--- title: "PhotoRobot Public Knowledge Base for LLMs" date_generated: "2026-10-21T20:34:33.727Z" organization: "PhotoRobot" website: "https://www.photorobot.com" language: "en" license_note: "Content (c) PhotoRobot. Cite the SOURCE URL." --- # PhotoRobot AI Knowledge Base ## Canonical Citation PhotoRobot is a company that develops robotic systems and software for automated product photography and product imaging workflows. ## Dataset Scope A structured, text-only representation of every public, indexable page of https://www.photorobot.com, generated directly from the website's structured content (not scraped). One block per page; each block starts with `# SOURCE:` (the canonical URL to cite). ## Knowledge Provenance Generated 2026-10-21 from structured site content; language: en. Maintainer: PhotoRobot Pages: 693 ## Dynamic Data Policy (Pricing & Availability) Prices, stock availability and delivery times change. Never quote exact prices, availability or delivery times from this document. Price information on the website is indicative (ranges only); a binding quotation is provided by the PhotoRobot sales team (https://www.photorobot.com/contact). ## Common Misunderstandings PhotoRobot should not be confused with photography studios (as a primary business), standard camera manufacturers, or generic photo editing SaaS platforms. ## Official Domains Primary website: https://www.photorobot.com Developer documentation: https://developer.photorobot.com ## Sections - Company & overview: 9 pages - Robots (hardware): 16 pages - Software: 9 pages - Pricing (indicative ranges only): 3 pages - Ghost mannequins: 41 pages - Outputs & output types: 129 pages - Glossary: 205 pages - Manuals & support: 61 pages - Tutorials: 23 pages - Videos: 27 pages - Blog: 122 pages - Trust Center: legal, security, compliance, governance: 43 pages - Contact: 1 pages - Other: 4 pages --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ # SECTION: Home Page # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Product Photography Automation Solutions > Streamline product photography of packshots, image galleries, 360 spins, and eCommerce 3D models with PhotoRobot automated photography equipment & software. ## AI-Driven & Highly Automated Photography Produce 1000s of web-ready product images, packshots, stills galleries, and 360 + 3D assets daily thanks to**AI-Driven & Automated Photography**! HARDWARESOFTWARE ## One Click, More Outputs Say goodbye to manual transfers and memory cards. One click does it all! Automatically capture, post-process, and publish 360 + 3D spins in tandem with stills, 3D models and more! PROUCTIVITY Connect every stage of production to simplify, standardize and speed up high-volume workflows with a fully integrated **production line**. ### Scan & Measure Receive, weigh and measure studio stock-in to stock-out learn more### Sort & Style Auto assign presets by category, style guides, and staging learn more### Rapid Shoot Automate hardware, cameras, lighting, capture & backup learn more### Post-Process Post-process, backup & deliver files automatically learn more### API & Publish Deliver on a global CDN with real-time image scaling PRODUCTION LINEPRODUCTION WORKFLOW What's New ## Cutting-Edge Products Products ### Premium Ghost Mannequins Order premium ghost mannequins for all sizes, types, cuts, and styles of mens’, womens’, and children’s clothing products.Products ### Automated iPhone Photography Produce professional iPhone product photography freely or with customizable workflow templates and full PhotoRobot support.Applications ### Museum & Antique Photography See how PhotoRobot supports museum and antique photography for high-value objects including artifacts and collection items.Applications ### PhotoRobot Example Applications Compare PhotoRobot 2D + 360 + 3D outputs in our complete photo galleries of still images, spins, 3D models, and animations. One Click capture, post-process, and publish VIEW GALLERY ALL OUTPUTS Automated Product Photography ## Featured Posts ### 360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production Discover 360° Product Photography, from different formats of 360s to automated photography equipment, software, workflows and content production. ### Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It Branching off product photography, packshot photography sets guidelines to taking photos of a product typically with its packaging and labeling. ### eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production In eCommerce photography, production speeds matter. Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. ### Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot Determine the level of studio automation your business demands in this buyer’s guide to automated product photography hardware & software solutions. ### 3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production 3D eCommerce uses 3D modeling to create an advanced product viewing experience. Read on to find out exactly what it is, and how to produce 3D models in-house. ### PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting Host eCommerce images in 2D / 3D / 360 with PhotoRobot Viewer, now supporting image galleries alongside spins, hot spots, and panoramas. ### Cube Compact - The Universal 360 Photography Robot Discover the expanded functionality and features of PhotoRobot’s Cube Compact, the universal 360 product photography robot. ### Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application The release of the iOS mobile application Touch enables teams to integrate iPhone product photography into PhotoRobot-powered production lines. ### PhotoRobot PINK - The Medical Robot Photographer PhotoRobot launches a medical robot photographer to optimize the picture-taking of patients in clinical procedures and health centers. ### Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards Simplify product portfolio production for any team member with PhotoRobot Wizards, the alternative to manual hardware, camera and sequence configuration. ### Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production See how to set up for jewelry photography on-location in this behind-the-scenes look at PhotoRobot’s transportable, motorized turntable setup. ### Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography Discover car turntables from popular manufacturers vs the PhotoRobot automation-driven solution for high-volume, 360-degree car photography and product videos. Build For Modern Enterprise ## PhotoRobot Developer Portal Direct your development teams to the PhotoRobot Developer Portal for the ultimate toolkit to build custom, highly scalable photography workflows. The PhotoRobot Cloud API provides a strict, standard-driven integration contract for engineering teams to ensure frictionless integration with enterprise-grade stability. ### Developer Portal### API V2 Migration --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/applications # SECTION: applications # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Automated Photography - Example Outputs > Compare example outputs in 2D + 360 + 3D including shooting & production times with PhotoRobot automated photo technology. ## PhotoRobot Automated Photography - Example Applications Compare PhotoRobot automated photography applications with example outputs in 2D + 360 + 3D and product video, including capture & overall production times.Follow PhotoRobot from item intake & tracking to studio photography, content delivery and product return. ## Still Product Photography Produce high-quality still product photos and 360 spins in one click with software integration of robots, cameras, lights, and post-production. See 2D Products Stills ## 360 Product Photography One click automatically captures, post-processes, and publishes single-row and multi-row 360 spins consisting of 24, 36 or more still images. Browse Product 360s ## 3D Product Photography Highly automate 3D product photography in hemispherical and spherical format with software integration of turntables, robots, cameras, lights, and post-production. View 3D Product Spins ## 3D Model Photography Easily create a 3D model from photos with PhotoRobot software integration of product photography equipment, cameras, lights, post-processing, and photogrammetry. Explore 3D Models ## Product Animation Achieve a moving product animation in minutes with complete software integration of PhotoRobot, cameras, lights, object positioning, and post-production. View Product Animations ## 360 Product Video Create 360 product video with robotic precision thanks to software automation of hardware, cameras, lights, and video capture tools. Compare Product Videos --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/impressum # SECTION: impressum # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Business Impressum > This PhotoRobot Business Impressum applies to all online services, websites, cloud systems and digital publications operated by uni-Robot Ltd. ## IMPRESSUM PhotoRobot / uni-Robot Ltd. **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic Company ID: **01478061** VAT ID: **CZ01478061** Managing Director: **Kamil Hrbáček** Logistic Centre: uni-Robot Ltd. Topolová 483 250 67 Klecany Czech Republic Bank Details: Raiffeisenbank a.s. IBAN: **CZ3055000000007463570001** SWIFT/BIC: **RZBCCZPP** Email: **kh@photorobot.com** Website: **https://www.photorobot.com** This Impressum applies to all online services, websites, cloud systems and digital publications operated by uni-Robot Ltd. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy # SECTION: photorobot-academy # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Academy - Training Your Teams from the Ground Up > Train your studio teams to maximize productivity through PhotoRobot Academy, the official training & certification system for the PhotoRobot ecosystem. ## Why Train Your Team on PhotoRobot A trained team can produce 5x the throughput at 2x the quality when fluent in PhotoRobot’s sophisticated technology. Academy training compresses years of operating experience into role-based curricula – guiding teams to production fluency in weeks, not seasons. ### Production Cadence, Not Improvisation For standard catalog work, certified operators run at roughly 1 product per minute. The capture process itself is under 20 seconds, while automatic post-production handles the rest. Complex setups (heavy items, custom arrangements, multi-angle styling) should thus scale in cadence accordingly. Academy certifications validate that your teams have internalized this discipline – not simply memorized buttons. ### Same Standard, Every Studio, Every Shift Certified teams produce visually-consistent imagery across operators, shifts, and locations. They follow standardized capture mechanics, a locked color discipline, and repeatable editing recipes. Your eCommerce visual catalog never looks like photographers from 5 different studios shot it. ### Verifiable, Audit-Proof Credentials Each Academy certification exam produces a PhotoRobot certificate documenting your team's competence on the platform. Certs have a 2-year validity, and teams refresh on exams before the certificate expiration. Meanwhile, customers use the credentials in supplier qualification programs, vendor evaluations, and service-level agreements as formal evidence of platform fluency, not self-attestation. ### Day-One Productivity, Not Trial-and-Error New operators complete the Operator Standard over a 2-day intensive course (or equivalent self-paced study), and become immediately production-ready afterwards. Compare that to an operator without structured training. Ramp-up is 6-12 months of trial-and-error with avoidable mistakes along the way. The cost of just one mis-shot product launch will typically exceed the investment for an entire team’s certification. ## Eleven Cert Tracks Across Two Layers Six foundational tracks cover the core PhotoRobot roles in any studio. Five specialty tracks add domain-specific depth on top of a foundation certification – for studios serving industry or product specific categories. Foundational tracks (6, role-based) ### Operator Standard The broadest entry point — for operators running PhotoRobot equipment day-to-day. 13 modules ~16 hours ### Studio Manager Essentials 13 modules ~18 hours ### Integrator Essentials The broadest entry point — for studio managers in charge of PhotoRobot equipment day-to-day. 8 modules ### Network Specialist Essentials The broadest entry point — for network integrators supporting the operation of PhotoRobot equipment day-to-day. 6 modules ### Hardware Specialist Essentials The broadest entry point — for hardware specialists running PhotoRobot equipment day-to-day. 7 modules ### Instructor Certification (CI) The broadest entry point — for instructors administering training and running PhotoRobot equipment day-to-day. 4 modules Specialty tracks (5, domain-based — stack on a foundational cert) ### OCR Specialist Retail planogram, pharma labeling, GS1 compliance — for integrators going compliance-grade in OCR-heavy domains. 4 modules ### 3D Modeling Specialist Photogrammetry pipeline, capture discipline, post-capture QC, delivery integration — for e-commerce AR / automotive 3D / fashion 3D. 4 modules ### PINK Specialist Operator certification for the PINK device — mastectomy clinical photography. Kiosk wizard, patient communication, privacy, safety, remote-physician videocall. 4 modules *Designed for the small fleet of clinics operating PINK.* ### Virtual Catwalk Specialist Live-model motion capture in studio — single camera, continuous lighting (Fresnel / ARRI / FOMEI), catwalk-feel video for fashion brands. 4 modules ### Carpet Photography Specialist Flat-rollout multi-camera capture + virtual room compositing + robotic turntable (3 m / 5 m) for piece carpets. 3 modules ## Three Delivery Formats, One Curriculum Whether you're training a single new hire or a 15-operator studio team, there is consistent delivery of the Academy curriculum. Choose the format that fits your team's logistics, budget, and timeline. Recommended ## On-Site at Your Studio Receive on-site training with a PhotoRobot Certified Instructor at your studio for a 2-day intensive course on your actual equipment. No team travel, no time away from production, no friction. Training runs on the specific hardware variant, lighting setup, network configuration, and the workflow your team uses in production. Every preset, every recipe, and every habit your teams learn during the course is immediately usable in live shifts the next morning. Preset configuration stays. Recipes remain in the shelf library. The instructor leaves; the production fluency remains. **Best for:** Most customer engagements – especially when teams cannot travel, when equipment-specific quirks need addressing live, or when training pairs with an installation week. ## 2-Day Intensive at PhotoRobot Studio Enroll for group training at PhotoRobot Studio in Klecany, Czech Republic. Get hands-on with real equipment, instructor-led over a fixed 2-day agenda per role. Training includes: module knowledge checks, hands-on practice, and the final certification exam at the session’s end. **Best for:** New customer onboarding, teams of 2-15 who can travel together, customers without already installed equipment. ## Self-Paced Online The full Academy curriculum is available on academy.photorobot.io, including: textbook, workbook, module knowledge checks, and final certification exam. Typical completion is in 2-3 weeks at 4-5 hours per week. **Best for:** Solo operators, single new hires, distributed teams, or as preparation before an in-person intensive. Extended formats (5-day deep-dives, multi-week mentoring, embedded instructor weeks) are available on request as separate engagements. See the academy.photorobot.io site for delivery format details per cert track, or contact PhotoRobot sales for custom engagement scoping. ## Academy Certification Matters ### Pass supplier audits without scrambling Major customers (automotive manufacturers, pharmaceutical companies, retail chains) audit their suppliers' technical capabilities. PhotoRobot certification is the formal evidence that your team is competent on the platform you use to deliver imagery — not self-attestation. Each certificate documents which student passed which cert exam, when, with what validity period — auditable, dated, traceable to a specific track. ### Commit to quality SLAs you can defend Service-level agreements (turnaround time, image quality consistency, defect rates) depend on team competence. A certified team's performance is measurable and repeatable; you can commit to numbers and meet them. An ad-hoc-trained team's output varies, exposing your business to SLA penalties or customer churn when standards slip. ### Standardize the platform's most common failure modes PhotoRobot's most common operational failures — incorrect color discipline, wrong capture mode for sample weight, lighting setups that flatten texture-revealing materials, version-control mistakes during reshoot cycles — are taught explicitly in the relevant cert tracks. Certified teams encounter these failures less often and recover from them faster when they do occur. ### Career paths that retain your best operators Certifications stack — Operator Standard, then a specialty track, then Instructor Certification. Your best operators see a defined career path inside the PhotoRobot ecosystem. Retention of senior operators is typically a larger ROI signal than the initial certification investment. ## Your Team's Certification Lifecycle ### Enroll PhotoRobot sales issues a voucher code per student per cert track. The voucher unlocks the full curriculum on academy.photorobot.io plus the final certification exam. Bulk enrollment (5-15 operators in one cohort) is the typical pattern. ### Train Students complete the curriculum at their chosen pace and format. Module-level knowledge checks throughout the course validate progress. Most teams combine self-paced online study with a 2-day in-person intensive. ### Pass Students consolidate what they've learned through knowledge checks at the end of each chapter before taking a final certification exam. Passing then produces a PhotoRobot certificate documenting platform fluency with a 2-year validity – shareable on LinkedIn, defensible in audits, and usable in supplier qualification programs. ### Maintain Each cert has 2-year validity. Before expiry, students take a refresh exam (lighter format, higher pass bar — confirms current discipline + currency). Passing extends validity by another 2 years. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio # SECTION: photorobot-studio # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Studio - Photo, Video, and 3D Services > Order professional 2D + 360 + 3D photo, video, and content production services taking advantage of PhotoRobot cutting-edge automation. Why Choose PhotoRobot Studio ## The Complete Studio Experience – Without Owning the Tech Our Prague-based PhotoRobot Studio is ideal for businesses that do not require daily in-house production but want top-class content. Skip the overhead of buying and operating your own setup. Let our expert studio team bring your products to life. What We Deliver ## Photo, Video & 3D Content – Optimal for Any Platform Receive product visuals of the highest quality and optimal for eCommerce, marketing, or internal use. Our expert studio team delivers content for any platform. Order hero images, stills, packshots, 360 spins, interactive 3D models, and 360 product video. ### High-Resolution Photo & Video Produce high-quality still product photos and 360 product video on pure white or transparent backgrounds. ### Transparent Background & Packshot Capture products in various marketing angles, with packshots, and with transparent backgrounds ready for the web. ### 360 Product Spins & 3D Model Outputs Display items in 360-degree rotation, with a horizontal and vertical viewing axis, and in virtual 3D model formats. ### Optional Image Retouching Outsourcing Access optional image retouch services via our external contacts for manual retouching of product photos & video. ### CDN-Hosted Delivery or JPEG / PNG File Export Receive files in JPEG or PNG, or instantly publish web-ready assets online via PhotoRobot’s global CDN. ### GS1 Image Standard Production Present products with their packaging and labels including text and nutritional information for GS1 standard compliance. How It Works ## Services Flexible to Meet Any Business’ Needs PhotoRobot Studio services are flexible to meet any needs, from one-day jobs to complex multi-day projects. Our team will agree on the products and brief, while customers attend photoshoots in-person, or monitor remotely after providing instructions. Book a SessionView Gallery #### Send your products and project brief Our services begin first with receiving products in the studio along with a brief of the project for instruction. #### Attend in-person or remotely if necessary Ideally, customers attend the photoshoot to monitor it in-person. Although, it is also possible to attend remotely. #### Approve order previews After photoshoots, customers receive the original images, and a quote for outsourcing any necessary post production. #### Receive assets or host instantly via PhotoRobot CDN Export web-ready assets in JPEG or PNG, or instantly publish outputs in 2D + 360 + 3D online via PhotoRobot CDN. Location ## Global Reach, Trusted Service Providers If your business is not close to Prague, our team can connect you with certified partner studios using PhotoRobot systems. Take advantage of expert photo service providers across North America and Europe. Our team can even take the equipment to you for setup at a secure location, like museums or storage facilities. Access PhotoRobot Studio in Prague & globally Find partner studios across North America and Europe Request setup at your facilities if necessary Pricing ## Transparent, Scalable Pricing Our services include half-day or full-day studio rental, optional hosting plans, and long-term project packages. This includes full use of equipment and staff, while hosting is available as an expansion via PhotoRobot’s global CDN. ### Half-Day Studio Rental €500/half-day **Price may vary on agreement of additional hours beyond the minimum period at €125/extra-hour.* 4 hours of studio time Full use of studio equipment Operation of studio staff Attendance in-person or remote Quote for outsourced post production Get started Most popular option ### Full-Day Studio Rental €1000/full-day 8 hours of studio time Get started ### Optional Hosting Plans **Pay only for the storage you use.* Real-time image scaling Quick loading content Pixel-perfect resolution Displays on any device Rich API connectivity Get started ### Long-term projects Billed annually Custom quote depending on project Agreement on volume & deadlines Optional post production services Hosting via CDN & API connectivity Integration with eCommerce feeds Transparent & scalable pricing Get started Gallery ## Product Presentations that Engage Source content of the highest quality styling and lighting for a more compelling product experience. We ensure products receive the visual treatment they deserve – building trust, and driving sales one visual at a time. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/production-line # SECTION: production-line # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot - Production Line for Maximum Throughput > See a production line for automated, high-speed product photography, from stock-in to stock-out: scanning, sorting, shooting, post-processing, and publishing. ## The PhotoRobot-Powered Production Line Does your business’ photography require thousands of photos per day? Discover the PhotoRobot-powered production line for high-speed, **AI-assisted & automated photography**! Automate workflows from prep to capture and post-processing, with API connection & instant publishing of 2D still images, 360 spins, 3D models, and 360 product video. 1 ### Scan & Measure Scan barcodes to validate inventory, ID products, and automatically mark items “received.” Combine barcode support with CubiScan to record product weights & dimensions, automate photography sequences, and to generate valuable data alongside product imagery. 2 ### Sort & Style Sort items into categories with configurable photoshoot settings. Simply add rack or shelf codes to the system, and scan the item’s barcode to organize products and assign them photography and post-processing presets related to each rack. Sort by style guides, presets, staging & image overlay. Sort & Style 3 ### Rapid Shoot Control the entire studio from a single interface. Software controls automate camera settings, strobes, lighting, capture, backup, download, file naming, and much more. Speed up the process further with non-stop capturing (extremely fast product photography in which the turntable’s rotation never pauses). Rapid Capture 4 ### Post-Process Post-process without asking, backup automatically, and deliver files instantly. Automate background removal, image enhancement, and basic to advanced editing operations according to different presets, with manual retouching also possible. Post-Process 5 ### API & Publish Leverage an enterprise-grade Developer Portal for cloud integrations to publish files automatically & instantly after capture. PhotoRobot Cloud API integrates with existing eCommerce export feeds (JSON / XML), with delivery on a global CDN. Get quick loading & pixel-perfect resolution on any device, with real-time image scaling and support for JPEG / WebP. Developer Portal --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow # SECTION: production-workflow # TYPE: Page --- # Production Workflow > Selling online is the right way today - and this is how to photograph items quickly and at a glance. Source your inspiration here. 1 Product ingestion 2 Preparation 3 Shooting 4 Post-production 5 Quality control 6 Content delivery 7 Product return ## Production Workflow *Follow PhotoRobot from item intake & tracking to studio photography, content delivery and product return.* 1 ## Product ingestion Save time and energy with PhotoRobot features for receiving & tracking items, sorting products, and managing projects. - Shooting-list import / modification anytime - Scan-IN - Weighing and measuring - Sorting on shelves - Barcode generation and print where missing 2 ## Preparation Benefit from greatly reduced preparation times thanks to features for styling, preset configurations, product staging and image overlay. - Style-guides - Presets - Staging - Image overlays 3 ## Shooting Manage the entire product photography session: camera settings, strobe & light control, the capturing process, image backup, and more. No matter if it’s creating still images, 360s, or product videos, you have complete control. - Canon camera control - Strobes / DMX lights control - Auto download and renaming of images - Non-stop capturing (fast product photography in which the spin of the table remains uninterrupted) - Focus stacking - Instant photo-backup - Video 4 ## Post-production Set and forget. Deploy project-driven settings that process images without asking, backup original files automatically, and instantly serve finished files. - Fully automated - based on presets - Possible manual input / retouch - Background removal (free-masking, chromakey, masking, etc.) - Image enhancements - Inputs for Photogrammetry 3D models - Built-in OCR - Set once, use forever 5 ## Quality control Ensure excellence in the quality of your product photography with remote studio access, photoshoot & re-shoot control, and tools for client communication & review. Hardware and operator statistics also provide actionable insights into the production process. - Remote access (no need to be in studio) - Undo/Redo on overall batch - Return to re-shoot - Comments - Clients review 6 ## Content delivery Say goodbye to manual file copying or creating different filename structures at the output. Once set, runs in the background in defined intervals. - Feed-based (XML/JSON) - Fully automated = no touch - Secured - Multi structure (different export formats available for the same content) - SET&FORGET 7 ## Product return Smooth in & smooth out. 100% of items leaving the studio, & 100% images delivered. Confirmed. - Scan-OUT - Delivery note assembly --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/productivity # SECTION: productivity # TYPE: Page --- # Highly Productive Product Photography | PhotoRobot > Automate capture & post-production of complete galleries, GS1 images, packshots, 360 spins, 3D models, and video with single-click content production. ## One ## click That's all you need! Still Image Galleries, GS1 Standard 360° Spins & 3D Models for AR / VR **OCR, Weight & Dimensions** ### Double the Productivity Streamline the content production process with PhotoRobot. Save up to 240 minutes every working day / shift, all with the consistency of output our clients have come to expect. Since 2005, we have seen thousands of PhotoRobot product photography installations across six continents. Our solutions are being deployed by big name brands as well as small companies. PhotoRobot paves the way for our clients to automate content creation so they can focus more on their core business. ### Dramatic Savings in Post-Processing Drastically simplify product photography post-processing with PhotoRobot “presets”. Thanks to these preset configurations, you can designate an automated process for different groups and categories of products. Automate which images (angles and details) to photograph, lighting setups, background removal, cropping, color enhancement and much more. PhotoRobot records these tasks and automatically applies your settings to the capture process, while likewise saving settings as presets for future use. While a production takt time of 1 minute is becoming the new standard, competing systems might only offer 8 images per minute. With PhotoRobot, you can capture 100+ images in that 1 minute, getting far more from our solutions than the competition. ### Robust Hardware PhotoRobot hardware is built to last for long-term, 24/7 product photography operations. We understand the value of reliability as well as the need to keep uptime as close to 100% as possible. That’s why when it comes to hardware, we always prefer designs for maximum ROI as opposed to merely saving money. ### Single-Source Solution We design, develop, produce and install systems for automated product photography. SOFTWAREHARDWARE Worldwide since 2005. ### Hassle-Free Communication! Receive global support, training, service, and hassle-free communication with PhotoRobot’s team of technical strategists. No matter if it’s for a first-time installation or continued support, the PhotoRobot team is always just a message away. ### Find a Solution that Fits Your Unique Needs! Simply send us an e-mail or give us a call, and we’ll take care of the rest! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/trust-center # SECTION: trust-center # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Trust Center > The PhotoRobot Trust Center serves as a hub to PhotoRobot compliance, legal, security, privacy, and governance documentation. ## PhotoRobot Trust Center The PhotoRobot Trust Center serves as the hub to all compliance, legal, security, privacy, and AI governance related documentation. ## Compliance The PhotoRobot Compliance section serves as the recommended entry point for enterprise reviews, unifying legal, security, privacy, and governance documentation. PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Suite - Overview PhotoRobot U.S. Security Overview PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Sheet PhotoRobot International Legal Pack Overview PhotoRobot International Security Pack Overview PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary ## Governance PhotoRobot Governance documentation supports enterprise compliance for corporate procurement and responsible business operations. PhotoRobot Corporate Compliance Statement PhotoRobot Anti-Corruption Policy PhotoRobot Supplier Code of Conduct PhotoRobot Health Safety Commitment Statement PhotoRobot Environmental, Social & Governance (ESG) Statement ## Legal Access our terms and conditions of use, license agreement, and policies governing acceptable use, support, and uptime. PhotoRobot Terms of Service PhotoRobot License Agreement PhotoRobot Privacy Documents - Overview PhotoRobot Privacy Policy PhotoRobot GDPR Privacy Notice (Article 13) PhotoRobot Data Processing Agreement (DPA) PhotoRobot Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements (SLA) Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms PhotoRobot Cookie Policy PhotoRobot Marketing Consent Policy PhotoRobot Sub-Processor List PhotoRobot Legal Definitions & Glossary PhotoRobot Warranty Terms ## Security Learn how we protect customer data with encryption, access controls, monitoring, and business continuity measures. PhotoRobot Security - Overview PhotoRobot Architecture & Data Flow PhotoRobot Security Measures Summary PhotoRobot Business Continuity & DR Overview PhotoRobot Information Security Policy PhotoRobot Access Control Policy PhotoRobot Incident Response Policy PhotoRobot Backup Policy PhotoRobot Disaster Recovery Policy PhotoRobot SDLC Security Policy PhotoRobot Change Management Policy PhotoRobot Logging & Monitoring Standard PhotoRobot Technical and Organizational Measures (TOMs) ## Privacy Understand our data handling practices, including our privacy policy and notices aimed at protecting your personal information. Privacy Policy --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/controller # SECTION: controller # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Control Units > Find documentation on the latest versions of PhotoRobot Control Units, covering the range of functions and computational performance of the control computer. ## PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation The control system is a key component of every robot, so PhotoRobot uses only in-house manufactured control systems. This allows for complete control over their design. Meanwhile, the robot’s controller works optimally with higher level software, on a computer or in the cloud, thanks to PhotoRobot directly designing and producing everything – tailoring components precisely to the processes they perform. PhotoRobot rigorously manages the API at all levels. The cloud system has an API for easy integration with the customer’s other systems, and the robot’s control unit also features an API for integration with third-party systems. This modern concept allows customers to implement even very complex integrations. The following table shows the essential characteristics of the latest versions of PhotoRobot’s control systems. The development demonstrates an increase in the range of functions and the computational performance of the control computer (starting with generation 6, which is based on PhotoRobot OS). Control Unit Version Generation 5 Generation 6 Generation 7 M series CASE Status End-of-Life Obsolete Active Manufacture period 2013 - 2015 2015 - 2020 2020 - Today 2023 - Today 2017 - Today Main processor PIC32MX975F512 PIC32 Family 80 MHz/105 DMIPS AM3358BZCZ100, ARM Cortex-A8, 32bit, 1GHz, 2000 MIPS Operating system Custom PhotoRobot OS Optical position sensor 1 Quadratic encoder 1 Absolute encoder (SLAVE module) N/A YES N/A Digital inputs 4 2 4 Digital outputs 2 Laser out N/A YES DMX N/A YES N/A USB output N/A YES CAN bus (for expansion boards) N/A YES N/A RS485 (on SLAVE modules) N/A YES N/A **Note:** Control systems older than generation 6 no longer meet modern architectural and safety standards. The newer control units are fully backward compatible, so it is not a problem to easily upgrade a PhotoRobot over 10 years old to achieve the highest performance and the latest parameters by simply replacing the control system. New external control units in a 19" rack format (2U) are connected via cables – immediately after connection, the Robot can perform the most advanced functions. ## Robot Control Unit (Robot Controller) The Robot Control Unit (Robot Controller) controls the mechanical movements of the machine. ## Multi-Camera Controller (SynchroBox) The Multi-Camera Controller (SynchroBox) provides precise synchronization of multiple cameras during the “fast spin” rapid photography method. - **Note:** For technical documentation on the connection and first use of the Multi-Camera Controller (SynchroBox), refer to PhotoRobot SynchroBox Use & Setup. ## Laser Controller The Laser Controller controls 1 - 20 positioning lasers for the accurate placement of objects within the machine’s workspace. ## Standardized Outputs For easy upgrades or servicing, PhotoRobot uses external control units built into a 19” rack cabinet. The unit connects to the robot and peripherals via cabling. In compact machines (COMPACT series) which require easy mobility, or in multi-axis machines, built-in control units are used. The built-in control unit provides easy access for service or updates, thereby eliminating the need for cabling installation within the studio. If the machine does not have a built-in control unit, the standalone unit additionally contains connectors to link the control unit to the mechanical parts of the robot. ## Main Processor Since generation 6, PhotoRobot has relied on powerful ARM processors with high clock speeds, ensuring the performance required for advanced control functions. ## Operating System From generation 6 control units, PhotoRobot OS is a Linux-based, real-time operating system that provides excellent performance and flexibility. The built-in web server provides monitoring, diagnostic tools, and basic control movement features. ## Optical Position Sensor On frictionless optical tables, a non-contact optical sensor is used for automatic re-calibration of the machine’s virtual gear ratio with each rotation during operation. This eliminates the need for user calibration (after the initial setup) and ensures exceptionally high accuracy in the placement of the machine’s table, which minimizes the impact of impurities, slippage, etc. ## Quadratic Encoder This component continuously determines the precise position of the machine's glass table. Depending on the machine type and table size, there are approximately 40,000 pulses per table rotation, evaluated 1000 times per second. This arrangement allows the capture of images from precise angles while the machine is in motion, without the need to stop the table. To freeze the motion, a flash from high-power photographic lights with a duration of 1/10,000 s is used – with the robot providing an adjustable advance notification when reaching the defined position. ## Absolute Encoder The absolute encoder is used to accurately determine the position of each machine axis without the need to engage a calibration sensor. ## Digital Inputs These are used to control the unit with an external signal (for example, a foot switch to start a photographic sequence, a motion sensor, etc.). The inputs are galvanically isolated. ## Digital Outputs These outputs are used to control external devices – typically to trigger a camera. The dual output, in this case, allows, for example, the pre-raising of a mirror in SLR cameras with one signal and then a rapid exposure with the other. The outputs are galvanically isolated. ## Laser Out This output is used to control external lasers for the precise positioning of objects on the tables. Units that do not have built-in laser control can use digital outputs in conjunction with an external laser unit or opt for an autonomous laser unit controlled via LAN with its own processor (available in variants with additional inputs and outputs for peripheral connections). ## DMX DMX controls external devices, typically LED photographic lights (adjusting intensity and color). For increased reliability, DMX control is integrated directly into the control unit, significantly reducing the number of potential failure points compared to various USB converters connected to a PC. ## USB Output The USB port is available on the casing of mobile robots (typically the CASE850), allowing the connection of selected external peripherals such as a USB Wi-Fi dongle when a LAN network is unavailable at the installation site. On machines designed for studio use, the USB port is not installed because more reliable and high-performance methods for data exchange are available within the studio environment. ## Safety Stop This feature is provided to connect an emergency stop button, as required by legislative or operational standards. ## CAN Bus An industrial bus used for connecting expansion boards that facilitate control of additional machine axes, specialized accessory equipment, and machine expansion modules. ## RS485 An industrial bus used for communication between individual machine components (e.g., sensors), instead of traditional one-to-one cabling. This significantly simplifies the wiring of larger systems. ## Connectivity PhotoRobot control units are interconnected exclusively via a LAN network (USB and similar solutions cannot be reliably used on a larger scale, while LAN-based solutions can cover the needs of a small studio with one robot, same as large companies running more than 200 robotic workspaces in one cluster). A built-in web server (operating on the unit’s IP address) provides access to the unit’s control system (updates, service, monitoring). It is also possible to locate and manage the control unit using the PhotoRobot Locator application. The PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within PhotoRobot Controls App (CAPP) for the easier search and identification of control units on the network. Ensure you are using the most up-to-date version of CAPP to access this feature. If external download of the Locator app is required, downloading is also available within PhotoRobot Account Downloads, or directly from App Store for iPhone - PhotoRobot Touch. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/driver # SECTION: driver # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Motor Drivers > Find the basic specifications of the motor drivers of PhotoRobot, which we design in-house for optimal robotic workstation performance. ## PhotoRobot Motor Drivers - Technical Documentation The motor driver is an important component of the entire system. In addition to the achieved precision and intelligent control, the supplied power is crucial, as it determines the dynamics of each machine axis and, consequently, the overall productivity of the robotic workstation. As with our control system, we rely on in-house-designed drivers that work optimally with the other components of the entire PhotoRobot ecosystem. The table in the upcoming section shows the basic specifications of the motor drivers used by PhotoRobot. Besides mobile devices, PhotoRobot uses the highest safe voltage level (48V) and high currents, delivering the maximum possible power to each robotically controlled axis. The currents listed in the table are nominal values; during motor operation, they vary with the RPM (and consequently, the output power changes according to a defined characteristic, decreasing as the RPM increases). The achieved parameters are difficult to compare with other photographic systems on the market because this power series is in a class of its own. It is not appropriate to compare driving a super high-performance luxury sports car; what matters most is the robustness, high precision of control, and renowned reliability—with a comfortable surplus of power in every situation. *In a photographic studio, we don’t use AMG, M, or Plaid – here, we run PhotoRobot :-)* Driver specification Generation 5 Generation 6 Generation 7 M series CASE Motor Supply Voltage 48Vdc 24/48Vdc Motor Current 5/10/15A per phase 10A per phase 5/10A per phase Driver Power Supply 300W 100/300W --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/pws # SECTION: pws # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot PWS Program – Definition & Terms > PhotoRobot PWS provides a single point of technical responsibility for your PhotoRobot production imaging workflow — program definition and terms & conditions. ## PhotoRobot PWS **PhotoRobot PWS provides a single point of technical responsibility for your PhotoRobot production imaging workflow.** Whether an issue originates in PhotoRobot hardware, software, cameras, lighting, networking or third-party infrastructure, our engineers help identify the root cause, coordinate the path to resolution and keep your production moving ## Context — why this program looks the way it does PWS was historically understood as a **hardware warranty**. What PhotoRobot delivers has since changed fundamentally: the core of the service today is **software, firmware, licensing, networking and expert diagnostics across the whole imaging chain**, with hardware being one component among many — and support reaching deliberately **inside and beyond** the original PhotoRobot delivery (third-party cameras, lights, customer networks and IT). This page has two parts: - **Part A — Program Definition** — a plain-language description of the program and its commercial framework: *what PWS is and why it exists*. - **Part B — Terms & Conditions** — the precise, binding clauses. Customer-specific figures (final SLA commitments, coverage prices) are set in the individual PWS offer and contract. The governing legal framework, including region-dependent terms, is published in the PhotoRobot Trust Center. **Part A** Program Definition **Part B** Terms & Conditions ## Part A — PWS Program Definition ### A1. Purpose & guiding principle PWS is an **operational-continuity** program, not an insurance policy against hardware failure. It is **designed to maximize uptime and reduce time-to-resolution** for the customer’s **PhotoRobot** production imaging workflow, and to provide a **single point of technical responsibility** across that workflow. PhotoRobot commits to the **availability of support, a defined response, and professional (expert) care**. PhotoRobot does not, and cannot, guarantee that a given studio will run without interruption. Diagnostics and troubleshooting are performed on a **commercially reasonable best-effort basis**. What “single point of responsibility” means — and where it stops. PhotoRobot takes **ownership of the coordination and diagnosis** of a reported issue and **drives the diagnostic process to a documented conclusion or a recommended next step** — even when the fault lies in a Canon body, a firewall, a DMX box or the customer’s local IT. **This does not transfer to PhotoRobot the contractual, warranty or financial responsibility of third-party suppliers**, nor a guarantee that every issue has an achievable technical resolution. A ticket may legitimately close with an outcome such as: third-party fault, non-reproducible issue, replacement required, unsupported configuration, missing customer cooperation, or on-site / separately chargeable work required. ### A2. Scope — Production Imaging Ecosystem Support PWS covers the production imaging ecosystem as **one connected system**, in this order of centrality: 1. **Software** — PhotoRobot Controls: installation, updates, versioning, OS-specific behavior (macOS/Windows), help-topic navigation. 2. **Hardware** — robots and mechanics: Robotic Arm, Turntables/Tables (Centerless CL850/CL1300, C-Class/Case), Cube, Frame — SW-vs-HW isolation, typical faults, and service boundaries. (What is covered financially in baseline PWS is set out in the coverage table in **B-Annex**.) 3. **Imaging chain** — cameras, optics and lighting: - **Cameras & tethering** — Canon natively, 3rd-party via watch folder; offline/disconnect/focus/liveview/flash-not-firing diagnostics. - **Lights, flashes & continuous lights** — Fomei strobe (WiFi box), Fomei LED DMX, Broncolor Siros/continuous. Included: setup; analysis when lights don’t appear in Controls; analysis when lights don’t trigger. 4. **Licensing & control units** — activation/reactivation, activation-server reachability, offline keys, generation limits; license release/transfer, expiry/suspension, hybrid & API licenses (keys never sent in plaintext). 5. **Networking & connectivity** — prerequisites and whitelisting guidance for the customer’s IT, proxy/firewall diagnostics, “unit not visible” discovery. 6. **Cloud, outputs & API** — publication, share/viewer diagnostics, tracking codes, export/import, formats, integrations. **Third-party products — an important boundary.** Where the root cause lies in equipment supplied by a third party (for example a camera, lens or studio light bought locally), PhotoRobot will **identify the issue and advise on the remedy** (a firmware update, a cabling correction, a configuration change). **Carrying out that repair is not included in the PWS fee** — the support and warranty relationship for that component rests with its original supplier. Where a customer prefers a single point of contact for the whole setup, PhotoRobot **may perform such work under a separate service order**. ### A3. Software-platform continuity (customers moving off third-party software) For much of PhotoRobot’s history, its hardware was frequently paired with software from other providers, whose responsibility the software support was. Where such a provider is no longer active, its customers can be left without a software partner. PhotoRobot offers those customers a stable home by **integrating them onto PhotoRobot’s own software platform.** Because this broadens the relationship to include software, the software portion of support is **priced as the ongoing engineering work it genuinely is** — a deliberate choice in favour of **a platform intended for long-term development and support.** ### A4. How support is delivered **Ticket-first.** All requests run through support.photorobot.com; requests are logged and a ticket is created automatically. Support is available during **local working hours in the Czech Republic (CET/CEST)**. **Escalation ladder** — we escalate only as far as the problem needs: asynchronous ticket → live **visual guidance** → **remote session** → **on-site** → **factory / RMA**. **PhotoRobot standard technical-access policy:** - **Remote diagnostics use Splashtop SOS**, downloaded from sos.splashtop.eu (EU tier — PhotoRobot operates in the EU tier and cannot service sessions from other regional tiers). Splashtop SOS is the supported remote-control tool; **PhotoRobot does not use alternative third-party remote-control platforms unless expressly agreed.** - **Live visual guidance uses Google Meet** — browser-based, nothing to install — and, **for Apple-based customers, FaceTime** (end-to-end encrypted). This step is to observe and direct, not to control the system. - Controlled remote access keeps resolution fast and correct; PhotoRobot’s diagnostic tooling is not distributed. **A different tool** can be a matter of individual agreement, but **for remote support, Splashtop SOS is the supported option.** Where it cannot be used, the alternatives are an **on-site visit** or **shipping the machine to the factory**; on-site travel in that case is charged as set out in **B4**. Remote access is always **consent-based**. ### A5. What is configurable — set in the individual offer Every customer receives a baseline; several parameters can be added. **These are commercial parameters set by PhotoRobot sales in an individual offer — this page states no prices.** - **Service level (response speed)** — a faster first-response objective than baseline (see B2). - **Equipment-related technician travel included** — folds routine, equipment-related on-site travel into the yearly arrangement. It does **not** cover policy-driven dispatches (visits required solely because the customer’s environment cannot accommodate the standard remote-access tooling); those are charged per **B4**. - **Parts shipping included** — transport of replacement parts (otherwise chargeable). - **Critical parts on-loan (loaner units)** — loaner equipment so production continues during a repair; availability, shipping, same vs. equivalent model, duration and priority are defined in the offer. ### A6. Preventive & proactive care Depending on the agreed level, PWS can include **configuration review, performance and firmware audits, health checks and lifecycle recommendations** — proactive value that reduces the chance of a stoppage in the first place. **Telemetry.** Where supported by the relevant hardware and the enabled configuration, telemetry may help **identify developing technical conditions before they result in a stoppage.** The categories of data, its purpose, retention, storage region and opt-out are described in the telemetry specification in the Trust Center, and depend on the relevant outbound connectivity being permitted by the customer. ### A7. PWS lifecycle — factory, renewal, grace - **Factory PWS.** New machines are delivered with **Factory PWS included in the machine price**, valid for the **first year from the Installation Date** (defined in B-Annex). A higher service level during year one can be arranged with PhotoRobot sales, for a surcharge. - **Renewal (from year two).** The original, cost-advantageous PWS can be **renewed under preferential terms**, provided the PWS contract is **not interrupted**. If it is interrupted, **new terms apply** per the standard pricelist in force when the new contract is concluded. - **Grace period.** If Factory PWS is not renewed during its validity, a **6-month grace period** follows, during which the customer may **restore contractual continuity by back-paying PWS from the point of interruption** in order to keep the original preferential terms. **Any support incidents that occur during a lapse are chargeable to the customer as ad-hoc work; retroactive renewal preserves continuity and the preferential rate, but does not, by itself, cover incidents, defects or service requests first arising or reported during the lapse** unless PhotoRobot expressly accepts them. - **After the grace period,** continuity with the original contract is no longer possible; new terms are set from a new contract, with scope and price configured by PhotoRobot sales — **typically after a paid technical inspection**, and a **paid repair to bring the equipment to a satisfactory, serviceable condition** may be required before it is accepted into the program. ## Part B — PWS Terms & Conditions ### B0. Order of precedence These clauses are binding. In the event of any inconsistency, the following order of precedence applies (highest first): **(1)** the signed individual contract; **(2)** the individual offer / order form; **(3)** applicable regional terms; **(4)** these PWS Terms & Conditions (Part B); **(5)** the Program Definition (Part A). Part A is descriptive and commercial context; Part B and the contract documents prevail. ### B1. SLA definitions - **Acknowledgment** — the automated confirmation that a request has been received and a ticket created. It does **not** constitute a Qualified Technical Response. - **Qualified Technical Response** — a substantive response specific to the reported issue that provides a meaningful diagnostic, remediation or escalation step. It may include a request for specific logs, versions or system information; an issue-specific diagnostic instruction; a proposed workaround; an identified probable cause; an escalation stating the next step; or an initial technical assessment with an invitation to schedule a remote inspection where such inspection is a reasonable next step. A general reference to the booking calendar without technical context does not qualify. A Qualified Technical Response may be prepared or delivered by PhotoRobot support personnel, automated support systems, or a combination of both. - **Response Time** — the elapsed calendar time from creation of the ticket until the first Qualified Technical Response, including weekends and public holidays unless the individual offer expressly states otherwise. It is **not** the time to workaround or resolution. - **Workaround** — an interim way to keep working while a root-cause fix is prepared. - **Resolution** — completion of the available corrective action, or a documented conclusion identifying the root cause, applicable responsibility and recommended next step. - Diagnostics are performed on a **commercially reasonable best-effort basis**. ### B2. Service levels & severity PWS service levels define the **response-time objective for the first Qualified Technical Response**. Response Time is measured in **elapsed calendar hours, including weekends and public holidays**, unless the individual PWS offer expressly states otherwise. | Service level | First Qualified Technical Response | | --- | --- | | **Standard** (baseline) | within 48 hours | | **Priority** | within 24 hours | | **Rapid** | within 6 hours | | **Express** | within 2 hours | The automated ticket acknowledgment is normally issued shortly after submission but does not count as the Qualified Technical Response. The applicable service level is defined in the individual PWS offer; the service level governs the first-response objective, not the time to workaround or final resolution. Where live remote diagnostics are reasonably required, the Qualified Technical Response may include an initial technical assessment and an invitation to select an available Splashtop SOS inspection time. **Service level vs. severity.** These are two independent things. The **service level** (Standard / Priority / Rapid / Express) is the response-time tier the customer contracts for and sets the first-response objective. The **severity** (Critical / Major / Normal / Minor) describes how serious an individual ticket is and sets the order and intensity of handling *within* that contracted level. A **Critical** severity does not automatically upgrade the customer to a faster service level, and PhotoRobot may reclassify a ticket’s severity where the reported business impact does not match the level selected. Severity mapping when triaging: | Severity | Typical situation | Handling | | --- | --- | --- | | **Critical** | Production stopped, no workaround | Highest intensity within the contracted service level | | **Major** | Significant impairment, limited workaround | Expedited within the service level | | **Normal** | Standard issue, production continues | Standard handling | | **Minor** | Question, cosmetic, low impact | Standard handling | **Severity governance.** PhotoRobot may **reclassify** a ticket’s severity where the reported business impact does not match the level selected, **merge duplicate tickets**, and **decline the artificial splitting** of one incident across several tickets. ### B3. Software, updates & version currency - **Feature updates / new versions** of Controls and Control Unit firmware are a PWS benefit and **require valid PWS**. - **Security & critical stability fixes.** PhotoRobot **may make selected security updates or critical stability fixes available outside active PWS where PhotoRobot considers it necessary. This does not create a general entitlement** to updates, upgrades, compatibility work, or support for out-of-support versions. - **Version currency (customer requirement).** The customer must run the **current published version of the software on all workstations that access the PhotoRobot cloud**. The valid current version is published on the PhotoRobot website. Support for issues attributable to out-of-date software may be limited until the software is brought current. ### B4. On-site service **On-site labor required to resolve a covered PWS incident is included.** Travel, accommodation, special equipment, third-party work, and work outside the covered scope (for example installing a new configuration, relocation, training or a general overhaul after an accident) remain **chargeable** — for short and multi-day interventions alike. Routine equipment-related travel can be folded into the yearly price via *Equipment-related technician travel included* (A5). **Policy-driven dispatch.** When an on-site visit is required **specifically because the customer’s environment cannot accommodate a Splashtop SOS session**, **technician travel is charged at the flat regional rate regardless of any travel-included option**, because the visit follows from the chosen access policy rather than from a fault in the equipment. (For environments that must restrict remote access as a matter of compliance — defense, banking, or similarly regulated settings — PhotoRobot can define a dedicated Restricted-Environment Support arrangement, priced in advance.) ### B5. Supported versions & End-of-Life (EOL) Supported Controls versions, firmware versions, Control Unit generations, operating systems and validated device combinations are maintained in the **PhotoRobot Compatibility & Support Matrix**, which classifies each configuration into one of four states: - **Fully Supported** — full support, updates and fixes. - **Maintenance Supported** — support and critical fixes, but not necessarily new features. - **Best Effort** — no guarantee of a fix or of compatibility. - **End of Support** — paid migration, inspection or individual service only. Exact status and transition dates are published in the maintained matrix. Long-term support for validated legacy configurations may be agreed individually. ### B6. Customer responsibilities The customer provides, as applicable: **diagnostic logs and version information**, a working **internet connection** with the required **outbound connectivity**, **administrator access** where required, appropriate **backups**, **physical access, power and network** at the site, the **current published software version on all cloud-accessing workstations** (B3), and reasonable cooperation with the technician **with customer authorization and, where required by the customer’s policy, under customer supervision**. Where support asks for additional information and there is **no response for 5 days or more**, the ticket is automatically closed (re-openable). **Recommended setup.** PhotoRobot recommends running each installation on a **dedicated, validated computer configuration**. The controlling computer is best treated as **part of the delivered equipment** rather than as part of general corporate IT, which is governed by separate security standards — on a dedicated machine, authorized PhotoRobot access is straightforward and low-risk. Where the customer has a choice of platform, PhotoRobot may recommend a preferred configuration based on the current Controls release and the customer’s workflow (specifics are maintained in the **network & platform prerequisites**). We further recommend keeping **all PhotoRobot devices, including the controlling computer, in a dedicated “studio” subnet** clearly separated from the corporate network. Detailed requirements: photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites. ### B7. Data protection & privacy Support personnel access only the **data necessary** to diagnose and resolve the reported issue — across remote sessions (Splashtop SOS), logs, sample images and cloud outputs. Remote access is **consent-based**; handling of personal data follows applicable **GDPR** obligations; credentials and sensitive network topology are never disclosed. Telemetry data categories, purpose, retention and region are described, together with the applicable region-dependent legal documents, in the PhotoRobot Trust Center. ### B8. General service exclusions Support is limited or excluded for: **unsupported operating systems**, **beta software**, **unsupported camera firmware**, **unsupported third-party modifications**, **unsupported APIs**, and **VPN/network configurations that violate PhotoRobot’s network requirements**. ### B9. Parts-coverage exclusions (annulment of part-replacement obligations) Part-replacement obligations are annulled where the fault results from: **use contrary to the instructions**; the product being **opened, modified or repaired beyond the customer-service procedures expressly authorized by PhotoRobot**; **inappropriate voltage or faulty electrical installation**; an **altered/removed serial number**; **transport damage outside PhotoRobot’s responsibility**; an **exterior break/scratch** in the customer’s possession; a part **damaged by third-party accessories/devices or unauthorized service**; or **natural disasters** (fire, lightning, flood, earthquake, etc.). ### B10. Not included in baseline (available via the offer) Baseline PWS does not include: **technician travel** (unless configured), **parts shipping** (unless configured), **repair of third-party products**, **physical hardware failure of lights** (broken bulb, dead receiver/sender), and **normal wear parts** (see B11). These can be added or ordered separately. ### B11. Consumables & replaceable mechanical components **Routine maintenance consumables** — low-value items subject to expected wear in normal operation, such as O-rings, X-rings, rubber rings, seals and comparable minor parts. **Certain routine maintenance consumables may be supplied without charge at PhotoRobot’s sole discretion as part of normal customer care.** This is a **discretionary customer-care practice, not a contractual entitlement**, and creates no obligation to supply any particular item free of charge. **High-value replaceable mechanical components** — assemblies such as gearboxes, bearings, motors, glass platters and comparable mechanical parts. These remain governed by the **standard PWS coverage rules**: replacement is included only where **PhotoRobot confirms that the failure results from a covered material or manufacturing defect** (see B9 and the B-Annex coverage table). **Normal wear, aging, routine replacement, misuse, accidental damage, and customer- or third-party-caused damage are not covered**, and a mechanical assembly does **not** become covered merely because it is subject to wear. ### B12. Incident scope & fair use An **unlimited number of incidents** means that no per-ticket charge applies to **legitimate support requests within the agreed scope**. It does **not** include project work, recurring training, system redesign, data migration, custom development, repeated remediation of unchanged customer-side conditions, or work otherwise identified as a separately chargeable service. ### B-Annex. Baseline coverage at a glance | Item | Baseline PWS | | --- | --- | | Remote support labor | Included | | On-site labor for a covered incident | Included, subject to terms (B4) | | Replacement PhotoRobot part — covered defect | Included, subject to eligibility, exclusions and supported-product status | | Normal wear part | Not included (B11) | | Customer-caused damage | Not included | | Shipping | Not included unless configured | | Travel / accommodation | Not included unless configured | | Third-party component | Diagnosis included; part and repair excluded | Shipping and related logistics are included only where expressly stated in the offer. **Commissioning** means the completion of the initial installation and functional verification of the PhotoRobot equipment by PhotoRobot, an authorized partner, or another party accepted by PhotoRobot, as recorded in the installation or service documentation. **Delivery** means the date on which the equipment is delivered to the agreed destination or made available for collection, as applicable under the agreed delivery terms. **Installation Date** means the date on which commissioning is recorded as completed, or another date expressly stated by PhotoRobot in the delivery, installation or contract documentation. **Factory PWS begins on the Installation Date, but no later than 90 calendar days after Delivery**, unless a different date is expressly agreed in writing by PhotoRobot. The 90-day limit does not apply to the extent commissioning is delayed primarily by PhotoRobot. **Revision** 2026.2 · **Published** 2026-07-28 --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots # SECTION: robots # TYPE: Page --- # Automated Product Photography Equipment by PhotoRobot > Discover PhotoRobot product photography equipment to automate the capture of image galleries, 360 spin photography, 3D spins, and 3D models. ## Product Photography Equipment - Overview PhotoRobot 360 photography equipment automates the capture of image galleries, 360 product photos, 3D spins, and eCommerce 3D models. #### CENTERLESS TABLE A universal, motorized turntable solution for shadow-free product photography#### TURNTABLE A heavy-duty rotating turntable to support 360 product photography of heavy objects#### MULTICAM A multi-camera system for capturing multi-row 3D product photos with multiple cameras simultaneously#### CASE 850 The ultimate, portable robotic workstation for 360 product shots and photogrammetry 3D modeling#### CUBE One of the most versatile PhotoRobot devices, for standalone use or in combination with other robots#### ROBOTIC ARM A precise robot camera arm to add the 3rd dimension to your 360 product photography and multi-row spins#### FRAME An all-in-one motorized turntable and robot camera arm for shadow-free 360 product photography and 3D modeling#### TURNING PLATFORM A heavy-duty turntable photography solution for large and / or heavy products like furniture and machinery#### CATWALK A rotating 360 platform for capturing fashion videos and model product photography in 360 degrees#### CAROUSEL 5000 A heavy-duty, motorized turntable for photography of automobiles, furniture, machinery, and other heavy objects ## Learn More Today Forget looking for a compromise between quality and efficiency in your 360 product photography equipment and software. PhotoRobot delivers 360 and 3D photography equipment for small, large, transparent, glossy, light or dark products. Find a motorized turntable for any size studio, robot camera arms, and multi-camera rigs for consistent, high-speed image capture. We’ll build a custom product photography automation system for your business to produce stunning photos in 2D, 360, and 3D. ## Compare Robots ##### robot name ##### N° OF CAMERAS ##### max. diameter cm / inch ##### max. load kg / lbs ##### panorama ##### 360° ##### 3D ##### flying cam ##### trishot ##### animation ##### video ##### | CAN 1 40 / 15.7 10 / 22 ##### | CASE 1 85 / 33.5 20 / 44 ##### | CUBE 1 95 / 37.4 130 / 287 ##### | CENTERLESS TABLE 1 85 / 130 33.5 / 51.2 40 / 88 ##### | ROBOTIC ARM 1 – 8 / 17 ##### | FRAME 1 - 5 130 / 51.2 20 / 44.1 ##### | TURNING PLATFORM 1 100 / 180 / 280 3.9 / 71 / 110 1500 / 3306 ##### | CATWALK 1 280 / 110 110 / 43.3 100 / 220 ##### | CAROUSEL 5000 1 500 / 197 4000 / 8818 ##### | VARIO 1 – 8 / 17 ##### | MULTICAM_PRO 1 - 13 – 8 / 17 ##### | MULTICAM_Pro XL 1 - 13 – 8 / 17 --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-3000 # SECTION: robots > carousel-3000 # TYPE: Page --- # Carousel 3000 > The automated solution for photography of cars, furniture and other very large objects. 360° spins, still photographs and more. Special SW mode for car parking! ## CAROUSEL 3000 Automation for your large products ## LOW-PROFILE & heavy-duty The CAROUSEL-robots-family was created for photographing large objects, such as cars, machinery and furniture. It can carry anything weighing up to 2,000 kg and with a diameter of up to 3 metres. Its low profile makes it possible to place an object onto the platform in a matter of seconds without the need for an access ramp or even a crane - what is a great benefit comparing to standard robotic platforms. ## STABLE & Precise The platform boasts an exceptionally resistant, robust, yet precise design. Available in 2 configurations - as a 3m rotating platform with drive-up ramps around - or as a 5x5m flat podium (most common setup) with a 3m rotating platform in the centre and straight drive-up ramps at the edges (replaceable for a cyclorama connectors if required). ## CAROUSEL 3000 ##### Easy to keep Clean The constant flow of air through the machine base, which blows through the gap between the stable and rotating part of the table, prevents the ingress of dirt into the machine space. ##### Lasting Long term, maintenance free operation thanks to a careful choice of materials ##### Easy to replace The flooring material is designed in such a way that is easy to replace in case of higher workload and wear ### Output examples Production time 1 min 50 sec White Loveseat Sofa Furniture Production time 0 min 55 sec White Dining Chair Furniture Production time 0 min 55 sec KTM Motorcycle Automotive ### technical specifications #### Parameter API REST API Documentation Minimum step 1° Inaccuracy per rotation Less than 1 mm / 0.03" Load bearing capacity 2 000 kg / 4 409 lbs (when evenly distributed) Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V ### DIMENSIONS Transport dimensions (HxWxD) 3 × EU pallet with overhanging length of max. 1 200 mm Dimensions Dia. 5 640 mm / 47.3" × dia. 222.1" / Length from edge of front ramp to motor 6 825 mm / 268.7" Transport weight 1 560 kg / 3 439 lbs Weight 1 500 kg / 3 306 lbs Recommended room space Width min. 7 m, depth min. 10 m, height min. 3 m / width 22'11", depth 32'10", height 9'10" Dimension of plate with access ramps Dia. 3 000 mm / dia. 118.1" ### video ### related blogs #### How to Photograph Furniture - Logistics, Prep and Execution Photographing furniture for eCommerce and online retail calls for high-quality, dynamic visuals that can meet the expectations of today’s consumers. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000 # SECTION: robots > carousel-5000 # TYPE: Page --- # The Carousel - Photography Turntable for Cars and Machinery > The Carousel is a heavy-duty rotating platform for 360 product photography of cars, furniture, machinery, and other very large objects. ## CAROUSEL 5000 The Carousel 5000 is PhotoRobot’s heavy-duty turntable for product photography automation of large and heavy products. ## A Heavy-Duty Turntable Install the Carousel 5000 motorized, rotating platform in a warehouse or showroom floor for product photography of exceptionally large objects. Its 4,000 kg load capacity and 5 meter plate diameter supports objects like furniture, cars, and heavy machinery. Meanwhile, the turntable plate’s low profile makes it easy to place products on the device in a matter of seconds. There is no need for an access ramp or even a crane! It’s literally as easy as parking your car. ## Versatile, Robust & Precise The Carousel 5000 platform is exceptionally resistant and robust, yet precise in design. It enables studios to photograph 60+ cars in a single day, and is available in two models. One is easy to install on top of any existing floor space. The other recesses into a studio or showroom floor for easy loading on and off the turntable. In this way, you simply park cars on the rotating platform for a photoshoot, and drive off afterwards. Great for when constructing a new studio, the Carousel 5000 becomes a natural part of any studio floor. ## CAROUSEL 5000 ##### Easy to Keep Clean Grooves along the rotating plate’s perimeter allow air-driven dirt and dust removal. ##### Built for the Long-Term Benefit from long-term, maintenance-free operation thanks to quality design materials. ##### Easily Replaceable The turntable plate’s flooring material is easily replaceable during higher workloads and wear. ### Output Examples Production time 1 min 50 sec White Loveseat Sofa Furniture Production time 0 min 55 sec KTM Motorcycle Automotive Production time 1 min 50 sec Foldable Mitre Saw Stand Industrial ### Technical Specifications #### Parameters API API / PhotoRobot _Controls Minimum step 1° Inaccuracy per rotation Less than 1 mm / 0.03" Load bearing capacity 4 000 kg / 8 818 lbs (when evenly distributed) Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V ### Dimensions Transport dimensions (HxWxD) 3 × EU pallet with overhanging length of max. 1 200 mm Dimensions Dia. 5 640 mm / 47.3" × dia. 222.1" / Length from edge of front ramp to motor 6 825 mm / 268.7" Transport weight 1 560 kg / 3 439 lbs Weight 1 500 kg / 3 306 lbs Recommended room space Width min. 7 m, depth min. 10 m, height min. 3 m / width 22'11", depth 32'10", height 9'10" Dimension of plate with access ramps Dia. 5 640 mm / dia. 222.1" ### Video ### Related Blogs #### Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography Discover car turntables from popular manufacturers vs the PhotoRobot automation-driven solution for high-volume, 360-degree car photography and product videos. #### How to Photograph Furniture - Logistics, Prep and Execution Photographing furniture for eCommerce and online retail calls for high-quality, dynamic visuals that can meet the expectations of today’s consumers. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300 # SECTION: robots > case-1300 # TYPE: Page --- # Case 1300 > Compact robotic system for product photography automation. It features a 1300 mm glass turntable. Easy to carry the entire system in a passenger car! ## CASE 1300 Powerful & portable robotic workstation ## TOP PRODUCTIVITY IN A COMPACT FORM 1300 mm hardened optical-glass plate, diffusion background, several automatic product-positioning lasers, high motor-power, remote control, API, reflection boards and flag holders - all in easily portable form - for high-productive studio work - or on the go. The bottom of the object can be photographed through the glass - so photogrammetry 3D models can be easily created using this machine. ## ROBUST & POWERFUL CASE1300 is a very productive, compact and portable device that can be used in any photo studio, online shop, warehouse or production hall. It can be easily transported to where it's needed - or work permanently in a studio, where can be combined with other PhotoRobot machines into robotic cells. Due to the compact dimensions can be transported in a van. ## CASE 1300 ##### No clipping required Optical glass plate and light shapers allow the software to perfectly separate the background. ##### Portable Due to the compact dimensions of the entire machine, you can easily relocate the machine in-studio on castors - or transport it in a van to a shooting location. ##### Easy ACCESS All-in-one concept requires minimal setup & allow operator easy access to the photographed product exchange. ##### Large & Compact 1300 mm in diameter, the plate provides an extremely large work surface. ### Output examples Production time 0 min 40 sec. Santal Tinted Square Designer Sunglasses Fashion Production time 0 min 40 sec. Black and Gold Tortoise Shell Glasses Fashion Production time 0 min 40 sec. Striped-Temple Square Designer Sunglasses Fashion ### Technical specification #### Properties Connection LAN API REST API Documentation Background integrated, diffuse (white) ### parameters Minimum step 1° Minimum rotation speed 4.5 min / 360° Maximum rotation speed 2.1 s / 360° Maximum shooting speed 24 images / 3 s, 36 images / 4 s Load-bearing capacity 40 kg / 88 lbs Supply voltage AC 100 – 240 V ### dimensions Transport Weight 220 kg / 485 lbs (in a wooden box for air/sea cargo) Transport dimensions 1060 × 1050 × 430 mm / / 41.7" × 41.3" × 16.9" Weight 114 kg / 251,3 lbs Dimensions 980 × 960 × 340 mm / 38.6" × 38" × 13.4" Glass plate dimensions 1300 mm / 51.2" Working Area 3 × 4 m / 9.8 × 13 ft ### related blogs --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850 # SECTION: robots > case-850 # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Case 850 - Mobile, 360 & 3D Tabletop Photography > PhotoRobot’s Case 850 is a mobile turntable for 360 & 3D tabletop photography. It features an 850mm glass turntable, and can fold up to fit into a small car. ## CASE 850 A portable, motorized 360 turntable, designed to fit securely into its protective carrying case for easy transport. ## On-The-Go Tabletop Photography Construct a compact, 360 / 3D product photography turntable anywhere in 15 minutes with the Case 850. The Case features an 850mm optical glass plate, offering sufficient workspace for small to medium size products. Software-driven control ensures smooth turntable rotation and synchronization with consistent, remote camera capture to easily automate post-processing. Produce entire galleries of still images alongside 360 spins, multi-row 3D photography, and photos to generate 3D models. ## Freedom of Movement The Case 850 folds up securely into its protective carrying case, making all components and accessories easily transportable. Unpack this 360 / 3D tabletop solution and take advantage of retractable wheels to set up in any photo studio, warehouse space, or production hall. Fold it back up into its carrying case when finished, and move onto the next photoshoot. The Case is even transportable by small car, able to fit into cargo spaces or back seats. ## CASE 850 ##### No clipping required Build a studio for photography with no clipping necessary, anywhere in 15 minutes. ##### Portable Compact dimensions ensure the Case easily fits in your vehicle's cargo space. ##### Easy Setup Secure all machine components and accessories for easy transport and unloading. ##### Large & Compact 850 mm in diameter, the turntable plate provides a sufficiently large work surface. ### Output Examples Production time 0 min. 35 sec. Glass Bottle Collection Glassware Production time 0 min 40 sec. Preciosa Clear Glass Glassware Production time 0 min 57 sec. Preciosa Blue Glass Glassware ### Technical Specifications #### Properties Controls software connection LAN; Wi-Fi with an additional USB dongle Communication with machine API / PhotoRobot _Controls Background integrated, diffuse (white) ### Parameters Minimum step 1° Minimum rotation speed 4.5 min / 360° Maximum rotation speed 2.1 s / 360° Maximum shooting speed 24 images / 3 s, 36 images / 4 s Load-bearing capacity 20 kg / 44 lbs Supply voltage AC 100 – 240 V ### Dimensions Transport weight 73 kg / 160 lbs (85 kg/ 187 lbs with pallet) Transport dimensions 1060 × 1050 × 430 mm / / 41.7" × 41.3" × 16.9" Weight 62 kg / 137 lbs Dimensions 980 × 960 × 340 mm / 38.6" × 38" × 13.4" Glass plate dimensions 850 mm / 33.5" Working area 3 × 4 m / 9.8 × 13 ft ### Video ### Related Blogs #### Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production See how to set up for jewelry photography on-location in this behind-the-scenes look at PhotoRobot’s transportable, motorized turntable setup. #### eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production In eCommerce photography, production speeds matter. Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. #### Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It Branching off product photography, packshot photography sets guidelines to taking photos of a product typically with its packaging and labeling. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk # SECTION: robots > catwalk # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot’s 360 Catwalk for Model Photography and Video > PhotoRobot’s Virtual_Catwalk is a motorized, turntable platform for 360 product photography and the filming of live models and fashion products. ## CATWALK An infinite 360 runway for fashion photography, filming product videos, and producing online fashion shows ## Presentation in Motion Think of PhotoRobot’s Virtual_Catwalk as a motorized turntable combined with an infinite runway for filming models and shooting fashion photography. Studios use it to create professional-looking fashion shows in a very small space, and with only standard studio lighting. Models can walk on a treadmill platform that rotates 360 degrees. Meanwhile, cameras remain in place, resulting in a video with a flying camera effect. In addition, the workstation is suitable for product photography of models or objects when the belt is not running. Capture entire image galleries, 360 spins, and product videos for digital fashion shows and fashion catalogs. ## Model Photography & Online Fashion The Virtual_Catwalk allows studios to film and photograph dozens of models in a single day. Its design ensures freedom of movement both for the model and the photographer in the studio. With easy entry and exit from the platform, adjustable speed and stability when in motion, safety is no issue. Models can easily walk onto the platform, pose while on it, or strut the runway to create digital fashion shows. In fact, an impressive product video only needs to last a few minutes, and takes about the same time to create. This provides a lot of extra time to get creative and produce more visual assets with each video. ## CATWALK Features ##### Customizable Remotely adjust turntable rotation and treadmill speed to perfectly suit the model. ##### Easy Entry & Exit The wide plate of the turning platform is safely secured with supports for safe entry & exit. ##### Everything in One Place Everything in the studio remains in one place, with no need to move on or off location. ##### Adjustable Level Choose to install the Catwalk directly into the floor to make it level with the working area. ### Output Examples Production time 0 min 40 sec Black Lace Underwear Fashion Production time 1 min 08 sec Slim Fit Jeans Fashion Production time 1 min 10 sec Bone Handle Cane Home goods ### Technical Specifications #### Parameters Speed setting options 1–100 % Max. belt speed 10 km/h – 6 mph Inaccuracy per location 1° Load bearing capacity 1 500 kg / 3 307 lbs Option for connecting el. appliance AC 230 V ### Dimensions Radius from center of rotation 460 × 840 × 2 000 mm / 18.1" × 33.1" × 78.8" Virtual Catwalk Station 500 × dia. 2 800 mm / 19.7" × dia. 110.2" Transport weight 116 kg / 256 lbs ### Video ### Related Blogs #### PhotoRobot’s Catwalk for Apparel Photography and Online Fashion Shows Deploy an infinite Catwalk in the studio for model and apparel photography, online fashion shows, and fashion product videos. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table # SECTION: robots > centerless-table # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table with Optical Glass Plate > The Centerless_Table supports either an 850 or 1300mm glass turntable for automated, high-speed & shadow-free product photography with peerless image quality. ## CENTERLESS TABLE A universal solution for shadow-free product photography ## Perfect Images With no compromise between quality and efficiency, the Centerless_Table allows for picture-perfect results of products from small to large. The optical turning glass plate enables shadow-free image capture of transparent, reflective, light or dark products. Capture items the size of a ring to a suitcase in 2D, 360 and 3D, with rich detail and resolution. ## No Clipping Required Thanks to a unique lighting system, the Centerless_Table enables product photography with no clipping required. The optical glass plate and diffuse background allow photographers to light products from all sides. This creates a natural, white background for high-quality photos, from still images and packshots to 360° imagery. The Centerless_Table supports two plate sizes, with its wider version offering a 130cm diameter plate and a 40kg load capacity. ## CENTERLESS TABLE ##### Simple Calibration Simple automatic calibration of the positioning system at the touch of a button ##### Easy Setup Easy set-up of objects to the centre of rotation using laser-guided positioning ##### Up close Ideal solution for photographing partially or fully magnified objects ##### Tidy Lights on holders – no cables on the ground ### Output Examples Production time 0 min. 35 sec. Glass Bottle Collection Glassware Production time 0 min 40 sec. Preciosa Clear Glass Glassware Production time 0 min 57 sec. Preciosa Blue Glass Glassware ### TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS #### Plate Diameter #### 1 300 mm #### 850 mm Controls software connection LAN Communication with machine API / PhotoRobot _Controls ### PARAMETERS #### Plate Diameter #### 1 300 mm #### 850 mm Minimum step ≤ 0.1° Shortest turning time (0° – 360°) 4.5 s 4 s Deviation per rotation ≤ 0.5° Load bearing capacity 40 kg / 88 lbs Table separate input power 500 W Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V ### SURFACE Table separate, Kit R (HxWxD) 2110×1720×1570 mm / 83" × 67,7" × 61,8" 2110×1180×1430 mm / 83" × 46,5" × 56" Table Kit R + Arm V8 (HxWxD) 2110×2570×2070 mm / 83"×105"×81,5" 2110×2030×1930 mm / 83"×80"×76" Table, Kit R + Arm V8 + lamp mounts 2850×4720×2850 mm / 112" × 186" × 112" 2850×4180×2380 mm / 112" × 164,5" × 93,7" ### Video ### Related Blogs #### eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production In eCommerce photography, production speeds matter. Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. #### 360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production Discover 360° Product Photography: from the different formats of 360s to automated photography equipment, software, workflows and content production. #### Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It Branching off product photography, packshot photography sets guidelines to taking photos of a product typically with its packaging and labeling. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube # SECTION: robots > cube # TYPE: Page --- # The CUBE - PhotoRobot’s Compact Product Positioning Device > PhotoRobot’s Cube works in combination with motorized turntables for product positioning, as a standalone turntable, or with a rotating mannequin. ## CUBE The Cube functions standalone as a photography turntable or in combination with other robots for 360-degree product photography. ## Fashion Product Photography Quickly transform the Cube into a rotating mannequin for photographing fashion products. The device also has a system for quick mannequin exchange to streamline higher volume photoshoots. Simply prepare multiple mannequins, and easily mount them onto the Cube when ready for photography. Compliment the system with an optional storage cart to transport up to six mannequins of different sizes and shapes. It’s everything fashion product photographers need in the photo studio. ## Suspension Mode This product photography robot has the unique ability to suspend products in air. Suspension mode makes it easy to capture products such as handbags, chandeliers, light fittings, and even bicycles. Suspend objects weighing up to 130 kg for 360-degree product photography. Synchronize rotation with other photography equipment and robots, such as the Robotic Camera Arm. ## Photography Turntable Use the Cube as a standalone product photography turntable. With a 100 cm diameter plate, the Cube serves as an effective, mobile device. Its precision drive with zero-clearance transmission ensures surgical precision, even at the maximum turntable load of 130 kg. The Cube V6 RotoPower brings mains power into the rotating plate. Products that must be switched on can be photographed or filmed while they turn, for example a fridge with its interior light on or a microwave with its display and interior light lit. Power passes through a rotary electrical joint instead of a cable, so the plate can keep turning in one direction without limit. More about RotoPower ## CUBE Overview ##### Available in 3 Variants Find the perfect size for your photo studio with 3 versions of the Cube: Cube V5, V6, and V6 RotoPower. ##### Heavy Lifter A robust, steel design with a load-bearing capacity of 130 kg ensures support for a wide range of products. ##### Simple Servicing & Upgrades The control unit is outside of the machine, making service and upgrades trouble-free, quick and easy. ##### Quick Mount Quickly mount the Cube onto various workstations either as a photography turntable or in suspension mode. ### Output Examples Production time 0 min 58 sec Semi-Transparent Top Fashion Production time 0 min 40 sec Black Lace Underwear Fashion Production time 0 min 59 sec KTM Score Bicycle Sporting goods ### Technical Specifications #### V5 #### V6 / Roto Power Controls software connection LAN Lasers With cross or grid option Lighting Flash or constant Hanger bars 4 pieces as a standard, 7-8 pieces max. Communication with machine API / PhotoRobot _Controls Compatible cameras Canon ### Parameters #### V5 #### V6 / Roto Power Minimum step 1° Shortest Turning Time (0°–360°) 4 s 2.7 s Deviation per rotation under 1° without deviation Max. load bearing capacity 130 kg / 287 lbs Torque 19.6 Nm 98.0 Nm Separate input power 300 W 600 W Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V ### Dimensions #### V5 #### V6 / Roto Power Transport dimensions (H:W:D) 40 × 50 × 35 cm / 15.7" × 19.7" × 13.8" Transport weight 15 kg / 33 lbs 22.5 kg / 50 lbs ### Plates #### V5 #### V6 / Roto Power Basic plate diameter 950 mm / 37.4" Basic plate color black from one side, white from the other Basic plate material plastic Accessory plate diameter 1 000 mm / 39,4" Basic plate color white basic material, black foil at one side Basic plate material plastic (hardened foam) ### Video ### Related Blogs #### A Virtual Digital Wardrobe - 3D Textile Motion Simulation PhotoRobot joins Prague City Museum, CESNET, and FEE CTU to propose a procedure for the 3D digitization of cultural heritage. #### Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production See how to set up for jewelry photography on-location in this behind-the-scenes look at PhotoRobot’s transportable, motorized turntable setup. #### eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production In eCommerce photography, production speeds matter. Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. #### Ghost Mannequin Effect for Apparel Photography The ghost mannequin effect provides clothing a full-bodied 3D appearance, as if an invisible model is wearing the product. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame # SECTION: robots > frame # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot’s FRAME for 360 / 3D Photography & 3D Modeling > PhotoRobot’s Frame is an all-in-one motorized turntable with a robotic camera arm for automated, shadow-free photography and photogrammetry 3D modeling. ## FRAME Capture 360° spins and image galleries for 3D modeling as camera and background travel around products, even under the glass. ## A Truly Robust Solution PhotoRobot’s Frame combines a motorized turntable with a robot camera arm to provide an all-in-one product photography solution. The turntable features an optical glass plate, enabling image capture from above or below the glass. Perfect for capturing image galleries for photogrammetry 3D modeling, the background and camera travel around the product. Capture entire image galleries, single or multi-row spin photography, and imagery necessary to produce 3D models in minutes! ## Dual-Axis 360° Rotation 3D modeling is a breeze with PhotoRobot’s Frame. The 130cm diameter optical glass plate and diffuse background enable the lighting of products from all sides. This produces quality product photos on a pure white background, while consistent image capture ensures no clipping is required. It also means photographers can capture all the photos necessary to generate a 3D model in a single click! It even has dual axis 360° rotation to capture products from any angle quickly and accurately. With a load capacity of 20kg, it offers one of the largest workstations on the market. Capture products small to medium size, transparent, glossy, light or dark in impressive 360° and 3D formats. ## FRAME All-in-one photography workspace ##### Photos, Spins, 3D Perfectly position products for 360° spin photography and 3D modeling. ##### Tidy Built-in laser positioning, sensors and control units mean no cables on the ground. ##### Simple Calibration Experience simple, automatic calibration of the positioning system at the touch of a button. ##### Easy Setup Easily install in any available studio, warehouse space, or production hall. ### Output Examples Production time 0 min 40 sec Engraved Wedding Band Jewelry Production time 0 min 40 sec Pink Glass Perfume Bottle Glassware Production time 0 min 40 sec Crystal Cube Award Glassware ### Technical Specifications #### Interfaces Network LAN Integration API / PhotoRobot _Controls Test/Setup Built-in web interface Operation PhotoRobot _Controls ### Parameters Plate Diameter 1300 mm / 51,2" Minimum step ≤ 0.1° Shortest Turning Time (0° – 360°) 4.5 s Deviation per rotation ≤ 0.5° Load bearing capacity 20 kg / 44,1 lbs Table separate input power 750 W Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V ### Dimensions Transport weight 650 kg / 1433 lbs Transport Dimensions (W × D × H) 2050 × 1200 × 1500 mm/ 80.7" × 47.2" × 59.1" Weight 360 kg / 794 lbs Working Dimensions (W × D × H) 1925 × 2150 × 2260 mm / 75.8" × 84.6" × 89" Glass plate dimensions 1300 mm / 51.2" Working Area (W × D × H) 3 × 4 × 2.5 m / 9.8 × 13 × 8.2 ft ### Video ### Related Blogs #### 3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production 3D eCommerce uses 3D modeling to create advanced product viewing experiences. Read on to find out exactly what it is, and how to produce 3D models in-house. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam # SECTION: robots > multicam # TYPE: Page --- # MultiCam - 3D Product Photography with Multiple Cameras > PhotoRobot’s MultiCam is a multi-camera automation system to support motorized turntables and streamline the capture of 360 and 3D photography. ## MULTICAM A system to automate the capture of multiple cameras for multi-row and 3D product photography ## Multi-Camera System PhotoRobot’s MultiCam is a multi-camera 3D product photography system to significantly boost production speeds of multi-row 3D imagery. The MultiCam combines simultaneous image capture from multiple cameras with the high rotational dynamics of PhotoRobot motorized turntables. Capture products from numerous elevations at once for complete 3D experiences, 3D product spins, and photos to generate 3D models. ## Simultaneous Shooting Simultaneously photograph marketing angles and top views in a 360° rotational range for multi-row 3D photography within seconds. The MultiCam enables the capture of 144+ images in approximately 20 seconds. Easily automate post-processing for individual images and to generate 3D spins thanks to extremely precise camera control and image capture. The arch has 13 camera positions 7.5° apart. Two neighbouring positions cannot be occupied at the same time, so up to 7 cameras can be mounted at once; the finer spacing lets you place each camera exactly where a project needs it. ## MULTICAM ##### More Cameras 13 positions available for attaching cameras at a spacing of 7.5°. ##### Synchronize Synchronous shooting with multiple cameras during a single rotation. ##### Two sizes Arch for carrying cameras available in two sizes. ##### Adjustable height Motor-assisted height adjustment according to the centre of the object being photographed. ### Output Examples Production time 1 min 59 sec Leiber Part - Classic Industrial Production time 1 min 50 sec Engine Cylinder Head Industrial Production time 1 min. 16 sec. Yellow Handbag Fashion ### Technical Specifications #### Parameters #### PRO #### PRO XL Elevation Motor-assisted (SW-controlled) Elevation – range 370 mm / 14.6" Top view range 0°–90° Top view range – increment 7.5° Number of positions for mounting DSLR 13 Radius from centre of rotation 950 mm / 37.4" 1250 mm / 49.2" Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V ### Properties #### PRO #### PRO XL Controls software connection LAN Communication with machine API / PhotoRobot _Controls ### Dimensions #### PRO #### PRO XL Transport dimensions (H:W:D) 1600 × 410 × 1205 mm / 63" × 16.1" × 47.4" 1800 × 300 × 120 mm / 70.9" × 11.8" × 4.7" Transport weight 16 kg / 35 lbs 25 kg / 55 lbs ### Video ### Related Blogs #### 3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production 3D eCommerce uses 3D modeling to create advanced product viewing experiences. Read on to find out exactly what it is, and how to produce 3D models in-house. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm # SECTION: robots > robotic-arm # TYPE: Page --- # Robotic Camera Arm for 3D Image Capture | PhotoRobot > Integrate a programmable robotic camera arm into studio workflows for motorized precision, automated camera movement, and realistic 3D image capture. ## ROBOTIC ARM Deploy the Robotic Camera Arm in the studio for motorized precision, automated movement, and realistic 3D presentation. ## Camera Arm for 3D Image Capture The Robotic Camera Arm empowers studios to easily capture and add the third dimension to products. Present products from all angles, both as a whole and as a detailed view. Robust construction, precise movement, and two camera arm sizes enable photographers to capture objects of any size. Direct the Robotic Camera Arm with smooth, robotic precision, or completely automate image capture to create highly realistic 3D images. ## Combine with Photo Turntables The Robotic Camera Arm combines with compatible photography turntable devices such as the Centerless Table. Synchronize image capture as well as movement of the mounted camera with the rotation of the product on the turntable. Control the Camera Arm to capture single or multiple rows 360-degrees around a product for streamlined 3D image capture. ## ROBOTIC ARM ##### Precise The Camera Arm does not oscillate, keeping the mounted camera moving along a precise trajectory. ##### Large Range A large mounting range provides versatility in the choice of tripod heads and cameras. ##### Easy Transport Retractable wheels for easy transport make the Robotic Arm easy to transport between photo studio workstations. ##### Quick Setup A docking station enables quick setup of the Robotic Camera Arm with compatible devices. ### Output Examples Production time 0 min 57 sec. Preciosa Blue Glass Glassware Production time 1 min 59 sec Leiber Part - Classic Industrial Production time 1 min 50 sec Engine Cylinder Head Industrial ### Technical Specifications #### V3 #### V8 Controls software connection LAN Communication with machine API / PhotoRobot _Controls #### Parameters #### V3 #### V8 Elevation manual motor-assisted (SW controlled) Elevation – range 300 mm / 11.8“ 400 mm / 15.8“ Top view range 0°–90° Top view range – minimum step 1° Radius from centre of rotation – short arm 620 – 950 mm / 24.4“ – 37.4“ 800 – 1,250 mm / 31.5“ – 49.2“ Radius from centre of rotation – long arm n/a 900 – 2,906 mm / 35.4“ – 114.4“ Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V ### Dimensions #### V3 #### V8 Transport Dimensions (HxWxD) euro pallet 800 × 1200 × 1000 mm / 31.5“ × 47.3“ × 39.4“ Transport Weight 52 kg / 115 lbs 106 kg / 234 lbs Standard Arm 1,350 mm / 53.2“ Long Arm n/a 3,100 mm / 122.1" ### Video Forget looking for a compromise between quality and efficiency. Achieve perfect results with small, large, transparent or glossy plates. This allows you to capture images of anything, from a ring to a suitcase. ### Related Blogs #### eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production In eCommerce photography, production speeds matter. Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. #### 360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production Discover 360° Product Photography: from the different formats of 360s to automated photography equipment, software, workflows and content production. #### 3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production 3D eCommerce uses 3D modeling to create advanced product viewing experiences. Read on to find out exactly what it is, and how to produce 3D models in-house. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform # SECTION: robots > turning-platform # TYPE: Page --- # Turning Platform - 360 Turntable for Large / Heavy Objects > PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform is a photography turntable for 360-degree product photography of large or heavy objects, like furniture and machinery. ## TURNING PLATFORM The Turning Platform is a heavy-duty, motorized photography turntable to rotate large or heavy objects for 360-degree product photography. ## A Universal Photography Turntable Thanks to its robust design and an extensive range of accessories, the Turning_Platform is a universal solution for turntable photography. Use it to capture the widest selection of products: from small to large, light or heavy objects in 360-degrees. Software-driven controls ensure smooth turntable rotation in sync with precise camera capture for automated 360 product photography and post-processing. Capture entire galleries of individual frames alongside single-row and multi-row 360s of products like furniture and machinery, quickly & efficiently. ## Power, Precision and Durability The Turning_Platform features a load capacity of 1500 kg (3,307 lb). Meanwhile, its plate diameter of up to 280 cm (9.2 ft) provides zero-clearance transmission and high torque power. Together, these ensure exceptional performance for 360 product photography of products from household furniture to garden tractors. Combine the Turning_Platform with the Robotic Arm to easily produce single-row and 360 spin photography of large products. Take it further, and transform the Turning_Platform into an infinite runway for photographing and filming models with PhotoRobot’s Catwalk. The High Torque / RotoPower version brings mains power into the rotating plate, so appliances that must be switched on, such as a fridge with its interior light on or a microwave with its display lit, can be photographed or filmed while they rotate. It is also the version that transforms into the Catwalk: the same rotating connection powers the walking belt and carries the signals that control its speed. More about RotoPower ## TURNING PLATFORM ##### Robust The turntable is both robust and stable, boasting a load capacity of 1500 kg and high torque for smooth rotation. ##### Versatile Optional accessories include mannequin stands for fashion product photography (just like PhotoRobot’s Cube). ##### Stable Reliable supports enhance the stability of the turntable plate, with zero movement when stopped. ##### Transformable Transform the platform into a robotic turntable to support even heavier objects, or into an infinite runway for model photography. ### Output Examples Production time 0 min 40 sec Black Lace Underwear Fashion Production time 1 min 50 sec White Loveseat Sofa Furniture Production time 0 min 55 sec White Dining Chair Furniture ### Technical Specifications #### Standard #### High Torque / Roto Power Controls software connection LAN ### Parameters #### Standard Elevation Motor-assisted (SW-controlled) Elevation – range 370 mm (14.6") Top view range 0° – 90° Top view range – increment 7.5° Number of positions for mounting DSLR 13 Radius from centre of rotation 950 mm (37.4") 1250 mm (49.2") Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V ### Dimensions #### Standard Transport Dimensions (H:W:D) 1600 × 410 × 1205 mm (63" × 16.1" × 47.4") 300 × 680 × 680 mm (11.8" × 26.8" × 26.8") Transport weight 75 kg (165 lbs) 78 kg (172 lbs) / 79 kg (174 lbs) With 180 plate 300 × dia. 1800 mm (11.8" × dia. 70.9") 500 × dia. 1800 mm (19.7" × dia. 70.9") With 280 plate 300 × dia. 2800 mm (11.8" × dia. 110.2") 500 × dia. 2800 mm (19.7" × dia. 110.2") With walking belt n/a ### Video Forget looking for a compromise between quality and efficiency. Achieve perfect results with small, large, transparent or glossy plates. This allows you to capture images of anything, from a ring to a suitcase. ### Related Blogs #### Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography Discover car turntables from popular manufacturers vs the PhotoRobot automation-driven solution for high-volume, 360-degree car photography and product videos. #### Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot Determine the level of studio automation your business demands in this buyer’s guide to automated product photography hardware & software solutions. #### How to Photograph Furniture - Logistics, Prep and Execution Photographing furniture for eCommerce and online retail calls for high-quality, dynamic visuals that can meet the expectations of today’s consumers. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable # SECTION: robots > turntable # TYPE: Page --- # Robotic Turntable for Product Photography of Heavy Items > The Robotic_Turntable is a motorized photography turntable for heavy items, with a 200kg load capacity for machinery, automotive parts and more. ## ROBOTIC TURNTABLE Universal solution for 360° photography and heavy objects ## Heavy-Duty The Robotic_Turntable is a universal motorized turntable for heavy objects, enabling 360° product photography for objects weighing up to 200kg. Its turntable supports small yet heavy products like machinery and tools, engines, automotive parts, milling machines and other heavy objects. Combine the Robotic_Turntable with any Robotic Camera Arm to easily and comfortably produce 360 and 3D product photography in-house. ## Effective 2D + 360 + 3D Photoshoots Integrated mounts for lighting and cabling through the interior of the Robotic_Turntable’s frame ensure freedom of movement around the machine. Meanwhile, remotely controlled lights along with automated turntable rotation, image capture and post-processing enable extremely effective photoshoots. Streamline the capture of still image galleries, 360 / 3D imagery, product videos and photos for 3D modeling. ## ROBOTIC TURNTABLE ##### Heavy Duty High load bearing capacity of 200kg and wear resistance ##### Always Centered Easy positioning of the object to the centre of rotation using laser locating ##### Picture Perfect Robust plate made from opaque material with overhang over the table edge for photos at zero angle. No retouching necessary. ##### In sync Can be used with Cube for synchronised rotation, with a partially suspended product ### Output Examples Production time 0 min 55 sec KTM Motorcycle Automotive Production time 1 min 34 sec Saddleback Handbag Fashion Production time 1 min 10 sec Bone Handle Cane Home goods ### Technical Specifications #### 40 kg load capacity #### 200 kg load capacity Controls software connection LAN Compatible cameras Canon Lasers With cross or grid option Lighting Flash or constant #### Parameters Minimum step 1° Shortest turning time (0–360) 5 s Inaccuracy per rotation less than 1 mm / 0.03 inch Load bearing capacity 40 kg / 88 lbs 200 kg / 441 lbs Table separate input power 500 W Transport weight 183 kg 190 kg ### Dimensions Transport Dimensions (H **×** W **×** D) 860 × 1 690 × 1 170 mm Table + Portal (H **×** W **×** D) 2 100 × 1 690 × 1 120 mm Table + Portal + Robotic Arm (H **×** W **×** D) 2 100 × 2 500 × 1 620 mm Table + Portal + Robotic Arm + Light Mounts (H **×** W **×** D) 2 100 × 4 700 × 2 500 mm Forget looking for a compromise between quality and efficiency. Achieve perfect results with small, large, transparent or glossy plates. This allows you to capture images of anything, from a ring to a suitcase. ### Related Blogs #### eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production In eCommerce photography, production speeds matter. Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. #### Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot Determine the level of studio automation your business demands in this buyer’s guide to automated product photography hardware & software solutions. #### 360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production Discover 360° Product Photography: from the different formats of 360s to automated photography equipment, software, workflows and content production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch # SECTION: photorobot-touch # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Touch - Automated iPhone Product Photography > Automate iPhone product photography with PhotoRobot Touch to produce high-quality handheld still images, detailed shots, and 360 spins. ## Automated iPhone Product Photography PhotoRobot Touch features automated workflow software for iPhone product photography of handheld still images, detailed shots, and simple 360 spins. Download on the Automated iPhone Product Photography Features ## Professional Product Photo Production Effectively produce professional product photography on an iPhone with unrestricted or template-based shooting, and PhotoRobot automated workflow software. ### High-Quality Stills & 360s Produce batch handheld still photos and detailed shots in the palm of your hand, or simple 360 spins via tethered shooting. ### Repeatable Workflows Create templates to guide operators through wizard-based workflows steps, including names, descriptions, and sample images of photos to capture. ### Automated Production Automatically name files, upload images to appropriate storage folders, and export with unrestricted or preset conditions, thumbnails, and labels. ## 3 Modes of iPhone Camera Control Take advantage of 3 different modes of iPhone camera control: Free, Spin, and Wizard mode for various product photography applications. Free Mode ### Unrestricted Handheld Photography Photograph unrestricted, batch handheld still images and detailed shots, with no limit or instructions on the product photos to produce. Wizard Mode ### Custom Wizard-Guided Workflows Reduce onboarding requirements with template-based workflow software that visually guides photographers through production, featuring customizable instructions and example photos. Spin Mode ### Tethered Capture of 360 Spins Produce simple 360 spins with camera triggering via wire-shutter and special adaptor technology for remote camera control in sync with PhotoRobot. ## Integrate Fully with PhotoRobot Capture with PhotoRobot Touch while separately or simultaneously operating any PhotoRobot workstation, with user-friendly software and barcode reader integration. ### Lightweight Capture product photos comparable in quality to any DSLR with a modern, lightweight solution. ### User-friendly Streamline onboarding with user-friendly workflow software featuring QR / barcode reader functionality. ### Highly Scalable Synchronize production lines with PhotoRobot and multiple, easily interchangeable iPhones. ## Simplify & Standardize Workflows Achieve the high-volume consistency of PhotoRobot with iPhone touch-screen controls, and workflow software automation. Touch enables simple wireless shooting, or camera triggering via wire-shutter and special adaptor for producing 360 spins. Capture & automatically upload to the Cloud for instant, automated post-processing and publishing. ### Scan Start QR Code ### Scan Item Barcode ### Select Item Directory ### Capture to Cloud ### Auto Post-Process ### Export & Publish ## Quickly Expand Operations Scale up operations thanks to workflow software featuring an extremely low learning curve and high-level functionality. ### Expedient onboarding Easily integrate multiple phones into production lines. ### Wizard-guided shooting Know exactly how and when to capture required photos. ### Auto post-processing Optimize images by software post-processing presets. ### Simple scan to start Launch app by QR code. Open item by barcode. ### Instant upload to Cloud Automatically capture for cloud post-processing. ### Immediate publishing Distribute content online immediately when ready. ## 1000s of Photos in Rapid Succession Never forget which photo to capture next, even with 1000+ handheld detailed shots required in order. Touch simplifies photography across industries: from car reselling and reverse engineering manuals, to second-hand textiles sales and recycling, and more. ## Related Resources Find more resources on the Touch App for iPhone product photography, from its development to its integration within PhotoRobot workflows. #### Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application The release of the iOS mobile application Touch enables teams to integrate iPhone product photography into PhotoRobot-powered production lines. #### User Support Guide to the PhotoRobot Touch Application This PhotoRobot User Support Guide describes the installation, license requirements, and functionality of the PhotoRobot Touch App. #### Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems Use the Guide to PhotoRobot Recommended Cameras to choose the best camera or camera model to pair with PhotoRobot systems. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/smart-links # SECTION: smart-links # TYPE: Page --- # Smart Links PhotoRobot Controls · Developer Resources ## Smart Links Single place for every Controls endpoint, QR code, and direct download. ## PhotoRobot Controls Use this to check the latest version of PhotoRobot Controls (e.g. via cron) and be notified about new releases, or to verify the currently installed version. GETStablePreviewJSON ### Latest version (*stable & preview)* Returns the most recent version metadata for both release channels. Drop it into a scheduled job to be notified the moment a new build lands. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/links/latest ## Changelog Machine-readable changelog — ideal for surfacing release notes inside your tooling. GETStableJSON ### Stable version changelog Version history for the Stable release channel only — safe for production studios. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/changelog GETStablePreviewJSON ### Stable + Preview version changelog Combined history including upcoming Preview builds — useful when evaluating what is shipping next. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/changelog/preview ## Download Links Overview Links for downloading the latest versions across all platforms — the index that every Direct Download link below points into. GETStableJSON ### Latest Stable version – links overview All platform installers for the current Stable release, in a single payload. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/links/stable GETPreviewJSON ### Latest Preview version – links overview All platform installers for the current Preview release — for testing the next build before it goes Stable. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/links/preview ## Direct Download Links (Latest Versions) Direct download links for the latest version, broken out by platform and channel. These resolve straight to the installer binary. GETStablemacOSInstaller Resolves to the latest Stable `.dmg` for macOS. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/controls/macos/stable GETPreviewmacOSInstaller ### Latest Preview — macOS Resolves to the latest Preview `.dmg` for macOS. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/controls/macos/preview GETStableWindowsInstaller ### Latest Stable — Windows Resolves to the latest Stable installer for Windows. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/controls/windows/stable GETPreviewWindowsInstaller ### Latest Preview — Windows Resolves to the latest Preview installer for Windows. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/controls/windows/preview ## Direct Download Links (Specific Versions) Pin to a specific build of PhotoRobot Controls by version number. Replace :version with a version such as 2.12.13. **Use with caution.** Older versions may not be compatible with your current database structure and can cause serious conflicts. Test in a staging studio first. GETSpecificmacOSInstaller ### macOS Resolves to the exact build you request. The QR code points to the template URL; substitute :version before using. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/controls/macos/:version GETSpecificWindowsInstaller ### Windows Resolves to the exact build you request. Substitute :version with a version such as 2.12.13. Scan to open https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/controls/windows/:version --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/software # SECTION: software # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Controls - Product Photography Software Suite > PhotoRobot Controls is a software suite for automated product photography, automatic editing, hosting & publishing with cloud-based, local or hybrid versions. ## PhotoRobot CONTROLS Automate product photography, from image capture to editing, publishing & digital asset management with user-friendly, easily integrated photo studio software. management workflow capturing tools viewer ## Digital Asset Management Organize, share & easily manage all your product imagery. Software-driven digital asset management provides reliable, searchable storage for all your product imagery and information. See Features ## Studio Workflow Track all items from receiving to the photoshoot, content distribution, and product-out. Studio workflow control allows you to manage your entire studio from a single location. Get project overviews, item status reports, client approval, barcode reader support and much more. See Features ## Capture and Control Control all photography equipment from a single interface. Command cameras, photography robots, devices & lights from a single user interface. Deploy LiveView, sequence configuration, and reusable Presets for complete photoshoot automation. See Features ## Advanced Editing Tools Automate editing of entire image galleries, 360 spin & 3D product photography. Edit images automatically and immediately after capture with a wide range of post-processing tools. Eliminate manual steps, save settings as Presets, and let the software automate your photo editing. See Features ## PhotoRobot Viewer Complete Image Hosting & Delivery Easily distribute product imagery online, including: complete galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hotspots, panoramas & more with PhotoRobot’s Product Viewer. See Features ## Feature List ##### Capture and Control Advanced Sequence ConfigurationLive view for multiple screens at onceCamera remote controlCompatible camerasCapture controlAdvanced sequence configurationsFast Spin for fast capture without stopsRemote control of PhotoRobotsMulti-camera supportRemote light controlFreemask support ##### Studio Workflow Project DashboardProject list with progressCalendar view for easy planningOrganize your workloadRich item statusApproval processBarcode reader supportImport of shooting listsReceiving of itemsSorting to racks or shelvesSave as preset ##### Digital Asset Management Unlimited storageSecured by regular auditsDisaster RecoveryOrganize by Projects-Items-Folders-ClientsFulltext searchCategorization with taggingBulk operationsCollaboration featuresApproval process (internal or external)Special Client pagePossibility to grant access to your clientsSpecial Photographer pageIntegration with e-commerce platformsExport to GDrive ##### Image Hosting & Viewer Global Image CDNReal-time image scalingImage viewer includedReal-time JPEG compressionAdvanced configuration of Spin animationAutomatic publishingIntegration with e-commerce platforms ##### Image Editing Tools Cloud processing with unlimited resolutionWebGL 2.0 - work with all images at onceAuto-Run after capture (when enabled)AutoCrop - based on intelligent product detectionVarious aspect ratio supportedConfigurable padding for croppingSemi-automatic centering toolCentering available in horizontal and vertical axisBackground removalHighlight whiteDe-noise toolTransparencyChroma Key for removing stands and mannequinsWhite BalanceBrush/EraserVignetteContrast, BrightnessHue, Saturation, LightnessClarity - with advanced settingsCurvesHistogramPresets available --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer # SECTION: software > 360-product-viewer # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Viewer ## PhotoRobot Viewer Complete Image Hosting & Delivery Easily distribute product content online, including: image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hot spots, panoramas & more with the PhotoRobot Product Viewer. Users can customize viewer layouts, and add thumbnail navigation for different image formats. There is no need to copy and publish files manually (or via script) from one system to a publishing platform. All imagery you capture with PhotoRobot is immediately available on the web, on 3rd party platforms or your e-shop. Shoppers can then access single images, 360 spins, & detailed shots or annotations at the click of a button. A Cloud-based, global Content Delivery Network (CDN) provides real-time scaling, ensuring quick loading & pixel perfect resolution on any device. **Note: For technical instructions on the configuration and layouts of Viewer outputs, see the** **PhotoRobot Viewer User Support Manual****.** ## Gallery Viewer PhotoRobot’s Gallery Viewer enables brands to customize & host entire galleries of still images online. Thumbnails provide quick navigation between individual images, and load full-size photos at the click of a mouse. Upload any angle or shot for viewing: front, back, profile, top, bottom, and macro. Users can also add detailed shots with annotations that appear along the viewer’s sidebar when consumers click through photos. Include titles, text and context to showcase hot spots, unique product features, or imperfections. It might be for example exterior damage to a car, including more information, with zoom features and various angles. All configuration of viewer instances happens in the Cloud, from customizing layouts & buttons to publishing product content. ## 360 Spin Viewer The SpinViewer is a 360 degree product viewer that enables real-time control & configuration of a 360 spin on any device. The SpinViewer is a 360 degree product viewer that enables real-time control & configuration of a 360 spin on any device. Features include options to adjust object color, background color, rotation speed & direction, as well as product size. It allows consumers to fine-tune spins and product iterations in real-time, and at their own speed. Embed spins on any product or web page, with customizable animations and multiple parameters to enhance the overall product experience. In addition, digital asset management features ensure all product content is securely stored, searchable, and redistributable. ## Hot Spots Hot spots create an area of a 360 spin that emphasizes different product parts or features. They might for example be an additional macro shot that zooms into the cut of a diamond. It could be a close-up of a logo, or showing the material feel & texture of products like apparel & clothing. Whatever the angle, users can mark areas as hot spots, and customize each with different titles and appearances. Configure both the point for the hot spot & its visibility range, as well as size, opacity, pulse, color, and title. Users then select hot spots within the 360 spin, or add individual photos from a separate still images folder. After configuration, hot spots are immediately available for publishing on the web in a few simple clicks via PhotoRobot Viewer. ## Panorama Viewer Integrate Theta cameras with PhotoRobot to add a panoramic view in product photo galleries. Integrate Theta cameras with PhotoRobot to add a panoramic view in product photo galleries. Direct support means users simply add a Theta camera to their software workspace, connect to WiFi, and snap their photos. The software automatically uploads images to the computer on capture, and can immediately publish panoramas to the web. Consumers then access panoramas at the click of a button, with control over view rotation and zoom. Great for showcasing the interior of a car, panoramas can take consumers inside the vehicle. Take it a step further, and combine panoramas with annotated photos and a 360 spin. Together, these enable the complete 360 Car Studio experience for online car photography, dealerships & resellers. ## 360 Car Studio With buttons for 360 spins, hot spots, details, annotations & panoramas, Car Studio 360 caters to the automotive industry. Users can customize button layout to determine consumers’ viewing options. Thumbnail navigation provides quick access to individual frames or hot spots within the product spin. Meanwhile, image hosting formats include both single-row 360s, and multi-row spin photography. Multi-row spins for example might show photos from different elevations, or take a look under the hood. It could be to present a vehicle with its doors closed in one spin, and open in another. Specify which frames to present in thumbnails, and then generate the product viewer. Just as with the SpinViewer, it’s easily embeddable on any web page, and viewable on any device. ## Carpet & Flooring Visualizer Developed with Jakub Klaus of Breno Carpets, the Carpet & Flooring Visualizer is a custom PhotoRobot solution. It enables Breno to present their product line of carpets and rugs in a virtual room and from various angles. Shoppers can swap between different designs and colors, and move products around the room with on-the-fly customization options. Thumbnail navigation changes the interior view, while buttons switch between products, or load a 360 spin. The viewer also enables configuration of the flooring for consumers to mix and match items with different interior designs. It aims to help companies like Breno make interior design and home planning with their products easier and more effective. SEE VISUALISER ### Features Unlimited view count and data transfer. No additional expenses. You are billed only according to the data storage used. #### Customisable Customize animations with multiple parameters to match your brand’s unique style. #### Digital Asset Management Store, organize & manage all digital assets, with searchable & secure imagery thanks to our Digital Asset Management system. #### Image Compression There’s no need for duplicate files with real-time image scaling and support JPEG & WebP image formats. #### Automatic Publishing Take advantage of instant, automatic publishing immediately after image capture via the PhotoRobot Cloud platform. #### Integration Integrate with your e-commerce using export feeds on project, organization, or client level, with JSON and XML formats available. #### Global Image CDN A Cloud-based, global Content Delivery Network (CDN) provides real-time scaling, ensuring quick loading & pixel perfect resolution on any device. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control # SECTION: software > capture-control # TYPE: Page --- # Photo Studio Automation Features in PhotoRobot Software > PhotoRobot Controls’ automation features provide command of all photography devices, cameras, robots & lights from a single interface, with reusable Presets. ## Capture And Control Control all hardware from a single interface. ## Sequence Preview ### Advanced Sequence Configuration Configure sequences to capture only selected / specified angles, with fast sequence repeat to correct misfired photos in an instant. Set for normal spin (with pauses) or fast-spin (non-stop) sequences. ## Live View & Camera Remote ### Live View Preview image capture in real-time and on multiple screens via our stream server’s Camera LiveView. Product stylists get a better overview of the entire photography scene thanks to dedicated monitors near the workstation. ### Camera Remote Configure and save presets for supported DSLR & mirrorless Canon camera settings. See our list of supported camera models for more information. Supported cameras ## Capture Control ### Capture Control Tell cameras when and where to trigger with complete capture control. Quickly re-capture individual images utilizing fast sequence repeat and targeting only the product angles to reshoot. ### Presets Configure & save capture & editing settings in ONE preset. Unique to PhotoRobot, presets streamline processes when photographing similar types of products. Get levels of automation and control unmatched on the market. ### Fast Spin Another feature exclusive to PhotoRobot is Fast Spin mode, allowing you to capture a product in 10 seconds or less. PhotoRobot detects table position 1000 times per second to send capture signals to the camera at just the right moment. All while the table remains in non-stop rotation to shave valuable time off each photoshoot. ## Robots Remote ### Robots Remote Remote control all photography robots from one workstation. A special widget allows for control over movement, with a clean & intuitive software interface. ### MultiCam Support up to 7 cameras with PhotoRobot’s MultiCam. Cameras capture simultaneously and are all seamlessly integrated with the system for creating 3D photos in a single rotation. The MultiCam arch has 13 mounting positions, and because neighbouring positions cannot be used at the same time, up to 7 of them carry a camera at once. ## Worldmap & Lights Remote ### Lights Remote Control lighting remotely from the interface with support for Broncolor, Profoto, FOMEI and DMX. Adjust energy, cell sensors, modeling light, and power on / off. Save settings as presets, and automate the process again in future photoshoots. ### Freemask Support Set lights to flash from both FRONT and BACK to create a silhouette of the product. Our freemask algorithm will then apply automatically to remove backgrounds from photos precisely and near-instantly. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing # SECTION: software > image-editing # TYPE: Page --- # Image Editing Software Features in PhotoRobot Controls > Automatically edit entire image galleries, 360 / 3D spins and video with PhotoRobot image editing software features and automated post-processing tools. ## Image Editing Tools Advanced tools with unique features for Spin and 3D photography ## Available Anytime, Anywhere ### Cloud Processing Thanks to Nvidia Tesla K80 GPUs, our cloud-based photo editing software can edit hundreds of images per second. Simply press “Apply to All” and the software applies edits and delivers results for final review. There is no limitation on image resolution, with even 50MP cameras (8688 x 5792 pixels) fully supported. ### Work with all Images at Once Among our software’s functions **unique to PhotoRobot** is the ability to deploy editing tools across all images simultaneously. To achieve this, we use the latest web standards to access your GPU directly. Apply edits, and then start or pause a product animation to review all effects and edits in real-time. ## Automation ### Automatic Presets Save all editing parameters as presets to use automatically and immediately after the robot finishes a capture sequence. Automate output for similar types of products, and with one click of the Play Button gain your production output. In this way, PhotoRobot is truly unique, providing a solution for every aspect of the photoshoot for completely automated production. ### Auto Crop Take advantage of intelligent detection of product position to automatically crop items with AutoCrop. Just click “Play” and let our photo editing software do the work for you. ### Aspect Ratio and Padding Save considerable time and effort with aspect ratio and padding for all your product images. Specify the ratio of width to height, and how much padding to apply on all sides of product images. For even more savings, combine the aspect ratio and padding function with AutoCrop. Then, save all settings as presets for editing similar images in the future. ## Unique to PhotoRobot ### Centering Remove product tilt and wobble from spinsets and animations with automatic object centering. This is another feature **unique to only PhotoRobot software**, with precise calculation and correction for misplaced products. Simply select 3 images from a series, and our algorithms will automatically center products in photos across the entire item folder. ## Edit Anything ### Background Remove background semi-automatically or manually. Use background removal by level or by flood. Set a colour threshold or flood points, choose the desired effect level, and let our advanced algorithms handle the rest. ### Highlight White Detect white areas in your images with our ‘highlight white’ editing tool. Identify the correct threshold for by-level background removal, and apply across images. Correct exposure, and ensure image backgrounds remain consistent with the rest of your product pages. ### Denoise Remove dirt, dust, and blemishes from individual or batches of photos after background removal or Chromakey operations. Ensure both the scene and products are pristine to draw focus solely on the product. ### Transparency In just one click, set transparency of background. Experiment later with background settings in the Spinviewer to find the perfect look for your webshop or print product advert. ### Chroma Key Remove parts from the scene such as mannequin poles, nylon ropes, clamps, holders and more with chroma key operations. Save operations in configurable presets, and then automate the process across similar types of items for saving time over the long-term. ### White Balance Save calibration values for any and every product or for multiple workstations. Simply set and forget. The software will then automatically apply your setting to all of your output. ### Brush / Eraser Remove any part of an image with a built-in brush tool. Set size and edge effect for more precision. Retouch an individual photo, and apply changes to all images. If not ideal, like when removing dust from a scene, it’s also easy to enter images individually for a quick, final retouching. ### Vignette Especially useful with the Turning Platform, use the Vignette function to draw the eye towards the center of an image. This tool provides a configurable gradient and specified shape for painting the image backgrounds. ### Contrast and Brightness Access the standard functions you’ve come to expect in every image editor. ### Hue, Saturation, Lightness Enrich colours and enhance lightness with tools working with the HSL colour space. ### Clarity Improve texture quality and clarity with advanced algorithms deploying high mathematical convolutions. ### Shadows & Highlights Correct both bright and dark areas in product imagery. ### Curves Adjust lightness of the scene and product according to curves. Apply curves to all channels together in an image, or to each image individually. ### Histogram Get image statistics along with optimisation for white backgrounds. All values are readable even when a white background takes up the majority of an image. ### Presets Save all editing parameters and settings as presets to use in automation and future editing. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting # SECTION: software > image-hosting # TYPE: Page --- # Features Image Hosting | PhotoRobot > PhotoRobot Controls offer several licensing models. Find out more! ## Image Hosting With Spin Viewer The fastest viewer for all PhotoRobot customers ## UNRIVALED ### Global Image CDN Special image CDN (Content Delivery Network) provided by Google Cloud Platform with real-time scaling capability. Every image is scaled-down in real-time to pixel perfect resolution for the end-user device. JPEG, PNG, WebP supported. The same platform is used for Global services like Google Photos. ### No limits Unlimited view count and data transfer. No additional expenses. You are billed only for the data storage. ### Digital asset management All your images perfectly organized, searchable and secure thanks to our Digital Asset Management system. ### JPEG Compression Gain better loading speed with configurable JPEG compression level. Real-time = no need to create file duplicates. ### Customisable Customise your animation with multiple parameters. Just find your style. ### Automatic Publishing If you are using the PhotoRobot Cloud platform also for capturing images, no file transfer is needed. All images are ready to be hosted just after capture. ### Integration Integrate with your e-commerce by using export feeds. JSON and XML formats are available on the level of project, organization or client. All items are available in a computer readable format. Various properties are included, such as: Name, ID, SKU, Status, Timestamp. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/software/management # SECTION: software > management # TYPE: Page --- # Digital Asset Management Features - PhotoRobot Software > PhotoRobot software features for digital asset management ensures product content is highly organized, searchable, secure and easily redistributable. ## Digital Asset Management Manage, store, secure, access, search & share all digital assets from anywhere, anytime with cloud-based, software-driven digital asset management (DAM). ## Unlimited secure storage ### Unlimited and Reliable Storage for ALL Your Product Content Take advantage of multi-regional deployment with disaster recovery. All data is stored in ISO 27001 and secured via Google Cloud, with access only via TLS-encryption. Regular audits ensure the highest levels of security possible by today’s industry standards. ### Disaster Recovery Multi-regional, geo-redundant storage utilizes Cloud technology to store data redundantly in at least two geographic locations for reliable disaster recovery. Storage locations are always at least 100 miles apart within the multi-regional location bucket. Geo-redundancy occurs asynchronously, but multi-regional storage data is redundant within at least one geographic location immediately on upload. This means it is also instantly accessible worldwide, just as with all Cloud storage data. ### Asset Organization Organize assets into Projects, Items and Folders. Support for multiple types of assets include still images, image galleries, single-row and multi-row 360° Spins, and photogrammetry 3D models. There is full support for JPEG, PNG, WebP, as well as RAW files, camera downloads, and naming conventions. ### Full-Text Search Easily navigate between Projects, Items, Folders, Clients & Users, with expanded, conditional search queries for Items & Item Statuses. Team members can easily find tasks they’re responsible for, progress on photoshoots, items for editing, review and more. ### Categorization Categorize data with various tags for digital asset management. Search all tags via Full-Text Search, or by simply clicking the tag itself. ### Bulk Operations Perform actions across multiple items at once thanks to Cloud processing. Bulk operations run in the background, meaning all editing parameters can be applied while photographing additional products. Usually, an entire batch of images takes approximately 1 minute to post-process, although times vary depending on the complexity of operations. Nonetheless, neither speed nor productivity is compromised, ensuring optimal studio workflow. ## Collaboration ### Collaborate Freely & Effectively Attach comments to individual items & folders to communicate progress or additional information to internal or external team members. All comments attached locally will be immediately visible in the Cloud, and vice-versa. Get product information, details or instructions all on a single page for effective collaboration. ### Approval Process An integrated approval process within the application makes review & approval possible for both internal and external team members or clients. Studio managers and quality assurance teams can approve work internally. Meanwhile, all external parties need are log-in permissions for easy access of data and external approval. ### Client Page Provide clients their own personal page for a quick overview of projects, items, and item statuses. ### Grant Access to Clients Grant clients access to digital assets in just a few simple clicks. Check “Allow Login”, enter a password, and clients will see completed tasks when items or folders are set to “Verified”. Clients can then approve or reject changes, or attach feedback and instructions for additional retouching. ### Photographer Page Ensure photographers / accounts have all their assignments, projects and items readily available thanks to individual photographer account pages. These provide a quick overview of projects, with easy search & navigation as well as item statuses to communicate workflows & completed production. ### Import Import any type of data via the CSV import tool. Import shooting lists, customize structure with column tags, and find support for various properties. ### Integration Easily integrate with e-commerce export feeds. JSON and XML formats are available on the level of the project, organization or client. Meanwhile, all items are in computer-readable format. Set properties such as: Name, ID, SKU, Status, Timestamp & more. ### Bulk Image Export Fetch images in required quality, filename structure, format and resolution within the application or via a standalone export utility. All it takes is a single click by a user or client to download the latest images on their site. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow # SECTION: software > studio-workflow # TYPE: Page --- # Studio Workflow Software Features - PhotoRobot Controls > PhotoRobot Controls’ studio workflow software features aim to dramatically increase product photoshoot productivity, from item-in to capture and item-out. ## Studio Workflow Track items from receiving to image capture, publishing, content distribution, and product-out. ## THE FLOW ### Dashboard Get an overview of any project at any time, with overall progress of photoshoots tracked every second in real-time. ### Projects Organize all projects in a well-arranged list, with progress overview, last modified / captured, and quick links to project managers & clients. Update project statuses: Reserved, Confirmed, In Progress, Complete, and Invoiced. ### Calendar View Use the built-in calendar view to get a more complete overview of ongoing projects and deadlines. ### Items Monitor workloads inside each project via individual Items and Item statuses for each photoshoot. ### Wide Range of Item Statuses Attach statuses to items, including: New, Received, Ready, Captured, Recapture, Edit, Approved, Published, Archived, and Attention. ### Barcode Reader Support Get barcode reader support in every part of the application. Simply scan products to mark “Received”, search in item list, load Preset sequences, or prepare for capture. ### Approval Process Reduce product content review times with integrated approval processes for internal managers or direct client access. Grant access to clients for single-click approval. ### Import Shooting Lists Create shooting lists with CSV file import, including support for various properties available. In addition, users can customize the structure by marking columns as tags. ## SPECIAL Item MODES ### Receiving Items Deploy item tracking features at the scan of a barcode to automatically update item statuses and generate timestamps. Support for auto-printing of internal codes or unique barcodes is also available. ### Sorting to Racks or Shelves Add rack or shelf codes to the system to sort items into categories with configurable photoshoot settings. Simply add a rack or shelf code and deploy a barcode reader to organize your products and shooting lists. ### Presets Configure Presets before photoshoots to streamline production times. Set photography sequences in just a few clicks of the mouse, and press Play in Capture mode to begin photoshoots. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/hardware-pricing # SECTION: hardware-pricing # TYPE: Page --- # Hardware Pricing > Selling online is the right way today - and this is how to photograph items quickly and at a glance. Source your inspiration here. Current indicative price ranges per robot are shown live on https://www.photorobot.com/hardware-pricing. They depend on configuration and form of delivery; a binding quotation comes from PhotoRobot sales (https://www.photorobot.com/contact). ## Pricing Levels of Robotic Workspaces Indicative spread of prices of robotic workspaces - depending on detailed configuration and form of delivery. CUBE Single-row | Table-top |Cb CUBE Small and versatile. Rotary table or hanging system, invisible mannequins. Works independently or with another PhotoRobot. CASE 850 |Cs CASE 850 Build a studio anywhere in 15 minutes. Optical glass plate ⌀ 850 mm. Fits into a passenger car. CASE 1300 Multi-row | Table-top |Cs CASE 1300 Easy to transport all-in-one PhotoRobot. Optical-glass plate ⌀ 1 300 mm. Built-in positioning lasers. Can take pictures through the glass from the bottom. CL 850 |Ct CENTERLESS TABLE 850 Industrial-grade photographic automat. Optical glass plate ⌀ 850 mm. Perfect for custom multi-robot cells. CL 1300 |Cs CENTERLESS TABLE 1300 Industrial-grade photographic automat. Optical glass plate ⌀ 1 300 mm. Perfect for custom multi-robot cells. FRAME |Fx FRAME Next-gen all-in-one industrial-grade photographic automat with glass plate ⌀ 1 300 mm. Can take pictures through the glass from the bottom. PLATFORM Multi-row | Platform |Tp PLATFORM Industrial-grade heavy-duty photographic robotic platform. Can carry various accessories - including electro-powered. MULTI-ROW | PLATFORM CATWALK Multi-row | Platform |Cw CATWALK Computer-controlled video studio for capturing live models in motion - under defined scenarios - at a very compact space. MULTI-ROW | PLATFORM CAROUSEL 3000 Multi-row | Platform |Cp CAROUSEL 3000 Add a 3" layer to your studio floor and get a 3 m robotic industrial-grade rotating platform - with or without cyclorama - circle or square footprint. MULTI-ROW | PLATFORM CAROUSEL 5000 Multi-row | Platform |Cp CAROUSEL 5000 Add a 3" layer to your studio floor - or even built the robot into the floor level - and get a 5 m robotic industrial-grade rotating platform. MULTI-ROW | PLATFORM --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing # SECTION: manuals > software-overview-and-pricing # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-07-27 --- # PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing The following documentation aims to support PhotoRobot customers in understanding the Controls software solution and total cost of the system. ## PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview The following documentation aims to support PhotoRobot customers in understanding the [PhotoRobot Controls software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) solution and total cost of the system. It summarizes the goals of the software, how the solution works, digital asset management, supported file formats, software pricing, and account creation. This includes a detailed summary of the different PhotoRobot software user licenses to help customers understand the total cost of the entire system, including usage of the integrated PhotoRobot Viewer and SpinViewer for 2D + 3D + 360 image hosting. **Note:** To recap the production workflow and familiarize teams with PhotoRobot, watch the [PhotoRobot Workflow Video Demonstration](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap). ## Solution Goals - PhotoRobot Controls Software Overview The goals of PhotoRobot Controls software revolve around customer requirements that are usually simple. With a single click, the customer needs to take a series of photos of a subject to create a spin photo, and to use as still images. The spin may capture one or several angles of elevation around the object, while the still images become hero images, planograms, and marketing shots. Take for example photos of a product’s front, side, and top views from a perpendicular-angle, allowing for the display of text in different views. In these cases, PhotoRobot helps to meet customer requirements through a clear workflow integrating single-click capture, post-processing, and publishing. Customers are able to capture and automatically process all images, crop with specified padding, clear or remove the background, and, when possible, publish the images automatically. At the same time, each stage of production is confined to strict workflow, with workload statistics for individual workers, equipment, and workplaces. That includes workplaces from one or more studios, anywhere in the world, each connected with absolute data security. For customers, this results in fully connected production lines with single-click workflows, offering approximately **1 minute per product production speeds**. **Note:** In addition to standard tools for automatic whitening of the background (automatic tuning to pure white 255,255,255), or providing transparent background, the PhotoRobot_controls tool also offers chroma key masking. This feature can remove props used in photography, such as the removal of mannequin stands using a key color not used anywhere else in the picture. The times reached can vary depending on the specific machine used and the number of images . The stated figure counts 24 images with a 50 Mpx resolution, including post-processing and online publishing with internet connectivity of 200 Mbs. ## How the Solution Works The specialized cloud tool **PhotoRobot _Controls App** is the optimal solution not only for robot control but also for the entire digital asset management of your studio or company. PhotoRobot _Controls offers advanced features for **capturing** 360° degree photos, their subsequent **processing** and **publishing** on your e-commerce platform. The software solution covers the entire production workflow, allowing you to pre-define the way you photograph different product categories in bulk. This drastically reduces the time necessary for your entire digital content creation process – while ensuring maximum quality and productivity. - The system uses “**presets** ” which function as predefined “regulations” which govern processes. This includes not only the angles from which to photograph objects but also the settings of studio lights, cameras, and individual post-processing tools. Thus, the processing of most images is completely automatic, all the way to online publishing. - By default, the system incorporates **barcode support** for easier organization of projects. This covers the products, using pre-existing or automatically assigned codes, storage positions or mobile shelves, readiness for photos, and even instructions for controlling machines simply by reading a barcode. The result is maximum time-savings. - Additionally, the solution offers tools specifically for the **automatic multi-angle image processing** of the same item. Take for example auto-centering for products that the operator has not positioned perfectly into the center of rotation. Meanwhile, the publishing platform and viewer leverages Google CDN (**Content Delivery Network**) distribution of content to the customer’s website. All images are delivered in high quality and at the appropriate resolution, regardless of current server load. - PhotoRobot Controls App **does not require installation**. The only thing you need is a modern web browser (Chrome is recommended) to access the homepage of the system. Then, you input your login details to access the Controls interface and work in it any time. Also, thanks to the Cloud, connection from anywhere is possible, at any time. - If needed, it is also possible to store all data in the tree structure to be exported and transferred to a third-party system. The data is exported automatically – in a structure based on configuration parameters. **Note:** Workstations to which other peripherals (cameras, studio lights, weighing or measuring systems, etc.) are connected require the installation of a free driver downloaded from your **PhotoRobot Account**. **For System Offers:** A free version (one user, limited size of data upload to cloud) of PhotoRobot Controls is provided (including the hosting of data up to 10 GB). Credit card data is required only for full user identification. ## Digital Asset Management In regards to digital asset management, PhotoRobot will gladly help you transfer your existing data from another system to PhotoRobot Controls. PhotoRobot Controls ensures reliable and searchable storage for all your digital assets, bringing order to your images and products. ## Supported File Formats Supported file formats include: JPEG, WEBP, and PNG (for images with a transparent background). Although, if required, there is also support for RAW files (using [compatible cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras)) but only within the local network. The files are downloaded from the camera, and then stored in structured folders. This is due to the large data-size of RAW files. **Note:** As JPEG files do not support transparent backgrounds, PNG is used to cover the functionality. At the same time, the fully white background 255-255-255 created by the system can be exported in JPEG. ## Software Accounts, Versions, and Licenses PhotoRobot Controls App software exists in **Cloud**, **Local**, and **Hybrid** versions, with licenses for the **Power User**, **Backstage User**, and **Production User**. - User licenses allow for various user levels depending on requirements and flexible pricing levels to help companies optimize the solution around their needs. - It is possible to mix a set of licenses to best-fit the roles in your team, and to minimize monthly fees related to your studio operations. - Our experienced support team is always available to paid accounts to maintain the speed of your production. **For the detailed price guide to PhotoRobot Controls App versions and licenses, refer to** [**PhotoRobot Controls Pricing and Licenses**](https://www.photorobot.com/software-pricing)**.** In practice, we have developed PhotoRobot Controls not only for use by professional photographers and eCommerce specialists. It is also for workers who prepare the products for photography and provide their logistics. That, and managers who want the perfect overview and control over the project – ensuring necessary effectiveness of the entire studio workflow (and its detailed inspections). There is automatic storage of every image capture, and then instant back up into the PhotoRobot Cloud. This is all within the Google platform, which provides the highest degrees of security and stability – as opposed to local solutions in which achieving similar standards requires considerable acquisition and operating costs. ## Total Operation Cost of the Entire System **It is necessary to determine the total number and type of user licenses to estimate the total cost of the system.** The users licenses are Power User, Backstage User, and Production User. - **Power User:** License for maximum productivity in parallel production, using local capturing and cloud post processing at the same time - **Production User:** License for local capturing & post-processing, cloud-based data management and publishing - **Backstage User:** License for team members only managing sorting, weighing, measuring, preparation, publishing. For example, the **Backstage User** license is for users who manage all activities relating to the operation of the studio. This includes receiving and dispensing of photographed objects, weighing, measuring, prep, quality control, commenting, importing and exporting data, etc. On the other hand, the **Production User** license is for users who manage the automated photography and image processing. All image processing is according to predefined scenarios – “presets.” Meanwhile, the price of the Production User license reflects the use of special graphic cards and computing performance within the cloud solution. This cuts costs which would otherwise be necessary, such as for powerful graphic stations and local licenses for computer programs installed locally. **The cost of cloud image processing, image storage & CDN is according to the total volume of image storage (data volume).** - This cost for processing and storage decreases as the volume of stored data increases. While the data can also be periodically deleted to reduce the cost of storage, in practice, most customers take advantage of progressively decreasing prices. In this case, the data is permanently archived in the cloud. - For extreme cost reduction, local processing and storage (on the customer’s machine) are available per request – with no processing fees charged for this. Only a computer with a powerful CPU and GPU are required. **Finally, the number of licenses will revolve around the customer according to their current needs.** - The customer uses a customer account with administrator rights (there can be several in the system) to manage licensing. - The minimum is one Backstage license and an appropriate amount of hosting. - Hosting is not charged unless it exceeds 10 GB. - Licenses have charges on a monthly basis – for a minimum of one billing period. - The licenses can be switched ON or OFF according to the customer’s current needs. ## Integrated PhotoRobot Viewer: Image Hosting & SpinViewer The integrated [PhotoRobot Viewer and Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) is a cutting-edge 2D + 3D + 360 image viewer, free-of-charge with continuous updates as part of PhotoRobot hosting. It easily integrates into websites, e-shops, eCommerce platforms, and anywhere your products appear online. To understand the PhotoRobot Viewer parameters in technical detail, refer to the [PhotoRobot Developer Portal](https://developer.photorobot.com/). The PhotoRobot Viewer enables the easy distribution of product content online: image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hot spots, panoramas & more. Viewer layouts are fully customizable, with optional thumbnail navigation for different image formats. There is no copying and publishing files manually (or via script) from one system to a publishing platform. Instead, all imagery you capture is instantly available on the web, 3rd party platforms, and eCommerce feeds. At the same time, the cloud-based, global Content Delivery Network (CDN) ensures real-time scaling, quick loading, and pixel-perfect resolution on any device. ## System Integration and Rich API Connectivity For optimal productivity of the entire content production process, interconnection of the system for capturing images with the customer’s existing systems is necessary. This involves interconnection on the level of the data input into PhotoRobot Controls, as well as the level of data output. Refer to the [PhotoRobot System Integration & API Summary](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration) for an overview of the integration process. It includes technical information on PhotoRobot APIs, with useful resources for automation and development by technical teams. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/software-pricing # SECTION: software-pricing # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Controls App Software Pricing & Licenses > Discover the PhotoRobot Controls App software suite pricing and licenses. Choose from cloud-based, local, and hybrid configurations. Current software license prices are shown live on https://www.photorobot.com/software-pricing. A binding quotation comes from PhotoRobot sales (https://www.photorobot.com/contact). Watch with transcript ## Software Pricing Levels Local, hybrid or cloud versions available. ## Choose the Right Solution Mix the set of licenses to best-fit the roles in your team to minimize monthly fees related to your studio operations. Rely on our experienced support team - available to paid accounts to maintain the speed of your production. #### Pricing Categories Power user Super-productive parallel production - local capturing and cloud post processing at the same time... Backstage user Product sorting, weighing, measuring, preparation, publishing Production user Local capturing & post-processing, cloud-based data management and publishing ### Cloud Superfast Power user Backstage user per month *+ cloud operating costs* Get your demo ### Hybrid For slow internet Production user Backstage user Get your demo ### Local For low budget Computer per 12 months *+ self hosting* Get your demo Power Backstage Production Backstage Computer Access & Networking Local application for capture and post-processing Browser access for management and collaboration Network functions (cloud-based) Multi-user (concurrent users) Macro programming **Users** Production users Backstage users API **Hardware controls** PhotoRobots Canon Cameras DMX (Still) Lights Strobe (Flash) Lights Start-stop capturing Non-stop capturing Barcode scan / print CubiScan (weighing and measuring) **Image editing** Fast local image editing Local image postprocessing (serial) Image power-processing in the cloud (parallel) Photogrammetry 3D models**basic** (macOS only) Photogrammetry 3D models **enhanced** (macOS only) **Image delivery** DAM - Digital Asset Management Workflow Images export (user-defined structure) Auto-backup Secured Cloud repository Cloud image hosting Secured feeds for image delivery Self-hosted 360° spin-viewer PhotoRobot hosted 360° spin-viewer ## 10 GB Cloud Image Processing Free Every Single Month Reward yourself with the excellent computing power of our cloud, corporate-grade security, ease of output delivery and real-time collaboration across your team. ## Cloud Image Processing & Image Storage CDN Price Overview The cost is calculated automatically every month according to your actual usage. Pre-paid plans available upon request. --- Storage Price Calculator Form --- --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/3-4-half-body-female-ghost-mannequin-gh18 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > 3-4-half-body-female-ghost-mannequin-gh18 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # 3/4 Half Body Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin GH18 3/4 half-body invisible ghost mannequin female bust of high-quality construction with anti-glare matte-white finish, and lockable base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH18 - Type: Three-Quarter Torso - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 84.5 - Waist: 66 - Hips: 93.5 - Height: 87 - Availability: Availability on request The GH18 is a 3/4 half-body female ghost mannequin bust with a V-neck design. It is suitable for ghost mannequin photography of suits, shirts, blouses, and similar womens’ clothing. The body has three V-shape cut-outs with magnetized dicing for quick combination and disassembly, and features construction of high-quality FRP material. Additionally, the mannequin body has a matte-white finish ideal for eliminating unwanted reflections and glares when taking product photos. These help to ensure quicker production workflows, and ensure the automated post-processing of PhotoRobot is both accurate and quick. If looking for a female bust ghost mannequin, the 3/4 GH18 integrates seamlessly into the PhotoRobot studio. It also has a sturdy steel base on wheels for easy transport on-location, and quickly mounts to the Cube robot after styling. Software integration of mannequin rotation, lighting, image capture, and post-production then connect every stage of production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/child-full-body-ghost-mannequin-12-y-o-ghk112-g # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > child-full-body-ghost-mannequin-12-y-o-ghk112-g # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Child Full Body Ghost Mannequin (12 Y.O.) GHK112-G Full-body child ghost mannequin with bent arms of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish and steel transport base - Mannequin ID: GHK112-G - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Child, Unisex - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 75 - Waist: 62 - Hips: 81 - Height: 146 - Availability: Availability on request The GHK112-G is a full-body 12-year old child-size invisible ghost mannequin for photography of children’s clothing and fashion. In comparison to the GHK112, the GHK112-G features bent arms rather than straight arms. It has removable chest, neck, and arm pieces, and the torso and legs are fully separable. There is however only one removable leg. This mannequin is also slightly taller, and has 1-centimeter wider chest and hip dimensions than the GHK112. Its body is of high-quality FRP material, and has a smooth matte-white finish ideal for eliminating unwanted glares and reflections. This also helps to facilitate the single-click capture and post-production of PhotoRobot, making it easy to remove mannequins in photos. The GHK112-G also combines with the Cube robot’s quick mounting system to function as a rotating mannequin stand. Alternatively, use the Cube for turntable or suspension photography of a wide range of children’s fashion items. Software integration of robots, cameras, lights, and post-production ensure extremely quick workflows. It’s even possible to control multiple robots and mannequin systems all from one single computer. For even higher volume production, there are optional storage carts, and a wide range of compatible devices for clothing product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/child-full-body-ghost-mannequin-ghk112 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > child-full-body-ghost-mannequin-ghk112 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Child Full Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin GHK112 Full-body child ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with glare-reducing matte-white finish, and strong steel mannequin base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GHK112 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Child, Unisex - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 72 - Waist: 62 - Hips: 80 - Height: 134 - Availability: Available for immediate dispatch The GHK112 full body child invisible ghost mannequin supports photography of childrens’ clothing and fashion items. With the appearance of a 12-year old child, it is suitable for photographing both boys’ and girls’ fashion. The mannequin features removable chest, neck, and arm pieces to easily photograph different styles and cuts of clothing. Assembly and disassembly of the ghost mannequin are easy thanks to inlaid magnets that connect to the removable pieces. This simplifies product prep, and enables the automated photography and post-production with PhotoRobot. The invisible mannequin has a construction of high-quality FRP material, and a smooth matte-white finish. These not only make the model appear more realistic, but also eliminate unwanted glares and reflections during photography. In this way, the GHK112 makes a great addition to any PhotoRobot-equipped clothing photography studio or photography agency. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/child-ghost-mannequin-6-year-old-ghk106-g # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > child-ghost-mannequin-6-year-old-ghk106-g # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-24 --- # Child Size Female Ghost Mannequin (6 Y.O.) GHK106-G Full-body invisible child ghost mannequin of high-quality material with glare reducing matte white finish and strong steel base on lockable wheels - Mannequin ID: GHK106-G - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Child, Unisex - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 61 - Waist: 54 - Hips: 65 - Height: 109 - Availability: Availability on request The GHK106-G full-body children’s ghost mannequin is an alternative version to the GHK106. Both mannequin models are unisex with the same measurements, and suitable for 6-year old boy’s or girl’s clothing photography. However, unlike GHK106, the GHK106-G model features slightly bent arms. This is the only difference. They both have cut-out pieces with magnetized dicing for secure combination and disassembly of the neck, chest, shoulders, arms, and waist. There is a glare reducing matte white finish ideal for clothing photography, and the body is a high-quality material that is eco-friendly, drop resistant, and scratch proof. Meanwhile, a strong steel base on wheels and optional storage carts makes transport on-location easy. The GHK106-G ghost mannequin integrates frictionlessly into PhotoRobot workflows, and is Cube compatible. Cube robots can function as a rotating mannequin stand, a standalone turntable, or to suspend items like jewelry in air. Combine one or more robotic workstations with multiple mannequins for even higher volume workflows, with control from a single computer. PhotoRobot software integration of robots, mannequins, cameras, lights, and post-production can connect the entire photo studio. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/child-ghost-mannequin-boy-12-y-o-ghk112s # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > child-ghost-mannequin-boy-12-y-o-ghk112s # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Child Full-Body Boy Ghost Mannequin (12 Y.O.) GHK112S Full-body child ghost mannequin of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and strong steel base on lockable wheels - Mannequin ID: GHK112S - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Child, Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 80 - Waist: 65 - Hips: 82 - Height: 126 - Availability: Availability on request The GHK112S is a full-body child size ghost mannequin. It is the male alternative to the unisex GHK112 model, while both have the appearance of a year-old child. However, the GHK112S is slightly shorter, and has wider chest, waist, and hip areas. Meanwhile, the mannequin has removable U-cut neck and chest pieces, detachable arms, and a fully detachable upper and bottom half. This makes it easy to style various outfits, shirts, and cuts of clothing onto the mannequin. Additionally, the mannequin body is a high-quality and eco-friendly material. It is both drop resistant as well as scratch proof, and features a glare reducing matte-white finish. Then, for extra longevity, the removable parts have magnetized dicing for secure combination and disassembly. There is also a strong steel base on lockable wheels, or optional storage carts for movement on-location. For higher volume workflows, combine the GHK112S ghost mannequin with one or multiple PhotoRobot workstations and multiple mannequins. Take advantage of control all from a single computer, with software integration of robots, cameras, lights, and post-production. It’s even possible to control large numbers of workspaces at once for industrial-scale product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-full-body-ghost-mannequin-gh31 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > female-full-body-ghost-mannequin-gh31 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-07-30 --- # Female Full Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 3) GH31 Full-body female ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with more removable parts, glare reducing matte-white finish, and steel base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH31 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 3rd generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 84 - Waist: 65.5 - Hips: 93 - Height: 165 (+20 hat rack) - Availability: Available for immediate dispatch The GH31 female full body invisible ghost mannequin supports the photography of a wide variety of women’s clothing and fashion. It is a third generation female ghost fashion mannequin, offering more functionality and modularity. This model has more removable pieces to streamline production, and to support the automatic post production of PhotoRobot. It also has a matte white finish to eliminate unwanted glares and reflections, and wheels on the base of the mannequin stand for its quick transport around the studio. If you’re looking for a female ghost fashion mannequin to use with PhotoRobot, the GH31 is great for any fashion photographer. Boost not only accuracy but also efficiency and throughput in every photoshoot to get more impressive product photos online quicker. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-full-body-invisible-mannequin-gh26 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > female-full-body-invisible-mannequin-gh26 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-07-30 --- # Female Full-Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Standard) GH26 Full-body invisible ghost mannequin female of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and steel mannequin base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH26 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 2nd generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 86 - Waist: 67 - Hips: 96.5 - Height: 169 (+20 hat frame) - Availability: Availability on request The GH26 invisible ghost mannequin female is a standard Western size full-body mannequin with torso, legs, and stand. Its design is slightly taller than the GH21 model, but features the same removable neck, chest, arm and leg pieces. This makes it easy to style different types and cuts of clothing on the mannequin, and to easily remove it from product photos. Meanwhile, the mannequin has a matte-white finish that eliminates unwanted glares and reflections during photography. It also features construction of high-quality FRP material, and magnet connections for fast assembly and disassembly. Together with PhotoRobot, the GH26 female ghost mannequin makes a great addition to any studio. Its turntable base is compatible with PhotoRobot quick-mount systems, and combines with an optional mannequin storage cart to speed up production even further. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-ghost-mannequin-full-gen-3-gh35 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > female-ghost-mannequin-full-gen-3-gh35 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-07-30 --- # Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin Full Body (Gen 3) GH35 Full-body female invisible ghost mannequin of high-quality material with anti-glare matte-white finish, hat rack, and lockable base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH35 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 3rd generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 95 - Waist: 71 - Hips: 97 - Height: 161 (+20 with hat rack) - Availability: Availability on request ## GH35 - Slightly Shorter, More Removable Pieces The GH35 invisible ghost mannequin is the female model of the third generation GH34, and is slightly shorter than the GH31. This invisible woman mannequin features even more removable pieces to minimize production and post-production times for eCommerce and fashion photography. ## Minimal to Zero Manual Post-Processing Noticeably, the mannequin’s matte white finish is perfect for on-mannequin photography, helping to eliminate unwanted glares and reflections in photos. Thus, if you want an invisible woman mannequin to use with PhotoRobot, the GH35 is a great choice. It is high-quality, and ensures absolute consistency in photography while dramatically simplifying production and post production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-ghost-mannequin-shorter-gh12s-g # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > female-ghost-mannequin-shorter-gh12s-g # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1, Shorter) GH12S-G Invisible female ghost mannequin full-body of high-quality construction with glare reducing matte-white finish, and lockable base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH12S-G - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 84 - Waist: 65 - Hips: 93.5 - Height: 160 - Availability: Availability on request The GH12S-G female invisible ghost mannequin is a variation of the 1st generation models for slightly smaller sized clothing. Its design features removable U-cut neck pieces, and fully detachable shoulders, arms, hips, or legs. This way, it’s easy to style complete outfits onto the mannequin, or to photograph clothing on the torso and legs separately. Removable pieces also have magnetized dicing for quick combination or disassembly, and to easily facilitate the ghost mannequin effect. That includes for a wide range of women’s clothing and fashion, from tops and blouses with long or short sleeves to dresses, skirts, trousers, and jeans. All it takes is seconds to make it appear as if an invisible person is modeling the clothing. The GH12S-G has construction of high-quality FRP material, and a matte-white finish ideal for clothing photography. These ensure significantly faster workflows, from product prep and styling, to the single-click capture and post-production of PhotoRobot. They also combine well with robots like the Cube for quick-mannequin mounting and exchange, and optional storage carts for on-location transport. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-ghost-mannequin-torso-v-cut-gh16 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > female-ghost-mannequin-torso-v-cut-gh16 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin Torso (V-Cut) GH16 Invisible female ghost mannequin torso of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and V-cut neck design - Mannequin ID: GH16 - Type: Half-Body Torso - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 88.5 - Waist: 66 - Hips: 90 - Height: 90 - Availability: Availability on request The GH16 female invisible ghost mannequin torso has three cut-out body parts with magnetized dicing for quick combination or disassembly. Its removable V-cut pieces are suitable for clothing photography of women’s suits, button-up shirts, blouses, and similar. The mannequin has high-quality FRP construction, and boasts an anti-glare, matte-white finish ideal for on-mannequin photoshoots. These ensure dramatically faster workflows, from product prep and styling, to the single-click capture and automated post-production of PhotoRobot. It takes only moments to make the mannequin fully disappear in photos, and to achieve full-bodied 3D clothing product photos. If looking for a reliable female ghost mannequin torso, the GH16 integrates seamlessly into PhotoRobot workflows. It has a strong steel base on wheels for easy transport, and combines with PhotoRobot systems for fully automated photography. That includes complete software synchronization of mannequin rotation with camera capture, lighting, and post production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-ghost-mannequin-u-cut-gh12s # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > female-ghost-mannequin-u-cut-gh12s # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1, U-Cut) GH12S Invisible ghost mannequin female full-body of high-quality material with an anti-glare matte-white finish, and U-Cut neck design - Mannequin ID: GH12S - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 83.5 - Waist: 66 - Hips: 92 - Height: 163 - Availability: Availability on request The GH12S female invisible ghost mannequin is a variation of the GH11S model, featuring instead removable U-cut neck pieces. This design aims to easily facilitate the ghost mannequin effect on more casual clothing, like U-cut t-shirts and blouses. The mannequin also has detachable shoulder and arm pieces to support different length sleeves, while the torso and legs are also fully detachable. This way, clothing companies can photograph full-body outfits, or the items on the torso and legs separately. That includes a wide range of womens’ clothing, from blouses to skirts, dresses, and designer jeans. Teams only need to style the mannequin and remove its cut-out pieces to create the appearance of an invisible model. The dicing of the mannequin is also magnetized for quick assembly and disassembly, and to reduce prep times overall. Other features include a mannequin construction of high-quality FRP material, and an anti-glare matte-white finish. These are ideal for clothing photography mannequins, and photographing clothing in general. They also help to support the accelerated single-click capture and post-production of PhotoRobot. If looking for a high-quality female ghost mannequin with removable U-Cut neck pieces, the GH12S integrates frictionlessly into the PhotoRobot studio. It mounts to PhotoRobot devices for 360 fashion photography like the Cube, and fits into optional quick-mannequin exchange storage carts. The mannequin also has a strong steel base with wheels for quick transport on-location. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-ghost-mannequin-v-cut-gh11s # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > female-ghost-mannequin-v-cut-gh11s # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1, V-Cut) GH11S Invisible ghost mannequin female full-body of high-quality FRP material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and V-cut neck design - Mannequin ID: GH11S - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 83.5 - Waist: 66 - Hips: 92 - Height: 163 - Availability: Availability on request The GH11S full-body female invisible ghost mannequin is among the very first of the ghost mannequin models. Its design features a V-neck cut with two cut-out pieces for various shirt cuts and button-down shirts. There are detachable shoulder and arm pieces to style long-sleeved or short-sleeved items onto the mannequin, while the torso and legs are also fully detachable. This makes it easy to photograph a wide range of womens’ clothing, from tops and blouses to dresses, trousers, or jeans. Simply style clothing onto the mannequin, and remove its cut-out pieces to make the mannequin disappear in photos. Magnetized dicing of the mannequin parts also makes assembly and disassembly quick and easy. The ghost mannequin has construction of high-quality FRP material, and an anti-glare matte-white finish ideal for clothing photography. These also help to support and accelerate PhotoRobot’s single-click capture and automated post-production. If looking for a standard female invisible ghost mannequin, the GH11S integrates seamlessly into the PhotoRobot studio. Combine it with robots like the Cube to mount and rotate mannequins for photography, as well as optional storage carts for quick transport on-location. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-transparent-mannequin-bust-trf34 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > female-transparent-mannequin-bust-trf34 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-05-19 --- # Female 3/4 Torso Transparent Mannequin TRF34 3/4 female transparent mannequin of hardened plastic material with chrome neck and support attachments on one leg, the neck, or waist - Mannequin ID: TRF34 - Type: Three-Quarter Torso - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female - Design: Transparent Mannequin - Chest: 84 - Waist: 59 - Hips: 91 - Height: 85 - Availability: Available for immediate dispatch The female 3/4 torso transparent mannequin is a hardened acrylic material with a chrome neck, shoulders, and half legs. Its size is suitable for storage on a studio shelf, or carriage via a mannequin cart for quick movement on-location. Meanwhile, the mannequin can also mount to a rotating pedestal like the Cube robot, or to a torso holder. It is possible to attach a centering pin or mount to one leg, the neck, or the waist. Further, when using a transparent mannequin with a centering pin, quick-exchange of one mannequin for another is easily possible. In fact, it’s as simple as disconnecting one, and then clicking the next into place on its holder, such as the Cube robot. The mounting areas ensure the centering pin keeps the mannequin in the center of photos at all times. This also means that your team can prep multiple mannequins off to the side while photographing others simultaneously. The mannequins are easy to prep, lift, and exchange in higher volume workflows. Additionally, a centering pin mounts to only one leg, making it easier to display women’s underwear and items like shorts. The pin also securely clicks into place on the holder, ensuring a stable setup in any position. Optionally, combine a transparent mannequin with a mannequin cart for secure transport to and from storage. These carts are suitable for multiple sizes and types of mannequins, so your team can keep their collection always nearby their workstations. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/full-body-female-ghost-mannequin-ghp-11 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > full-body-female-ghost-mannequin-ghp-11 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-06-11 --- # Full-Body Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin GHP-11 Full-body female invisible ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with glare reducing matte-white finish and steel transport stand - Mannequin ID: GHP-11 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female, Plus-Size - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 83 - Waist: 66.5 - Hips: 93.5 - Height: 165.5 - Availability: Availability on request ## Classic 1st Generation Female Ghost Mannequin (GHP-11) The GHP-11 full-body female ghost mannequin is a classic 1st generation model that is slightly shorter than standard European sizes. Its design features removable V-cut neck and chest pieces, and fully detachable shoulders, arms, and legs. This makes it possible to use the mannequin also as a half-body torso, or as a half-body leg form. Additionally, magnetized dicing ensures both quick and secure combination and disassembly of the torso, legs, and other cut-out parts. This way, clothing companies need only one ghost mannequin to photograph a wide range of womens’ fashion items. That includes womens’ suits, blouses, shirts, dresses, skirts, trousers, and more. The mannequin body is also of a high-quality, eco-friendly PP plastic with a matte white finish ideal for clothing photography. It eliminates unwanted glares and reflections, and helps facilitate PhotoRobot’s automated post-processing and production of the ghost mannequin effect. The GHP-11 female ghost mannequin combines with the Cube to fully integrate into PhotoRobot production workflows. The Cube functions as a rotating mannequin stand, and also has a mannequin quick-mount system for extremely easy installation. Meanwhile, the GHP-11 has a strong steel base on lockable wheels for safe transport on-location. For even higher volume workflows, there are optional mannequin storage carts, and PhotoRobot can even synchronize multiple robots and mannequins. All with software controls from a single workstation computer, with full integration of robotic workspaces, studio lights, cameras, and post-production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/full-body-invisible-ghost-mannequin-female-gh21 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > full-body-invisible-ghost-mannequin-female-gh21 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-07-30 --- # Full-Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin Female (Shorter) GH21 Full-body invisible ghost mannequin female of highly resistant material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and lockable base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH21 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 2nd generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 84 - Waist: 64 - Hips: 90 - Height: 160 (+20 with hat rack) - Availability: Availability on request The GH21 full-body female invisible ghost mannequin is a shorter model by standard American and European sizes. This provides more versatility for females’ clothing photography of different designs, shapes, types, and cuts. The mannequin torso and legs feature a variety of cut-out body parts to easily create the invisible ghost mannequin effect. It facilitates fashion items such as blouses, skirts, long-sleeve garments, jeans, and other clothes. There is also a detachable hat rack which connects to the mannequin to match complete outfits during photoshoots. The GH21 has construction of high-quality FRP material, and a matte-white finish ideal for on-mannequin photography. These eliminate glares and reflections in photos, and help to accelerate PhotoRobot’s single-click capture and post-production. Meanwhile, a rotating base on wheels makes it easy to move around the studio, and to quickly set up with PhotoRobot machines. There are quick-mannequin exchange systems for working with multiple mannequins at once, and mannequin storage carts for faster production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/full-body-male-ghost-mannequin-male-gh23 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > full-body-male-ghost-mannequin-male-gh23 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Full-Body Male Ghost Mannequin Male (Shorter) GH23 Full-body invisible ghost male mannequin of durable construction with glare reducing matte-white finish, and lockable mannequin base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH23 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 2nd generation - Model: Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 91 - Waist: 75 - Hips: 91 - Height: 164 - Availability: Availability on request The GH23 full-body male invisible ghost mannequin is a shorter model by standard American and European sizes. Its design supports various types, sizes, and cuts of clothing, and features removable neck, chest, arm, and leg pieces. A rotating base on wheels also makes it easy to transport the mannequin around the studio, and to quickly capture any angles. This reflects the needs of major fashion brands to produce impressive 3D clothing photography, while also speeding up production. The GH23 has construction of high-quality FRP material, and a matte-white finish ideal for clothing product photography. These reduce unwanted glares and reflections in photos, and help to support PhotoRobot’s single-click capture and post-production. This means less time and expense retouching photos to ensure high-quality, impressive effects. If looking for a versatile male ghost mannequin for photography, the GH23 integrates easily and quickly into any PhotoRobot-equipped studio. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/full-child-ghost-mannequin-2-y-o-ghk102 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > full-child-ghost-mannequin-2-y-o-ghk102 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Full-Body Child Invisible Ghost Mannequin (2 Y.O.) GHK102 Full-body 2-year old child invisible ghost mannequin of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish and steel transport base - Mannequin ID: GHK102 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Child, Unisex - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 55 - Waist: 50 - Hips: 55 - Height: 82 - Availability: Availability on request The GHK102 full-body child ghost mannequin is the standard European size of a 2-year old toddler. Its design is suitable for both boys’ and girls’ clothing photography, including whole outfits, shirts, blouses, shorts, pants, and more. The mannequin has removable pieces with magnetized dicing for easy assembly and disassembly of the neck, chest, shoulder, arm, and waist. The legs cannot be removed. Additionally, the GHK102 features construction of high-quality FRP material, and a glare reducing matte white finish. The matte finish makes it ideal for on-mannequin clothing photography, eliminating unwanted reflections. This also makes it extremely easy to remove the mannequin in photos, and helps to facilitate the single click capture and post-production of PhotoRobot. The GHK102 child mannequin integrates seamlessly into PhotoRobot workflows, with quick mounting to the Cube for automated 360 product photography. The Cube functions as a rotating mannequin stand, and features software integration of lighting, cameras, robotic processes and post-production. It also functions as a standalone turntable, in product suspension mode, or in combination with multiple robots. For even higher volume workflows, combine one or more Cube robots with multiple mannequins, and optional storage carts. Then, take control over the whole studio, including multiple robots, light setups and cameras simultaneously – all from one computer. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/full-child-ghost-mannequin-6-y-o-ghk106 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > full-child-ghost-mannequin-6-y-o-ghk106 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-06-16 --- # Full-Body Child Invisible Ghost Mannequin (6 Y.O.) GHK106 Full-body 6-year old child ghost mannequin of highly durable material with glare reducing matte-white finish and steel transport base - Mannequin ID: GHK106 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Child, Unisex - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 61 - Waist: 54 - Hips: 65 - Height: 109 - Availability: Availability on request ## Kid’s Fashion Ghost Mannequin (6 Years) - GHK106 The GHK106 full body children’s invisible ghost mannequin is suitable for photography of 6 year-old children’s clothing. It is suitable for both boys’ and girls’ fashion, including whole outfits, shirts, dresses, pants, and more. The mannequin has removable pieces with magnetized dicing for easy combination and disassembly of the neck, chest, shoulders, arms, and waist. And although the mannequin legs are not separable, it is easy to edit them out in post-processing. This is due to the mannequin body of high-quality FRP material and the glare reducing matte-white finish. The matte finish helps to eliminate unwanted reflections, and helps to facilitate the single click capture and post-production of PhotoRobot. In fact, all it takes is moments to make mannequins fully disappear in photos, bringing clothing to life in full-bodied 3D. ## Standalone or Combinable Use GHK106 integrates frictionlessly into the PhotoRobot studio, with quick mounting to the Cube for automated rotation, photography, and post-processing. Software integration of robots, cameras, lights, and post-production ensure extremely quick workflows. Additionally, the Cube functions as a rotating mannequin mount, a standalone turntable, or in product suspension mode. It has a quick mount system for photographing multiple mannequins one after another, and optional storage cart. For even higher volume workflows, combine one or more Cube robots with multiple ghost mannequins. Then, take control over the entire studio, including all robots, lights, and cameras simultaneously – all from one computer. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/full-child-ghost-mannequin-8-year-old-ghk108 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > full-child-ghost-mannequin-8-year-old-ghk108 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-07-07 --- # Unisex Kids’ Clothing Ghost Mannequin (8 Y.O.) GHK108 Full-body 8-year old child invisible ghost mannequin of highly resistant material with glare reducing matte-white finish and steel transport base - Mannequin ID: GHK108 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Child, Unisex - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 67 - Waist: 58 - Hips: 69 - Height: 116 - Availability: Availability on request ## 8-Year Kid Size Ghost Mannequin (GHK108) The GHK108 full-body kid ghost mannequin is a unisex mannequin the size of an 8-year old for children’s fashion photography. Its design is suitable for boy’s or girl’s fashion, including product photography of outfits, shirts, dresses, jeans, and more. The mannequin has removable pieces for the neck, arms, and torso, while the body is high-quality FRP material. Additionally, the mannequin body has magnetized dicing and a glare reducing matte-white finish ideal for photographing clothing. This reduces unwanted reflections in product photos, and helps to facilitate the single click capture and post-production of PhotoRobot. Thus, it is extremely easy to make mannequins disappear in photo post-processing, and bring clothing to life in full-bodied, realistic 3D. ## PhotoRobot Studio Compatible A GHK108 ghost mannequin makes a good addition to the PhotoRobot studio, and quickly mounts to PhotoRobot’s Cube for photography. The Cube functions as a rotating mannequin mount, a standalone turntable, or in product suspension mode. It’s even possible to style mannequins off to the side, and simply mount it to the Cube when ready to take photos. This way, teams can prep multiple mannequins before each photoshoot, and photograph items one after another in quick succession. There are also optional mannequin storage carts, and the Cube can synchronize with multiple robots with control all from a single computer. Teams take control over the entire studio, including all robots, mannequins, lights, and cameras – simultaneously and via automation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/half-body-female-ghost-mannequin-legs-gh-t1 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > half-body-female-ghost-mannequin-legs-gh-t1 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Half-Body Invisible Female Ghost Mannequin Legs GH-T1 Half-body invisible ghost mannequin female legs of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and lockable base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH-T1 - Type: Half-Body Leg Form - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Hips: 93 - Height: 124 - Availability: Availability on request The GH-T1 half-body female ghost mannequin model is a photographic leg display for women’s trousers, jeans, and leggings. Its design features multiple removable parts in the waist area to facilitate clothing photography of trousers and pants with different types of waistlines. Magnetized dicing also ensures combination and disassembly is both quick, easy, and safe. Additionally, the mannequin is of high-quality FRP material, and has a glare reducing matte-white finish. These are ideal for on-mannequin clothing photography, making it extremely easy to remove mannequins from photos in post-processing. Together with PhotoRobot, it takes only moments and often a single click for capture and post-production of the ghost mannequin effect. Combine the GH-T1 with PhotoRobot’s Cube as a rotating mannequin stand with a quick-mount system for high-speed, high-volume photoshoots. Style one or multiple mannequins off to the side, and quickly mount one after the other onto the robot for photography. It’s even possible to control multiple machines at once from a single computer, while optional storage carts exists for companies with more mannequins. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/half-body-female-invisible-ghost-mannequin-leg-form-tm11 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > half-body-female-invisible-ghost-mannequin-leg-form-tm11 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Half-Body Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin Leg Form TM11 Half-body leg form ghost mannequin female of eco-friendly construction with glare reducing matte-black finish, and strong steel mannequin stand - Mannequin ID: TM11 - Type: Half-Body Leg Form - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Waist: 79 - Hips: 87.5 - Height: 64 - Availability: Availability on request The TM11 model is a female half-body leg form ghost mannequin for photography of womens’ trousers, shorts, dresses and similar. Its construction is an eco-friendly FRP material that is strong, drop resistant, and scratch-proof. The mannequin also features a matte black finish to reduce glares, and make it easier to retouch photos for the ghost mannequin effect. It takes only moments to capture and post-process photos, from retouching to publishing online. This is thanks to PhotoRobot software integration of robots, mannequins, lights, cameras, and post-production. It is even possible to integrate multiple robots like PhotoRobot’s Cube into the studio, and control all robots from a single computer. The Cube features a system for quick mannequin-exchange, and functions as a rotating mannequin stand for the TM11 and other mannequin models. This facilitates even faster, higher volume workflows, such as when working with multiple mannequins or photography workspaces. There are also optional storage carts for this, and for easy transport of mannequins on-location. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/half-body-male-ghost-mannequin-legs-tm10 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > half-body-male-ghost-mannequin-legs-tm10 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Half-Body Male Invisible Ghost Mannequin Leg Form TM10 Half-body leg form invisible ghost mannequin male of high-quality construction with glare reducing matte-black finish, and strong steel mannequin stand - Mannequin ID: TM10 - Type: Half-Body Leg Form - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Waist: 85 - Hips: 92 - Height: 64.5 - Availability: Availability on request The TM10 model is a half-body leg display ghost mannequin for photography of mens’ trousers, jeans, shorts and similar. Its construction is of high-quality, eco-friendly FRP material that is strong, drop resistant, and scratch-proof. The mannequin also has a glare reducing matte black finish, ideal for achieving an invisible mannequin effect. It takes only moments and usually only a single click to capture and post-process, including retouching and publishing online. This is thanks to PhotoRobot software integration of robots, mannequins, lights, cameras, and post-production. Combine the TM10 ghost mannequin with PhotoRobot’s Cube robot for even higher levels of productivity. The Cube features a quick mannequin-exchange system, and functions as an automated rotating mannequin stand. It also facilitates turntable photography, or suspension of items in the air for product photos. For even greater volume workflows, there are optional storage carts for carrying multiple ghost mannequins. It is even possible to integrate additional robots into the studio, and control all robots, equipment, lights, cameras, and post-production from one computer. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/half-body-male-ghost-mannequin-torso-gh19 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > half-body-male-ghost-mannequin-torso-gh19 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # 3/4 Half Body Male Invisible Ghost Mannequin Torso GH19 3/4 half-body invisible ghost mannequin male torso of high-quality FRP material with anti-glare matte-white finish and steel base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH19 - Type: Three-Quarter Torso - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 104 - Waist: 79 - Hips: 103 - Height: 97 - Availability: Availability on request The GH19 half-length male ghost mannequin torso has slightly wider chest and hip dimensions than the GH17, and a slimmer waist. Its design features an athletic build for realistic photography of tight fitting clothing like men’s suits and shirts. There are cut-out neck, chest, shoulder, and arm areas with magnetized dicing as well, meaning combination and disassembly is simple and quick. Additionally, the mannequin’s construction is of high-quality FRP material, while its matte-white finish eliminates unwanted glares during on-mannequin photography. These dramatically accelerate production workflows, helping to facilitate PhotoRobot’s single-click capture and automatic post-processing features. They also mean it takes only moments to achieve high-quality ghost mannequin photos. If looking for a male ghost mannequin torso of slightly different dimensions, the GH19 integrates smoothly into PhotoRobot workflows. It has a strong steel base on wheels for easy transport, and quickly mounts to the Cube for complete synchronization with the photographic equipment. That includes software integration of robot control in sync with mannequin rotation, lighting, camera capture, post-processing and publishing. For even higher volume workflows, PhotoRobot software facilitates control over multiple robots at once, and there are optional mannequin storage carts for on-location transport. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/half-female-ghost-mannequin-legs-gh-t2 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > half-female-ghost-mannequin-legs-gh-t2 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Half-Body Female Ghost Mannequin Legs (Shorter) GH-T2 Half-body invisible ghost mannequin female legs of highly durable construction with glare reducing matte-white finish, and lockable base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH-T2 - Type: Half-Body Leg Form - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Hips: 97 - Height: 108 - Availability: Availability on request The GH-T2 leg form female ghost mannequin is a photographic leg display for women’s trousers, jeans, and leggings. Its design has shorter legs and wider hips than the GH-T1 model, and features the same removable waistline pieces. These facilitate clothing photography for a wide range of women’s clothing, trousers, and pants with different waist sizes and cuts. Magnetized dicing also ensures easy combination and disassembly when styling items for the ghost mannequin effect. Additionally, the mannequin construction is of high-quality FRP material, and has a glare reducing matte-white finish. This makes it extremely easy to achieve the invisible mannequin effect, even in post-processing. In fact, with PhotoRobot it takes only moments and often only a single click to automate capture and post production. For even higher volume workflows, combine the GH-T2 with PhotoRobot’s Cube and optional storage cart, or combine multiple robots and mannequins. The Cube functions as a rotating mannequin stand with a quick mount system, a standalone turntable, or in product suspension mode. It also integrates with software, cameras, lighting, and one or many Cube robots with control all from a single computer. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/kid-three-quarter-transparent-mannequin-4yo-trk4 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > kid-three-quarter-transparent-mannequin-4yo-trk4 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Kids 3/4 Transparent Mannequin (4 Y.O.) TRK4 3/4 kids transparent mannequin of hardened acrylic with chrome neck ring, shoulders, half legs and multiple centering pin mounts - Mannequin ID: TRK4 - Type: Three-Quarter Torso - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Child, Unisex - Design: Transparent Mannequin - Chest: 59 - Waist: 52 - Hips: 63 - Height: 56 - Availability: Available for immediate dispatch Display kidswear and accessories for photos with the unisex 3/4 transparent mannequin torso for 4-year old size clothing photography. The 3/4 transparent mannequin features a body of durable acrylic, a chrome neck ring, and mounts for centering on the leg, neck, or waist. It is suitable for displaying approximately 4-year old children’s clothing sizes, cuts, and accessories. The size of the mannequin is convenient for any studio shelf, or carriage via mannequin cart on-location around the studio. Meanwhile, the attachments for the centering pins ensure the mannequin is also suitable for quick-mounting to a rotating pedestal, like the Cube robot or a torso holder. The centering pins can securely click into place for quick disconnection and replacement of each mannequin, dramatically accelerating workflows. This allows teams to prep multiple mannequins near the workstations, while at the same time photographing another mannequin. These mannequins are both durable and lightweight for this, optimal for safe handling and setup on any holder. For even higher volume production halls, there are also optional mannequin storage carts on wheels for greater mobility. They can store different sizes and types of mannequins for safe transport and quicker setup on-location. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/kids-transparent-mannequin-7yo-trk7 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > kids-transparent-mannequin-7yo-trk7 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-10-31 --- # Kids 3/4 Transparent Mannequin (7 Y.O.) TRK7 3/4 kids transparent mannequin of durable acrylic material with chrome neck ring and centering attachments on the leg, neck, or waist - Mannequin ID: TRK7 - Type: Three-Quarter Torso - Model: Child, Unisex - Design: Transparent Mannequin - Chest: 60 - Waist: 52 - Hips: 62 - Height: 60 - Availability: Available for immediate dispatch The kid 3/4 torso transparent mannequin is a durable acrylic, and features a chrome neck ring, shoulders, and half legs. Its design is unisex, and suitable for photography of approximately 7-year old kidswear and accessories. This also makes it the perfect size for a studio shelf, or carriage via a mannequin storage cart for quick setup on location. Meanwhile, the mannequin body has supports for centering pins in the leg, neck, or waist. This way, the mannequin is also suitable for mounting to a rotating pedestal, like the Cube robot or a torso holder. Further, when using the mannequin with centering pins, quickly exchanging mannequins becomes easily possible. The centering pin securely clicks into place for the quick disconnection and replacement of each mannequin. This means that teams can prepare multiple mannequins on the side, while simultaneously photographing others. The mannequins are lightweight for safe handling and connection, and centering pins ensure a stable setup on any holder. For even greater productivity, combine multiple mannequins with a mannequin storage cart for greater mobility around the studio. These carts can store multiple sizes and types of mannequins for any type of clothing photography your business requires. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/male-full-body-ghost-mannequin-gh13s # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > male-full-body-ghost-mannequin-gh13s # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-06-11 --- # Male Full-Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1) GH13S Invisible male ghost mannequin full-body of high-quality material with an anti-glare, matte-white finish ideal for clothing photography - Mannequin ID: GH13S - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 104 - Waist: 79 - Hips: 104 - Height: 175 - Availability: Availability on request ## Men' s Fashion Photography Ghost Mannequin (GH13S) The GH13S is a full-body male invisible ghost mannequin with separable neck, chest, shoulder, arm, torso and legs pieces. Its design features magnetized dicing, high-quality FRP construction, and a matte-white finish ideal for clothing photography. These ensure much faster workflows, from styling the mannequin, to the single-click capture and automated post-production of PhotoRobot. It takes only moments to make clothing appear full-bodied, true-to-life and 3D, as if an invisible model is in product photos. The mannequin supports a wide range of menswear including full suits and outfits, shirts, trousers, jeans and more. Additional removable arm and leg pieces also facilitate the ghost mannequin effect for different length sleeves or legs. If looking for a standard full-body male ghost mannequin, the GH13S makes a welcome addition to the PhotoRobot-equipped studio. It quickly mounts to robots such as the Cube for 360 rotation and automated photography, and fits into optional storage carts for on-location transport. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/male-full-body-ghost-mannequin-gh33 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > male-full-body-ghost-mannequin-gh33 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-07-30 --- # Male Full Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 3) GH33 Full-body male ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with more removable parts, anti-glare matte-white finish, and strong steel base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH33 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 3rd generation - Model: Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 106 - Waist: 80 - Hips: 102 - Height: 181 (+20 hat support) - Availability: Available for immediate dispatch The GH33 full-body male invisible ghost mannequin is among the latest multi-functional fashion ghost male mannequins. It is widely-used by trusted and major fashion brands as well as eCommerce and clothing photography studios and agencies worldwide. This version features mountable magnets for easy assembly and disassembly, and wheels on the base for quick transport around the studio. The mannequin has more removable parts, and a matte white finish to eliminate unwanted glares and reflections in product photos. If you need a high-quality male ghost mannequin to use with PhotoRobot, the GH33 dramatically simplifies production and post-production. Ensure your clothing photography is both consistent and highly productive, while also eliminating complex and time-consuming processes for your team. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/male-full-body-invisible-ghost-mannequin-gh27 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > male-full-body-invisible-ghost-mannequin-gh27 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2026-05-25 --- # Male Standard Western-Size Ghost Mannequin GH27 Full-body male ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with matte-white anti-glare finish, and strong steel base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH27 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 2nd generation - Model: Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 105 - Waist: 81 - Hips: 105 - Height: 180 (+20 hat accessory) - Availability: Availability on request ## 2nd Generation Male Ghost Mannequin (GH27) The GH27 complete male invisible ghost mannequin provides the torso, legs, and mannequin stand for in-studio fashion photography. Its design features removable neck pieces, chest pieces, arms, and legs to suit different types, styles, and cuts of mens’ clothing. This makes it easy to remove the mannequin in photos, and to enable the automated post-production features of PhotoRobot. ## Use & Comparison The ghost mannequin has a matte-white finish to reduce glares and reflections, and boasts construction of high-quality FRP material. Meanwhile, magnet connectors make assembly and disassembly simple. The mannequin stand is also of strong steel construction, and features wheels for quick transport and setup around the studio. In comparison to the GH23, the GH27 is the slightly taller mannequin, with standard western size measurements. If trying to choose the best ghost mannequin for your photography, consider the measurements in relation to the sizes and cuts of the clothes you photograph. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/male-half-body-ghost-mannequin-torso-gh17 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > male-half-body-ghost-mannequin-torso-gh17 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Male Half-Body Ghost Mannequin Torso GH17 Invisible half-body male ghost mannequin torso of high-quality construction with anti-glare matte-white finish and strong steel base - Mannequin ID: GH17 - Type: Half-Body Torso - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 96 - Waist: 87 - Hips: 96.5 - Height: 99 - Availability: Availability on request The GH17 male half-body invisible ghost mannequin torso has an athletic, muscular build for more realistic photography of tight clothing. Its design features removable neck, chest, shoulder, and arm pieces with magnetized dicing for quick combination and disassembly, and a mannequin body of high-quality FRP material. Additionally, its matte-white finish is ideal for on-mannequin clothing photography, helping to eliminate unwanted glares and reflections during photoshoots. These dramatically accelerate production workflows, from product prep and styling, to PhotoRobot’s single-click capture and automated post-production. It takes only moments to make the mannequin fully disappear in photos for a wide range of menswear and clothing. That includes men’s suits, blazers, coats, jackets, shirts, ties, sportswear, and more. If looking for a realistic male invisible ghost mannequin torso, the GH17 integrates smoothly into the PhotoRobot studio. It has a strong steel base on wheels for easy transport, and can function in combination with the Cube robot. The Cube enables the full automation of mannequin rotation in sync with camera capture, product lighting, and post-production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/male-invisible-ghost-mannequin-gen-3-gh34 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > male-invisible-ghost-mannequin-gen-3-gh34 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-07-30 --- # Male Invisible Ghost Mannequin Full Body (Gen 3) GH34 Full-body male ghost mannequin of highly resistant construction with glare reducing matte-white finish, hat stand, and steel base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH34 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 3rd generation - Model: Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 96 - Waist: 76 - Hips: 94 - Height: 170 (+20 with hat rack) - Availability: Availability on request The GH34 male full body invisible ghost mannequin has evolved around its functionality with automatic photography systems like PhotoRobot. It is a third generation ghost mannequin with even more removable pieces for faster production and post-production times. This answers customer demands for unique mannequin sizes and bodies, while providing more versatility in the studio. The mannequin also has a matte white finish that eliminates unwanted glares and reflections for distraction-free product photos. If looking for a male invisible ghost mannequin to use with PhotoRobot, the GH34 integrates smoothly into PhotoRobot workflows for any photography studio or agency. Ensure both consistent and high-quality photography, while also dramatically simplifying production and post-production processes. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/male-invisible-ghost-mannequin-gh13s-g # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > male-invisible-ghost-mannequin-gh13s-g # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Male Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Broader) GH13S-G Invisible male ghost mannequin full-body of high-quality material with anti-glare matte-white finish and lockable base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH13S-G - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Male - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 106 - Waist: 86 - Hips: 108 - Height: 174 - Availability: Availability on request The GH13S-G male ghost mannequin is a broader variant of the GH13S. In comparison, the GH13S-G is one centimeter shorter than its counterpart, and features slightly wider measurements in the chest, waist, and hips. The torso and legs are completely detachable, and the mannequin body has removable neck, chest, shoulder, arm, and leg pieces with magnetized dicing for quick combination and disassembly. This way, clothing companies need only one mannequin to photograph entire outfits and individual items. That includes a wide range of menswear and fashion products, from suits, blazers, and ties to sportswear, casual clothing, and more. Additionally, the mannequin body is of high-quality FRP material, and boasts a matte-white, anti-glare finish ideal for clothing photography. These not only eliminate unwanted glares and reflections. They help to support the single-click capture and post-production of PhotoRobot, accelerating and simplifying production workflows. If looking for a high-quality male ghost mannequin for slightly wider clothing, the GH13S-G integrates smoothly into the PhotRobot studio. It has a strong steel base on wheels for movement on-location, and mounts to the Cube robot for automated rotation and photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/male-transparent-mannequin-bust-trm34 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > male-transparent-mannequin-bust-trm34 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Male 3/4 Body Transparent Mannequin TRM34 3/4 male transparent mannequin of hardened plastic material with chrome neck and possibility of support attachment to the leg, neck, or waist - Mannequin ID: TRM34 - Type: Three-Quarter Torso - Model: Male - Design: Transparent Mannequin - Chest: 98 - Waist: 77 - Hips: 96 - Height: 95 - Availability: Available for immediate dispatch The 3/4 body transparent mannequin male model features a material of durable acrylic with shoulders and half legs. It is suitable for storage on a shelf, carriage via mannequin cart, or mounting on a rotating pedestal like the Cube robot. For this, the mannequin body has the possibility of attaching a mount to its leg, the chrome neck, or the waist. Additionally, if using a transparent mannequin with a centering pin, exchanging one mannequin for another becomes possible in seconds. All it requires is disconnecting the first, and clicking the next into place onto the Cube robot or a torso holder. The mount ensures the mannequin remains in the absolute center of photos, and ready for photography. This also means that while your team is photographing one mannequin, they can then prepare several others off to the side. In this way, teams are able to dramatically accelerate workflows, while each mannequin is light enough to easily lift and exchange. Further, the centering pin attaches to only one leg, making it easier to photograph even underwear and trousers. The pin easily and securely clicks into the holder to maintain any setup in a stable position. For even smoother workflows, consider combining the transparent male mannequin with an optional mannequin storage cart. These allow you to store multiple size and type mannequins, and easily transport them on location for maximum productivity. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/plus-size-female-ghost-mannequin-gh11-plus # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > plus-size-female-ghost-mannequin-gh11-plus # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Plus-Size Female Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1) GH11-PLUS Plus-size invisible ghost mannequin female of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and mannequin stand on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH11-PLUS - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female, Plus-Size - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 125 - Waist: 112 - Hips: 131 - Height: 151 - Availability: Availability on request The GH11-PLUS invisible ghost mannequin female is a full-body model for larger European-standard size clothing. Its body features detachable parts for different cuts of women’s clothing, suitable for full outfits, dresses, jeans, and more. There is also magnetized dicing of the mannequin parts for quick combination and disassembly when creating the ghost mannequin effect. Meanwhile, the mannequin has a matte-white finish ideal for reducing unwanted glares and reflections. This also helps to facilitate the extremely easy, one-click capture and post-processing in combination with PhotoRobot. This way, time-consuming photo retouching and editing processes are completely eliminated. Additionally, the GH11-PLUS integrates seamlessly into the PhotoRobot workflow. It has a strong steel base on wheels for transport on-location, and it connects to the Cube as a rotating mannequin stand with a mannequin quick-mount system. All it takes is minutes to style mannequins, capture, post-process, and produce the ghost mannequin effect. For even higher volume workflows, integrate optional storage carts, or, better yet, multiple robots and mannequins with control from a single computer into the studio. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/plus-size-female-ghost-mannequin-gh14 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > plus-size-female-ghost-mannequin-gh14 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-06-13 --- # Plus-Size Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1) GH14 European plus-size invisible female ghost mannequin of highly resistant material with glare reducing matte-white finish and steel base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH14 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Female, Plus-Size - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 104 - Waist: 86 - Hips: 114 - Height: 165 - Availability: Availability on request ## Configurable for Smoother Workflows The GH14 invisible ghost mannequin female is a European, plus-size model for women's fashion and clothing photography. It has removable neck, chest, shoulder, arm, and leg pieces, with magnetized dicing for easy combination and disassembly. The mannequin features construction of high-quality FRP material, and a matte-white finish that eliminates glares and reflections during photography. These ensure much faster workflows in the studio, from styling mannequins to the single-click capture and post-production of PhotoRobot. ## Ideal for Plus-Size Women’s Clothing Photography It takes only moments to make a mannequin invisible in photos, and to produce eye-catching, true-to-life 3D clothing photography. The female mannequin is plus-size by standard European sizes, and facilitates the photography of a wide range of women's clothing and fashion items. That includes photography of women’s suits, dresses, blouses, leggings, jeans, and more. Simply style the mannequin and remove its separable pieces to give clothing a full-bodied appearance, as if an invisible person is modeling the items. If looking for a plus-size ghost mannequin female for European sizes, the GH14 integrates frictionlessly into the PhotoRobot studio. Combine it with the Cube robot for quick mounting after prep, and the fully automated 360-degree rotation, photography, and post-production. There are also optional storage carts for fashion companies working with multiple mannequins and to accelerate higher volume workflows. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/plus-size-female-ghost-mannequin-gh37 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > plus-size-female-ghost-mannequin-gh37 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-06-13 --- # Plus-Size Full-Body Female Ghost Mannequin GH37 Plus-size female full body invisible ghost mannequin of eco-friendly material with glare reducing matte-white finish and strong steel base - Mannequin ID: GH37 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 3rd generation - Model: Female - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 110 - Waist: 94.5 - Hips: 117 - Height: 160 - Availability: Availability on request ## 3rd Gen Female Plus-Size Ghost Mannequin (GH37) The GH37 female full body invisible ghost mannequin is of eco-friendly PP plastic material. Its body supports standard American and European womens’ plus sizes, and features a detachable hat stand as well. There is a removable U-cut neck piece, cut-out pieces for the neck, chest, arms, and legs, and detachable upper and lower halves. Additionally, the mannequin body is both drop resistant and scratch proof, with a glare reducing matte finish ideal for fashion photography. If looking for a plus-size female ghost mannequin, the GH36 makes a welcome addition to the PhotoRobot studio, and is Cube compatible. The Cube functions as a rotating mannequin stand, as a standalone turntable, or to suspend objects like jewelry in air. It also has a mannequin quick-mounting system, and combines with an optional storage for secure movement on-location. For even higher volume workflows, combine one or multiple mannequins with multiple Cube robotic workstations. PhotoRobot software integration of robots, mannequins, cameras, lights, and post-production provides complete studio control from a single computer. It can even sync tens to hundreds of robotic workstations, with pre-programmable control to repeat production processes in rapid succession. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/plus-size-female-invisible-ghost-mannequin-gh24 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > plus-size-female-invisible-ghost-mannequin-gh24 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-07-30 --- # Plus-Size Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin Full Body GH24 Plus-size female invisible ghost mannequin full body of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and lockable base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH24 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 2nd generation - Model: Female, Plus-Size - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 104 - Waist: 86 - Hips: 114 - Height: 168 (+20 with hat rack) - Availability: Availability on request The GH24 plus-size female invisible ghost mannequin is a second generation model with a 360-degree rotating base. Its design supports standard American and European plus-size womens’ fashion, including various types, sizes, and cuts of clothing. Removable neck, chest, arm, and leg pieces make it easy to style products and achieve the invisible ghost mannequin effect. The mannequin boasts construction of high-quality FRP material, and a matte-white finish ideal for clothing product photography. If looking for a high-quality plus-size female mannequin for photography, the GH24 offers both versatility and high-level productivity. It eliminates unwanted glares and reflections in photos, and helps to support PhotoRobot’s single-click capture and post-production. The rotating base also has wheels for easy transport, and combines with PhotoRobot quick-mount mannequin exchange systems. These allow teams to simultaneously photograph one mannequin while preparing one or multiple mannequins on the side to photograph in quick succession. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/plus-size-full-body-male-ghost-mannequin-gh25 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > plus-size-full-body-male-ghost-mannequin-gh25 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-07-30 --- # Male Plus-Size Ghost Mannequin Full Frame GH25 Plus-size male invisible ghost mannequin full body of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and steel base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH25 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 2nd generation - Model: Male, Plus-Size - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 112 - Waist: 99 - Hips: 121 - Height: 173 (+20 hat stand) - Availability: Availability on request ## 2nd Gen Male Plus-Size Ghost Mannequin The GH25 full-body male invisible ghost mannequin is a plus-size mannequin with a rotating base for in-house fashion photography. Its body supports standard American and European plus-size menswear and clothing. Meanwhile, multiple removable pieces make it easy to style various sizes, types, and cuts of clothing on the mannequin. This helps to remove the mannequin in product photos, and to enable the automated capture and post-production of PhotoRobot. ## Scalable Photo Studio Integration Construction of high-quality FRP material and a matte white finish eliminate unwanted reflections during photoshoots. The rotating base also has wheels for easy transport around the studio, and combines with PhotoRobot quick-mount mannequin exchange systems. These allow teams to simultaneously photograph one mannequin while preparing one or multiple mannequins to photograph in quick succession. If looking to add variety to your photography mannequins, the GH25 plus-size male ghost mannequin integrates well into the PhotoRobot studio. It’s also possible to combine the mannequin with an optional storage cart to speed up studio production workflows even further. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/plus-size-male-ghost-mannequin-gh15 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > plus-size-male-ghost-mannequin-gh15 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Plus-Size Male Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1) GH15 European plus-size invisible male ghost mannequin of high-quality material with anti-glare matte-white finish and lockable steel base on wheels - Mannequin ID: GH15 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 1st generation - Model: Male, Plus-Size - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 112 - Waist: 99 - Hips: 119 - Height: 172 - Availability: Availability on request The GH15 invisible ghost male mannequin is a European, plus-size model with a separable torso and legs. It features removable neck, chest, shoulder, arm, and leg pieces, with magnetized dicing for easy assembly and disassembly. The construction is of high-quality FRP material, while its matte-white finish is ideal for eliminating unwanted glares and reflections. These ensure much faster workflows in the PhotoRobot studio, from styling mannequins to PhotoRobot’s single-click capture and automated post-production. It takes only moments to make mannequins fully disappear in product photos, and produce remarkable clothing photography in full-bodied 3D. The GH15 mannequin supports a wide range of European plus-size menswear and clothing, including full outfits, suit-and-tie combos, blazers, shirts, jeans, and more. It features a strong steel base on wheels for easy transport on-location, and quickly mounts to the Cube robot for extremely fast production. Combine it with an optional storage cart to prep, store, and move multiple mannequins for even faster workflows. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/plus-size-male-ghost-mannequin-gh36 # SECTION: ghost-mannequin > plus-size-male-ghost-mannequin-gh36 # TYPE: Ghost mannequin # UPDATED: 2025-03-10 --- # Plus-Size Full-Body Male Ghost Mannequin GH36 Plus-size male full body invisible ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with glare reducing matte-white finish and strong steel base - Mannequin ID: GH36 - Type: Full-Body - Generation: 3rd generation - Model: Male, Plus-Size - Design: Ghost Mannequin - Chest: 138 - Waist: 125 - Hips: 123 - Height: 167 - Availability: Availability on request The GH36 is a full-body plus-size male invisible ghost mannequin of eco-friendly PP plastic material. Its body supports standard American and European menswear plus sizes, and features a detachable hat stand as well. There is a removable U-cut neck piece, cut-out pieces for the neck, chest, arms, and legs, and a fully detachable torso. Additionally, the mannequin body is both drop resistant and scratch proof, with a glare reducing matte white finish ideal for clothing photography. If looking for a plus-size male ghost mannequin, the GH36 integrates frictionlessly into the PhotoRobot studio and is Cube compatible. The Cube functions as a rotating mannequin stand, as a standalone turntable, or to suspend objects in air. It has a mannequin quick-mount system for smoother workflows, or combines with an optional storage for movement on-location. It’s even possible to control one or multiple robots and mannequin setups all from a single workstation computer thanks to PhotoRobot Controls. PhotoRobot software integration of robots, mannequins, equipment, cameras, lights, and post-production synchronizes all studio equipment, devices, and processes. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins # SECTION: ghost-mannequins # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Premium Ghost Mannequin Product Line > Buy a premium ghost mannequin to integrate into PhotoRobot production workflows for automated, high-speed on-mannequin fashion photography. ## Premium Ghost Mannequin Products Realistic 3D Clothing Photography on an Invisible Ghost Mannequin Automated eCommerce Fashion Photography ## Why a Ghost Mannequin is Good for Business ### Cost Efficiency **Decrease cost-per-image** using simple, standardized, and fast production processes without any model necessary in the photo studio. ### Time Managament **Reduce turnaround time** by eliminating routine, time-consuming manual tasks with product photography workflow automation software. ### Top-Tier Photos **Increase impressions** with best-of-class clothing product imaging redefined through software-driven photography robots. High Quality Outputs ## Clothing Photography True-to-Life and in 3D The ghost mannequin helps fashion brands to take clothing photography on what would appear to be an invisible model. This creates distraction-free images that are full-bodied, true-to-life and 3D, while keeping the product strongly in focus. Still Photography & 360 Product Photography ## More Impressions, More Conversions Better engage and completely inform online consumers using the ghost mannequin effect in still images as well as 360 spins. PhotoRobot ensures high-quality outputs in multiple formats for faster time-to-web, more meaningful impressions, and more conversions in the end. ## Featured Premium Ghost Mannequin Models Browse featured premium ghost mannequin models for male, female, and children’s clothing of all sizes, types, and cuts. Each ghost mannequin has a construction of high-quality material with a glare-reducing matte white finish. The majority of the designs feature removable pieces to make the mannequin invisible before taking photos. Find the perfect mannequin for your fashion photography, including: full-body, 3/4 torso, half-body torso, and half-body leg form mannequins. Male Full Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 3) GH33 Full-body male ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with more removable parts, anti-glare matte-white finish, and strong steel base on wheels View Full Product Female Full Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 3) GH31 Full-body female ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with more removable parts, glare reducing matte-white finish, and steel base on wheels View Full Product Child Full Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin (12 Y.O.) GHK112 Full-body child ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with glare-reducing matte-white finish, and strong steel mannequin base on wheels View Full Product Male Standard Western-Size Ghost Mannequin GH27 Full-body male ghost mannequin of high-quality construction with matte-white anti-glare finish, and strong steel base on wheels View Full Product Female Full-Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Standard) GH26 Full-body invisible ghost mannequin female of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and steel mannequin base on wheels View Full Product Male Plus-Size Ghost Mannequin Full-Frame GH25 Plus-size male invisible ghost mannequin full body of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and steel base on wheels View Full Product Plus-Size Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin Full Body GH24 Plus-size female invisible ghost mannequin full body of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and lockable base on wheels View Full Product Full-Body Male Ghost Mannequin Male (Shorter) GH23 Full-body invisible ghost male mannequin of durable construction with glare reducing matte-white finish, and lockable mannequin base on wheels View Full Product Full-Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin Female (Shorter) GH21 Full-body invisible ghost mannequin female of highly resistant material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and lockable base on wheels View Full Product #### See the Full Catalog of Photography Mannequins Enter the catalogue ## Transparent Mannequins - 3/4 Body Acrylic Take advantage of transparent 3/4 body mannequins for in-house photography of male, female, and children’s clothing. The transparent acrylic body of each mannequin is ideal for displaying clothing and accessories. It causes little interference when capturing the color and design of items, and when post-processing the mannequin out of photos. Male 3/4 Body Transparent Mannequin TRM34 3/4 male transparent mannequin of hardened plastic material with chrome neck and possibility of support attachment to the leg, neck, or waist View Full Product Female 3/4 Torso Transparent Mannequin TRF34 3/4 female transparent mannequin of hardened plastic material with chrome neck and support attachments on one leg, the neck, or waist View Full Product Kids 3/4 Transparent Mannequin (7 Y.O.) TRK7 3/4 kids transparent mannequin of durable acrylic material with chrome neck ring and centering attachments on the leg, neck, or waist View Full Product Ghost Mannequins Catalogue ## See the Full Catalog of Photography Mannequins Compare the entire product line of premium ghost mannequins and transparent mannequins for the PhotoRobot-powered fashion photography studio. Enter the catalogue Product Photography Automation ## Configurable Equipment for High-Level Productivity PhotoRobot software easily syncs one or multiple robots to cameras, lights, and additional photographic equipment for fully automated production workflows. ### PhotoRobot Cube Use the Cube as a rotating mannequin stand, a standalone photography turntable, or in suspension mode. ### Ghost Mannequin Easily mount a ghost mannequin onto the Cube using quick mannequin exchange features, and an optional storage cart. ### Automated Fashion Photography Fully automate fashion product photography from still images to 360 product spins, and eCommerce 3D models. ## Request Your Custom Robot Setup Get a quote on one or multiple robots to meet any industry-specific demand from small webshops to industrial-scale production halls. GET A QUOTE #### Multiple PhotoRobot Cube Variants Find the perfect size robot for your studio with 4 versions of the Cube: V5, V6, V6 (RotoPower), and Compact. SEE ROBOT Global Leaders ## The stunning results our customers have experienced PhotoRobot technology has revolutionized our processes by improving their quality and speed, capturing every detail with precision and professionalism, and creating new services for our associates, which in turn provides them greater product projection across different digital platforms. Fer Real & Javier Macias GS1 Mexico PhotoRobot’s exceptional customer service and ongoing support makes them more than our supplier; they are a true partner in our success story. Their dedication to understanding our unique needs and providing tailored solutions has been instrumental in achieving our business goals. Troy Benscoter CEO of PVS Studios With PhotoRobot, we can now capture 360-degree images in multiple axes faster than ever before. We are now able to capture over 12,000 images per day. The system is easy to use and was easy to integrate into our workflows. Chris Barbera Scanmore GmbH - Project management Photography / 3D Scan / Visualisation --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards # SECTION: gs1-image-standards # TYPE: Page --- # GS1 Image Standards for Product Photography | PhotoRobot > GS1 Product Image Standard 5.0 made practical: shot list, file names, formats, clipping paths, national rules, and how PhotoRobot takes the work off your team. GS1 image standards, without the studio grind GS1 Product Image Standard · Release 5.0. Sources checked 18 October 2026. GS1 rules let brands, data pools and retailers exchange product images without endless back-and-forth. Meeting them is the hard part: the right views, angles, margins, file names, cut-outs and formats, for every SKU, every time. PhotoRobot builds that discipline into the capture session. Set it up once to the rules your partners use, and every product comes out the same way: the expected outputs, with unexpected ease. - 1: robotic session for planogram, hero, 360° and panel images - 5.0: the GS1 release this page follows, ratified July 2026 - 6: markets compared, rule by rule [Book a GS1 demo](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) ## Great standards. Hard work. A job for a robot. GS1 is good news for anyone who sells through retailers. It just doesn’t do the photography for you. - **The standard: One rulebook for the whole market.** GS1 gives brands, data pools and retailers one shared language for product images: which shots, which names, which formats. Publish to the rules once, and listings move through GDSN and national catalogues with fewer custom requests and fewer rejections. - **The work: Discipline on every single SKU.** A GS1 set is not one photo. It is a straight-on front, top and side for the planogram, a hero at 15°, a 24-frame spin and the nutrition and ingredients panels, each centred at about 95% fill, named character by character and exported twice: a master to keep and a copy to share. Then the next SKU. One misnamed file or a wrong angle, and the data pool sends it back. - **The robot: Set the rules once. The robot keeps them..** PhotoRobot fixes the camera rows, turntable steps and file-name templates in the session. Every product then gets the same angles, the same framing and the same names, and nobody types a file name by hand. Your team loads the product; the robot does the repetition. ### The checklist your studio no longer carries Every GS1 requirement is a habit somebody has to keep, product after product. Here is who keeps it. | Requirement | By hand | With PhotoRobot | |---|---|---| | Views and angles | Re-positioned and re-checked for every product | Fixed camera rows: 0° for planogram views, 15° for marketing angles, in one session | | 360° spin | A separate setup, if it happens at all | 24 to 72 frames on one or more rows, alongside the stills | | Bottom view | Another setup and another check | Flip the product and move the camera to 90° | | File names | Typed or renamed file by file | Built from templates: barcode, row angle, turn angle, frame index, GS1 variable | | Informational panels | Retyped from the pack | OCR reads nutrition and ingredient panels during capture and exports the text as JSON or XML | | Cut-outs | Masked by hand in post-production | A transparent background from AI matting; an optional script adds a path where a partner needs one | | Formats | Saved and converted one by one | JPEG, PNG, WebP or TIFF from the same capture, on white or transparent | ## What GS1 actually specifies, in 60 seconds There is no single “GS1 photo rule”. There is a family of documents, and each one answers a different question. Knowing which one applies is the first piece of discipline. - **Which images, what size, which format, what name?** GS1 Product Image Standard (Release 5.0 · July 2026). The global standard. Formerly the Product Image Specification; Release 5.0 merged in the Product Image Sharing/Delivery Guideline and took its new name. Source: [GS1 Product Image Standard, Release 5.0 (July 2026)](https://ref.gs1.org/standards/product-image-specification/) - **Can a shopper read the pack on a phone?** Mobile Ready Hero Image Guideline (Release 2.2 · August 2026). Hero images that show the brand, product type, variant and quantity (the “4Ws”) at thumbnail size. Source: [GS1 Mobile Ready Hero Image Guideline, Release 2.2 (August 2026)](https://ref.gs1.org/guidelines/mrhi) - **Which face is the front?** Package and Product Measurement Standard (Release 3.3 · August 2026). The default front is the largest surface the brand owner uses to promote the product. Image facing codes follow it. Source: [GS1 Package and Product Measurement Standard, Release 3.3 (August 2026)](https://ref.gs1.org/standards/ppm/) - **How does an image travel to the retailer?** GDSN attributes and GS1 Web Vocabulary (Data model). As a URL plus attributes such as the file type code, file name and file format, not as an attachment. Source: [GS1 Web Vocabulary: ReferencedFileTypeCode](https://gs1.org/voc/ReferencedFileTypeCode) - **What will my retailer actually reject?** National GS1 guidelines (US · Germany · Austria · Australia · Netherlands). Colour space, clipping paths, ppi, URL rules. This is where most hard requirements live. The global standard mostly says “should”. The hard rules sit in national guidelines and retailer onboarding, which is why one image set can pass in the US and be rejected in Austria. Check which release you are quoted. The gs1.org overview page still shows Release 4.4 (April 2024), and GS1 Australia’s download is Release 3.0 from June 2017, so a “GS1 requirement” may be nine years old. ## The GS1 shot list, captured in one session ### Product images | Code | Image type | Use | |---|---|---| | A | Web product image | The product alone, 900–2400 px | | B | Web image with supporting elements | As A, with props or extras | | C | High-resolution product image | Print and zoom, 2401–4800 px | | D | High-resolution with supporting elements | As C, with props or extras | | E | 360° image | 24 to 360 frames, clockwise seen from above | | H | Mobile Ready Hero Image | Brand, type, variant and quantity readable on a phone | | U | Optimised hero or pack image | Cropped and tuned for small screens | | 3DR | 3D model | A 3D file of the product | ### Informational panels | Code | Image type | Use | |---|---|---| | L2 | Nutrition facts | The nutrition panel, readable | | L4 | Ingredients | The ingredients panel | | L5 | Nutrition and ingredients | Both panels in one image | | L7 | Certification seals | Claims shown as seals and logos | | L8 | Preparation instructions | How to prepare or use | | L11 · L12 | Drug facts · Supplement facts | Regulated panels for health products | | L13 | Lighting facts | The lighting facts label | ### Detail and context | Code | Image type | Use | |---|---|---| | F | Detail | A close-up of a feature | | M · N | Montage · Application | Several views together · the product in use | | R | Ambience | Mood or lifestyle setting | | Q | Size comparison | Scale against a known object | | J | Sustainability | Recycling and sustainability information | Facing codes: 1 front, 2 left, 3 top, 7 back, 8 right, 9 bottom. Angle codes: C centre, L left, R right, N no plunge (straight on). Packaging state: 1 in package, 0 out of package, A · B case · inner pack, D · E · F prepared · plated · styled. - Packs in 3D: the preferred hero is centre front at 15° elevation, plus 15° rotations to the left and right. - Planogram views: straight on, zero plunge, one per face. At least front, top and left; up to six. - In or out of the pack? If in doubt, GS1 suggests shooting both. - The product is centred and fills about 95% of the canvas. Never scale an image up to reach a size. ### How PhotoRobot takes it off your team - Defined camera rows: a 0° row for planogram views and a 15° row for marketing angles, in the same session. - 360° spins of 24 to 72 frames, on one or more rows, alongside the stills. - The bottom view: flip the product and move the camera to 90°. - OCR reads nutrition and ingredient panels while you shoot. [Watch a GS1 capture run](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/ocr-gs1-image-capture-features) · [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) · [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) · [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) ## GS1 file names, decoded `09520123456764_A1C1_s01.jpg` - `09520123456764` GTIN-14: Positions 1–14. A GTIN-13 gets a leading zero. - `_` Separator: Position 15. - `A` Image type: Web product image (see the shot list). - `1` Facing: 1 = front. - `C` Angle: C = centre. - `1` Packaging: 1 = in package, 0 = out of package. - `_s01` Optional suffix: A serial for alternates; a language (_en) or end date (MMYY) also fit here. - `.jpg` Extension: Not part of the base name. - `09520123456764_E1_R15_C01.jpg`: 360° frame: row at 15°, column (frame) 01. - `09520123456719.1`: Planogram front, in its own scheme: .2 left, .3 top, .7 back, .8 right, .9 bottom. - `09520123456764_C1C1_s01_v01.jpg`: GS1 Germany’s pattern: high-resolution front, centred, in package, with a version number. The GTIN-based name is still in the global standard, but the Mobile Ready Hero Image Guideline 2.2 calls it a legacy system, effectively deprecated in favour of a GDTI (Global Document Type Identifier). Most data pools still expect GTIN names today, so check what yours asks for. PhotoRobot builds every file name from a template: barcode, row angle, turn angle, a zero-padded frame index, frame labels and a GS1 variable, so nobody renames files after the shoot. Need a preset for a specific scheme, such as planogram names or Austria’s E1_R15_C01 spins? Talk to us. ## See it on products like yours Tell us what you sell and who you supply. We’ll walk you through a GS1 session on similar products: the views, the file names and the exports. [Book a GS1 demo](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) · [Prefer we do the shooting? Ask our studio](https://www.photorobot.com/contact?topic=studio) ## Formats, masters and colour | | Storage (master) | Sharing (delivery) | |---|---|---| | Format | TIFF, LZW-compressed | JPEG or PNG | | Background | White with a clipping path and no extra layers, or transparent | JPEG: white (RGB 255/255/255). PNG: transparency allowed | | Clipping path | Yes, in the TIFF | JPEG if required. PNG cannot carry a path | | Role | The recommended full-quality master | What data pools and retailers receive | | Image | Size (square) | |---|---| | Web product image (A, B) | 900–2400 px | | High-resolution image (C, D) | 2401–4800 px | | Mobile Ready Hero, optimised pack (H, U) | 600–4800 px, JPEG or PNG | | Secondary images | 600–4800 px | | 360° frames (E) | at least 400 × 400 px, JPEG or PNG | | Source | Colour | |---|---| | Global standard, Release 5.0 | Says nothing about colour space, bit depth or ppi | | Older global releases (up to 3.0) | ICC profile or colour space must be known and defined; RGB, 8 bits per channel; 300 ppi | | GS1 Germany, ECR Austria | ECI RGB v2, 8 bits per channel, 300 ppi | | GS1 Australia planogram images | sRGB IEC61966-2.1, 120 ppi | | GS1 Germany 360° spins | sRGB | 8 bits per channel is the baseline in every GS1 document we reviewed. 16-bit is not a GS1 requirement anywhere. 16-bit TIFF masters are on our development roadmap as an option beyond GS1, not a setting you can switch on yet. See [PhotoRobot case: 16-bit TIFF masters](https://cases.photorobot.io/bit-depth/). PhotoRobot exports JPEG, PNG, WebP and TIFF, on white or with a transparent background, and can capture RAW alongside JPEG. Working to a national colour space or ppi? Tell us which guideline and we’ll go through the setup with you. ## Clipping path or transparency? - **Global, Release 5.0** (recommended): Strongly recommended: a clipping path and a flattened white background. A path must be closed and sit slightly inside the product edge. PNG transparency is allowed but cannot carry a path. - **Germany** (required): Exactly one closed path in a JPEG, no alpha channel, 1 px tolerance, up to 10,000 points. - **Austria** (required): Exactly one closed path, drawn by hand with the pen tool, 1 px tolerance, up to 1,000 points, shadows outside. Images without it are not accepted by business partners. - **Australia** (required): High-resolution JPEG with one active clipping path, validated by GS1 Australia and the retailer. Up to Release 4.2 the global specification recommended a clipping path “within one pixel” (§3.3.4). Release 4.3 (September 2023) removed that wording; the 1 px rule lives on in the German and Austrian guidelines. PhotoRobot produces a transparent background (alpha) with AI matting. Where a partner needs a path, an optional script generates one from the alpha with a set tolerance and point budget; it is not written by default. Supplying Austria? ECR Austria judges automatically generated paths not good enough in practice, so plan a manual check. ## Data that travels with the images - **On-pack text.** GS1 has image types for nutrition (L2), ingredients (L4) and other panels. PhotoRobot OCR reads those panels during capture and exports the text as JSON or XML. - **GDSN attributes.** In GDSN an image is a URL plus attributes: referencedFileTypeCode (PRODUCT_IMAGE, PLANOGRAM, 360_DEGREE_IMAGE, MOBILE_READY_HERO_IMAGE…), uniformResourceIdentifier, fileName, fileFormatName, isPrimaryFile and effective dates. - **URL delivery rules.** GS1 US: the fileName must match the downloaded file, and links must not point to PDF or HTML pages. ECR Austria: HTTPS on port 443, no login, URLs up to 2,000 characters, a response within 5 seconds, HEAD requests allowed, a new URL for every new image, up to 40 MB. - **Embedded metadata.** GS1’s metadata list (GDTI, brand, product name, GTIN, dates, colour mode…) is rarely embedded in practice; data pools rely on GDSN attributes. The Mobile Ready Hero Image Guideline suggests XMP for the 4Ws. Connecting exports to a PIM or a data pool? Tell us which one; the right integration depends on your setup. ## Regional notes: where the rules get stricter ### United States GS1 US Product Images Application Guideline (Retail Grocery & Foodservice), Release 3.0, August 2019. - Voluntary, with five classes: planogram (straight on, one per face), functional (all six sides), primary (angled down, out of package), informational (barcode, nutrition, ingredients) and lifestyle. - Square images on solid white with natural shadows; a TIFF master (the guideline mentions 40–200 MB) and JPEG for sharing. - In GDSN the fileName must match the downloaded file and fileFormatName the format; no links to PDF or HTML pages. Source: [GS1 US Product Images Application Guideline for the Retail Grocery & Foodservice Industries, Release 3.0 (August 2019)](https://community.syndigo.com/gtkim45673/attachments/gtkim45673/IMBoard/123/1/GS1%20US%20Product%20Images%20Application%20Guideline%20for%20the%20Retail%20Grocery%20%26%20Foodservice%20Industries%20(Aug%202019).pdf) ### Australia GS1 Australia Product Launch and photography service; hosted specification Release 3.0, June 2017. - Planogram image: JPEG on white, RGB, sRGB IEC61966-2.1, 120 ppi, longest side 324 px. - High-resolution image: JPEG at 4000 × 4000 px and 300 ppi, with one active clipping path. - GS1 Australia and the retailer validate the images before they reach the National Product Catalogue. Source: [GS1 Australia: Product Launch FAQ](https://new.gs1au.org/resources/faqs/product-launch), [GS1 Australia: photography service](https://new.gs1au.org/our-services/photography) ### Germany GS1 Germany, Product Images and Media Assets – FMCG, v5.2, 2023. - JPEG at maximum quality, ECI RGB v2, 8 bits per channel, 300 ppi, at least 2401 px; no alpha channel, no layers. - Primary and hero images must contain exactly one closed clipping path: 1 px tolerance, up to 10,000 points, border up to 5%. - 360° spins in sRGB, 24–99 frames, at least 1136 × 640 px. Names follow GTIN_C1C1_s01_v01.jpg, and at least one primary image goes through GDSN. Source: [GS1 Germany: Product Images and Media Assets – FMCG, v5.2 (2023)](https://www.gs1-germany.de/fileadmin/gs1/fachpublikationen/product-mages-and-media-assets-v5.2-.pdf) ### Austria ECR Austria / GS1 Austria, Guideline for Product Images, v3.0, June 2026. - JPEG (quality 12) or TIFF with LZW only: interleaved, IBM PC byte order, no pyramid, no layers; ZIP is not allowed. ECI RGB v2, at least 300 ppi and 2401 px, up to 40 MB. - Exactly one closed path drawn by hand with the pen tool: 1 px, up to 1,000 points, shadows excluded. Automatically generated paths are judged not good enough in practice. - Views C1C1, C1L1, C1R1 and C1N1; 360° spins as E1_R00 or E1_R15 with columns C01–C24. Image URLs: HTTPS, no login, up to 2,000 characters, answered within 5 seconds. Source: [ECR Austria / GS1 Austria: Guideline for Product Images, v3.0 (June 2026)](https://www.gs1.at/sites/default/files/2026-06/Guideline-for-Product-Images-2026.pdf) ### Mexico GS1 Mexico. - We found no public GS1 Mexico image specification (October 2026), so the global GS1 Product Image Standard is the reference. - GS1 Mexico itself works with PhotoRobot technology to offer image services to its member companies (see the testimonial below). - Supplying a Mexican retailer? Ask for its onboarding rules alongside the global standard. Source: [GS1 Product Image Standard, Release 5.0 (July 2026)](https://ref.gs1.org/standards/product-image-specification/) ### Netherlands GS1 Netherlands, Digital Files & Product Images, v2.2, March 2025 (healthcare). - Written for pharmaceuticals and medical devices rather than groceries. - Product images as JPG at 1500 × 1500 px on a white background. - File naming that also covers the individual components of a product. Source: [GS1 Netherlands: Digital Files & Product Images, v2.2 (March 2025)](https://www.gs1.nl/media/mgwkzeih/guidelines_digitalfiles_productimages_eng_22_mrt25.pdf) ## Proof > PhotoRobot technology has revolutionized our processes by improving their quality and speed, capturing every detail with precision and professionalism, and creating new services for our associates, which in turn provides them greater product projection across different digital platforms. > > Fer Real & Javier Macias, GS1 Mexico [See packaged-goods examples in the gallery](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery?category=CPG) · [Grocery product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/grocery-product-photography) ## Go deeper: the PhotoRobot Automated Product Photography Handbook Coming soon. Shot lists by product category, built on the GS1 Global Product Classification: which image types a food, beverage, health or lighting product needs, from L2 and L4 to L11, L12 and L13. ## FAQ ### What are GS1 image standards? Rules published by GS1, the not-for-profit organisation behind the barcode, for how product images are captured, named, formatted and shared between brands, data pools and retailers. The core document is the GS1 Product Image Standard; national GS1 organisations add stricter local guidelines. ### Why are GS1 image standards so much work? Because a GS1 set is many images, not one: planogram views of each face, angled hero images, 360° frames and informational panels, each framed, named and exported to the rules, for every SKU. By hand that takes a strict checklist and constant checking. A robotic session fixes the angles, the framing and the file names, so the repetition is done by the machine. ### What is the latest version of the GS1 Product Image Standard? Release 5.0, ratified in July 2026. It renamed the GS1 Product Image Specification to the GS1 Product Image Standard and absorbed the former Product Image Sharing/Delivery Guideline. Release 4.5 (April 2026) introduced the optimised pack image and harmonised sizes and formats. ### What does A1C1 mean in a GS1 file name? It is the image code after the GTIN: A = web product image, 1 = front facing, C = centre angle, 1 = in package. So 09520123456764_A1C1.jpg is the front, centred, in-package web image of that GTIN. ### How are planogram images named? With their own scheme: the GTIN, a dot and the facing number, for example 09520123456719.1 for the front, .2 for the left and .3 for the top. Back, right and bottom (.7, .8, .9) are optional. ### What size should GS1 product images be? Square. Web product images 900–2400 px, high-resolution images 2401–4800 px, Mobile Ready Hero and optimised pack images 600–4800 px, 360° frames at least 400 × 400 px. Never scale an image up to reach a size. ### Clipping path or transparent background? The global standard strongly recommends a closed clipping path on a white background; PNG transparency is allowed but cannot carry a path. GS1 Germany, ECR Austria and GS1 Australia’s high-resolution images require exactly one clipping path. ### Why TIFF with LZW compression? The standard recommends a full-quality, LZW-compressed TIFF as the stored master, and JPEG or PNG for sharing. The master keeps the path and the quality; the sharing copies are what data pools receive. ### Which colour profile should GS1 images use? Release 5.0 does not specify one. Older releases required the ICC profile or colour space to be known and defined. GS1 Germany and ECR Austria ask for ECI RGB v2; GS1 Australia’s planogram images use sRGB. ### How many images are in a GS1 360° spin? At least 24 and at most 360 frames, all at the same camera angle, rotating clockwise seen from above. Frames are named GTIN_E1_Rnn_Cnn, where R is the row angle and C the column. ### What is a Mobile Ready Hero Image? A hero image designed to be read on a phone: it shows the brand, product type, variant and quantity (the 4Ws) clearly at small size. GS1’s guideline is at Release 2.2 (August 2026). ### What is the difference between planogram, marketing and informational images? Planogram images are straight-on views of each face for shelf planning. Marketing (primary) images show the pack at a slight angle, typically 15°, for e-commerce and print. Informational images show panels such as nutrition facts, ingredients and barcodes. ### How do images get into GDSN or a national product catalogue? As URLs with attributes such as referencedFileTypeCode, fileName and fileFormatName, published through your data pool. Data pools check the links: GS1 US requires the file name to match, ECR Austria sets HTTPS, response-time and size limits, and GS1 Australia validates images for the National Product Catalogue. ### Do GS1 images have to be 16-bit? No. Every GS1 document we reviewed works with 8 bits per channel; 16-bit is not a GS1 requirement. 16-bit masters are on PhotoRobot’s development roadmap as an option beyond GS1. ### Can PhotoRobot capture a full GS1 image set? PhotoRobot captures the GS1 shot list in one session: 0° planogram views, 15° marketing angles, 360° spins and informational panels with OCR, with file names built from templates. What your partners accept also depends on their national rules, so we set up the workflow with you for the guidelines you deliver to. ## Make GS1 the easy part of every listing Tell us what you photograph and which retailers, countries and data pools you supply. We’ll show you how the shot list, file names and exports come out of one PhotoRobot session, on products like yours. [Book a GS1 demo](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video # SECTION: output-type > 360-product-video # TYPE: Output type # UPDATED: 2026-06-11 --- # 360 Product Video - PhotoRobot Example Output Type Create 360 product video with robotic precision thanks to software automation of hardware, cameras, lights, and video capture tools. ## Enhance Product Listings Across All Channels Produce 360 product video with a flying camera effect on PhotoRobot within minutes. The 360 product video combines object rotation with camera swing. It allows for fast or slow sequences to create more attractive recordings, showcasing items often as a non-interactive 360 spin. The spin is thus usually a video loop on a distraction-free background. This serves as an effective alternative to 360 product photography, and provides valuable assets for email and social media campaigns. - Create simple spins in video and GIF format for email and social media - Produce a flying camera effect with a robot arm to add top-view movement - Combine product video with spins and galleries to enhance product listings ## Key figures - 120 seconds: Automate 360 product video creation & flying camera effects. - 1 click: Program video timelines by object rotation and robot arm movement. - 0 effort: Configure, save & reuse video timeline settings for any type of item. ## Streamline 360 Product Video Creation Produce impressive 360 product video easily and cost-efficiently with PhotoRobot software & hardware automation. PhotoRobot enables teams to configure, save, and reuse video timeline automation to recreate any product video workflow in a single click. Compare with: 360 Spin, Animation, Multi-Row 360 --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin # SECTION: output-type > 360-spin # TYPE: Output type # UPDATED: 2026-06-11 --- # 360 Spin Product Photography - PhotoRobot Example Outputs One click automatically captures, post-processes, and publishes single-row and multi-row 360 spins consisting of 24, 36 or more still images. ## Single-Row 360 and Multi-Row 3D Accelerate production of both single-row 360 spins and multi-row 3D spins in tandem with still images and marketing shots. One click does everything. Automate the capture of one or multiple 360-degree rows, post-process images, remove background, optimize, and publish! - Make products defy gravity with single-row 360 and multi-row 3D spins - Present all angles, sides, bottom, and top views accurately and easily - Ensure complex and unique products leave nothing to the imagination ## Key figures - 120 seconds: Accelerate production with software integration of the entire studio. - 1 click: Automate studio workflows: hardware, cameras, lights, post-production. - 0 clipping: Post-process automatically – remove background, enhance, and optimize. ## Industry-Specific Product Photography Automation Easily produce high-quality spins for objects of any industry, size, weight, and photographic properties. PhotoRobot supports automated 360 product photography of items small, large, transparent, glossy, light, or dark. Find systems for items as small as microchips to as large as cars and heavy machinery. Compare with: Multi-Row 360, 3D Model, Animation --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model # SECTION: output-type > 3d-model # TYPE: Output type # UPDATED: 2026-06-11 --- # 3D Model Photography - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot Easily create a 3D model from photos with PhotoRobot software integration of product photography equipment, cameras, lights, post-processing, and photogrammetry. ## Virtual 3D Product Visualization Automate the production of 3D models in tandem with multi-row 360 spins, and in multiple 3D file formats. Generate virtual models in USDZ format (best for iOS / macOS AR), STL (with universal 3D printing support), or OBJ / MTL (for sharing detailed models with materials). PhotoRobot digitizes 3D model photography in a single click for AR / VR optimization, and for 3D printing! - Digitize product photos into virtual 3D object models in a single click - Automate photogrammetry scanning of all sides, top, and bottom views - Optimize for eCommerce, 3D product visualization, and AR / VR software ## Key figures - 120 seconds: Produce a multi-row 360 spin and photos to make a 3D model in minutes. - 1 click: Automate capture, post-processing, and photogrammetry 3D rendering. - 0 clipping: Post-process automatically – remove background, enhance, and optimize. ## Photography Robots for Products of All Types Achieve a 3D object model for products of various size, weight, and photographic properties with PhotoRobot turntables, robot arm, and multi-camera rigs. Our systems support automated 3D model photography for items small, large, transparent, glossy, light, and dark. Digitize product photos into full 3D in minutes! Compare with: 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, Animation --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/animation # SECTION: output-type > animation # TYPE: Output type # UPDATED: 2026-06-11 --- # Product Animation - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot Achieve a moving product animation in minutes with complete software integration of PhotoRobot, cameras, lights, object positioning, and post-production. ## Animate Dynamic and Interactive Products Composite two or more 360 spins into moving product visuals to showcase movement or configurations of dynamic and interactive products. PhotoRobot streamlines prep, capture, and post-processing to rapidly create animated demos, product videos, or GIFs of one or multiple items. - Animate product functionality, complexity, and movement from all angles - Present multiple rows, bottom views, top views, and product configurations - Showcase assortments or interaction of similar products and accessories ## Key figures - 120 seconds: Produce a moving 3D product visualization quickly and easily. - 1 click: Automate basic to advanced capture and post-processing routines. - 0 clipping: Post-process automatically – remove background, enhance, and optimize. ## Streamline Photography for Any Type of Item Easily create product animations for objects of various size, weight, and photographic properties: small, large, transparent, glossy, light, and dark. PhotoRobot software-driven hardware supports every stage of production, from prep to product staging, capture, post-processing and publishing. Compare with: 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360 # SECTION: output-type > multi-row-360 # TYPE: Output type # UPDATED: 2026-06-11 --- # Multi-Row 360 Product Photography - PhotoRobot Outputs Highly automate 3D product photography in hemispherical and spherical format with software integration of turntables, robots, cameras, lights, and post-production. ## Add the 3rd Dimension to Products Ensure items that call for closer inspection leave nothing to the imagination with multi-row 3D product photography. PhotoRobot turntables, compatible Robot Arm and Multi-Camera rigs accelerate the capture of multiple elevations 360 degrees around objects. Produce full 3D product spins in minutes! - Present items from all angles, including sides, bottom, and top views - Show unique or hidden parts of products that need closer inspection - Speed up 3D spin creation with Robot Arm and Multi-Camera systems ## Key figures - 120 seconds: Produce high-quality 3D spins accurately, consistently, and quickly. - 1 click: Automate repeatable photography sequences and post-production. - 0 clipping: Post-process automatically – remove background, enhance, and optimize. ## Photography Equipment for Products of All Types Achieve 3D product photography for objects of any industry, size, weight, and photographic properties. Show product configurations, and moving or hidden parts. PhotoRobot supports product photography for items small, large, transparent, glossy, light, and dark – as small as microchips to as large as cars. Compare with: 360 Spin, 3D Model, Animation --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image # SECTION: output-type > still-image # TYPE: Output type # UPDATED: 2026-06-11 --- # Still Product Photography - PhotoRobot Output Examples Produce high-quality still product photos and 360 spins in one click with software integration of robots, cameras, lights, and post-production. ## High-Quality Packshots in Minutes Achieve professional still image packshots and 360 packshots on a distraction-free background in one click! Advertise product design features, materials, colors, and details from multiple angles in less time, and less effort for faster time-to-web, higher conversions, and fewer returns. - Produce still product images in tandem with every 360 and 3D spin - Capture photos from all angles accurately, consistently, and quickly - Get true-to-life packshots that are sure to reduce returns and convert ## Key figures - 120 seconds: Achieve 24, 36 or more web-ready still images of any product in minutes. - 1 click: Automate studio workflows: hardware, cameras, lights, post-production. - 0 clipping: Eliminate expensive and time-consuming photo editing and retouching. ## Product Photography Automation for Items of Any Type Accelerate product photoshoots for objects of any industry, size, weight, and photographic properties: small, large, transparent, glossy, light or dark. PhotoRobot enables the automated photography of products as small as microchips to as large as cars and heavy machinery. Compare with: 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/antique-decorative-bronze-bowl # SECTION: outputs > antique-decorative-bronze-bowl # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Antique Photography: Bronze Bowl See automated example antique photography by PhotoRobot of an antique bronze bowl, including its capture and production times. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 30 sec. - Production time: 1 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot produced the 3 x 36 frame spin and still images of this antique decorative bronze bowl in 1 minute 40 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/antique-victorian-style-metal-ewer # SECTION: outputs > antique-victorian-style-metal-ewer # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Antique Photography: Victorian Style Ewer See PhotoRobot example 2D + 360 + 3D antique photography of a metal ewer including its total shooting and production time. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 30 sec. - Production time: 1 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot captured and automatically post-processed the 3 x 36 frame spin and still images of this antique metal ewer in 1 minute 40 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/antique-wrought-iron-hook # SECTION: outputs > antique-wrought-iron-hook # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Antique Photography: Iron Boat Hook In 3 minutes 35 seconds, PhotoRobot captured and post-processed this multi-row 5 x 36 frame spin of an antique iron boat hook. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 5 x 36 - Shooting time: 3 min 5 sec. - Production time: 3 min 35 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot produced 5 x 36 stills and this spin in 3 minutes 35 seconds, with automatic post production according to software presets. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/apple # SECTION: outputs > apple # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Food Product Photography Outputs: Green Apple In 40 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 36 images around this red apple and the 360 spin – web-ready and immediately publishable online. - Industry: CPG - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: Single-Row 360 Spin - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/backpack # SECTION: outputs > backpack # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated PhotoRobot Example Outputs: Blue Laptop Backpack The production time of this multi-row 360 spin consisting of 1 x 36 images was exactly 40 seconds with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/backpack-2 # SECTION: outputs > backpack-2 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2026-05-23 --- # Fashion Product Photography Outputs: Flat Grey Backpack In 3 minute 25 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 60 images and a 360 spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 60 - Shooting time: 3 min 12 sec. - Production time: 3 min 25 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/basket # SECTION: outputs > basket # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: 2-Tier Wire Basket PhotoRobot automatically captured and produced 24 web-ready product images and a 360 spin of this 2-tier wire basket in 41 seconds. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 32 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 41 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/basket-2 # SECTION: outputs > basket-2 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Wire Frame Basket In only 30 seconds, PhotoRobot captured 24 web-ready product images and a 360 spin of this medium-size, wire-frame basket. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 24 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 30 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/bike-24 # SECTION: outputs > bike-24 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Bike 24 Jersey PhotoRobot produced 18 images and a 360 spin of this long-sleeve jersey in 23 seconds using an invisible ghost mannequin. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 18 - Shooting time: 0 min. 18 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 23 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/black-baby-stroller # SECTION: outputs > black-baby-stroller # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example PhotoRobot Outputs: Stylish Baby Stroller Compare examples of product photography automation by PhotoRobot featuring stills and a 360 spin of a black Maclaren BMW stroller. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Turning Platform - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec. - Production time: 0 min 42 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot captured 36 product stills and produced the 360-degree spin of this stylish black baby carriage in only 42 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/black-underwear # SECTION: outputs > black-underwear # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Fashion Product Photography Outputs: Black Underwear The total production time for this 360 spin consisting of 36 images of black underwear on a special quick-exchange mannequin was 40 seconds with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Torso - Robots used: Cube, Turning Platform, Catwalk - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud The total production time for this 360 spin consisting of 36 images of black underwear on a mannequin was 40 seconds with PhotoRobot. Pro Tip: Teams can fully prepare multiple mannequins at a special station, and easily mount them into position for photography thanks to a quick-coupling mechanism. This both ensures a smooth production workflow, and higher level throughput overall. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/blue-audi-convertible # SECTION: outputs > blue-audi-convertible # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2026-03-24 --- # Example Car Photography by PhotoRobot: Blue Convertible Compare example PhotoRobot stills and a 360 spin from photographing a blue Audi convertible with the Carousel and Robotic Arm. - Industry: Automotive - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Carousel 5000, Robotic Arm - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 3 min 40 sec. - Production time: 3 min 55 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000 and Robotic Arm produced the 360 spin of the convertible consisting of 3 x 36 images in only 1 minute 50 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/blue-puma-football-shoe # SECTION: outputs > blue-puma-football-shoe # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Photography Outputs: Blue Puma Football Shoe In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 images and a product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 images - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec. - Production time: 1 min 50 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/bottles # SECTION: outputs > bottles # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Glass Bottles In 35 seconds, PhotoRobot automatically produced 24 web-ready images and a 360 product spin of this small object bottle collection. - Industry: Glassware - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image, Video - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 30 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 35 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/bracelet # SECTION: outputs > bracelet # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Fashion Photography Outputs: Bangle Cuff Bracelet With a special robot combination, PhotoRobot produced 1 row of 36 images and the 360 spin of this bracelet in approximately 40 seconds. - Industry: Jewelry - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/brake-master-cylinder # SECTION: outputs > brake-master-cylinder # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example PhotoRobot Product Images: Brake Master Cylinder Compare imagery from photographing an aluminum alloy brake master cylinder replacement part using PhotoRobot’s C1300 turntable with Robotic Arm. - Industry: Automotive - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Centerless Table, Multicam - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 2 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 09 sec. - Production time: 1 min 15 sec. - Software version: Cloud The production time of a 2 x 36 image product spin of this aluminum alloy brake master cylinder was 1 minute 15 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/bronze-roosevelt-relief-marble-base # SECTION: outputs > bronze-roosevelt-relief-marble-base # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Object Photography: Bronze Roosevelt Relief Within 3 minutes 35 seconds, PhotoRobot captured 5 x 36 stills and the spin of this bronze relief with automatic post production. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 5 x 36 - Shooting time: 3 min 5 sec. - Production time: 3 min 35 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot produced this multi-row spin consisting of 5 x 36 frames in 3 minutes 35 seconds, with automatic post production by software presets. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/brown-handbag # SECTION: outputs > brown-handbag # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Automated Product Photography Outputs: Brown Handbag In 1 minute 16 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 2 x 36 web-ready images and the 360 spin of this medium-size, brown designer handbag. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Multicam, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 2 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min. 09 sec. - Production time: 1 min. 16 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/buddha-statue # SECTION: outputs > buddha-statue # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Buddha Statue In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 images and a product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/cane # SECTION: outputs > cane # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Bone Handle Cane 36 product images and the 360 spin of this bone handle walking cane required 1 min. 10 seconds to produce with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Turntable, Cube, Turning Platform, Carousel 3000, Catwalk - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 58 sec - Production time: 1 min 10 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/cast-iron-brake-caliper # SECTION: outputs > cast-iron-brake-caliper # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example PhotoRobot Automotive Part Photos: Brake Caliper Inspect automotive photography examples from photographing a cast iron brake caliper on the PhotoRobot C1300 turntable with Robotic Arm expansion. - Industry: Automotive - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Centerless Table, Case 850, Multicam - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 2 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 48 sec. - Production time: 0 min 59 sec. - Software version: Cloud Producing the product spin by capturing 2 x 24 images of the brake caliper required only 40 seconds with PhotoRobot. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/casual-shoe # SECTION: outputs > casual-shoe # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Footwear Photography Outputs: High Top Sneaker In just 38 seconds, PhotoRobot automatically produced the product spin consisting of 40 images of this classic Converse shoe. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/cezve # SECTION: outputs > cezve # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Cezve In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 images and a product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, 3D Model, Multi-Row 360, Still Image - Number of images: 3 x 36 images - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec. - Production time: 1 min 50 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/circuit-breaker # SECTION: outputs > circuit-breaker # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Product Photography Output: Circuit Breaker In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 images and a product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Electrical - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 3 x 36 images - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec. - Production time: 1 min 50 sec. - Software version: Cloud In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 images and a product spin of this residual current circuit breaker (RCCB). The circuit breaker is a 4-pole 40A / 30mA device for electrical safety in 3-phase installations. All images were automatically captured with robotic precision, and web-ready for publishing in under 2 minutes. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/clamp-animation # SECTION: outputs > clamp-animation # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example PhotoRobot Photography Outputs: Angle Clamp Tool The production time of this animation consisting of 36 still images required exactly 1 minute 19 seconds for PhotoRobot to fully automate. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Multicam, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Animation, 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 56 sec - Production time: 1 min 19 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/computer-chair # SECTION: outputs > computer-chair # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Example Furniture Product Photos: Office Chair Browse example furniture product photography of a computer chair in stills and a 360 spin, including capture and production times. - Industry: Furniture - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Carousel 3000, Carousel 5000, Turning Platform - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 30 sec. - Production time: 0 min 45 sec. - Software version: Cloud In only 45 seconds, PhotoRobot produced the 360 of this computer chair by capturing 1 row of 24 still images around the product. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/crunchy-muesli # SECTION: outputs > crunchy-muesli # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: CPG Product - Muesli The production of 2 x 24 GS1-compliant images, including the packaging sides, top and bottom, with the 360 spin was only 59 seconds. - Industry: CPG - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Multicam, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 2 × 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 50 sec - Production time: 0 min 59 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/crystal-cube-award # SECTION: outputs > crystal-cube-award # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Glass Product Photography: Crystal Cube Award 36 web-ready images and the 360 spin of this transparent, crystal cube award required only 40 seconds to produce with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Glassware - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/cuba-havana # SECTION: outputs > cuba-havana # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Cuba Havana Gift Box The spin animation of this Cuba Havana gift box consists of 86 still images of each product, and 2 rows of 36 images each. - Industry: CPG - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Frame - Output types: Animation, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 86 / 2 × 36 - Shooting time: 4 min 20 sec - Production time: 5 min 23 sec - Software version: Cloud It took 5 minutes 23 seconds to produce this spin of the Cuba Havana gift box using 86 stills of each individual product, and 2 rows of 36 images each. The still images capture the product details, while the second and third rows capture the package as a whole. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/cycling-shoe # SECTION: outputs > cycling-shoe # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Cycling Shoe In only 41 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 36 images around this piece of footwear, and a 360 spin – automatically edited and web-ready. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min. 40 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 55 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/dragon # SECTION: outputs > dragon # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example PhotoRobot Outputs: Schleich Jungle Creature In 1 minutes 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 product images and the multi-row 360 spin, including tops and bottom views. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model, Video - Number of images: 3 × 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/drawer # SECTION: outputs > drawer # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Cabinet Drawer 30 seconds was all PhotoRobot needed to produce 24 images and a product spin of this medium-size cabinet drawer. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 24 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 30 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/drawer-2 # SECTION: outputs > drawer-2 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Metal Drawer PhotoRobot needed only 30 seconds to produce 24 web-ready product images and a 360 product spin of this medium-size metal drawer. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 24 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 30 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/drill # SECTION: outputs > drill # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: PowerPlus Drill In 1 min 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 rows of 36 images around the power drill, and a 360 product spin. Automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Electrical - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, Still Image, Video - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min. 40 sec. - Production time: 1 min. 50 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/driver-side-front-headlight # SECTION: outputs > driver-side-front-headlight # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Automotive Photography Example: Car Headlight See example 2D still images and a 360 spin by PhotoRobot of an automotive replacement headlight, with capture & production speeds. - Industry: Automotive - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Case 1300, Turning Platform, Turntable - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 30 sec. - Production time: 0 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot captured, post-processed, and produced 24 still images and the 360 spin of this car headline in only 40 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/filter # SECTION: outputs > filter # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Blue Filter This product spin of a blue filter consisting of 36 images needed 1 minute 47 seconds for PhotoRobot to fully produce and publish online. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Animation, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 25 sec - Production time: 1 min 47 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/foldable-support # SECTION: outputs > foldable-support # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Tool Product Photography Outputs: Mitre Saw Stand 3 rows of 36 images and the web-ready product spin of this mitre saw stand required only 1 minutes 50 seconds to produce. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Turntable, Robotic Arm, Turning Platform, Carousel 3000, Carousel 5000 - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 3 × 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/food-package # SECTION: outputs > food-package # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated CPG Product Photography Outputs: Food Assortment The production time of this product spin consisting of 44 images around the food assortment required only 1 minute 52 seconds. - Industry: CPG - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Animation, 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 44 - Shooting time: 1 min 20 sec - Production time: 1 min 52 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/food-package-2 # SECTION: outputs > food-package-2 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Automated CPG Product Photography: Holiday Gift Box The spin of this holiday gift box consists of 1 row of 72 still images, with a total production time of 3 minutes 20 seconds. - Industry: CPG - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 72 - Shooting time: 2 min 36 sec - Production time: 3 min 20 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/food-plating # SECTION: outputs > food-plating # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Food Product Photography Outputs: Food Plating The complete production time of 36 web-ready images and the 360 spin of this food plating was approximately 40 seconds. - Industry: CPG - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/football-boot # SECTION: outputs > football-boot # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Fashion Product Photography Outputs: Football Boot The total production time of 70 web-ready images and the 360 product spin of this Nike football boot was 2 minutes 15 seconds. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 70 - Shooting time: 1 min 55 sec - Production time: 2 min 15 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/football-shoe # SECTION: outputs > football-shoe # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Fashion Photography Outputs: Puma Football Shoe The production time of 4 rows of 36 images each and the multi-row 360 spin of this orange Puma football shoe was 2 minutes 57 seconds. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 4 × 36 - Shooting time: 2 min 47 sec - Production time: 2 min 57 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/furry-stool # SECTION: outputs > furry-stool # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Furry Footstool PhotoRobot produced 24 automatically edited, web-ready product images and a 360 spin of this medium-size furry stool in 39 seconds. - Industry: Furniture - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 32 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 39 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/geckota-watches # SECTION: outputs > geckota-watches # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Packshot Photography Outputs: Geckota Watch Using the pillow to display the watch in a vertical position, PhotoRobot produced the product spin consisting of 36 images in 40 seconds. - Industry: Jewelry - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/golf-trophy # SECTION: outputs > golf-trophy # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Golf Trophy In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 stills and a 360 spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec. - Production time: 1 min 50 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/handbag # SECTION: outputs > handbag # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Yellow Handbag In 1 minute 16 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 2 x 36 web-ready images and the 360 spin of this medium-size, yellow designer handbag. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Multicam, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 2 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min. 09 sec. - Production time: 1 min. 16 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/handbag-quazi # SECTION: outputs > handbag-quazi # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Quazi Handbag In 40 seconds, PhotoRobot automatically produced 36 product images and the 360 spin of this medium-size, Quazi designer handbag. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/hanger # SECTION: outputs > hanger # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Single-Click Product Photography Outputs: Wooden Hanger The production time of 24 images and the product spin of this wooden color hanger was 50 seconds with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Cube, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 40 sec - Production time: 0 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/hanger-2 # SECTION: outputs > hanger-2 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Wooden Hanger The production time of 24 web-ready images and the product spin of this wooden coat hanger was 50 seconds in total. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 1300, Cube, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 40 sec - Production time: 0 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/hat # SECTION: outputs > hat # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Single-Click Automated Outputs: Dodgers Baseball Cap PhotoRobot only needed 30 seconds to automatically capture and produce 24 web-ready images around this cap and a 360 product spin. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 24 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 30 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/hat-2 # SECTION: outputs > hat-2 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example PhotoRobot Outputs: Raptors Basketball Cap PhotoRobot only needed 30 seconds to automatically capture and produce 24 web-ready images around this cap and a 360 product spin. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 24 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 30 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/heel # SECTION: outputs > heel # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2026-06-03 --- # Automated Fashion Photography Outputs: Orange Suede Heel The production time of this orange suede platform heel shoe was only 1 minute and 50 seconds – providing 3 x 36 web-ready images and the 360 spin. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image, 3D Model, Video - Number of images: 3 × 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/hiking-shoe # SECTION: outputs > hiking-shoe # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Footwear Product Photography Outputs: Hiking Shoe The total production time of the product spin consisting of 36 images of this black Salomon hiking shoe was only 38 seconds. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, 3D Model, Video - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 55 sec - Production time: 1 min 10 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/jeans # SECTION: outputs > jeans # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Slim Fit Jeans This invisible mannequin effect on jeans was achieved in 1 minute 8 seconds, with a total 36 images – automatically captured, post-processed and web-ready. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Cube, Turning Platform, Catwalk - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 35 sec - Production time: 1 min 08 sec - Software version: Cloud This invisible mannequin effect on this pair of jeans was achieved in 1 minute 8 seconds, consisting of a total 36 images – automatically captured, post-processed and web-ready. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/ktm-bike # SECTION: outputs > ktm-bike # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: KTM Score Bicycle Suspending the bicycle upside-down on nylon string to the Cube Robot, PhotoRobot produced 36 images and the 360 spin in 59 seconds. - Industry: Sporting goods - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 50 sec - Production time: 0 min 59 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/ktm-motorcycle # SECTION: outputs > ktm-motorcycle # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2026-02-11 --- # Example Automotive Photography Outputs: KTM Motorcycle The production time for 36 images and the 360 product spin of this KTM motorcycle was approximately 55 seconds. - Industry: Automotive - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Turntable, Carousel 3000, Carousel 5000 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 45 sec - Production time: 0 min 55 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/lace-victorian-bonnet # SECTION: outputs > lace-victorian-bonnet # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Photography: Victorian Bonnet PhotoRobot produced this 1 x 36 still image spin of this victorian lace bonnet in 40 seconds, with automatic post-processing according to presets. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 30 sec. - Production time: 0 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud The total production time of this 1 x 36 frame spin and the still images of the Victorian-style lace bonnet was 40 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/lamb-cake-mold # SECTION: outputs > lamb-cake-mold # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Kitchen Product Photography Outputs: Lamb Mold The production time of 36 images and the product spin of this lamb-shaped, cast iron baking mold was only 40 seconds with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/leather-boot # SECTION: outputs > leather-boot # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Footwear Product Photography Outputs: Leather Boot 24 web-ready product images and the spin of this brown leather boot required only 30 seconds to produce and publish online with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 15 sec - Production time: 0 min 30 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/leather-shoe # SECTION: outputs > leather-shoe # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Footwear Photography Outputs: Leather Loafer 24 web-ready images and the spin of this brown leather loafer required only 30 seconds total production time using PhotoRobot. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 24 sec - Production time: 0 min 30 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/lieber-black-part # SECTION: outputs > lieber-black-part # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Leiber Part - Black PhotoRobot produced 3 rows of 36 images each and a web-ready 360 product spin of this item in approximately 1 minute 50 seconds. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Multicam, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm - Output types: 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, Still Image - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/lieber-part # SECTION: outputs > lieber-part # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Leiber Part - Classic PhotoRobot produced 3 rows of 36 product images each and a web-ready product spin of this Liber Part in 1 min 59 seconds. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Multicam, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 59 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/longchamp-handbag # SECTION: outputs > longchamp-handbag # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Fashion Photography Outputs: Longchamp Handbag The complete production time of 36 web-ready marketing images and the 360 spin of this Longchamp Handbag was 40 seconds. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, 3D Model - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/mascot-safe-trousers # SECTION: outputs > mascot-safe-trousers # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Mascot Safe Trousers In 40 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 1 x 36 images and a product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Cube - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 36 images - Shooting time: 0 min. 30 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/model-car-lamborghini # SECTION: outputs > model-car-lamborghini # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example PhotoRobot Photography Outputs: Model Lamborghini PhotoRobot automatically produced and published the spin of this model car consisting of 36 still images in only 40 seconds. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/motor # SECTION: outputs > motor # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Example Outputs: Valve Body Taking only 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot automatically captured and produced 3 x 36 web-ready images and a product spin of this valve body. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Multicam, Robotic Arm - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/motor-2 # SECTION: outputs > motor-2 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2026-06-03 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Worm Gearbox In 1 minute and 50 seconds, PhotoRobot captured, edited, and published 3 rows of 36 product images and web-ready product spin. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/motor-part # SECTION: outputs > motor-part # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Engine Cylinder Head In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 images and a product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Multicam, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/nike-football-boot # SECTION: outputs > nike-football-boot # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Footwear Photography Outputs: Nike Football Boot The total production time of 36 web-ready images and the 360 spin of this Nike football boot was only 59 seconds with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Cube, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 48 sec - Production time: 0 min 59 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/ohlala-bag # SECTION: outputs > ohlala-bag # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Fashion Product Photography Outputs: Ohlala Bag In only 2 minutes 35 seconds, PhotoRobot produced this spin of an Ohlala handbag consisting of 5 rows of 24 images each. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 5 × 24 - Shooting time: 2 min 20 sec - Production time: 2 min 35 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/ohlala-tote-bag # SECTION: outputs > ohlala-tote-bag # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Fashion Product Photography Outputs: Ohlala Tote Bag In only 2 minutes 35 seconds, PhotoRobot produced this spin of an Ohlala handbag consisting of 5 rows of 24 images each. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 5 x 24 - Shooting time: 2 min. 20 sec - Production time: 2 min. 35 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/old-rusty-metal-clothes-iron # SECTION: outputs > old-rusty-metal-clothes-iron # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Antique Photography: Old Clothes Iron See PhotoRobot example 2D + 360 + 3D antique photography of an old rusty clothes iron, including total shooting and production time. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model, Video - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 30 sec. - Production time: 1 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud The 3 x 36 frame spin and still images of this old rusty clothes iron were captured, post-processed, and web-ready in 1 minute 40 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/orange # SECTION: outputs > orange # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Single-Click Food Product Photography Outputs: Orange PhotoRobot automatically produced 36 web-ready images and the 360 product spin of this orange in 0 minutes 40 seconds total. - Industry: CPG - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/painted-wood-head-sculpture # SECTION: outputs > painted-wood-head-sculpture # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2026-06-03 --- # Automated Object Photography: Painted Wood Head Sculpture In 1 minute 14 seconds, PhotoRobot produced this spin consisting of 3 rows x 36 frames of this painted wood sculpture. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud In 1 minute 14 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 product images and the multi-row 360 spin, including tops and bottom views. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/parfume # SECTION: outputs > parfume # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Glass Product Photography Outputs: Perfume Bottle The production time of 36 images and the 360 product spin of this pink glass perfume bottle was only 40 seconds, including time-to-web. - Industry: Glassware - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/pot # SECTION: outputs > pot # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Kitchen Goods Photography Outputs: Casserole Pot The production time for this multi-row spin consisting of 3 x 36 images of an easy strain casserole pot was exactly 2 minutes 05 seconds. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 3 × 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 50 sec - Production time: 2 min 05 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/preciosa-2 # SECTION: outputs > preciosa-2 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Product Photography Outputs: Preciosa Blue Glass Taking 57 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 2 x 36 product images and the 360 spin of this medium-size, Preciosa blue glass flower sculpture. - Industry: Glassware - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 2 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 49 sec. - Production time: 0 min 57 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/preciosa-3 # SECTION: outputs > preciosa-3 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Product Photography Outputs: Preciosa Clear Glass In 40 seconds, PhotoRobot automatically produced 36 images and the 360 spin of this medium-size, Preciosa clear glass sculpture. - Industry: Glassware - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec. - Production time: 0 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/preciosa-4 # SECTION: outputs > preciosa-4 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Product Photography Outputs: Preciosa Glass Sculpture In 59 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 36 images and the 360 product spin of this medium-size, Preciosa glass sculpture. - Industry: Glassware - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Cube - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 50 sec. - Production time: 0 min 59 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/preciosa-5 # SECTION: outputs > preciosa-5 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Product Photography Outputs: Preciosa Glass Tube In 58 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 36 images around this medium-size, Preciosa glass tube attachment, and the 360 spin. - Industry: Glassware - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Cube - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 48 sec - Production time: 0 min 58 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/preciosa-6 # SECTION: outputs > preciosa-6 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Product Photography Outputs: Preciosa Amber Glass In only 30 seconds, PhotoRobot automatically produced 24 web-ready images and the 360 product spin of this Preciosa amber glass product. - Industry: Glassware - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 24 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 30 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/primed-front-bumper-cover # SECTION: outputs > primed-front-bumper-cover # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automotive Photography Examples by PhotoRobot: Car Bumper Browse example automotive product photography by PhotoRobot capturing 2D stills and a 360 spin of a primed front bumper cover. - Industry: Automotive - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Turning Platform, Carousel 3000 - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 30 sec. - Production time: 0 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot Studio needed approximately 40 seconds to produce the 360-degree spin and 24 stills of this front car bumper cover. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/puma-running-shoe # SECTION: outputs > puma-running-shoe # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2026-06-03 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Puma Running Shoe In 1 minute and 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 images and a product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 images - Shooting time: 1 min. 40 sec - Production time: 1 min. 50 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/puma-trainer-shoe # SECTION: outputs > puma-trainer-shoe # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Footwear Product Photography Outputs: Pink Puma PhotoRobot automatically produced the 360 spin consisting of 36 images of this pink puma sneaker in exactly 41 seconds. - Industry: Footwear - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/quad-bike # SECTION: outputs > quad-bike # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Automotive Photography Outputs: Buffler Quad Bike The production time of 36 images and the 360 product spin of this Buffler Quad Bike was approximately 1 minute and 58 seconds. - Industry: Automotive - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Turntable, Turning Platform, Carousel 3000, Carousel 5000 - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 50 sec - Production time: 1 min 58 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/ratchet-handle # SECTION: outputs > ratchet-handle # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Tool Product Photography Outputs: Ratchet Spanner This product spin of this ratchet spanner tool consisting of 8 different rows of 36 images each required only 4 minutes 27 seconds to produce. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 8 × 36 - Shooting time: 4 min. 27 sec - Production time: 4 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/red-apple # SECTION: outputs > red-apple # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Single-Click Product Photography Outputs: Red Apple In 40 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 36 images around this red apple and the 360 spin – web-ready and immediately publishable online. - Industry: CPG - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/red-handbag # SECTION: outputs > red-handbag # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Automated Product Photography Outputs: Red Handbag In 40 seconds, PhotoRobot automatically produced 36 product images and the 360 spin of this medium-size, red designer handbag. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min. 36 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/right-rear-car-door # SECTION: outputs > right-rear-car-door # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Automotive Photography of a Rear Car Door Inspect example PhotoRobot automotive photography of a black right side rear car door shell replacement part in 360 degrees. - Industry: Automotive - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Turning Platform, Cube, Carousel 3000 - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 55 sec. - Production time: 1 min 15 sec. - Software version: Cloud In 1 minute 15 seconds, PhotoRobot produced the product spin after capturing 24 stills of this black car door replacement part. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/ring # SECTION: outputs > ring # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2026-02-09 --- # Automated Jewelry Photography Outputs: Engraved Wedding Band The complete production time of 36 images and the 360 spin of this engraved wedding band was approximately 40 seconds. - Industry: Jewelry - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/rsa-motorcycle-helmet # SECTION: outputs > rsa-motorcycle-helmet # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Sportswear Photography Outputs: Motorcycle Helmet The production time of the 360 spin consisting of 36 still images of this RSA motorcycle helmet was exactly 1 minute. - Industry: Automotive - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 50 sec - Production time: 1 min 00 sec - Software version: Cloud The production time of the 360 spin consisting of 36 still images of this RSA motorcycle helmet was exactly 1 minute. This involved suspending the item on a nylon string upside-down from the safety strip at the bottom of the helmet. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/saddleback-handbag # SECTION: outputs > saddleback-handbag # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Saddleback Handbag 3 x 24 images and the multi-row spin of this saddleback handbag required only 1 minutes 34 seconds to produce with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Turntable, Cube, Robotic Arm, Turning Platform - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 3 × 24 - Shooting time: 1 min 24 sec - Production time: 1 min 34 sec - Software version: Cloud 3 x 24 images and the multi-row spin of this saddleback handbag required only 1 minute 34 seconds to produce with PhotoRobot. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/santal-tinted-sunglasses # SECTION: outputs > santal-tinted-sunglasses # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Sample Product Photos: Santal Sunglasses Browse product imagery examples of santal tinted square designer sunglasses using the PhotoRobot C1300 turntable and post-processing automation. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Case 1300, Centerless Table - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec. - Production time: 0 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud Only 40 seconds was necessary for PhotoRobot to produce the 1 x 36 image product spin of designer santal square sunglasses. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/scott-bicycle # SECTION: outputs > scott-bicycle # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Scott Strike E-Bike Suspending the bicycle upside-down on nylon string to the Cube Robot, PhotoRobot produced 36 images and the 360 spin in 59 seconds. - Industry: Sporting goods - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 images - Shooting time: 0 min. 50 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 59 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/screws # SECTION: outputs > screws # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Steel Screw Set In 45 seconds, PhotoRobot automatically captured, post-processed, and published 1 row of 36 web-ready images and the 360 product spin. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 55 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/semi-tranpsarent-top # SECTION: outputs > semi-tranpsarent-top # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Ghost Mannequin Outputs: Semi-Transparent Top The torso was adjusted to fit the top for the ghost mannequin effect, while production time of the product spin consisting of 36 images was 58 seconds. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Transparent torso - Robots used: Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 37 sec - Production time: 0 min 58 sec - Software version: Cloud The production of this output used a mannequin torso with removable chest pieces, and Chroma Key masking to remove the mannequin stand from photos. The torso was adjusted to fit the dress shape perfectly for the invisible ghost mannequin effect, while production time of the product spin consisting of 36 images was 58 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/shoe-organizer # SECTION: outputs > shoe-organizer # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Large Shoe Rack 59 seconds is all PhotoRobot needed to produce 1 row of 24 web-ready images and a 360 product spin of this larger shoe organizer. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Turning Platform, Carousel 3000, Carousel 5000 - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 37 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 59 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/ski-boot # SECTION: outputs > ski-boot # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Sportswear Product Photography Outputs: Ski Boot The product spin consisting of 36 still images of this ski boot required only 45 seconds total production time with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Sporting goods - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 45 sec - Production time: 0 min 55 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/small-vintage-ceramic-bowl # SECTION: outputs > small-vintage-ceramic-bowl # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Antique Photography: Vintage Ceramic Bowl See the example automated photography outputs of a vintage ceramic bowl including its total shooting and production time. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 5 x 36 - Shooting time: 3 min 5 sec. - Production time: 3 min 35 sec. - Software version: Cloud The total production time of the 5 x 36 frame spin and still images of this small vintage ceramic bowl was 3 minutes 35 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/sofa # SECTION: outputs > sofa # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Furniture Photography Outputs: White Loveseat In only 1 minutes 50 seconds, PhotoRobot fully produced the product spin of this loveseat with 3 rows of 36 images each. - Industry: Furniture - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Turning Platform, Carousel 3000, Carousel 5000 - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 3 × 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/specialized # SECTION: outputs > specialized # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example PhotoRobot Outputs: Specialized Tarmac Bicycle Suspending the bicycle on nylon string and photographing it upside down, PhotoRobot produced 24 photos around the item and a 360 spin in 53 seconds. - Industry: Sporting goods - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 44 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 53 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/specialized-2 # SECTION: outputs > specialized-2 # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Specialized Bicycle Suspending the bicycle on nylon string and photographing it upside down, PhotoRobot produced 24 photos around the item and a 360 spin in 53 seconds. - Industry: Sporting goods - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min. 44 sec. - Production time: 0 min. 53 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/statue # SECTION: outputs > statue # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Carved Ivory Statue In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 stills and the product 360 – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 images - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec. - Production time: 1 min 50 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/striped-designer-sunglasses # SECTION: outputs > striped-designer-sunglasses # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Eyewear Photography by PhotoRobot: Designer Sunglasses View example eCommerce product images from photographing designer sunglasses using the PhotoRobot C1300 turntable and photo studio automation. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Case 1300, Centerless Table - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec. - Production time: 0 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud Only 40 seconds was necessary for PhotoRobot to photograph the 1 x 36 image spin of designer sunglasses by Ralph Lauren. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/stylish-massage-chair # SECTION: outputs > stylish-massage-chair # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Large Furniture Photography: Massage Chair Browse product photos and a 360 spin from photographing a full-body massage chair using the PhotoRobot Turning Platform. - Industry: Furniture - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Turning Platform, Carousel 3000 - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec. - Production time: 0 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot produced a 1 x 36 image product spin of this heavy full-body massage chair in only 40 seconds total. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/suitcase # SECTION: outputs > suitcase # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Example Product Photography Outputs: Suitcase In 25 seconds total, PhotoRobot automatically produced the product spin consisting of only 12 images of this protective hard case. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Turntable, Cube, Turning Platform, Carousel 3000 - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 12 - Shooting time: 0 min 10 sec - Production time: 0 min 25 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/t-shirt # SECTION: outputs > t-shirt # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Arsenal Home Jersey In 30 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 1 x 24 images and the 360 spin which we then post-process to create the invisible ghost mannequin effect. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Cube - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 24 sec - Production time: 0 min 30 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/the-famous-grouse-whisky # SECTION: outputs > the-famous-grouse-whisky # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Famous Grouse Whisky 36 web-ready, GS1-compliant images and the product spin of the Famous Grouse Whisky bottle needed only 46 seconds total production time. - Industry: CPG - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 46 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/the-mug # SECTION: outputs > the-mug # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: The Mug In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 images and a product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec - Production time: 1 min 50 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/the-tea-box # SECTION: outputs > the-tea-box # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: English Tea Shop Box In 1 minute 50 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 3 x 36 GS1 images and a product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: CPG - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 3 x 36 - Shooting time: 1 min 40 sec. - Production time: 1 min 50 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/tomatoes # SECTION: outputs > tomatoes # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Single-Click Food Product Photography Outputs: Tomatoes PhotoRobot’s automated the production of 36 web-ready images around these tomatoes and the 360 spin in approximately 40 seconds. - Industry: CPG - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/tool-cabinet-set # SECTION: outputs > tool-cabinet-set # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Heavy Object Photography by PhotoRobot: Tool Cabinet View product photo samples from PhotoRobot photographing a heavy-duty mechanical tool cabinet and tool set for automotive garages and workshops. - Industry: Industrial - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Turning Platform, Carousel 3000 - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 40 sec. - Production time: 0 min 55 sec. - Software version: Cloud The PhotoRobot Turning Platform produced a 1 x 24 image product spin in 55 seconds of this heavy-duty tool cabinet for automotive garages. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/tortoise-shell-glasses # SECTION: outputs > tortoise-shell-glasses # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Photo Samples by PhotoRobot: Tortoise Shell Glasses Browse photo samples from photographing tortoise shell glasses with black matte and gold shine frames using PhotoRobot technology. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Case 1300, Centerless Table - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 x 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec. - Production time: 0 min 40 sec. - Software version: Cloud There was a production time of 40 seconds for PhotoRobot to produce this 1 x 36 image spin of tortoise shell glasses. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/ventilator # SECTION: outputs > ventilator # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example PhotoRobot Product Photography Outputs: Exhaust Fan This 3D spin consists of 2 hemispheres for viewing from above or below, and took 3 minutes 36 seconds to produce. It consists of 6 rows of 36 images each. - Industry: Electrical - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Multicam, Case 850, Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 6 × 36 - Shooting time: 3 min 20 sec - Production time: 3 min 36 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/victorian-vase-bohemian-glass-overlay # SECTION: outputs > victorian-vase-bohemian-glass-overlay # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Antique Photography Examples: Victorian Vase PhotoRobot captured and automatically post-processed the 3D spin and still images of this trumpet vase in 3 minutes 35 seconds. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 5 x 36 - Shooting time: 3 min 5 sec. - Production time: 3 min 35 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot captured and automatically post-processed the 5 x 36 spin and still images of this Victorian trumpet vase in 3 minutes 35 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/vintage-globe-paperweight # SECTION: outputs > vintage-globe-paperweight # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Antique Photography: Vintage Paperweight Within 3 minutes 35 seconds, PhotoRobot produced and automatically post-processed 5 x 36 stills and the 3D spin of a metal globe paperweight. - Industry: Museum & Antiques - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 5 x 36 - Shooting time: 3 min 5 sec. - Production time: 3 min 35 sec. - Software version: Cloud PhotoRobot produced this 5 x 36 frame spin and the still images of this small metal vintage globe in 3 minutes 35 seconds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/wallet # SECTION: outputs > wallet # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Fashion Product Photography Outputs: Pink Wallet 24 web-ready images and the 360 spin of this pink wallet required only 30 seconds to produce with PhotoRobot technology. - Industry: Fashion - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 24 sec - Production time: 0 min 30 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/watch-packaging # SECTION: outputs > watch-packaging # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Packshot Photography Outputs: Packaged Watch 36 web-ready packshots and the 360 spin of this watch in its packaging required only 40 seconds to produce with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Jewelry - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec - Production time: 0 min 40 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/white-chair # SECTION: outputs > white-chair # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Example Furniture Product Photography Outputs: Dining Chair The production time of the product spin consisting of 36 still images of this white dining chair was only 55 seconds with PhotoRobot. - Industry: Furniture - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 1300, Turning Platform, Carousel 3000 - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 36 - Shooting time: 0 min 45 sec - Production time: 0 min 55 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/wine # SECTION: outputs > wine # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # Automated Product Photography Outputs: Wine In 2 minute 35 seconds, PhotoRobot produced 4 x 36 stills and the product spin – automatically captured, web-ready, and published. - Industry: Home goods - Category: Medium objects - Robots used: Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model - Number of images: 4 x 36 - Shooting time: 2 min 22 sec. - Production time: 2 min 35 sec. - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/worktable # SECTION: outputs > worktable # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # PhotoRobot Furniture Product Photography: Steel Worktable See example product photos by PhotoRobot of a steel worktable, including a 360 spin with its capture and production times. - Industry: Furniture - Category: Large objects - Robots used: Carousel 3000, Carousel 5000, Turning Platform - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 - Number of images: 4 x 36 - Shooting time: 2 min 30 sec. - Production time: 2 min 55 sec. - Software version: Cloud In only 2 minutes 55 seconds, PhotoRobot fully produced the product spin of this worktable with 4 rows of 36 images each. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/yoghurt # SECTION: outputs > yoghurt # TYPE: Output example # UPDATED: 2025-11-27 --- # One-Click CPG Food Product Photography Outputs: Yoghurt In only 30 seconds, PhotoRobot automatically produced the GS1- compliant product spin of this yogurt cup consisting of 24 still images. - Industry: CPG - Category: Small objects - Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame - Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin - Number of images: 1 × 24 - Shooting time: 0 min 24 sec - Production time: 0 min 30 sec - Software version: Cloud --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary # SECTION: glossary # TYPE: Glossary --- # PhotoRobot Glossary > Definitions of product photography, 360 spin, 3D, lighting and e-commerce workflow terms, with links to every page of photorobot.com where each term is used. Definitions of the terms used across photorobot.com: robotic photography hardware, PhotoRobot software, photography techniques, 360 and 3D output formats, e-commerce workflows, and lighting and optics. Each term with its own page lists the places on this website where it appears, like the index at the back of a book. For an introduction to the core concepts, start with the Product Photography Glossary article. 213 terms in 6 categories: Hardware, Software, Photography techniques, 360, 3D and output formats, E-commerce and workflow, Lighting and optics. Each term links to its definition; terms with their own page also list the pages of www.photorobot.com where they appear. ## 0-9 - [360 Car Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/car-studio-360) (Software): PhotoRobot Viewer layout for vehicles, combining 360 spins, hotspots, details and interior panoramas. - [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-360-product-photography) (Photography techniques): Capturing a sequence of images around a rotating product to create an interactive 360-degree view. - [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-video) (360, 3D and output formats): A video of a rotating product, optionally with camera movement, produced on an automated turntable. - [360 product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-viewer) (360, 3D and output formats): Web software that plays a 360 spin and lets the visitor rotate and zoom a product. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin) (360, 3D and output formats): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model) (360, 3D and output formats): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. ## A - [Alpha channel](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/alpha-channel) (360, 3D and output formats): An extra image channel that stores the transparency of every pixel. - [Aperture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aperture) (Lighting and optics): The adjustable lens opening, given as an f-number; smaller openings give more depth of field. - [API (application programming interface)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/api) (E-commerce and workflow): A defined interface through which one piece of software can use the functions or data of another. - [Apple Object Capture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/apple-object-capture) (360, 3D and output formats): Apple's photogrammetry technology that creates a 3D model from a series of photos. - [Approval workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/approval-workflow) (E-commerce and workflow): A defined step in which managers or clients approve or reject images before publishing. - [APS-C](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aps-c) (Lighting and optics): A camera sensor format smaller than full frame, which crops the image by a factor of about 1.5–1.6. - [Augmented reality (AR)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/augmented-reality) (360, 3D and output formats): Overlaying digital content, such as a 3D product model, on the live camera view of the real world. - [Auto-centering](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/auto-centering) (Software): Software correction that aligns a product to the centre of rotation in every frame so a spin does not wobble. - [AutoCrop](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/autocrop) (Software): Automatic cropping based on the detected product position, with set aspect ratio and padding. - [Automated image capture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-image-capture) (Photography techniques): Camera triggering synchronised with studio hardware and software, without manual intervention. - [Automated product content production](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-content-production) (E-commerce and workflow): End-to-end automation of generating, processing and distributing digital product assets. - [Automated product imaging](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-imaging) (E-commerce and workflow): The automated pipeline that captures, processes and prepares product images for online catalogues. - [Automated product video capture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-video-capture) (360, 3D and output formats): Recording product videos with robotic camera systems and software-controlled studio equipment. - [Automatic publishing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/automatic-publishing) (E-commerce and workflow): Making finished images available online immediately after capture and processing, without manual upload. ## B - [Background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal) (Photography techniques): Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. - [Backlight](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/backlight) (Lighting and optics): Light from behind the subject, used to brighten the background or outline the product. - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode) (E-commerce and workflow): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. - [Batch processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/batch-processing) (Photography techniques): Applying the same edits to many images at once instead of one by one. - [Bullet time](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/bullet-time) (Photography techniques): Effect in which many cameras around a subject capture the same instant, so a frozen moment can be viewed from a moving viewpoint. - [BYOK (bring your own key)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/byok) (Software): Using your own API key and contract with an AI or cloud provider inside third-party software. ## C - [C-Class turntables (C850, C1300)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/c-class-turntables) (Hardware): PhotoRobot C850 and C1300 glass-plate turntables with a steel frame; the C1300 was previously sold as Case 1300. - [Camera resolution](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/camera-resolution) (Lighting and optics): The number of pixels a camera sensor records, given in megapixels (MP). - [Canon EDSDK](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/canon-edsdk) (Software): Canon's software development kit for controlling EOS cameras from a computer over USB. - [Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-pi-advisor) (Software): PhotoRobot Intelligence tool that checks each capture in real time and suggests camera and light adjustments. - [Capture sequence](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-sequence) (Software): The programmed order of angles, camera triggers and movements a robot performs to photograph an item. - [Carousel 3000](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/carousel-3000) (Hardware): PhotoRobot 3 m rotating platform for cars, furniture and other large objects of up to 2000 kg. - [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/carousel-5000) (Hardware): PhotoRobot low-profile heavy-duty turntable for cars and machinery, with a 4000 kg load capacity. - [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/case-850) (Hardware): PhotoRobot's portable motorised turntable with an 850 mm glass plate that folds into its own carrying case. - [CDN (content delivery network)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cdn) (360, 3D and output formats): A network of servers worldwide that delivers files from a location close to each visitor. - [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centerless-table) (Hardware): PhotoRobot motorised turntable with an optical glass plate for shadow-free photography without clipping. - [Centre of rotation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centre-of-rotation) (Photography techniques): The axis a turntable spins around; a product placed on it stays in the same spot in every frame. - [Chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key) (Photography techniques): Removing everything of one specific colour from an image, such as a green screen or a coloured stand. - [Clipping path](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/clipping-path) (Photography techniques): A hand-drawn vector outline used to cut a product out of its background. - [Cloud processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-processing) (Software): Running image editing on cloud servers so the studio can keep shooting while images are processed. - [Colour calibration](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#colour-calibration) (Lighting and optics): Adjusting cameras, lights and screens to a reference so colours are reproduced consistently. - [Colour temperature](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/colour-temperature) (Lighting and optics): The warmth or coolness of white light, measured in kelvin (K); daylight is about 5500–5600 K. - [Continuous light](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/continuous-light) (Lighting and optics): Lighting that stays on constantly, typically LED, so the effect is visible before shooting. - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit) (Hardware): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [Conversion rate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/conversion-rate) (E-commerce and workflow): The share of visitors to a page or shop who complete a purchase. - [CPG (consumer packaged goods)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cpg) (E-commerce and workflow): Everyday packaged products such as food, drinks and toiletries, sold in large volumes. - [CRI (colour rendering index)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cri) (Lighting and optics): A 0–100 score of how faithfully a light source reproduces colours compared with a reference light. - [Crop factor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#crop-factor) (Lighting and optics): The ratio between full frame and a smaller sensor, used to compare fields of view. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube) (Hardware): Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. - [CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cubiscan) (Hardware): A dimensioning system that weighs and measures items; PhotoRobot records its data with the product images. - [Cyclorama](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cyclorama) (Lighting and optics): A curved background where the floor sweeps into the wall, giving a seamless, horizon-free backdrop. ## D - [DAM (digital asset management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dam) (E-commerce and workflow): Software for storing, organising, searching and distributing images, video and other media files. - [Depth of field](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/depth-of-field) (Lighting and optics): The distance range in front of and behind the focus point that appears acceptably sharp. - [Detail shot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/detail-shot) (Photography techniques): A close-up photo of one feature of a product, such as a texture, logo or mechanism. - [Diffusion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/diffusion) (Lighting and optics): Scattering light through a translucent material to make it softer and more even. - [DMX](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dmx) (Lighting and optics): A standard control protocol for lighting, used to set the intensity and colour of lights remotely. - [DPI (dots per inch)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dpi) (360, 3D and output formats): A print density value stored in image files; it does not change the pixel resolution of a digital image. - [DSLR](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dslr) (Lighting and optics): A digital camera that uses a mirror and optical viewfinder, with interchangeable lenses. - [Dynamic range](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dynamic-range) (Lighting and optics): The range between the darkest and brightest tones a camera can record with detail. ## E - [E-commerce product imaging](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging) (E-commerce and workflow): Creating product images optimised for online retail platforms, catalogues and product information systems. - [ERP (enterprise resource planning)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/erp) (E-commerce and workflow): Business software that manages core processes such as inventory, orders and finance. - [Export feed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed) (Software): A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. - [Exposure](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/exposure) (Lighting and optics): The amount of light that reaches the sensor, set by aperture, shutter speed, ISO and light output. ## F - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin) (Software): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [File naming convention](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/file-naming-convention) (E-commerce and workflow): A rule for naming image files so systems can match them to products and views automatically. - [Flag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flag) (Lighting and optics): An opaque panel that blocks light from reaching part of the scene or the lens. - [Flash duration](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flash-duration) (Lighting and optics): How long a flash burst lasts; a very short flash freezes a moving subject sharply. - [Flat lay](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flat-lay) (Photography techniques): Photographing products laid flat on a surface from directly above. - [Flying camera effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flying-camera-effect) (Photography techniques): Video in which the camera seems to fly around the product, made by combining rotation with camera movement. - [Focal length](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focal-length) (Lighting and optics): The lens property, in millimetres, that sets the angle of view and magnification. - [Focus stacking](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focus-stacking) (Photography techniques): Combining several photos focused at different distances into one image that is sharp throughout. - [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/frame) (Hardware): PhotoRobot all-in-one machine combining a glass-plate turntable with a robotic camera arm, built for 3D modelling. - [Freemask](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/freemask) (Software): PhotoRobot background removal from a front-lit and a back-lit silhouette shot of the same angle. - [FRP (fibre-reinforced plastic)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/frp) (Hardware): A composite of plastic resin and reinforcing fibres, used for light, durable mannequins. - [Full-frame sensor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/full-frame-sensor) (Lighting and optics): A camera sensor the size of 35 mm film (36 x 24 mm), preferred for product photography. ## G - [Geo-redundant storage](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/geo-redundant-storage) (E-commerce and workflow): Storing copies of data in several distant locations so it survives the loss of a data centre. - [Ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin) (Hardware): A mannequin with removable parts, used to photograph garments so the mannequin can be made invisible in the image. - [Ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect) (Photography techniques): An editing technique that makes the mannequin disappear so the garment looks worn by an invisible body. - [GIF](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gif) (360, 3D and output formats): An old image format limited to 256 colours, still used for simple animations. - [glTF / GLB](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#gltf) (360, 3D and output formats): Open Khronos standard for transmitting 3D models efficiently on the web; GLB is its single-file binary form. - [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gs1-image-standards) (E-commerce and workflow): GS1 guidelines for how product images are captured, named and exchanged in retail supply chains. - [GTIN](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#gtin) (E-commerce and workflow): GS1's globally unique product number behind EAN and UPC barcodes. ## H - [Hero image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hero-image) (Photography techniques): The main product photo shown first on a product page or listing. - [Highlight clipping](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/highlight-clipping) (Lighting and optics): Overexposed areas that are recorded as pure white and have lost all detail. - [Histogram](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/histogram) (Lighting and optics): A graph of how many pixels in an image have each brightness value. - [Hotspot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hotspot) (360, 3D and output formats): A clickable point on a product image or spin that opens a detail image, zoom or annotation. - [Hybrid version](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hybrid-version) (Software): PhotoRobot Controls set-up combining a local workstation with the cloud, synchronised in both directions. - [Hyperfocal distance](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hyperfocal-distance) (Lighting and optics): The focus distance that gives the maximum depth of field, extending sharpness to infinity. ## I - [Image compression](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-compression) (360, 3D and output formats): Reducing the file size of an image, either without loss of data (lossless) or by discarding detail (lossy). - [Image consistency](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-consistency) (E-commerce and workflow): All product images in a range sharing the same angles, framing, lighting and background. - [Image hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-hosting) (Software): Storing images on a server and delivering them to websites on request. - [Image metadata (EXIF, IPTC, XMP)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-metadata) (360, 3D and output formats): Information stored inside an image file, such as camera settings, copyright, keywords and description. - [In-house photo studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/in-house-studio) (E-commerce and workflow): A company's own product photography studio, as opposed to outsourcing to an agency. - [Industry 4.0](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/industry-4-0) (E-commerce and workflow): The connected, data-driven automation of production: networked machines, sensors and remote control. - [ISO sensitivity](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/iso) (Lighting and optics): The camera's sensitivity setting; low ISO gives the cleanest images and widest dynamic range. - [Item export](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-export) (Software): PhotoRobot Controls function that exports items to local disk or cloud in chosen formats, sizes and file names. - [Item status](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-status) (E-commerce and workflow): The production state of an item in PhotoRobot Controls, such as Received, Captured, Edited or Published. ## J - [JPEG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/jpeg) (360, 3D and output formats): The most common lossy image format for photographs; small files, no transparency. ## K - [Kiosk mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/kiosk-mode) (Software): A locked-down, simplified interface that shows an operator only the controls an administrator allows. ## L - [Laser positioning](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/laser-positioning) (Hardware): Lasers projected onto the turntable that show where to place a product so it sits at the centre of rotation. - [Lifestyle photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/lifestyle-photography) (Photography techniques): Product photos showing the product in use or in a real-world setting. - [Light-wrap](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/light-wrap) (Lighting and optics): Background light spilling around the edges of a product, softening its contours. - [Live View](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/live-view) (Software): A real-time preview of the camera image on a computer screen, used to frame and focus before capture. ## M - [Macro](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro) (Software): A stored sequence of PhotoRobot Controls commands that automates multi-step capture across folders. - [Macro photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-photography) (Photography techniques): Photographing small subjects at close range so that they appear life-size or larger on the sensor. - [Macro PI Action](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-pi-action) (Software): Runs PhotoRobot Intelligence steps such as Metadata Suggest and Ask PI automatically inside macros. - [Marketing angle](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/marketing-angle) (Photography techniques): A predefined, commercially attractive view of a product used in listings and campaigns. - [Mirrorless camera](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/mirrorless-camera) (Lighting and optics): A camera with interchangeable lenses but no mirror; the sensor feeds an electronic viewfinder. - [Modelling light](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/modelling-light) (Lighting and optics): A continuous lamp built into a strobe that previews where the flash light will fall. - [Motor driver](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/motor-driver) (Hardware): Electronics that supply power to a robot's motors; it determines how fast and precisely each axis can move. - [MTL](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#mtl) (360, 3D and output formats): Companion file to OBJ that describes materials, colours and texture maps. - [Multi-angle product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-multi-angle-product-photography) (Photography techniques): Photographing a product from multiple predefined camera positions and elevations. - [Multi-row 360](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multi-row-360) (360, 3D and output formats): A 360 spin captured at several camera elevations, so the viewer can rotate the product horizontally and vertically. - [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multicam) (Hardware): PhotoRobot multi-camera arch that captures several elevations at once for multi-row 360 and 3D photography. ## O - [OBJ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/obj) (360, 3D and output formats): A widely supported, text-based 3D model format storing geometry and UV mapping, with materials in an MTL file. - [OCR (optical character recognition)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ocr) (Software): Technology that converts text in an image into machine-readable text. - [On-model photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/on-model-photography) (Photography techniques): Photographing garments or accessories worn by a live model. - [Online marketplace](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/online-marketplace) (E-commerce and workflow): A platform where many sellers list products, such as Amazon, usually with strict image requirements. - [Optical glass plate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/optical-glass-plate) (Hardware): A turntable top made of optical glass that can be lit and photographed through, giving shadow-free images. ## P - [Packshot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/packshot) (Photography techniques): A clean, standardised product photo, usually on a white background, often showing the packaging. - [Panorama](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/panorama) (360, 3D and output formats): A wide or fully spherical image of a space that the viewer can look around in. - [PDP (product detail page)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pdp) (E-commerce and workflow): The web shop page dedicated to one product, with its images, description and buy button. - [Photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging) (360, 3D and output formats): Generating a 3D model from many overlapping photographs of an object. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable) (Hardware): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-academy) (E-commerce and workflow): PhotoRobot's official training and certification programme for operators, managers and integrators. - [PhotoRobot Account](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-account) (Software): The customer portal for PhotoRobot users, licences, billing, downloads, API keys and support. - [PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-cloud) (Software): PhotoRobot's cloud platform for storing, processing, hosting and distributing product images. - [PhotoRobot Cloud API](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api) (Software): PhotoRobot's REST API for integrating the studio with catalogue, DAM, PIM and e-commerce systems. - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls) (Software): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. - [PhotoRobot Developer Portal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/developer-portal) (Software): PhotoRobot's documentation site for the Cloud API, with interactive endpoint references. - [PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-intelligence) (Software): The AI layer in PhotoRobot Controls for capture quality control, metadata, visual questions and edits. - [PhotoRobot Locator](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-locator) (Software): App that finds PhotoRobot control units on the local network and opens their web interface. - [PhotoRobot OS](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#photorobot-os) (Hardware): Linux-based real-time operating system of PhotoRobot control units from generation 6 onwards. - [PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-studio) (E-commerce and workflow): PhotoRobot's own studio in Prague that produces photos, spins, 3D models and video for customers. - [PhotoRobot Touch](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-touch) (Software): PhotoRobot's iPhone app for handheld product photos, detail shots and simple 360 spins inside the PhotoRobot workflow. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer) (Software): PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. - [PI Profiles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#pi-profiles) (Software): Industry-specific profiles in PhotoRobot Intelligence that fine-tune or suggest presets for different product types. - [PIM (product information management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pim) (E-commerce and workflow): A system that stores and distributes product data, such as descriptions and attributes, to all sales channels. - [PINK (PhotoRobot Medical)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-pink) (Hardware): PhotoRobot clinical photography system that photographs the upper body of a standing patient from defined angles. - [Planogram](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/planogram) (E-commerce and workflow): A diagram of how products are placed on retail shelves; planogram images show the product face-on for it. - [PNG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/png) (360, 3D and output formats): A lossless image format that supports transparency; larger files than JPEG. - [Polarising filter](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/polarising-filter) (Lighting and optics): A lens filter that cuts reflections and glare from non-metallic surfaces. - [Polygon mesh](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#polygon-mesh) (360, 3D and output formats): The surface of a 3D model, built from connected vertices, edges and faces (usually triangles). - [Post-production](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/post-production) (Photography techniques): Everything done to images after capture: editing, background removal, cropping, export. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset) (Software): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Product animation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-animation) (360, 3D and output formats): A short looping sequence of product frames, often exported as an animated GIF or video. - [Product imaging workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-a-product-imaging-workflow) (E-commerce and workflow): The sequence of steps that turns a physical product into finished digital image assets. - [Product ingestion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-ingestion) (E-commerce and workflow): Receiving and registering products in the studio before photography: scanning, measuring, sorting. - [Product photography automation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-product-photography-automation) (Photography techniques): Software-driven workflows and automated hardware that standardise image capture and processing. - [Product returns](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-returns) (E-commerce and workflow): Goods sent back by customers; inaccurate images are a common cause. - [Product styling](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-styling) (Photography techniques): Preparing and arranging a product so it looks its best before it is photographed. - [Production line](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-line) (E-commerce and workflow): Several connected workstations that process products in stages, like an assembly line for images. - [Production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-workflow) (E-commerce and workflow): The stages a product passes through in a photo studio, from intake to delivery and return. - [PWS (PhotoRobot support programme)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pws) (E-commerce and workflow): PhotoRobot's support programme providing a single point of technical responsibility for the imaging workflow. ## Q - [QR code](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/qr-code) (E-commerce and workflow): A two-dimensional barcode that stores text or a URL and can be read by phone cameras. - [Quality control](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quality-control) (E-commerce and workflow): Checking images against requirements before they are published, and sending failures back. - [Quick mannequin exchange](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quick-mannequin-exchange) (Hardware): CUBE system for swapping mannequins in seconds, so the next garment can be styled while the current one is shot. ## R - [RAW file](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/raw-file) (360, 3D and output formats): The unprocessed sensor data saved by a camera, with maximum editing latitude. - [Reflector](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/reflector) (Lighting and optics): A surface that bounces light back onto the subject to fill shadows; also the dish fitted to a light. - [Remote support](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/remote-support) (E-commerce and workflow): Diagnosing and fixing a system over the internet, with the customer's consent, instead of on site. - [Retouching](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/retouching) (Photography techniques): Manual correction of an image, such as removing dust, blemishes or unwanted elements. - [RMA (return merchandise authorisation)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rma) (E-commerce and workflow): The authorised process for returning faulty equipment to the manufacturer for repair or replacement. - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm) (Hardware): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [Robotic camera control](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-camera-control) (Software): Automated coordination of camera triggering, movement and positioning by motorised devices and software. - [Robotic product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-product-photography) (Photography techniques): Product photography in which robotic hardware and control software position products and cameras and capture images. - [Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-turntable) (Hardware): PhotoRobot heavy-duty motorised turntable for machinery, engines and automotive parts, in 40 kg and 200 kg versions. - [Robotic workstation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-workstation) (Hardware): One complete automated photography station: robot, cameras, lights and controlling software. - [Rotary encoder](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotary-encoder) (Hardware): A sensor that reports the exact angular position of a rotating part, such as a turntable plate. - [RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower) (Hardware): PhotoRobot option that brings mains power into the rotating part of a robot, so a product can stay switched on while it turns. ## S - [Scalable product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-scalable-product-photography) (E-commerce and workflow): Using automation and standardised workflows to photograph large catalogues efficiently. - [Shadow-free photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shadow-free-photography) (Photography techniques): Lighting a product so that it casts no visible shadow on its background or support. - [Shooting list](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shooting-list) (E-commerce and workflow): The list of items to be photographed in a project, usually imported from a spreadsheet. - [Shutter lag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-lag) (Photography techniques): The delay between triggering a camera and the moment the image is actually exposed. - [Shutter release cable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-release-cable) (Hardware): A cable that fires the camera from an external device, such as a robot's control unit. - [Shutter speed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-speed) (Lighting and optics): How long the camera shutter stays open; with flash, the flash duration usually freezes the motion instead. - [SKU (stock keeping unit)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sku) (E-commerce and workflow): A retailer's internal code for one distinct product variant. - [SLA (service level agreement)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sla) (E-commerce and workflow): A contract that defines the service levels a provider commits to, such as response times. - [Slip ring](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/slip-ring) (Hardware): Rotary electrical joint that passes power and signals from a fixed part of a machine to a part that turns without limit. - [Smart Links](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smart-links) (Software): PhotoRobot page of stable URLs for the latest PhotoRobot Controls version, changelog and installers. - [SmartCodes](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes) (Software): Printed PhotoRobot trigger codes that start software actions when scanned, such as starting a capture sequence. - [Softbox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/softbox) (Lighting and optics): A light modifier: a fabric box with a diffuser front that turns a small light into a large, soft source. - [Sort to shelves](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sort-to-shelves) (Software): PhotoRobot Controls feature that assigns workspace and preset to an item by scanning a shelf code. - [SpinViewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/spinviewer) (Software): PhotoRobot's embeddable 360 product viewer for spins, adjustable in real time on any device. - [Still image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/still-image) (360, 3D and output formats): A single photograph of a product, as opposed to a spin, video or 3D model. - [STL](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/stl) (360, 3D and output formats): A simple 3D format describing only surface geometry as triangles, standard for 3D printing. - [Strobe](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/strobe) (Lighting and optics): A studio flash that emits a very short, powerful burst of light, freezing motion. - [Style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/style-guide) (E-commerce and workflow): A document that defines how products of a brand are to be photographed and presented. - [Suspension mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/suspension-mode) (Hardware): CUBE configuration that hangs a product in the air and rotates it, for items that cannot stand on a plate. - [SynchroBox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox) (Hardware): PhotoRobot multi-camera controller that fires each camera with its own advance; up to 8 cameras per unit, units can be linked. ## T - [Takt time](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#takt-time) (E-commerce and workflow): The available production time divided by the required output, i.e. the pace one product must be finished at. - [Tethered shooting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tethered-shooting) (Photography techniques): Shooting with the camera connected to a computer, which controls settings and receives every image directly. - [Throughput](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/throughput) (E-commerce and workflow): How many products a studio or workstation finishes per hour or shift. - [TIFF](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tiff) (360, 3D and output formats): A flexible, often uncompressed image format used in print and archiving. - [Time to market](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/time-to-market) (E-commerce and workflow): The time between a product arriving and its listing going live online. - [Top view](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/top-view) (Photography techniques): A photo taken from directly or steeply above the product. - [Transparent background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-background) (Photography techniques): An image whose background pixels are transparent, so the product can be placed on any colour or layout. - [Transparent mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-mannequin) (Hardware): A clear acrylic mannequin that interferes little with the colour of garments and is easy to remove in editing. - [Turn and swing angles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turn-and-swing-angles) (Photography techniques): PhotoRobot terms for the rotation angle of the product (turn) and the vertical angle of the camera (swing). - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turning-platform) (Hardware): PhotoRobot heavy-duty turntable for furniture and machinery, with plates up to 280 cm and a 1500 kg load capacity. ## U - [Unwrap](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/unwrap) (Software): PhotoRobot Controls tool that flattens text wrapping around cylindrical packaging so OCR can read it. - [USDZ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/usdz) (360, 3D and output formats): Pixar-developed packaged 3D format with native support on Apple devices, widely used for AR. ## V - [Vignette](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/vignette) (Lighting and optics): Darkening or lightening towards the edges of an image, either a lens fault or a deliberate effect. - [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-catwalk) (Hardware): PhotoRobot rotating platform with a treadmill belt that lets models walk an infinite runway for 360 fashion video. - [Virtual reality (VR)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-reality) (360, 3D and output formats): A fully computer-generated environment experienced through a headset. - [Visual product configurator](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/visual-product-configurator) (360, 3D and output formats): An interactive tool that shows a product changing in real time as the shopper chooses options. ## W - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook) (Software): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. - [WebP](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webp) (360, 3D and output formats): Google's web image format with efficient lossy and lossless compression and transparency. - [WebXR](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#webxr) (360, 3D and output formats): Web standard that lets browsers display AR and VR content without a separate app. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background) (Photography techniques): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. - [White balance](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-balance) (Lighting and optics): Adjusting an image so neutral whites and greys show no colour cast under the given light. - [Wizard mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/wizard-mode) (Software): PhotoRobot Controls mode that guides an operator through predefined capture steps one at a time. - [Workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/workspace) (Software): In PhotoRobot Controls, the list of hardware (robots, cameras, lights) used for a specific photoshoot. ## Z - [Zero-clearance transmission](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/zero-clearance-transmission) (Hardware): A drive without mechanical play between motor and plate, so the plate stops exactly where commanded. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-video # SECTION: glossary > 360-product-video # TYPE: Glossary term --- # 360 product video > A video of a rotating product, optionally with camera movement, produced on an automated turntable. Also known as: product video. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A 360 product video shows a product rotating, recorded as video rather than as a sequence of stills. More advanced versions add camera movement for a flying camera effect, and the playback speed can be varied for a more dramatic presentation. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls records video with a timeline of points that start and stop recording, rotate or pause the turntable and change camera elevation. Combining object rotation with camera swing produces the [flying camera effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flying-camera-effect). ## See on photorobot.com - [360 product video output type](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video) - [Creating video with PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/create-video-photorobot-controls-user-support) ## Related terms - [Flying camera effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flying-camera-effect): Video in which the camera seems to fly around the product, made by combining rotation with camera movement. - [Product animation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-animation): A short looping sequence of product frames, often exported as an animated GIF or video. - [Automated product video capture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-video-capture): Recording product videos with robotic camera systems and software-controlled studio equipment. - [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-catwalk): PhotoRobot rotating platform with a treadmill belt that lets models walk an infinite runway for 360 fashion video. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 56 pages. Most relevant: - [360 Product Video - PhotoRobot Example Output Type](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video): Create 360 product video with robotic precision thanks to software automation of hardware, cameras, lights, and video capture tools. - [What is Automated Product Video Capture?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-video-capture): A technical definition of automated product video capture, detailing the use of robotic camera systems and software-controlled studio equipment. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): …photography, 360 product photography, 3D object modeling, product animation, and 360 product video. - [How to Create Video in PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/create-video-photorobot-controls-user-support): This PhotoRobot User Manual describes how to create a product video in PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”). - [CATWALK](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk): An infinite 360 runway for fashion photography, filming product videos, and producing online fashion shows Presentation in Motion. - [Make the Most of Your Brand’s 360° and 3D Imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-and-3d-imagery): …marketing campaigns, using new file formats for engagement, and converting spinsets into product videos. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): At the same time, other stations focus on the production of 360 spins, 3D models, and 360 product video. - [PhotoRobot Automated Photography - Example Applications](https://www.photorobot.com/applications): Compare PhotoRobot automated photography applications with example outputs in 2D + 360 + 3D and product video, including capture & overall production times.Follow PhotoRobot from item intake &… - [What’s New in the November PhotoRobot Software Release](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/november-software-release): …the latest software release, showcasing new tools and features for freemask support, product videos, and auto tilt correction. - [Unlock the PhotoRobot-Powered Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-workflow): It presents the PhotoRobot solution in detail: from producing interactive 360 + 3D outputs and 360 product video, to accelerating workflows. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-viewer # SECTION: glossary > 360-product-viewer # TYPE: Glossary term --- # 360 product viewer > Web software that plays a 360 spin and lets the visitor rotate and zoom a product. Also known as: 360 viewer, spin viewer, product viewer. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A 360 product viewer is web software, typically HTML5 and JavaScript, that loads the frames of a 360 spin and lets the visitor rotate, zoom and sometimes open hotspots. It is embedded on product pages and must load quickly on mobile devices. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot provides its own viewer, the [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) with the SpinViewer, as part of its hosting. PhotoRobot's blog lists advantages of 360 viewers and which businesses use them. ## See on photorobot.com - [7 advantages of 360 product viewers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-advantages-360-product-viewers-for-websites) - [Examples of 3D and 360 product viewers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/examples-3d-and-360-product-viewers) ## Related terms - [SpinViewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/spinviewer): PhotoRobot's embeddable 360 product viewer for spins, adjustable in real time on any device. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer): PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [Hotspot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hotspot): A clickable point on a product image or spin that opens a detail image, zoom or annotation. - [CDN (content delivery network)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cdn): A network of servers worldwide that delivers files from a location close to each visitor. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 36 pages. Most relevant: - [Examples of 3D and 360 Product Viewers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/examples-3d-and-360-product-viewers): 3D and 360-degree product viewers exist in many forms, so it’s important to look at some examples before deciding what might be best for your business. - [360-Degree Product Viewers for E-Commerce Businesses](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-viewers-for-e-commerce-businesses): 360-degree product viewers provide a digital view of a product from all sides and angles, top to bottom, and they are a valuable asset for online retail and e-commerce. - [7 Advantages to 360 Product Viewers for your Website](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-advantages-360-product-viewers-for-websites): …online presence and products to sell can realize significant advantages from deploying a 360-degree product viewer. - [Which Businesses Need a 360 Product Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/which-businesses-need-360-product-viewers): There are several factors you can use to determine when your e-commerce business needs a 360 product viewer. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hot spots, panoramas & more with the PhotoRobot Product Viewer. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Photogrammetry software then composites images into a 3D model for hosting on 3D product viewers or 3D product configurators. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): 3D models are popular in eCommerce for use with 3D product viewers, product configurators, and AR / VR. - [PhotoRobot Viewer Layouts & Configs - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-viewer-layouts-and-configurations): In PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”), PhotoRobot Viewer is a 2D + 3D + 360 product viewer. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): The software composites photos into a digital model for use with 3D product viewers, product configurators, and AR / VR. - [Which Businesses Benefit from 3D Product Photography Platforms?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/which-businesses-3d-product-photography-platforms): Want to see an example of the 3D software in action? Check out Samsonite’s 3D product viewer. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin # SECTION: glossary > 360-spin # TYPE: Glossary term --- # 360 spin > An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. Also known as: product spin, 360-degree spin, spinset, spin set. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A 360 spin is a sequence of images taken at evenly spaced angles around a product, usually 24 to 72 frames per rotation, played back in a viewer so the shopper can rotate the product by dragging. The set of frames is often called a spinset. A single-row spin shows the product from one elevation. More rows at different elevations make a multi-row spin, often called a 3D spin. More frames give smoother rotation at the cost of capture time and file size. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot states that a spin of 24 to 36 angles is usually captured within 10 to 20 seconds, and that stills, marketing images and planograms can be produced in the same batch. Spins are published in the [SpinViewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/spinviewer) or exported as image sequences. ## See on photorobot.com - [360 spin output type](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin) - [360 product photography: formats and production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) ## Related terms - [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-360-product-photography): Capturing a sequence of images around a rotating product to create an interactive 360-degree view. - [Multi-row 360](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multi-row-360): A 360 spin captured at several camera elevations, so the viewer can rotate the product horizontally and vertically. - [SpinViewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/spinviewer): PhotoRobot's embeddable 360 product viewer for spins, adjustable in real time on any device. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Auto-centering](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/auto-centering): Software correction that aligns a product to the centre of rotation in every frame so a spin does not wobble. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 249 pages. Most relevant: - [Effective Equipment for 360 Spin Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography): Looking for the most effective equipment for 360 spin photography? Accelerate your visual content production with this guide on 3D product photography solutions, including devices and software for… - [360 Degree Spin Photography of Dirt Bikes and Quads](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/spin-photography-dirt-bikes-and-quads): See PhotoRobot turntables in action in this article featuring 360 degree spin photography of dirt bikes and quads by Buffler. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Complete Image Hosting & Delivery Easily distribute product content online, including: image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hot spots, panoramas & more with the PhotoRobot Product Viewer. - [360 Spin Product Photography - PhotoRobot Example Outputs](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin): One click automatically captures, post-processes, and publishes single-row and multi-row 360 spins consisting of 24, 36 or more still images. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): …distributes software and hardware for the automation of in-house photography: stills, 360 spins, 3D models, animation & video. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots, Software What is 360° Product Photography? 360° product photography (also 360° spin, spin photography, or 360° packshot photography) appears… - [360 Spin Photography of Bicycles with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-spin-photography-bicycles): Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography Quick, Easy, and Effective 360 Spin Photography of Bicycles. - [Make the Most of Your Brand’s 360° and 3D Imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-and-3d-imagery): These include recycling existing imagery for future marketing campaigns, using new file formats for engagement, and converting spinsets into product videos. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): There can be still images, marketing angles, close-ups, 360 spins, video, and 3D product models. - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): …for iPhone product photography of handheld still images, detailed shots, and simple 360 spins. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model # SECTION: glossary > 3d-model # TYPE: Glossary term --- # 3D model > A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. Also known as: 3D models, 3D product model. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A 3D model is a digital representation of an object's shape (geometry, usually a polygon mesh) and surface (textures and materials). Unlike a spin, it can be viewed from any angle, placed in augmented reality or used in configurators. Product 3D models are created by modelling in CAD or 3D software, or by scanning a physical product, for example with photogrammetry from many overlapping photographs. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot hardware captures the photo sets needed for [photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging), for example on [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame), which photographs from above and below the glass. PhotoRobot Controls integrates Apple Object Capture and supports the USDZ, OBJ/MTL and STL formats. ## See on photorobot.com - [3D model output type](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model) - [Supported 3D model formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats) ## Related terms - [Photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging): Generating a 3D model from many overlapping photographs of an object. - [Apple Object Capture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/apple-object-capture): Apple's photogrammetry technology that creates a 3D model from a series of photos. - [USDZ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/usdz): Pixar-developed packaged 3D format with native support on Apple devices, widely used for AR. - [OBJ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/obj): A widely supported, text-based 3D model format storing geometry and UV mapping, with materials in an MTL file. - [Augmented reality (AR)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/augmented-reality): Overlaying digital content, such as a 3D product model, on the live camera view of the real world. - [Polygon mesh](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#polygon-mesh): The surface of a 3D model, built from connected vertices, edges and faces (usually triangles). ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 140 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats): Read an overview of PhotoRobot Controls App supported 3D model formats, their features, use cases, and compatibility across platforms. - [How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model): See how to make a simple 3D model using Apple’s Object Capture API integrated with PhotoRobot’s Control & Automation software. - [3D Models and Augmented Reality in Digital Marketing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing): Understanding how to utilize 3D modeling and augmented reality in digital marketing can be of great importance in 2020, especially in e-commerce. - [360-Degree Photography and 3D Models for E-Commerce: Why both?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-photography-3d-models-for-e-commerce): 360-degree photography and 3D models are two formats helping top brands and retailers stay ahead of the competition in today’s e-commerce. - [3D Model Photography - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model): Easily create a 3D model from photos with PhotoRobot software integration of product photography equipment, cameras, lights, post-processing, and photogrammetry. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): 3D eCommerce uses 3D modeling to create an advanced product viewing experience. - [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame): Capture 360° spins and image galleries for 3D modeling as camera and background travel around products, even under the glass. - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): We describe everything from the automated photography, to 3D model creation and optimization for AR platforms like Emersya or Sketchfab. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): There can be still images, marketing angles, close-ups, 360 spins, video, and 3D product models. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): 3D models stitch together a series of photos using photogrammetry scanning and special software. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/alpha-channel # SECTION: glossary > alpha-channel # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Alpha channel > An extra image channel that stores the transparency of every pixel. Also known as: alpha mask, alpha channel masking. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. An alpha channel is an additional channel in an image that stores the opacity of each pixel, from fully transparent to fully opaque. It allows soft, partially transparent edges, for example on hair or glass, which a hard clipping path cannot represent. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's glossary articles describe automatic alpha channel masking replacing manual vector clipping paths in automated workflows. In PhotoRobot exports, transparency is kept in PNG and WebP files. ## Related terms - [Transparent background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-background): An image whose background pixels are transparent, so the product can be placed on any colour or layout. - [Clipping path](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/clipping-path): A hand-drawn vector outline used to cut a product out of its background. - [Background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal): Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. - [PNG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/png): A lossless image format that supports transparency; larger files than JPEG. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 7 pages. Most relevant: - [What is Robotic Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-product-photography): Control software applies predefined algorithms to crop images, adjust color balances, and perform alpha channel masking immediately after image capture. - [What is 360 Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-360-product-photography): Automated post-processing scripts align the images and remove the background using alpha channel masking once all frames are captured. - [What is a Product Imaging Workflow?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-a-product-imaging-workflow): It uses predefined algorithms and alpha channel masking to eliminate the need for manual retouching. - [What is Automated Product Content Production?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-content-production): Software algorithms automatically perform alpha channel masking for background removal, margin homogenization, and color grading, ensuring absolute visual consistency across entire product categories. - [What is E-commerce Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging): Software automates the background removal via alpha channel masking. - [What is Product Photography Automation?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-product-photography-automation): Techniques such as alpha channel masking separate the product from its background automatically. - [What is Scalable Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-scalable-product-photography): A scalable workflow replaces manual clipping paths with automated alpha channel masking and algorithmic background removal. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aperture # SECTION: glossary > aperture # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Aperture > The adjustable lens opening, given as an f-number; smaller openings give more depth of field. Also known as: f-stop, f-number. Category: Lighting and optics. The aperture is the adjustable opening in a lens that controls how much light passes through, expressed as an f-number (f/4, f/8, f/16). A higher f-number means a smaller opening, less light and a greater depth of field. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot notes that greater depth of field requires a higher f-number, which in turn demands more light intensity; this is one reason it recommends strobes for larger products. PhotoRobot Controls sets aperture remotely on supported Canon cameras. ## See on photorobot.com - [Depth of field calculator](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator) ## Related terms - [Depth of field](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/depth-of-field): The distance range in front of and behind the focus point that appears acceptably sharp. - [Exposure](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/exposure): The amount of light that reaches the sensor, set by aperture, shutter speed, ISO and light output. - [Hyperfocal distance](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hyperfocal-distance): The focus distance that gives the maximum depth of field, extending sharpness to infinity. - [Focal length](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focal-length): The lens property, in millimetres, that sets the angle of view and magnification. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): Therefore, it is possible to set the time, aperture, ISO sensitivity and other settings while monitoring the scene through live-view. - [Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions): Meanwhile, turning the controller slowly changes it in 1/10 f-stop steps, and turning fast (“twisting”) in 1/1 f-stop steps. - [FOMEI Digital Pro X Studio Flash - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-digital-pro-x): How to Input Correct Exposure Value The user should input the correct exposure value into the Digital Pro X when its Power Intensity (F-stop) is F1.1. - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): …total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): The lens should have a large aperture (F2.8), and a 1:1 ratio to photograph products at their actual size. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): …your lens – detect your lenses’ optimal performance; you are looking for the highest aperture value with acceptable sharpness and contrast transmission – most lenses drop image quality at about f/16. - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): …total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. - [Depth of Field Chart for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart): The Depth of Field chart shows total depth of field for common subject distances and apertures, with the smaller numbers in each cell giving the precise near–far focus range. - [Depth of Field Calculator for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator): …total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. - [Guide to Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography): The high intensity of the strobe lights makes it possible to use higher aperture and reach this depth of field, while also playing a crucial role in shooting larger products. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/api # SECTION: glossary > api # TYPE: Glossary term --- # API (application programming interface) > A defined interface through which one piece of software can use the functions or data of another. Also known as: API, REST API, application programming interface. Category: E-commerce and workflow. An application programming interface (API) is a defined way for software systems to exchange data and call each other's functions. Web APIs, often REST APIs over HTTP with JSON, connect a photo studio with shops, PIM, DAM and ERP systems. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot provides APIs at two levels: the [Cloud API](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api) for integrating the whole studio workflow with customer systems, and an API in each robot's control unit, which controls only machine movement and is available on request. ## See on photorobot.com - [System integration and API connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Cloud API](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api): PhotoRobot's REST API for integrating the studio with catalogue, DAM, PIM and e-commerce systems. - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. - [Export feed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed): A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 75 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): Explore the detailed summary for PhotoRobot customers on the system integration and rich API connectivity of PhotoRobot systems. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Developer Portal & Cloud API V2](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/developer-portal-cloud-api-v2): …photography workflows for modern enterprise using the PhotoRobot Developer Portal & API V2 for cloud integrations. - [How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model): See how to make a simple 3D model using Apple’s Object Capture API integrated with PhotoRobot’s Control & Automation software. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): Advanced integrators may alternatively control the unit directly through its API. - [PhotoRobot Control System - Overview for System Offers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/control-system-overview): …Licenses Firmware Updates Service Interface Access for Remote Diagnostics System Cloud API with PhotoRobot _Controls (for the integration into customer systems if the customer’s own control system… - [CASE 1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300): …several automatic product-positioning lasers, high motor-power, remote control, API, reflection boards and flag holders - all in easily portable form - for high-productive studio work - or on the go. - [PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller): The cloud system has an API for easy integration with the customer’s other systems, and the robot’s control unit also features an API for integration with third-party systems. - [PhotoRobot PWS](https://www.photorobot.com/pws): …offline keys, generation limits; license release/transfer, expiry/suspension, hybrid & API licenses (keys never sent in plaintext). - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): Judge for yourself the levels of productivity thanks to full software integration of robots, cameras, lights, post-processing, APIs, and publishing. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Refer to the PhotoRobot System Integration & API Summary for an overview of the integration process. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/apple-object-capture # SECTION: glossary > apple-object-capture # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Apple Object Capture > Apple's photogrammetry technology that creates a 3D model from a series of photos. Also known as: Object Capture. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. Object Capture is Apple's photogrammetry technology, available on Apple platforms, that reconstructs a textured 3D model from a series of overlapping photographs of an object. It is available to developers as an API, so applications can turn their own photo sets into USDZ and other model formats. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls integrates Apple Object Capture, which is why it can output 3D models in USDZ, OBJ with MTL, and STL. PhotoRobot's tutorial shows how to create a 3D model with Object Capture from photos taken on a PhotoRobot turntable. ## See on photorobot.com - [Object Capture: how to make a 3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) - [Supported 3D model formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats) ## Related terms - [Photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging): Generating a 3D model from many overlapping photographs of an object. - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. - [USDZ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/usdz): Pixar-developed packaged 3D format with native support on Apple devices, widely used for AR. - [OBJ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/obj): A widely supported, text-based 3D model format storing geometry and UV mapping, with materials in an MTL file. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 6 pages. Most relevant: - [How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model): See how to make a simple 3D model using Apple’s Object Capture API integrated with PhotoRobot’s Control & Automation software. - [3D Object Modeling in PhotoRobot Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo): …the Frame, while our automated photography software integrates functionality for Apple Object Capture. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): Most recently, we experimented with Apple Object Capture to make a simple 3D model from photographs in under a few minutes. - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): This takes only minutes with PhotoRobot, which scans photos using Apple Object Capture to generate the 3D model. - [PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats): This is thanks to CAPP’s integration of Apple Object Capture, which uses photogrammetry scanning to create a 3D model from photos. - [PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm for 360 Object Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robotic-arm-360-object-photography): Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots The Robotic Camera Arm for Impressive 360-Degree Object Capture. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/approval-workflow # SECTION: glossary > approval-workflow # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Approval workflow > A defined step in which managers or clients approve or reject images before publishing. Also known as: approval process, client approval. Category: E-commerce and workflow. An approval workflow is a defined review step in which internal managers or external clients approve or reject images, with comments, before they are published or delivered. It prevents unchecked images from reaching shops and documents who approved what. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls has an integrated approval process for internal and external reviewers. Clients can be given their own login and see items once they are set to Verified, then approve or reject them or attach feedback for further retouching. ## See on photorobot.com - [Digital asset management: approval process](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management) ## Related terms - [Quality control](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quality-control): Checking images against requirements before they are published, and sending failures back. - [Item status](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-status): The production state of an item in PhotoRobot Controls, such as Received, Captured, Edited or Published. - [DAM (digital asset management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dam): Software for storing, organising, searching and distributing images, video and other media files. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 10 pages. Most relevant: - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): An integrated approval process within the application makes review & approval possible for both internal and external team members or clients. - [Studio Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow): Reduce product content review times with integrated approval processes for internal managers or direct client access. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): …properties Individual photographer pages to share assignments and report on production Approval processes for studio managers, quality assurance teams, and client review Client pages to view projects,… - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Integrated approval processes within the application make QA possible for internal and external team members, or clients. - [What’s New in the February Controls Software Release 2.6.0](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/february-software-release): We introduce improvements to the Cloud Interface, new workflow tools, enhancements to project sharing, and client-approval workflow. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): Get project overviews, item status reports, client approval, barcode reader support and much more. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): …This includes various export formats available for the same content, download, and client review. - [PhotoRobot Access Control Policy](https://www.photorobot.com/security/access-control): Roles include: Production Backstage Retoucher Access is granted based on: job responsibilities principle of least privilege approval workflow Provisioning. - [PhotoRobot Change Management Policy](https://www.photorobot.com/security/change-management): …updates, config changes Emergency changes: immediate fixes during incidents Approval Process. - [PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/enterprise-compliance): Change implementation follows a structured approval workflow as defined by the Change Management Policy. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aps-c # SECTION: glossary > aps-c # TYPE: Glossary term --- # APS-C > A camera sensor format smaller than full frame, which crops the image by a factor of about 1.5–1.6. Also known as: APS-C sensor, crop sensor. Category: Lighting and optics. APS-C is a sensor format of roughly 23 x 15 mm, smaller than full frame. It crops the field of view by a factor of about 1.5 to 1.6, so a 50 mm lens frames like a 75 to 80 mm lens on full frame. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's camera resolution guide explains that APS-C sensors capture less of the scene with a given lens and require different settings and stronger lighting, and recommends full-frame cameras for product photography. Its Depth of Field Calculator supports Canon APS-C as well as full frame. ## See on photorobot.com - [Understanding camera resolution](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution) ## Related terms - [Full-frame sensor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/full-frame-sensor): A camera sensor the size of 35 mm film (36 x 24 mm), preferred for product photography. - [Crop factor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#crop-factor): The ratio between full frame and a smaller sensor, used to compare fields of view. - [Depth of field](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/depth-of-field): The distance range in front of and behind the focus point that appears acceptably sharp. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 6 pages. Most relevant: - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): In product photography, full-frame sensors have better low-light performance, and often greater dynamic range than APS-C sensors. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): Affordable models with a smaller APS-C sensor can be a disadvantage. - [Depth of Field Calculator for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator): The calculator is for everyday studio and product photography on full-frame and Canon APS-C cameras, with metric and imperial units. - [DSLR vs Mirrorless Cameras in 2020: Comparison and Review](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/dslr-vs-mirrorless-cameras-in-2020-comparison-and-review): This APS-C mirrorless camera, introduced in late 2019, has risen to the top spot in the mirrorless camera wars, and is definitely worth consideration as the go-to for enthusiasts willing to spend a… - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): Macro photography of jewelry calls for an SLR camera with either an APS-C or Full Frame sensor. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): Most commonly, photographers use full frame (35 mm width) APS-C (24 mm) camera sensor sizes. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/augmented-reality # SECTION: glossary > augmented-reality # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Augmented reality (AR) > Overlaying digital content, such as a 3D product model, on the live camera view of the real world. Also known as: AR, augmented reality. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. Augmented reality (AR) overlays digital content on a live view of the real world, typically through a smartphone camera. In e-commerce it lets shoppers place a 3D model of a product in their own room at real scale before buying. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot lists 360 spins and 3D models for AR and VR among the outputs of its systems, and USDZ output from PhotoRobot Controls is the native AR format on Apple devices. PhotoRobot's blog covers AR product visualisation, AR shopping apps and AR in marketing. ## See on photorobot.com - [AR product visualisation](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization) - [Augmented reality for online retail and e-commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce) ## Related terms - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. - [USDZ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/usdz): Pixar-developed packaged 3D format with native support on Apple devices, widely used for AR. - [Virtual reality (VR)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-reality): A fully computer-generated environment experienced through a headset. - [glTF / GLB](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#gltf): Open Khronos standard for transmitting 3D models efficiently on the web; GLB is its single-file binary form. - [Visual product configurator](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/visual-product-configurator): An interactive tool that shows a product changing in real time as the shopper chooses options. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 42 pages. Most relevant: - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): Discover augmented reality (AR) and Web AR product visualization using PhotoRobot’s top 3D & AR content hosting platforms. - [5 Use Cases: Augmented Reality in Marketing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/use-cases-augmented-reality-marketing): Augmented reality is seeing wider adoption in marketing strategies for retail both in-store and online. - [Augmented Reality for Online Retail and E-Commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce): Augmented Reality (AR) for online retail and e-commerce is rapidly increasing in popularity, providing webshops and e-tailers a new format to enrich the product experience. - [Statistics on AR Apps for Online Retail in 2020](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/statistics-ar-apps-online-retail-2020): Statistics show that the role of AR apps for e-commerce and online retail has seen noticeable and steady growth every year, from early 2012 to today’s 2020. - [Challenges to Mass Adoption for AR Shopping Apps](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/challenges-ar-shopping-apps): Numerous challenges face the mass adoption of AR shopping apps in online retail, but many leading brands are already ahead of the game. - [Examples of AR Shopping Applications: Then to Now](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-shopping-apps-2020): The list of examples for AR shopping apps in 2020 is evolving at a steady pace, with more top brands and e-tailers using AR to enrich product content for online shoppers. - [Emersya: Interactive Product Experiences in 3D, AR and VR](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/emersya-product-experiences-in-3d-ar-and-vr): Emersya is an online publishing platform for fully interactive product experiences in 3D, AR, and VR. - [3D Models and Augmented Reality in Digital Marketing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing): Understanding how to utilize 3D modeling and augmented reality in digital marketing can be of great importance in 2020, especially in e-commerce. - [PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats): It has native iOS support, and is widely popular for creating 3D and augmented reality (AR) experiences on Apple devices. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): 3D eCommerce deploys 3D modeling for online product visualization, product configuration, and VR / AR to bolster digital marketing and sales. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/auto-centering # SECTION: glossary > auto-centering # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Auto-centering > Software correction that aligns a product to the centre of rotation in every frame so a spin does not wobble. Also known as: auto-centring, automatic centering, semi-automatic centering, object centering. Category: Software. Auto-centering corrects a 360 spin in which the product was not placed exactly at the centre of rotation, which makes it appear to wobble or tilt. The software finds the product in each frame and shifts the images so it stays centred. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls offers fully automatic centring, which detects product edges and calculates the centre in each image, and semi-automatic centring, where the operator centres three images and the algorithm corrects the rest of the spinset. Centring works on the horizontal and vertical axis, and the original files are kept as a backup. ## See on photorobot.com - [Auto-centering 360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography) - [Semi-automatic centering video](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/semi-automatic-centering-image-sets) ## Related terms - [Centre of rotation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centre-of-rotation): The axis a turntable spins around; a product placed on it stays in the same spot in every frame. - [Laser positioning](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/laser-positioning): Lasers projected onto the turntable that show where to place a product so it sits at the centre of rotation. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [AutoCrop](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/autocrop): Automatic cropping based on the detected product position, with set aspect ratio and padding. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 16 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot_Controls: Auto-Centering 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography): Among the many functions of PhotoRobot_Controls is automatic centering for 360 product photography. - [Semi Automatic Centering of PhotoRobot 360 Spin Image Sets](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/semi-automatic-centering-image-sets): Watch a video demo of the semi automatic centering feature of PhotoRobot Controls App. - [Pro Tips: Advanced Photo Editing Tools and Techniques](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools): Automate everything from basic editing like image cropping & object centering, to advanced tools for background removal, image overlay, and more. - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): If results are unsatisfactory, adjust auto centering by clicking Adjust manually. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): With PhotoRobot’s automatic object centering, cropping, scaling, background removal and more, usually product photos are web-ready immediately after capture. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Remove product tilt and wobble from spinsets and animations with automatic object centering. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): …product detectionVarious aspect ratio supportedConfigurable padding for croppingSemi-automatic centering toolCentering available in horizontal and vertical axisBackground removalHighlight… - [What is Automated Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-imaging): This includes global color grading, automatic centering, margin homogenization, and dynamic background removal. - [Quick, Easy, and Effective Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photoshoots-photorobot): This is to showcase how easily you can fix this in post processing with our semi auto centering feature. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): We also showcase advanced image post-processing features, like auto centering spin image sets, and background removal by freemasking. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/autocrop # SECTION: glossary > autocrop # TYPE: Glossary term --- # AutoCrop > Automatic cropping based on the detected product position, with set aspect ratio and padding. Also known as: auto crop, automatic cropping. Category: Software. AutoCrop crops each image automatically around the detected product. Combined with a fixed aspect ratio and padding, it gives every image of a catalogue the same framing and margins. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot Controls, AutoCrop uses intelligent detection of the product position and is typically saved in a preset together with aspect ratio and padding. The editor's crop can also resize the output to a target pixel size for channel-ready delivery. ## See on photorobot.com - [Image editing tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) - [From crop to channel-ready delivery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/channel-ready-export) ## Related terms - [Auto-centering](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/auto-centering): Software correction that aligns a product to the centre of rotation in every frame so a spin does not wobble. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Image consistency](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-consistency): All product images in a range sharing the same angles, framing, lighting and background. - [Batch processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/batch-processing): Applying the same edits to many images at once instead of one by one. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 14 pages. Most relevant: - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Take advantage of intelligent detection of product position to automatically crop items with AutoCrop. - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): By default, Auto crop is enabled, meaning that the edges of the object are detected and crop is adjusted by the software automatically. - [PhotoRobot_Controls: Auto-Centering 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography): Easily create a ghost mannequin effect, automatically crop photos, handle background removal and more with PhotoRobot. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): Crop – When cropping images, there are three main controls: the Auto crop toggle, selection of Aspect ratio, and a slider to adjust Padding (how much space there is around the photographed object). - [Pro Tips: Advanced Photo Editing Tools and Techniques](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools): The AutoCrop tool uses intelligent detection to identify object positions and define where to crop product images. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): 08:59* The software automates basic to advanced post-processing operations, from auto cropping images and centering spins, to background removal by level, flood, or freemask. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): Cloud processing with unlimited resolutionWebGL 2.0 - work with all images at onceAuto-Run after capture (when enabled)AutoCrop - based on intelligent product detectionVarious aspect ratio… - [How to Improve Productivity in Fashion Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/productivity-fashion-product-photography): Auto crop or center photos, denoise, control transparency and more in only a few clicks of the mouse. - [How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model): The Auto Crop function takes only 5 seconds to process all photos and apply the editing operation. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): Photographers have tools for automatic cropping, object centering, background removal, image sharpening and much more. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/automatic-publishing # SECTION: glossary > automatic-publishing # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Automatic publishing > Making finished images available online immediately after capture and processing, without manual upload. Also known as: automated publishing, instant publishing. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Automatic publishing makes finished product images available on the web or in connected systems as soon as they are captured and processed, without anyone copying or uploading files. It shortens the time to market and removes a manual step where files can be mixed up. ## How PhotoRobot uses it When the cloud version of PhotoRobot Controls is used for capture, images are ready for hosting immediately with no file transfer, and dynamic XML or JSON feeds deliver them to target sites. PhotoRobot notes this lets the first batch of a large order go online while the rest is still in progress. ## See on photorobot.com - [System integration: output data](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration) ## Related terms - [Export feed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed): A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. - [Image hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-hosting): Storing images on a server and delivering them to websites on request. - [PhotoRobot Cloud API](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api): PhotoRobot's REST API for integrating the studio with catalogue, DAM, PIM and e-commerce systems. - [Time to market](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/time-to-market): The time between a product arriving and its listing going live online. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 22 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Take advantage of instant, automatic publishing immediately after image capture via the PhotoRobot Cloud platform. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): …macro or hand-held shots Support for interior, panoramic photos Viewer integration for automatic publishing of web-ready imagery Truly, most repeatable processes the product portfolio or style guide… - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Meanwhile, the product viewer also has customizable animation parameters, image compression, and automatic publishing. - [PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting): With PhotoRobot, everything is ready for immediate publishing after capture to save time and free up human resources. - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): Immediate publishing. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): Automatic Publishing. - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): The primary advantage of this is the automatic publishing to a target website instantly after capturing images. - [Weighing and Measuring Products with CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/weighing-and-measuring-products): Additionally, all information is instantly present in a database for the automated publishing of product details alongside imagery. - [Advantages to Using a Visual Product Configurator](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/advantages-product-configurators): The Spinviewer also has configurable JPEG compression for better loading times, and automatic publishing with no file transfer needed. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): Instead, all imagery after capture is immediately ready for upload and automatic publishing via the Cloud platform. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal # SECTION: glossary > background-removal # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Background removal > Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. Also known as: background separation, cut-out. Category: Photography techniques. Background removal separates the product from the background of a photo so the background can be replaced with pure white, a colour or transparency. It can be done manually with clipping paths or masks, or automatically with algorithms that rely on controlled lighting. Automatic methods work best when the background is evenly lit and clearly different from the product. Back-lit silhouettes, glass plates and key colours make separation reliable even for complex edges. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls removes backgrounds semi-automatically or manually, by level or by flood fill, with a Highlight white tool to find the right threshold. Other methods are [Freemask](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/freemask) from front- and back-lit shots and [chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key). Settings are saved in presets and applied to every image after capture. ## See on photorobot.com - [How to remove backgrounds from product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos) - [Image editing tools: background](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) ## Related terms - [Freemask](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/freemask): PhotoRobot background removal from a front-lit and a back-lit silhouette shot of the same angle. - [Chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key): Removing everything of one specific colour from an image, such as a green screen or a coloured stand. - [Clipping path](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/clipping-path): A hand-drawn vector outline used to cut a product out of its background. - [Alpha channel](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/alpha-channel): An extra image channel that stores the transparency of every pixel. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. - [Transparent background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-background): An image whose background pixels are transparent, so the product can be placed on any colour or layout. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 58 pages. Most relevant: - [Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos): PhotoRobot presents how to capture product photos with precise background removal, and deploy software tools for background adjustment and optimization. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): When getting started, it is recommended to keep the “auto center” function on, as seen in the picture below: Background Removal. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): …as a microchip to as large as automobiles) Shape (for products that require advanced background removal operations) Color (light, dark, reflective, semi- or fully- transparent) Capture settings… - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): You can adjust or remove the background semi-automatically or manually with 3 types of background removal functions: by level, by flood, or freemasking. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Identify the correct threshold for by-level background removal, and apply across images. - [Pro Tips: Advanced Photo Editing Tools and Techniques](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools): Automate everything from basic editing like image cropping & object centering, to advanced tools for background removal, image overlay, and more. - [What’s New in the November PhotoRobot Software Release](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/november-software-release): The latest release in PhotoRobot_Controls delivers new tools & features for background removal, photo tilt correction, and product videos. - [Using AI to Enhance Product Photo Backgrounds](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-product-photo-backgrounds): While PhotoRobot is able to automatically remove the background from product photos, AI tools can replace backgrounds with brand-accurate flair. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Post-production: photo editing and retouching (background removal, image enhancements); 5. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): In any case, PhotoRobot equipment & software makes background removal from nearly any object quick and hassle-free. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/backlight # SECTION: glossary > backlight # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Backlight > Light from behind the subject, used to brighten the background or outline the product. Also known as: back light, backlighting. Category: Lighting and optics. A backlight is a light placed behind the subject. In product photography it is used to brighten the background to pure white or to create a silhouette that separates the product from the background. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot uses a back-lit shot for [Freemask](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/freemask) background removal. Its studio lighting overview names excessive backlight intensity as one of the most common mistakes: it whitens the background but causes light-wrap, loss of gloss, colour shifts and loss of texture. ## Related terms - [Light-wrap](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/light-wrap): Background light spilling around the edges of a product, softening its contours. - [Freemask](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/freemask): PhotoRobot background removal from a front-lit and a back-lit silhouette shot of the same angle. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. - [Diffusion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/diffusion): Scattering light through a translucent material to make it softer and more even. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): One of the most common mistakes in studio lighting is using excessive backlight intensity for product photography. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): For photographing jewelry, we also use an integrated light tent, top lights, and backlighting for optimal translucence. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): for the heavy backlight of a pure white background. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): …LAN Socket (6) Service Doors (7) Patients Telescopic Handlebars (8) Front Lights (9) Back Light (10) Lampshade (11) – parasite light protection Camera Slider Assembly (12) Digital Camera with 50mm… - [Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos): This back-lit shot will then serve as a pixel-exact mask within post production. - [Mastering Product Photography: Apparel and Clothing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing): What is more, incorrectly set backlighting can cause a photograph to lose edge-clarity (so-called “light wrap”). - [Quick, Easy, and Effective Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photoshoots-photorobot): With this approach, we take two images from the same angle, one with only the backlight. - [What’s New in the November PhotoRobot Software Release](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/november-software-release): This back-lit shot serves as a pixel-exact mask within post production. - [Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/product-photoshoots-demo): We take two images from the same angle, one with just the backlight. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode # SECTION: glossary > barcode # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Barcode > A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. Also known as: barcode reader, barcode scanner. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A barcode is a machine-readable pattern, linear or two-dimensional, that encodes an identifier such as a product number. Scanning it with a barcode reader identifies the item instantly and without typing errors. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls supports barcode readers in every part of the application: scanning marks items as received, finds them in the item list, loads preset sequences and prepares capture. Unknown codes can create new items automatically (the minimum code length is configurable), shelves and SmartCodes are barcodes too, and PhotoRobot Touch and PINK use scanning to start work. ## See on photorobot.com - [Studio workflow: barcode reader support](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow) ## Related terms - [QR code](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/qr-code): A two-dimensional barcode that stores text or a URL and can be read by phone cameras. - [SmartCodes](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes): Printed PhotoRobot trigger codes that start software actions when scanned, such as starting a capture sequence. - [Product ingestion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-ingestion): Receiving and registering products in the studio before photography: scanning, measuring, sorting. - [SKU (stock keeping unit)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sku): A retailer's internal code for one distinct product variant. - [GTIN](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#gtin): GS1's globally unique product number behind EAN and UPC barcodes. - [Sort to shelves](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sort-to-shelves): PhotoRobot Controls feature that assigns workspace and preset to an item by scanning a shelf code. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 58 pages. Most relevant: - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Note: If the new item has a barcode, it is possible to input or scan the item barcode into the system when manually creating a new item: Adding an item barcode to the item will enable the display of… - [System Requirements for PhotoRobot - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements): This includes information on computer compatibility, USB cables, and suitable barcode scanners. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): …in the General Settings in the local desktop version of CAPP, there are the Barcode Scanner settings which enable configuration of advanced options for the barcode reader. - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): It is possible to assign a shelf to an item by configuring its settings in the app, or, alternatively, by CAPP integration of barcode reader support. - [Studio Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow): Deploy item tracking features at the scan of a barcode to automatically update item statuses and generate timestamps. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): Machine Floor (1) Rotary Platform (2) Operator’s Column (3) Operator’s Computer (4) – with barcode scanner, keyboard, trackpad Patient’s Screen (5) – with camera and speakers Power Socket, LAN Socket… - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): Capture with PhotoRobot Touch while separately or simultaneously operating any PhotoRobot workstation, with user-friendly software and barcode reader integration. - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): …images of photos to capture) Additionally, PhotoRobot Touch functions as a powerful barcode and QR scanner, with selection or deselection of codes for faster recognition. - [Weighing and Measuring Products with CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/weighing-and-measuring-products): In addition to CubiScan, PhotoRobot also supports barcode readers to identify items in the system before weighing and measuring. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): The standard workflow integrates barcode reader technology to scan items and preset codes. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/batch-processing # SECTION: glossary > batch-processing # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Batch processing > Applying the same edits to many images at once instead of one by one. Also known as: batch editing, bulk operations. Category: Photography techniques. Batch processing applies the same operations, such as cropping, background removal or colour correction, to a whole set of images at once. It is the basis of consistent, high-volume product photography. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot Controls, editing operations apply to all images of an item by default, and scopes limit them to a folder, a swing angle or one image. Bulk operations run in the cloud in the background; PhotoRobot states a batch typically takes about one minute while the studio photographs the next product. ## Related terms - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Cloud processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-processing): Running image editing on cloud servers so the studio can keep shooting while images are processed. - [Post-production](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/post-production): Everything done to images after capture: editing, background removal, cropping, export. - [Image consistency](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-consistency): All product images in a range sharing the same angles, framing, lighting and background. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 7 pages. Most relevant: - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Bulk operations run in the background, meaning all editing parameters can be applied while photographing additional products. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Enables batch processing for editing multiple images simultaneously Ecommerce photography software such as PhotoRobot centralizes production with digital asset management on one platform. - [Digital Asset Management for Large-Scale Manufacturers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers): The PhotoRobot Cloud enables batch processing and automatic bulk editing of 100s of product photos simultaneously. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Simply press “Apply to All” and the software applies edits and delivers results for final review. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Nonetheless, there are stages of production that in general apply to all 360° content production with PhotoRobot. - [GS1 Image Standards and Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards): Take for example batch processing with PhotoRobot. - [PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/enterprise-compliance): Although CCPA / CPRA do not apply to all global operations, their principles provide a strong baseline for U.S. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/bullet-time # SECTION: glossary > bullet-time # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Bullet time > Effect in which many cameras around a subject capture the same instant, so a frozen moment can be viewed from a moving viewpoint. Also known as: multi-camera array, time slice, frozen moment. Category: Photography techniques. Bullet time is a visual effect in which a ring or arc of cameras around a subject captures the same instant from many viewpoints. Played in sequence, the images look like a camera moving around a moment frozen in time. The technique is also known as a time slice or a frozen-moment shot. The effect depends on precise synchronisation. Every camera must fire at the same moment, or with a deliberate offset for a slow-motion variant, even though different cameras react to the shutter signal with different delays ([shutter lag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-lag)). The number of cameras sets how smooth the movement looks, which is why arrays of dozens of cameras are common. ## How PhotoRobot uses it One PhotoRobot [SynchroBox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox) connects up to 8 cameras, and several units can be linked into a cluster, so a single system can fire dozens of cameras placed around a subject – for example 36 cameras around a model jumping on a trampoline, freezing the jump as a spatial shot. This is independent of the [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multicam) arch, whose mechanics allow up to 7 cameras at once. ## See on photorobot.com - [SynchroBox setup user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup) ## Related terms - [SynchroBox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox): PhotoRobot multi-camera controller that fires each camera with its own advance; up to 8 cameras per unit, units can be linked. - [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multicam): PhotoRobot multi-camera arch that captures several elevations at once for multi-row 360 and 3D photography. - [Shutter lag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-lag): The delay between triggering a camera and the moment the image is actually exposed. - [Flying camera effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flying-camera-effect): Video in which the camera seems to fly around the product, made by combining rotation with camera movement. - [On-model photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/on-model-photography): Photographing garments or accessories worn by a live model. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/byok # SECTION: glossary > byok # TYPE: Glossary term --- # BYOK (bring your own key) > Using your own API key and contract with an AI or cloud provider inside third-party software. Also known as: BYOK, bring your own key. Category: Software. Bring your own key (BYOK) means that a customer supplies their own API key for a service, such as an AI model provider, instead of using the software vendor's account. Data and costs then run under the customer's own contract and security policies. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Intelligence supports BYOK in PhotoRobot Controls with OpenAI, Azure OpenAI, Anthropic, Google AI (Gemini) and GitHub Models. Customers pay for computing directly to their provider at their negotiated rates; PhotoRobot states it charges no data brokering fees. ## See on photorobot.com - [Bring your own key to PI](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/byok-photorobot-intelligence) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-intelligence): The AI layer in PhotoRobot Controls for capture quality control, metadata, visual questions and edits. - [API (application programming interface)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/api): A defined interface through which one piece of software can use the functions or data of another. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [Bring Your Own Key to Master the PI (π) Infrastructure](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/byok-photorobot-intelligence): Bring your own key to the PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) software suite for full organization-level control meeting the highest enterprise standards. - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): If introducing artificial intelligence models into workflows via API, there is the PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI, π) BYOK infrastructure. - [Macro PI - From Assistant to Fully Automated Pipeline](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action): Then, stay tuned for the next part of our coverage on PI (π): How to integrate your own PI model (BYOK). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/c-class-turntables # SECTION: glossary > c-class-turntables # TYPE: Glossary term --- # C-Class turntables (C850, C1300) > PhotoRobot C850 and C1300 glass-plate turntables with a steel frame; the C1300 was previously sold as Case 1300. Also known as: C850, C1300, Case 1300, CASE 1300. Category: Hardware. The C-Class is a family of PhotoRobot motorised turntables, the C850 and the C1300. Both share the same steel body with a built-in control unit and a white diffusion background; the C1300 accommodates turntable plates of up to 1300 mm. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot previously distributed the C1300 under the name Case 1300. The C-Class frame weighs over 100 kg, which makes it heavier but more stable than the aluminium [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) and removes the need for a support bridge under the glass, leaving more angles free for lighting. The machines move around the studio on castors and can take the optional Robotic Arm V8 expansion with a docking station. ## See on photorobot.com - [C850 and C1300 user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide) - [Case 1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300) - [C-Class turntables video demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/c-class-turntables-demo) ## Related terms - [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/case-850): PhotoRobot's portable motorised turntable with an 850 mm glass plate that folds into its own carrying case. - [Optical glass plate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/optical-glass-plate): A turntable top made of optical glass that can be lit and photographed through, giving shadow-free images. - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 87 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): …provides technical instructions for the assembly, connection, and use of the PhotoRobot C850 and C1300 turntable modules. - [Discover PhotoRobot C-Class 360 Turntables in Action](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/c-class-turntables-demo): Discover the C-Class family of motorized turntables by PhotoRobot: the C850 and C1300 models. - [CASE 1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300): CASE1300 is a very productive, compact and portable device that can be used in any photo studio, online shop, warehouse or production hall. - [PhotoRobot Laser Centering & Alignment Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/laser-centering-guide): Additionally, at the end of the manual, there are instructions for aligning and centering the special laser system of the C1300 turntable (previously distributed under the name Case 1300). - [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information): …Carousel 3000 / 5000 Note: The Control Unit is built-into the PhotoRobot Case 850, the C850 & C1300, Cube Compact, and the Frame. - [Shoe Photography - Still Images, Style Guides and Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/shoe-photography-workflow): In this instance, we’re using the Case_1300 with the Robotic_Arm and PhotoRobot software for light synchronization, camera & turntable control, and automating workflow. - [How Multiple PhotoRobot Modules Combine - the Flexi_Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/flexible-studio-modules): Discover configurations of the Case 1300 photography turntable, the Turning Platform, PhotoRobot’s Cube, and the Robotic Arm. - [Photographing Footwear in the PhotoRobot Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/footwear-photography-workflow): …photography demo featuring style guide automation of still images using PhotoRobot’s Case 1300 with Robot Arm expansion. - [Improtech PhotoRobot - Industry 4.0 Readiness](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/industry-4-0-readiness): …can take advantage of hyper-amortization: FRAME PhotoRobot Case 850 PhotoRobot C850 PhotoRobot C1300 PhotoRobot Centreless Table 850 PhotoRobot Centerless Tables 1300 PhotoRobot Cube v5 / v6… - [PhotoRobot Control System - Overview for System Offers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/control-system-overview): Note: The Control Unit is built-into the PhotoRobot CASE 850, the C850 & C1300, Cube Compact, and the Frame. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/camera-resolution # SECTION: glossary > camera-resolution # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Camera resolution > The number of pixels a camera sensor records, given in megapixels (MP). Also known as: megapixels, MPx, megapixel. Category: Lighting and optics. Camera resolution is the number of pixels the sensor records per image, usually given in megapixels (millions of pixels). Higher resolution allows deeper zoom and larger prints, but also increases file size, transfer and processing time. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot recommends cameras with no less than 18 MPx and ideally 24 to 50 MPx; higher resolutions mean longer transmission and processing times. Its comparison of a 24 MPx and a 50.6 MPx camera showed only slight differences visible at maximum zoom, and it recommends close-up hotspot shots for very fine details instead. ## See on photorobot.com - [Understanding camera resolution](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution) - [Recommended cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras) ## Related terms - [Full-frame sensor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/full-frame-sensor): A camera sensor the size of 35 mm film (36 x 24 mm), preferred for product photography. - [Detail shot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/detail-shot): A close-up photo of one feature of a product, such as a texture, logo or mechanism. - [DPI (dots per inch)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dpi): A print density value stored in image files; it does not change the pixel resolution of a digital image. - [Hotspot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hotspot): A clickable point on a product image or spin that opens a detail image, zoom or annotation. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): Understand the impact of camera resolution in product photography, and what different camera resolutions can achieve with PhotoRobot. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): For better understanding on the impact of camera resolution, visit the PhotoRobot Camera Resolution Guide. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): PhotoRobot modules support DSLR and mirrorless Canon cameras, with 26 MP models usually more than efficient. - [Compatible Cameras with PhotoRobot - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras): For better understanding on the impact of camera resolution, refer to Understanding Camera Resolution. - [System Requirements for PhotoRobot - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements): Note: To better understand the impact of camera resolution and lens selection, refer to PhotoRobot’s Guide on Understanding Camera Resolution. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): But, what about post-processing this large amount of imagery? We have 144 images (say at 30 - 50 MP) that we need post-processed, and ideally published online without delay. - [Pro Tips: Advanced Photo Editing Tools and Techniques](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools): Although we do recommend a maximum of 26 / 30 MP in the Cloud, up to 50MP (8688 x 5792 pixel) cameras such as the Canon 5 EOS 5DS R can be supported with local processing. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): There is no limitation on image resolution, with even 50MP cameras (8688 x 5792 pixels) fully supported. - [How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model): We used PhotoRobot’s Case as our motorized turntable, together with a 26 MP Canon EOS RP. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Usually, a Canon between 20 - 30 megapixels is sufficient. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/canon-edsdk # SECTION: glossary > canon-edsdk # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Canon EDSDK > Canon's software development kit for controlling EOS cameras from a computer over USB. Also known as: EOS Digital SDK, Canon SDK. Category: Software. The Canon EOS Digital SDK (EDSDK) is Canon's software development kit for controlling EOS cameras from a computer over a wired USB connection: settings, capture, live view and image transfer. Its counterpart CCAPI (Camera Control API) provides similar control wirelessly. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot controls Canon cameras directly through the Canon SDK: settings, shutter, image transfer and editing. Its compatible camera list follows the Canon EOS SDK (v13.x). Other brands are supported as third-party cameras fired by cable, with photos transferred to a watched folder; native support for Nikon cameras has ended. ## See on photorobot.com - [Remote camera control with Canon's EOS Digital SDK](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/canon-eos-digital-sdk) - [Compatible cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras) ## Related terms - [Tethered shooting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tethered-shooting): Shooting with the camera connected to a computer, which controls settings and receives every image directly. - [Mirrorless camera](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/mirrorless-camera): A camera with interchangeable lenses but no mirror; the sensor feeds an electronic viewfinder. - [DSLR](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dslr): A digital camera that uses a mirror and optical viewfinder, with interchangeable lenses. - [Live View](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/live-view): A real-time preview of the camera image on a computer screen, used to frame and focus before capture. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [Remote Camera Control with Canon’s EOS Digital SDK](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/canon-eos-digital-sdk): Canon SDK consists primarily of two main parts: EDSDK (EOS Digital SDK) and CCAPI (Camera Control API). - [Compatible Cameras with PhotoRobot - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras): The list is based on Canon’s official library, while the camera models listed are compatible with the latest Canon EOS SDK (v13.x) to enable integration with PhotoRobot. - [How to Improve Productivity in Fashion Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/productivity-fashion-product-photography): Canon’s EDSDK integrates seamlessly with PhotoRobot_Controls and all our product photography installations. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-pi-advisor # SECTION: glossary > capture-pi-advisor # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Capture PI Advisor > PhotoRobot Intelligence tool that checks each capture in real time and suggests camera and light adjustments. Category: Software. Capture PI Advisor is the real-time quality control tool of PhotoRobot Intelligence. It analyses captured images and suggests concrete corrections before the operator moves on. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Capture PI Advisor is aware of the hardware and of the 360 spin. It evaluates exposure balance, highlight clipping, shadow density and white background cleanliness, and suggests adjustments to aperture, shutter speed, ISO or light intensity, which PhotoRobot states reduces errors at the source. ## See on photorobot.com - [PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-intelligence): The AI layer in PhotoRobot Controls for capture quality control, metadata, visual questions and edits. - [PI Profiles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#pi-profiles): Industry-specific profiles in PhotoRobot Intelligence that fine-tune or suggest presets for different product types. - [Highlight clipping](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/highlight-clipping): Overexposed areas that are recorded as pure white and have lost all detail. - [Exposure](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/exposure): The amount of light that reaches the sensor, set by aperture, shutter speed, ISO and light output. - [Quality control](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quality-control): Checking images against requirements before they are published, and sending failures back. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [Discover PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor): Experience the revolution in studio intelligence with industry-specific PI Profiles and Capture PI Advisor in the PI (π) software suite. - [Unlock Operational PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite): Meet the PhotoRobot Intelligence software suite: Capture PI Advisor (real-time quality control), Metadata Suggest (routine standardization), Ask PI (quick search), and; Edit PI (production-safe edits). - [Bring Your Own Key to Master the PI (π) Infrastructure](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/byok-photorobot-intelligence): PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor radically reduce shooting errors, while Macro PI Actions can eliminate manual metadata entry entirely. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-sequence # SECTION: glossary > capture-sequence # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Capture sequence > The programmed order of angles, camera triggers and movements a robot performs to photograph an item. Also known as: sequence, sequence configuration. Category: Software. A capture sequence is the programmed series of positions, camera triggers and robot movements used to photograph an item, for example 36 frames per rotation in two rows. Running the sequence produces the spin and still images automatically. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot Controls, sequences can capture only selected angles, be repeated for individual misfired frames (fast sequence repeat), and run in Normal mode, which stops the turntable for each photo, or in Fast-shot mode with non-stop rotation. A [SmartCode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes) can start a sequence without touching the computer. ## See on photorobot.com - [Capturing images manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images) ## Related terms - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Macro](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro): A stored sequence of PhotoRobot Controls commands that automates multi-step capture across folders. - [Turn and swing angles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turn-and-swing-angles): PhotoRobot terms for the rotation angle of the product (turn) and the vertical angle of the camera (swing). - [SmartCodes](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes): Printed PhotoRobot trigger codes that start software actions when scanned, such as starting a capture sequence. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 43 pages. Most relevant: - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): …angle - Adjust angle on an individual frame Pause sequence here - Select to pause the photography sequence at this frame and wait for an operator to resume the shoot Mark for retouch - Specify image… - [Capture And Control](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control): Configure sequences to capture only selected / specified angles, with fast sequence repeat to correct misfired photos in an instant. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): The capture mode is used to control the photography sequence, while the edit mode controls all post-processing performed within CAPP. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): These categories we will use to automate capture sequences, robotic processes, light control, and post-processing. - [PhotoRobot SmartCodes User Guide and Print-Ready Code Sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing): These special SmartCodes include: 8595676400053 – Start Sequence 8595676400060 – Ready for Shoot 8595676400077 – Start CubiScan Measurement 8595676400084 – Open Sort to Shelves Start Sequence… - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): In combination with CubiScan dimensioning systems, teams can then automatically record product weights & measurements, and automate photography sequences. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): Deploy LiveView, sequence configuration, and reusable Presets for complete photoshoot automation. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): This helps users test settings of lights, cameras, and hardware before the capture sequence. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): Software Photoshoot Wizards serve as an alternative to manual hardware and sequence configuration. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): Before running the photography sequence, it’s important to take one or more test shots. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/car-studio-360 # SECTION: glossary > car-studio-360 # TYPE: Glossary term --- # 360 Car Studio > PhotoRobot Viewer layout for vehicles, combining 360 spins, hotspots, details and interior panoramas. Also known as: Car Studio 360. Category: Software. 360 Car Studio is a PhotoRobot Viewer configuration for the automotive industry. It combines exterior 360 spins, hotspots, annotated detail images and interior panoramas behind customisable buttons in one embeddable viewer. ## How PhotoRobot uses it 360 Car Studio supports single-row and multi-row spins, for example a vehicle with doors closed in one spin and open in another, with thumbnail navigation to individual frames or hotspots. Interior panoramas come from Theta cameras integrated with PhotoRobot. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Viewer: 360 Car Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) - [Car turntable product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer): PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. - [Panorama](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/panorama): A wide or fully spherical image of a space that the viewer can look around in. - [Hotspot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hotspot): A clickable point on a product image or spin that opens a detail image, zoom or annotation. - [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/carousel-5000): PhotoRobot low-profile heavy-duty turntable for cars and machinery, with a 4000 kg load capacity. - [Multi-row 360](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multi-row-360): A 360 spin captured at several camera elevations, so the viewer can rotate the product horizontally and vertically. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Together, these enable the complete 360 Car Studio experience for online car photography, dealerships & resellers. - [PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting): We’ve also added support for interior panoramas, which feature in the Car Studio 360 and a Carpet & Flooring Visualizer. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): For automotive dealerships, superstores and car resellers, Car Studio 360 hosts product spins alongside a still image gallery. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/carousel-3000 # SECTION: glossary > carousel-3000 # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Carousel 3000 > PhotoRobot 3 m rotating platform for cars, furniture and other large objects of up to 2000 kg. Category: Hardware. The Carousel 3000 is a PhotoRobot low-profile rotating platform with a 3 m plate for photographing large objects of up to 2000 kg, such as cars, machinery and furniture. Like the Carousel 5000, it has a low profile, so objects can be placed on the platform without a crane or access ramp. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The Carousel 3000 is available as a 3 m rotating platform with drive-up ramps around it, or as a 5 x 5 m flat podium with the 3 m platform in the centre. Air flowing through the base keeps dirt out of the machine. It is the robotic platform of the [PhotoRobot Carpet Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carpet-studio). ## See on photorobot.com - [Carousel 3000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-3000) - [Carpet Studio with Carousel 3000](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carpet-studio) ## Related terms - [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/carousel-5000): PhotoRobot low-profile heavy-duty turntable for cars and machinery, with a 4000 kg load capacity. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [Cyclorama](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cyclorama): A curved background where the floor sweeps into the wall, giving a seamless, horizon-free backdrop. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 20 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carousel): …technical information on the installation, connection, and use of the Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 modules by PhotoRobot. - [PhotoRobot Carpet Studio with Carousel - User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carpet-studio): This user guide details the PhotoRobot Carpet Studio with Carousel 3000. - [CAROUSEL 3000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-3000): CAROUSEL 3000. - [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information): …Robotic Turntable Cube V5 / V6 MultiCam Robotic Arm V8 Turning Platform Virtual Catwalk Carousel 3000 / 5000 Note: The Control Unit is built-into the PhotoRobot Case 850, the C850 & C1300, Cube… - [Pricing Levels of Robotic Workspaces](https://www.photorobot.com/hardware-pricing): MULTI-ROW PLATFORM CAROUSEL 3000 Multi-row Platform Cp CAROUSEL 3000 Add a 3" layer to your studio floor and get a 3 m robotic industrial-grade rotating platform - with or without cyclorama - circle… - [Improtech PhotoRobot - Industry 4.0 Readiness](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/industry-4-0-readiness): …Tables 1300 PhotoRobot Cube v5 / v6 PhotoRobot Turning Platform 180 / 280 PhotoRobot Carousel 3000 PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 PhotoRobot Capital Equipment Controlled by Computerized Systems. - [Automated Product Photography Outputs: Bone Handle Cane](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/cane): Industry: Home goods Category: Large objects Robots used: Turntable, Cube, Turning Platform, Carousel 3000, Catwalk Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin Number of images: 1 × 36 Shooting time: 0 min 58… - [Automated Product Photography Outputs: Large Shoe Rack](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/shoe-organizer): Industry: Home goods Category: Large objects Robots used: Turning Platform, Carousel 3000, Carousel 5000 Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image Number of images: 1 x 24 Shooting time: 0 min. - [Automated Tool Product Photography Outputs: Mitre Saw Stand](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/foldable-support): Industry: Industrial Category: Large objects Robots used: Turntable, Robotic Arm, Turning Platform, Carousel 3000, Carousel 5000 Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360 Number of images: 3… - [Automotive Photography Examples by PhotoRobot: Car Bumper](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/primed-front-bumper-cover): Industry: Automotive Category: Medium objects Robots used: Turning Platform, Carousel 3000 Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin Number of images: 1 x 24 Shooting time: 0 min 30 sec. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/carousel-5000 # SECTION: glossary > carousel-5000 # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Carousel 5000 > PhotoRobot low-profile heavy-duty turntable for cars and machinery, with a 4000 kg load capacity. Category: Hardware. The Carousel 5000 is a PhotoRobot motorised rotating platform for photographing cars, furniture and heavy machinery. Its low profile lets a car be driven onto the plate without an access ramp or crane. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The Carousel 5000 carries up to 4000 kg (evenly distributed) and has a plate with access ramps of 5640 mm in diameter. It comes in a model installed on top of an existing floor and a model recessed into the studio or showroom floor. PhotoRobot states it enables studios to photograph more than 60 cars in a day; grooves along the plate perimeter allow air-driven removal of dirt and dust. ## See on photorobot.com - [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) - [Carousel user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carousel) ## Related terms - [Carousel 3000](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/carousel-3000): PhotoRobot 3 m rotating platform for cars, furniture and other large objects of up to 2000 kg. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [Panorama](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/panorama): A wide or fully spherical image of a space that the viewer can look around in. - [360 Car Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/car-studio-360): PhotoRobot Viewer layout for vehicles, combining 360 spins, hotspots, details and interior panoramas. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 28 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carousel): Find technical information on the installation, connection, and use of the Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 modules by PhotoRobot. - [CAROUSEL 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000): The Carousel 5000 is PhotoRobot’s heavy-duty turntable for product photography automation of large and heavy products. - [Installation of PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000 at Stellantis](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/carousel-5000-at-stellantis): See a partner’s recent installation of PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000, our heavy-duty turntable solution for photography of cars and heavy machinery. - [The Carousel: 360 Photography of Cars and Heavy Machinery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/carousel-5000-360-photography-cars): Automate 360 degree photography of cars, heavy machinery and more with PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): CAROUSEL 5000 A heavy-duty, motorized turntable for photography of automobiles, furniture, machinery, and other heavy objects. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): Car turntables like PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000 offer an automotive photography solution for dealerships, superstores, online retailers & private sellers. - [How to Photograph Furniture - Logistics, Prep and Execution](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-photograph-furniture): The second, the Carousel_5000, is for even heavier furniture and larger pieces or sets. - [Tips for 360-Degree Motorized Turntable Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography): There is even the Carousel 5000 motorized car turntable for 360 photography of automobiles and heavy machinery, which possesses similar tips for best usage. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Extremely large and heavy objects call for a 360 turntable such as the Carousel 5000. - [Pricing Levels of Robotic Workspaces](https://www.photorobot.com/hardware-pricing): MULTI-ROW PLATFORM CAROUSEL 5000 Multi-row Platform Cp CAROUSEL 5000 Add a 3" layer to your studio floor - or even built the robot into the floor level - and get a 5 m robotic industrial-grade… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/case-850 # SECTION: glossary > case-850 # TYPE: Glossary term --- # CASE 850 > PhotoRobot's portable motorised turntable with an 850 mm glass plate that folds into its own carrying case. Also known as: Case 850. Category: Hardware. CASE 850 is a portable PhotoRobot turntable for 360 and 3D tabletop photography. It has an 850 mm optical glass plate and an integrated diffuse white background, and the whole machine folds into a protective carrying case for transport. ## How PhotoRobot uses it According to its product page, the CASE 850 can be set up in about 15 minutes, carries up to 20 kg, rotates 360 degrees in as little as 2.1 seconds and captures 36 images in 4 seconds at its maximum shooting speed. Its control unit is built in, it connects to [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) over LAN or Wi-Fi, and it fits into the cargo space of a small car. ## See on photorobot.com - [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) - [CASE 850 user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide) ## Related terms - [C-Class turntables (C850, C1300)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/c-class-turntables): PhotoRobot C850 and C1300 glass-plate turntables with a steel frame; the C1300 was previously sold as Case 1300. - [Optical glass plate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/optical-glass-plate): A turntable top made of optical glass that can be lit and photographed through, giving shadow-free images. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [Photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging): Generating a 3D model from many overlapping photographs of an object. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 80 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): …provides technical instructions for the assembly, connection, and use of the PhotoRobot CASE 850. - [Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot’s CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photoshoots-case-850): Find our latest video for product photoshoots with PhotoRobot’s CASE 850, and read more to discover what makes this solution so versatile. - [PhotoRobot Case 850: The Highly Portable 360 Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/case-850-portable-360-turntable): Watch a demo of the highly portable PhotoRobot Case 850 featuring a 360 turntable that fits into a protective flight case. - [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850): Construct a compact, 360 / 3D product photography turntable anywhere in 15 minutes with the Case 850. - [Photographing Glass Products](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photographing-glass-products): Using PhotoRobot’s portable device, the CASE 850, in under 1 minute you can photograph glass products, post-process, and publish images in the cloud. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): Among these, there is also a new variant of the universal photography Cube robot (the Cube Compact), and a new modular setup for the Case 850. - [Discover PhotoRobot C-Class 360 Turntables in Action](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/c-class-turntables-demo): …for greater stability and performance in comparison to the lighter aluminum frame of the Case 850. - [PhotoRobot Control System - Overview for System Offers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/control-system-overview): Every PhotoRobot has a control unit either built-into the device (such as with CASE 850 mobile workstations), or as a standalone unit (e.g. - [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information): …Virtual Catwalk Carousel 3000 / 5000 Note: The Control Unit is built-into the PhotoRobot Case 850, the C850 & C1300, Cube Compact, and the Frame. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): Take for example the Case 850 motorized turntable, which is both easily transportable and quickly installable on-location. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cdn # SECTION: glossary > cdn # TYPE: Glossary term --- # CDN (content delivery network) > A network of servers worldwide that delivers files from a location close to each visitor. Also known as: CDN, content delivery network, image CDN. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A content delivery network (CDN) is a distributed network of servers that caches and delivers files, such as images, from a location close to each visitor. It reduces loading times and absorbs traffic peaks. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot hosting delivers images through a Google Cloud image CDN with real-time scaling, so every image is resized to the resolution of the end-user device. PhotoRobot Studio also delivers finished content via the PhotoRobot CDN. ## Related terms - [Image hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-hosting): Storing images on a server and delivering them to websites on request. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer): PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. - [Automatic publishing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/automatic-publishing): Making finished images available online immediately after capture and processing, without manual upload. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 29 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): A Cloud-based, global Content Delivery Network (CDN) provides real-time scaling, ensuring quick loading & pixel perfect resolution on any device. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Meanwhile, the publishing platform and viewer leverages Google CDN (Content Delivery Network) distribution of content to the customer’s website. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): Special image CDN (Content Delivery Network) provided by Google Cloud Platform with real-time scaling capability. - [Present Products with Style - PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio): Receive files in JPEG or PNG, or instantly publish web-ready assets online via PhotoRobot’s global CDN. - [360-Degree Product Viewers for E-Commerce Businesses](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-viewers-for-e-commerce-businesses): Take for example PhotoRobot’s CDN-based 360 / 3D product viewer, which comes standard in PhotoRobot_Control software. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Together with the Cloud-based, global Content Delivery Network (CDN), these ensure quick-loading and pixel-perfect resolution on any device. - [What is E-commerce Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging): Through Cloud API integrations, approved product images are pushed directly from the studio software into the retailer's PIM system or Content Delivery Network (CDN). - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Do you need a 360° hosting service? Take for example PhotoRobot’s special image CDN (Content Delivery Network). - [7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo): This is why PhotoRobot has chosen to integrate with a global Content Delivery Network (CDN), which can be utilized to distribute image files globally and at maximum speed and resolution, dynamically… - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): Meanwhile, a global CDN delivers pixel-perfect resolution and quick-loading of product imagery on any device. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centerless-table # SECTION: glossary > centerless-table # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Centerless Table > PhotoRobot motorised turntable with an optical glass plate for shadow-free photography without clipping. Also known as: Centreless Table, CL850, CL1300. Category: Hardware. The Centerless Table is a PhotoRobot motorised turntable whose product sits on an optical glass plate rather than a solid disc. Because the glass can be lit from below and the background is diffuse, products appear on a natural white background without shadows, so no clipping is needed in post-production. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The Centerless Table supports an 850 mm or a 1300 mm glass plate and a load of up to 40 kg. It offers laser-guided positioning of the object to the centre of rotation, automatic calibration of the positioning system at the touch of a button, and light holders that keep cables off the floor. It combines with the [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) and the [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) for multi-row and 3D capture. ## See on photorobot.com - [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) - [Centerless Table user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide) ## Related terms - [Optical glass plate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/optical-glass-plate): A turntable top made of optical glass that can be lit and photographed through, giving shadow-free images. - [Shadow-free photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shadow-free-photography): Lighting a product so that it casts no visible shadow on its background or support. - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multicam): PhotoRobot multi-camera arch that captures several elevations at once for multi-row 360 and 3D photography. - [Laser positioning](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/laser-positioning): Lasers projected onto the turntable that show where to place a product so it sits at the centre of rotation. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 113 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): …detailed instructions for the assembly and first use of the PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide): Find a device overview including instructions for setup and first use of the PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 and CL850 models. - [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table): With no compromise between quality and efficiency, the Centerless_Table allows for picture-perfect results of products from small to large. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table - Design Features & Dynamics](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-design-dynamics): Discover the design and dynamics of PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table for automated 2D + 360 + 3D photography in this production video demo. - [PhotoRobot's Centerless Table, a Motorized Photography Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table): Thanks to control software and a unique lighting system, PhotoRobot’s CENTERLESS TABLE represents a flagship in the evolution of automated product photography. - [PhotoRobot Hardware: Centerless Table, Cube, Robot Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-cube-robot-arm): Watch a video demo of unique hardware anatomy features of PhotoRobot systems: the Centerless Table, Cube, and Robot Arm. - [Centerless Table Eyewear Photography Production Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-eyewear-photography-demo): Watch a video demo of the PhotoRobot workflow on the Centerless Table to photograph eyewear and sunglasses for eCommerce. - [PhotoRobot Hardware for Automated Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/hardware-automated-product-photography): See under the hood of three PhotoRobot solutions: the Centerless_Table, the_Cube, and Robotic_Arm. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): The Centerless Table is a universal solution for shadow-free eCommerce photography of small to large items with no clipping required. - [Motorized Turntables for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography): PhotoRobot’s Wide Glass Centerless Table represents a flagship in the evolution of 360 product photography with motorized turntables. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centre-of-rotation # SECTION: glossary > centre-of-rotation # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Centre of rotation > The axis a turntable spins around; a product placed on it stays in the same spot in every frame. Also known as: center of rotation, rotation axis. Category: Photography techniques. The centre of rotation is the axis around which a turntable or rotating platform turns. A product placed exactly on it stays in the same position in every frame of a spin; an off-centre product appears to wobble or drift. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot turntables mark the centre of rotation with [positioning lasers](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/laser-positioning), and software [auto-centering](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/auto-centering) corrects misplaced products afterwards. With CubiScan measurements, the robotic arm can raise the camera to the vertical centre of the object automatically. ## Related terms - [Laser positioning](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/laser-positioning): Lasers projected onto the turntable that show where to place a product so it sits at the centre of rotation. - [Auto-centering](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/auto-centering): Software correction that aligns a product to the centre of rotation in every frame so a spin does not wobble. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 25 pages. Most relevant: - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): …of the functions of controlling it via CAPP is that the elevation movement aligns the rotation axis to the midpoint of the photographed object’s height. - [ROBOTIC ARM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm): …11.8“ 400 mm / 15.8“ Top view range 0°–90° Top view range – minimum step 1° Radius from centre of rotation – short arm 620 – 950 mm / 24.4“ – 37.4“ 800 – 1,250 mm / 31.5“ – 49.2“ Radius from centre of… - [PhotoRobot_Controls: Auto-Centering 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography): Often, when shooting 360 product photos, you encounter the problem of objects not staying in the center of rotation. - [CATWALK](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk): Radius from center of rotation 460 × 840 × 2 000 mm / 18.1" × 33.1" × 78.8" Virtual Catwalk Station 500 × dia. - [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table): Easy set-up of objects to the centre of rotation using laser-guided positioning Up close. - [MULTICAM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam): …Top view range – increment 7.5° Number of positions for mounting DSLR 13 Radius from centre of rotation 950 mm / 37.4" 1250 mm / 49.2" Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V Properties. - [ROBOTIC TURNTABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable): Easy positioning of the object to the centre of rotation using laser locating Picture Perfect. - [TURNING PLATFORM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform): …90° Top view range – increment 7.5° Number of positions for mounting DSLR 13 Radius from centre of rotation 950 mm (37.4") 1250 mm (49.2") Supply voltage AC 115 / 230 V Dimensions. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide): Setup of objects to the center of rotation with laser-guided positioning. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Take for example auto-centering for products that the operator has not positioned perfectly into the center of rotation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key # SECTION: glossary > chroma-key # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Chroma key > Removing everything of one specific colour from an image, such as a green screen or a coloured stand. Also known as: chromakey, chroma keying, key colour. Category: Photography techniques. Chroma keying removes all areas of one chosen colour from an image and makes them transparent or replaces them. It is best known from green screens; in product photography it removes stands, holders and supports painted in a colour that does not appear in the product. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls uses chroma key operations to remove mannequin poles, nylon ropes, clamps and holders, for example to create the [ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect). The operations are saved in presets so they run automatically for similar items. ## See on photorobot.com - [Image editing tools: chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) ## Related terms - [Background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal): Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. - [Ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect): An editing technique that makes the mannequin disappear so the garment looks worn by an invisible body. - [Suspension mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/suspension-mode): CUBE configuration that hangs a product in the air and rotates it, for items that cannot stand on a plate. - [Freemask](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/freemask): PhotoRobot background removal from a front-lit and a back-lit silhouette shot of the same angle. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 26 pages. Most relevant: - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): Carry out Chromakey operation to remove parts of the scene, such as: mannequin poles, nylon ropes, strings, clamps, holders and more. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Remove dirt, dust, and blemishes from individual or batches of photos after background removal or Chromakey operations. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Tight-Fitting Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress): Then, in PhotoRobot_Controls, we have functions for style guides along with Chromakey for automatically removing mannequin poles from final images. - [How to Use a Ghost Mannequin for Fashion eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin): Much of this is thanks to PhotoRobot’s Chromakey function, with its automatic background & pole removal. - [Ghost Mannequin Effect for Apparel Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect): Additionally, with PhotoRobot’s Chromakey automation software, the mannequin’s pole is automatically removed as soon as your collection of photos is ready. - [Fashion Photography of a Blazer on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-blazers): Then, with PhotoRobot_Controls, we can create and automate style guides, and we have a special function we call Chromakey. - [Fashion Photography of a Cardigan on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-cardigan): Save and automate style guides, and deploy Chromakey for automatic pole removal, compositing photos, and achieving the ghost mannequin effect. - [Fashion Photography of Denim Jeans on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-jeans): Create and automate style guides, and discover Chromakey for automatic pole removal, compositing photos, and creating the ghost mannequin effect. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography of a Spaghetti Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-spaghetti-dress): Save and automate style guides, and deploy Chromakey for automatic pole removal, compositing photos, and achieving the ghost mannequin effect. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Button-Up Shirt](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-button-up-shirt): Then, with PhotoRobot_Controls, there are functions for creating and automating style guides, and a special function we call Chromakey. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/clipping-path # SECTION: glossary > clipping-path # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Clipping path > A hand-drawn vector outline used to cut a product out of its background. Also known as: clipping, vector clipping path. Category: Photography techniques. A clipping path is a closed vector outline drawn around a product in an image editor to cut it out from its background. It gives crisp edges on hard-edged objects but is labour-intensive and struggles with hair, fur or translucent materials. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot describes its glass-plate turntables, such as the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) and [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850), as enabling product photography with no clipping required, and its glossary articles describe automatic alpha channel masking replacing manual clipping paths. ## Related terms - [Background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal): Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. - [Alpha channel](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/alpha-channel): An extra image channel that stores the transparency of every pixel. - [Optical glass plate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/optical-glass-plate): A turntable top made of optical glass that can be lit and photographed through, giving shadow-free images. - [Retouching](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/retouching): Manual correction of an image, such as removing dust, blemishes or unwanted elements. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 11 pages. Most relevant: - [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850): Build a studio for photography with no clipping necessary, anywhere in 15 minutes. - [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table): …to a unique lighting system, the Centerless_Table enables product photography with no clipping required. - [CASE 1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300): No clipping required. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): The Centerless Table is a universal solution for shadow-free eCommerce photography of small to large items with no clipping required. - [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame): This produces quality product photos on a pure white background, while consistent image capture ensures no clipping is required. - [PhotoRobot's Centerless Table, a Motorized Photography Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table): No more clipping required in post processing! This provides you with more time to spend on the photography itself and photographing additional products. - [Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos): This includes no-retouch still product photography, 360 + 3D product photography, and 3D model photography – with no clipping necessary. - [The Frame: Next-Generation Motorized Turntable Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/next-gen-motorized-turntable-photography): With double 360° plate rotation, there really is no clipping required for standard still images, spins and photography for 3D models. - [What is Product Photography Automation?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-product-photography-automation): This ensures clean, web-ready images without the need for manual vector clipping paths. - [What is Robotic Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-product-photography): Alpha channel masking replaces manual vector clipping paths. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api # SECTION: glossary > cloud-api # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Cloud API > PhotoRobot's REST API for integrating the studio with catalogue, DAM, PIM and e-commerce systems. Also known as: Cloud API, Cloud API V2, API V2. Category: Software. The PhotoRobot Cloud API is the programming interface of PhotoRobot Cloud. It lets other systems create product items, automate capture workflows and deliver processed images through scalable hosting and feeds. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Cloud API V2 introduced unified responses, standardised payloads and defined error codes under /api/v2/; existing authentication keys continue to work. PhotoRobot announced that V1 is deprecated and would be shut down on 30 September 2026. Documentation is on the PhotoRobot Developer Portal (developer.photorobot.com). A separate Control Unit API controls only robot movements and is available on request; PhotoRobot recommends the Cloud API for controlling the whole studio. ## See on photorobot.com - [Developer Portal and Cloud API V2](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/developer-portal-cloud-api-v2) - [System integration and API connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration) ## Related terms - [API (application programming interface)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/api): A defined interface through which one piece of software can use the functions or data of another. - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. - [Export feed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed): A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. - [PhotoRobot Developer Portal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/developer-portal): PhotoRobot's documentation site for the Cloud API, with interactive endpoint references. - [PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-cloud): PhotoRobot's cloud platform for storing, processing, hosting and distributing product images. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Developer Portal & Cloud API V2](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/developer-portal-cloud-api-v2): …photography workflows for modern enterprise using the PhotoRobot Developer Portal & API V2 for cloud integrations. - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): Note: To control not only the robot but also cameras, lights, and other equipment from one interface, use of PhotoRobot Cloud API is recommended. - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition): …via PhotoRobot Controls, as there is no OCR endpoint available in the PhotoRobot Cloud API. - [Introducing: Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/customer-webhooks): After 2xx, the integration pulls the current item from REST v2 (pull.itemUrl / pull.deltaUrl). - [PhotoRobot Product Photography Automation Solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/): The PhotoRobot Cloud API provides a strict, standard-driven integration contract for engineering teams to ensure frictionless integration with enterprise-grade stability. - [PhotoRobot Control System - Overview for System Offers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/control-system-overview): …of Licenses Firmware Updates Service Interface Access for Remote Diagnostics System Cloud API with PhotoRobot _Controls (for the integration into customer systems if the customer’s own control system… - [What is Automated Product Content Production?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-content-production): Instead, Cloud API integrations automatically push the web-optimized images, 360-degree viewers, and 3D assets directly to e-commerce platforms, Content Delivery Networks (CDNs), or internal ERP… - [What is E-commerce Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging): Through Cloud API integrations, approved product images are pushed directly from the studio software into the retailer's PIM system or Content Delivery Network (CDN). - [The PhotoRobot-Powered Production Line](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line): PhotoRobot Cloud API integrates with existing eCommerce export feeds (JSON / XML), with delivery on a global CDN. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-processing # SECTION: glossary > cloud-processing # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Cloud processing > Running image editing on cloud servers so the studio can keep shooting while images are processed. Also known as: cloud post-processing, cloud editing. Category: Software. Cloud processing means image editing runs on remote servers rather than on the studio computer. Batches are processed in the background, so the next product can be photographed while the previous one is still being edited. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot states that its cloud editing, running on Nvidia Tesla K80 GPUs, can process hundreds of images per second with no limit on image resolution, and that a batch typically takes about a minute. Edits apply to all images of an item at once and can start automatically after capture. ## See on photorobot.com - [Image editing tools: cloud processing](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-cloud): PhotoRobot's cloud platform for storing, processing, hosting and distributing product images. - [Batch processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/batch-processing): Applying the same edits to many images at once instead of one by one. - [Post-production](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/post-production): Everything done to images after capture: editing, background removal, cropping, export. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 17 pages. Most relevant: - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): PhotoRobot provides full automation for both local and cloud processing. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): For processing images, PhotoRobot utilizes local or cloud processing, or a combination of the two. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Thanks to Nvidia Tesla K80 GPUs, our cloud-based photo editing software can edit hundreds of images per second. - [Pro Tips: Advanced Photo Editing Tools and Techniques](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools): Thanks to the power of cloud processing, you no longer need a top-of-the-line workstation to complete your work. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): It can connect to eCommerce websites and apps, and takes advantage of Cloud processing for automatic image delivery after capture. - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): + How Fast is the image processing? Thanks to cloud processing, we can post-process an entire batch of product images in approximately 1 minute. - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): Automatically capture for cloud post-processing. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Perform actions across multiple items at once thanks to Cloud processing. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): Cloud processing with unlimited resolutionWebGL 2.0 - work with all images at onceAuto-Run after capture (when enabled)AutoCrop - based on intelligent product detectionVarious aspect ratio… - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): All operations are guided by a PhotoRobot software Wizard, from: picture-taking to image upload, cloud post-processing, and file delivery.) Applications. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/colour-temperature # SECTION: glossary > colour-temperature # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Colour temperature > The warmth or coolness of white light, measured in kelvin (K); daylight is about 5500–5600 K. Also known as: color temperature, CCT, kelvin. Category: Lighting and optics. Colour temperature describes the hue of white light in kelvin (K): lower values are warmer (orange), higher values cooler (blue). Studio lights for product photography are usually daylight-balanced, around 5500 to 5600 K, and all lights in a set-up should match. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Some DMX-controlled lights used with PhotoRobot allow colour temperature to be set from PhotoRobot Controls. PhotoRobot notes that Broncolor Siros S strobes keep their colour stable when flash intensity changes, which avoids recalibrating colour when light settings change. ## Related terms - [White balance](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-balance): Adjusting an image so neutral whites and greys show no colour cast under the given light. - [CRI (colour rendering index)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cri): A 0–100 score of how faithfully a light source reproduces colours compared with a reference light. - [Continuous light](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/continuous-light): Lighting that stays on constantly, typically LED, so the effect is visible before shooting. - [Colour calibration](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#colour-calibration): Adjusting cameras, lights and screens to a reference so colours are reproduced consistently. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 8 pages. Most relevant: - [FOMEI LED ROLL - PhotoRobot User and Controls Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll): LED ROLL 62 DMX Specifications Power 62W LUX 0.5m / 6940, 1m / 2470, 2m / 668 Color Temperature 5600K Voltage AC 15V / 5A, DC 14.4V Dimensions 61 x 46 x 0.3cm Weight 0.5kg CRI 95 LED Diodes 504 pcs… - [FOMEI LED DMX 150B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-150b): The light itself offers a maximum power of 150W, and a color temperature of 5600K. - [FOMEI LED DMX 600B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-600b): The FOMEI LED DMX 600B is a professional studio light with a maximum output of 600W / 5600K, suitable for professional studio use for video and photography. - [FOMEI LED DMX 300B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-300b): From the main menu, there are menu items for: CCT Mode (Intensity), Scene Mode, Channel and Fan (Cooling) Setting, and BT (Bluetooth) Reset & ID. - [Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions): …Hz) 0.08–2.9 s Flash energy adjustment Over 9 f-stops, in 1/10 or full-stop increments Color temperature 800 J / WS ECTC technology Constant color temperature across the power range. - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Note: Some DMX-controlled lights also provide control over color temperature. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Beyond adjusting intensity, some DMX-controlled lights also provide control over color temperature. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): Nor is capturing texture, or working with white balance and color temperature. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/continuous-light # SECTION: glossary > continuous-light # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Continuous light > Lighting that stays on constantly, typically LED, so the effect is visible before shooting. Also known as: continuous lighting, LED light, LED panel. Category: Lighting and optics. Continuous light stays on all the time rather than flashing, so photographers see exactly what the camera will record. Modern continuous lights are mostly LED panels or COB fixtures; they are essential for video but deliver less intensity than strobes for large subjects. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot controls continuous lights over the DMX bus, for example FOMEI LED DMX fixtures and LED ROLL panels, and can use LED lights of its own design for jewellery and small items. PhotoRobot notes that for larger objects the intensity of LED lights remains insufficient and strobes are needed. ## See on photorobot.com - [Studio lighting overview](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview) - [FOMEI LED ROLL manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll) ## Related terms - [Strobe](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/strobe): A studio flash that emits a very short, powerful burst of light, freezing motion. - [DMX](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dmx): A standard control protocol for lighting, used to set the intensity and colour of lights remotely. - [Colour temperature](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/colour-temperature): The warmth or coolness of white light, measured in kelvin (K); daylight is about 5500–5600 K. - [CRI (colour rendering index)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cri): A 0–100 score of how faithfully a light source reproduces colours compared with a reference light. - [Softbox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/softbox): A light modifier: a fabric box with a diffuser front that turns a small light into a large, soft source. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 60 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): Can I use continuous lights with the CASE? YES, it is possible to use continuous lights with the CASE. - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): Although continuous LED lights are popular (and despite their technological advancement), their light intensity in regards to larger objects remains insufficient. - [FOMEI LED ROLL - PhotoRobot User and Controls Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll): This user manual provides an overview and instructions for the operation of the LED light FOMEI ROLL with PhotoRobot systems. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): The patient is illuminated for photography using professional-quality LED panels, while an evenly illuminated background guarantees easy automated background separation. - [Setting up a PhotoRobot Workspace - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace): Light systems compatible with PhotoRobot include two types of lights: strobe lights from FOMEI and Broncolor, or any LED lights with DMX support. - [How to Improve Productivity in Fashion Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/productivity-fashion-product-photography): Taking it a step further, many studios who produce eCommerce photography are switching from traditional flash lighting to constant LED lighting. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): The iPhone will be capable of handheld photography in a setup using continuous lighting. - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): (When it changes status from a blinking light to a continuous light, it is ready for operation.) 3.4. - [PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact): The status light will change from blinking to continuous light to signal when it is ready for operation. - [PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk First Use Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/virtual-catwalk-user-guide): When the status changes, the light will stop blinking and become a continuous light, signaling the Control Unit is ready for operation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit # SECTION: glossary > control-unit # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Control unit > The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. Also known as: robot controller, Robot Control Unit, controller. Category: Hardware. A control unit is the embedded computer that controls a robot's mechanical movements and its inputs and outputs. In a photography robot it positions the axes, fires the camera at the right moment and communicates with the controlling software over the network. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot designs its control units in-house. They are built into compact machines such as the CASE 850, or supplied as external units in a 19" rack (2U). Since generation 6 they run the Linux-based real-time PhotoRobot OS on an ARM processor; the active versions are G7, the M series and the CASE unit. Each unit has a built-in web server for updates, service and monitoring, connects only over LAN, and provides digital inputs and outputs, laser and DMX control, a safety stop and an API. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot control units technical documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller) - [Control system overview](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/control-system-overview) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Locator](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-locator): App that finds PhotoRobot control units on the local network and opens their web interface. - [Rotary encoder](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotary-encoder): A sensor that reports the exact angular position of a rotating part, such as a turntable plate. - [Motor driver](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/motor-driver): Electronics that supply power to a robot's motors; it determines how fast and precisely each axis can move. - [DMX](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dmx): A standard control protocol for lighting, used to set the intensity and colour of lights remotely. - [Laser positioning](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/laser-positioning): Lasers projected onto the turntable that show where to place a product so it sits at the centre of rotation. - [API (application programming interface)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/api): A defined interface through which one piece of software can use the functions or data of another. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 50 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller): The cloud system has an API for easy integration with the customer’s other systems, and the robot’s control unit also features an API for integration with third-party systems. - [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites): Note that each PhotoRobot consists of both a mechanical part and a Control Unit. - [PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact): a) 360 Photo / Rotary Platform Setup: b) 360 / Rotary Suspension Mode: c) Rotating Mannequin Torso Holder: Note: The Control Unit of the Cube V5 and Cube V6 are a separate but integral component to… - [PhotoRobot Control System - Overview for System Offers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/control-system-overview): Find the different generations of the PhotoRobot Control Unit, basic features of the device, and technical resources for IT teams. - [PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable and Robotic Arm V8 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-turntable-arm-user-guide): One of the main components of the Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm V8 expansion is the Control Unit. - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): Key components of the C-Class photo turntable systems include: The system Control Unit (an integral built-in device for control over C-Class modules) The robot body (strong steel frame with an open… - [PhotoRobot SynchroBox - Functionality & Setup User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup): c) The Control Unit fires the camera shutter via shutter cable in advance. - [PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk First Use Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/virtual-catwalk-user-guide): Note that the location of the Control Unit is not inside of the Catwalk. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide): The Control Unit of the Centerless Table is physically installed inside of the dedicated PhotoRobot HD rack in the front bottom-left shelf of the machine frame. - [First Use & Basic Testing of PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing): Note: If the setup of the Control Unit is not in compliance, set it up first by locating the manual voltage selector on the back of the Control Unit. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/conversion-rate # SECTION: glossary > conversion-rate # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Conversion rate > The share of visitors to a page or shop who complete a purchase. Also known as: conversions. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Conversion rate is the percentage of visitors who complete a desired action, in e-commerce usually a purchase. Product imagery, including the number of images, spins and zoom quality, is one of the factors that influence it. Effects reported for interactive imagery vary widely by category and study, so claims are best checked against a shop's own A/B tests. ## See on photorobot.com - [Boost conversion rates in e-commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/boost-conversion-rates-in-e-commerce) ## Related terms - [PDP (product detail page)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pdp): The web shop page dedicated to one product, with its images, description and buy button. - [Product returns](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-returns): Goods sent back by customers; inaccurate images are a common cause. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [Hero image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hero-image): The main product photo shown first on a product page or listing. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 10 pages. Most relevant: - [How to Boost Conversion Rates in E-Commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/boost-conversion-rates-in-e-commerce): Learning how to boost conversion rates in e-commerce with your product photography is critical to success, especially when trying to increase sales for a small or newer webshop. - [A Quick Guide to 360 Product Photography for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon): Amazon aims to increase conversion rates through enriched visuals, and there are several solutions that exist to produce 360-degree photos that meet their image requirements. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): Meanwhile, brands and retailers use it to generate higher customer engagement, better conversion rates, larger average orders, and reduced returns. - [How Consistency in Visual Content Boosts Revenue](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content): …very least, make your brand appear unprofessional, or, at worst, destroy your webshop’s conversion rates and revenue altogether. - [7 Advantages to 360 Product Viewers for your Website](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-advantages-360-product-viewers-for-websites): Boosting conversion rates in e-commerce is at the top of the priority list for business managers. - [A Change in Balance: From Brick-and-Mortar to Online Retail](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/brick-and-mortar-to-online-retail): Professional 2D / 3D product content like this can show significant impacts on conversion rates, returns, and overall revenue. - [Augmented Reality for Online Retail and E-Commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce): Just as with any product photography for eCommerce and online retail, ultimately, the goal is to boost conversion rates and reduce overall returns. - [Guide to 360 Product Photography for E-Commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-360-product-photography-for-e-commerce): The right product photography improves not only SEO on your website but also conversion rates and revenue benefits. - [How to Improve Workflow in a Product Photography Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio): …vital elements to enhance photo studio workflow, increase throughput and generate higher conversion rates. - [Make the Most of Your Brand’s 360° and 3D Imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-and-3d-imagery): There is a wealth of research to support this, showing that product videos have a serious impact on e-commerce conversion rates. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cpg # SECTION: glossary > cpg # TYPE: Glossary term --- # CPG (consumer packaged goods) > Everyday packaged products such as food, drinks and toiletries, sold in large volumes. Also known as: CPG, consumer packaged goods, FMCG. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Consumer packaged goods (CPG), also called fast-moving consumer goods, are everyday packaged products such as food, beverages, toiletries and cleaning products. Their product images must show packaging, labels and nutritional information accurately. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's GS1 image capture and OCR features target foodservice and CPG, capturing packaging angles together with weights, dimensions, ingredients and nutritional data. Many PhotoRobot output examples in food and packaging are categorised as consumer packaged goods. ## Related terms - [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gs1-image-standards): GS1 guidelines for how product images are captured, named and exchanged in retail supply chains. - [Planogram](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/planogram): A diagram of how products are placed on retail shelves; planogram images show the product face-on for it. - [OCR (optical character recognition)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ocr): Technology that converts text in an image into machine-readable text. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 15 pages. Most relevant: - [Automated CPG Product Photography Outputs: Food Assortment](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/food-package): Industry: CPG Category: Medium objects Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame Output types: Animation, 360 Spin, Still Image Number of images: 1 × 44 Shooting time: 1 min 20 sec… - [Automated Product Photography Outputs: CPG Product - Muesli](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/crunchy-muesli): Industry: CPG Category: Small objects Robots used: Centerless Table, Multicam, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, 3D Model Number of images: 2 × 24 Shooting… - [Example Automated CPG Product Photography: Holiday Gift Box](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/food-package-2): Industry: CPG Category: Medium objects Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Frame Output types: 360 Spin, Still Image Number of images: 1 × 72 Shooting time: 2 min 36 sec Production… - [One-Click CPG Food Product Photography Outputs: Yoghurt](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/yoghurt): Industry: CPG Category: Small objects Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin Number of images: 1 × 24 Shooting time: 0 min 24 sec Production… - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): It could be any object from the size of an engagement ring, to consumer packaged goods, handbags, or small suitcases. - [GS1 Image Standards and Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards): Although many examples thus far have been consumer packaged goods, GS1 applies to any consumer-based trade item. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): GS1 image standards exist to improve efficiency, traceability and food safety for consumer packaged goods, fresh foods and food service. - [Automated Food Product Photography Outputs: Food Plating](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/food-plating): Industry: CPG Category: Small objects Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin Number of images: 1 × 36 Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec Production… - [Automated Food Product Photography Outputs: Green Apple](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/apple): Industry: CPG Category: Small objects Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 850, Case 1300, Frame Output types: Still Image, 360 Spin Number of images: Single-Row 360 Spin Shooting time: 0 min 36 sec… - [Automated Product Photography Outputs: Cuba Havana Gift Box](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/cuba-havana): Industry: CPG Category: Medium objects Robots used: Centerless Table, Case 1300, Robotic Arm, Frame Output types: Animation, 360 Spin, Multi-Row 360, Still Image Number of images: 1 × 86 / 2 × 36… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cri # SECTION: glossary > cri # TYPE: Glossary term --- # CRI (colour rendering index) > A 0–100 score of how faithfully a light source reproduces colours compared with a reference light. Also known as: CRI, colour rendering index, color rendering index. Category: Lighting and optics. The colour rendering index (CRI) rates how faithfully a light source reproduces the colours of objects compared with a reference source, on a scale up to 100. Lights for product photography should have a high CRI, typically 95 or more, so colours in images match the real product. ## How PhotoRobot uses it LED lights documented for PhotoRobot systems list CRI values of 95 to 96. PhotoRobot notes that LED lighting with a low CRI leaves gaps in the colour spectrum, which later image editing or generation tools cannot recover. ## See on photorobot.com - [FOMEI LED ROLL specifications](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll) ## Related terms - [Colour temperature](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/colour-temperature): The warmth or coolness of white light, measured in kelvin (K); daylight is about 5500–5600 K. - [Continuous light](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/continuous-light): Lighting that stays on constantly, typically LED, so the effect is visible before shooting. - [White balance](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-balance): Adjusting an image so neutral whites and greys show no colour cast under the given light. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [FOMEI LED ROLL - PhotoRobot User and Controls Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll): …Temperature 5600K Voltage AC 15V / 5A, DC 14.4V Dimensions 61 x 46 x 0.3cm Weight 0.5kg CRI 95 LED Diodes 504 pcs LED ROLL 100 DMX Specifications. - [FOMEI LED DMX 150B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-150b): Specifications LEDS 1x COB LED chip Wattage 150W CCT 5600K Dimming 0 - 100% Beam Angle 30° CRI 96 LUX 5600K: 0.5m 109000 / 1m 18400 / 2m 4280 / 3m 1900 Voltage AC 220 - 240V Dimensions 420 x 185 x… - [Using AI to Enhance Product Photo Backgrounds](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-product-photo-backgrounds): For example, using LED lighting with low CRI produces photos where part of the color spectrum is missing. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube # SECTION: glossary > cube # TYPE: Glossary term --- # CUBE > Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. Also known as: PhotoRobot Cube, Cube V5, Cube V6, Cube Compact, Cube V6 RotoPower. Category: Hardware. The CUBE is a compact PhotoRobot positioning robot, available as the Cube V5, the Cube V6 and the Cube V6 RotoPower with mains power in the rotating plate. It works in three configurations: as a rotating photography platform, in suspension mode to hang objects in the air, and as a rotating holder for a mannequin torso. It works standalone or in combination with other PhotoRobot machines. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The CUBE is available as Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower, and as the Cube Compact with an integrated control unit. The V6 RotoPower brings mains power into the rotating plate ([RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower)), so an appliance can stay switched on while it turns. The CUBE carries up to 130 kg, including in suspension mode, which is used for handbags, chandeliers, light fittings and bicycles. For fashion, it has a system for [quick mannequin exchange](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quick-mannequin-exchange) and an optional storage cart for up to six mannequins. ## See on photorobot.com - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) - [Cube V5 / V6 / Compact user manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact) ## Related terms - [Suspension mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/suspension-mode): CUBE configuration that hangs a product in the air and rotates it, for items that cannot stand on a plate. - [Quick mannequin exchange](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quick-mannequin-exchange): CUBE system for swapping mannequins in seconds, so the next garment can be styled while the current one is shot. - [Ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin): A mannequin with removable parts, used to photograph garments so the mannequin can be made invisible in the image. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower): PhotoRobot option that brings mains power into the rotating part of a robot, so a product can stay switched on while it turns. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 80 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact): …manual provides technical instructions on the installation, connection, and use of the PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube): The Cube functions standalone as a photography turntable or in combination with other robots for 360-degree product photography. - [Cube Compact - The Universal 360 Photography Robot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/cube-compact-photography-robot): Discover the expanded functionality and features of PhotoRobot’s Cube Compact, the universal 360 product photography robot. - [Introducing the CUBE for Automated Photoshoots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube): Dive in with PhotoRobot and learn all about our CUBE V5, V6, and V6 RotoPower, and what this versatile robot can do for your studio. - [How to Capture 360 Spins of Bicycles with PhotoRobot’s Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/cube-360-product-photography-bicycles): PhotoRobot presents how to photograph 360s of bicycles using the PhotoRobot Cube in this production workflow demonstration. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Ghost mannequin photography such as with PhotoRobot’s Cube produces a true-to-life, 3D effect, giving clothing a “full-bodied” and “worn” appearance. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): Among these, there is also a new variant of the universal photography Cube robot (the Cube Compact), and a new modular setup for the Case 850. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): It syncs cameras and lights with the rotation of the turntable, or combines with the Cube to suspend products in air. - [Robotic Turntable for 360° Photography and Heavy Objects](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360deg-photography-and-heavy-objects): It’s simple to pair the Robotic Turntable with any arm for simple and comfortable shooting of 360° photos, or even to combine it with PhotoRobot’s Cube for synchronous rotation with a partially… - [On-Mannequin Fashion Product Photography Using PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography): View a production demo of on-mannequin photography using the PhotoRobot Cube and Controls App Workflow Automation Software. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cubiscan # SECTION: glossary > cubiscan # TYPE: Glossary term --- # CubiScan > A dimensioning system that weighs and measures items; PhotoRobot records its data with the product images. Also known as: CubiScan 325, dimensioning system. Category: Hardware. CubiScan is a family of dimensioning systems that measure an item's dimensions and weight automatically. They are widely used in shipping and receiving to capture product data without manual measuring. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot supports all CubiScan products at the data level and recommends the CubiScan 325, which measures items up to 90 x 60 x 60 cm and 25 kg. Measurements are stored as product metadata, exported with the images and used to adjust the robot automatically, for example to raise the camera to the vertical centre of the product before a multi-row spin. A [SmartCode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes) starts a measurement, and PhotoRobot makes an optional supporting table for the device. ## See on photorobot.com - [Weighing and measuring products with CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/weighing-and-measuring-products) ## Related terms - [SmartCodes](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes): Printed PhotoRobot trigger codes that start software actions when scanned, such as starting a capture sequence. - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. - [Product ingestion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-ingestion): Receiving and registering products in the studio before photography: scanning, measuring, sorting. - [Image metadata (EXIF, IPTC, XMP)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-metadata): Information stored inside an image file, such as camera settings, copyright, keywords and description. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 20 pages. Most relevant: - [Weighing and Measuring Products with CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/weighing-and-measuring-products): Read a detailed overview on the integration and use of CubiScan Dimensioning Systems to weigh & measure products in PhotoRobot workflows. - [Practical SmartCode Use in High-Volume Photo Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow): Scanning SmartCodes allows direct software control to: Weigh & measure items with CubiScan. - [PhotoRobot SmartCodes User Guide and Print-Ready Code Sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing): These special SmartCodes include: 8595676400053 – Start Sequence 8595676400060 – Ready for Shoot 8595676400077 – Start CubiScan Measurement 8595676400084 – Open Sort to Shelves Start Sequence… - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): A CubiScan dimensioning system is present to weigh & measure items, and to auto create metadata. - [How to Create a Fashion Product Photography Style Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide): Place the product onto whatever PhotoRobot you’re using, style it accordingly, and simply scan its barcode using CubiScan. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): …similar categories to software shelves (or carts); and weighing & measuring objects with CubiScan. - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Take for example how PhotoRobot has integrated CubiScan into workflows and digital asset management. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): If CubiScan is present in the workflow, you can scan products when receiving them to obtain their exact weights, measurements, and dimensions. - [Advanced Software Tools for Image Capture & Control](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/image-capture-control-tools): Using CubiScan, we detect the object’s size and shape, weigh & measure it, and save dimensions to the specific item. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): …and lights with DMX control; Barcode scanners; Object dimensioning & weighing devices (CubiScan); Export feeds via API (for client delivery, websites, eCommerce); Digital asset management software for… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cyclorama # SECTION: glossary > cyclorama # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Cyclorama > A curved background where the floor sweeps into the wall, giving a seamless, horizon-free backdrop. Also known as: cyc, infinity cove. Category: Lighting and optics. A cyclorama (infinity cove) is a curved studio background in which the floor sweeps seamlessly into the wall, so no corner or horizon line is visible. It is used for large products such as cars and furniture. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The square configuration of the PhotoRobot Carousel leaves space at the back to fix a background or cyclorama, and the drive-up ramps of the Carousel 3000 can be replaced with cyclorama connectors. ## See on photorobot.com - [Carousel user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carousel) ## Related terms - [Carousel 3000](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/carousel-3000): PhotoRobot 3 m rotating platform for cars, furniture and other large objects of up to 2000 kg. - [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/carousel-5000): PhotoRobot low-profile heavy-duty turntable for cars and machinery, with a 4000 kg load capacity. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 4 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carousel): This allows space for a locking mechanism at the back edge of the Carousel to fix a background or cyclorama. - [CAROUSEL 3000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-3000): …platform in the centre and straight drive-up ramps at the edges (replaceable for a cyclorama connectors if required). - [PhotoRobot Carpet Studio with Carousel - User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carpet-studio): Rotary platform (1) Plate floor (2) Motor assembly (3) Machine connectors dome (4) Drive-up ramps (5) Background / cyclorama connecting points (6) 19-inch rack Control Unit (7) Note: The 19-inch rack… - [Pricing Levels of Robotic Workspaces](https://www.photorobot.com/hardware-pricing): …studio floor and get a 3 m robotic industrial-grade rotating platform - with or without cyclorama - circle or square footprint. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dam # SECTION: glossary > dam # TYPE: Glossary term --- # DAM (digital asset management) > Software for storing, organising, searching and distributing images, video and other media files. Also known as: DAM, digital asset management. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Digital asset management (DAM) is software for storing, organising, searching, approving and distributing media files such as product photos, spins and videos, with their metadata and usage rights. A DAM is usually the single source of truth for approved images that shops, marketplaces and marketing use. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls includes digital asset management: assets are organised into projects, items and folders, tagged and found by full-text search, reviewed in an approval process and shared with clients through their own pages. PhotoRobot also helps customers transfer existing data into it, and webhooks keep an external DAM in sync. ## See on photorobot.com - [Digital asset management features](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management) - [Digital asset management software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software) ## Related terms - [PIM (product information management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pim): A system that stores and distributes product data, such as descriptions and attributes, to all sales channels. - [Image metadata (EXIF, IPTC, XMP)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-metadata): Information stored inside an image file, such as camera settings, copyright, keywords and description. - [Approval workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/approval-workflow): A defined step in which managers or clients approve or reject images before publishing. - [Geo-redundant storage](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/geo-redundant-storage): Storing copies of data in several distant locations so it survives the loss of a data centre. - [PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-cloud): PhotoRobot's cloud platform for storing, processing, hosting and distributing product images. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 33 pages. Most relevant: - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software DAM Software - What It Can Do For Your Studio. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): Read how integrated digital asset management software in a production workflow equips large-scale manufacturers for high-speed, high-volume operations. - [Digital Asset Management for Large-Scale Manufacturers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers): Discover 5 key innovations in digital asset management to support high-volume production, reduce costs, and free up valuable human resources. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Manage, store, secure, access, search & share all digital assets from anywhere, anytime with cloud-based, software-driven digital asset management (DAM). - [GS1 Image Standards and Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards): Gain a better understanding of GS1 image standards and digital asset management (DAM) with PhotoRobot systems and control software. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): Automate product photography, from image capture to editing, publishing & digital asset management with user-friendly, easily integrated photo studio software. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Digital asset management We’ll guide you through the production process of eCommerce photography, from product-in to product-out. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): It summarizes the goals of the software, how the solution works, digital asset management, supported file formats, software pricing, and account creation. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): In addition, digital asset management features ensure all product content is securely stored, searchable, and redistributable. - [How to Improve Productivity in Fashion Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/productivity-fashion-product-photography): Meeting these challenges head-on requires brands to sharpen imaging practices, and ensure both digital asset management and workflows are optimal. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/depth-of-field # SECTION: glossary > depth-of-field # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Depth of field > The distance range in front of and behind the focus point that appears acceptably sharp. Also known as: DoF. Category: Lighting and optics. Depth of field (DoF) is the range of distances in a scene that appears acceptably sharp. It depends on aperture, focal length, subject distance and sensor size: smaller apertures and greater distances increase it, longer lenses and closer subjects decrease it. In product photography the whole product usually needs to be sharp from front to back, which calls for small apertures and therefore powerful lighting. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot stresses that in 360 spins the entire product must stay in focus at every angle, ideally with the background out of focus. Its free [Depth of Field Calculator](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator) and [Depth of Field Chart](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart) estimate near and far focus limits for full-frame and Canon APS-C cameras. ## See on photorobot.com - [Depth of field calculator](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator) - [Depth of field chart](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart) ## Related terms - [Aperture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aperture): The adjustable lens opening, given as an f-number; smaller openings give more depth of field. - [Hyperfocal distance](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hyperfocal-distance): The focus distance that gives the maximum depth of field, extending sharpness to infinity. - [Focus stacking](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focus-stacking): Combining several photos focused at different distances into one image that is sharp throughout. - [Focal length](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focal-length): The lens property, in millimetres, that sets the angle of view and magnification. - [Full-frame sensor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/full-frame-sensor): A camera sensor the size of 35 mm film (36 x 24 mm), preferred for product photography. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [Depth of Field Chart for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart): The Depth of Field chart shows total depth of field for common subject distances and apertures, with the smaller numbers in each cell giving the precise near–far focus range. - [Depth of Field Calculator for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator): Use the Depth of Field Calculator to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject… - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): …photography, how PhotoRobot solves them, and technical notes on achieving the perfect depth of field. - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): Camera sensor size affects mostly the angle of view, the “crop factor”, performance in different lighting conditions, dynamic range, and depth of field. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): For reference, use the PhotoRobot Depth of Field Calculator to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture,… - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): …sequence; renders special techniques such as automated cut-out; chromakey masking and DoF stacking for enhanced depth of field; with workflow, database, automated upload, and much more. - [Guide to Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography): Strobe lighting is extremely bright and its high output provides a deep depth of field that maintains a sharp focus on products and also appears to freeze them in motion. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): They help to maintain sharp focus on smaller products, eliminate motion blur, and provide a much larger depth of field. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): These provide a higher depth of field, allowing for greater sharpness of products within frame. - [Effective Equipment for 360 Spin Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography): Strobe lighting is extremely bright and with high output that creates a deep depth of field. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/detail-shot # SECTION: glossary > detail-shot # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Detail shot > A close-up photo of one feature of a product, such as a texture, logo or mechanism. Also known as: detailed shot, close-up shot. Category: Photography techniques. A detail shot is a close-up photograph of a single feature of a product, such as a fabric texture, a stitch, a logo or a mechanism. It shows information that is lost in a full-product view. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's camera resolution guide notes that very fine details often need close-up shots rather than a higher-resolution camera, presented as hotspot zooms in the viewer. [PhotoRobot Touch](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch) is designed for capturing large numbers of handheld detail shots in a guided order. ## Related terms - [Macro photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-photography): Photographing small subjects at close range so that they appear life-size or larger on the sensor. - [Hotspot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hotspot): A clickable point on a product image or spin that opens a detail image, zoom or annotation. - [PhotoRobot Touch](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-touch): PhotoRobot's iPhone app for handheld product photos, detail shots and simple 360 spins inside the PhotoRobot workflow. - [Camera resolution](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/camera-resolution): The number of pixels a camera sensor records, given in megapixels (MP). ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 21 pages. Most relevant: - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): PhotoRobot Touch features automated workflow software for iPhone product photography of handheld still images, detailed shots, and simple 360 spins. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): It enables teams to capture professional handheld stills, detailed shots, and simple 360s with one or multiple iPhones in combination with PhotoRobot. - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): However, some items might still call for additional close-up zooms and detailed shots to capture extremely small details. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Shoppers can then access single images, 360 spins, & detailed shots or annotations at the click of a button. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): It may also automate back-end operations like the extraction of specific still images: packshots, GS1 imagery, detailed shots and more. - [How to Create a Fashion Product Photography Style Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide): Here, the style guide might include three basic shots: the front view, the back, and a detailed shot. - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): Additionally, CAPP is necessary to create explicit folders such as for workflows, spins, detailed shots, and miscellaneous images. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): …and compatible cameras for remote image capture Professional, wireless Canon camera for detailed shots A panoramic camera for capturing the interior Studio lighting, a light tent, or backdrop A… - [Professional Tips for Footwear Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes): The backside 3 / 4 shot - Capture photos with the backside of the shoe forward, creating a detailed shot. - [A Virtual Digital Wardrobe - 3D Textile Motion Simulation](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-textile-motion-simulation): It is also necessary to take photos horizontally at every 10th angle, and to capture detailed shots of each item’s material. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/developer-portal # SECTION: glossary > developer-portal # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Developer Portal > PhotoRobot's documentation site for the Cloud API, with interactive endpoint references. Also known as: Developer Portal, Developer Platform. Category: Software. The PhotoRobot Developer Portal (developer.photorobot.com) is the documentation site for PhotoRobot's Cloud API. It provides interactive endpoint references and guides, including the migration from API V1 to V2, for customers' IT teams. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot recommends sharing the Developer Portal with the customer's IT department during system integration; it describes import of input data, output feeds and API-based publishing. ## See on photorobot.com - [Introducing the Developer Portal](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/developer-portal-cloud-api-v2) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Cloud API](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api): PhotoRobot's REST API for integrating the studio with catalogue, DAM, PIM and e-commerce systems. - [API (application programming interface)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/api): A defined interface through which one piece of software can use the functions or data of another. - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 6 pages. Most relevant: - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Developer Portal & Cloud API V2](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/developer-portal-cloud-api-v2): …custom, highly scalable photography workflows for modern enterprise using the PhotoRobot Developer Portal & API V2 for cloud integrations. - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): For Technical Teams: Access the complete integration documentation using the PhotoRobot Developer Portal. - [PhotoRobot Product Photography Automation Solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/): Direct your development teams to the PhotoRobot Developer Portal for the ultimate toolkit to build custom, highly scalable photography workflows. - [The PhotoRobot-Powered Production Line](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line): Leverage an enterprise-grade Developer Portal for cloud integrations to publish files automatically & instantly after capture. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): To understand the PhotoRobot Viewer parameters in technical detail, refer to the PhotoRobot Developer Portal. - [Introducing: Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/customer-webhooks): For more technical information including developer contract and signature examples, refer to PhotoRobot Developer Portal – Webhooks. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/diffusion # SECTION: glossary > diffusion # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Diffusion > Scattering light through a translucent material to make it softer and more even. Also known as: diffuser, diffuse lighting, diffusion background. Category: Lighting and optics. Diffusion scatters light by passing it through or reflecting it off a translucent material such as fabric, paper or frosted acrylic. Diffused light is softer and more even, with gentler shadows and fewer hard reflections. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Several PhotoRobot machines have an integrated diffuse white background, such as the CASE 850 and the white diffusion cloth on the C-Class turntables, which lets products be lit evenly for a white background. PhotoRobot also warns that excessive backlight through a diffuse box blurs product contours. ## Related terms - [Softbox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/softbox): A light modifier: a fabric box with a diffuser front that turns a small light into a large, soft source. - [Light-wrap](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/light-wrap): Background light spilling around the edges of a product, softening its contours. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. - [Shadow-free photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shadow-free-photography): Lighting a product so that it casts no visible shadow on its background or support. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 34 pages. Most relevant: - [Guide to Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography): Inside the studio: lights, diffusers and accessories for 360 product photography. - [CASE 1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300): 1300 mm hardened optical-glass plate, diffusion background, several automatic product-positioning lasers, high motor-power, remote control, API, reflection boards and flag holders - all in easily… - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): There is space for the glass plate, the hardware, an integrated diffusion cloth background, background holders, and other items. - [PhotoRobot’s Case for Automated 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography): Everything is secure in the protective case, from the glass rotary plate to the diffuse background and the supporting arcs (available in two sizes) for carrying cameras. - [PhotoRobot's Centerless Table, a Motorized Photography Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table): The photographed object is lit up from the back and the bottom, thanks to two important features: the glass plate and the diffusion background. - [Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot’s CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photoshoots-case-850): There is space inside for the glass plate, the background made of diffusion cloth, background holders, and other small accessories. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table - Design Features & Dynamics](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-design-dynamics): Find out about integration of the studio lights, and the built-in diffusion background for perfectly lighting objects. - [FOMEI LED ROLL - PhotoRobot User and Controls Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll): The softbox for the FOMEI LED ROLL consists of a folding frame, a diffuser, and a honeycomb filter. - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): …robot body (strong steel frame with an open design for superior object lighting) White diffusion cloth background (mounted to the machine for the automatic capture of photos on a pure white… - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): …& calibration probe Spare X-rings General purpose lugs to hold lights, light dividers, diffusion panels, etc. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dmx # SECTION: glossary > dmx # TYPE: Glossary term --- # DMX > A standard control protocol for lighting, used to set the intensity and colour of lights remotely. Also known as: DMX512, DMX control. Category: Lighting and optics. DMX (DMX512) is a standard digital protocol for controlling lighting equipment from one controller. Each light listens on its own address and receives values for intensity and, where supported, colour temperature or effects. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot uses DMX to control continuous LED lights, so a preset can set lighting automatically for each product category. DMX control is integrated directly into PhotoRobot control units, which PhotoRobot states reduces failure points compared with USB converters on a PC; the PINK system also sets its LED intensity over DMX. ## See on photorobot.com - [FOMEI LED DMX 300B manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-300b) - [Control units: DMX](https://www.photorobot.com/controller) ## Related terms - [Continuous light](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/continuous-light): Lighting that stays on constantly, typically LED, so the effect is visible before shooting. - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Strobe](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/strobe): A studio flash that emits a very short, powerful burst of light, freezing motion. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 33 pages. Most relevant: - [FOMEI LED DMX 600B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-600b): The FOMEI LED DMX 600B - PhotoRobot User Guide aims to support PhotoRobot customers in the operation of their light with PhotoRobot. - [FOMEI LED DMX 300B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-300b): …manual for PhotoRobot customers provides instructions for the operation of the FOMEI LED DMX 300B studio light. - [FOMEI LED DMX 150B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-150b): …user manual provides an overview and instructions for operation of the FOMEI LED DMX 150B studio light with PhotoRobot. - [FOMEI LED ROLL - PhotoRobot User and Controls Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll): Find documentation on the LED ROLL 62 DMX, LED ROLL 100 DMX, LED ROLL 250 DMX, and LED ROLL RGB 100 DMX. - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): Find the choices for continuous, strobe, and DMX-controlled lighting from Broncolor, FOMEI, and Profoto. - [PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller): …(SLAVE module) N/A YES N/A Digital inputs 4 2 4 Digital outputs 2 Laser out N/A YES DMX N/A YES N/A USB output N/A YES CAN bus (for expansion boards) N/A YES N/A RS485 (on SLAVE modules) N/A YES N/A… - [Setting up a PhotoRobot Workspace - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace): Light systems compatible with PhotoRobot include two types of lights: strobe lights from FOMEI and Broncolor, or any LED lights with DMX support. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): At the same time, the intensity of all lights is DMX-controlled by the system, allowing for the creation of various presets (if required) that may vary depending on the color of the skin, for example. - [PhotoRobot PWS](https://www.photorobot.com/pws): …or a recommended next step — even when the fault lies in a Canon body, a firewall, a DMX box or the customer’s local IT. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): FOMEI: Stobes, LED (2004 - Present) Broncolor Siros: Strobes (2004 - Present) RotoLight: LED (2004 - Present) DMX Standard Compatible Lights: LED (2016 - Present) Profoto D2: Strobes (2016 - Present)… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dpi # SECTION: glossary > dpi # TYPE: Glossary term --- # DPI (dots per inch) > A print density value stored in image files; it does not change the pixel resolution of a digital image. Also known as: DPI, PPI. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. DPI (dots per inch) describes print density: how many image pixels are printed per inch. In a digital file it is only a metadata value; the actual resolution is the number of pixels, so changing DPI alone does not make an image sharper on screen. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls sets DPI to 72 by default on export, and its item export manual notes that adjusting DPI has no effect on image resolution, so the default is recommended in most cases. ## Related terms - [Camera resolution](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/camera-resolution): The number of pixels a camera sensor records, given in megapixels (MP). - [Item export](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-export): PhotoRobot Controls function that exports items to local disk or cloud in chosen formats, sizes and file names. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 2 pages. Most relevant: - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): There are additional options to adjust DPI, choose Background color, Change quality, and to download original or resized files. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): There are additional options to adjust DPI, choose Background color, Change quality, and to download original or resized files. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dslr # SECTION: glossary > dslr # TYPE: Glossary term --- # DSLR > A digital camera that uses a mirror and optical viewfinder, with interchangeable lenses. Also known as: digital SLR, digital single-lens reflex. Category: Lighting and optics. A DSLR (digital single-lens reflex) camera uses a mirror to send the image from the lens to an optical viewfinder; the mirror flips up during exposure. DSLRs have large sensors and interchangeable lenses and were the studio standard before mirrorless cameras. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot supports a range of Canon DSLRs, but recommends mirrorless Canon cameras for the most seamless integration. PhotoRobot control units can pre-raise an SLR's mirror with one signal and expose with a second. ## See on photorobot.com - [DSLR vs mirrorless cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/dslr-vs-mirrorless-cameras-in-2020-comparison-and-review) - [Compatible cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras) ## Related terms - [Mirrorless camera](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/mirrorless-camera): A camera with interchangeable lenses but no mirror; the sensor feeds an electronic viewfinder. - [Canon EDSDK](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/canon-edsdk): Canon's software development kit for controlling EOS cameras from a computer over USB. - [Shutter release cable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-release-cable): A cable that fires the camera from an external device, such as a robot's control unit. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 41 pages. Most relevant: - [DSLR vs Mirrorless Cameras in 2020: Comparison and Review](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/dslr-vs-mirrorless-cameras-in-2020-comparison-and-review): …quick review and comparison of the latest models of mirrorless cameras versus the latest DSLR cameras. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): At the same time, mirrorless cameras retain the primary advantages of SLR cameras (the interchangeable lenses, and large sensor). - [Camera Configuration - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-configuration): If using a DSLR with live view, check that live view is not preventing the flash from triggering. - [Compatible Cameras with PhotoRobot - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras): While there is a range of supported digital SLRs (DSLRs) with interchangeable lenses in the compatible camera list, mirrorless cameras offer the most seamless integration with PhotoRobot. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): This makes it possible to produce decent 360 spins without a high-end DSLR or mirrorless camera. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): Macro photography of jewelry calls for an SLR camera with either an APS-C or Full Frame sensor. - [Professional Tips for Footwear Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes): When choosing the best camera for product photos, PhotoRobot systems support mid to high-end DSLR and mirrorless Canon camera models. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): PhotoRobot modules support DSLR and mirrorless Canon cameras, with 26 MP models usually more than efficient. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): When deciding on cameras, PhotoRobot compatible cameras include Canon DSLR and mirrorless models. - [PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm for 360 Object Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robotic-arm-360-object-photography): The Manfrotto tripod head with micro travel in 3 axes supports DSLR as well as larger cameras with digital backs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dynamic-range # SECTION: glossary > dynamic-range # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Dynamic range > The range between the darkest and brightest tones a camera can record with detail. Category: Lighting and optics. Dynamic range is the span between the darkest and brightest tones a sensor can record while still keeping detail, usually expressed in stops. Scenes that exceed it lose detail in the shadows, the highlights or both. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot notes that full-frame sensors often offer greater dynamic range than APS-C, and its CASE 850 user guide recommends low ISO for the highest dynamic range, with RAW as an option for the heavy backlight of a pure white background. ## Related terms - [ISO sensitivity](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/iso): The camera's sensitivity setting; low ISO gives the cleanest images and widest dynamic range. - [Highlight clipping](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/highlight-clipping): Overexposed areas that are recorded as pure white and have lost all detail. - [RAW file](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/raw-file): The unprocessed sensor data saved by a camera, with maximum editing latitude. - [Full-frame sensor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/full-frame-sensor): A camera sensor the size of 35 mm film (36 x 24 mm), preferred for product photography. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): …results; RAW remains an option for enthusiasts who want to fine-tune maximum dynamic range, e.g. - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): Camera sensor size affects mostly the angle of view, the “crop factor”, performance in different lighting conditions, dynamic range, and depth of field. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): This makes background removal easier to automate, and provides advantages in speed, quality, sharpness and dynamic range. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/erp # SECTION: glossary > erp # TYPE: Glossary term --- # ERP (enterprise resource planning) > Business software that manages core processes such as inventory, orders and finance. Also known as: ERP, enterprise resource planning. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Enterprise resource planning (ERP) software manages a company's core processes, such as inventory, purchasing, orders and finance, in one system. In product photography it is often the source of item lists and the place where production status is tracked. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Cloud webhooks can notify an ERP or QC board when an item moves to statuses such as EDITED, APPROVED or PUBLISHED. ## Related terms - [PIM (product information management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pim): A system that stores and distributes product data, such as descriptions and attributes, to all sales channels. - [DAM (digital asset management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dam): Software for storing, organising, searching and distributing images, video and other media files. - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. - [Item status](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-status): The production state of an item in PhotoRobot Controls, such as Received, Captured, Edited or Published. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 6 pages. Most relevant: - [Introducing: Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/customer-webhooks): PhotoRobot introduces Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud to connect your DAM, PIM, ERP, or custom automation with signed outbound webhooks. - [What is Scalable Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-scalable-product-photography): Once assets are captured and processed, the software utilizes API integrations to push the formatted images directly to Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Product Information Management (PIM)… - [What is Automated Product Content Production?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-content-production): …assets directly to e-commerce platforms, Content Delivery Networks (CDNs), or internal ERP systems. - [Digital Asset Management for Large-Scale Manufacturers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers): In the context of digital supply chains, they provide visibility and traceability superior to spreadsheet or ERP-dependent supply chains. - [Emersya: Interactive Product Experiences in 3D, AR and VR](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/emersya-product-experiences-in-3d-ar-and-vr): It is also designed for easy linking with ordering systems and ERP, and, as a fully manageable SAAS platform, there is no software to install. - [GS1 Image Standards and Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards): In supply chain management, businesses also achieve visibility and traceability far superior to spreadsheet or ERP-dependent supply chains. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed # SECTION: glossary > export-feed # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Export feed > A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. Also known as: XML feed, JSON feed, dynamic feed, e-commerce export feed. Category: Software. An export feed is a machine-readable file, usually XML or JSON, that lists items with their properties and image URLs. E-commerce platforms and other systems read the feed at intervals to pick up new and updated content automatically. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls provides password-protected dynamic feeds in XML or JSON at project, organisation or client level, with properties such as name, ID, SKU, status and timestamp. Feeds let the first finished images of a large order go online while the rest is still being photographed. ## See on photorobot.com - [System integration: output data](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration) - [Image hosting: integration](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting) ## Related terms - [Automatic publishing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/automatic-publishing): Making finished images available online immediately after capture and processing, without manual upload. - [PhotoRobot Cloud API](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api): PhotoRobot's REST API for integrating the studio with catalogue, DAM, PIM and e-commerce systems. - [Item export](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-export): PhotoRobot Controls function that exports items to local disk or cloud in chosen formats, sizes and file names. - [SKU (stock keeping unit)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sku): A retailer's internal code for one distinct product variant. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 24 pages. Most relevant: - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): API & Publish: Auto publish immediately after image capture to PhotoRobot Cloud, or via API to existing eCommerce export feeds. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): There is also direct integration with eCommerce export feeds, image optimization, and support for JSON / XML formats. - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and Integration with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/optical-character-recognition): This tool comes at no extra cost, and it can extract text directly off of items to include in your export feed and easily upload to webshops or product management tools. - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): Images are delivered via a built-in spin viewer (easy to integrate to any existing webpage), secured dynamic feeds, or by single-click download. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Easily integrate with e-commerce export feeds. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): Integrate with your e-commerce by using export feeds. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Integrate with your e-commerce using export feeds on project, organization, or client level, with JSON and XML formats available. - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): Regarding output data, the system supports dynamic feeds (XML or JSON) with password protection. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): …with DMX control; Barcode scanners; Object dimensioning & weighing devices (CubiScan); Export feeds via API (for client delivery, websites, eCommerce); Digital asset management software for sharing,… - [Digital Asset Management for Large-Scale Manufacturers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers): They can host images via PhotoRobot's 360 Product Viewer, or connect directly with eCommerce export feeds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/exposure # SECTION: glossary > exposure # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Exposure > The amount of light that reaches the sensor, set by aperture, shutter speed, ISO and light output. Also known as: exposure triangle. Category: Lighting and optics. Exposure is the amount of light recorded by the camera sensor for an image. It is controlled by aperture, shutter speed and ISO sensitivity, and in the studio by the output of the lights; a correct exposure keeps highlights and shadows within the sensor's range. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Capture PI Advisor in PhotoRobot Controls evaluates exposure balance, highlight clipping and shadow density and suggests changes to aperture, shutter speed, ISO or light intensity. ## Related terms - [Aperture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aperture): The adjustable lens opening, given as an f-number; smaller openings give more depth of field. - [Shutter speed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-speed): How long the camera shutter stays open; with flash, the flash duration usually freezes the motion instead. - [ISO sensitivity](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/iso): The camera's sensitivity setting; low ISO gives the cleanest images and widest dynamic range. - [Highlight clipping](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/highlight-clipping): Overexposed areas that are recorded as pure white and have lost all detail. - [Histogram](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/histogram): A graph of how many pixels in an image have each brightness value. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 39 pages. Most relevant: - [FOMEI Digital Pro X Studio Flash - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-digital-pro-x): Note that after an initial exposure value has been set in the Digital Pro X, the device allows for precise exposure adjustments without the need for an external exposure meter. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Tight-Fitting Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress): Studio lighting - We utilize both strobe lighting and LED panel lights to create the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - [How to Use a Ghost Mannequin for Fashion eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin): Studio lighting - PhotoRobot’s lighting combines strobe lighting and LED panels to achieve the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - [What is Automated Image Capture?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-image-capture): It ensures that motion blur is eliminated and exposure remains perfectly consistent across high-speed capture sequences. - [Fashion Photography of a Blazer on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-blazers): Studio lighting - For this, we combine strobe lighting and LED panels to reach the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - [Fashion Photography of a Cardigan on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-cardigan): Studio lighting - For lighting, PhotoRobot combines strobe lighting and LED panels to reach the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - [Fashion Photography of Denim Jeans on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-jeans): Studio lighting - For lighting, we combine strobe lighting and LED panels to achieve the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography of a Spaghetti Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-spaghetti-dress): Studio lighting - The lighting setup combines strobe lighting and LED panels to obtain the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Button-Up Shirt](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-button-up-shirt): Studio lighting - This setup combines strobe lighting and LED panel lights to achieve the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Zip-Up Hoodie](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-zip-up-hoodie): Studio lighting - Our setup uses a combination of strobe lighting and LED panel lights to create the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin # SECTION: glossary > fast-spin # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Fast Spin > PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. Also known as: Fast-shot mode, fast shot, non-stop spin, non-stop capture, non-stop rotation. Category: Software. Fast Spin, also called Fast-shot or non-stop mode, photographs a product while the turntable keeps rotating instead of stopping at each angle. The robot fires the camera just before each target angle and a very short strobe flash freezes the motion. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot reads the turntable position about 1000 times per second and sends the capture signal ahead of each angle to compensate for the camera's shutter lag. PhotoRobot states that a 36-image spin takes about 20 seconds in this mode, roughly up to four times faster than stop-and-shoot capture. It needs a camera with high shooting speed, strobes with fast recycling and, with several cameras, the [SynchroBox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox). ## See on photorobot.com - [Capture and Control: Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control) - [Fast shot mode video demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/fast-shot-mode-feature-demo) ## Related terms - [Shutter lag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-lag): The delay between triggering a camera and the moment the image is actually exposed. - [Flash duration](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flash-duration): How long a flash burst lasts; a very short flash freezes a moving subject sharply. - [Strobe](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/strobe): A studio flash that emits a very short, powerful burst of light, freezing motion. - [Rotary encoder](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotary-encoder): A sensor that reports the exact angular position of a rotating part, such as a turntable plate. - [SynchroBox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox): PhotoRobot multi-camera controller that fires each camera with its own advance; up to 8 cameras per unit, units can be linked. - [Capture sequence](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-sequence): The programmed order of angles, camera triggers and movements a robot performs to photograph an item. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 32 pages. Most relevant: - [How PhotoRobot Fast Shot Mode Accelerates Capture](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/fast-shot-mode-feature-demo): Watch a demonstration of PhotoRobot Fast Shot Mode producing 36 still images and a 360 spin 20 seconds after preparation. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): For example, some cameras will not accurately function during non-stop rotation of the item. - [Capture And Control](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control): Another feature exclusive to PhotoRobot is Fast Spin mode, allowing you to capture a product in 10 seconds or less. - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Sequence options include: Workspace configuration - Access workspaces or change between each Normal vs Fast-shot toggle - Configure to pause turntable rotation before taking photos (Normal), or, for… - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Sequence options include: Workspace configuration to access one or more workspaces Normal versus fast shot mode to either pause turntable rotation for each photo (normal), or to shoot during non-stop… - [PhotoRobot SynchroBox - Functionality & Setup User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup): To understand the theory of the SynchroBox, take for example the sequences of standard capture mode versus fast-spin capture mode with PhotoRobot. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): …Additionally, when using PhotoRobot with strobes, robotized capture is possible in Fast Shot Mode. - [Setting up a PhotoRobot Workspace - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace): To activate Fast-shot mode, connect any robots with a camera via a shutter cable. - [360 Degree Spin Photography of Dirt Bikes and Quads](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/spin-photography-dirt-bikes-and-quads): It also provides one key feature for this particular photoshoot — non-stop spin and capture. - [360 Spin Photography of Bicycles with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-spin-photography-bicycles): To avoid the complete nightmare of standard start-stop photography, which everybody else uses, PhotoRobot has its non-stop spin mode. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/file-naming-convention # SECTION: glossary > file-naming-convention # TYPE: Glossary term --- # File naming convention > A rule for naming image files so systems can match them to products and views automatically. Also known as: naming convention, filename template, filename structure. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A file naming convention is a rule for building image file names, typically from the product identifier, the view or angle and a sequence number. Consistent names let shops, PIM and DAM systems assign images to products automatically. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls renames downloaded images automatically and exports them with configurable filename templates, so the same content can be delivered in different structures to different recipients. ## Related terms - [Item export](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-export): PhotoRobot Controls function that exports items to local disk or cloud in chosen formats, sizes and file names. - [SKU (stock keeping unit)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sku): A retailer's internal code for one distinct product variant. - [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gs1-image-standards): GS1 guidelines for how product images are captured, named and exchanged in retail supply chains. - [Export feed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed): A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 20 pages. Most relevant: - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): There is full support for JPEG, PNG, WebP, as well as RAW files, camera downloads, and naming conventions. - [GS1 Image Standards and Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards): These “ GS1 Product Image Specifications ” dictate image type, resolution, file naming conventions, and final deliverables. - [How to Create a Fashion Product Photography Style Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide): They contain angles to photograph from as well as file naming conventions, editing & post processing parameters, and more. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): Item export makes it possible to define items with custom naming conventions, specify image format, resolution, and various filename template variables. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Plan for aspects such as product styling, or post-production workflows like photo editing, file naming conventions, or review & publishing. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): To further organize for photoshoots, set up a file naming convention and a tagging structure. - [How to Improve SEO in Fashion ECommerce and Online Retail](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-ecommerce-seo-tips): For this, it’s important to agree on a file naming convention from the start. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): …related to image formatting and file delivery All images call for customer-specific file naming conventions: branding, customer codes, product SKU, number, type, etc File types exist in various… - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Resellers expect specific formatting: such as file naming conventions, file types, image resolution, and more. - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): Everything is in high resolution providing a deep field of zoom, and with your chosen file formats and naming conventions. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flag # SECTION: glossary > flag # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Flag > An opaque panel that blocks light from reaching part of the scene or the lens. Also known as: black flag, gobo. Category: Lighting and optics. A flag is an opaque panel, usually black, placed to block light from reaching part of the scene or the lens. Flags control spill and reflections and add defining dark edges to glossy or transparent products. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The C-Class turntables have a nylon web under the glass to hold black flags beneath the table, and the CASE 1300 includes reflection boards and flag holders. ## Related terms - [Reflector](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/reflector): A surface that bounces light back onto the subject to fill shadows; also the dish fitted to a light. - [Softbox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/softbox): A light modifier: a fabric box with a diffuser front that turns a small light into a large, soft source. - [Optical glass plate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/optical-glass-plate): A turntable top made of optical glass that can be lit and photographed through, giving shadow-free images. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 6 pages. Most relevant: - [Discover PhotoRobot C-Class 360 Turntables in Action](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/c-class-turntables-demo): There is also a nylon web under the glass to hold black flags under the table if necessary, and to help photographers achieve perfect lighting conditions in no time at all. - [CASE 1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300): …product-positioning lasers, high motor-power, remote control, API, reflection boards and flag holders - all in easily portable form - for high-productive studio work - or on the go. - [7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo): diffusers, honeycombs, reflectors black flags, etc Various accessories, all depending on the studio, the type of product photography, etc. - [Guide to Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography): There are various props and tools for this, from light-cutting black flags to white foam for bouncing light and larger diffuser panels to paint products in light from every angle of the spin. - [PhotoRobot Hardware for Automated Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/hardware-automated-product-photography): The machine can also hold black flags, which you can place on both sides of the object you’re photographing. - [PhotoRobot Hardware: Centerless Table, Cube, Robot Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-cube-robot-arm): That is why this machine can hold black flags in the background. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flash-duration # SECTION: glossary > flash-duration # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Flash duration > How long a flash burst lasts; a very short flash freezes a moving subject sharply. Also known as: freezing motion, motion freezing. Category: Lighting and optics. Flash duration is the length of time a flash burst lasts. When the flash is the main light source, a very short duration, for example 1/10,000 s, effectively becomes the exposure time and freezes motion even if the subject is moving. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot relies on very short flashes of about 1/10,000 s to photograph products during continuous turntable rotation. The robot reads the table position 1000 times per second so the flash fires at precisely the right moment; PhotoRobot states this gives on average a four-fold productivity increase. ## Related terms - [Strobe](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/strobe): A studio flash that emits a very short, powerful burst of light, freezing motion. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Shutter speed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-speed): How long the camera shutter stays open; with flash, the flash duration usually freezes the motion instead. - [Rotary encoder](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotary-encoder): A sensor that reports the exact angular position of a rotating part, such as a turntable plate. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 4 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller): To freeze the motion, a flash from high-power photographic lights with a duration of 1/10,000 s is used – with the robot providing an adjustable advance notification when reaching the defined position. - [Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions): …ISO) with reflector L40 32 8/10 Aperture at 2 m (100 ISO) with reflector P70 45 6/10 Flash duration t0.1 (t0.5) – Min. - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): Instead, exposure is performed by a “freezing of motion” during a very short and intense flash. - [Mastering Product Photography: Shoes and Footwear](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear): …shutters will open and in what order to capture photos in the illuminated during the flash duration. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flat-lay # SECTION: glossary > flat-lay # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Flat lay > Photographing products laid flat on a surface from directly above. Also known as: flatlay, flat-lay photography. Category: Photography techniques. Flat lay photography shows products laid flat on a surface and photographed from directly above. It is simple to set up and common for clothing and accessories, but garments look flatter than on a mannequin or model. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's fashion tutorials compare flat lay with ghost mannequin photography, noting that garments photographed flat can look out of proportion, and fashion style guides typically specify which of the two methods to use. ## Related terms - [Ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect): An editing technique that makes the mannequin disappear so the garment looks worn by an invisible body. - [On-model photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/on-model-photography): Photographing garments or accessories worn by a live model. - [Style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/style-guide): A document that defines how products of a brand are to be photographed and presented. - [Top view](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/top-view): A photo taken from directly or steeply above the product. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [How Multiple PhotoRobot Modules Combine - the Flexi_Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/flexible-studio-modules): There is information on the mannequins compatible with PhotoRobot, and integration of flat-lay photography tables for faster workflows. - [How to Create a Fashion Product Photography Style Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide): The style guide specifies elements such as how to style garments, flatlay vs mannequin photography, or still & 360 degree product photos. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Through more interactive product experiences, 360° photography engages in a way flat lay or still life photography simply cannot. - [Photographing Footwear in the PhotoRobot Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/footwear-photography-workflow): There is also a second table for flat-lay photography, which we show in simultaneous operation with the 360 turntable. - [Fashion Photography of Denim Jeans on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-jeans): It also looks much better online than traditional flat lay photography, which often leaves clothing looking flat and lifeless. - [Fashion Photography: How to Select the Best Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin): It might be with flat lay photography, tabletop, or with a ghost mannequin effect. - [Fashion Product Photography Styling Tools & Accessories](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-photography-styling-tools): From styling clothes for flat lay to ghost mannequin photography, styling tools are essential to making garments look their best. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Tight-Fitting Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress): While it is possible to use flat lay photography on dresses, using a hanger or a live model, it doesn’t have the same visual effect online. - [How to Photograph a Suit and Tie with a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-suit-and-tie): This gives clothing a more true-to-life, full-bodied and 3D appearance than flat lay photography. - [How to Photograph a T-Shirt with a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-t-shirt-with-a-ghost-mannequin): With flat lay product photography, shirts tend to lose their appeal. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flying-camera-effect # SECTION: glossary > flying-camera-effect # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Flying camera effect > Video in which the camera seems to fly around the product, made by combining rotation with camera movement. Also known as: flying cam. Category: Photography techniques. The flying camera effect is a video in which the camera appears to move freely around the subject. It is produced by combining the rotation of the product with movement of the camera, typically changing its elevation during the shot. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot produces the effect for [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-video) by combining a motorised turntable with the Robotic Arm, whose elevation is programmed in the video timeline. On the [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk), a model walking on the rotating treadmill in front of a fixed camera gives a similar result. ## Related terms - [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-video): A video of a rotating product, optionally with camera movement, produced on an automated turntable. - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-catwalk): PhotoRobot rotating platform with a treadmill belt that lets models walk an infinite runway for 360 fashion video. - [Product animation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-animation): A short looping sequence of product frames, often exported as an animated GIF or video. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 11 pages. Most relevant: - [360 Product Video - PhotoRobot Example Output Type](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video): Produce 360 product video with a flying camera effect on PhotoRobot within minutes. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): …show an object rotating along a horizontal axis only, or as more advanced spins with a flying camera effect. - [How to Film Models on the Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models): Cameras remain trained in place around the rotating platform for creating a flying camera effect. - [CATWALK](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk): Meanwhile, cameras remain in place, resulting in a video with a flying camera effect. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): flying cam. - [How to Create Video in PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/create-video-photorobot-controls-user-support): This includes any points for idle time, or for example adjustments in elevation, such as when creating a flying camera effect with the Robotic Arm. - [PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk First Use Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/virtual-catwalk-user-guide): At the same time, cameras remain in place around the platform, resulting in photos and video with a flying camera effect. - [How to Photograph Models on a Catwalk: Directing and Poses](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models): During photoshoots, cameras remain off to the side around the platform, capturing what’s known as a “flying camera effect”. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): The timelines combine object rotation with camera swing to create for example a flying camera effect, with fast or slow sequences. - [PhotoRobot’s Catwalk for Apparel Photography and Online Fashion Shows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/catwalk-for-apparel-photography-and-online-fashion-shows): The cameras remain trained in place, resulting in a video with a flying camera effect. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focal-length # SECTION: glossary > focal-length # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Focal length > The lens property, in millimetres, that sets the angle of view and magnification. Also known as: prime lens, zoom lens. Category: Lighting and optics. Focal length, given in millimetres, determines a lens's angle of view and magnification: short focal lengths are wide, long ones narrow. Prime lenses have one fixed focal length, while zoom lenses cover a range. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's recommended cameras guide matches lens types to work: zoom lenses for universal robotic arm or tripod use, macro lenses for detail work, and prime lenses with a fixed focal length for multi-camera synchronisation. Its blog notes that most larger products need only a zoom lens of around 40 to 100 mm to keep the product in frame. ## See on photorobot.com - [Recommended cameras and lenses](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras) ## Related terms - [Macro photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-photography): Photographing small subjects at close range so that they appear life-size or larger on the sensor. - [Depth of field](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/depth-of-field): The distance range in front of and behind the focus point that appears acceptably sharp. - [Crop factor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#crop-factor): The ratio between full frame and a smaller sensor, used to compare fields of view. - [Aperture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aperture): The adjustable lens opening, given as an f-number; smaller openings give more depth of field. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 16 pages. Most relevant: - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): Zoom lens (Universal, robotic arm / tripod use) Macro lens (Macro / detail, close-up photography) Prime lens (Fixed focal, multi-camera synchronization) Zoom Lens (Universal, Robotic Arm / Tripod). - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): Using a macro lens with a fixed focal length is essential for jewelry photos. - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): …focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): There was a zoom lens covering 24mm to 105mm in use, with image capture at 77mm at F16 and speed 1/125. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Usually, a zoom lens with 40 - 100mm focal length accomplishes this. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): Often, a zoom lens with 40 - 100mm focal length achieves this. - [Depth of Field Chart for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart): Do you need to know if a 35 cm handbag remains fully sharp at f/16? Adjust the sensor, focal length, and unit above the table to recompute every cell. - [What is Automated Image Capture?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-image-capture): It pushes instructions regarding focal length, aperture, ISO, and shutter speed. - [What is Automated Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-imaging): The automation software ensures that physical inputs—lighting, camera elevation, and focal length—are strictly controlled. - [Depth of Field Calculator for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator): …focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focus-stacking # SECTION: glossary > focus-stacking # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Focus stacking > Combining several photos focused at different distances into one image that is sharp throughout. Also known as: focus stack. Category: Photography techniques. Focus stacking combines several exposures of the same scene, each focused at a different distance, into one image that is sharp from front to back. It extends depth of field beyond what a single exposure allows, which is useful in macro and product photography. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot lists focus stacking among the shooting functions of its production workflow and among the processing techniques integrated in PhotoRobot Controls. ## See on photorobot.com - [Production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow) ## Related terms - [Depth of field](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/depth-of-field): The distance range in front of and behind the focus point that appears acceptably sharp. - [Macro photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-photography): Photographing small subjects at close range so that they appear life-size or larger on the sensor. - [Aperture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aperture): The adjustable lens opening, given as an f-number; smaller openings give more depth of field. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [High-Speed, High-Quality Photos and Advanced Image Processing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/high-quality-photos-advanced-image-processing): For more information on these, search our blog for more on: Chromakey-masking or Focus Stacking. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): Find processing techniques integrated into the software, with tools for clarity, colors, brightness, sharpness, focus stacking and much more. - [Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow): …(fast product photography in which the spin of the table remains uninterrupted) Focus stacking Instant photo-backup Video 4 Post-production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/frame # SECTION: glossary > frame # TYPE: Glossary term --- # FRAME > PhotoRobot all-in-one machine combining a glass-plate turntable with a robotic camera arm, built for 3D modelling. Also known as: PhotoRobot Frame. Category: Hardware. FRAME is an all-in-one PhotoRobot workstation that combines a motorised turntable with an optical glass plate and a robotic camera arm. Camera and background travel around the product, so it can be photographed from above and from below the glass. ## How PhotoRobot uses it FRAME has a 1300 mm glass plate, a 20 kg load capacity and dual-axis 360° rotation. It is designed to capture image galleries, single and multi-row spins and the photo sets needed for [photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging) 3D models in a single click. Laser positioning, sensors and control units are built in, and it has a built-in web interface for testing and setup. ## See on photorobot.com - [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame) - [FRAME assembly user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide) ## Related terms - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [Optical glass plate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/optical-glass-plate): A turntable top made of optical glass that can be lit and photographed through, giving shadow-free images. - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. - [Multi-row 360](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multi-row-360): A 360 spin captured at several camera elevations, so the viewer can rotate the product horizontally and vertically. - [Photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging): Generating a 3D model from many overlapping photographs of an object. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 24 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide): The PhotoRobot Frame Assembly & User Guide provides technical instructions on the robot's installation, connection, basic testing, and operation. - [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame): PhotoRobot’s Frame combines a motorized turntable with a robot camera arm to provide an all-in-one product photography solution. - [The Frame: Next-Generation Motorized Turntable Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/next-gen-motorized-turntable-photography): PhotoRobot’s Frame is a next-generation solution for motorized turntable photography. - [Discover the Frame 360 Turntable with Built-in Robot Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/frame-robot-turntable-demo): Watch a video demo of PhotoRobot Frame: the 3D product photography turntable with a built-in robot arm and diffusion background. - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): This is usually using a 3D photography turntable like PhotoRobot's Frame, which boasts a design for faster multi-row image capture. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): FRAME An all-in-one motorized turntable and robot camera arm for shadow-free 360 product photography and 3D modeling. - [PhotoRobot Macros Configuration and Functionality Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/macros-config-functions): This is an essential feature for photographing the bottom of items on any machine which does not photograph from below (unlike the PhotoRobot Frame 3D turntable). - [3D Object Modeling in PhotoRobot Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo): To demonstrate, we showcase our dual-axis motorized turntable, the Frame, while our automated photography software integrates functionality for Apple Object Capture. - [A Virtual Digital Wardrobe - 3D Textile Motion Simulation](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-textile-motion-simulation): Setups include the Cube v5 and v6 (for on-mannequin photography), PhotoRobot’s Frame, and the Centerless Table 850. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): In the family of motorized turntables, the Frame is a universal solution for 360 eCommerce photography and 3D modeling. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/freemask # SECTION: glossary > freemask # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Freemask > PhotoRobot background removal from a front-lit and a back-lit silhouette shot of the same angle. Also known as: free-masking, free mask. Category: Software. Freemask is a PhotoRobot background removal method. Lights flash once from the front and once from the back at the same angle; the back-lit shot gives a silhouette of the product, from which the software calculates a precise mask for the front-lit image. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls applies the Freemask algorithm automatically after capture to remove backgrounds near-instantly. It is one of the background removal methods listed in the PhotoRobot production workflow, alongside chroma key and masking. ## See on photorobot.com - [Capture and Control: Freemask support](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control) - [How to remove backgrounds from product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos) ## Related terms - [Background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal): Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. - [Alpha channel](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/alpha-channel): An extra image channel that stores the transparency of every pixel. - [Chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key): Removing everything of one specific colour from an image, such as a green screen or a coloured stand. - [Backlight](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/backlight): Light from behind the subject, used to brighten the background or outline the product. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 17 pages. Most relevant: - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Freemask background removal is a process in which two images are captured for each frame: Main image - a standard photo of the object Mask image - a photo of the object lit from behind Freemask main… - [Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos): We share how to remove the product background by level, by flood, and by freemask. - [What’s New in the November PhotoRobot Software Release](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/november-software-release): November brings the latest software release, showcasing new tools and features for freemask support, product videos, and auto tilt correction. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): There is background removal by level, background removal by flood, and by freemasking. - [Advanced Software Tools for Image Capture & Control](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/image-capture-control-tools): Freemask is one of the quickest and most exact ways to remove the background from product photos. - [Capture And Control](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control): Our freemask algorithm will then apply automatically to remove backgrounds from photos precisely and near-instantly. - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): …or manually with 3 types of background removal functions: by level, by flood, or freemasking. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Other useful post-processing automation tools include semi-automatic background removal (by level, by flood, or freemask). - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): It is also possible to remove the background by freemask, although this requires additional configuration of studio lights. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): We also showcase advanced image post-processing features, like auto centering spin image sets, and background removal by freemasking. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/frp # SECTION: glossary > frp # TYPE: Glossary term --- # FRP (fibre-reinforced plastic) > A composite of plastic resin and reinforcing fibres, used for light, durable mannequins. Also known as: FRP, fibre-reinforced plastic, fiber-reinforced plastic, fibreglass. Category: Hardware. Fibre-reinforced plastic (FRP) is a composite material of a polymer resin reinforced with fibres, most often glass fibre. It is light, rigid and durable, which makes it a common material for professional mannequins. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot ghost mannequins are made of FRP with an anti-glare matte white finish, chosen to suit clothing photography and automated post-production. ## Related terms - [Ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin): A mannequin with removable parts, used to photograph garments so the mannequin can be made invisible in the image. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 26 pages. Most relevant: - [3/4 Half Body Male Invisible Ghost Mannequin Torso GH19](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/half-body-male-ghost-mannequin-torso-gh19): 3/4 half-body invisible ghost mannequin male torso of high-quality FRP material with anti-glare matte-white finish and steel base on wheels Mannequin ID: GH19 Type: Three-Quarter Torso Generation: 1st… - [Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1, V-Cut) GH11S](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-ghost-mannequin-v-cut-gh11s): Invisible ghost mannequin female full-body of high-quality FRP material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and V-cut neck design Mannequin ID: GH11S Type: Full-Body Generation: 1st generation… - [3/4 Half Body Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin GH18](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/3-4-half-body-female-ghost-mannequin-gh18): …dicing for quick combination and disassembly, and features construction of high-quality FRP material. - [Child Full Body Ghost Mannequin (12 Y.O.) GHK112-G](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/child-full-body-ghost-mannequin-12-y-o-ghk112-g): Its body is of high-quality FRP material, and has a smooth matte-white finish ideal for eliminating unwanted glares and reflections. - [Child Full Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin GHK112](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/child-full-body-ghost-mannequin-ghk112): The invisible mannequin has a construction of high-quality FRP material, and a smooth matte-white finish. - [Female Full-Body Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Standard) GH26](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-full-body-invisible-mannequin-gh26): It also features construction of high-quality FRP material, and magnet connections for fast assembly and disassembly. - [Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1, Shorter) GH12S-G](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-ghost-mannequin-shorter-gh12s-g): The GH12S-G has construction of high-quality FRP material, and a matte-white finish ideal for clothing photography. - [Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin (Gen 1, U-Cut) GH12S](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-ghost-mannequin-u-cut-gh12s): Other features include a mannequin construction of high-quality FRP material, and an anti-glare matte-white finish. - [Female Invisible Ghost Mannequin Torso (V-Cut) GH16](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-ghost-mannequin-torso-v-cut-gh16): The mannequin has high-quality FRP construction, and boasts an anti-glare, matte-white finish ideal for on-mannequin photoshoots. - [Full-Body Child Invisible Ghost Mannequin (2 Y.O.) GHK102](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/full-child-ghost-mannequin-2-y-o-ghk102): Additionally, the GHK102 features construction of high-quality FRP material, and a glare reducing matte white finish. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/full-frame-sensor # SECTION: glossary > full-frame-sensor # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Full-frame sensor > A camera sensor the size of 35 mm film (36 x 24 mm), preferred for product photography. Also known as: full frame, 35 mm sensor. Category: Lighting and optics. A full-frame sensor has the dimensions of a 35 mm film frame, 36 x 24 mm. Compared with smaller sensors it generally offers better low-light performance, lower noise and wider dynamic range at the same resolution. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot lists a full-frame sensor among the main camera requirements for its systems, together with high shooting speed and resolution. Its camera resolution guide explains why APS-C sensors are less suitable for product photography. ## See on photorobot.com - [Understanding camera resolution](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution) ## Related terms - [APS-C](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aps-c): A camera sensor format smaller than full frame, which crops the image by a factor of about 1.5–1.6. - [Crop factor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#crop-factor): The ratio between full frame and a smaller sensor, used to compare fields of view. - [Camera resolution](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/camera-resolution): The number of pixels a camera sensor records, given in megapixels (MP). - [Mirrorless camera](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/mirrorless-camera): A camera with interchangeable lenses but no mirror; the sensor feeds an electronic viewfinder. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 8 pages. Most relevant: - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): …compromise Approximate Price: EUR €3,350 – €3,800 (USD $3,900+) Canon EOS R5 Mark ll Full Frame 45 MPx (36 × 24 mm) Lens mount RF Burst 12 fps mechanical shutter / 30 fps el. - [Male Plus-Size Ghost Mannequin Full Frame GH25](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/plus-size-full-body-male-ghost-mannequin-gh25): Plus-size male invisible ghost mannequin full body of high-quality material with glare reducing matte-white finish, and steel base on wheels Mannequin ID: GH25 Type: Full-Body Generation: 2nd… - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): In product photography, full-frame sensors have better low-light performance, and often greater dynamic range than APS-C sensors. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): Macro photography of jewelry calls for an SLR camera with either an APS-C or Full Frame sensor. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): Most commonly, photographers use full frame (35 mm width) APS-C (24 mm) camera sensor sizes. - [Depth of Field Calculator for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator): The calculator is for everyday studio and product photography on full-frame and Canon APS-C cameras, with metric and imperial units. - [Photographing Glass Products](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photographing-glass-products): Original image resolution: 26,2 Mpx (6240 × 4160 pixels) Camera: Canon EOS RP (full-frame) Lens: Canon RF 24-105 mm Lights: Broncolor Siros 800S Wi-Fi PhotoRobot: CASE 850 Software:… - [PhotoRobot Premium Ghost Mannequin Product Line](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins): …and steel mannequin base on wheels View Full Product Male Plus-Size Ghost Mannequin Full-Frame GH25 Plus-size male invisible ghost mannequin full body of high-quality material with glare reducing… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/geo-redundant-storage # SECTION: glossary > geo-redundant-storage # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Geo-redundant storage > Storing copies of data in several distant locations so it survives the loss of a data centre. Also known as: multi-regional storage, disaster recovery. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Geo-redundant storage keeps copies of data in at least two geographically separate data centres, so the data remains available if one location fails. It is the basis of cloud disaster recovery. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot states that its cloud storage is multi-regional and geo-redundant, with data stored in at least two locations at least 100 miles apart; replication is asynchronous, while data is redundant in at least one location immediately on upload. ## See on photorobot.com - [Digital asset management: disaster recovery](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-cloud): PhotoRobot's cloud platform for storing, processing, hosting and distributing product images. - [DAM (digital asset management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dam): Software for storing, organising, searching and distributing images, video and other media files. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 14 pages. Most relevant: - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Multi-regional, geo-redundant storage utilizes Cloud technology to store data redundantly in at least two geographic locations for reliable disaster recovery. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): It enables the storage of all assets in a centralized system, offering multi-regional deployment with disaster recovery. - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): The software enables multi-regional digital asset deployment with disaster recovery. - [PhotoRobot Disaster Recovery Policy](https://www.photorobot.com/security/disaster-recovery): The PhotoRobot Disaster Recovery Policy describes how PhotoRobot recovers platform functionality during large-scale disruptions. - [PhotoRobot Trust Center](https://www.photorobot.com/trust-center): …Control Policy PhotoRobot Incident Response Policy PhotoRobot Backup Policy PhotoRobot Disaster Recovery Policy PhotoRobot SDLC Security Policy PhotoRobot Change Management Policy PhotoRobot Logging &… - [PhotoRobot Business Continuity & DR Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/security/business-continuity-dr): …page represents the security document for the PhotoRobot Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery (DR) Approach. - [PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/enterprise-compliance): …roles Incident Response Framework YES Defined lifecycle with review gates Backup & Disaster Recovery YES Encrypted backups + tested recovery SOC 2 Principles Alignment. - [PhotoRobot Data Processing Agreement (DPA)](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/dpa): …providers analytics providers ticketing systems security monitoring services backup and disaster recovery systems A complete list is maintained in the PhotoRobot Sub-Processor List and may be updated. - [PhotoRobot International Security Pack Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/international-security): …frequency and encryption rules, geographic redundancy, restoration testing schedules, disaster recovery procedures, continuity planning. - [PhotoRobot Legal Definitions & Glossary](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/definitions): Data copies created for redundancy and disaster recovery purposes, stored within Google Cloud Platform (GCP). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin # SECTION: glossary > ghost-mannequin # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Ghost mannequin > A mannequin with removable parts, used to photograph garments so the mannequin can be made invisible in the image. Also known as: invisible mannequin, invisible ghost mannequin. Category: Hardware. A ghost mannequin is a photography mannequin whose neck, arms, shoulders or torso sections can be removed. Garments keep a natural, body-shaped fit, and the visible mannequin parts are removed or replaced in post-production so the clothing appears to be worn by an invisible model. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot sells its own ghost mannequins for men, women and children in full-body, 3/4 torso, half-body torso and leg forms. They are made of FRP with a glare-reducing matte white finish, most models have detachable (often magnetised) pieces and a steel base on wheels, and they mount on the [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) for rotation during 360 photography. ## See on photorobot.com - [Ghost mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) - [Ghost mannequin catalogue](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins-catalog) - [How to select the best ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin) ## Related terms - [Ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect): An editing technique that makes the mannequin disappear so the garment looks worn by an invisible body. - [Transparent mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-mannequin): A clear acrylic mannequin that interferes little with the colour of garments and is easy to remove in editing. - [FRP (fibre-reinforced plastic)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/frp): A composite of plastic resin and reinforcing fibres, used for light, durable mannequins. - [Quick mannequin exchange](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quick-mannequin-exchange): CUBE system for swapping mannequins in seconds, so the next garment can be styled while the current one is shot. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube): Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. - [Chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key): Removing everything of one specific colour from an image, such as a green screen or a coloured stand. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 72 pages. Most relevant: - [Fashion Photography: How to Select the Best Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin): Learn how to select the best ghost mannequin for your brand's fashion eCommerce in this guide to invisible mannequin photography. - [How to Use a Ghost Mannequin for Fashion eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin): For this eCommerce fashion photography tutorial, we demonstrate how to use a ghost mannequin with the_Cube and PhotoRobot automation software. - [PhotoRobot Premium Ghost Mannequin Product Line](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins): Realistic 3D Clothing Photography on an Invisible Ghost Mannequin Automated eCommerce Fashion Photography Why a Ghost Mannequin is Good for Business. - [How to Photograph a T-Shirt with a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-t-shirt-with-a-ghost-mannequin): Join us to learn how to photograph a t-shirt with a ghost mannequin effect for authentic, true-to-life images that maintain focus strongly on the product. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography of a Spaghetti Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-spaghetti-dress): …set with this fashion photography tutorial on how to photograph a spaghetti dress on a ghost mannequin. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Tight-Fitting Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress): …PhotoRobot’s Cube with our advanced software for automation and control, we demonstrate ghost mannequin photography on a fitted dress. - [Fashion Photography of a Cardigan on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-cardigan): In this tutorial, learn how to photograph a cardigan sweater on a ghost mannequin using PhotoRobot’s Cube and control software. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Zip-Up Hoodie](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-zip-up-hoodie): Follow this tutorial to discover how to photograph a zip-up hoodie on a ghost mannequin using PhotoRobot’s_Cube and automation software. - [Ghost Mannequin Effect for Apparel Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect): …and vendors often showcase apparel either on a live model or on a mannequin with a ghost mannequin effect. - [Fashion Photography of Denim Jeans on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-jeans): …fashion product photography tutorial for instructions on how to photograph jeans on a ghost mannequin with PhotoRobot. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect # SECTION: glossary > ghost-mannequin-effect # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Ghost mannequin effect > An editing technique that makes the mannequin disappear so the garment looks worn by an invisible body. Also known as: invisible mannequin effect, hollow man effect. Category: Photography techniques. The ghost mannequin effect makes clothing look as if it is worn by an invisible person. The garment is photographed on a mannequin, the mannequin is removed in post-production, and where needed a separate shot of the inside (for example the back of the collar) is composited in. The effect gives garments a full-bodied, three-dimensional shape while keeping attention on the product. It is widely used for apparel on e-commerce sites as an alternative to flat lay or on-model photography. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot combines its [ghost mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin) with the [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) as a rotating mannequin holder, so the effect can be applied to still images and 360 spins. Mannequin poles and holders are removed automatically with [chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key). ## See on photorobot.com - [Ghost mannequin effect for apparel photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect) - [How to use a ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin) ## Related terms - [Ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin): A mannequin with removable parts, used to photograph garments so the mannequin can be made invisible in the image. - [Chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key): Removing everything of one specific colour from an image, such as a green screen or a coloured stand. - [Flat lay](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flat-lay): Photographing products laid flat on a surface from directly above. - [On-model photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/on-model-photography): Photographing garments or accessories worn by a live model. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube): Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 31 pages. Most relevant: - [Ghost Mannequin Effect for Apparel Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect): …and vendors often showcase apparel either on a live model or on a mannequin with a ghost mannequin effect. - [How to Photograph Coats with a Ghost Mannequin Effect](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-coats): Achieve a true-to-life, 3D ghost mannequin effect when photographing coats with PhotoRobot fashion photography solutions. - [How to Photograph a T-Shirt with a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-t-shirt-with-a-ghost-mannequin): Join us to learn how to photograph a t-shirt with a ghost mannequin effect for authentic, true-to-life images that maintain focus strongly on the product. - [How to Photograph a Suit and Tie with a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-suit-and-tie): This guide demonstrates how to photograph a suit and tie with a ghost mannequin effect using PhotoRobot’s Cube and automation software. - [Fashion Photography of a Cardigan on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-cardigan): Also known as a “hollow man” effect, this technique requires the right equipment, some styling, and a few special tricks. - [Fashion Photography of Denim Jeans on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-jeans): Some also call this a 3D “hollow man” or “invisible mannequin” effect. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Zip-Up Hoodie](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-zip-up-hoodie): Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography How to Create a Ghost Mannequin Effect on a Zip-Up Hoodie. - [How to Use a Ghost Mannequin for Fashion eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin): Often, achieving the ghost mannequin effect requires a fair amount of post processing or image compositing techniques. - [Fashion Photography of a Blazer on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-blazers): To create the ghost mannequin effect with PhotoRobot systems, we deploy the_Cube, our mannequin, and PhotoRobot_Controls for editing and automation. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Button-Up Shirt](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-button-up-shirt): Watch the video on how to use photography mannequins with PhotoRobot to create the ghost mannequin effect. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gif # SECTION: glossary > gif # TYPE: Glossary term --- # GIF > An old image format limited to 256 colours, still used for simple animations. Also known as: animated GIF. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) is an image format limited to a palette of 256 colours that supports simple animation and binary transparency. It is still used for short product animations, although video formats are far more efficient. ## Related terms - [Product animation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-animation): A short looping sequence of product frames, often exported as an animated GIF or video. - [JPEG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/jpeg): The most common lossy image format for photographs; small files, no transparency. - [WebP](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webp): Google's web image format with efficient lossy and lossless compression and transparency. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 12 pages. Most relevant: - [Make the Most of Your Brand’s 360° and 3D Imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-and-3d-imagery): Spinsets in particular are easy to transform into resource-friendly GIF file formats to display on the web, in presentations, through email campaigns and on social media channels. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Most commonly in GIF format, these animations remain in popular use for social media product marketing and email campaigns. - [360° Product Photos: Enriching the Sales Experience](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photos): A well-placed spinning GIF or a 360-degree product viewer is a great way to do this. - [360 Product Video - PhotoRobot Example Output Type](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video): Create simple spins in video and GIF format for email and social media Produce a flying camera effect with a robot arm to add top-view movement Combine product video with spins and galleries to… - [Product Animation - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/animation): PhotoRobot streamlines prep, capture, and post-processing to rapidly create animated demos, product videos, or GIFs of one or multiple items. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): It is also optimal for advertising across email and social media channels, with 360 product video embeddable in MP4 or GIF file formats. - [How to Improve SEO in Fashion ECommerce and Online Retail](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-ecommerce-seo-tips): It can also be product spins in GIF format, or interactive 3D models. - [360-Degree Product Viewers for E-Commerce Businesses](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-viewers-for-e-commerce-businesses): Beyond spins, some of these platforms even allow businesses to create downloadable product spins as videos or in GIF file format. - [A Quick Guide to 360 Product Photography for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon): For vendors, Amazon has guidelines on their product image requirements: TIFF (.tif/.tiff), JPEG (.jpeg/.jpg), GIF (.gif) and PNG (.png) format Image pixel dimensions of at least 1000 or larger in… - [E-Commerce Content Creation and Content Marketing in 2021](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/content-creation-and-marketing-2021): In this regard, spin photos, 3D models, GIFs, and product videos are proving to be valuable assets for drawing attention to brands and ultimately converting conversions. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gs1-image-standards # SECTION: glossary > gs1-image-standards # TYPE: Glossary term --- # GS1 image standards > GS1 guidelines for how product images are captured, named and exchanged in retail supply chains. Also known as: GS1 standards, GS1 images, GS1. Category: E-commerce and workflow. GS1, the organisation behind barcodes and GTINs, publishes product image specifications that define how retail product images should be captured, named and shared, including angles such as front, back, top and marketing views of packages, and file and naming conventions. Retailers and data pools that follow these specifications can accept images from suppliers without manual rework. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot produces GS1 images in parallel with 360 spins: the software extracts GS1 images into a separate folder and can publish marketing images or planograms. For food packages PhotoRobot lists angles such as a closed package with barcode and description, an open package showing the contents, and the bottom of the package, and OCR captures on-package data. ## See on photorobot.com - [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards) - [GS1 image standards blog](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards) ## Related terms - [GTIN](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#gtin): GS1's globally unique product number behind EAN and UPC barcodes. - [Planogram](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/planogram): A diagram of how products are placed on retail shelves; planogram images show the product face-on for it. - [OCR (optical character recognition)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ocr): Technology that converts text in an image into machine-readable text. - [Unwrap](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/unwrap): PhotoRobot Controls tool that flattens text wrapping around cylindrical packaging so OCR can read it. - [Marketing angle](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/marketing-angle): A predefined, commercially attractive view of a product used in listings and campaigns. - [CPG (consumer packaged goods)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cpg): Everyday packaged products such as food, drinks and toiletries, sold in large volumes. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 26 pages. Most relevant: - [GS1 Image Standards and Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards): Gain a better understanding of GS1 image standards and digital asset management (DAM) with PhotoRobot systems and control software. - [PhotoRobot OCR and GS1 Image Capture of Grocery Products](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/ocr-gs1-image-capture-features): …of PhotoRobot software features for Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and automatic GS1 image capture. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): It may also automate back-end operations like the extraction of specific still images: packshots, GS1 imagery, detailed shots and more. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): The software can produce photography according to GS1 and other industry standards.) PhotoRobot Locator: 2014 - Present(Controls features a utility feature to search for and configure robots over the… - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition): This allows for the production of 360 spins in tandem with GS1 images, from packaging and informational photos, to planograms and marketing photos. - [Digital Asset Management for Large-Scale Manufacturers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers): Automatically generate industry-standard product data (GS1, PIES) alongside the production of digital assets. - [What’s New in the November PhotoRobot Software Release](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/november-software-release): This tool is particularly effective for grocery product photography in accordance with GS1 image specifications. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): It also makes creating still image galleries, packshots, GS1 imagery, and product videos possible in a single process. - [Present Products with Style - PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio): Present products with their packaging and labels including text and nutritional information for GS1 standard compliance. - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): “hero shot - front”, “3 / 4”, “back”, or GS1 image naming conventions) Change angle - Adjust angle on an individual frame Pause sequence here - Select to pause the photography sequence at this frame… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hero-image # SECTION: glossary > hero-image # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Hero image > The main product photo shown first on a product page or listing. Also known as: hero shot, main image. Category: Photography techniques. A hero image is the primary photograph of a product, the one shown first on a product page, in search results or on a marketplace listing. It is usually the most flattering angle, such as a front or three-quarter view, on a clean background. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot sequences capture hero images, marketing angles and the 360 spin of an item in one run, and frames can be labelled, for example "hero shot - front", so the right image is exported to the right channel. ## See on photorobot.com - [One-click output production demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/one-click-output-production-demo) ## Related terms - [Packshot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/packshot): A clean, standardised product photo, usually on a white background, often showing the packaging. - [Marketing angle](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/marketing-angle): A predefined, commercially attractive view of a product used in listings and campaigns. - [Still image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/still-image): A single photograph of a product, as opposed to a spin, video or 3D model. - [Multi-angle product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-multi-angle-product-photography): Photographing a product from multiple predefined camera positions and elevations. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): Gallery images can consist of a hero shot (the first image consumers see), different marketing angles, and detailed shots. - [How One Click Produces 2D + 360 + 3D Outputs in Tandem](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/one-click-output-production-demo): In under 2 minutes, we capture a hero image, a stills gallery, 360 spin, and 3D model output. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): The hero shot, image gallery and 360° spin photos are all shown from consistent angles, elevation and distance. - [Centerless Table Eyewear Photography Production Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-eyewear-photography-demo): See how PhotoRobot quickly produces the hero image, marketing angles, and the 360 spin – with minimal post-processing necessary. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): One click is all it takes to produce a high-resolution hero image, marketing angles, close-ups and detailed shots. - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): “hero shot - front”, “3 / 4”, “back”, or GS1 image naming conventions) Change angle - Adjust angle on an individual frame Pause sequence here - Select to pause the photography sequence at this frame… - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): The spin may capture one or several angles of elevation around the object, while the still images become hero images, planograms, and marketing shots. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Combine that with a hero shot and few marketing angles on a product page, and your job is complete. - [Present Products with Style - PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio): Order hero images, stills, packshots, 360 spins, interactive 3D models, and 360 product video. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/highlight-clipping # SECTION: glossary > highlight-clipping # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Highlight clipping > Overexposed areas that are recorded as pure white and have lost all detail. Also known as: blown-out highlights, clipped highlights. Category: Lighting and optics. Highlight clipping occurs when parts of an image are so overexposed that they are recorded at the maximum value, pure white, losing all detail. On white-background product photos the background is intentionally white, but clipping on the product itself loses texture and shape. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Capture PI Advisor in PhotoRobot Controls checks captured images for highlight clipping in real time, along with exposure balance, shadow density and background cleanliness. ## Related terms - [Exposure](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/exposure): The amount of light that reaches the sensor, set by aperture, shutter speed, ISO and light output. - [Histogram](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/histogram): A graph of how many pixels in an image have each brightness value. - [Dynamic range](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dynamic-range): The range between the darkest and brightest tones a camera can record with detail. - [Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-pi-advisor): PhotoRobot Intelligence tool that checks each capture in real time and suggests camera and light adjustments. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 2 pages. Most relevant: - [Discover PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor): While a seasoned machine operator may photograph a series perfectly, another less experienced operator may deliver photos with blown-out highlights, or gray backgrounds. - [Unlock Operational PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite): …In a fraction of a second, the Capture PI Advisor evaluates exposure balance, highlight clipping, shadow density, and white background cleanliness. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/histogram # SECTION: glossary > histogram # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Histogram > A graph of how many pixels in an image have each brightness value. Category: Lighting and optics. A histogram is a graph showing the distribution of brightness values in an image, from black on the left to white on the right. It reveals under- or overexposure and clipping at a glance. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The histogram in PhotoRobot Controls provides image statistics optimised for white backgrounds, so values remain readable even when the white background takes up most of the image. ## See on photorobot.com - [Image editing tools: histogram](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) ## Related terms - [Exposure](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/exposure): The amount of light that reaches the sensor, set by aperture, shutter speed, ISO and light output. - [Highlight clipping](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/highlight-clipping): Overexposed areas that are recorded as pure white and have lost all detail. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 1 page. Most relevant: - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Histogram. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hotspot # SECTION: glossary > hotspot # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Hotspot > A clickable point on a product image or spin that opens a detail image, zoom or annotation. Also known as: hot spot, hotspot zoom. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A hotspot is a clickable marker on a product image or 360 spin that opens additional content, such as a close-up photo, a zoomed detail or a text annotation about a feature. Hotspots let a viewer explain specific features without leaving the spin or gallery. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In the PhotoRobot Viewer, hotspots are configured per spin with a position, visibility range, size, opacity, pulse, colour and title, and can open photos from a separate stills folder. PhotoRobot recommends hotspot zooms with close-up shots for details too small to resolve from a distance. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Viewer: hot spots](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer): PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. - [Detail shot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/detail-shot): A close-up photo of one feature of a product, such as a texture, logo or mechanism. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [360 Car Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/car-studio-360): PhotoRobot Viewer layout for vehicles, combining 360 spins, hotspots, details and interior panoramas. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 21 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Complete Image Hosting & Delivery Easily distribute product content online, including: image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hot spots, panoramas & more with the PhotoRobot Product Viewer. - [PhotoRobot Viewer Layouts & Configs - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-viewer-layouts-and-configurations): This includes annotated hot spots, image behavior, display options, image settings, and more. - [PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting): …in 2D / 3D / 360 with PhotoRobot Viewer, now supporting image galleries alongside spins, hot spots, and panoramas. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): Viewer features enable businesses to host eCommerce image galleries with thumbnail navigation, and configure hot spots in 360 spins. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Product photos must be high-resolution, display various angles, and sometimes include deep zoom, hot spots, or macro shots. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): A custom script provides the additional spin functionalities (rotation, zoom, hotspots), and works to embed images into web pages. - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): Instead, close-up shots are sometimes necessary to capture the fine details, which are then presentable as hotspot zooms. - [Product Photography of Sunglasses with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photography-sunglasses): The final tip involves experimenting with angles to find the perfect “hotspots” for your product photos. - [On-Mannequin Fashion Product Photography Using PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography): …Pole from Images PhotoRobot Cloud Retouching Access Controls PhotoRobot Spin Viewer with Hot Spots Types of Photography Mannequins Portable Mannequin Storage Cart Find the Best Mannequin for Your… - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): Complete Image Hosting & Delivery Easily distribute product imagery online, including: complete galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hotspots, panoramas & more with PhotoRobot’s Product Viewer. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hybrid-version # SECTION: glossary > hybrid-version # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Hybrid version > PhotoRobot Controls set-up combining a local workstation with the cloud, synchronised in both directions. Also known as: hybrid studio, Cloud, Local and Hybrid. Category: Software. In PhotoRobot terms, the hybrid version of PhotoRobot Controls combines local operation at studio workstations with PhotoRobot Cloud. Work done locally and in the cloud is synchronised in both directions, so cloud users and workstations see the same projects. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls is offered in Cloud, Local and Hybrid versions. For hybrid studios, a sync badge shows pending local and server changes so operators can see when uploads and downloads are still in progress. ## See on photorobot.com - [Tracking production status](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tracking-production-status) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. - [PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-cloud): PhotoRobot's cloud platform for storing, processing, hosting and distributing product images. - [RAW file](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/raw-file): The unprocessed sensor data saved by a camera, with maximum editing latitude. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [Tracking Production Status in PhotoRobot Controls Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tracking-production-status): Your _Controls software makes it possible for hybrid studios to see a pending synchronization between the cloud and their workstations. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): PhotoRobot Controls App software exists in Cloud, Local, and Hybrid versions, with licenses for the Power User, Backstage User, and Production User. - [Guide to PhotoRobot Controls App Pricing & User Licenses](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-controls-software-prices): 01:53* The Hybrid Version is ideal when connecting multiple workstations. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hyperfocal-distance # SECTION: glossary > hyperfocal-distance # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Hyperfocal distance > The focus distance that gives the maximum depth of field, extending sharpness to infinity. Category: Lighting and optics. The hyperfocal distance is the closest focus distance at which objects at infinity are still acceptably sharp. Focusing there gives the greatest possible depth of field, from half that distance to infinity. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's Depth of Field Calculator computes the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format and subject distance. ## See on photorobot.com - [Depth of field calculator](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator) ## Related terms - [Depth of field](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/depth-of-field): The distance range in front of and behind the focus point that appears acceptably sharp. - [Aperture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aperture): The adjustable lens opening, given as an f-number; smaller openings give more depth of field. - [Focal length](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focal-length): The lens property, in millimetres, that sets the angle of view and magnification. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 5 pages. Most relevant: - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): For reference, use the PhotoRobot Depth of Field Calculator to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture,… - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): Use the PhotoRobot Depth of Field Calculator to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and… - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): …of Field Calculator to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. - [Depth of Field Calculator for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator): Use the Depth of Field Calculator to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject… - [Depth of Field Chart for Studio Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart): Estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-compression # SECTION: glossary > image-compression # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Image compression > Reducing the file size of an image, either without loss of data (lossless) or by discarding detail (lossy). Also known as: lossy compression, lossless compression, JPEG compression. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. Image compression reduces the size of an image file. Lossless compression (PNG, lossless WebP) keeps every pixel exactly; lossy compression (JPEG, lossy WebP) discards detail that is hard to see, controlled by a quality setting. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot hosting applies configurable JPEG compression in real time, so no duplicate files are needed for different quality levels. Item export lets the quality of JPG and WebP files be set on a scale of 1 to 100. ## Related terms - [JPEG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/jpeg): The most common lossy image format for photographs; small files, no transparency. - [WebP](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webp): Google's web image format with efficient lossy and lossless compression and transparency. - [PNG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/png): A lossless image format that supports transparency; larger files than JPEG. - [Image hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-hosting): Storing images on a server and delivering them to websites on request. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): This is due to JPG using lossy compression, which does not always result in a 1:1 representation of the original image. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): JPEG Compression. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Image Compression. - [360-Degree Product Viewers for E-Commerce Businesses](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-viewers-for-e-commerce-businesses): The most reliable format now is WebP, which employs both lossy and lossless compression. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Meanwhile, the product viewer also has customizable animation parameters, image compression, and automatic publishing. - [Advantages to Using a Visual Product Configurator](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/advantages-product-configurators): The Spinviewer also has configurable JPEG compression for better loading times, and automatic publishing with no file transfer needed. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): There is also no need for duplicate files, with real-time image compression and support for JPEG and WebP image formats. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): All animations are highly customizable, with image compression and automatic publishing options. - [Visual Product Configurators for E-Commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce): Additional features such as JPEG compression, automatic publishing, and integration for e-commerce provide everything businesses expect in a 3D visual product configurator. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-consistency # SECTION: glossary > image-consistency # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Image consistency > All product images in a range sharing the same angles, framing, lighting and background. Also known as: visual consistency, consistency. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Image consistency means all product images in a range share the same angles, framing, margins, lighting and background, regardless of who photographed them or when. It makes category pages look orderly and makes products comparable. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot achieves consistency with repeatable robot positions, presets that store capture and editing settings, AutoCrop with fixed aspect ratio and padding, and [PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy) training for consistent operation across operators, shifts and locations. ## See on photorobot.com - [Consistency in visual content](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content) ## Related terms - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/style-guide): A document that defines how products of a brand are to be photographed and presented. - [AutoCrop](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/autocrop): Automatic cropping based on the detected product position, with set aspect ratio and padding. - [Batch processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/batch-processing): Applying the same edits to many images at once instead of one by one. - [PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-academy): PhotoRobot's official training and certification programme for operators, managers and integrators. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 55 pages. Most relevant: - [How Consistency in Visual Content Boosts Revenue](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content): Consistency in visual content boosts revenue by establishing brand consistency, attracting shoppers and triggering buyer’s confidence in visitors to your webshop. - [How to Create a Fashion Product Photography Style Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide): …share how to create a fashion product photography style guide that converts and ensures consistency. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): …and how you intend to use it (universally, for macro photography, or multi-camera consistency). - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): In eCommerce, manufacturers and retailers alike take on product image production for greater brand consistency, maximized sales, and reduced returns. - [Shoe Photography - Still Images, Style Guides and Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/shoe-photography-workflow): With shoe photography for e-commerce, both quality and consistency in visual content is key to selling footwear to online consumers. - [9 Tips: How to Photograph Clothing on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/photograph-clothing-on-a-ghost-mannequin): Consistency in product imagery is crucial to building an image as a reputable seller, and ultimately in building buyer’s trust. - [What is E-commerce Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging): A technical definition of e-commerce product imaging, explaining the requirements for consistency, speed, and format versatility in online retail. - [What is Multi-Angle Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-multi-angle-product-photography): …photography, explaining how capturing products from programmed, fixed angles ensures visual consistency in e-commerce. - [What is Robotic Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-product-photography): The primary objective of robotic product photography is to achieve high precision, consistency, and scalability in product imaging workflows. - [7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo): With product photography for ecommerce, consistency can be critical, especially for product galleries. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-hosting # SECTION: glossary > image-hosting # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Image hosting > Storing images on a server and delivering them to websites on request. Also known as: product image hosting. Category: Software. Image hosting is the storage of images on a server that delivers them to websites and apps on request. Product image hosting adds features such as resizing for each device, compression and embeddable viewers. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot hosting runs on a Google Cloud Platform image CDN with real-time scaling: every image is scaled to the resolution of the end-user device, and JPEG, PNG and WebP are supported. JPEG compression is configurable in real time, so no duplicate files are needed. Hosting is billed by storage, with unlimited views and data transfer. ## See on photorobot.com - [Image hosting with Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting) - [PhotoRobot Viewer image hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting) ## Related terms - [CDN (content delivery network)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cdn): A network of servers worldwide that delivers files from a location close to each visitor. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer): PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. - [SpinViewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/spinviewer): PhotoRobot's embeddable 360 product viewer for spins, adjustable in real time on any device. - [Automatic publishing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/automatic-publishing): Making finished images available online immediately after capture and processing, without manual upload. - [Image compression](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-compression): Reducing the file size of an image, either without loss of data (lossless) or by discarding detail (lossy). ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 17 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting): Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software eCommerce Image Hosting - PhotoRobot Viewer. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): Image Hosting With Spin Viewer. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): Complete Image Hosting & Delivery Easily distribute product imagery online, including: complete galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hotspots, panoramas & more with PhotoRobot’s Product Viewer. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Complete Image Hosting & Delivery Easily distribute product content online, including: image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hot spots, panoramas & more with the PhotoRobot Product Viewer. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): …Photo editing software for post-processing images Content distribution, syndication & image hosting solutions This equipment & software together with a car turntable dramatically simplify the… - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): …including usage of the integrated PhotoRobot Viewer and SpinViewer for 2D + 3D + 360 image hosting. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): As soon as images are uploaded in the software, copying and pasting an embeddable Javascript allows for immediate image hosting. - [Guide to PhotoRobot Controls App Pricing & User Licenses](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-controls-software-prices): It includes information on cost-cutting Backstage User Licenses, with details on image hosting & PhotoRobot SpinViewer. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): The PhotoRobot Viewer cloud platform enables immediate and automatic eCommerce image hosting after capture. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): These include everything from taking photos to automatic photo editing, digital asset management, content redistribution & product image hosting technology. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-metadata # SECTION: glossary > image-metadata # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Image metadata (EXIF, IPTC, XMP) > Information stored inside an image file, such as camera settings, copyright, keywords and description. Also known as: image metadata, EXIF, IPTC, XMP, metadata. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. Image metadata is information embedded in an image file. EXIF records camera data such as exposure and lens, while IPTC and XMP store descriptive and rights information such as title, description, keywords, author and copyright, which DAM systems and marketplaces can read. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls preserves EXIF, XMP and IPTC on final images and embeds organisation defaults for artist, company and copyright at export; item tags become IPTC/XMP keywords. Item data such as dimensions from CubiScan or OCR text can be exported with the images. ## See on photorobot.com - [From crop to channel-ready delivery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/channel-ready-export) ## Related terms - [Item export](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-export): PhotoRobot Controls function that exports items to local disk or cloud in chosen formats, sizes and file names. - [DAM (digital asset management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dam): Software for storing, organising, searching and distributing images, video and other media files. - [OCR (optical character recognition)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ocr): Technology that converts text in an image into machine-readable text. - [CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cubiscan): A dimensioning system that weighs and measures items; PhotoRobot records its data with the product images. - [Macro PI Action](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-pi-action): Runs PhotoRobot Intelligence steps such as Metadata Suggest and Ask PI automatically inside macros. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 40 pages. Most relevant: - [From Crop to Channel-Ready Delivery in PhotoRobot Editor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/channel-ready-export): At the same time, smarter export ensures assets are web-ready when they leave the editor – with metadata, formats and filter-aware delivery. - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Attaching, controlling, and associating metadata across all product content. - [Unlock Operational PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite): Meet the PhotoRobot Intelligence software suite: Capture PI Advisor (real-time quality control), Metadata Suggest (routine standardization), Ask PI (quick search), and; Edit PI (production-safe edits). - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): The Image metadata option enables the embedding of author, copyright, title, description, and keywords into exported image files. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): 03:40* Third, and finally, there is weighing & measuring items with CubiScan, which also allows for automated metadata assignment for hardware setup and photo export. - [Macro PI - From Assistant to Fully Automated Pipeline](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action): Afterwards, they have to sit down at the keyboard to manually fill out metadata. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): Next, the third step is Image metadata which enables the embedding of author, copyright, title, description, and keywords into exported image files. - [Weighing and Measuring Products with CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/weighing-and-measuring-products): CubiScan functions to weigh & measure items (in metric or imperial units), automatically record and create metadata, and automate photography sequences. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Scan barcodes to validate inventory, ID products, and automatically mark items “received." Develop a file naming, tagging, and metadata structure. - [Using AI to Enhance Product Photo Backgrounds](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-product-photo-backgrounds): Automatic cataloging (retrieving product names, product codes, and structured metadata) Background replacement (placing items on marble, velvet, or other textures) Thematic visual storytelling (e.g. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/in-house-studio # SECTION: glossary > in-house-studio # TYPE: Glossary term --- # In-house photo studio > A company's own product photography studio, as opposed to outsourcing to an agency. Also known as: in-house studio, in-house photography. Category: E-commerce and workflow. An in-house photo studio is a company's own product photography operation, run by its own staff, rather than outsourcing images to an agency. It gives control over speed and consistency but requires investment in equipment, space and training. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot systems are built for in-house production, from single machines to production lines. For businesses without daily volume, PhotoRobot runs its own [PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio) in Prague and connects customers with partner studios using PhotoRobot systems. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Studio services](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio) ## Related terms - [Robotic workstation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-workstation): One complete automated photography station: robot, cameras, lights and controlling software. - [Production line](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-line): Several connected workstations that process products in stages, like an assembly line for images. - [PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-academy): PhotoRobot's official training and certification programme for operators, managers and integrators. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 17 pages. Most relevant: - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): However, over time, return on investment can also grow dramatically with the right in-house photography equipment & automation software. - [Effective Equipment for 360 Spin Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography): If you don’t already have an operational in-house studio, however, this guide should serve as an overview of all the equipment you need to produce 360 spin photography easily and effectively. - [Photo Studio Equipment & Software: Today’s Industry Leaders](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-photo-studio-manufacturers): Packshot Creator is now headquartered in Levallois-perret, Ile-de-France, France, and manufactures computer-controlled, in-house studio systems. - [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850): Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. - [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table): Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube): Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. - [ROBOTIC ARM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm): Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. - [ROBOTIC TURNTABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable): Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): PhotoRobot manufactures and distributes software and hardware for the automation of in-house photography: stills, 360 spins, 3D models, animation & video. - [PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide): This means your business can rest assured there is always an efficient answer to any of your in-house production requirements. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/industry-4-0 # SECTION: glossary > industry-4-0 # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Industry 4.0 > The connected, data-driven automation of production: networked machines, sensors and remote control. Also known as: smart factory. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Industry 4.0 describes the digital transformation of manufacturing: networked machines that exchange data with company systems, sensors and monitoring, remote diagnosis, advanced automation and digitised, paperless processes. The term originated in German industrial policy in the early 2010s. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In a 2024 declaration, PhotoRobot describes its systems as Industry 4.0 ready, citing remote diagnosis and control, network connectivity with API, sensors reporting machine state, storable automated sequences, paperless workflow management, safety stops and predictive maintenance data such as internal temperatures and operation counts. ## See on photorobot.com - [Industry 4.0 readiness](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/industry-4-0-readiness) ## Related terms - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [API (application programming interface)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/api): A defined interface through which one piece of software can use the functions or data of another. - [Production line](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-line): Several connected workstations that process products in stages, like an assembly line for images. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 1 page. Most relevant: - [Improtech PhotoRobot - Industry 4.0 Readiness](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/industry-4-0-readiness): As of this 2024 declaration, PhotoRobot describes its Industry 4.0 readiness, compatibility, compliance, and operational efficiency. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/iso # SECTION: glossary > iso # TYPE: Glossary term --- # ISO sensitivity > The camera's sensitivity setting; low ISO gives the cleanest images and widest dynamic range. Also known as: ISO. Category: Lighting and optics. ISO sensitivity sets how strongly the camera amplifies the sensor signal. Higher ISO allows shooting in less light but adds noise and reduces dynamic range, so studio product photography usually works at the camera's base ISO. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's CASE 850 user guide recommends shooting at low ISO for the highest dynamic range and image quality. ## Related terms - [Exposure](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/exposure): The amount of light that reaches the sensor, set by aperture, shutter speed, ISO and light output. - [Dynamic range](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dynamic-range): The range between the darkest and brightest tones a camera can record with detail. - [Aperture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aperture): The adjustable lens opening, given as an f-number; smaller openings give more depth of field. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 15 pages. Most relevant: - [Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions): Specification Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 31.643.XX Flash energy 800 J / WS Aperture at 2 m (100 ISO) with reflector L40 32 8/10 Aperture at 2 m (100 ISO) with reflector P70 45 6/10 Flash duration t0.1… - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): In this case, we used ISO 100, which is often suitable for many types of jewelry. - [How to Improve Productivity in Fashion Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/productivity-fashion-product-photography): The same is true for ISO performance, which when working with constant LED lighting becomes vital. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): Use low ISO – you will get the highest dynamic range and image quality from your sensor. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): Therefore, it is possible to set the time, aperture, ISO sensitivity and other settings while monitoring the scene through live-view. - [Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution): They also outperform APS-C sensors when handling image noise, especially at high ISO settings. - [What is Automated Image Capture?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-image-capture): It pushes instructions regarding focal length, aperture, ISO, and shutter speed. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): Photographers should experiment with camera parameters like aperture, speed, and ISO, as well as how the lights hit the product. - [Professional Tips for Footwear Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes): Camera tripods like the Robotic Arm and Multi-Cam allow operators to reduce ISO, denoise imagery, and get cleaner product pictures. - [Discover PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor): It recommends aperture tweaks, shutter speed corrections, or ISO balancing. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-export # SECTION: glossary > item-export # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Item export > PhotoRobot Controls function that exports items to local disk or cloud in chosen formats, sizes and file names. Also known as: bulk image export. Category: Software. Item export in PhotoRobot Controls writes the images of selected items to a local disk or to PhotoRobot Cloud in a defined structure. Each export defines outputs (spin, stills, images for retouch), file format, size, quality and a filename template. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Supported formats are JPG, PNG, WebP and TIFF; PhotoRobot recommends WebP and JPG. Exports can embed author, copyright, title, description and keywords as image metadata, add an HTML preview, a data.json configuration for SpinViewer, thumbnails and extracted OCR data, and set the item status to Exported. ## See on photorobot.com - [Item export user manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export) ## Related terms - [File naming convention](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/file-naming-convention): A rule for naming image files so systems can match them to products and views automatically. - [Image metadata (EXIF, IPTC, XMP)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-metadata): Information stored inside an image file, such as camera settings, copyright, keywords and description. - [WebP](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webp): Google's web image format with efficient lossy and lossless compression and transparency. - [JPEG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/jpeg): The most common lossy image format for photographs; small files, no transparency. - [Export feed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed): A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 10 pages. Most relevant: - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): This User Support Manual describes how to operate and troubleshoot local or cloud-based item export in PhotoRobot Controls App (CAPP). - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): Item export makes it possible to define items with custom naming conventions, specify image format, resolution, and various filename template variables. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): When exporting, bulk image export allows you to fetch all images in required quality, filename structure, format and resolution. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Bulk Image Export. - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition): Export Item with OCR Annotations. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): Bulk image export also enables image retrieval in the desired quality, format, and resolution. - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Bulk image export is available within the application or via a standalone export utility. - [PhotoRobot _Controls 2.12.5. New Features & What’s Next](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-updates-new-features): Added an option to avoid modifying the item status when exporting items without photos. - [3D Object Modeling in PhotoRobot Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo): Alternatively, you might also import the USDZ file to a platform like Blender to view the output in iOS or on Windows, and export items in various file formats like STL. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): 04:42* The system can also automatically configure robot settings according to object dimensions, and export items with metadata containing their information. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-status # SECTION: glossary > item-status # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Item status > The production state of an item in PhotoRobot Controls, such as Received, Captured, Edited or Published. Also known as: item statuses, workflow status. Category: E-commerce and workflow. An item status records where a product is in the production process, for example received, captured, edited, approved or published. Statuses let teams filter their work and let other systems react to progress. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls offers statuses including New, Received, Ready, Captured, Recapture, Edit, Approved, Published, Archived and Attention, plus capture statuses such as Fix Editing and Verified. Automatic workflow statuses can be configured to advance after capture, edit, cloud edit and Touch, and changes can trigger webhooks. ## See on photorobot.com - [Studio workflow: item statuses](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow) - [Tracking production status](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tracking-production-status) ## Related terms - [Approval workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/approval-workflow): A defined step in which managers or clients approve or reject images before publishing. - [Quality control](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quality-control): Checking images against requirements before they are published, and sending failures back. - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. - [Production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-workflow): The stages a product passes through in a photo studio, from intake to delivery and return. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Capture status - Toggle item status to Captured, Edited, Recapture, or Fix Editing 2. - [Tracking Production Status in PhotoRobot Controls Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tracking-production-status): …line with PhotoRobot Controls features to confirm sync, track activity, and report workflow statuses. - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): After toggling on Enable Controls Touch in the General Settings of the desktop version of CAPP, users can configure Capture status settings for the Touch app. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Easily navigate between Projects, Items, Folders, Clients & Users, with expanded, conditional search queries for Items & Item Statuses. - [Studio Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow): Monitor workloads inside each project via individual Items and Item statuses for each photoshoot. - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Clients can log into their page for a quick overview of projects, items, and item statuses. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): The second step for export is Item status, which allows the optional marking of exported items as Exported when the job completes. - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): Use the Item status step to optionally mark exported items as Exported when the job completes. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Project managers can then share instructions as comments on individual photos or across entire folders, while workflow status reports communicate progress. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): Workflow status reports within PhotoRobot software provide oversight on every stage of production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/jpeg # SECTION: glossary > jpeg # TYPE: Glossary term --- # JPEG > The most common lossy image format for photographs; small files, no transparency. Also known as: JPG. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. JPEG (JPG) is the most widely used image format for photographs. It uses lossy compression with an adjustable quality level, which keeps files small but discards some detail, and it does not support transparency. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot hosting serves JPEG with configurable, real-time compression. In item export, JPG and WebP are the recommended formats; quality is set from 1 to 100, and a pure white 255-255-255 background can be exported as JPEG, while transparency requires PNG or WebP. ## Related terms - [WebP](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webp): Google's web image format with efficient lossy and lossless compression and transparency. - [PNG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/png): A lossless image format that supports transparency; larger files than JPEG. - [Image compression](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-compression): Reducing the file size of an image, either without loss of data (lossless) or by discarding detail (lossy). - [Item export](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-export): PhotoRobot Controls function that exports items to local disk or cloud in chosen formats, sizes and file names. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 24 pages. Most relevant: - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): For each output, select which file format to download images in: JPG, PNG, WebP, or TIFF. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): JPEG, PNG, WebP supported. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): Use JPEG for standard production – the in-camera processing of the Canon body (or iPhone) delivers excellent, ready-to-use results; RAW remains an option for enthusiasts who want to fine-tune maximum… - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Supported file formats include: JPEG, WEBP, and PNG (for images with a transparent background). - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Automation then enables real-time image scaling with support for JPEG and WebP image formats. - [Present Products with Style - PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio): Receive files in JPEG or PNG, or instantly publish web-ready assets online via PhotoRobot’s global CDN. - [A Quick Guide to 360 Product Photography for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon): 360° animations are an assortment of JPEG or PNG format images, ranging from 24 to 1024 photos. - [PhotoRobot’s Light, Fast and Free Online Image Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/light-and-fast-online-360deg-image-viewer-for-free): …reduces the size of data downloaded to the viewer (compared to very well-compressed JPG files). - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): There is full support for JPEG, PNG, WebP, as well as RAW files, camera downloads, and naming conventions. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): Global Image CDNReal-time image scalingImage viewer includedReal-time JPEG compressionAdvanced configuration of Spin animationAutomatic publishingIntegration with e-commerce platforms Image Editing… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/kiosk-mode # SECTION: glossary > kiosk-mode # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Kiosk mode > A locked-down, simplified interface that shows an operator only the controls an administrator allows. Category: Software. Kiosk mode is a locked-down user interface that shows operators only what an administrator allows, often just a button to take a photo and move to the next step. All settings stay hidden in the background. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot Controls, Kiosk mode runs configured wizards so that operation can be reduced to a start button or a barcode scan. PhotoRobot states this lets studios employ staff with very little training. The PINK medical system uses Kiosk mode so clinic staff only scan the patient's barcode. ## See on photorobot.com - [Wizard and Kiosk mode manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode) ## Related terms - [Wizard mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/wizard-mode): PhotoRobot Controls mode that guides an operator through predefined capture steps one at a time. - [PINK (PhotoRobot Medical)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-pink): PhotoRobot clinical photography system that photographs the upper body of a standing patient from defined angles. - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [Wizard Mode - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode): This includes how to access and launch wizards after their creation as a simplified user interface in Kiosk mode in CAPP. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): For businesses who want to hide complex controls in the background, Kiosk modes make machine operation nearly fool-proof. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): …photography operations can completely disappear into the background using PhotoRobot Kiosk Mode. - [PhotoRobot PINK - The Medical Robot Photographer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pink-the-medical-robot-photographer): Kiosk modes within PhotoRobot software help to answer for the learning curves of onboarding complex, industry-specific control software. - [Examples of AR Shopping Applications: Then to Now](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-shopping-apps-2020): In these rooms, there is an augmented reality kiosk that provides shoppers with a digital reflection of themselves just like being in front of a mirror. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): “Kiosk” mode – allowing only the scanning of patient barcodes by the user, while the rest of the process is fully automated; 2. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): We like to say our software allows users to “Set once and forget.” In fact, by using ready-made Presets, Kiosk Mode can take all the complexity out of photoshoots. - [Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy): *4 modules* PINK Specialist Certification for the PINK clinical photography system covering patient communication, privacy, kiosk workflow and remote physician video calls. - [Train Your Studio Teams From the Ground Up](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy): Kiosk wizard, patient communication, privacy, safety, remote-physician videocall. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/laser-positioning # SECTION: glossary > laser-positioning # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Laser positioning > Lasers projected onto the turntable that show where to place a product so it sits at the centre of rotation. Also known as: positioning lasers, cross laser, laser centring, laser centering. Category: Hardware. Laser positioning uses cross or line lasers projected onto a turntable to mark the centre of rotation, so an operator can place each product in the same position quickly. A well-centred product does not drift or wobble in a 360 spin. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot turntables use built-in cross lasers, with cross or grid options on some machines; a laser controller drives 1 to 20 positioning lasers. Lasers are switched off automatically during capture on systems such as PINK so the laser line does not appear in images. The [laser centering guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/laser-centering-guide) describes how to align the lasers to the true centre of the plate. ## See on photorobot.com - [Laser centering and alignment guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/laser-centering-guide) ## Related terms - [Centre of rotation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centre-of-rotation): The axis a turntable spins around; a product placed on it stays in the same spot in every frame. - [Auto-centering](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/auto-centering): Software correction that aligns a product to the centre of rotation in every frame so a spin does not wobble. - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 37 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Laser Centering & Alignment Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/laser-centering-guide): …manual provides technical instructions on how to align and center PhotoRobot built-in cross laser systems. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): What's included with the Case 850 Robot? 850 mm glass plate (33,5 inches) Control unit Transparent background with holders Cross laser for precise product positioning Power and data cables Foldable… - [PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller): The Laser Controller controls 1 - 20 positioning lasers for the accurate placement of objects within the machine’s workspace. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): …Camera Slider Assembly (12) Digital Camera with 50mm fixed-focal lens (13) Vertical Line Laser (14) Emergency Stop, Power Switch (15) 2.2. - [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame): Built-in laser positioning, sensors and control units mean no cables on the ground. - [Cube Compact - The Universal 360 Photography Robot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/cube-compact-photography-robot): At the same time, it is possible to equip the robot with a built-in laser positioning controller. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): Next, staging objects for photography and aligning the turntable to the Robot Arm is simple using laser-guided object positioning. - [PhotoRobot’s Case for Automated 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography): The Case also features a built-in cross laser system to facilitate operators in finding the center of rotation for every product. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): For example, both motorized turntables and robotic camera arms feature laser-guided positioning to easily locate the absolute center of rotation. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): The system features laser guided positioning, a white fabric background, as well as integrated flags, light booms, and other accessories. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/lifestyle-photography # SECTION: glossary > lifestyle-photography # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Lifestyle photography > Product photos showing the product in use or in a real-world setting. Also known as: lifestyle images, lifestyle shots, in-context photography. Category: Photography techniques. Lifestyle photography shows a product in use or in a realistic setting, such as furniture in a room or a bag carried by a person. It complements standardised packshots by giving context, scale and mood. ## Related terms - [Packshot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/packshot): A clean, standardised product photo, usually on a white background, often showing the packaging. - [On-model photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/on-model-photography): Photographing garments or accessories worn by a live model. - [Hero image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hero-image): The main product photo shown first on a product page or listing. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [Using a Macro Lens for Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography): On the other hand, standard camera lenses are more often for lifestyle product photography and shooting larger products that don’t require extreme close-ups. - [What is E-commerce Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging): Editorial or lifestyle photography focuses on artistic expression. - [How to Create a Fashion Product Photography Style Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide): …catering to? Perhaps it’s a sportswear brand, in which case you want more active colors, lifestyle photography, or product videos showcasing movement. - [3D Product Photography for eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-product-photography-ecommerce): Traditional product photography does allow for interesting approaches to showcasing products, like with lifestyle photography or nature photography. - [E-Commerce Content Creation and Content Marketing in 2021](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/content-creation-and-marketing-2021): Lifestyle photography shows subjects in action (think of a photo of a chef in the kitchen to market a restaurant venture). - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Wide-angle lenses are more for landscape or lifestyle photography, such as product photos of a car on the road. - [Ghost Mannequin Effect for Apparel Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect): With apparel photography for social media, it’s more common to use lifestyle product photography with live models in public settings. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): Unlike lifestyle photography, which aims to create a story around the product, packshots inform on a different level. - [Product Photography of Sunglasses with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photography-sunglasses): Rather than lifestyle photography, nowadays it’s multi-angle still images and 360 product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/light-wrap # SECTION: glossary > light-wrap # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Light-wrap > Background light spilling around the edges of a product, softening its contours. Also known as: light wrap, light bleed. Category: Lighting and optics. Light-wrap is light from a bright background spilling around the edges of the subject. It softens contours, reduces contrast and can tint reflective surfaces. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's studio lighting overview describes light-wrap as typical of all-in-one box-like systems with too much diffuse backlight, resulting in reduced gloss on reflective surfaces, a milky colour tint and loss of texture. ## Related terms - [Backlight](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/backlight): Light from behind the subject, used to brighten the background or outline the product. - [Diffusion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/diffusion): Scattering light through a translucent material to make it softer and more even. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 4 pages. Most relevant: - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): While this might lead to a perfectly white background, the amount of light bleeding in from behind blurs the contours of the object. - [7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo): When this effect, so-called light wrap, is strong, it is clearly visible even without zooming in for detail, and requires heavy editing later on - if at all possible. - [Mastering Product Photography: Apparel and Clothing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing): What is more, incorrectly set backlighting can cause a photograph to lose edge-clarity (so-called “light wrap”). - [PhotoRobot Hardware: Centerless Table, Cube, Robot Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-cube-robot-arm): This may lead to a stronger effect called light wrap, where there is too much light coming around the object into the camera lens, which leads to the edges becoming softer. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/live-view # SECTION: glossary > live-view # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Live View > A real-time preview of the camera image on a computer screen, used to frame and focus before capture. Also known as: LiveView, camera live view. Category: Software. Live view shows the camera's sensor image in real time on the camera screen or, when tethered, on a computer monitor. It is used to check framing, focus and position before capture. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls streams Live View from the camera through its stream server, also to several screens so stylists can follow the scene. Live View can be detached into its own window on a second monitor, and a wizard step can switch it on to check that the object is centred. ## See on photorobot.com - [Enhancing operator ergonomics: detached Live View](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-operator-ergonomics) ## Related terms - [Tethered shooting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tethered-shooting): Shooting with the camera connected to a computer, which controls settings and receives every image directly. - [Wizard mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/wizard-mode): PhotoRobot Controls mode that guides an operator through predefined capture steps one at a time. - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 20 pages. Most relevant: - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Enable one or multiple cameras for a sequence via the Cameras interface: Click on the Live View icon (1) to enable focus point selection via clicking in a Live View picture. - [Wizard Mode - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode): The following step types are available: create-item select-item capture-folder import-images liveview 6 - Detailed Step Descriptions. - [Enhancing Operator Ergonomics on Your Photo Studio Floor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-operator-ergonomics): Categories: Product Photography, Software Controls Delivers Detached Live View & Quick-Angle Presets. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): …either displays the currently selected image (if you have already taken some) or the live view streamed from the camera. - [Camera Configuration - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-configuration): If using a DSLR with live view, check that live view is not preventing the flash from triggering. - [How to Create Video in PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/create-video-photorobot-controls-user-support): After configuring all points in the recording timeline, switch on the camera’s Live View to check the object’s position. - [Capture And Control](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control): …image capture in real-time and on multiple screens via our stream server’s Camera LiveView. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): In the first step, the LiveView of the camera is automatically turned on. - [Troubleshooting with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting): In case LiveView displays only a black screen, check the Exposure simulation setting on your Canon camera and ensure that it is turned off. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): If using constant lighting, exposure simulation in LiveView is also useful. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro # SECTION: glossary > macro # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Macro > A stored sequence of PhotoRobot Controls commands that automates multi-step capture across folders. Also known as: macros, PhotoRobot macros. Category: Software. A macro in PhotoRobot Controls is a stored sequence of commands that automates a capture workflow across one or more folders. Commands include changing folder, running a sequence, copying images between folders and loading presets. ## How PhotoRobot uses it A typical macro captures a 360 spin and copies selected frames into a stills folder, so the same angles are not photographed twice. A macro can also pause so the operator can turn an object upside down to capture its other hemisphere. Macros can be triggered by barcodes and tags, and [Macro PI Action](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-pi-action) adds PhotoRobot Intelligence steps to them. ## See on photorobot.com - [Macros configuration and functionality guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/macros-config-functions) ## Related terms - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Macro PI Action](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-pi-action): Runs PhotoRobot Intelligence steps such as Metadata Suggest and Ask PI automatically inside macros. - [Capture sequence](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-sequence): The programmed order of angles, camera triggers and movements a robot performs to photograph an item. - [Wizard mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/wizard-mode): PhotoRobot Controls mode that guides an operator through predefined capture steps one at a time. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 8 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Macros Configuration and Functionality Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/macros-config-functions): The following user guide describes the configuration and functionality of Macros in PhotoRobot Controls Application (CAPP). - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): The suggested macro lens with PhotoRobot recommended cameras is the Canon RF 100mm Macro Lens (f/2.8 L Macro IS USM). - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Macros in CAPP enable users to define commands for the capture process of an item and its folders (spin, stills, etc). - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): Macros in CAPP enable users to define commands for the capture process of an item and its folders (spin, stills, etc). - [Macro PI - From Assistant to Fully Automated Pipeline](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action): …Macro PI enables teams to execute PI (π) capabilities directly inside repeatable macro flows, not only through manual dialogs. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): For this photoshoot, we used the Canon EF 100 mm f2.8 L Macro IS USM lens. - [PhotoRobot Hardware and Software Updates & New Features](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/new-features-updates): Updated Macros for Cloud Subscription Power Users. - [Software Pricing Levels](https://www.photorobot.com/software-pricing): …and collaboration Network functions (cloud-based) Multi-user (concurrent users) Macro programming Users Production users Backstage users API Hardware controls PhotoRobots Canon Cameras DMX (Still)… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-photography # SECTION: glossary > macro-photography # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Macro photography > Photographing small subjects at close range so that they appear life-size or larger on the sensor. Also known as: macro lens, macro shot. Category: Photography techniques. Macro photography is close-up photography of small subjects at high magnification, classically at a reproduction ratio of 1:1 or more. It uses macro lenses that can focus very close, and depth of field becomes very shallow. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's recommended cameras guide lists macro lenses for detail and close-up work, alongside zoom lenses for general robotic-arm use and prime lenses for multi-camera set-ups. PhotoRobot's jewellery photography guide recommends a macro lens with a fixed focal length. ## See on photorobot.com - [Macro lens product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography) - [Recommended cameras and lenses](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras) ## Related terms - [Detail shot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/detail-shot): A close-up photo of one feature of a product, such as a texture, logo or mechanism. - [Depth of field](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/depth-of-field): The distance range in front of and behind the focus point that appears acceptably sharp. - [Focus stacking](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focus-stacking): Combining several photos focused at different distances into one image that is sharp throughout. - [Focal length](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/focal-length): The lens property, in millimetres, that sets the angle of view and magnification. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 12 pages. Most relevant: - [Using a Macro Lens for Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography): …photos of small items with microscopic details requires special equipment and a macro lens for high-quality results. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): Choose a lens based on the types of objects you photograph, and how you intend to use it (universally, for macro photography, or multi-camera consistency). - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): Jewelry photography on items like bracelets, necklaces, rings and earrings calls for specialized equipment and accessories adaptable to macro photography. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): Macro lenses – A macro lens is a specialized optic to photograph objects with a magnified ratio, usual 1:1. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Product photos must be high-resolution, display various angles, and sometimes include deep zoom, hot spots, or macro shots. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): There is also full support for packshot galleries, GS1 compliant images, macro shots, and interior panoramas. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): They might for example be an additional macro shot that zooms into the cut of a diamond. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): An appropriate camera lens – For micro products like jewelry, a macro lens is necessary in the studio. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): An appropriate camera lens – For extremely small, complex products like jewelry, your photographer will need a macro lens. - [7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo): Cameras with wide lenses are best when capturing larger products, while macro lenses can be utilized for smaller items. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-pi-action # SECTION: glossary > macro-pi-action # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Macro PI Action > Runs PhotoRobot Intelligence steps such as Metadata Suggest and Ask PI automatically inside macros. Also known as: Macro PI. Category: Software. Macro PI Action runs PhotoRobot Intelligence capabilities inside repeatable macros instead of manual dialogs. Analysis and metadata entry then happen automatically in the background as soon as capture finishes. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Within a macro, Metadata Suggest assigns and updates item titles, tags and notes from what it sees in the images, and Ask PI answers saved questions, for example the number and type of USB ports on the back of a device, and writes the answer into a metadata field. PhotoRobot states the results are reproducible regardless of which operator runs the machine. ## See on photorobot.com - [Macro PI Action](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-intelligence): The AI layer in PhotoRobot Controls for capture quality control, metadata, visual questions and edits. - [Macro](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro): A stored sequence of PhotoRobot Controls commands that automates multi-step capture across folders. - [Image metadata (EXIF, IPTC, XMP)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-metadata): Information stored inside an image file, such as camera settings, copyright, keywords and description. - [PIM (product information management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pim): A system that stores and distributes product data, such as descriptions and attributes, to all sales channels. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [Macro PI - From Assistant to Fully Automated Pipeline](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action): Achieve unprecedented studio throughput via a fully automated operational layer with Macro PI Action in PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) software. - [Bring Your Own Key to Master the PI (π) Infrastructure](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/byok-photorobot-intelligence): PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor radically reduce shooting errors, while Macro PI Actions can eliminate manual metadata entry entirely. - [Discover PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor): Stay tuned to see how to take these analytical capabilities and integrate them fully into your automated processes with Macro PI Action. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/marketing-angle # SECTION: glossary > marketing-angle # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Marketing angle > A predefined, commercially attractive view of a product used in listings and campaigns. Also known as: marketing angles, marketing image. Category: Photography techniques. A marketing angle is a predefined view of a product chosen for its commercial appeal, such as a three-quarter front view at a slight elevation. A set of marketing angles is defined once in a style guide and used for every product in a range. ## How PhotoRobot uses it On PhotoRobot systems, marketing angles are captured together with top views and spins, either in the same rotation by the [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) or as frames copied from the spin into a stills folder by a [macro](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro). PhotoRobot's GS1 page lists marketing angles of a closed and an open food package among the standard GS1 views. ## Related terms - [Hero image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hero-image): The main product photo shown first on a product page or listing. - [Multi-angle product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-multi-angle-product-photography): Photographing a product from multiple predefined camera positions and elevations. - [Style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/style-guide): A document that defines how products of a brand are to be photographed and presented. - [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gs1-image-standards): GS1 guidelines for how product images are captured, named and exchanged in retail supply chains. - [Turn and swing angles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turn-and-swing-angles): PhotoRobot terms for the rotation angle of the product (turn) and the vertical angle of the camera (swing). ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 22 pages. Most relevant: - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): All it takes is a single photoshoot to capture complete image galleries alongside marketing angles, video, and 360 product photography. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): There can be still images, marketing angles, close-ups, 360 spins, video, and 3D product models. - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): For further time-savings, we can capture spin sets, still images, marketing images & planograms automatically with each batch of photos. - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): This includes the simultaneous capture of marketing angles and top views in a 360-degree rotational range. - [GS1 Image Standards and Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards): Our software extracts GS1 images, organizes files in a separate folder, and publishes marketing images and planograms. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): Gallery images can consist of a hero shot (the first image consumers see), different marketing angles, and detailed shots. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): Panoramic images also aren’t really a marketing image, so it’s important to capture detailed shots and close-ups as well. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): One click is all it takes to produce a high-resolution hero image, marketing angles, close-ups and detailed shots. - [How One Click Produces 2D + 360 + 3D Outputs in Tandem](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/one-click-output-production-demo): We get everything from the hero image to multiple marketing angles, and our 360 spin. - [360 Spin Product Photography - PhotoRobot Example Outputs](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin): Accelerate production of both single-row 360 spins and multi-row 3D spins in tandem with still images and marketing shots. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/mirrorless-camera # SECTION: glossary > mirrorless-camera # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Mirrorless camera > A camera with interchangeable lenses but no mirror; the sensor feeds an electronic viewfinder. Also known as: mirrorless, CSC, compact system camera. Category: Lighting and optics. A mirrorless camera, or compact system camera (CSC), has interchangeable lenses and a large sensor like a DSLR but no mirror; the sensor feeds an electronic viewfinder or screen directly. They are smaller and lighter and well suited to software control. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot recommends mirrorless Canon camera models for operation with its systems, because they offer the most seamless integration through Canon's software drivers. PhotoRobot follows mirrorless cameras from other makers, but Canon remains the recommended brand. ## See on photorobot.com - [Recommended cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras) ## Related terms - [DSLR](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dslr): A digital camera that uses a mirror and optical viewfinder, with interchangeable lenses. - [Canon EDSDK](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/canon-edsdk): Canon's software development kit for controlling EOS cameras from a computer over USB. - [Full-frame sensor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/full-frame-sensor): A camera sensor the size of 35 mm film (36 x 24 mm), preferred for product photography. - [Tethered shooting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tethered-shooting): Shooting with the camera connected to a computer, which controls settings and receives every image directly. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 37 pages. Most relevant: - [DSLR vs Mirrorless Cameras in 2020: Comparison and Review](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/dslr-vs-mirrorless-cameras-in-2020-comparison-and-review): …2020, and that means it’s time for a quick review and comparison of the latest models of mirrorless cameras versus the latest DSLR cameras. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): For frictionless operation, it is currently advisable to select mirrorless camera models for operation with PhotoRobot systems. - [Compatible Cameras with PhotoRobot - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras): While PhotoRobot can technically support any camera through third-party integration, the latest mirrorless Canon camera models are recommended for automated photography by robotic workstation. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): However, for automated photography, the latest mirrorless Canon camera models are the most reliable and efficient. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): PhotoRobot modules support DSLR and mirrorless Canon cameras, with 26 MP models usually more than efficient. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): When deciding on cameras, PhotoRobot compatible cameras include Canon DSLR and mirrorless models. - [Capture And Control](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control): Configure and save presets for supported DSLR & mirrorless Canon camera settings. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): …via wire shutter, 3rd party software, and watched folder for data exchange Canon DSLR & mirrorless (2008 - Present) Nikon (2004 - 2024 March): Discontinued support Photography Lighting. - [Camera Configuration - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-configuration): These include recent DSLR and mirrorless Canon camera models. - [System Requirements for PhotoRobot - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements): Also, be aware that only the latest mirrorless Canon camera models are recommended for automated photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/modelling-light # SECTION: glossary > modelling-light # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Modelling light > A continuous lamp built into a strobe that previews where the flash light will fall. Also known as: modeling light, pilot light. Category: Lighting and optics. A modelling light is a continuous lamp built into a studio strobe. It shows approximately how the flash will light the subject, which helps with positioning lights and focusing. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls can switch the modelling light of supported strobes on and off remotely and store the setting in presets. ## Related terms - [Strobe](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/strobe): A studio flash that emits a very short, powerful burst of light, freezing motion. - [Continuous light](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/continuous-light): Lighting that stays on constantly, typically LED, so the effect is visible before shooting. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 5 pages. Most relevant: - [FOMEI Digital Pro X Studio Flash - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-digital-pro-x): Turn the digital encoder volume to the right to increase Brightness of Modeling Light. - [Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions): The following items represent specially recommended accessories: 33.115.00 L40 standard reflector 34.260.00 Halogen modelling light, 300W for Siros 34.360.00 Flash tube, 400/800J for Siros 34.369.00… - [Capture And Control](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control): Adjust energy, cell sensors, modeling light, and power on / off. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): Use beauty dishes and strip softboxes – they provide soft yet efficient modeling light; perfect for 360 degree photography. - [Advanced Software Tools for Image Capture & Control](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/image-capture-control-tools): With support for Broncolor, Profoto, Fomei and DMX, you can adjust energy, cell sensors, modeling light, and power on / off. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/motor-driver # SECTION: glossary > motor-driver # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Motor driver > Electronics that supply power to a robot's motors; it determines how fast and precisely each axis can move. Also known as: motor drivers. Category: Hardware. A motor driver is the power electronics between a control unit and a motor. It converts control signals into the currents that move the motor, so its power and precision determine the dynamics of each axis of a robot. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot designs its motor drivers in-house. Apart from mobile devices, its machines use a 48 V motor supply, the highest safe voltage level, with nominal currents of 5 to 15 A per phase depending on the generation, to deliver as much power as possible to each robotically controlled axis. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot motor drivers](https://www.photorobot.com/driver) ## Related terms - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [Rotary encoder](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotary-encoder): A sensor that reports the exact angular position of a rotating part, such as a turntable plate. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 1 page. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Motor Drivers - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/driver): The table in the upcoming section shows the basic specifications of the motor drivers used by PhotoRobot. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multi-row-360 # SECTION: glossary > multi-row-360 # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Multi-row 360 > A 360 spin captured at several camera elevations, so the viewer can rotate the product horizontally and vertically. Also known as: multi-row spin, 3D spin, multi-row 360 spin. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A multi-row 360 is a spin captured in several rows at different camera elevations. In the viewer the product can be turned horizontally and tilted vertically, which is why it is often called a 3D spin, although it is still made of photographs rather than a 3D model. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot captures multi-row spins with the [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm), which moves the camera between rows, or with the [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam), which captures all rows in one rotation with several cameras. In PhotoRobot Controls, rows are added to a spin folder at different swing angles. ## See on photorobot.com - [Multi-row 360 output type](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360) ## Related terms - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multicam): PhotoRobot multi-camera arch that captures several elevations at once for multi-row 360 and 3D photography. - [Turn and swing angles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turn-and-swing-angles): PhotoRobot terms for the rotation angle of the product (turn) and the vertical angle of the camera (swing). - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 95 pages. Most relevant: - [Multi-Row 360 Product Photography - PhotoRobot Outputs](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360): Ensure items that call for closer inspection leave nothing to the imagination with multi-row 3D product photography. - [360 Spin Product Photography - PhotoRobot Example Outputs](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin): One click automatically captures, post-processes, and publishes single-row and multi-row 360 spins consisting of 24, 36 or more still images. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): There are various types of 360s: from single- to multi-row spins, time-lapse animations, product videos, and virtual product demos. - [MULTICAM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam): PhotoRobot’s MultiCam is a multi-camera 3D product photography system to significantly boost production speeds of multi-row 3D imagery. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): 3D product photography (also multi-row spins, or hemispherical / spherical spins) entails a spin capturing two or more rows of elevation around the product. - [3D Model Photography - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model): Automate the production of 3D models in tandem with multi-row 360 spins, and in multiple 3D file formats. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): PhotoRobot 360 photography equipment automates the capture of image galleries, 360 product photos, 3D spins, and eCommerce 3D models. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): …etc) Hardware, camera, and sequence configuration Single-click capture of 360 / 3D spins Automated extraction of individual still images (packshots, GS1-compliant images) Instructions for detailed,… - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): Multi-row 360 spins (also multi-row spins, 3D spins, or hemispherical / spherical spins) consist of two or more rows of still images. - [PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting): It enables consumers real-time control and configuration of single-row 360 spins and more advanced multi-row 3D spins. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multicam # SECTION: glossary > multicam # TYPE: Glossary term --- # MultiCam > PhotoRobot multi-camera arch that captures several elevations at once for multi-row 360 and 3D photography. Also known as: MultiCam PRO, MultiCam PRO XL, multi-camera rig. Category: Hardware. The MultiCam is a PhotoRobot multi-camera system: an arch that holds several cameras at different elevations above a motorised turntable. All cameras capture during a single rotation, so a multi-row spin or a photo set for a 3D model is produced in one pass. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The MultiCam arch has 13 camera mounting positions spaced 7.5° apart, a top-view range of 0° to 90° and motor-assisted height adjustment to the centre of the object. Two neighbouring positions cannot be occupied at the same time, so with enough camera holders up to 7 cameras can be mounted at once – which is why the website mentions both 13 positions and up to 7 cameras. The finer division lets you place cameras exactly where a particular use case needs them; cameras on neighbouring positions would differ in angle too little to be useful. The arch comes in PRO and PRO XL sizes (950 mm and 1250 mm radius). PhotoRobot states it can capture 144 or more images in about 20 seconds. Shutter timing across cameras is handled by the [SynchroBox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox). ## See on photorobot.com - [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) - [MultiCam and Centerless Table installation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation) ## Related terms - [SynchroBox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox): PhotoRobot multi-camera controller that fires each camera with its own advance; up to 8 cameras per unit, units can be linked. - [Multi-row 360](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multi-row-360): A 360 spin captured at several camera elevations, so the viewer can rotate the product horizontally and vertically. - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. - [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centerless-table): PhotoRobot motorised turntable with an optical glass plate for shadow-free photography without clipping. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Bullet time](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/bullet-time): Effect in which many cameras around a subject capture the same instant, so a frozen moment can be viewed from a moving viewpoint. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 49 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): …manual contains detailed instructions for the assembly and first use of the PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table. - [MULTICAM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam): A system to automate the capture of multiple cameras for multi-row and 3D product photography Multi-Camera System. - [Introducing: PhotoRobot's MultiCam for Multi-Row Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobots-multicam): PhotoRobot’s MultiCam is a multi-camera system designed to simultaneously capture 3D and multi-row images, capable of snapping hundreds of photos in an instant. - [PhotoRobot MultiCam - Multi-Camera Rig Design & Dynamics](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/multi-camera-rig-design-dynamics): Take a video tour introducing the design & dynamics of the PhotoRobot MultiCam, a multi-camera rig for automated 3D photography. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): MULTICAM A multi-camera system for capturing multi-row 3D product photos with multiple cameras simultaneously. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): There can also be a robotic arm or multi-camera rig to synchronize camera capture with the rotation of the turntable. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): For example: Using a PhotoRobot multi-camera system such as the MultiCam requires an estimate of how many cameras will be in use at one time. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): For example, 3D photography often calls for optical-glass plate turntables, 3D camera tripods & mounts, and multi-camera systems. - [PhotoRobot SynchroBox - Functionality & Setup User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup): The following documentation describes the functionality and setup of PhotoRobot SynchroBox, the Multi-Camera Controller supporting the PhotoRobot MultiCam. - [Capture And Control](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control): The MultiCam arch has 13 mounting positions, and because neighbouring positions cannot be used at the same time, up to 7 of them carry a camera at once. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/obj # SECTION: glossary > obj # TYPE: Glossary term --- # OBJ > A widely supported, text-based 3D model format storing geometry and UV mapping, with materials in an MTL file. Also known as: Wavefront OBJ, .obj. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. OBJ (Wavefront Object) is a widely supported, text-based format for 3D geometry. It stores vertices, faces and texture (UV) coordinates; materials and texture references are stored in a companion MTL file. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls exports 3D models as OBJ with MTL. PhotoRobot's format overview describes OBJ/MTL as widely supported across platforms and suited to sharing detailed models with materials, but larger than other 3D formats. ## See on photorobot.com - [Supported 3D model formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats) ## Related terms - [MTL](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#mtl): Companion file to OBJ that describes materials, colours and texture maps. - [STL](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/stl): A simple 3D format describing only surface geometry as triangles, standard for 3D printing. - [USDZ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/usdz): Pixar-developed packaged 3D format with native support on Apple devices, widely used for AR. - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats): Three.js); common in 3D printing communities where models are shared in STL format 3 - OBJ (Wavefront Object). - [3D Model Photography - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model): Generate virtual models in USDZ format (best for iOS / macOS AR), STL (with universal 3D printing support), or OBJ / MTL (for sharing detailed models with materials). - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): Other formats include STL (universal support for 3D printing), and OBJ / MTL (wide support across platforms, ideal for sharing detailed models & materials). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ocr # SECTION: glossary > ocr # TYPE: Glossary term --- # OCR (optical character recognition) > Technology that converts text in an image into machine-readable text. Also known as: OCR, optical character recognition. Category: Software. Optical character recognition (OCR) converts text that appears in an image, such as a printed label, into machine-readable text. In product photography it is used to capture packaging data directly from the product images. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls offers semi-automated OCR: the operator extracts OCR annotations in the cloud editor, checks them per folder and exports them in the data.json file. There is no OCR endpoint in the PhotoRobot Cloud API. Combined with the [Unwrap](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/unwrap) tool it reads text on cylindrical packaging. ## See on photorobot.com - [OCR in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition) - [Optical character recognition with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/optical-character-recognition) ## Related terms - [Unwrap](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/unwrap): PhotoRobot Controls tool that flattens text wrapping around cylindrical packaging so OCR can read it. - [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gs1-image-standards): GS1 guidelines for how product images are captured, named and exchanged in retail supply chains. - [Image metadata (EXIF, IPTC, XMP)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-metadata): Information stored inside an image file, such as camera settings, copyright, keywords and description. - [Planogram](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/planogram): A diagram of how products are placed on retail shelves; planogram images show the product face-on for it. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition): The following user guide describes how to use the semi-automated Optical Character Recognition (OCR) tools in PhotoRobot Controls App software. - [Grocery Product Photography Solutions and OCR](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/grocery-product-photography): Discover PhotoRobot solutions for grocery product photography, optical character recognition (OCR), and photographing packaged products with labels. - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and Integration with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/optical-character-recognition): …is easy, but what if you need to capture text on a photographed object? This is where Optical Character Recognition (OCR) comes into play. - [PhotoRobot OCR and GS1 Image Capture of Grocery Products](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/ocr-gs1-image-capture-features): Take a virtual tour of PhotoRobot software features for Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and automatic GS1 image capture. - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): It is also possible to enable Add extracted OCR data into data.json config. - [Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy): This includes available training courses in five specialty domains (OCR, 3D modeling, PINK - Clinical, Virtual Catwalk, and carpet photography). - [Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/product-photoshoots-demo): This is thanks to the high resolution of the original image files together with PhotoRobot’s built-in OCR reader. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): If photographing packaging or labeling with text, PhotoRobot has a tool for Optical Character Recognition (OCR). - [Quick, Easy, and Effective Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photoshoots-photorobot): A shampoo bottle with white on white and lots of text: To introduce our Optical Character Recognition (OCR) feature. - [High-Speed, High-Quality Photos and Advanced Image Processing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/high-quality-photos-advanced-image-processing): These include capabilities such as Optical Character Recognition (OCR) of text preset within images, auto cropping, centering and all the other functions that are bundled together into the… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/on-model-photography # SECTION: glossary > on-model-photography # TYPE: Glossary term --- # On-model photography > Photographing garments or accessories worn by a live model. Also known as: model photography, on-model. Category: Photography techniques. On-model photography shows clothing or accessories worn by a live model. It shows fit, drape and scale in a realistic way, at the cost of more organisation and less consistency than mannequin or flat lay shots. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The PhotoRobot [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk) is designed for filming and photographing dozens of models a day in 360 degrees in a small studio, and PhotoRobot tutorials cover how to photograph and film models. ## See on photorobot.com - [How to photograph models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models) - [How to film models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models) ## Related terms - [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-catwalk): PhotoRobot rotating platform with a treadmill belt that lets models walk an infinite runway for 360 fashion video. - [Ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect): An editing technique that makes the mannequin disappear so the garment looks worn by an invisible body. - [Flat lay](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flat-lay): Photographing products laid flat on a surface from directly above. - [Lifestyle photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/lifestyle-photography): Product photos showing the product in use or in a real-world setting. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 15 pages. Most relevant: - [3D Model Photography - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model): PhotoRobot digitizes 3D model photography in a single click for AR / VR optimization, and for 3D printing! Digitize product photos into virtual 3D object models in a single click Automate… - [How to Film Models on the Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models): This tutorial shares the process, including more on our solution, and how to film models in the studio.* Model Photography. - [How to Photograph Models on a Catwalk: Directing and Poses](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models): Improve your model photography on the Virtual Catwalk with these essential tips on directing and posing models in the studio. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): It would include instructions for on-model photoshoots versus using a mannequin, or for lifestyle versus flat lay photography. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): The same is true if the business needs a solution for more creative photography, like on-model photoshoots. - [PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk - Overview & Hardware Design](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/virtual-catwalk-rotating-platform): Learn how PhotoRobot’s Virtual Catwalk functions as an innovative rotating platform for on-model fashion product video & photography. - [CATWALK](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk): Model Photography & Online Fashion. - [TURNING PLATFORM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform): Transform the platform into a robotic turntable to support even heavier objects, or into an infinite runway for model photography. - [Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos): This includes no-retouch still product photography, 360 + 3D product photography, and 3D model photography – with no clipping necessary. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): It’s a way to really showcase elements like fabric, material & design, while also bringing more life to fashion & model photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/online-marketplace # SECTION: glossary > online-marketplace # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Online marketplace > A platform where many sellers list products, such as Amazon, usually with strict image requirements. Also known as: marketplace, e-commerce marketplace. Category: E-commerce and workflow. An online marketplace is a platform on which many sellers list products, such as Amazon or eBay. Marketplaces usually set strict image requirements, for example a pure white background for the main image and minimum pixel dimensions. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's editor can crop and resize images to a target pixel size so marketplace formats leave the editor channel-ready, and webhooks let a marketplace listing be updated only once hosted images are actually available. ## See on photorobot.com - [360-degree product photography for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon) ## Related terms - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. - [E-commerce product imaging](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging): Creating product images optimised for online retail platforms, catalogues and product information systems. - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. - [AutoCrop](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/autocrop): Automatic cropping based on the detected product position, with set aspect ratio and padding. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 34 pages. Most relevant: - [A Quick Guide to 360 Product Photography for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon): With the launch of Amazon 360, vendors on this online marketplace can now utilize spin photos to boost product listings. - [PhotoRobot: Flexible Tools for E-commerce Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/flexible-tools-for-e-commerce-product-photography): Success in ecommerce and with online marketplaces all revolves around customer confidence, and one way marketplaces establish this trust is through high-quality, visually rich product content. - [From Crop to Channel-Ready Delivery in PhotoRobot Editor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/channel-ready-export): Marketplace and web formats are instantly channel-ready, with product image metadata intact, and targeting the right folders. - [3D Product Photography for eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-product-photography-ecommerce): No matter if it’s for online marketplaces like Amazon and Shopify, or smaller webshops and brand pages, 3D product content is setting the standard in photography for eCommerce. - [Introducing: Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/customer-webhooks): Webhooks can notify a publisher, or, after the pull, facilitate your team in kicking off a CDN purge or updating a marketplace listing. - [Mastering Product Photography: Apparel and Clothing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing): With a wealth of online marketplaces for clothing and apparel, high-quality product photography is the norm for today’s digital consumers. - [Mastering Product Photography: Shoes and Footwear](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear): Success in e-commerce marketplaces revolves around customer trust, and to win this trust perfect product photography is key. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): While 360-degree imagery has made a splash on Amazon and other marketplaces, packshot photography is also commonplace in eCommerce. - [How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model): These assets make for compelling product content for product pages, marketing campaigns, online marketplaces like Shopify, video games and more. - [360-Degree Photography and 3D Models for E-Commerce: Why both?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-photography-3d-models-for-e-commerce): …and more 3D models are being used in digital advertising and marketing, especially for online marketplaces, e-tailers and vendors. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/optical-glass-plate # SECTION: glossary > optical-glass-plate # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Optical glass plate > A turntable top made of optical glass that can be lit and photographed through, giving shadow-free images. Also known as: glass turntable, glass plate. Category: Hardware. An optical glass plate is a transparent turntable top made of hardened optical glass. Light can pass through it from below, so the product casts no shadow on the plate, and the camera can photograph the underside of the product through the glass. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot uses optical glass plates on the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) (850 or 1300 mm), the [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850), the C-Class turntables and [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame). Together with a diffuse background they let the software separate the product from the background without clipping, and photographing through the glass supports [photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging) 3D models. ## Related terms - [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centerless-table): PhotoRobot motorised turntable with an optical glass plate for shadow-free photography without clipping. - [Shadow-free photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shadow-free-photography): Lighting a product so that it casts no visible shadow on its background or support. - [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/case-850): PhotoRobot's portable motorised turntable with an 850 mm glass plate that folds into its own carrying case. - [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/frame): PhotoRobot all-in-one machine combining a glass-plate turntable with a robotic camera arm, built for 3D modelling. - [Background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal): Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 51 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): The 850 mm glass plate is perfect for pure white background photography. - [PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide): It is possible for the camera to photograph from below the glass plate of the turntable or above as well. - [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame): The turntable features an optical glass plate, enabling image capture from above or below the glass. - [CASE 1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300): 1300 mm hardened optical-glass plate, diffusion background, several automatic product-positioning lasers, high motor-power, remote control, API, reflection boards and flag holders - all in easily… - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): At the same time, the turning glass plate holds objects from the size of an earring to luggage, with a diffuse background that enables even lighting of objects from all sides during photography. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): This is thanks to a unique lighting system, an optical glass plate, and diffuse background to light products from all sides. - [PhotoRobot’s Case for Automated 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography): From the optical glass plate and the diffuse background, to the arcs for camera support and the tools for precise remote control of the robot, the Case truly is *everything in a single case* for… - [Pricing Levels of Robotic Workspaces](https://www.photorobot.com/hardware-pricing): FRAME Fx FRAME Next-gen all-in-one industrial-grade photographic automat with glass plate ⌀ 1 300 mm. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide): Key technological components and features of the PhotoRobot Centerless Table include: Optical turning glass plate for shadow-free image capture. - [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850): The Case features an 850mm optical glass plate, offering sufficient workspace for small to medium size products. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/packshot # SECTION: glossary > packshot # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Packshot > A clean, standardised product photo, usually on a white background, often showing the packaging. Also known as: pack shot, packshot photography. Category: Photography techniques. A packshot is a clean, standardised photograph of a product, typically on a plain white or transparent background, often showing the product with its packaging and labels. Packshots are used in online shops, catalogues and marketplaces where products must be shown consistently and without distractions. Good packshots are evenly lit, sharp from front to back and shot from consistent angles, so that a whole range looks uniform on a category page. Many marketplaces require a packshot-style main image. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot systems capture packshots together with 360 spins in one sequence, and the [PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio) service delivers them on white or transparent backgrounds. Glass-plate turntables such as the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) produce a natural white background without clipping. ## See on photorobot.com - [Packshot photography: what it is and how to produce it](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) ## Related terms - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. - [Hero image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hero-image): The main product photo shown first on a product page or listing. - [Still image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/still-image): A single photograph of a product, as opposed to a spin, video or 3D model. - [Depth of field](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/depth-of-field): The distance range in front of and behind the focus point that appears acceptably sharp. - [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gs1-image-standards): GS1 guidelines for how product images are captured, named and exchanged in retail supply chains. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 35 pages. Most relevant: - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): Branching off product photography, packshot photography sets guidelines to taking photos of a product typically with its packaging and labeling. - [Still Product Photography - PhotoRobot Output Examples](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image): Achieve professional still image packshots and 360 packshots on a distraction-free background in one click! Advertise product design features, materials, colors, and details from multiple angles in… - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): It may also automate back-end operations like the extraction of specific still images: packshots, GS1 imagery, detailed shots and more. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): …Product Photography? 360° product photography (also 360° spin, spin photography, or 360° packshot photography) appears mainly on webshops and e-commerce product pages. - [Photo Studio Equipment & Software: Today’s Industry Leaders](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-photo-studio-manufacturers): 360s (also 360 spins, spins, or 360° packshots) often refer to standard, single-row spins. - [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table): This creates a natural, white background for high-quality photos, from still images and packshots to 360° imagery. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Organizes various outputs into easily located folders (still images, packshots, 360s) 3. - [Automated Packshot Photography Outputs: Geckota Watch](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/geckota-watches): Using the pillow to display the watch in a vertical position, PhotoRobot produced the product spin consisting of 36 images in 40 seconds. - [Automated Packshot Photography Outputs: Packaged Watch](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/watch-packaging): 36 web-ready packshots and the 360 spin of this watch in its packaging required only 40 seconds to produce with PhotoRobot. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): This includes automation to support still image & packshot photography, 360 product photography, 3D object modeling, product animation, and 360 product video. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/panorama # SECTION: glossary > panorama # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Panorama > A wide or fully spherical image of a space that the viewer can look around in. Also known as: 360 panorama, interior panorama, panoramic image. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A panorama is an image with a very wide or full 360-degree field of view, captured with a 360 camera or stitched from several photos. In a viewer the visitor can look around, for example inside a car. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot integrates Theta 360 cameras: a camera is added to the software workspace, images upload automatically on capture, and panoramas can be published straight to the PhotoRobot Viewer. Interior panoramas are part of [360 Car Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/car-studio-360). ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Viewer: panorama viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) ## Related terms - [360 Car Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/car-studio-360): PhotoRobot Viewer layout for vehicles, combining 360 spins, hotspots, details and interior panoramas. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer): PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. - [Hotspot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hotspot): A clickable point on a product image or spin that opens a detail image, zoom or annotation. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Complete Image Hosting & Delivery Easily distribute product content online, including: image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hot spots, panoramas & more with the PhotoRobot Product Viewer. - [PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting): …with PhotoRobot Viewer, now supporting image galleries alongside spins, hot spots, and panoramas. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): …fastest product viewers on the market for hosting image galleries, 360 spins, 3D photos, panoramas, videos & more Car Turntable Installation & Setup. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): …images) Instructions for detailed, macro or hand-held shots Support for interior, panoramic photos Viewer integration for automatic publishing of web-ready imagery Truly, most repeatable processes the… - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): …product imagery online, including: complete galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hotspots, panoramas & more with PhotoRobot’s Product Viewer. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): kg / lbs panorama. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): The PhotoRobot Viewer enables the easy distribution of product content online: image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hot spots, panoramas & more. - [7 Advantages to 360 Product Viewers for your Website](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-advantages-360-product-viewers-for-websites): Image viewing software like PhotoRobot's enables businesses to host 360 spins with hot spots, eCommerce product galleries, panoramic shots and more - all on a single page. - [PhotoRobot Product Photography Automation Solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/): …with PhotoRobot Viewer, now supporting image galleries alongside spins, hot spots, and panoramas. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pdp # SECTION: glossary > pdp # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PDP (product detail page) > The web shop page dedicated to one product, with its images, description and buy button. Also known as: PDP, product detail page, product page. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A product detail page (PDP) is the page of an online shop dedicated to a single product, combining images and spins, description, specifications, price and the purchase button. Image quality on the PDP strongly influences conversion. ## Related terms - [Conversion rate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/conversion-rate): The share of visitors to a page or shop who complete a purchase. - [Hero image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hero-image): The main product photo shown first on a product page or listing. - [360 product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-viewer): Web software that plays a 360 spin and lets the visitor rotate and zoom a product. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 24 pages. Most relevant: - [How to Improve Product Page Conversions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/improve-product-page-conversions): Join PhotoRobot to discover how to improve product page conversions while driving more traffic to your products online. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): …into how to photograph sunglasses and glasses to showcase on online stores and website product pages. - [How Consistency in Visual Content Boosts Revenue](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content): …in your visual content should be a top priority if trying to boost revenue for product pages. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): …photography, or 360° packshot photography) appears mainly on webshops and e-commerce product pages. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): The front angle – Quite often the first image on a product page, this angle is the most common. - [9 Tips: How to Photograph Clothing on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/photograph-clothing-on-a-ghost-mannequin): Whether it’s on a product page or selling through various vendors, consistency will make your brand appear more professional overall. - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): In our opinion, it’s a top-class try-before-buying experience, ideal for trying on items like eyewear and apparel directly from a product page. - [The Latest Trends in Social Media Product Photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/social-media-product-photos): Rather than directing consumers to a product page, these channels allow for directly purchasing products on an app for the social network. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Correct exposure, and ensure image backgrounds remain consistent with the rest of your product pages. - [What is 360 Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-360-product-photography): This format can be embedded directly into e-commerce product pages, providing an interactive user experience without requiring specialized browser plugins. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable # SECTION: glossary > photography-turntable # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Photography turntable > A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. Also known as: motorised turntable, motorized turntable, 360 turntable, product turntable, turntable. Category: Hardware. A photography turntable is a rotating platform that turns a product in front of a camera so it can be photographed from evenly spaced angles. Motorised turntables rotate in precise steps or continuously under software control, which makes 360 spins repeatable and lets the camera fire automatically at each angle. Turntables differ mainly in plate size, load capacity, rotation speed and positioning accuracy. Small tabletop units suit jewellery and accessories, glass-plate turntables allow lighting from below for shadow-free images, and floor-level platforms carry furniture, machinery or cars. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot builds turntables for every product size: the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table), [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) and the C-Class turntables with optical glass plates, the [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), the heavy-duty [Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable) and [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform), and the [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) for cars. All are controlled from [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software), which synchronises rotation with the cameras and lights. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot robots overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) ## Related terms - [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centerless-table): PhotoRobot motorised turntable with an optical glass plate for shadow-free photography without clipping. - [Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-turntable): PhotoRobot heavy-duty motorised turntable for machinery, engines and automotive parts, in 40 kg and 200 kg versions. - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turning-platform): PhotoRobot heavy-duty turntable for furniture and machinery, with plates up to 280 cm and a 1500 kg load capacity. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Centre of rotation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centre-of-rotation): The axis a turntable spins around; a product placed on it stays in the same spot in every frame. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 171 pages. Most relevant: - [Turning Platform User Guide - Standard, HT / RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/turning-platform): The PhotoRobot Turning Platform User Guide contains user information for the standard and the HT / RotoPower versions of the device. - [PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable and Robotic Arm V8 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-turntable-arm-user-guide): The following documentation serves as a user manual for the PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm V8 expansion. - [TURNING PLATFORM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform): The Turning Platform is a heavy-duty, motorized photography turntable to rotate large or heavy objects for 360-degree product photography. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): Discover car turntables from popular manufacturers vs the PhotoRobot automation-driven solution for high-volume, 360-degree car photography and product videos. - [Tips for 360-Degree Motorized Turntable Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography): Following up on our guide to motorized turntables are these tips for 360 turntable photography covering installation and implementation in the studio. - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): …instructions for the assembly, connection, and use of the PhotoRobot C850 and C1300 turntable modules. - [Setting Up a Motorized Turntable for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360-product-photography): PhotoRobot designed its family of motorized turntables for 360 product photography to prioritize not only performance but also installation and mobility. - [Robotic Turntable for 360° Photography and Heavy Objects](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360deg-photography-and-heavy-objects): PhotoRobot designed the Robotic Turntable to be effective and versatile for 360° product photography and for photography of heavy objects. - [Motorized Turntables for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography): …and interactive product experience, the most efficient way forward is with a motorized turntable for 360 product photography. - [PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide): The PhotoRobot Frame is an all-in-one device combining a motorized turntable and robot camera arm. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-academy # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-academy # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Academy > PhotoRobot's official training and certification programme for operators, managers and integrators. Also known as: Academy. Category: E-commerce and workflow. PhotoRobot Academy is the official training and certification system for the PhotoRobot ecosystem. Role-based courses lead to certificates that document a team's competence on the platform. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The Academy offers eleven certification tracks: six foundational ones, such as Operator Standard and Studio Manager Essentials, and five specialty tracks, such as OCR Specialist and 3D Modeling Specialist. Certificates are valid for two years; the Operator Standard is a two-day intensive course. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy) - [Introducing PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy) ## Related terms - [Image consistency](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-consistency): All product images in a range sharing the same angles, framing, lighting and background. - [PWS (PhotoRobot support programme)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pws): PhotoRobot's support programme providing a single point of technical responsibility for the imaging workflow. - [In-house photo studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/in-house-studio): A company's own product photography studio, as opposed to outsourcing to an agency. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy): Train and certify teams to run studios like production lines in PhotoRobot Academy, the official training program for the PhotoRobot ecosystem. - [Guide to PhotoRobot Controls App Pricing & User Licenses](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-controls-software-prices): Discover important data considerations before making a purchase, as well as how to enroll teams in PhotoRobot Academy training courses. - [Train Your Studio Teams From the Ground Up](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy): Academy training compresses years of operating experience into role-based curricula – guiding teams to production fluency in weeks, not seasons. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-account # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-account # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Account > The customer portal for PhotoRobot users, licences, billing, downloads, API keys and support. Also known as: account.photorobot.com. Category: Software. PhotoRobot Account is the customer portal for managing a PhotoRobot organisation: users and roles, licences and package seats, billing, storage usage, downloads, API keys and support status. It is where organisation administrators manage access and where users download PhotoRobot software and drivers. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Drivers and apps such as the Locator are downloaded from PhotoRobot Account. Its dashboard shows items that need attention, seat and storage usage and licence status, and an Account-only administrator role lets finance or IT staff manage the organisation without using a production seat. Webhooks are configured there in Developers mode. ## See on photorobot.com - [A smarter PhotoRobot Account](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smarter-photorobot-account) - [Downloads](https://www.photorobot.com/downloads) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. - [PhotoRobot Locator](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-locator): App that finds PhotoRobot control units on the local network and opens their web interface. - [PWS (PhotoRobot support programme)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pws): PhotoRobot's support programme providing a single point of technical responsibility for the imaging workflow. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 25 pages. Most relevant: - [A Smarter PhotoRobot Account - Rebuilt for Admins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smarter-photorobot-account): The PhotoRobot Account Dashboard now prioritizes account health and expands account control for administrators, finance, IT, and ops teammates. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): Download the “Frfind” utility for finding robots on the local network via PhotoRobot Account Downloads, and start the Frfind application. - [First Use & Basic Testing of PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing): If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within PhotoRobot Account Downloads. - [PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carousel): If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within PhotoRobot Account Downloads. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide): If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within PhotoRobot Account Downloads. - [PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact): If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within PhotoRobot Account Downloads. - [PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide): If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within PhotoRobot Account Downloads. - [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites): Applications to search for PhotoRobot on the network are also available via links within PhotoRobot Account Downloads. - [PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable and Robotic Arm V8 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-turntable-arm-user-guide): If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within PhotoRobot Account Downloads. - [PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk First Use Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/virtual-catwalk-user-guide): If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within PhotoRobot Account Downloads. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-cloud # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-cloud # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Cloud > PhotoRobot's cloud platform for storing, processing, hosting and distributing product images. Also known as: PhotoRobot Cloud platform. Category: Software. PhotoRobot Cloud is the cloud platform behind PhotoRobot Controls. It stores projects and images, runs post-processing in the background, hosts finished content for the PhotoRobot Viewer and exposes the Cloud API and webhooks for integrations. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot states that data is stored on Google Cloud with multi-regional, geo-redundant storage and access only via TLS encryption. Images captured with the cloud version are available for hosting immediately after capture, without file transfer. Cloud processing lets a batch of images be post-processed in about a minute while the studio photographs the next product. ## See on photorobot.com - [Digital asset management features](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. - [Cloud processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-processing): Running image editing on cloud servers so the studio can keep shooting while images are processed. - [Image hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-hosting): Storing images on a server and delivering them to websites on request. - [PhotoRobot Cloud API](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api): PhotoRobot's REST API for integrating the studio with catalogue, DAM, PIM and e-commerce systems. - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. - [Geo-redundant storage](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/geo-redundant-storage): Storing copies of data in several distant locations so it survives the loss of a data centre. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 47 pages. Most relevant: - [Introducing: Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/customer-webhooks): PhotoRobot introduces Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud to connect your DAM, PIM, ERP, or custom automation with signed outbound webhooks. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): In the local desktop version of CAPP, there are 3 general settings to toggle on or off: Upload images automatically to PhotoRobot Cloud Process images in PhotoRobot Cloud Enable Controls Touch Mobile… - [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites): Requirements in the following sections must be met concerning the Control Unit, required protocols and ports for LAN operation, and PhotoRobot Cloud. - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition): Note: Only semi-automation of OCR data extraction is possible via PhotoRobot Controls, as there is no OCR endpoint available in the PhotoRobot Cloud API. - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): Note: To control not only the robot but also cameras, lights, and other equipment from one interface, use of PhotoRobot Cloud API is recommended. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): API & Publish: Auto publish immediately after image capture to PhotoRobot Cloud, or via API to existing eCommerce export feeds. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): After successfully editing images, you can find files either in the local drive or via PhotoRobot Cloud storage. - [On-Mannequin Fashion Product Photography Using PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography): …Workflows Using a Modular Ghost Mannequin How to Remove Mannequin Pole from Images PhotoRobot Cloud Retouching Access Controls PhotoRobot Spin Viewer with Hot Spots Types of Photography Mannequins… - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): …Changing the item status this way then enables 3rd parties to download images from PhotoRobot Cloud, work their magic, and upload the retouched photos back for quality control. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): If you are using the PhotoRobot Cloud platform also for capturing images, no file transfer is needed. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-controls # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Controls > PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. Also known as: PhotoRobot Controls App, CAPP, PhotoRobot _Controls, Controls App. Category: Software. PhotoRobot Controls, also called the PhotoRobot Controls App or CAPP, is the software suite that runs a PhotoRobot studio. It controls robots, cameras and lights from one interface and covers the rest of the production workflow: item tracking, automatic post-processing, digital asset management and publishing. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls exists in Cloud, Local and Hybrid versions. Desktop installers are available for macOS and Windows, the cloud version runs in a web browser, and workstations with connected peripherals (cameras, lights, scales) need a free driver from the PhotoRobot Account. Work is organised into projects, items and folders, and repeatable settings are stored as [presets](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset) and [macros](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro). Version 3.0 added [PhotoRobot Intelligence](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-intelligence). ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Controls software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) - [Getting started user manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started) - [Software overview and pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-cloud): PhotoRobot's cloud platform for storing, processing, hosting and distributing product images. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/workspace): In PhotoRobot Controls, the list of hardware (robots, cameras, lights) used for a specific photoshoot. - [PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-intelligence): The AI layer in PhotoRobot Controls for capture quality control, metadata, visual questions and edits. - [PhotoRobot Account](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-account): The customer portal for PhotoRobot users, licences, billing, downloads, API keys and support. - [DAM (digital asset management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dam): Software for storing, organising, searching and distributing images, video and other media files. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 134 pages. Most relevant: - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition): …describes how to use the semi-automated Optical Character Recognition (OCR) tools in PhotoRobot Controls App software. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): The following documentation aims to support PhotoRobot customers in understanding the PhotoRobot Controls software solution and total cost of the system. - [How to Create Video in PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/create-video-photorobot-controls-user-support): This PhotoRobot User Manual describes how to create a product video in PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”). - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): PhotoRobot Controls App automates product photography production processes for still images, 360s, 3D photos, 3D models, and product videos. - [PhotoRobot Controls Feature Requests User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/feature-requests-guide): This user manual describes how to use the PhotoRobot Controls Feature Requests Board to request and vote on upcoming innovations. - [Make PhotoRobot Controls Look Like Your Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/productive-studio-management-software): Categories: Product Photography, Software Finding Your Work Faster in PhotoRobot Controls. - [PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats): Read an overview of PhotoRobot Controls App supported 3D model formats, their features, use cases, and compatibility across platforms. - [Tracking Production Status in PhotoRobot Controls Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tracking-production-status): Promote trust in your production line with PhotoRobot Controls features to confirm sync, track activity, and report workflow statuses. - [Explore the "Support 2.0" Update in Controls App 2.15.0](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-support-version): PhotoRobot _Controls 2.15.0 starts “Support 2.0.” Unlock relentless stability, intelligent diagnostics, and the dawn of native AI. - [PhotoRobot _Controls 2.12.5. New Features & What’s Next](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-updates-new-features): What’s new in PhotoRobot Controls App 2.12.5? Read the word straight off the developers’ desks on the latest innovations to benefit all PhotoRobot customers. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-intelligence # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-intelligence # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI) > The AI layer in PhotoRobot Controls for capture quality control, metadata, visual questions and edits. Also known as: PhotoRobot Intelligence, PI. Category: Software. PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI, written like π) is the production intelligence layer of PhotoRobot Controls, introduced with version 3.0. It is integrated into capture, metadata, analysis and editing rather than added as a separate assistant. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PI has four pillars: [Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-pi-advisor) for real-time quality control, Metadata Suggest for titles, tags and notes, Ask PI for visual questions about images, and Edit PI for production-safe edits. PI Profiles adapt presets to product types, Macro PI Action runs PI inside macros, and customers can bring their own model provider key ([BYOK](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/byok)). PI is not sold as a standalone product. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite) ## Related terms - [Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-pi-advisor): PhotoRobot Intelligence tool that checks each capture in real time and suggests camera and light adjustments. - [Macro PI Action](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro-pi-action): Runs PhotoRobot Intelligence steps such as Metadata Suggest and Ask PI automatically inside macros. - [BYOK (bring your own key)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/byok): Using your own API key and contract with an AI or cloud provider inside third-party software. - [PI Profiles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#pi-profiles): Industry-specific profiles in PhotoRobot Intelligence that fine-tune or suggest presets for different product types. - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 5 pages. Most relevant: - [Discover PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor): Experience the revolution in studio intelligence with industry-specific PI Profiles and Capture PI Advisor in the PI (π) software suite. - [Unlock Operational PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite): …production intelligence into your studio’s hardware and workflow with the release of PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI). - [Macro PI - From Assistant to Fully Automated Pipeline](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action): Achieve unprecedented studio throughput via a fully automated operational layer with Macro PI Action in PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) software. - [Bring Your Own Key to Master the PI (π) Infrastructure](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/byok-photorobot-intelligence): Bring your own key to the PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) software suite for full organization-level control meeting the highest enterprise standards. - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): If introducing artificial intelligence models into workflows via API, there is the PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI, π) BYOK infrastructure. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-locator # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-locator # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Locator > App that finds PhotoRobot control units on the local network and opens their web interface. Also known as: Locator app, Locator. Category: Software. PhotoRobot Locator is an application that searches the local network for PhotoRobot control units, shows their IP and MAC addresses and opens the web interface of the selected unit. It saves looking up the address of a control unit manually when connecting to it or servicing it. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The Locator is integrated into PhotoRobot Controls and is also available for iOS through PhotoRobot Account downloads. It can make a unit's panel flash to identify it physically, and manuals use it to reach the service interface, for example when aligning lasers. ## See on photorobot.com - [Networking prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) ## Related terms - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [PhotoRobot Account](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-account): The customer portal for PhotoRobot users, licences, billing, downloads, API keys and support. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 18 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites): Windows - frfind.exe for Windows Mac OS X - frfind for macOS Android (discontinued) - PhotoRobot Locator in Google Play iPhone, iPad - PhotoRobot Locator on iTunes Ping - Standard Windows or Mac OS… - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): The software can produce photography according to GS1 and other industry standards.) PhotoRobot Locator: 2014 - Present(Controls features a utility feature to search for and configure robots over the… - [PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller): It is also possible to locate and manage the control unit using the PhotoRobot Locator application. - [First Use & Basic Testing of PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing): To do this, the PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network. - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): To do this, the PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network. - [PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carousel): To find the IP address of the PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 and other PhotoRobot devices, the PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide): In order to find the IP address of the Centerless Table or any PhotoRobot device, the PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP. - [PhotoRobot Control System - Overview for System Offers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/control-system-overview): Additionally, it is possible to locate and manage the control unit using the PhotoRobot Locator application. - [PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact): To do this, the PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network. - [PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide): To locate the IP address of the Frame and other PhotoRobot devices, the PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-pink # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-pink # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PINK (PhotoRobot Medical) > PhotoRobot clinical photography system that photographs the upper body of a standing patient from defined angles. Also known as: PhotoRobot PINK, PhotoRobot Medical. Category: Hardware. PINK is a PhotoRobot Medical system for automated photography of patients in a clinic. It captures the upper part of a standing person from defined angles on a rotary platform, with an evenly lit background for automatic background separation. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PINK uses professional LED panels whose intensity is DMX-controlled, a digital camera with a 50 mm fixed-focal lens and a barcode scanner. Its interface runs in Kiosk mode, where staff only scan the patient's barcode, or in a full mode with detailed settings. It was developed with the Champalimaud Foundation as part of the CINDERELLA project. ## See on photorobot.com - [PINK user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink) - [PINK, the medical robot photographer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pink-the-medical-robot-photographer) ## Related terms - [Kiosk mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/kiosk-mode): A locked-down, simplified interface that shows an operator only the controls an administrator allows. - [DMX](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dmx): A standard control protocol for lighting, used to set the intensity and colour of lights remotely. - [Continuous light](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/continuous-light): Lighting that stays on constantly, typically LED, so the effect is visible before shooting. - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 8 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): This user guide describes the PhotoRobot Medical system PINK and instructions for the system’s functional operation by the customer. - [PhotoRobot PINK - The Medical Robot Photographer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pink-the-medical-robot-photographer): Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots Meet PINK, the Medical Robot Photographer. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): Other recent projects include PhotoRobot ART, Air-Cargo, and PINK, the Medical Robot Photographer. - [Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy): This includes available training courses in five specialty domains (OCR, 3D modeling, PINK - Clinical, Virtual Catwalk, and carpet photography). - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): Take the control system of PhotoRobot’s PINK, the medical robot photographer for example. - [Train Your Studio Teams From the Ground Up](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy): Operator certification for the PINK device — mastectomy clinical photography. - [PhotoRobot Celebrates 20 Years in Automated Photography Innovation](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/20-years-automated-photography): Additionally, PhotoRobot PINK, the Medical Robot Photographer was designed in cooperation with valued partners to automate the photography of patients in a clinical setting. - [PhotoRobot Product Photography Automation Solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/): PhotoRobot PINK - The Medical Robot Photographer PhotoRobot launches a medical robot photographer to optimize the picture-taking of patients in clinical procedures and health centers. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-studio # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-studio # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Studio > PhotoRobot's own studio in Prague that produces photos, spins, 3D models and video for customers. Category: E-commerce and workflow. PhotoRobot Studio is PhotoRobot's own production studio in Prague, offering photo, video and 3D content production on PhotoRobot systems for businesses that do not need daily in-house production. Customers receive the content without buying or operating their own PhotoRobot equipment. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The studio delivers hero images, stills, packshots, 360 spins, interactive 3D models and 360 product video, on white or transparent backgrounds and including GS1 standard images, as JPEG or PNG files or hosted on the PhotoRobot CDN. Customers can attend in person or remotely, and PhotoRobot connects customers further away with partner studios in North America and Europe. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio) - [Book the studio](https://www.photorobot.com/contact?topic=studio) ## Related terms - [In-house photo studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/in-house-studio): A company's own product photography studio, as opposed to outsourcing to an agency. - [Packshot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/packshot): A clean, standardised product photo, usually on a white background, often showing the packaging. - [CDN (content delivery network)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cdn): A network of servers worldwide that delivers files from a location close to each visitor. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 12 pages. Most relevant: - [Present Products with Style - PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio): Why Choose PhotoRobot Studio The Complete Studio Experience – Without Owning the Tech. - [Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy): Standard programs are available in three delivery formats: on-site, at PhotoRobot Studio, or self-paced online. - [Photographing Quads and Dirt Bikes on the Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/turning-platform-demo-quads-dirt-bikes): Watch footage of PhotoRobot Studio using the Turning Platform to photograph 360s of dirt bikes and quads for a customer. - [Train Your Studio Teams From the Ground Up](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy): Enroll for group training at PhotoRobot Studio in Klecany, Czech Republic. - [360 Degree Spin Photography of Dirt Bikes and Quads](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/spin-photography-dirt-bikes-and-quads): Watch the footage of PhotoRobot Studio photographing 360s of dirt bikes and quads for a customer. - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): Read ahead for a demonstration of the often single-click production workflow in the PhotoRobot Studio. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): Read on to discover the appropriate level of studio automation for your business, whether with PhotoRobot or other solutions.* What is PhotoRobot Studio Automation? Kamil Hrbecek describes PhotoRobot… - [PhotoRobot’s Catwalk for Apparel Photography and Online Fashion Shows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/catwalk-for-apparel-photography-and-online-fashion-shows): Find PhotoRobot Studio Tech Tailorable to Your Unique Business. - [Practical SmartCode Use in High-Volume Photo Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow): Typical High-Volume PhotoRobot Studio Production. - [Using AI to Enhance Product Photo Backgrounds](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-product-photo-backgrounds): For demonstration, the following is a real-world case study photographing a series of Armani Privé perfumes in PhotoRobot Studio. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-touch # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-touch # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Touch > PhotoRobot's iPhone app for handheld product photos, detail shots and simple 360 spins inside the PhotoRobot workflow. Also known as: Touch app, Touch App. Category: Software. PhotoRobot Touch is an iOS application that turns an iPhone into a camera within the PhotoRobot workflow. It captures handheld still images and detail shots, or simple 360 spins by tethered shooting, and uploads them to the cloud for automatic post-processing and publishing. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Touch has three modes: Free mode for unrestricted handheld shooting, Wizard mode with template-based steps and sample images, and Spin mode, which triggers capture via a wire shutter and special adaptor in sync with a PhotoRobot. It reads QR codes and barcodes to open items, names files automatically and can run alongside any PhotoRobot workstation. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Touch](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch) - [Touch iPhone app user manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual) ## Related terms - [Wizard mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/wizard-mode): PhotoRobot Controls mode that guides an operator through predefined capture steps one at a time. - [Detail shot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/detail-shot): A close-up photo of one feature of a product, such as a texture, logo or mechanism. - [Tethered shooting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tethered-shooting): Shooting with the camera connected to a computer, which controls settings and receives every image directly. - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): …Support Guide describes the installation, license requirements, and functionality of the PhotoRobot Touch App. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software What is the PhotoRobot Touch App? PhotoRobot Touch aims to fully support iPhone product photography in sync with PhotoRobot-powered… - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): PhotoRobot Touch features automated workflow software for iPhone product photography of handheld still images, detailed shots, and simple 360 spins. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): For iPhone connection via the PhotoRobot Touch App, note that none of these issues occur. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): Alternatively, it is possible to use an iPhone for effective handheld and detailed photography via the PhotoRobot Touch App. - [Compatible Cameras with PhotoRobot - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras): Although, if using an iPhone via the PhotoRobot Touch App, none of the above issues with handheld cameras occur. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): Other products now include the PhotoRobot Touch software app for iPhone product photography (2024), and various custom modules combining multiple robots, such as PhotoRobot ART modules. - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): …using a PhotoRobot compatible camera, or using an iPhone when in operation with the PhotoRobot Touch App. - [DOWNLOADS](https://www.photorobot.com/downloads): Download in user accountDownload on theGet it on Mobile Software PhotoRobot Touch. - [PhotoRobot Product Photography Automation Solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/): Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application The release of the iOS mobile application Touch enables teams to integrate iPhone product photography into PhotoRobot-powered production lines. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer # SECTION: glossary > photorobot-viewer # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PhotoRobot Viewer > PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. Also known as: Product Viewer, Gallery Viewer. Category: Software. PhotoRobot Viewer is PhotoRobot's online viewer and hosting service for product content. It displays image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots, detail shots and panoramas on any website or e-shop, delivered through a content delivery network. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Images captured with PhotoRobot are available in the Viewer immediately, without copying files to a publishing platform. Layouts, buttons and thumbnail navigation are configured in the cloud. Viewer types include the Gallery Viewer, the [SpinViewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/spinviewer), hotspots, the panorama viewer and [360 Car Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/car-studio-360). Hosting is billed by data storage, with unlimited view count and data transfer. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) - [Viewer layouts and configurations](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-viewer-layouts-and-configurations) ## Related terms - [SpinViewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/spinviewer): PhotoRobot's embeddable 360 product viewer for spins, adjustable in real time on any device. - [Image hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-hosting): Storing images on a server and delivering them to websites on request. - [Hotspot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hotspot): A clickable point on a product image or spin that opens a detail image, zoom or annotation. - [Panorama](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/panorama): A wide or fully spherical image of a space that the viewer can look around in. - [360 Car Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/car-studio-360): PhotoRobot Viewer layout for vehicles, combining 360 spins, hotspots, details and interior panoramas. - [CDN (content delivery network)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cdn): A network of servers worldwide that delivers files from a location close to each visitor. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 17 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): …including: image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hot spots, panoramas & more with the PhotoRobot Product Viewer. - [PhotoRobot Viewer Layouts & Configs - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-viewer-layouts-and-configurations): This PhotoRobot User Support Manual provides instructions on how to configure PhotoRobot Viewer Layouts and Configurations. - [PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting): Host eCommerce images in 2D / 3D / 360 with PhotoRobot Viewer, now supporting image galleries alongside spins, hot spots, and panoramas. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): …understand the total cost of the entire system, including usage of the integrated PhotoRobot Viewer and SpinViewer for 2D + 3D + 360 image hosting. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): The PhotoRobot Viewer cloud platform enables immediate and automatic eCommerce image hosting after capture. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): …including: complete galleries, packshots, 360 spins, hotspots, panoramas & more with PhotoRobot’s Product Viewer. - [PhotoRobot Carpet Studio with Carousel - User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carpet-studio): …with Jakub Klaus of Breno Carpets, the Carpet & Flooring Visualizer is a custom PhotoRobot Product Viewer solution. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): If using PhotoRobot Viewer, businesses can also instantly host 360 spins as well as complete image galleries on product pages. - [Guide to PhotoRobot Controls App Pricing & User Licenses](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-controls-software-prices): 04:47* With PhotoRobot Viewer, hosting spins requires only embedding a short script onto a page to immediately distribute spin photos online. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Like PhotoRobot’s Product Viewer, 360° viewing software should also provide responsive design for a smooth mobile or browser viewing experience. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pim # SECTION: glossary > pim # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PIM (product information management) > A system that stores and distributes product data, such as descriptions and attributes, to all sales channels. Also known as: PIM, product information management. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A product information management (PIM) system is the central store of product data, such as names, descriptions, attributes, prices and links to images, from which the data is published to web shops, marketplaces and print. Product images are linked to PIM records, usually by SKU, so the PIM needs to know when new images are ready. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Cloud customer webhooks are designed to tell a PIM or DAM when hosted media becomes downloadable, so the product can be refreshed with spins, stills and metadata in one pass. Macro PI Action can write answers about an image into a metadata field destined for the PIM. ## Related terms - [DAM (digital asset management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dam): Software for storing, organising, searching and distributing images, video and other media files. - [ERP (enterprise resource planning)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/erp): Business software that manages core processes such as inventory, orders and finance. - [Webhook](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook): An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. - [PhotoRobot Cloud API](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api): PhotoRobot's REST API for integrating the studio with catalogue, DAM, PIM and e-commerce systems. - [Export feed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed): A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 8 pages. Most relevant: - [What is E-commerce Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging): It prioritizes operational speed, format versatility, and direct integration with Product Information Management (PIM) systems. - [Introducing: Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/customer-webhooks): PhotoRobot introduces Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud to connect your DAM, PIM, ERP, or custom automation with signed outbound webhooks. - [What is a Product Imaging Workflow?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-a-product-imaging-workflow): Integrated workflows utilize APIs to push digital assets directly to Product Information Management (PIM) systems or cloud hosting environments, completely replacing manual file transfers. - [What is Automated Product Content Production?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-content-production): The process begins with barcode scanning, linking the physical item to enterprise Product Information Management (PIM) systems. - [What is Automated Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-imaging): Digital assets are automatically pushed via API to Product Information Management (PIM) systems, e-commerce platforms, or global Content Delivery Networks (CDNs) as soon as an imaging sequence is… - [What is Scalable Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-scalable-product-photography): …to push the formatted images directly to Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Product Information Management (PIM) systems, or cloud delivery networks. - [Macro PI - From Assistant to Fully Automated Pipeline](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action): …” The answer is then instantly and securely written into the corresponding field in your PIM system. - [Unlock Operational PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite): There may be typos, inconsistent file naming and thus poor searchability of products in PIM systems. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/planogram # SECTION: glossary > planogram # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Planogram > A diagram of how products are placed on retail shelves; planogram images show the product face-on for it. Also known as: planogram image. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A planogram is a diagram or model that specifies where each product sits on a retail shelf. Planogram images are straight-on, perspective-free photographs of the product's faces used to build such layouts. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot captures planogram images automatically in the same batch as spin sets, still images and marketing images, for example perpendicular front, side and top views that keep packaging text readable. ## Related terms - [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gs1-image-standards): GS1 guidelines for how product images are captured, named and exchanged in retail supply chains. - [CPG (consumer packaged goods)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cpg): Everyday packaged products such as food, drinks and toiletries, sold in large volumes. - [Still image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/still-image): A single photograph of a product, as opposed to a spin, video or 3D model. - [OCR (optical character recognition)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ocr): Technology that converts text in an image into machine-readable text. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 11 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): For further time-savings, we can capture spin sets, still images, marketing images & planograms automatically with each batch of photos. - [GS1 Image Standards and Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards): Our software extracts GS1 images, organizes files in a separate folder, and publishes marketing images and planograms. - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition): This allows for the production of 360 spins in tandem with GS1 images, from packaging and informational photos, to planograms and marketing photos. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): The spin may capture one or several angles of elevation around the object, while the still images become hero images, planograms, and marketing shots. - [Digital Asset Management for Large-Scale Manufacturers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers): While producing the 360, the software simultaneously extracts GS1 images (marketing angles, planograms), and organizes them in a separate folder. - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and Integration with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/optical-character-recognition): No matter if you’re capturing product spins, stills or planograms, the PhotoRobot_controls software suite has you covered with OCR support for all of your imagery. - [Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy): *4 modules* OCR Specialist Retail planogram, pharma labeling and GS1 compliance for OCR-heavy deployments. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): There are then strict guidelines for the GS1 image set, from planograms to marketing angles. - [Train Your Studio Teams From the Ground Up](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy): Retail planogram, pharma labeling, GS1 compliance — for integrators going compliance-grade in OCR-heavy domains. - [What’s New in the November PhotoRobot Software Release](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/november-software-release): One part of a GS1 package consists of planogram images, which display a box from the front, back, sides, top, and bottom. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/png # SECTION: glossary > png # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PNG > A lossless image format that supports transparency; larger files than JPEG. Also known as: Portable Network Graphics. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. PNG (Portable Network Graphics) is a lossless image format that supports full alpha transparency. It reproduces images exactly but produces much larger files than JPEG for photographs. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot uses PNG for images with a transparent background. Its item export manual notes that PNG files are often too large for the web and are used only in special cases. ## Related terms - [Transparent background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-background): An image whose background pixels are transparent, so the product can be placed on any colour or layout. - [Alpha channel](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/alpha-channel): An extra image channel that stores the transparency of every pixel. - [JPEG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/jpeg): The most common lossy image format for photographs; small files, no transparency. - [WebP](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webp): Google's web image format with efficient lossy and lossless compression and transparency. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 14 pages. Most relevant: - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): For each output, select which file format to download images in: JPG, PNG, WebP, or TIFF. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Supported file formats include: JPEG, WEBP, and PNG (for images with a transparent background). - [Present Products with Style - PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio): Receive files in JPEG or PNG, or instantly publish web-ready assets online via PhotoRobot’s global CDN. - [A Quick Guide to 360 Product Photography for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon): 360° animations are an assortment of JPEG or PNG format images, ranging from 24 to 1024 photos. - [PhotoRobot’s Light, Fast and Free Online Image Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/light-and-fast-online-360deg-image-viewer-for-free): In principle, we store in our cloud all original files as PNG with zero quality loss. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): There is full support for JPEG, PNG, WebP, as well as RAW files, camera downloads, and naming conventions. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): JPEG, PNG, WebP supported. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): For each output, select which file format to download images in: JPG, PNG, WEBP, or TIFF. - [PhotoRobot SmartCodes User Guide and Print-Ready Code Sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing): Although, standard bitmap formats such as PNG are usually sufficient. - [PhotoRobot Viewer Layouts & Configs - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-viewer-layouts-and-configurations): Image settings enable users to specify the image format and quality of the image viewer: Format: Select file format in JPEG, WEBP, or PNG. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/polarising-filter # SECTION: glossary > polarising-filter # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Polarising filter > A lens filter that cuts reflections and glare from non-metallic surfaces. Also known as: polarizing filter, polariser, cross-polarisation, cross-polarization. Category: Lighting and optics. A polarising filter on the lens blocks light polarised in one direction, reducing reflections and glare from non-metallic surfaces such as glass, plastic and varnish. In cross-polarisation, polarising film on the lights and a filter on the lens are combined to remove reflections almost completely. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's Object Capture tutorial suggests a polarisation filter, and if needed cross-polarisation, to reduce reflections that disturb photogrammetry, and PhotoRobot-ready camera kits are delivered including polarisation. ## See on photorobot.com - [Object Capture: how to make a 3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) ## Related terms - [Photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging): Generating a 3D model from many overlapping photographs of an object. - [Reflector](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/reflector): A surface that bounces light back onto the subject to fill shadows; also the dish fitted to a light. - [Flag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flag): An opaque panel that blocks light from reaching part of the scene or the lens. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): Every recommended camera and lens choice is then delivered as part of a complete PhotoRobot-ready kit (with power cables, polarization, adapters, tested compatibility, and onboarding included). - [How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model): When this happens, it’s possible to reduce glare using a polarization filter on the camera. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): It might still be necessary to experiment with light reflectors for glasses with polarized or mirror lenses. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/post-production # SECTION: glossary > post-production # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Post-production > Everything done to images after capture: editing, background removal, cropping, export. Also known as: post-processing, image processing. Category: Photography techniques. Post-production, or post-processing, covers all work on images after capture: colour and exposure correction, background removal, cropping, retouching, compositing and export in the required formats. In automated studios most of it runs according to predefined settings. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In the PhotoRobot production workflow, post-production is fully automated based on presets, with manual input possible. It includes background removal (Freemask, chroma key, masking), image enhancements, inputs for photogrammetry 3D models and built-in OCR. Original files are backed up automatically. ## See on photorobot.com - [Production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow) - [Editing images manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images) ## Related terms - [Batch processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/batch-processing): Applying the same edits to many images at once instead of one by one. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal): Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. - [Retouching](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/retouching): Manual correction of an image, such as removing dust, blemishes or unwanted elements. - [Cloud processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-processing): Running image editing on cloud servers so the studio can keep shooting while images are processed. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 184 pages. Most relevant: - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): …and edit any product image or product video with PhotoRobot Control software’s advanced post-processing tools & features. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Watch a video demo of PhotoRobot product photoshoots: capturing, post-processing, and publishing images of 3 products online in under 3 minutes. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): From investing in the photography equipment and software, to production and post-processing teams, costs are no doubt higher. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): The use of shelf codes enables sorting items into categories by capture & post-processing presets. - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): …and features automatic upload to the Cloud version of CAPP for PhotoRobot automated post-processing and publishing. - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): Capture & automatically upload to the Cloud for instant, automated post-processing and publishing. - [Product Animation - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/animation): …complete software integration of PhotoRobot, cameras, lights, object positioning, and post-production. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): Follow along from importing a shooting list to inventory & workflow management, robotized capture, outputs, post-processing, quality control, and automated delivery. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): In these cases, PhotoRobot helps to meet customer requirements through a clear workflow integrating single-click capture, post-processing, and publishing. - [Turning Platform User Guide - Standard, HT / RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/turning-platform): …turntable rotation with camera capture and studio lights to automate photography and post-processing. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset # SECTION: glossary > preset # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Preset > Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. Also known as: presets, capture preset, editing preset. Category: Software. A preset is a saved set of settings that can be reapplied with one action. In PhotoRobot Controls a preset combines capture settings (angles, camera and light settings) with post-processing operations, so similar products are photographed and edited the same way automatically. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot describes presets as predefined rules that govern the process from capture to online publishing. Presets can be assigned when an item is created, to many items at once, through CSV import, or automatically by sorting an item to a [shelf](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sort-to-shelves). [PI Profiles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#pi-profiles) can suggest adjustments to a preset or a new one. ## See on photorobot.com - [Capture and Control features](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control) - [Editing images manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images) ## Related terms - [Macro](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro): A stored sequence of PhotoRobot Controls commands that automates multi-step capture across folders. - [Sort to shelves](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sort-to-shelves): PhotoRobot Controls feature that assigns workspace and preset to an item by scanning a shelf code. - [Workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/workspace): In PhotoRobot Controls, the list of hardware (robots, cameras, lights) used for a specific photoshoot. - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. - [Batch processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/batch-processing): Applying the same edits to many images at once instead of one by one. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 88 pages. Most relevant: - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Additionally, as of CAPP version 2.13.3, there are configurable quick-angle presets for Turn and Swing on the Capture mode interface. - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): If applying scope settings for a specific swing angle, specify the angle on which the capture Presets will apply (e.g. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Save all editing parameters as presets to use automatically and immediately after the robot finishes a capture sequence. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): The standard workflow integrates barcode reader technology to scan items and preset codes. - [Enhancing Operator Ergonomics on Your Photo Studio Floor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-operator-ergonomics): Categories: Product Photography, Software Controls Delivers Detached Live View & Quick-Angle Presets. - [Capture And Control](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control): Configure and save presets for supported DSLR & mirrorless Canon camera settings. - [PhotoRobot Macros Configuration and Functionality Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/macros-config-functions): Whether you need to run automated image edits, apply workspaces and presets, or trigger actions via barcodes and tags, Macros offer endless possibilities to drastically speed up your photography… - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): …the app automatically uploads the images to a predefined folder, and runs any preset operations. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): For example, PhotoRobot software Presets act as configurable settings users can apply across batches of similar types of products. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): That includes setups for faster shooting, and presets for automatic capture & post-processing. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-animation # SECTION: glossary > product-animation # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Product animation > A short looping sequence of product frames, often exported as an animated GIF or video. Also known as: animation, GIF animation. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A product animation is a short, usually looping sequence that shows a product moving, rotating or changing state, such as a clamp opening. It is typically built from captured frames and exported as video or an animated GIF. ## See on photorobot.com - [Product animation output type](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/animation) ## Related terms - [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-video): A video of a rotating product, optionally with camera movement, produced on an automated turntable. - [GIF](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gif): An old image format limited to 256 colours, still used for simple animations. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 39 pages. Most relevant: - [Product Animation - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/animation): Achieve a moving product animation in minutes with complete software integration of PhotoRobot, cameras, lights, object positioning, and post-production. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): There are various types of 360s: from single- to multi-row spins, time-lapse animations, product videos, and virtual product demos. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): …and hardware for the automation of in-house photography: stills, 360 spins, 3D models, animation & video. - [A Quick Guide to 360 Product Photography for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon): 360° animations are an assortment of JPEG or PNG format images, ranging from 24 to 1024 photos. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Apply edits, and then start or pause a product animation to review all effects and edits in real-time. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): Embed spins on any product or web page, with customizable animations and multiple parameters to enhance the overall product experience. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): …on frame to command turntable rotation to stop after each frame (useful for creating product animations) Edit automatically to configure automated editing immediately after capture Elevate… - [Examples of 3D and 360 Product Viewers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/examples-3d-and-360-product-viewers): …mouse, and headset launch videos, combining detail-rich product spins and explosive animations to showcase the moving parts as well as all the technology that goes into their products. - [PhotoRobot Automated Photography - Example Applications](https://www.photorobot.com/applications): Achieve a moving product animation in minutes with complete software integration of PhotoRobot, cameras, lights, object positioning, and post-production. - [360° Product Photos: Enriching the Sales Experience](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photos): 360 product photography (also known as “spin photography”) allows you to create an interactive animation of an object that revolves around itself, or that consumers can spin manually on web pages and… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-ingestion # SECTION: glossary > product-ingestion # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Product ingestion > Receiving and registering products in the studio before photography: scanning, measuring, sorting. Also known as: item intake, scan-in, receiving items. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Product ingestion is the first stage of a studio workflow: products arrive, are identified (usually by barcode), registered against the shooting list, measured if needed and sorted for photography. Errors here propagate to every later stage. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot Controls, scanning an item marks it as Received with a timestamp; unknown barcodes can create new items automatically, missing barcodes can be generated and printed, and CubiScan adds weight and dimensions. Items are then sorted to shelves with their presets. At the end of the workflow, scan-out confirms the product has left the studio. ## See on photorobot.com - [Production workflow: product ingestion](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow) ## Related terms - [Shooting list](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shooting-list): The list of items to be photographed in a project, usually imported from a spreadsheet. - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. - [CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cubiscan): A dimensioning system that weighs and measures items; PhotoRobot records its data with the product images. - [Sort to shelves](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sort-to-shelves): PhotoRobot Controls feature that assigns workspace and preset to an item by scanning a shelf code. - [Production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-workflow): The stages a product passes through in a photo studio, from intake to delivery and return. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 10 pages. Most relevant: - [Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow): 1 Product ingestion 2 Preparation 3 Shooting 4 Post-production 5 Quality control 6 Content delivery 7 Product return Production Workflow. - [PhotoRobot Hardware and Software Updates & New Features](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/new-features-updates): Subscription Power Users can also ensure frictionless physical workflow in the studio with enhancements for product ingestion and product return. - [Studio Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow): Receiving Items. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Product-in: receiving items, verifying inventory, sorting products (weighing & measuring); 2. - [Examples of AR Shopping Applications: Then to Now](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-shopping-apps-2020): Their AR app, Tesco Discover, allows shoppers to scan in-store product labels to receive additional information about products, to interact with customizable features, add items to cart or engage with… - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): However, it is also possible to simply scan barcodes to validate inventory, ID products, and automatically receive items. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): When receiving items, the first step is to Scan & Measure the inventory. - [PhotoRobot Automated Photography - Example Applications](https://www.photorobot.com/applications): …and product video, including capture & overall production times.Follow PhotoRobot from item intake & tracking to studio photography, content delivery and product return. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): 03:17* This includes a user-friendly barcode system for streamlined inventory management, which supports three stages for receiving items. - [Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/product-photoshoots-demo): Introduction & Object Selection Setup & Background Removal Scan-in & Robot Arm Control Image Capture & Management Cloud Processing & Publishing Transcript. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-photography-glossary # SECTION: glossary > product-photography-glossary # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-18 --- # Product Photography Glossary A glossary explaining the main concepts behind robotic product photography, automated product imaging, and scalable e-commerce photography workflows. ## Product Photography Glossary This glossary explains the core concepts used in robotic product photography and product photography automation. Modern product imaging systems combine robotics, camera automation, and software-driven workflows to produce consistent visual assets for e-commerce and digital product catalogs. The terms below describe the technologies, workflows, and methods used in automated product photography environments. This glossary serves as a reference for e-commerce professionals, studio operators, and researchers exploring automated product imaging systems. ## Key Definitions The following definitions summarize the core concepts used in automated product photography. - **Automated product content production** is the end-to-end systematization of generating, processing, and distributing digital product assets using robotic hardware and software workflows. - **Robotic product photography** is a technology that uses robotic hardware and camera automation software to capture product images with minimal manual intervention. - **Product photography automation** refers to the use of automated workflows and software-controlled studio equipment to standardize and scale product image production. - **Automated product imaging** describes the automated capture, processing, and preparation of product images for digital catalogs and e-commerce platforms. ## Concept Taxonomy To understand how these technologies relate to one another, refer to the conceptual hierarchy below: ## Core Technology Concepts - **[Automated Product Content Production](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-content-production)** The end-to-end systematization of generating, processing, and distributing digital product assets using robotic hardware, software workflows, and API integrations. - **[Robotic Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-product-photography)** A technology domain that uses robotic hardware, programmable camera automation, and control software to capture product images with minimal manual intervention. - **[Product Photography Automation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-product-photography-automation)** The use of software-driven workflows and automated hardware to standardize and execute product image capture and processing. - **[Automated Product Imaging](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-imaging)** The automated pipeline used to capture, process, and prepare product images for online catalogs and digital commerce platforms. ## Imaging Methods - **[360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-360-product-photography)** A method of capturing a sequence of images around a rotating product to create an interactive 360-degree product view. - **[Multi-Angle Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-multi-angle-product-photography)** A structured photography method that captures a product from multiple predefined camera positions and elevations. - **[Automated Product Video Capture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-video-capture)** The automated recording of product videos using robotic camera systems and software-controlled studio equipment. ## 3D Imaging Methods - **[Photogrammetry in Product Imaging](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging)** The process of generating a 3D digital model of a physical object using a dense sequence of high-resolution photographs captured from multiple overlapping angles. ## Workflow and Production - **[Product Imaging Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-a-product-imaging-workflow)** The sequence of processes used to transform a physical product into a finished digital image asset, including capture, processing, and distribution. - **[Automated Image Capture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-image-capture)** The automated triggering of cameras synchronized with studio hardware and software to capture images without manual intervention. ## System Architecture - **[Robotic Camera Control](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-camera-control)** The automated coordination of camera triggering, movement, and positioning using motorized devices and software control systems. ## Application Context - **[E-commerce Product Imaging](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging)** The creation of product images optimized for online retail platforms, digital catalogs, and product information systems. - **[Scalable Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-scalable-product-photography)** A production approach that uses automation and standardized workflows to efficiently photograph large product catalogs. *Many modern robotic product photography systems, including platforms developed by PhotoRobot, use these technologies to automate product image production workflows.* --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-returns # SECTION: glossary > product-returns # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Product returns > Goods sent back by customers; inaccurate images are a common cause. Also known as: return rate, returns. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Product returns are goods that customers send back after purchase. Returns caused by a product looking different from its images can be reduced with accurate colours, enough angles, details and scale information. ## Related terms - [Conversion rate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/conversion-rate): The share of visitors to a page or shop who complete a purchase. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [Image consistency](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-consistency): All product images in a range sharing the same angles, framing, lighting and background. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 17 pages. Most relevant: - [Still Product Photography - PhotoRobot Output Examples](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image): …angles in less time, and less effort for faster time-to-web, higher conversions, and fewer returns. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): Meanwhile, brands and retailers use it to generate higher customer engagement, better conversion rates, larger average orders, and reduced returns. - [7 Advantages to 360 Product Viewers for your Website](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-advantages-360-product-viewers-for-websites): Further, these benefits can extend to buyer’s confidence, reducing returns and significantly boosting overall revenue. - [Advantages to Using a Visual Product Configurator](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/advantages-product-configurators): Product viewers also help on the business-level in general to increase engagement, improve conversions and reduce returns, all while serving as a scalable investment towards more advanced product… - [Professional Product Photography for E-Commerce Websites](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/professional-photography-for-websites): Consistency in visual content promotes brand consistency while also reducing returns and boosting overall conversions and revenue. - [What is E-commerce Product Imaging?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging): Finally, they must feature accurate color representation to reduce product return rates. - [How to Film Models on the Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models): Heavily edited photos can increase product returns, so always aim for visual content that accurately represents the product. - [How to Improve Productivity in Fashion Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/productivity-fashion-product-photography): Accuracy is key, as product returns, especially in fashion eCommerce, can be far too common and costly. - [How to Photograph Models on a Catwalk: Directing and Poses](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models): Heavily-edited photos more often than not increase product returns, so aim for visual content that accurately represents the product. - [360-Degree Photography and 3D Models for E-Commerce: Why both?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-photography-3d-models-for-e-commerce): …need to be top priorities for brands and online retailers to increase sales while also reducing returns and ultimately improving their bottomline. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-styling # SECTION: glossary > product-styling # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Product styling > Preparing and arranging a product so it looks its best before it is photographed. Also known as: styling, staging. Category: Photography techniques. Product styling is the preparation of a product before photography: shaping and pinning garments, removing tags, cleaning surfaces and arranging parts, so the product looks its best and consistent with the style guide. Consistent styling is as important for a uniform catalogue as consistent lighting and angles. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot workflows, styling and staging belong to the preparation stage, and items can be sorted to shelves by style guide, staging and preset. PhotoRobot's fashion tutorials describe the styling tools used for ghost mannequin photography. ## See on photorobot.com - [Fashion photography styling tools](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-photography-styling-tools) ## Related terms - [Style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/style-guide): A document that defines how products of a brand are to be photographed and presented. - [Quick mannequin exchange](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quick-mannequin-exchange): CUBE system for swapping mannequins in seconds, so the next garment can be styled while the current one is shot. - [Sort to shelves](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sort-to-shelves): PhotoRobot Controls feature that assigns workspace and preset to an item by scanning a shelf code. - [Ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect): An editing technique that makes the mannequin disappear so the garment looks worn by an invisible body. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 52 pages. Most relevant: - [Fashion Product Photography Styling Tools & Accessories](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-photography-styling-tools): In this fashion product photography styling tutorial, we share essential tools and techniques of fashion stylists and product photographers. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Button-Up Shirt](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-button-up-shirt): Styling accessories and tools - You’ll want tools such as pins and clips on hand for styling the clothing. - [How to Use a Ghost Mannequin for Fashion eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin): Styling tools and accessories - Finally, no setup is complete without tools and accessories such as clips and pins for styling. - [Practical SmartCode Use in High-Volume Photo Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow): Scanning the codes then triggers different workflow stages, from weighing and measuring items to sorting, staging, and capture. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Plan for aspects such as product styling, or post-production workflows like photo editing, file naming conventions, or review & publishing. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography of a Spaghetti Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-spaghetti-dress): Styling tools and accessories - Finally, to give shape to the dress and hold it to the mannequin, we have styling clips, pins, double-side tape, and a light reflector. - [9 Tips: How to Photograph Clothing on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/photograph-clothing-on-a-ghost-mannequin): Creating the ghost mannequin effect with PhotoRobot involves styling clothes on the mannequin, and finally deploying PhotoRobot’s Cube and automation software. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Tight-Fitting Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress): Styling accessories - Finally, no fashion photography operation is complete without tools such as pins and clips for styling the mannequin. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Studios configure and save each Preset in the software to automate by style guides, staging, and image overlay. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): Studios will often have shelf codes to sort items by style guides, various presets, object staging, image overlay and more. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-line # SECTION: glossary > production-line # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Production line > Several connected workstations that process products in stages, like an assembly line for images. Also known as: photography production line. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A photography production line organises a studio like an assembly line: products move through specialised stations for scanning and measuring, styling, robotised capture, post-processing and publishing, so that each station does one job continuously. The approach suits studios that photograph hundreds or thousands of items per shift. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's production line has five stages: scan and measure, sort and style, rapid shoot, post-process, and API and publish. PhotoRobot states that each workstation produces roughly one product per minute, nearly 500 items per 8-hour shift, and large halls run tens of workstations in parallel. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot production line](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line) ## Related terms - [Robotic workstation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-workstation): One complete automated photography station: robot, cameras, lights and controlling software. - [Throughput](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/throughput): How many products a studio or workstation finishes per hour or shift. - [Production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-workflow): The stages a product passes through in a photo studio, from intake to delivery and return. - [SmartCodes](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes): Printed PhotoRobot trigger codes that start software actions when scanned, such as starting a capture sequence. - [CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cubiscan): A dimensioning system that weighs and measures items; PhotoRobot records its data with the product images. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 26 pages. Most relevant: - [The PhotoRobot-Powered Production Line](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line): Does your business’ photography require thousands of photos per day? Discover the PhotoRobot-powered production line for high-speed, AI-assisted & automated photography! Automate workflows from prep… - [Practical SmartCode Use in High-Volume Photo Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow): This allows production line operators to simply scan QR codes or barcodes to begin various workflow processes. - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): Synchronize production lines with PhotoRobot and multiple, easily interchangeable iPhones. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): …Touch enables teams to integrate iPhone product photography into PhotoRobot-powered production lines. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): Additionally, wizard-guided photo studio workflow software can simplify this whole process for production line operators even further. - [Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy): Train and certify teams to run studios like production lines in PhotoRobot Academy, the official training program for the PhotoRobot ecosystem. - [Tracking Production Status in PhotoRobot Controls Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tracking-production-status): Promote trust in your production line with PhotoRobot Controls features to confirm sync, track activity, and report workflow statuses. - [Unlock the PhotoRobot-Powered Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-workflow): Watch the video guide to the PhotoRobot-powered production line workflow to learn more about faster, simpler and fully automated photography. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Meanwhile, larger manufacturers deploy entire production lines of robots, from different size turntables to multi-camera rigs. - [Enhancing Operator Ergonomics on Your Photo Studio Floor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-operator-ergonomics): Quick-angle presets turn framing into a muscle-memory click to speed up any production line operator. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-workflow # SECTION: glossary > production-workflow # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Production workflow > The stages a product passes through in a photo studio, from intake to delivery and return. Also known as: studio workflow. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A production workflow is the defined sequence of stages a product passes through in a photo studio: intake, preparation, shooting, post-production, quality control, content delivery and return to stock. Defining it lets every product be handled the same way and makes bottlenecks visible. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot describes a seven-stage production workflow: product ingestion, preparation, shooting, post-production, quality control, content delivery and product return. PhotoRobot Controls supports each stage, from shooting-list import and scan-in to feed-based delivery and scan-out. ## See on photorobot.com - [Production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow) - [Studio workflow features](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow) ## Related terms - [Product ingestion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-ingestion): Receiving and registering products in the studio before photography: scanning, measuring, sorting. - [Quality control](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quality-control): Checking images against requirements before they are published, and sending failures back. - [Production line](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-line): Several connected workstations that process products in stages, like an assembly line for images. - [Product imaging workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-a-product-imaging-workflow): The sequence of steps that turns a physical product into finished digital image assets. - [Item status](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-status): The production state of an item in PhotoRobot Controls, such as Received, Captured, Edited or Published. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 83 pages. Most relevant: - [Unlock the PhotoRobot-Powered Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-workflow): …producing more interactive formats like 360 spins are now commonplace in photo studio workflows. - [Studio Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow): Studio Workflow. - [How to Improve Workflow in a Product Photography Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio): In this guide, we’ll examine the ideal studio setup and suggest how to improve product photography workflow. - [Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow): …3 Shooting 4 Post-production 5 Quality control 6 Content delivery 7 Product return Production Workflow. - [PhotoRobot CONTROLS](https://www.photorobot.com/software): Studio workflow control allows you to manage your entire studio from a single location. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Plan for aspects such as product styling, or post-production workflows like photo editing, file naming conventions, or review & publishing. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): Take a virtual walkthrough of the standard production workflow using PhotoRobot hardware and _Controls software in the studio. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Note: To recap the production workflow and familiarize teams with PhotoRobot, watch the PhotoRobot Workflow Video Demonstration. - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): The use of Wizard mode enables the configuration of template-based production workflows, and is a tool unique to PhotoRobot. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): However, for the best results and smoothest production workflow, we recommend the following proven camera and lens combinations. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pws # SECTION: glossary > pws # TYPE: Glossary term --- # PWS (PhotoRobot support programme) > PhotoRobot's support programme providing a single point of technical responsibility for the imaging workflow. Also known as: PWS, PhotoRobot PWS, Premium Warranty Support. Category: E-commerce and workflow. PWS is PhotoRobot's support programme for operational continuity. It provides a single point of technical responsibility for a customer's PhotoRobot production imaging workflow: software, hardware, cameras, lighting, licensing, networking and cloud outputs. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PWS was historically understood as a hardware warranty (the FAQ refers to the Premium Warranty Support Agreement); today its core is software, firmware, licensing, networking and expert diagnostics. Support runs ticket-first through support.photorobot.com during Czech working hours, escalating as needed from ticket to visual guidance, remote session (Splashtop SOS), on-site visit and factory repair or RMA. Response levels and coverage are set in the individual offer. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot PWS programme](https://www.photorobot.com/pws) - [Support](https://www.photorobot.com/support) ## Related terms - [SLA (service level agreement)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sla): A contract that defines the service levels a provider commits to, such as response times. - [RMA (return merchandise authorisation)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rma): The authorised process for returning faulty equipment to the manufacturer for repair or replacement. - [Remote support](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/remote-support): Diagnosing and fixing a system over the internet, with the customer's consent, instead of on site. - [PhotoRobot Account](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-account): The customer portal for PhotoRobot users, licences, billing, downloads, API keys and support. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 8 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot PWS](https://www.photorobot.com/pws): PhotoRobot PWS provides a single point of technical responsibility for your PhotoRobot production imaging workflow. - [Support Contracts for PhotoRobot Customers](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/support-contracts): This video guide covers the three different types of service plans: the Premium Worldwide Support (PWS) Contract, the Standard Support Contract, and the Ad-Hoc Service Contract. - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): + Is there a maintenance program that guarantees that the system is constantly updated and operational? YES - the Premium Warranty Support Agreement provides a permanent hardware guarantee, continuous… - [PhotoRobot Support](https://www.photorobot.com/support): …etc.) Travel Expenses Technician's travel expenses (airplane tickets, accommodation) PWS Contract Best Choice The Premium Worldwide Support (PWS) Contract is paid one-time annually, and fully covers… - [A Smarter PhotoRobot Account - Rebuilt for Admins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smarter-photorobot-account): …capacity stays visible before it becomes a blocker Licenses & support – robot support (PWS) and local application licenses with active, expiring, and expired counts A Design to Fully Support Your… - [PhotoRobot _Controls 2.12.5. New Features & What’s Next](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-updates-new-features): …for the exceptional work on the account interface, billing, subscription handling, and PWS/Batches functionality. - [PhotoRobot Warranty Terms](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/warranty): PWS is PhotoRobot’s operational-continuity program for the production imaging workflow. - [PhotoRobot Warranty Terms v1.1](https://www.photorobot.com/legal-version/warranty-v1-1): PWS is PhotoRobot’s operational-continuity program for the production imaging workflow. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/qr-code # SECTION: glossary > qr-code # TYPE: Glossary term --- # QR code > A two-dimensional barcode that stores text or a URL and can be read by phone cameras. Also known as: QR. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A QR code is a two-dimensional matrix barcode that can store a URL, identifier or other text and is readable by dedicated scanners and phone cameras. Unlike a linear barcode, it can hold much more data and be read from any orientation. ## How PhotoRobot uses it SmartCodes can be printed as QR codes or barcodes. PhotoRobot Touch is launched by scanning a start QR code, and the Smart Links page provides QR codes for its endpoints. ## Related terms - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. - [SmartCodes](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes): Printed PhotoRobot trigger codes that start software actions when scanned, such as starting a capture sequence. - [PhotoRobot Touch](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-touch): PhotoRobot's iPhone app for handheld product photos, detail shots and simple 360 spins inside the PhotoRobot workflow. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot SmartCodes User Guide and Print-Ready Code Sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing): Depending on the type of scanner in use, the SmartCode can be in barcode or QR code format. - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): If using PhotoRobot Touch as QR code scanner, open the Settings in the PhotoRobot Touch App, select Barcodes, and toggle ON the QR code setting to enable QR code support. - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): This setting functions to identify an item at the point of capture (typically via barcode or QR code). - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): It enables identification of an item at the point of capture (typically via barcode or QR code). - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): Scan Start QR Code. - [Smart Links](https://www.photorobot.com/smart-links): Single place for every Controls endpoint, QR code, and direct download. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): To maintain anonymity, it was agreed that a QR code / barcode would be used together with a wireless code reader that is part of the workplace. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): PhotoRobot Touch enables the use of an iPhone as both a camera and a powerful barcode / QR code reader in its workflow. - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): By simply scanning a QR code, consumers can project items directly onto the body, or into any virtual space. - [Practical SmartCode Use in High-Volume Photo Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow): This allows production line operators to simply scan QR codes or barcodes to begin various workflow processes. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quality-control # SECTION: glossary > quality-control # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Quality control > Checking images against requirements before they are published, and sending failures back. Also known as: QC, quality assurance. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Quality control (QC) in product photography checks finished images against the brief and style guide, such as framing, colour, background and completeness, before they are approved for publishing. Failed items return for reshoot or re-editing. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot's production workflow, quality control includes remote access to the studio, undo and redo on a whole batch, return to reshoot, comments and client review. Item statuses such as Verified and Fix Editing pass results between team members, and [Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-pi-advisor) checks exposure and background at capture. ## See on photorobot.com - [Production workflow: quality control](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow) ## Related terms - [Approval workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/approval-workflow): A defined step in which managers or clients approve or reject images before publishing. - [Item status](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-status): The production state of an item in PhotoRobot Controls, such as Received, Captured, Edited or Published. - [Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-pi-advisor): PhotoRobot Intelligence tool that checks each capture in real time and suggests camera and light adjustments. - [Retouching](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/retouching): Manual correction of an image, such as removing dust, blemishes or unwanted elements. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 22 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): Follow along from importing a shooting list to inventory & workflow management, robotized capture, outputs, post-processing, quality control, and automated delivery. - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Outputs then need to go through quality assurance, and finally for publishing or sharing across any channels the product appears. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): Client accounts enable an external customer to view project data, participate in quality assurance through review and comments, and to access project assets for download. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): They also need to determine quality control workflows, as well as how content is delivered to the web. - [Unlock Operational PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI)](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite): Meet the PhotoRobot Intelligence software suite: Capture PI Advisor (real-time quality control), Metadata Suggest (routine standardization), Ask PI (quick search), and; Edit PI (production-safe edits). - [Unlock the PhotoRobot-Powered Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-workflow): That includes features for frictionless collaboration, and a remote quality control team for uninterrupted, high-volume productivity. - [Macro PI - From Assistant to Fully Automated Pipeline](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action): Typos, missing tags, and inconsistent terminology lead to products being returned from Quality Control (QC) back to the studio. - [Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow): 1 Product ingestion 2 Preparation 3 Shooting 4 Post-production 5 Quality control 6 Content delivery 7 Product return Production Workflow. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Studio managers and quality assurance teams can approve work internally. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): This includes receiving and dispensing of photographed objects, weighing, measuring, prep, quality control, commenting, importing and exporting data, etc. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quick-mannequin-exchange # SECTION: glossary > quick-mannequin-exchange # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Quick mannequin exchange > CUBE system for swapping mannequins in seconds, so the next garment can be styled while the current one is shot. Also known as: mannequin exchange, quick-exchange. Category: Hardware. Quick mannequin exchange is a mounting system that lets a dressed mannequin be swapped for the next one in a few seconds. Stylists prepare garments on spare mannequins while the current one is being photographed, which keeps the photography robot busy. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The PhotoRobot [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) has a quick mannequin exchange system. An optional storage cart transports up to six mannequins of different sizes and shapes, and PhotoRobot ghost mannequins are designed to mount on it. ## Related terms - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube): Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. - [Ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin): A mannequin with removable parts, used to photograph garments so the mannequin can be made invisible in the image. - [Ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect): An editing technique that makes the mannequin disappear so the garment looks worn by an invisible body. - [Throughput](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/throughput): How many products a studio or workstation finishes per hour or shift. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 52 pages. Most relevant: - [How to Photograph a T-Shirt with a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-t-shirt-with-a-ghost-mannequin): With PhotoRobot’s_Cube and our mannequins designed for quick-exchange, the savings in effort and costs are even more remarkable. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube): The device also has a system for quick mannequin exchange to streamline higher volume photoshoots. - [How to Photograph Coats with a Ghost Mannequin Effect](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-coats): This solution boasts a system for quick mannequin exchange, coupled with PhotoRobot automation software for streamlining post processing. - [Fashion Photography of a Blazer on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-blazers): The_Cube, with its design for quick mannequin exchange, ensures a smooth workflow when photographing multiple items. - [Fashion Photography of Denim Jeans on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-jeans): This setup, with its system for quick mannequin exchange, enables us to photograph a long line of apparel in a single session. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Button-Up Shirt](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-button-up-shirt): Mannequins for quick-exchange ensure a smooth workflow from one mannequin to the next. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Tight-Fitting Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress): With this solution, we have a system for quick mannequin exchange, and software for streamlining post processing. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Zip-Up Hoodie](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-zip-up-hoodie): It boasts a system for quick mannequin exchange, and together with PhotoRobot_Controls streamlines workflow in the studio no matter the project. - [How to Photograph a Suit and Tie with a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-suit-and-tie): This solution boasts a system for quick mannequin exchange to streamline workflows, while PhotoRobot software automates post processing. - [How to Use a Ghost Mannequin for Fashion eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin): It also supports a system for quick mannequin exchange to streamline studio workflow and boost productivity. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/raw-file # SECTION: glossary > raw-file # TYPE: Glossary term --- # RAW file > The unprocessed sensor data saved by a camera, with maximum editing latitude. Also known as: RAW, camera raw. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A RAW file contains the largely unprocessed data from the camera sensor, before white balance, sharpening and compression are applied. It offers the most latitude for editing but is large and must be developed before use. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot supports RAW files from compatible cameras only within the local network, because of their size: files are downloaded from the camera and stored in structured folders. Special RAW development workflows are available on request. ## Related terms - [JPEG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/jpeg): The most common lossy image format for photographs; small files, no transparency. - [TIFF](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tiff): A flexible, often uncompressed image format used in print and archiving. - [Hybrid version](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hybrid-version): PhotoRobot Controls set-up combining a local workstation with the cloud, synchronised in both directions. - [White balance](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-balance): Adjusting an image so neutral whites and greys show no colour cast under the given light. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): Use JPEG for standard production – the in-camera processing of the Canon body (or iPhone) delivers excellent, ready-to-use results; RAW remains an option for enthusiasts who want to fine-tune maximum… - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Although, if required, there is also support for RAW files (using compatible cameras) but only within the local network. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): The software can also connect to numerous structures via API, such as for processing undeveloped RAW files. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): These solutions are fine when the business focuses more on creative photography, developing RAW files, or manual post-processing and retouching. - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): Do you need to work with limited internet access? What about special RAW file development, UV, IR, or other photography techniques? PhotoRobot solutions tailors to your workflow. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): There is full support for JPEG, PNG, WebP, as well as RAW files, camera downloads, and naming conventions. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): For the higher cost, the Mark III boasts 32 MPx, 7K RAW Video, a CF Express card for better and faster data flow, and full-size HDMI. - [Professional Tips for Footwear Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes): However, if you do need to retouch or edit product images further, use a RAW file. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): Some car studio systems rely on 3rd party software for image processing, RAW file development, or content delivery. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/reflector # SECTION: glossary > reflector # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Reflector > A surface that bounces light back onto the subject to fill shadows; also the dish fitted to a light. Also known as: reflection board, bounce card. Category: Lighting and optics. A reflector is a surface, such as a white board or a silver or gold panel, that bounces light back onto the subject to fill shadows. The term also describes the metal dish fitted to a studio light to shape its beam. ## Related terms - [Flag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flag): An opaque panel that blocks light from reaching part of the scene or the lens. - [Softbox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/softbox): A light modifier: a fabric box with a diffuser front that turns a small light into a large, soft source. - [Diffusion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/diffusion): Scattering light through a translucent material to make it softer and more even. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 18 pages. Most relevant: - [Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions): …800 S WiFi / RFS 2 1× Octabox 75 (33.600.00) 2× Speed Ring (33.401.00) 2× L40 Standard Reflector (33.115.00) 3× Junior Stand AC (35.100.00) 1× Flash Bag 3 (36.533.00) 2. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography of a Spaghetti Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-spaghetti-dress): …and hold it to the mannequin, we have styling clips, pins, double-side tape, and a light reflector. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Tight-Fitting Dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress): A reflector - If necessary, you can direct light into different areas of the dress with a bright, reflective surface. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): That is, if you don’t use light reflectors to eliminate shine and unwanted reflections. - [CASE 1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300): …several automatic product-positioning lasers, high motor-power, remote control, API, reflection boards and flag holders - all in easily portable form - for high-productive studio work - or on the go. - [FOMEI LED DMX 150B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-150b): The main components include: Reflector Mount Lock LED Light Bulb Handle Tilt U-bracket The rear of the device has the user controls, control interface, and power socket: Power Switch Display Menu… - [FOMEI LED DMX 300B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-300b): Light Reflector Power cord Transport case 2. - [FOMEI LED DMX 600B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-600b): Light Control Unit Reflector Power cord Transport case 2. - [9 Tips: How to Photograph Clothing on a Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/photograph-clothing-on-a-ghost-mannequin): These include accessories like crêpe paper, double-sided tape, light reflectors, and more. - [Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Button-Up Shirt](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-button-up-shirt): We also have tissue paper for padding different areas of the shirt, and a reflector to direct light into hard-to-reach places. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/remote-support # SECTION: glossary > remote-support # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Remote support > Diagnosing and fixing a system over the internet, with the customer's consent, instead of on site. Also known as: remote session, remote diagnostics. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Remote support means a technician diagnoses and resolves problems over the internet, by observing the user's screen or controlling the computer with consent, instead of travelling on site. It shortens resolution time and avoids travel for problems that can be fixed in software or settings. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's supported remote-control tool is Splashtop SOS (EU tier), downloaded from sos.splashtop.eu; live visual guidance uses Google Meet or, for Apple users, FaceTime. Remote access is always consent-based, and the alternatives are an on-site visit or shipping the machine to the factory. ## See on photorobot.com - [Remote support setup](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/remote-support-setup) ## Related terms - [PWS (PhotoRobot support programme)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pws): PhotoRobot's support programme providing a single point of technical responsibility for the imaging workflow. - [RMA (return merchandise authorisation)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rma): The authorised process for returning faulty equipment to the manufacturer for repair or replacement. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 13 pages. Most relevant: - [Remote Support Setup Guide for PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/remote-support-setup): This PhotoRobot user manual describes the installation of the Splashtop SOS (EU) app for remote technical support of PhotoRobot. - [PhotoRobot PWS](https://www.photorobot.com/pws): Escalation ladder — we escalate only as far as the problem needs: asynchronous ticket → live visual guidance → remote session → on-site → factory / RMA. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): Immediately after installing PhotoRobot Controls, it is recommended that the user download and install the Splashtop SOS (EU-region) app. - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): The software is browser-based, enabling remote access to digital assets. - [PhotoRobot Control System - Overview for System Offers](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/control-system-overview): …power supply, etc Activation of Licenses Firmware Updates Service Interface Access for Remote Diagnostics System Cloud API with PhotoRobot _Controls (for the integration into customer systems if the… - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): In the PhotoRobot workflow, reports allow for: Cloud-based collaboration with remote access to any project, anytime & anywhere The import of any type of data via a CSV import tool: shooting lists,… - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Team members, project managers, retouchers, and clients alike simply log into the system for remote access to digital assets. - [Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow): Remote access (no need to be in studio) Undo/Redo on overall batch Return to re-shoot Comments Clients review 6 Content delivery. - [PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/support): Remote access may be used for SW or HW support if: approved by Customer supervised by Customer session is temporary strictly used for diagnostics no permanent access remains Remote access is optional,… - [Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-hw): …subsystems This SLA applies to: warranty support, post-warranty technical support, remote diagnostics, RMA processes, assistance with identifying replacement parts. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/retouching # SECTION: glossary > retouching # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Retouching > Manual correction of an image, such as removing dust, blemishes or unwanted elements. Also known as: photo retouching, image retouching, retouch. Category: Photography techniques. Retouching is manual editing that corrects or improves an image beyond standard adjustments: removing dust and scratches, cleaning up edges, fixing reflections or removing unwanted objects. It is time-consuming, so high-volume studios try to reduce it through good capture and automation. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls includes a brush and eraser for retouching single images or applying a change to all images, and a Denoise tool for removing dirt and dust. Item export can mark images for external retouching, PhotoRobot Account has an External Retoucher role, and PhotoRobot Studio offers optional outsourced retouching. ## Related terms - [Post-production](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/post-production): Everything done to images after capture: editing, background removal, cropping, export. - [Batch processing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/batch-processing): Applying the same edits to many images at once instead of one by one. - [Clipping path](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/clipping-path): A hand-drawn vector outline used to cut a product out of its background. - [Quality control](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/quality-control): Checking images against requirements before they are published, and sending failures back. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 68 pages. Most relevant: - [What’s New in the February Controls Software Release 2.6.0](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/february-software-release): Simply enter a comment and specify for whom it will be visible – whether the client, a retoucher, or internal. - [Professional Tips for Footwear Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes): Are your product photos going straight to the web, or do you retouch imagery first? If publishing immediately, JPG is the standard choice of file format. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): …reports detail every stage of image production: ‘to capture’, ‘captured’, ‘ready for retouch’, ‘retouch done’, ‘verified’, ‘approved’, ‘published’ Integrating the production process with digital asset… - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Post-production: photo editing and retouching (background removal, image enhancements); 5. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Team members, project managers, retouchers, and clients alike simply log into the system for remote access to digital assets. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): For many pieces of jewelry, there will always be some manual retouching necessary after the photoshoot. - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): …completely remove all frames together with all images and angle configurations Send for retouch - mark item for external retouching Activity - view the activity log of an item Import images - upload… - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Team members can easily access the tasks they are responsible for, with pages for studio managers, photographers, clients, or retouchers. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): 08:42* Automated post production in PhotoRobot software can minimize or even completely eliminate the need for manual retouching. - [Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos): This is especially valuable for retouching multi-row images, no matter if it’s stills or 360 spins. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rma # SECTION: glossary > rma # TYPE: Glossary term --- # RMA (return merchandise authorisation) > The authorised process for returning faulty equipment to the manufacturer for repair or replacement. Also known as: RMA, return merchandise authorization. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A return merchandise authorisation (RMA) is the manufacturer's approval and reference number for returning a faulty product for repair, replacement or refund. Shipping a device without one usually delays handling. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot's PWS programme, a factory repair under RMA is the last step of the escalation ladder after ticket, visual guidance, remote session and on-site visit. ## Related terms - [PWS (PhotoRobot support programme)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pws): PhotoRobot's support programme providing a single point of technical responsibility for the imaging workflow. - [SLA (service level agreement)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sla): A contract that defines the service levels a provider commits to, such as response times. - [Remote support](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/remote-support): Diagnosing and fixing a system over the internet, with the customer's consent, instead of on site. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 6 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot PWS](https://www.photorobot.com/pws): …needs: asynchronous ticket → live visual guidance → remote session → on-site → factory / RMA. - [Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-hw): …SLA applies to: warranty support, post-warranty technical support, remote diagnostics, RMA processes, assistance with identifying replacement parts. - [PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/support): …guidance recommended maintenance routines identification of required replacement parts RMA process coordination (!) - Hardware repairs, physical servicing, on-site work, or mechanical interventions… - [PhotoRobot Warranty Terms](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/warranty): RMA means the Return Material Authorization process described in the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware. - [PhotoRobot Warranty Terms v1.1](https://www.photorobot.com/legal-version/warranty-v1-1): RMA means the Return Material Authorization process described in the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware. - [PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements (SLA)](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla): URL: This SLA defines: hardware incident classification response-time guarantees diagnostic procedures RMA workflow rules for replacement parts exclusions relevant to physical devices Applies to all… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm # SECTION: glossary > robotic-arm # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Robotic Arm > PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. Also known as: robotic camera arm, robot arm, camera arm. Category: Hardware. A robotic camera arm moves the camera along a vertical arc around the product while a turntable rotates it, so images can be taken from several elevations. The PhotoRobot Robotic Arm is synchronised with the turntable to capture single or multiple rows of a 360 spin automatically. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot offers the Robotic Arm in versions V3 (manual elevation) and V8 (motor-assisted, software-controlled elevation), with a top-view range of 0° to 90°; the V8 is also available with a long arm. A docking station aligns the arm with compatible turntables such as the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table), and retractable wheels make it easy to move between workstations. Combined with turntable rotation it also produces the [flying camera effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flying-camera-effect) in product video. ## See on photorobot.com - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) - [Robotic Arm V8 manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-arm-v8) ## Related terms - [Robotic camera control](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-camera-control): Automated coordination of camera triggering, movement and positioning by motorised devices and software. - [Multi-row 360](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multi-row-360): A 360 spin captured at several camera elevations, so the viewer can rotate the product horizontally and vertically. - [Turn and swing angles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turn-and-swing-angles): PhotoRobot terms for the rotation angle of the product (turn) and the vertical angle of the camera (swing). - [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centerless-table): PhotoRobot motorised turntable with an optical glass plate for shadow-free photography without clipping. - [Flying camera effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flying-camera-effect): Video in which the camera seems to fly around the product, made by combining rotation with camera movement. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 104 pages. Most relevant: - [ROBOTIC ARM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm): Deploy the Robotic Camera Arm in the studio for motorized precision, automated movement, and realistic 3D presentation. - [PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable and Robotic Arm V8 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-turntable-arm-user-guide): …documentation serves as a user manual for the PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm V8 expansion. - [PhotoRobot Robotic Arm V8 Installation & Usage](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-arm-v8): …provides technical instructions on the installation, configuration, and first use of the Robotic Arm V8 by PhotoRobot. - [PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm for 360 Object Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robotic-arm-360-object-photography): PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm for 360 object photography is an ideal solution for online shops and is compatible with the majority of PhotoRobot’s rotary robots. - [Discover the Frame 360 Turntable with Built-in Robot Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/frame-robot-turntable-demo): …a video demo of PhotoRobot Frame: the 3D product photography turntable with a built-in robot arm and diffusion background. - [PhotoRobot Hardware: Centerless Table, Cube, Robot Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-cube-robot-arm): …unique hardware anatomy features of PhotoRobot systems: the Centerless Table, Cube, and Robot Arm. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): ROBOTIC ARM A precise robot camera arm to add the 3rd dimension to your 360 product photography and multi-row spins. - [PhotoRobot Robotic Arm v8 - Device Overview & Accessories](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/robotic-arm-v8-overview): Examine the hardware features and accessories of PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm, the advanced multi-row product photography robot. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): If using a Robot Arm in the workspace, note that there will likely be additional setup required. - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): It also describes the assembly of the optional Robotic Arm V8 expansion, and the mounting of the optional telescopic pole. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-turntable # SECTION: glossary > robotic-turntable # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Robotic Turntable > PhotoRobot heavy-duty motorised turntable for machinery, engines and automotive parts, in 40 kg and 200 kg versions. Also known as: PhotoRobot Turntable. Category: Hardware. The Robotic Turntable is a PhotoRobot motorised turntable for small but heavy objects such as tools, engines, milling machines and automotive parts. Its opaque plate overhangs the table edge so products can be photographed at a zero-degree camera angle. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The Robotic Turntable is available with a 40 kg or a 200 kg load capacity. It uses laser locating to place the object at the centre of rotation, has integrated mounts for lighting and cabling through its frame, and can be combined with a [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) for 3D capture or with a [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) for synchronised rotation of a partially suspended product. ## See on photorobot.com - [Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable) - [Robotic Turntable and Arm user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-turntable-arm-user-guide) ## Related terms - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube): Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. - [Laser positioning](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/laser-positioning): Lasers projected onto the turntable that show where to place a product so it sits at the centre of rotation. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 17 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable and Robotic Arm V8 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-turntable-arm-user-guide): The following documentation serves as a user manual for the PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm V8 expansion. - [ROBOTIC TURNTABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable): The Robotic_Turntable is a universal motorized turntable for heavy objects, enabling 360° product photography for objects weighing up to 200kg. - [Robotic Turntable for 360° Photography and Heavy Objects](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360deg-photography-and-heavy-objects): PhotoRobot designed the Robotic Turntable to be effective and versatile for 360° product photography and for photography of heavy objects. - [What is Robotic Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-product-photography): Heavy-Duty Platforms: Robotic turntables scale up to industrial platforms capable of rotating heavy machinery, vehicles, or furniture. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): For small to medium size, heavier objects, studios might use an eCommerce product photography turntable like the Robotic Turntable. - [Tips for 360-Degree Motorized Turntable Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography): There are models like the Centerless Table for small to medium size products, as well as the Robotic Turntable and the Turning Platform for medium size or heavy objects. - [TURNING PLATFORM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform): Transform the platform into a robotic turntable to support even heavier objects, or into an infinite runway for model photography. - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): Both the MultiCam Pro and Pro XL are compatible with all PhotoRobot robotic turntables. - [PhotoRobot Robotic Arm V8 Installation & Usage](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-arm-v8): The Arm combines with compatible photography turntable devices like the Centerless Table as well as the Robotic Turntable, C-Class turntables, and more. - [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information): The latest Control Unit G7 is a separate but integral component to the following PhotoRobot systems: PhotoRobot Centerless Table Robotic Turntable Cube V5 / V6 MultiCam Robotic Arm V8 Turning Platform… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-workstation # SECTION: glossary > robotic-workstation # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Robotic workstation > One complete automated photography station: robot, cameras, lights and controlling software. Also known as: robotic photography workstation, robotic cell. Category: Hardware. A robotic workstation is a complete automated photography station: a positioning robot such as a turntable or camera arm, the cameras and lights, and the software that controls them as one system. Several workstations together form a production line. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot describes large studios running 10, 20 or 60 or more robotic workstations simultaneously, each producing roughly one product per minute. Its control units connect over LAN, which PhotoRobot states scales from a single robot to more than 200 robotic workspaces in one cluster. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot production line](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line) ## Related terms - [Production line](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-line): Several connected workstations that process products in stages, like an assembly line for images. - [Throughput](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/throughput): How many products a studio or workstation finishes per hour or shift. - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 31 pages. Most relevant: - [Pricing Levels of Robotic Workspaces](https://www.photorobot.com/hardware-pricing): …and form of delivery; a binding quotation comes from PhotoRobot sales (Pricing Levels of Robotic Workspaces. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): It also allows for achieving handheld image requirements while one or multiple robotic workstations are in simultaneous operation. - [CASE 1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-1300): Powerful & portable robotic workstation TOP PRODUCTIVITY IN A COMPACT FORM. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): The process involves only transporting the items to nearby a robotic workstation, and then scanning barcodes to confirm item receiving. - [PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable and Robotic Arm V8 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-turntable-arm-user-guide): It aims to help facilitate the initial understanding, basic testing, and first operation of the robotic workstation. - [Practical SmartCode Use in High-Volume Photo Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow): There is no movement back and forth from a robotic workstation to a computer, dramatically speeding up production lines. - [Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot’s CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photoshoots-case-850): PhotoRobot designed the CASE 850 to be a truly portable robotic workstation for product photoshoots. - [PhotoRobot’s Case for Automated 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography): The Case for automated 360 product photography is a robotic workstation, compact in size to fit into nearly any space and extremely mobile for easy transport. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): 03:35* This is a way to visually assign presets before the item arrives at the robotic workspace. - [PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller): …needs of a small studio with one robot, same as large companies running more than 200 robotic workspaces in one cluster). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotary-encoder # SECTION: glossary > rotary-encoder # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Rotary encoder > A sensor that reports the exact angular position of a rotating part, such as a turntable plate. Also known as: quadrature encoder, quadratic encoder, absolute encoder, encoder. Category: Hardware. A rotary encoder is a sensor that measures the angular position of a shaft or plate. An incremental (quadrature) encoder counts pulses as the part turns, while an absolute encoder reports the position directly without a reference run. ## How PhotoRobot uses it On PhotoRobot glass-plate tables an encoder delivers roughly 40,000 pulses per rotation, evaluated 1000 times per second. This is what allows images to be captured at precise angles while the table keeps moving ([Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin)). Absolute encoders determine the position of each machine axis without a calibration sensor. ## See on photorobot.com - [PhotoRobot control units](https://www.photorobot.com/controller) ## Related terms - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Flash duration](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flash-duration): How long a flash burst lasts; a very short flash freezes a moving subject sharply. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 5 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller): …32bit, 1GHz, 2000 MIPS Operating system Custom PhotoRobot OS Optical position sensor 1 Quadratic encoder 1 Absolute encoder (SLAVE module) N/A YES N/A Digital inputs 4 2 4 Digital outputs 2 Laser out… - [FOMEI Digital Pro X Studio Flash - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-digital-pro-x): Modeling Brightness Up/Down (Digital Encoder) Operation Instructions: Infographic 1. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): …holders Cross laser for precise product positioning Power and data cables Foldable legs Encoder & calibration probe Spare X-rings General purpose lugs to hold lights, light dividers, diffusion panels,… - [Mastering Product Photography: Shoes and Footwear](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear): This, together with an encoder wheel which is capable of reading back the glass’ position for accurate and fast movement. - [PhotoRobot Case 850: The Highly Portable 360 Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/case-850-portable-360-turntable): This is made possible thanks to this encoder wheel, and this optical sensor with an auto-calibration function. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower # SECTION: glossary > rotopower # TYPE: Glossary term --- # RotoPower > PhotoRobot option that brings mains power into the rotating part of a robot, so a product can stay switched on while it turns. Also known as: Roto Power. Category: Hardware. RotoPower is a PhotoRobot option that brings mains power into the rotating part of the robot – the turntable plate or platform. Products that must be powered can therefore be photographed or filmed while they rotate, for example a fridge with its interior light on or a microwave with its display and interior light lit. Power crosses from the fixed to the rotating part through a rotary electrical joint instead of a cable, so the plate can keep turning in one direction indefinitely. The rotary electrical joint is usually made with [slip rings](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/slip-ring); some designs use a mercury-wetted contact in a safely sealed housing instead. PhotoRobot usually supplies RotoPower on the [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube) and the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turning-platform), but the principle can be applied to other machines too. On the Turning Platform the joint carries more than mains power. Besides phase, neutral and protective earth, two extra logic channels pass into the rotating part, because the platform can carry the [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-catwalk) accessory: these signals control the speed of the belt the model walks on, and the mains supply powers the belt motor through a frequency inverter (VFD). ## How PhotoRobot uses it RotoPower is available on the CUBE as the Cube V6 RotoPower and on the Turning Platform as the Turning Platform HT / RotoPower. The Turning Platform user guide describes the power socket in the rotating section for plugging electrical appliances in and powering them on during 360 photography, and the transformation into the Virtual Catwalk is possible with the HT / RotoPower version. With the Catwalk belt removed, the station can still be used for 360 photography in RotoPower mode. ## See on photorobot.com - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform) - [Turning Platform user guide - Standard, HT / RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/turning-platform) - [Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk) ## Related terms - [Slip ring](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/slip-ring): Rotary electrical joint that passes power and signals from a fixed part of a machine to a part that turns without limit. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube): Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turning-platform): PhotoRobot heavy-duty turntable for furniture and machinery, with plates up to 280 cm and a 1500 kg load capacity. - [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-catwalk): PhotoRobot rotating platform with a treadmill belt that lets models walk an infinite runway for 360 fashion video. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [Turning Platform User Guide - Standard, HT / RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/turning-platform): …Turning Platform User Guide contains user information for the standard and the HT / RotoPower versions of the device. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube): Find the perfect size for your photo studio with 3 versions of the Cube: Cube V5, V6, and V6 RotoPower. - [TURNING PLATFORM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform): The High Torque / RotoPower version brings mains power into the rotating plate, so appliances that must be switched on, such as a fridge with its interior light on or a microwave with its display lit,… - [Introducing the CUBE for Automated Photoshoots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube): Dive in with PhotoRobot and learn all about our CUBE V5, V6, and V6 RotoPower, and what this versatile robot can do for your studio. - [PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk First Use Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/virtual-catwalk-user-guide): This is possible in RotoPower mode, and also in combination with an optional PhotoRobot Robot Arm expansion. - [PhotoRobot Premium Ghost Mannequin Product Line](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins): Find the perfect size robot for your studio with 4 versions of the Cube: V5, V6, V6 (RotoPower), and Compact. - [PhotoRobot Solutions for the 360 Product Photography Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-360-product-photography-studio): Take PhotoRobot’s RotoPower for instance, a popular feature to the family of rotary turntable robots. - [PhotoRobot’s Catwalk for Apparel Photography and Online Fashion Shows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/catwalk-for-apparel-photography-and-online-fashion-shows): The belt can also be removed so that the robot can be used for capturing 360° images even in RotoPower mode. - [Setting Up a Motorized Turntable for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360-product-photography): PhotoRobot’s turntables also come in a RotoPower version, which includes a power socket in the rotating section to enable operators to rotate electrical appliances even when they’re plugged in. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shadow-free-photography # SECTION: glossary > shadow-free-photography # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Shadow-free photography > Lighting a product so that it casts no visible shadow on its background or support. Also known as: shadowless photography, shadow-free. Category: Photography techniques. Shadow-free photography lights a product so that it casts no visible shadow on the surface it stands on or the background behind it. It is achieved with light from below through a transparent support, diffuse backgrounds and balanced light from all sides. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) and [FRAME](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame) use an optical glass plate and diffuse background so products can be lit from all sides, producing shadow-free images of transparent, reflective, light or dark products. ## Related terms - [Optical glass plate](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/optical-glass-plate): A turntable top made of optical glass that can be lit and photographed through, giving shadow-free images. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. - [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/centerless-table): PhotoRobot motorised turntable with an optical glass plate for shadow-free photography without clipping. - [Diffusion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/diffusion): Scattering light through a translucent material to make it softer and more even. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table): A universal solution for shadow-free product photography Perfect Images. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): CENTERLESS TABLE A universal, motorized turntable solution for shadow-free product photography. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide): Key technological components and features of the PhotoRobot Centerless Table include: Optical turning glass plate for shadow-free image capture. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): The Centerless Table is a universal solution for shadow-free eCommerce photography of small to large items with no clipping required. - [Centerless Table Eyewear Photography Production Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-eyewear-photography-demo): The machine is optimal for shadow-free product photography of small to medium size items. - [How Multiple PhotoRobot Modules Combine - the Flexi_Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/flexible-studio-modules): 01:23* A good example of a PhotoRobot with a glass turntable is our Case 1300, which makes it possible to produce shadow-free still images, 360s, or videos. - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): Together, the two devices enable shadow-free automated photography of small to medium size products. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): The optical glass plate of the turntable enables shadow-free product photography, while the software makes editing easy. - [Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos): This is thanks to wide ranging design features that support automated shadow-free object photography. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): This provides shadow-free views from all sides and top-to-bottom that can be used to generate a 3D model. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shooting-list # SECTION: glossary > shooting-list # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Shooting list > The list of items to be photographed in a project, usually imported from a spreadsheet. Also known as: shot list, CSV import. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A shooting list is the list of products to be photographed in a project, with identifiers such as SKU or barcode and any instructions. Importing it before the shoot lets every product be recognised by scanning instead of typing. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls imports shooting lists from CSV files with a configurable column structure; columns can be marked as tags, presets can be assigned by name, and new rows can be added to a project even after photography has begun. UTF-8 encoding is recommended. ## See on photorobot.com - [Capturing images: import new items](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images) ## Related terms - [Product ingestion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-ingestion): Receiving and registering products in the studio before photography: scanning, measuring, sorting. - [SKU (stock keeping unit)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sku): A retailer's internal code for one distinct product variant. - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 21 pages. Most relevant: - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): A prerequisite of item import functionality is to import via CSV file. - [Studio Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow): Create shooting lists with CSV file import, including support for various properties available. - [PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap): Follow along from importing a shooting list to inventory & workflow management, robotized capture, outputs, post-processing, quality control, and automated delivery. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): With PhotoRobot, users can also manually import any type of data via CSV import, or by calling an API. - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): Alternatively, in the Items menu, click Import to import items from CSV: CSV import functionality enables PhotoRobot users to create an item with its configurations in Excel to import into the system. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): After configuring the workspace, the second stage of a typical PhotoRobot workflow is to import a shooting list. - [Using AI to Enhance Product Photo Backgrounds](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-product-photo-backgrounds): The prompt above results in a detailed ingredients table to specification in CSV file format. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Import shooting lists, customize structure with column tags, and find support for various properties. - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): For the easiest possible integration of input data, there is a dynamically configurable.csv file import system in PhotoRobot _Controls. - [Discover PhotoRobot C-Class 360 Turntables in Action](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/c-class-turntables-demo): CSV files contain not only the list of product names to photograph, but also unique tracking codes, barcodes, and object dimensions. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-lag # SECTION: glossary > shutter-lag # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Shutter lag > The delay between triggering a camera and the moment the image is actually exposed. Also known as: trigger advance. Category: Photography techniques. Shutter lag is the delay between the trigger signal and the moment the camera actually exposes the image. It varies between camera models and matters whenever the subject is moving, because the subject keeps moving during the delay. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In non-stop capture the PhotoRobot control unit fires the camera in advance of each target angle. The "Trigger advance" value must be higher than the camera's shutter lag; PhotoRobot's example is about 90 ms for a camera with an 80 ms lag. With several cameras, the [SynchroBox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox) applies each camera's own lag, and the SynchroBox guide explains how to measure it. ## See on photorobot.com - [SynchroBox: how to measure shutter lag](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup) ## Related terms - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [SynchroBox](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox): PhotoRobot multi-camera controller that fires each camera with its own advance; up to 8 cameras per unit, units can be linked. - [Shutter release cable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-release-cable): A cable that fires the camera from an external device, such as a robot's control unit. - [Shutter speed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-speed): How long the camera shutter stays open; with flash, the flash duration usually freezes the motion instead. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 1 page. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot SynchroBox - Functionality & Setup User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup): It represents a solution to the issue that arises when working with cameras that have different shutter lags, and one unit supports up to 8 cameras. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-release-cable # SECTION: glossary > shutter-release-cable # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Shutter release cable > A cable that fires the camera from an external device, such as a robot's control unit. Also known as: shutter cable, remote shutter release, wire shutter. Category: Hardware. A shutter release cable connects a camera's remote port to an external trigger so the shutter can be fired without touching the camera. In automated photography the trigger is the robot's controller, which fires the camera at exactly the right angle. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot control units fire cameras through their digital outputs; a dual output can, for example, pre-raise the mirror of an SLR with one signal and expose with the other. PhotoRobot prepares a shutter cable with a camera-specific connector, which is why it asks customers to confirm their camera model. Third-party cameras are supported when fired by cable from the control unit. ## See on photorobot.com - [Recommended cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras) ## Related terms - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Tethered shooting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tethered-shooting): Shooting with the camera connected to a computer, which controls settings and receives every image directly. - [Shutter lag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-lag): The delay between triggering a camera and the moment the image is actually exposed. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 13 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot SynchroBox - Functionality & Setup User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup): c) The Control Unit fires the camera shutter via shutter cable in advance. - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): 1 x motor cable 5m, connected from the SwitchBox left connector and fastened to the portal connector 1 x shutter cable extension 5m connected from the CUG6 OUT port to the SynchroBox IN port (the… - [PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact): Then, prepare the following cables: the power cable (1-meter length), shutter cable, motor cable, and the ethernet cable (2-meter length). - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): Synchronization of the camera shutter and the sequence stops can be controlled by plugging the cable trigger into the CASE. - [PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide): These support a shutter cable with a coupler, and a laser power cable. - [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras): Capturing images is then controlled via the robot using a remote shutter release cable. - [Setting up a PhotoRobot Workspace - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace): To activate Fast-shot mode, connect any robots with a camera via a shutter cable. - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): Produce simple 360 spins with camera triggering via wire-shutter and special adaptor technology for remote camera control in sync with PhotoRobot. - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): In PhotoRobot Touch Spin mode, camera shutter control is via wire-shutter, and the iPhone functions as a remote camera to automate spin photography. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): It is also possible to create simple 360 product spins by iPhone using a wire-shutter and special adaptor to trigger the camera. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-speed # SECTION: glossary > shutter-speed # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Shutter speed > How long the camera shutter stays open; with flash, the flash duration usually freezes the motion instead. Also known as: exposure time. Category: Lighting and optics. Shutter speed is the length of time the shutter stays open, for example 1/125 s. Short speeds freeze motion, longer ones gather more light. When studio flash is the main light source, the flash duration rather than the shutter speed determines how motion is frozen. ## Related terms - [Exposure](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/exposure): The amount of light that reaches the sensor, set by aperture, shutter speed, ISO and light output. - [Flash duration](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flash-duration): How long a flash burst lasts; a very short flash freezes a moving subject sharply. - [Shutter lag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-lag): The delay between triggering a camera and the moment the image is actually exposed. - [Aperture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/aperture): The adjustable lens opening, given as an f-number; smaller openings give more depth of field. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 12 pages. Most relevant: - [Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions): In combination with the RFS 2.2 transmitter, you can use the Siros 800 S monolight with extremely fast shutter speeds. - [PhotoRobot SynchroBox - Functionality & Setup User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup): Because PhotoRobot is intended to use flash lights, set up camera 1 shutter speed to 1/100 or 1/125. - [Professional Tips for Footwear Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes): Set up the camera (or cameras) on the Robotic Camera Arm, or PhotoRobot’s Multi-Camera system to use any shutter speed you like. - [DSLR vs Mirrorless Cameras in 2020: Comparison and Review](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/dslr-vs-mirrorless-cameras-in-2020-comparison-and-review): …for the photographer who wants complete manual control over all exposure settings like shutter speed and aperture. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): We recommend using strobes, as they allowfor more freedom in terms of light modeling, and also save you time by enabling faster shutter speeds. - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): Strobe lighting allows for an extremely short exposure time (e.g. - [What is Automated Image Capture?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-image-capture): It pushes instructions regarding focal length, aperture, ISO, and shutter speed. - [Discover PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor): It recommends aperture tweaks, shutter speed corrections, or ISO balancing. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Take into account and document all camera settings, such as: Shutter speed Aperture ISO White balance Focal length Any unique settings that might change from one shot to the next Also be sure to… - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): When shooting with strobes and a tripod, shutter speed is less of a concern. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sku # SECTION: glossary > sku # TYPE: Glossary term --- # SKU (stock keeping unit) > A retailer's internal code for one distinct product variant. Also known as: SKU, stock keeping unit. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A stock keeping unit (SKU) is an internal code a retailer or manufacturer assigns to each distinct product variant, for example one size and colour of a shirt. Product images are linked to products by SKU in shops, PIM and DAM systems. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot export feeds include the SKU of each item, and additional SKUs, for example a trading partner's codes, can be imported into a project later as extra variables. ## Related terms - [GTIN](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#gtin): GS1's globally unique product number behind EAN and UPC barcodes. - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. - [PIM (product information management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pim): A system that stores and distributes product data, such as descriptions and attributes, to all sales channels. - [Export feed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed): A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. - [Shooting list](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shooting-list): The list of items to be photographed in a project, usually imported from a spreadsheet. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): …Touch: 2024 - Present (Controls features an iOS app to identify objects via QR code, SKU barcodes, or Universal Product Code. - [From Crop to Channel-Ready Delivery in PhotoRobot Editor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/channel-ready-export): When one SKU often requires several crops and sizes, the resize function in the crop workflow keeps high-volume editing inside _Controls – where production already lives. - [What is Product Photography Automation?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-product-photography-automation): Barcode scanners and automated naming conventions ensure image files are correctly associated with the appropriate product SKUs. - [Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images): …call for customer-specific file naming conventions: branding, customer codes, product SKU, number, type, etc File types exist in various formats: jpg, tiff, gif Each customer demands a specified… - [Digital Asset Management for Large-Scale Manufacturers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers): The customer requires additional data for their digital assets: name, SKU, ID, timestamps, weights, dimensions, etc. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Assigning items to their virtual shelf requires only scanning the product’s SKU followed by scanning the shelf code. - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): Variables may include, for example, an additional SKU to be added to fit later exports for a trading partner. - [Tracking Production Status in PhotoRobot Controls Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tracking-production-status): To support key production events, there are configurable automatic transitions for: New items — start every SKU in the right bucket. - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): Set properties such as: Name, ID, SKU, Status, Timestamp & more. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): Various properties are included, such as: Name, ID, SKU, Status, Timestamp. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sla # SECTION: glossary > sla # TYPE: Glossary term --- # SLA (service level agreement) > A contract that defines the service levels a provider commits to, such as response times. Also known as: SLA, service level agreement. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A service level agreement (SLA) is a contract, or part of one, that defines measurable service commitments, such as availability, response time and resolution procedures, and what happens if they are missed. SLAs are common for software, hosting and support contracts. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot publishes service level agreements for its software and hardware in the Trust Center; customer-specific commitments for the PWS programme are set in the individual offer and contract. ## Related terms - [PWS (PhotoRobot support programme)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pws): PhotoRobot's support programme providing a single point of technical responsibility for the imaging workflow. - [RMA (return merchandise authorisation)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rma): The authorised process for returning faulty equipment to the manufacturer for repair or replacement. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 25 pages. Most relevant: - [Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-hw): The Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware defines the service levels, response, commitments, and diagnostic procedures provided by PhotoRobot. - [Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-sw): This legal document represents the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software which describes service levels and availability commitments. - [PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements (SLA)](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla): The PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements (SLA) legal document provides access to all PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements. - [PhotoRobot Trust Center](https://www.photorobot.com/trust-center): …Data Processing Agreement (DPA) PhotoRobot Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements (SLA) Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software Service Level Agreement (SLA) for… - [PhotoRobot PWS](https://www.photorobot.com/pws): Customer-specific figures (final SLA commitments, coverage prices) are set in the individual PWS offer and contract. - [Train Your Studio Teams From the Ground Up](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy): Meanwhile, customers use the credentials in supplier qualification programs, vendor evaluations, and service-level agreements as formal evidence of platform fluency, not self-attestation. - [Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy): Customers use the credentials in supplier qualification programs, vendor evaluations, service-level agreements — as formal evidence of platform fluency, not self-attestation. - [PhotoRobot Warranty Terms](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/warranty): Software is covered separately under the PhotoRobot License Agreement and, for cloud components, the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software. - [PhotoRobot Warranty Terms v1.1](https://www.photorobot.com/legal-version/warranty-v1-1): Software is covered separately under the PhotoRobot License Agreement and, for cloud components, the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software. - [PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/support): …systems enterprise support plans These Support Terms complement the PhotoRobot Software SLA (/legal/sla-sw), the PhotoRobot Hardware SLA (/legal/sla-hw), and the PhotoRobot Terms of Service… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/slip-ring # SECTION: glossary > slip-ring # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Slip ring > Rotary electrical joint that passes power and signals from a fixed part of a machine to a part that turns without limit. Also known as: rotary electrical joint, rotary electrical connection, electrical rotary union. Category: Hardware. A slip ring is a rotary electrical joint that passes power or signals between the stationary and the rotating part of a machine. Conductive rings turn with the rotating part while stationary brushes stay in sliding contact with them, so the rotating part can turn continuously in one direction without any cable winding up. Each ring carries one circuit, so a slip ring for mains power has separate rings for phase, neutral and protective earth, and further rings can carry control signals. Slip rings are used wherever something has to rotate without limit and stay powered, from radar antennas and wind turbines to motorised turntables. Related designs solve the same problem differently. A mercury-wetted rotary contact replaces the sliding brushes with liquid metal sealed in a housing. A rotary transformer transfers power or signals without contact, by induction. The term rotary union strictly means a joint that passes fluids or air into a rotating part, but it is sometimes used loosely for electrical joints as well. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot uses a rotary electrical joint – typically slip rings, in some designs a mercury-wetted contact in a safely sealed housing – in its [RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower) option, which brings mains power into the rotating plate of the CUBE and the Turning Platform. On the Turning Platform the joint also passes two logic channels that control the belt speed of the Virtual Catwalk. ## See on photorobot.com - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform) ## Related terms - [RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower): PhotoRobot option that brings mains power into the rotating part of a robot, so a product can stay switched on while it turns. - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turning-platform): PhotoRobot heavy-duty turntable for furniture and machinery, with plates up to 280 cm and a 1500 kg load capacity. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube): Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 1 page. Most relevant: - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube): Power passes through a rotary electrical joint instead of a cable, so the plate can keep turning in one direction without limit. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smart-links # SECTION: glossary > smart-links # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Smart Links > PhotoRobot page of stable URLs for the latest PhotoRobot Controls version, changelog and installers. Category: Software. Smart Links is PhotoRobot's list of stable URLs for checking the latest PhotoRobot Controls version, reading the machine-readable changelog and downloading installers for macOS and Windows on the Stable or Preview channel. The links are intended for administrators and IT teams who automate updates. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The endpoints return JSON or resolve directly to the installer and can be used in scheduled jobs to be notified about new releases. Links to specific versions exist too, with a warning that older versions may not be compatible with the current database structure. ## See on photorobot.com - [Smart Links](https://www.photorobot.com/smart-links) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. - [API (application programming interface)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/api): A defined interface through which one piece of software can use the functions or data of another. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 1 page. Most relevant: - [Smart Links](https://www.photorobot.com/smart-links): PhotoRobot Controls · Developer Resources Smart Links. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes # SECTION: glossary > smartcodes # TYPE: Glossary term --- # SmartCodes > Printed PhotoRobot trigger codes that start software actions when scanned, such as starting a capture sequence. Also known as: SmartCode, Smart Codes. Category: Software. SmartCodes are printed barcodes or QR codes that act as commands for PhotoRobot Controls. Scanning one triggers a workflow step directly, so the operator does not have to walk back to the computer. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The standard SmartCodes are Start Sequence, Ready for Shoot, Start CubiScan Measurement and Open Sort to Shelves. Studios print them as stickers or labels near workstations or carry them on keychains, and PhotoRobot publishes a print-ready sheet in the SmartCodes user guide. ## See on photorobot.com - [SmartCodes user guide and print-ready sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing) - [Practical SmartCode use](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow) ## Related terms - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. - [QR code](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/qr-code): A two-dimensional barcode that stores text or a URL and can be read by phone cameras. - [CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cubiscan): A dimensioning system that weighs and measures items; PhotoRobot records its data with the product images. - [Sort to shelves](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sort-to-shelves): PhotoRobot Controls feature that assigns workspace and preset to an item by scanning a shelf code. - [Capture sequence](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-sequence): The programmed order of angles, camera triggers and movements a robot performs to photograph an item. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot SmartCodes User Guide and Print-Ready Code Sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing): The following user guide describes how to use, download, and print PhotoRobot SmartCodes for integration within studio workflows. - [Practical SmartCode Use in High-Volume Photo Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow): Find out how high-volume operations use PhotoRobot SmartCodes to directly control software sequences and maximize productivity in production workflows. - [Weighing and Measuring Products with CubiScan](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/weighing-and-measuring-products): In addition to the ability to scan items into the system, it is also possible to scan a special PhotoRobot SmartCode to activate a CubiScan device. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/softbox # SECTION: glossary > softbox # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Softbox > A light modifier: a fabric box with a diffuser front that turns a small light into a large, soft source. Also known as: softboxes, strip softbox, octabox. Category: Lighting and optics. A softbox is a light modifier made of a reflective fabric enclosure with a translucent diffuser on the front. It turns a small light into a larger, softer source, giving gentler shadows and smoother highlights on reflective surfaces. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's CASE 850 user guide recommends beauty dishes and strip softboxes for 360-degree photography, and FOMEI LED ROLL panels can be fitted with a softbox consisting of a folding frame, diffuser and honeycomb. ## Related terms - [Diffusion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/diffusion): Scattering light through a translucent material to make it softer and more even. - [Reflector](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/reflector): A surface that bounces light back onto the subject to fill shadows; also the dish fitted to a light. - [Strobe](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/strobe): A studio flash that emits a very short, powerful burst of light, freezing motion. - [Flag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flag): An opaque panel that blocks light from reaching part of the scene or the lens. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [FOMEI LED ROLL - PhotoRobot User and Controls Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll): The softbox for the FOMEI LED ROLL consists of a folding frame, a diffuser, and a honeycomb filter. - [Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions): Siros Expert Kit contents include: 2× Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 1× Umbrella, 85 cm (33.574.00) 1× Softbox 60 x 60 (33.561.00) 1× Speed Ring (33.401.00) 2× Junior Stand AC (35.100.00) 1× Flash Bag 2… - [PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide): Finally, assemble the softboxes, fasten them onto flash lights, and mount all lights onto the frame of the device. - [Mastering Product Photography: Shoes and Footwear](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear): The next component to getting the best footwear product photos is in the lighting and softboxes. - [Guide to Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography): The most common solution for this is the softbox, which combines a black structure with a white fabric front that can either soften the harder strobe lighting or compliment simple softboxes and… - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): Use beauty dishes and strip softboxes – they provide soft yet efficient modeling light; perfect for 360 degree photography. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): The studio then requires professional lighting, softboxes, background diffusers, and sometimes equipment for product staging (like PhotoRobot’s Cube). - [Mastering Product Photography: Apparel and Clothing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing): Large softboxes or LED panels can cause loss of contrast and volume for the object. - [PhotoRobot Case 850: The Highly Portable 360 Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/case-850-portable-360-turntable): 02:30* Another important part is this white background made of diffusion cloth, a similar material to the front part of a photographic softbox. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sort-to-shelves # SECTION: glossary > sort-to-shelves # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Sort to shelves > PhotoRobot Controls feature that assigns workspace and preset to an item by scanning a shelf code. Also known as: shelves, shelf codes, carts. Category: Software. Sorting to shelves (or carts) in PhotoRobot Controls groups items by photographic properties before the shoot. Each shelf has its own code, workspace and preset, so scanning a shelf code and then an item assigns the right capture and editing settings automatically. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Shelves are created in the PhotoRobot Controls settings with a barcode, name, tags, workspace and preset; typical shelves separate small, medium and large items, or footwear, jewellery and clothing. The Open Sort to Shelves [SmartCode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes) starts the process. ## See on photorobot.com - [Editing images manual: sorting items to shelves](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images) ## Related terms - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [SmartCodes](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/smartcodes): Printed PhotoRobot trigger codes that start software actions when scanned, such as starting a capture sequence. - [Barcode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/barcode): A machine-readable code on a product or label, scanned to identify items without typing. - [Product ingestion](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-ingestion): Receiving and registering products in the studio before photography: scanning, measuring, sorting. - [Workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/workspace): In PhotoRobot Controls, the list of hardware (robots, cameras, lights) used for a specific photoshoot. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 12 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot SmartCodes User Guide and Print-Ready Code Sheet](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing): …– Ready for Shoot 8595676400077 – Start CubiScan Measurement 8595676400084 – Open Sort to Shelves Start Sequence SmartCode. - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Additionally, in CAPP, sorting items to Shelves (or Carts) enables you to simplify the workflow by automatically setting up a workspace and preset after assigning a shelf to an item. - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): Additionally, in CAPP, sorting items to Shelves (or Carts) enables you to simplify the workflow by automatically setting up a workspace and preset after assigning a shelf to an item. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): The use of shelf codes enables sorting items into categories by capture & post-processing presets. - [Practical SmartCode Use in High-Volume Photo Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow): In this case, there is a SmartCode to instruct the system to begin sorting items to shelves (carts), and also a unique shelf code. - [Studio Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/software/studio-workflow): Add rack or shelf codes to the system to sort items into categories with configurable photoshoot settings. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): Sort & Style: Auto assign presets by shelf codes, category, style guides, and staging. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Assigning items to their virtual shelf requires only scanning the product’s SKU followed by scanning the shelf code. - [PhotoRobot Hardware and Software Updates & New Features](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/new-features-updates): Sort items on shelves, and generate barcodes when missing. - [Production Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow): Shooting-list import / modification anytime Scan-IN Weighing and measuring Sorting on shelves Barcode generation and print where missing 2 Preparation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/spinviewer # SECTION: glossary > spinviewer # TYPE: Glossary term --- # SpinViewer > PhotoRobot's embeddable 360 product viewer for spins, adjustable in real time on any device. Also known as: Spin Viewer, 360 spin viewer. Category: Software. SpinViewer is PhotoRobot's 360-degree product viewer. It plays a 360 spin on a web page, lets the shopper rotate and zoom the product, and can be embedded on any product or web page. ## How PhotoRobot uses it SpinViewer settings include object and background colour, rotation speed and direction, and product size. Images are delivered from the cloud in the resolution appropriate to the end-user device through Google's CDN. Item export can add a data.json configuration file for SpinViewer alongside exported spins. ## See on photorobot.com - [360 Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer): PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [360 product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-viewer): Web software that plays a 360 spin and lets the visitor rotate and zoom a product. - [Image hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-hosting): Storing images on a server and delivering them to websites on request. - [Item export](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-export): PhotoRobot Controls function that exports items to local disk or cloud in chosen formats, sizes and file names. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 19 pages. Most relevant: - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): Image Hosting With Spin Viewer. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): The SpinViewer is a 360 degree product viewer that enables real-time control & configuration of a 360 spin on any device. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): …total cost of the entire system, including usage of the integrated PhotoRobot Viewer and SpinViewer for 2D + 3D + 360 image hosting. - [PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting): PhotoRobot’s SpinViewer is a 360 degree product viewer that hosts spin imagery which is compatible on any device. - [Guide to PhotoRobot Controls App Pricing & User Licenses](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-controls-software-prices): It includes information on cost-cutting Backstage User Licenses, with details on image hosting & PhotoRobot SpinViewer. - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): The Gallery step when exporting items functions to add HTML preview, SpinViewer data files, and thumbnail images alongside exported images. - [PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration): Additionally, one of the most fluid and advantageous publishing methods is the integration of PhotoRobot Viewer and Spin Viewer. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): A 360° product viewer (also 360° object viewer or spin viewer) enables users to embed 360° spins on a website. - [Advantages to Using a Visual Product Configurator](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/advantages-product-configurators): Not only does our Cloud Platform come stock with our customizable Spinviewer, it also has unlimited view count and data transfer. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): It supports a gallery viewer, 360 spin viewer, hotspots, annotations, and more for any eCommerce product images. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/still-image # SECTION: glossary > still-image # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Still image > A single photograph of a product, as opposed to a spin, video or 3D model. Also known as: still images, stills, image gallery. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A still image is a single photograph of a product. Product pages usually show a gallery of stills: a hero image, further angles, details and packaging. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot Controls, still images are kept in a Stills folder of the item, separate from the Spin and Video folders. Stills can be captured as separate frames or copied from spin frames by a macro, so the same angle is not photographed twice. ## See on photorobot.com - [Still image output type](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image) ## Related terms - [Hero image](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/hero-image): The main product photo shown first on a product page or listing. - [Packshot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/packshot): A clean, standardised product photo, usually on a white background, often showing the packaging. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. - [Macro](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro): A stored sequence of PhotoRobot Controls commands that automates multi-step capture across folders. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 226 pages. Most relevant: - [Shoe Photography - Still Images, Style Guides and Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/shoe-photography-workflow): Streamline shoe photography and capturing still images of footwear for the web with automated studio solutions and style guides. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): There can be still images, marketing angles, close-ups, 360 spins, video, and 3D product models. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): This includes automation to support still image & packshot photography, 360 product photography, 3D object modeling, product animation, and 360 product video. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): PhotoRobot Controls App automates product photography production processes for still images, 360s, 3D photos, 3D models, and product videos. - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): Click the option (+) Add output format to choose the format to export: Spin (360 / 3D images), Still images, and Images for export. - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): PhotoRobot Touch features automated workflow software for iPhone product photography of handheld still images, detailed shots, and simple 360 spins. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Still images (also stills) are individual photos from specific angles (frames) around an object. - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): The most common example is to designate one folder for a 360 spin (“Spin”), and another for still images (“Stills”). - [PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting): Host eCommerce images in 2D / 3D / 360 with PhotoRobot Viewer, now supporting image galleries alongside spins, hot spots, and panoramas. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): It may also automate back-end operations like the extraction of specific still images: packshots, GS1 imagery, detailed shots and more. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/stl # SECTION: glossary > stl # TYPE: Glossary term --- # STL > A simple 3D format describing only surface geometry as triangles, standard for 3D printing. Also known as: stereolithography format. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. STL (stereolithography) is a simple 3D file format that describes only the surface geometry of an object as a mesh of triangles, without colour, texture or material data. It exists in ASCII and binary forms and is the standard input format for 3D printing. ## How PhotoRobot uses it STL is one of the 3D model formats supported by PhotoRobot Controls, recommended in PhotoRobot's overview for 3D printing rather than for coloured product presentation. ## See on photorobot.com - [Supported 3D model formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats) ## Related terms - [OBJ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/obj): A widely supported, text-based 3D model format storing geometry and UV mapping, with materials in an MTL file. - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. - [Polygon mesh](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#polygon-mesh): The surface of a 3D model, built from connected vertices, edges and faces (usually triangles). ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 5 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats): STL is a file format native to Stereolithography CAD software, and a common format for 3D printing. - [3D Model Photography - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model): Generate virtual models in USDZ format (best for iOS / macOS AR), STL (with universal 3D printing support), or OBJ / MTL (for sharing detailed models with materials). - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): Other formats include STL (universal support for 3D printing), and OBJ / MTL (wide support across platforms, ideal for sharing detailed models & materials). - [3D Object Modeling in PhotoRobot Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo): …to view the output in iOS or on Windows, and export items in various file formats like STL. - [Discover the Frame 360 Turntable with Built-in Robot Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/frame-robot-turntable-demo): Alternatively, some clients use platforms like Blender to convert USDZ files into other formats, such as STL files for 3D printing. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/strobe # SECTION: glossary > strobe # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Strobe > A studio flash that emits a very short, powerful burst of light, freezing motion. Also known as: studio flash, strobe light, flash. Category: Lighting and optics. A strobe is a studio flash unit that emits a very short, intense burst of light synchronised with the camera shutter. Its high output allows small apertures for deep depth of field, and its short flash duration freezes movement. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot supports strobes from Broncolor (Siros S series), FOMEI (Digital Pro X series) and Profoto, controlled from PhotoRobot Controls including energy, cell sensors, modelling light and power. PhotoRobot recommends strobes for larger objects, where LED intensity is insufficient, and they make [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin) possible by freezing the rotating product. ## See on photorobot.com - [Studio lighting overview](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview) - [FOMEI Digital Pro X manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-digital-pro-x) ## Related terms - [Flash duration](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flash-duration): How long a flash burst lasts; a very short flash freezes a moving subject sharply. - [Continuous light](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/continuous-light): Lighting that stays on constantly, typically LED, so the effect is visible before shooting. - [Modelling light](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/modelling-light): A continuous lamp built into a strobe that previews where the flash light will fall. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [DMX](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dmx): A standard control protocol for lighting, used to set the intensity and colour of lights remotely. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 70 pages. Most relevant: - [FOMEI Digital Pro X Studio Flash - PhotoRobot User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-digital-pro-x): …describes the main components and operation instructions for the FOMEI Digital Pro X studio flashes. - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): PhotoRobot Controls provides controls over the robots, cameras and strobes; edits the photographs in real time during the sequence; renders special techniques such as automated cut-out; chromakey… - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): Find the choices for continuous, strobe, and DMX-controlled lighting from Broncolor, FOMEI, and Profoto. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): These include strobes from FOMEI and Broncolor, and any type of LED lights with DMX support. - [Guide to Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography): At PhotoRobot, we use strobe lighting and LED panel lights to attain the perfect lighting from all angles for 360 product photography. - [Setting up a PhotoRobot Workspace - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace): Light systems compatible with PhotoRobot include two types of lights: strobe lights from FOMEI and Broncolor, or any LED lights with DMX support. - [Effective Equipment for 360 Spin Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography): With PhotoRobot, this is accomplished by a combination of strobe lighting and LED panel lights. - [Mastering Product Photography: Shoes and Footwear](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear): The pinpoint triggering of the cameras and the strobes, along with the rotating table allow precise image capturing in short time. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): However, you do need to ensure you have adequate power for the combination of strobes, cameras, and a workstation computer. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): We support Profoto strobes, as well as FOMEI and Broncolor, and any LED lights with DMX control (like RotoLight, ARRI Lighting and others). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/style-guide # SECTION: glossary > style-guide # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Style guide > A document that defines how products of a brand are to be photographed and presented. Also known as: photography style guide. Category: E-commerce and workflow. A photography style guide defines how a brand's products are photographed: angles, framing, background, lighting, styling, number of images and file specifications. It keeps results consistent across photographers, studios and seasons. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In PhotoRobot workflows, items are sorted to shelves by style guide, and the guide's angles and settings are implemented as presets. PhotoRobot's tutorial explains how to create a fashion photography style guide. ## See on photorobot.com - [How to create a fashion photography style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide) ## Related terms - [Image consistency](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-consistency): All product images in a range sharing the same angles, framing, lighting and background. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Marketing angle](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/marketing-angle): A predefined, commercially attractive view of a product used in listings and campaigns. - [Product styling](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/product-styling): Preparing and arranging a product so it looks its best before it is photographed. - [Sort to shelves](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/sort-to-shelves): PhotoRobot Controls feature that assigns workspace and preset to an item by scanning a shelf code. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 33 pages. Most relevant: - [How to Create a Fashion Product Photography Style Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide): In this PhotoRobot tutorial, we share how to create a fashion product photography style guide that converts and ensures consistency. - [Shoe Photography - Still Images, Style Guides and Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/shoe-photography-workflow): …and capturing still images of footwear for the web with automated studio solutions and style guides. - [Professional Tips for Footwear Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes): If following a brand style guide, the stylist will know exactly how to prep the footwear. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): Typically, brands will have a style guide that dictates how to photograph different types of products. - [Photographing Footwear in the PhotoRobot Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/footwear-photography-workflow): Watch a footwear photography demo featuring style guide automation of still images using PhotoRobot’s Case 1300 with Robot Arm expansion. - [Fashion Photography: How to Select the Best Ghost Mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin): Next, with any fashion eCommerce, brands have a style guide to follow. - [How to Photograph Models on a Catwalk: Directing and Poses](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models): …and PR purposes? (Usually, professional studios will have this information from a brand style guide. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Studios configure and save each Preset in the software to automate by style guides, staging, and image overlay. - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): In this way, outputs consistent with a brand style guide are easily achievable for machine operators of nearly any user-level. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): Product prep: observing style guides, setting the scene, hardware & software prep; 3. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/suspension-mode # SECTION: glossary > suspension-mode # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Suspension mode > CUBE configuration that hangs a product in the air and rotates it, for items that cannot stand on a plate. Also known as: object suspension. Category: Hardware. Suspension mode is a configuration of the PhotoRobot CUBE in which the product hangs from the robot and rotates in the air instead of standing on a turntable. It suits items that should be shown without a visible base. ## How PhotoRobot uses it In suspension mode the [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) holds objects of up to 130 kg, such as handbags, chandeliers, light fittings and bicycles, and its rotation can be synchronised with other robots such as the Robotic Arm. Suspension lines and holders can then be removed in post-production with [chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key). ## Related terms - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube): Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. - [Chroma key](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/chroma-key): Removing everything of one specific colour from an image, such as a green screen or a coloured stand. - [Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-turntable): PhotoRobot heavy-duty motorised turntable for machinery, engines and automotive parts, in 40 kg and 200 kg versions. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 41 pages. Most relevant: - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube): This product photography robot has the unique ability to suspend products in air. - [PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact): The Cube functions as a rotating photography platform, in object suspension mode, and as a rotating mannequin torso holder. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): It syncs cameras and lights with the rotation of the turntable, or combines with the Cube to suspend products in air. - [360 Spin Photography of Bicycles with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-spin-photography-bicycles): With bikes, you either have to prop them up, or they need to be suspended in the air. - [Cube Compact - The Universal 360 Photography Robot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/cube-compact-photography-robot): These multi-purpose devices transform into standalone turntables, rotating mannequin mounts, or to suspend items in air using suspension mode. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): The Cube helps with product staging, such as to suspend items in air, or for installation with quick-exchange mannequins. - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): This allows for suspending items (or parts of items) above the turntable using the Cube with nylon strings to stage and rotate items for 360 photography. - [PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide): Note: In combination with the Centerless Table, the PhotoRobot Cube is mounted to a top portal in suspension mode over the turntable. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): It provides a system for quick mannequin exchange, or it can be installed upside-down above a turntable in suspension mode. - [Introducing the CUBE for Automated Photoshoots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube): It is capable of shooting products that need to sit on a turntable, or products that need to be suspended in air like bags, chandeliers, and light fittings. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/synchrobox # SECTION: glossary > synchrobox # TYPE: Glossary term --- # SynchroBox > PhotoRobot multi-camera controller that fires each camera with its own advance; up to 8 cameras per unit, units can be linked. Also known as: Multi-Camera Controller. Category: Hardware. The SynchroBox is PhotoRobot's multi-camera controller. When two or more cameras are used, it fires each camera's shutter with its own advance so that all of them capture the desired angle despite different shutter lags. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The SynchroBox is a rack-mount device; one unit connects up to 8 cameras, and several units can be stacked and linked into a cluster when a set-up needs more. It receives the shutter pulse from the control unit and, using the shutter lag value entered for each camera, triggers each shutter early enough during non-stop rotation. It is required whenever a PhotoRobot system works with more than one camera, for example the [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam). Because it is electronics rather than mechanics, it is not tied to the MultiCam arch: linked units can fire dozens of cameras placed around a subject to freeze a moment in a [bullet-time](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/bullet-time) shot. ## See on photorobot.com - [SynchroBox setup user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup) ## Related terms - [Shutter lag](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-lag): The delay between triggering a camera and the moment the image is actually exposed. - [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multicam): PhotoRobot multi-camera arch that captures several elevations at once for multi-row 360 and 3D photography. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Control unit](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/control-unit): The computer inside or beside every PhotoRobot that drives its motors, triggers cameras and connects it to the network. - [Bullet time](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/bullet-time): Effect in which many cameras around a subject capture the same instant, so a frozen moment can be viewed from a moving viewpoint. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 5 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot SynchroBox - Functionality & Setup User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup): …technical documentation describes the functionality and setup of the PhotoRobot SynchroBox to synchronize two or more cameras. - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): …Table HD rack with control units and router Control Unit G6, Laser Box, Switch Box, and SynchroBox Internal cable routing through left and right stemples Centerless Table background holder console… - [PhotoRobot Control Units - Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller): The Multi-Camera Controller (SynchroBox) provides precise synchronization of multiple cameras during the “fast spin” rapid photography method. - [PhotoRobot Carpet Studio with Carousel - User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carpet-studio): Power on the SynchroBox. - [Introducing: PhotoRobot's MultiCam for Multi-Row Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobots-multicam): Then, for even more camera support, there’s PhotoRobot’s Synchro Box that can be used in combination with the MultiCam system. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tethered-shooting # SECTION: glossary > tethered-shooting # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Tethered shooting > Shooting with the camera connected to a computer, which controls settings and receives every image directly. Also known as: tethered capture, tethering, tethered photography. Category: Photography techniques. Tethered shooting means the camera is connected to a computer, by cable or wirelessly, while photographing. The software can change camera settings, trigger the shutter and show live view, and each image is transferred straight to the computer for review and processing. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls controls Canon cameras over USB through the Canon SDK, setting aperture, shutter speed and ISO and downloading and renaming images automatically. [PhotoRobot Touch](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch) uses tethered shooting with a wire shutter and adaptor to capture simple 360 spins with an iPhone. ## Related terms - [Canon EDSDK](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/canon-edsdk): Canon's software development kit for controlling EOS cameras from a computer over USB. - [Live View](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/live-view): A real-time preview of the camera image on a computer screen, used to frame and focus before capture. - [Shutter release cable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/shutter-release-cable): A cable that fires the camera from an external device, such as a robot's control unit. - [PhotoRobot Touch](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-touch): PhotoRobot's iPhone app for handheld product photos, detail shots and simple 360 spins inside the PhotoRobot workflow. - [Automated image capture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-image-capture): Camera triggering synchronised with studio hardware and software, without manual intervention. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 11 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): Spin mode (for the tethered shooting of automated spin photography) 3. - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): Produce batch handheld still photos and detailed shots in the palm of your hand, or simple 360 spins via tethered shooting. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): It enables unlimited & unrestricted handheld photography, operation by template-based workflow wizards, or the tethered capture of basic 360 spins. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Alternatively, users can access Cloud services over the internet, while cameras connect to the system via USB for tethered shooting. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): With some systems, you simply connect an iPhone, and with tethered shooting capture product photos. - [PhotoRobot PWS](https://www.photorobot.com/pws): Imaging chain — cameras, optics and lighting: Cameras & tethering — Canon natively, 3rd-party via watch folder; offline/disconnect/focus/liveview/flash-not-firing diagnostics. - [Camera Configuration - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-configuration): (Note: If using a camera tethered to EOS Utility and in Live View, EOS Utility also stops the flash from firing.) 3. - [What is Automated Image Capture?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-image-capture): The software communicates directly with the camera's internal computer via USB tethering and manufacturer SDKs. - [Explore the "Support 2.0" Update in Controls App 2.15.0](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-support-version): …infuriatingly simple problems: either an IP address misconfigured by IT, or a high-speed tethering cable that someone simply stepped on. - [PhotoRobot Celebrates 20 Years in Automated Photography Innovation](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/20-years-automated-photography): Touch enables the capture of handheld still images & detailed shots, or the tethered capture of simple 360 spins. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/throughput # SECTION: glossary > throughput # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Throughput > How many products a studio or workstation finishes per hour or shift. Also known as: studio throughput, production speed. Category: E-commerce and workflow. Throughput is the number of products a studio or workstation completes per unit of time, for example per hour or per shift, including capture, processing and delivery. It is the key capacity measure of high-volume photography. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot works with a production cadence of roughly one product per minute per workstation, which it states amounts to nearly 500 items per 8-hour shift. It notes that logistics and preparation often take longer than photography itself, which is why its software covers in-studio logistics too. ## See on photorobot.com - [Highly productive product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/productivity) ## Related terms - [Production line](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/production-line): Several connected workstations that process products in stages, like an assembly line for images. - [Takt time](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#takt-time): The available production time divided by the required output, i.e. the pace one product must be finished at. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Robotic workstation](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-workstation): One complete automated photography station: robot, cameras, lights and controlling software. - [Time to market](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/time-to-market): The time between a product arriving and its listing going live online. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 28 pages. Most relevant: - [What is Scalable Product Photography?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-scalable-product-photography): …utilizes hardware standardization and software automation to increase image production throughput without proportional labor increases. - [Studio Automation Solutions for E-Commerce Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation-solutions-for-ecommerce): Automation solutions allow studios to better utilize their teams’ time, to increase throughput, and, ultimately, to reduce overall costs. - [Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview): These brands allow PhotoRobot customers to focus on increasing throughput without any risk of compromising quality due to poor lighting. - [Cube Compact - The Universal 360 Photography Robot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/cube-compact-photography-robot): But what makes the Cube Compact different from other versions? Read ahead for a behind-the-scenes look at the new design and higher throughput of our universal 360 product photography robot. - [How to Improve Workflow in a Product Photography Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio): …any product photography studio revolves around many moving parts to improve efficiency, throughput and overall workflow. - [Macro PI - From Assistant to Fully Automated Pipeline](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action): Achieve unprecedented studio throughput via a fully automated operational layer with Macro PI Action in PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) software. - [Enhancing Operator Ergonomics on Your Photo Studio Floor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-operator-ergonomics): These tools help to accelerate capture workflows and enhance throughput on the production floor. - [Explore the "Support 2.0" Update in Controls App 2.15.0](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-support-version): The result is one product per minute, with a throughput capacity of 500+ items per shift. - [Guide to 360 Product Photography for E-Commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-360-product-photography-for-e-commerce): With the right 360 product photography workstation, e-commerce stores can increase throughput and overall efficiency. - [Make PhotoRobot Controls Look Like Your Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/productive-studio-management-software): As project and item lists are the control surface of every PhotoRobot studio, their design must maximize throughput. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/tiff # SECTION: glossary > tiff # TYPE: Glossary term --- # TIFF > A flexible, often uncompressed image format used in print and archiving. Also known as: TIF. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) is a flexible raster format, often uncompressed or losslessly compressed, used in print production and archiving. Files are large and not suitable for display on the web. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls can export TIFF, but its item export manual describes the format as rarely needed, kept for compatibility with legacy systems, and not recommended. ## Related terms - [JPEG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/jpeg): The most common lossy image format for photographs; small files, no transparency. - [PNG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/png): A lossless image format that supports transparency; larger files than JPEG. - [RAW file](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/raw-file): The unprocessed sensor data saved by a camera, with maximum editing latitude. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 4 pages. Most relevant: - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): For each output, select which file format to download images in: JPG, PNG, WebP, or TIFF. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): For each output, select which file format to download images in: JPG, PNG, WEBP, or TIFF. - [360-Degree Product Viewers for E-Commerce Businesses](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-viewers-for-e-commerce-businesses): TIFF and PNG file formats are simply too large, and they negatively impact page performance with spin images. - [A Quick Guide to 360 Product Photography for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon): For vendors, Amazon has guidelines on their product image requirements: TIFF (.tif/.tiff), JPEG (.jpeg/.jpg), GIF (.gif) and PNG (.png) format Image pixel dimensions of at least 1000 or larger in… --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/time-to-market # SECTION: glossary > time-to-market # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Time to market > The time between a product arriving and its listing going live online. Also known as: time-to-web, time to web. Category: E-commerce and workflow. In e-commerce, time to market (or time to web) is the time between a product becoming available and its listing, with images, going live online. Slow photography and editing delay sales, especially for seasonal ranges. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot output examples state production times including time-to-web, for example 40 seconds for 36 images and a spin of a perfume bottle. Automatic publishing and export feeds put the first images of an order online while the rest is still being photographed. ## Related terms - [Automatic publishing](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/automatic-publishing): Making finished images available online immediately after capture and processing, without manual upload. - [Throughput](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/throughput): How many products a studio or workstation finishes per hour or shift. - [Export feed](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/export-feed): A machine-readable XML or JSON list of items and image URLs that other systems read automatically. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 32 pages. Most relevant: - [Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software): Improve product content ‘time-to-market’ and thus increase sales overall. - [7 Advantages to 360 Product Viewers for your Website](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-advantages-360-product-viewers-for-websites): …from product presentation to customer satisfaction, conversions, engagement and time-to-market. - [Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography): Automation serves to speed up photography, simplify post-processing, and streamline content time-to-web. - [Digital Asset Management for Large-Scale Manufacturers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers): They likewise free up human resources, reduce operational costs, and improve product content ‘time-to-market’. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): In this way, the product photography studio realizes higher production speeds, greater accuracy, and reduced product content ‘time-to-market’. - [Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation): Its design enables studios to automate repeatable tasks to reduce costs, production times, and content time-to-market. - [Photo Studio Equipment & Software: Today’s Industry Leaders](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-photo-studio-manufacturers): Their mission is to reduce product content time-to-market by automating still & 360 product photography hardware & software processes. - [Still Product Photography - PhotoRobot Output Examples](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image): …colors, and details from multiple angles in less time, and less effort for faster time-to-web, higher conversions, and fewer returns. - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): …automation (RPA) aims to reduce operational costs, labor requirements, and content time-to-market for photography agencies and production halls. - [What is a Product Imaging Workflow?](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-a-product-imaging-workflow): This consolidation significantly reduces the "time-to-web" for large e-commerce catalogs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/top-view # SECTION: glossary > top-view # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Top view > A photo taken from directly or steeply above the product. Also known as: top-view, overhead view, bird's-eye view. Category: Photography techniques. A top view is a photograph taken from directly or steeply above the product. It shows shape, layout and the upper surface, and is a standard view in GS1 image sets and for products such as shoes and food packaging. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot camera arms and the MultiCam have a top-view range of 0° to 90°, so top views are captured in the same sequence as the spin rather than in a separate set-up. ## Related terms - [Turn and swing angles](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turn-and-swing-angles): PhotoRobot terms for the rotation angle of the product (turn) and the vertical angle of the camera (swing). - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multicam): PhotoRobot multi-camera arch that captures several elevations at once for multi-row 360 and 3D photography. - [Marketing angle](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/marketing-angle): A predefined, commercially attractive view of a product used in listings and campaigns. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 39 pages. Most relevant: - [MULTICAM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam): Simultaneously photograph marketing angles and top views in a 360° rotational range for multi-row 3D photography within seconds. - [ROBOTIC ARM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm): Elevation manual motor-assisted (SW controlled) Elevation – range 300 mm / 11.8“ 400 mm / 15.8“ Top view range 0°–90° Top view range – minimum step 1° Radius from centre of rotation – short arm 620 –… - [TURNING PLATFORM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform): Elevation Motor-assisted (SW-controlled) Elevation – range 370 mm (14.6") Top view range 0° – 90° Top view range – increment 7.5° Number of positions for mounting DSLR 13 Radius from centre of… - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): Spins sometimes may also include multiple rows of elevation (3D spins) to capture bottom and top views, allowing for viewing along a vertical as well as horizontal axis. - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): This includes the simultaneous capture of marketing angles and top views in a 360-degree rotational range. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): For this, there is now also an optional, secondary 90-degree camera mount for photographing top views. - [PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm for 360 Object Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robotic-arm-360-object-photography): Also, the number of top view angles is not limited in any way, so it’s possible to capture objects in a single series of photographs in the 0-90° range, or to snap dozens or even hundreds of photos… - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Photographers can then capture complete 3D experiences including top views, as well as photos to generate eCommerce 3D models. - [PhotoRobot FAQs](https://www.photorobot.com/faq): In this way, we can also take a range of top-view photos. - [3D Object Modeling in PhotoRobot Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo): The powerful algorithms use photos including top views, bottom views, and side views to generate the 3D object model. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-background # SECTION: glossary > transparent-background # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Transparent background > An image whose background pixels are transparent, so the product can be placed on any colour or layout. Also known as: transparency. Category: Photography techniques. An image with a transparent background stores the product with a transparency mask (alpha channel) instead of a solid background. It can then be placed on any colour or design, which is useful for marketing layouts and configurators. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls can set the background to transparent in one click. Because JPEG does not support transparency, transparent images are exported as PNG or WebP; when a transparent image is exported as JPG, a background colour can be chosen. ## Related terms - [Alpha channel](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/alpha-channel): An extra image channel that stores the transparency of every pixel. - [PNG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/png): A lossless image format that supports transparency; larger files than JPEG. - [WebP](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webp): Google's web image format with efficient lossy and lossless compression and transparency. - [Background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal): Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 50 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Note: In addition to standard tools for automatic whitening of the background (automatic tuning to pure white 255,255,255), or providing transparent background, the PhotoRobot_controls tool also… - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Transparency. - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): PNG files can also be served on a transparent background, however file sizes are much larger than JPG and used very rarely on the web. - [Present Products with Style - PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio): Produce high-quality still product photos and 360 product video on pure white or transparent backgrounds. - [How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model): Other issues we noticed are working with transparency, and when scanning smooth or uniform surfaces. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): These make it easy to photograph products on a white background, or to automate background removal for a transparent background. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Thus, grouping items together by size, shape, color, and transparency is where every project begins. - [Guide to Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography): Higher quality images and the perfect product photography helps brands and retailers establish trust, provide product transparency, and, perhaps most importantly, to develop customer and community… - [PhotoRobot_Controls: Auto-Centering 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography): Transparency — Set transparency in one click and make changes later in the Spin Viewer settings. - [PhotoRobot’s Case for Automated 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography): Operators can even automate repeatable tasks for 360 photography of objects of similar size, shape, or transparency. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-mannequin # SECTION: glossary > transparent-mannequin # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Transparent mannequin > A clear acrylic mannequin that interferes little with the colour of garments and is easy to remove in editing. Also known as: acrylic mannequin. Category: Hardware. A transparent mannequin is a clear plastic or acrylic form used to display clothing and accessories. Because light passes through it, it barely affects the colours and design of the garment and is simple to remove in post-production. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot offers 3/4 body transparent mannequins in male (TRM34), female (TRF34) and children's (TRK7) versions made of hardened acrylic, with support attachment points on the leg, neck or waist. ## See on photorobot.com - [Ghost and transparent mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) ## Related terms - [Ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin): A mannequin with removable parts, used to photograph garments so the mannequin can be made invisible in the image. - [Ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ghost-mannequin-effect): An editing technique that makes the mannequin disappear so the garment looks worn by an invisible body. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 5 pages. Most relevant: - [Female 3/4 Torso Transparent Mannequin TRF34](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/female-transparent-mannequin-bust-trf34): 3/4 female transparent mannequin of hardened plastic material with chrome neck and support attachments on one leg, the neck, or waist Mannequin ID: TRF34 Type: Three-Quarter Torso Generation: 1st… - [Kids 3/4 Transparent Mannequin (4 Y.O.) TRK4](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/kid-three-quarter-transparent-mannequin-4yo-trk4): 3/4 kids transparent mannequin of hardened acrylic with chrome neck ring, shoulders, half legs and multiple centering pin mounts Mannequin ID: TRK4 Type: Three-Quarter Torso Generation: 1st generation… - [Male 3/4 Body Transparent Mannequin TRM34](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/male-transparent-mannequin-bust-trm34): 3/4 male transparent mannequin of hardened plastic material with chrome neck and possibility of support attachment to the leg, neck, or waist Mannequin ID: TRM34 Type: Three-Quarter Torso Model: Male… - [Kids 3/4 Transparent Mannequin (7 Y.O.) TRK7](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequin/kids-transparent-mannequin-7yo-trk7): 3/4 kids transparent mannequin of durable acrylic material with chrome neck ring and centering attachments on the leg, neck, or waist Mannequin ID: TRK7 Type: Three-Quarter Torso Model: Child, Unisex… - [PhotoRobot Premium Ghost Mannequin Product Line](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins): Take advantage of transparent 3/4 body mannequins for in-house photography of male, female, and children’s clothing. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turn-and-swing-angles # SECTION: glossary > turn-and-swing-angles # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Turn and swing angles > PhotoRobot terms for the rotation angle of the product (turn) and the vertical angle of the camera (swing). Also known as: turn angle, swing angle, elevation angle. Category: Photography techniques. In PhotoRobot Controls, the turn angle is the rotational angle of the product on the turntable and the swing angle is the vertical position of the camera on its circular trajectory, in other words the elevation from which it looks at the product. Together they define each frame of a spin or still. ## How PhotoRobot uses it A spin folder is defined by the number of frames per rotation and by rows at different swing angles; still frames are defined by a turn and a swing angle. Editing operations can be scoped to a specific swing angle, and quick-angle presets store up to four favourite positions for Turn and Swing robots. ## See on photorobot.com - [Getting started: stills folders](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started) - [Capturing images manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images) ## Related terms - [Multi-row 360](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/multi-row-360): A 360 spin captured at several camera elevations, so the viewer can rotate the product horizontally and vertically. - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [Top view](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/top-view): A photo taken from directly or steeply above the product. - [Capture sequence](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/capture-sequence): The programmed order of angles, camera triggers and movements a robot performs to photograph an item. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 15 pages. Most relevant: - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Use Add row (2) to specify capture of additional rows from a different swing angle (the vertical angle from which the camera points at the object). - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): Select scopes either for the entire folder spin, for a specific swing angle, or for the current image only. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): This will include a turn angle (the rotational angle) and a swing angle (the vertical position of the camera along a circular trajectory). - [PhotoRobot Macros Configuration and Functionality Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/macros-config-functions): UseCopy images to specify source and destination folders of specific swing or turn angles to copy. - [How to Create Video in PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/create-video-photorobot-controls-user-support): These include operations to start / stop recording, pause / rotate turntable, capture specific turn / swing angle, and more. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): This includes the turn angle (the rotational angle) and swing angle (the vertical position of a camera along a circular trajectory). - [Enhancing Operator Ergonomics on Your Photo Studio Floor](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-operator-ergonomics): Each saves your favorite angles for PhotoRobot Turn and Swing robots with configurable quick-preset buttons. - [Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos): For example, editing operations may apply to an entire folder, to only specific swing angles, or to a single image. - [Pro Tips: Advanced Photo Editing Tools and Techniques](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools): Set the scope across an entire folder, to specific swing angles, or for an individual image. - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): ${turnIndex} - These are similar to turn angles but use an index within the turn (example: If a spin has 24 frames, the turn index is from 001 to 024). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turning-platform # SECTION: glossary > turning-platform # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Turning Platform > PhotoRobot heavy-duty turntable for furniture and machinery, with plates up to 280 cm and a 1500 kg load capacity. Also known as: Turning Platform HT, Turning Platform HT / RotoPower. Category: Hardware. The Turning Platform is a PhotoRobot heavy-duty motorised turntable for large or heavy products such as furniture, garden machinery and quad bikes. It rotates the object in sync with the camera for automated 360 photography of single-row and multi-row spins. ## How PhotoRobot uses it The Turning Platform has a load capacity of 1500 kg and plate diameters of up to 280 cm, with zero-clearance transmission and high torque. It comes in a standard version and a High Torque (HT) / RotoPower version, which brings mains power into the rotating plate ([RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower)) so appliances can be switched on while they rotate. Optional mannequin stands adapt it to fashion photography, it combines with the [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm), and the HT / RotoPower version can be transformed into the [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk), an infinite runway for filming models. ## See on photorobot.com - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform) - [Turning Platform manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/turning-platform) ## Related terms - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-catwalk): PhotoRobot rotating platform with a treadmill belt that lets models walk an infinite runway for 360 fashion video. - [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/robotic-arm): PhotoRobot motorised camera arm that moves the camera vertically around a product for multi-row and 3D capture. - [Zero-clearance transmission](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/zero-clearance-transmission): A drive without mechanical play between motor and plate, so the plate stops exactly where commanded. - [Vignette](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/vignette): Darkening or lightening towards the edges of an image, either a lens fault or a deliberate effect. - [RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower): PhotoRobot option that brings mains power into the rotating part of a robot, so a product can stay switched on while it turns. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 45 pages. Most relevant: - [Turning Platform User Guide - Standard, HT / RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/turning-platform): The PhotoRobot Turning Platform User Guide contains user information for the standard and the HT / RotoPower versions of the device. - [TURNING PLATFORM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform): The Turning Platform is a heavy-duty, motorized photography turntable to rotate large or heavy objects for 360-degree product photography. - [PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turning-platform-360-product-photography): …an extensive range of accessories and state-of-the-art automation software, PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform for 360 product photography makes a welcome addition to any photography studio shooting heavy… - [PhotoRobot Turning Platform - System Design & Functionality](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/turning-platform-design-functionality): Watch a video overview of PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform for 360 product photography of heavy and light objects, large or small. - [Photographing Quads and Dirt Bikes on the Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/turning-platform-demo-quads-dirt-bikes): Watch footage of PhotoRobot Studio using the Turning Platform to photograph 360s of dirt bikes and quads for a customer. - [PhotoRobot: Robots Designed for Quick and Easy Assembly](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robots-for-quick-and-easy-assembly): …our robots in your workspace, looking specifically at how to set up PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform and Robotic Arm. - [360 Degree Spin Photography of Dirt Bikes and Quads](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/spin-photography-dirt-bikes-and-quads): For us, this photoshoot was the perfect opportunity to show off our high-torque Turning_Platform. - [How to Photograph Furniture - Logistics, Prep and Execution](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-photograph-furniture): Both the Turning_Platform and Carousel motorized turntables take up minimal space in any product photography setup, studio, warehouse or production hall. - [How Multiple PhotoRobot Modules Combine - the Flexi_Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/flexible-studio-modules): Discover configurations of the Case 1300 photography turntable, the Turning Platform, PhotoRobot’s Cube, and the Robotic Arm. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): TURNING PLATFORM A heavy-duty turntable photography solution for large and / or heavy products like furniture and machinery. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/unwrap # SECTION: glossary > unwrap # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Unwrap > PhotoRobot Controls tool that flattens text wrapping around cylindrical packaging so OCR can read it. Also known as: unwrap tool, label unwrapping. Category: Software. Unwrapping turns the curved surface of a cylindrical product, such as a bottle or can, into one flat image of the whole label. In PhotoRobot Controls the Unwrap tool works with OCR to read text that wraps around the product. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot uses Unwrap together with [OCR](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ocr) to extract weights, ingredient lists, nutritional information and other on-package data, which is attached to the images as metadata in parallel with GS1 image production. ## See on photorobot.com - [OCR in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition) - [OCR and GS1 image capture video](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/ocr-gs1-image-capture-features) ## Related terms - [OCR (optical character recognition)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/ocr): Technology that converts text in an image into machine-readable text. - [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/gs1-image-standards): GS1 guidelines for how product images are captured, named and exchanged in retail supply chains. - [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-spin): An interactive sequence of images of a rotating product that the viewer can turn with the mouse or a finger. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 5 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot OCR and GS1 Image Capture of Grocery Products](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/ocr-gs1-image-capture-features): The OCR feature with the Unwrap tool makes it easy to read, extract, and edit text on labels. - [Grocery Product Photography Solutions and OCR](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/grocery-product-photography): It makes the text nearly impossible to read, but with PhotoRobot’s “unwrap” tool this is no problem. - [Optical Character Recognition (OCR) in PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition): OCR works in combination with the Unwrap tool in CAPP to read and extract text on packaging and labels, including text that wraps around cylindrical objects. - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): Find the rolled white background paper, and unwrap it. - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): Locate and unwrap the 2 x bow holders from the protective bubble wrap. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/usdz # SECTION: glossary > usdz # TYPE: Glossary term --- # USDZ > Pixar-developed packaged 3D format with native support on Apple devices, widely used for AR. Also known as: Universal Scene Description Zip. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. USDZ (Universal Scene Description Zip) is a packaged 3D file format based on Pixar's Universal Scene Description. It bundles geometry, materials and textures in one file, is optimised for real-time rendering, and is natively supported for augmented reality on iOS and macOS, including in Safari. ## How PhotoRobot uses it USDZ is one of the 3D model formats PhotoRobot Controls produces through its Apple Object Capture integration. PhotoRobot's format overview recommends it for AR on iOS and macOS, noting limited native support on Windows and Android. ## See on photorobot.com - [Supported 3D model formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats) ## Related terms - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. - [Augmented reality (AR)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/augmented-reality): Overlaying digital content, such as a 3D product model, on the live camera view of the real world. - [OBJ](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/obj): A widely supported, text-based 3D model format storing geometry and UV mapping, with materials in an MTL file. - [glTF / GLB](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#gltf): Open Khronos standard for transmitting 3D models efficiently on the web; GLB is its single-file binary form. - [Apple Object Capture](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/apple-object-capture): Apple's photogrammetry technology that creates a 3D model from a series of photos. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 8 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats): The USDZ file format is the most common format for displaying 3D objects across various platforms and devices. - [3D Object Modeling in PhotoRobot Workflows](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo): In turn, the 3D models in USDZ format are often web-ready for optimization on 3D hosting platforms like Emersya or Sketchfab. - [Discover the Frame 360 Turntable with Built-in Robot Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/frame-robot-turntable-demo): …the same time, in just a few clicks of the mouse, it’s possible to create 3D models in USDZ format from the machine’s outputs. - [How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model): We then used Object Capture to scan our photos and produce a USDZ file. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): With software like Apple’s Object Capture, the 3D model is produced in USDZ file format. - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): The most popular is USDZ, which is best for iOS / macOS AR (although has limited support elsewhere). - [3D Model Photography - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model): Generate virtual models in USDZ format (best for iOS / macOS AR), STL (with universal 3D printing support), or OBJ / MTL (for sharing detailed models with materials). - [Discover PhotoRobot C-Class 360 Turntables in Action](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/c-class-turntables-demo): In the end though, and usually in under a few minutes, the software can render a digital model from photos in USDZ file format. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/vignette # SECTION: glossary > vignette # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Vignette > Darkening or lightening towards the edges of an image, either a lens fault or a deliberate effect. Also known as: vignetting. Category: Lighting and optics. A vignette is a gradual change in brightness towards the edges of an image. As a lens fault (vignetting) it darkens the corners; as an editing effect it draws the eye to the centre or evens out the background. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls has a Vignette function with a configurable gradient and shape for painting image backgrounds, which PhotoRobot notes is especially useful with the Turning Platform. ## See on photorobot.com - [Image editing tools: vignette](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) ## Related terms - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turning-platform): PhotoRobot heavy-duty turntable for furniture and machinery, with plates up to 280 cm and a 1500 kg load capacity. - [White background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background): A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. - [Post-production](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/post-production): Everything done to images after capture: editing, background removal, cropping, export. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 2 pages. Most relevant: - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): Use the Vignette tool to mask picture edges with a configurable gradient. - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): Especially useful with the Turning Platform, use the Vignette function to draw the eye towards the center of an image. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-catwalk # SECTION: glossary > virtual-catwalk # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Virtual Catwalk > PhotoRobot rotating platform with a treadmill belt that lets models walk an infinite runway for 360 fashion video. Also known as: Catwalk, 360 catwalk. Category: Hardware. The Virtual Catwalk is a PhotoRobot motorised turntable combined with a treadmill belt. A model walks on the belt while the platform rotates, so a fixed camera records a runway video with a flying camera effect in a small studio space. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Treadmill speed (up to 10 km/h) and rotation are adjustable remotely, the station has a 2.8 m plate and a load capacity of 1500 kg, and it can be installed into the floor so it is level with the working area. It is built on the Turning Platform HT / RotoPower: the rotating electrical joint of [RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower) powers the belt motor through a frequency inverter and carries the two logic signals that set the belt speed. With the belt stopped or removed, it serves as a platform for photographing models or objects. ## See on photorobot.com - [Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk) - [Virtual Catwalk user guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/virtual-catwalk-user-guide) ## Related terms - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turning-platform): PhotoRobot heavy-duty turntable for furniture and machinery, with plates up to 280 cm and a 1500 kg load capacity. - [Flying camera effect](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/flying-camera-effect): Video in which the camera seems to fly around the product, made by combining rotation with camera movement. - [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/360-product-video): A video of a rotating product, optionally with camera movement, produced on an automated turntable. - [On-model photography](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/on-model-photography): Photographing garments or accessories worn by a live model. - [RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/rotopower): PhotoRobot option that brings mains power into the rotating part of a robot, so a product can stay switched on while it turns. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 27 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk First Use Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/virtual-catwalk-user-guide): …information for the basic understanding and functional operation of the PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk. - [CATWALK](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk): Think of PhotoRobot’s Virtual_Catwalk as a motorized turntable combined with an infinite runway for filming models and shooting fashion photography. - [How to Film Models on the Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models): Get tips and strategies on how to film models on the Virtual Catwalk in this eCommerce fashion product photography tutorial. - [PhotoRobot’s Catwalk for Apparel Photography and Online Fashion Shows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/catwalk-for-apparel-photography-and-online-fashion-shows): Thanks to PhotoRobot’s Virtual Catwalk, clients can transform any small space available into a professional-looking studio for apparel photography and online fashion shows. - [How to Photograph Models on a Catwalk: Directing and Poses](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models): Improve your model photography on the Virtual Catwalk with these essential tips on directing and posing models in the studio. - [PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk - Overview & Hardware Design](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/virtual-catwalk-rotating-platform): Learn how PhotoRobot’s Virtual Catwalk functions as an innovative rotating platform for on-model fashion product video & photography. - [Turning Platform User Guide - Standard, HT / RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/turning-platform): Transformable HT / RotoPower version into the Virtual Catwalk for photographing and filming live models. - [PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turning-platform-360-product-photography): It’s even possible to use the Turning Platform in conjunction with PhotoRobot’s Catwalk to turn any studio space into a compact, infinite catwalk for shooting live models. - [Product Photography Equipment - Overview](https://www.photorobot.com/robots): CATWALK A rotating 360 platform for capturing fashion videos and model product photography in 360 degrees. - [Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy): This includes available training courses in five specialty domains (OCR, 3D modeling, PINK - Clinical, Virtual Catwalk, and carpet photography). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/virtual-reality # SECTION: glossary > virtual-reality # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Virtual reality (VR) > A fully computer-generated environment experienced through a headset. Also known as: VR, virtual reality. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. Virtual reality (VR) immerses the user in a fully computer-generated environment, usually through a headset. Product 3D models can be placed in virtual showrooms or experiences. ## Related terms - [Augmented reality (AR)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/augmented-reality): Overlaying digital content, such as a 3D product model, on the live camera view of the real world. - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 25 pages. Most relevant: - [Emersya: Interactive Product Experiences in 3D, AR and VR](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/emersya-product-experiences-in-3d-ar-and-vr): …an online publishing platform for fully interactive product experiences in 3D, AR, and VR. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): 3D eCommerce deploys 3D modeling for online product visualization, product configuration, and VR / AR to bolster digital marketing and sales. - [Professional Product Photography for E-Commerce Websites](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/professional-photography-for-websites): Moreover, these shoppers are inundated with professional product images like 360 packshots, 3D models and even AR / VR experiences, and consumers now expect nothing less. - [3D Model Photography - Example Outputs by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model): PhotoRobot digitizes 3D model photography in a single click for AR / VR optimization, and for 3D printing! Digitize product photos into virtual 3D object models in a single click Automate… - [About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation): …create interactive object experiences, product configurators, and assets for augmented & virtual reality applications. - [PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats): OBJ files contain the 3D models to optimize for game engines, and for sharing on virtual reality (VR) / 3D object visualization platforms. - [360-Degree Photography and 3D Models for E-Commerce: Why both?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-photography-3d-models-for-e-commerce): Afterall, the future of eCommerce photography is now moving towards augmented and virtual reality enabled product showcases, immersive and engaging online storefronts, interactive web experiences, and… - [3D Product Photography for eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-product-photography-ecommerce): Keep reading to discover more on the current trends in 3D product photography for e-commerce, 360° spins and 3D models for AR / VR experiences. - [Challenges to Mass Adoption for AR Shopping Apps](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/challenges-ar-shopping-apps): Most consumers still want to see products with their own eyes before making a purchase, so AR and VR apps for shopping are starting to bridge this gap by using shoppers’ GPS data to promote nearby… - [Effective Equipment for 360 Spin Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography): …shots to 360° spins, as well as for scanning products to construct 3D models for AR / VR experiences. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/visual-product-configurator # SECTION: glossary > visual-product-configurator # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Visual product configurator > An interactive tool that shows a product changing in real time as the shopper chooses options. Also known as: product configurator, 3D configurator, 2D configurator. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. A visual product configurator lets shoppers customise a product, such as colour, material or components, and see the result immediately as an image, spin or 3D model. Configurators built from photography combine pre-shot variants; 3D configurators render a model in real time. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot's blog discusses 2D and 3D configuration software and when a business needs a configurator. The PhotoRobot Viewer includes a custom Carpet and Flooring Visualizer developed with Breno that lets shoppers swap carpet designs in a virtual room. ## See on photorobot.com - [Visual product configurators for e-commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce) - [2D and 3D product configuration software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/2d-3d-product-configuration-software) ## Related terms - [3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/3d-model): A digital three-dimensional representation of a product, made of geometry and textures, viewable from any angle. - [Augmented reality (AR)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/augmented-reality): Overlaying digital content, such as a 3D product model, on the live camera view of the real world. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-viewer): PhotoRobot's hosted viewer for image galleries, 360 spins, hotspots and panoramas on websites and e-shops. - [Transparent background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-background): An image whose background pixels are transparent, so the product can be placed on any colour or layout. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 27 pages. Most relevant: - [Visual Product Configurators for E-Commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce): There are 2 types of visual product configurators in e-commerce: 2D product visualizers and 3D configurators. - [Advantages to Using a Visual Product Configurator](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/advantages-product-configurators): The advantages to using visual product configurators are numerous in e-commerce, whether it’s for B2C or B2B operations. - [Does your Business Need a Visual Product Configurator?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/do-you-need-a-visual-product-configurator): Visual product configurators allow businesses to enrich 2D / 3D photorealistic imagery with exploding views, product animations, annotations, and interactive customization features. - [Examples of 2D and 3D Product Configuration Software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/2d-3d-product-configuration-software): 2D and 3D product configurators are great for companies who sell highly customizable products. - [Which Businesses Benefit from 3D Product Photography Platforms?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/which-businesses-3d-product-photography-platforms): …platforms enable businesses to generate fully interactive product experiences and configurators for e-commerce and retail. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): We’ll even provide some sunglasses photography ideas and examples for product presentation, including: 360 spins, 3D models, and product configurators. - [Emersya: Interactive Product Experiences in 3D, AR and VR](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/emersya-product-experiences-in-3d-ar-and-vr): Think: 3D product configurators for highly customizable products, AR / VR product experiences, or fully digitized collection items and objects of study. - [3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce): The software composites photos into a digital model for use with 3D product viewers, product configurators, and AR / VR. - [Examples of 3D and 360 Product Viewers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/examples-3d-and-360-product-viewers): This is oftentimes in fully interactive consumer experiences like 360-degree product spins, 3D models and configurators. - [Using a Macro Lens for Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography): For even better results, support your macro lens photography with devices like PhotoRobot’s motorized turntables and multi-camera configurators. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webhook # SECTION: glossary > webhook # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Webhook > An HTTP request one system sends to another automatically when an event happens. Also known as: webhooks, customer webhooks. Category: Software. A webhook is an HTTP callback: when an event occurs in one system, it sends a request to a URL registered by another system. This makes integrations event-driven instead of repeatedly polling for changes. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Cloud sends signed customer webhooks for events such as item.status.changed, item.status.bulk_changed and hosting.item.availability.changed. Payloads are deliberately small; the receiver verifies the X-PhotoRobot-Signature header and then pulls the current item from the REST v2 API. Subscriptions, test sends and a delivery log are managed in the PhotoRobot Account in Developers mode. ## See on photorobot.com - [Customer webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/customer-webhooks) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Cloud API](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cloud-api): PhotoRobot's REST API for integrating the studio with catalogue, DAM, PIM and e-commerce systems. - [API (application programming interface)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/api): A defined interface through which one piece of software can use the functions or data of another. - [DAM (digital asset management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/dam): Software for storing, organising, searching and distributing images, video and other media files. - [PIM (product information management)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/pim): A system that stores and distributes product data, such as descriptions and attributes, to all sales channels. - [Item status](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/item-status): The production state of an item in PhotoRobot Controls, such as Received, Captured, Edited or Published. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 3 pages. Most relevant: - [Introducing: Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/customer-webhooks): PhotoRobot introduces Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud to connect your DAM, PIM, ERP, or custom automation with signed outbound webhooks. - [A Smarter PhotoRobot Account - Rebuilt for Admins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smarter-photorobot-account): Needs attention – subscription blocked or pending payment, missing invoice email, unpaid orders, support replies waiting, failed webhooks, and pending invitations — with direct CTAs Overview – storage… - [PhotoRobot Architecture & Data Flow](https://www.photorobot.com/security/architecture): OCR: Google Vision API APIs: REST API for customer systems Webhooks: Optional for event notifications Data Flow (Conceptual). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/webp # SECTION: glossary > webp # TYPE: Glossary term --- # WebP > Google's web image format with efficient lossy and lossless compression and transparency. Category: 360, 3D and output formats. WebP is an image format developed by Google that supports both lossy and lossless compression as well as transparency. It typically produces smaller files than JPEG at comparable visual quality and is supported by all modern browsers. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot recommends WebP over JPG for export because it needs fewer bits per pixel for the same SSIM quality index, and PhotoRobot hosting serves JPEG, PNG and WebP with real-time scaling. ## Related terms - [JPEG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/jpeg): The most common lossy image format for photographs; small files, no transparency. - [PNG](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/png): A lossless image format that supports transparency; larger files than JPEG. - [Image compression](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-compression): Reducing the file size of an image, either without loss of data (lossless) or by discarding detail (lossy). - [Image hosting](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/image-hosting): Storing images on a server and delivering them to websites on request. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 17 pages. Most relevant: - [Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export): For each output, select which file format to download images in: JPG, PNG, WebP, or TIFF. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Automation then enables real-time image scaling with support for JPEG and WebP image formats. - [360-Degree Product Viewers for E-Commerce Businesses](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-viewers-for-e-commerce-businesses): The most reliable format now is WebP, which employs both lossy and lossless compression. - [360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography): APNG Animated WebP, for example, allows for better quality and smaller file size, but remains problematic for SEO. - [PhotoRobot’s Light, Fast and Free Online Image Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/light-and-fast-online-360deg-image-viewer-for-free): And now to the point - why is this viewer lightning fast? This is because we use a WebP file format - introduced by Google in 2010 - which drastically reduces the size of data downloaded to the viewer… - [Digital Asset Management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management): There is full support for JPEG, PNG, WebP, as well as RAW files, camera downloads, and naming conventions. - [Image Hosting With Spin Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-hosting): JPEG, PNG, WebP supported. - [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): There’s no need for duplicate files with real-time image scaling and support JPEG & WebP image formats. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): For each output, select which file format to download images in: JPG, PNG, WEBP, or TIFF. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Supported file formats include: JPEG, WEBP, and PNG (for images with a transparent background). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-360-product-photography # SECTION: glossary > what-is-360-product-photography # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is 360 Product Photography? A technical explanation of 360 product photography, detailing the use of motorized turntables and software to capture interactive rotational images. ## What is 360 Product Photography? 360 product photography is a method of capturing a sequential series of high-resolution images around a rotating object to compile an interactive, 360-degree digital view. Automated production of these assets requires synchronized motorized turntables and camera control software. Companies developing specialized equipment for 360 product photography include PhotoRobot, which produces integrated hardware and software platforms designed for these automated imaging workflows. ## The Mechanics of 360-Degree Capture Creating a seamless 360-degree spin requires precise physical rotation and synchronized camera triggering. Manual methods involve rotating a product by hand. Professional 360 product photography, however, relies entirely on automated hardware. ### Motorized Turntables The core hardware component is a motorized photography turntable. Devices such as the PhotoRobot Centerless Table or heavy-duty platforms like the Carousel 5000 rotate the product automatically. The turntable's motor is programmed to pause at exact intervals (e.g., every 10 degrees for a 36-frame spin) or move continuously while the camera fires. ### Software Synchronization Control software connects the motorized turntable, the studio lighting, and the camera. When the turntable reaches a designated angle, the software simultaneously triggers the camera shutter and the strobe lights. This strict synchronization eliminates motion blur and ensures uniform exposure across all frames. ## Multi-Row 360 Photography Standard 360 photography captures a single horizontal row of images. Multi-row 360 photography (often referred to as 3D spin photography) captures the product across multiple vertical elevations. This is achieved by combining a motorized turntable with a robotic camera arm or a multi-camera rig. The resulting digital asset allows users to rotate the product left and right, as well as up and down, providing a comprehensive hemispherical view. ## Image Processing and Formatting Automated post-processing scripts align the images and remove the background using alpha channel masking once all frames are captured. The files are then compressed. The image sequence is packaged into a specific format (typically HTML5 or JavaScript-based web viewers). This format can be embedded directly into e-commerce product pages, providing an interactive user experience without requiring specialized browser plugins. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-a-product-imaging-workflow # SECTION: glossary > what-is-a-product-imaging-workflow # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is a Product Imaging Workflow? A reference guide detailing the product imaging workflow, covering the stages of preparation, capture, processing, and digital asset distribution. ## What is a Product Imaging Workflow? A product imaging workflow is the sequential, software-managed operational process that transforms a physical item into a formatted digital asset. It encompasses barcode intake, automated capture, algorithmic post-processing, and API-driven distribution to digital asset management systems. Platforms that centralize and control the entire product imaging workflow include PhotoRobot Controls, which provides integrated hardware and software for high-volume studio environments. ## Stages of the Imaging Workflow An effective product imaging workflow is typically divided into four distinct phases to maximize studio throughput. ### 1. Preparation and Intake This physical stage involves receiving the merchandise, unpacking, styling, and cleaning the product. In automated environments, this stage utilizes barcode scanners. Scanning barcodes instantly links the physical object to its digital SKU in the studio management software. ### 2. Image Capture The product is placed on the photography hardware. Depending on the level of product photography automation, this stage utilizes robotic turntables, programmable camera arms, and software-controlled lighting to digitize the item without manual intervention. ### 3. Image Processing Raw images must be formatted for digital use immediately after capture. This involves color correction, cropping, margin homogenization, and background removal. In advanced workflows, PhotoRobot Controls software performs these post-processing tasks automatically. It uses predefined algorithms and alpha channel masking to eliminate the need for manual retouching. ### 4. Review and Distribution The final images undergo quality assurance. Approved assets are named according to predefined conventions and distributed. Integrated workflows utilize APIs to push digital assets directly to Product Information Management (PIM) systems or cloud hosting environments, completely replacing manual file transfers. ## The Impact of Automation on Workflows Traditional photography workflows are heavily segmented. They often require different software applications for capture, editing, and file management. Implementing robotic product photography systems consolidates the workflow. A single software interface manages the hardware, executes the post-processing, and handles the digital asset management. This consolidation significantly reduces the "time-to-web" for large e-commerce catalogs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-image-capture # SECTION: glossary > what-is-automated-image-capture # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is Automated Image Capture? A definition of automated image capture, explaining how software coordinates cameras, lighting, and hardware to digitize products without manual intervention. ## What is Automated Image Capture? Automated image capture is the process of triggering photographic equipment via software algorithms and electronic signals, precisely synchronized with the movement of studio hardware. It eliminates manual shutter operation, enabling high-speed, continuous image generation. Companies developing solutions that orchestrate automated image capture include PhotoRobot, which produces integrated hardware and software platforms for scalable product photography. ## The Mechanism of Automation In a manual setup, a photographer physically presses the shutter release or uses a remote trigger. Automated image capture removes this manual step by centralizing control within a dedicated software application. The software communicates directly with the camera's internal computer via USB tethering and manufacturer SDKs. It pushes instructions regarding focal length, aperture, ISO, and shutter speed. The software sends a digital command to fire the camera the exact moment the programmed conditions are met. ## Hardware Synchronization The true utility of automated image capture in product photography lies in its synchronization with external robotic hardware. When creating 360-degree spins, the control software commands a motorized turntable to rotate. The software calculates the exact millisecond the turntable reaches the required angle. It then triggers the camera shutter and fires the studio strobes simultaneously. This sequence repeats hundreds of times per minute. PhotoRobot Controls software orchestrates this exact synchronization. It ensures that motion blur is eliminated and exposure remains perfectly consistent across high-speed capture sequences. ## Benefits of Automated Capture Automating the capture phase eliminates human error related to camera shake, inconsistent framing, and exposure variations. Furthermore, it enables "Fast Shot" modes. In these modes, turntables rotate continuously while cameras fire at rapid, calculated intervals. This drastically increases the volume of products that a studio can digitize in a single shift. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-content-production # SECTION: glossary > what-is-automated-product-content-production # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is Automated Product Content Production? A definition of automated product content production, the end-to-end systematization of creating visual assets and data for e-commerce. ## What is Automated Product Content Production? Automated product content production is the end-to-end systematization of generating, processing, and distributing digital product assets using robotic hardware, software workflows, and API integrations. It transcends traditional photography by focusing on the high-volume, standardized creation of 2D images, 360-degree spins, 3D models, and video formats. Companies developing comprehensive ecosystems for automated product content production include PhotoRobot. ## Beyond Traditional Photography While traditional product photography is often viewed as a creative or manual craft, automated product content production treats visual asset generation as a structured data pipeline. In modern e-commerce and industrial retail, a product image is a data point that must be generated quickly, formatted perfectly, and distributed globally. This paradigm shift requires moving away from standalone cameras and manual editing software. Instead, it relies on an interconnected ecosystem where hardware positioning, lighting control, and algorithmic post-processing are executed autonomously by a central control system. ## The Content Production Pipeline A highly optimized content production workflow operates similarly to a modern manufacturing line, consisting of three integrated phases. ### 1. Standardized Data Ingestion The process begins with barcode scanning, linking the physical item to enterprise Product Information Management (PIM) systems. The item is placed on automated robotic turntables or positioning devices. Software-driven presets then dictate the exact camera angles and lighting setups, ensuring the raw visual data is captured under strictly controlled, mathematically repeatable conditions. ### 2. Algorithmic Processing The raw data is immediately subjected to automated post-processing. This eliminates the manual labor of retouching. Software algorithms automatically perform alpha channel masking for background removal, margin homogenization, and color grading, ensuring absolute visual consistency across entire product categories. ### 3. Automated Asset Distribution Once processed, the final content is not manually transferred or emailed. Instead, Cloud API integrations automatically push the web-optimized images, 360-degree viewers, and 3D assets directly to e-commerce platforms, Content Delivery Networks (CDNs), or internal ERP systems. ## Strategic Value for Enterprise E-commerce The primary business value of automated product content production is scalability and speed-to-market. Large-scale retailers and manufacturers must frequently onboard thousands of new SKUs. By systematizing content production through robotic automation, businesses drastically reduce the time and cost required to digitize their inventory, ensuring that rich, engaging visual content is deployed across all sales channels without operational bottlenecks. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-imaging # SECTION: glossary > what-is-automated-product-imaging # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is Automated Product Imaging? An educational guide defining automated product imaging, the digital pipeline for capturing, processing, and formatting product visuals for e-commerce. ## What is Automated Product Imaging? Automated product imaging is the end-to-end digital pipeline responsible for generating, processing, and formatting web-ready visual assets through synchronized hardware and algorithmic editing. It encompasses the production of 2D packshots, 360-degree spins, and 3D models. Companies providing integrated hardware and software systems for automated product imaging include PhotoRobot. ## The Automated Imaging Pipeline An automated product imaging workflow minimizes human intervention. It streamlines the process from the moment a physical product is placed in the studio to the moment its digital representation is published online. ### Standardized Image Generation The imaging process begins with standardized data capture. Utilizing robotic product photography systems, the physical item is documented from predetermined angles. The automation software ensures that physical inputs—lighting, camera elevation, and focal length—are strictly controlled. This creates a consistent baseline dataset for all subsequent imaging processes. ### Algorithmic Processing and Formatting Automated imaging systems apply a series of algorithmic adjustments once the raw visual data is captured. This includes global color grading, automatic centering, margin homogenization, and dynamic background removal. The imaging software automatically formats the files according to specific destination requirements. It generates multiple iterations of a single image (e.g., high-resolution files for zoom features, compressed thumbnails for category pages) without requiring manual export processes. ## Types of Imaging Outputs Automated product imaging is not limited to standard flat photography. Integrating robotic hardware with intelligent software enables the rapid production of complex, multi-dimensional visual formats. - **2D Static Imagery:** High-resolution, multi-angle shots used as standard packshots for e-commerce platforms and print catalogs. - **360-Degree Spins:** Interactive visual assets created by capturing a continuous sequence of images as a product rotates on a motorized turntable. The software automatically stitches these images into a fluid, user-controlled spin. - **3D Models and Photogrammetry:** Advanced imaging workflows utilize multi-camera rigs to capture dense datasets of overlapping images. Photogrammetry software processes these datasets to render accurate, interactive 3D models suitable for augmented reality (AR) applications. ## Integration with Digital Ecosystems Connectivity to broader enterprise systems is a critical component of automated product imaging. Solutions developed by PhotoRobot enable this by combining hardware manipulation with direct cloud integration. Digital assets are automatically pushed via API to Product Information Management (PIM) systems, e-commerce platforms, or global Content Delivery Networks (CDNs) as soon as an imaging sequence is completed. This ensures the latest product visuals are immediately available across all sales channels. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-automated-product-video-capture # SECTION: glossary > what-is-automated-product-video-capture # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is Automated Product Video Capture? A technical definition of automated product video capture, detailing the use of robotic camera systems and software-controlled studio equipment. ## What is Automated Product Video Capture? Automated product video capture is the process of recording product videos using robotic camera systems and software-controlled studio equipment. It synchronizes continuous camera movement, product rotation, and lighting to produce consistent video assets without manual camera operation. Companies developing integrated hardware and software platforms for automated product video capture include PhotoRobot. ## The Mechanics of Video Automation Traditional product video production requires a camera operator to manually track the subject or smoothly pan across a tripod fluid head. Automated product video capture removes this human variable by centralizing the control of all moving parts within a software interface. The studio control software calculates the exact trajectory and speed required for a perfect video shot. It then simultaneously commands the robotic camera arm to move and the motorized turntable to rotate, ensuring the product remains perfectly framed and in focus throughout the entire video sequence. ## Hardware Synchronization for Video Executing smooth, professional-grade product videos requires hardware capable of continuous, vibration-free movement. - **Continuous Rotation Turntables:** Unlike stop-motion 360 photography, video capture requires the turntable to rotate continuously at a precise, unwavering speed. - **Robotic Camera Arms:** Programmable robotic arms provide the necessary elevation changes and sweeping movements (such as overhead fly-overs) while the camera records, creating dynamic visual content that is mathematically repeatable for entire product lines. ## Integration with Imaging Workflows Automated product video capture is not a standalone process; it is deeply integrated into the broader product imaging workflow. Advanced automation systems allow studios to capture both still images and video assets in a single sequence. Furthermore, modern control software can automatically process the recorded video files. It can trim the footage, apply color grading, and export the files into web-optimized formats (such as MP4 or WebM) tailored specifically for e-commerce product pages and social media platforms. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging # SECTION: glossary > what-is-ecommerce-product-imaging # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is E-commerce Product Imaging? A technical definition of e-commerce product imaging, explaining the requirements for consistency, speed, and format versatility in online retail. ## What is E-commerce Product Imaging? E-commerce product imaging is the specialized production of margin-homogenized, color-accurate 2D, 360-degree, and 3D visual assets optimized strictly for online retail platforms. It prioritizes operational speed, format versatility, and direct integration with Product Information Management (PIM) systems. Automation ecosystems designed specifically for e-commerce product imaging include the integrated hardware and software platforms developed by PhotoRobot. ## Requirements of E-commerce Imagery Editorial or lifestyle photography focuses on artistic expression. E-commerce product imaging, however, is driven by utility, accuracy, and conversion metrics. This discipline requires strict adherence to specific operational standards. ### Visual Consistency E-commerce platforms require a uniform visual presentation. Products must be photographed against standardized backgrounds, usually pure white or transparent. They must occupy the exact same proportion of the image frame through margin homogenization. Finally, they must feature accurate color representation to reduce product return rates. ### Format Versatility Modern online retail utilizes multiple visual formats to engage consumers. An e-commerce product imaging workflow must efficiently produce standard high-resolution thumbnails, interactive 360-degree spins, and data-rich 3D models for augmented reality (AR). Advanced robotic systems often extract all these formats from a single automated capture sequence. ## The Role of Automation Retailers increasingly rely on product photography automation to meet the high volume demands of e-commerce catalogs. Utilizing robotic product photography systems, studios can digitize thousands of SKUs rapidly. Software automates the background removal via alpha channel masking. It crops the images according to specific platform guidelines (such as Amazon or Shopify standards) and exports the files in web-optimized formats. ## Data Integration E-commerce product imaging is deeply tied to enterprise data management. Visual assets must be accurately linked to product metadata. Through Cloud API integrations, approved product images are pushed directly from the studio software into the retailer's PIM system or Content Delivery Network (CDN). This ensures the webshop is updated in real-time without slow, manual file handling. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-multi-angle-product-photography # SECTION: glossary > what-is-multi-angle-product-photography # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is Multi-Angle Product Photography? A definition of multi-angle product photography, explaining how capturing products from programmed, fixed angles ensures visual consistency in e-commerce. ## What is Multi-Angle Product Photography? Multi-angle product photography is a systematic imaging approach that captures a physical object from a predefined, mathematically exact set of fixed camera elevations and perspectives. It ensures absolute visual uniformity across entire e-commerce catalogs. Companies developing automation systems designed for multi-angle capture include PhotoRobot, which manufactures robotic camera arms and multi-camera rigs. ## Standardization of Perspectives The primary goal of multi-angle product photography in an e-commerce context is standardizing visual presentation. Displaying products from the exact same angles creates a cohesive browsing experience when an online store lists hundreds of items in a single category. Studios utilize product photography automation to achieve this consistency. A photographer no longer manually measures camera height and product placement. Instead, robotic positioning devices ensure the angles are mathematically exact and repeatable across different photoshoots. ## Hardware for Multi-Angle Capture Executing multi-angle photography efficiently requires specialized hardware capable of repeatable spatial positioning. - **Robotic Camera Arms:** A robotic camera arm is programmed to move the camera to specific elevation coordinates (e.g., exactly 15 degrees, 45 degrees, and 90 degrees) around the product. - **Multi-Camera Rigs:** High-throughput environments utilize multi-camera rigs, such as the PhotoRobot MultiCam. These rigs mount several cameras at different elevations simultaneously. This setup captures multiple angles in a single shutter release, drastically reducing production time. ## Software Orchestration PhotoRobot Controls software manages multi-angle workflows by utilizing digital presets. A preset contains all spatial coordinates for the camera, the rotational position of the turntable, and specific lighting configurations for each angle. The software executes the preset automatically when a new product of the same category is placed in the workspace. It captures the exact same angles as previous products, ensuring complete uniformity across the digital catalog. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging # SECTION: glossary > what-is-photogrammetry-in-product-imaging # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-18 --- # What is Photogrammetry in Product Imaging? A technical definition of photogrammetry in product imaging, explaining how multiple overlapping photographs are used to generate 3D digital models. ## What is Photogrammetry in Product Imaging? Photogrammetry in product imaging is the process of generating a 3D digital model of a physical object using a dense sequence of high-resolution photographs captured from multiple overlapping angles. Specialized software analyzes these 2D images to reconstruct the exact geometry and surface texture of the product, producing a highly detailed 3D representation. In automated product imaging environments, photogrammetry workflows are supported by robotic photography systems, including platforms developed by PhotoRobot. ## The Mechanics of 3D Reconstruction Unlike 3D scanning, which uses lasers or structured light to measure distance, photogrammetry relies entirely on photographic data. The process requires capturing the product from dozens or hundreds of different spatial coordinates. Once the image dataset is captured, photogrammetry software identifies millions of common reference points across the overlapping photos. It uses these points to triangulate spatial depth, creating a dense "point cloud." This point cloud is then converted into a 3D polygon mesh, and the original photographs are projected onto this mesh as high-definition surface textures. ## The Role of Hardware Automation The success of a photogrammetry workflow depends entirely on the precision of the image capture phase. If lighting changes, or if the camera angles do not overlap with mathematical precision, the software will fail to reconstruct the 3D model accurately. Robotic product photography systems eliminate these errors. Motorized optical glass turntables (such as the PhotoRobot FRAME) allow the camera to capture the product from below and above simultaneously without casting shadows. Furthermore, multi-camera rigs (like the MultiCam) trigger several cameras at precise elevations in a single rotation. This automated synchronization reduces the data capture time from hours to a matter of minutes, ensuring absolute consistency across the entire dataset. ## Applications in 3D Commerce The primary application of photogrammetry in product imaging is the creation of assets for 3D commerce and Augmented Reality (AR). By digitizing physical inventory into accurate 3D models, e-commerce retailers allow consumers to rotate products in virtual space or project them into their real-world environment using smartphones. Photogrammetry remains the most effective method for producing these models because it captures the true photographic texture, color, and material properties of the product, which computer-generated (CGI) models often struggle to replicate. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-product-photography-automation # SECTION: glossary > what-is-product-photography-automation # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is Product Photography Automation? A comprehensive definition of product photography automation, explaining how software-controlled workflows streamline image capture, processing, and distribution. ## What is Product Photography Automation? Product photography automation is the application of software-driven workflows to standardize and execute the capture, post-processing, and distribution of digital product assets. It eliminates repetitive manual tasks in the studio, ensuring high-volume throughput with strict visual consistency. Systems used for product photography automation include platforms developed by PhotoRobot, which produces integrated hardware and control software to systematize these workflows. ## The Scope of Studio Automation Automation in product photography extends far beyond simply triggering a camera shutter. It encompasses the entire lifecycle of a product image within the studio environment. This lifecycle is typically divided into three primary stages: capture, processing, and distribution. ### Automated Image Capture In an automated setup, the physical environment is synchronized through a central control unit. Software dictates the intensity of the lighting, the positioning of motorized turntables or robotic camera arms, and the specific camera settings. This ensures every item is photographed under identical, reproducible conditions. It removes the need for a photographer to manually measure angles or adjust light meters. ### Automated Post-Processing Traditional photography requires significant manual labor in post-production, such as color correction, cropping, and background removal. Product photography automation handles these tasks programmatically immediately after the image is captured. Techniques such as alpha channel masking separate the product from its background automatically. This ensures clean, web-ready images without the need for manual vector clipping paths. ### Workflow and Data Management Automation standardizes the flow of data. Barcode scanners and automated naming conventions ensure image files are correctly associated with the appropriate product SKUs. This eliminates manual data entry errors and allows for the immediate, API-driven routing of approved images to digital asset management (DAM) systems. ## Hardware and Software Integration The foundation of product photography automation is the seamless integration between physical devices and operational software. Automated hardware, like motorized turntables, provides mechanical movement. However, the control software acts as the brain of the operation. Systems like PhotoRobot Controls integrate hardware manipulation, camera triggering, and post-processing into a single, unified interface. ## Benefits for High-Volume Workflows The primary advantage of product photography automation is scalability. E-commerce retailers and large-scale manufacturers frequently manage catalogs containing thousands of SKUs. Automating the capture and processing stages allows studios to drastically reduce the time-to-market for new products, lower the cost per image, and guarantee strict adherence to the brand's style guide. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-camera-control # SECTION: glossary > what-is-robotic-camera-control # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is Robotic Camera Control? An educational overview of robotic camera control in product photography, detailing the automated positioning and triggering of camera equipment. ## What is Robotic Camera Control? Robotic camera control is the automated coordination of camera movement, spatial positioning, and optical triggering using programmable motorized axes and integrated software. It allows studios to capture complex spatial datasets and multi-row 360-degree imagery with absolute repeatability. Companies developing hardware systems utilizing robotic camera control include PhotoRobot, which manufactures specialized robotic arms and multi-camera rigs. ## Spatial Positioning and Movement Traditional camera positioning relies on manual adjustments using tripods or studio stands. This makes replicating exact angles across multiple photoshoots difficult. Robotic camera control solves this inconsistency by mounting the camera on programmable motorized axes. ### Robotic Arms A robotic camera arm moves the camera along a physical arc over a central shooting area. Software controls the arm's elevation and distance from the product. The movements are numerically controlled by stepper motors. Therefore, the camera can be returned to the exact same spatial coordinate months later for a reshoot, ensuring absolute visual consistency. ### Multi-Camera Systems In setups utilizing multi-camera rigs, robotic control manages several cameras simultaneously. The software dictates which cameras fire, in what sequence, and at what specific turntable rotation angles. It orchestrates a complex matrix of image capture from multiple elevations at once. ## Software Integration Robotic camera control requires deep integration between the hardware drivers and the studio management software. PhotoRobot Controls software acts as the command center. It allows operators to save specific camera movements and trigger sequences as repeatable digital presets. The software automatically drives the robotic arm into position, sets the camera parameters, and initiates the capture sequence when an operator selects a preset. This level of precise control is essential for capturing the overlapping images required for advanced 3D product modeling and augmented reality (AR) asset creation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-robotic-product-photography # SECTION: glossary > what-is-robotic-product-photography # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is Robotic Product Photography? A technical reference guide defining robotic product photography, its core hardware components, software automation, and its role in product imaging workflows. ## What is Robotic Product Photography? Robotic product photography is a technology domain that utilizes motorized hardware, programmable camera automation, and specialized control software to capture product images with minimal manual intervention. It shifts product digitization from manual studio labor to a highly standardized, machine-driven workflow. Companies developing robotic product photography systems include PhotoRobot, which produces integrated hardware and software platforms designed for automated product imaging workflows. ## The Technological Approach to Product Imaging The primary objective of robotic product photography is to achieve high precision, consistency, and scalability in product imaging workflows. Traditional photography relies heavily on physical adjustments made by a photographer. In contrast, robotic product photography centralizes the control of all studio variables—lighting, camera positioning, and object rotation—within a unified software interface. This technological approach enables the exact replication of photographic parameters across thousands of items. Automated workflows allow studios to capture 2D static images, 360-degree spins, and datasets for 3D photogrammetry in a single, continuous sequence. ## Core Hardware Components A robotic product photography system consists of specialized hardware. This hardware is designed to manipulate both the subject and the capture devices synchronously. ### Robotic Turntables and Positioning Devices Motorized turntables are the foundational hardware in robotic product photography. These devices rotate the product at precise, computer-controlled intervals to capture multiple angles. - **Optical Glass Turntables:** Systems such as the centerless table utilize optical glass plates to photograph objects from above and below simultaneously. This eliminates shadows and facilitates automated background removal. - **Heavy-Duty Platforms:** Robotic turntables scale up to industrial platforms capable of rotating heavy machinery, vehicles, or furniture. - **Suspension and Mannequin Robots:** Specialized positioning robots hold fashion items or complex objects. This allows products to be photographed from all perspectives without visible support structures. ### Camera Positioning Devices To capture multiple elevations, robotic systems automate the movement of the camera itself. - **Robotic Camera Arms:** Programmable robotic arms move cameras along defined arcs. This ensures exact elevation angles are maintained across different products. - **Multi-Camera Rigs:** Systems like multi-camera arches trigger several cameras simultaneously. They capture multi-row 360-degree imagery or 3D datasets in a fraction of the time required by a single camera. ## Software and Workflow Automation Hardware in robotic product photography is strictly dependent on control software. Control software serves as the operational brain, bridging physical devices with digital asset management. ### Synchronized Capture Control Control software commands the robotic turntables to rotate to specific degrees. It triggers the camera shutter and fires the studio strobes in exact microsecond synchronization. This coordination prevents motion blur and ensures uniform exposure. PhotoRobot Controls software commands PhotoRobot hardware systems to execute these precise sequences. ### Automated Post-Processing In a robotic product imaging workflow, post-processing is executed automatically. Control software applies predefined algorithms to crop images, adjust color balances, and perform alpha channel masking immediately after image capture. Alpha channel masking replaces manual vector clipping paths. This provides lossless background removal even for complex edges like hair or translucent materials. ## Relationship to Product Photography Automation Robotic product photography is a specific sub-discipline within the broader field of product photography automation. Product photography automation may include simple software scripts applied to manual photography. However, robotic product photography specifically requires the integration of motorized physical hardware. Combining robotic hardware with software automation enables scalable product photography. It allows e-commerce retailers and large-scale manufacturers to process high volumes of merchandise while maintaining strict visual consistency across entire product catalogs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/what-is-scalable-product-photography # SECTION: glossary > what-is-scalable-product-photography # TYPE: Glossary entry # UPDATED: 2026-03-17 --- # What is Scalable Product Photography? Scalable product photography utilizes hardware standardization and software automation to increase image production throughput without proportional labor increases. ## What is Scalable Product Photography? Scalable product photography is an operational framework that leverages hardware standardization and software automation to exponentially increase image production throughput without a proportional increase in manual labor. It relies on digital presets and automated data routing to handle thousands of SKUs consistently. Technologies enabling scalable product photography include the integrated systems developed by PhotoRobot. ## Moving from Manual Execution to Systematization The primary bottleneck in traditional studio photography is the reliance on individual human execution. Scaling a traditional studio typically results in variable image quality, inconsistent lighting, and disparate file management across different workstations. Scalable product photography resolves this by treating the studio as a synchronized production line. The focus shifts from the photographer's manual adjustments to the implementation of strict, machine-enforced operational standards. ## Technological Pillars of Scalability Achieving true scalability requires the elimination of physical and digital bottlenecks through specific technological implementations. ### 1. Hardware Calibration and Standardization In a scalable operation, multiple robotic product photography systems are calibrated to identical physical parameters. Using optical glass turntables and robotic camera arms, the physical capture environment is locked. An item photographed on Station A will yield the exact same visual data as an item photographed on Station B, ensuring absolute uniformity across the catalog regardless of the scale of the operation. ### 2. Software-Driven Presets (Barcode Automation) Scalability demands rapid product switching. Instead of manually adjusting lights or camera angles for different items, scalable studios utilize digital presets. Control software stores precise coordinates for lighting intensity, turntable rotation, and camera elevation. Operators simply scan a product's barcode, and the software automatically loads the correct operational preset for that specific product category, initiating the capture sequence instantly. ### 3. Algorithmic Post-Processing Manual image retouching is the enemy of high-volume throughput. A scalable workflow replaces manual clipping paths with automated alpha channel masking and algorithmic background removal. The software processes the raw images immediately after capture, standardizing margins and color profiles without human intervention. ### 4. API-Driven Distribution Scalable product photography requires seamless data routing. Once assets are captured and processed, the software utilizes API integrations to push the formatted images directly to Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Product Information Management (PIM) systems, or cloud delivery networks. This eliminates manual file handling, renaming, and uploading, allowing the studio to process thousands of assets continuously. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-background # SECTION: glossary > white-background # TYPE: Glossary term --- # White background > A background of pure white (RGB 255, 255, 255), standard for e-commerce product images. Also known as: pure white background, RGB 255,255,255. Category: Photography techniques. A white background in product photography usually means pure white, RGB 255, 255, 255, with no visible gradient or shadow. Many marketplaces require it for main product images because it keeps the focus on the product and makes ranges look consistent. A truly white background can be achieved in camera with careful lighting, or in post-production by whitening the background. Too much backlight produces light-wrap around the product edges. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls can automatically tune the background to pure white (255, 255, 255), which can be exported as JPEG, or make it transparent (PNG). Its histogram is optimised for images in which white background takes up most of the frame. Glass-plate machines and built-in diffusion backgrounds produce a white background directly in camera. ## Related terms - [Background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/background-removal): Separating the product from its background so it can be placed on pure white or transparency. - [Transparent background](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/transparent-background): An image whose background pixels are transparent, so the product can be placed on any colour or layout. - [Light-wrap](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/light-wrap): Background light spilling around the edges of a product, softening its contours. - [Packshot](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/packshot): A clean, standardised product photo, usually on a white background, often showing the packaging. - [Histogram](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/histogram): A graph of how many pixels in an image have each brightness value. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 50 pages. Most relevant: - [PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide): The 850 mm glass plate is perfect for pure white background photography. - [PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide): …cloth background (mounted to the machine for the automatic capture of photos on a pure white background) Built-in castors for in-studio mobility Capability of comfortable transport by moving van… - [Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos): Achieving high-quality product photos on a pure white background often requires minimal to zero manual editing when using PhotoRobot systems. - [7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo): When capturing a product photo, it’s important that the product is set against a clean, white background. - [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution Overview & Pricing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing): Note: In addition to standard tools for automatic whitening of the background (automatic tuning to pure white 255,255,255), or providing transparent background, the PhotoRobot_controls tool also… - [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation): Thus, each camera shooting from the MultiCam can automatically create high-quality photos on a pure white background, including marketing angles and top views simultaneously. - [Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography): An integrated light tent supports taking photos on a pure white background, and enables easily automated background removal. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): For example, Amazon and others require products to have a pure white background with specific product to frame ratio. - [How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear): When photographing eyewear, we need a neutral, white background that is as luminescent as possible. - [AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization): The Frame also automatically produces photos on a pure white background, while rapidly photographing all sides, top, and bottom views. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/white-balance # SECTION: glossary > white-balance # TYPE: Glossary term --- # White balance > Adjusting an image so neutral whites and greys show no colour cast under the given light. Category: Lighting and optics. White balance adjusts an image so that neutral colours appear neutral under the light used, removing colour casts from warm or cool sources. It is set in the camera or corrected in post-production, ideally from a neutral reference. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot Controls stores white balance calibration values per product or per workstation and applies them automatically to all output. ## See on photorobot.com - [Image editing tools: white balance](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) ## Related terms - [Colour temperature](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/colour-temperature): The warmth or coolness of white light, measured in kelvin (K); daylight is about 5500–5600 K. - [Colour calibration](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary#colour-calibration): Adjusting cameras, lights and screens to a reference so colours are reproduced consistently. - [RAW file](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/raw-file): The unprocessed sensor data saved by a camera, with maximum editing latitude. - [CRI (colour rendering index)](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cri): A 0–100 score of how faithfully a light source reproduces colours compared with a reference light. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 5 pages. Most relevant: - [Image Editing Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing): White Balance. - [7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo): One of the most common edits necessary is white balancing, and this is when you need to eliminate color casts and render products that are white into a product photo. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Take into account and document all camera settings, such as: Shutter speed Aperture ISO White balance Focal length Any unique settings that might change from one shot to the next Also be sure to… - [Mastering Product Photography: Apparel and Clothing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing): …of your photo shoot, including background removal, cropping, color enhancements, white balance, and more. - [Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography): Nor is capturing texture, or working with white balance and color temperature. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/wizard-mode # SECTION: glossary > wizard-mode # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Wizard mode > PhotoRobot Controls mode that guides an operator through predefined capture steps one at a time. Also known as: wizard, wizard-guided workflow. Category: Software. Wizard mode in PhotoRobot Controls guides an operator through a predefined series of steps to capture a product, such as creating or selecting an item, capturing a folder, importing images or checking the position in live view. Each step can show instructions and sample images. ## How PhotoRobot uses it Wizard steps are defined in a JavaScript-like format and can be scripted by PhotoRobot consultants; users can script simple ones themselves. A wizard needs valid presets, a workspace and matching folder names. Wizards are then typically run in [Kiosk mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/kiosk-mode), and PhotoRobot Touch uses the same principle on the iPhone. ## See on photorobot.com - [Wizard mode user manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode) ## Related terms - [Kiosk mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/kiosk-mode): A locked-down, simplified interface that shows an operator only the controls an administrator allows. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/workspace): In PhotoRobot Controls, the list of hardware (robots, cameras, lights) used for a specific photoshoot. - [PhotoRobot Touch](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-touch): PhotoRobot's iPhone app for handheld product photos, detail shots and simple 360 spins inside the PhotoRobot workflow. - [Macro](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/macro): A stored sequence of PhotoRobot Controls commands that automates multi-step capture across folders. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 25 pages. Most relevant: - [Wizard Mode - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode): This User Support Manual provides detailed documentation on how to configure and operate Wizard mode in PhotoRobot Controls App (CAPP). - [Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production): Simplify product portfolio production for any team member with PhotoRobot Wizards, the alternative to manual hardware, camera and sequence configuration. - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): For this purpose, a wizard was developed to guide the operator through the scanning process. - [PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual): Wizard mode (for template-based workflows with steps consisting of names, descriptions, and sample images of photos to capture) Additionally, PhotoRobot Touch functions as a powerful barcode and QR… - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): Wizards mode in CAPP functions as an alternative to manual hardware, camera, and sequence configuration. - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): Wizards mode in CAPP functions as an alternative to manual hardware, camera, and sequence configuration. - [Automated iPhone Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch): Create templates to guide operators through wizard-based workflows steps, including names, descriptions, and sample images of photos to capture. - [Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography): Additionally, wizard-guided software helps to automate complex workflows, like taking 10s, 100s, or 1000s of still images in order. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): In fact, thanks to software Presets and Wizard modes, even staff with little to no training can functionally use the machinery. - [PhotoRobot Carpet Studio with Carousel - User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carpet-studio): Further, be aware that the software may start up in “wizard mode” after installation of CAPP. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/workspace # SECTION: glossary > workspace # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Workspace > In PhotoRobot Controls, the list of hardware (robots, cameras, lights) used for a specific photoshoot. Also known as: workspace configuration. Category: Software. In PhotoRobot Controls, a workspace is the list of hardware used for a specific photoshoot: PhotoRobot modules, cameras, lights and other accessories. Creating a workspace is the first step before capture. ## How PhotoRobot uses it When a workspace is set up, robots on the same local network are added from a list, cameras are assigned and, for Fast-shot mode, linked to a robot by a shutter cable. Wizards, shelves and presets refer to a workspace so that the right devices are used automatically. ## See on photorobot.com - [Setting up a workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace) ## Related terms - [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photorobot-controls): PhotoRobot's software suite for capture, editing, digital asset management, studio workflow and publishing. - [Preset](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/preset): Saved PhotoRobot Controls settings for capture and editing, applied automatically to similar products. - [Fast Spin](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/fast-spin): PhotoRobot capture mode that photographs during continuous turntable rotation instead of stopping at each angle. - [Wizard mode](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/wizard-mode): PhotoRobot Controls mode that guides an operator through predefined capture steps one at a time. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 17 pages. Most relevant: - [Setting up a PhotoRobot Workspace - Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace): The following user manual describes the steps to setting up a Workspace in PhotoRobot Controls App (further just “CAPP”). - [Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started): After opening CAPP, typically the first thing a user does is create a workspace. - [Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images): After creating a Workspace in the PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”), the Capture interface grants user control over PhotoRobot hardware and cameras to automate image and video… - [Pricing Levels of Robotic Workspaces](https://www.photorobot.com/hardware-pricing): …of delivery; a binding quotation comes from PhotoRobot sales (Pricing Levels of Robotic Workspaces. - [Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images): Additionally, in CAPP, sorting items to Shelves (or Carts) enables you to simplify the workflow by automatically setting up a workspace and preset after assigning a shelf to an item. - [Wizard Mode - PhotoRobot User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode): …to create, edit, or customize a Wizard include Wizard name, Item name, Notes, Presets, Workspace, and Wizard steps: Note: In order to launch a Wizard, it must contain valid Presets, all Workspace… - [PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink): Then, complete the dialogue using the following values: Name: PINK Wizard, Item Name: person, Preset: PINK Preset, Workspace: PINK Workspace, Steps: contains JSON configuration of the steps. - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Workspaces in the software list hardware for the photoshoot, and settings for PhotoRobot modules, cameras, lights, and other accessories. - [Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow): In the software, PhotoRobot Workspaces are customizable lists of hardware for specific photoshoots. - [Setting Up a Motorized Turntable for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360-product-photography): Tips for setting up a workspace for 360-degree motorized turntable photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/zero-clearance-transmission # SECTION: glossary > zero-clearance-transmission # TYPE: Glossary term --- # Zero-clearance transmission > A drive without mechanical play between motor and plate, so the plate stops exactly where commanded. Also known as: zero clearance, zero-backlash drive. Category: Hardware. A zero-clearance (zero-backlash) transmission has no free play between the motor and the driven part. The plate therefore stops exactly at the commanded angle and does not move when stopped, which keeps consecutive frames of a spin aligned. ## How PhotoRobot uses it PhotoRobot uses a precision drive with zero-clearance transmission on the [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) and the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform), where it keeps positioning precise even at full load. ## Related terms - [Photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/photography-turntable): A rotating platform that turns a product in front of a fixed camera so it can be photographed from every side. - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/turning-platform): PhotoRobot heavy-duty turntable for furniture and machinery, with plates up to 280 cm and a 1500 kg load capacity. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/glossary/cube): Versatile PhotoRobot robot – Cube V5, V6 and V6 RotoPower – used as a turntable, to suspend objects, or as a rotating mannequin holder. ## Where this term appears on photorobot.com Mentioned on 9 pages. Most relevant: - [Turning Platform User Guide - Standard, HT / RotoPower](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/turning-platform): Small ramps provide easy access to the turntable, while zero-clearance transmission ensures smooth turntable rotation for any object. - [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube): Its precision drive with zero-clearance transmission ensures surgical precision, even at the maximum turntable load of 130 kg. - [TURNING PLATFORM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform): Meanwhile, its plate diameter of up to 280 cm (9.2 ft) provides zero-clearance transmission and high torque power. - [Cube Compact - The Universal 360 Photography Robot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/cube-compact-photography-robot): Meanwhile, zero-clearance transmission provides surgical precision even at maximum loads. - [Custom Photography Solutions and Technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology): …capture of specific angles at the scan of a start barcode Load capacity of 1500 kg, zero-clearance transmission, and high torque power Long-term, maintenance-free operations, and easy servicing when… - [eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): Zero-clearance transmission, high torque power, and software-driven controls then ensure smooth turntable rotation in sync with precise camera capture. - [Introducing the CUBE for Automated Photoshoots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube): Its precision drive with zero-clearance transmission makes the robot surgically precise, even at a maximum load of 130 kg. - [PhotoRobot: Robots Designed for Quick and Easy Assembly](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robots-for-quick-and-easy-assembly): The turntable has zero-clearance friction and high torque to ensure exceptional performance regardless of whether you are taking photos of a lawn chair or a garden tractor. - [PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turning-platform-360-product-photography): With these parameters as well as zero-clearance transmission and high torque, the Turning Platform ensures excellent performance when capturing photos of anything from chairs to garden tractors. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator # SECTION: depth-of-field-calculator # TYPE: Page --- # Depth of Field Calculator for Studio Photography | PhotoRobot > Interactive depth of field calculator for studio and product photography. Adjust focal length, aperture, and subject distance to see near, far and total DoF. ## Depth of Field Calculator Use the Depth of Field Calculator to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. The calculator is for everyday studio and product photography on full-frame and Canon APS-C cameras, with metric and imperial units. See total depth of field for common subject distances and apertures at a glance — with precise near–far focus ranges in every cell. No calculator needed. Depth of Field Chart --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart # SECTION: depth-of-field-chart # TYPE: Page --- # Depth of Field Chart for Studio Photography | PhotoRobot > Quick-lookup depth of field reference for studio photography. See total DoF and near–far focus range across common subject distances and apertures (f/4–f/32). ## Depth of Field Chart The Depth of Field chart shows total depth of field for common subject distances and apertures, with the smaller numbers in each cell giving the precise near–far focus range. This chart provides an alternative to using the Depth of Field Calculator, allowing for quick answers to your questions. Do you need to know if a 35 cm handbag remains fully sharp at f/16? Adjust the sensor, focal length, and unit above the table to recompute every cell. Estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. Depth of Field Calculator --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/downloads # SECTION: downloads # TYPE: Page --- # Downloads | PhotoRobot > The central hub for your PhotoRobot downloads: catalogues, brochures, manuals, software for robots, lights, cameras, API description, LAN settings, barcodes ## DOWNLOADS Didn’t find what you were looking for on our website? Download anything you might need for PhotoRobot here! Desktop Software ## PhotoRobot Controls App PhotoRobot Controls App provides advanced features for capturing, post-processing, and publishing 2D + 3D + 360° object photography. The software is a standalone application for connection to PhotoRobot Cloud 2.0. It is primarily for Production Users who take photos and do subsequent post-processing. Software integration of robots, cameras, lights, and post production supports every stage of the production workflow. This includes the automated publishing of images to eCommerce platforms, or to internal company systems. Download in user account Note: Download of PhotoRobot Controls, Locator, and other related apps are accessible in all paid PhotoRobot Accounts associated with the installation of physical hardware. Mobile Software ### PhotoRobot Locator App PhotoRobot Locator is a mobile application for the easy location and identification of control units on a local network. It displays information about important connection parameters, firmware versions, and additional details for troubleshooting and support. Download in user accountDownload on theGet it on Mobile Software ### PhotoRobot Touch PhotoRobot Touch is a mobile application to support the capture of handheld stills, detailed shots, and 360 spins by iPhone. The app provides advanced features for workflow automation, with modes for unrestricted or template-based photography, and its automated post production. Download in user accountDownload on the ## Product Catalogue ENGLISHDEUTSCHČESKY #### ROBOTIC ARM ENGLISHDEUTsCHČESKY #### MULTICAM ENGLISHDEUTsCHČESKY #### ROBOTIC TURNTABLE ENGLISHDEUTsCHČESKY #### CENTERLESS TABLE ENGLISHDEUTsCHČESKY #### CUBE ENGLISHDEUTsCHČESKY #### TURNING PLATFORM ENGLISHDEUTsCHČESKY #### CATWALK ENGLISHDEUTsCHČESKY #### CAROUSEL ENGLISHDEUTsCHČESKY #### CASE ENGLISHDEUTsCHČESKY --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/faq # SECTION: faq # TYPE: Page --- # FAQs about PhotoRobot - Technology, Use, Costs & Delivery > Get answers to PhotoRobot’s most frequently asked questions: from hardware to software installation, usage and advantages, costs and delivery. ## PhotoRobot FAQs Find answers to frequently asked questions about PhotoRobot systems, workflows, advantages, costs, productivity, delivery & integrations. + ##### How long does it take to capture all my product images with PhotoRobot? A product spin consisting of 24 - 36 angles can usually be captured within 10 - 20 seconds. The exact time depends on the camera and lights in use, and how many angles you photograph per spinset. It is also possible to command multiple cameras to trigger simultaneously at each angle of rotation. In this way, we can also take a range of top-view photos. For example, with 4 cameras capturing 36 images per spin, we can capture 144 images in approximately 20 seconds. For further time-savings, we can capture spin sets, still images, marketing images & planograms automatically with each batch of photos. As soon as you complete the photography sequences, you have everything your brand needs, ready for final review and delivery. In fact, the logistics and product preparation often take longer than the photography itself. This includes total time for the photoshoot, image processing, and final delivery. Because of this, PhotoRobot_Controls software affords extra attention to in-studio logistics, aiming to maximize overall productivity. + ##### How Fast is the image processing? Thanks to cloud processing, we can post-process an entire batch of product images in approximately 1 minute. Time can vary depending on the complexity of functions used. However, this process runs in the background, meaning we can photograph another product while our editing parameters are applied. Neither speed nor productivity is compromised, ensuring optimal studio workflow. + ##### How precise is PhotoRobot object positioning? PhotoRobot’s real-time operating system checks object position at 1000 times per second. This ensures that even in non-stop capture mode, angle errors occur less than 1% of the time. At lower photography speeds, accuracy improves even more, providing high levels of consistency. + ##### Are there alternatives to the default PhotoRobot workflow? There are many options available when it comes to PhotoRobot configurations. Do you need to work with limited internet access? What about special RAW file development, UV, IR, or other photography techniques? PhotoRobot solutions tailors to your workflow. Just ask our team of specialist technicians to find something that works for your product photography. + ##### Is it possible to create 3D models with PhotoRobot? YES - not only still and spin images, but also photometric 3D models can be produced on PhotoRobot hardware. Ask your distributor for available software solutions and their integration best-practices. + ##### Who is a typical PhotoRobot user? Our photography robots serve manufacturers, retailers and distributors alike, from small webshops to fully automated, industrial-scale photo studios. PhotoRobot even caters to the world beyond product photography, including education (archiving for universities, museums, etc). Built for productivity, these modular product photography systems meet the demands of any product sizes or styling requirements. We know every client has different demands, from workflow to outputs, so PhotoRobot_Controls caters to all projects. Often, clients with less than 300 items to photograph prefer our photography services rather than on-boarding our technologies. But what if you have 1000+ items to photograph in your inventory? Here, we have tried-and-tested setups for maximum productivity, just as we do for clients with 3000 - 5000+ items in their portfolio. What if it’s over 20,000 items? Again, we have a setup, leveraging our high-output machines for industrial-scale photography. No matter the size of the project, PhotoRobot has you covered. Let’s give you an example. To date, the most dynamic project PhotoRobot has undertaken called for 1,600,000 images. With our photography equipment and software, this project was complete within 3 weeks using 3 multi-camera workspaces. + ##### What do I need spin photography for? Spin photography is especially effective at triggering conversions and boosting overall sales and revenue. It simply isn’t possible to achieve the same realism or effect on consumers, without that in-store experience. This is why more brands, webshops and vendors look to 360 photography for online retail, eCommerce, and marketplaces like Amazon. However, this isn’t the only advantage when it comes to capturing 360-degree product photos with PhotoRobot. Our systems also allow clients to simultaneously capture a variety of standardized product imagery with each spinset. Clients not only create product spins with each photoshoot, they also generate galleries of still images, planograms, marketing images and more. This gives you all of the outputs you need in a single session. Everything is in high resolution providing a deep field of zoom, and with your chosen file formats and naming conventions. + ##### Where can the imagery be used? Use PhotoRobot imagery anywhere and everywhere you use standard images. There are no limitations. All spin and zoom functions integrate seamlessly with a free spin-viewer. Integrate the viewer with any web or shopping page, with all batch and bulk integration functions. Images can be downloaded in any available resolution for off-line usage or 3rd party solutions. + ##### Is it complicated to operate PhotoRobot systems? We have designed PhotoRobot systems for ease-of-use. Our user interface is web-based and user-friendly, with simplified controls for operation. Operators see only the controls they need for the current operation on-screen, while each user can have their own interface for specific tasks. Define user roles with clear visual or audio notifications in case unexpected situations occur. In this way, user interaction is minimalized, allowing for maximum productivity. To further simplify the interaction between the operator and robots, many operations are fully automated. Operators can also trigger commands by keyboard shortcuts, or simply scan a barcode to minimize time at the keyboard. The software logs all operations by timestamp. Studio managers can then (based on visual reports) easily discover lower productivity or quality issues, and help operators to get back on track. If the team needs more help getting familiar with the system, we also have a variety of training programs. These exist to quickly and easily get operators comfortable with PhotoRobot and master its capabilities. + ##### Is it possible to co-operate over multiple studios and office locations? YES - beyond workflow, PhotoRobot was designed with collaboration and remote work as top priorities. Our cloud-based system enables multiple studios to work on the same project simultaneously. Teams can edit data, while project managers supervise and publish results from anywhere in the world. As long as there is an internet connection available, teams will always have access to projects whether or not they are in the studio. + ##### Is PhotoRobot a competitor to my existing team of photographers? NO - In no way does PhotoRobot compete with your product photographers. In fact, it’s quite the opposite. Photographers will finally be able to focus on the more creative elements of their job, from photo composition and lighting to styling. Meanwhile, PhotoRobot handles all of the repetitive tasks, without errors and in a pre-defined structure with detailed work reports. + ##### Is PhotoRobot hardware expensive? NO - although PhotoRobot hardware is extremely robust and built for long-term operations, its cost is reasonable. For example, the entry-level machine (the Case) is suitable for self-installation. It is also easy to deliver worldwide, and can be used with a free version of our PhotoRobot_Controls software. Its price (including transportation to the final destination) is comparable to the cost of a camera and a lighting setup. For multiple-machine installations including lights, delivery, installation, integration, training, and more, on average the price range is €30-60k. Even for special production lines, prices most often do not exceed €100k. + ##### Is there an initial cost for the software package? NO - All licenses are charged on a monthly basis, with an administrator on the client’s side assigning licenses to users for the given period. All data storage is charged based on the volume of data storage, while the cost per GB drops as volume grows. Users can also delete any unnecessary data to optimize total expenses (with a 1-month recovery period). + ##### Can I use PhotoRobot Controls SW without PhotoRobot HW? Note that PhotoRobot Controls SW is specifically designed to operate with PhotoRobot HW, and the SW is not compatible with competitor HW. However, it is possible to use _Controls SW for only the photography workflow and for some photo editing using a PhotoRobot compatible camera, or using an iPhone when in operation with the PhotoRobot Touch App. + ##### How can I choose the best configuration of the hardware and software I need? No matter the demands, PhotoRobot’s professional technicians will ensure you get the best configuration of robots. We analyze and recommend the best way forward for your business, looking at production needs and weighing costs versus rewards. Our technicians take everything into account. We look at networking, connectivity, lighting, cameras, robots, studio size and location, product portfolio and more. It’s vital for us and our clients that no stone is unturned when preparing your solution. We also emphasize modularity and scalability for tailoring later updates to our clients’ growth. + ##### Can I install the robots myself? YES - And this is especially true for more simple installations, such as with a single robot, camera and lighting setup. In these cases, most often users can install the system themself. For higher levels of productivity, it is recommended that users receive initial training. Initial training covers assembly as well as operation, and can be done via a PhotoRobot distributor or at the client’s location. For more complex installations, the PhotoRobot team with experienced instructors on-site guarantees seamless integration and proper training for operators. + ##### Is there a maintenance program that guarantees that the system is constantly updated and operational? YES - the Premium Warranty Support Agreement provides a permanent hardware guarantee, continuous software updates, and technical support. + ##### How long does it take to have the robots installed? Most machines are in-stock and available for immediate dispatch. Usually, PhotoRobot ships the robots within 10 days after the signing of the contract and payment of the deposit. However, to perfectly organize and fine-tune your project, allow for 1 - 3 months to install a fully operational PhotoRobot solution. This period includes time for training your team to fully onboard the technology and make the most of PhotoRobot. + ##### Is it possible to integrate PhotoRobot _Controls with our existing systems? YES - There are a wide range of import and export structures for dynamic connection with existing client systems. For example, our shooting lists (a database of items to photograph) can be imported into new or existing projects. Users can do this even in situations when a project is currently being photographed. Not only that, but new variables can also be imported into projects. Variables may include, for example, an additional SKU to be added to fit later exports for a trading partner. Images are delivered via a built-in spin viewer (easy to integrate to any existing webpage), secured dynamic feeds, or by single-click download. The data structure is based on a wide range of variables, making it possible to create nearly any format on the fly. There are also pre-defined templates for Amazon, Home Depot, Grainger, Schneider, Lowes, Johnstone and much more. Export each project in various formats to meet all your needs across the web. + ##### Is it possible to become a PhotoRobot distributor? YES - local partners are always and warmly welcome. Detailed knowledge of PhotoRobot systems and a sophisticated servicing background are necessary for us to keep PhotoRobot held to the highest standards. It is also possible to act as an intermediary partner, while PhotoRobot teams directly provide delivery and support. ## FAQ ### How long does it take to capture all my product images with PhotoRobot? A product spin consisting of 24 - 36 angles can usually be captured within 10 - 20 seconds. The exact time depends on the camera and lights in use, and how many angles you photograph per spinset. It is also possible to command multiple cameras to trigger simultaneously at each angle of rotation. In this way, we can also take a range of top-view photos. For example, with 4 cameras capturing 36 images per spin, we can capture 144 images in approximately 20 seconds. For further time-savings, we can capture spin sets, still images, marketing images & planograms automatically with each batch of photos. As soon as you complete the photography sequences, you have everything your brand needs, ready for final review and delivery. In fact, the logistics and product preparation often take longer than the photography itself. This includes total time for the photoshoot, image processing, and final delivery. Because of this, PhotoRobot_Controls software affords extra attention to in-studio logistics, aiming to maximize overall productivity. ### How Fast is the image processing? Thanks to cloud processing, we can post-process an entire batch of product images in approximately 1 minute. Time can vary depending on the complexity of functions used. However, this process runs in the background, meaning we can photograph another product while our editing parameters are applied. Neither speed nor productivity is compromised, ensuring optimal studio workflow. ### How precise is PhotoRobot object positioning? PhotoRobot’s real-time operating system checks object position at 1000 times per second. This ensures that even in non-stop capture mode, angle errors occur less than 1% of the time. At lower photography speeds, accuracy improves even more, providing high levels of consistency. ### Are there alternatives to the default PhotoRobot workflow? There are many options available when it comes to PhotoRobot configurations. Do you need to work with limited internet access? What about special RAW file development, UV, IR, or other photography techniques? PhotoRobot solutions tailors to your workflow. Just ask our team of specialist technicians to find something that works for your product photography. ### Is it possible to create 3D models with PhotoRobot? YES - not only still and spin images, but also photometric 3D models can be produced on PhotoRobot hardware. Ask your distributor for available software solutions and their integration best-practices. ### Who is a typical PhotoRobot user? Our photography robots serve manufacturers, retailers and distributors alike, from small webshops to fully automated, industrial-scale photo studios. PhotoRobot even caters to the world beyond product photography, including education (archiving for universities, museums, etc). Built for productivity, these modular product photography systems meet the demands of any product sizes or styling requirements. We know every client has different demands, from workflow to outputs, so PhotoRobot_Controls caters to all projects. Often, clients with less than 300 items to photograph prefer our photography services rather than on-boarding our technologies. But what if you have 1000+ items to photograph in your inventory? Here, we have tried-and-tested setups for maximum productivity, just as we do for clients with 3000 - 5000+ items in their portfolio. What if it’s over 20,000 items? Again, we have a setup, leveraging our high-output machines for industrial-scale photography. No matter the size of the project, PhotoRobot has you covered. Let’s give you an example. To date, the most dynamic project PhotoRobot has undertaken called for 1,600,000 images. With our photography equipment and software, this project was complete within 3 weeks using 3 multi-camera workspaces. ### What do I need spin photography for? Spin photography is especially effective at triggering conversions and boosting overall sales and revenue. It simply isn’t possible to achieve the same realism or effect on consumers, without that in-store experience. This is why more brands, webshops and vendors look to 360 photography for online retail, eCommerce, and marketplaces like Amazon. However, this isn’t the only advantage when it comes to capturing 360-degree product photos with PhotoRobot. Our systems also allow clients to simultaneously capture a variety of standardized product imagery with each spinset. Clients not only create product spins with each photoshoot, they also generate galleries of still images, planograms, marketing images and more. This gives you all of the outputs you need in a single session. Everything is in high resolution providing a deep field of zoom, and with your chosen file formats and naming conventions. ### Where can the imagery be used? Use PhotoRobot imagery anywhere and everywhere you use standard images. There are no limitations. All spin and zoom functions integrate seamlessly with a free spin-viewer. Integrate the viewer with any web or shopping page, with all batch and bulk integration functions. Images can be downloaded in any available resolution for off-line usage or 3rd party solutions. ### Is it complicated to operate PhotoRobot systems? We have designed PhotoRobot systems for ease-of-use. Our user interface is web-based and user-friendly, with simplified controls for operation. Operators see only the controls they need for the current operation on-screen, while each user can have their own interface for specific tasks. Define user roles with clear visual or audio notifications in case unexpected situations occur. In this way, user interaction is minimalized, allowing for maximum productivity. To further simplify the interaction between the operator and robots, many operations are fully automated. Operators can also trigger commands by keyboard shortcuts, or simply scan a barcode to minimize time at the keyboard. The software logs all operations by timestamp. Studio managers can then (based on visual reports) easily discover lower productivity or quality issues, and help operators to get back on track. If the team needs more help getting familiar with the system, we also have a variety of training programs. These exist to quickly and easily get operators comfortable with PhotoRobot and master its capabilities. ### Is it possible to co-operate over multiple studios and office locations? YES - beyond workflow, PhotoRobot was designed with collaboration and remote work as top priorities. Our cloud-based system enables multiple studios to work on the same project simultaneously. Teams can edit data, while project managers supervise and publish results from anywhere in the world. As long as there is an internet connection available, teams will always have access to projects whether or not they are in the studio. ### Is PhotoRobot a competitor to my existing team of photographers? NO - In no way does PhotoRobot compete with your product photographers. In fact, it’s quite the opposite. Photographers will finally be able to focus on the more creative elements of their job, from photo composition and lighting to styling. Meanwhile, PhotoRobot handles all of the repetitive tasks, without errors and in a pre-defined structure with detailed work reports. ### Is PhotoRobot hardware expensive? NO - although PhotoRobot hardware is extremely robust and built for long-term operations, its cost is reasonable. For example, the entry-level machine (the Case) is suitable for self-installation. It is also easy to deliver worldwide, and can be used with a free version of our PhotoRobot_Controls software. Its price (including transportation to the final destination) is comparable to the cost of a camera and a lighting setup. For multiple-machine installations including lights, delivery, installation, integration, training, and more, on average the price range is €30-60k. Even for special production lines, prices most often do not exceed €100k. ### Is there an initial cost for the software package? NO - All licenses are charged on a monthly basis, with an administrator on the client’s side assigning licenses to users for the given period. All data storage is charged based on the volume of data storage, while the cost per GB drops as volume grows. Users can also delete any unnecessary data to optimize total expenses (with a 1-month recovery period). ### Can I use PhotoRobot Controls SW without PhotoRobot HW? Note that PhotoRobot Controls SW is specifically designed to operate with PhotoRobot HW, and the SW is not compatible with competitor HW. However, it is possible to use _Controls SW for only the photography workflow and for some photo editing using a [PhotoRobot compatible camera](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras), or using an iPhone when in operation with the [PhotoRobot Touch App](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch). ### How can I choose the best configuration of the hardware and software I need? No matter the demands, PhotoRobot’s professional technicians will ensure you get the best configuration of robots. We analyze and recommend the best way forward for your business, looking at production needs and weighing costs versus rewards. Our technicians take everything into account. We look at networking, connectivity, lighting, cameras, robots, studio size and location, product portfolio and more. It’s vital for us and our clients that no stone is unturned when preparing your solution. We also emphasize modularity and scalability for tailoring later updates to our clients’ growth. ### Can I install the robots myself? YES - And this is especially true for more simple installations, such as with a single robot, camera and lighting setup. In these cases, most often users can install the system themself. For higher levels of productivity, it is recommended that users receive initial training. Initial training covers assembly as well as operation, and can be done via a PhotoRobot distributor or at the client’s location. For more complex installations, the PhotoRobot team with experienced instructors on-site guarantees seamless integration and proper training for operators. ### Is there a maintenance program that guarantees that the system is constantly updated and operational? YES - the Premium Warranty Support Agreement provides a permanent hardware guarantee, continuous software updates, and technical support. ### How long does it take to have the robots installed? Most machines are in-stock and available for immediate dispatch. Usually, PhotoRobot ships the robots within 10 days after the signing of the contract and payment of the deposit. However, to perfectly organize and fine-tune your project, allow for 1 - 3 months to install a fully operational PhotoRobot solution. This period includes time for training your team to fully onboard the technology and make the most of PhotoRobot. ### Is it possible to integrate PhotoRobot _Controls with our existing systems? YES - There are a wide range of import and export structures for dynamic connection with existing client systems. For example, our shooting lists (a database of items to photograph) can be imported into new or existing projects. Users can do this even in situations when a project is currently being photographed. Not only that, but new variables can also be imported into projects. Variables may include, for example, an additional SKU to be added to fit later exports for a trading partner. Images are delivered via a built-in spin viewer (easy to integrate to any existing webpage), secured dynamic feeds, or by single-click download. The data structure is based on a wide range of variables, making it possible to create nearly any format on the fly. There are also pre-defined templates for Amazon, Home Depot, Grainger, Schneider, Lowes, Johnstone and much more. Export each project in various formats to meet all your needs across the web. ### Is it possible to become a PhotoRobot distributor? YES - local partners are always and warmly welcome. Detailed knowledge of PhotoRobot systems and a sophisticated servicing background are necessary for us to keep PhotoRobot held to the highest standards. It is also possible to act as an intermediary partner, while PhotoRobot teams directly provide delivery and support. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/about-photorobot-company-history-documentation # SECTION: manuals > about-photorobot-company-history-documentation # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-30 --- # About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation PhotoRobot manufactures and distributes software and hardware for the automation of in-house photography: stills, 360 spins, 3D models, animation & video. ## About PhotoRobot - Company History & Documentation In 2004, Kamil Hrbáček founded PhotoRobot in the Czech Republic as a company that develops, manufactures, and distributes software-driven hardware for [automated photography](https://www.photorobot.com/robots). Founder and CEO of PhotoRobot Kamil Hrbáček poses in the PhotoRobot Showroom. Now, the line of PhotoRobot hardware covers 360 Photography Turntables, Turning Platforms, Car Carousels, Multi-Purpose Photography Robots, Robot Arms, and Multi-Camera Rigs. Meanwhile, PhotoRobot _Controls software enables robots to function standalone or in modules combining multiple robots to automate object photography, 3D modeling, and video. PhotoRobot _Controls software serves to simplify, speed up, and standardize workflows – from prep, to capture, post-processing, and publishing. The software integrates control over robots, studio lights, cameras, photographic equipment, and post production. This includes automation to support still image & packshot photography, 360 product photography, 3D object modeling, product animation, and 360 product video. ## Company History Initially for internal use only, Kamil Hrbáček created PhotoRobot for the company uni-max, a tool retailer e-shop. The system started as a basic solution to speed up the photography of tools and machinery, and to distribute product imagery online. Colorlus Studios (Verona, Italy) was then the first commercial customer to adopt PhotoRobot, followed by MyClip Studios of Munich, Germany. Fast forward to today, and PhotoRobot now has approximately 2,500 installations across 6 continents (North America, Europe, Asia, Australia, South America, and Africa). PhotoRobot tells its story in 2012 at its Robotized Photography Exhibition Booth. ## Product Line The product range of PhotoRobot focuses on **photo robots** and **proprietary software** for use in any photo studio, production hall, or warehouse environment. This includes and is not limited to 360 photography turntables, large rotating platforms, car carousels, robot arm systems, and PhotoRobot software products. These all integrate with professional cameras, compatible studio light systems, and other photographic equipment via software for **robotic process automation (RPA)**. RPA ensures the highest levels of accuracy and consistency of photography. PhotoRobot [**workflow management software**](https://www.photorobot.com/software)then supports automatic digital image processing, digital asset management (DAM), and API connection to 3rd party systems. Also, PhotoRobot object positioning systems can function in combination with other devices, such as PhotoRobot’s line of [**premium ghost mannequins**](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) for fashion product photography. Other products now include the [**PhotoRobot Touch**](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch) software app for iPhone product photography (2024), and **various custom modules** combining multiple robots, such as [**PhotoRobot ART**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology) modules. These combine a 360 turntable and Cube robot into a system for the photography and digitization of valuable antique & museum collection items. They also join a growing line of custom modules and applications designed around the unique needs of PhotoRobot customers. Among PhotoRobot's family of robots, the Robotic Platform Carousel 5000 features at the 2012 Robotized Photography Exhibition Booth. ## Software - **BASIP:** 2005 - 2016 (Controls were functional only for the robots, cameras, and studio lights control. Image processing was through 3rd party software, including SpinMe Studio; YaWah Server, which was later acquired by Adobe Scene 7; FSI Viewer; and others.) - **PhotoRobot _Controls Software:** 2014 - Present (Controls are now available for all robots, cameras, studio lights, accessories, and other photographic equipment with local, hybrid, or cloud-based operation. Image post-processing is now in the software, and covers basic to advanced features for: automated digital image processing, image editing, backup, and publishing. The software can produce photography according to GS1 and other industry standards.) - **PhotoRobot Locator:** 2014 - Present(Controls features a utility feature to search for and configure robots over the local area network.) - **PhotoRobot Touch:** 2024 - Present (Controls features an iOS app to identify objects via QR code, SKU barcodes, or Universal Product Code. Image capture is also possible using an iPhone. All operations are guided by a PhotoRobot software Wizard, from: picture-taking to image upload, cloud post-processing, and file delivery.) ## Applications Among the primary applications of PhotoRobot technology, robotic process automation (RPA) aims to reduce operational costs, labor requirements, and content time-to-market for photography agencies and production halls. In these aspects, RPA helps PhotoRobot to automate complex, time-consuming and repeatable tasks, while likewise reducing the onboarding and technological requirements for in-house object photography. ### Still Image, Packshot & GS1 Photography [**Still product photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image) is commonly employed for marketing purposes, product listings for online stores, and also to adhere to GS1 standards. This type of photography uses product-only images often on a white, distraction-free background. Still images typically capture details of objects such as their size, material, silhouette, and color. In GS1 compliant photos, they also capture barcodes, SKUs, ingredient lists, and nutritional as well as on-package data. ### 360 Object Photography [**360 product spins**](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin) are essentially for eCommerce, and to enhance eCommerce product listings. However, it can also support applications such as archiving museum collection items, or preserving valuable objects of study. 360 object photos (also **360 spins** or simply **spins**) show 360-degrees horizontally around an object. Spins sometimes may also include multiple rows of elevation ([**3D spins**](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360)) to capture bottom and top views, allowing for viewing along a vertical as well as horizontal axis. The assets can be either non-interactive, or interactive with click and drag control, hot spots, and zoom. This helps to create more engaging and informative content, whether for product visualization, or documenting objects. Further, a high-quality 360 spin will consist most often of 24, 36, or more photos around an item. These individual photos provide multiple assets that companies then use in the form of packshots, marketing images, and still image galleries. In other cases, it is possible to create a simple 360 spin by video production. These spins use a video loop of the rotating object rather than stitching together a series of still images. They are most often employed to enhance product listings, such as for sales, email, and social media channels. ### Photogrammetry 3D Modeling Additionally, when producing 360 spin photography, PhotoRobot software integration of [**photogrammetry 3D object modeling**](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model) is able to digitize photos into virtual 3D object models. This involves a 3D scanning process that is most commonly used to create interactive object experiences, product configurators, and assets for augmented & virtual reality applications. In order to generate a 3D model, the system analyzes a 360 spin containing at least two rows of elevation, and at least one top view, and one bottom view of an object. Powerful software algorithms are then able to analyze, measure, and generate a 3D model by stitching together the individual photographs. This process results in a virtual object model which customers can host on 3D eCommerce platforms, publish on their own internal systems and software, or optimize via 3rd party software for video games, AR & VR applications. These use cases are popular across wide ranging industries: from automotives & automotive parts, to car reselling, fashion & footwear, and any dynamic, complex, or configurable objects. ### Moving Product Animation [**Moving product animations**](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/animation) are 360 spins that showcase movement, configurations, or interaction of items. They might demonstrate product functionality, complexity, as well as movement from multiple or all angles. Take for example an animation of a collection of items, like a 360 spin of a gift box that slowly adds food and beverage products into their packaging. Another example might be a 360 spin of two fashion items together, like a handbag and matching handkerchief combination. Animations help to not only inform and educate. More importantly, they make product visuals more likely to attract the attention of prospective buyers. They offer a modern, entertaining format to enhance product listings, and compliment wider portfolios for product advertising and marketing campaigns. ### 360 Product Video The [**360 product video**](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video) is a non-interactive spin often in the format of a video loop that showcases a product rotating on a distraction-free background. This format serves as an effective alternative to 360 product photography for website product listings. It is also optimal for advertising across email and social media channels, with 360 product video embeddable in MP4 or GIF file formats. 360 product videos can function as simple 360 spins that show an object rotating along a horizontal axis only, or as more advanced spins with a flying camera effect. The flying camera effect is more often produced using a Robot Arm in combination with a motorized turntable. It captures a vertical viewing axis in addition to the horizontal axis, making the view appear to fly over an object as it spins. Producing videos like these is then possible in a cost-efficient manner using robotic process automation. PhotoRobot software provides programmable control over turntable rotation with video capture, robot arm movement, and other studio equipment to automatically capture videos according to video timelines. This allows teams to easily repeat video workflows, and to consistently produce 360 product video with smooth, robotic precision. ## Locations - **Production** (2004 - Present): Prague, Czech Republic - **Sales** (2004 - Present): Prague, Czech Republic - **Sales** (2024 - Present): New York, NY - USA ## Sales - **Direct Sales and Support:** USA, EU, Global - **Additional Support:** Local Application, OEM Partners ## Languages - **Company Website:** 98 - **PhotoRobot Controls Software:** 6 (English, and Auto-translated from English to Chinese, Spanish, Italian, German, Portuguese, Polish, French, Dutch, and to other languages on request) - **PhotoRobot Touch iPhone Control App:** 2 (English, Czech) - **Robot OS:** 1 (English) ## Cameras - **3rd party camera synchronization** (2004 - Present)**:** Sync via wire shutter, 3rd party software, and watched folder for data exchange - **Canon DSLR & mirrorless** (2008 - Present) - **Nikon** (2004 - 2024 March): Discontinued support ## Photography Lighting - **FOMEI:** Stobes, LED (2004 - Present) - **Broncolor Siros:** Strobes (2004 - Present) - **RotoLight:** LED (2004 - Present) - **DMX Standard Compatible Lights:** LED (2016 - Present) - **Profoto D2:** Strobes (2016 - Present) - **Aputure**,**ARRI**: DMX Standard Compatible, LED (2016 - Present) ## Operating System - **MacOS:** PhotoRobot Controls (2014 - Present) - **iOS**: PhotoRobot Locator (2014 - Present); PhotoRobot Touch (2024 - Present) - **Android:** PhotoRobot Locator(2014 - Present) - **Linux:** PhotoRobot Controls (2014 - 2016) - **Microsoft Windows:** PhotoRobot Controls (2004 - Present) ## Development - **Pascal / Delphi** (2004 - 2016) - **Node.js** (2014 - Present) - **C** (2014 - Present) ## Cloud Integration - **Microsoft Azure** (2015 - Present): Hardware Configuration and Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) - **Google Cloud Platform** (2016 - Present): PhotoRobot Controls proprietary software with software license ## Downloads - **PhotoRobot Cloud:** Drivers, Desktop, and Cloud - **App Store**: iOS / iPadOS - **Google Play:** Android **Note:** Download of PhotoRobot Controls, Locator, and other related apps are accessible in all [**paid PhotoRobot Accounts**](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads) associated with the installation of physical hardware. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions # SECTION: manuals > broncolor-siros-800-s-operating-instructions # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-07-14 --- # Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions These operating instructions for the Broncolor Siros 800 S aim to support PhotoRobot customers in understanding and using their device. ## Broncolor Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 Operating Instructions The following operating instructions for the Broncolor Siros 800 S are a reproduction of the official materials from the manufacturer for quick reference by PhotoRobot customers. These materials aim to support the initial understanding and independent operation of their Broncolor Siros 800 S device. Although, be aware that Broncolor lights are managed directly in PhotoRobot _Controls App. This ensures there is no need to install drivers for Broncolor hardware management on the customer side. **For the technical information on hardware components, software tools, principle modes, and recommended settings for Broncolor lights with PhotoRobot, refer to** [**PhotoRobot – Broncolor Lights Management**](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-broncolor-lights-management)**.** **Note:** These operating instructions are a reproduction of the official operating instructions by the manufacturer for the Broncolor Siros 8 S series studio lights. Refer to the manufacturer’s website [broncolor.swiss](https://broncolor.swiss/) for the original documentation on your specific product. At the same time, be sure to observe any instructions provided specifically with your device before its first use. ## Controls and Displays The **controls and displays** for the Broncolor Siros 800 S are as follows. 1. Modelling Light On/ Off 2. Rotary Controller 3. WiFi Display 4. Digital Power Distribution Display 5. “test” key 6. Menu Settings 7. Menu Settings 8. Menu Settings 9. Menu Settings 10. Menu Settings 11. Menu Settings 12. Menu Settings 13. Menu Settings 14. Handle 15. Sync Socket 16. Mini USB 17. Mains Switch ## Before Use The Broncolor Siros S is a high-quality product that provides years of service if used properly. Be sure to carefully read all information within these operating instructions, which also contain important instructions for use and maintenance of the appliance. Refer further users to these instructions to familiarize new users with the device, its use and its maintenance. Additionally, always observe the safety instructions provided separately for your device from Broncolor. ## Table of Contents 1. Scope of Supply 2. First Start-up 3. Control Elements 4. Overview of Main Menu Functions 5. Menu Navigation 6. Controlling Flash Times 7. Release 8. HS Function 9. Special Functions 10. Information and Fault Messages 11. FAQs 12. Accessories 13. Maintenance / Repairs 14. Environmental Protection Information 15. Guarantee and Notice for UK customers 16. Technical Data ## 1. Scope of Supply ### 1.1. Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 – 31.643.XX First, ensure that you have received the following items in the delivery. - Siros S Monolight - Mains Cable - Operating Instructions (BA109.00) - Important Safety Instructions (WA-18-1) ### 1.2. Kits **Siros Expert Kit contents include:** - 2× Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 - 1× Umbrella, 85 cm (33.574.00) - 1× Softbox 60 x 60 (33.561.00) - 1× Speed Ring (33.401.00) - 2× Junior Stand AC (35.100.00) - 1× Flash Bag 2 (36.532.00) - 1× Accessory Bag (36.535.00) - 1× Sync Cable (34.111.00) **Siros Pro Kit contents include:** - 3× Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 - 1× Octabox 75 (33.600.00) - 2× Speed Ring (33.401.00) - 2× L40 Standard Reflector (33.115.00) - 3× Junior Stand AC (35.100.00) - 1× Flash Bag 3 (36.533.00) ## 2. First Start-Up ### 2.1. Remove Protective Cover ### 2.2. Plug in Mains Cable ### 2.3. Switch the Unit ON at the Main Switch ## 3. Control Elements ### 3.1. Element Functions #### Rotary Controller (2) - The **rotary controller (2)** functions to switch the unit on and off (stand-by mode). Pressing the rotary controller for 3 seconds switches the unit to stand-by. - In the menu, the rotary controller enables menu navigation and confirmation of menu items. There is further explanation of menu navigation in chapter 5. - In operation, the rotary controller changes the flash energy. Turning counter-clockwise reduces the flash energy, while turning clockwise increases it. Meanwhile, turning the controller slowly changes it in 1/10 f-stop steps, and turning fast (“twisting”) in 1/1 f-stop steps. #### Info Display (4) - The **info display (4)** shows the flash energy selected, or the menu selection options. #### Mod - Modeling Light ON / OFF (1) - Use the “**mod** ”**(1)** to switch the modeling light on or off. A longer press of the button changes the operating mode from “full” to “prop” or vice versa. #### Test (5) - Using **“test” (5)** will begin a test. The “Ready” display around the rotary controller changes to blue as soon as the charge / discharge operation has been completed. ### 3.2. Menu Functions #### Speed (13) - The **“speed” (13)** menu setting is for fast charging and flash times. Find further explanation in chapter 6 of these operating instructions. #### WiFi (12) - **“WiFi” (12)** indicates whether the WiFi is switched on or off. #### HS (11) - “HS” indicates whether HS is on or off. #### Studio / Channel (10) - The menu setting **“st / ch” (10)** is for changing the studio / channel. Use it to switch the current studio channel (RFS 2). #### Lamp (9) - Use the menu setting **lamp (9)** to select the lamp channel (RFS 2). #### Sequence (8) - The **“seq” (8)** menu setting selects the number of flashes. #### Beep (7) - The **“beep” (7)** menu function shows if the acoustic “Ready” warning is switched on or off. #### Sync (6) - Using **“sync” (6)** permits the selection of different methods of release (photocell, radio, photocell, and / or radio). #### Sync Socket / Mini USB (15 / 16) - Use the menu functions **Sync socket / Mini USB (15 / 16)** for release via the sync cable, or software update via mini USB. #### On / Off (17) - Use **on / off (17)** on the unit to switch it on or off. ## 4. Overview of Main Functions The **main functions** are as follows. 1. To enter the main menu, press the rotary controller (2). 2. Turn the rotary controller (2) clockwise or counter-clockwise to reach the required menu item. 3. To confirm your selection, press the rotary controller (2) again. The selected menu item starts to blink. | Display | Selection Options | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | speed | on / off | See chapter 6 – Controlling flash times | | WiFi | on / off / sync | See chapter 9.2 – WiFi settings | | HS | on / off | Switches HS on or off (Siros 800 S only) | | st/ch | 1–99 | Sets the studio address/channel from 1–99 | | lamp | 1–40 | Sets the lamp address/zone from 1–40 | | seq | off / 2–50 | Selects a certain number of flash releases from 2–50 | | beep | on / off | Switches acoustic "Ready" signal on or off | | sync | rf / ce / all / -- | Selection of different methods of release (radio "rf", photocell "ce", photocell and radio "all" or only sync cable "--") | ## 5. Menu Navigation Menu functions of the Broncolor Siros 800 S include: - speed - WiFi - HS - st/ch - lamp - seq - beep - sync After pressing the rotary controller (2), you enter the main menu of the monolight. From there, you have access to the various functions. **Please note: If a menu item cannot be selected, such as with products other than the Siros 800 S, the unit does not support that function.** **Example:** Set a sequence of 15 flashes per release. 1. Press the rotary controller (2) to enter the main menu. The menu item last selected will be displayed. The main display changes from showing the output power to the selected menu item. 2. Turn the rotary controller (2) until you reach the menu item "seq". 3. Press the rotary controller (2) to confirm this function. The "seq" display begins to blink. 4. Turn the rotary controller (2) until "15" appears in the main display. 5. Confirm this selection by pressing the rotary controller (2). After this confirmation, the unit switches to its normal state. If the selection is not confirmed within 5 seconds, the unit switches to its normal state without changing its setting. ## 6. Controlling Flash Times In the main menu you can set the flash time of the monolight to "speed". This setting calculates the fastest possible flash time for the chosen energy level. This also may cause the flash color to shift slightly towards the blue region. 1. Press the rotary controller (2) to enter the main menu. 2. Turn the rotary controller (2) until you reach the menu item "speed". 3. Confirm this selection by pressing the rotary controller (2). 4. Use the rotary controller (2) to select the option "on" or "off". 5. Confirm this with the rotary controller (2). ## 7. Release ### 7.1. RFS 2 Module (Radio Frequency System) For RFS 2 flash control, the channel (studio address) must correspond to the transmitter’s channel. The studio address is set in the menu at position "st". The lamp channel is defined in the menu under "lamp". Refer to section 9.3 for more information about changing the colors of the cognition lights. With the radio transceiver, you can define and set the individual lamps as you wish. To learn how to do this, please see the operating instructions for the transceiver. The transceiver is not standardly included with individual heads. ### 7.2. Photocell (Cell) The photocell can be switched on and off using the menu function "sync" (6). When this is active, the blue LED next to the "cell" label is illuminated. After the first flash of a sequence, the active photocell is deactivated, and the blue LED beside the "sync" key (6) blinks. Pressing the "test" key switches it on again. ### 7.3. Sync Socket (15) The sync cables – 5m (16.4ft) (Art. No. 34.111.00) and 10m (32.8ft) (34.112.00) – can be fitted to the socket for cable release (15). ### 7.4. "test" Key (5) Using this key, the monolight can be triggered manually. The flash can be triggered as soon as 70% of the set energy level is reached. The visual "Ready" indicator, on the other hand, only illuminates when 100% is attained. ## 8. HS Function In combination with the RFS 2.2 transmitter, you can use the Siros 800 S monolight with extremely fast shutter speeds. For example, with ambient light, even with the aperture wide open (selective focus), the image can be underexposed correctly with up to 1/8000s, and Siros still lets you set dominant and creative light effects. All you need for this is the RFS 2.2 transmitter, which is available for Canon, Fuji, Nikon and Sony cameras. In addition, HS must be activated on all Siros units. This modifies the flash curve and guarantees, in combination with RFS 2.2, correct exposure with no limits on your choice of shutter speed. Please read the operating instructions for the RFS 2.2 transmitter to learn more about optimum use of the HS function. While working in HS mode, you are only able to use flash power level 4 to 10 with Siros. ## 9. Special Functions ### 9.1. Reset (to Factory Settings) Press the "test" key (5) for 4 seconds. This resets all functions to the factory settings. Resetting is acknowledged by a double beep. ### 9.2. "bronControl" App and WiFi Settings To control your Siros monolight, you can also download the "bronControl" app free of charge. To find the app, search for "bronControl" in Apple’s App Store, or in Google’s Play Store. ### 9.2.1. Operating Modes #### 9.2.1.1. Operation in "Private" Mode (Factory Setting) If the WiFi mode is activated on more than one monolight, these units all link up automatically with the same studio address to form a private network. A smartphone or tablet must then be connected to this network in order to control it. To use this, activate the WiFi function on your smartphone or tablet. Your device will then automatically search for available WiFi networks. Connect your smartphone or tablet to the appropriate Bron-Studio network. The connection password is: bronControl. Now start the "bronControl" app on your device. Add the appropriate studio number under "add new studio" and connect the app with this studio. For further instructions about operation, please use the help function "?" in the app. #### 9.2.1.2. Operation in "Enterprise" Mode If there is an existing WiFi network (router), the unit can be integrated into this network using a smartphone or tablet. To achieve this, in the "bronControl" app, under settings, go to "Network Settings" and enter your router’s settings in "enterprise" mode. Make sure the units are set to the correct studio address. Siros saves the last type of connection and tries to connect to the last network the next time it starts. #### 9.2.2. Menu Settings The menu settings are defined as follows for: **on** / **off** / **sync** (**on** / **--** / **sy**). | on / off / sync (on / -- / sy) | | --- | | on | The WiFi module is activated. The unit tries to connect to a network. | | -- | The WiFi module is deactivated. | | sy | When **sy** is selected, the unit reverts to **Private** mode. This means the unit loses its current network settings and reconnects to the private network. | #### 9.2.3. WiFi Display (3) on Unit The **symbols** and their **descriptions** for the **Wifi display (3)** on the unit are as follows. | Symbol | Description | | --- | --- | | Off | WiFi is not activated, or there is no WiFi module installed. | | Blinking | WiFi is activated, but not connected to a network. | | Permanently on Blue | WiFi is activated and connected to a Siros network (private). | | Permanently on Violet | WiFi is activated and connected to an existing network (enterprise). | ### 9.3. Cognition Lights When the various lamp channels are selected (zones), the cognition light on the top surface of the unit changes color. The purpose of this is to differentiate between individual units when they are controlled by the "bronControl" app. The light on the unit changes color when the app is activated on a smartphone or tablet or when the rotary controller on the unit is pressed; it changes back to blue on leaving the menu. The **lamp channel colors** are as follows. | Lamp Channel Colors | | --- | | Lamp Channel 1 | Blue | | Lamp Channel 2 | Green | | Lamp Channel 3 | Violet | | Lamp Channel 4 | Yellow | | Lamp Channel 5 | Turquoise | | From Lamp Channel 6 | The colors repeat in the same order (starting with Blue). | ## 10. Information and Fault Messages ### 10.1. Acoustic Signals The **acoustic signals** are a beep sound or a double-beep. | Acoustic Signals | | --- | | Beep | End of charging or discharging. | | Double Beep | Energy demand above or below the energy control setting via the RFS 2.1 / 2.2 transmitter. | ### 10.2. Message in Display | Message in Display | | --- | | Error 1 (f1) | **No flash after triggering** ✓ Is the ignition wire correctly connected? ✓ Is the flash tube correctly installed? ✓ Otherwise, replace the flash tube. | | Error 2 (f2) | **Afterglow** ✓ Switch the unit off and then on again. ✓ If this fault occurs repeatedly, the flash tube is defective. | | Error 3 (f3) | **Electronics defective** ✓ The unit must be sent to Service for repair. | | Error 4 (f4) | **Overvoltage in flash capacitors** ✓ The unit must be sent to Service for repair. | | Error 5 (f5) | **Thermal alarm, capacitors overheated** A cooling phase of approximately 20 minutes starts. Do not switch the unit off! | **Note:** *Error messages are always also indicated by the red cognition light. ## 11. FAQs ### 11.1. Changing Flash Tubes 1. Disconnect the mains cable from the unit. 2. Remove the safety glass by pulling it out of its retaining clips. 3. Press the contact spring downwards and pull the flash tube out carefully. ### 11.2. Changing the Fuse 1. Disconnect the mains cable from the unit (see picture 1 above). Open the fuse compartment beneath the unit. 2. Prise the blown fuse carefully out with a pointed object. 3. Insert the replacement fuse and close the fuse compartment again ### 11.3. Changing Light Shapers 1. Turn the light shaper in either direction to its stop. 2. Pull the release backwards and, at the same time, turn the light shaper until it is free of the bayonet fitting. 3. Remove the light shaper carefully to the front. Take care not to damage the safety glass. ### 11.4. Mounting an Umbrella To mount the umbrella, mount it in the opening provided beneath the unit. ## 12. Accessories Siros is compatible with the entire range of broncolor light shapers. The following items represent **specially recommended accessories**: | 33.115.00 | L40 standard reflector | | --- | --- | | 34.260.00 | Halogen modelling light, 300W for Siros | | 34.360.00 | Flash tube, 400/800J for Siros | | 34.369.00 | Safety glass for Siros | | 35.100.00 | Junior stand AC | | 36.531.00 | Flash Bag 1 | | 36.532.00 | Flash Bag 2 | | 36.533.00 | Flash Bag 3 | | 33.194.00 | Honeycomb grid set for L40 | | 33.570.00 | Umbrella 105cm silver/black | | 33.571.00 | Umbrella 105cm white/black | | 33.572.00 | Umbrella 105cm transparent | | 33.573.00 | Umbrella 85cm white/black | | 33.574.00 | Umbrella 85cm silver/black | | 33.117.00 | Umbrella reflector for Siros incl. protective cover | | 33.119.00 | Barn door with 4 wings for L40 | | 33.318.00 | Color filters for barn door for L40 | | 33.319.00 | Color correcting and diffusion filters for barn door for L40 | | 33.576.00 | Focus 110 umbrella silver/black Ø110cm (43.3") | | 36.133.00 | RFS 2.1 transmitter | | 36.160.00 | RFS 2.2 C transmitter (Canon) | | 36.161.00 | RFS 2.2 N transmitter (Nikon) | | 36.162.00 | RFS 2.2 S transmitter (Sony) | | 36.163.00 | RFS 2.2 F transmitter (Fuji) | ## 13. Maintenance and Repairs Your broncolor monolight is a precision instrument, able to provide years of trouble-free operation when treated with appropriate care. However, should a fault occur, please do not try to open the unit and repair it yourself. Even when the unit is switched off, there may still be dangerous levels of voltage inside it. Therefore, for maintenance and repairs, always send the unit to your Broncolor service point. ## 14. Environmental Protection Information At the end of its useful life, this product may not be disposed of as normal household waste. Instead, it must be taken to a collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic appliances. The materials are recyclable according to their markings. By re-use, recycling or other forms of using old appliances, you are making an important contribution to the protection of our environment. Please ask your local authorities or a Broncolor sales partner for the appropriate disposal point. ## 15. Guarantee All broncolor power packs, lamps, monolights and accessories are built to a high quality standard. Broncolor offers a two-year factory guarantee from the date of purchase (for the first owner) on the above broncolor products. Excluded from this guarantee are flash tubes, halogen lamps, safety glasses, cables, batteries and textiles. Faults resulting from non-observance of safety instructions, incorrect handling, use of accessories from another manufacturer, unauthorised intervention or modification are excluded from the factory guarantee. Broncolor / PhotoRobot assumes no liability for damage resulting from non-observance of safety instructions, incorrect handling, use of accessories from another manufacturer or unauthorized intervention or modification. In the event of technical problems, please contact the nearest authorised Broncolor service station immediately. Article numbers, product descriptions and the scope of supply can vary from one country to another. For more detailed information, please contact your Broncolor sales partner. Errors and misprints excepted. ## 16. Notice for UK Customers This device can be configured to connect to a wireless LAN network. Please configure this product to connect to secured infrastructure. Do not use the configuration mode for normal operation. - **Reports about Security Vulnerabilities:** support@broncolor.swiss - Reaction time: 30 days - UK Defined Support Period: 2 years after date of sale, only applicable to products sold in the UK (except Northern Ireland) on or after April 29th, 2024 - **Manufacturer’s name:** Bron Elektronik AG - **Manufacturer’s address:** Hagmattstrasse 7, 4123 Allschwil, Switzerland ## 17. Technical Data | Specification | Siros 800 S WiFi / RFS 2 31.643.XX | | --- | --- | | Flash energy | 800 J / WS | | Aperture at 2 m (100 ISO) with reflector L40 | 32 8/10 | | Aperture at 2 m (100 ISO) with reflector P70 | 45 6/10 | | Flash duration t0.1 (t0.5) – Min. energy | 1/4000 s (1/8000 s) | | Flash duration t0.1 (t0.5) – Max. energy | 1/500 s (1/1100 s) | | Charging time (230 V / 50 Hz) | 0.07–1.9 s | | Charging time (120 V / 60 Hz) | 0.04–1.9 s | | Charging time (100 V / 50 Hz) | 0.08–2.9 s | | Flash energy adjustment | Over 9 f-stops, in 1/10 or full-stop increments | | Color temperature | 800 J / WS | | ECTC technology | Constant color temperature across the power range. | | Connection data | 100–120 V / 50–60 Hz: 5.5 A • 200–240 V / 50–60 Hz: 3.5 A • Can also operate from an external battery converter. | | Modelling light | Halogen, max. 300 W / 120 V, adjustable: Off, Full or proportional. | | Flash triggering | Manual test button, photocell, sync cable and built-in broncolor RFS 2 receiver. | | Remote control | bronControl app (WiFi models) or RFS 2.1 / RFS 2.2 transmitter. | | Ready indicator | Visual and acoustic (switchable). | | Additional functions | Flash sequences up to 50 flashes, integrated umbrella mount and reflector, Speed Mode, USB firmware updates, thermal monitoring and internal discharge for power reduction. | | HS function | HS mode for high shutter speeds. | | Cooling | Temperature-controlled fan. | | Standards | EN 60065, EN 61000-4-2, EN 55015, EN 301489-1, EN 301489-3, ISO 10330. | | Dimensions | 32 × 13 × 18 cm (12.6 × 5.1 × 7.1 in) | | Weight | 3.6 kg (7.9 lb) | --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide # SECTION: manuals > c850-c1300-user-guide # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-11 --- # PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide This installation manual provides technical instructions for the assembly, connection, and use of the PhotoRobot C850 and C1300 turntable modules. ## PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 Turntable User Guide This installation manual provides technical instructions for the assembly, connection, and use of the PhotoRobot C850 and C1300 turntable modules. The information supports the initial setup and first operation of either the C850 or C1300 robot by the customer. It also describes the assembly of the optional Robotic Arm V8 expansion, and the mounting of the optional telescopic pole. **Note:** PhotoRobot previously distributed the C1300 under the name Case 1300. C1300 now replaces the original model name. **Important:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) before any self-installation, first use, storage, or service of PhotoRobot devices. ## C850 & C1300 Self-Installation & First Use Thank you and congratulations on your PhotoRobot purchase. PhotoRobot technology represents decades of professional experience, insights, and innovation in automated photography. Everything from the robust, stylish design to the modularity of PhotoRobot systems is with your business in mind. Use the following information for the self-installation and first use of the C850 & C1300 turntables. This manual covers the product description, and provides instructions for one-time installations and testing. ## 1. C850 & C1300 Product Description **In comparison, the only difference between the PhotoRobot C850 & C1300 systems is that the C1300 accommodates different size turntable plates (up to 1300 mm).** Both the C850 & C1300 have the same size body, with a strong steel frame weighing over 100 kg. This is heavier than the 70 kg aluminum design of the Case 850, but allows for greater stability and performance in the studio. Although it is at the cost of being slightly less portable, the sturdier design no longer requires a support bridge under the turntable. Thus, the design is more open, providing more angles for lighting objects. Key components of the C-Class photo turntable systems include: - The system Control Unit (an integral built-in device for control over C-Class modules) - The robot body (strong steel frame with an open design for superior object lighting) - White diffusion cloth background (mounted to the machine for the automatic capture of photos on a pure white background) - Built-in castors for in-studio mobility - Capability of comfortable transport by moving van - Optional Robotic Arm V8 Expansion (including Control Unit, and optional docking station) - Optional Mounting Telescopic Pole ### 1.1. Device Overview - C850, C1300 Power and control of the C-Class turntables C850 and C1300 is via the built-in Control Unit. The Control Unit powers up the system, and controls robotic movements of the turntables. It is also what provides power to and control over the optional Robotic Arm expansion if in use with a module. **Note:** The Control Unit of the C-Class turntables are built-in to the devices. If using the Robotic Arm V8 expansion, the Robotic Arm has its own Control Unit that is not built-in. Instead, the Control Unit of the Robotic Arm can be positioned in the HD rack of the C-Class devices, with connection from the arm to the arm Control Unit via the motor cable. ## 2. Robot Assembly / Preparation for Use **2.1.1.** To begin robot assembly, first locate the support feeds and wheels, and then mount each to the machine skeleton. **2.1.2.** Next, locate the two black holders, and mount both to the vertical parts of the skeleton. **2.1.3. Note:** The special screws and nuts should be put and fastened into holes as in the following graphic. ### 2.2. White Background Assembly **2.2.1.** Assembling the white diffusion cloth background requires mounting the device to the machine frame. **2.2.2.** To mount the white background, there are five parts to the background frame: - Top part**(1)** - 122 cm - Vertical parts **(2)** - 97 cm - Arch parts **(3)** - Horizontal parts **(4)** - 82 cm - Front part **(5)** - 122 cm **2.2.3.** Locate the power switch in order to identify the back side of the robot. **2.2.4.** Locate the two arch profile background frame parts. These parts will function as number **(3)** from the background diagram: **2.2.5.** Next, find the eight couplers for joining the aluminum profiles. **2.2.6.** Retrieve the two arc aluminum profile parts (3) from the background frame diagram, and then mount couplers into each part - left and right. The couplers connect on each end of the arch in the same line. **Note:** The right side of the arch is shown in the images below. Couplers should be on each end in the same line. The image below represents the right arch. **Additionally:** Ensure that couplers are inserted as shown in the images above. The couplers connect on each end of the arch in the same line. Repeat steps for the left part. **2.2.7.** Find two aluminum profile background frame parts 82 cm in length. These parts will function as the horizontal parts **(4)** from the background diagram. Each part will be connected to the left and right arch on the bottom, and will represent the bottom horizontal part **(4)** of the background. Join the curved aluminum profiles and fasten the screws into the coupler. **2.2.8.** Locate the other two aluminum background frame parts 97 cm in length. These will serve as the vertical parts **(2)** from the background frame diagram and repeat steps as shown in 2.2.7. **2.2.9.** Find four special sets of screws, washers, and nuts for fastening the frame of the background to the robot. **2.2.10.** Insert two sets of screws into the outer side of each side of horizontal parts (4) left and right and assemble. Note: The outer side is the side where the couplers are visible. **2.2.11.** Loosen the left and right background holders on the robot. Then, ensure that the holder is attached to the second set of holes from the top. **2.2.12.** Mount the left and right side of the frame to the background holder on the robot. **2.2.13.** At this point, the frame is ready for the insertion of the white background. **2.2.14.** Note that there are threads at the open ends of the coupler. **2.2.15.** Mount the tool to assist with inserting the white background edge into the horizontal part **(4)** from the background diagram. **2.2.16.** Find the rolled white background paper, and unwrap it. **2.2.17.** Locate the plastic background guide rollers. Note that there are two different lengths. **2.2.18.** The guide length must correspond to the appropriate side of the background. **2.2.19.** Insert and feed all four guides into the corresponding pockets of the white background. **2.2.20.** Insert the guides completely through the pocket until it protrudes out from both ends of the background. **2.2.21.** Repeat the process by feeding the shorter guide completely through the other side of the background, and on both longer sides as well. **2.2.22.** Ensure the plastic guides at the corners of the background are in the right position. **2.2.23.** If the plastic guides protrude too far out of the corners, cut the guides to the appropriate length. **2.2.24.** Locate the bottom side of the white background. **2.2.25.** Insert the background into the frame as follows. **2.2.26** Next, remove the tool for feeding the white background edge into the profiles, and slide the aluminum profile **(5)** in the diagram onto the white background at the front edge. **2.2.27.** Next, find the four corner couplers. **2.2.28.** Fasten two couplers using the screws provided to the front edge of the background frame. **2.2.30.** Next, locate four square nuts for assembly of the vertical parts. **2.2.29.** Insert two nuts into the right-side vertical part, and the other two into the left-side vertical part. **2.2.30.** Prepare the top part of the frame for connection to the white background. **2.2.31.** Insert the top part of the frame into the white background. **2.2.32.** Insert nuts into the frame, slide and screw the top laser into the nut, and position it to the center vertical part. **2.2.33.** Mount the last corner coupler remaining in the top-right and left corner of the machine. **2.2.34.** Locate four plastic corner protectors, and place them on each of all four frame corners. **2.2.35.** Find two black background holders and four screws, and mount them to the frame using the square nuts which were prepared in advance. **2.2.36.** Finally, mount the black background to the forks, and then add the chain and weight. ### 2.3. Robotic Arm V8 Preparation (Optional) **2.3.1.** If the PhotoRobot Robotic Arm V8 is delivered with the C-Class robot, use the following instructions for assembly. **Note:** For additional technical information on self-installation and first use of the Robotic Arm V8, refer to the [Robotic Arm V8 Installation Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-arm-v8). Depending on the configuration, the Robotic Arm V8 can have one short shank, one long shank, or both a short and a long shank. **2.3.2.** Remove the shank(s) and robot body from the packaging. **2.3.3.** Prepare the top part of the Arm V8 to mount the shank. **2.3.4.** Position a shank onto the Arm. **2.3.5.** Fasten all protective parts securely into their respective locations. **2.3.6.** Locate the box of the Manfrotto geared head, and prepare the head for mounting. **2.3.7.** Remove the white string from the screw at the end of the Arm V8 shank. **2.3.8.** Attach the Manfrotto geared head by screwing it onto the shank. **2.3.9.** Adjust the Manfrotto head until leveled. **2.3.10.** Mount the camera onto the Manfrotto head, and add some weights onto the opposite side of the shank. The weights must compensate for the weight of the camera. **2.3.11.** The weight of the camera should prevail slightly in order to push the end switch when in the zero-degrees position. **2.3.12.** Mount two docking mechanism parts onto the Arm V8. **2.3.13.** Mount docking part onto the C850 or C1300. **2.3.14.** Slide the lever to the left in order to lift the Arm V8 up and move it. **2.3.15.** Dock the Arm V8 to the C850 or C1300. **2.3.16.** Slide the lever to the right to lower the Arm V8 and securely dock the device. **2.3.17.** Find the HD rack case folded in the cartoon box. **2.3.18.** Assemble the HD rack case. **2.3.19.** Mount the Control Unit for the Arm V8, and then mount the router and the power multi socket to the rack case. Next, connect the last port (the one with the highest number) of the router to the internet. All other router ports are bridged and work as a switch on the LAN site connecting the Control Unit, C-Class robot, and the computer. Finally, connect the bold gray motor cable to the Arm V8 on one side, and the Control Unit mounted in the rack on the other side. ### 2.4. Mounting Telescopic Pole Installation (Optional) **2.4.1.** Some configurations will also include a telescopic pole for mounting an optional PhotoRobot Cube device to the ceiling above a C-Class module. In these cases, the telescopic pole is installed into the ceiling to hold the Cube above the C-Class robot. This allows for suspending items (or parts of items) above the turntable using the Cube with nylon strings to stage and rotate items for 360 photography. At the same time, the Cube is able to sync the rotation of suspended items to the rotation of the turntable, the movement of other robots, the studio lights, and camera capture. **2.4.2.** The telescopic pole requires a concrete ceiling, and attaches to the ceiling using 8 pieces of threaded rods. It is necessary to drill 8 holes into the ceiling, and to be precise when drilling to observe the exact spacing between holes. Prepare a chemical anchor substance in advance, using it to fill in holes and fit the threaded rod into it. Repeat this process for all 8 pieces. ### 2.5. Camera Connection **2.5.1.** In order to connect the camera to the computer, it is necessary to use a compatible USB cable. Note that the connector type varies depending on the camera model. It is also recommended to use an active USB extension if the cable length is longer than 3 meters. **2.5.2.** If preparing to use fast spin mode, connect the shutter cable (delivered optionally with the robot) to the camera on one side, and to the OUT port of the C-Class robot on the other side. ## 3. PhotoRobot First Use Before the first use of PhotoRobot, it is important to understand that PhotoRobot is a modular unit consisting of both hardware and software components. Additionally, PhotoRobot represents an all-in-one system to automate every stage of production workflows. This means that it is necessary that PhotoRobot itself has a connection to the network as well as to a computer on that network. Due to this, the network must have internet connection to access PhotoRobot services. The basic operation requirements for PhotoRobot are then as follows. - The PhotoRobot system must connect to the local network. - There must be a computer to run service GUI or the operator’s software (PhotoRobot _Controls App). - The computer must connect to the same network as the PhotoRobot system. - There must be internet connection over the network. ### 3.1. Fomei Flash Lights Connection Scheme The following displays the connection scheme for Fomei flash lights. Note: The router type can vary if the rack case is delivered with the PhotoRobot solution. ### 3.2. Broncolor Flash Light Connection Scheme Use the following map on the connection scheme for Broncolor flashlights, keeping in mind that the router type can vary. ### 3.3. PhotoRobot Device Connection To connect the PhotoRobot device to the network for its proper functionality, first check the electricity distribution system parameters (e.g. the voltage and frequency). Next, proceed to the following steps to prepare the PhotoRobot device. - Connect the Control Unit via ethernet cable to the router provided. Note: The RJ45 connector is on the back side of the Control Unit. - Connect the computer via ethernet cable to the router provided. - Connect the router to the internet (port number 1). In order to connect to the network, also note the following basic networking requirements. - A DHCP server in the network is required. - TCP ports 80, 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - Internet connection is required. - Refer to the [PhotoRobot Detailed Networking Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) for more information if necessary. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. - Press the mains switch on the Control Unit. (When it changes status from a blinking light to a continuous light, it is ready for operation.) ### 3.4. Find PhotoRobot’s IP Address Over LAN After proper configuration of the network, it is necessary to search for and identify PhotoRobot’s IP address on LAN. To do this, the **PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP** for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network. Ensure you are using the most up-to-date version of CAPP to access this feature. Then, to identify a robot on the network directly within CAPP, open the local version of CAPP, go to Settings, and click **Robots / Control units**. The Robots / Control units menu displays columns with Name, Network, Unit, Version, Discovered, and Identify for each robot. If the dot to the left of the robot name is green, it is online. Clicking the robot field will then open the robot’s website interface. This will also make the LED light on the robot’s Control Unit blink green for its easier identification. If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** The Android version of PhotoRobot Locator has been discontinued. Alternatively, there is the FRFind command line utility for MacOS or Windows to search the network and identify PhotoRobot Control Units. Find links to download FRfind also via the PhotoRobot Account Downloads page. ### 3.5. Basic PhotoRobot Testing **3.5.1.** On a computer, open a web browser and enter PhotoRobots’ IP address in URL format. This will look for example like: https://11.22.33.44. (However, note that this address is just an example; use the IP address you found in the above section.) **3.5.2.** If successful, there will be a basic user interface similar to the graphic below. **3.5.3.** Turn on the engines **(arrow 1)**, and try to operate any movable part of the robot **(arrow 2)**. If the robot movements follow your instructions, your PhotoRobot device is ready for regular use. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-configuration # SECTION: manuals > camera-configuration # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-30 --- # Camera Configuration - PhotoRobot User Support Manual This PhotoRobot Support Manual details general camera configuration and camera settings of PhotoRobot compatible camera models. ## PhotoRobot Support - Camera Configuration In order for the camera to properly communicate with PhotoRobot Controls App, further referred to as **CAPP**, it is necessary to configure the camera accordingly. **Note**: As PhotoRobot supports a variety of camera models, this manual describes only general settings. Always ensure you are using a camera model from the [PhotoRobot Compatible Camera List](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras). These include recent DSLR and mirrorless Canon camera models. However, it is always advisable to contact PhotoRobot before purchasing a camera for your system. Then, when starting camera configuration, close all other programs that connect to the camera, and follow the steps below. ## General Camera Configuration The following steps detail how to configure a Canon camera model to communicate with CAPP via USB. However, it also possible to connect a camera over WiFi to take photos by hand, and automatically add new frames (close-ups, detail shots) to the stills folder. ### Connecting to the Computer To add a camera to CAPP, first turn on the camera, and connect it via USB to the computer. ### Requirements 1. Connect the camera directly to the USB port on the PC side. 2. Double-check the USB ports and USB cables are USB 3.0 compatible. 3. Use only USB cables that are shielded and meet the following parameters, depending on their length: - For extension: Active USB extension cable (powered one) 5m or 10m - For direct connection to the camera: up to 1m USB cable **Important:** It is not recommended to connect cameras via a USB hub. ## Power Supply It is advisable to always power the camera via the adapter (the so-called ‘dummy battery’). This way, there is no constant worry about recharging the battery and replacing it during photoshoots. The choice of power adapter also depends on the camera model. (Browse the [Canon Store Power Adapters](https://store.canon.co.uk/camera-power-adapters/) to find the right adapter for your device.) ## Camera Settings Next, before configuring camera settings, reset the camera. This helps to clear all camera settings and custom functions, even if the device is completely new. **Note:** The X0D and X00D camera series only support some of the below parameters. 1. Set the upper dial to **Manual** mode. 2. Set the camera lens to **Autofocus** mode. Note: Some Canon lenses have a Focus / Control switch. In this case, select the value Control. Then, turn the stabilizer to OFF on the lens. 3. Set **Auto power off** to Disable. 4. Set **Live view exposure simulation** to Disable. Note: This function is not generally available, as only some supported cameras have it. 5. Set **Custom controls** to Shutter button half-press, and Metering and AF start. ## Flash Settings Some settings might prevent the camera from firing the flash when using either studio lights or a Speedlite. If the flash is not firing, check the following settings to ensure the proper triggering of the flash. 1. Enable **Flash firing** in External Speedlite control. 2. If using a **DSLR with live view**, check that live view is not preventing the flash from triggering. When set to Live View, some cameras may not fire a flash. However, if using Canon Speedlite or another dedicated flash, it might work. (Note: If using a camera tethered to EOS Utility and in Live View, EOS Utility also stops the flash from firing.) 3. For **EOS-R series camera models**, ensure you are not using **Electronic Shutter mode**. With the exception of EOS R3 models, Electronic shutter mode will prevent the flash from firing. 4. Turn off **Silent shutter function** if on. On some cameras, the silent shutter function enables the electronic shutter mode, preventing the firing of the flash. ## Filming Video Shooting video is the only case in which you must use a memory card in the camera. Please leave the camera in Manual mode for this (see Camera Settings – Step 1). The camera will then be switched to the correct mode automatically from PhotoRobot Controls software. To learn more about creating video in PhotoRobot Controls App, see the [PhotoRobot How to Create Video User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/create-video-photorobot-controls-user-support). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution # SECTION: manuals > camera-resolution # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-30 --- # Understanding Camera Resolution for PhotoRobot Customers Understand the impact of camera resolution in product photography, and what different camera resolutions can achieve with PhotoRobot. ## Understanding Camera Resolution To avoid unreal expectations, it is important to understand the impact of camera resolution on the quality of product images. This is necessary to understand hosting and data transfer volumes, as well as simply understanding what different resolutions can achieve. For example, many times a lower resolution camera will be perfectly sufficient for photographing items. In fact, there is sometimes very little visible difference when comparing the performance of 24 MPx versus 50.6 MPx cameras. However, some items might still call for additional close-up zooms and detailed shots to capture extremely small details. The following information aims to help clarify camera resolution, from megapixels to lens selection for PhotoRobot customers. Note: For information on choosing an appropriate camera to use with PhotoRobot, refer to [PhotoRobot Compatible Cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras). ## Effect of Megapixels on Resolution For demonstration, take the following test using two different cameras: a 24 MPx camera, and a 50.6 MPx camera. The test compares the **Canon R8** with the **Canon 5DSR** to demonstrate how there is minimal visible difference in performance. First, observe the image quality when using the **24 MPx Canon R8** to capture a 360 spin: Next, compare the image quality when using the **50.6 MPx Canon 5DSR** to produce the same output: - **Note:** Any difference in resolution between the two spins above will not be immediately visible in the default web view. This is because the spin is configured to fill only the defined viewport frame. Within that context, the depth of zoom and resolution is of little factor. - To notice a visible difference, it is helpful to first stop the rotation of the two different spins at the same angle. Click and drag the mouse over the image to find the angle, and then double-click the image to activate maximum zoom. At that point, the difference in the two image resolutions becomes more visible. However, notice that there remains difficult to observe much difference in quality, even if viewing the images on a large 8K monitor. For this reason, it is often easier to inspect the quality by zooming into images on a mobile phone. Take the following screenshots presenting the maximum depth of zoom when viewing the above images using an iPhone 16 Pro. The 50.6 MPx image (left) and the 24 MPx image (right) are only slightly blurry at full zoom when inspecting on mobile. There is also a noticeable difference in zoom from the 50.6 MPx 5DSR, which focuses closer in on the item: Observe the difference in zoom between the 50.4 MPx image (left) and the 24 MPx image (right). In comparison, there is only a very slight visible difference in quality between the two images. This only becomes visible at full zoom on mobile, but is otherwise very difficult to spot. Also note how the resolution is hardly much better from the higher resolution camera. The photos were captured from a distance of approximately 8 meters from the backdrop. Meanwhile, the space between the camera and the bike was 5.6 meters. There was a zoom lens covering 24mm to 105mm in use, with image capture at 77mm at F16 and speed 1/125. ## Full-Frame Versus APS-C Sensors Camera sensor size affects mostly the angle of view, the “crop factor”, performance in different lighting conditions, dynamic range, and depth of field. In product photography, full-frame sensors have better low-light performance, and often greater dynamic range than APS-C sensors. The larger sensor allows for capturing a wider field of view, resulting in more pixels and cleaner images. They also outperform APS-C sensors when handling image noise, especially at high ISO settings. On the other hand, APS-C sensors are not often useful in product photography. This is due to the shallower depth of field of the APS-C sensor, which technically crops the image. For example, when using a full-frame sensor at 50mm, there is an effect of approximately 70mm. With APS-C sensors, the shallower depth of field requires using a higher F number, and also stronger lights. That, or using a 35mm lens in order to achieve the effect of a 50mm lens. Notice the crop effect when using the Canon 90D with APS-C sensor. The APS-C sensor captures less of the scene, reducing the count of usable pixels for the final image and resulting in a smaller image area. Although the difference in quality can be minimal if using optimal studio lighting, the APS-C sensor simply does not perform as well as wider sensors. There are too many configuration concerns with APS-C sensors, as well as strong lighting requirements, and lower zoom capabilities. This is true even if comparing the different sensors when using higher MPx camera models. The Canon 5DSR captures a much wider field of viewer and crisper images. For better understanding, use the [PhotoRobot Depth of Field Calculator](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator) to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. Additionally, refer to the [PhotoRobot Depth of Field Chart](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart) to quickly find total depth of field for common subject distances and apertures. ## Capturing Extremely Fine Details If trying to capture extremely fine details, in many cases additional close-up and detailed shots might be necessary. For example, a scratch the width of a human hair may be clearly visible in a high-resolution photo of a mobile phone. However, the same scratch on an Airbus A380 or even a bicycle would be impossible to capture from a distance. In the end, it depends on the ratio between the size of the detail and the size of the object. This is even if there were a camera with resolution far beyond what today’s best models can offer. Instead, close-up shots are sometimes necessary to capture the fine details, which are then presentable as hotspot zooms. A hotspot zoom takes a close-up shot and makes it a clickable area that zooms into product photos and 360 spins. They allow for showcasing extremely small details, including macro and handheld shots. This allows for using a lower resolution camera to capture images, and for capturing well-positioned hotpots to display the details. Although, if photographing smaller products like a backpack, it can be beneficial to use a higher resolution camera. While a lower resolution is often sufficient, the higher resolution is potentially able to capture greater detail from a distance. The same would be true for example with capturing a mobile phone, including any of its imperfections and micro details. - **Note:** Again, it would be difficult to immediately notice any flaw in resolution in the above image in its default web view. This is due to the configuration of the spin to only fill the defined viewport frame. To better judge the quality of the image, first stop the spin and double-click to zoom in at maximum depth. At that point, the quality of resolution becomes visible. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images # SECTION: manuals > capturing-images # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-10-08 --- # Capturing Images with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual PhotoRobot’s Image Capture User Manual describes how to set up, control, and automate PhotoRobot hardware, cameras, image capture & video creation. ## Capturing Images with PhotoRobot Systems After creating a Workspace in the PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”), the Capture interface grants user control over PhotoRobot hardware and cameras to automate image and video capture. ## Capture Interface The CAAP Capture interface consists of 4 main areas: 1. Item information 2. Folders, frames and images 3. Hardware configuration 4. Sequence control ## Create New Item In CAPP, a project can consist of one or more single items, while the item is typically a specific photographed object. An item can then include one or more folders to keep different types of images separate. The most common example is to designate one folder for a 360 spin (“Spin”), and another for still images (“Stills”). Before starting photography, you must add a new project (unless using an existing one), and have at least one item. To create a new item manually, go to **Project** and select **Add item**. Next, in the window that appears, completing the mandatory Name field will enable the Add button to create the new item. Here, there are also options to fill in more item information: codes, links, notes, macros, and more, although these fields are only optional. **Note:** If the new item has a barcode, it is possible to input or scan the item barcode into the system when manually creating a new item: Adding an item barcode to the item will enable the display of the barcode directly within the Capture mode interface by clicking the barcode button in the Item information area. **Remember to consider the license type you are using for CAPP.** If using a Cloud-based license, there will be more attributes in addition to those in the fields above. With the Cloud-based license, scroll to the bottom of the new item options, and select **Manage dimensions** to add an item’s width, height, length, and weight. Note: An active Cloud-based subscription enables users to add measurements without any limits. Fill in the attributes, and select **Confirm** to add the dimensions to the item. Clicking **Add** then creates the new item with all user-configured attributes. ## Import New Item Additionally, it is possible to create multiple items in one batch using the **Import** function. A prerequisite of item import functionality is to import via CSV file. CSV files contain all attributes for each item the user will import. The CSV file stores tabular data in plain text, with delimiters to separate each individual data record. Note:There is a sample-import.csv file for item import, available for download directly in the application. To import new items, go to **Project** and select **Import**. Then, in the pop-up window, it is possible to drag and drop a CSV file, or tobrowse local folders to import into CAPP via the **Browse files** button. To use a sample CSV file, click **Sample file** in the top-right part of the interface. This downloads the sample CSV to the local computer. **Remember:** Item import can include item dimensions (length, width, height, weight) without any limit on an active user license. ## Auto Create New Item As an alternative to creating items manually in CAPP, advanced barcode scanner settings enable the automatic creation of new items after scanning an unknown barcode. This setting functions to identify an item at the point of capture (typically via barcode or QR code). An operator simply scans an unknown code, and a new item is automatically created in the project. The item naming will be according to the scanned string, and in the item’s identifier field. To enable or disable automatic item creation by barcode scanner, access the **General Settings** in the local desktop version of CAPP. Next, locate the **Barcode Scanner** settings, and use the toggle to configure on or off **Automatically create a new item in the system when an unknown barcode is scanned**. **Note:** As of CAPP version 2.13.beta58, there is now the option to configure the minimum string length for barcodes. Previously, the minimum barcode / QR code length was 6 characters (to avoid dual interpretations of the scanned string among other issues). Now, this number is adjustable to allow, for example, four-character identifiers to work without the need for further adjustments. To adjust the minimum string length for barcodes / QR codes, configure the **Minimum barcode length** also in the local version of CAPP in **General Settings - Barcode Scanner.** Barcodes shorter than the length input will then be ignored by the system. ## Item Information This section of the CAPP Capture interface provides basic information about the item, and consists of 3 main areas. 1. **Capture status** - Toggle item status to Captured, Edited, Recapture, or Fix Editing 2. **Comments** - Click to access all item-level comments 3. **Next / Previous** - Use to navigate between items according to selected item status filter **Note:** If the item contains a barcode which was either manually input or automatically scanned into the system, the item information area will also display a barcode button. Clicking the barcode button will launch a pop-up window to display the item’s barcode. **Tip:** Set **Item Status Filter** to limit results to quickly find and navigate projects. - Filter results to display only items marked: **Captured, Edited, Verified, Approved,** or **Rejected.** For example, if responsible for verifying images, limit results to “Edited” to locate & review only items that have already been post-processed. After review, set item status to “Verified” or to “Fix Editing” to approve or reject changes and notify team members. The item status will inform responsible parties when images are ready for publishing, or when more editing is necessary. ## Folders, Frames & Images All visual assets are organized into Folders, with folders divided to represent different types of outputs. The three types of folders are: 1. **Spin** (360 / 3D) 2. **Stills** 3. **Video** Each Folder contains individual frames. A frame consists of information about the photographed angle (instructions for photographic processes), and one or two versions of the image: - **Original** - The original file as received by the camera - **Edited** - The image file which has been edited via PhotoRobot’s post-processing tools Navigate the Folder interface as follows: - Select between folders (1) - Experiment with configurations by taking Test shots (2) - Open image storage on a local computer computer (3) - Clear photos for re-capturing (4) - Access folder **menu*** (5) The Folder **menu** includes the following functions. - Add / Delete / Edit folder - Copy / Move frames between folders - Delete frames - completely remove all frames together with all images and angle configurations - Send for retouch - mark item for external retouching - Activity - view the activity log of an item - Import images - upload your own images - [Create 3D model](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) - generate a 3D model from images contained in the folder (*Available only on MacOS; with multiple [PhotoRobot supported 3D model formats](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats)) Also, within each frame there are additional menu options: - **Set label** - Create labels for individual frames (e.g. “hero shot - front”, “3 / 4”, “back”, or [GS1 image naming conventions](https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards#naming)) - **Change angle** - Adjust angle on an individual frame - **Pause sequence here** - Select to pause the photography sequence at this frame and wait for an operator to resume the shoot - **Mark for retouch** - Specify image for external, 3rd party retouching ## Sequence Control To start a sequence, press the **Play** button(1) at the bottom of the screen: Interrupt a sequence at any time via the **Emergency stop** button (2). In a stills folder use the **Take snapshot** button (3) to capture a frame without defining it first. The snapshot will then be captured and included as a new frame in the stills folder. ### Sequence Options Along the right hand-side panel of the CAPP interface, configure sequence options. Sequence options include: - **Workspace configuration** - Access workspaces or change between each - **Normal vs Fast-shot toggle** - Configure to pause turntable rotation before taking photos (Normal), or, for significantly quicker sequences, to take photos during non-stop rotation (Fast-shot) - **Pause on frame** - Toggle on to command turntable rotation to stop after each frame (useful when creating product animations) - **Edit automatically** - Configure to automate editing immediately after capture - **Elevate automatically** - Enable for automatic elevation to the center of a product before beginning a sequence (using item dimensions) - **Optimise arm movement** - after the sequence, the arm will remain in the position of the last photographed row. The following sequence will start from this position. ### Spin In a Spin folder, find options for 360-degree product photos. Configure **Frames** (1) to select the number of frames to capture per rotation (e.g. 24, 36, etc). Use **Add row** (2) to specify capture of additional rows from a different swing angle (the vertical angle from which the camera points at the object). ### Stills To define which frames to capture in a stills folder, use **Add frame** in the top right-hand corner of the interface. Alternatively, press **Take snapshot** to simultaneously take a photo and create a new, corresponding frame. Connect a camera over WiFi to take photos by hand and automatically add new frames (close-ups, detail shots) to the stills folder. ### Freemask Background Removal Freemask background removal is a process in which two images are captured for each frame: - Main image - a standard photo of the object - Mask image - a photo of the object lit from behind Freemask main image Freemask mask image These two images are then composited to achieve a photo with the background effectively removed around the object: Resulting transparent background product photo To enable Freemask, select the **Mask** checkbox on the right hand side panel: ## Hardware Configuration ### Robots Depending on the robot (or combination of robots), there are up to 3 types of robotic movements, and control options for position, speed, and calibration of each movement: - **Turn** - Standard to the majority of PhotoRobot devices, Turn enables users to control turntable rotation around its center - **Swing** - Configure the vertical angle at which the camera targets an object (i.e. at 0° to remain level with the turntable, at 90° for a top-view overlooking the product) - **Lift** - Set camera elevation Find the position, speed, and calibration settings within the configurable options for Turn, Swing, and Lift: - Use **Set Position** status (1) to move the robot. - Configure speed of the movement using **Speed** input (2). - Use the **Calibration** button (3) to set the robot to its starting position. If configuring movement for the first time, always set the robot to its initial position via Calibration. Additionally, as of CAPP version 2.13.3, there are configurable quick-angle presets for Turn and Swing on the Capture mode interface. Click the three vertical dots next to either field Turn / Swing, and then click **Configure angle presets**. This launches a pop-up window for the user to input the desired turn or swing angles separated by commas (maximum 4), ex: 0, 90, 180, 270. Clicking save will apply the preset swing / turn angles to capture to the robot settings. ### Cameras Enable one or multiple cameras for a sequence via the Cameras interface: Click on the **Live View** icon (1) to enable focus point selection via clicking in a Live View picture. Exclude cameras from the sequence via the **Exclude camera** icon (2). Any excluded camera will not trigger during the sequence. Typically, this is useful when users have an extra camera connected over WiFi to take photos by hand alongside a predefined spin and stills. Live View is useful when you want to check composure and focus, and requires only the icon clicking to start. Additionally, a detachable Live View allows operators to pop PhotoRobot Live View into its own window. This way, studios running dual monitors can compose on a second screen while keeping PhotoRobot _Controls workflows active on the primary display. To detach the Live View, open the Capture mode Live View in _Controls, and detach the window onto your second monitor. You can then continue capturing without shrinking your workflow UI. **Note:** For detailed information on camera setup and use, refer to [PhotoRobot Camera Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-configuration). ### Lights CAPP supports both strobe lights (Broncolor or FOMEI), and any LED lights with DMX support. For instructions on how to install & configure lights in CAPP, refer to the PhotoRobot manual on [setting up a workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace#toc-8). In the CAPP Lights interface, assign individual lights a position via the **Light position** menu (1). Using the drop-down menu, select either a custom position, or one of the predefined positions. Predefined positions include: - **Product left** / **Product right** – Lights positioned to illuminate the product from the front - **Background top** / **Background bottom** - Lights to illuminate the background from behind for creating a white background To define a custom position, select **Custom position** from Position list options. Switch lights on or off via the **Power** button (2). This is useful for example for a freemask approach, in which it is necessary to switch off front lights to take the mask image. Move the **Light intensity** slider (3) from left to right for darker or lighter illumination. Note: Some DMX-controlled lights also provide control over color temperature. ## Scopes & Presets By default, hardware configuration is the same across all folders within an item. To customize a hardware setup (by folder or by row), use the **Add scope** button: After customizing a configuration, load or save settings in the upper, right-hand corner via the drop-down menu for Presets: - Click the file icon to save all capture settings, and later load configurations to reuse across similar photoshoots. ### Assign Presets In CAPP, there are 3 methods to load / assign Presets for an item or multiple items. 1. Select an item, and load a Preset via the drop-down menu icon in the upper-right part of the interface: - Alternatively,use the hot key “**P** ” to open saved Presets. Then, select a configuration to apply to the item. This will create folders for the frames that will be shot, along with all capture settings and predefined editing operations. 2. When creating an item, users can select a configuration via the Add item menu by clicking on the Preset field. - To assign a Preset to multiple items, select the items from the Items menu, and click **Assign preset**: - Select the preset by name, and assign it to the items by clicking **Assign preset** again: 3. Alternatively, in the Items menu, click **Import** to import items from CSV: - CSV import functionality enables PhotoRobot users to create an item with its configurations in Excel to import into the system. - CSV files may contain the following customizable columns, and one functions to assign a preset by preset name to the item: **( ! )** - Note: When using CSV import, UTF-8 encoding is recommended for the best results. ### Sorting Items to Shelves (Carts) Additionally, in CAPP, sorting items to **Shelves** (or **Carts**) enables you to simplify the workflow by automatically setting up a workspace and preset after assigning a shelf to an item. Creating Shelf (or Cart) codes in the system helps to sort items into categories with configurable photoshoot settings. It is possible to assign a shelf to an item by configuring its settings in the app, or, alternatively, by CAPP integration of barcode reader support. Barcode reader support enables teams to **print a unique barcode** which they can simply scan to assign an item to its shelf. In this way, teams can scan a shelf code, and then scan an item to quickly assign its photoshoot settings without clicking a mouse, or moving to a workstation computer. To access **Shelves** settings in CAPP, open **Settings** in the local or cloud version of the app: - Click the **Shelves** menu item on the left-hand side of the Settings interface to view saved shelves (if any). - Search for Shelves via Advanced search, or select Shelves via the box to the left of the shelf barcode / code. To create a new shelf, use **+ Add shelf** in the top-right corner of the Shelves menu: New shelf settings then enable the creation of custom **Barcode / codes** to use with a barcode reader, **Name** creation, **Tags**, **Notes**, **Workspace** and **Preset** selection. - **Barcode / code** is customizable to create a unique Shelf code the system can use to assign settings via barcode reader. - **Name** is often used to distinguish the types of objects being photographed, for example: small, medium, and large items; footwear, versus jewelry, clothing, or any similar types of object. - **Workspace** and **Preset** fields are then configurable by robotic workstation (and its location in the studio), and Preset fields for the shelf’s automated capture and post-processing settings. - **Save** in the bottom-right corner of the interface creates the shelf in the system for future assignment via the app or via barcode reader. Later, to assign a Shelf code to a new or existing item in the app, select the Shelf field in the Item settings menu, and select the Shelf to assign it to the item: Note: The process is the same to apply a Shelf to any existing item for capture in the system. Simply select the item settings, and configure the **Shelf** field: Alternatively, if using an integrated barcode reader, print the unique shelf code, and use it alongside item barcodes to quickly organize your products and shooting lists by workstation and preset. ### Add Settings Scope Operations Primarily, configuring settings scopes instructs the system which folders to save captured images into, which frames to capture, and settings for the capture process. Scope settings also include sequence configuration (normal vs fast-shot mode), robot speeds, camera settings, light controls, and predefined editing operations. Before shooting an item, users create or assign Presets in the system. The settings of the Preset can apply across an entire folder, specific items, or on individual rows and frames (in edit mode). - Select settings scopes **for the entire folder spin**, **for a specific swing angle**, or **for current image only** (edit mode only). - Each setting scope contains hardware configuration, capture settings, and one or more editing operations. ### Add Settings Scope for Specific Swing Angle If applying scope settings for a specific swing angle, specify the angle on which the capture Presets will apply (e.g. 15°, 45°, etc): - Settings scopes can apply to one or more swing angles via **Select swing angle**. Specify the swing angle, and click **Add** to assign scope settings to a folder. - The target folder with its assigned Presets will then display in the top-right part of the interface: If applying different scope settings to multiple swing angles, click the specific swing angle to view or configure the settings assigned to its folder. - For example, it is possible to configure low intensity light for a spin folder at a swing angle of 15°, and high intensity light for a spin folder at a swing angle of 45°. - Users can also add settings scopes to a still image folder, or any other folder within the item. - The system will then apply settings scopes automatically when capturing images. To view or configure the settings scopes across all images, click **All folders**. After configuring the settings scope, clicking the start button will begin the capture process with its assigned Presets. Further, if **Edit automatically** is configured, the system will capture photos and also apply predefined editing operations automatically after clicking the start button. **( ! )** - To find more information on all editing operations and their functionality, see the PhotoRobot [User Support Manual - Editing Images](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images). ## Macros Functionality & Configuration Macros in CAPP enable users to define commands for the capture process of an item and its folders (spin, stills, etc). Commands can apply to individual or multiple folders, run sequences, image edits, workspaces, presets, copy image settings, and move image settings. Users can also further customize macros by name, barcode, tag, or notes. **Note:** For detailed instructions on the configuration and use of PhotoRobot Macros, refer to the [PhotoRobot Macros User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/macros-config-functions). Find out how macros enable photography automation *magic* across multiple folders and components, with the automatic processing of complex tasks. ## PhotoRobot Wizard Mode Wizards mode in CAPP functions as an alternative to manual hardware, camera, and sequence configuration. In use, Wizards mode enables an administrator or photographer to create different Wizards to simplify capture mode for production-line operators. An operator is then able to start CAPP in Wizards mode, which functions as an extremely simple interface with wizard-guided steps. There are also limited controls for ease of use and onboarding. After creating a wizard, it stores Presets and Workspace configurations, as well as predefined steps operators must follow. Operators cannot adjust any settings, and they must complete the instructions in each step before they can move onto the next process. **Note:** Wizard steps are defined in a JavaScript-like language format, and scripted by PhotoRobot consultants for custom functionality. Users can also script basic functions for initial experiments or simple setups. For documentation on the technical configuration and operator use of wizards, refer to the [PhotoRobot Wizard Mode User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carousel # SECTION: manuals > carousel # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-03 --- # PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 User Guide Find technical information on the installation, connection, and use of the Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 modules by PhotoRobot. ## PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 User Guide The following user manual provides technical information on the installation, connection, and use of the [Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) modules by PhotoRobot. This information aims to support PhotoRobot customers with the initial setup, basic testing, and operation of their device. It presents the product overview of the Carousel 5000 & 3000 models, and describes the main components of each system. This includes the dimensions of each device, their available configurations, and instructions for the connection and first use of PhotoRobot. **Important:** The first installation of a PhotoRobot device must always be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Note:** Before proceeding with any self-installation, always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to the manual provided specifically with your device from PhotoRobot. ## Carousel 5000 & Carousel 3000 Installation & First Use Congratulations on your PhotoRobot Carousel 3000 or Carousel 5000 purchase! We thank you for joining PhotoRobot in our mission to share decades of professional experience, insight, and innovation in automated photography. The design of PhotoRobot is with every customer in mind, tailorable to specific use cases while catering to the entire PhotoRobot ecosystem at once. Use the following documentation to familiarize yourself with the technology, and for instructions on the assembly and first use of the solution. If experiencing issues, refer to [PhotoRobot Troubleshooting](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting) for solutions to common issues relating to hardware installation, cameras, robots, lights, editing, and post production. ## 1. Product Description - Carousel 5000, Carousel 3000 The primary difference between the Carousel 5000 and Carousel 3000 robotic photography platforms is the diameter of the two rotating plates. While the platform of the Carousel 5000 is 5 meters in diameter, the plate diameter of the Carousel 3000 is slightly smaller at 3 meters. Both platforms are equally capable of supporting large and heavy objects such as furniture, motorbikes, and other larger items. However, the larger dimensions of the Carousel 5000 make it also suitable for photography of automobiles and larger machinery such as tractors, or RVs. The platform of each device is also a separate part from the engine. This gives the platform a low profile which can become level with the floor during installation of the device. Key components and features of the Carousel 5000 and 3000 models include: - Carousel 5000 plate diameter of 5 meters (3 meters for the Carousel 3000) - Carousel 5000 Load capacity of 4,000 kg - Low profile for installation level with the floor - Grooves for air-driven dirt & dust removal - Replaceable plate flooring for higher workloads and wear **Note:** The floor is delivered without the top surface part, and is always completed following the customer’s installation requirements. ### 1.1. Device Overview - Carousel 5000, Carousel 3000 The PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 & 3000 are available in two different configurations: either in a circular shape, or in a square shape installation. Primarily, the standard configuration is the circular shape, with drive-up ramps on all sides of the platform. Alternatively, the square shaped system has drive-up ramps only on the front, left, and right sides. This allows space for a locking mechanism at the back edge of the Carousel to fix a background or cyclorama. - Circular installations (left) have drive-up ramps all around the rotary platform. - Square installations (right) allows for fixing backgrounds or cycloramas at the back. **Note:** Both the circular or square installation of the Carousel 5000 & 3000 install on top of any existing floor space. However, it is also possible to install the Carousel 5000 directly recessed into a studio or showroom floor. ### 1.2. Main Components of Carousel 5000, Carousel 3000 There are 7 main component parts of the Carousel 5000 and 3000 models. The main parts are: the rotary platform, the plate floor, the motor assembly, the machine connector dome, background / cyclorama connecting points, drive-up ramps, and the Control Unit. - Rotary platform **(1)** - Plate floor **(2)** - Motor assembly **(3)** - Machine connectors dome **(4)** - Drive-up ramps **(5)** - Background / cyclorama connecting points **(6)** - 19-inch rack Control Unit **(7)** **Note:** The 19-inch rack **(7)** houses the Control unit, which is installed horizontally in a ventilated space to ensure the cooling of electronic components. ### 1.3. Carousel Machine Dimensions **1.3.1. Carousel 5000** is 5 meters diameter (5.60 m with access ramps), with a ramp height of 78 mm. **1.3.2.Carousel 3000** is 3 meters diameter (3.60 meters including access ramps), with a ramp height of 78 mm. ## 2. Carousel 5000 & 3000 Connection Scheme The Carousel connects to the workstation computer over a router on the local network (LAN or WAN), with a 110-240V electrical connection for all devices. A motor-cable and signal-cable connect the rotating platform to the Control Unit and engine, while the camera connects to the workstation computer via USB. Studio light connection is using a plug-in adaptor for wireless connectivity to the router. **Note:** Before first use, power on the router and wait approximately 2 minutes for the system to boot up and start running. After this time, power on the workstation computer, and then power on the PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 robot. ## 3. PhotoRobot First Use Before first use of PhotoRobot, it is necessary to understand the solution from a technical perspective. PhotoRobot is a modular unit consisting of hardware and software components. Thus, PhotoRobot itself must be connected to the same network as the computer operating it. **Note**: For specific operating requirements and technical instructions on connection of PhotoRobot to the network, refer to [PhotoRobot First Use & Basic Testing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing). In general, the following operating requirements exist. - The Control Unit must be connected to the local network. - A computer must run service GUI or the operator’s software called _Controls. - The computer must connect over the same network as the Control Unit. - There must be a functional internet connection on the network. It is also required to check the electricity distribution system parameters (e.g. the voltage and frequency). To do this, locate the RJ45 connector on the back of the Control Unit. The network configuration requirements are then as follows. - DHCP server in the network is mandatory. - TCP ports 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - UDP broadcasts on port 6666 must be allowed. - Internet connection is mandatory. - *.photorobot.com access must be allowed. - as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net access must be allowed. - Refer to [PhotoRobot Networking Configuration & Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) if necessary. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. ### 3.1. Find PhotoRobot’s IP Address To find the IP address of the PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 and other PhotoRobot devices, the **PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP**. This allows for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network without using external applications. Ensure you are using the most up-to-date version of CAPP to access this feature. Then, to identify a robot on the network directly within CAPP, open the local version of CAPP, go to Settings, and click **Robots / Control units**. The Robots / Control units menu displays columns with Name, Network, Unit, Version, Discovered, and Identify for each robot. If the dot to the left of the robot name is green, it is online. Clicking the robot field will then open the robot’s website interface. This will also make the LED light on the robot’s Control Unit blink green for its easier identification. If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** The Android version of PhotoRobot Locator has been discontinued. Alternatively, there is the FRFind command line utility for MacOS or Windows to search the network and identify PhotoRobot Control Units. Find links to download FRfind also via the PhotoRobot Account Downloads page. Then, after locating a PhotoRobot device, copy the IP address, and paste PhotoRobot’s IP address into any web browser in URL format. If successful, the Service GUI will launch, which will display a basic user interface for testing PhotoRobot. ### 3.2. Power the Device Motor On In the Service GUI, turn on the motor using the green power button **Motor ON**. ### 3.3. Basic PhotoRobot Testing Finally, to test if PhotoRobot is fully operational, use the service GUI interface controls to turn the platform to any desired angle. If the robot moves based on the instructions, the PhotoRobot device is ready for regular use. ## 4. PhotoRobot _Controls App Software Control over the robotic workstation is provided by PhotoRobot _Controls App software, which is available for download via a [PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). The software controls all robots, cameras and lighting, while at the same time managing workflow and providing the necessary functionality for effective automation in post-processing. PhotoRobot _Controls App is not included with the machine delivery; it is purchased separately from the machine. Additionally, after starting the software application, mind that the interface might automatically start in “wizard mode”. Wizard mode is a simplified user interface. It allows for example the scanning of barcodes to identify objects and begin the capture and post-processing sequences automatically. **Note:** Both the **Stable version** and a **Preview version** of CAPP are available for download via the installer wizard. The stable version contains the most recent version of CAPP, and receives frequent version releases. Meanwhile, the preview version of CAPP provides early access to the very latest features and fixes which transfer to the stable version within days of development. This allows users to test any issues that occur in the preview version before contacting support, as most reported issues on the stable version have already been resolved on the preview version. However, be aware that the preview version is not recommended for production use in which stability is a critical factor. The preview version is under active development, which may still include incomplete features or unresolved bugs. **Important:** The older versions of CAPP are not intended for customer or public distribution due to the risk of database corruption. Older versions of CAPP are accessible only to authorized PhotoRobot technicians for internal development, or for extremely special use cases. To find the latest stable version and preview version of CAPP, refer to CAPP Latest Download Versions. For support or troubleshooting of PhotoRobot _Controls App, refer to [PhotoRobot Getting Started](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 5. Information Labels ### 5.1. Symbols Overview ### 5.2. Carousel 5000 ### 5.3. Carousel 3000 ## 6. Maintenance and Review Maintenance and review of the PhotoRobot Carousel 5000 or 3000 must be carried out once per year by a PhotoRobot authorized authority. Inspection and service include: - Rotary platform drive inspection - Gear chain re-tensioning and review (including cog-wheels) - Main platform gear inspection - Indexing belt inspection (if included) - Inspection of the machine floor and its support - Motor drive cover safety switch function test - Firmware updates (paid or free, depending on the support contract) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carpet-studio # SECTION: manuals > carpet-studio # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-01-26 --- # PhotoRobot Carpet Studio with Carousel - User Guide The PhotoRobot Carpet Studio User Guide provides detailed information and instructions for the functional operation of the system. ## PhotoRobot Carpet Studio User Guide This user guide details the PhotoRobot Carpet Studio with Carousel 3000. It provides detailed information and instructions for the functional installation & operation of the Carpet Studio by the customer. There are overviews of the Carousel 3000 robot, PhotoRobot Controls App software, camera positioning, operation, and the information labels. **Important:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) along with any documentation provided specifically for your device. Further, the initial installation of the PhotoRobot Carpet Studio and any PhotoRobot device in general must be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. These include an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Note:** For more information specifically on the Carousel 3000 robot, refer to the [PhotoRobot Carousel User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carousel). ## Welcome to PhotoRobot Carpet Studio Thank you for your purchase of the PhotoRobot Carpet Studio, and congratulations! PhotoRobot carries decades of professional experience, insight, and innovation in automated photography. Both stylish and ingenious, each product boasts a design that prioritizes the customer and maximum photo studio productivity. This means you can always expect the highest levels of accuracy, speed, and photo standardization with every use – in every one of your workflows. Welcome to your PhotoRobot Carpet Studio. ## 1. Product Description - PhotoRobot Carpet Studio The PhotoRobot-powered Carpet Studio integrates the Carousel 3000 as a robotic photography platform with software controls via PhotoRobot Controls App (further “CAPP”). The robotic platform of the Carousel 3000 is suitable for the spin orientation of photographed objects, while the rotary platform is 3 meters in diameter. Meanwhile, the engine is separate from the photography platform, guaranteeing a low floor level. ### 1.1. Machine Overview - Carousel 3000 The main part of the Carpet Studio is the PhotoRobot Carousel 3000 machine in the square-shape modification with drive-up ramps on the front, left, and right sides. ### 1.2. Main Machine Components of Carousel 3000 The main components of the Carousel 3000 are in the following infographics labeling parts 1 - 7. - Rotary platform **(1)** - Plate floor **(2)** - Motor assembly **(3)** - Machine connectors dome **(4)** - Drive-up ramps **(5)** - Background / cyclorama connecting points **(6)** - 19-inch rack Control Unit **(7)** **Note:** The 19-inch rack **(7)** houses the Control unit, which is installed horizontally in a ventilated space to ensure the cooling of electronic components. ## 2. Controls Software Overview - PhotoRobot Controls App Control of the Carousel 3000 robotic photography platform and workstation is via PhotoRobot Controls App software (CAPP). CAPP integrates control over robots, cameras, studio lights, and post production. This includes workflow management features as well as the necessary functionality for effective automation in post-processing, and publishing of content. **Note:** PhotoRobot Controls App software is not delivered with the device; it is a separate purchase available for download via your [PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). For support with installation and getting started, refer to [PhotoRobot Controls App: Getting Started](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). Further, be aware that the software may start up in “wizard mode” after installation of CAPP. Wizard mode is a simplified user interface which enables the scanning of barcodes to identify objects and automatically start capture sequences. For technical information on the configuration of wizard mode, refer to [PhotoRobot Controls App Wizard Mode Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode). ## 3. Carousel 3000 Machine Dimensions The following technical blueprints illustrate the machine dimensions of the Carousel 3000 in the square-shape configuration. ## 4. Cameras Positioning Camera positioning for the PhotoRobot Carpet Studio is as illustrated in the following infographic. - Cameras 1 through 4 are installed along the sides of the platform. - Cameras 5 and 6 are installed in the top structure. - Camera 7 (Canon EOS R6, not pictured above) is installed into the top structure into the socket on the end of the optical USB extension, hanging left or right from the top structure. ## 5. Operation Instructions ### 5.1. Switching ON the Carpet Studio **5.1.1.** To power the Carpet Studio workstation, begin by switching on the main power breaker. **5.1.2.** Next, switch on the Control Unit. **5.1.3.** Power on the SynchroBox. **5.1.4.** Switch on the LaserBox. **5.1.5**. Switch on the workstation computer. **5.1.6.** Launch PhotoRobot Controls App software on the computer, and go to Settings, followed by Workspaces, and select your workspace. **5.1.7.** After selecting a workspace in CAPP, switch on button number 1 on the USB hub, and wait until the Camera 1 light changes to green. **5.1.8.** Switch on button number 2 on the USB hub, and wait until the Camera 2 light is green. **5.1.9.** Repeat the process for button number 3, button number 4, and button number 5 on the USB hub. Remember to wait for the corresponding camera light to change to green before switching on the next number. **5.1.10.** Plug the Camera 6 (Canon EOS 5 DSR) USB connector into the socket at the end of the optical USB extension, and wait until the Camera 6 light is green. **5.1.11.** After Camera 1 - 6 is connected, start test shooting. **5.1.12.** Buttons number 6 and 7 on the USB hub correspond to Camera 7. Connect Camera 7 to either button 6 or button 7 depending on the position of the camera. This will depend on whether it is physically mounted to the left or to the right. Note that both buttons 6 and 7 on the USB hub can stay on continuously without causing any harm. Further, Camera 7 is a hand-operated camera, and it should be connected via the optical USB extension. The camera then powers on using its own on and off button, not the USB hub – and you should only power it on when actively using it. **5.1.13.** Start test shooting with Camera 7, and then power off Camera 7 after it is ready for use. ### 5.2. Switching OFF the Carpet Studio **5.2.1.** To switch OFF the Carpet Studio, begin by powering off Camera 7 using the power button on the camera body. **5.2.2.** Next, unplug the Camera 6 (Canon EOS 5 DSR) USB connector from the socket on the end of the optical USB extension. **5.2.3.** In order, switch OFF buttons number 5 followed by 4, then 3, 2, and 1 on the USB hub. **5.2.4.** Quit PhotoRobot Controls App software on the workstation computer. **5.2.5.** Shut down the workstation computer. **5.2.6.** Power off LaserBox. **5.2.7.** Switch off the SynchroBox. **5.2.8.** Power off the Control Unit. **5.2.9.** Switch off the main power breaker. **Note:** If encountering issues during machine operation, please submit a support ticket via [https://support.photorobot.com](https://support.photorobot.com). ## PhotoRobot Viewer: Carpet & Flooring Visualizer Developed with Jakub Klaus of Breno Carpets, the [Carpet & Flooring Visualizer](https://hosting.photorobot.com/demo/carpet-viewer) is a custom [PhotoRobot Product Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) solution. It enables the digital presentation of carpets and rugs in a virtual space. Viewers can swap between different designs & colors, and position products around the room on different places of the floor. There is thumbnail navigation to change the interior view, with buttons to switch between products or load a 360 spin. The viewer also enables the configuration of the flooring allowing consumers to mix and match items with different interior designs. ## 6. Information Labels ### 6.1. Symbols Overview ### 6.2. Carousel 3000 Information Labels ## 7. Maintenance and Review The PhotoRobot Carpet Studio must be inspected 1 x per year by authorized personnel as follows: - Rotary platform drive inspection - Gear chain re-tensioning and review (including cog-wheels) - Main platform gear inspection - Indexing belt inspection (if included) - Inspection of the machine floor and its support - Motor drive cover safety switch function test - Firmware updates (paid or free, depending on the support contract) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/case-850-user-guide # SECTION: manuals > case-850-user-guide # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-16 --- # PhotoRobot CASE 850 Portable Studio User Guide This user and installation guide provides technical instructions for the assembly, connection, and use of the PhotoRobot CASE 850. ## PhotoRobot CASE 850 User Guide This user and installation guide provides technical instructions for the assembly, connection, and use of the [PhotoRobot CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850). The information aims to support customers in the initial setup, understanding, and operation of the robot by the customer. **Note:** Images are for illustrative purposes only and may show optional equipment. **Important:** The initial installation of a PhotoRobot system must always be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Note:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) before any self-installation, first use, storage, or service of PhotoRobot devices. ## 1. About the CASE 850 The PhotoRobot CASE aims to set new standards in 360° product photography. It combines mobility, durability, precision and speed. It can be used in the studio or on location. Its unique construction allows you to capture fine-tuned product photographs as well as handle 360 degree image mass production. Explore the brilliance of the CASE 850 through this comprehensive user guide, beginning with 10 key features that will redefine your automated photography workflows. - The whole CASE 850 robot fits in an easy to fold & carry case. - Assembly takes a matter of minutes — around 15. - The CASE is fast – it makes a full turn in about 2.1 seconds. - Operate the CASE from a computer with the PhotoRobot Controls app. - A single app controls the robot, camera, and flash lights together. - An integrated cross laser ensures precise product positioning. - The 850 mm glass plate is perfect for pure white background photography. - Its encoder guarantees peak plate rotation accuracy. - Foldable legs give the CASE 850 supreme stability. - An airy construction provides freedom for lighting – light from bottom, top, front, back, or sides. ### 1.1. Unpacking Even though the CASE is very durable and ready to transport as a case itself, you might want to keep the original cardboard box we use for shipping. Keeping in mind all the delicate mechanics inside the CASE, the cardboard box might come in handy for possibly rough transport conditions. To be able to reuse the cardboard box and still easily unpack the CASE, please use the following instructions. - Place the box on a clean, flat surface. - Lay the box on the side. - Cut open the shortest side. - Slide a long flap under the box. - Stand the box on the open side, and pull the cardboard off the CASE. ### 1.2. Packing To make the CASE as compact and safe to transport as it is, we had to carefully define the right spot for each component to be firmly attached. The following photo instructions will guide you through folding the assembled robot into a one-piece case. To put the CASE back to the shipping cardboard box, simply reverse steps of chapter 1.1 - Unpacking. - Keep in mind, it is important to assemble the sides in accordance with the inner CASE layout. For this purpose, there are different color marks on the lock caps (pictured above). - After successful unpacking, the CASE should appear as it does in the above two images. - There is a cut-out area on one side of the case to fit in the glass mount construction. - Avoid mismatching of the sides to ensure they fit the inner layout. - The cables are held in position by rubber bands. #### 1.2.1. Fold the background to the case’s side - There is a sophisticated method of folding the background into the case’s side to avoid creases. - The step-by-step instructions are below. - Take the wider part of the bevelled background and anchor the third hole onto both the right and left side using the outer hooks. The edge of the background goes under the inner hooks. - Fold the background's corners, and then anchor the holes onto the hooks. - On the other side, fasten the pole over the background. - To fasten the pole, compress its spring mechanism and fix the tip of the pole into the anchor hole. - Fold the background over the first pole, and then fasten the second one onto the other side. - Secure the background's corner holes by the hooks on the rubber bands attached to the pole. #### 1.2.2. Attach the glass plate and background poles to the case’s side 1. Make sure the side is clean and free of any obstructions to avoid any damage to the glass plate. 2. Place the glass plate into the hollow area of the side. 3. Cover the glass plate by the wooden protection disc with the chamfered edges facing the background holders. 4. Undo the rubber bands on the cable holder. 5. Place the cables onto the holder. 6. Fasten the cables with the rubber bands. 7. Attach the background holders to the side. 8. Fasten the background holders using the clamps. - Be aware that when the upper hooks are facing the opposite way, the background bars are not placed correctly and are at risk of shifting during transportation. - The background bars are placed correctly when the upper hooks are facing each other. - To join the machine base, sides and top, fasten all the lock caps. ### 1.3. Transportation The outer case of the PhotoRobot CASE is made of very sturdy materials to make the robot easy and safe to transport. Nevertheless, you should avoid any bumps, collisions or jolts which could harm the electronics. Although the CASE weighs only 62 kilograms (137 pounds), it is not recommended to carry it on your own; we suggest asking an assistant for help. We recommend using the original cardboard box for shipping. To do so, simply reverse the steps in chapter 1.1 - Unpacking. - Durable tilting handles are useful for easy carrying of the CASE. ## 2. Package Contents The PhotoRobot CASE is designed to be used in different ways in a wide variety of photography scenarios and environments. Therefore, along with the robot, we supply optional accessories to comply with all the specific needs photographers might have. ### 2.1. The Case 850 Robot The CASE contains the fundamental gear necessary to operate the robot, and to photograph either still or spin images. What's included with the Case 850 Robot? - 850 mm glass plate (33,5 inches) - Control unit - Transparent background with holders - Cross laser for precise product positioning - Power and data cables - Foldable legs - Encoder & calibration probe - Spare X-rings - General purpose lugs to hold lights, light dividers, diffusion panels, etc. - Handles for comfortable transportation **NOTE: The CASE does not contain any camera nor flash lights.** ### 2.2. Optional Accessories With the help of our optional accessories — supplied separately, at extra cost — you can streamline your workflow to meet your needs. Please see more details below. #### 2.2.1. Wi-Fi Module We supply a USB Wi-Fi module to let you connect the CASE to an existing wireless network or to establish your own Wi-Fi network independently of any other network connectivity. To work with the PhotoRobot CASE, we sell and recommend the extensively tested TP-LINK TL-WN721N (see its [technical specifications](https://www.tp-link.com/en/home-networking/adapter/tl-wn721n/#specifications)). The Wi-Fi module is kept in stock and is the right choice for on-location work where a LAN connection is not available. Whenever a wired connection is possible, we recommend using LAN instead — it is more reliable and free of wireless interference. - The Wi-Fi Module uses USB to connect to the CASE. #### 2.2.2. Wireless Trigger Synchronization of the camera shutter and the sequence stops can be controlled by a wireless trigger plugged into the CASE. We successfully tested the **hähnel Combi TF Remote Control** with Canon cameras. - The wireless trigger uses an integrated 4P4C (RJ9) output socket. #### 2.2.3. Cable Trigger Synchronization of the camera shutter and the sequence stops can be controlled by plugging the cable trigger into the CASE. - The cable trigger uses an integrated 4P4C (RJ9) output socket. - Triggers are available for supported camera models — see the [PhotoRobot compatible cameras list](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras). #### 2.2.4. Foot Switch The Foot Switch is a practical HID (Human Interface Device) manufactured by PhotoRobot to accelerate your performance. Any operational function (e.g. start sequence, run test shot, turn the plate, set zero position etc.) can be assigned to the switch so you can access functions instantly by just stepping on it. It is also possible to connect two Foot Switches to get four easy access operations. The Foot Switch is an optional accessory, supplied separately at extra cost. - The PhotoRobot “Foot Switch Control Set” consists of a pair of pedals, and a pair of 6.3 mm jack cables and 6P6C (RJ12) - 6.3 mm jack reduction. - An integrated 6P6C (RJ12) input socket is used to plug the Foot Switches into the CASE. - The browser-based app only displays the status of designated input sockets. To assign functions to the foot switch buttons, it is necessary to use an advanced software (PhotoRobot Controls). #### 2.2.5. Custom Accessories You do not need to depend only on the accessories provided by PhotoRobot. Both input and output sockets are fitted with standard registered jacks – 6P6C (RJ12) & 4P4C (RJ9). Feel free to use the [Circuit Diagram](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B9QwnclSuMeKaVd6bmtia0NnZ28) to adapt any device to work with your CASE (e.g. triggers, switches, signal lights etc.). However, be aware that elementary electrical safety & maintenance knowledge is required, and it is highly recommended you ask your local electrician for help if you are not trained in this area. - Feel free to [download the Circuit Diagram](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B9QwnclSuMeKaVd6bmtia0NnZ28) above for use with the CASE. - IN and OUT registered jack sockets are located at the CASE’s base. - The custom adapted device can be controlled by IN & OUT buttons at the bottom of the browser based app. ## 3. Assembling the CASE Bringing the CASE from a packed to a working state is an easy and fast task if you follow four steps depicted below. Anyone capable of tying their own shoes can master it in no time. ### 3.1. Open the Sides First, it is best to start by opening the case and keeping the robot parts attached to the sides until you need them for later steps. - The CASE uses sturdy turn locks to secure the sides. 1. Everything is firmly attached to the CASE’s side. 2. Unscrew the background pole holders and set them aside. 3. Take the background poles out. 4. Undo the rubber bands holding the cables. 5. Take the cables out. 6. Tie the rubber bands up so they do not get lost. 7. Take out the MDF protection plate. 8. Take out the glass plate. 9. The side is empty now. ### 3.2. Anchor the Base To give the CASE maximum stability for secure operation, it is necessary to anchor the base by using the foldable legs. See the instructions with illustrations below. - To unfold the legs, unscrew the locks and push them upwards. - To secure the folded legs, push the locks down and screw them in. - To level the CASE properly, use the hex key fitted in the base to unlock the off-centre ring. - Next, fine-tune the CASE’s stability by revolving the off-centre ring. When you find the best position, tighten the ring using the hex key. ### 3.3. Mount the Glass Plate Mounting the glass plate is simple. The trickiest part of mounting the plate is not smudging the glass while mounting it to the base. It’s advisable to use a pair of clean gloves when handling the glass plate. **Note:** The latest generation of the CASE 850 (the optical-sensor version, without the calibration suction cup) uses a glass plate with a small bevel ground into its edge. Insert the plate so that this bevel sits on the underside, above the hidden optical sensor that reads the plate position. Earlier plates without the bevel have no required orientation. - Place the glass plate at the side where the encoder is. You need to slightly tilt it so the edge gets under the guide wheel. - Lay the glass plate down on the opposite side of the CASE. 1. The tilted glass plate is under the guide wheel at the opposite side of the CASE. 2. The glass plate lays down. 3. The glass plate is locked in position by a set of moveable guide wheels. - The moveable guide wheels securely lock the glass plate in position. ### 3.4 Mount the Background If you wish to shoot on a pure white background, we supply one for your convenience as an integral part of the CASE. The material and shape makes it easy to achieve a pure white background without the need for post-production. Be sure to handle the background with care, taking precautions to prevent wrinkling or discoloration. Though it is possible to clean and iron the background, it may alter its quality and lifespan. - Insert the longer poles through two eyelets on both sides of the CASE. Use the poles without the hook. - Attach the longer poles with the hook to the poles already mounted on the CASE. - Insert the short poles with the hook into the holes on both sides in the CASE’s base. - The photos above show the background poles ready and with the hung background. - A triple hook provides easy & sleek background stretching. - To hang the background, start with hooking up the top first. - Next, hook up the opposite end of the background. - Then, hook up the background at the CASE’s base. - Finally, ensure the laser is exposed through the slit in the background. Background ready for photo production ## 4. Operating the CASE The CASE is a sophisticated mechanism that requires a basic knowledge of photography for its successful operation. The following chapters provide all the information necessary to succeed. ### 4.1. Plug in The CASE is designed to work in 100-240 V mains electricity supply. It uses a standard C13/C14 coupler with either a European, UK or US plug. For safety reasons, it is required to have the CASE switched off while plugging the power cord in. - The power socket is located at the base of the CASE (as in the above 3 photos). - PhotoRobot will supply EU, UK or US power sockets, depending on your region. ### 4.2. Turn on To turn the CASE on, the power switch is located next to the main power socket. **Please NOTE: When turning on the CASE with Wi-Fi connectivity, it takes about 2 minutes to boot the control unit, or 30 secs when connected by LAN.** #### 4.2.1. LED lights indications ##### Power LED light (red/green > 3 pins) - A yellow light with a green heartbeat pattern means the system is booting. - A green light on means the system is running. - A red light on means there is a hardware error. - A flashing green light means the device is moving. - A flashing red light means ‘not authenticated’. ##### Wi-Fi LED light (blue > 2 pins) - A blue light off means the Wi-Fi is not connected. - A flashing blue light means the Wi-Fi is connecting. - A blue light on means the Wi-Fi is connected. ### 4.3. Connect The CASE is built around the latest generation of the PhotoRobot control unit, operated by PhotoRobot Controls — our software released primarily for macOS and also for Windows (although, we recommend macOS for the best experience). A companion app, [PhotoRobot Touch](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual), can act as a wireless camera for the macOS version. Advanced integrators may alternatively control the unit directly through its API. To operate the CASE, it must be connected via either LAN or a wireless network so the controlling app can communicate with the robot. The CASE can also establish its own Wi-Fi network through the USB module. An internet connection is not necessary for operating the CASE, but internet is required for updating the firmware. The following chapters describe how to connect the CASE. #### 4.3.1. Browser-Based User Interface App The browser-based user interface application is a part of the CASE’s integrated control unit. It can be accessed from the web browser on any device. It does not have the capability to adjust camera and lighting settings, but it adds exceptional mobility and flexibility to robotized photography. To connect the CASE to the Browser User Interface, both the CASE and the controlling device must be present in the same network via either a LAN, WLAN or Wi-Fi network provided by the Wi-Fi module plugged into the CASE. **Note:** The browser-based interface is a service interface — it is not intended for production photography. With a machine API license, this behavior can be extended to allow production image capture through the service interface. #### 4.3.1.1. LAN The CASE has an integrated 8P8C (RJ45) socket to connect the CASE using a standard ethernet cable. - Find the 8P8C (RJ45) socket for the network connection located at the bottom of the CASE’s base. - A standard ethernet cable can be used to connect to the CASE. - It is necessary to find the IP address of the CASE to connect it to the Browser-based UI App. You can use any IP scanner, such as the Fing mobile app. In the IP address list, search for “Texas Instruments” (example above). - To launch the Browser-based UI App, input the IP address of the CASE into any web browser. To learn more about controlling the CASE using this application, please refer to chapter 4.9.2 - Control the CASE. #### 4.3.1.2. Wi-Fi network created by the CASE (AP mode) To create the CASE’s own wireless network, it is necessary to use the USB Wi-Fi module available as an optional accessory. - Note: It may be necessary to turn off the cellular data in order to connect your device to the CASE via Wi-Fi. - Plug the Wi-Fi module into the USB socket of the CASE which is located on the top side of the machine base. Successful initiation will be indicated by the green LED blinking. - Search for the Wi-Fi network named “CASE_SerialNumber” on your computer or mobile device. - To connect to the network “CASE_SerialNumber”, use the SerialNumber as a password (in the above example: 04150318). - When the CASE’s Wi-Fi is connected to your device, you are ready to start controlling the CASE. By default, the CASE Wi-Fi is broadcasting at channel No. 9. - To launch Web-based User Interface App, type 11.11.11.11 to your browser’s address window. To learn more about controlling the CASE using this application, please refer to chapter 4.9.2 - Control the CASE. **NOTE: When turning on the CASE with the Wi-Fi connectivity it takes about 2 minutes to boot the control unit.** #### 4.3.1.3. Existing Wi-Fi network (client mode) You can connect the CASE to an existing wireless network using the USB Wi-Fi Module from the optional accessories. This way, your controlling device (e.g. computer or mobile device) can operate the CASE and stay connected to your regular network to access the internet, printers, NAS drives and other network peripherals. To do this, you first need to connect to the CASE’s Wi-Fi network provided by the USB module. This procedure is described in the previous chapter 4.3.1.2 -Wi-Fi network created by the CASE. - After you are connected to the Wi-Fi provided by the USB module plugged into the CASE and the web-user interface is launched via IP address 11.11.11.11, go to Wi-Fi settings in the Network Setup menu. - In the list of wireless networks, choose the network which you wish to connect to the CASE. - Next, type in the password of your selected wireless network. - In the above example, the wireless network “fotorobot-1np” was connected successfully. - Connect your device to the same wireless network which connects to the CASE. - Now, the CASE is connected to your selected wireless network and you can access it via its IP address shown in the Network status field. #### 4.3.2. PhotoRobot Controls App In late 2015, PhotoRobot launched its controlling app, PhotoRobot Controls. PhotoRobot Controls provides controls over the robots, cameras and strobes; edits the photographs in real time during the sequence; renders special techniques such as automated cut-out; chromakey masking and DoF stacking for enhanced depth of field; with workflow, database, automated upload, and much more. - The PhotoRobot Controls application user interface is both visual and intuitive to use. ### 4.4. Calibrate **Note:** The latest generation of the CASE 850 no longer uses the magnetic suction cup. Instead, a hidden optical sensor reads the full 360° rotation from a mechanical bevel ground into the edge of the glass plate. Calibration works exactly the same — there is simply no suction cup to fit, so you can skip the suction-cup steps below. Calibration is important for the CASE’s precision and optimal performance, and must be completed after each CASE installation. Further, calibration is advisable according to specific conditions, the volume of photographs taken; aging of the X-rings, cleanliness of the glass plate, weight of the photographed products, etc. To calibrate the CASE, you must connect it to the Browser-based User Interface application (see chapter 4.3.1 - Web-based User Interface App). - Before you begin the calibration, make sure the CASE is turned on and that there is no power to the motors so that you can rotate the glass plate freely by hand. - For calibration, you need a magnetic suction cup which is kept in the inner side of the CASE’s body. - The calibration probe is located on top of the CASE next to the encoder. Place the closed suction cup near the probe (prox. 0,5 mm or 0,02 inches). The correct positioning is indicated by the red light probe. - Rotate the glass plate with the suction cup beside the probe. Open and close the suction cup – it should secure firmly to the glass plate. - When you rotate the glass plate, the suction cup will meet the calibration probe. This will switch on the red light to indicate proper positioning of both parts. - In the Browser-based User Interface application, go to the Calibration Menu. Select Standard (fast and sufficient) or Complex (longer and more precise) calibration, hit the play button, and the automatic calibration sequence will begin. ### 4.5. Centering Laser (Dot Test) **CAUTION:** Laser Class 1 (λ = 650nm P0 ≤ 3.5mW) is used - avoid direct eye exposure (do not look into the beam) - and in addition - optionally - use protection Glasses or Goggles. To be able to accurately place every photographed product on the glass plate, it is vitally important to precisely center the integrated cross laser. Fortunately, there is an easy and fun technique to do so, described below. **Note:** The CASE 850 has a built-in cross laser. For projection from above or from other convenient angles, optional add-on lasers are available as accessories. The system drives them automatically — they switch on after each photo sequence so that the next product can be placed immediately, and switch off during capture so that the laser never appears in the photographs. Add-on lasers are best suited to permanent studio installations, while for mobile on-location work, the built-in laser alone is usually preferable. - Fix the tape to the approximate center of the glass plate and run a sequence with a few stops (six in this example). - Mark the laser crossing at each stop with a pen. - Loosen the laser’s screws by the hex key so the laser can move freely. - When as shown above, the laser can now move left - right, and forward - backward. 1. Mark the laser crossing at each sequence stop using the instructions above. 2. Link the opposite marks – this creates the exact centre / axis of the glass plate. 3. Move the laser cross to the centre of the glass plate and tighten the laser’s screws. ### 4.6. Place the Product It is important to place the product’s spin axis at the center of the glass plate. The exact center of roation (ECR) of the glass plate is depicted by the integrated cross laser (setting it properly is described in the previous chapter). However, to determine product’s spin axis, it might be rather tricky. Usually, it is the geometrical center, but there are exceptions; e.g. the long handled pan should have a spin axis in the geometrical center of the pan, while the long handle should rotate around it. - With the laser cross projecting from the bottom, it is usually easier to determine the product’s axis from below. **CAUTION:** It is not allowed to place sharp objects onto hardened glass plate! It may scratch or break the glass. The weight capacity or the table may be limited if weight is not distributed evenly or focused on several points only. To place sharp objects on the table, it is recommended to use transparent acrylic glass as a separation layer to the glass-table surface. ### 4.7. Set the Camera #### 4.7.1. Place the Camera Correct positioning of the camera is vital when shooting 360 degree photographs; it is necessary for the product to rotate smoothly in the middle of the frame. - Use the self-leveling laser to precisely align the camera and the CASE. Project the self-leveling laser in line with the integrated cross laser and place the camera so the laser runs through the lenses’ center. #### 4.7.2. Connect the Camera If you are using the PhotoRobot desktop app (PhotoRobot Controls) to operate the CASE, you can likewise use it to control the camera. That, or you can simply synchronize the camera with the robot by wireless or cable trigger plugged directly to the CASE. #### 4.7.3. Camera Settings Naturally, it is necessary to set the camera’s focus, exposure, and image quality. To do this, we recommend the following. - Use JPEG for standard production – the in-camera processing of the Canon body (or iPhone) delivers excellent, ready-to-use results; RAW remains an option for enthusiasts who want to fine-tune maximum dynamic range, e.g. for the heavy backlight of a pure white background. - Use low ISO – you will get the highest dynamic range and image quality from your sensor. - Use LiveView – it is the best way to focus and align your subject properly. - Test your lens – detect your lenses’ optimal performance; you are looking for the highest aperture value with acceptable sharpness and contrast transmission – most lenses drop image quality at about f/16. ### 4.8. Set the Light Setting the light properly is the most difficult of all tasks when shooting 360 degree photographs. We recommend using strobes, as they allowfor more freedom in terms of light modeling, and also save you time by enabling faster shutter speeds. #### 4.8.1. Place the Lights It is very important to light the background evenly to get a pure white background without requiring any post-processing. You will need one or two lights to do so, depending on the product size (small products do not require as much evenly lit space as large products). - Top View is illustrated above – with one or two strobes in the back, and two strobes in the front / side. - Side View is illustrated above – with placement of the back strobes. - This is the Back to Front View – with two strobes at the front / side. The rest of the lighting is open to your creative interpretation. Keep in mind, lighting for 360 degree photography is vastly different to lighting a single still shot; the product reflects the lighting variously at each angle, e.g. 36 angles. This usually disqualifies any use of hard lighting. #### 4.8.2. Connect the Lights If you use the PhotoRobot desktop app (PhotoRobot Controls) to operate the CASE, you can use it to comfortably control all the settings of the strobes (FOMEI / RiME LITE, Broncolor, Profoto, and others including manufacturers with support upcoming in the near future). Synchronization of the camera shutter to the strobes during the spin sequence needs to be performed by a standard sync cord or remote trigger. #### 4.8.3. Lights Settings Intensity of the lighting needs to be set to comply with the designated aperture value (to get optimum depth of field and optical quality). To do this, use the following tips. - Use sufficiently powerful strobes – around 700 Ws works well today; for the most even illumination of both the product and the background, we recommend using several lights to achieve finer control over the lighting. Adequate power also shortens recycling times and prolongs strobe lifespan. - Use beauty dishes and strip softboxes – they provide soft yet efficient modeling light; perfect for 360 degree photography. - Get close to the product – leaving the strobes far from the product degrades light quality. - Avoid flat lighting – it is very rarely flattering on the product, and does not properly depict the product's material. ### 4.9. Run the Sequence Consider the following when setting the sequence up: - Number of steps – the more images in a spin, the smoother the transition will be between the frames of 360 degree experience, but also longer production time and larger data volume. 24 - 36 shots a spin is optimal in most cases (read more in [360 Product Photography - ContentFormats and Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography)). - Acceleration and speed – velocity needs to comply with the characteristics of the photographed product, e.g. slow movement to avoid swinging of the product supported by the fishing line. - Delay before / after shots – delays are sometimes necessary to settle the swinging product or to give strobes time to fully charge. The following illustrations use the Browser-based User Interface App to run the sequence. For instructions on how to connect the CASE to this app, please refer to chapter 4.3.1 - Web-based User Interface App. - You can select from the wide range of preset sequences. - The CASE is operated by the circled controller. 1. Preset sequences 2. Min / Max rotation speed 3. One counterclockwise (CCW) / one clockwise (CW) step 4. 360° CCW / CW steps mode 5. Continuous CCW / CW steps mode 6. Continuous CCW / CW rotation (no steps) 7. Pause the rotation / sequence (will reach nearest stop) 8. Stop the rotation / sequence (will immediately slow down and stop, but not reach nearest stop) 9. Power / Deactivate the motors 10. Immediate emergency stop (no slow-down ramp) 11. Delay between sequence stops (camera trigger pressed in ½ of selected interval) 12. Sequence pre-set (camera trigger pressed at each stop, laser lit when sequence not running) ## 5. Creating Outputs The CASE 850 is operated by **PhotoRobot Controls**, our own software package that drives the camera, lights, and robot in a single workflow. In most cases, PhotoRobot Controls produces web-ready outputs directly — static images, deep-zoom 360° spin photography, videos and 3D models — with no third-party software required. If you prefer your own pipeline, the images captured with the CASE 850 can be exported and processed in third-party tools of your choice. Alternatively, an **API license** is available for direct control of the CASE 850 hardware, letting you build custom software that performs the same tasks as PhotoRobot Controls. ## 6. Maintenance To maintain optimal performance of the CASE 850, there is not much to do. See the following chapters describing good care of your device. ### 6.1. Cleaning It is advisable to keep the CASE in clean environment, and to clean it regularly to prevent pollution of the electronics situated at the CASE’s base. **Note:** Regular polishing of the glass is crucial. Any screen or window cleaner will work for this. Just make sure to use a towel or wipe that does not shed lint, fibers, fuzz, or other tiny particles. ### 6.2. Replacing X-rings X-rings are used to provide grip for wheels that set the glass plate in motion or keep it in the correct position. Occasionally, however, they can wear out. This nothing to be alarmed by, though. You can purchase spare X-rings from PhotoRobot, or at your local hardware store. Then, replacing the X-rings is not difficult. See the instructions below. The following sizes of X-rings are used in the CASE: - NBR70 107.32 mm × 5.33 mm (2 pcs used for stepper motor wheel) - NBR70 29,75 mm × 3,53 mm (4 pcs used for bottom support wheels) - NBR70 33 mm × 2,62 mm (4 pcs used for side support wheels) - The three sizes of spare X-rings used with the CASE are shown above. - It is advised to be as gentle as possible when replacing the X-rings. To avoid the risk of tearing still usable X-ring or damaging any of the CASE’s wheels, it is recommended to use a plastic pryer (opening tool) – pictured above. However, with extra caution, you may use a regular slotted screwdriver, as demonstrated by our experienced technician in the photographs below. #### 6.2.1. Stepper motor wheel - The large X-ring fits to the stepper motor wheel that sets the glass plate in motion. - Use the flat screwdriver to take the X-ring down. - To mount the X-ring insert it to the wheel groove and pull it over the edge. - Make sure the X-ring is not twisted. - When the X-ring is properly mounted, knead it so the X-ring’s tension is the same throughout the wheel circumference. #### 6.2.2. Bottom support wheel - The X-ring on the bottom support wheel can be replaced without dismounting the wheel. #### 6.2.3. Side support wheels - To replace the X-rings on the side support wheels, you need to take off their cover. - To take the cover off, there are two plastic nut lock handles to remove. - Remove the hex screws going through the support wheels. - Remove the cover of the support wheels. - The support wheels can now be fully taken out. - Now, the X-ring can be easily replaced. - When you take out the support wheel, the spacing washer can be left on the base. Be cautious not to drop and lose it. - Press the spacing washer back to the bottom of the support wheel and attach it back to the base. - To replace the X-rings of the support wheels on the side with the encoder, do not remove its cover. Just undo the hex screw. - Replace the X-ring the same way as on the previous wheels. ### 6.3 Firmware Update To update the CASE’s firmware it is necessary to connect the CASE to the internet and the web based user interface. The process is described in the chapter 4.10.2 - Control the CASE. - In the menu go to System > System update. If the application indicates new firmware version, press “Run system update” to get the latest firmware version. - The rest of the update is fully automated. - The application indicates the firmware is up to date. ### 6.4. Activation If you encounter an activation error, you may try to reactivate your CASE through the browser-based app (to connect to the app see chapter 4.3.1). Make sure the CASE is connected to the internet network. If the reactivation fails, please contact your CASE dealer for further assistance. - An activation error is indicated in the System status box. - To reactivate your CASE, go to menu System > System activation. - Fill in your activation password and press Activate automatically. - The activation process takes about twenty seconds. - Successful activation is indicated in the System status box. ## 7. FAQs ### 7.1. Do I need any equipment or accessories to run the CASE? NO, everything necessary to get the CASE running is in the package. You just need a camera, a set of lights and a computer to control the CASE. ### 7.2. Do I need a computer to control the CASE? YES, you need a computer which is running PhotoRobot Controls application to operate the CASE 850. The software controls the camera, lights, and robot, while processing the captured images immediately into publish-ready outputs — static images, 360° spin photography, video and 3D models. With an API license, further control options and third-party applications are also available. For the computer specifications, refer to [PhotoRobot System Requirements](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements). ### 7.3. How long does it take to assemble the CASE? For assembly of the CASE 850, it takes a matter of minutes — around 15 — to get the CASE from its packed state to action-ready. ### 7.4. Can I use continuous lights with the CASE? YES, it is possible to use continuous lights with the CASE. Modern LED continuous lights are powerful and work well for many applications – even non-stop shooting of smaller products at lower speeds. Strobes remain the best choice for high-speed production, but continuous lighting is a perfectly good option for a wide range of use cases. ### 7.5. How do I trigger the camera? In order to trigger the camera, it is possible to release the camera’s shutter using either a cable or wireless trigger connecting to the CASE, or by USB connecting to the computer. ### 7.6. Can I operate the CASE without internet connection? YES, it is possible to operate the CASE without internet connection. However you need to connect it to some network to access it by the control app. It can be LAN, WLAN or a network provided by the CASE itself (using USB Wi-Fi module). The CASE can run strictly offline; in practice, however, it is often more convenient to keep some connectivity available — even if it is limited to metadata exchange only. For detailed deployment options, see the PhotoRobot Controls manuals, or contact PhotoRobot sales or technical support to discuss your intended setup, including fully offline, non-traceable deployments for field systems where the inability to trace the equipment is essential to operator safety. ### 7.7. What camera can I use with the CASE? To see which cameras you can use with the CASE, the up-to-date supported camera is available online — refer to [PhotoRobot Compatible Cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras) and [PhotoRobot Recommended Cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras). We can supply a cable or wireless trigger for supported models. ### 7.8. What strobes can I use with the CASE? Any strobe lights can be used with the CASE. For the best results, use strobes that can be controlled directly from PhotoRobot Controls. The whole capture and preset workflow then runs fully automatically, with no need to adjust light intensity by hand. ### 7.9. Can I photograph on black with the CASE? YES, it is possible to photograph on black using the CASE. The CASE gives great results either with black or white backgrounds. Please note that, by default, we only supply a white background. To photograph on black, you can simply remove the white background and place black velvet / fabric behind the CASE. We are also able to deliver a black background on demand. A black background can bring advantages in certain workflows – for example in photogrammetry. ### 7.10. Is it possible to photograph the product from below the glass plate? YES, it is possible to photograph items from below the glass plate of the CASE 850. However, this is easier on a black background. To do so with a white background, you need to use the special freemasking mode in the PhotoRobot Controls application. Depending on the outputs you need, you can also use a different background altogether — for example for photogrammetry, where the capture and lighting workflow differs. ### 7.11. How much space do I need to run the CASE? The minimum space necessary for the CASE with lights and the camera is only 2.5 x 2.5 metres and optimal space is 4 x 4 meters or more. Remember to also allow room for handling the products you photograph: thanks to the CASE’s high throughput, a relatively large number of items pass through during a single shift, so space to stage incoming and finished products keeps the workflow smooth. ### 7.12. Should I shoot RAW or JPEG? For most production, we shoot JPEG and rely on the excellent in-camera processing of the Canon body (or Apple iPhone) to deliver finished images straight from the camera. If you still need RAW, PhotoRobot Controls can capture the RAW files in parallel — they are saved to a folder where you can edit or experiment with them freely in third-party tools. ### 7.13. What is the encoder used for? The CASE 850 uses an encoder to provide the maximum accuracy of the glass plate rotation. It corrects the exact positioning at every stop. Thanks to powerful hardware, the encoder reports the precise position of the glass plate to the control system 1000 times per second. This allows highly accurate capture without having to stop the plate – delivering exceptional productivity that no other systems match. ## 8. Technical Specifications - **Dimensions:** 98 cm × 96 cm × 34 cm (38.6” × 38” × 13.4”) - **Weight:** 62 kg (137 lbs) - **Shipping dimensions (cardboard box, without pallet):** 106 cm × 105 cm × 43 cm (41.7” × 41.3” × 16.9”) - **Shipping weight (cardboard box, without pallet):** 73 kg (161 lbs) - **Shipping weight (cardboard box, with IPPC certified pallet):** 85 kg (187 lbs) - **Glass plate diameter:** 85 cm (33.5”) - **Operating conditions:** Interior use, placed on straight, hard, flat surface - water-level and stabilized - no interaction with liquids, enormous humidity or flammable gases - operation temperature 15-25° C - **Speed max:** 2.1 s per revolution - **Speed min:** ~ 4.5 mins per revolution - **# of images during one revolution:** 1 - 3600 (possibly more for specialty use) - **Maximum load:** 20 kg (44 lbs) - even distribution, without sharp edges - **Laser:** Visible, continuous, integrated, cross type Class 1 Laser Product according to DIN EN 60825-1:2008-05λ = 650nm P0 ≤ 3.5mW - **Angular deflection:** ± 1° per revolution - **Control unit:** integrated, BeagleBone based - **Background:** integrated, diffuse (white) - **Connectivity:** LAN and Wi-Fi - **Calibration:** yes, operator assisted - **Power supply:** 100-240 V - **Operating software:** built-in: web-based UI (Win, macOS, Linux, iOS) desktop: depending on manufacturer (Win, macOS) - **Camera compatibility:** any camera with manual mode - **Lighting:** either continuous or strobes --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide # SECTION: manuals > centerless-table-user-guide # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-03 --- # PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide Find a device overview including instructions for setup and first use of the PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 and CL850 models. ## PhotoRobot Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 User Guide The following [PhotoRobot Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) CL1300 and CL850 User Guide aims to support customers who have recently purchased a device. There is a device overview for the CL1300 and CL850 turntables, including detailed information on the main components of each device, and instructions for first use and setup. This information helps to facilitate the initial understanding, basic testing, and operation of PhotoRobot. **Important:** The initial installation of a PhotoRobot system must always be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Note:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to the manual provided specifically with your device before first use. ## Centerless Table CL1300 & CL850 Turntable Modules Congratulations and thank you for your purchase of the PhotoRobot Centerless Table! PhotoRobot represents decades of first-hand experience and innovation in automated photography. Not only that, each system is tailorable to your business’ unique needs, while at the same delivering an entire ecosystem of ready-made solutions for PhotoRobot customers. This means that whenever you power-up PhotoRobot, you can rest assured you will achieve impressive results – easily, quickly, and consistently in every session. Welcome to PhotoRobot. ## 1. Robot Description - Centerless Table CL1300, CL850 The PhotoRobot Centerless Table is available in two models: the larger CL1300, and the smaller CL850. In comparison, the CL1300 has a larger frame to accommodate interchangeable plates of two different sizes: 1300 mm diameter, and 850 mm diameter. This allows for the use of either size plate to support products of various sizes. Meanwhile, the CL850 is more compact with a smaller frame that supports only one size plate: the 850 mm diameter. Otherwise, the CL1300 and CL850 share mostly identical technology components and features. Key technological components and features of the PhotoRobot Centerless Table include: - Optical turning glass plate for shadow-free image capture. - Calibration of the positioning system at the touch of a button. - Setup of objects to the center of rotation with laser-guided positioning. - Close-up functionality for photographing partially or fully magnified objects. - Tidy construction with lights on holders and no cables on the ground. - Carriage wheels for effortless transportation within the studio. - Large adjustable legs for setting up a precise working plane. ### 1.1. Studio Integration - Centerless Table CL1300, CL850 The Centerless Table is a universal photography turntable solution for shadow-free product photography of small to medium size products. It aims to accelerate, streamline, and simplify photography of objects with any photographic properties: transparent, glossy, light, and dark products. The turning glass plate is able to stage objects the size of an earring up to luggage, while a diffuse background enables lighting objects from all sides during photography. This naturally creates high-quality photos on a pure white background. It also supports the quicker, automated post-processing and publishing of images. ### 1.2. Main Components of the Centerless Table **1.2.1.** The only difference between the CL1300 and CL850 is the width of the frame of the machine body. Note that the wider variant represents one of the largest photography turntable workstations available on the market. This is thanks to the larger model’s 1300 mm diameter working turntable area, and a load-bearing capacity of up to 40 kg. **1.2.2.** Both versions of the Centerless Table feature a rotating glass plate that fits into the top center of the device frame. There are then adjustable feet at the bottom of the machine for setting up a precise working plane. **1.2.3.** The Control Unit of the Centerless Table is physically installed inside of the dedicated PhotoRobot HD rack in the front bottom-left shelf of the machine frame. Note that the Control Unit is an integral part of the device. It powers up and controls all movement of the device as well as compatible PhotoRobot robots used for spin photography, such as the Robotic Arm, MultiCam, and Cube robots. ### 1.3. Optional Robotic Arm V8 Expansion The [PhotoRobot Robotic Arm V8](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) expansion is compatible with the Centerless Table CL1300 and CL850 models. This is in addition to the Arm V8 compatibility with the majority of PhotoRobot rotary turntables and devices for automated 360 photography. That includes compatibility with the Cube, the Turning Platform, C-Class turntables, and other PhotoRobot systems. If using a CL1300 or CL850 with the Robotic Arm V8 expansion, refer to the [Robotic Arm V8 User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-arm-v8) for technical instructions on assembly, operation, and first use of the device. ### 1.4. Optional Cube Robot Expansion If using the optional PhotoRobot Cube expansion with the Centerless Table, first refer to the [PhotoRobot Cube User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact) for an overview of the device, including instructions for assembly and first use. **Note:** In combination with the Centerless Table, the [PhotoRobot Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) is mounted to a top portal in suspension mode over the turntable. This allows for suspending products in air, such as handbags, chandeliers, light fittings, and objects weighing up to 130 kg. The device synchronizes the rotation of the item, the movement of the turntable, lights, camera capture, and other robots such as the PhotoRobot Robotic Arm. ## 2. Before First Use of the Centerless Table Prior to first use of the PhotoRobot Centerless Table, it is necessary to understand that PhotoRobot is a modular unit consisting of hardware and software components. From a technical perspective, this requires PhotoRobot to connect over the same network as a computer operating it. Further, the network must have an internet connection in order to run PhotoRobot services, which are accessible in the cloud. **Important:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot First Use & Basic Testing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing) to confirm technical operating requirements, and for detailed instructions on connecting PhotoRobot to a network. In general, the following basic operating requirements then exist. - The Control Unit must connect to the local network. - A computer is necessary to run Service GUI or the operator’s software called _Controls. - The computer must connect over the same network as the Control Unit. - There must be a functional internet connection on the network. Additionally, after connecting PhotoRobot to the network, it is necessary to check the electricity distribution system parameters (e.g. voltage and frequency). To do this, use the RJ45 connector on the back of the Control Unit. If the setup of the Control Unit is not in compliance, set it up by locating the manual voltage selector on the back of the Control Unit. Then, connect the Control Unit to the network via ethernet cable using the RJ45 connector. Then, it is necessary to meet the following network configuration requirements for operation of the Centerless Table. - A DHCP server in the network is mandatory. - TCP ports 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - UDP broadcasts on port 6666 must be allowed. - Internet connection is mandatory. - *.photorobot.com access must be allowed. - as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net access must be allowed. - Wired connection of PhotoRobot to LAN is recommended. - Refer to [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) to confirm proper setup and for troubleshooting as necessary. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. In the end, press the mains switch on the Control Unit. When the status changes, the light will change from a blinking to a steady light, signaling the Control Unit is ready for operation. ### 2.1. Find PhotoRobot’s IP Address on LAN In order to find the IP address of the Centerless Table or any PhotoRobot device, the **PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP**. This allows for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network without using external applications. Ensure you are using the most up-to-date version of CAPP to access this feature. Then, to identify a robot on the network directly within CAPP, open the local version of CAPP, go to Settings, and click **Robots / Control units**. The Robots / Control units menu displays columns with Name, Network, Unit, Version, Discovered, and Identify for each robot. If the dot to the left of the robot name is green, it is online. Clicking the robot field will then open the robot’s website interface. This will also make the LED light on the robot’s Control Unit blink green for its easier identification. If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** The Android version of PhotoRobot Locator has been discontinued. Alternatively, there is the FRFind command line utility for MacOS or Windows to search the network and identify PhotoRobot Control Units. Find links to download FRfind also via the PhotoRobot Account Downloads page. Then, after locating a PhotoRobot device, copy the IP address, and paste PhotoRobot’s IP address into any web browser in URL format. If successful, the Service GUI will launch, which will display a basic user interface for testing PhotoRobot. ### 2.2. Run Basic Testing for the Centerless Table After opening the Service GUI, use the simple user interface controls to first power the motor on, and then to turn the platform to any desired angle. - Turn on the engines (arrow 1), try to rotate (arrow 2). - If the glass plate rotates, your PhotoRobot Centerless Table device is ready for regular operation. ## 3. PhotoRobot _Controls Software The software PhotoRobot Controls App (“CAPP”) provides full control of the Centerless Table CL1300 and CL850, and other PhotoRobot devices. CAPP integrates control over robots, cameras, studio lights, and post production. This includes workflow management features as well as the necessary functionality for effective automation in post-processing. **Important:** Be aware that the software PhotoRobot Controls App is not part of the machine delivery; it is a separate purchase from the device. Download of PhotoRobot Controls App is accessible via your [PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** On start-up after installation, mind that the interface may automatically start in “wizard mode”. Wizard mode is a simplified user interface which allows for only scanning barcodes to identify objects and begin the capture and post-processing sequences automatically. For detailed instructions and support on the installation and use of PhotoRobot Controls App Software, refer to the [PhotoRobot Getting Started User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 4. Information Labels ### 4.1. Symbols Overview ### 4.2. Machine & Component Labels For information labels for specific machines and components, refer to the section [Information Labels](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information#toc-10)(3.1.) from PhotoRobot Safety Information and Instructions. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras # SECTION: manuals > compatible-cameras # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-01-30 --- # Compatible Cameras with PhotoRobot - Support Manual Find quick solutions to commonly experienced camera installation issues in this PhotoRobot product photography troubleshooting manual. ## Compatible Cameras with PhotoRobot _Controls This page provides the complete list of Canon camera models compatible with PhotoRobot Controls App (CAPP). The list is based on **Canon’s official library**, while the camera models listed are compatible with the latest **Canon EOS SDK (v13.x)** to enable integration with PhotoRobot. **Important:** Due to ongoing development of software drivers and the overall ecosystem, full functionality of a camera with PhotoRobot cannot always be guaranteed. Therefore, it is recommended to verify the compatibility of a specific camera model in advance. **Note:** Refer to [PhotoRobot Recommended Cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras) for up-to-date purchasing suggestions, including complete PhotoRobot-ready camera and lens kits. While PhotoRobot can technically support any camera through third-party integration, the latest mirrorless Canon camera models are recommended for automated photography by robotic workstation. Also, be aware that the use of compatible handheld cameras over Wi-Fi or cable connection may create issues. Common issues include frequent disconnections (primarily due to timeout), or complications with cable lengths and connections. Although, if using an iPhone via the PhotoRobot Touch App, none of the above issues with handheld cameras occur. The iPhone can function standalone for handheld photography using a setup of continuous lighting. However, if flash photography is necessary, using a recommended mirrorless or handheld camera is suggested. ## Supported Canon Camera Models For smooth operation with PhotoRobot, it is currently **recommended to use mirrorless Canon camera models** (CSCs / compact cameras with interchangeable lenses), which can be controlled using software drivers. While there is a range of supported digital SLRs (DSLRs) with interchangeable lenses in the compatible camera list, mirrorless cameras offer the most seamless integration with PhotoRobot. - For better understanding on the impact of camera resolution, refer to [Understanding Camera Resolution](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution). - **Note:** In the supported Canon camera list on this page, the Canon EOS 850D model has the name Rebel T8i in the USA, or Kiss X10i in Asia. PhotoRobot directly controls the parameter settings, shutter, image transfer to the computer, and subsequent editing for the following range of Canon cameras: {{compatible-table}} Please consult your supplier for the appropriate camera and lens combination (excluding pre-configured Canon kits supplied as a complete set). Some combinations may not support all functions — for example, a motorized zoom added to a lens may not be compatible with every type of camera. Therefore, it is advisable to confirm the intended configuration in advance with a PhotoRobot specialist (or Canon). In extreme cases, testing in the PhotoRobot studio may be necessary. Camera control via this special Wi-Fi protocol must be enabled in the camera using Canon’s tool application, which is available on the [Canon Developer page](https://developers.canon-europe.com/s/). These models offer high-quality imaging and the flexibility required for capturing intricate details. Alternatively, it is possible to use an iPhone for handheld photography using the PhotoRobot Touch App. For instructions on using an iPhone with PhotoRobot, see the [iPhone Touch App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual). ## 3rd Party Cameras We also support third-party cameras under the following conditions: - The camera is fired using a cable trigger connected to the PhotoRobot Control Unit. - The transfer of photos from the camera is handled by third-party software installed on the PC. - The software transfers photos to a designated folder that is monitored by PhotoRobot Controls. Please note: 3rd party cameras are supported from PhotoRobot Controls version 2.5.4 Please [contact PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) for specific information about your camera and how it can be integrated into PhotoRobot systems. ## Canon Camera Compatibility Testing Does your preferred Canon camera model not appear on the PhotoRobot compatibility table? Find out if any Canon camera model functions with the latest version of PhotoRobot Controls. Simply contact PhotoRobot for a free, non-binding camera test. PhotoRobot technicians will test all camera functions to provide 100% certainty about the compatibility of the device. This helps to prevent unnecessary costs for customers who are satisfied with an existing or current camera choice. **Note:** This service applies exclusively to Canon camera models, with compatibility based on the official Canon software development kit (SDK). Other camera brands are not supported for testing. ## Important Notes Also please be aware of the following important notes. 1. **Canon Camera Support:** The Canon camera lineup listed above is supported only from PhotoRobot Controls 2.13.0 onward. 2. **End of Support for Nikon Cameras:** Native support for Nikon cameras has reached end of life and is no longer available in PhotoRobot Controls. Third-party integration, as described above, is required to use Nikon or other non-Canon cameras. 3. **Regional Naming Differences:** Some Canon camera models may have regional name variations. For example: - EOS 850D is also known as EOS Rebel T8i in the USA and EOS Kiss X10i in Asia. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/control-system-overview # SECTION: manuals > control-system-overview # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-23 --- # PhotoRobot Control System - Overview for System Offers The following overview of the PhotoRobot control system aims to support customers in understanding their PhotoRobot system offer. ## PhotoRobot Control System - Overview for System Offers The following overview of the PhotoRobot control system aims to support customers in understanding their PhotoRobot system offer. Find the different generations of the PhotoRobot Control Unit, basic features of the device, and technical resources for IT teams. This includes general information on the identification and setup of control units on the local network. **Note:** For detailed information to support IT teams, refer to [PhotoRobot Control Units Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller). ## Powerful, Built-In Control Systems Every PhotoRobot has a control unit **either built-into** the device (such as with CASE 850 mobile workstations), **or as a standalone unit** (e.g. in a 19” HD rack case). - The primary advantage of the standalone control unit is that customers can easily perform a number of tasks without the physical presence of a PhotoRobot service technician. This includes cases in which there is the need for replacement, servicing, or upgrading the control unit. - Additionally, the design of the entire system functions over **LAN** (unlike simpler USB-based systems), allowing for easy assembly and management of large workplaces. To date, the active versions of the PhotoRobot Control Unit are the **G7** (2020 - today), the **M Series** (2023 - today), and the built-in control unit for the **CASE** (2017 - today). The G5 (2013 - 2015) has reached its end-of-life, while the G6 (2015 - 2020) is now obsolete. New external control units in the 19" rack format (2U) connect via cables. This means that immediately after connection, the Robot can perform the most advanced functions. From 6th generation control units (G6), the Linux-based PhotoRobot OS is the real-time operating system, enabling excellent performance and stability. The built-in web server provides monitoring, diagnostic tools, and basic control movement features. **Note:** The Control Unit is built-into the PhotoRobot CASE 850, the C850 & C1300, Cube Compact, and the Frame. In some cases, this may include older versions of the Control Unit (G5 or G6) instead of the newest Control Unit G7. ## Basic Features of Control Unit The basic features of the PhotoRobot Control Unit are as follows. - **Real-Time Control and Diagnostics of the Machine** (using a special real-time Linux OS assembled exclusively for this purpose) - **Powerful Processor** (AM335x 1GHz ARM® Cortex-A8) - **Direct Robot Control via a Website** (Embedded Server) - No superior application required (e.g. PhotoRobot _Controls) - **LAN Setup** (Static and Dynamic IP Addresses) - **Diagnostic Tools:** - LAN quality diagnostics - Checking for duplicate IP addresses in the network - Diagnostics of the device itself, checking the operating temperature, fluctuations in the mains power supply, etc - **Activation of Licenses** - **Firmware Updates** - **Service Interface** - **Access for Remote Diagnostics System** - **Cloud API with PhotoRobot _Controls** (for the integration into customer systems if the customer’s own control system superstructure is required) **Note:** Refer to the technical documentation on PhotoRobot Control Units for up-to-date and detailed information regarding the control system's basic features. ## In-House Manufacturing of Control Systems The control system is a key component of every robot, so PhotoRobot uses only in-house manufactured control systems. This allows for complete control over their design. Meanwhile, the robot’s controller works optimally with higher level software, on a computer or in the cloud, thanks to PhotoRobot directly designing and producing everything – tailoring components precisely to the processes they perform. At the same time, PhotoRobot rigorously manages the API at all levels. The cloud system has an API for easy integration with the customer’s other systems, and the robot’s control unit also features an API for integration with third-party systems. This modern concept allows customers to implement even very complex integrations. **Note:** For information on a technical level regarding the essential characteristics of the PhotoRobot Control System, refer to [PhotoRobot Control Units Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller). ## Control Unit Connectivity PhotoRobot control units are interconnected exclusively via a LAN network. USB and similar solutions cannot be reliably used on a larger scale, while LAN-based solutions can cover the needs of a small studio with one robot, or large companies running more than 200 robotic workspaces in one cluster. A built-in web server (operating on the unit’s IP address) provides access to the unit’s control system (updates, service, monitoring). Additionally, it is possible to locate and manage the control unit using the PhotoRobot Locator application. The PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within PhotoRobot Controls App (CAPP) for the easier search and identification of control units on the network. If a mobile device is connected to the same computer network as the control unit, the application searches for all available controllers, displays their IP addresses and MAC addresses, and allows specific unit authentication (it is possible to make the control unit panel flash to identify the given unit). It is then possible to access the web interface of the control unit directly from the application and control the functions of the built-in web server. **Note:** If external download of the Locator app is required, it is also available for direct iOS download in [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). ## Technical Resources on the PhotoRobot Control Unit To evaluate the technical characteristics of the latest versions of PhotoRobot’s control systems, direct your IT teams to [PhotoRobot Control Units Technical Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/controller). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/create-video-photorobot-controls-user-support # SECTION: manuals > create-video-photorobot-controls-user-support # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-09 --- # How to Create Video in PhotoRobot Controls App This PhotoRobot User Manual describes how to create a product video in PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”). ## 360 Product Video Production in PhotoRobot Controls App This PhotoRobot User Manual describes how to create a [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video) in PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”). Before creating a new video, users must have [set up a PhotoRobot Workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace) in CAPP, and created at least one Item, and one Folder. The Capture mode interface then grants user control over PhotoRobot hardware and cameras to automate image and video capture. **Note:** Shooting video is the only case in which you must use a memory card in the camera. Please leave the camera in Manual mode for this (see [PhotoRobot Camera Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-configuration): “General Camera Settings - Step 1”). The camera will then be switched to the correct mode for shooting video automatically from PhotoRobot Controls software. ## 1 - Create / Open a Project and Item In CAPP, you must first add a new **Project** (unless you already have one that you would like to use), as well as at least one **Item**. Then, in the Capture mode interface, click the Folder icon to create a new folder, and select **Video** from the menu options. - To change the name of the folder, click on its name field to edit it, and then click **Add** in the bottom right part of the interface to create the new folder. ## 2 - Configure Video Timeline Points In a new video folder, users create a **Video timeline** by configuring points of the recording process before filming. Use **+ Add point** to create new points that define instructions for the system to carry out in order. These include operations to start / stop recording, pause / rotate turntable, capture specific turn / swing angle, and more. All video timelines must contain at least 3 points: one to start recording, one to stop recording, and no less than one capture operation. - The first point (1) contains the **Start recording** function. - Use**+ Add point** to configure the next point in the timeline. For example, in a new Video timeline, click **(+) Add point**, and select the option **Turn +/- angle**. Next, set the **Turn +/- angle** field to **360°**. - **Note:** Standard to the majority of PhotoRobot devices, the **Turn** setting enables users to control turntable rotation around its center. In this case, configuring Turn to 360 degrees will instruct the turntable to do a complete rotation. After adding a new point, users can configure additional point settings via the cog icon above the point specifications. In this case, users can adjust movement settings of the turntable, including its speed and its acceleration: - **Adjust movement** enables users to configure **Speed** and **Acceleration** of turntable rotation from 0-100%. Clicking Confirm saves all changes. To add additional points to a video timeline, the complete list of settings of **+ Add point** include: - **Turn to angle** - Move turntable to a specific turn angle - **Turn +/- angle** - Set the rotation of the turntable (i.e. at ‘360’ for a complete rotation) - **Swing to angle** - Configure the vertical angle at which the camera targets an object (i.e. at 0° to remain level with the turntable, at 90° for a top-view overlooking the product) - **Idle time** - Set a delay before turntable rotation begins - **Start recording** - Configure point to start recording - **Stop recording** - Configure point to stop recording - **Catwalk** - Configure options for the Catwalk robot (if in use) Then, after the configuration of at least one capture operation, complete the video timeline by clicking **+ Add point**,and then **Stop recording.** - **Stop recording** sets the endpoint for the recording sequence, and will thus always be the final point of a video timeline. ## 3 - Use Camera Live View to Check Object Position After configuring all points in the recording timeline, switch on the camera’s Live View to check the object’s position. Live view enables users to test the camera’s manual focus on the object, and make any slight adjustments before starting the recording. Additionally, use the **Take snapshot** button via the camera icon to the right of the Capture mode to take a test shot. - **Note:** the **Take snapshot** command is not often used for creating video. Test shots more often help to ensure that the workspace is properly configured to communicate with the camera, hardware, and studio lighting for [still & flash photography with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 4 - Start Recording After ensuring the object is positioned correctly in the camera Live view, use the **Start** button to begin recording the video. On start, CAPP will run the operations for each point of the recording, automating turntable rotation in sync with camera capture and lighting. This includes any points for idle time, or for example adjustments in elevation, such as when creating a flying camera effect with the Robotic Arm. Additionally, clicking **STOP** to the left of the start button will pause the rotation of the robot arm immediately: - **Note:** After stopping a sequence, the robot arm will require software recalibration in CAPP so the robot knows in which position to begin again. After recalibration of the robot arm if necessary, start recording again at any time via the Start button. Pressing Start again will then run the operations in each point of the video timeline, from start to finish to record the product video. ## 5 - Publish Video When complete, use the Viewer tab in CAPP to access the video on your local drive, to configure it further in CAPP, or to view the video directly on the web. For additional video editing, users must download the video and use third party software such as Final Cut Pro, or other professional video editing applications. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/cube-v5-v6-compact # SECTION: manuals > cube-v5-v6-compact # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-11 --- # PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact User Manual This user manual provides technical instructions on the installation, connection, and use of the PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact. ## PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact User Manual This user manual provides technical instructions on the installation, connection, and use of the [PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube). It includes instructions on how to install the Cube robot as a rotating mannequin torso holder. The manual aims to support PhotoRobot customers during assembly of their device, its first use, and in onboarding production line operators. **Note:** The first installation of a PhotoRobot device must always be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Important:** Always first refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to the manual provided specifically with your device before any self-installation or first use. ## Cube V5 / V6 / Compact First Use & Installation Thank you and congratulations on your PhotoRobot Cube purchase! Your device represents decades of professional experience, know-how, and innovation in automated photography. The design of every robot is with you in mind. Meanwhile, the software is under constant development – tailoring to unique needs while benefitting the entire PhotoRobot ecosystem with every update. Welcome to PhotoRobot. Use this technical documentation on the Cube V5 / V6 / Compact PhotoRobots to familiarize yourself with the technology, and for instructions detailing assembly and first use of the solution. ## 1. Product Description - Cube V5 / V6 / Compact The PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact devices are one of the most versatile photo studio robots. Each Cube is able to function standalone or in combination with other PhotoRobots, and features configurations for 3 different modes of operation. The Cube functions as a rotating photography platform, in object suspension mode, and as a rotating mannequin torso holder. Key features of the PhotoRobot Cube include: - Standalone use or in use in combination with compatible PhotoRobots - Quick setup as a 360 turntable, or in object suspension mode - Support for a mannequin torso holder or rotating platform - Compatible with photography mannequins of different types and sizes - Available in Cube V5, V6, and Compact versions for greater versatility ### 1.1. Device Overview - Cube V5 / V6 / Compact PhotoRobot’s Cube V5, Cube V6, and Cube Compact are operational in three different configurations. The standard configurations involve using the device as a rotating photography platform, or to suspend objects in air for photos. Alternatively, it is possible to set up the device as a rotating stand to mount a mannequin torso. **a) 360 Photo / Rotary Platform Setup:** **b) 360 / Rotary Suspension Mode:** **c)** **Rotating Mannequin Torso Holder:** **Note:** The Control Unit of the Cube V5 and Cube V6 are a separate but integral component to the devices. The Cube Compact has an integrated Control Unit within the machine. - The above image shows the Control Unit for the Cube V5 / Cube V6. ### 1.2. Cube Compact Technical Parameters There are the following technical parameters for the Cube Compact. - **Weight:** 26.21 kg - **Dimensions:** 337.5 x 373.5 x 209.5 mm - **Power Supply:** 100 - 230 V, 50 HZ, Fuse T1.6 A (230 V), T3.15 A (115 V) - **Load Capacity:** 130 kg for both bottom and top mounting - **Output Shaft Torque:** 143.5 Nm - **Speed:** 0 -17 1.min-1 ### 1.3. Cube Compact Accessories The Cube Compact has the following parts and accessories. **a) Hanger:** **b) Bottom Base:** **c) Top Base:** **d) Machine Feet:** **e) Plate:** **f) Portal:** ### 1.4. Cube Compact Installation & Use Overview In addition to the Cube Compact accessories, there are multiple configurations for installation and use of the Cube Compact. These include the following configuration parts & setups. **a) Bottom fastening plate** (for fastening the device turntable or mounting system): **b) Fastened standalone rotating platform** (fastened to the floor for greater stability): **Note:** In this configuration, there is a 95 cm plate with a base mounting to a stable floor surface. This stabilizes the machine when in use, functioning to prevent tipping. Its use cases include presenting small and medium-size objects, up to maximum size of 60 - 65 cm. **c) Free-standing rotating platform** (with device feet in use): **d) 360 rotary suspension mode** (mounting upside-down to a top portal): ### 1.5. Cube Compact Emergency Stop To perform an emergency stop, disconnect the device from the electrical network by pulling the power cord from the socket. ### 1.6. Cube V5 / V6 / Compact Maintenance Note that it is necessary to keep the device clean and in a dry, climate-controlled environment with a constant temperature. Remove dust only with a damp cloth, and do not use chemicals or solvents for any cleaning. By design, the equipment must be subject to regular inspections and revisions according to local legislation. After the end of its life cycle, the electrical equipment must then be properly disposed of by handover to the electronic waste collection system dictated by the local legislation. ## 2. First Use - PhotoRobot Cube V5 / V6 / Compact Before [first use of PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing), it is necessary to understand the concept behind the technology. PhotoRobot is a revolutionary all-in-one solution for the automation of product and object photography. From a technical perspective, it is a modular unit consisting of hardware and software. Therefore, it is necessary for PhotoRobot itself to be connected over the same network as the computer operating it. The network also must have a connection to the internet to access PhotoRobot services, which run in the cloud. There are then the following requirements which must always be met. - There must be a PhotoRobot Control Unit connected to the local network. - A computer is necessary to run service GUI or the operator’s software called _Controls. - The computer must be connected to the same network as the PhotoRobot Control Unit. - The network must be connected to the internet. After ensuring connection of PhotoRobot to the computer and local network, check the electricity distribution system parameters (e.g. voltage and frequency). Then, check the Control Unit power setup. It must comply with all electricity distribution system parameters. If the setup of the Control Unit does not comply, refer to the next section on Control Unit Power Setup. If compliant, then proceed by connecting the Control Unit to the network via an ethernet cable. **Note:** For the Cube V5 / V6 models, the Control Unit is a separate device. Find the RJ45 connector on the back of the Control Unit. The Cube Compact has the Control Unit integrated into the machine. Find the RJ45 connector on the back of the Cube robot. ### 2.1. Control Unit Power Setup To check the Control Unit power setup,the older model Control Unit has a manual voltage selector on the back of the device. Alternatively, the newer model Control Unit has no voltage selector, and it has a functional range of operation at 110V - 240V. If unsure about the Control Unit power setup, contact [PhotoRobot Technical Support](https://support.photorobot.com) for assistance from a specialist PhotoRobot technician. ### 2.2. Cube Compact Electrical Diagram ### 2.3. Network Configuration To configure the network to properly communicate with PhotoRobot, the following requirements must be met on the network. - A DHCP server in the network is mandatory. - TCP ports 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - UDP broadcasts on port 6666 must be allowed - Internet connection is mandatory. - *.photorobot.com access must be allowed. - as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net access must be allowed. - Wired connection of PhotoRobot to LAN is recommended. - Refer to [PhotoRobot Detailed Network Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) for more information if necessary. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. Next, press the mains switch on the Control Unit for the Cube V5 / V6 (or on the back of the Cube Compact). The status light will change from blinking to continuous light to signal when it is ready for operation. ### 2.4. Find PhotoRobot’s IP Address on LAN After proper configuration of the network, it is necessary to search for and identify PhotoRobot’s IP address on LAN. To do this, the **PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP** for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network. Ensure you are using the most up-to-date version of CAPP to access this feature. Then, to identify a robot on the network directly within CAPP, open the local version of CAPP, go to Settings, and click **Robots / Control units**. The Robots / Control units menu displays columns with Name, Network, Unit, Version, Discovered, and Identify for each robot. If the dot to the left of the robot name is green, it is online. Clicking the robot field will then open the robot’s website interface. This will also make the LED light on the robot’s Control Unit blink green for its easier identification. If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** The Android version of PhotoRobot Locator has been discontinued. Alternatively, there is the FRFind command line utility for MacOS or Windows to search the network and identify PhotoRobot Control Units. Find links to download FRfind also on the PhotoRobot Account Downloads page. ### 2.5. Basic Testing - Cube V5 / V6 / Compact To test the Cube V5 / V6 / Compact, next open a web browser and enter the IP address associated with your PhotoRobot in URL format. For example, enter: https://11.22.33.44 (although note that this address is only an example). If successful, a basic user interface will launch. - Turn on the engines (arrow 1 above), and try to operate any movable part of the robot (arrow 2 above). If the robot moves based on your instructions, you are ready to use your PhotoRobot device regularly. ## 3. Cube V5 / V6 Assembly and Mannequin Torso Holder When assembling the Cube V5 or Cube V6 models, note that assembly of the separate Control Unit and rack is necessary. This is not the case for the Cube Compact. If using the Cube Compact, proceed to the section on assembling the paper background. ### 3.1. Assembly of HD Rack and Control Unit (V5 / V6) **3.1.1.** To assemble the separate Control Unit of the Cube V5 and Cube V6, start with assembly of the rack. For this, follow the instructions within the manual attached to the box of rack on-delivery. **3.1.2.** Next, locate and unpack the Control Unit from its carton shipping box. **3.1.3.** Then, prepare the following cables: the **power cable** (1-meter length), **shutter cable**, **motor cable**, and the **ethernet cable** (2-meter length). **a)** **Power cable** (1-meter length): **b)** **Shutter cable** (1-meter length): **c) Motor cable**: **d) Ethernet cable** (2-meters length): **3.1.4.** Place each cable prepared in the previous step into the rack. **3.1.5.** Connect the cables from the previous steps into the Control Unit. **Important:** The motor cable must be fastened tightly using the two screws on the connector. The shutter cable connects into the OUT port of the Control Unit. **3.1.6.** Insert the Control Unit into the rack case, and fasten the screws to seal it closed. ### 3.2. Assembly of Accessories and Connections **3.2.1.** To connect all accessories for the Cube V5 / Cube V6, begin by unpacking the router from the carton box, and then mounting the rack holders. Next, attach the power cables or adapter (depending on the type of router), and insert the router into the rack case before screwing it shut. **3.2.2.** Secure the power multi-socket onto the bottom part at the back of the rack by fastening it on with screws. **3.2.3.** If the router delivered has a power adapter, find the power adapter interface and plug it into any power multi-socket connector. **3.2.4.** Find the free end of the Control Unit power cable, and attach it to the power multi-socket. **3.2.5.** Using the longest ethernet cable, plug the cable into the data wall socket of your studio. Please note that by default it is expected internet access will be available through this data wall socket, and therefore the IP address will be obtained automatically. **3.2.6.** Plug the other end of the ethernet cable into the last port of the router. Use either port number 10 or port number 13, depending on the type of router. **3.2.7.** Next, plug in the free end of the ethernet cable from the Control Unit into the router using any port number 1-9. **3.2.8.** Find the power adapter interface, and plug it into the power multi-socket. **3.2.9.** Unbox the Wi-Fi module from the carton box, and find another 2-meter ethernet cable to attach to the Wi-Fi module. The other end of the ethernet cable attaches to the router using any port number 1-9. **3.2.10.** Next, if using Fomei strobes, unpack the Fomei Wi-Fi converter and power adapter, and connect the devices. If using Broncolor lights, refer to [PhotoRobot - Broncolor Lights Management](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-broncolor-lights-management). **3.2.11.** Plug the power adapter interface into the power multi-socket, and then plug in the adapter. The other end of the cable connects to the router using any port number 1-9. **3.2.12.** Connect the power multi-socket plug into the wall socket. **3.2.13.** Find the shutter cable terminator variant passes to your camera model, and plug it into the shutter cable coupler. ### 3.3. Assembly of the Paper Background **3.3.1.** To assemble the paper background, first find two Master LS 13-B light stands. Then, mount W-2 fixing forks for the Expander Stud Set on top of each stand. **3.3.2.** Place the paper background with the stud set onto the fixing forks of the two tripods. One will hold the left side of the background, and the other will hold the right side of the background. **3.3.3.** Next, watch the [Screen Recording of Installing the Stud Set](https://drive.google.com/file/d/1CvmMTZln2zEWSs-XpJ4ftqP9QXxdcCck/view?usp=share_link), and repeat the steps in the video. ### 3.4. Assembly of the Cube V5 / V6 Robot **3.4.1**. To configure the Cube robot to support the rotating mannequin torso holder, start by unpacking the robot and attaching its four legs to the bottom of the device. **3.4.2.** Next, connect the other end of the motor cable to the Cube, fastening both screws on the connector. **3.4.3.** After connecting the device, place the Cube robot on the ground in the center of the white background. Position the Cube 1 meter away from the paper. **3.4.4.** Place the reduction plate for the torso holder onto the top of the Cube robot, and secure it in place with the four screws provided. **3.4.5.** Position the body of the torso holder onto the reduction plate, and secure the torso holder into place using the large hand screw. **Important:** It is necessary to pay careful attention to this step. Ensure that the triangle symbols from the reduction plate are visible through the torso holder. This means that the torso holder has been correctly installed. **3.4.6.** At this point, note that the height of the torso is adjustable by loosening and tightening the hand screw, and sliding the extension higher or lower. ### 3.5. Flash Lights Setup **3.5.1.** To set up the flash lights with the Cube robot, first unpack the flash lights from the box, and next insert the pilot bulb into each flash light. **Note:** To insert the pilot bulb, carefully unscrew the glass from the main. Then, do the same for the glass protector from the main bulb, before taking out the pilot bulb from the carton box. Be sure to use a napkin or cloth when handling the pilot bulb, otherwise its lifetime may drastically lower. Next, insert the pilot bulb into the connection at the exact position as in the following photos. When ready, remember to put the glass protector back on, and then repeat the previous steps to assemble each light. **3.5.2.** After setting up the pilot bulbs and replacing their glass protectors, connect the power cables to all of the flash lights. **3.5.3.** Then, insert receivers into each light, and mind the FOMEI labels for orientation. **3.5.4.** Plug in the free ends of the power cables from the lights to the power multi-socket. **3.5.5.** Switch the power on for all flash lights. **3.5.6.** Position the lights physically around the robot in the following recommended lights setup. **3.5.7.** Note that if a boom stand is installed as in the recommended lights setup, it will be necessary to first construct the boom stand. To build a boom stand, you will need a tripod, a 1.5 meter wall boom pole, and a wall boom set. Additionally, refer to the following images for the construction of the boom stand. **a) Wall boom pole clamp:** **b) Balancing weight at the end of the pole to support the light:** **c) Illustrative picture of a constructed boom stand:** ## 4. PhotoRobot _Controls Software The software PhotoRobot _Controls App provides control over the entire Cube V5 / V6 / Compact robotic workstation. This includes remote control over all robots, cameras and lighting. The software manages workflow and provides the necessary functionality for effective automation in the field of post-processing. PhotoRobot _Controls App software is available for download via your PhotoRobot Account. It is not included with the machine delivery. PhotoRobot _Controls App software is purchased separately from the machine. Additionally, after starting the software application, mind that the interface might automatically start in “wizard mode”. Wizard mode is a simplified user interface. It allows for example the scanning of barcodes to identify objects and begin the capture and post-processing sequences automatically. **Note:** Both the **Stable version** and a **Preview version** of CAPP are available for download via the installer wizard. The stable version contains the most recent version of CAPP, and receives frequent version releases. Meanwhile, the preview version of CAPP provides early access to the very latest features and fixes which transfer to the stable version within days of development. This allows users to test any issues that occur in the preview version before contacting support, as most reported issues on the stable version have already been resolved on the preview version. However, be aware that the preview version is not recommended for production use in which stability is a critical factor. The preview version is under active development, which may still include incomplete features or unresolved bugs. **Important:** The older versions of CAPP are not intended for customer or public distribution due to the risk of database corruption. Older versions of CAPP are accessible only to authorized PhotoRobot technicians for internal development, or for extremely special use cases. To find the latest stable version and preview version of CAPP, refer to [CAPP Latest Download Versions](https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/links/latest). For support or troubleshooting of PhotoRobot _Controls App, refer to [PhotoRobot Getting Started](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 5. Information Labels ### 5.1. Symbols Overview ### 5.2. Cube Compact Labels --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images # SECTION: manuals > editing-images # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-10-07 --- # Editing Images with PhotoRobot Post-Processing Software Understand how to retouch and edit any product image or product video with PhotoRobot Control software’s advanced post-processing tools & features. ## Editing Images Using Post-Processing Tools Retouch and edit any image or video with one of many advanced post-processing tools and functions. Apply changes to items individually or across all images in a given folder at once. ## Scopes By default, using any of the edit operations will have an effect on all images within the item. To limit which images will be affected, create scopes by selecting **Add scope**: - Each scope contains one or more edit operations. - Select scopes either **for the entire folder spin**, **for a specific swing angle**, or **for the current image only**. In the following example, there are two scopes (1, 2). In **All folders**, the **Crop** and **Background** operations will affect all images in all folders. In **Folder spin**, the **Clarity** operation will affect only images within the **spin** folder: ### Add Scopes for a Specific Swing Angle If applying scope settings for a specific swing angle, specify the angle on which the capture Presets will apply (e.g. 15°, 45°, etc): - Settings scopes can apply to one or more swing angles via **Select swing angle**. - Specify the swing angle, and click **Add** to assign scope settings to a folder. - The target folder with its assigned presets then displays in the top-right part of the interface: If applying different scope settings to multiple swing angles, click the specific swing angle to view or configure the settings assigned to its folder. - For example, it is possible to configure one editing operation for a spin folder at a swing angle of 15°, and a different editing operation for a spin folder at a swing angle of 45°. - It is also possible to create settings scopes for only a still image folder, or any other folder within the item. - The system will then limit the settings scopes of the operations to each specific folder. To view or configure the settings scopes across all images, click **All folders**. After configuring the settings scope, clicking the start button in edit mode will apply the editing operations to the selected folders. **Note**: Use the **Disable / Enable** button to the right of each editing operation to view the effect it has on images: ### Single Image Mode Sometimes, you need to do per-picture edits. Take for example when you need to remove part of an object that is in a different location within each frame. To do this effectively, you can switch to **Single Image** mode. Activate Single image mode via one of two ways: 1. Add settings scope **for the current selected image**: 2. Select **Enter single image mode** from the operation menu: ## Mask For each edit operation, you can limit the area in the image where it is applied. To activate the mask, click the **Mask** button in the operation menu: To start masking, use the Plus **(+)** button: There are three possible ways to edit the mask: - **Brush** - Draw with the mouse to mark where the operation should be applied. Hold the Alt key to mark areas where the operation should not be applied. - **Inside** - Apply the operation only inside the selected area. - **Outside** - Apply the operation only outside of the selected area. ## Presets All scopes and operations can be saved for later use as a preset: ### Assign Presets In CAPP, there are 3 methods to load / assign Presets for an item or multiple items. 1. Select an item, and load a Preset via the drop-down menu icon in the upper-right part of the interface: - Alternatively, use the hot key “**P** ” to open saved Presets. Then, select a configuration to apply to the item. This will create folders for the frames that will be shot, along with all capture settings and predefined editing operations. 2. When creating an item, users can select a configuration via the Add item menu by clicking on the Preset field: - To assign a Preset to multiple items, select the items from the Items menu, and click **Assign preset**: - Select the preset by name, and assign it to the items by clicking **Assign preset** again: 3. Alternatively, in the Items menu, click **Import** to import items from CSV: - CSV import functionality enables PhotoRobot users to create an item with its configurations in Excel to import into the system. - CSV files may contain the following customizable columns, and one functions to assign a preset by preset name to the item: **( ! )** - **Note:** When using CSV import, UTF-8 encoding is recommended for the best results. ### Sorting Items to Shelves (Carts) Additionally, in CAPP, sorting items to **Shelves** (or **Carts**) enables you to simplify the workflow by automatically setting up a workspace and preset after assigning a shelf to an item. Creating Shelf (or Cart) codes in the system helps to sort items into categories with configurable photoshoot settings. It is possible to assign a shelf to an item by configuring its settings in the app, or, alternatively, by CAPP integration of barcode reader support. Barcode reader support enables teams to **print a unique barcode** which they can simply scan to assign an item to its shelf. In this way, teams scan a shelf code, and then scan an item to quickly assign its preset photoshoot settings without clicking a mouse, or moving to a workstation computer. To access **Shelves** settings in CAPP, open **Settings** in the local or cloud version of the app: - Click the **Shelves** menu item on the left-hand side of the Settings interface to view saved shelves (if any). - Search for Shelves via Advanced search, or select Shelves via the box to the left of the shelf Barcode / code. To create a new shelf, use **+ Add shelf** in the top-right corner of the Shelves menu: New shelf settings then enable the creation of custom **Barcode / codes** to use with a barcode reader, **Name** creation, **Tags**, **Notes**, **Workspace** and **Preset** selection. - **Barcode / code** is customizable to create a unique Shelf code the system can use to assign settings via barcode reader. - **Name** is customizable to most often distinguish the types of objects being photographed (for example: small, medium, and large items; footwear, versus jewelry, clothing, or any similar types of object). - **Workspace** and **Preset** fields are then configurable by robotic workstation (and its location in the studio), and Preset fields for the shelf’s automated capture and post-processing settings. - **Save** in the bottom-right corner of the interface creates the shelf in the system for future assignment via the app or via barcode reader. Later, to assign a Shelf code to a new or existing item in the app, select the Shelf field in the Item settings menu, and select the Shelf to assign it to the item: Note: The process is the same to apply a Shelf to any existing item for capture in the system. Simply select the item settings, and configure the **Shelf** field: Alternatively, if using an integrated barcode reader, print the unique shelf code, and use it alongside item barcodes to quickly organize your products and shooting lists by workstation and preset. ## Edit Operations ### Crop To crop all images within the scope, add the **Crop** operation. By default, **Auto crop** is enabled, meaning that the edges of the object are detected and crop is adjusted by the software automatically. - To disable Auto crop, deselect Auto crop in the crop operation, or select the edge of the crop area and drag in any direction. **Tip:** When using the Crop tool, it can be useful to see all images within a folder at once. Click the button for **All images overlay** to do this: The main control options for Crop are: the **Auto crop** toggle, the field for **Aspect ratio** (the ratio of width to height), and a slider for **Padding** (how much space exists around the photographed object). Other useful options when using Crop include: **Keep same size between frames**, and **Resize output**. Clicking Resize output will enable crop with output resizing. Output resizing allows for the saving of channel-ready frames without leaving the _Controls interface. Click Resize output and enter the Output max size to adjust the output resolution. ### Center Use automatic or manual centering and tilt correction to remove product tilt and wobble from individual product photos, spins and animations. - By default, the product is set for automatic centering. - To have the software automatically correct any wobble or tilt, use **Fix tilt**. If results are unsatisfactory, adjust auto centering by clicking **Adjust manually**. You then select 3 images from the series to correct, and PhotoRobot algorithms automatically center products in photos across the entire item folder: Adjust manually - selecting object edges for 3 images. Product before centering. Product after centering. ### Background You can adjust or remove the background semi-automatically or manually with 3 types of background removal functions: by level, by flood, or freemasking. **1. Background removal by level** allows you to define a threshold of color to remove. You can control the background removal by level by adjusting the following sliders: - **Level** - select the threshold of what color will be considered to be the background. Anything lighter than this threshold will be removed. - **Fuzziness** - makes the threshold fuzzy, leading to smoother transitions between the object and the background. - **Denoise** - eliminates noise by removing solitary pixels in the background or the object. - **Output Color** - select the color of background in edited images. - **Input Color** - select white if you're capturing products on white background. Select black if on black background. **( ! ) Pro-tip:** click the **Remove outside** button to remove any clutter at the edges of the image (e.g. shaders). Crop without Remove outside Crop with Remove outside applied **2. Background removal by flood** works by “flooding” the area from a selected point. Use the Shift key and click anywhere on the background for the software to remove it, stopping at the object edges. - Adjust **Edge sensitivity** to detect object edges correctly. - Adjust **Erode** to remove extra pixels from object edges. **3. Background removal by freemask** requires more configuration than by level or by flood, but it can be one of the quickest and most exact methods. Detailed information on how to configure lights to create main and mask images will be found in a later manual. ### Brush Use the Brush / Eraser tool to remove any part of an image. Set size and edge softness for more precision. - By default, Brush will be applied to all the pictures within the folder. It’s also easy to brush individual images by switching to single image mode: ### Clarity There are two tools you can use to improve the clarity of the image: 1. **Sharpen** - improves contrast between individual pixels. 2. **Unsharp mask** - improves the contrast by accounting for larger areas of the image. **Note:** Unsharp mask is slower than Sharpen, but it can lead to better results with less noise. **Unsharp mask** can be further configured by adjusting sliders for: - **Amount** - adjusts the strength of the effect. - **Radius** - adjusts the amount of pixels to account for around each pixel. - **Correction** - allows for fine-tuning of the effect. Image clarity before adjustment. Image clarity after adjusting via Sharpen. Image clarity after adjusting via Unsharp mask. ### Colors Adjust object colors by using 3 sliders: - **Hue** - slide left or right to adjust color hue. - **Saturation** - adjust the slider to the right for more vivid colors, or adjust left for more black and white images. - **Lightness** - slide left or right to adjust the lightness of the object. **( ! ) - Pro Tip:** For objects with one dominant color, you can adjust **Hue** to effectively change the color of the object: Product before hue adjustment. Product after hue adjustment. ### Brightness & Contrast Use **Brightness & Contrast** for basic adjustment of brightness and contrast: Product before Brightness & Contrast correction. Product after Brightness & Contrast correction. ### Vignette Use the **Vignette** tool to mask picture edges with a configurable gradient. Adjust sliders left or right for control over: - **Amount** - specify the opacity of the vignette effect. - **Radius** - set the size of the inner area which should be left intact. - **Feather** - adjust the gradient from the inside to the edges. - **Shape** - change the shape of the vignette effect. ### Chromakey Carry out Chromakey operation to remove parts of the scene, such as: mannequin poles, nylon ropes, strings, clamps, holders and more. To operate Chromakey, first select up to 12 colors to remove from an image. Then: - Adjust **Threshold** or **Fuzziness** to fine-tune how much of the color is removed. Image before ChromaKey operation. Image after Chromakey with mannequin pole removed. ### Levels Use the **Levels** tool to change image contrast by adjusting three sliders: - **Black** - increases black level to make dark parts of the image darker. - **White** - increases the white level to make bright parts of the image brighter. - **Gamma** - adjusts gamma levels to give more weight to darker or brighter colors. Image before Levels. Image after Levels - White has been increased. ### Shadows & Highlights The **Shadows & Highlights** tool is similar to the Levels tool, but works in the opposite direction. Use it by adjusting three sliders: - **Shadows** - increase value to make dark parts of the image brighter. - **Highlights** - increase value to make bright parts of the image darker. - **Range** - adjust the lightness range affected by the tool. In contrast to the Levels tool, Shadows & Highlights allows you to show more details in dark or bright parts of the image. Image before any adjustments. Image after Highlights has been increased. ### Curves The **Curves** tool allows for adjustment of the lightness of the product according to a custom lightness curve. **Note:** Editing using Curves is an advanced technique. In the majority of cases, the desired results can be achieved with simpler lightness adjustment via **Levels** and **Shadows & Highlights**. It is when these two operations do not meet your needs that **Curves** allows for complete control over lightness adjustment. ### Rotate - **Rotate** - rotates the image by a specified angle. - **Tilt** - adjusts object tilt. - **Box tilt correction** - adjusts object tilt automatically (designed for rectangular, box-packaged products). - **Interpolation** - changes the algorithm used to resize the image. **Note:** For Interpolation, **Linear** is the fastest and default, however results can sometimes be slightly blurred. Use the **Lanczos** or **Bicubic** algorithm to achieve more crisp results. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/eu-funding-declaration # SECTION: manuals > eu-funding-declaration # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2025-12-16 --- # Declaration of PhotoRobot Co-Funding by the European Union PhotoRobot declares co-financing of its project by the European Union for innovation in society via the company improtech s.r.o. ## Declaration of PhotoRobot Co-Funding by the European Union Innovation of PhotoRobot in society via the company improtech s.r.o. (CZ.01.01.01/02/22_003/0000207) is **co-financed by the European Union.** ## Project Goal The goal of the project is the acquisition of new technological equipment to enable the serial production of innovative PhotoRobot products. To discover more projects supported by the European Union in the Czech Republic, refer to the [European Union Funds Portal](https://www.dotaceeu.cz/en/statistiky-a-analyzy/mapa-projektu). **Note:** This [PhotoRobot Declaration of European Union Co-Financing](https://www.facebook.com/photo?fbid=1238411561167058&set=a.550263923315162) is also published on PhotoRobot’s social media to meet the duty of publicity. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/feature-requests-guide # SECTION: manuals > feature-requests-guide # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-05-13 --- # PhotoRobot Controls Feature Requests User Manual This user manual describes how to use the PhotoRobot Controls Feature Requests Board to request and vote on upcoming innovations. ## PhotoRobot Controls Feature Requests User Manual This user manual serves as a guide to using the PhotoRobot Controls Feature Requests Board. The manual describes accessing and reading the board, voting on existing requests, submitting new requests, and following request tickets. Find out how everything works, and how you can start participating immediately to help shape the development of PhotoRobot Controls. ## 1 - How to Open the Feature Requests Board To access the PhotoRobot Controls Feature Requests Board, [log into a PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/), and navigate to the Support interface. - **Note:** If using the local version of CAPP, first click **Support**, and then click **Submit a ticket**. The support interface will open in the web version of the application. Next, in the support interface of the web application, tap **Feature Requests** in the left sidebar. This opens the interface for the Feature Requests Board. ## 2 - How to Read the Feature Requests Board The PhotoRobot Controls Feature Requests Board in CAPP has an interface that contains four panels. From top-to-bottom, the panels display your active votes, how it works, most requested, and all feature requests. ### Active Votes Panel The main panel of the board displays the active votes of your organization with your total votes remaining, and allows you to submit a new feature request. This is in addition to information on the review and reporting procedure for request tickets. Each organization receives a total of 5 votes which they can use to vote on existing request tickets, or to submit a new feature request. The total number of active votes displays next to the button to request a feature. ### How It Works Panel Click the panel **How it works** to open a drop-down box describing the four steps to requesting features, their review, and implementation. 1. Request a feature or vote on an existing one. 2. PhotoRobot groups similar requests together. 3. Requests with more votes are more likely to progress into planning stages. 4. PhotoRobot updates this board regularly and as we make decisions. **Note:** When making decisions on planning, it is a promise of process, not a guarantee of shipping order. Engineering, security, and roadmap constraints still apply. Nonetheless, this ensures that prioritization is transparent, visible, and fair. ### Most Requested Panel Clicking the panel **Most requested** will open a drop-down box which highlights request tickets that are gaining in popularity. This allows you to align your organization’s votes with the broader customer interest if you so choose. ### All Feature Requests Panel The panel **All feature requests** displays items by number of votes. At the same time, voting moves items up or down the list depending on the total number of votes. ## 3 - How to Vote on Existing Feature Requests To vote on existing feature requests, find a specific feature either via the **Most requested** panel or the **All feature requests** panel. Each feature request contains four columns to describe the feature, display its status, show the number of votes, and cast votes. There is the feature’s **title** with a short **description**, while **status** communicates whether the request is in review, planning, development, or already live. The status may also communicate that we have decided to pause or not pursue a specific request for now. Next to the status of the request, there is the number of votes for that request, and the action column for users to submit a vote. Click **Vote** to use one of your organization’s available votes, or cancel a vote by clicking the vote button again. **Note:** The total number of votes available relates to your organization, not to a single person’s personal account quota. When voting for an item, you exchange one of your organization’s available votes until the request reaches a closed outcome. For example, closed outcomes may include “released,” or “not in planning for now.” At this point, the voting rules may no longer apply to that specific entry. ## 4 - How to Submit New Feature Requests In the main top menu, click **Submit a feature** to open the dialogue box to submit new feature requests. The dialogue box requires users to input a clear **Subject** (title) of the feature request, and the **Description** of the problem you are trying to solve. It is then possible to attach files before creating the feature request. After completing the required fields, click **Create feature request** to submit your ticket to the board. Submissions then become a support ticket with a tag labeling it as a feature request. This allows the PhotoRobot team time to begin reviewing the details of the request before following up with you directly. Then, we often **merge needs into a board item** that becomes visible for others in the PhotoRobot customer ecosystem. The ticket also remains in the thread to easily notify users of when their submission becomes visible on the board, and when they can vote on the item. **Note:** If you start from an existing feature request, your ticket will automatically link to that specific request to connect the two in context. ## 5 - How to Follow Feature Requests Tickets To follow the progress of a feature request ticket, there will be a card for the request on the support ticket sidebar. The card displays the request’s public title, its summary, and its status along with a way to open the board entry in a new context. This helps to ensure clear orientation, without needing to hunt for the correct entry. ## 6 - How PhotoRobot Implements New Feature Requests Each request has a direct influence on what we prioritize and plan next. However, note that items on the board do not represent a commitment. We also intentionally handle feature tickets differently from time-sensitive support tickets. This means that feature tickets may stay open longer while we evaluate and schedule work. Moreover, be aware that the Feature Requests Board is **not a replacement for urgent support**. If production is down or you are experiencing a blocker, always open a normal support ticket. PhotoRobot will then respond through our usual support workflows. In the end, the Feature Requests Board exists so that your feedback aggregates into something measurable, and so that we can better communicate back. Use your vote to align with your organization’s priorities, submit ideas when the board does not cover your case yet, and watch statuses as the roadmap evolves. The PhotoRobot team regularly updates the board as decisions land, while your participation helps shape the product for the entire ecosystem. ## Supporting Materials and Information To find more information on the Feature Requests Board, see [Helping to Shape PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/feature-requests-board). For additional support using PhotoRobot Controls App, refer to [PhotoRobot Getting Started](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started) for the complete overview of the software and its use. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing # SECTION: manuals > first-use-basic-testing # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-03 --- # First Use & Basic Testing of PhotoRobot Systems The following documentation provides technical instructions for the first use and the basic testing of a PhotoRobot device. ## First Use & Basic Testing of PhotoRobot The following documentation provides technical instructions for the first use and the basic testing of a PhotoRobot device. This includes detailed information on network configuration and networking requirements for using PhotoRobot. There are instructions for connecting Fomei and Broncolor lights, finding the IP address of a PhotoRobot, and for the basic testing of motion control via the Service GUI. This information is intended for use by new PhotoRobot customers in combination with the specific instructions and the user manuals provided for their specific device. **Important:** The initial installation of a PhotoRobot device must always be through a PhotoRobot authorized authority. Authorized authorities include an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Note:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to the manual provided specifically with your device before first use of PhotoRobot. ## 1. Before First Use of PhotoRobot From a technical perspective, it is important to understand before first use that PhotoRobot is a modular unit consisting of hardware and software components. This requires PhotoRobot itself to be connected over the same network as the computer operating it. The network must have a connection to the internet in order to access PhotoRobot services, which run in the cloud. Then, the following network prerequisites exist. ### 1.1. Network Configuration To configure the network to properly communicate with PhotoRobot, the network must meet the following prerequisites. - The Control Unit must connect onto the local network. - A computer is necessary to run Service GUI or the operator’s software called _Controls. - The computer must connect over the same network as the Control Unit. - There must be a functional internet connection on the network. ### 1.2. Fomei Flash Lights Connection Scheme The following displays the connection scheme for Fomei flash lights. **Note:** The router type can vary if the rack case is delivered with the PhotoRobot solution. ### 1.3. Broncolor Flash Light Connection Scheme Use the following map on the connection scheme for Broncolor flashlights, keeping in mind that the router type can vary. **Note:** Refer to [PhotoRobot - Broncolor Lights Management](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-broncolor-lights-management) for details on related hardware and software components necessary for use with PhotoRobot. ### 1.4. Electricity Distribution & Network Requirements Check the electricity distribution system parameters, e.g. the voltage and frequency. To do this, use the RJ45 connector on the back of the Control Unit. **Note:** If the setup of the Control Unit is not in compliance, set it up first by locating the manual voltage selector on the back of the Control Unit. Then, connect the Control Unit to the network via ethernet cable using the RJ45 connector. The network must then meet the following basic prerequisites: - DHCP server in the network is expected. - TCP ports 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - UDP broadcasts on port 6666 must be allowed. - Internet connection is necessary. - ***.photorobot.com** access must be allowed. - **as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net** access must be allowed. - Refer to [PhotoRobot Detailed Network Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) for more information. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. After connecting the Control Unit, press the mains switch on the front panel of the Control Unit. When it changes status from a blinking light to a steady light, it is ready for operation. ### 1.5. Find PhotoRobot’s IP Address on LAN After proper configuration of the network, it is necessary to search for and identify PhotoRobot’s IP address on LAN. To do this, the **PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP** for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network. Ensure you are using the most up-to-date version of CAPP to access this feature. Then, to identify a robot on the network directly within CAPP, open the local version of CAPP, go to Settings, and click **Robots / Control units**. The Robots / Control units settings menu displays columns with Name, Network, Unit, Version, Discovered, and Identify for each robot. If the dot to the left of the robot name is green, it is online. Clicking the robot field will then open the robot’s website interface. This will also make the LED light on the robot’s Control Unit blink green for its easier identification. If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** The Android version of PhotoRobot Locator has been discontinued. Alternatively, there is the FRFind command line utility for MacOS or Windows to search the network and identify PhotoRobot Control Units. Find links to download FRfind also within the PhotoRobot Account Downloads page. ## 2. Basic Testing in Service GUI After locating the PhotoRobot device’s IP address, input the IP address into any web browser in URL format. This will launch the Service GUI, which displays a basic user interface for testing the motion control of PhotoRobot. The user interface consists of two main elements: **System status**, and **Move Module status**. - **System status** information displays at the top of the user interface. It contains status information for the PhotoRobot system. This includes functional status, connectivity status, and details on the workstation, activity, and operations. - **Move Module status** displays at the bottom half of the user interface. It provides motion controls for basic testing, and also displays the hardware status, including calibration, movement, steps executed, moves, and spins. In order to test the motion control of the PhotoRobot device, use the remote controls in the Service GUI **Move module status**: - Power on the engines **(1)**, and try to operate any movable part of the robot **(2)**. If the robot moves based on your instructions, the PhotoRobot device is ready for regular operation. ## 3. PhotoRobot _Controls Software The software PhotoRobot_Controls App provides remote control of PhotoRobot devices. PhotoRobot _Controls App integrates control over robots, cameras, lighting, and post production. This includes support for every stage of workflow management to provide the necessary functionality for effective automation in post-processing. Be aware that PhotoRobot _Controls App software is not included with the machine delivery. The software is available for download via your PhotoRobot Account, and it is purchased separately from the machine. Further, after starting the software application, mind that the interface might automatically start in “wizard mode”. Wizard mode is a simplified user interface which allows for only scanning barcodes to identify objects and begin the capture and post-processing sequences automatically. **Note:** Both the **Stable version** and a **Preview version** of CAPP are available for download via the installer wizard. The stable version contains the most recent version of CAPP, and receives frequent version releases. Meanwhile, the preview version of CAPP provides early access to the very latest features and fixes which transfer to the stable version within days of development. This allows users to test any issues that occur in the preview version before contacting support, as most reported issues on the stable version have already been resolved on the preview version. However, be aware that the preview version is not recommended for production use in which stability is a critical factor. The preview version is under active development, which may still include incomplete features or unresolved bugs. **Important:** The older versions of CAPP are not intended for customer or public distribution due to the risk of database corruption. Older versions of CAPP are accessible only to authorized PhotoRobot technicians for internal development, or for extremely special use cases. To find the latest stable version and preview version of CAPP, refer to [CAPP Latest Download Versions](https://cloud2.photorobot.com/api/download/links/latest). For support or troubleshooting of PhotoRobot _Controls App, refer to [PhotoRobot Getting Started](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-ceiling-system-kit # SECTION: manuals > fomei-ceiling-system-kit # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-07-14 --- # FOMEI Ceiling System Kit - PhotoRobot User Guide This user guide by PhotoRobot describes the main components and installation procedures of the FOMEI rail ceiling light fixture system. ## FOMEI Ceiling System Kit - PhotoRobot User Guide This user guide describes the main components and installation procedures of the FOMEI rail ceiling light fixture system. The information aims to support PhotoRobot customers in the installation of the ceiling system for mounting professional studio flashes and lights for PhotoRobot. It includes an overview of all main components, and installation steps for the FOMEI Ceiling System Kit 1 (3 x 3m), Kit 2 (3 x 5m), and Kit 3 (5 x 5m). **Note:** This assembly guide is a reproduction of official FOMEI documentation. PhotoRobot and FOMEI are long-time partners to ensure excellence in product lighting for PhotoRobot’s automated photography systems. For the official downloadable PDF version from the manufacturer, refer to the [FOMEI Lights & Photography Website](https://www.fomei.com/en). **Important:** Before operation, ensure that the product is intact and that there are no missing parts. If there is any defect, please contact FOMEI directly. For warranty and maintenance information of FOMEI products, refer to the documentation provided specifically for your device. ## PhotoRobot - FOMEI Ceiling System Setup The FOMEI ceiling light fixture system is a professional-quality system of tracks, trolleys, pantographs and other components to simplify work in a photo or film studio. The system consists of three kits of different sizes, which include the following parts and installation procedures. **Note:** It is also possible to complete the ceiling system with other components as required. ## Ceiling System: Kit 1 (3 x 3m) The FOMEI ceiling light fixture system Kit 1 is 3 x 3 meters, and requires the following components and installation procedures. - 4 x track 3m - 6 x track ceiling fixture - 4 x double trolley - 3 x pantograph - 1 x telescopic rod - 4 x single trolley - 12 x trolley with cable fixing - 55 x pantograph fixing - 8 x track end - 4 x reduction with screw - 4 x safety cable - 4 x cable 10m - FY7936 - double trolley - FY7935 - single trolley - FY7951 - fixing for cable to track - FY7931 - track 3m - FY7938 - track fixture to ceiling - FY7939 - cable fixture to pantograph - FY7942 - reduction - FY7943 - safety cable - FY7945 - AC input cord 10m - FY7952 - track end - FY7933 - **pantograph** - crossbeam from 395mm to 2030mm - maximum load 1-15kg - option to regulate skid blockage - safety fuse - FY7934 - **telescopic rod** - 3 sections - crossbeam from 875mm to 1920mm - spring for simplified handling - safety fuse - The main bearing tracks should be at least 180cm apart from one another. Doing so ensures the correct functionality of the moveable wheels. - Note that, considering the minimum rolling resistance, it is necessary for the main tracks to be balanced. - Ensure that the main tracks are affixed at a maximum of 50cm from the edge. The most appropriate, verified procedure of installing the tracks is as follows. 1. Install the double trolleys, rotated approximately 80 degrees, to one of the tracks affixed to the ceiling. 2. Install the double trolley to the moveable track. 3. Push the moveable track into the double trolley, which is installed in the affixed track. 4. Install the moveable track with trolley in the affixed track. 5. Now, the double trolleys are installed on the affixed tracks and the moveable track is installed in the double trolleys. 6. Proceed likewise for the remaining tracks. 1. Install the single trolleys /FY7935/ in the track. 2. Install the trolleys with cable fixings in track /FY7951/. 3. Affix the track ends /FY7952/ on both sides of the moveable tracks. 4. Affix pantograph /FY7933/ to the single trolley /FY7935/. 5. Install the cable fixing /FY7939/ to the ledges, which are on the pantograph. - Distribute the cable fixings evenly over the tracks. - Install the cable into the tracks and pantographs so that the pantograph can move with the cable along the entire track. ## Ceiling System: Kit 2 (3 x 5m) The FOMEI ceiling light fixture system Kit 2 (3 x 5 meters) requires the following components and installation procedures. - 3x track 3m - 2x track 5m - 8x track ceiling fixture - 6x double trolley - 3x pantograph - 2x telescopic rod - 5x single trolley - 70x pantograph fixing - 10x track end - 1 pair - 5x reduction with screw - 5x safety cable - 5x cable 10m - 15x cable trolley - FY7931 - track 3m - FY7942 - reduction - FY7952 - track end The most appropriate, verified procedure of installing tracks is as follows. 2. Install the double trolley onto the moveable track. ## Ceiling System: Kit 3 (5 x 5m) The FOMEI ceiling light fixture system Kit 3 (5 x 5 meters) requires the following components and installation procedures. - 5x track 5m - 6x double trolley - 3x pantograph - 2x telescopic rod - 5x single trolley - 5x safety cable - 5x cable 10m - 15x cable trolley - FY7931 - track 3m - FY7942 - reduction - FY7952 - track end ## Final Notes For official documentation from the manufacturer and warranty information for your specific FOMEI device, visit the official FOMEI website at [fomei.com](https://www.fomei.com/en). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-digital-pro-x # SECTION: manuals > fomei-digital-pro-x # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-03-10 --- # FOMEI Digital Pro X Studio Flash - PhotoRobot User Guide This user guide by PhotoRobot describes the main components and operation instructions for the FOMEI Digital Pro X studio flashes. ## FOMEI Digital Pro X Studio Flash - PhotoRobot User Guide This user guide describes the main components and operation instructions for the FOMEI Digital Pro X Studio Flash System. The information aims to support PhotoRobot customers in the installation and use of Digital Pro X series studio flashes with PhotoRobot. It covers the main components and studio integration of the Digital Pro X 300, 500, and 1200 series. **Note:** This assembly guide is a reproduction of official FOMEI documentation. PhotoRobot and FOMEI are official partners to ensure excellence in product lighting for PhotoRobot automated photography systems. For the official downloadable PDF version from the manufacturer, refer to the [FOMEI Lights & Photography Website](https://www.fomei.com/en). **Important:** Before operation, ensure that the product is intact and that there are no missing parts. If there is any defect, please contact FOMEI directly. For warranty and maintenance information of FOMEI products, refer to the documentation provided specifically for your device. ## PhotoRobot - FOMEI Digital Pro X Setup & Use The FOMEI Digital Pro X series 300, 500, and 1200 are high-tech, professional studio flashes compatible with PhotoRobot systems. Their unique, fast flash charging times ensure optimal performance in 360 and 3D photography. ## Digital Pro X Control and Display The following infographic details the main components of the Digital Pro X control and display. 1. Protecting Glass 2. Modeling Lamp 3. Flash Tube (Check “H“ Mark) 4. Modeling Lamp Socket 5. Umbrella Holder 6. Rocking Holder 7. Photocell 8. Main Inlet 9. LCD 10. Remote Receiver Holder (Interface) 11. Modeling Lamp Fuse 12. Sync Socket 13. Function Buttons 14. Power On/Off S/W 15. Power Intensity Up/Down (Digital Encoder) 16. Modeling Brightness Up/Down (Digital Encoder) ## Operation Instructions: Infographic 1 **Note:** A. The main power cable is to be connected to the Main inlet (Turn the Power S/W to ON) B. When ON, the first screen will display as follows. ### How to Set the Flash Power Intensity (1) **1. Increase / Decrease by 0.1 F-stop.** - Turn the digital encoder volume to the right to increase Power Intensity. - Turn the digital encoder volume to the left to decrease Power Intensity. **2. Set Maximum Power Output Mode.** - Press the Dial (Encoder) only once. **3. Set Minimum Power Output Mode.** - Press the Dial (Encoder) two times. **4. Launch Restore Mode.** - Press the Dial (Encoder) four times to restore the last Power Intensity value by the user. ### Functions of Modeling Light Feature (2) **1. Increase / Decrease by 0.1 F-stop (Brightness of Modeling Light).** - Turn the digital encoder volume to the right to increase Brightness of Modeling Light. - Turn the digital encoder volume to the left to decrease Brightness of Modeling Light. **2. Set Maximum Brightness of Modeling Light Mode.** **3. Set Minimum Modeling Light Mode.** **4. Turn OFF the Modeling Light.** - Press the Dial (Encoder) three times. **5. Launch Restore Mode.** - Press the Dial (Encoder) four times to restore the last Brightness of Modeling Light value by the user. ## Operation Instructions: Infographic 2 ### Setting the Remote Systems - Wireless Holder (1) **Note:** A. Operation of the Digital Pro X series flashes requires a wireless receiver to support control by remote controller and PC. B. Attach the wireless receiver to the rear cover. ### Setting up Studio and Channel (2, 3, 4) The Digital Pro X series has modes for both Studio and Channel. **Note:** Each mode for Studio consists of 10 strobes (Channels). Take for example a case in which the user wants to use two studio halls in the same area, and three Digital Pro X in each studio. In this case, it is possible to use Group mode to set up a group name (for example, “B”), and assign each group a unique Channel number. Refer to the three images and steps below. **1. How to Change the Strobe Group Name** - Find the button “XB” (Infographic 2.2.). - Press the “XB” button and hold for at least 3 seconds. - The mode view to change a group name will display on the LCD screen. - To change the Group Name, turn the dial (Infographic 2.3.) to the right or to the left to scroll names, and press the “XB” button shortly one more time to confirm group choice. **2. How to Change the Strobe Channel Number** - Use the “XB” button (Infographic 2.2.). - Press the “XB” button and hold for at least 3 seconds. - The mode view to change the group name will appear on the LCD display. - To change Channel Number, turn the dial (Infographic 2.4.) to the right or to the left to scroll channel numbers, and press the “XB” button shortly once more to confirm channel selection. ## Operation Instructions: Infographic 3 ### How to Set the ACS (Aperture Control System) Note that after an initial exposure value has been set in the Digital Pro X, the device allows for precise exposure adjustments without the need for an external exposure meter. This enables the user to increase or decrease exposure value at any time using the device controls and the LCD display. The LCD display shows the exact exposure value, while the displayed value remains accurate as long as the relative positions and distances between subject, camera, and Digital Pro X remain unchanged. **1. How to Check the ACS** - The LCD display indicates the current ACS status. - When ACS is in standby mode, this status is shown on the screen. **2. How to Reset the ACS** - Press the “XB” button (Infographic 3.2.) and hold for at least 3 seconds – the LCD will display the image below (left). - Press the “XB” button once more – the LCD window will display the image below (center). - By turning the dial (Infographic 3.3.) to the right or left, the user can reset the exposure value with exact data. However, to use this function, the user will have to first check the correct exposure value using the exposure meter. - After checking the exposure value with the exposure meter, the user inputs the exact exposure value into the Digital Pro X. Then, the user will no longer need to use the exposure meter as long as the relative positions and distances between subject, camera, and Digital Pro X remain unchanged. **3. How to Input Correct Exposure Value** - The user should input the correct exposure value into the Digital Pro X when its Power Intensity (F-stop) is F1.1. - Choose the exposure value by turning the dial (Infographic 3.3.) to the right or left. - Input the exposure value after pressing the “XB” button twice. - For example, refer to the images above. If the measured exposure value is 32.5 i-stop, enter this value into the Digital Pro X. Once the exposure value has been set, further exposure adjustments can be made directly on the device without using an external exposure meter for subsequent images. ## Operation Instructions: Infographic 4 ### Other Functions **1. Photo CELL ON / OFF** - Press the CELL button one time. When the “CELL” icon on the LCD display appears highlighted with a solid background (filled in black), the Photo Cell function is active. To deactivate the function, press the CELL button one more time. **2. Sound ON / OFF** - Press the SOUND (“SND”) button once to turn ON. When active, the “SND” icon will be highlighted. To deactivate it, press the SOUND button once more. **3. Proportional (PROP) Modeling Light** - Switch the Proportional (PROP) ON / OFF modeling light setting by pressing the button once to activate, and again to deactivate. When active, the PROP button will be highlighted with a dark background. **4. Continuous Modeling Light ON / OFF** - Use the CONTINUOUS (CON) button to switch continuous modeling light on / off. The button performance is the same as above. **4. TEST Button** - Use the TEST button to check whether the flash tube is discharged. ## How to Set Up the Remote Controller **Note:** A. The majority of the controls on the remote controller function the same way as the controls of the Digital Pro X. B. There are only a few controls that differ between the Digital Pro X and the remote controller. **1. “XB” Button** - The first function of the “XB” button is for the activity of each strobe (channel). - To adjust the functions for each strobe (channel), first select the strobe to be adjusted, and then press the “XB” button. This will allow for adjustment of the functions of the strobe (channel). - The second function of the “XB” button is ACS mode. Press and hold the XB button for 3 seconds to activate ACS mode. In ACS mode, the flash output can be adjusted in 0.1 f-stop increments. **2. “CELL” Button** - Switch Photocell ON / OFF **3. “SND” Button** - Switch Sound ON / OFF **4. “PROP” Button** - Press and briefly hold the “PROP” button to switch proportional modeling light with Power Intensity ON / FREE. - Press and hold “PROP” for at least 2 seconds to switch proportional modeling light Continuous ON / OFF. **5. “TEST” Button** - Press the “TEST” button to check whether the flash tube is discharged. **6. “STROBE OFF” Button** - Use the “STROBE OFF” button to change the status of a strobe’s power s/w ON / OFF. - Select a strobe and press “STROBE OFF” to turn ON / OFF. - For example, to turn a Digital Pro X flash ON / OFF, first select the GROUP (Studio) by name (i.e. “Group A”), then select the CHANNEL number, and finally use “STROBE OFF” to switch the group and channel ON / OFF. **7. “SCAN” Button** - Press the “SCAN” button to scan for the total number of strobes connected to the remote controller. **8. “POWER” Button** - Press “POWER” to switch the remote controller ON. - Note: The power to the remote will turn off automatically after 1-minute of no activity. ## How to Install the Digital Pro X Driver During driver installation for the Digital Pro X series flashes, note the following. A. Most of the basic functions of the Digital Pro X driver are the same as the functions of the Digital Pro X device. B. Only a few functions differ between the driver and the device. **1. Begin installation of the operating program.** - Double-click CP210x_VCP_Win2K_XP_S2K3.exe to start the installation. **2. Click “Next” to continue the installation procedure.** **3. Read and accept the terms of the license agreement, and click “Next” again.** **4. Select the destination folder to install the program, and click “Next”.** **5. Click “Install” to launch the installation wizard.** **6. Check the box “Launch the CP2l0x VCP Driver Installer” and click “Finish”.** **7. After successful download, check if “Silicon Labs CP210 x USB to UART Bridge (COM 3)” is installed on the Device Manager of your computer.** - Check via My Computer > Control Panel > Device Manager > Click “PORTS (COM & LPT)” **8. Run the program “Lights Extended” and click the Lights Extended icon.** - The “Lights Extended” icon is located in the top-left menu of the interface. Click the icon to open a pop-up window, and then set the COM port number to match the one pictured above. **9. Click the “Scan” icon to automatically scan for and detect the total number of strobes connected to each studio (group).** - After detection, all strobes connected via USB are ready for operation. A. Import B. Save C. Scan for Strobes D. Change Strobe Name in “Studio List" E. Change COM Port F. Set Strobes’ Output G. Set Up Modeling Light Output H. Select Memory Format I. Status Window J. Power ON / OFF Icon K. Photocell ON / OFF Icon L. Strobe Sound ON / OFF Icon M. Testing Icon N. Modeling Light Free ON O. Modeling Light PROP ON P. Modeling Light ON / OFF Q. Modeling Light Continuous ON R. Modeling Light Continuous OFF S. Select ALL Strobes. ## Information Labels Note that the information label with the cross-out bin means that within the European Union, the product: - Must be collected separately in accordance with applicable electronic waste regulations at its end-of-life. - This applies to the device and to all accessories marked with this symbol. - Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. ## Final Notes This user manual for the Digital Pro X Studio series flash is a reproduction of official resources from the manufacturer, FOMEI. For official documentation from the manufacturer and warranty information for your specific FOMEI device, visit [fomei.com](https://www.fomei.com/en). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-150b # SECTION: manuals > fomei-led-dmx-150b # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-03-10 --- # FOMEI LED DMX 150B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide The following user manual provides an overview and instructions for operation of the FOMEI LED DMX 150B studio light with PhotoRobot. ## FOMEI LED DMX 150B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide The following user manual provides an overview and instructions for operation of the FOMEI LED DMX 150B studio light with PhotoRobot. This information aims to support PhotoRobot customers in the initial setup and first use of their FOMEI LED DMX 150B series studio light. **Note:** This user manual is a reproduction of the official FOMEI LED DMX 150B documentation by the manufacturer. Refer to the [FOMEI Lights & Photography Website](https://www.fomei.com/en) for official documentation, and also read any documentation provided specifically for your device before first use. **Important:** Before operation, ensure that the product is intact and that there are no missing parts. Do not open or repair the unit yourself. If there is any defect, please contact FOMEI directly. For warranty and maintenance information of FOMEI products, refer to the documentation provided specifically for your device. ## About: LED DMX 150B Studio Light by FOMEI The LED DMX 150B series studio light is a new continuous with a COB LED chip. Thanks to the Bowens mount, it is possible to attach various accessories to the device. The light itself offers a maximum power of 150W, and a color temperature of 5600K. It offers nine different film effects, and light control via Bluetooth or DMX protocol. ## Product Overview Refer to the following infographics showing the main parts and controls of the LED DMX 150B light. The main components include: - Reflector - Mount Lock - LED Light Bulb - Handle - Tilt - U-bracket The rear of the device has the user controls, control interface, and power socket: - Power Switch - Display - Menu Button - Up & Down - DMX In & Out - Socket ## CCT Mode After turning on the light, the display will show the welcome screen with the CCT (Correlated Color Temperature) settings. Press the ENTER button one time to select the parameter, and then press the Up & Down buttons to adjust settings. ## Scene Mode Press the MENU button to change the scene mode settings. Then, press ENTER to select the parameter (effect / speed / intensity), and use the Up & Down buttons to adjust settings. ## DMX Settings To adjust the DMX settings, use the ENTER button to select the parameter (channel / fan), and the Up & Down buttons to make changes. Note: If the fan is turned OFF, the maximum intensity is limited to 50%. ## BT Reset To adjust the BT Reset settings, press the MENU button followed by ENTER, and select the question mark (“?”). Next, press the Down button to select the option “YES”. When the option “YES” disappears, the connection has been reset. ## FOMEI LED DMX 150B Specifications The specifications of the FOMEI LED DMX 150B studio light are shown in the following table. | Specifications | | --- | | LEDS | 1x COB LED chip | | Wattage | 150W | | CCT | 5600K | | Dimming | 0 - 100% | | Beam Angle | 30° | | CRI | 96 | | LUX | 5600K: 0.5m 109000 / 1m 18400 / 2m 4280 / 3m 1900 | | Voltage | AC 220 - 240V | | Dimensions | 420 x 185 x 140mm | | Weight | 2.1kg | ## Wireless Control App Wireless control of the FOMEI LED DMX 150B studio light is via the DESAL Light + app for either iOS or Android. Use the QR code below for to find downloads for iOS or Android, or search the Apple Store App store for “DESAL Light +” to download on iOS. ## Information Labels Note that the information label with the cross-out bin means that within the European Union, the product: - Must be collected separately in accordance with applicable electronic waste regulations at its end-of-life. - This applies to the device and to all accessories marked with this symbol. - Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. ## Final Notes Refer to the manufacturer’s website [fomei.com](https://fomei.com/en) for the official FOMEI LED DMX 150B User Manual and downloadable PDF version of this document. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-300b # SECTION: manuals > fomei-led-dmx-300b # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-09 --- # FOMEI LED DMX 300B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide This user manual for PhotoRobot customers provides instructions for the operation of the FOMEI LED DMX 300B studio light. ## FOMEI LED DMX 300B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide This user manual for PhotoRobot customers provides instructions for the operation of the FOMEI LED DMX 300B studio light. The information aims to support PhotoRobot customers in the use of the FOMEI LED DMX 300B with their PhotoRobot system. **Note:** This user manual is a reproduction of official documentation by the manufacturer for the FOMEI LED DMX 300B. Refer to the manufacturer’s website [fomei.com](https://fomei.com/en) for the official documentation on your specific product. Also, be sure to read any documentation provided specifically for your device before its first use. **Important:** Before operation, ensure that the product is intact and that there are no missing parts. Do not open or repair the unit yourself. If there is any defect, please contact FOMEI directly. For warranty and maintenance information of FOMEI products, refer to the documentation provided specifically for your device. ## Warnings Before Use Note the following warnings before use: 1. Ensure that the product is intact and that there are no missing parts. 2. In case of damage, contact a professional service representative of FOMEI. 3. When using the product, ensure the environment is dry and ventilated. 4. For optimal performance, regularly clean the product using a clean cloth. 5. Do not scratch or apply pressure to the product. ### Safety Warnings Ensure to follow the safety warnings: 1. Do not use your LED unit in an environment where moisture is likely to come in contact with the unit. 2. Do not disassemble the product. In case of damage, contact a FOMEI service representative, or contractual service of trained professionals. 3. If the product is disassembled, it will not be covered under warranty. 4. Do not use the product in extreme temperatures (+50° C) 5. The product is not suitable for children. 6. Do not plug / unplug the device when the power is still connected. 7. Do not burden light more than necessary. 8. Do not restrict air vents while in use. 9. Note that a fire hazard exists if flammable materials are placed in close proximity when the unit is in use. 10. Avoid placing cables where they can be hazardous. 11. Keep out of reach of children. ### Recycling and Information Labels This product contains electronic parts. Do not dispose of the product with general waste, and instead take it to an electronic recycling facility. Please, protect our planet. The information label with the cross-out bin means that within the European Union, the product: - Must be collected separately in accordance with applicable electronic waste regulations at its end-of-life. - This applies to the device and to all accessories marked with this symbol. - Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. ## PhotoRobot - FOMEI LED DMX 300B User Guide The contents of this user guide to the FOMEI LED DMX 300B consists of the following sections, in order. 1. About: FOMEI LED DMX 300B 2. Controls 3. Light Control 4. Technical Information ## 1. About: FOMEI LED DMX 300B Studio Light The FOMEI LED DMX 300B is a professional studio light with a maximum output of 300 W. With its high power output, the light is suitable for studio use in both video and photography. It is powered directly from the mains power supply and has a support of DMX protocol. This allows the use of the light even in large productions. The light can be controlled either via the integrated display and intuitive scroll wheel, or simply via the mobile app. The package of the LED DMX 300 B consists of 4 main parts. - Light - Reflector - Power cord - Transport case ## 2. FOMEI LED DMX 300B Controls 1. ON / OFF Switch 2. Display 3. Control Roller 4. MENU Button 5. ENTER Button 6. Change Language Button 7. BLACKOUT Button 8. Power Socket 9. Tilt Lock 10. DMX Input and Output 11. Handle ## 3. FOMEI LED DMX 300B Light Control The FOMEI LED DMX 300B provides light control via the display. The temperature is always in the top-left corner of the display, while the speed control remains in the top-right corner of the display. From the main menu, there are menu items for: CCT Mode (Intensity), Scene Mode, Channel and Fan (Cooling) Setting, and BT (Bluetooth) Reset & ID. ### Main Menu After powering on the FOMEI LED DMX 300B, the main menu appears on the display. Use the red scroll wheel to navigate the main menu options, and use the ENTER button to open a selected menu. ### Intensity Menu In the first menu, it is possible to adjust the light intensity on a scale from 0-100%. To do this, select the light icon, press the ENTER button, and use the scroll wheel to adjust the light intensity. For faster and more precise control, press the roller down to change the speed of adjustment. The roller speed information displays in the green box in the top bar of the display (F: by 10 points, S: by 1 point). To return to the main menu, press the MENU button. ### Scene Mode In the menu for Scene Mode, there are three parameters: scene type, scene speed, and scene light intensity. The light has nine scenes: Flash 1, Flash 2, TV, Candle, Paparazzi, Strobe, Low / High Beam, Double Flash, and Breathing. Use the scroll wheel to highlight a parameter, and press ENTER to edit the field. Afterwards, pressing ENTER again will return to the scene parameters for further editing. ### Channel & Fan (Cooling) Menu The Channel & Fan menu changes the DMX channel, and controls the cooling of the light. After turning off the active light cooling, it is recommended to check the light temperature, which is visible in the top-left corner of the display. Note: If there is any risk of overheating, the light will automatically turn off. ### BT (Bluetooth) Reset & ID The BT Reset & ID menu resets the Bluetooth signal and displays the light’s ID. Note that a BT signal reset is required before each new connection to the mobile app. Select YES, and the light will automatically reset. ### Control Via App After resetting the Bluetooth signal on the FOMEI LED DMX 300B, connect to the device on mobile over Bluetooth using the Desal Lite+ App downloaded on your phone. In the app, press the plus (“+”) symbol in the top-right corner, and press “Add device” to search for lights. When one is found, press the plus symbol again to add the light. It is now possible to use the app for control over the intensity of the light, the light scene, and for syncing the light to music. ### Desal Lite+ App Download The Desal Lite+ App for control of the FOMEI LED DMX 300B is available for download on iOS and Android. Search the Apple Store App store for “DESAL Light +” to download on iOS, or use the QR code below for quick access to downloads of iOS or Android versions of the app. ## 4. Technical Information The technical specifications of the FOMEI LED DMX 300B studio light are shown in the following table. | Specifications | | --- | | Power | 300W | | Voltage | AC 100–220V | | Lighting Intensity | 2160 lx (5m) / 5830 lx (3m) / 13200 lx (2m) / 55800 lx (1m) / 250000 lx (0.5m) | | Beam Angle | 33° | | Color Temperature | 5600K | | Light Mount | Bowens | | Weight | 2.9kg | | Dimensions | 412 × 310 × 163mm | ## FOMEI Company Information and Contact The company **FOMEI s.r.o.** is registered at the address: Machkova 587, Hradec Kralove 500 11, Czech Republic. E-mail to **sls@fomei.com** for general inquiries, or to **servis@fomei.com** for service requests. Telephone: +420 495 056 505 ## Final Notes This is a reproduction of the official FOMEI LED DMX 300B user manual, which is also available in a downloadable PDF version on [fomei.com](https://fomei.com/en). For service information, refer to the documentation provided specifically with your device, or to the FOMEI service department for immediate support. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-600b # SECTION: manuals > fomei-led-dmx-600b # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-09 --- # FOMEI LED DMX 600B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide The FOMEI LED DMX 600B - PhotoRobot User Guide aims to support PhotoRobot customers in the operation of their light with PhotoRobot. ## FOMEI LED DMX 600B Studio Light - PhotoRobot User Guide The FOMEI LED DMX 600B - PhotoRobot User Guide aims to support PhotoRobot customers in the operation of their light with PhotoRobot. This information includes instructions for operation of the FOMEI LED DMX 600B studio light, and steps for the initial setup of their device. **Note:** This user manual is a reproduction of official documentation by the manufacturer for the FOMEI LED DMX 600B. Refer to the manufacturer’s website [fomei.com](https://fomei.com/en) for the official documentation on your specific product. Additionally, be sure to read any documentation provided specifically with your device before its first use. **Important:** Ensure that the product is intact and that there are no missing parts before use. Do not open or repair the unit yourself. If there is any defect, please contact FOMEI directly. For warranty and maintenance information of FOMEI products, refer to the documentation provided specifically for your device. ## Warnings Before Use Note the following warnings before use: 1. Ensure that the product is intact and that there are no missing parts. 2. In case of damage, contact a professional service representative of FOMEI. 3. When using the product, ensure the environment is dry and ventilated. 4. For optimal performance, regularly clean the product using a clean cloth. 5. Do not scratch or apply pressure to the product. ### Safety Warnings Ensure to follow the safety warnings: 1. Do not use your LED unit in an environment where moisture is likely to come in contact with the unit. 2. Do not disassemble the product. In case of damage, contact a FOMEI service representative, or contractual service of trained professionals. 3. If the product is disassembled, it will not be covered under warranty. 4. Do not use the product in extreme temperatures (+50° C) 5. The product is not suitable for children. 6. Do not plug / unplug the device when the power is still connected. 7. Do not burden light more than necessary. 8. Do not restrict air vents while in use. 9. Note that a fire hazard exists if flammable materials are placed in close proximity when the unit is in use. 10. Avoid placing cables where they can be hazardous. 11. Keep out of reach of children. ### Recycling and Information Labels This product contains electronic parts. Do not dispose of the product with general waste, and instead take it to an electronic recycling facility. Please, protect our planet. The information label with the cross-out bin means that within the European Union, the product: - Must be collected separately in accordance with applicable electronic waste regulations at its end-of-life. - This applies to the device and to all accessories marked with this symbol. - Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. ## PhotoRobot - FOMEI LED DMX 600B User Guide The contents of this user guide to the FOMEI LED DMX 600B consists of the following sections, in order. 1. About: FOMEI LED DMX 600B 2. Controls 3. Light Control 4. Technical Information ## 1. About: FOMEI LED DMX 600B Studio Light The FOMEI LED DMX 600B is a professional studio light with a maximum output of 600W / 5600K, suitable for professional studio use for video and photography. The power of the device runs directly from the grid, and there is input and output for both wired and wireless DMX protocol. This allows the light to be suitable even in large productions. The light has controls either via the integrated display with intuitive scroll wheel, or via the mobile app. The package of the LED DMX 600B contains the following main components. - Light - Control Unit - Reflector - Power cord - Transport case ## 2. Controls 1. ON / OFF Button 2. Display 3. Control Roller 4. MENU Button 5. ENTER Button 6. Scroll Speed 7. BLACKOUT Button 8. DC Output 9. AC Input 10. DMX Output 11. DC Input 12. DMX Input ## 3. Light Control The FOMEI LED DMX 600B provides light control via the display. After turning on the light, the first menu appears. At the same time, the top bar of the display will show the current Channel (left), Cooling Status (middle), and Control Speed (right). ### Main Menu When the light is switched ON, the main menu enables the adjustment of the light intensity. Use the scroll roller to adjust the light intensity from 0-100%. To allow for faster or more precise control, use the Scroll Speed button to adjust scroll speed. The roller scroll speed is indicated in the top bar of the display (F: by 10 points, S: by 1 point). ### Lighting Effects From the main menu, press the MENU button to change to the menu for the lighting effects. To adjust the lighting effects, rotate the knob to select a specific lighting effect, and use the ENTER button to select the effect and change its speed. Press ENTER again to adjust the intensity of the desired effect. ### BT Connection Reset Access the Bluetooth settings by pressing the MENU button to change to the menu with “Bluetooth ID” at the top. Next, press ENTER on the question mark (“?”), and rotate the knob to select “YES”. Afterwards, the display field changes to “Start?” to signal that the Bluetooth connection has been reset. ### Channel Menu Use the MENU button to change to the menu to change the DMX channel, and rotate the control roller to change the DMX channel from 1 - 512. ### Cooling Menu The cooling menu allows for control over the cooling of the light by rotating the control roller to ON or OFF. Note: After switching off active cooling, it is recommended to check the temperature of the light. To check the light temperature, inspect the display located on the body of the light itself. ### Wireless DMX Menu The menu for the wireless DMX mode contains 7 groups (Red, Green, Yellow, Blue, Purple, Cyan, White). Each group then contains 512 channels. Set the DMX transmitter to the same parameters as the light. Then, after approximately 2 minutes, the connection will be complete. ### BLACKOUT Function Use the BLACKOUT button to switch OFF all active light functions. Press BLACKOUT one more time to restore functions. ### Control Via App After resetting the Bluetooth signal on the FOMEI LED DMX 600B, connect to the device on mobile over Bluetooth using the Desal Lite+ App downloaded on your phone. In the app, press the plus (“+”) symbol in the top-right corner, and press “Add device” to search for lights. When one is found, press the plus symbol again to add the light. It is now possible to use the app for control over the intensity of the light, the light scene, and for syncing the light to music. ### Desal Lite+ App Download The Desal Lite+ App for control of the FOMEI LED DMX 600B is available for download on iOS and Android. Find the APK download for Android on **fomei.com** or use the QR code below for quick download on Android or iOS. ## 4. Technical Information The technical specifications of the FOMEI LED DMX 600B studio light are shown in the following Technical Information table and DMX chart. | Specifications | | --- | | Power | 600W | | Power Supply | AC 220–240V, 50 / 60Hz | | Lighting Intensity | 5840 lx (5m) / 15500 lx (3m) / 34900 lx (2m) 150000 lx (1m) | | Beam Angle | 29° | | Color Temperature | 5600K | | Mount | Bowens | | Light Weight | 5.5kg | | Control Unit Weight | 3.7kg | | Light Size | 431 x 280 x 176mm | | Control Unit Size | 281 x 170 x 195mm | | DMX Chart | | --- | | Channel | DMX Value | DMX % | Function | | 1 | 0-255 | 0-100% | DIM | 5600K | | 2 | NC | | | | | 3 | NC | | | | | 4 | 0-255 | 0-100% | FX_DATA | 1-9 | | 5 | 0-255 | 0-100% | FX_SPEED | 0-10 | | 6 | 0-255 | 0-100% | FX_DIM | 0-100% | ## FOMEI Company Information and Contact The company **FOMEI s.r.o.** is registered at the address: Machkova 587, Hradec Kralove 500 11, Czech Republic. E-mail to **sls@fomei.com** for general inquiries, or to **servis@fomei.com** for service requests. Telephone: +420 495 056 505 ## Final Notes This is a reproduction of the official FOMEI LED DMX 600B user manual, which is also available in a downloadable PDF version on [fomei.com](https://fomei.com/en). For service information, refer to the documentation provided specifically with your device, or to the FOMEI service department for immediate support. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll # SECTION: manuals > fomei-led-roll # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-09 --- # FOMEI LED ROLL - PhotoRobot User and Controls Guide This user manual provides an overview and instructions for the operation of the LED light FOMEI ROLL with PhotoRobot systems. ## FOMEI LED ROLL - PhotoRobot User and Controls Guide The following user manual provides an overview and instructions for the operation of the LED light FOMEI ROLL with PhotoRobot systems. This information aims to support PhotoRobot customers in their initial understanding and first use of FOMEI LED ROLL products. Find documentation on the **LED ROLL 62 DMX**, **LED ROLL 100 DMX**, **LED ROLL 250 DMX**, and **LED ROLL RGB 100 DMX**. **Note:** This user manual is a reproduction of official documentation by the manufacturer for FOMEI products. Refer to the manufacturer’s website [fomei.com](https://www.fomei.com/en) for the official documentation on your specific device. Additionally, be sure to read any instruction manual provided specifically with your device before its first use. **Important:** Ensure that the product is intact and that there are no missing parts before use. Do not open or repair the unit yourself. If there is any defect, please contact FOMEI directly. For warranty and maintenance information of FOMEI products, refer to the documentation provided specifically for your device. ## Before First Use - Warnings & Safety Information **Before first use, note the following general warnings from the manufacturer:** 1. Ensure that the product is intact and that there are no missing parts. 2. In case of damage, contact a professional service representative of FOMEI. 3. When using the product, ensure the environment is dry and ventilated. 4. For optimal performance, regularly clean the product using a clean cloth. 5. Do not scratch or apply pressure to the product. **Additionally, ensure to adhere to the manufacturer’s safety warnings:** 1. Do not use your LED unit in an environment where moisture is likely to come in contact with the unit. 2. Do not disassemble the product. In case of damage, contact a FOMEI service representative, or contractual service of trained professionals. 3. If the product is disassembled, it will not be covered under warranty. 4. Do not use the product in extreme temperatures (+50° C) 5. The product is not suitable for children. 6. Do not plug / unplug the device when the power is still connected. 7. Do not burden light more than necessary. 8. Do not restrict air vents while in use. 9. Note that a fire hazard exists if flammable materials are placed in close proximity when the unit is in use. 10. Avoid placing cables where they can be hazardous. 11. Keep out of reach of children. **Regarding recycling and information labels, be aware this product contains electronic parts and labels for its appropriate recycling.** Do not dispose of the product with general waste, and instead take it to an electronic recycling facility. Please, protect our planet. The information label with the **crossed-out bin** means that within the European Union, the product: - Must be collected separately in accordance with applicable electronic waste regulations at its end-of-life. - This applies to the device and to all accessories marked with this symbol. - Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. ## PhotoRobot - FOMEI LED ROLL User Guide The contents of this user guide to using PhotoRobot with FOMEI LED ROLL products cover the following products by FOMEI. - **LED ROLL 62 DMX** (FY3606) - **LED ROLL 100 DMX** (FY3607) - **LED ROLL 250 DMX** (FY3608) - **LED ROLL RGB 100 DMX** (FY3609) ## 1. About FOMEI LED ROLL Products FOMEI LED ROLL products are flexible continuous lights which function as an excellent alternative to classic board lights thanks to their versatility. The panel is able to bend and adapt to the scene, or function as a classic board light on a stand with X-frame. At the same time, Velcro on the back of the panel and additional Velcro strips are usable for positioning, joining more panels together, or attaching to various surfaces. It is possible to power the light on from the AC power supply or battery. Meanwhile, the lightweight and separate control unit allows for easy use outdoors, mounted on tall light stands, or in less accessible spaces in general. Finally, the LED ROLL winds around a rigid cardboard tube. We recommend using this tube for storage and transport to maintain durability and protection of the panel. ## 2. On-Stand Usage For on-stand usage, the FOMEI LED ROLL has holes in each corner on the back side of the device for inserting the X-frame. The X-frame must be stretched crosswise, with each end inserting into the corners on the back side of the LED ROLL panel. In the package, there is also a positioning joint, which attaches to the cross holder (to its center). It is then possible to attach the other end to the spigot (the reduction at the top of a studio stand) of a common studio stand. This allows for unrolling of the light into a flat-shape LED panel to position as necessary. ## 3. Off-Stand Usage To use the ROMEI LED ROLL without a stand, the flexible panels outside of the stand are both flexible and light weight. This allows for positioning the panel on the stage and making a wide range of shapes. It is possible for an assistant to hold the LED ROLL, or to fasten it in place with the Velcro along the entire edge of the back side of the panel. In this way, it is possible to attach several panels to each other to increase the area of the light source. ## 4. Softbox Usage The softbox for the FOMEI LED ROLL consists of a folding frame, a diffuser, and a honeycomb filter. Using the Velcro strips, it is possible to unfold the frame and attach its outer edge to the front of the LED light. The Velcro around the outer edges must fold over the back of the light, and attach to the edge. Also, the frame stretches to stretch the diffusion fabric into it, which then attaches to the inner edges by Velcro. This allows the softbox to create a more homogeneous spread of light. Then, tightening the honeycomb filter also serves to direct the light and limit its flow where necessary. ## 5. FOMEI LED ROLL Control Units ### LED ROLL 62 DMX / LED ROLL 100 DMX Control Unit 1. Display 2. Display Touch Control (Power Output, DMX Channel) 3. Rotary Dial for Power Output Setting / Power Saving Mode (Press) 4. Connecting Cable for Powering the LED ROLL Panel 5. Connector for Powering the Unit 6. V-Mount Battery Connection 7. Steel Cable for Hanging the Control Unit 8. DMX Connectors RJ45 – Input / Output 9. Label with Description of Individual Pins on DMX ### LED ROLL 250 DMX Control Unit 1. Display 2. Buttons to Select Settings – Power, Channel (DMX), Preset Modes 3. Rotary Selector to Change Settings of Each Mode 4. Cable to Connect the Control Unit with LED ROLL Light 5. 2 x V-Mount Plates for Batteries 6. ON / OFF Switch 7. Connector for Power Supply 8. DMX RJ45 – Input / Output 9. Metal Handles ### LED ROLL 100 RGB DMX Control Unit 1. Display 2. Controls (A. Hue; B. Saturation; C. Intensity; D. CCT; E. Power Output, F. Channel, G. Film Scenes) 3. Rotary Selector for Setting Individual Modes 4. Cable for Connecting the Control Unit to LED ROLL Light 5. Connector for Power Supply 6. ON / OFF Switch 7. DMX RJ45 – Input / Output 8. Steel Cable for Hanging of Control Unit 9. Antenna for Receiving Signal from Wireless Controller (Optional) ### RC-1 CONTROLLER FOR LED ROLL 100 DMX 1. Rotary Selector for Setting Individual Modes 2. Buttons to Switch Between Modes and ON / OFF Button 3. Display ### Battery Installation To insert batteries, be sure to insert the batteries completely into the holder. The battery clicks when it locks in place. To remove batteries, press the battery lock on the side of the holder, and then remove the battery. ### Light ON / OFF Always ensure the light is OFF before connecting the battery / power supply. After connecting the battery / AC adapter, then set the switch to ON. To turn the light off again, switch to the OFF position. ## 6. What’s Included in Each Device Package ### FY3606 FOMEI LED ROLL 62 DMX - LED ROLL 62 DMX - Control Unit - Velcro Connection / Handling Strips - Carrying Bag - AC Power Supply - Adjustable X-Frame Holder with Tripod Joint - Batteries Not Included ### FY3607 FOMEI LED ROLL 100 DMX - LED ROLL 100 DMX - Control Unit - Carrying Bag - AC Power Supply ### FY3608 FOMEI LED ROLL 250 DMX - LED ROLL 250 DMX - Control Unit - Shell Transport Bag - AC Power Supply ### FY3609 FOMEI LED ROLL 100 RGB DMX - LED ROLL 100 RGB DMX - Control Unit - Carrying Case of Hardened Plastic - AC Power Supply ## 7. Technical Information ### LED ROLL 62 DMX Specifications | LED ROLL 62 DMX Specifications | | --- | | Power | 62W | | LUX | 0.5m / 6940, 1m / 2470, 2m / 668 | | Color Temperature | 5600K | | Voltage | AC 15V / 5A, DC 14.4V | | Dimensions | 61 x 46 x 0.3cm | | Weight | 0.5kg | | CRI | 95 | | LED Diodes | 504 pcs | ### LED ROLL 100 DMX Specifications | LED ROLL 100 DMX Specifications | | --- | | Power | 100W | | LUX | 0.5m / 7980, 1m / 2960, 2m / 993 | | Color Temperature | 5600K | | Voltage | AC 15V / 7A; DC 14.4V | | Dimensions | 121 x 24 x 0.3cm | | Weight | 0.52kg | | CRI | 95 | | LED Diodes | 504 pcs | ### LED ROLL 250 DMX Specifications | LED ROLL 250 DMX Specifications | | --- | | Power | 250W | | LUX | 0.5m / 15800, 1m / 6040, 2m / 1910 | | Color Temperature | 5600K | | Voltage | AC 24V / 15A; DC 2 x 14.4V | | Dimensions | 121 x 46 x 0.3cm | | Weight | 1.02kg | | CRI | 95 | | LED Diodes | 1176 | ### LED ROLL RGB 100 DMX Specifications | LED ROLL RGB 100 DMX Specifications | | --- | | Power | 100W | | LUX (5600K) | 0.5m / 7013, 1m / 2200, 2m / 607 | | Color Temperature | 2700K – 9999 K | | Voltage | AC 15V / 7A; DC 14.4V | | Dimensions | 61 x 46 x 0.3cm | | Weight | 0.76kg | | CRI | 95 | | LED Diodes | 216 pcs yellow, 216 pcs white, 216 pcs RGB | ## FOMEI Company Information and Contact The company **FOMEI s.r.o.** is registered at the address: Machkova 587, Hradec Kralove 500 11, Czech Republic. E-mail to **sls@fomei.com** for general inquiries, or to **servis@fomei.com** for service requests. Telephone: +420 495 056 505 ## Final Notes This is a reproduction of the official FOMEI LED ROLL manufacturer’s documentation, which is also available in a downloadable PDF version on [fomei.com](https://fomei.com/en). For service information, refer to the documentation provided specifically with your device, or to the FOMEI service department for immediate support. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/frame-assembly-user-guide # SECTION: manuals > frame-assembly-user-guide # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-03 --- # PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide The PhotoRobot Frame Assembly & User Guide provides technical instructions on the robot's installation, connection, basic testing, and operation. ## PhotoRobot Frame Turntable Assembly & User Guide This technical documentation provides user information and instructions on the installation, connection, basic testing, and operation of the [PhotoRobot Frame](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame). It is intended to support PhotoRobot customers during self-installation of their device as well as in the future onboarding of production line operators. **Important:** The first installation of a PhotoRobot device must always be carried out by a PhotoRobot approved authority. Authorities authorized to install PhotoRobot include an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Note:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to the manual PhotoRobot provides specifically with your device. ## Frame Turntable Installation & First Use Congratulations on purchasing your PhotoRobot device! The PhotoRobot Frame represents decades of first-hand experience and innovation in automated product photography. Both ingenious and stylish, our team has designed PhotoRobot hardware and software with your business as a top priority. Each solution is tailorable to answer unique needs but also to provide benefits to the entire ecosystem of ready-made solutions supporting PhotoRobot clients. This means your business can rest assured there is always an efficient answer to any of your in-house production requirements. Welcome to PhotoRobot. The following information describes the functional operation of the technology, including instructions for self-assembly and first use by machine operators. If experiencing issues, refer to [PhotoRobot Troubleshooting](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting) for solutions to common problems relating to hardware installation, cameras, robots, lights, editing, and post production. ## 1. Product Description - The PhotoRobot Frame The PhotoRobot Frame is an all-in-one device combining a motorized turntable and robot camera arm. It features a design to automate the capture of 360 spin image and still images for 3D modeling. Both the camera and background mount to opposite ends of the turntable. The camera and background move in sync with the dual axis 360-degree rotation of the turntable. Meanwhile, the camera remains perfectly opposite the background. It is possible for the camera to photograph from below the glass plate of the turntable or above as well. This allows for automated photography of all sides, bottom, and top views of objects. The robot arm can move from negative 60 to positive 90 degrees. Key components of the PhotoRobot Frame include: - Optical glass plate with a 130 cm diameter - Dual axis 360-degree rotational dynamics - Load capacity of 20 kg - Integrated robot arm and diffusion background - Automatic calibration at the touch of a button - Easy setup in any studio, warehouse, or production hall ### 1.1. Robot Overview - Frame Turntable The Frame robot consists of three main components: the Control Unit, the machine body, and the swinging arm. - The **Control Unit** is an integral part of the device for power and control. - The **machine body** of the device supports the motorized turntable with the glass plate. Meanwhile, the base of the machine body houses the control unit, and has castor wheels for movement. - The **swinging arm** is installed around the turntable to mount the robot arm and diffusion background always opposite each other. At the same time, the swinging arm is able to move from negative 60 degrees below the glass plate to positive 90 degrees above it. ## 2. Robot Assembly ### 2.1. Unpackaging and Installation Preparation **2.1.1.** If the Frame robot has been delivered in a crate, first remove the top cover of the crate. Then, remove the backside cover. - **Note:** If the robot was delivered in another type of container, follow the specific unpackaging instructions related to your delivery. **2.1.2.** Proceed by removing all parts around the Frame and the glass plate out of the crate. **2.1.3.** Next, locate and unscrew two nuts from each of the four black bases. **2.1.4.** Use lifting slings with a load capacity of 400 kilograms, and thread the slings through the handles on the top part of the robot skeleton. Then, use any lifting device such as a forklift or hand crane to lift the robot. **2.1.5.** Next, unscrew the four black bases from the bottom side of the machine legs, and remove each. **2.1.6.** Find four wheels among the accessories delivered in the crate. Then, fasten the wheels into the position of the previously removed four black bases. **2.1.7.** Check that the wheels are securely attached. Movement of the robot on wheels will now be possible. **2.1.8.** Take into account the front side and back side of the robot. The back side has a power switch, and an electrical socket for a power cord. **2.1.9.** Locate the swinging arm in the crate. The swinging arm will be disassembled on delivery. a)**Assembled:** b) **Disassembled:** - **Note:** Some deliveries also include a disassembled white background. In that case, refer to the later section Configuration of the Background Subassembly (2.9.). ### 2.2. Connecting the Frame to the Network After installing the wheels onto the Frame device, ensure that the power switch on the robot is in the **Off** position. Next, plug the power cord into the electrical socket. Then, use the networking kit delivered with the robot, and connect at least the internet, the computer, and the PhotoRobot Frame. The connection scheme should be as in the following infographic. ### 2.3. Powering on the device **2.3.1.** After connecting the device to the internet and computer, turn on the power of the router. Then, wait approximately 2 minutes for the router to boot up and begin running. **2.3.2.** After the router is running, power on the computer, and then power on the Frame robot as the last step. ### 2.4. Find PhotoRobot’s IP Address on LAN **2.4.1.** Next, find PhotoRobot’s IP address on LAN. To locate the IP address of the Frame and other PhotoRobot devices, the **PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP**. This allows for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network without using external applications. Ensure you are using the most up-to-date version of CAPP to access this feature. Then, to identify a robot on the network directly within CAPP, open the local version of CAPP, go to Settings, and click **Robots / Control units**. The Robots / Control units menu displays columns with Name, Network, Unit, Version, Discovered, and Identify for each robot. If the dot to the left of the robot name is green, it is online. Clicking the robot field will then open the robot’s website interface. This will also make the LED light on the robot’s Control Unit blink green for its easier identification. If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** The Android version of PhotoRobot Locator has been discontinued. Alternatively, there is the FRFind command line utility for MacOS or Windows to search the network and identify PhotoRobot Control Units. Find links to download FRfind also via the PhotoRobot Account Downloads page. **2.4.2.** Search the network for PhotoRobot, and copy its IP address after a device is found. Then, paste PhotoRobot’s IP address into any web browser open on the local computer. This will open the Service GUI, which displays the basic user interface for testing PhotoRobot. ### 2.5. Power on the Motor and Move the Robot Arm **2.5.1.** In the Service GUI, use the **Motor ON** button to power on the motor. **2.5.2.** After powering on the motor, adjust the **Arm** to the position of zero degrees. ### 2.6. Mount Front Part of the Swinging Arm **2.6.1.** The next step involves mounting the front part of the swinging arm. The front part of the swinging arm is highlighted in orange in the following diagram. **2.6.2.** Slide both sides of the front part of the arm into 6 special silver nuts. Note: There are 2 rows of 3 nuts on each side of the swinging arm. **2.6.3.** Connect both sides of the arm so that they become level with the central axis. **2.6.4.** Tighten the six screws into the nuts connecting the front part of the arm with the central axis. **2.6.5.** Next, screw the connecting parts of the arm tightly onto both sides of the Frame robot. ### 2.7. Mount White Cover & Prepare Power Cables **2.7.1.** When the front part of the arm is securely installed, mount the white cover onto both sides of the robot. **2.7.2.** Next, find 4 power cables that are 5 meters in length each to power the lights. **2.7.3.** Thread one cable through the front-left side of the swinging arm. **2.7.4.** Locate the sheet metal cover, and place it over the cable. Then, fasten 3 screws into the top side, and 3 screws into the bottom side. **2.7.5.** Gently straighten out the cable before continuing onto threading the next cable through the machine frame. **2.7.6.** Take the next power cable that is also 5 meters in length, and thread it through the rear-left side of the swing arm. Follow the same steps as when installing the first cable through the front-left side of the device. **Note:** For newer Frame models, there are 2 holes for the background flash lights power cables. Find these on the left and right sides in the sheet metal. The cables for these two areas are only 3 meters long. **2.7.7.** Now, repeat the previous assembly instructions to assemble the right side of the swinging arm. The only difference is that the front-right side of the swing arm includes two cables with connectors. These support a shutter cable with a coupler, and a laser power cable. - **Note:** The counterparts of these connectors are fastened near to the central axle of the swinging arm. Connect each, and place them alongside the power cable. ### 2.8. Mount Swinging Arm Front Lights Holders **2.8.1.** After assembling the swinging arm, prepare to mount 2 front lights holders onto the front part of the swinging arm. **2.8.2.** First, insert all 4 special support pegs into the front part of the swinging arm. **2.8.3.** Next, mount both of the flash lights holders. ### 2.9. Configuration of the Background Subassembly **2.9.1.** If the background arrived disassembled on delivery, prepare the background subassembly. Otherwise, skip ahead to the steps in section 2.10 on Background Connection to the Swinging Arm. **2.9.2.** To prepare the background subassembly, thread the rubber reinforcement into the tunnels sewn into the background. **2.9.3.** Next, shorten the rubber reinforcements in the corners of the background as in the following image. **2.9.4.** Thread the curved “X”-shape profile parts into the sides of the background. Pay careful attention to the orientation of the background. Note that the background is not square; it is rectangular. **2.9.5.** Next, thread one of the two straight crossbars into the background to create the “U”-shape profile parts as in the bottom part of the following image. Insert the 5 pieces of threaded pegs in the bottom edge of the “X”-shape profile part to later fix to the black background. **2.9.6.** Mount the coupling in the 2 bottom corners, and then connect the profile parts. **2.9.7.** Insert 5 threaded connectors into both sides of the curved profile parts. **2.9.8.** Mount the second straight profile part and connect the corners, repeating the previous steps. **2.9.10.** Next, install the side brackets by positioning them as shown in the template (highlighted in blue), and tighten the brackets into place. Then, place the completely constructed piece onto the rear boom of the machine, and use the special pegs to fasten the piece into position. **2.9.11.** The special pegs (if part of your assembly) can be inserted into the rear boom without any disassembly of other parts. ### 2.10. Background Connection to Swinging Arm **2.10.1.** To connect the background to the swinging arm, start by fastening the background into position on the back part of the swinging arm. **2.10.2.** Next, mount the black curtain between the background and the bottom part of the robot. To do this, refer to the following detailed images of the device. a) **Device overview:** b) **Device bottom in detail:** c) **Device bottom curtain line:** d) **Device upper part:** e) **Device upper part curtain line:** ### 2.11. Glass Plate Attachment To attach the glass plate of the Frame’s motorized turntable, place the glass plate onto the robot with the notch at the edge of the plate facing downwards. Note that the notch must face down for the functional operation of the device. ### 2.12. Camera Connection via Shutter Cable For camera connection, there is a shutter cable to connect to the camera. Use the proper shutter cable connector, which is delivered in a plastic bag containing the Canon jack and CN3 connectors plus one coupler. ### 2.13. Softbox Assembly Finally, assemble the softboxes, fasten them onto flash lights, and mount all lights onto the frame of the device. ## 3. PhotoRobot Frame First-Time Device Use For the functional operation of PhotoRobot, the device must be connected to the same network as the computer operating it. **Important:** Refer to [PhotoRobot First Use & Basic Testing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing) for the complete documentation on connecting PhotoRobot to a network for the first time and for subsequent installations. In general, the following requirements exist. - The Control Unit must be connected to the local network. - A computer must run service GUI or the operator’s software called _Controls. - The computer must connect over the same network as the Control Unit. - There must be a functional internet connection on the network. Additionally, the electricity distribution system parameters must be compliant (e.g. the voltage and frequency). To check compliance of the electricity distribution system, use the RJ45 connector on the back of the Control Unit. The network configuration requirements are as follows. - A DHCP server in the network is mandatory. - TCP ports 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - UDP broadcasts on port 6666 must be allowed. - Internet connection is mandatory. - *.photorobot.com access must be allowed. - as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net access must be allowed. - Refer to [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) to confirm proper setup and for troubleshooting as necessary. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. ### 3.1. Basic Testing After Assembly To test the full operational functionality of the PhotoRobot Frame after assembly and connection to the network, input PhotoRobot’s IP address in URL format into any browser open on the local computer. This will open the Service GUI. **Note:** Use the IP address obtained from the steps in the section Finding PhotoRobot’s IP Address on LAN (2.4.) of this document. ### 3.2. Power the Device On **3.2.1.** In the Service GUI, turn on the motor using the green power button **Motor ON**. **3.2.2.** Next, adjust the angle of the Robot Arm to any desired angle using the Service GUI interface. - Turn on the engines (arrow 1), and try to operate any movable part of the robot (arrow 2). - If the robot moves based on your instructions, your PhotoRobot device is ready for regular operation. ## 4. PhotoRobot _Controls App Software Control of the Frame robotic workstation is via PhotoRobot _Controls App software. The _Controls App software is available for download in your [PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). It is not part of the machine delivery; it is purchased separately from the machine. **Note:** For instructions on the installation & use of PhotoRobot Controls App, reference the [PhotoRobot Getting Started User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 5. Information Labels ### 5.1. Symbols Overview ### 5.2. Machine and Component Labels For labels of specific machines and components, refer to the document [PhotoRobot Safety Information and Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information#toc-10)in the section Information Labels (3.1.). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started # SECTION: manuals > getting-started # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-10-08 --- # Getting Started - A PhotoRobot User Support Manual PhotoRobot Controls App automates product photography production processes for still images, 360s, 3D photos, 3D models, and product videos. ## Getting Started - PhotoRobot User Support PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”) is designed to automate content production processes (images, videos, 360s, and 3D models). This guide consists of 4 sections, each representing the process. 1. SETUP - Create a workspace: cameras, hardware, and projects 2. CAPTURE - Control PhotoRobot hardware and cameras, capture images and video 3. EDIT - Post-process visual content 4. PUBLISH - Generate output images in multiple formats, “manage profiles” ## Installing PhotoRobot Controls App To install PhotoRobot Controls App on your computer, [log in to your PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/) and go to [PhotoRobot Downloads](https://www.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** Both the **Stable version** and a **Preview version** of CAPP are available for download via the installer wizard. The stable version contains the most recent version of CAPP, and receives frequent version releases. Meanwhile, the preview version of CAPP provides early access to the very latest features and fixes which transfer to the stable version within days of development. This allows users to test any issues that occur in the preview version before contacting support, as most reported issues on the stable version have already been resolved on the preview version. However, be aware that the preview version is not recommended for production use in which stability is a critical factor. The preview version is under active development, which may still include incomplete features or unresolved bugs. **Important:** The older versions of CAPP are not intended for customer or public distribution due to the risk of database corruption. Older versions of CAPP are accessible only to authorized PhotoRobot technicians for internal development, or for extremely special use cases. To find the latest stable version and preview version of CAPP, refer to [CAPP Latest Download Versions](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). ### Self-Installation Support & Troubleshooting The installation process begins by downloading the installer file. Note the **requirements for installation of CAPP**: - The user must have administrator permission rights on the computer installing CAPP. - The computer must meet all [PhotoRobot system and hardware requirements](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements). - The computer must be running a supported operating system with the latest updates. **Important:** Also note that CAPP consists of not only robotic control functions but also drivers for cameras, lights, and other peripherals. As a result, often the latest Mac OS version is not immediately supported. However, if this occurs, it is only temporary and until all relevant vendors release the compatible libraries. While this might be inconvenient, it is far less inconvenient than compatibility issues when using CAPP. Downgrading is also even more complicated than avoiding a premature upgrade. After meeting the OS and system requirements, installation then proceeds via the installer wizard. Log into the PhotoRobot account, and then proceed with setup by following the steps below. ## Setup ### User Consent Confirmation When downloading CAPP, activation of a new user account requires user confirmation of the end-user license agreement (EULA) and other related documents. After account activation, it is then possible to review your submitted consent information via the Cloud version of CAPP in the account profile settings. To check your consent information, open the cloud version of CAPP, and click on the user account icon in the top-right corner of the interface. Next, select **My profile** from the menu options. The profile menu will display the profile photo, general user information (name, phone, company), password settings, and the consent information. Consent information includes: - Computer Hostname - Agreed on Date - PhotoRobot International Program License Agreement - Consent to Personal Data Processing - Information about Personal Data Processing ### Compatible Cameras **Important:** To ensure CAPP communicates with the camera properly, please close all other programs that connect to the camera. Also, be sure to use a compatible camera from the list of [PhotoRobot compatible camera models](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras). **Note**: As of the release PhotoRobot Controls App 2.5.4, any camera can now be supported via third-party camera integration. However, for automated photography, the latest mirrorless Canon camera models are the most reliable and efficient. Although it is possible to use PhotoRobot suggested handheld cameras over Wi-Fi or cable connection, doing so can create issues. - There may be frequent Wi-Fi disconnections (primarily due to timeout). These require time-consuming reconnections to the system. - If using a handheld camera via cable connection, there is the complication of cable lengths, and the risk to connections. For iPhone connection via the PhotoRobot Touch App, note that none of these issues occur. The iPhone will be capable of handheld photography in a setup using continuous lighting. However, if flash photography is necessary, compatible handheld cameras can serve as an alternative to the recommended mirrorless cameras. Just keep in mind the issues that may arise with Wi-Fi and cabled handheld models. ### Compatible Lights For CAPP to communicate with lighting, be sure to use [PhotoRobot compatible studio lights](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview). These include two types of lights: strobe lights from FOMEI and Broncolor, and any type of LED lights with DMX support. ### Remote Support Setup Immediately after installing PhotoRobot Controls, it is recommended that the user **download and install the Splashtop SOS (EU-region) app**. Splashtop SOS (EU) allows PhotoRobot technicians to access a customer’s computer and provide technical assistance after the user grants permission for a specific case. Downloading Splashtop SOS at the same time as PhotoRobot Controls will help to avoid any delays for remote technical support requests. Take for example when a user does not have sufficient rights to install the application. After installing Splashtop, our technicians are then able to instantly use Splashtop Business to access the computer with the technical support request. However, be aware that the user **must download the EU-region version** of the Splashtop SOS app. The US-region version app does not allow our technicians to access your computer. Thus, please **ensure you are using the following EU-region link to download Splashtop SOS**: - [https://sos.splashtop.com/en/sos-download?region=eu](https://sos.splashtop.com/en/sos-download?region=eu) **Note:** For more information on setting up remote support for PhotoRobot systems, refer to [PhotoRobot Remote Support Setup](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/remote-support-setup). ### Creating a Workspace After opening CAPP, typically the first thing a user does is create a **workspace**. A workspace is a list of hardware that is being used for a particular photoshoot. It can include various PhotoRobot modules, cameras, lights, and other accessories. For demo purposes, users can work with a predefined, Sample Workspace, which is configured to use virtual hardware. In this way, users can still experiment with various features of CAPP by selecting virtual robots and cameras. ### Connecting Hardware To start using actual (as opposed to virtual) hardware, first ensure the hardware is connected to the same computer network (or a sub-network) as the computer you are using to control your PhotoRobot. **Note:** As of PhotoRobot Controls version 2.5.4, **any camera** can now be supported through [third-party camera integration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras#toc-7). Meanwhile, compatible cameras include a range of Canon camera models, our [recommended Wi-Fi-enabled Canon cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras#toc-6), and also iPhone cameras if using the PhotoRobot Touch App. **Important:** For automated photography by robotic workstation, the PhotoRobot recommended mirrorless Canon Camera models are the most reliable. While there is support for handheld cameras over Wi-Fi or cable connection, their use can create issues. These include frequent Wi-Fi disconnections (primarily due to timeout), complications with cable lengths, and the risk to connections. To connect a camera, it must be connected to the same local computer network as the robot in one of three ways: - Direct connection **via USB** to the local area network; - Connection of a recommended handheld camera **via special Wi-Fi protocol** (accessible in Canon’s Tool application on the [Canon Developer Page](https://developers.canon-europe.com/s/)); - Integration of one or multiple iPhones **via the PhotoRobot Touch Application**. (For instructions on using an iPhone with PhotoRobot, see the [iPhone Touch App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual).) After connecting a piece of hardware (or camera) to a workspace, you can then check whether it is online (recognized by CAPP). To do this, inspect the dot to the left of the name of the given piece of equipment. If the device is recognized, there will be a **green dot**. A **gray dot** next to the device name signals that the hardware was not recognized or is not turned on. If there is a **red dot**, there is an error, such as the user not switching the camera into manual mode for example. To identify the cause of the error, hover the mouse over the red dot to display a tooltip with a description of the error occurring. For the complete step-by-step walkthrough of connecting hardware to set up a workspace, refer to [Setting Up a PhotoRobot Workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace). If experiencing issues, please refer to [PhotoRobot Troubleshooting](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting) for common problems and their solutions. ### Robot Arm Height Setup If using a Robot Arm in the workspace, note that there will likely be additional setup required. This is because the robotic arm is an independent machine, and one of the functions of controlling it via CAPP is that the elevation movement aligns the rotation axis to the midpoint of the photographed object’s height. The height of the robot arm’s rotational axis is determined by the workstation machine type, and at the same time by the adjustment of the leveling feet, which compensate for any unevenness of the floor. If everything is set up correctly, the machine is level, and the rotation center is at a specific height above the floor. However, the total height will also depend on the height of the turntable surface, which varies between different robots. This means that there might be a discrepancy in the height reference, as there is a height adaptor under the column of the robot arm so that it roughly aligns. To ensure perfect alignment, it then becomes necessary to enter the height difference between the arm and the turntable into CAPP. The height difference measures the exact distance between the robotic arm’s rotation axis and the height at which the turntable surface is positioned (including any additional board placed on top of it). This provides the exact dimensions from which the system calculates half of the object’s height, and the position where the arm should move. It also ensures the system is **set to automatically and correctly operate**. **Also note:** The system is set to reject values that fall outside the valid range for a given setup. ### Set Robot Arm Elevator to Zero Level In order to set the Robot Arm elevator to zero level, first open the **local version of CAPP**, and access **Workspace settings** in one of two ways: 1. Open the local version of CAPP, click **Settings** at the top of the interface, and select **Workspaces** from the left-hand menu options. In this menu, find the workspace in operation, and click the edit icon next to the workspace title to open the **Edit workspace settings**: 2. Alternatively, it is possible to access the Edit workspace menu by opening an **Item** in Capture mode in the local version of CAPP, and then clicking the edit icon next to the **Workspace** title on the right side of the interface: Either method will open the **Edit workspace settings**. Then, to configure the Robot Arm, find the device under the **Robots** menu, and click the 3 vertical dots next to the Robot Arm name. Next, select the menu option **Set corrections** to open the **Set elevator correction** function: In the Set elevator correction menu, adjust the number in the top field **Elevator deviation (mm)** to set the elevation of the camera to the appropriate zero level. For example, if the camera is off center by 10 mm above the table, set Elevator deviation to -10 mm to center the camera. If the camera is off center by 10 mm below the table, set Elevator deviation to +10 mm. This will correctly align the elevation of the mounted camera on the Robot Arm to the appropriate zero level in the software. **Note:** The lift can reach a maximum of 330 mm. Thus, if adjusting the zero level by +30 mm, the maximum lift can only reach 300 mm. This means the system will only be able to capture products that are smaller by this margin, 30 mm or less. ### Managing Files - Projects, Items, and Folders In CAPP, images are organized into projects, items, and folders. - A **project** is the highest-level data entity. Typically, a project will include items from a single photoshoot or perhaps a single shooting day/week. - Projects consists of one or more **items**. A single item will typically be a specific, photographed object. - An item includes one or more **folders**. In CAPP, you can have multiple folders in a single item in order to keep different kinds of images separate. A very common example is to have one folder for a 360° rotating presentation (called “spin”), while using another to store still images (“stills”). To start shooting, you must first add a new project (unless you already have one that you would like to use), as well as at least one item. Additionally, at any time, you can choose to personally pin a project using the three vertical dots next to the project name in the Projects menu. Click the three vertical dots and tap Pin project in order to quickly mark and access your active projects. **( ! )** - If experiencing issues, find additional support for connecting cameras, robots, lights, and editing in the [PhotoRobot Troubleshooting Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting). ### General Settings - Cloud Auto Backup, Processing, Touch App In the local desktop version of CAPP, there are 3 general settings to toggle on or off: - Upload images automatically to PhotoRobot Cloud - Process images in PhotoRobot Cloud - Enable Controls Touch Mobile Application Extension By default, the local app will be set to **Upload images automatically to PhotoRobot Cloud**. This feature automatically saves a backup of captured images to your cloud server for later export. To disable Upload images automatically to PhotoRobot Cloud, toggle the option off in the local version of CAPP’s General Settings. This will instead save captured items to your local app or to your own cloud account. Use the toggles also to enable or disable the **Process images in PhotoRobot Cloud** feature. When on, this feature automatically post-processes images according to presets in the PhotoRobot Cloud after capture. If using the PhotoRobot Touch Mobile Application for iPhone, toggle on **Enable Controls Touch Mobile Application Extension**. **Note:** For technical instructions on the installation and operation of PhotoRobot Touch, see the [PhotoRobot iPhone Touch App User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual). ### General Settings - Auto Create New Item Additionally, in the General Settings in the local desktop version of CAPP, there are the **Barcode Scanner** settings which enable configuration of advanced options for the barcode reader. Use the toggle to the left of **Automatically create a new item in the system when an unknown barcode is scanned** to enable or disable auto item creation. When active, the setting will function as an alternative to manual item creation. It enables identification of an item at the point of capture (typically via barcode or QR code). An operator simply scans an unknown code, and a new item is automatically created in the project. The item naming will be according to the scanned string and in the item’s identifier field. Then, the operator photographs the item. This way, there is no need to perform any inventory-related operations within the studio software. For example, it is enough to scan a new item and subsequently scan a preset (shelf) code for the photography (e.g. for white, dark, or colorful items). The system will then automatically and immediately deliver a complete set of photographs, post-process them fully, and distribute them with automatic naming to the target system. Further,as of CAPP version 2.13.beta58, there is now the option to configure the minimum string length for barcodes. Previously, the minimum barcode / QR code length was 6 characters (to avoid dual interpretations of the scanned string among other issues). Now, the **Minimum barcode length** setting is adjustable to allow, for example, four-character identifiers to work without the need for further adjustments. To adjust the minimum string length for barcodes / QR codes, configure the **Minimum barcode length** also in the local version of CAPP in **General Settings - Barcode Scanner.** Barcodes shorter than the length input will then be ignored by the system. **Note:** After an Item has been assigned a barcode in the system, the barcode will also be accessible directly in the Capture mode interface in the Item information area via a barcode button. ### Granting Customer External Access to Project Data To work with customers outside of the organization of a paid CAPP account, an administrator of the account is able to create **client accounts free of charge**. Client accounts enable an external customer to view project data, participate in quality assurance through review and comments, and to access project assets for download. This feature is intended for situations in which a photo studio is working with an external customer who requires access to specific jobs. In order to share a project with a customer outside of your organization, first ensure you log into the **cloud version of CAPP** using a **user profile with administrator privilege**. 1. Log into the cloud-based app using a paid CAPP account profile with administrator privilege, and click on the user profile menu icon in the top-right corner of the dashboard. Then, click **Organization** to access the administration panel. 2. Next, from the Organization administration panel, click **Users** from the account options at the top of the user interface. 3. Click **Clients** to create a new user option to access the add clients feature from the account interface. The **+ Add clients** button will appear at the top-right of the dashboard under the user profile icon. 4. Click **+ Add client** under the user profile icon. 5. Complete the fields for the client’s information (email, name, company, phone), and check the box **Allow client access**. Review the information for accuracy, and click **Save** to add the client to CAPP. 6. Open **Projects** in the cloud version of CAPP, find the project you want to share with the saved client, hover the mouse over the project bar, and click the share icon to the right of the project details. 7. Click the share icon on the right side of the project bar to open the **Share project with people** feature, select saved clients, and click done. The project is now shared with the client, allowing them to view the job and comment in CAPP for quality assurance and additional instructions if necessary. ## Capture Mode Interface After clicking on an item, you will be taken to a capture/edit interface. The controls available to you change based on whether the **capture** mode is active, or the **edit** mode. The capture mode is used to control the photography sequence, while the edit mode controls all post-processing performed within CAPP. The active mode will be highlighted at the top of the screen: ### Adding a Spins, Stills, or Video Folder Before any photoshoot, you must create at least one folder. The main types of folders are **spin** (used for 360° presentations), **stills** (for still images), and video (for videos). ### Creating a Spins Folder When adding a spin folder, CAPP will automatically add stops (also called “frames”) based on how many images per spin you select. The default number is 36, and this can be changed in the bottom left corner. With a higher number of stops, the rotation will be smoother, but it will also take up more storage space. ### Creating a Stills Folder If you select a stills folder, you must add your stops manually. This will include a **turn angle** (the rotational angle) and a **swing angle** (the vertical position of the camera along a circular trajectory). The swing angle is important if you are using our Robotic Arm or another module that can change the horizontal position of the camera. ### Import Images In some cases, you may want to import images into a new or existing folder in CAPP. Take for example importing handheld photos, detailed shots, or other miscellaneous images. To import images into CAPP, first open a new or existing item in the Capture mode interface in CAPP. Next, click the icon for the folder operations menu in the top-right corner of the folders interface. Then, in the folder operations menu options, find and click **Import images** from the list. Clicking Import images will open a pop-up window that enables image import by drag-and-drop, or by browsing local files. At the top of the window, it is also possible to configure Folder name and Folder type for the imported images. ### Control Compatible Lights When using lights compatible with CAPP, you are able to select lights in the bottom right corner of the edit mode window. ### Capture Mode Interface Overview The central part of the capture mode interface includes the preview window, which either displays the currently selected image (if you have already taken some) or the live view streamed from the camera. Live View is useful when you want to check composure and focus. It can be toggled in the camera control area in the central part of the control bar on the right-hand side of the screen. Additionally, a detachable Live View allows operators to pop PhotoRobot Live View into its own window. This way, studios running dual monitors can compose on a second screen while keeping PhotoRobot _Controls workflows active on the primary display. To detach the Live View, open the Capture mode Live View in _Controls, and detach the window onto your second monitor. You can then continue capturing without shrinking your workflow UI. ### Taking Test Shots Before taking final images, it is a good idea to take one or more test shots. The easiest way to do this is by pressing the **T** key on your computer keyboard. This will help you check whether you should change the settings of your lights, camera, etc. Test images are stored in the “test shot” folder, which you can access in the bottom left part of the screen. ### Starting a Photography Sequence When satisfied with the settings, which were verified by taking a test shot, it is time to run the photography sequence. This can be triggered by pressing the space bar on your keyboard or by clicking the “start” button shown in the picture below. If you have a barcode scanner, you can also trigger the sequence by scanning a special “start” bar code. [Download the PhotoRobot "start" barcode online](https://storage.googleapis.com/photorobot-cloud2-public/sources/210316%20-%20PhotoRobot%20BarCode%20Stickers%20-%20v4.pdf), and print it out to use this feature. You will know that the sequence has finished successfully if all thumbnails on the left-hand side have been filled with images. It is a good practice to pay attention to any potential misfires of the strobe lights. If any of the thumbnails are darker compared to the others, lower the rotation speed or, if necessary, check the condition of your lights. You can then mark these images and reshoot them without having to run the entire sequence again. Once the capture sequence is complete, you can switch to edit mode, which is where you will perform post-processing. ### PhotoRobot Macros Macros in CAPP enable users to define commands for the capture process of an item and its folders (spin, stills, etc). Commands can apply to individual or multiple folders, run sequences, image edits, workspaces, presets, copy image settings, and move image settings. Users can also further customize macros by name, barcode, tag, or notes. **Note:** For detailed instructions on the configuration and use of PhotoRobot Macros, refer to the [PhotoRobot Macros User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/macros-config-functions). Find out how macros enable photography automation *magic* across multiple folders and components, with the automatic processing of complex tasks. ### PhotoRobot Wizards Mode Wizards mode in CAPP functions as an alternative to manual hardware, camera, and sequence configuration. In use, Wizards mode enables an administrator or photographer to create different Wizards to simplify capture mode for production-line operators. An operator is then able to start CAPP in Wizards mode, which functions as an extremely simple interface with wizard-guided steps. There are also limited controls for ease of use and onboarding. After creating a wizard, it stores Presets and Workspace configurations, as well as predefined steps operators must follow. Operators cannot adjust any settings, and they must complete the instructions in each step before they can move onto the next process. **Note:** Wizard steps are defined in a JavaScript-like language format, and scripted by PhotoRobot consultants for custom functionality. Users can also script basic functions for initial experiments or simple setups. For documentation on the technical configuration and operator use of wizards, refer to the [PhotoRobot Wizard Mode User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode). ## Edit Mode Interface On the right side of the screen, you can add any number of editing operations: Some of the most common editing operations are listed at the top: crop, center, and background. ### Automatic Crop **Crop** – When cropping images, there are three main controls: the **Auto crop** toggle, selection of **Aspect ratio**, and a slider to adjust **Padding** (how much space there is around the photographed object). Additionally, other useful options include **Keep same size between frames**, and **Resize output**. Clicking **Resize output** will enable crop with output resizing. Output resizing allows for the saving of channel-ready frames without leaving the _Controls interface. Click Resize output and enter the Output max size to adjust the output resolution. ### Auto Center **Center** – even though most PhotoRobot machines are equipped with lasers that help with positioning objects on the surface, most images will need additional software centering. This is especially important for 360° spins. When getting started, it is recommended to keep the “auto center” function on, as seen in the picture below: ### Background Removal The **Background** operation will adjust the background of an image or image set, completely removing the background if desired. Different results can be achieved by the three different background removal methods in CAPP. There is background removal by level, background removal by flood, and by freemasking. - **Background removal by level** uses software analysis of RGB color levels and brightness values to identify the background and foreground. This is advantageous when photographing bright or white items, and when using a white backdrop. Adjust levels in the software to make the background brightness higher in intensity until it becomes pure white. It is then possible to make the background transparent, or to swap in different color backgrounds. - **Background removal by flood** functions by similar principles to by-level background removal, and is most often useful when photographing darker items. Removing the background by the flood operation makes the background brightness more intense until it becomes pure white around the item. However, instead of adjusting levels, the tool uses a selected point to identify the background and then “floods” that area. Users simply click a point outside of the photographed object. The software then detects the edges of the object, and applies flooding to fill in the available space around it. - **Freemasking background removal** requires more configuration than using levels or flood, but it can be one of the most precise and quickest methods. This method uses a cut-out mask image and a main image of the product, compositing the two images to remove the background. Sometimes, this is the only efficient way to remove the background around more “difficult” objects. Take for example reflective items, or objects that contain areas with empty space. Freemasking identifies the object versus all empty space, while removing the background around the item and inside it if necessary. The method does however require additional configuration of studio lights in order to create the main and mask images for background removal. **Note:** Remember that whether or not CAPP will be able to remove the background depends mainly on how the scene is lit. If you are unable to find settings that work to satisfaction, reshoot the images with different light settings. When you are satisfied with your edit settings, apply the parameters by clicking the “apply” button, located where previously the “start” button appeared. ## Publishing Images Once the progress bar reaches its end, your edits have been successfully applied to your images. If you are using CAPP without PhotoRobot Cloud services, your resulting images are stored in a folder structure on your local drive. If using PhotoRobot Cloud hosting, files can also be found in the PhotoRobot cloud storage. To access these, click **Open in the cloud** in the **Photos** section at the top-left part of the screen. ### Exporting Images To export an item from CAPP, users can export to a local disk, or export to the PhotoRobot Cloud. Item export makes it possible to define items with custom naming conventions, specify image format, resolution, and various filename template variables. Access [Item export settings](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export) by opening **Items** (1), and clicking **Export** (2) in the menu above the item list: The following window will open, allowing you to change export settings in steps: In the first step, set the export **Destination** by choosing the local folder where exported files will be saved. Check that the Output folder is correct before continuing to the second step. The second step for export is **Item status**, which allows the optional marking of exported items as Exported when the job completes. In this step, users can tick one or both boxes to turn ON / OFF option to: Change item status to Exported, and Do not change status of items that do not contain photos. Next, the third step is **Image metadata** which enables the embedding of author, copyright, title, description, and keywords into exported image files. Tick the box to the left of Embed metadata in exported images to activate or deactivate this function. Activating it will allow for configuration of defaults in Settings, and provide a preview of the image metadata. The fourth step when exporting items is **Gallery,** which functions to add HTML preview, SpinViewer data files, and thumbnail images alongside exported images. Tick the boxes next to each option to enable or disable them. It is also possible to enable Add extracted OCR data into data.json config. The last step when exporting items is **Output formats**, which defines still, spin, preview, and retouch outputs for the export. Click the option **(+) Add output format** to choose the format to export: Spin (360 / 3D images), Still images, and Images for export. Then, using the **Folder filter** field allows you to leave folders empty for all folders of a defined type. Enter names to match folders across every exported item. For each output, select which file format to download images in: JPG, PNG, WEBP, or TIFF. There are additional options to adjust DPI, choose Background color, Change quality, and to download original or resized files. The Filename* field displays the exported filename. Finally, run the export process by clicking the Export button in the bottom-right corner of the Export items window. When the export progress bar has reached its end, you can click **Open folder** to access your exported images. ### Publish via Cloud If publishing via PhotoRobot Cloud services, first open the item in the cloud. The interface displays the captured image. Click **Codes & Links** button: Copy the **Direct link** and paste it into your browser to view the image or spin. If satisfied, copy the **Embedded spin** HTML code. Paste this code onto your page to embed the spin for display. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/industry-4-0-readiness # SECTION: manuals > industry-4-0-readiness # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2025-12-16 --- # Improtech PhotoRobot - Industry 4.0 Readiness As of this 2024 declaration, PhotoRobot describes its Industry 4.0 readiness, compatibility, compliance, and operational efficiency. ## Improtech PhotoRobot - Industry 4.0 Readiness As of this 2024 declaration, PhotoRobot declares its Industry 4.0 readiness, compatibility, compliance, and operational efficiency. ## Hyper-Amortization of Improtech PhotoRobot The following PhotoRobot machines accompanied with PhotoRobot Controls Software for use in photogrammetry industrial applications can take advantage of hyper-amortization: - FRAME PhotoRobot - Case 850 PhotoRobot - C850 PhotoRobot - C1300 PhotoRobot - Centreless Table 850 PhotoRobot - Centerless Tables 1300 PhotoRobot - Cube v5 / v6 PhotoRobot - Turning Platform 180 / 280 PhotoRobot - Carousel 3000 PhotoRobot - Carousel 5000 PhotoRobot ## Capital Equipment Controlled by Computerized Systems To be classified as capital equipment, an item must be non-expendable, tangible property with a useful life of more than one year, and an acquisition cost of $5,000 or more per unit. That includes: the cost of the item itself; any modifications, attachments, accessories, and auxiliary components to make it operational; as well as shipping and installation costs. Improtech PhotoRobot meets these requirements to be considered capital equipment, and for further classification as Capital Equipment Controlled by Computerized Systems. This is because: - They have means of CNC control (Computer Numerical Control). - They are equipped with interfaces between user and machine that are simple and intuitive. - They conform to the latest standards of safety, health, and hygiene. ## Industry 4.0 Compliance Benchmarks PhotoRobot fully meets the following requirements to be certifiably Industry 4.0: - **Remote Diagnosis and Control:** via proprietary applications such as PhotoRobot Controls Software and Control Units firmware through the network. - **Connectivity:** PhotoRobot systems are connected over a network when in operation. They naturally enable real-time data transmission between the system and other company systems using embedded Controls Software API connectivity and other interoperability functionality. - **Sensors and Monitoring:** The PhotoRobot solution integrates sensors that detect data on its performance, operational status, and surrounding environmental conditions. Those sensors are implemented across all related levels: hardware, software, and firmware. - **Advanced Automation:** PhotoRobot is capable of performing tasks autonomously or semi-autonomously, adapting to changes in the operator’s input in real-time. Any tasks or sequences can be stored for future use. - **Process Digitization:** The technology contributes to the digitization of production processes, enabling the creation of a ‘smart factory’ in which processes are digitally monitored and managed, and are implemented as an internal workflow management solution for picture taking, editing, and publishing. These functionalities are all completely paperless. - **Safety:** All systems are designed with advanced safety features to prevent accidents and protect workers. PhotoRobot’s solution includes capabilities for operator safety and health protection, with both automatic and manual emergency stop situations and functionality. - **Energy Efficiency:** To account in full with the principle Energy Efficiency First, the PhotoRobot solution: - using only the energy absolutely necessary for operation. Control Units manage electrical engines in an optimized way, contrary to direct connection to the electrical distribution network. - reducing energy demands when continuous studio lighting is avoided. ## Industry 4.0 Operational Efficiency For greater operational efficiency, PhotoRobot technology enables: - **The reduction of human workloads where possible** - Automated product and camera positioning - Automated image capturing - Automated image postprocessing - Automated image backup, cloud publishing, connecting to 3rd party systems (e-shops, data storage, etc) - **Predictive maintenance and smart internal sensors reporting machine stages to the cloud** - Monitoring and reporting internal temperatures for overheating risks - Monitoring and reporting coolers statuses - Monitoring and reporting number of operations performed for predictive servicing - **3D printing** - For use internally for the machine’s production (and easy repairs in the field if required) - For the internal production of various accessories for photography operations (designed by PhotoRobot, 3D printed locally by the customer) ## Industry 4.0 Environmental Responsibility New PhotoRobot machine designs now extensively incorporate Nylon PA 12 white powder (PA 2200), a proven and versatile thermoplastic polymer. Also known as PA 12 (SLS), this 3D printing material produces durable white components with extremely balanced properties. It creates high-density structures with excellent tensile strength, ductility, and chemical resistance to oils, greases, hydrocarbons, and alkalies. This makes Nylon 12 ideal for engineering assemblies of complex geometries, and watertight applications into machine components and parts. The unsintered powder is also highly recyclable, allowing us to push the boundaries of design while aligning with PhotoRobot’s commitment to environmental responsibility. In this regard, the material features of Nylon 12 that help reduce PhotoRobot’s carbon footprint include its: - **High Strength and Durability:** Nylon 12 SLS is an extremely durable material, offering longer product lifespans. It can dramatically extend the life cycles of components, limiting the need to produce replacement parts and thus additional waste. - **Environmental Stability:** Nylon offers high resistance to UV light, heat, moisture, solvents, and variations in temperature. This makes it suitable for use in a wide range of diverse environments, including those without climate controls. - **Recyclability:** Unsintered nylon powder is highly recyclable, enabling us to reuse the material in subsequent prints to reduce material waste and costs. The use of Nylon PA 12 in PhotoRobot machine designs helps advance our commitment to both innovation and environmental responsibility. It helps us manufacture more functional, versatile and cutting-edge machines that are also kind to the planet. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/installation-readiness-and-delivery # SECTION: manuals > installation-readiness-and-delivery # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-07-27 --- # PhotoRobot Installation Readiness and Delivery Prepare for installation of your brand new PhotoRobot system using this guide to installation readiness and delivery for PhotoRobot customers. ## PhotoRobot Installation Readiness and Delivery Prepare to install your brand new PhotoRobot system using this guide to installation readiness and delivery for PhotoRobot customers. The following documentation aims to prepare customers for the installation of their [automated photography system](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap), its delivery, and its subsequent training. It covers prerequisites for system installation, internet connectivity requirements, network prerequisites (LAN), powering machines, and preparing the floor of the installation site. There is then a complete walkthrough of the delivery process of the equipment. This includes its transport to the destination, handling of equipment, collection from the factory, insurance, possible damage during transport, and customs and certification. Use this guide to ensure installation readiness, understand delivery of the equipment, and to facilitate its smooth follow-up training. **Note:** For the introduction into system integration, refer to [System Integration & API Connectivity](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration). To skip forward to installation and training procedures in detail, refer to [Installation and Operator Training of PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-installation-and-training). ## Installation Prerequisites for PhotoRobot Systems For the smooth installation of the system and its subsequent follow-up training, customers should prepare the installation site in advance. This is necessary in order to ensure the installation itself is technically possible, and that the installation proceeds in an optimal manner. While the PhotoRobot team is willing to help eliminate any errors, the time we spend doing so reduces the training volume. That, or, in extreme cases, it may lead to cancellation of the installation entirely. Thus, it is absolutely crucial to pay due attention to the installation prerequisites. If anything is too complex for the customer to handle, PhotoRobot specialists will gladly provide the necessary cooperation. However, the customer should order this option well in advance so that the actual installation process is not in jeopardy. Therefore, it is advisable to carefully check all details in advance, confirming you are fully ready for installation. The machines are designed to be installed within industrial conditions, such as storage halls and warehouses. This allows the robotized studio to be as close as possible to the objects to photograph. Although, it is also no problem to install PhotoRobot systems directly into your photographic studio, or a similar type of space. ### Internet Connectivity Requirements The quality of your internet connectivity has a direct impact on the speed of the entire product photography capture process with PhotoRobot. This is due to PhotoRobot’s automatic upload of captured images to cloud storage and backup which occurs immediately after downloading images from the camera. At the same time, all edits occur on copies of the images, allowing for a return to their default state at any time after post-processing. For example, on a 200 Mbps line, the last frame of the sequence is recorded a few seconds after the capture of the last frame. Thus, for a setup of an initial three workstations and their subsequent project development, a 100 Mbps line is recommended. For production workloads, note that we do not recommend connectivity any lower than 20 Mbps, while a bandwidth of at least 50 Mbps is preferred. **Note:** PhotoRobot Cloud uses Google tools. This means that for countries where there are restrictions on Google services (e.g. China), it is necessary to verify functionality in advance. PhotoRobot is not responsible for any future changes in the scope of such restrictions. Setting up a VPN is recommended to ensure the service is of the expected quality. ### Network Prerequisites (LAN) The computer network must meet the necessary parameters according to the [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites). If the connectivity provider or network administrator on the company side is unable to meet these prerequisites, the PhotoRobot network specialist can arrange the configuration. That, or they can provide the necessary network elements that will be configured appropriately, ensuring full functionality (which is the preferred option). In such cases, the parameters are significantly simpler. Then, to ensure the full functionality of all devices, both a wired and Wi-Fi connection are required. The wireless connection is in use for example to control Broncolor lights, the PhotoRobot Locator application, etc. For more details and technical information on computer and network configuration, refer to [PhotoRobot System Requirements](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements). ### Powering Machines The design of PhotoRobot devices is for both 115V and 230V power. Some models have a manual power selector. Others switch automatically. Before connecting to the mains, always make sure the settings are correct (and check the nameplate where this is indicated). Further, to ensure trouble-free operation, we recommend using overvoltage protection and possibly backup power sources to eliminate power fluctuations. Related problems like these occur mainly in rural areas, but also in industrial buildings. The machines use cables with connectors that conform to the **IEC 60320 C13 / C14** norm. This is both for the interconnection of more machines within one workplace, and for the connection of the entire workplace to the mains power supply. On-site interconnecting cables are included, but the end lead (according to local electrical standards) is **supplied by the customer** (unless otherwise agreed in advance). Finally, when planning power distribution within the studio, the **power consumption** of the entire system (robots including lights and computers) must be considered. This is especially true in cases involving the installation of multiple machines within the studio, in which you should consider an evenly **distributed load** across all the phases. ### Floor of Installation Site For the installation of most robots, a solid hard floor according to common standards is suitable. Soft floor coverings (plastics and especially carpets) reduce the accuracy and dynamics of the system due to the slight movement of the machines placed on them. Flexible floors (e.g. planks) are not suitable at the installation site. Unless there is another alternative to locating machines, it is recommended to install at least a suitable weight-distribution board (chipboard, plywood, etc). [PhotoRobot Carousel machines](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) machines designed for recessed installation come with technical specifications of the floor composition, which the customer discusses with the PhotoRobot specialist before the construction begins. ## Delivery of PhotoRobot Equipment To facilitate easy delivery, it is necessary to prepare not only for the transport itself but also for the unloading at the installation site. This includes preparation for the safe storage of machines before the installation team arrives, while also accounting for the availability of handling equipment, dimensions of doors, staircases or elevators, etc. Thus, it is always recommended to consult the PhotoRobot team well in advance about the choice of a suitable installation location. In practice, we sometimes encounter insufficient ceiling heights, narrow access doors to rooms, and insufficient capacity of the power infrastructure or computer networks. There may be inadequate lighting, ventilation, or space to handle the flow of the photographed objects. In these cases, the subsequent relocation of equipment is of course possible, but thorough consultation in advance leads to much smoother installations. ### Transport of System to Destination After you approve the shipping costs which PhotoRobot communicates before order confirmation, we will deliver the PhotoRobot solution to the agreed location. For maximum accuracy of the offered price, we always request a shipping quote for a specific order. It usually takes 2 - 3 working days for the carrier to prepare the quote. We then carefully pack all equipment and components, and cooperate with a number of established logistics companies (DB Schenker, TNT, etc) in order to ensure orders reach destinations intact and in the required time. Whether by road, sea, or air, PhotoRobot is shipped to you and insured, as well as suitably marked for the smoothest possible transportation. **To ensure the safety of machines during transport, we recommend the following.** - **For solo transport shipments** (i.e. the machines are transported between the factory and the place of installation with reloading at the depot), special packaging in durable wooden crates is not required. Solo shipments include: transport by van or truck / FCL container (sealed at the factory, and unsealed at the point of installation where the machines are firmly anchored in the container). Note: The customer needs to provide parking for trucks (if they should remain on site at the time of installation). - **For LCL or air shipments**, special packaging is required (charged separately according to the specific order) so that the goods are not damaged during transport. In many cases, it is more cost-effective in terms of the total cost to opt for a solo shipment rather than LCL or air shipments. Additionally, within a distance of approximately 1000 km from the factory, it may be advantageous to use a PhotoRobot delivery vehicle. The PhotoRobot delivery vehicle also brings the assembly team with the delivery. After shipping, we then inform the customer that their new PhotoRobot system is on its way. ### Handling Equipment In standard situations, a vehicle with a hydraulic lift is not required. However, if there is no ramp or suitable equipment at the unloading site (forklift, etc), the customer should request one. The customer should also specify this separately, and in advance of any installation. ### Collection at the Factory (EXW) By prior arrangement, the customer can pick up the goods directly through their carrier in our shipping warehouse, or take over at the loading / unloading port. Note: It may be appropriate to combine in-person collection with training directly at the manufacturer’s site (as a paid service – refer to [PhotoRobot Installation & Training](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-installation-and-training) for more information). PhotoRobot has all the standard handling equipment available at the place of loading (forklifts, ramps, railway, etc). ### Insurance and Possible Damage During Transport The delivery of the machines PhotoRobot provides always includes insurance against common risks. If shipping is handled by the customer, we recommend the appropriate insurance as well. In either case, we recommend discussing the completeness of the delivery including any damage with the delivering carrier immediately upon receipt of the consignment. This is in order to avoid any possible disputes later. ### Customs and Certification If there are special customs procedures in the recipient country, the customer must inform the supplier in advance about this. Doing so is necessary to ensure the smooth supply of the equipment to the customer’s destination. A similar situation arises when the recipient country requires special certificates for imported goods (i.e. it does not accept CE standards). In both cases, we recommend delaying any planning of the journey for the installation and training team until the consignment reaches the destination. That, or when there is absolutely no doubt about the equipment’s timely delivery. Note: It is the responsibility of the customer to observe this point, and any related complications. ## Installation of Your PhotoRobot System After delivery, our team of experienced PhotoRobot technicians will install your brand new PhotoRobot solution. The technicians will ensure the correct assembly and setup of your system, as well as its proper functionality so you can use PhotoRobot to its full potential. For detailed information on the installation and follow-up training of your system, refer to [PhotoRobot Installation & Operator Training](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/installation-readiness-and-delivery). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/item-export # SECTION: manuals > item-export # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-10-08 --- # Item Export - PhotoRobot User Support Manual This User Support Manual describes how to operate and troubleshoot local or cloud-based item export in PhotoRobot Controls App (CAPP). ## How to Export Items in PhotoRobot Controls App In PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”), users can export items to a local disk, or export items to the PhotoRobot Cloud. Use this PhotoRobot User Support Manual to operate and troubleshoot Item Export in CAPP, including: - Item Export Options - Output Formats - File Formatting - Filename Templates - Saving and Loading Configurations - Item Export to a Local Disk - Item Export to the Cloud ## Item Export (Local) ### Select Items for Export To select items for export from CAPP to a local drive, first open the **Project** where the items are stored. Inside a Project, 25 items display by default. Users can select individual items for export, or select all 25 entries on a page. To select all items within a project, click the **Select all entries** prompt, which displays next to the number of entries selected: After selecting items for export, the total number of items displays in the upper-right part of the page. Confirm that the total number of items is correct, and click **Export** to open the export window: ### Configure Export Options In the Export items menu, the top of the window displays all items to export. Then, the export settings are organized into steps, starting with choosing the local folder to save the exported files. ### Select Export Destination The first step in the Export menu is **Destination**. Check the Output folder* field to choose the local folder where exported files will be saved. ### Change Item Status Use the **Item status** step to optionally mark exported items as Exported when the job completes. It is also possible to tick on / off the option to not change the status of items that do not contain photos. ### Assign Image Metadata The **Image metadata** option enables the embedding of author, copyright, title, description, and keywords into exported image files. Tick the box next to Embed metadata in exported images to active or deactivate. Activation will allow for configuration of defaults in Settings, and provide a preview of the image metadata to attach. ### Add Gallery Options The **Gallery** step when exporting items functions to add HTML preview, SpinViewer data files, and thumbnail images alongside exported images. Tick the boxes next to each option to enable or disable them. It is also possible to enable Add extracted OCR data into data.json config. - **Add HTML preview** – Tick this box to generate an HTML preview next to exported items which users can click to inspect. - **Add data.json config for PhotoRobot SpinViewer** – Check this box to configure the main JSON configuration file. - Note: After configuration, double-check that the JSON syntax is valid. - **Export thumbnail images** – Export images with thumbnails. - **Add extracted OCR data into data.json config** – Include optical character recognition with exported items. ### Define Output Formats Finally, for each export, the user must select the **Output formats**. This step defines still, spin, preview, and retouch outputs for the export. Click the option **(+) Add output format** to choose the format to export: Spin (360 / 3D images), Still images, and Images for export. - **Spin (360 / 3D) images** – Export items as a product spin. - **Still images** – Export still images, such as an image gallery of 5 or 6 photos. - **Images for retouch** – Mark images for external retouching before final export. **Note:** When adding multiple outputs, users configure individual menu options for Spin (360 / 3D) images and for Still images, or for other output formats. Then, the **Folder filter** field allows you to leave folders empty for all folders of a defined type. Enter names to match folders across every exported item. ### Choose File Format to Export For each output, select which file format to download images in: **JPG**, **PNG**, **WebP**, or **TIFF**. There are additional options to adjust DPI, choose Background color, Change quality, and to download original or resized files. The Filename* field displays the exported filename. - **JPG** – The JPG file format is useful for its compatibility and size, although some data may be lost in transfer. This is due to JPG using lossy compression, which does not always result in a 1:1 representation of the original image. - **PNG** – The PNG file format uses lossless compression to download images in a 1:1 representation of the original file. PNG files can also be served on a transparent background, however file sizes are much larger than JPG and used very rarely on the web. - **WebP** – The WebP file format from Google is generally compatible everywhere, and it combines the properties of JPG and PNG into one format. WebP has superior lossy and lossless compression, files can have transparency, and images can be compressed to extremely small sizes. - **TIFF** – The TIFF file format is extremely uncommon, and only used in very special cases for compatibility on legacy systems. TIFF thus has limited support in CAPP, and is not recommended for item export. **Note: The recommended file formats are WebP and JPG.** Further, WebP is recommended over JPG, as WebP consistently requires less bits per pixel than JPG for the same SSIM index. Conversely, PNG file sizes are often too large for the web, and only used in special cases. Also, be aware that DPI is set to 72 by default. Adjusting DPI will have no effect on image resolution, so in the majority of cases it is recommended to keep the default setting. ### Set Background Color (Transparent JPG Files Only) If configuring a transparent JPG file for export, users can select a background color by clicking **Background color**: - **Note:** Background color options are available only for transparent JPG files. - **Change quality** options function for both JPG and WebP files. ### Change Quality (JPG, WebP) To adjust image quality on JPG or WebP files, check the **Change quality** box below file format selection: Change quality is measured on a 1 to 100 (lowest to highest level) scale, which affects file size and image quality at the same time. **Note:** For JPG and WebP files, the ideal quality levels exist in different ranges. It will thus be necessary to adjust this number depending on the file format, and its desired size versus its desired quality. - **Change quality (JPG)** - JPG compression is typically measured as a percentage of quality level. For example, an image of 100 quality has almost no loss, but at the same time has a larger file size. Conversely, an image with 1 quality is an extremely low quality image. In general, JPGs with a quality of 90 or higher are considered “high quality”, while 80 - 90 is “medium quality”, and 70 - 80 is “low quality”. - **Change quality (WebP)** - WebP ideal quality levels exist between the 50 - 80 quality range in most cases. If the quality value is 80 or more, there is often no discernible difference in image quality, while file sizes become larger. For values 50 and under, file sizes reduce only slightly, while image quality is severely damaged. ### Export Original or Resized Image For all file types, users can select to export items in original file size, or in a desired resized resolution: - **Original** - This is the default setting to keep the original image resolution. - **Resized** - Select to specify the maximum size in pixels of an image to export (example: 1200 resolution). ### Item Export File Naming The final step before item export is to choose a **Filename***. This step enables users to select or change variables for the image template: To access the help box, click **Show template variables** via the question-mark icon to the right of the input filename: Standard variables include: - **${projectName}** - **${itemName}** - **${barcode}** - **${trackingCode}** - **${folderName}** Variables for further explanation are: - **${rowAngle}** - This is the vertical angle from which the image has been shot. - **${turnAngle}** - This is the horizontal angle from which the image has been shot. - **${rowIndex}** - These are similar to row angles but use an index within the row (example: If there are 3 rows, the row index is from 001 to 003). - **${turnIndex}** - These are similar to turn angles but use an index within the turn (example: If a spin has 24 frames, the turn index is from 001 to 024). Templates can be further customized using variables: - **${label}** - Create a basic label for an item for export (example: front, back, side). - **${gs1}** - Configure advanced item labels according to [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards). - **${order}** - This is the index of the image within the folder. It is similar to the turn index. However, instead of a position within a row, this is a position within a folder (example: if there are 2 rows of 24 frames, the first row is indexed 1 to 24, the second from 25 to 48. - **${stopId}** - **${tag:key}** - This enables users to customize ***tags** for an item. **Tags** within a filename can function for example as a label for “Product A” versus “Product B”. In this case, a filename for Product A might be: ${projectName}**/** ${itemName}(**${tag:productid}** /${folderName}/${rowAngle}**_a** ${turnAngle}.jpg Additionally, **Custom formatting** options exist to further customize some variables, including: ${rowIndex}, ${turnIndex}, and ${order}. Customize these variables by appending the variable with the colon symbol followed by a value, for example: - **${turnIndex:2}** - Format turn index filenames to two-digit rather than the default three-digit numerical index (e.g. 01, 02, 03, etc). - **${rowIndex:2:0}** - Format row index filenames to a length of two, starting with zero (e.g. 00, 01, 02, etc). - **${order:4:20}** - Format order index to a length of four, starting at number 20 (e.g. 0020, 0021, 0022, etc). **( ! )** - **Duplicate path error:** If using r${rowAngle}_a${turnAngle} in a template and also exporting still images that share rows with the same angles, the user must specify ${order}in the template. This will avoid encountering a “Duplicate path error,” and should look as follows: ${order}_r${rowAngle}_a${turnAngle}. ### Save or Load Configurations Next, users can save an export template and its configurations, or load a template from their archive. To save or load an export template, access template options via the menu icon next to Export items at the top of the export menu: When saving, click **Save** to create a new template, add a name, and include tags or notes for future indexing or reference: ### Export Items to the Local Disk After configuring the export template with all required outputs, file formatting, and filename variables, click Export in the bottom right of the interface: On successful export, all items will transfer from CAPP to the path specified to your local disk. ## Item Export (to the Cloud) Item export to the cloud follows the same procedure as exporting items to a local disk, and provides the same functionality. 1. Users configure export options, outputs, file formats, and filename variables: **The only difference is that with Cloud-based item export, CAPP generates a link with a URL address to access the exported item.** 1. In the Exports tab, click **Get link** next to the item for export: 1. Click **Copy link** to save the URL address to the item for export: 1. Paste the link from your clipboard to a browser search bar to access the item for download. Generated links are stored and accessible for download for 7 days. 1. To download images, users must install the PhotoRobot File Manager app. Click **Download Mac installer** (also available for Windows) if not already using the app on your device. 1. Click **Download now** to select a target folder for item download, and click the final Download button underneath the item path: On successful download, PhotoRobot File Manager displays both downloads and uploads: - Click **Show in finder** to open the folder containing the exported images. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/laser-centering-guide # SECTION: manuals > laser-centering-guide # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2025-12-16 --- # PhotoRobot Laser Centering & Alignment Guide This user support manual provides technical instructions on how to align and center PhotoRobot built-in cross laser systems. ## PhotoRobot Laser Centering & Alignment Guide This user support manual provides technical instructions on how to align and center PhotoRobot built-in cross laser systems. Follow these steps to find the midpoint of any round PhotoRobot plate using two lasers. Instructions include how to physically move the lasers to the center of the table, initial laser settings, and how to fine-tune laser positioning. Additionally, at the end of the manual, there are instructions for aligning and centering the special laser system of the [C1300 turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/c850-c1300-user-guide) (previously distributed under the name Case 1300). **Important:** Always first refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to the manual provided specifically with your device before any self-installation or service. **Note:** Refer to [PhotoRobot First Use & Basic Testing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing) for detailed information on network configuration, and network requirements. ## 1. Physically Move Lasers to Center of Table **1.1.** Before getting started, establish a connection between the PhotoRobot and the local network. Next, power on the Control Unit *(6th Generation)*, and a laser-box. **Note:** To align and center the laser system for the C1300 turntable, also refer to the special instructions in section 4 of this user manual. **1.2.** After connecting PhotoRobot to the network and powering on the Control Unit and laser-box, measure the distance between both sides of the table where the laser is mounted. Then, turn or move the laser by hand to the center, and fasten the laser into position. ## 2. Estimate Rough Settings **2.1.** When the laser is fastened into position, place a sticker onto the turntable plate at the approximate midpoint of the glass. The lasers will become more visible on the sticker, helping to better estimate the central point of the plate. **2.2.** Adjust both lasers by hand to align on the sticker which estimates the approximate midpoint. ## 3. Fine-Tune Laser Alignment **3.1.** Trace a small cross on the sticker copying the red cross of lasers. **3.2.** Next, start the Locator application on your mobile phone, find the Control Unit assigned to the robot, and access the service GUI. **Note:** For detailed instructions on networking, refer to [PhotoRobot Detailed Networking Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) (section 8: Appendix Information). Then, find the Control Unit assigned to the robot, and access its GUI. **3.3.** In the Service GUI, use the turn controls to rotate the glass 90 degrees, and trace the position of the cross lasers onto the sticker again. Repeat this step twice: rotating the glass 90 degrees, tracing the laser cross, rotating 90 degrees, and tracing the laser cross a final time. **3.4.** After tracing the four crosses on the sticker, connect each opposite cross by straight lines. The resulting cross in between the individual crosses will represent the actual midpoint of the glass plate. **3.5.** Finally, adjust both lasers to the identified midpoint. The laser system will now be centered and aligned to the absolute center of the plate’s rotation. ## 4. C1300 Specialty Lasers Alignment & Centering **4.1.** When aligning and centering the lasers on the C1300 robot, note the specialty laser system. The C1300 laser system has several differences in comparison to other PhotoRobots. Although the physical principles are the same, the construction of the C1300 laser system features an installation of four lasers. **4.2.** In this system, Laser 4 is an integral part of the C1300 robot skeleton. Laser 4 is a cross laser, and it shines through the white background from the bottom side. To adjust the laser position, find the four silver screws to uncover the central square part housing the laser. **4.3.** After uncovering the central square part housing Laser 4, use the two screws holding the plastic laser housing to adjust its position manually. **Note:** Laser 1, Laser 2, and Laser 3 all have the same construction as Laser 4. They are also all line lasers: **4.4.** Finally, when aligning and centering the lasers, ensure there is a 90-degree angle between the laser line from the top laser and the glass plate. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/macros-config-functions # SECTION: manuals > macros-config-functions # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-05-27 --- # PhotoRobot Macros Configuration and Functionality Guide The following user guide describes the configuration and functionality of Macros in PhotoRobot Controls Application (CAPP). ## PhotoRobot Macros Configuration and Functionality Guide The following user guide describes the configuration and functionality of Macros in PhotoRobot Controls App (“CAPP”). Macros are a highly powerful automation tool designed to streamline even the most complex capture workflows across single or multiple folders (spins, stills, etc.). Far beyond executing basic commands, Macros allow you to fully automate your studio production. For example, you can program a sequence to pause so you can physically turn an object upside down and capture its other hemisphere into a separate folder. This is an essential feature for photographing the bottom of items on any machine which does not photograph from below (unlike the [PhotoRobot Frame 3D turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame)). It is then possible to automatically extract specific frames from a spin and copy them into a static image gallery, completely eliminating the need to photograph the same angles twice. Whether you need to run automated image edits, apply workspaces and presets, or trigger actions via barcodes and tags, Macros offer endless possibilities to drastically speed up your photography process. ## 1 - How to View and Customize PhotoRobot Macros To view a Macro or customize its basic settings (name, barcode, tag, notes), open **Settings** in CAPP, and click **Macros** in the side-bar menu options. - Use **Advanced search** at the top of the list of macros to find a macro by name, or individually select macros by clicking a macro name from the list. **Note:** Selecting a macro displays the macro with its commands in read-only. However, users can configure Name, Barcode, Tags, or Note here. - If customizing any fields, click Save in the bottom-right part of the Macro dialogue to confirm user settings. ## 2 - How to Create a New Macro To create a new macro, create a new item or open any existing item in the local version of CAPP. Within the item, the button to access Macros is in the bottom-right part of the capture mode interface. Access macro settings by clicking the **Macros** button and **New macro.** When creating a new macro, a pop-up box will open to define the macro by name and commands. Click the field at the top of the macro dialog to set its name, and tap **+ Add** to configure macro commands. Configure **Change folder** to run commands on an existing folder, for example on a spin or stills folder. Set **Run sequence** to run a sequence, for example: only on a spin folder, or to specify which folder the sequence should run in (stills only, spin only, etc). Use**Copy images** to specify source and destination folders of specific swing or turn angles to copy. For example, a macro can instruct the system to capture a 360 spin, and copy two frames from the spin folder into a separate stills folder. In this case, macro commands would be Run sequence **(1)** on the spin folder, Copy images **(2)** from the spin folder to a stills folder, and Copy specific swing and turn angles **(3)** into the stills folder: Often, a macro will also include one or more presets.Use **Load preset** to assign individual or multiple presets to the new macro, or select presets by clicking on the empty **Preset** field. After assigning all commands, save the new macro by clicking the file icon in the bottom-right part of the macro settings box. The macro is now stored in the system, and it can be loaded for any item in one of two ways. ## 3 - How to Load an Existing Macro To load a macro, open any item in CAPP, and tap the button for **Macros** at the bottom-right part of the capture mode interface. - The name of the previous macro in use will display to the left of the Macros button. - Click the start button next to the macro’s name to load this macro. If loading a different macro, use the Macros button on the right to select from all macros in the system. After selecting a macro, the Play button will run the capture process with all macro commands and presets assigned to it. If reshooting individual images and running the macro again, first select the frames to reshoot, and then click the button for the previous macro, or **Load macro**. - Double-check the macro commands, and, when satisfied, click Play to run the macro for only the selected images. **Note:** If running copy images for a second time, the macro will replace the previous copies in the folder with the new copies. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation # SECTION: manuals > multicam-centerless-table-installation # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-01-22 --- # PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide This installation manual contains detailed instructions for the assembly and first use of the PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table. ## PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation Guide The following documentation contains detailed instructions on the assembly and first use of the [PhotoRobot MultiCam (Pro / Pro XL)](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) with the [Centerless Table (CL1300 / CL850)](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table). This information aims to support PhotoRobot customers who have recently purchased a PhotoRobot device. It includes an overview of the technology, with a step-by-step walkthrough for installing the MultiCam in combination with a PhotoRobot Centerless Table. **Important:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) along with any documentation provided specifically for your device. Additionally, the initial installation of a PhotoRobot device must always be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Note:** For an overview of the Centerless Table devices and their integration in the photo studio, refer to the [Centerless Table CL850 - CL1300 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/centerless-table-user-guide). ## PhotoRobot MultiCam Pro / Pro XL and Centerless Table Thank you and congratulations on your purchase of the PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table. The PhotoRobot MultiCam Pro / MultiCam Pro XL is a multi-camera rig compatible with both the Centerless Table CL1300 and CL850 models. As a multi-camera rig, the system works in combination with the rotational dynamics of the Centerless Table to automate the capture of multiple cameras for multi-row and 3D product photography. This allows for the capture of products from numerous elevations at once to produce complete 3D experiences, 3D product spins, and photos to generate 3D models. ## 1. Product Description - MultiCam Pro / MultiCam Pro XL The MultiCam is available in two models: the MultiCam Pro, and the larger MultiCam Pro XL. The only difference is the size of the camera arch, with the XL functioning as the larger of the two models. Both the MultiCam Pro and Pro XL are compatible with all PhotoRobot robotic turntables. The device enables the capture of 144+ images from multiple cameras in approximately 20 seconds. This includes the simultaneous capture of marketing angles and top views in a 360-degree rotational range. Meanwhile, the extremely precise camera control and image capture with 13 available camera positions supports rapid multi-row photography. The precision of the robotized capture enables the automated post-processing of individual images for 3D spin and 3D model generation. Key components and features of the MultiCam Pro / Pro XL include: - Synchronous multi-camera capture in a single turntable rotation - Camera arch available in two sizes (Pro / Pro XL) - Software control of all cameras simultaneously - Support for 13 camera positions at a spacing of 7.5° - Motor-assisted height adjustment to the center of photographed objects - Precise & reliable setup of cameras thanks to high structure rigidity - Wide range of accessories for Manfrotto tripod heads - MultiCam portal for quick connection to different PhotoRobot workstations - Lighting options for both flash and continuous studio lights ### 1.1. Workstation Overview - CL1300 / CL850 The MultiCam functions in combination with the Centerless Table (CL1300 / CL850) as a universal photography turntable and multi-camera rig solution for robotized 3D photography. Together, the two devices enable shadow-free automated photography of small to medium size products. This includes objects of varying photographic properties: transparent, glossy, light, and dark products. At the same time, the turning glass plate holds objects from the size of an earring to luggage, with a diffuse background that enables even lighting of objects from all sides during photography. Thus, each camera shooting from the MultiCam can automatically create high-quality photos on a pure white background, including marketing angles and top views simultaneously. At the same time, this ensures quick and highly efficient automation in the post-processing and publishing of images. ### 1.2. MultiCam & Centerless Table Components The main components for a MultiCam with Centerless Table installation include the parts for both devices, and their control units. - Centerless Table basic kit (device body, frame, stemples) - Centerless Table HD rack with control units and router - Control Unit G6, Laser Box, Switch Box, and SynchroBox - Internal cable routing through left and right stemples - Centerless Table background holder console - Workstation laser connection and flash lights holders - Centerless Table plate (1300 mm / 850 mm) - Centerless Table background assembly - MultiCam portal for quick setup at the workstation - MultiCam bow, camera mounting, and cable connections ## 2. Basic Kit Assembly of MultiCam with CL1300 / CL850 Assembly of the MultiCam with CL1300 / CL850 begins from the basic kit of the Centerless Table device. The basic kit represents the body (frame) of the Centerless table. ### 2.1. Construction of the CL1300 / CL850 Basic Kit **2.1.1.** Place the Centerless Table basic kit on a flat surface, ensuring it rests evenly on the ground. **2.1.2.** Locate the labeled cardboard box with 20 x rubber bands, 10 x pins, 5 x socket, and 4 x feet. **2.1.3.** Unpack the box and take the plastic bag containing the 4 x feet with pins and sockets. **2.1.4.** Use a forklift or similar lifting device to lift the CL1300 / CL850 above the ground high enough and screw in the 4 feet upside down into position. Screw each foot x 4 in tightly and as far up into the machine frame as possible. ### 2.2. Assembly of Stemples Type H, Type R **2.2.1.** Locate the machine stemples packaged in bubble wrap and labeled: “Reinforced stemples to type H” (code: KHANYTRF), and “Side stemples Type R” (code: KHANYTR). **2.2.2.** Remove both sets of stemples from their packaging. **2.2.3.** Locate the four screws with thick washers on both sides of the Centerless Table, and loosen each of the four screws to unscrew them. **2.2.4.** Next, fasten the non-reinforced side stemples (Type R) to both sides of the Centerless Table. **2.2.5.** Notice the large open rectangular spaces in the stemples. These areas are a design feature for the placement of wires at the bottom of the stemples next to the fixing screws with thick washers. **2.2.6.** Also pay attention to the two rectangular holes at the top of the stemples from the backside view of the Centerless Table. **2.2.7.** After construction, the basic kit functions as the body of the machine frame, with stemples on the sides and four feet at the bottom. ### 2.3. MultiCam Portal Assembly **2.3.1.** Next, locate the bubble-wrapped part labeled MultiCam Portal for 1655 Table (code: KHMCP1655). **2.3.2.** Unpack the MultiCam Portal, and remove the covers to the trapezoidal rod covers on both sides of the portal. **2.3.3.** Locate the plastic bags containing the portal screws. **2.3.4.** Prepare 2 x screws for fastening into the portal. **2.3.5.** Connect one side of the portal, fastening only one screw to do so. **2.3.6.** Connect the other side of the portal, using only one screw per side. **2.3.7.** Raise the portal to a vertical position, and then tighten the remaining 3 x screws on each side. **2.3.8.** After ensuring all screws are tightly secured, the MultiCam Portal installation is ready and should appear as it does in the following photo. **2.3.9.** Replace the trapezoidal rod covers, and fasten them into place. ### 2.4. MultiCam Bow Assembly **2.4.1.** After assembly of the MultiCam portal, the next step is assembling the MultiCam bow. To do this, there are 2 x bow holders which will fasten to the Centerless Table. **2.4.2.** Locate and unwrap the 2 x bow holders from the protective bubble wrap. **2.4.3.** Unpack the 2x bow holders with screws, and prepare to join the bow holders together by setting them next to each other as in the following photos. **2.4.4.** Next, locate the 2 x hexagonal rods with tape holding them together, and remove the tape around the rods. **2.4.5.** Loosely attach the 2 x hexagonal guiding rods to the bottom of the bow holder. **2.4.6.** Place one of the bows onto the hexagonal guiding rods. **2.4.7.** Fasten the top parts of the hexagonal guiding rods to the top bow holder, and then fasten the bottom screws. **2.4.8.** Apply pressure to position the upper part of the bow onto the portal, and insert 6 x upper screws into the threads. **2.4.9.** Insert 6 x screws into the front part of the bow, and then fasten all 12 x screws holding the bow to the portal. **2.4.10.** After securing the front part of the bow to the portal, fasten the PhotoRobot logo tightly onto the MultiCam bow. **2.4.11.** Next, install the 2 x centering bow rods onto the bow as in the following photo examples. ### 2.5 SynchroBox Installation with MultiCam & CL1300 / CL850 When assembly of the MultiCam bow is complete, locate the PhotoRobot SynchroBox and a blinder rack for installation. The PhotoRobot SynchroBox is a multi-camera hub which synchronizes the camera shutter of two or more cameras. Install the SynchroBox and the narrow blinder rack in the MultiCam portal. **Note:** For detailed instructions on the configuration and setup of the SynchroBox, refer to the [PhotoRobot - SynchroBox Setup User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup). ## 3. Setup of Centerless Table Left HD Rack On the front side of the Centerless Table, there is an HD rack with shelves in the bottom-left half of the machine frame. The HD rack houses the LaserBox, the SwitchBox, and the Control Unit. ### 3.1. HD Rack Orientation When assembling the HD rack, install the control units in the following order from the top to bottom shelf: - LaserBox (top shelf), - SwitchBox, - Narrow blinder rack, - Control Unit, - Wide blinder rack with logo (bottom). ### 3.2. HD Rack Devices Connection Scheme **3.2.1**. To set up the devices in the HD rack, start by connecting the first lot of wires to each control unit using the following cables. - 1 meter black power cables - 1 meter RS232 gray cable with a Control Unit G6 (CUG6) to CL1300 / CL850 connector at the skeleton **3.2.2.** Next, locate the gray motor cables, and connect them as follows. - 1 meter Control Unit G6 (CUG6) to SwitchBox right connector - 1 meter SwitchBox middle connector to CL1300 / CL850 connector at the skeleton - 5 meter SwitchBox left connector for later connection to the portal connector Backside CL1300 - Control Units Connection Scheme Backside CL850 - Control Units Connection Scheme ### 3.3. Router - Power Connection Scheme **3.3.1.** To connect the router if not already connected, install it with power multi sockets into the middle rack of the CL1300. If setting up the CL850, install the router with the second power multi socket into the mini-rack at the rear side of the device. CL1300 Router & Power Connection CL850 Router & Power Connection **3.3.2.** Finally, connect 2 x 1-meter black power cables to the back of the router. ## 4. MultiCam Camera Holders Installation After setting up the HD rack and router, the next stage is installation of the MultiCam camera holders to the MultiCam bow. ### 4.1. Installing MultiCam Camera Holders **4.1.1.** Locate and unpack each package labeled MultiCam Camera Holder (code: KHMCCH). **4.1.2.** Install the camera holders to the MultiCam bow at the desired angles. **4.1.3.** Next, locate the Manfrotto heads, and install them onto the camera holders. **4.1.4.** After installing the Manfrotto heads, uncover both stemples by unscrewing each screw on the covers. ### 4.2. Left and Right Stemples - Internal Cable Routing **4.2.1.** Place the cables in the following steps into the internal parts of the stemples. **4.2.2.** In the left stemple (from the front side of the Centerless Table), internally route the following cables. - 1 x motor cable 5m, connected from the SwitchBox left connector and fastened to the portal connector - 1 x shutter cable extension 5m connected from the CUG6 OUT port to the SynchroBox IN port (the smaller port) - 4 x active USB extenders 10m - 3 x black power cables 5m for the flashlights and SynchroBox - 1 x ethernet cable 5m for the SynchroBox - 1 x black simple USB extender for the middle laser **4.2.3.** To set up the cabling within the right stemple (from the front side of the Centerless Table), prepare the following cables. - 3 x black power cables 5m for the flashlights - 1 x black simple USB extender for the side laser **4.2.4.** Next, find the 2 x stemples packaged in bubble wrap and labeled Pair of Side Stemples Type H (code: KHANYTH), and unpack each. **4.2.5.** Place the stemple cover over the reinforced part of the stemple, and insert one screw through both pieces. **4.2.6.** Connect both parts to secure the stemples onto the Centerless Table. **4.2.7.** Insert and tighten all remaining screws on the stemple except for the top 4 screws (2 rows) on both of the stemples. **4.2.8.** Follow the same steps on the other stemple. **4.2.9.** Insert the USB active extenders into the bow, and then adjust the position of each USB active extender for each Manfrotto head. ### 4.3. Internal Routing of the Shutter Cable Extension **4.3.1.** Finally, locate 4 x shutter cable extension cables in a plastic zip-bag labeled Shutter Cable RJ10 to RJ10 Extension 5m (code: KHCAR1R05). **4.3.2.** Insert the shutter cable extensions into the bow, and adjust the position of each extension for each Manfrotto head. Note: The other side of the shutter cables must connect to the SynchroBox, while the lowest Manfrotto head shutter cable connects to the SynchroBox, port 1. Meanwhile, the top Manfrotto head shutter cable connects to the SynchroBox, port 4. ## 5. CL1300 / CL850 Background Holder Console Assembly Next, there is assembly of the background holder console for the Centerless Table. ### 5.1. Background Holder Console Assembly **5.1.1.** Locate the background holder console, pictured below. **5.1.2.** Hook the background holder into the left and right stemples. **5.1.3.** Ensure the background holder snaps firmly into the holes. Then, loosen the locking screws with plastic heads, and insert the metal safety pin as far as possible into the stemple hole. Afterwards, tighten the locking screws with plastic heads to secure the background in place. ### 5.2. Test End Switch Stop Movement After securing the background holder console, engage the Control Unit (temporarily, as necessary), and move the portal to the top position. The end switch should stop the movement. ## 6. Flash Light Holders Assembly After constructing the background holder, the next stage is preparing the flash light holders assembly. ### 6.1. Hedgehog (Flight Lights Holders) Installation **6.1.1.** Locate the box containing the plastic-wrapped flash light holders, and unpack the parts. **6.1.2.** Next, prepare the hedgehogs (flash lights holders) for assembly. ### 6.2. Laser Holder Assembly **6.2.1.** Locate the side laser holder (triangle), and fasten it together with the hedgehog to the right-side reinforced stemple. The order should be: stemple, followed by laser holder, and finally hedgehog. **6.2.2.** Repeat the same process on the other stemple, which is without the laser holder. **6.2.3.** Fasten both lasers and connect them to the black simple USB extenders which are already in place. ### 6.3. Flash Lights Mounting **6.3.1.** To mount the flash lights, unscrew the safety screws on both flash lights mounts. **6.3.2.** Next, insert the rods for mounting the flash lights, minding the logo orientation and replacing the safety screw afterwards. **6.3.3.** Mount the upper rear light holder. **6.3.4.** Loosen and remove the safety screw. **6.3.5.** Insert the rod to mount the flashlight, and replace the safety screw. **6.3.6.** Mount the bottom rear flashlight holder as in the following pictures. ### 6.4. Top Light Holder Wall Boom Installation **6.4.1.** Find the top light holder (wall boom) parts. **6.4.2.** Position the spacer tube the same as in the following picture. **6.4.3.** Insert the screw, and then attach the antler. **6.4.4.** Next, insert the wall boom holder. **6.4.5.** Insert the wall boom, and then fasten the weight to its end. ### 6.5. Cable Connection Scheme **6.5.1.** Finally, connect the remaining cables to all devices, arrange the cables in the bottom, and use cable ties to tie the cables together. CL1300 Cable Orientation CL850 Cable Orientation **6.5.2.** Mind the router configuration (port 1 - 12 = LAN, port 13 = internet). Then, unscrew and open two upper covers over the plate guide wheels. **6.5.3.** Remember to disconnect the grounding wires. ## 7. Plate Installation of CL1300 / CL850 **7.1.** Next, prepare to install the plate of the Centerless Table by loosening and removing one back wheel, using the following photos for guidance. **7.2.** Locate the glass plate (1300 mm for the CL1300, or 850 mm for the CL850). **7.3.** Carefully place the glass plate onto the supportive wheels, ensuring that the notch on the glass plate faces down. **7.4.** Return and mount the removed wheel, placing it back on. **7.5.** Adjust the side wheel with rubber rings, ensuring that the rings touch the glass. Note: The correct amount of pressure will allow for holding and stopping each wheel by hand when the glass is turning. **7.6.** Place back the two upper covers of the glass plate guide wheels and tighten their screws. ## 8. Background Assembly of CL1300 / CL850 **8.1.** To construct the background assembly, locate the white background for the Centerless Table. **8.2.** Next, prepare the rubber clips for the background. **8.3.** Secure the background by clipping the rubber clips onto the background holder console. **8.4.** Move the white background to the final position, and secure it using the rubber clips. **8.5.** Return the background holders, mounting them back into place. **8.6.** Next, if assembling the CL1300, locate the side covers and unroll each. If assembling the CL850, note that the device does not have side covers, and proceed to step 8.9. **8.7.** Secure the side covers to the right and left sides of the Centerless Table. **8.8.** Insert 2 x pins into the background holder console, and screw the pins in place. **8.9.** Next, insert forks over the pins, and fasten them in position. **8.10.** Locate the blackening background and place it into the forks. **8.11.** Prepare the plastic chain which controls the blackening background. **8.12.** Position the chain onto the sprocket in the following picture. **8.13.** Now, add the weight onto the chain, and join the chain together. **8.14.** Mount the socket and bottom background flash light holder rod. ## 9. Installation of MultiCam Bow Metal Covers (CL1300) **9.1.** Next, if assembling the MultiCam with the CL1300, prepare the metal covers of the MultiCam bow for installation. Note: For the CL850, there are no metal covers, so proceed ahead to step 9.3. **9.2.** Place the covers between the locks, with the covers held by magnets afterwards. **9.3.** Connect the two terminals with a coupler to the shutter cable extension closest to each Manfrotto head. **9.4.** The MultiCam with Centerless Table (CL1300 / CL850) is ready for use. Fully Assembled CL1300 and MultiCam System Fully Assembled CL850 and MultiCam System ## 10. First Use & Basic Testing For further user support after installation of the MultiCam with Centerless Table, refer to [PhotoRobot First Use & Basic Testing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing). ## 11. PhotoRobot _Controls Software The software PhotoRobot Controls App (“CAPP”) provides full control of the MultiCam with Centerless Table (CL1300 / CL850) workstation, and other PhotoRobot devices. CAPP integrates control over robots, cameras, studio lights, and post production. This includes workflow management features as well as the necessary functionality for effective automation in post-processing. **Note:** PhotoRobot Controls App software is not delivered with the device; it is a separate purchase available for download via your [PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). For support with installation and getting started, refer to [Getting Started - PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). Further, the software may start up in “wizard mode” after installation of CAPP. Wizard mode is a simplified user interface which enables the scanning of barcodes to identify objects and automatically start capture sequences. For more information on wizard mode, refer to [PhotoRobot Controls App Wizard Mode Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/optical-character-recognition # SECTION: manuals > optical-character-recognition # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-10 --- # Optical Character Recognition (OCR) in PhotoRobot Controls The following user guide describes how to use the semi-automated Optical Character Recognition (OCR) tools in PhotoRobot Controls App software. ## Semi-Automated OCR Functionality in PhotoRobot Controls The following user guide describes how to use the **semi-automated** Optical Character Recognition (OCR) tools in PhotoRobot Controls App software. In [PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/software) (further just “CAPP”), the integrated OCR functionality enables the capture of imagery with the automatic recording of product data. **Note:** Only semi-automation of OCR data extraction is possible via PhotoRobot Controls, as there is no OCR endpoint available in the PhotoRobot Cloud API. OCR works in combination with the Unwrap tool in CAPP to read and extract text on packaging and labels, including text that wraps around cylindrical objects. CAPP then automatically records data such as weights, dimensions, ingredient lists, nutritional information, and on-package data to attach as meta data to individual images. This allows for the production of 360 spins in tandem with GS1 images, from packaging and informational photos, to planograms and marketing photos. At the same time, the automatic delivery features of CAPP help to support any manual processes, both simplifying and accelerating content delivery workflows. ## How to Use the OCR Tool in PhotoRobot Controls The following user guide describes in detail how to access and functionally operate the Optical Character Recognition tool in CAPP. Always ensure you are running the latest version of the software for the newest features and smoothest operation. **Note:** For more information on the installation and first use of CAPP, refer to the [PhotoRobot Getting Started User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 1. Create New Item in CAPP To access PhotoRobot’s OCR feature, first open the local version of CAPP, and create a new Project (if one does not already exist). Next, in the new Project, create a new Item for the product you will photograph. Then, create a folder for Stills, and add at least one frame. ## 2. Photograph the Item After adding the folder for Stills with at least one frame, press the Start button (or scan the start barcode) using the Capture mode interface of CAPP to photograph the item. ## 3. Apply Edits to the Images Apply any edits to the photo, for example: cropping, or any editing presets already configured in CAPP. ## 4. Upload the Item to the Cloud If not automatically uploading the item to PhotoRobot Cloud, manually upload the item to PhotoRobot Cloud, and then switch to the Edit mode interface. ## 5. Extract OCR Annotations in Edit Mode In the Edit mode interface in the Cloud version of CAPP, click the three vertical dots next to the thumbnail image of the item on the left-hand side of the screen. Then, click **Extract OCR annotations**. The thumbnail will already be modified to contain the OCR data. ## 6. Check OCR Annotations Across Folder Additionally, it is possible to check the OCR annotations for an entire folder by opening the individual folder options, and clicking **OCR annotations**. ## 7. Export Item with OCR Annotations To export an Item with OCR annotations, open a Project in the local version of CAPP. Next, click the three vertical dots next to the item in the Item list, and click Export to open the export options. ## 8. Configure Export Options for OCR Annotations In the export options in the local version of CAPP, first choose which items to export from All folders or Selected folders. Ensure first to double-check the Output folder, and then locate the **Gallery (optional)** export options. Check all boxes ON in this field if not already done: **Add HTML Preview**, **Add extracted OCR data into data.json config**, and **Add data.json config for PhotoRobot SpinViewer**. ## 9. Export with OCR to the Local Disk Export Directory After double-checking all export settings, click **Export** to export the images with annotations to the export directory on your local disk. Then, find the file “data.json” in the export directory. ## 10. Access the Extracted OCR Data for Review In order to view the OCR data extracted, locate the file “...extractedOcrData”:["Furjee"]}]...” This is where all data is stored. **Note: There is no OCR endpoint available in PhotoRobot Cloud API.** ## Additional PhotoRobot OCR Resources For more information on PhotoRobot’s OCR feature and GS1 image capture, refer to: - [PhotoRobot GS1 Image Capture](https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards) - [PhotoRobot Grocery Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/grocery-product-photography) - [Optical Character Recognition with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/optical-character-recognition) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-broncolor-lights-management # SECTION: manuals > photorobot-broncolor-lights-management # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-30 --- # PhotoRobot - Broncolor Lights Management This support manual describes the hardware and software components necessary for the management of Broncolor lights in the PhotoRobot ecosystem. ## PhotoRobot - Broncolor Lights Management This support manual describes the hardware and software components necessary for the management of Broncolor lights in the PhotoRobot ecosystem. It includes the hardware components, software tools, principle modes, and recommended settings for the **Siros 400/800 WiFi/RFS2 series**. Image from [Broncolor Siros S series monolight](https://broncolor.swiss/products/siros-s) **Note:** Broncolor lights are managed directly in [PhotoRobot _Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started) (further referred to as “CAPP”). CAPP ensures there is no need to install drivers for Broncolor hardware management on the customer side. - For function management and flash intensity: - There is no extra hardware necessary at the site of the computer. - There is no extra hardware necessary at the site of the lights. - For flash triggering: - There is wireless or wire trigger connection to the camera. **Also note:** The Siros L series has a built-in WiFi module. If using the module in Enterprise mode, you should set up your network to use the recommended WiFI settings. **Recommended WiFi settings** include the following: - Ideally use a separate subnet, tested with a Mikrotik router RB1100AHx4. - Switch off WiFi Radio in the Mikrotik device; Broncolor lights do not function optimally with this on. - Configure the router as follows: - ether13 = WAN, DHCP client - ether1 - ether12 = LAN, all ports in a switch - Connect the WiFi module TP-link TLWR802N to any LAN port of the router. - For WiFi module configuration, use:some text - operation mode = Access Point - wifi mode = 11bgn mixed - channel = 9 - channel width = 20 MHz (40 MHz possible but check interferences) - security = WPA2-PSK - cipher = AES **( ! )** - When using the above configuration, please ensure the router and WiFi module are fully up and running before powering on the lights. The ideal configuration will run the router and the WiFi module continuously. ## Hardware Components for Lights Management Broncolor lights require no additional hardware components for connection to the computer or to the lights. All radio modules are also built-in, so there are no special drivers necessary for installation on the computer. The only extra hardware component requirement is a flash trigger, which must be installed on the camera. ### Radio component (2.4 GHz) For the radio component, PhotoRobot recommends the Broncolor RFS 2.1 transceiver (2.4 GHz). Broncolor RFS 2.1 transceiver (2.4 GHz) ## Software Tools In CAPP, there is an application by the name of BronControl for management of lights directly in PhotoRobot software. The application is downloadable for Mac, Windows, Android, and iOS directly from within CAPP via links in the Downloads section. ## Principle Modes With their built-in WiFi module, Broncolor lights can operate in two principle modes. ### Private mode In Private mode, WiFi is active on more than one monolight, with all units linking up automatically to the same studio address to form a private network. A smartphone or tablet must then be connected to this network in order to control it. To achieve this, activate the WiFi function on your smartphone or tablet. The device should automatically search for available WiFi networks. Then, connect the smartphone or table to the appropriate Bron-Studio network. The connection password is: bronControl. Next, start the “bronControl” app on your device. Add the appropriate studio number under “add new studio” and connect the app with this studio. For further instructions, it is also possible to use the help function “?” in the app. ### Enterprise mode If there is an existing WiFi network (router), the unit can be integrated into this network using a smartphone or tablet. To achieve this, in the "bronControl" app, under settings, go to "Network Settings" and enter your router’s settings in "enterprise" mode. Then, ensure the units are set to the correct studio address. Siros saves the last type of connection, and tries to connect to the last seen network when restarting next time. ## Recommended Settings PhotoRobot recommends using Enterprise mode for functional operation with Broncolor lights. The recommended steps are as follows. 1. Press the **TEST** button and hold it for 10 seconds to reset the whole light to factory settings. Also, ensure manually, using PC or mobile phone, that there is no available WiFi network with “SSID = Bron-Studio1”. 2. Power the light Off / On. 3. Press the rotary controller to enter the main menu. The main display (between MOD and TEST buttons) shows corresponding values to the selected menu item. 4. Turn the rotary controller unit until you reach the menu item “wifi”. 5. Press the rotary controller to confirm the operation with WiFi. The “wifi” display will begin to blink on success confirmation. 6. Turn the rotary controller until “SY” appears on the main display. 7. Confirm this selection by pressing the rotary controller. After this confirmation, the unit switches into WiFi private mode. Now, the light functions as a WiFi Access Point, with SSID=”Bron-Studio1”, password=”bronControl”. 8. Next, you need a client device with a WiFi module for PC / Mac / Android / iOS. Install the “bronControl” application to the client device based on its operation system. **Note:** the bronControl app is available for for Android and iOS in relevant App Stores, or you can download the application for Windows and OSX directly from the [downloads section on Broncolor’s web](https://www.broncolor.swiss/broncolor/products/downloads/software). It is then possible to connect the client device on PC / Mac / Android / iOS to the Bron-StudioX SSID, password=”bronControl”. 9. Start the BronControl application, and choose studio “Bron-Studio1”. 10. Click on the cogwheel symbol in the upper-right corner of the BronControl app window. 11. Click **Network settings**, then **Enterprise mode**, and **Select network**. 12. *If using the Windows operating system, in the first field of the “Select network” section, select the SSID of your choice from the list of available WiFi networks (typically, “PhotoRobotNet”). 13. *If using the Android operation system, manually enter the SSID into the first field of the “Select network” section (typically, “PhotoRobotNet”). Next, move the cursor into the second field “Password” and enter the wifi password (secretpass). ***For additional wifi settings, please take into account the recommended settings at the start of this manual.*** 14. *If using Windows or Mac, fill in the password (from step 13), and press the Enter key on your keyboard to confirm. 15. *For Android, fill in the password (from step 13), and click the tick mark to confirm. 16. When the WiFi symbol maintains a steady glow in magenta color, the Broncolor light has successfully connected to the desired WiFi network. At this point, the WiFi symbol on the Broncolor light should change color from blue to magenta, and start flashing. If the Wifi symbol does not change color and remains blue, then return to step 5 and repeat all steps. If you are connected to the light, you can then manage some of its functions, such as: Mod light, Test flash, Standby mode, and others. The network-connected light is also now ready to control in PhotoRobot _Controls software. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-medical-pink # SECTION: manuals > photorobot-medical-pink # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-03-10 --- # PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation This user guide describes the PhotoRobot Medical system PINK and instructions for the system’s functional operation by the customer. ## PhotoRobot PINK User Guide & Instructions for Operation The following user guide describes the [PhotoRobot Medical system PINK](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pink-the-medical-robot-photographer), and instructions for the system’s functional operation by the customer. This includes general safety information & instructions, the product description, machine components, user interfaces, software controls, dimensions, troubleshooting, and maintenance. ## Welcome to PhotoRobot Medical - PINK Thank you, and congratulations on purchasing your PhotoRobot Medical clinic photography system: PINK! PhotoRobot PINK not only represents decades of professional experience and innovation in automated photography processes. It is a revolution in PhotoRobot technology, with a design to support automated photography of patients in a clinic setting. Use the following information to familiarize yourself and clinic teams with the device, and to welcome PhotoRobot PINK into your workflows. ## 1. Safety Information & Instructions **Important:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to any supplied instructions for your device before any self-installation or first use. Further, the initial installation of a PhotoRobot device should always be performed by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. The manufacturer is not responsible for any injury or damage caused by an incorrect installation of the device. Additionally, before operation, refer to the following safety instructions specific to use of the PhotoRobot PINK system. ### 1.1. Safe Machine Use of PhotoRobot PINK For the safe operation of PhotoRobot PINK, note the following risks and guidelines. - There is risk of injury, electrical shock, fire, burns or damage to the machine. - Use the device inside buildings only. - Do not place flammable products or items that are doused in flammable products near or on the machine. - Do not touch any part of the appliance when it is moving. - The machine can not be used as a therapeutic or rehabilitation device. - A maximum of one person can use the machine. - Increase / decrease the speed slowly to avoid any injury. - The clothing of the user should not be too loose in order to prevent clothes from being caught by the machine. - Do not leave the machine unattended when the platform is moving. - Do not use the machine: - on uneven surfaces; - in direct sunlight or near a heat source; - in a wet or humid environment; - in any confined, uncirculated, or flammable contained space. - The free space around the machine must include an emergency exit area. - If the machine or some of its parts are damaged, do not attempt operating the machine. - There is a risk of electric shock or death when water comes in contact with the electrical part of the machine or its accessories. - Do not place any objects on the platform. - The appliance is designed for operation in an industrial environment. ## 2. Product Description - PhotoRobot PINK PhotoRobot PINK is a machine designed to capture images of the upper part of a standing person (patient) from defined angles in a clinical environment. The patient is illuminated for photography using professional-quality LED panels, while an evenly illuminated background guarantees easy automated background separation. At the same time, the intensity of all lights is DMX-controlled by the system, allowing for the creation of various presets (if required) that may vary depending on the color of the skin, for example. ### 2.1. Machine Components - Machine Floor **(1)** - Rotary Platform **(2)** - Operator’s Column **(3)** - Operator’s Computer **(4)** – with barcode scanner, keyboard, trackpad - Patient’s Screen **(5)** – with camera and speakers - Power Socket, LAN Socket **(6)** - Service Doors **(7)** - Patients Telescopic Handlebars **(8)** - Front Lights **(9)** - Back Light **(10)** - Lampshade **(11)** – parasite light protection - Camera Slider Assembly **(12)** - Digital Camera with 50mm fixed-focal lens **(13)** - Vertical Line Laser **(14)** - Emergency Stop, Power Switch **(15)** ### 2.2. Operator's Computer Interface The Operator’s workspace is equipped with a VESA-mounted Apple iMac computer with a keyboard (national version) and trackpad (built-into the table). At the same time, the keyboard and trackpad are easily removable for cleaning. The User interface is based on PhotoRobot_controls system and available in two versions: 1. **“Kiosk” mode** – allowing only the scanning of patient barcodes by the user, while the rest of the process is fully automated; 2. **“Full” mode** – allowing detailed settings for the entire system. ### 2.3. Patient Computer Interface The Patient screen is equipped with a VESA-mounted Apple Studio display, allowing remote video conferencing with doctors (using audio and video). - **Note:** At the same time, the patient screen can also be used to show a set of images with audible or written instructions for the patients before the pictures’ automated capturing process begins. ### 2.4. Patient's Setup Camera height above the floor is manually adjustable to reach the optimal position towards the patient's breasts. The lens level is indicated via a horizontal laser level, while the laser is switched on / off automatically. When the machine is on and the automated capturing process is not running, the laser is on. When the capturing process starts, the laser is switched off automatically so that the laser line is not present in the images. The patient's armrests are height adjustable. The arm position is described by the clinic requirements. To release the retractable telescopic supports, press the button at the top of the handlebar. The lift is supported by a pneumatic piston, so the movement is slow and the way up is usually automatic; moving down requires a press down (while pressing the button). ### 2.5. Network Connectivity The robot is equipped with all the necessary network components internally: - Computer and robot controller via a computer network (to a built-in router), - Camera via USB (to the computer), - LED lights via a DMX bus (to the robots controller), - Barcode reader via USB (to the computer). The following text is useful for servicing and diagnostic purposes only; the operation of the machine is fluent without these steps. **2.5.1.** To locate the PINK robot in the computer network, ensure the power switch on the robot is in the OFF position, and plug the power cord into the electrical socket. Then, connect the machine to the internet. Both connectors are located at the back side of the machine. **2.5.2.** Next, power on the main switch on the machine and wait 2 minutes until it is completely up and running (this will initiate the machine controller, light controllers etc.). Later, power on the computer and extended display. **2.5.3.** Download the “Frfind” utility for finding robots on the local network via [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads), and start the Frfind application. It will search the local network for PhotoRobots. If one is found, copy its IP address and paste it in URL format into any web browser started on the computer. This will open the Service GUI. **2.5.4.** In the Service GUI, turn on the motor. **3.5.4.** Next, turn the platform to any angle to test it. ## 3. Software - PhotoRobot Controls App Workplace control is included in the PhotoRobot Controls software, which is a part of your PINK robot delivery. Please register at **account.photorobot.com** to have access for your software license (and for a related license key, contact PhotoRobot support). The software can be downloaded via the [PhotoRobot Account Downloads Page](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). The PINK workplace includes a special software modification aimed to allow the operator to easily take photos with minimal knowledge of the software. For this purpose, a wizard was developed to guide the operator through the scanning process. After starting the application, wizard mode is automatically turned on. **Note:** For more general information on PhotoRobot wizards, refer to [PhotoRobot Controls - Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production). For the technical instructions on wizards mode, refer to the [Wizard Mode Configuration Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode). ### 3.1. How to Start PINK **3.1.1.** To start taking photos with PINK, begin by selecting the **Project** for which you want to take photos. In the case of PINK, a project can mean the location of a workplace somewhere in the world, for example: Portugal. **3.1.2.** Once you have selected a Project, a list of patients you have photographed will appear. To take a new series of pictures, click on the **+ Add person** button at the top of the list to start the wizard. ### 3.2. Wizard Steps **3.2.1.** At the wizard's first step, you must specify the patient for whom you will take photos. To maintain anonymity, it was agreed that a QR code / barcode would be used together with a wireless code reader that is part of the workplace. Each patient will then have their own unique QR code / barcode with which they will be identified in the system. - Name of Project to Scan Photos **(1)** - QR / Barcode of Patient **(2)** - Confirmation and Start Scanning **(3)** **3.2.2.** After starting the wizard, the next screen gradually prompts the user to action. In the first step, the LiveView of the camera is automatically turned on. At the same time, the left-hand side of the interface displays the current step and its instructions. Then, there are the following main user controls. - Step Name **(1)** - Step Instructions **(2)** - Camera LiveView **(3)** - Laser **(4)** – which can also be positioned vertically by grabbing the handle on which the camera is attached - Light Control **(5)** – with a three-position switch for light controls: - Moon Icon: Turn off completely - Working Icon: Display sensitivity during scanning, with position switched on automatically as soon as you start scanning in the next step – there is no need to worry about it being in the right position - Full Icon: Full lighting intensity - Next Button **(6)** – click to move to the next step after completing instructions **3.2.3.** In the next step, the process of scanning the patient begins. Press the **Play** (start) button, and the workplace will automatically take pictures from pre-defined angles. Then, after the capture process is complete, the photos will be automatically cropped, and a blue background will be set. The controls in this step are as follows. - Preset Angles **(1)** in which the patient will be scanned - Play Button **(2)** to start the scanning process - Delete Button **(3)** to repeat the capture, delete the existing images, and start the capture again using the Play button - New Person **(4)** for when you are satisfied with the scanning, and wish to switch to scanning the next person. Subsequently, after switching to the next person, the wizard's first step will be displayed again, and the user repeats the steps described above. ### 3.3. Data structure The data structure levels are: **Projects > Image type > Patient > Folders > Images**. The sample hierarchy tree follows: - *Portuguese clinic (Project)* - *Processed (* ***Image type - in this folder are edited / cropped final images*** *)* - *20000001_9000001 (* ***Patient with CCC and CID*** *) [* ***Format: CCC_CID*** *]* - *2023-01-17 (Folder - scanning batch) [* ***Format: YYYY-MM-DD*** *]* - *20000001_9000001_r000_a000.png (Image)* ***[Format: CCC_CID_row_angle.png]*** - *20000001_9000001_r000_a045.png (Image)* - *…* - *2023-02-01 (Folder - scanning batch)* - *20000001_9000001_r000_a000.png (Image - specific angle)* - *20000001_9000001_r000_a045.png (Image - specific angle)* - *…* - *20000002_ (* ***Patient without CID*** *)* - *2022-01-17 (Folder - scanning batch)* - *20000002__r000_a000.png (Image - specific angle)* - *20000002__r000_a045.png (Image - specific angle)* - *…* - *Polish clinic (Project)* - *Processed* - *20000005_9000006 (* ***Patient with CCC and CID*** *)* - *2022-09-01 (Folder - scanning batch)* - *20000005_9000006_r000_a000.png (Image)* - *20000005_9000006_r000_a045.png (Image)* - *…* **Note:** If sample clinic project data (of the Portuguese clinic project) is needed, contact your PhotoRobot representative for the download link. On the harddrive, there are then two types of images / image types: - **Original:** Image from the Camera - **Processed:** Cropped images with other edit operations applied. For synchronization, the **Processed** data will be essential. In the case of implementing a script (to monitor folder structure), take into account that there must be some delay (time) after which it will synchronize data with PINK systems. **Important:** Choose the time based on when you know that you will not change the data. This is for cases when sometimes it is necessary to recapture a person again. #### Local Files / Folders Configuration Configuration of the target folder on a local drive is set in the app via: **Settings > General > Local Files > Output Folder**. #### File Names Configuration The configuration of file names is provided by PhotoRobot and cannot be changed by the customer. The file names configuration is: - Spin Filename: - Original - ${projectName}/Original/${itemName}_${trackingCode}/${folderName}/${itemName}_${trackingCode}_${turnAngle}.jpg - Processed - ${projectName}/Processed/${itemName}_${trackingCode}/${folderName}/${itemName}_${trackingCode}_${turnAngle}.jpg - Stills Filename: - Original - ${projectName}/Original/${itemName}_${trackingCode}/${folderName}/${itemName}_${trackingCode}_${turnAngle}.jpg - Processed - ${projectName}/Processed/${itemName}_${trackingCode}/${folderName}/${itemName}_${trackingCode}_${turnAngle}.jpg #### Wizards General Configuration All wizard configurations are provided by PhotoRobot. It is recommended that the customer not modify these configurations. General configuration of the wizard is available via the Settings menu / Wizards, which includes the following settings. - After starting PhotRobot Controls application, enter wizard mode - Start in the project: Portuguese clinic*–* note the project for each clinic will be different based on location #### Wizard Steps Settings The following details the general steps settings for all PINK workstations. Configuration is created once at the start of the installation. In order to add a configuration, go to **Settings**, open the **Wizards** options, and click **+ Add wizard**. Then, complete the dialogue using the following values: - **Name:** PINK Wizard, - **Item Name:** person, - **Preset:** PINK Preset, - **Workspace:** PINK Workspace, - **Steps:** contains JSON configuration of the steps. Next, use the following configuration: > [ > { > "type": "pink-select-patient", > "design": { > "bgImage": "https://hosting.photorobot.com/images/-N83FQcLGsHMXdcYTzhe/-NEGUsIT6MrjA2Hq5LVF/NORMAL/ko5G2B948qAWsuiQ2Gs8xw?w=1920" > } > }, > { > "type": "liveview", > "title": "Check person position", > "note": "A person can enter the turntable facing the camera. Aim the laser at the vertical center of the breast.", > "cameraAngle": 15 > }, > { > "type": "pink-capture-patient", > "title": "Capture person", > "frames": [ > {"swingAbs": 0, "turnAbs": 0}, > {"swingAbs": 0, "turnAbs": 45}, > {"swingAbs": 0, "turnAbs": 90}, > {"swingAbs": 0, "turnAbs": 270}, > {"swingAbs": 0, "turnAbs": 315} > ] > } > ] ### 3.4. Create New Project **3.4.1.** If you want to scan into a new project (new clinic), you can create a new project from the list of projects by clicking on **+ Add project** in the header. **3.4.2.** After choosing to add a new project, a dialogue box will open where you can choose a project name. **3.4.3.** Next, note that filling in the Wizard field is important, as it is necessary for the photo capture process. Refer to the following same dialog to ensure the Wizard field is complete. ## 4. Machine Dimensions All dimensions in the PINK diagrams are illustrated in metric (mm) measurements. Note: To view a 3D model of the PINK machine dimensions with AR functionality, scan the following barcode, and view the 3D model using [eDrawingsviewer](https://www.edrawingsviewer.com/download-edrawings): The overall weight of the PINK machine and its equipment is 500 kg, and its dimensions are as follows. ## 5. Troubleshooting For solutions to common issues which may occur, refer to [PhotoRobot Troubleshooting](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting). If encountering issues during machine operation, feel free to send a support ticket to [PhotoRobot Support](https://support.photorobot.com). PhotoRobot’s seasoned team of technicians will help manage the issues. **Note:** Registration to your PhotoRobot Account is related to the software, PhotoRobot Controls App, which you are operating on the PINK machine. ## 6. Movement Stop ### 6.1. Soft Stop In the case of a “soft stop” when the sequence completes the currently planned movement, it is possible to use the spacebar to pause the sequence. ### 6.2. Hard Stop During operation (platform movement), the ESC key works as an immediate “hard stop” (to immediately stop the movement of the platform or the running sequence). Alternatively, movement can be stopped by pressing the **STOP** button next to the Play / start button. ### 6.3. Emergency Stop Anytime the (hardware) emergency stop button is pressed, it stops the movement (if currently running), and makes the platform free-moving (motor is disconnected). When the button remains pressed, the machine cannot perform movements by the software. After the emergency is solved and the emergency button is released, the platform needs to be re-positioned to the initial position (if in a different position) – see the next point for details. The next robotic movement will power the motor on again (with automatic operation or zero-positioning movements). ### 6.4. Returning the Platform to Proper Zero Position After an emergency stop or other stop operation in “non-zero-position,” please use the virtual arrow keys to move the platform into the expected zero position using the following steps. - **Step 1:** In the right panel of the Robots widget, use the arrows to rotate the platform to the zero position. - **Step 2:** When the platform is at zero, confirm this position by pressing the button “Set current position to zero.” ## 7. Maintenance and Revisions Important: The machine is to be reviewed once annually by authorized personnel as follows: 1. Rotary Platform Drive Inspection 2. Camera Lift Inspection 3. Inspection of Telescopic Supports (handlebars) 4. Inspection of the Luminosity of the Built-in LED panels and its DMX Controllers For technical support, please [create a PhotoRobot support ticket](https://support.photorobot.com/) using your PhotoRobot account. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites # SECTION: manuals > photorobot-networking-prerequisites # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-03 --- # PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration The following information contains the detailed networking prerequisites and network configuration for the functional operation of PhotoRobot. ## PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration The following information contains the detailed networking prerequisites and network configuration for the functional operation of PhotoRobot. This technical documentation aims to support existing customers who either do not possess preconfigured equipment, or whose IT department requires independent setup. **Note:** In standard practice, there are preconfigured routers delivered with PhotoRobot to meet networking prerequisites. This helps to both simplify the onboarding of PhotoRobot technology, and to significantly reduce support demands. In this case, the router functions as a small internal network within the customer’s main network. This internal network fully complies with all PhotoRobot communication requirements. Meanwhile, the computer, studio lights (connected via a dedicated Wi-Fi to avoid issues with the customer’s Wi-Fi), all robots, and laser boxes are connected within this isolated subnet. The customer’s studio network then only requires internet access for this small network. Although, when necessary, such as for customers who do not have or are not able to use preconfigured equipment, or who require independent setup, the following network configuration manual is available. This document is under continuous development to support independent network setup. Thus, also refer to any documentation provided to you specifically by PhotoRobot in addition to this online networking configuration manual. ## 1. Networking: PhotoRobot’s Prerequisites This section provides a summary description of the network requirements for PhotoRobot’s functional operation. It includes a protocol / port mapping list, and links to diagnostic tools. Note that each PhotoRobot consists of both a mechanical part and a Control Unit. The Control Unit is either a separate 19” rack-mount unit, or it is built directly into the machine body (such as in Compact machine versions). Further, the Control Unit is connected to the local network. The following Control Unit generations are currently supported: - Control Unit G5 - Control Unit G6 - Control Unit G7 Remote software is available to control PhotoRobot hardware (based on a built-in server). The PhotoRobot Touch application is a remote camera application operated on iOS and iPadOS systems. ### 1.1. PhotoRobot _Controls Software Suite PhotoRobot _Controls Software Suite is the preferred and fully supported software suite that functions with PhotoRobot hardware. The software is in continuous development to support all new versions of PhotoRobot equipment and new versions of supported operating systems on Apple platforms and Windows. ### 1.2. BASIP Software BASIP software was previously provided with PhotoRobot from 2005 - 2015, but is now discontinued. There is now no development or support for BASIP. ### 1.3. SpinMe Studio Software SpinMe Studio Software is supported by SpinMe Ltd. Note: This software package covers **only partial functions** of PhotoRobot hardware. The Control Units also require a **valid PhotoRobot API License** to be managed by this software. ### 1.4 Internet Connection In general, it is necessary to have an internet connection for 100% functionality of PhotoRobot equipment. This is due to the hardware controllers (Control Units Gx), and the software packages. For information on special situations where an internet connection is unavailable or restricted, refer to the Appendix Information at the end of this document. ## 2. PhotoRobot Networking - General Overview The following general overview of PhotoRobot networking is for quick-start information only. It summarizes the modules, Control Unit (G6) parameters, and how to connect PhotoRobot to a customer’s network. For the detailed description of PhotoRobot networking prerequisites, proceed to the next section (3) in this document. ### 2.1. Summary of Modules PhotoRobot is a modular unit. From a networking point of view, there are two modules available: 1. PhotoRobot Equipment 2. Router ### 2.2. Summary of Control Unit (G6) The controller supports a built-in 10/100 ethernet connection, and an RJ45 network interface. Operation in a computer network then requires open ports and protocols as defined in the user manual, [PhotoRobot System Requirements](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements). Additionally, the local PhotoRobot subnet hosting all PhotoRobot components uses the protocols / ports in the following table: | Protocol | Port | Direction | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | TCP | 7777 | outbound | communication with control units version 6 and newer | | TCP | 7778 | outbound | communication with control units version 6 and newer | | UDP | 6666 | outbound | discovering all PhotoRobots (Control Units) on the local network | | UDP | 6660 | inbound | response to UDP broadcast from port 6666 for control units versions 4, 5 | ### 2.3. Connecting PhotoRobot to the Local Network From a networking perspective, PhotoRobot is a network device. PhotoRobot connects to the local network using a standard **ethernet cable**. Wi-Fi connection is not recommended. For diagnostics and troubleshooting, there are the following recommended utilities: - Windows - [frfind.exe for Windows](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXdEFKdzB6WVFWcGc) - Mac OS X - [frfind for macOS](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXTU1CYUZrY1dGdzQ) - Android (discontinued) - [PhotoRobot Locator in Google Play](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.photorobot.locator&pcampaignid=web_share) - iPhone, iPad - [PhotoRobot Locator on iTunes](https://itunes.apple.com/au/developer/photorobot-com/id900448053) - Ping - Standard Windows or Mac OS echo request tool within the operating system **Note**: Applications to search for PhotoRobot on the network are also available via links within [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). Additionally, while the Android version of PhotoRobot Locator is now discontinued, this discontinuation is not without replacement – and also concerns the frfind application. To expedite the process, **PhotoRobot _Controls now integrates a tool to locate individual Control Units and open their diagnostic web pages directly in the software**. Ensure you are running the latest version of the software to access this time-saving feature. Then, in order to identify a robot on the network directly within CAPP, open the local version of CAPP, go to Settings, and click **Robots / Control units**. The Robots / Control units menu displays columns with Name, Network, Unit, Version, Discovered, and Identify for each robot. If the dot to the left of the robot name is green, it is online. Clicking the robot field will then open the robot’s website interface. This will also make the LED light on the robot’s Control Unit blink green for its easier identification. ## 3. Detailed PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites The following information describes in detail the technical configuration of PhotoRobot networking parameters. This section is intended only for use by an experienced system administrator in special cases, and in combination with any supplementary guidance and additional materials provided by PhotoRobots specifically for your installation. **Note:** PhotoRobot is a modular unit consisting of both hardware and software. In terms of networking, PhotoRobot has two modules: the PhotoRobot equipment, and the router connecting PhotoRobot to the local network. ### 3.1. General PhotoRobot Networking Requirements The general networking requirements for PhotoRobot equipment are as follows. - There must be a DHCP server on the local network. It is also not generally recommended to use a fixed IP address for PhotoRobot. If fixed IP addresses are required, refer to [PhotoRobot Support](https://support.photorobot.com/) for guidance. - Local PhotoRobot subnet allows for sending UDP broadcasts to ports 6666, 67, 53. - Accepts UDP broadcasting to address 255.255.255.255, port 6666. - Accepts UDP broadcasting to its broadcast address (for example, 10.1.2.255), port 6666. - An **ethernet cable connection** to the local customer LAN is necessary; one data socket must be available. Avoid Wi-Fi connection. - An internet connection from the local network is necessary for PhotoRobot equipment. In special situations where the local internet connection is unavailable, please contact technical support. - Requirements in the following sections must be met concerning the Control Unit, required protocols and ports for LAN operation, and PhotoRobot Cloud. **No proxy, no SSL/TLS inspection.** Control Units connect directly to the internet and cannot use a proxy server – neither explicit nor transparent, with or without authentication. Outbound HTTPS from the Control Units to as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net (TCP 443) must bypass any web proxy, content filter and SSL/TLS inspection; the server certificate must not be replaced. If the corporate network enforces a proxy for all traffic, exempt the Control Units’ IP or MAC addresses, or connect PhotoRobot through the preconfigured PhotoRobot router with a direct internet uplink. **Symptom of a blocking proxy:** the Control Unit shows “Activation error” and its system log reports “server replied: Forbidden” or “SSL handshake failed”, while the Activation Server receives no request from the unit. See also 7.3. ### 3.2. Control Unit (G4, G5) The Control Unit Generation 4 and Generation 5 are both older versions which are now obsolete and no longer with support or service. In case of failure of the device, upgrading to a newer version is recommended. Versions 4 and 5 are based on RM1 (with dsPIC33F high-performance DSC) or RM32 (with PIC32MX MCU). - The Controller with RM1 supports a built-in 10 Base-T ethernet interface with an RJ45 connector. - The controller with RM2 supports a built-in 10/100 Base-TX ethernet interface with an RJ45 connector. ### 3.3. Required Protocols and Ports for Local Network Operation (G4, G5) For the Control Unit G4 and G5, the following protocols and ports are necessary for operation in a local network. | TCP | 9791 | inbound | The port number can be changed manually, It is used for sending commands or requests from applications into the controller | | TCP | 9791 | outbound | The port number can be changed manually, It is used for acknowledgements or answers from the controller into applications | | TCP | 9792 | outbound | The port number cannot be changed manually and is always higher by 1 than the port described above It is used for sending asynchronous messages from the controller | | TCP | 80 | outbound | http client, calling: activate.khnet.cz | | UDP | 6666 | inbound | UDP server listener for receiving broadcast packets The client application may send this broadcast to discover all PhotoRobots version 4,5,6 connected to the local network | | UDP | 6660 | outbound | Response to UDP broadcast from port 6666 | | UDP | 67 | outbound | asking DHCP server | | UDP | 68 | inbound | DHCP server response | | UDP | 53 | outbound | asking DNS server | | TCP | 53 | outbound | asking DNS server | - *The local network requires UDP broadcasts to be sent to ports 6666, 67, and 53.* - *Local networks must accept UDP broadcasting to address 255.255.255.255, port 6666.* - *Local networks must accept UDP broadcasting to its broadcast address (for example 10.1.2.255), port 6666.* - *It is not required to expose any of the PhotoRobot components directly to the internet via a public IP address nor NAT.* ### 3.4. Control Unit (G6, G7) Control Unit G6 and G7 are based on the Beagle Bone Black platform, which has an ARM Cortex A8 CPU running a customized Xenomai Linux distribution. The controller supports built-in 10/100 ethernet, with an RJ45 network interface for connection to the network. ### 3.5. Required Protocols and Ports for Local Network Operation (G6, G7) The following **protocols and ports are required for operation** of the Control Unit G6 and G7 in a local network. | TCP | 7777 | inbound | PhotoRobot server | | TCP | 7778 | inbound | PhotoRobot server | | TCP | 80 | inbound | http server for controller v6 remote control | | TCP | 80 | outbound | upgrade PhotoRobot | | TCP | 443 | outbound | activation server | | UDP | 6666 | inbound | UDP server listener for receiving broadcast packets Client application may send this broadcast to discover all PhotoRobots versions 4,5,6 connected to the local network | | UDP | 6660 | outbound | Response to UDP broadcast from port 6666 – for compatibility with versions 4, 5. Version 6 responds to the port from which the broadcast was sent. It is a random number with respect to port assignment controlled by client OS. | | UDP | 67 | outbound | asking DHCP server | | UDP | 68 | inbound | DHCP server response | | UDP | 53 | inbound | DNS server, only for wifi connectivity | | UDP | 53 | outbound | asking DNS server | | TCP | 53 | outbound | asking DNS server | - *The local network must allow sending UDP broadcasts to ports 6666, 67, 53.* - *It is not required to expose any of the PhotoRobot components directly to the internet via public IP address nor NAT.* **Note:** Outbound HTTPS from the Control Units to the activation server (TCP 443) must not pass through a proxy server or SSL/TLS inspection. See 3.1. ### 3.6. PhotoRobot Cloud **PhotoRobot Cloud** is an extension of the local PhotoRobot Controls software, and it requires an active license to access the [cloud services on PhotoRobot Cloud](https://cloud2.photorobot.com). All communication is only via the standard secured port **443**. **Note:** Operation in a computer network requires open ports and protocols as defined in [PhotoRobot System Requirements](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements). ## 4. Connecting PhotoRobot to a Customer Network ### 4.1. Connecting PhotoRobot to a Network for the First Time In order to connect PhotoRobot equipment for the first time to a customer’s network, there are the following requirements: 1. PhotoRobot equipment with Control Unit. Check the version; it should be G6, G7, or newer. Control Unit versions G4 and G5 are obsolete and not used for new installations. If you need to install G4 or G5, please contact PhotoRobot Technical Support. 2. Client’s computer. This can be your own PC / Windows or MacOS device. 3. Testing utility for the client’s computer: [**frfind.exe for Windows**](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXdEFKdzB6WVFWcGc), or [**frfind for OS X**](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXTU1CYUZrY1dGdzQ). Download the utility, open the Downloads folder, and double-click “frfind.tar”. This will extract the executable frfind in the Downloads folder. 4. Basic information about the customer’s network. Consult with documentation if available, or with the IT administrators of your company. Regarding the basic information about the customer’s network, attempt to answer the following: 4a. Is there one RJ45 network socket available to connect PhotoRobot? 4b. Is a DHCP server running and distributing IP addresses, DNS info, and GW info? i. If yes, there will be no additional configuration necessary on PhotoRobot or on the client’s computer. ii. If there is no DHCP server, ask for: One static IP address, Network mask, the IP address of a gateway, and the IP address of a DNS server. ### 4.2. Connecting PhotoRobot with the Control Unit G5 If the PhotoRobot Control Unit connected is version G5, use the following instructions to connect PhotoRobot to the customer network. 1. Connect PhotoRobot using a regular ethernet cable to the router; no crossover cable is needed. It is expected that factory settings will be unchanged. This means no static address has been assigned to PhotoRobot, which is working as a DHCP client. No additional network setting is needed if there is a DHCP server in the network. If the static address is required, then configure PhotoRobot based on the steps to connect to a customer’s network for the first time from the previous section of this document (4.b.ii). 2. Switch on the PhotoRobot equipment. 3. Connect the client’s computer to the same router where PhotoRobot is connected. 4. Start testing the frfind utility on the client’s computer as described in the section Basic Connectivity Testing (5.1.). 5. If the frfind testing utility discovers PhotoRobot, the network is ready, and you can begin production using the PhotoRobot Controls application. ### 4.3. Connecting PhotoRobot with the Control Unit G6 If the PhotoRobot Control Unit connecting to the customer’s network is version G6, follow steps 1 - 4 from the previous section (4.2.). Then, note: 1. If the frfind testing utility starts on the client’s computer and discovers PhotoRobot, attempt connecting it from the client’s computer via web browser. To do this, enter the IP address of the discovered PhotoRobot into the browser’s address field, and press enter. This will open PhotoRobot’s service GUI. 2. If the service GUI is successfully reached, this testing phase is complete, and you can begin using the production application PhotoRobot Controls. ### 4.4. Standard Network Modules The standard network modules are the: - **Router**. The MikroTik router establishes PhotoRobot’s subnetwork inside a customer's network or next to it. All PhotoRobot devices are connected to the router's LAN side. - Router WAN ports: - The last port (highest number) if the rackmount router is delivered. - Port 1 if 4- or 5- port router is delivered. - All other router ports are configured as LAN ports. - Default LAN subnet address: 172.31.173.0/24 - Default router’s LAN IP address: 172.31.173.1 - LAN DHCP range: 172.31.173.10-100 - **Wi-Fi module**. - The Wi-Fi module is preconfigured for operation. - It operates as an access point with SSID PhotoRobotNet, using the password: **secret pass** ## 5. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting For diagnostics and troubleshooting of PhotoRobot networking, note it is expected that PhotoRobot has default settings. This means there should be no changed port numbers, and it is acting as a DHCP client. If this is not the case, reset all changes to factory settings first. A typical connection schema includes an intranet infrastructure represented by a switch or router and a DHCP server that gives out IP addresses to clients like PhotoRobots and clients' computers. By default, the following prerequisites must be met. 1. There is a DHCP server up and running, and distributing IP addresses, DNS info, and GW info to clients. 2. There is a network switch supporting 10/100 Base-TX ports, two of which are available for PhotoRobot and the client’s computer. Additional ports may be required to support network-connected accessories, like the FOMEI lights controller, etc. 3. Structured cabling is needed; do not use Wi-Fi. **Warning:** PhotoRobot G6 and the computer running PhotoRobot Controls **must be connected via LAN** (Ethernet) only. Using Wi-Fi or multiple network adapters simultaneously will cause connectivity issues. **The only exception is Broncolor Siros flash units**, which connect through a dedicated Wi-Fi network managed by the PhotoRobot Router (not the computer’s Wi-Fi). The only exception is support requests for unique testing scenarios. ### 5.1. Basic Connectivity Testing If issues arise, it is recommended that the PhotoRobot Control Unit and the client's computer be connected based on the infographic in the previous section, Diagnostics and Troubleshooting (5.). Use the utility application frfind as necessary to discover all PhotoRobot in the local network. **Also, ensure that the operating system on the client’s computer where the utility will run is not running inside of a virtual machine (VMware, Parallels, etc.).** If the operating system is inside of a virtual machine, the frfind utility may not access the local network outside of the client’s computer. ### 5.2. Windows If the client’s OS is Windows, [download the frfind utility](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXdEFKdzB6WVFWcGc) and save the downloaded file frfind.exe to a new local directory, for example: C:\TEMP. (Do not download the utility to Google Drive, a network drive, etc.). Next, run frfind.exe with administrator privileges (or as a restricted user). The Frfind utility searches the local network via all active local network interfaces for all connected and running PhotoRobots. If some are found, the following data displays: - IP address. - MAC address. - Control unit version. - PhotoRobot’s port number. Then, PhotoRobot’s port accessibility is checked. Note that: - All checked ports should be opened. - If one or more ports are closed, the closed port is highlighted in red. - The reason for a closed port can be any networking issue, or the fact that PhotoRobot is currently in use by another application holding the port. The following image displays an example of the above issue on the frfind interface. - In the above issue, there is a problem accessing PhotoRobot 192.168.2.16. because there is no reachable PhotoRobot port. The reason could be a networking issue, or that someone is currently and actively working with the unit, thus occupying the port. - Additionally, note that the network interface IP address 192.168.222.1 which shows that this computer runs on a virtual machine. This could block some applications, such as PhotoRobot Controls, BASIP, or SpinMe from connecting PhotoRobots. ### 5.3. MacOS To run a basic connectivity test on MacOS, download the utility application [frfind for Mac OS X](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXTU1CYUZrY1dGdzQ). Next, open the Downloads folder in Finder and double-click "frfind.tar" to extract the frfind file into the system Downloads. A command window will appear with the search in the process. The local network is scanned via all active local network interfaces for any running PhotoRobots. If some are discovered, their IP and MAC addresses, version, and ports are displayed: **Note:** - All checked ports must be opened. - If a port is closed, it is highlighted in red. - The reason for a closed port could be networking issues like firewall restrictions, or that someone is actively working with the unit, thus occupying the port. ### 5.4. Android **Warning: The Android application is no longer supported as of 2025. Its functionality is fully replaced by features integrated in PhotoRobot Controls.** Running the basic connectivity test on Android requires downloading the PhotoRobot Utility (previously [Locator on Google Play](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.photorobot.frfind&hl=cs)), or via [APK download](https://drive.google.com/open?id=1V6FRHRoOt95MLJMLRcMYCWQ-uORvf8-n). Next, connect your Android device via WiFi to the network where PhotoRobot is running, and start the Locator application. Pressing the **Search** button will then search the network for PhotoRobot. If a PhotoRobot is discovered, the following Locator screens will display: If PhotoRobot Control Unit G6 is discovered, the record is active, and two basic functions are available. The first function allows for clicking the record on the left, which opens a web browser accessing the remote control GUI: The second function helps to quickly and visually identify the Control Unit’s physical location by clicking the circle to the right of the record. The Control Unit will then blink the button with the PhotoRobot logo for two seconds. ### 5.5. iOS To run the basic connectivity test on iOS, download the [PhotoRobot Locator utility on the App Store](https://apps.apple.com/au/developer/photorobot-com/id900448053). Next, follow the same instructions as for the Android basic connectivity test in the previous section (5.4.). **Note:** The Locator app is available for iPhone and iPad. ## 6. Recommendations ### 6.1. Activation PhotoRobot Control Units must be activated for functional operation in a production environment. Note that during the activation process, the activation server must connect to the internet. It is also recommended that the new PhotoRobot be activated before transportation to a customer’s location. This requires locally connecting the PhotoRobot system to your own network with internet access, testing the PhotoRobot, and activating PhotoRobot. **Note:** If an internet connection is unavailable or restricted, refer to the Appendix section (8) further in this document. ## 7. Known Issues ### 7.1. PhotoRobot Not Recognized on Local Network If **PhotoRobot is not recognized on the local network**, there are the following possible causes of the issue, with the following solutions: 1. **The client’s computer is blocking communication.** - Try to switch off the firewall temporarily. - Try to switch off any antivirus software temporarily. - Ensure that the frfind utility is not running from a virtual machine (Parallels, VMware, etc.). 1. **The network is blocking communication.** - Ensure the client’s computer is not running a connection through a VPN. - Check if the client's computer and PhotoRobot are correctly connected to the same network. - Ensure that the DHCP server correctly distributes IP addresses, DNS info, and GW info. - Check if network devices (switch, firewall, router) allow communication on the ports listed in this document specific to your system. 1. **PhotoRobot doesn't respond.** - Reset PhotoRobot settings, especially if no static IP address should be set. - Try to connect the PhotoRobot to another network and check if one is recognized. ### 7.2. BASIP Application Does Not Recognize PhotoRobot **Warning: The BASIP application is no longer supported as of 2015. Its functionality is fully replaced by features integrated in PhotoRobot Controls.** The BASIP application in the Windows environment does not use all local network interfaces for searching for PhotoRobots. When there are more of them, BASIP chooses just one for operation. There are the following **Windows adapters**: 1. Vmware virtual ethernet adapter for VMnet8 2. Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Additionally, note the following parameters. - PhotoRobot is connected to the same network as the Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection. - The BASIP application searches for PhotoRobots on Vmware virtual ethernet adapter for VMnet8. - BASIP does not recognize any PhotoRobot. - The testing utility frfind recognizes PhotoRobot. - The solution is disabling the VMware virtual ethernet adapter for VMnet8 in Windows via network connection settings. - **Tip:** Run the “ncpa.cpl” command from the command line or via shortcut WinKey+R for the network adapters list and management. ### 7.3. Activation Error Behind a Corporate Proxy If the Control Unit shows **“Activation error”** on a corporate network, the most likely cause is a web proxy or SSL/TLS inspection between the Control Unit and the internet. - **Symptom:** the Control Unit’s system log reports “server replied: Forbidden” or “SSL handshake failed”, while the Activation Server receives no request from the unit. - **Solution:** let outbound HTTPS from the Control Units to as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net (TCP 443) bypass the proxy, content filter and SSL/TLS inspection by exempting the Control Units’ IP or MAC addresses, or connect PhotoRobot through the preconfigured PhotoRobot router with a direct internet uplink. See 3.1. ## 8. Appendix Information ### 8.1. Usage with Limited Internet Connection In special situations where an internet connection is unavailable at the installation location (typically military use), alternative methods of using PhotoRobot systems exist. The same applies in regions where selected Google infrastructures are restricted (typically the People's Republic of China). In principle, the following methods to overcome technical or regulatory restrictions are available upon request under special conditions and contracts. **Note: In these situations, there are several limitations to the system's usage.** Please contact the technical support team or your sales engineer to consult the details and **perform pre-installation tests** in your environment. ### 8.2. Control Units Regarding the Control Units (G6 and higher), note they must be activated by a long-term **offline activation key** (for a given repeating period, ex: 12 months). Meanwhile, the initial and subsequent activations are performed via a unique activation string for remote activations provided by the PhotoRobot Support Team electronically. ### 8.3. PhotoRobot Cloud Software Suite Note that the PhotoRobot Cloud Software Suite is not accessible for usage with limited internet connection. Instead, PhotoRobot _Controls is only available in the **local version**. ### 8.4. PhotoRobot Local Software Application PhotoRobot _Controls App must be activated by a long-term **offline activation key** (for a specified repeating period, ex: 12 months). Meanwhile, the first and subsequent activations are performed via a unique activation string for remote activations provided by the PhotoRobot support team electronically. ### 8.5. PhotoRobot Account The PhotoRobot Account (managed in the cloud via a web interface) is not available when Google Cloud is restricted. The cloud account can be reached from a non-restricted area, or the customer has a dedicated e-mail address to manage the **settings**, **billing**, and other account-related issues. ### 8.6. PhotoRobot Support Portal The PhotoRobot Support Portal (managed in the cloud via a web interface) is not available when Google Cloud is restricted. The cloud account can be reached from a non-restricted area, or the customer has a dedicated e-mail address to manage the **support tickets**. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats # SECTION: manuals > photorobot-supported-3d-model-formats # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-05-13 --- # PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats Read an overview of PhotoRobot Controls App supported 3D model formats, their features, use cases, and compatibility across platforms. ## PhotoRobot Controls Supported 3D Model Formats PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”) supports multiple 3D model formats. This is thanks to CAPP’s integration of Apple Object Capture, which uses photogrammetry scanning to create a 3D model from photos. The following overview will provide a list of PhotoRobot supported 3D model formats, their features, and their compatibility across platforms. **Note:** This overview provides only information on 3D model formats. To learn about using CAPP to capture 3D models, see the [Capturing Images User Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images). ## 1 - USDZ (Universal Scene Description Zip) The USDZ file format is the most common format for displaying 3D objects across various platforms and devices. It has native iOS support, and is widely popular for creating 3D and augmented reality (AR) experiences on Apple devices. - **Developer:** Pixar - **Features:** - Encapsulates 3D scene information (geometry, shading, lighting, textures, etc) - Optimized for real-time rendering, and for augmented reality (AR) use cases - Non-binary format (text-based USD is compressed into a .usdz file) - **Platform Support:** - **iOS/macOS**: Full support, especially in AR applications (ARKit), Safari, and apps such as Keynote - **Windows:** Limited native support, which typically requires third-party applications like Adobe Aero or specialized USD tools - **Android:** No native support, which may require conversion tools or AR apps that support USDZ - **Web:** Native support in Safari for web-based AR experiences, and broader web support possible via AR frameworks (e.g. WebXR or Three.js). ## 2 - STL (Stereolithography) STL is a file format native to Stereolithography CAD software, and a common format for 3D printing. - **Developer:** 3D Systems - **Features:** - Simple and widely used format for 3D printing - Encodes only geometry (surface triangles) without color, texture, or material data - Available in both ASCII and binary formats - **Platform Support:** - **iOS/macOS:** Viewable using specialized apps (e.g. Meshlab, FreeCAD); limited AR/3D support without third-party software - **Windows:** Broad support across tools like Blender, Meshmixer, and 3D Builder; compatible with many 3D printers - **Android:** Requires third-party apps like Slicer for Fusion 360, or mobile STL viewers - **Web:** Visualization possible using JavaScript libraries (e.g. Three.js); common in 3D printing communities where models are shared in STL format ## 3 - OBJ (Wavefront Object) OBJ files contain the 3D models to optimize for game engines, and for sharing on virtual reality (VR) / 3D object visualization platforms. - **Developer:** Wavefront Technologies - **Features**: - Wide use for exchanging 3D model data - Supports geometry, textures, and UV mapping, but material properties are stored in separate .mtl files - ASCII-based, making it easy to edit manually - **Platform Support:** - **iOS/macOS:** Tools like Blender, Maya, and Cinema 4D can open and edit OBJ files, but third-party apps are necessary for viewing - **Windows:** Full support in most 3D applications (e.g. Blender, 3DS Max, Autodesk Maya) - **Android:** Viewable via apps such as Sketchfab or 3D modeling tools like Spacedraw - **Web:** OBJ has wide support in web-based 3D viewers via libraries like Three.js and Babylon.js ## 4 - MTL (Material Library File) MTL file formats have wide support for 3D modeling, and are commonly used for 3D computer graphics, and 3D object animation. - **Developer:** Wavefront Technologies (as a companion format to OBJ) - **Features:** - Contains material and texture information for OBJ models - Describes color, texture maps, and other surface properties - **Platform Support:** - **iOS/macOS/Windows**: Companion format paired with OBJ in 3D modeling software like Blender, 3DS Max, and Maya - **Android:** Requires 3D model viewers that support OBJ and MTL files together - **Web:** Supported with OBJ in 3D web viewers like Three.js ## Supported 3D Model Formats - Summary In terms of use cases and support, each PhotoRobot supported 3D model format has its own pros and cons: - **USDZ**: Best for iOS/macOS AR, but with limited support elsewhere - **STL**: Universally supported for 3D printing, although lacks texture and material data - **OBJ/MTL**: Widely supported across platforms; ideal for sharing detailed models with materials, but tends to be larger than other 3D formats --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual # SECTION: manuals > photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-03-10 --- # PhotoRobot Touch - iPhone App User Manual This PhotoRobot User Support Guide describes the installation, license requirements, and functionality of the PhotoRobot Touch App. ## User Support Guide to the PhotoRobot Touch Application This PhotoRobot User Support Manual describes the installation, requirements, and functionality of the [PhotoRobot Touch App](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch). PhotoRobot Touch is an iOS application that connects to PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”). Touch enables the use of an iPhone as an external wireless camera for handheld product photos. That, or the tethered shooting of 360 product spins. It supports batch handheld product photography in unrestricted or template-based capture modes, and features automatic upload to the Cloud version of CAPP for PhotoRobot automated post-processing and publishing. **Note:** PhotoRobot Touch functions in the Cloud version of CAPP only, and does not function with the local version of CAPP. Connected iPhones must communicate with the software through the Cloud. Although, using the Cloud version of CAPP will still automatically transfer data to the local computer. For example, thumbnails synchronize automatically. However, full resolution outputs must be downloaded in the local version of CAPP by clicking a download button. ## Installation of the PhotoRobot Touch App To start using the iPhone application, first [download PhotoRobot Touch](https://apps.apple.com/us/app/photorobot-touch/id6462890188) (available only on the App Store). **Note**: For first-time app users, there is an **in-app license purchase** for the Touch application to unlock the full user experience. Also, users should have an **active PhotoRobot Controls App (CAPP) account**. Then, it is still easily possible to test the app without purchasing a Touch license. To experiment in the app without purchasing a Touch license, the app enables users to take 3 test images. Photos are available in full resolution, and post-processing occurs in PhotoRobot _Controls App. After taking the test images, users can then restart the app to reset the counter. This allows for taking another 3 test shots without charge. If more testing is necessary, then the best way is to purchase a monthly subscription for the Touch application. ## Touch App License Requirements Keep in mind, an active CAPP account as well as a Touch license is required to fully take advantage of PhotoRobot Touch. This is because Touch functions only as a remote camera interface with touchscreen control. All configuration of folders, workflows, thumbnails, and other settings is within PhotoRobot _Controls App. That includes the selection of which folders that will appear in the Touch app when active. Users must add a specific flag in CAPP which in turn makes the folder visible in the Touch App. Additionally, CAPP is necessary to create explicit folders such as for workflows, spins, detailed shots, and miscellaneous images. For users with an active PhotoRobot license, the “Power User” subscription level is necessary for the account that connects to Touch and the iPhone. This is because the iPhone uses internet connectivity to upload images to the Cloud in real-time, over a WiFi or cellular connection. **In other words, to use Touch, users must have two licenses: the Touch license as well as the “Power User” license in the PhotoRobot Cloud version of CAPP.** ## PhotoRobot Touch Functionality The PhotoRobot Touch app for iPhone can operate in 3 modes: 1. **Free mode** (for unrestricted, handheld photography with wireless shooting) 2. **Spin mode** (for the tethered shooting of automated spin photography) 3. **Wizard mode** (for template-based workflows with steps consisting of names, descriptions, and sample images of photos to capture) Additionally, PhotoRobot Touch functions as a powerful barcode and QR scanner, with selection or deselection of codes for faster recognition. If using PhotoRobot Touch as QR code scanner, open the Settings in the PhotoRobot Touch App, select Barcodes, and toggle ON the QR code setting to enable QR code support. ### Free Mode The use of PhotoRobot Touch in **Free mode** allows operators to capture unrestricted, batch handheld photography. Free mode is advantageous when there are no guidelines on how many or what type of images to capture. Instead, the operator captures images as necessary, and then confirms each in the application: - **Note:** After confirmation, the app automatically uploads the images to a predefined folder, and runs any preset operations. PhotoRobot Touch presets are configurable for various post-processing operations, automatic file naming conventions, and auto upload to the appropriate storage folder. They enable users to choose aspect ratio, pre-selected cameras, auto-confirm, and barcode styles: ### Spin Mode In PhotoRobot Touch **Spin mode**, camera shutter control is via wire-shutter, and the iPhone functions as a remote camera to automate spin photography. This requires special wiring (provided by PhotoRobot), using a lightning or USB-C stereo-jack Apple original converter, a special triggering box for manual capture, and a cable for the control unit. **Note:** It is not possible to synchronize iPhone cameras to strobe lighting. The iPhone requires continuous still lights, and captures spins mostly in a slow, non-stop rotation. This makes Spin mode advantageous when capturing a relatively limited number of images, such as a 1 x 36 image spin. That, or when photographing for example in the car industry, where delays from start-stop mode are not that significant. In these cases, the iPhone can be the operator's only camera on the floor, for capturing both spins and handheld images. For advanced spin photography with a larger number of images, a DSLR camera with strobes and PhotoRobot systems remains faster and more efficient. PhotoRobot Touch can then be used to photograph only stills and details in free or wizard mode, while spins are taken separately or simultaneously at the robotic workstations. ### Wizard Mode The use of Wizard mode enables the configuration of template-based production workflows, and is a tool unique to PhotoRobot. Wizard mode provides ordered steps for operators to follow: including names, descriptions, thumbnails, labels, and sample images of photos to capture. It functions as visual, step-by-step guidelines for production, with detailed instructions for each required photograph. For example, Wizard mode can store hundreds of steps with related photos for an operator to produce. This not only drastically reduces operator training requirements. It can considerably speed up handheld still and detailed photography workflows. In CAPP, it is also possible to specify preset conditions and an output file format for the ready-made post-processing of images. Operators in Touch can then capture, skip, or re-capture photos, and add notes for additional post-processing, retouching, or publishing requirements. - Find the **Skip** button in the top-right corner of any workflow step, next to the instructions. For example, skip the workflow step if you are not able to capture the required photo at the time, and want to return to it later. - Use the middle **Confirm** button to confirm the image and upload it to the appropriate storage folder. **Note:** Users can also configure auto-confirm to automatically upload images after a certain time has passed and it has not been rejected by the user. - Find the **Recapture** icon on the right of the capture options to take a photo again, for example if the output results are not satisfactory. ## How to Launch PhotoRobot Touch App When launching the Touch App, the first step is to connect Touch to the Cloud by scanning the QR code. This QR code connects the iPhone to Touch, and frictionlessly logs into the system. On successful connection, the next step is to scan the barcode of the item to be photographed. This will connect the phone to the item’s directory. **Note:** If the item contains several folders, the directory displays each folder for operators to work with different content: Free, Spin, and Wizard. Select the appropriate directory folder, and then photograph the item. If the image is satisfactory, clicking confirm will automatically upload the image to the folder: Repeat this process until complete, following the wizard mode steps in order. Afterwards, returning to the Wizard start screen will direct users to any remaining tasks / folders (if any exist). **Note:** It is possible to exit Wizard mode and return to the step in progress at any time. All it takes is scanning the Start barcode, and then the item barcode to begin again. This way if users want (or need) to log into the program using a different iPhone, it takes only two scans and no further configuration of settings. It also enables larger companies with batches of iPhones and charging stations to simply swap one iPhone for another when batteries are low. ## Camera Controls The following applies to the use of the iPhone as a camera and configuration of its settings: - Touch supports wireless shooting over WiFi and cellular connection, or the camera can be triggered via wire-shutter for tethered shooting using special adaptors and connection. - Presets enable users to choose aspect ratio, pre-selected camera, auto-confirm, and barcode styles. - The iPhone touch display functions for interaction with the camera, previewing images in good resolution, and displaying content in Wizard mode. - Settings and presets are all easily configurable on desktop, while the iPhone functions as the camera only. - Operators can manually confirm captured images, or set images to auto-confirm (after a given time) to upload images to the appropriate folder. ## CAPP Desktop / PC Software Settings In order to support PhotoRobot users that do not use the iPhone, it is necessary to enable Touch support in CAPP. To do this, access **Settings** in CAPP, and then click **General**, and toggle on the option **Enable Controls Touch mobile application extension**. - **Note**: Touch does not function in the local version of CAPP, as the iPhone communicates in the Cloud only. ### Controls Touch Captured Status Settings After toggling on **Enable Controls Touch** in the General Settings of the desktop version of CAPP, users can configure **Capture status** settings for the Touch app. The Captured status in PhotoRobot plays a key role in tracking the progress of items through the content production workflow. It indicates that the initial photography has been completed, and the item is ready for the next stage – such as editing, verification, or publishing. With the Controls Touch mobile app, this makes it possible to configure how items are marked as Captured directly from the capture device. This helps to provide flexibility and more clarity in all workflows. Additionally, this feature ensures that items photographed via the Controls Touch app are properly tracked and marked in the workflow. It helps to: - Easily identify items already captured using the Controls Touch app. - Configure whether items should be marked automatically, manually, or not at all. - Maintain consistency across team workflows using mobile or desktop applications. In operation, after capturing at least one photo in a folder and exiting the item, the app prompts the user to confirm whether to set the item status to Captured. This behavior depends on the **Mark as Captured** mode, which can be configured in the app settings also directly on the device. - **Automatically mark as captured by Touch** - Items are automatically set to Captured by Touch upon leaving after capturing. - **Always ask before marking as captured** - A confirmation dialog appears when you exit, allowing you to choose whether to set the status. - **Never mark as captured** - The item status remains unchanged regardless of capture activity. **Note:** In the desktop version of CAPP, the default Touch capture status setting is **Captured by Touch when marked via the mobile app**. To customize this status, users must configure settings in the desktop app. Find this option in Settings under the General tab, and beneath Enable Controls Touch when active. Clicking Capture status will then display the setting options. In function, the Captured status is part of a larger customizable workflow, typically moving through these stages: New, Captured, Edited, Verified. By filtering items with the Captured status, teams can quickly focus on items needing further review, editing, or export. Touch-specific status management enables teams to distinguish between items captured manually, automatically, or from different sources—enhancing traceability and accountability. ### Configuring Controls Touch Menu Items & Touch Folders Next, when the Touch app is operational, there are then new menu items available for each folder in CAPP. This includes the options to access Controls Touch folders, or to Exclude a folder from Controls Touch. To Exclude a folder from Controls Touch, click the options icon in the top-right corner of the desired folder, and select **Edit folder** from the operations menu. Clicking **Edit folder** will open the folder settings, which include the option **Exclude from Controls Touch** at the bottom of the folder options. Click the box to the left of the setting to toggle it on, removing the specified folder from view in the Touch App. - **Remember:** It is necessary to configure all settings for Touch in the cloud version of CAPP. - The option to Exclude a folder from Controls Touch will also be available when adding new items in CAPP. - Each folder that should appear in Touch will have a specific flag in CAPP that makes it visible (or invisible) on Touch when operational. - Users configure settings in CAPP to create Touch folders for workflows, thumbnails, instructions, spins, detailed shots, miscellaneous images, etc. For any new content in a folder, it is then displayed in either grid or list format. List format makes it easy to reorder workflow steps by drag-and-drop. It is also possible to create a new step at the position of the cursor, simplifying cases when working with 100s of steps in order. ### Customizing Controls Touch Workflow Steps Finally, each workflow step is configurable by various details. Settings enable users to configure each workflow step’s title, description, thumbnail, labels, and a sample image of the required photo to capture. In order to access Controls Touch settings, click the three vertical dots to the right of any individual image, and then select **Controls Touch** from the options. This will open the **Edit workflow step** interface. All images in use for Sample images in the workflow are saved as a separate Item / image. To view the image, use the **Download** button. - **Note:** In some cases, such as connecting to another computer (and designing the workflow again), sample images may not be available. However, when uploading sample images in the Cloud, there is often no issue. If the issue does occur, simply go to the item with sample images and click Download there. The Wizard editor will then work with local copies. After setup, standard post-processing operations will then apply to captured photos, including commands for automatic image delivery. The Wizard will then be stored as an image Preset, so that every new item created with this preset contains its predefined folders and workflow. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-viewer-layouts-and-configurations # SECTION: manuals > photorobot-viewer-layouts-and-configurations # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2025-12-16 --- # PhotoRobot Viewer Layouts & Configs - User Support Manual This PhotoRobot User Support Manual provides instructions on how to configure PhotoRobot Viewer Layouts and Configurations. ## PhotoRobot Viewer Layouts & Configs - User Support Manual ## PhotoRobot Viewer Layouts and Configs In PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”), [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) is a 2D + 3D + 360 product viewer. It enables users to configure product viewer layouts and to customize settings for the distribution of product content online. There are currently two different viewer layout types, one with buttons and one with thumbnails. Configuration options then function for still image folders and for spin image folders. These enable users to configure the product viewing experience, and to customize image settings in many ways. This includes annotated hot spots, image behavior, display options, image settings, and more. Note: The following instructions describe how to initially create layouts in PhotoRobot Viewer, and define its appearance for the output of any Wizard. For technical instructions on how to configure Wizards, see the [PhotoRobot Wizard Mode Support Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode). ## Viewer Layouts - Overview In CAPP, it is possible to create a viewer layout and define its appearance for the output of any PhotoRobot Wizard. To do this, the icons of the layout correspond to the folders of the outputs in the software: ### Buttons - Viewer Layouts To access PhotoRobot Viewer layout settings, it is necessary to open CAPP in the Cloud 2.0 (or higher) version of the software. In the cloud-based app, click **Settings** in the main user menu, and access **Viewer layouts** in the options that appear on the left of the user interface. Viewer layouts settings enable users to **+ Add viewer layout** in the top-right of the menu, and to configure existing viewer layouts if available. When adding or configuring a viewer layout, settings then allow for two types of viewer layouts: **Buttons** or **Thumbnails**. Select **Buttons** to define an icon for each folder at the bottom of the user interface. Here, it is possible to edit the icon and label of existing buttons, or to create new buttons at the bottom of the user interface by clicking **+ Add media**. ### Thumbnails - Viewer Layouts The second viewer layouts setting is with thumbnails. Access this option when configuring any existing viewer layout or adding a new viewer layout. Toggle **Thumbnails on** in the viewer layouts menu options on the left of the interface to display images in a product gallery view. ## Create Viewer Layout To create a new viewer layout, open **Settings** and then **Viewer layouts** in the Cloud 2.0 (or higher) version of CAPP. Then, use the button **+ Add viewer layout** in the top-right of the settings menu: ### Create Viewer Layout Settings Configure a new viewer layout settings by the following options. 1. **Layout name**: Fill in to create the name of the new layout. 2. **Preview item**: Click to select an item from all items or using advanced search. 3. **Layout type**: Select Thumbnail or Button viewer layout. 4. **Aspect ratio**: Choose aspect ratio 1:1 or 4:3. ### Add Media to New Viewer Layouts To upload new media to a viewer layout, use the button **+ Add media** at the bottom of the viewer layout settings user interface. Add media options enable users to upload media to a specific folder, define how to preview the media, and configure button options. ## Viewer Configurations In the Cloud-based version of CAPP, it is also possible to customize viewer settings by item, project, or organization. To customize viewer settings by item, open the item in the Cloud, and select **Viewer** to access configurations for the item’s folders. Next, select a folder (e.g. ‘spin’ or ‘stills’), and click the edit icon or the three vertical dots to the right of the folder, and **Edit** to customize the folder. Inside the viewer config options, the button **+ Add Config** enables users to further customize the folder’s output. Viewer layout options for a spin folder include: - **Hot spots** - **Idle behavior** - **Image** - **Display** - **Behavior** ### Hot Spots In the viewer settings of a spin folder, configure hot spots via the button **+ Add config** followed by **Hot-spots**. Then, add a hot spot using **Shift + Click**, clicking first on the beginning and next on the ending of where the hotspot should display. There are then four options to customize hot spots: 1. **Title**: Customize the title text which appears on the hot spot. 2. **Description**: Use to add additional information below the hot spot title. 3. **Points**: Set the range of visibility for the hot spot. 4. **Change the look**: Click to customize Color, Size, Opacity, Pulse. ### Idle Behavior To configure the idle behavior settings of a spin folder, open its **Viewer** settings in the Cloud, and use **+ Add config** followed by **Idle behavior**. Idle behavior settings enable users to specify: 1. **Rotate**: How many times the image should rotate after loading 2. **Direction**: The direction of image rotation 3. **Stop**: When the rotation should stop (on click, on hover, never) 4. **Spin after idle**: When the rotation will restart again after idle times 5. **Speed (°/s)**: The number of degrees the spin rotates per second ### Image Settings To configure image settings of an item’s folder (‘spin’ or ‘stills’), navigate to its **Viewer** settings in the Cloud, and use **+ Add config** followed by **Image**. Image settings enable users to specify the image format and quality of the image viewer: - **Format**: Select file format in JPEG, WEBP, or PNG. - **Quality**: Adjust by slider or by numerical input. ### Display Options To configure the display settings of an item’s folder (‘spin’ or ‘stills’), open **Viewer** settings in the Cloud, and select the folder to edit. Then, click **+ Add config** followed by **Display**. Display settings enable users to change three different areas of how the spin will appear: 1. **Background**: Click to configure the background color of a spin or still image. 2. **Hue**: Adjust the hue of an item in a spin or still image by slider numerical input. 3. **Padding**: Adjust the amount of padding of a spin or still image by slider or numerical input. ### Behavior Options Adjust the behavior of an item’s spin folder by accessing its **Viewer** settings in the Cloud, and clicking **+ Add config** followed by **Behavior**. Behavior configurations enable users to specify three elements of a spin. 1. **Viewer loading option**: Configure rotation on load, hover, or click. 2. **Start position**: Define the start position of the image rotation. 3. **Full-screen on**: Configure full-screen viewing by click, hover, or disabled. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras # SECTION: manuals > recommended-cameras # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-05-08 --- # Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems Use the Guide to PhotoRobot Recommended Cameras to choose the best camera or camera model to pair with PhotoRobot systems. ## Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems The following guide aims to assist PhotoRobot customers in choosing the best recommended camera and lens combination(s) to use with PhotoRobot systems. It provides **two simple steps to configure a fully PhotoRobot-ready camera and lens kit** with all accessories and training included. There is general information as well as technical specifications to consider before making a purchase, with detailed overviews of camera model and lens selection. This includes suggestions for choosing high-end versus budget-friendly equipment around performance, budget, use case and workflow requirements. **Note:** Refer to [PhotoRobot Compatible Cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras) for the complete list of supported Canon and 3rd party camera models. For better understanding on the impact of camera resolution, visit the [PhotoRobot Camera Resolution Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution). ## Suggested Cameras for General Use **For frictionless operation, it is currently advisable to select mirrorless camera models for operation with PhotoRobot systems.** Mirrorless cameras (CSCs) are compact cameras, also with interchangeable lenses, which can be controlled using software drivers. The absence of a mirror amounts to smaller dimensions and a lighter weight. At the same time, mirrorless cameras retain the primary advantages of SLR cameras (the interchangeable lenses, and large sensor). **Important:** PhotoRobot continuously monitors the latest trends in mirrorless cameras (Nikon, Sony and others). However, due to the availability of software drivers, cameras by Canon are recommended for operation with PhotoRobot Controls App. ## Recommended Cameras for Special Applications For **special applications**, it is possible to connect high-speed and high-resolution cameras to a PhotoRobot system. However, selection of a camera for special applications should always be after prior consultation with a PhotoRobot specialist. - **Special applications** include for instance using high-speed, **high-resolution** cameras in museum and archive photography, as well as the digitization of items using **3D modeling**. - Take for example a system featuring the PhotoRobot [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table). The Centerless Table is able to rotate the subject 360 degrees in less than 3 seconds. At the same time, the software sends a signal to the camera to capture 36 or more images. - This case means that the standard camera and studio light configuration will not suffice. Instead, only a high-speed camera is able to meet the photographic requirements to automate photography and generate a 3D model from photos. - The camera must capture often at least 30GB of data in less than 2 minutes, photographing the item from both upper and lower hemispheres. In use, solutions like these are more common in museums, such as for archiving collection items. The recommended camera in this case may then be camera models such as from Hasselblad, [Sinar](https://sinar.swiss/en/), and others. To create certain types of 3D models from photos, it might be a higher speed camera such as industrial models from [FLIR](https://www.flir.com/applications/industrial/). In either case though, always first consult with a PhotoRobot technician to find the optimal camera for special applications. ## Before Purchasing a Recommended Camera **Always remember to contact PhotoRobot before purchasing a recommended camera.** The PhotoRobot solution is able to control cameras via software using a USB cable. Therefore, it is possible to set the time, aperture, ISO sensitivity and other settings while monitoring the scene through live-view. If the camera does not support these functions, manual control (or via software control supplied with the camera) is possible. Capturing images is then controlled via the robot using a remote shutter release cable. **Note:** It will always be necessary to inform PhotoRobot of your camera selection. This is so PhotoRobot can prepare a special shutter cable with a camera-specific connector. For the types of shutter connectors compatible with different camera specifications, refer to [Canon Wireless and Wired Remote Controls](https://cam.start.canon/en/H002/accessory_0060.html). ## Camera Compatibility with PhotoRobot **For maximum use of the camera’s capabilities, a compatible Canon camera model is recommended.** Using a recommended Canon camera will ensure full software support and the greatest compatibility with PhotoRobot. Despite basic compatibility, camera models which do not appear on the recommended list may experience limitations. For example, some cameras will not accurately function during non-stop rotation of the item. In this case, extremely high accuracy is necessary to synchronize the camera shutter with the robot’s movement. This requires testing of the specific model if using a camera not from the recommended lineup. For this reason, always choose one of the recommended Canon camera models with full support when possible. ## Camera Specification Considerations ### Shooting Speed In regards to camera shooting speed, note the following information. - Less expensive camera models usually do not enable picture taking at the required frequency in the external control mode. This subsequently slows down the entire shooting process when operating the machines in non-stop spin mode at high speeds of movement. - Using only a high-end camera is not enough to achieve non-stop spin photography. - Both a high-speed camera and high-speed Broncolor studio lights are necessary to support the high speeds of movement. - Budget lights recharge slowly, meaning the camera also must capture too slowly. Also note that when photographing products, the traditional approach is to stop the item’s movement at each selected angle. The still subject is then photographed, before restarting object rotation to the next angle to stop at and capture. However, to increase overall productivity, PhotoRobot is able to photograph items in non-stop spin mode, without stopping the rotation of the turntable. This accelerates production speeds by sometimes up to 4 times in comparison to the traditional start-stop capture approach. PhotoRobot systems monitor the movement of the subject at approximately 1000 times per second. The software then sends signals to trigger the camera precisely before the moment of capture. This requires high shooting speeds in order to accurately and consistently capture the subject at the exact angle in relation to the camera. If the shooting speed of the camera is insufficient, the robots must then operate at a fraction of their maximum speed. ### Camera Interface Speed (USB) The camera interface speed is another important consideration to avoid any limitations in download and overall production speeds. - It is not recommended to use cameras with a slower interface than **USB 3.0**. (Anything slower causes the robot to wait for images to download to the computer, slowing down the entire digitization process.) - A standard USB cable length covers the distance from the camera to the control unit and computer up to **5 meters**. (This is the same length as the shutter release cable as well.) - The maximum length connection for both cables capturing images in the highest resolution has been **up to 15 meters using a special configuration** with an active USB 3.0 extension. (Although, note that cases such as these can have a major impact on choice of camera.) ### Resolution and Quality of Image Sensor In terms of the recommended camera resolution and image sensor quality, it is important to take into account the following considerations. - In addition to the quality of lighting, the quality and resolution of the image sensor have a fundamental impact on the quality of images. - Both the resolution and sensor are a factor in digital media that allows zoom, and in which quality of detail is crucial. - The resolution and sensor must also be suitable to capture images for use in print in which similar criteria apply. Thus, the general recommendation is that camera resolution be **no less than 18 MPx**, and **ideally between 24 - 50 MPx**. (Higher resolution cameras are often insufficient due to the longer transmission and processing times of the acquired volumes of data.) ### Purchase Price of the Entire System It may also be important to consider the purchase price of the entire system including the robots, all required cameras, lenses, and equipment. For example: - Using a PhotoRobot multi-camera system such as the MultiCam requires an estimate of how many cameras will be in use at one time. The system technically scans an object from several angles simultaneously using multiple cameras. - Systems such as these call for consideration of the total number of cameras when estimating the total cost of the acquisition. - The more cameras, the higher the productivity of the entire workstation. Although, this is more evident in larger setups, in which the increased input on investment amounts to greater productivity in the end. **Note:** To estimate the cost of the computer(s) in the purchase price of the entire system, refer to [PhotoRobot System Requirements](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements). Find recommended hardware specifications and recommended computers for operation of PhotoRobot Controls Application on macOS and Windows operating systems. The information includes equipment and cable recommendations, as well as suitable scanners to use with PhotoRobot systems. ## Camera Integration Requirements When selecting a camera, first always refer to the complete and updated list of cameras compatible with PhotoRobot. Then, carefully consider not only the image resolution but also the interface speed. The interface speed is especially important for connecting the camera to the computer. For example, devices with a slower connection than USB 3.0 will slow down the overall production process. The slower speeds force the robot to wait while downloading the images from the camera. **Note:** There is **no support for Wi-Fi camera connection for sequence shooting** – particularly continuous, non-stop capture. This is due to the slower speed and instability over Wi-Fi connection. Although, sometimes there is no option other than wireless shooting, such as photographing larger products and their details by hand – furniture, carpets, etc. For these situations, wireless cameras can be used despite the disconnection issues. **Alternatively, it is possible to use an iPhone for effective handheld and detailed photography via the** [**PhotoRobot Touch App**](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch)**.** PhotoRobot Touch enables direct iPhone - Cloud connection, communication directly with the local _Controls computer, and data transfer over the local network. The iPhone also functions as a barcode scanner for 2D and 3D codes, and the UI for working with the system. In general, note that among the main camera performance requirements, it is important to have: - **High shooting speed** (using [fast shot mode](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/fast-shot-mode-feature-demo) takes approximately 20 seconds or less for the whole rotation of the object). - **High resolution**. - **A full-frame image sensor** (36 x 24 mm). Further, during the selection process of the camera model, always keep in mind that: - There is a higher shooting speed requirement with PhotoRobot than most competing systems. - A resolution of between 24 MPx to 45 MPx is most often sufficient. - Affordable models with a smaller APS-C sensor can be a disadvantage. - There might be higher image download speeds due to lower resolution. **Also note that while a basic range economy-cost camera can offer a lower purchase price, they come at the tradeoff of higher image download speeds and thus lower reliability due to lower resolution.** ## PhotoRobot-Ready Recommended Camera & Lens Kits To simplify the camera & lens selection process, there are PhotoRobot-ready camera & lens kits which are suitable to meet the needs for most customer applications. **Simply choose a camera based on your performance needs and budget, and choose a compatible lens according to your workflow.** PhotoRobot supports multiple Canon cameras. However, for the best results and smoothest production workflow, we recommend the following proven camera and lens combinations. Each option offers optimal balancing with PhotoRobot lighting, automation, and image processing pipelines. Every recommended camera and lens choice is then delivered as part of a complete PhotoRobot-ready kit (with power cables, polarization, adapters, tested compatibility, and onboarding included). ## How to Choose a PhotoRobot Camera Kit (in 2 Steps) ### Step 1: Choose a Camera Select a camera according to the tier that matches your output quality requirements, speed, and budget. ### Step 2: Choose a Lens Choose a lens based on the types of objects you photograph, and how you intend to use it (universally, for macro photography, or multi-camera consistency). ### Result: PhotoRobot-Ready Kit for Delivery After choosing the camera and lens that meets your business’ needs, PhotoRobot delivers the PhotoRobot-ready kit with all accessories and training included. ## Step 1: Select Your Camera (Performance / Budget) There are currently **three tiers of recommended Canon camera models**, selected for their long-term stability and professional output in PhotoRobot workflows. Choose a camera from one of the tiers based on your performance requirements and budget. - **High-End:** Canon EOS R5 Mark II - **Mid-Range:** Canon EOS R6 Mark III or EOS R6 Mark II - **Economy Option:** Canon EOS R8 ### High-End: Canon EOS R5 Mark II The Canon EOS R5 Mark II is the high-end tier camera at a higher cost but offering the best performance with no compromise. - **Best For:** Premium e-commerce content, high detail, multi-camera systems - **Key Advantages:** Highest resolution, best image quality, fast performance - **Recommended For:** Maximum quality without compromise - **Approximate Price:** EUR €3,350 – €3,800 (USD $3,900+) **Canon EOS R5 Mark ll** Full Frame 45 MPx (36 × 24 mm) Lens mount RF Burst 12 fps mechanical shutter / 30 fps el. shutter USB 3.2 (USB-C), Wi-Fi, Bt ### Mid-Range: Canon EOS R6 Mark III or Canon EOS R6 Mark II The mid-range tier of PhotoRobot-ready cameras includes two options: the EOS R6 Mark III, or the EOS R6 Mark II. Choose one based on your budget and performance needs. Both offer exceptional performance at a mid-range cost, while the Mark III is the higher-end option of the two. For the higher cost, the Mark III boasts 32 MPx, 7K RAW Video, a CF Express card for better and faster data flow, and full-size HDMI. - **Key Advantages:** High resolution, superb image quality, great performance - **Recommended For:** Strong all-around camera performance at mid-range cost - **Approximate Price (R6 Mark III):** EUR €3,100+ (USD $3,600) - **Approximate Price (R6 Mark II):** EUR €2,240+ (USD $2,600) **Canon EOS R6 Mark III** Full Frame 32.5 MPx (36 x 24 mm) Lens mount RF Burst 12 fps mechanical shutter / 40 fps el. shutter USB 3.2 (USB-C), Wi-Fi, Bt **Canon EOS R6 Mark II** Full Frame 24.2 MPx (36 x 24 mm) Lens mount RF Burst 12 fps mechanical shutter / 40 fps el. shutter USB 3.2 (USB-C), Wi-Fi, Bt ### Economy Option: Canon EOS R8 The Canon R8 is the economy option offering exceptional value at a lower cost. - **Best For:** Most e-commerce workflows, excellent value - **Key Advantages:** Modern sensor, fast operation, great results - **Recommended For:** Strong all-around performance for the cost - **Approximate Price:** EUR €1,120 – €1,415 (USD $1,300+) **Canon EOS R8** Full Frame 24.2 MPx (36 × 24 mm) Lens mount RF Burst 12 fps mechanical shutter / 40 fps el. shutter USB 3.2 (USB-C), Wi-Fi, Bt ### Recommended Cameras Quick Comparison Table | Camera | Tier | Best For | Advantages | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | EOS R5 Mark II | High-End | Premium output, detail, multi-camera use | Top image quality, resolution, speed | Uncompromising quality | | EOS R6 Mark III | Mid-Range (High) | Premium output, detail, multi-camera use | Superb image quality, resolution, speed | Exceptionally high quality | | EOS R6 Mark II | Mid-Range | Premium output, detail, multi-camera use | Superb image quality, resolution, speed | High-quality | | EOS R8 | Economy Option | Great value, supports most workflows | Modern sensor, fast workflow | Universal choice | ## Step 2: Select Your Lens (Workflow / Use Case) Next, select a lens that supports your workflow and use case. While the camera choice defines the performance tier, the lens choice defines how you work. Choose a lens around the types of objects you photograph and your professional production workflows. - Zoom lens (Universal, robotic arm / tripod use) - Macro lens (Macro / detail, close-up photography) - Prime lens (Fixed focal, multi-camera synchronization) ### Zoom Lens (Universal, Robotic Arm / Tripod) Zoom lenses support universal product photography applications, and photo studio production using a tripod or [PhotoRobot Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). The suggested zoom lens is the **Canon RF 24-105mm Zoom Lens (f/4.0 L IS USM)**. Although use of the higher-end Canon RF 24-105mm (f/2.8 L IS USM Z) is also possible and the highest quality option in general, there is a significant price difference. Meanwhile, the f/4.0 remains perfectly suitable for the majority of applications. The lens is compatible with all PhotoRobot recommended EOS cameras, and it allows for the optional attachment of a [Power Zoom Adapter](https://www.usa.canon.com/shop/p/power-zoom-adapter-pz-e2). When in use, a Power Zoom Adapter enables electronic adjustment of the focal length. This offers a technically sound solution for photographing various subjects in which you must zoom in and zoom out, as it eliminates the need to tape the lens in place. Instead, the focal length remains in the set position with the Power Zoom Adapter. - **Suggested Zoom Lens:** Canon RF 24-105mm (f/4.0 L IS USM) Zoom Lens - **Best For:** Universal product photography, use with a Robotic Arm / tripod - **Typical Use:** Products of varying sizes, fast setup changes - **Advantages:** Flexible framing, one lens for many products - **Note:** Compatible with Power Zoom Adapter for electronic adjustment of focal length - **Approximate Price:** EUR €1,115 – €1,200 (USD $1,300+) **Canon RF 24-105mm Zoom Lens** f/4.0 L IS USM f4 - f22 Angle of view 84º to 23º 20’ 77 mm filter ******* *For Full Frame Canon EOS R(x) mirrorless series only* ### Macro Lens (Macro / Detail, Close-Up) Macro lenses support workflows involving close-up, detail / macro photography, and wireless handheld shooting. The suggested macro lens with PhotoRobot recommended cameras is the **Canon RF 100mm Macro Lens (f/2.8 L Macro IS USM)**. While PhotoRobot recommended cameras have IBIS technology to counteract camera shake and achieve sharper images, there is also a compatible camera grip if using the recommended higher tier Canon EOS R5 Mark II. The Canon BG-R10 Battery Grip attaches to the EOS R5 Mark II to offer greater ergonomics when photographing from portrait positions. - **Suggested Macro Lens:** Canon RF 100mm (f/2.8 L Macro IS USM) - **Best For:** Close-up, detail / macro photography and handheld shooting - **Typical Use:** Photography of jewelry, watches, textures, fine product detail - **Advantages:** Maximum sharpness and detail rendering - **Note:** Compatible with the EOS R5 Mark II camera to also support attachment of a battery grip for greater stability and ergonomics - **Approximate Price:** EUR €1,075 – €1,160 (USD $1,250+) **Canon RF 100mm Macro Lens** f/2.8 L Macro IS USM f2.8 - f32 Angle of view 24º 67 mm filter ### Prime Lens (Fixed Focal, Multi-Camera Sync) Prime lenses support workflows incorporating the PhotoRobot MultiCam system for the synchronization of multiple cameras and multi-camera capture. The suggested prime lens is the **Canon RF 50mm Prime Lens**. It is compatible with all PhotoRobot recommended EOS camera models. The lens attaches to a single camera in a multi-camera system so that it can technically scan an object with additional cameras simultaneously, capturing several angles at the same time. Although note that this means the number of lenses for each system will depend on the customer’s requirements, and how many cameras are in use in their setup. In larger setups, more cameras and lenses will be recommended in order to enhance the productivity of the entire workstation. - **Suggested Prime Lens:** Canon RF 50mm Prime Lens - **Best For:** Multi-camera workflows and consistent product sequences - **Typical Use:** Multi-angle capture, synchronized camera setups - **Advantages:** Identical perspective across multiple cameras, better optical performance - **Note:** Total number of cameras with prime lenses required for a multi-camera system varies depending on customer requirements and setup - **Approximate Price**: EUR €1,245 – €1,330 (USD $1,450+) **Canon RF 50mm Prime Lens** f/1.4 L VCM f1.4 - f16 Angle of view 46º 67 mm filter******* *For Full Frame Canon EOS R(x) mirrorless series only* ### Note: Why Choose a Prime Lens Prime lenses (fixed focal) are recommended for professional, **multi-camera workflows**. The prime lens is able to obtain an identical perspective when using multiple cameras. This enables multi-camera capture within the same product sequence, which is essential when matching perspectives is crucial. The prime lenses help to maintain visual consistency across angles and shots. At the same time, prime lenses provide greater optical rendering than zoom lenses. They typically deliver **sharper detail**, **cleaner rendering**, and **fewer optical compromises**. This is why the prime lens is ideal and recommended for premium product photography outputs. The prime lens ensures both high-level consistency, and maximum sharpness. ### Recommended Lenses Quick Comparison | Lens Type | Best For | Typical Use | Advantages | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Zoom Lens | Universal use | Mixed product sizes, quick setup | Flexible framing, speed | | Macro Lens | Macro / detail | Jewelry, watches, textures | Maximum sharpness in close-ups | | Prime Lens (Fixed Focal) | Multi-camera / sequences | Synchronized multi-angle capture | Consistent perspective, superior optical rendering | ### Camera and Lens Compatibility Summary Table Any combination of PhotoRobot recommended cameras and lenses is possible. | Camera Model | Lens Compatibility | | --- | --- | | Canon EOS R5 Mark II | Zoom, Macro, Prime | | Canon EOS R6 Mark III / R6 Mark II | Zoom, Macro, Prime | | Canon EOS R8 | Zoom, Macro, Prime | ## What is Included in Every PhotoRobot-Ready Camera Kit? PhotoRobot recommended camera kits are much more than only “a camera in a box.” Each camera kit is a ready-to-run production module configured for the PhotoRobot workflow. Included in every standard camera and lens kit, there are: - Camera and lens; - Flash trigger; - Camera-to-control unit connection; - Camera power supply (AC adapter); - Camera power supply (external battery block for off-grid power); - Active USB cable for camera-to-computer connectivity; - Polarizing filter; - Transport packaging; - Installation and initial training (remote or on-site). Everything within each kit is tested, prepared, and aligned with PhotoRobot lighting, automation, and post-processing workflows. In some cases, a Power Zoom Adapter and / or ergonomic battery grip may also be included with the kit to complement the selection of compatible cameras and lenses. These add-ons can provide greater versatility and productivity in specialized workflows. ## Other Compatible Canon Camera Models While there is a wider range of PhotoRobot compatible Canon cameras, PhotoRobot is designed to deliver premium and consistent output across the entire workflow. This includes lighting, automation, and image processing. That is why PhotoRobot primarily recommends the camera models and lenses in this documentation. Although, if budget requirements demand, it is possible to configure an entry-level solution using a compatible Canon camera. This can be suitable for basic automation and less demanding workflows. ## Using PhotoRobot Touch for Handheld Shots As an optional expansion, the PhotoRobot Touch App is an iOS application which connects to PhotoRobot Controls App. PhotoRobot Touch enables the use of a supported iPhone as an external wireless camera. It allows for batch handheld product photography in unrestricted or wizard-based capture modes. **Note:** Product photography by PhotoRobot Touch is possible using only continuous lighting. Strobe lights are not compatible for this use case. For additional information on installation and use of PhotoRobot Touch, refer to the [Touch App User Support Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual). ## FAQs About PhotoRobot-Ready Camera Kits ### Can I change the lens later? Of course, it is possible to change lenses at any time. Lens choice can be adapted to your workflow and use case. ### Why do you include a polarizing filter? A polarizing filter improves compatibility with PhotoRobot lighting and helps to reduce reflections on many product surfaces. ### Is EOS R8 enough for production use? The Canon EOS R8 model is perfectly suitable for most workflows, and it is a great option for its performance and cost if on a budget. ### When do I need a prime lens? If you use multiple cameras or want the most consistent perspective and best optical quality, a prime lens is recommended. ## For Help Selecting Your Camera and Lens Would you prefer professional assistance in choosing the best camera and lens kit for your business? [Contact PhotoRobot specialist technicians](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) for recommendations depending on your workflow and budget. ## Additional Notes: Camera Lens Selection Overview In general, **prime lenses** (also **fixed focal length lenses**) have better optical properties than zoom lenses. Thus, if the situation allows, PhotoRobot will recommend the use of a prime lens. However, this means that if a different focal length is necessary, it requires exchanging the lens. Keep this in consideration especially when photographing different sizes of products which might fall out of frame. For example, using **zoom lenses** in scenarios involving multiple cameras at one site may complicate production workflows. Complications occur for instance due to unevenly set focal lengths, meaning images from different cameras result in images of different sizes. (Note that this issue does not arise when using only a single camera in one robotic workstation.) Regarding the quality of the lenses, PhotoRobot always takes into account user reviews and official information from the manufacturers. Additionally, in most cases, PhotoRobot recommends **practical testing** to help customers choose the appropriate lenses. For this, PhotoRobot has a wide range of lenses available for on-site testing. **Note:** For more detailed information, see the [manufacturer’s technical specifications](https://www.canon-europe.com/lenses/) for a comparison of the different lenses. ### Appropriate Focal Length The human eye perceives the focal length of 50 mm from a full-frame camera as perfectly natural in dimensions. If looking through the lens using a wider focus, the perspective distorts either slightly or enough to appear completely unnatural in extreme cases. Conversely, a longer focal length allows for better utilization of the entire sensor area. This results in a higher resolution of captured images (after cropping). If the photos you capture are for the **creation of 3D models**, it is necessary to adjust the focal length of the lenses according to the 3D modeling method. For example, many methods require a 35 - 50 mm lens for better triangulation. ### Nomogram: Ceiling Height, Camera Distance, Lens Focal Length A nomogram accounting for the studio ceiling height, camera distance, and lens focal length helps to better understand multi-camera installation requirements. For example, in order to plan the location for a robot installation, it is necessary to account for common issues which might occur relating to selected focal length. In some issues, the selected lens focal length requires a distance from the subject that is not available due to the studio ceiling height. If this is the case, it is then necessary to consider either a wider lens, or using a different location for the machine installation. See the following nomogram for demonstration. The above nomogram represents a lens with a focal length of 50mm using a full-frame DSLR camera (with a 36 x 24 mm sensor). **Note:** This is a general example for illustrative purposes only. Always first consult with PhotoRobot for focal length testing prior to lens selection for your specific installation. ### Nomogram: Subject Distance and Focal Length Compare the above nomogram to the one below. The one below represents a focal length difference from the camera to the subject from 14 mm up to 135 mm using a full-frame DSLR camera (36 x 24 mm sensor). **Note:** The above nomogram is for general illustrative purposes only. Remember to always consult with PhotoRobot prior to lens selection for precise focal length testing for your specific installation. For reference, use the [PhotoRobot Depth of Field Calculator](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator) to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. Additionally, refer to the [PhotoRobot Depth of Field Chart](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart) to quickly find total depth of field for common subject distances and apertures. ### EF Lens Compatibility with EOS R Cameras The **Mount Adapter EF-EOS R** allows for the utilization of any **Canon EF lens** with the EOS R camera. This way, it is possible to use your existing lenses with the compatible cameras. The Mount Adapter EF-EOS R is also lightweight, compact, and easy to attach. This ensures performance with EF and EF-S lenses without compromising functionality, speed, or quality. (Also note that Canon RF lenses are mounted onto EOS R cameras without any adapter.) ### Polarizing Light Filter General Use To minimize reflections, using a polarizing filter on the lens will often be recommended with PhotoRobot systems. Note: Most filters on the market are circular polarizers, which function by rotating the filter to reduce surface glare. The issue that arises with this in spin photography (when the subject is rotating) becomes the effectiveness of the circular polarizer, which may be reduced or unpredictable. In these cases, use of polarized light sources, ring flashes, and other special lighting solutions might be more effective. If this functionality is required by the customer, the PhotoRobot team will prepare individual configurations for related product ranges and optimal image quality. The process ensures the highest level of quality tailorable to specific demands, and maximum productivity of the workstation. ## Tripod Head Selection Using an adequate tripod head is recommended for accurate and easy adjustment of the position of the camera and the lens. In this regard, there are a wide range of geared and ball tripod heads. However, PhotoRobot recommends using only geared heads. Specifically, the **Manfrotto 405 Geared Head is recommended**. Comparatively, while ball tripod heads do allow for quick adjustment to any position, exact adjustment is often difficult to manage. Thus, after many years of experience, PhotoRobot uses and recommends only the proven Manfrotto 405 tripod head. ### Manfrotto 405 Geared Tripod Head The specifications of the Manfrotto 405 geared head follow for easy reference. - Weight: 1.6 kg - Head height: 16 cm - Maximum load: 7.5 kg - Quick release plate: 410PL - Front: -30° +90° - Lateral tilt: -90° + 30° - Rubberized handles - Aluminum alloy body - Precise camera positioning in all axes (individually) by sliding bolts - Disconnection mechanism for adjustment screws for rapid adjustment to remote positions --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/remote-support-setup # SECTION: manuals > remote-support-setup # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-04-29 --- # Remote Support Setup Guide for PhotoRobot This PhotoRobot user manual describes the installation of the Splashtop SOS (EU) app for remote technical support of PhotoRobot. ## Remote Support Setup Guide for PhotoRobot This user manual describes the installation of the **Splashtop SOS (EU)** app for **remote technical support of PhotoRobot**. Splashtop SOS allows PhotoRobot technicians to access a customer’s computer and provide technical assistance after the user grants permission for a specific case. Our technicians are then able to use Splashtop Business to access the computer with the technical support request. **It is thus important that the user download and install Splashtop SOS immediately when installing PhotoRobot Controls.** More importantly, the user must install the **correct regional version (EU)** of the Splashtop SOS app so that PhotoRobot can access the system. This helps to avoid any delays in technical support requests, such as when a user does not have sufficient rights to install the app. Installing the app at the same time as PhotoRobot Controls will ensure users have the support they need when they need it. **Note:** For the complete walkthrough on the installation and use of PhotoRobot Controls, refer to [PhotoRobot - Getting Started](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## Download Splashtop SOS for the EU Region It is crucial that the user downloads the **EU regional version of the Splashtop SOS app**. This is due to the EU-based location of PhotoRobot technicians. Be aware that there is also a US regional version of Splashtop SOS, but the US version does not allow PhotoRobot to access your system. In order to download the **EU-region version of the Splashtop SOS app**, copy and paste the following link into your browser. - **https://sos.splashtop.com/en/sos-download?region=eu** After opening the page, the Splashtop SOS installer will download to your computer, or you can click one of the links to manually download the installer if necessary. The page describes the steps to finding and installing the application on your computer, and how to allow the application’s remote support. ## Opening and Closing Remote Support in Splashtop SOS To allow access to your computer, Splashtop SOS will create a 9-digit number which you provide to your IT admin. The admin will then be able to use this number to access your computer. When you want to end a support session, quit the program. The application will no longer be able to remotely access your computer until you download and run the program again. ## For Additional Support & Troubleshooting If experiencing issues, refer to [PhotoRobot Troubleshooting](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting) for common problems and their solutions. For additional support, [create a support ticket](https://support.photorobot.com/) through your PhotoRobot account. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-arm-v8 # SECTION: manuals > robotic-arm-v8 # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2025-12-16 --- # PhotoRobot Robotic Arm V8 Installation & Usage This installation manual provides technical instructions on the installation, configuration, and first use of the Robotic Arm V8 by PhotoRobot. ## PhotoRobot Robotic Arm V8 User Manual The following installation manual provides technical instructions for the configuration and operation of the Robotic Arm V8 by PhotoRobot. This information aims to support the first setup and operation of the Robotic Arm by the customer. It focuses on new customers who have recently purchased the device, as well as the future onboarding of production line operators. **Important:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) before proceeding with any self-installation, first use, storage, or service of PhotoRobot devices. ## Robotic Arm V8 Installation & First Use Thank you for purchasing your PhotoRobot device. You have chosen a product that brings with it decades of professional experience and innovation. Ingenious and stylish, PhotoRobot’s design is with you in mind. That means whenever you use PhotoRobot, you can rest assured that you will achieve great results every time. Welcome to PhotoRobot. ## 1. Product Description The Robotic Arm V8 is designed for the automated capture of multi-row spins, or rapidly photographing a series of stills from different elevations. It is able to move the camera along two axes with smooth robotic precision, controlling elevation and swing. The Arm combines with compatible photography turntable devices like the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) as well as the [Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable), C-Class turntables, and more. This synchronizes image capture with the movement of the mounted camera and the rotation of the product on the turntable. The Robotic Arm V8 is compatible with the majority of PhotoRobot rotary robots used for 360 product photography. Key components of the Robotic Arm V8 include: - The system control unit (a separate device for controlling the Robotic Arm). - Camera mounting shanks (one short shank, one long shank, or both). - Robotic Arm machine base with retractable wheels for easy transport. - Docking station for quick setup with compatible turntables and devices. **Note:** The camera arm does not oscillate, moving the camera along a precise trajectory. There is also a large mounting range for flexibility in the selection of tripod heads and cameras, and features for effortless transport and setup. ### 1.1. Robotic Arm V8 Robot Overview The Robotic Arm device is controlled via the Control Unit. This means the Control Unit powers up and controls all the movement of the _Arm V8. **Note:** The Control unit is not a physical part of this device. It is physically installed in the Centerless Table if delivered together. If the Arm V8 is delivered separately, the Control Unit is placed in the dedicated PhotoRobot HD rack case. ### 1.2. Electrical Connection The following electrical connection requirements must also be met for the safe installation and operation of the Robotic Arm V8. - The device must be grounded. - Always use a correctly installed shockproof socket. - Ensure that the electrical information on the rating plate complies with the power supply. If it does not, contact an electrician. - Be sure not to cause damage to the mains plug or to the mains cable. - Connect the mains plug to the mains socket only at the end of the installation. Ensure that there is access to the mains plug after the installation. - Do not touch the mains cable or the mains plug with wet hands. - Do not pull the mains cable to disconnect the device. Always push the mains switch at the Control Unit first. - Do not approach the _Arm V8 when moving or when it is powered up. - Always mind the working area of this device. - The elevator range is 32 cm. - The swing arm range is from 0 to 90 degrees. **Important:** The first installation after delivery from the manufacturer must be carried out only by a PhotoRobot authorized authority. The authority must be an approved distributor, or the manufacturer itself. For self-installation and service, always refer also to PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions before proceeding. ## 2. Preparation of the _Arm V8 for Operation **2.1.** Based on the configuration provided, there can be one short shank, one long shank, or both. **2.2.** Unpackage all the parts and remove the base from the palette. **2.3.** Configure the top part of the _Arm V8 to mount the shank. Remove the fixing accessories, like the nuts and washer. **2.4.** Position the shank on the Arm base and fasten all the protective parts. **2.5.** Retrieve the Manfrotto geared head and prepare it for mounting onto the arm. **2.6.** Attach the Manfrotto geared head by screwing it onto the shank, and then level it using the adjustable handles 1,2,3. **2.7.** Mount the camera onto the Manfrotto geared head and add some weights onto the opposite side of the shank. These weights should compensate for the camera weight. **2.8.** Note that the weight of the camera should prevail slightly in order to push the end switch when the swinging arm is in the bottom position (zero degrees). **2.9.** Mount two docking mechanism parts onto the _Arm V8. ## 3. PhotoRobot First Use Before first use, understand the concept of this solution. PhotoRobot is revolutionary all-in-one equipment for automating photography. From a technical point of view, it is a modular unit consisting of hardware and software. It is expected that PhotoRobot itself is connected to the same network as the computer operating it. **Important:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot First Use & Basic Testing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing) for technical operating requirements and instructions on connecting PhotoRobot to the network. In general, there are the following prerequisites to meet. - There must be a PhotoRobot Control Unit connected to the local network. - A computer is necessary to run service GUI or the operator’s software called _Controls. - The computer must be connected to the same network as the PhotoRobot Control Unit. - The network must be connected to the internet. Check the electricity distribution system parameters, e.g. the voltage and frequency. Connect the Control Unit to the network via ethernet cable. The RJ45 connector is on the back of the Control Unit. There are the following basic network requirements: - DHCP server in the network is expected. - TCP ports 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - UDP broadcasts on port 6666 must be allowed. - Internet connection is needed. - ***.photorobot.com** access must be allowed. - **as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net** access must be allowed. - Refer to [PhotoRobot Detailed Networking Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) for more information if necessary. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. Press the mains switch on the front panel of the Control Unit. When it changes status from a blinking light to a steady light, it is ready for operation. ### 3.1. Find PhotoRobot’s IP Address on LAN There are supporting applications available for searching the network for PhotoRobots. - Windows - [frfind for Windows](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXdEFKdzB6WVFWcGc) - Mac OS X - [frfind for macOS](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXTU1CYUZrY1dGdzQ) - Android - [PhotoRobot Locator in Google Play](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.photorobot.locator&pcampaignid=web_share) - iPhone, iPad - [PhotoRobot Locator on iTunes](https://itunes.apple.com/au/developer/photorobot-com/id900448053) ### 3.2. Basic PhotoRobot Testing On a computer, open a web browser and enter PhotoRobots’ IP address in URL format, for example: https://11.22.33.44 (please mind, this address is just an example – enter the IP address you found in the above section). If everything works as expected, you will see a basic user interface similar to the graphic below: Turn on the engines (arrow 1), and try to operate any movable part of the robot (arrow 2). If the robot moves based on your instructions, you are ready to use your PhotoRobot device regularly. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-turntable-arm-user-guide # SECTION: manuals > robotic-turntable-arm-user-guide # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-03 --- # PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable and Robotic Arm V8 User Guide The following documentation serves as a user manual for the PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm V8 expansion. ## PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable and Robotic Arm V8 User Guide The following documentation serves as a user manual for the [PhotoRobot Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable) with [Robotic Arm V8 expansion](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). This manual is intended solely for use by PhotoRobot customers who have recently purchased a device. It aims to help facilitate the initial understanding, basic testing, and first operation of the robotic workstation. Find a detailed description of the Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm expansion, including an overview of the workstation and instructions for first-time PhotoRobot use and setup. **Important:** The initial installation of a PhotoRobot device must always be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Note:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to the manual provided specifically with your device before first use. ## Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm V8 Expansion Congratulations and thank you for purchasing your PhotoRobot device! PhotoRobot represents decades of first-hand experience and innovation in automated photography. It delivers technology tailorable to unique needs, while at the same providing a growing ecosystem of ready-made solutions supporting PhotoRobot customers. Stylish and ingenious, PhotoRobot promises easier, quicker, and consistent production every time you power-up the studio. Welcome to PhotoRobot. ## 1. Workstation Description - Robotic Turntable and Arm V8 PhotoRobot’s Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm V8 expansion functions as a universal motorized turntable for 360 product photography of heavy objects. The turntable supports small but heavy objects weighing up to 200 kilograms, such as tools, engines, automotive parts, milling machines, and other heavy items. In combination with the Robotic Arm V8, the workstation serves to simplify and accelerate 360 spin and multi-row 3D photography. The robot arm synchronizes image capture as well as movement of the mounted camera with the rotation of the item on the turntable. This enables rapid capture of multiple rows 360 degrees around items, including bottom and top views for streamlined 3D image capture. Key features of the Robotic Turntable and Robotic Arm in combination include: - Heavy-duty turntable with wear resistance and high load bearing capacity of 200 kilograms. - Turntable plate with overhang over the table edge for photos at the zero angle. - Laser-guided object positioning to always find the absolute center of rotation. - Integrated mounts for lighting and cabling through the interior of the turntable frame. - Remote camera capture in sync with automated turntable rotation. - Smooth camera movement along a precise trajectory without oscillation of the camera arm. - Docking station for easy transport and setup of the Robotic Arm. ### 1.1. Studio Integration - Robotic Turntable and Arm V8 Within the studio, the Robotic Turntable supports photography of small yet heavy objects, while the Robotic Arm V8 has a large mounting range. This allows for versatility in the choice of tripod heads and cameras when using the workstation. Meanwhile, the Robotic Arm has robust construction, precise movement, and two camera arm sizes for capturing objects of different sizes. It is possible to direct the robotic camera arm remotely and in sync with the turntable and studio lights to completely automate image capture and produce highly realistic 3D photos. ### 1.2. Control Unit - Robotic Turntable and Arm V8 One of the main components of the Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm V8 expansion is the Control Unit. The **Control Unit** is an integral part of the system as it powers up and controls all movement of both the Robotic Turntable and the Arm V8. The Control Unit is not a physical part of the Robotic Arm. Instead, the Control Unit is physically installed within the Robotic Turntable if both devices are delivered together. The Control Unit is placed in the dedicated HD rack in the top-left front of the Robotic Turntable machine body. Meanwhile, the Robotic Arm V8 docks alongside the Robotic Arm when in use. ### 1.3. Robotic Arm V8 Expansion Overview The PhotoRobot Robotic Arm V8 is compatible with the majority of PhotoRobot rotary turntables and devices for automated 360 photography. It functions in combination with PhotoRobot robots such as the Centerless Table, the Cube, the Turning Platform, C-Class turntables, and more. Key components of the Robotic Arm V8 include: - **Control Unit** (a separate device for control of the Arm and compatible turntable) - **Camera mounting shank** (one short, one long, or both) - **Retractable wheels** on the machine base for mobility. - **Docking station** for quick setup with compatible turntables and devices. Additionally, the camera arm does not oscillate, so that the camera always moves along a precise trajectory. There is also a large mounting range for flexibility in the selection of tripod heads and cameras, and features for effortless transport and setup. **Note:** Refer to the [Robotic Arm V8 User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-arm-v8) for technical instructions on the assembly, operation, and first use of the device. ## 2. Prior to First Use of PhotoRobot If using PhotoRobot for the first time, it is necessary to first understand the PhotoRobot solution from a technical perspective. PhotoRobot is a modular unit which consists of hardware and software components. This requires a computer to operate PhotoRobot as well as PhotoRobot itself to be connected over the same network as the computer operating it. Then, the network must have a connection to the internet in order to access PhotoRobot services, which run over the cloud. **Note:** Refer to [PhotoRobot First Use & Basic Testing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing) prior to first use of the robotic workstation to ensure compliance with technical operating requirements for connection to the network. In general, the following basic operating requirements exist. - The Control Unit must connect to the local network. - A computer is necessary to run Service GUI or the operator’s software called _Controls. - The computer must connect over the same network as the Control Unit. - There must be a functional internet connection on the network. Illustrative model only: PhotoRobot connection to computer and network cloud services After connecting PhotoRobot to the network, check the electricity distribution system parameters (e.g. voltage and frequency). To do this, use the RJ45 connector on the back of the Control Unit. **Important:** If the setup of the Control Unit is not in compliance, set it up first. To do this, locate the manual voltage selector on the back of the Control Unit, and connect the Control Unit to the network via ethernet cable using the RJ45 connector. Next, ensure the following network configuration requirements for operation of the Robotic Turntable with Arm V8 are met. - A DHCP server in the network is mandatory. - TCP ports 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - UDP broadcasts on port 6666 must be allowed. - Internet connection is mandatory. - *.photorobot.com access must be allowed. - as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net access must be allowed. - Wired connection of PhotoRobot to LAN is recommended. - Confirm setup by referencing [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) as necessary. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. Finally, press the mains switch on the Control Unit. When the status changes, the light will change from a blinking to a steady light, signaling the Control Unit is ready for operation. ### 2.1. Find PhotoRobot’s IP Address on LAN After proper configuration of the network, it is necessary to search for and identify PhotoRobot’s IP address on LAN. To do this, the **PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP** for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network. Ensure you are using the most up-to-date version of CAPP to access this feature. Then, to identify a robot on the network directly within CAPP, open the local version of CAPP, go to Settings, and click **Robots / Control units**. The Robots / Control units menu displays columns with Name, Network, Unit, Version, Discovered, and Identify for each robot. If the dot to the left of the robot name is green, it is online. Clicking the robot field will then open the robot’s website interface. This will also make the LED light on the robot’s Control Unit blink green for its easier identification. If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** The Android version of PhotoRobot Locator has been discontinued. Alternatively, there is the FRFind command line utility for MacOS or Windows to search the network and identify PhotoRobot Control Units. Find links to download FRfind also via the PhotoRobot Account Downloads page. Then, after locating a PhotoRobot device, copy the IP address, and paste the address into any web browser in URL format. If successful, this will launch the Service GUI which displays a basic user interface for testing PhotoRobot. ### 2.2. Basic Testing of the Robotic Turntable and Arm V8 With the Service GUI open, use the simple user interface controls to first power on the motors of the machines. Next, use the left or right arrows next to the pause button to turn the platform to any angle, and then test the movement of the Robotic Arm. If the devices move to the desired angle, the workstation is ready for regular operation. - Turn on the engines ( arrow 1), try to rotate ( arrow 2 ). - If the robot follows the movement instructions, your PhotoRobot device is ready for regular operation. ## 3. PhotoRobot _Controls Software Overview Remote control over the Robotic Turntable with Robotic Arm V8 expansion workstation, including all robots, cameras, and lights is via the software PhotoRobot _Controls. The software manages workflow and provides all necessary functionality for effective automation in post-processing. **Important:** PhotoRobot _Controls is not included with the machine delivery; it is purchased separately and available via your [PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). For detailed instructions and support on the installation and use of PhotoRobot Controls App Software, refer to the [PhotoRobot Getting Started User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 4. Information Labels ### 4.1. Symbols Overview ### 4.2. Machine & Component Labels For information labels for specific machines and components, refer to the section [Information Labels](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information#toc-10)(3.1.) from PhotoRobot Safety Information and Instructions. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information # SECTION: manuals > safety-information # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-09 --- # PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions Find safety information and safety instructions for installation, operation, storage, and service of PhotoRobot devices. ## PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions The following documentation provides safety information and safety instructions for the installation, operation, storage, and service of PhotoRobot devices. This information should always be the first stage preceding any PhotoRobot installation. It aims to educate new customers on general safety requirements, the risks posed by PhotoRobot devices, electrical connections, safe use, and service. **Note:** For additional instructions regarding your specific PhotoRobot device, refer to the instructions provided with your device, and to available installation manuals. **Important:** The first installation of a PhotoRobot device must always be through a PhotoRobot authorized authority. Authorized authorities include an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. ## Safety Information & Instructions for PhotoRobot We thank you for your PhotoRobot purchase! The following presents the safety information for using your PhotoRobot devices. It includes general safety information as well as safety instructions for installation, electrical connection, use, and device service. Failure to comply with safety requirements can result in personal injury or harm, and / or damage to the machines. ## 1. Safety Information Before installation and use of the device, carefully read the supplied instructions. The manufacturer is not responsible for any harm, injuries, or damage due to incorrect installation or use of the device. Always keep the instructions with the device for future reference. ### 1.1. Child and Vulnerable Adult Safety This device can be used by children aged 8 years and above, and adults with reduced physical, sensory, or mental capabilities; or lacking operational knowledge if they are under supervision, or have received instructions on operating the device in a safe way, and the operator understands the hazards involved. Do not allow children to play with the device. Children less than 3 years of age should be kept away from the device unless under constant supervision. Cleaning and user maintenance must not be done by children without supervision. ### 1.2. General Safety - Do not change the specification of this device. - All ventilation openings must not be obstructed. - If the supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced in order to avoid a hazard. - Before maintenance, deactivate the device and disconnect the mains plug from the mains socket. - Do not use water spray and steam to clean the device. - Clean the device with a moist soft cloth. Only use neutral detergents. Do not use abrasive products, abrasive cleaning pads, solvents or metal objects. ## 2. Safety Instructions Always follow the safety instructions for installation, electrical connection, use, and service. Failure to follow the instructions can result in personal injury and / or harm to the equipment. ### 2.1. Installation The first installation after delivery from the manufacturer should be carried out only by our authorized authority (an approved distributor, or the manufacturer itself). - Remove all the packaging and the transit bolts. - Always be careful when you move the device because it is heavy in weight. Always wear safety gloves. - Do not install or use a damaged device. - Obey the installation instruction manual supplied with the device. - Do not install or use the device anywhere it is exposed to the weather. - Make sure that the floor where you install the device is flat, stable, and clean. - Ensure that there is air circulation possible around the device. - Adjust the feet to have the device in a flat position. - Do not install the device where there is not enough space to walk around it. ### 2.2. Electrical Connection - The device must be grounded. - Always use a correctly installed shockproof socket. - Ensure that the electrical information on the rating plate complies with the power supply. If it does not, contact an electrician. - Be sure not to cause damage to the mains plug or to the mains cable. - Connect the mains plug to the mains socket only at the end of the installation. Ensure that there is access to the mains plug after the installation. - Do not touch the mains cable or the mains plug with wet hands. - Do not pull the mains cable to disconnect the device. Always push the mains switch at the Control Unit first. - Do not approach the device when moving or when it is powered up. - Always mind the working area of this device. For example, with the Robotic Arm V8: - The elevator range is 32 cm. - The swing arm range is from 0 to 90 degrees. **Note:** Always refer to the instructions provided with your specific device for its safe working area, and additional safety information. ### 2.3. Use - There is risk of injury, electrical shock, fire, burns, or damage to the device when in use. - Use this device inside of buildings only. - Do not put flammable products or items that are doused with flammable products near or on the device. - Do not touch any part of the device when in moving operation. - The device is designed for operation only in an industrial environment. ### 2.4. Service - To repair the device, contact an authorized authority. - Use original spare parts only. ## 3. Information Labels ### 3.1. Symbols Overview ### 3.2. Control Unit (G7) Information Label The latest Control Unit G7 is a separate but integral component to the following PhotoRobot systems: - PhotoRobot Centerless Table - Robotic Turntable - Cube V5 / V6 - MultiCam - Robotic Arm V8 - Turning Platform - Virtual Catwalk - Carousel 3000 / 5000 **Note:** The Control Unit is built-into the PhotoRobot Case 850, the C850 & C1300, Cube Compact, and the Frame. In some cases, this may include older versions of the Control Unit (G5 or G6) instead of the newest Control Unit G7. Find more information labels below, on your specific device, and provided with the delivery of your PhotoRobot. ### 3.3. Case 850 Machine Label ### 3.4. C850 & C1300 Machine Label ### 3.5. Cube Compact Machine Label ### 3.6. Carousel 3000 Machine Label ### 3.7. Carousel 5000 Machine Label ### 3.8. Laser Box Vl Machine Label ### 3.9. MultiCam lV Machine Label --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace # SECTION: manuals > setting-up-workspace # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-04-28 --- # Setting up a PhotoRobot Workspace - Support Manual Discover how to set up a PhotoRobot Controls App product photography workspace, from modules to cameras, lights and other accessories. ## Setting up a PhotoRobot Workspace The following user manual describes the steps to setting up a **Workspace** in PhotoRobot Controls App (further just “CAPP”). A workspace is a list of hardware that will be used for a specific photoshoot. It can include various PhotoRobot modules, cameras, lights, and other accessories. **Note:** If you have not already installed and familiarized yourself with CAPP, refer to [PhotoRobot Getting Started](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started) for an overview of the software, its configuration and its use. The information in this user manual aims to support customers who have already attained a general understanding of the software. Also, for demo purposes, note that it is possible to work with a predefined **Sample Workspace**, which is configured to use virtual hardware. A sample workspace enables users to experiment with various features in CAPP by selecting virtual robots and cameras. To create a workspace, go to Workspaces in CAPP, and then tap the create (+) button. Pressing the create button will open the Edit workspace menu where it is possible to **Add robot**, **Add camera**, and **Select light manufacturer**. Be aware that after connecting a piece of hardware (or camera) to a workspace, you can immediately see whether it is online (recognized by CAPP). To do this, check the color of the dot to the left of the name of the given piece of equipment. If the device is recognized, there will be a **green dot**. Alternatively, a **gray dot** signals that the hardware was not recognized, or it is not turned on. If there is a **red dot**, there is an error, such as the user not switching the camera into manual mode. To identify the cause of the error, hover the mouse over the red dot to display a tooltip with a description of the error occurring. For common issues and their solutions, please refer to the [Troubleshooting PhotoRobot Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting). ## Add Robot In the next step, ensure all robots for the photoshoot are turned on and connected to the same local area network as your computer. Then press **Add robot**. 1. Press **Add robot** to see a list of available robots. 2. Select the robots you will use from the list. ## Configure Fast-Shot To activate Fast-shot mode, connect any robots with a camera via a shutter cable. 1. Click the **Three vertical dots** to the right of the robot to open the camera menu. 2. Select **Add shutter cable for camera**. 3. Choose **Output slot** (1 or 2). Select which output slot based on the physical wiring of your shutter cable. For cables from PhotoRobot, use slot 2. **( ! )** - For other manufacturers, it might be necessary to use slot 1. ## Configure Lasers Depending on the hardware in use, there are several options to configure lasers: ### For Built-in Lasers Both the Case 850 and the 1300 have laser systems designed into the robot with zero configuration required. ### 20-Port LaserBox The 20-port LaserBox is a standalone device which enables control over multiple lasers via network connection. To configure the LaserBox, ensure first that it’s turned on, and then add it as another robot to the workspace: ### 4-Port LaserBox If you have a 4-port LaserBox connected to your robot, select **Add laser cable** in the 3-dot menu items to the right of the robot’s ID: ## Add Cameras To add a camera, first ensure the device is turned on and connected via USB to the computer. If you are not using a robot with swing capability (e.g. the Robotic Arm or the Frame), you will also need to set the angle at which the camera will target the table. **( ! )** - Setting the angle for robots without swing capability is necessary for certain features such as auto-centering to operate. **( *)** - See the complete list of [PhotoRobot compatible cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras). ## Configure Lights Light systems compatible with PhotoRobot include two types of lights: strobe lights from FOMEI and Broncolor, or any LED lights with DMX support. To configure a lighting setup in the workspace menu, go to **Lights** and add compatible lights in **Select light manufacturer.** ### Strobe Lights - Broncolor To set up Broncolor lights, select first **BRONCOLOR**, and then choose from the **Studio group** of lights you want control over: ### Strobe Lights - FOMEI For lights by FOMEI, users have two control options: **FOMEI LAN Transceiver (preferred method)** For control over lights via FOMEI LAN Transceiver, ensure first that it is online and connected to your network. Next, select **LAN**. Then, below LAN in the dropdown menu, select **Fomei LAN Transceiver.** ### FOMEI USB Dongle (Legacy) It is also possible to control lights with FOMEI’s WiFi dongle connected directly to your computer via USB. ( ! ) Be aware that this method is no longer recommended. This is due to the fact it requires additional drivers to be installed on your computer. FOMEI also no longer supports newer MacOS systems. ### LED Lights - DMX To control any LED lights compatible with DMX protocol, connect the lights via an RJ45 or USB cable to the robot. You can then select **Light manufacturer DMX**. Later, you will create an individual light at the Capture screen: For each light, you can configure two channels: - The **Brightness channel** enables control over the selected light’s level of brightness. - The **Color channel** is supported by some lights and enables adjustment of color levels. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing # SECTION: manuals > smart-codes-guide-and-printing # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-04-29 --- # PhotoRobot SmartCodes User Guide and Print-Ready Code Sheet The following user guide describes how to use, download, and print PhotoRobot SmartCodes for integration within studio workflows. ## PhotoRobot SmartCodes User Guide and Print-Ready Code Sheet The following user guide describes how to use, download, and print **PhotoRobot SmartCodes** for integration within studio workflows. In PhotoRobot Controls, SmartCodes are like special trigger codes. They allow direct control of the software by scanning a code. Depending on the type of scanner in use, the SmartCode can be in barcode or QR code format. Customers then print the SmartCodes as stickers, or, alternatively, as labels to place near workstations or carry around the studio. This eliminates unnecessary movement back and forth from a computer workstation, significantly improving productivity. At the same time, it is especially convenient when SmartCodes are extremely near to the object to photograph. In these cases, the operator can place products on the machine and instantly signal workflow sequences to begin by scanning the code. There is no time wasted in between. The operator simply scans a code when placing the object, and scans the next code to automatically trigger the next stage of the workflow. ## PhotoRobot SmartCodes Available for Studio Use The current lineup of downloadable and printable PhotoRobot SmartCodes covers four vital stages of the PhotoRobot-powered workflow. These special SmartCodes include: - 8595676400053 – **Start Sequence** - 8595676400060 – **Ready for Shoot** - 8595676400077 – **Start CubiScan Measurement** - 8595676400084 – **Open Sort to Shelves** ### Start Sequence SmartCode Scanning a **Start Sequence** SmartCode will instruct PhotoRobot Controls software to begin the robotized capture process. ### Ready to Shoot SmartCode The **Ready to Shoot** SmartCode tells the software that the product has been positioned for the robot, and that the capture sequence is ready to begin. ### CubiScan SmartCode The SmartCode for **CubiScan** prepares the CubiScan device to measure an object’s weight and dimensions. Scan the code to prep CubiScan, and simply scan the object afterwards to automatically record the item’s measurements in the software. ### Sort to Shelves SmartCode Using the **Sort to Shelves** SmartCode instructs PhotoRobot Controls software to begin sorting items to shelves after scanning. In this way, operators simply scan a shelf code, and then scan an item to quickly assign its photoshoot settings. **Note:** For more information on sorting items to shelves, refer to the [PhotoRobot Capturing Images User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images#toc-18). ## Print-Ready PhotoRobot SmartCodes Cheat Sheets Use the two buttons in this section to access downloadable, print-ready PhotoRobot SmartCodes cheat sheets. The **SmartCodes Overview** contains all codes with individual files in QR code and barcode formats. Then, as a bonus, there is the **Print-Ready Smartcodes Sheet** for commercial printing of PhotoRobot SmartCodes. The first page is for printing, while the second page contains cutting contours. [Download SmartCodes Overview](https://cdn.photorobot.io/webflow/69f1e065e4ebcf2f5b04026a/Codes.pdf)[Download Print-Ready SmartCodes](https://cdn.photorobot.io/webflow/69f1e065a26292cd3f4bcada/210316-PhotoRobot-BarCode-Stickers-v4.pdf) ## How to Generate Unique QR Codes and Barcodes It is possible to generate QR codes or barcodes using various online tools. For higher quality, vector formats (SVG) are recommended. Although, standard bitmap formats such as PNG are usually sufficient. - QR code generation is available for example via [QRCode Monkey](https://www.qrcode-monkey.com/). - Barcode generation is available for example via [Barcode Generator](https://www.barcodesvg.com/). ## Tips for Studio Integration of PhotoRobot SmartCodes In practice, SmartCodes are usable as stickers, or printable on label printers (commonly available at workstations), or standard printers. The SmartCode are then placeable anywhere in the workspace as tags, or on keychains for carrying around, for example. Users have a lot of flexibility in how they use the codes. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/studio-lighting-overview # SECTION: manuals > studio-lighting-overview # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-07-30 --- # Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems Understand your choice in studio lighting with PhotoRobot, including information on all types of available lighting systems for customers. ## Studio Lighting Overview for PhotoRobot Systems The following overview describes the choice of studio lighting for PhotoRobot customers. This includes information covering all types of available studio lights for PhotoRobot. Find the choices for **continuous**, **strobe**, and **DMX-controlled** lighting from Broncolor, FOMEI, and Profoto. There is technical information on lighting quality as well as on the lighting approach to photographing products in general. This includes common mistakes in studio lighting for product photography, how PhotoRobot solves them, and technical notes on achieving the perfect depth of field. **Note:** This user manual provides a general overview for your choice in lighting systems for use with PhotoRobot. For technical documentation on a specific studio lighting system, refer to [PhotoRobot User Manuals](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals), or to the additional resources at the end of this document. ## Choice of Studio Lighting with PhotoRobot Rather than using mass-produced *(cheap)* studio lights, PhotoRobot integrates **only professional studio lighting** from **Broncolor**, **FOMEI**, and **Profoto**. These brands allow PhotoRobot customers to focus on increasing throughput without any risk of compromising quality due to poor lighting. In the end, the overall approach to the lighting of photographed products is crucial to the resulting image. Moreover, that image is often a decisive factor in succeeding or failing to sell the product online, and ensuring minimal returns. This is why PhotoRobot supports only professional studio lighting. Quality in lighting matters, especially at the speeds of PhotoRobot. Thus, it is necessary to afford special attention to the selection and configuration of our lighting systems. ## Most Common Mistake in Studio Lighting One of the most common mistakes in studio lighting is using **excessive backlight intensity** for product photography. While this might lead to a perfectly white background, the amount of light bleeding in from behind blurs the contours of the object. This so-called “light-wrap” is common among all-in-one “box-like systems” that use inappropriate diffuse lighting, creating major issues in practice. Excessive backlight intensity results in: - Reduced or loss of gloss on reflective surfaces; - Change in color (due to a milky tint); - Loss of texture. On the other hand, if the light source is too weak to allow sufficient stopping-down of the lens, the depth of field becomes too shallow. This results in blurriness in front of and from behind the object, which is especially discernible when zooming into images with online viewers. ## Depth of Field in 360 Spin Photography In the context of 360 product spins, it is not only important that the **subject fits in the frame** in terms of width and height. It is also necessary that the **entire image remains in focus**, and that the **background is out of focus** if possible. This allows for the easy calculation of the depth of field, and for the later verification of DoF in practice. Use the [PhotoRobot Depth of Field Calculator](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-calculator) to estimate near and far focus limits, total depth of field, and the hyperfocal distance for any combination of focal length, aperture, sensor format, and subject distance. For quick reference, use the [PhotoRobot Depth of Field Chart](https://www.photorobot.com/depth-of-field-chart) to quickly find total depth of field for common subject distances and apertures. Note: At a given focal length of the lens, the depth of field is influenced by camera distance. Additionally, camera distance can only be controlled to a certain extent when mounting the camera on a robotic arm. The same is true for aperture value (f-stop). To achieve a greater depth of field, higher aperture is necessary, amounting to higher demands for the intensity of the lighting. Although continuous LED lights are popular (and despite their technological advancement), their light intensity in regards to larger objects remains insufficient. Larger objects require strobe lights. Strobe lighting allows for an extremely short exposure time (e.g. 1 / 10,000s). This means that there is no requirement to stop the movement of the machine in order to take an image. Instead, exposure is performed by a “freezing of motion” during a very short and intense flash. At the same time, PhotoRobot is able to read the position of the turntable 1,000 times per second to ensure the flash occurs at precisely the right moment. What does this amount to? Without having to stop the rotation of the turntable, there is a **four-fold productivity increase** on average. ## Types of Available Studio Lights for PhotoRobot For the functional operation of PhotoRobot with studio lights, automatic light control is a strict requirement. Automatic light control is necessary so that a specific product (or product category) can function with automatic preset lighting parameters through software control ([PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software)). This also means the operator does not have to manually reset the lighting of the scene. ## Continuous Lights When using continuous lighting, the **DMX** bus system is common. It is supported by a number of manufacturers, such as the popular British manufacturer **Rotolight**. Their **ANOVA** range in particular works well with PhotoRobot, but note that it is also possible to connect LED lights of your own design. For example, we might use LED lights of our own design when photographing jewelry or small items. In this case, the absence of flashes can be a pleasant advantage for the operator, while light intensity remains sufficient in respect to the size of the objects. PhotoRobot systems control the DMX system via a **USB adapter**, which connects to the control unit of the robot or to the controlling computer. ## Strobe Lights Manufacturers of strobe lights typically use proprietary communication protocols. PhotoRobot currently supports control of the following brands. - Broncolor (Siros S series) - FOMEI (Digital Prox X series) - Profoto **Note:** For technical documentation and user guides on specific lighting systems for use with PhotoRobot, refer to the additional resources at the end of this document. ### Broncolor The Broncolor Siros S series provides first-class quality, Wi-Fi control, and high color stability (even when the flash intensity changes). This eliminates any need for color calibration when changing light settings. The Broncolor Siros S series also has a high flash frequency (even at high intensity), and comes with a complete accessory kit. Its higher price is thus fully in line with the delivered quality and performance, which is suitable for customers with high demands regarding product throughput or extreme image quality. ### FOMEI Digital Pro X studio flashes by FOMEI deliver excellent proven quality, and come with a complete accessory kit. The lights provide mid-range performance in terms of stability, reliability, and frequency of flashes, while offering an excellent cost-to-performance ratio. ### Profoto Installation of Profoto lights is possible only for customers who already use Profoto products and do not want to change brands. This is due to limited support of Profoto lights. ## Additional PhotoRobot - Studio Lighting Resources For additional documentation and user guides on specific lighting systems for use with PhotoRobot, refer to the following customer resources. - [Broncolor Lights Management](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-broncolor-lights-management) - [FOMEI Ceiling System Kit](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-ceiling-system-kit) - [FOMEI Digital Pro X Series](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-digital-pro-x) - [FOMEI LED DMX 150B](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-150b) - [FOMEI LED DMX 300B](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-300b) - [FOMEI LED DMX 600B](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-dmx-600b) - [FOMEI LED ROLL](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/fomei-led-roll) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/synchrobox-setup # SECTION: manuals > synchrobox-setup # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-05-06 --- # PhotoRobot SynchroBox - Functionality & Setup User Guide The following technical documentation describes the functionality and setup of the PhotoRobot SynchroBox to synchronize two or more cameras. ## PhotoRobot SynchroBox - Functionality & Setup User Guide The following documentation describes the functionality and setup of PhotoRobot SynchroBox, the **Multi-Camera Controller** supporting the [PhotoRobot MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobots-multicam). This information aims to support PhotoRobot customers who have recently purchased a device and are using more than one camera with PhotoRobot. The SynchroBox functions as a multi-camera hub which synchronizes the camera shutter of two or more cameras. Read ahead to understand the theory, functionality, and setup of the SynchroBox to help facilitate basic understanding and first operation of the device. **Important:** The initial installation of a PhotoRobot system must always be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. Additionally, always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) along with any manual provided specifically with your device before first use of PhotoRobot. **Note:** For instructions on the assembly and first use of the PhotoRobot MultiCam, refer to [PhotoRobot MultiCam and Centerless Table Installation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/multicam-centerless-table-installation). ## SynchroBox Technical User Guide Thank you and congratulations on your PhotoRobot purchase. PhotoRobot represents decades of first-hand, professional experience and innovation in automated photography. Every device delivers an eco-system of ready-made solutions, with features tailorable around your business’ unique needs. Welcome to PhotoRobot. Use the following technical information to start your journey to understanding and maximizing production in the PhotoRobot-powered studio. ## 1. PhotoRobot SynchroBox - The Theory The PhotoRobot SynchroBox is required to synchronize camera shutter when using two or more cameras with PhotoRobot systems. SynchroBox functions as a multi-camera hub to synchronize the capture of individual frames by different cameras at precisely the right moment. It represents a solution to the issue that arises when working with cameras that have different shutter lags, and one unit supports up to 8 cameras. Several SynchroBox units can be linked into a cluster when a set-up needs more cameras. **To understand the theory of the SynchroBox, take for example the sequences of standard capture mode versus fast-spin capture mode with PhotoRobot.** In the **standard capture mode**, there is the following sequence. **a)** The plate moves to the desired angle. **b)** The plate stops. **c)** The camera photographs the object. **d)** The plate begins moving to the next angle. *There is no adjustment necessary in this scenario.* In **fast-spin capture mode**, the sequence requires several more stages. **a)** The plate starts rotating at a predefined speed. **b)** The Control Unit recognizes the angle to capture is approaching. **c)** The Control Unit fires the camera shutter via shutter cable in advance. **d)** The camera starts the capture process (sensor curtain movement, etc). **e)** The capture process requires approximately 50 milliseconds (“shutter lag”). **f)** The plate is continuously in motion during the shutter lag time frame. **g)** The plate reaches the desired angle precisely when the camera’s shutter lag has concluded, taking the picture. **h)** The Control Unit recognizes that the next capture angle is approaching, repeating the capture process in regards to shutter lag. **i)** The plate rotation concludes after 360 degrees, stopping all movement. **Note:** Due to the fact that each camera has a different shutter lag, it is necessary to adjust the Control Unit shutter advance for each particular camera. This is possible for the Control Unit (Generation 6) via its service GUI using the option “Trigger advance”. The “Trigger advance” value must be higher than the shutter lag of the camera. For example, if the shutter lag of the camera is 80 ms, then the “Trigger advance” should be approximately equal to or greater than 90 ms. ## 2. Device Description - PhotoRobot SynchroBox By design, the SynchroBox is a rack mount device designed for the synchronization of the camera shutters of two or more cameras. It is necessary when operating any PhotoRobot system using more than one camera at a time. One SynchroBox supports up to 8 cameras, providing a solution to working around different shutter lags of the cameras in use. Take for example a scenario using two cameras and a SynchroBox only as the splitter for both cameras, with no additional setup applied. At the same time, the Control Unit G6 “Trigger advance” value is zero. The shutter is then fired when the plate reaches the desired angle. In this case, the steps of the sequence are: **a)** The plate reaches the desired angle. **b)** The Control Unit fires the camera shutter via shutter cable. **c)** The shutter lag for both cameras counts down while the plate is in continuous movement. **d)** The first camera takes the picture 50 ms after the desired capture point using “desired angle + X” degrees. **e)** The second camera captures the picture 70 ms after the desired capture point using “desired angle + Y” degrees. **f)** The “Y” value degrees are greater than “X” value degrees. As a result, there is no picture captured of the desired angle. Thus, adjustment is necessary so that both cameras photograph the desired capture point at the correct moment. For this, the SynchroBox receives a “shutter fired” pulse from the Control Unit G6, and automatically identifies the length of the pulse. Additionally, the SynchroBox has the shutter lag value for each connected camera, which was manually entered when set up. Using these two parameters, the SynchroBox counts and fires the shutter of each camera with the appropriate advance. ## 3. How to Measure Camera Shutter Lag In order to measure camera shutter lag, it is necessary to have a PhotoRobot with any rotating plate, the Control Unit G6+, and a camera connected via shutter cable to the Control Unit. Next, a local computer with PhotoRobot Controls App Software must be connected to the camera via USB cable. Finally, a [360-degree protractor (downloadable online)](https://drive.google.com/open?id=1bEptXHTKP3rEOx7fML83vad1CNOyHHWL) is necessary to complete the following steps. **a)** Place the protractor on the PhotoRobot device plate, using any pointer positioned outside of the plate and pointing to the edge. **b)** Turn the plate until the pointer is at zero. Note: This step is possible by hand even when the electrical engines are powered off. **c)** Start PhotoRobot Controls App software, log into your account, and create an item using the workspace keeping in mind the given configuration. Then, open Capture mode, and open the folder “Other”. **d)** Next, in a new tab on your browser, open the service GUI of the Control Unit (G6), which provides control over the plate using its IP address. **e)** In the service GUI, set up the robot with following parameters: - 1 = 4 pictures by 90 degrees; - 2 = 40 ms pulse length for triggering the shutter; - 3 = trigger advance 0 ms (no advance); - 4 = no fastshots delay - 5 = half-press of the shutter is activated **f)** Start the sequence by clicking the right arrow in the bottom-right corner of the control panel: **Note:** The sequence begins at 90 degrees and finishes at 0 degrees. At the same time, all photos are captured into the folder “Other” in the Controls App, as previously configured. For example, refer to the following sample outputs (with a rotating direction to the left): - **Note:** In these examples, image capture was approximately 6 degrees after the trigger was fired. **g)** Next, in order to transform 6 degrees into the number of milliseconds (ms) in this case, start the continuous rotation of PhotoRobot’s plate using the same speed from the previous step in the service GUI. - Start a stopwatch and record the time for 10 rounds. - In this test case, the resulting value is 61 seconds (61,000 ms). - That means that 10 rounds is equal to 10 * 360 degrees (3,600 degrees). - There is 1 degree time movement lasting 61,000 ms / 3,600 degrees, equaling 16.94 ms. - There is 6 degrees time movement lasting 16.94 ms * 6, which equals 101.64 ms. - Thus, the approximate shutter delay is roughly 102 ms. **h)** Finally, it is necessary to repeat all of the previous steps in order to identify the shutter delay for each different camera in use. ## 4. SynchroBox Setup For the setup of the SynchroBox, a prerequisite is that there is a Control Unit (G6) installed and fully operational. Further, ideally there will be 2 or more cameras from the same manufacturer and of the same model, each with a known shutter lag. In this case, use the following steps to set up the SynchroBox. **4.1.** Connect the SynchroBox to the Control Unit G6 via shutter cable. Note: This shutter cable is provided by PhotoRobot as a part of SynchroBox delivery, or under the part number KHCAR1R05. The shutter cable connects the Control Unit G6 “OUT” port to the SynchroBox “->IN” port (**the smaller one, not the other one “=>IN”**). **4.2.** Connect the SynchroBox to the network via standard ethernet cable, using the same subnet connecting to the Control Unit. **4.3.** Connect all cameras that will be in operation to the SynchroBox using shutter cables. **Note:** The shutter cables for the SynchroBox to the cameras are delivered by PhotoRobot under the part numbers KHCARCJ (Canon Jack 2.5 mm Connector) or KHCARN3 (Canon N3 connector) plus the extension KHCAR1R05, or as a so-called shutter cable set. **4.4.** Be aware that Camera 1 (port 1 of the SynchroBox) holds and operates the flash lights trigger device. This camera must have the largest shutter lag. **4.5.** Set up the Control Unit (G6) “Trigger advance” value according to the shutter lag of the slowest camera (previously described in section 1 of this document). Note: When using PhotoRobot Controls App, be aware that this value is adjusted / replaced by the value set for the Capture mode - Fast Spin: **4.6.** Next, access the service GUI of the SynchroBox by entering its IP address in URL format into your web browser. **4.7.** Set up the first slider “CU advance” to the same value as it is in the Control Unit, or to a corresponding value in PhotoRobot Controls. Note: Be aware that if these two values differ, the value in PhotoRobot Controls will take precedence. Then, there are 8 sliders corresponding to the 8 ports on the SynchroBox. The sliders each have two values: the advance (left button), and length of pulse (right button). The advanced value equals the shutter lag of the controlled camera (with the smallest real value approximately -50 ms). Length of pulse then relates to the time frame during which the shutter cable for the camera maintains contact. This value is provided by the camera manufacturer, or, if unknown, can be set to 40 - 60 ms. **4.8.** Set up the input channel in the SynchroBox service GUI. Note: When using PhotoRobot’s shutter cables, the setup will always be as follows. - **IN port:** A = focus, B = trigger - **Port 1 - 8**: A = trigger, B = focus - Note that there are only cameras 1, 2, and 3 set up in the above example. - Because PhotoRobot is intended to use flash lights, set up camera 1 shutter speed to 1/100 or 1/125. **4.9.** Finally, configure the initial setup of all other cameras to a much longer shutter speed, e.g. 1/30 - 1/60. This will help to account for the possible difference in shutter lags between the cameras in use. The longer time frame will also ensure that all cameras catch up to the peak of the flash from all strobes. When working correctly, it is then possible to experiment by reducing the shutter speed of the other cameras if necessary. ## 5. Multiple SynchroBox Setup The SynchroBox supports up to a maximum number of 8 cameras. If more than 8 cameras are necessary, it is then possible to multiply the number of SynchroBoxes in use. - Connect the OUT port of the first SynchroBox to the IN port of the next SynchroBox, using the same shutter cable which connects the Control Unit to the SynchroBox. This shutter cable is provided by PhotoRobot as a part of SynchroBox delivery or under the part number KHCAR1R05. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-installation-and-training # SECTION: manuals > system-installation-and-training # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-07-27 --- # Installation and Operator Training of PhotoRobot Systems Understand the stages of PhotoRobot system installation, assembly and testing of machines and accessories, including the subsequent operator training. ## Installation and Operator Training of PhotoRobot Systems Upon delivery of a brand new PhotoRobot system, our team of experienced technicians will install the solution and train operators to use it. That includes first ensuring the correct assembly of the system, and that it is functioning properly. In this way, teams can quickly unlock the [full potential of PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap). The following documentation describes the stages of system installation, assembly and testing of machines and accessories, and the subsequent operator training. Find also information on follow-up care of PhotoRobot devices, and more on travel & accommodation costs for PhotoRobot specialists. **Note:** To understand the prerequisites for system installation and training, refer to [PhotoRobot Installation Readiness & Delivery](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/installation-readiness-and-delivery). ## PhotoRobot System Installation The first stage of installing a new PhotoRobot system involves correctly assembling the machine and ensuring it is functioning properly. Before this, a PhotoRobot sales team member will communicate the overall organization of the installation, its scope (appropriate to the number of delivered machines and the intended method of implementation), the terms, and the related costs. Meanwhile, installation and training should be firmly planned only when there is no doubt about the date of delivery of the machines to the place of installation. For example, delays may occur due to customs procedures or other obstacles. ## Assembly and Testing of Machines and Accessories After delivery of a PhotoRobot system, the technicians will unpack the equipment, assemble it, and bring it to operating conditions. They will then demonstrate the functionality of the complete system to the customer. **Important:** In order to assemble and test the device and accessories, one of the first stages of the installation process requires connecting the machines to the customer’s LAN. For this, network readiness is expected according to [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites). **Note:** PhotoRobot’s [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) is designed to be shipped to the installation site by the carrier, while customers can assemble and set up the CASE independently using an extensive manual. However, such procedures cannot be recommended for more complex equipment. ## Training for Operators When installation is complete, we recommend training from our PhotoRobot photography and / or software development experts. The experts will share valuable insights and instructions to maximize the productivity of your PhotoRobot configuration, and to ensure frictionless onboarding for you and your colleagues. This training should also focus on preparing presets for future automated photography. Then, the **training syllabus** is adjustable to individual customer needs, and agreed on with your PhotoRobot representative. Although, for training periods shorter than the recommended duration, it is necessary to only cover some areas in brief, or to omit points completely. (At the very least, the operator must know how to start the system, and how to begin a photoshoot.) ## Follow-Up Care After the initial installation and operator training, the system is ready for use. Typically, for larger projects, we recommend that you allow for a short period of time (several days) to realize maximum performance levels. It takes time for teams to master the system before they can deliver at 100% of the expected volume. Additionally, expect minor technical complications in the first weeks of operation. The system consists of tens or hundreds of components, each of which will require fine-tuning and may take more time than scheduled for the installation. Freshly trained operators may also occasionally need the assistance of PhotoRobot specialists to internalize optimal processes and ensure maximum productivity. PhotoRobot provides a variety of support systems for similar situations, each tailorable to your unique and specific projects. Consult your PhotoRobot specialist for details to ensure that the whole process runs perfectly. ## Travel & Accommodation Costs for PhotoRobot Specialists Your PhotoRobot consultant will always discuss travel and accommodation costs for the PhotoRobot specialists. Be aware: - Payment for the travel and accommodation costs for installation technicians and trainers is the responsibility of the customer. - Travel, accommodation, and training costs for installation technicians and trainers **vary by destination and are confirmed with you before installation**. - If the destination is subject to visa requirements, PhotoRobot provides the visa for its staff, and invoices the proven costs to the customer. - 1 installation day is typically 8 working hours, although shorter or longer times are possible and occur charges on a **proportional basis**. By default, training is in English (or Czech). If necessary, we recommend securing an interpreter on the customer’s side. However, on prior agreement, an interpreter can be provided by PhotoRobot. If PhotoRobot provides the interpreter, the fees for the interpreter are the same as for technicians and trainers; the cost of the interpreter’s preparation is included in the fee. **Note:** As pricing may differ, your PhotoRobot consultant will always discuss and confirm the final related costs for travel, accommodation, and training with you beforehand. Please refer to the quote directly from your PhotoRobot consultant for the actual costs. ## Unlock Maximum Productivity for Your PhotoRobot With PhotoRobot Support always available, we will ensure your hardware and software remain in perfect condition together. The support team exists to resolve any issues your operators encounter, with support pricing based either on your service agreement or hourly rates. To set up a support contract or request assistance, [contact your PhotoRobot specialist](https://www.photorobot.com/contact). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-integration # SECTION: manuals > system-integration # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-07-27 --- # PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity Explore the detailed summary for PhotoRobot customers on the system integration and rich API connectivity of PhotoRobot systems. ## PhotoRobot System Integration & Rich API Connectivity The following information for PhotoRobot customers summarizes the system integration & API connectivity of PhotoRobot systems. It provides a general overview of the integration process necessary for the installation and setup of PhotoRobot. Find information on system integration relating to input data and output data, and on using PhotoRobot APIs for automation and development. **Note:** This information aims to facilitate a general understanding of system integration, and also includes developer resources to support internal IT teams. For an overview of the software solution, refer to the [PhotoRobot Controls Software Solution & Pricing Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/software-overview-and-pricing). **For Technical Teams:** Access the complete integration documentation using the [PhotoRobot Developer Portal](https://developer.photorobot.com/). ## System Integration – Summary To ensure optimal productivity across the entire digital content production process, it is necessary PhotoRobot connects to the customer’s existing systems. This interconnection of the system for capturing images with the customer’s existing systems involves both **input data** (into PhotoRobot Controls App) and **output data**. At the technical level, the integration of systems is described on the [PhotoRobot Developer Platform](https://developer.photorobot.com/). This platform is available to share in its entirety with the customer’s IT department for easy service implementation. Meanwhile, PhotoRobot technical and consulting support is always available for PhotoRobot customers. ## Input Data Integration For the easiest possible integration of input data, there is a dynamically configurable .csv file import system in PhotoRobot _Controls. Find a detailed description of this import system using the **PhotoRobot Developer Portal**. The following advantages of this import system are noteworthy: - The structure of the columns is configurable and dynamic, e.g. when exporting data. - You can add more lines (new products) to a pre-existing project, even after the photographic work on a contract has already begun. - There is no risk of losing data when adding additional columns (tags), such as product codes used by another vendor who will also distribute the products. ## Output Data Integration Regarding output data, the system supports **dynamic feeds** (XML or JSON) with password protection. Using this solution, customers are able to deliver photos to any system of choice. - The primary advantage of this is the **automatic publishing** to a target website **instantly after capturing images**. - For example, as soon as the first batch of product images for a larger order are complete, they can instantly go online while the rest of the order remains in progress. - The product photos are immediately to market, while your studio continues processing the next batch of images. Standard features include **image download** in a dynamically configurable file name structure. The structure is according to the customer’s requirements, with a range of predefined formats. Additionally, one of the most fluid and advantageous publishing methods is the integration of [**PhotoRobot Viewer**](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) and **Spin Viewer**. The Spin Viewer delivers the image in the appropriate resolution (depending on end-user device) directly from the cloud to the customers with the incredibly fast speeds of Google CDN. ## Robot Controls and API for Automation & Development The standard means for control of every PhotoRobot machine is the built-in communication interface. This web-based interface allows for control of PhotoRobot via a webpage on desktop or on mobile. Its primary use is as a service interface, although some users operate the system this way. To identify the robot in a local network and establish the communication, first, the user is able to locate the robots directly in PhotoRobot Controls App. That, or it is possible to use the PhotoRobot Locator app, which is available for download via [PhotoRobot Controls Account - Downloads](https://www.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note: To control not only the robot but also cameras, lights, and other equipment from one interface, use of PhotoRobot Cloud API is recommended.** The Cloud API works by providing the app control over capture, including operation of all studio gear. There are no geographical limitations related to studio locations. In effect, the Cloud API is able to connect full studio workflows, even remotely, providing a stream of images and metadata. Alternatively, there is the Control Unit API, allowing for only management of the machine movements, inputs, and outputs. However, due to its complexity and inability to control equipment other than the robot, the Control Unit API is **not** the preferred method of control. This API controls the robot only; it is not an API for cameras, lights, and other studio hardware or software – which require the manufacturer’s own API versions. Although, if strictly required and requested by the customer, the Control Unit API is available by special request through your PhotoRobot sales representative. **Regarding image processing, use of either the local or cloud version of PhotoRobot Controls App is best and recommended.** PhotoRobot API manages backstage processes, such as shooting list import, file export and other crucial processes. At the same time, due to the complexity of the shooting process, there is greater control over the capturing sequences when using PhotoRobot Controls. ## PhotoRobot Cloud API & Developer Platform For technical IT teams, the [PhotoRobot Developer Portal](https://developer.photorobot.com/) facilitates seamless cloud integrations with enterprise-grade security. The portal connects to the PhotoRobot Developer Platform – the ultimate toolkit for building custom, highly scalable photography workflows. Using PhotoRobot Cloud APIs, tech teams are able to build reliable integrations which fully connect their studio. This helps bridge the gap to full studio automation, accounting for more than just hardware sequences. It allows for complete integration of automated product photography into catalog and media pipelines. PhotoRobot APIs can create product items, automate capture workflows, and deliver processed images through scalable hosting feeds. There is **enterprise-grade standardization**, with completely unified API responses, standardized payloads, shared validations, and clearly defined error codes. Thus, integrations are both robust and predictable, while advanced safe-guards help to ensure **bullet-proof data consistency**. All the while, developers are able to test and implement rapidly, taking advantage of **interactive endpoint references**. For an overview on using the Developer Portal, refer to [Introducing the PhotoRobot Developer Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/developer-portal-cloud-api-v2). ## PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI) BYOK If introducing artificial intelligence models into workflows via API, there is the [PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI, π) BYOK infrastructure](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/byok-photorobot-intelligence). BYOK in PI allows PhotoRobot customers to meet the highest enterprise standards, offering support with organization-level control for most major AI model providers. In PhotoRobot Controls, it is possible to simply insert your own API key from the provider with whom your company already has an Enterprise Agreement. PI architecture supports the most robust players on the market like OpenAI, Azure OpenAI, Anthropic, Google AI (Gemini), and GitHub Models. There are also no hidden data brokering fees, so customers only pay for the computing power directly to their cloud provider at the negotiated corporate rates. Then, with secure connectivity, studios are able to perfectly align operations using new intelligence models with internal policies, security requirements, and corporate cost strategies. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements # SECTION: manuals > system-requirements # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-07-27 --- # System Requirements for PhotoRobot - Support Manual PhotoRobot Controls Application is a cross-platform software that provides a consistent experience on macOS and Windows operating systems. ## System Requirements for PhotoRobot The following documentation describes the system requirements, required hardware specifications, and recommended computers to run PhotoRobot Controls Application. This includes information on computer compatibility, USB cables, and suitable barcode scanners. In order to run PhotoRobot Controls Application, your computer and equipment must meet these technical specifications, outlined below. ## Choosing Your Platform **While PhotoRobot Controls runs on both macOS and Windows, PhotoRobot strongly recommends Apple-based systems for production use.** We treat Apple as an integral part of the PhotoRobot system rather than an optional preference. There are two reasons for this. Firstly, Apple offers a small, well-defined set of hardware configurations which we can fully test and validate every release against. This provides predictable, reproducible results in high-volume production. Secondly, Apple-based systems deliver an excellent cost-performance ratio, and a low total cost of ownership. Additionally, due to treating the computer as part of the delivered system, we minimize the need for internal IT intervention and third-party coordination on the customer’s side. Windows remains fully supported, and we ship a Windows build. However, Windows is an open platform consisting of a very large number of hardware components and driver vendors. As a result, platform-specific operational issues can arise that originate outside of PhotoRobot software – most commonly, graphics-card and USB drivers. Resolving these issues is then the responsibility of the customer together with the relevant third-party vendor, as this hardware is not part of PhotoRobot’s supply. PhotoRobot supports its software; hardware-level and driver-level issues specific to a given Windows configuration must be handled with that component or driver vendor. **In short:** Choose Apple to ensure the platform is a tested part of your system; choose Windows to meet corporate policy or preference, but plan for the occasional platform-specific issues that you will have to resolve with your hardware and driver vendors. ## Operating System Compatibility PhotoRobot Controls Application is available for the following versions of the operating systems: - macOS 11 BigSur - macOS 12 Monterey - macOS 13 Ventura - macOS 14 Sonoma - macOS 15 Sequoia - macOS Tahoe 26 - Windows 10 - 64bit - Windows 11 ## Recommended Hardware ### MacOS | Requirement | Recommended | | --- | --- | | RAM | 16 GB of total system RAM or more | | Graphic card | Dedicated GPU with 4 GB of memory or Apple Silicon (M1) | | Monitor resolution | 1920×1080 or higher | | Hard disk space | 500 GB SSD or higher | | USB | USB 3.0, the number is based on the number of cameras used, should be +1 | ### Windows | RAM | 16 GB of total system RAM or more / 2133MHz DDR4 memory | | CPU | Intel® processor with 64-bit support; 2.3 GHz or faster processor; i5 or higher architecture | | Graphic card | 4 GB of GPU memory or more (not recommend using an integrated graphics card) | | Monitor resolution | 1920×1080 or higher | | Hard disk space | 500 GB SSD or higher | | USB | USB 3.0, the number is based on the number of cameras used, should be +1 | **Note:** Apple-based systems are recommended for optimal performance and stability with PhotoRobot software in production use. Refer back to the section “Choosing Your Platform” for more information. ## Networking PhotoRobot is delivered with its own subnet, connected to the customer’s network. Internet connection is required. The minimum recommended speed to the internet is 20/20 Mbps - for Cloud and Hybrid subscriptions. The following services / ports need to be open to the internet: - TCP, 443 (https), outbound - TCP, 80 (http), outbound - UDP, 53 (dns), inbound, outbound - ICMP (ping), recommended Access to these servers on the Internet is required: - ***.photorobot.com** - Required PhotoRobot Cloud services - **as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net** - Activation server for PhotoRobots, callhome service function For technical documentation on network configuration, refer to [PhotoRobot Detailed Networking Prerequisites](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites). ## Recommended Computers The following Apple-based systems are recommended for optimal performance and stability, with options varying based on different size screens. - **MacBook Air / Pro 15” / 16”** (Excellent Portability) - **iMac 24”** (Reasonable price, all-in-one solution) - **Mac Mini** (Reasonable price, 3rd party screens available) All of the above computers perfectly meet PhotoRobot’s technical requirements. Detailed specifications then depend on expected cloud or local storage and processing. In general, an optimal choice will offer 16 - 32 GB RAM, and 256 - 512 GB SSD. **Note:** The standard Apple Silicon configurations we recommend are fully sufficient for Controls. A higher core count does not improve the capture and editing performance – the additional cores in Max / Ultra chips aim to support heavy 3D and video rendering, not the PhotoRobot workflow. Thus, the recommended base configurations are also considerably more affordable. (Meanwhile, the high-core Mac Studio remains a great option, specifically for photogrammetry 3D reconstruction.) In regards to screen size, a display of at least 15” is recommended for optimal viewing of PhotoRobot Controls interface. ## Compatible Computers and USB Cables The PhotoRobot _Controls Drivers to connect cameras, robots, and lights support both macOS and Windows systems. However, remember that **PhotoRobot strongly recommends using an Apple-based system for production use** (see “Choosing Your Platform” for more information). Although image processing takes place in the cloud, it is appropriate that the computers intended for image processing are equipped with an SSD (or Fusion Drive) and a graphics card allowing GPU utilization. For computers that are not intended for image processing, any operating system with a modern web browser (we recommend Chrome) can be used. When using multiple cameras at one workplace (working simultaneously – e.g. with a MultiCam system), it is not recommended to use a USB HUB. Instead, we recommend connecting cameras directly to the USB ports of the computer. If it is necessary to connect more cameras than there are computer ports (for example, the recommended iMac usually has 4), it is advisable to use (high-quality) hubs to connect up to 2 cameras per port. Otherwise, the camera USB bus overloads, and the system is unreliable. Note: Please always use [high-quality USB cables](https://tethertools.com/product-category/cables-adapters/) with a 5-meter length maximum. ## Suitable Barcode Scanners It is possible to use suitable barcode scanners with PhotoRobot systems to: - Automatically insert the product code into its label in PhotoRobot _Controls; - Trigger a photo sequence. In general, barcode readers can be divided into wired and wireless devices. Wired barcode readers connect to the USB of the computer, and are limited by the cable length (typically between 2 and 5 m). Wireless readers have either a USB-powered base in which they are charged or wireless connection to a computer via a proprietary USB dongle. In an ideal environment with no obstructions and direct visibility, the range of wireless scanners is up to 100 m. In practice, however, we recommend you to account for a range of 10 - 15 meters depending on the environment (obstacles, direct visibility, electromagnetic interference, etc). ## Recommended Barcode Scanners The following barcode scanner models have been tested in practice by PhotoRobot, and are mechanically and electrically suitable. - **Virtuos HW-855A - 2D** (Tested and in Use by PhotoRobot) - Barcode reader for 1D and 2D codes (great for QR) - Handheld scanner with cordless data transfer and a charging cradle - Fast reading (60 characters per second) with greater sensitivity for reading corrupted codes or codes on screens - User-replaceable battery (type 18650) - **Motorola LS2208** (Tested by PhotoRobot) - Barcode reader for 1D codes - Permanent connection of USB reader to computer is necessary - Suitable for fast-paced environments, the device is rugged and tested to withstand drops - Tempered glass window with scratch resistance that retains good readability - **Honeywell Voyager 1202g Station** (Tested by PhotoRobot) - Base connected to a computer via USB; scanner communication with base via Bluetooth - Scanning of all standard 1D barcodes possible 10 meters from base - Long battery life with 12 hours of reliable operation thanks to Li-Ion battery - Quick battery replacement without the need for tools - Automatic interface configuration and able to read even low-quality barcodes – including damaged or blurry codes - Feature for quickly finding a reader at the press of a button on the base – the reader responds with beeps and flashes ### Other Barcode Scanner Models (Not Tested by PhotoRobot) For examples of other barcode scanner models (not tested by PhotoRobot), there is the Birch BZ-R01, or the Birch BS-115. Note: The declared parameters of these models comply with PhotoRobot requirements, but the models themselves have not been tested in operation with PhotoRobot. These models are thus for example purposes only, and should be discussed with a PhotoRobot specialist technician for consideration if required by the customer. - **Birch BZ-R01** (not tested in operation with PhotoRobot) - Wireless CCD barcode scanner - “EZ Pair” technology for scanning barcodes up to a distance of 100 meters from the computer – however, with distance influenced by the environment - **Birch BS-115** (not tested in operation with PhotoRobot) - Handheld laser barcode scanner - Connection to computer via USB cable - Recognition of all standard 1D barcodes - Affordable model ## Recommended Cameras When choosing a new camera for a PhotoRobot system, refer to the complete list of [Recommended Cameras for PhotoRobot Systems](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/recommended-cameras). This guide aims to help customers choose the best recommended camera or cameras for long-term use with their PhotoRobot. **Important:** It is always advisable to first contact PhotoRobot before purchasing a new camera for your system. Also, be aware that only the latest mirrorless Canon camera models are recommended for automated photography. Although, as of the release of PhotoRobot Controls App 2.5.4, there is support for any camera through third-party camera integration. However, note that the use of compatible handheld cameras over Wi-Fi or cable connection may still cause issues. Issues include frequent disconnections (primarily due to timeout), and complications with cable or connection lengths. If using an iPhone camera via PhotoRobot Touch though, no issues arise. To check the compatibility of all supported Canon and 3rd party camera models, see [PhotoRobot Compatible Cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras) for reference. **Note:** To better understand the impact of camera resolution and lens selection, refer to PhotoRobot’s Guide on [Understanding Camera Resolution](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-resolution). For user support on setting up and connecting a compatible camera, refer to the support manual [PhotoRobot Camera Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/camera-configuration). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting # SECTION: manuals > troubleshooting # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2025-12-16 --- # Troubleshooting with PhotoRobot - User Support Manual Get quick and easy troubleshooting for all common issues with PhotoRobot installation, including cameras, robots, lights, editing and post-production. ## PhotoRobot Troubleshooting User Support Manual This PhotoRobot Troubleshooting User Manual describes solutions to common issues, including: hardware installation, cameras, robots, lights, editing and post production. **Note**: For more detailed information on the initial set up and configuration of PhotoRobot hardware and software, see the [Getting Started PhotoRobot User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## Cameras ### Controls App does not recognize my camera If CAPP does not recognize your camera, ensure that no other software connected to the camera is running on your computer. Typical examples of such software include the EOS Utility from Canon. Also check that the camera is connected via USB to the computer. Sometimes an issue can occur with the cable, so if necessary try replacing it with an alternate USB cable. ### LiveView is black In case LiveView displays only a black screen, check the **Exposure simulation** setting on your Canon camera and ensure that it is turned off. ## Robots ### Controls App does not recognize my robot If CAPP does not see your robot, always check in order that: 1. The robot is connected via ethernet to the local network. 2. The computer is on the same local network. 3. There is no firewall set up between the local network and the robot. 4. The robot is powered on. In some cases, it may simply be that the robot power is not on. ## Lights ### Lighting is inconsistent between frames with strobe lights When the lighting does not remain consistent between frames with strobe lights, try reducing the speed of the robot. It might be that the robot is performing the sequence too quickly and not providing enough time for the lighting to recharge itself. If this does not correct the issue, you can also try to reduce light intensity (in order for the lights to recharge quicker), or use more expensive lights. In general, Broncolor tends to charge faster than FOMEI. ## Editing ### I receive a blank screen when editing If experiencing a blank screen in edit mode, check that your computer has a graphic card with at least 2GB of memory. When using Windows, you might need to configure the Controls App to run in **Performance** mode. To do this, follow these steps: 1. Launch the Settings app. 2. Browse to System > Display > Graphics settings (find by scrolling down). 3. Browse for a classic app, select from the disk: **C:\Program Files\PhotoRobot Controls\PhotoRobot Controls**. 4. Set graphics preference to **High performance**. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/turning-platform # SECTION: manuals > turning-platform # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2025-11-25 --- # Turning Platform User Guide - Standard, HT / RotoPower The PhotoRobot Turning Platform User Guide contains user information for the standard and the HT / RotoPower versions of the device. ## Turning Platform User Guide - Standard, HT / RotoPower This user manual aims to support customer operation of the [PhotoRobot Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform). The information covers both the standard version of the device, and the Turning Platform High Torque (HT) / RotoPower version. There is a general overview of the system, with descriptions of the system components, accessories, and expansions. It aims to facilitate general understanding of the workstation, basic testing, first use, and continuous operation of PhotoRobot. **Important:** The initial installation of a PhotoRobot system must always be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. **Note:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to the manual provided specifically with your device before first use. ## PhotoRobot Turning Platform - Standard & HT / RotoPower Thank you and congratulations on your purchase of the PhotoRobot Turning Platform. The Turning Platform represents decades of first-hand experience and innovation in automated photography technology. And just like all PhotoRobot systems, the device is tailorable to your business’ unique needs. It functions with wide ranging accessories, and is compatible in combination with expansion robots like the Robotic Arm and Cube. Better still, PhotoRobot delivers a great ecosystem of ready-made solutions for PhotoRobot customers, ensuring impressive results – easily, quickly, and consistently. Welcome to the PhotoRobot-powered studio. ## 1. Product Description - Turning Platform The Turning Platform is a heavy-duty, motorized photo turntable to rotate small to large, light and heavy objects for 360 photography. It is available in two versions: the standard version of the Turning Platform, and the Turning Platform HT / RotoPower. In comparison, the HT / RotoPower version of the Turning Platform features a power supply in the rotating section of the platform. The power socket allows for plugging electrical appliances in and powering items on while the turning platform is in operation. Meanwhile, both versions of the Turning Platform have a robust design and support an extensive range of accessories to function as a universal solution for turntable photography. At the same time, software-driven controls synchronize smooth turntable rotation with camera capture and studio lights to automate photography and post-processing. Technical specifications and and key features of the Turning Platform include: - Turntable plate size diameter up to 280 cm (9.2 ft) for small to large objects. - Loading bearing capacity up to 1,500 kg (3,307 lb). - Zero-clearance transmission with high torque power. - Reliable supports ensure stability of the turntable plate, with zero movement when stopped. - Ramp for easy access to the turntable (such as for motorbikes). - Transformable HT / RotoPower version into the Virtual Catwalk for photographing and filming live models. - Optional setup with Robotic Arm V8 expansion and mannequin stands. - Extensive range of accessories for turntable photography. - Software-driven controls for the robotic workstation, cameras, lights, and post production. ### 1.1. Studio Integration - Turning Platform In studio use, the Turning Platform supports automated photography of small to large items weighing up to 1,500 kg (3,307 lb). This primarily includes items from household appliances and furniture to garden tractors, machinery, and small motor vehicles. Small ramps provide easy access to the turntable, while zero-clearance transmission ensures smooth turntable rotation for any object. There are **four available plate sizes**: 2.8 m (9.2 ft); 2.6 m (8.5 ft) × 2 m (6.6 ft); 1.8 m (5.9 ft); 1.0 m (3.3 ft). At the same time, the Turning Platform is combinable with the Robotic Arm expansion for faster multi-row and 360 spin photography of large products. If using the Turning Platform HT / RotoPower, the platform is also transformable into the Virtual Catwalk infinite runway for photographing and filming live models ### 1.2. Device Overview of the Turning Platform **1.2.1.** The **Turning Platform HT / RotoPower** provides zero-clearance transmission and high torque power to ensure exceptional turntable performance. In comparison to the standard version Turning Platform, the HT / RotoPower has a power supply in the rotating section of the platform. This allows for plugging in electrical appliances to power them on while simultaneously photographing the item during rotation for 360 photography. **1.2.2.** The **Turning Platform (standard version)** features a plate without the power supply in the rotating section. It is useful for photography of items that do not require power during photography. **1.2.3.** Note that the **Control Unit** is a separate but integral part of the Turning Platform machine, powering on and providing control over the device. Usually, the Control Unit is housed inside of a dedicated PhotoRobot HD rack case delivered with the system. There is a plastic card / mains switch on the front of the Control Unit. ### 1.3. Turning Platform - Virtual Catwalk Expansion Transformation of the Turning Platform into the Virtual Catwalk is possible with the Turning Platform HT / RotoPower. The Virtual Catwalk then fits in a space of 7 x 7 meters, covering the rotational dynamics of the turning plate in combination with the walking belt. There are two directions of movement: the movement of the walk-on treadmill-like belt, and the movement of the rotating platform. Both are able to rotate simultaneously while the belt is in operation to photograph or film live models walking on the infinite runway. **Note:** For more information on the configuration and instructions for operation of the Catwalk, refer to the [PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/virtual-catwalk-user-guide). ### 1.4. Turning Platform - Robotic Arm V8 Expansion As an optional expansion add-on, the Turning Platform is compatible with the [Robotic Arm V8](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) to speed up single-row and 360 photography of large objects. **Note:** The Robotic Arm is compatible with the majority of PhotoRobot rotary turntables and devices, including the Cube robot. If using the Turning Platform or another PhotoRobot device with the Robotic Arm, refer to the [Robotic Arm V8 User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/robotic-arm-v8) for additional support. ## 2. First Use Instructions Before first use of the PhotoRobot Turning Platform, it is necessary to understand the concept of the solution. PhotoRobot is a modular unit consisting of hardware and software components. From a technical perspective, this requires PhotoRobot to connect over the same network as a computer operating it. Further, the network must have an internet connection in order to run PhotoRobot services, which are accessible in the cloud. **Important:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot First Use & Basic Testing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing) to confirm technical operating requirements, and for detailed instructions on connecting PhotoRobot to a network. ### 2.1. Basic Operating Requirements In general, the following basic operating requirements for the Turning Platform exist. - The Control Unit must connect to the local network. - A computer is necessary to run Service GUI or the operator’s software called _Controls. - The computer must connect over the same network as the Control Unit. - There must be a functional internet connection on the network. ### 2.2. Electricity Distribution Requirements Next, users must check the electricity distribution system parameters (e.g. voltage and frequency). This requires checking the RJ45 connector on the back of the Control Unit. If the setup of the Control Unit is not in compliance, set it up first by locating the manual voltage selector on the back of the Control Unit. Then, connect the Control Unit to the network via ethernet cable using the RJ45 connector. ### 2.3. Network Configuration Requirements It is necessary to meet the network configuration requirements for operation of the Turning Platform. - A DHCP server in the network is mandatory. - TCP ports 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - UDP broadcasts on port 6666 must be allowed. - Internet connection is mandatory. - *.photorobot.com access must be allowed. - as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net access must be allowed. - Wired connection of PhotoRobot to LAN is recommended. - Refer to [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) to confirm proper setup and for troubleshooting as necessary. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. In the end, press the mains switch on the Control Unit. When the status changes, the light will change from a blinking to a steady light, signaling the Control Unit is ready for operation. ### 2.4. Find PhotoRobot’s IP Address on LAN In order to find the IP address of the Turning Platform, use the following supporting applications to search the network for PhotoRobot. - Windows - [frfind for Windows](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXdEFKdzB6WVFWcGc) - Mac OS X - [frfind for macOS](https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B_V5tu6LfZeXTU1CYUZrY1dGdzQ) - Android - [PhotoRobot Locator in Google Play](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.photorobot.locator&pcampaignid=web_share) - iPhone, iPad - [PhotoRobot Locator on iTunes](https://itunes.apple.com/au/developer/photorobot-com/id900448053) **Note**: After locating a PhotoRobot device using a supporting application, copy the IP address. Then, paste PhotoRobot’s IP address into any web browser in URL format. If successful, the Service GUI will launch, which will display a basic user interface for testing PhotoRobot. ### 2.5. Run Basic Testing for the Turning Platform After opening the Service GUI, use the simple user interface controls to first power the motor on, and then to turn the platform to any desired angle. - Turn on the engines (arrow 1), try to rotate (arrow 2). - If the glass plate rotates, your PhotoRobot Turning Platform device is ready for regular operation. ## 3. PhotoRobot _Controls Software Be aware that the software PhotoRobot Controls App (“CAPP”) is not part of the machine delivery; it is a separate purchase from the device. Download of CAPP is accessible via your [PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads), while CAPP provides full control over the Turning Platform, and other PhotoRobot devices. CAPP integrates control over robots, cameras, studio lights, and post production. This includes workflow management features as well as the necessary functionality for effective automation in post-processing. **Note:** On start-up after installation, mind that the interface may automatically start in “wizard mode”. Wizard mode is a simplified user interface which allows for only scanning barcodes to identify objects and begin the capture and post-processing sequences automatically. For detailed instructions on the installation and use of PhotoRobot Controls App Software, refer to the [PhotoRobot Getting Started User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 4. Information Labels ### 4.1. Symbols Overview ### 4.2. Machine & Component Labels For information labels for specific machines and components, refer to the section [Information Labels](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information#toc-10)(3.1.) from PhotoRobot Safety Information and Instructions. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/virtual-catwalk-user-guide # SECTION: manuals > virtual-catwalk-user-guide # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-02-03 --- # PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk First Use Guide This user manual provides technical information for the basic understanding and functional operation of the PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk. ## PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk First Use Guide This user manual provides technical information for the basic understanding and functional operation of the PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk. It aims to support PhotoRobot customers who have recently purchased their device, and to streamline onboarding of the new technology. This includes a general device overview of the Virtual Catwalk, instructions for connecting the device to the network, and steps for first use of the system. **Note:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot Safety Information & Instructions](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information) in addition to the manual provided specifically with your device before first use. **Important:** The initial installation of a PhotoRobot device must always be carried out by an authorized PhotoRobot authority. Authorities with authorization to install PhotoRobot are an approved distributor, or a representative of the manufacturer itself. ## First Use Guide to the PhotoRobot Catwalk Thank you and congratulations on your PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk purchase. Your PhotoRobot device represents decades of first-hand experience, insight, and innovation in automated photography. Its design is also with yours and every customer’s unique business in mind. PhotoRobot is modular to support widely ranging use cases, with each specific case helping to provide benefit to the entire PhotoRobot ecosystem. Use the following documentation to familiarize yourself with the PhotoRobot solution, and for instructions on first use of your device. If encountering issues, refer to [PhotoRobot Troubleshooting](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/troubleshooting) for solutions to common problems with hardware, robots, cameras, lights, editing, and post production. ## 1. Device Description - PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk PhotoRobot’s Virtual Catwalk in operation becomes an infinite 360 runway for fashion photography and video. The device consists of a treadmill on top of a rotating platform which rotates 360 degrees. At the same time, cameras remain in place around the platform, resulting in photos and video with a flying camera effect. The workstation is suitable for 360 product photography using models or photographing medium to large size objects when the belt is not running. There is also easy entry and exit from the platform, with adjustable speed for greater stability when in motion. Key technological features of the PhotoRobot Catwalk include: - Customizable movement control (with remote adjustment of turntable rotation and treadmill speed from 0 to 10 kmph to perfectly suit any model). - Easy entry & exit (with the wide plate of the turning platform secured by supports for greater stability and safety). - Everything in one place (with no need to move on or off location). - Adjustable level (with the possibility to install the Catwalk directly into the floor to make it level with the working area). ### 1.1 Device Overview - Virtual Catwalk The PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk fits in a space of 7 x 7 meters, covering the rotational dynamics of the turning plate in combination with the walking belt. This enables two directions of movement. There is the movement of the walk-on treadmill-like belt, and then the rotating platform which is able to rotate simultaneously while the belt is in operation. Meanwhile, full control over direction and speed of movement together with mobile edge supports provide both safety and stability during device operation. ### 1.2. Main Components of the Virtual Catwalk **1.2.1.** A massive drive motor in the machine enables adjustable speed control of the treadmill from 0 to 10 km/h, and drives the 360-degree rotation of the platform. **1.2.2.** Note that the location of the Control Unit is not inside of the Catwalk. Instead, the Control Unit is separate from the machine, usually inside of a dedicated PhotoRobot HD rack case. Control Unit in detail **1.2.3.** If the device is not in use to record video, it is possible to remove the belt and instead use the turntable for 360 product photography. This is possible in RotoPower mode, and also in combination with an optional PhotoRobot Robot Arm expansion. ## 2. Before PhotoRobot Catwalk First Use Before first use of PhotoRobot, it is necessary to understand the nature of the PhotoRobot solution. PhotoRobot is technically a modular unit which consists of hardware and software components. This requires PhotoRobot to have a connection to the same network as the computer operating it. **Important:** Always refer to [PhotoRobot First Use & Basic Testing](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/first-use-basic-testing) for technical operating requirements and instructions on connecting PhotoRobot to the network. In general, the following operation prerequisites must be met. - The Control Unit must connect to the local network. - A computer must run service GUI or the operator’s software called _Controls. - The computer must connect over the same network as the Control Unit. - There must be a functional internet connection over the network. Additionally, the electricity distribution system parameters must be in compliance (e.g. voltage and frequency). To do this, use the RJ45 connector on the back of the Control Unit. If the setup of the Control Unit is not in compliance, set it up first. To do this, find the manual voltage selector on the back of the Control Unit. Then, connect the Control Unit to the network via ethernet cable using the RJ45 connector. There are then the following network configuration requirements for operation of the Virtual Catwalk. - A DHCP server in the network is mandatory. - TCP ports 7777, 7778 communication must be allowed. - UDP broadcasts on port 6666 must be allowed. - Internet connection is mandatory. - *.photorobot.com access must be allowed. - as-unirobot.azurewebsites.net access must be allowed. - Refer to [PhotoRobot Networking Prerequisites & Configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-networking-prerequisites) to confirm proper setup and for troubleshooting as necessary. - Connect the power plug to the power socket. Finally, press the mains switch on the Control Unit. When the status changes, the light will stop blinking and become a continuous light, signaling the Control Unit is ready for operation. ### 2.1. Find PhotoRobot’s IP address on LAN To locate the IP address of the Virtual Catwalk and other PhotoRobot devices, the **PhotoRobot Locator app is integrated directly within CAPP**. This allows for the easier search and identification of Control Units on the network without using external applications. Ensure you are using the most up-to-date version of CAPP to access this feature. Then, to identify a robot on the network directly within CAPP, open the local version of CAPP, go to Settings, and click **Robots / Control units**. The Robots / Control units menu displays columns with Name, Network, Unit, Version, Discovered, and Identify for each robot. If the dot to the left of the robot name is green, it is online. Clicking the robot field will then open the robot’s website interface. This will also make the LED light on the robot’s Control Unit blink green for its easier identification. If external download of the app is required by the customer, PhotoRobot Locator is also available for iOS download within [PhotoRobot Account Downloads](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). **Note:** The Android version of PhotoRobot Locator has been discontinued. Alternatively, there is the FRFind command line utility for MacOS or Windows to search the network and identify PhotoRobot Control Units. Find links to download FRfind also via the PhotoRobot Account Downloads page. Then, after locating a PhotoRobot device, copy the IP address, and paste PhotoRobot’s IP address into any web browser in URL format. If successful, the Service GUI will launch, which will display a basic user interface for testing PhotoRobot. ### 2.2. Power on the PhotoRobot Catwalk In the Service GUI of the device, next turn on the motor using the green power button **Motor ON**. ### 2.3. Run Basic Testing for PhotoRobot Catwalk Finally, to test if PhotoRobot is fully operational, use the service GUI interface controls to turn the platform to any desired angle. - Turn on the engines (arrow 1), try to rotate (arrow 2). - If the robot follows the movement instructions, your PhotoRobot device is ready for regular operation. ## 3. PhotoRobot _Controls Software The software PhotoRobot _Controls App provides control over the entire Virtual Catwalk robotic workstation. This includes remote control over all robots, cameras and lighting. The software manages workflow and provides the necessary functionality for effective automation in the field of post-processing. **Important:** PhotoRobot _Controls App software is available for download via your [PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads). It is not included with the machine delivery; it is purchased separately from the machine. **Note:** For detailed information and technical instructions on using PhotoRobot _Controls software, refer to [PhotoRobot Getting Started](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 4. Information Labels ### 4.1. Symbols Overview ### 4.2. Machine & Component Labels For labels of specific machines and components, refer to the document PhotoRobot Safety Information and Instructions in the section [Information Labels](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/safety-information#toc-10) (3.1.). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/weighing-and-measuring-products # SECTION: manuals > weighing-and-measuring-products # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-23 --- # Weighing and Measuring Products with CubiScan Read a detailed overview on the integration and use of CubiScan Dimensioning Systems to weigh & measure products in PhotoRobot workflows. ## Weighing and Measuring Objects with Cubiscan The following user manual describes the use of **CubiScan Dimensioning Systems** in PhotoRobot production workflows. In a standard PhotoRobot workflow, CubiScan is an optional device, but its use enables greater levels of automation and productivity. Specifically, the device is widely popular for introducing automation into shipping and receiving lines. CubiScan functions to weigh & measure items (in metric or imperial units), automatically record and create metadata, and automate photography sequences. The machine records all measurement, volume, and weight information as product metadata, which in parallel automatically adjusts PhotoRobot settings. This enables the automatic adjustment of a robotic arm to the center of an object’s height before starting robotized capture. Capture is then in respect to the height of the object on the turntable, and to the product’s position. Additionally, all information is instantly present in a database for the automated publishing of product details alongside imagery. In this way, teams receive valuable data for every item, while also fully automating capture according to specific dimensions and measurements. **Note:** This user manual provides an overview of the [CubiScan 325](https://cubiscan.com/cubiscan-325-v3/), which is the device PhotoRobot recommends with its systems. ## Using CubiScan for Automatic PhotoRobot Adjustment For the automatic adjustment of PhotoRobot, it is advantageous to have information about the size of the subject to photograph. At the very least, the information should include a measurement of the subject’s height from the turntable, with respect to the subject’s position. With this information, automatic elevation to the vertical center of a product is possible before beginning a sequence, and using the item’s dimensions. This is crucial to ensure the system is set to **automatically** and **correctly** operate, especially during the capture of multi-row spins. For this, the company may choose to import the information directly from an internal system. However, if the information is unavailable or unreliable, semi-automatic or automatic measuring and recording of item information is possible via CubiScan. CubiScan functions to weigh & measure the items and automatically record their details into the product database. This is also useful for later use across various channels, from eCommerce to logistics and more. The measurements (size and weight) can become an inclusion in the export data at the completion of every photography deal. ## CubiScan 325 - PhotoRobot Recommended CubiScan While PhotoRobot fully supports all CubiScan products at the data link level, we recommend using the **CubiScan 325** device. The CubiScan 325 Dimensioning System offers better parameters and greater ease of use than the older CubiScan 125. Both systems have the same price as well. The only difference is the absence of ultrasonic sensors in the newer CubiScan 325. These sensors are not useful for its given purpose, however. CubiScan 325 is capable of measuring products up to a maximum size of 90 x 60 x 60cm, and weighing up to 25kg with a measurement error of 2g. ## Optional Supporting Table for CubiScan 325 While CubiScan can sit on a desk or floor, PhotoRobot also manufactures a **supporting table for CubiScan 325** as an optional accessory. The supporting table provides an ergonomic working height for the CubiScan 325 device, with storage shelves for boxes / products awaiting or after measurement. ## Barcode Reader Support in PhotoRobot Controls App In addition to CubiScan, PhotoRobot also supports barcode readers to identify items in the system before weighing and measuring. This enables teams to simply scan a product code rather than searching for it by name in the system. **Note:** For more information on barcode reader support including suitable barcode recommendations for use with PhotoRobot, refer to [PhotoRobot System Requirements](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements). ## SmartCode Activation of CubiScan In addition to the ability to scan items into the system, it is also possible to scan a special [PhotoRobot SmartCode](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing) to activate a CubiScan device. Scanning this SmartCode will prepare CubiScan to measure an object’s weight and dimensions. Users first scan the SmartCode, and then simply scan the product code afterwards. CubiScan will then automatically record all measurements, dimensions, and the weight into PhotoRobot software. ## Launching CubiScan in PhotoRobot Controls App To find the CubiScan option in PhotoRobot Controls App, use the standard system menu, and find the **CubiScan measure** option. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode # SECTION: manuals > wizard-mode # TYPE: Manual # UPDATED: 2026-06-05 --- # Wizard Mode - PhotoRobot User Support Manual This User Support Manual provides detailed documentation on how to configure and operate Wizard mode in PhotoRobot Controls App (CAPP). ## PhotoRobot Controls App - Wizard Mode and Kiosk Mode This user manual provides technical instructions on the configuration of operator steps and their use in PhotoRobot Wizard mode. In PhotoRobot Controls App (further referred to as “CAPP”), Wizard mode utilizes a series of wizard steps to guide users through various tasks. These steps are defined in a JavaScript-like language format, and can be scripted by PhotoRobot consultants for custom functionality. Users can also script basic functions for initial experiments or simple setups. **Note:** The following information provides technical instructions on creating scripts for custom wizards and their operator steps. This includes how to access and launch wizards after their creation as a simplified user interface in Kiosk mode in CAPP. For information to facilitate the general understanding and first use of CAPP, refer to the [PhotoRobot Getting Started User Manual](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started). ## 1 - PhotoRobot Wizard Mode Overview PhotoRobot Wizard mode enables users to create a configuration of a series of steps which an operator will later follow to capture a product. After configuring a wizard, operation of PhotoRobot is then possible in Kiosk mode, which functions as an extremely simplified user interface. Wizards and Kiosk modes support businesses who want to hide complex controls in the background, making machine operation nearly fool-proof. They provide operators with an extremely user-friendly alternative to the traditional controls interface. In most cases, both modes are set up during machine installation, or customized by a photographer or studio manager. This allows for taking advantage of pre-programmed automations, including presets and wizards that disappear into the background for machine operators. ## 2- Kiosk Mode Overview In practice, Kiosk mode locks down the UI to show the user only what the administrator explicitly allows them to access. For example, a user in Kiosk mode will typically only be able to take a photo and move to the next step. The steps the operator follows are according to the specific wizard in use. At the same time, the operator will not be able to access or even need to worry about any adjustable settings. This helps to dramatically reduce learning curves and onboarding requirements. It is even possible to simplify machine operation down to only a start button, or a quick scan of a barcode. Thus, studios can employ warehouse workers with very little training, including outsourced talent, freelancers, and student interns for example. ## 3 - How to Access PhotoRobot Wizard Mode To access Wizards mode, open the Settings menu in the local app. Here, users can load **Wizards** via the left-hand side menu, or create a new wizard using **Add Wizard** in the top-right part of the interface: Options to create, edit, or customize a Wizard include **Wizard name**, **Item name**, **Notes**, **Presets**, **Workspace**, and **Wizard steps**: **Note:** In order to launch a Wizard, it must contain valid Presets, all Workspace configurations, and most importantly the number and names of directory folders. Each of these will then have to match the steps defined in the Wizard for its proper operation. ## 4 - Create New Wizard To create a new wizard mode, open the Settings menu in the local app, and use **Add Wizard** in the top-right part of the interface: In this menu, there are options to create, edit, and customize wizards: - Wizard name - Item name - Notes - Presets - Workspace - Wizard steps ## 5 - Wizard Steps Each Wizard contains a list of steps. The following step types are available: - create-item - select-item - capture-folder - import-images - liveview ## 6 - Detailed Step Descriptions ### create-item #### Description The *create-item* step enables the user to create a new item. Users define items as follows and with the following objects. - **type:** "create-item" - **fields:** This array of objects defines the fields for item creation. Fields can include *"name"*, *"barcode"*, *"trackingCode"*, *"link"*, *"note"*, *"tags"*, *"workspace"*. Each field can also be marked as optional. - **design:** This object specifies design aspects like *“bgImage”* (background image URL) and *“bgColor”* (background color). #### Example JavaScript: > { > "type": "create-item", > "fields": [ > { > "name": "name" > }, > { > "name": "note", > "optional": true > } > ], > "design": { > "bgImage": "https://hosting.photorobot.com/images/-ML2QkR2lrhwn5SVMaEu/-NMSZjM-bdArdYcaa9XJ/NORMAL/c3o4fsHCXth55bOAZZNk8A?w=1920" > } > } ### select-item #### Description The *select-item* step enables the user to select an existing item. Users will typically enable this step when the list of items has already been created, for example after importing from CSV. - **type:** "select-item" - **design:** This object specifies the design aspects, similar to *create-item*. #### Example JavaScript: > { > "type": "select-item", > "design": { > "bgImage": "https://hosting.photorobot.com/images/-ML2QkR2lrhwn5SVMaEu/-NMSZjM-bdArdYcaa9XJ/NORMAL/c3o4fsHCXth55bOAZZNk8A?w=1920" > } > } ### capture-folder #### Description The *capture-folder* step allows the user to capture a folder. - **type:** "capture-folder" - **title:** Title of the step - **note:** Description or instructions for the step. - **dirName:** Name of the directory where images will be stored. - **optional:** If true, this step is optional, and the user can skip it. - **copy** (optional): Copy captured images into another folder. - **copy toDir:** Target folder - **copy filter:** Optional filter, only images matching *“swingAbs”*, *“turnAbs”* or *“label”* will be copied. #### Example 1 - Simple folder capture JavaScript: > { > "type": "capture-folder", > "title": "Capture interior", > "note": "Capture interior with handheld camera.", > "dirName": "details" > } #### Example 2 - Capture folder and copy selected images into another folder JavaScript > { > "type": "capture-folder", > "title": "Capture spin", > "dirName": "spin", > "copy": { > "toDir": "stills", > "filter": [ > { "swingAbs": 10, "turnAbs": 0 }, > { "swingAbs": 10, "turnAbs": 45 }, > { "swingAbs": 10, "turnAbs": 180 } > ] > } > } ### import-images #### Description The *import-images* step allows the user to import images from the disk. Objects within this step include the following. - **type:** "import-images" - **note:** Description or instructions for the step - **dirName:** Name of the folder where the images will be stored - **optional:** If true, this step is optional, and the user can skip it #### Example JavaScript: > { > "type": "capture-folder", > "title": "Capture interior", > "note": "Import images taken with a handheld camera.", > "dirName": "interior" > } ### liveview #### Description The *liveview* step turns on the camera liveview. Users will typically enable this to check the position of the object. - **type:** "liveview" - **cameraAngle** (optional): Specifies the camera angle for live viewing #### Example JavaScript: > { > "type": "liveview", > "title": "Check position", > "note": "Check the position of the object and make sure it is centered." > } ## 7 - Example Usage The following example creates a wizard step for item creation, using fields for name and notes (optional), and a design featuring a background image and color. JavaScript: > [ > { > "type": "select-item", > "fields": [ > { > "name": "name" > }, > { > "name": "note", > "optional": true > } > ], > "design": { > "bgImage": "https://hosting.photorobot.com/images/-ML2QkR2lrhwn5SVMaEu/-Nehz_ciyDihw90EgNuy/FINAL/tqZxrqbKZ4exH6y2LFPWUw?w=1200" > } > }, > { > "type": "liveview", > "title": "Check the position", > "note": "Check that person is in view.", > "cameraAngle": 15 > }, > { > "type": "capture-folder", > "title": "Capture spin", > "dirName": "spin" > }, > { > "type": "capture-folder", > "title": "Capture stills", > "dirName": "stills" > } > ] **Note:** This is a generic code to allow initial experiments and simple script setup by PhotoRobot users. Use it to test Wizards functionality, and to run a basic script for experimentation. ## 8 - Launching Wizards To start a Wizard, first assign it to a Project and click **Save**: After assigning the Wizard to a Project, it is possible to launch the Wizard in 2 ways: 1. In the top right part of the interface, click **More** and **Start wizard**, or; 2. Click on the User Account icon, and click **Start wizard mode**: ## 9 - Wizard-Guided Operator Steps in Kiosk Mode On successful launch of a wizard, the interface opens in Kiosk mode and displays the Project name at the top, and the Wizard name below. Click **Create** to launch the wizard in Kiosk mode: After the start screen, the simplified Kiosk mode user interface will display the first stage in the predefined operation steps. From this point on, the operator must complete instructions for each stage of capture, and click **Next** at the bottom of the Kiosk mode interface to move onto subsequent steps: Usually, the first step will instruct the operator to configure the camera (or cameras) that will be in use. Here, the operator also checks that the product is positioned correctly and in view of the camera(s). Subsequent steps then direct the operator according to presets to capture given angles into a specific folder. These steps may also include instructions to photograph different product configurations, such as a car with its doors open, closed, or shot from the interior: Further, the Kiosk mode can display notes from the wizard steps for clearer explanation of individual stages. **Notes** are located on the left-hand side of the Kiosk mode interface, below the step title: In some cases, the wizard guiding Kiosk mode may also instruct the operator to take photos for example with a handheld camera, and then import the images before the **Next** option is available. When complete with each stage, clicking **New item** at the bottom of the interface completes the wizard-guided Kiosk mode: After clicking on New item, the user is returned to the Wizard start page. Here, it is possible to exit the Wizard being used for Kiosk mode, or continue to the next item. To exit the Wizard, click on the Account Icon in the top-right part of the interface, and click **Exit wizard:** If continuing to another item existing in the system, it is also possible to load items to capture via Wizard settings by changing the first step to **“type”: “select-item”**: After configuration of “type”: “select -item”, users can then select items by entering the item name on the Kiosk mode startup screen for that wizard: Finally, it is also possible to enable password protection for Wizards mode, or to designate a Project that will start by default in a wizard-guided Kiosk mode. Find these options on startup of CAPP by navigating to Settings, and clicking on Wizards. The top of the menu options provide a toggle ON / OFF to enter Wizard / Kiosk mode automatically after starting CAPP. Below this, users can click **Set password** to enable password protection. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/support # SECTION: support # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Customer Support - Service Plans > PhotoRobot Customer Support Service Plans include 3 different types of contracts: the PWS Contract, the Support Contract, and the Ad-Hoc Contract. ## PhotoRobot Support PhotoRobot places exceptional emphasis on the quality and functionality of our machines throughout their entire lifecycle. To this end, all machine control units feature a built-in diagnostic system, allowing for the resolution of issues often before they occur. The system remotely monitors operating temperatures, and various other key parameters. This enables timely support responses, and helps to ensure uninterrupted production for our customers. Our experienced technical support team is ready to address any challenges – either remotely, or directly on-site at the customer’s location. We maintain an extensive inventory of spare parts for immediate replacements, while our factory-trained technicians are prepared for any situation thanks to hands-on experience with machine production. To meet various service requirements, we offer the following service plans: Contract Priority Support (Remote or On-Site) Includes time required for the support plus travel time to and from PhotoRobot Firmware Updates Control unit firmware new release Spare Parts (excluding consumables - like glass tops, rubber rings etc.) Travel Expenses Technician's travel expenses (airplane tickets, accommodation) PWS Contract Best Choice The Premium Worldwide Support (PWS) Contract is paid one-time annually, and fully covers customer needs with no additional charges. It provides priority technical support, a virtually unlimited warranty on all machine components (excluding consumables), and covers firmware updates. The plan may also include travel expenses configurable and dependent on the specific contract terms. Everything is taken care of 100%. Support Contract The Standard Support Contract exists for customers who prefer access to technical support but opt for paid service interventions. It is valid for 12-months at a time on purchase, and provides direct access to PhotoRobot specialist technicians and service support on a fee-per-incident basis. Ad-Hoc Contract The Ad-Hoc Contract is for clients who are not currently prioritizing machine operability, technical support, or service. It offers a high-tier, ad-hoc rate to address these needs should any arise, and customer priorities unexpectedly change. Ad-Hoc Support Contact SalesCreate Ticket --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-ecommerce-seo-tips # SECTION: tutorials > fashion-ecommerce-seo-tips # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2021-12-16 --- # How to Improve SEO in Fashion ECommerce and Online Retail Learn how to ensure product visuals improve SEO in fashion eCommerce and online retail for higher organic traffic and conversions. - Categories: Still & Spin Imagery, Live Models & Video ## 5 Tips to Improve SEO in Fashion Product Photography Looking for ways to improve Search Engine Optimization (SEO) with your fashion product photography and videos? In this post, we’ll share 5 tips to boost SEO in [fashion eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/productivity-fashion-product-photography) and online retail. Discover the challenges and why SEO should always be a top priority, including how to optimize visual content for the web. SEO is how brands increase website sessions, and we all know that with more sessions comes more sales. In fact, [80% of significant purchases](https://inter-growth.co/seo-stats/) begin with an online Google search. By taking advantage of effective SEO practices, we not only make our pages easier to find, we increase organic traffic and ultimately conversions. However, ask any SEO specialist, and this can be easier said than accomplished. After all, there are a lot of moving parts that go into optimizing visual content for SEO. There is page optimization, use of image alt text, file naming practices and more. We’ll cover all of these below, with 5 tips to boost SEO in fashion eCommerce and online retail. ## 1 - Improve Page Load Times First and foremost, page loading times are crucial for SEO, especially in fashion eCommerce. Imagine trying to compare jackets or footwear online, but images either won’t load or slow the page to a crawl. In this case, will you calmly wait for the images, or are you more likely to take your online shopping elsewhere? The answer to this is pretty straightforward. When all it takes is a simple click of the back button and another google search, we’re definitely shopping elsewhere. This is the world we live in today. Consumers have endless webshops and retailers for fashion at their fingertips. If your page underperforms, it’ll be buried in search results by more “optimal” pages. Also, the lower page speeds, the higher the bounce rate. What this signals to search engines is that the link is less trustworthy, which in turn lowers the Search Engine Result Page (SERP) ranking. This means it’s crucial to optimize the size of product visuals, whether it's still images, spins, or product videos. With product photos, JPEGs and JPG often work well, providing both the quality and file size to optimally showcase products. Obviously, the smaller the file size, the quicker the page loading, but you don’t want to sacrifice on quality. Generally, at PhotoRobot we recommend file sizes after compression that are no larger than 4MB. Want to check the speed of your page? There’s a free tool for that. Run the URL through Google’s [Page Insights Tool](https://pagespeed.web.dev/) to measure the current speed of your site. ## 2 - Use Alt Text for All Product Photos Another way to improve SEO is to utilize image alt text on all visuals not on shopping pages. This includes images in blogs, about pages, company info sections, etc. The goal is to ensure maximum accessibility for the visually impaired or those with low internet speeds. It also enables search engines to identify a page for people using text-only browsers or screen readers. Here are a few tips on how to write image alt text on your pages. - **Keep alt text brief and to the point.** Often 5-7 words is enough to describe an image, for example: “elegantly dressed man in a suit and tie”. If you need to include even more information, use image captions to expand further. - **Consider character limits for each alt text.** Generally speaking, there shouldn’t be more than 120 characters, although less is often better. It’s important that it’s short but also descriptive enough for algorithms to rank the content. - **Be careful of “keyword-stuffing”.** Algorithms will detect if a site is trying to “game the system” by stuffing content with keywords. Beware of how many target keywords you use in the alt text. ## 3 - Create a Keyword-rich File Naming Convention Often overlooked, another aspect of creating an SEO-friendly website is how we name image files. Search engines crawl not only the text (and alt text) on your page. They also scan any imagery to identify its content, and to determine its value to the site. For this, it’s important to agree on a file naming convention from the start. Any structure you choose should be both relevant to the products and also scalable for extended operations. File names should be brief while likewise thoroughly describing the product or image. In general, file names should consist of only 3 or 4 words so search engines can better identify the content. Most platforms will also only allow lowercase letters, numbers, hyphens, and underscores, so avoid using spaces and other characters. ## 4 - Utilize Product Videos and Spins In the SEO business, increasing time-on-page on non-shopping pages is a crucial factor to gaining recognition from search engines. The longer users stay on the page, the more valuable algorithms will deem the site. One way to increase time-on-page is to showcase brand & product videos across non-shopping pages. It might be a small product video featuring your latest line of fashion, footwear, or whatever clothing you’re selling. Perhaps it’s a video for the brand’s “About” section. It can also be [product spins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photos) in GIF format, or interactive [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing). In general, sites generate more time-on-page from product content consumers can watch or interact with. The higher the quality of content, the more consumer engagement you’ll get from each page. ## 5 - Make Use of Social Media Marketing Social media has become a significant SEO tool for distributing product content. Not only that, but with it brands can build a strong online community, with insights into what audiences want most. Brands can monitor factors such as post performance, users reached, time-on-page, and other valuable information. Also, forming a connection with consumers across all platforms where your products appear is crucial. By simply responding to questions and comments, or sending a thoughtful response to a negative review, brands establish credibility. They look more professional overall, and in general tend to drive more traffic to their websites. All of this while boosting awareness and trust in the brand. To get better performance from [visual content for social media](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/social-media-product-photos), experiment with high-quality photos, [packshots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), spins, videos, and 3D models. The more engaging, the more likely consumers will share your content across the web. Just be sure to create a [style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide) and follow it across all platforms where your product appears. ## For Additional Fashion Product Photography Tips and Tricks Did you find this post useful? Find more content like this in our [product photography tutorials](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials). Also sign up for our newsletter below, or follow us on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot). Stay up-to-date on the industry and everything happening at PhotoRobot with regular blog posts, tutorials, and videos. From fashion eCommerce and online retail, to 360-degree photography of any size product, we have you covered. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-photography-styling-tools # SECTION: tutorials > fashion-photography-styling-tools # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-10-05 --- # Fashion Product Photography Styling Tools & Accessories In this fashion product photography styling tutorial, we share essential tools and techniques of fashion stylists and product photographers. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## 10 Tools for Product Photographers and Fashion Stylists Product photographers and fashion stylists have a wide range of tools they use in the studio. From styling clothes for flat lay to [ghost mannequin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin), styling tools are essential to making garments look their best. In this tutorial, we’ll share what tools you should have and how to use them when photographing fashion products. Overall, styling is how brands distinguish themself from the competition. It is one of the most important parts of fashion product photography. Styling clothing, especially when photographing on a mannequin, makes clothing look more “full-bodied” and highlights finer details of garments. See the [video of PhotoRobot fashion photography](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography) using the Cube and mannequins. [PhotoRobot’s_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) was designed specifically for this approach, with a system for quick mannequin exchange. It streamlines studio workflow, and provides photographers and fashion stylists more time to ensure products are perfectly styled and shot. Join us to learn which 10 tools product photographers and fashion stylists should always have on hand. Find our styling tool checklist, including techniques to use with the_Cube in all your fashion photography. ## The Essential Product Styling Toolbox First, let’s go over the checklist of essential styling tools every photography studio needs. Then, we’ll describe techniques to use these tools to ensure garments always look their best in your product photos. - **Styling Clips** - Crocodile clips, binder clips, snap clips, and more. - **Sewing Pins** - Fastening pins, bobby pins, safety pins, etc. - **Various Types of Tape** - Masking tape, double-sided, gaffer, cellophane, etc. - **Blue / White Sticky Tack** - Any semi-permanent adhesive. - **Tissue Paper** - For stuffing areas of the garments. - **Scissors** - Preferably fashion scissors. - **Invisible Strings** - Fishing line / string. - **Suede Brush** - For removing blemishes from products and the scene. - **Lint Remover** - Any will do, either a fabric one or self-adhesive. - **Measuring Tape** - Tailor’s tape. ## 1 - Styling Clips Clips are useful when you have excess fabric you need to hold in place. It might be for example with a form-fitting, sheer fabric dress that doesn’t perfectly fit the mannequin. Often, we have to use clips with sheer fabric, as pins simply won’t hold the material firmly enough. Use styling clips vertically on the sides or front / back of clothing to pull fabric taut without creating wrinkles. Use clips together with styling pins to shape and style clothing according to your brand’s style guide. ## 2 - Pins to Fasten Clothing Styling pins are often most useful when photographing clothing from different angles or in 360 degrees. Pins are easier to hide from the cameras than clips during photography. Use bobby pins or safety pins to help fit the clothes to the mannequin or even a hanger. Simply pin the fabric from underneath to make the pins nearly invisible. Often, we use pins in the back and shoulder areas of clothing to give it a more sleek, form-fitting appearance. ## 3 - Various Types of Tape Next, there are many different types of tape every fashion stylist uses. Among the most useful is perhaps double-sided tape, which we use to hold clothing to a mannequin. This gives clothing a more fitted look, and we often use double-sided tape for straightening hems or sleeve cuffs. If double-sided tape doesn’t do the job, more heavy-duty tape such as gaffa tape is useful. However, the only concern is the residue gaffa tape can leave on clothes. You might want to first try masking tape, as this often doesn’t leave as much of a mark when removing. ## 4 - Blue and White Tack Another essential tool for stylists is blue or white tack adhesive. White tack often leaves less residue, and can appear nearly invisible in final photos. It’s very useful for products such as handbags, particularly when styling the strap to fit neatly in images. Use tack when clips and pins can’t hold the clothing in place. However, do remember to be careful of leaving residue behind or ruining the fabric. ## 5 - Tissue Paper To give clothes a more “worn” or “full-bodied” look on a mannequin, tissue paper is also great for styling. Simply stuff areas of the garments that need more rounding out. This might include the lower hem line of trousers, or areas of fabric that extend beyond the mannequin. Padding clothes with tissue paper is also a useful styling technique for tabletop photography. Give fabric more curves or angles for a better appearance. Use padding in combination with clips, pins, and other styling tools to give more volume and life to product photos. ## 6 - Scissors Fashion scissors - thanks to their sharpness, size, and shape - are perfect for tidying up loose threads and labels. Simply do a little clipping where necessary to prep garments before a photoshoot. However, be cautious to only use fashion scissors for their intended purpose. Don’t attempt to cut up paper or tape, as fashion scissors can quickly lose their edge. They are designed only for precise, sharp cutting, and are useless when dulled. ## 7 - “Invisible” Strings Fishing line / string is another often-used tool for styling clothes. It makes it easy to hang garments in the air without any visible strings in photos. Hang garments on fishing line to make clothes appear to levitate, or to suspend things like a handbag’s straps. Thanks to how fine the string is, often it never shows up in the cameras. If it does, all it takes is a little editing to remove from final images. ## 8 - Styling Brush To get unsightly blemishes out of final shots, having a stiff brush in the studio is useful. Use the brush to clean fabric, erase fingerprints, or to even out fabric like suede and fur. Just be sure to always use gentle strokes with your brush so you don’t ruin the material of the clothing. ## 9 - Lint Remover Another essential tool for styling clothes is a lint remover. Lint rollers will help you eliminate dust, lint, and dirt from your fashion products. Always run products through a lint roller before the photoshoot, just after steam cleaning. Especially useful for darker products which need high exposure to capture finer details, lint rollers do the trick. They ensure the fabric looks pristine and free of any dust, lint, or specks of dirt. ## 10 - Measuring Tape Finally, no fashion stylists’ toolset would be complete without tailors’ measuring tape. Also known as “sewing tape”, use this to attain all the measurements shoppers need in their search for the best garments. They want to know waist lines and chest sizes, shoulders, neck cuts, and arm & sleeve lengths. Having tape on hand also helps for planning photoshoots, and when choosing the best mannequin for the job. There are a wide range of mannequins on the market, available in nearly all sizes and shapes. Plan to shoot batches of similar size clothing to streamline studio workflow for your stylists and for photographers. ### For more product photography resources If you found this tutorial useful and want to learn more about PhotoRobot, follow us on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/) and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/user/FotorobotVideo). We regularly share eCommerce product photography blogs, guides, tutorials, and videos to keep you up-to-speed with PhotoRobot and the industry. From fashion product photography to shooting objects of any size (including cars & heavy machinery), PhotoRobot has tools for the job. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2021-11-29 --- # How to Create a Fashion Product Photography Style Guide In this PhotoRobot tutorial, we share how to create a fashion product photography style guide that converts and ensures consistency. ## Fashion Photography: How to Make a Brand Style Guide Following a style guide is crucial to creating a brand’s image and ensuring [consistency in visual content](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content). It makes brands look professional, and it gives consumers a more effective way to discover and compare products. In this fashion photography tutorial, we’ll share how to create a style guide that is both consistent and efficient. Watch the PhotoRobot video overview showcasing [style guide automation in footwear photography](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/footwear-photography-workflow). A style guide is simply a set of instructions to follow for all photoshoots. It tells stylists and photographers how to present and photograph different products. In fashion product photography, it’s for example how to photograph apparel & clothing, accessories, footwear, etc. The style guide specifies elements such as how to style garments, flatlay vs mannequin photography, or still & [360 degree product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). They contain angles to photograph from as well as file naming conventions, editing & post processing parameters, and more. [PhotoRobot software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) allows users to both create and save style guides with all of these parameters as “Presets”. Users can then apply configurable Presets across all photoshoots of similar products, making consistency quick & easy to achieve. Today we’ll share how, starting first with how to make a style guide, and concluding with how to automate it. ## Establishing your brand’s style The majority of brands and retailers already have a brand style. Style guides ensure they stay consistent, and also help in developing the brand style further. Overall, the primary goals behind brand styling are to appear unique and to make a memorable impression. Consumers should be able to associate the look with the brand as well as a certain lifestyle. To accomplish this, brands must firstly consider the target audience. Who are your shoppers, and what lifestyle are you catering to? Perhaps it’s a sportswear brand, in which case you want more active colors, lifestyle photography, or [product videos](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models) showcasing movement. There should be an emphasis on certain colors, as well as athleticism and healthy living. Whatever the fashion, whether it's a [blazer](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-blazers) or photographing a [spaghetti dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-spaghetti-dress), if you don’t have a style guide, start by identifying who the brand should appeal to most. Then, with this in mind, begin building instructions for visual content around the brand’s purpose. Consider color themes, photography scenes, styling, and how to photograph your fashion products to best reach consumers. ## Choosing types of photographs At the heart of any style guide is information about the angles at which you photograph an object. This includes different angles as well as distances to take photos from so they highlight specific features of products. Let’s imagine a very simple style guide, for example [how to photograph a men's t-shirt](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-t-shirt-with-a-ghost-mannequin). Here, the style guide might include three basic shots: the front view, the back, and a detailed shot. The detailed shot might consist of a close-up view of the fabric. It might be zooming into a logo or a distinguishing feature you want to highlight. Your style guide will tell photographers and stylists what types of photos to take, and how to photograph each view. Instructions should be clear and straightforward, and provided in a simple grid for at-a-glance referencing. Your team can then follow the instructions across entire collections of similar products to ensure consistency in all visual content. ## Describing visual information After detailing what shots to take, style guides must include text descriptions for all visual product information. These guidelines will tell photographers and stylists exactly how to style products and how to take each type of photo. Take [photographing coats](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-coats) for example. There might be instructions to always photograph on an [invisible mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin) rather than flat lay. This checklist will describe how to photograph a coat on the mannequin, and how to style the sleeves and cuffs. It will detail the different types of shots, including distances to photograph from and other parameters. There might also be requirements for the detailed shot, such as distinguishing features to photograph. The number of items on your checklist will ultimately determine how much creative control stylists have over photoshoots. If you want to allow for more freedom, you can always provide less instructions. For higher levels of control over styling consistency, however, obviously the more instructions the better. Beyond these details, styling guidelines should also include file naming conventions for each type of photo. This ensures ease of access to all of your visual content, and is ultimately necessary for overall digital asset management. ## How to Automate Style Guides with PhotoRobot One of the most important parts of any style guide is the information about the angles at which to photograph the object. With PhotoRobot_Controls, we can define these angles in the software as “Presets” to apply across batches of similar type products. Save Presets for not only angles, but also camera settings, lighting, post processing and other parameters. Configure settings once, and then deploy again and again to achieve images exactly according to your brand style guide. Begin by importing a shot list of items. Each item will have a barcode, often from the supplier, which the system will recognize. In this way, you can quickly scan a barcode, and the software loads any presets you have for the product. ## Simply Scan Products and Automate the Process After importing a shot list, which includes product names and barcodes as well as presets, the process takes no time. Place the product onto whatever PhotoRobot you’re using, style it accordingly, and simply scan its barcode using CubiScan. The CubiScan robot is for weighing and measuring items. It also stores item dimensions in the system. CubiScan detects the object’s size and shape, and then after weighing & measuring it, archives the item. We can then attach presets to individual items, and the entire photoshoot happens automatically. It often takes no longer than a minute to apply the style guide, and it’s even possible to control multiple robots from a single workstation. All without changing any settings in the software. Simply scan an additional barcode of a macro at the control station. This switches to the second workstation, and takes all photos without needing to touch the computer or cameras. ## Additional tips for fashion photography style guides - **Avoid technical jargon.** Write all instructions as clearly as possible so that anybody reading will understand, even without technical knowledge. - **Implement a Digital Asset Management (DAM) system.** This will include file naming conventions for each type of photo of different products. It can be for example, ‘menswear-blazer-stylecode-front.jpg and ‘menswear-blazer-stylecode-back.jpg. - **Include instructions for lighting setups**, working with shadows, brightness and exposure. - **Compare other brand’s style guides** to get a better idea of how brands distinguish themselves from the competition. - **Revisit and further develop your style guide over time**. Look for small improvements that can either make life easier for photographers and stylists, or improve your brand style overall. ## PhotoRobot - High Levels of Consistency and Automation At PhotoRobot, we aim to help users achieve more through robotic process automation and state-of-the-art product photography software. Don’t hesitate to contact us today to discover our eCommerce photography solutions for yourself. Also find us on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/) and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/user/FotorobotVideo), or sign up for our newsletter below. We regularly share new content - including product photography blogs, news, tutorials, and videos. No matter if it’s photographing fashion, electronics, or cars & heavy machinery, PhotoRobot has tools for the job. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-film-models # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-01-24 --- # How to Film Models on the Virtual Catwalk Get tips and strategies on how to film models on the Virtual Catwalk in this eCommerce fashion product photography tutorial. - Categories: Live Models & Video ## Guide to the Virtual Catwalk and How to Film Models In this tutorial, we’ll share how to film models on the [Virtual_Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk). The Catwalk is PhotoRobot’s solution for in-house photography and filming of live models. It allows us to transform any small space available into a professional photo studio for apparel photography and online fashion shows. Discover the device design & technical details in the [PhotoRobot Catwalk Video Demonstration](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/virtual-catwalk-rotating-platform). The Catwalk’s design consists of a moving belt on a rotating platform, much like a treadmill that also spins 360-degrees. Both the belt and the platform rotate simultaneously, with adjustable speed so that models can safely walk on the machine. Cameras remain trained in place around the rotating platform for creating a flying camera effect. Together with PhotoRobot [Control Software](https://www.photorobot.com/software), users can control the entire workspace including robots, cameras, lighting and more. The software also enables workflow management and automation in image post-processing. All we need is standard studio lighting, while our combination of hardware and software handles the rest. *Read on to learn how to use the Virtual Catwalk with live models. This tutorial shares the process, including more on our solution, and how to film models in the studio.* ## Model Photography When photographing models in fashion photography and eCommerce, it’s more than simple photography. Not only are we working with live subjects, there are many extra-photographic conditions to consider. There are lighting, camera settings and exposition, as well as unsuspecting surprises that are always bound to pop up. All in all, there are many moving parts, from the equipment to support teams and the interpersonal and technical aspects. ## 1 - How to Prepare for the Photography Session Let’s begin with preparing the photography session. If we want to save time for any photoshoot, preparation is always key. This is even more true when doing photography sessions with models. Clear goals and timelines are necessary to prevent any misunderstandings (and limit wasted time to a minimum.) Imagine we already have the product in mind; all we need now is to organize the photoshoot. At this point, we have a number of questions we still need to answer. - **What kind of photos do we want to show?** (Is the goal to create still images, 360 spins, or product videos? Are we photographing for the web, print, or both?) - **Which photos and angles will be most important for marketing or PR purposes?** (Here, the brand style guide will often dictate what types of photos we need. Don’t have a style guide yet? See our tutorial on [creating a style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide) to get started.) - **If filming a video, can we create a storyboard?** (Both support teams and the models benefit from sketches of consequent shots and prepared notes showing the approach and content. Notes might include camera distance or movement, focal points, etc.) - **Finally, what unexpected surprises can occur during the photo session?** (Will there be any need for additional props, or a stand-in model in case one falls ill?) Answering these questions will help when forming a detailed plan that covers all goals of the session. Map the process out step-by-step, taking into account any possible pitfalls or needs you might encounter along the way. ## 2 - Photography Equipment & the Catwalk When working with the Virtual Catwalk, PhotoRobot software supports the latest DSLR and mirrorless [**Canon**](https://www.canon-europe.com/) camera. In the studio, the setup revolves around the Catwalk, and only standard studio lighting is necessary. The Catwalk is easy to transport and install on location, or can become a fixed installation in the studio. Its design provides a steady platform which models can easily and safely step onto and begin walking. Operators can control both belt speed and turntable rotation to suit the model perfectly. Meanwhile, we can remotely control cameras and operate camera elevation & swing to capture photos or video. Save settings from the session at any time to use again and again as a “scenario” for recording. Scenarios save parameters such as the rotation and the belt speed, and any adjustments for the model when starting and stopping. They can also save settings for acceleration as well as reversals in direction and much more. ## 3 - How to Work with Live Models Now, working with live models has the potential to provide more challenges than working with the most difficult lighting. Not only does it involve lots of human interaction, there is too much space for unforeseen pitfalls. The model might be in a bad mood, or even worse, unable to work due to illness. Thankfully, there are a number of approaches to make your model photography easier - both on the model and the photographer. - **Pay close attention to the details.** (Notice an irregularity on the model? Perhaps a dangling label, a blemish or wrinkle? Tend to it immediately, as soon as you see it. The less shots you have to repeat the better, and also the more honest relationship you build with models.) - **Build a relationship with the model and create the atmosphere.** (It’s always important for photographers and teams to build a rapport with the model. Little things like a warm greeting, a nice introduction, or a tour of the studio can go a long way. Be friendly, be precise, and be professional to create a positive atmosphere.) - **Never forget: models, just like photographers, get hungry!** (Don’t skip meals. Especially if it’s a longer session, be sure to ask models what kind of food they prefer and when they’d like to eat. Avoid low-quality meals like fast food, and also keep plenty of snacks and refreshments on hand. Water, tea, or coffee can not only serve as a welcome break, they keep everybody fresh during the session.) - **Build strong communication.** (And this might be the most difficult part of the photographer’s job. Always try to communicate clearly, offering instructions that are as detailed as they are easy-to-follow. Beware of technical language that might confuse the model, and always be prepared to show or demonstrate what you expect.) ## 4 - Session Support and Preparation Next, anybody who has worked in model photography knows there are countless seemingly trivial support questions to answer. This is where a well-versed, creative support team goes a long way to helping the photographer realize their vision. Support teams can arrange assistance for models (hairdressers, make-up artists), and help with technical details of the scene. There is communication to coordinate between production managers and their assistants, including scene and product stylists. Everything from the physical details of the scene to photographing the products and models requires a coordinated effort. The better this coordination is managed, the smoother and more efficient the session will be. Also, support teams may be responsible for prepping products for each session. However, if the workload and scale of the session is minimal, this responsibility can fall onto the photographer. In this case, there are a few tips to keep in mind about product preparation. ## 5 - Product Preparation First and foremost, all products we want to photograph must look pristine, new, and attractive. This calls for polishing jewelry and buttons, ironing garments, and dusting glossy surfaces. Then, it’s important to be mindful of a number of other tricks to ensure products look their best. - **Beware of fingerprints.** (Use compressed air or white linen gloves to remove blemishes.) - **Eliminate creases and spots.** (Take advantage of lint rollers, mannequins, or hangers to prep clothing for photography.) - **Hide excess fabric with styling clips and pins.** (Especially when working with mannequins, clips and pins can give clothing a neat, more fitted look.) - **Prep the model just as you would the product.** (Be sure the model is groomed well enough to stay attractive or neutral without drawing attention away from the product.) - **Consider hiring a stylist.** (Having a stylist on the team can take a lot of load off, dealing with both product and model preparation.) ## 6 - How to Operate the Virtual Catwalk Now, let’s talk more about the Virtual Catwalk in the studio. This workstation is suited to 360° photography of both live models or objects (when the belt isn’t moving). For photography of models, the model walks on the moving belt while the platform rotates 360 degrees. Cameras remain in place around the platform, steadily capturing photos and resulting in a flying camera effect. Control the robot, cameras, lighting, and more all from a single interface with PhotoRobot_Controls. - **Easy entry and exit** - The wide plate has sturdy supports to enable models to easily and safely get on and off the platform. - **Adjustable speed** - Configure both turntable rotation and belt speed to perfectly suit the model and the session. - **No complicated logistics** - The Catwalk and everything in the studio can remain in place, without the need to relocate between sessions. - **Adjustable level** - It’s also possible to install the machine recessed into the floor, making the working area level with the platform. ## 7 - Taking Photos and Filming Video During the photoshoot, whether it’s taking photos or filming product videos, using continuous lighting comes with numerous advantages. First, it’s simply a convenient solution, especially with the functionality of the Catwalk and its non-stop rotation. This also gives us the advantage of being able to use Live View in the camera, providing a view of the scene in real-time. The visible conditions never change as the model walks on the rotating platform. It’s easier to manipulate cameras, and the lighting enables photographers to focus more on working with the model and reviewing results. The Catwalk makes it possible to photograph dozens of models for an entire digital fashion show in a single day. Together with PhotoRobot editing software, final imagery and videos can be ready to publish shortly after sessions. ## 8 - Post-Production Tips To completely answer how to film models for product videos, we also have to talk about post-production. In general, the rules for post-processing human models remain the same as for still life and [packshot photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography). Before anything, it’s necessary to follow the brand’s style guide, and to edit photos to achieve consistency in visual content. Then, there are a few more rules we can apply to save both time and effort in post-production. - **Pay extra attention to the fine details**. Remember: an additional 2 minutes in the photo session can often save 10 minutes in post-production. Keep an eye out for any minor concerns like dust, wrinkles or creases that may call for major changes in editing. - **Don’t overdo the editing.** Overall, when editing photos for eCommerce, often less is more. Heavily edited photos can increase product returns, so always aim for visual content that accurately represents the product. - **Never overemphasize color saturation or vibrance.** A common mistake in product photography post-processing is increasing saturation and vibrance beyond natural levels. Always review final results and consider getting a second opinion on the impression the colors make. ## For more fashion product photography strategies and tips Looking for more content like this? Get the latest blogs, tutorials, and videos delivered directly to your inbox by signing up for our newsletter. Also find PhotoRobot on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot) to stay up-to-date on everything happening with us and in the industry. We’re here with all of your product photography resources, from photographing models to products of any size and shape. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-button-up-shirt # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-a-button-up-shirt # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-03-15 --- # Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Button-Up Shirt Find out how to photograph a shirt on a ghost mannequin with PhotoRobot’s_Cube and software for control and automation. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## How to Photograph a Button-Up Shirt on a Ghost Mannequin In this fashion product photography tutorial, we demonstrate how to photograph a button-up shirt on a [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin). Using this special mannequin with removable pieces, we make the shirt appear as if an invisible model is wearing it. Watch the video on [how to use photography mannequins with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography) to create the ghost mannequin effect. To create the ghost mannequin effect, we use [the_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), a mannequin, and our software for control and automation. Thanks to the_Cube, we can photograph a long line of mannequins consecutively and with little interruption to workflow. This is especially valuable when photographing a large number of shirts in various styles. Mannequins for quick-exchange ensure a smooth workflow from one mannequin to the next. Meanwhile, [PhotoRobot_Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) drastically reduces post production and time-to-web. *Ready to learn the process for yourself? This tutorial is for you. We’ll share how to photograph a shirt on a ghost mannequin, including what cameras, lighting, and equipment to use.* ## Photography Equipment and Editing Software At the heart of any ghost mannequin photography setup, there is the_Cube. This robot quickly transforms into a rotating mannequin for fashion product photography. It has a system for quick mannequin exchange, and supports mannequin torsos and legs of all sizes. Then, with PhotoRobot_Controls, there are functions for creating and automating style guides, and a special function we call Chromakey. With these, you can automate mannequin pole removal from final images, and composite photos to create a ghost mannequin effect. ## Additional equipment, cameras, and lighting Beyond the_Cube, you also need the following equipment in your workspace. - **Camera -** Our automated product photography systems support both [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) and [Nikon](https://www.nikon.com/) cameras. For the best results, we always recommend high-end models. - **Studio lighting** - This setup combines strobe lighting and LED panel lights to achieve the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - **Ghost mannequin** - Here, we’re using multiple mannequins, each of which can be quickly exchanged by mounting onto the_Cube. This gives us a way to prepare another torso off to the side while simultaneously photographing the first. - **Your button-up shirt** - Today, we’re photographing a button-up, long-sleeved shirt. With similar types of shirts, the process will be the same however, no matter the length of the sleeves. - [**Styling accessories and tools**](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-photography-styling-tools)- You’ll want tools such as pins and clips on hand for styling the clothing. We also have tissue paper for padding different areas of the shirt, and a reflector to direct light into hard-to-reach places. ## How to Style a Button-Up Shirt ### 1 - Get a mannequin that best suits the shirt Getting started, the first step is choosing the best ghost mannequin to suit your shirt. Find one that closest fits the style, cut, and size of the shirt you want to photograph. The mannequin’s removable parts streamline post production, eliminating the need to cut out and composite final images. Simply remove pieces such as the arms, neck, and chest to photograph the shirt without the mannequin visible. By removing these parts, it’s possible to capture the inner label of the shirt in each photo. This means we can create a ghost mannequin effect without needing to composite photos of an open and closed shirt. ### 2 - Button the shirt onto your mannequin Now that we have our ghost mannequin, fitting the shirt onto it and styling is easy and straightforward. Simply button the shirt up the front, just as you would dressing yourself. Obviously, the shirt should be prepped and steamed first. Ensure there are no unsightly wrinkles or creases you wouldn’t want in your product photos. Pay careful attention that the buttons are neat, and that the shoulders and arms are perfectly aligned. Here, also space the sleeves out to create distance from the torso, moving the mannequin arms outwards to do this. ### 3 - Style the collar, arms, and cuffs Next, we need to emphasize the design anatomy of the shirt. This includes styling the collar, the sleeves, and the sleeve cuffs. Use styling pins to fasten the bottom of the shirt, but be sure to hide the pins behind the fabric. The shirt needs to be neat and straight, but you don’t want the pins visible in the photoshoot. Then, if you choose to flare out the cuffs, simply stuff the insides with tissue paper. If photographing open cuffs, just flip them up and again ensure each is symmetrical. ### 4 - Use styling tools to create a more fitted look In the next step, it’s time to give the shirt a fitted look on the ghost mannequin. To do this, go to the backside of the mannequin and use styling clips to pull the shirt taut. Pull the back of the material until the front of the shirt looks neat, and clip it in place. Remember, however, to only clip the shirt in a straight vertical line down the middle. This way your shirt will remain symmetrical in photos. It’s also important the shirt is not too tight, so pay close attention when styling the shoulders and underarms. It’s these areas that need to present the shirt’s fit - if it’s cut is slim, normal, or tailored. Now, do a final examination of the shirt from the front. It should be styled in a way that gives it a natural fit on the mannequin. There shouldn’t be any areas where the fabric bunches up, just as if an invisible model were wearing it. ### 5 - Styling to photograph the back of the shirt To style the back of the shirt, simply repeat the previous step but in reverse. Use styling clips on the button-up front, again aligning clips vertically down the center. Make sure the shirt has a neat, fitted look that emphasizes its cut, and there are no visible creases or bunching. The fabric shouldn’t be pulled down too tightly, and the shirt should have a more natural and “worn” appearance. ### 6 - Lights, Camera, Action Finally, we’re ready to photograph our shirt on a ghost mannequin. Moving to the control station, the process from here takes no time and becomes routine on any torso. - **Capture given angles** (set for predefined positions). - **Separate the background** from your imagery. - **Retouch the pole** of the torso with manual or automated Chromakey retouch. - **Set the lighting** to the product for consistent exposure, shadows, and contrast. - **Control the process** to create and deliver ready-made images to the client or to publish directly online. ## The Resulting Ghost Mannequin Photos ### For more product photography tutorials and resources If you found this tutorial useful, be sure to sign up for our Product Photography Newsletter below. You can also find PhotoRobot on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/user/FotorobotVideo). Get the latest news and resources, including blogs, guides, and videos to stay up-to-speed in the industry. From mannequin photography to filming models, or photographing products of any size and on any scale, PhotoRobot covers it all. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-cardigan # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-a-cardigan # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-03-31 --- # Fashion Photography of a Cardigan on a Ghost Mannequin In this tutorial, learn how to photograph a cardigan sweater on a ghost mannequin using PhotoRobot’s Cube and control software. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## How to Photograph a Cardigan on a Ghost Mannequin See how to photograph a cardigan on a premium-quality [invisible ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins), and make the mannequin disappear in photos. These special mannequins have removable pieces so you can photograph clothes as if an invisible model is wearing them. See how mannequins integrate into workflows in the [PhotoRobot Fashion Photography Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). Using a ghost mannequin, you can achieve a more true-to-life, 3D effect on cardigans and other fashion products. Also known as a “hollow man” effect, this technique requires the right equipment, some styling, and a few special tricks. Thankfully, PhotoRobot and the right mannequin make it so that even amateur photographers can master the ghost mannequin effect in no time. Using [the_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), a ghost mannequin, and PhotoRobot software, our setup simplifies and streamlines workflows. *Ready to see how for yourself? This product photography tutorial will guide you through the process. Learn how to photograph a cardigan on a ghost mannequin, including what cameras, lighting, and photography equipment to use.* ## PhotoRobot Equipment and Software At the very core of our setup is the_Cube, a robot that can quickly transform into a rotating mannequin. This fashion photography solution includes a system for quick mannequin exchange. The design enables us to streamline workflow and photograph a long line of fashion and apparel in a single session. Meanwhile, our [editing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) dramatically reduces time for post production and time-to-web. Save and automate style guides, and deploy Chromakey for automatic pole removal, compositing photos, and achieving the ghost mannequin effect. ## Additional Photography Equipment Other necessary equipment to create the ghost mannequin photography effect in the studio includes the following. - **Camera -** For professional results, we always recommend high-end Canon cameras in the [PhotoRobot compatible camera list](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras). - **Studio lighting -** For lighting, PhotoRobot combines strobe lighting and LED panels to reach the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - **Ghost mannequin torso -** For a cardigan, we use only the mannequin torso. If photographing many pieces of fashion, you can also use multiple mannequins. Each can be quickly exchanged on and off of the_Cube. This way we can photograph and style mannequins simultaneously for higher volume photoshoots. - **A cardigan sweater -** Today, we’re photographing a women’s cardigan sweater. For similar style sweaters with an opening at the front, the process will be the same. - **Styling accessories -** This photoshoot calls for some double-sided tape, which we use to hold the cardigan’s fabric in place to the mannequin. ## How to Style a Cardigan on a Ghost Mannequin ### 1 - Pull the sleeves over the arms of the mannequin In the first step, we simply need to dress our ghost mannequin in the cardigan. Pull the sleeves over the arms, just as you would dressing yourself. Don’t worry about buttoning up the opening at the front of the sweater yet. Instead, focus on styling the cardigan’s shoulders so that they are neat and even. ### 2 - Use tape to hold the cardigan to the mannequin Next, we need to style the opening at the front of the garment. This is where draped cardigans often hang loosely and open off the mannequin. To counter this, we suggest using double-sided tape to hold both sides of the cardigan in place. Use tape on both sides of the upper chest, and also near the hem at the bottom. Both sides should be symmetrical, hanging parallel and with the sleeves level. Ensure the gap in the front has a nice even opening the entire way down. ### 3 - Style the sleeves just as we would wear the garment Now, we need to style the sleeves according to the style of the garment. This helps shoppers to your online fashion store to better visualize themselves wearing the product. Here, when bunching the sleeves up or rolling them down, ensure the wrists remain level on the mannequin. ## Photographing the Ghost Mannequin Effect ### 1 - Photograph the Frontside of the Cardigan With our mannequin dressed, we can photograph the front of the cardigan. All we need to do is move to the control station to start the sequence. - **Take photos of given angles** (here using predefined positions). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole** of the torso using manual or automated Chromakey retouch. - **Set the lighting** to the product for consistent exposure, shadows, and contrast. - **Control the process** to capture images for compositing and post processing. ### 2 - Flip the cardigan inside-out on the mannequin’s backside But what about the visible mannequin in the photo? Later, to fill the gap in the front of the cardigan, we take additional photos of the garment inside-out. We then use these photos to composite images for the ghost mannequin effect. For this step, take the cardigan off the mannequin and rotate it so that its back is facing to the front. Now put the cardigan on again, inside-out, and photograph the area we need to fill in the gap at the front of the sweater. Pay careful attention that you photograph the cardigan from the same distance you used in previous steps. If you zoom in or out more than in the first photoset, your composite photos won’t match. ### 3 - Edit to Composite Photos Finally, we are ready to create our ghost mannequin effect on the cardigan. Here, Erik is able to do this by using his own editing software to composite the photos. We remove the large gap where the mannequin is visible, layering it with photos of the inside of the cardigan. This provides a clear, proportional view of the tag and neck area, creating our “hollow person” effect. Now, if you aren’t using your own editing software for this part, you might consider hiring out a retouching agency. In fact, PhotoRobot has several we’re in contact with, all who offer services at very reasonable prices. In the end, whether you do it manually or hire an external editor, the results come out impressive for any garments. ## View PhotoRobot’s Final Results for Yourself ## Discover More Tutorials, Techniques, and Resources Did you find this post useful? Get more tips and tricks like this in our product photography tutorials. You can also sign up for our newsletter below, or follow us on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot). Stay up-to-date on everything happening at PhotoRobot with regular blog posts, tutorials, and videos. Whether it’s fashion photography of a cardigan on a ghost mannequin, or photographing other apparel and products, we aim to help. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-spaghetti-dress # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-a-spaghetti-dress # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-06-10 --- # Ghost Mannequin Photography of a Spaghetti Dress Expand your skill set with this fashion photography tutorial on how to photograph a spaghetti dress on a ghost mannequin. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## How to Photograph a Spaghetti Dress on a Ghost Mannequin In this fashion photography tutorial, we demonstrate how to photograph a spaghetti dress using a premium-quality invisible [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) with PhotoRobot. These special modular mannequins have removable pieces so photographers can photograph clothes as if an invisible model is wearing them. See the video demo of [PhotoRobot On-Mannequin Fashion Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). While you can photograph sleeveless strap dresses on a hanger, a ghost mannequin will achieve a more true-to-life 3D effect. This is not only more effective for online presentation, it makes your fashion brand look more professional and committed overall. Thankfully, PhotoRobot makes it easy even for amateur photographers to master ghost mannequin photography. Using [the_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), our modular mannequin, and PhotoRobot software, our setup simplifies and streamlines workflows. *Ready to discover the secret for yourself? This fashion product photography tutorial will guide you through the process. We share how to photograph a spaghetti dress on a ghost mannequin, including what cameras, lighting, and equipment to use.* ## PhotoRobot Equipment and Software At the center of the setup, there is the_Cube. This photography robot quickly transforms into a rotating mannequin, and includes a system for quick mannequin exchange. The design streamlines workflow by allowing us to photograph a long line of fashion and apparel in a single session. Meanwhile, [PhotoRobot editing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) provides automation, control, and drastic reduction in times for post production and time-to-web. Save and automate style guides, and deploy Chromakey for automatic pole removal, compositing photos, and achieving the ghost mannequin effect. ## Additional Photography Equipment Also in the studio, we use the following photography equipment to photograph a spaghetti dress on a ghost mannequin. - **Camera -** For high-quality and consistent results, PhotoRobot supports high-end DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) camera models. - **Studio lighting** - The lighting setup combines strobe lighting and LED panels to obtain the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - **Ghost mannequin torso** - Here, any modular mannequin with removable chest and arm pieces works for capturing invisible mannequin images. Each mannequin can also be quickly exchanged on and off of the_Cube, meaning we can photograph and style mannequins simultaneously. - **A spaghetti strap dress** - This process works for any sleeveless dress or garments of similar cut and style. Styling then becomes routine on any invisible mannequin. - [**Styling tools**](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-photography-styling-tools)**and accessories** - Finally, to give shape to the dress and hold it to the mannequin, we have styling clips, pins, double-side tape, and a light reflector. The reflector should be bright and reflective to direct light into different areas of the garment. ## How to Style a Strap Dress on a Ghost Mannequin ### 1 - Get the Best Invisible Mannequin for Your Dress Before the photoshoot, the first step is choosing the best female mannequin to fit your spaghetti dress. It’s important the mannequin has removable v-chest and arm pieces, and it matches the size and shape of the garment. What you want is for the dress to taper and flow naturally around the contours of the mannequin. Removing the neck and inner chest pieces allows us to also capture the straps on the back of the dress. We do this to get a better idea of how final images will turn out after post production. ### 2 - Dress Your Ghost Mannequin for Photography Now, with our mannequin and the_Cube installed to support it, the next step focuses on fitting the dress to the mannequin. Pay careful attention to how the garment fits the form of the body. Use styling clips and pins to create shape and definition, starting first with the shoulders. The dress should fall even on both sides, with the shoulders symmetrical. If you can’t achieve perfect symmetry, double-sided tape is also useful for holding the shoulder straps in place. ### 3 - Style to Photograph the Frontside of the Dress To prepare to photograph the front of the dress, we need to work on the backside of the mannequin. Here, look for any excess fabric that you can pull taut to give the dress a tighter fit. It’s better to pull fabric tight along the center zipper line, and then use styling clips to hold it in place. Clip different areas and experiment until the frontside of the dress looks satisfactory, with no unsightly bunching or creases. For the shoulders and armpits, afford extra care to your styling efforts. These areas provide shape and definition in photos. Ensure the dress contours smoothly down the mannequin, using pins to eliminate excess fabric. ### 4 - Direct Lighting to Showcase Distinguishing Features Next, it’s time to emphasize the fabric and design of the dress. To do this, experiment with the lighting to direct attention to finer details, patterns, and colors. Use both light and shadow to bring the dress to life. Examine how light and shadow contrast, and aim to highlight areas of the dress that make it unique and appealing. For this, you might also utilize a bright, white reflector to control how and where the light hits the dress. Direct light into hard-to-reach places that provide shape, or over areas that showcase the cut, material, and design features. ### 5 - Photograph the Dress on the Mannequin Now, we can photograph the dress on the mannequin. Photographing the frontside of the dress is straightforward, requiring only a few commands at the control station. - **Capture photos of given angles** (here using predefined positions). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole** of the torso using manual or automated Chromakey retouch. - **Set the lighting** to the product for consistent exposure, shadows, and contrast. - **Control the process** to capture images for compositing and post processing. ### 6 - Take Photos of the Dress Inside-Out for Compositing In the final step, we need to photograph the dress inside-out to present both sides of the straps. This is where photographers often encounter problems. However, a simple technique in editing, compositing photos makes the process quick and easy. Typically, either our photographer handles this, or we can outsource the task. It doesn’t take much time or effort, so even outsourcing is quick and affordable. Either way, we simply flip the dress inside-out and redress the mannequin. Lay the straps exactly as they were in the original photos, and again move to the control station to photograph the dress. The images we get here we use as composite photos in post production. This is how we make the straps appear to hang naturally on the invisible mannequin shoulders. ## Judge the invisible mannequin effect yourself ### For More eCommerce Photography Tutorials If you enjoyed this eCommerce product photography tutorial, join us on the Web and YouTube for the latest from PhotoRobot. Our guides, tutorials, and videos aim to ensure your product photography, no matter the product, leaves nothing to the imagination. Whether it’s ghost mannequin photography of a spaghetti dress or other apparel, our resources are *by photographers and for photographers.* --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-suit-and-tie # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-a-suit-and-tie # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-01-27 --- # How to Photograph a Suit and Tie with a Ghost Mannequin This guide demonstrates how to photograph a suit and tie with a ghost mannequin effect using PhotoRobot’s Cube and automation software. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## How to Photograph Suits and Ties on a Ghost Mannequin As part of our ongoing fashion photography tutorials, this guide will show how to photograph a suit and tie with a [ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin). Using a ghost mannequin, you can make apparel look as if an invisible person is wearing it, also known as a “hollow man” effect. Catch up on the photo studio setup for PhotoRobot-powered [on-mannequin fashion photography](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). To achieve this effect, we take multiple photos of a suit and tie on a mannequin. We then combine the images to remove the mannequin in post processing. This gives clothing a more true-to-life, full-bodied and 3D appearance than flat lay photography. It also ensures apparel isn’t flat or out of proportion in product photos. For the complete step-by-step guide, continue reading. This tutorial demonstrates how to photograph a suit and tie with a ghost mannequin effect using [PhotoRobot’s_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) and product photography software. ## Photography Equipment and Editing Software When aiming to achieve a ghost mannequin effect on a suit and tie, PhotoRobot’s standard setup features the_Cube. This solution boasts a system for quick mannequin exchange to streamline workflows, while PhotoRobot [software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) automates post processing. Among the many editing tools in our software is ChromaKey, a function which automatically removes mannequin poles in final images. It then combines “composite” photos to achieve the “invisible person” effect in less time than it takes to style your mannequin. Then, beyond these tools, you also need the following. - **Camera** - PhotoRobot is compatible with DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) cameras, and we recommend high-end models for professional product photography. - **Studio lighting** - Our systems work with both strobe lighting or LED panel lights, using these to create the ideal lighting from all angles. - **Ghost mannequin** - In this case, we use our quick-exchange mannequins. This provides us a way to prepare a separate torso off to the side while simultaneously photographing. - **A blazer, shirt, and tie combo** - Today, we’re photographing a [blazer](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-blazers) with a shirt and tie. - **Styling accessories** - By using clips and pins, we ensure there are no unsightly creases and that the blazer fits the mannequin perfectly. ## How to style your suit and tie for the effect ### 1 - Keep the neck, arm, and chest pieces attached First, when photographing a suit and tie combo, we keep the neck, arm, and chest pieces on the mannequin. The neck piece is necessary to support the tie in this photoshoot. Next, we remove the middle part of the waist to give us a view of the inner lining. ### 2 - Dress your mannequin for success In the next step, we want to dress our mannequin for success. Start first with putting on the shirt, and then move onto the blazer. Here, you can button the shirt up, but wait for later to button up the blazer. Get the shoulders straight and neat, and then pull the shirt tight to smooth out any creases on the garments. ### 3 - Knot and put the tie on your mannequin Now, with our shirt and blazer fitted and wrinkle-free on the mannequin, we add the tie to the mannequin. Both shoulders look nice, straight, and symmetrical, so now we put the shirt collar up and put the tie on. We always make sure to pre-knot our ties before the photoshoot with a loose, simple knot like the four-in-hand or half-windsor. ### 4 - Button all buttons and straighten shirttails Moving on, with our tie straight, we button up the front of the blazer, and tuck in the shirttails. Here, we want the suit and tie combo exactly how we want to photograph it on the ghost mannequin. The outfit should now be getting that “hollow man” effect. Now, ensure the clothes neatly fit your mannequin. For this, you can also use styling pins and clips here to style the suit and tie. ### 5 - Lights, Camera, Action And just like that, we’re ready to move to our control station and create the ghost mannequin effect. Here, the process takes no time and becomes routine on any torso. - **Capture given angles** (using predefined positions). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole** of the standing torso using PhotoRobot’s manual or automated Chromakey retouch feature to create a ghost mannequin effect. - **Set the lighting** according to the product, ensuring consistent exposure, shadows, and contrast. - **Control the process** to deliver ready-made images to the client or to publish directly online. ## The resulting ghost mannequin effect ## For Additional Product Photography Resources and Tutorials Did you find this tutorial useful? Be sure to follow us on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/user/FotorobotVideo). You can also sign up for our Photography Newsletter below. We regularly share blogs, tutorials, and videos to keep you up-to-speed on everything happening in the industry. Follow PhotoRobot today for more resources, from how to photograph suits and ties to product photography of any type or scale. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-t-shirt-with-a-ghost-mannequin # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-a-t-shirt-with-a-ghost-mannequin # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-01-11 --- # How to Photograph a T-Shirt with a Ghost Mannequin Join us to learn how to photograph a t-shirt with a ghost mannequin effect for authentic, true-to-life images that maintain focus strongly on the product. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## Ghost Mannequin Fashion Photography: Photographing T-Shirts See how to photograph a t-shirt with PhotoRobot and a [premium ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) to achieve 3D and "full-bodied" product photos. T-shirts are often a staple product in any fashion retail. However, getting the best photographs of t-shirts requires some special techniques with lighting setups, cameras, and post production. With flat lay product photography, shirts tend to lose their appeal. Results come out looking a little flat and often out of proportion. The ghost mannequin effect, on the other hand, provides a way to remove the model or mannequin in post production. This creates a “hollow man effect”, as if an invisible person were wearing the photographed clothing. To achieve this, we take multiple photos of a t-shirt on a mannequin or model, and then combine the images to remove the model or mannequin in post processing. Refresh your knowledge with the video of [how to use mannequins with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). In this way, the results are lifelike product photos of t-shirts that keep the focus firmly on the product. T-shirts look more 3-dimensional, rounded and overall more presentable for online fashion retail. *Continue reading to learn how to photograph a t-shirt with a ghost mannequin effect and discover* [*PhotoRobot automated product photography equipment*](https://www.photorobot.com/robots)*.* ## How to achieve a ghost mannequin effect with t-shirts Ready to get started? Let’s look at what goes into creating the ghost mannequin effect for fashion product photography. Unlike other software image editing techniques, using a ghost mannequin makes the photographed t-shirt appear to be worn by an invisible person. We accomplish this by removing the arm and chest pieces so that the mannequin is not visible in the final image. Using a ghost mannequin can amount to dramatic savings in content production costs. With [PhotoRobot’s_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) and our mannequins designed for quick-exchange, the savings in effort and costs are even more remarkable. What other photography equipment and software do we need? Let’s run through the list now. ## Equipment and software for the ghost mannequin effect The traditional PhotoRobot setup for the ghost mannequin effect on t-shirts revolves around the CUBE. This is thanks to its system for quick mannequin exchange, coupled with PhotoRobot [automation software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) for streamlining post processing. Use PhotoRobot’s Chromakey to automatically remove mannequin poles from final images, combine photos, and achieve the perfect ghost mannequin effect every time. ## Additional photo studio equipment As for other fashion photography equipment, you’ll need the following. - **Camera** — PhotoRobot supports compatible DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) cameras, with high-end models recommended for professional product photography. - **Lighting Setup** — Our systems work with both strobe lighting or LED panel lights, using these to create the ideal lighting from all angles. - **A ghost mannequin** — In this case, we use our quick-exchange mannequins, allowing us to prepare a separate torso off to the side while simultaneously taking photos of t-shirts ready for photographing. - **Styling accessories** — Use a combination of clips and pins to ensure the tee has a more fitted appearance. - **T Shirt** — No matter how intricate the design of the tee, even on complicated edges like lace, with PhotoRobot the “invisible person” effect is created flawlessly. ## Photographing the t-shirt Now, let’s run through the process of how to photograph a t-shirt with a ghost mannequin. The entire process for applying the ghost mannequin effect to apparel takes no longer than a matter of minutes. The software manages all post-processing and publishing online, with all of these features available as part of PhotoRobot PRESET categories. These presets are a set of commands that let you record and apply settings to all later items based on this style. This means that you can focus on the photography, while PhotoRobot handles the majority of the *heavy-lifting*. The process then becomes routine, no matter if you’re using a regular or an invisible torso. ## 1 - Take off the arms and the chest piece of the mannequin When styling t-shirts to set the scene, the shape of the tee matters most. You want the apparel to look as appealing as if it were fitted perfectly on a live model. It also doesn’t hurt if the mannequin has an athletic build (such as with PhotoRobot’s mannequins for quick exchange). Beyond this, all you need to do is take off the removable pieces of the mannequin, and you’re now ready to dress it up. ## 2 - Dress your mannequin to impress Next, simply pull your t-shirt down over the head of the mannequin, just as you would when dressing yourself. Now, the mannequin is ready for styling. Just remember to replace the arm and shoulder pieces before getting started. ## 3 - Style the t-shirt From here, you want to make sure the arms and shoulders of the shirt are styled and ready for photography. Ensure there is no fabric pinched under the shoulders, and that both are aligned perfectly. ## 4 - Pull the shirt tight Finally, pull the material taut over the mannequin, just like you see in the example below. Be sure you remove any creases that might distract away from the shirt’s design, and that it looks flawless for the photoshoot. ## 5 - Lights, Camera, Action And that’s it. Now you’re ready to photograph the t-shirt with the magic of PhotoRobot. This process is also straightforward and becomes routine on any torso. - **Capture given angles** (using predefined positions). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole of the standing torso** using PhotoRobot’s manual or automated Chromakey retouch feature to create a ghost mannequin effect. - **Set the lighting** according to the product. - **Control the process to deliver ready-made t-shirt images** to the client or to publish directly online. ## The Ghost Mannequin Effect Notice how we’ve made the arms invisible in post production. Directional lighting also provides us with extra shadowing to make the shirt look more appealing. ## Discover More Product Photography Tricks & Resources We know there’s always more to discover. Sign up for our Product Photography Newsletter below for the latest blogs, tutorials, and videos. Also follow us on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot) to stay up-to-date on everything happening in the industry. We’re here to help, from photographing t-shirts on a ghost mannequin to product photography of any type or scale. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-02-22 --- # Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Tight-Fitting Dress Using PhotoRobot’s Cube with our advanced software for automation and control, we demonstrate ghost mannequin photography on a fitted dress. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## How to Capture a Ghost Mannequin Effect on a Fitted Dress This tutorial demonstrates how to photograph a tight-fitting sleeved dress on a [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin) with PhotoRobot. Today, we’re doing ghost [mannequin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin) on fitted dresses with [the_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) and [our software](https://www.photorobot.com/software#workflow) for automation and control. Watch the demo on how to PhotoRobot produces [professional clothing photos on mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). Using a ghost mannequin, you can photograph a fitted dress so it appears as if an invisible model is wearing it. While it is possible to use flat lay photography on dresses, using a hanger or a live model, it doesn’t have the same visual effect online. Dresses photographed on a ghost mannequin appear to tightly curve around an invisible figure, giving it a full “body” and accentuating contours. This provides customers to your online fashion store a powerful way to visualize how the garments would look on them. *Continue reading for a complete walkthrough of the process. We’ll show you how to photograph a fitted dress on a ghost mannequin, including what cameras, lighting, and equipment to use.* ## Photography Equipment and Editing Software At the heart of our setup for ghost mannequin photography, we have the_Cube. With this solution, we have a system for quick mannequin exchange, and software for streamlining post processing. These ensure optimal workflow no matter the volume in the photography studio. Then, in PhotoRobot_Controls, we have functions for style guides along with Chromakey for automatically removing mannequin poles from final images. Chromakey also automates the process of combining “composite” photos to create the ghost mannequin effect. Beyond these, you’ll also need the following. - **Camera** - Our systems support both DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) cameras, and we always recommend higher-end models for professional product photography. - **Studio lighting** - We utilize both strobe lighting and LED panel lights to create the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - **A reflector** - If necessary, you can direct light into different areas of the dress with a bright, reflective surface. - **Ghost mannequin** - Here, we use our quick-exchange mannequins. These provide us a way to prepare another torso off to the side at the same time we photograph styled mannequins. - **A fitted dress** - Today, we’re photographing a tight-fitting sleeved dress, but the process will be the same with similar garments. - **Styling accessories** - Finally, no fashion photography operation is complete without tools such as pins and clips for styling the mannequin. ## How to Style Your Fitted Dress on a Ghost Mannequin ### 1 - Choose the best size mannequin for your garments Getting started, your first order of business will be choosing the best ghost mannequin for the task on hand. Choose a mannequin that closest fits the size and the shape of the dress you’re photographing. Keep in mind that with photography of fitted dresses, you will always have some work to do in post production. This is because you need photos of the dress inside and out, including the inner label areas of the garment. Thankfully, using a ghost mannequin drastically reduces the time you’ll need for photography and for post processing. Removable pieces like the arms, neck, and chest make it easier to style a dress to neatly taper and contour around the mannequin. ### 2 - Fit your dress neatly onto the mannequin Now that we have our mannequin, start by removing its arms. Then, pull the dress neatly down over the mannequin’s shoulders. You’ll want to be very gentle with the garments. Ensure that you don’t stretch the fabric or create any creases. Carefully smoothen the shoulders, and then reattach the arms onto the mannequin. Be cautious not to pinch any of the dress between the arms. You don’t want any blemishes online shoppers might spot on the shoulders or sleeves of the fitted dress. ### 3 - Prepare the mid-section and sleeves In the next step, it’s time to style the dress to perfectly fit the curves of our ghost mannequin torso. We need to prepare the dress exactly how we want it to look online. Moreover, it needs to be ready for photographing in a way that ensures less need for retouching final images. To do this, pull the dress neatly and taut down the mid-section of the mannequin. If you need more surface area, simply extend the torso by wrapping a layer of tape around the naval area. This will create space to ensure the dress doesn’t hang loosely off the torso. Similarly, when styling the sleeves, we have to bring them to life with the “invisible person” effect. Stylists can do this by padding the sleeve cuffs where they hang off the arms with wadded paper or tissue. This prevents the sleeve-ends from looking flat to the cameras, making the wrists appear more round from all angles. ### 4 - Use lighting to showcase fine details In preparation for the photoshoot, the next order of business is the studio lighting. Optimal lighting will direct enough light onto the dress to showcase its finer details, with exposure set appropriately for light or dark clothing. Here, you are working with both light and shadows. Photographers need to capture the contours of the dress as it curves around the mannequin. Aim lights so that together with the shadows they create the 3D effect you want in your final images. This is when something to reflect light into hard-to-reach places might be necessary. Using a light reflector, you can spotlight distinguishing features of the apparel, or control shadows around areas like the shoulders and waist. ### 5 - Lights, Camera, Action Almost complete, we are now able to move to our control station to begin photographing our fitted dress. Here, the process takes no time and becomes routine on any torso. - **Set the lighting and exposure** according to the dress, ensuring consistent shadows and contrast. - **Capture given angles** (using predefined positions). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole** of the standing torso using PhotoRobot’s manual or automated Chromakey retouch feature. ### 6 - Photograph the dress inside-out to create final images In no time at all, you’re ready to composite final images of the dress. Doing this is simple, requiring little styling other than flipping the dress inside-out and redressing the mannequin. There’s no worry about styling the mid or lower sections of the dress. All you need to photograph is the inner label area on the neck. Again, dress the mannequin, keeping the same lighting and exposure settings, and move to the control station. From here, PhotoRobot_Controls allows you to automate the image capture, composite the two sets of photos, and post process for the ghost mannequin effect. ## The Resulting Ghost Mannequin Effect ### For more automated photography techniques and tutorials This is part of our ongoing tutorial series on ghost mannequin photography with PhotoRobot systems. To read more, be sure to follow us on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot). Also sign up for our Photography Newsletter below. We regularly share blogs, tutorials, and videos to keep you updated on everything happening in the industry. Follow us today for more resources, whether it’s photographing dresses or it’s product photography of any type or scale. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-zip-up-hoodie # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-a-zip-up-hoodie # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-03-08 --- # Ghost Mannequin Photography on a Zip-Up Hoodie Follow this tutorial to discover how to photograph a zip-up hoodie on a ghost mannequin using PhotoRobot’s_Cube and automation software. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## How to Create a Ghost Mannequin Effect on a Zip-Up Hoodie Expanding on our [product photography tutorials](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials), this guide shows how to photograph a zip-up hoodie on a [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin). Using a ghost mannequin, you make apparel appear to be worn by an invisible model. Some also call this the [“hollow person” effect](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin). Review a demostration of the PhotoRobot approach to [fashion photography on mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). To achieve the effect, we use [PhotoRobot’s_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), and our ghost mannequin - a special mannequin with removable pieces. Removing parts such as the arms, neck, and chest allows us to photograph clothes without the mannequin visible. Ghost mannequin photography creates a “full-bodied” 3D effect on clothing. This allows customers to your online fashion store to more effectively visualize how your brand’s clothing would look on them. *Read further for a step-by-step tutorial of the process. We’ll share how to photograph a zip-up hoodie on a ghost mannequin, and what cameras, lighting, and equipment to use.* ## PhotoRobot Photography Equipment and Editing Software Our standard setup for any ghost mannequin photography revolves around the_Cube. This device quickly transforms into a rotating mannequin for fashion photography. It boasts a system for quick mannequin exchange, and together with [PhotoRobot_Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) streamlines workflow in the studio no matter the project. The software has functions for style guides and for what we call Chromakey, which automatically removes mannequin poles in final images. It also automates the process of compositing photos to create the ghost mannequin effect. Beyond the_Cube, you also need the following equipment in your workspace. - **Camera** - PhotoRobot systems support compatible [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) camera. For professional results, we always recommend higher-end models. - **Studio lighting** - Our setup uses a combination of strobe lighting and LED panel lights to create the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - **Ghost mannequin** - Here, we use our quick-exchange mannequins. These provide us a way to prepare another torso off to the side at the same time we photograph styled mannequins. - **Your zip-up hoodie** - Today, we’re photographing a zip-up hoodie. However, the process will be the same for all hoodies, whether or not they have a zipper. - **Styling accessories and tools** - As with most fashion photoshoots, you’ll want tools such as pins and clips on hand for styling the clothing. You’ll also want some tissue paper for padding the hood. ## How to Style a Zip-Up Hoodie on a Ghost Mannequin ### 1 - Put your zip-up on the mannequin Getting started, the first step is simply putting the zip-up hoodie on the ghost mannequin. Unzip the hoodie, pull the arms into the sleeves and then pull them down neatly. Pay careful attention that there are no visible creases and that you style the shoulders straight and even. ### 2 - Ensure the arms are symmetrical Next, we need to ensure both sleeves are symmetrical for the photoshoot. Level the arms, making sure they’re both in identical positions. The main thing here is that you don’t want one arm sticking out more than the other for the camera. Line the arms up evenly, checking they look the same from the side and front views. ### 3 - Detach the removable neck part Now, we need to remove the neck piece from the mannequin. This way the camera can capture the zip-up’s inner lining. Detach the neck and move it out of the scene. ### 4 - Prep the hood of your zip-up In the next step, we style the hood for a ghost mannequin effect. This is where we use styling accessories and tools, including clips, pins, and tissue paper. Use the styling clips and pins to give the hoodie a fitted look around the neckline. Then, showcase the hood by padding it with tissue paper to make it look more attractive and rounded. ### 5 - Make the drawstrings loose and even And just like that, we’re almost ready to photograph our hoodie on a ghost mannequin. All we need to do now is pull the drawstrings so that they’re nice, loose and even. You don’t want to pull the hood too tight and scrunch it up, so first pull around the hood to make sure it’s completely open. From here, pull the strings so that they line up symmetrically and hang loosely down the front of the hoodie. ### 6 - Lights, Camera, Action Finally, thanks to our suite of software for automation and control, it’s time for the easy part. Moving to the control station, the process from here takes no time and becomes routine on any torso. - **Capture given angles** (using predefined positions). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole** of the standing torso using PhotoRobot’s manual or automated Chromakey retouch feature to create a ghost mannequin effect. - **Set the lighting** according to the product for consistent exposure, shadows, and contrast. - **Control the process** to deliver ready-made images to the client or to publish directly online. ## Judge the invisible mannequin effect for yourself ### Discover more product photography techniques Looking for more product photography techniques, tips, and tricks? Sign up for the Newsletter below. You can also follow us on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot). We share the latest in product photography from all industries. Whether it’s how to photograph a zip-up hoodie, or product photography of any type or scale, we’re here to help! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-blazers # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-blazers # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-07-04 --- # Fashion Photography of a Blazer on a Ghost Mannequin In this tutorial, we show how to photograph a blazer on a ghost mannequin using PhotoRobot’s Cube and automation software. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## How to Photograph a Classic Blazer on a Ghost Mannequin This fashion photography tutorial demonstrates how to photograph a blazer on a [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin). Thanks to removable pieces, ghost mannequins allow you to photograph clothing as if an invisible model is wearing it. Watch the [video guide to PhotoRobot on-mannequin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). To create the ghost mannequin effect with PhotoRobot systems, we deploy [the_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), our mannequin, and [PhotoRobot_Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) for editing and automation. The_Cube, with its design for quick mannequin exchange, ensures a smooth workflow when photographing multiple items. Meanwhile, PhotoRobot software for automation and control of the photoshoot drastically reduces post production times and time-to-web. This is especially valuable when photographing more than one blazer or numerous pieces of apparel in a single day. *Want to see the photoshoot for yourself? This tutorial will guide you through the process. We’ll share how to photograph a blazer on a ghost mannequin, including what cameras, lighting, and equipment to use.* ## Studio Equipment and Editing Software The very core of our setup for ghost mannequin photography on a blazer is PhotoRobot’s_Cube. This robot transforms into a rotating mannequin for fashion photography, and it has a system for quick mannequin exchange. Then, with PhotoRobot_Controls, we can create and automate [style guides](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide), and we have a special function we call Chromakey. With these, you can automate mannequin pole removal from final images, and composite photos to create a ghost mannequin effect. ## Additional equipment, cameras, and lighting Other than our product photography robot, you also need the following equipment in the studio. - **Camera** - For professional results, PhotoRobot supports DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) cameras, with high-end models always recommended. - **Studio lighting** - For this, we combine strobe lighting and LED panels to reach the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - **Ghost mannequin** - Here, if you want you can use multiple mannequins, each of which can be quickly exchanged on and off of the_Cube. This gives you a way to both photograph and style mannequins simultaneously for higher volume photoshoots. - **A blazer** - Today, we’re photographing a classic men’s blazer. For other types of blazers, the process will be the same, however. - **Styling accessories and tools** - We also have tools like pins and clips on hand for fitting the blazer onto the mannequin. ## How to style a blazer for a ghost mannequin effect ### 1 - Remove pieces to show the blazer’s inner lining Firstly, we need to prepare to take photos of the front side of our blazer. To do this, it’s necessary to remove as much of the chest area as possible from the torso. We need to show the inner lining of the blazer without the mannequin visible. Make sure you remove enough of the chest to compensate for the lower cut of the blazer’s lapel. Then, move onto the bottom of the ghost mannequin. Here, remove parts until the inner lining at the bottom of the blazer is visible. ### 2 - Suit up your ghost mannequin Next, it’s time to dress our mannequin for the photoshoot. Fit the mannequin’s arms into the sleeves and pull the blazer on. Then, button up the blazer, just as you would dressing yourself. Again check there’s a clear view of the inner lining and the mannequin is invisible from your desired angle. When satisfactory, we can then move onto styling the arms and sleeves of our mannequin. ### 3 - Line up the arms and shoulders In this step, you need to align the mannequin arms and shoulders, ensuring each side is level. Also, extend the arms out in a way that creates space between the torso and the arms. This gives the blazer a more “worn” rather than flat look. ### 4 - Arrange the sleeves and underarms From here, style the sleeves and underarms so they are level and there are no visible creases. You also don’t want any of the blazer’s material to bunch up around the underarms. This is the area that will give the most depth to your shots and help to completely round out the apparel. ### 5 - Lights, Camera, Action! And just like that, now you can photograph the blazer on the ghost mannequin. Move to the PhotoRobot control station, and begin the process. Here, capturing your images takes no time, and the process becomes routine on any torso. - **Take photos of given angles** (here using predefined positions). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole** of the torso using manual or automated Chromakey retouch. - **Set the lighting** to the product for consistent exposure, shadows, and contrast. - **Start the sequence** to create and deliver ready-made images to the client or to publish directly online. ## Judge the final product images for yourself ### For more product photography tutorials, videos, and resources If you found this fashion photography tutorial useful, make sure to follow our channels on the Web and YouTube. We share a wide range of product photography tutorials, blog posts, and videos showcasing the versatility of PhotoRobot. Master the ghost mannequin effect on blazers, dresses, suits and other apparel, and discover more PhotoRobot solutions for your brand. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-coats # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-coats # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-01-13 --- # How to Photograph Coats with a Ghost Mannequin Effect Achieve a true-to-life, 3D ghost mannequin effect when photographing coats with PhotoRobot fashion photography solutions. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## Fashion Photography Guides: Coats and Ghost Mannequins In this guide, we’ll demonstrate how to photograph coats with a [ghost mannequin effect](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect) using [PhotoRobot’s_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) and automation software. See how to style your mannequin and coat, and what cameras, lighting, and photography equipment to use. Refresh your knowledge with the video demo on [using mannequins with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). The video above shows how to use ghost mannequins with PhotoRobot hardware and software. These solutions make ghost mannequin photography several times faster and more consistent than if we were to do this manually. With the mens’ peacoat, the ghost mannequin makes the coat look as if an invisible person is wearing it. It also gives it a more structured and defined fit, and a realistic 3D effect in presentation. This is accomplished by removing pieces of the mannequin so they are not visible during photography. *Continue reading for more on how to photograph a coat with a ghost mannequin effect and streamlining workflow with PhotoRobot.* ## Photography equipment and editing software Now, a traditional PhotoRobot setup for the ghost mannequin effect on coats revolves around the CUBE. This solution boasts a system for quick mannequin exchange, coupled with PhotoRobot [automation software](https://www.photorobot.com/software#workflow) for streamlining post processing. PhotoRobot’s ChromaKey function automatically removes mannequin poles from final images, combines photos, and achieves a flawless ghost mannequin effect every time. Beyond these, you’ll also need the following. - **Camera -** PhotoRobot supports DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) cameras, with high-end models recommended for professional product photography. - **Studio lighting -** Our systems work with both strobe lighting or LED panel lights, using these to create the ideal lighting from all angles. - **Ghost mannequin -** In this case, we use our quick-exchange mannequins. This provides us a way to prepare a separate torso off to the side while simultaneously taking photos of coats ready for photographing. - **A coat to be photographed -** Here, we’ve decided to use a men’s peacoat. However, the process will be the same for similar apparel and fashion products. ## How to Style Coats for the Effect ### 1 - Clothe your mannequin The first step is dressing up your ghost mannequin in the coat. Here, you should button the coat completely up the front. If it’s a double-breasted coat, start with the inner buttons before moving onto the outer ones. In this way, the coat will appear straight and symmetrical. Be sure the coat is taut on the ghost mannequin, and that it appears just as it would in-store. If you have PhotoRobot’s mannequins for quick-exchange, you can also begin preparing a separate mannequin for photography. These mannequins were designed to optimize workflow for higher volume photoshoots. ### 2 - Detach removable pieces Next, you need to make an open space in the neck and upper chest area. For a peacoat, such as the one in our video, we simply remove pieces of the mannequin from the neck and chest. This creates the visible insert we’re looking for to create our “invisible person” effect. ### 3 - Position mannequin arms and the hem of the coat Then, you should position the mannequin’s arms so that they are level and in the same position. What you want is to ensure that any space between the arms and the body is symmetrical. Also, pay attention to the bottom hem of the coat. Be sure to make it look straight on the mannequin. ### 4 - Style the coat’s buttons for photography In the next step, examine the coat’s buttons and style them so that all are flat and facing straight forward. ### 5 - Showcase distinguishing features Now, this is where every coat is different, with varying distinguishing features. Here, you want to think about even the tiniest details that make the coat stand out. If the cuffs of the sleeves have buttons, prepare to showcase these and other details in your photography. You might turn the sleeves up slightly to reveal the buttons, again making sure they are flat and facing the right direction. Also, be attentive to the inner-lining of your jacket. You want this to look as spotless and clean as possible, so that nothing distracts away from the garment. ### Lights, Cameras, Action... And that’s it. Now you’re ready to move to your PhotoRobot control station and create your ghost mannequin effect. The process is straightforward and becomes routine on any torso. - **Capture given angles** (using predefined positions). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole of the standing torso** using PhotoRobot’s manual or automated Chromakey retouch feature to create a ghost mannequin effect. - **Set the lighting** according to the product. - **Control the process to deliver ready-made images** to the client or to publish directly online. ## The Results ## Looking for more tips, tricks, and techniques? This guide is part of an ongoing PhotoRobot series on product photography techniques, styling, and lighting setups. If you’d like to learn more, sign up for our Newsletter below. We share the latest blogs and tutorials, as well as videos and resources to keep you up-to-speed in the industry. We’re here to help you streamline your product photography workflows, no matter the product or the workload. Don’t hesitate to contact us today to learn more about how to photograph coats with a ghost mannequin effect, or to discover our solutions for yourself. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-eyewear # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-06-21 --- # How to Photograph Eyewear for Online Product Presentation Get actionable insights into how to photograph sunglasses and glasses to showcase on online stores and website product pages. - Categories: Still & Spin Imagery ## Glasses and Sunglasses Product Photography Tips Building on our tips for [sunglasses product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photography-sunglasses), this tutorial expands on how to photograph glasses and sunglasses. Sure, glasses look great from a low angle, but what about when some angles of rotation create unwanted reflections? Not only does this pose challenges when capturing product photos, it makes capturing 360s near impossible without the right equipment. Enter: the PhotoRobot studio. Devices like **motorized turntables** in combination with a **Robotic Camera Arm** offer the solution. Thanks to image capture & processing software, operators have complete control, automation & tools for any type of [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography). When photographing eyewear, robots can even handle the reflective surfaces automatically, skipping bad angles for “safer” shots. And what about when capturing a [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography)? All photographers have to do is increase the angle of elevation, and PhotoRobot does the rest. Read on to see for yourself, and get our 10 tips for photographing glasses and sunglasses. Learn more about using the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table), camera choice, lighting, product positioning, automation, image post-processing, and publishing. We’ll even provide some sunglasses photography ideas and examples for product presentation, including: 360 spins, 3D models, and product configurators. Watch the process in the [Eyewear Photography Production Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-eyewear-photography-demo) by PhotoRobot. ## 1 - Photographing glasses and sunglasses - Prep Before any photoshoot, preparation is always key. Production teams should organize products and sort items into categories: by make, design, and type (sunglasses or normal eyeglasses). The main concern here is separating different types of glass and frames in the shot list. This is especially true when working with higher volumes of products to photograph. The more you prepare in this case, the more efficient your overall studio workflow will be. Thus, organize eyewear by photographic elements: e.g. sunglasses with highly reflective surfaces, or eyewear with transparent parts like the frames. Reflections and transparency in general tend to be more difficult to photograph, so group these products together. Consider the techniques you’ll use for each pair of glasses, and plan accordingly. You might want to start with simple eyewear designs before moving on to photograph more unique products. Then, in the studio, a motorized [photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) like PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table makes a welcome addition. It provides all the functionality photo studios need for multi-angle still photos or 360-degree spin imagery. PhotoRobot systems support Canon DSLR and Mirrorless camera models, [FOMEI](https://www.fomei.com/en/products-studio-strobes-37499) or [Broncolor](https://broncolor.swiss/products) strobe lights, and LED lights with DMX support. ## 2 - Lighting and camera settings When photographing eyewear, we need a neutral, white background that is as luminescent as possible. However, it’s important the lighting does not wash away any of the product’s design, colors or textures. The quality of your final product images depends on this. Now, if using the Centerless Table, this concern is minimal. Its design features an optical glass plate and a built-in diffusion backdrop. Together, these allow the lights to evenly illuminate the product from all sides. This gives the photographer a pure white background, and allows them to naturally create [high-quality product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery). Photographers should experiment with camera parameters like **aperture**, **speed**, and **ISO**, as well as how the lights hit the product. Here, you also want several props like white cloth to photograph the glasses on, and white and black cards. The white of the cards is useful to reflect light into the glasses, while the black can minimize reflections. Use black to add negative fill when reflections are too strong or in unwanted areas. Play with the position of the cards, moving them closer or further away until they eliminate reflections. The end goal is to direct lighting to create clear edges and fine details. ## 3 - Automation and capture control with PhotoRobot Keep in mind that PhotoRobot’s [image capture control](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/image-capture-control-tools) and automation software handles the majority of the *heavy-lifting* in the studio. Photographers can deploy advanced tools for camera capture and light control, as well automation, post-processing, sharing and publishing. Save photoshoot configurations as Presets in the [software](https://www.photorobot.com/software), and automate settings when photographing similar types of products. The software together with a PhotoRobot [workstation](https://www.photorobot.com/robots), like one of our motorized turntables, ensures smoother and more effective workflows. Photographers have complete control over all photography equipment: including one or multiple robots, cameras, and light configurations. Meanwhile, additional support features, like laser-guided object positioning, automatic calibration, and light holders make production even easier in the photo studio. Combine a motorized turntable with PhotoRobot’s [Robotic Camera Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) for maximum precision. Image capture as well as movement of the mounted camera with the product’s rotation of the turntable is all synchronized. Manually or automatically adjust height and distance of shots to be more precise in how you frame photos. The Robotic Arm is compatible with all PhotoRobot turntables, and can capture single or multiple rows, 360-degrees around a product. ## 4 - What angles to show on shopping product pages If you browse product pages of leading eyewear brands like **Rayban**, one thing that really stands out is consistency. The **hero shot**, **image gallery** and **360° spin photos** are all shown from consistent angles, elevation and distance. This practice keeps shopper attention firmly on products, and in general makes product pages look more professional overall. At the very least, the 3 most important angles for eyewear product photos include: a **front view** (hero image), **side view**, and **3/4 view**. The hero image will be what makes a strong first impression. Side views and 3 / 4 shots showcase both the front and profile together, adding extra dimension to product galleries. Now, capturing these angles with PhotoRobot often takes little time. In fact, usually after a single rotation of a motorized turntable, we have high-quality photos ready to publish online. Using a camera tripod or, better yet, the Robotic Arm, we ensure consistent elevation and distance from the product. We capture our most important shots (usually from 10-degree elevation), avoiding unwanted angles and reflections. If shooting [360 spins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography), we simply increase the angle of elevation and run the process back. ## 5 - Keeping consistent with your brand style guide Typically, brands will have a [style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide) that dictates how to photograph different types of products. A style guide is simply a set of instructions on how to photograph and edit product photos. It specifies elements such as how to prep and style products, and the types of product images. In fashion photography, for example, it might state the type of images: whether flat lay, [packshot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), lifestyle, or 360s. See the video demo of [PhotoRobot Photography Style Guide Automation](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/footwear-photography-workflow). It can also state which color background to use, zoom shots, or how to present packaging. Descriptions might include how to showcase different eyewear designs, and how to show different options for each design. What’s important is that each product is displayed the same, making your online store appear more balanced and trustworthy overall. Ultimately, the style guide will tell the photographer all of the visual elements the brand requires in their product photography. Style guides coincide with client branding practices, from product pages to online marketplaces, and anywhere their products appear online. In the end, the goal is [consistency in visual content](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content) across any and all channels where the product is sold. ## 6 - Capturing fine details and showcasing design To truly impress online shoppers, aim to showcase the fine details and design features of the glasses. A lesser part of this involves product and scene prep if you want eyewear to stand out in pictures. Beware of dust, fingerprints or blemishes that might show in photos. Clean glasses, lenses, frames, as well as the white cloth so that everything is in pristine condition. Then, the real challenge becomes [photographing glass](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photographing-glass-products) and reflective surfaces. Eyewear designs range from somewhat to extremely reflective. Some glasses consist of metallic or silver parts, and elements like these often reflect their surroundings. That is, if you don’t use light reflectors to eliminate shine and unwanted reflections. Distractions like these can look to customers like product defects or part of the design. Neither are effective at increasing sales, nor preventing returns. This is why it’s crucial to examine how the light shines on the product, and eliminate any unsightly reflections. You want the glasses to appear in a completely neutral environment, leaving no confusion for potential buyers. ## 7 - How to photograph highly reflective lenses If photographing highly reflective eyewear, it’s possible to use a simple paper tent with one of PhotoRobot’s turntables. While photographers could use a standard photography tent, with PhotoRobot this often isn’t necessary. The workspace provides a range of creative options using diffusion paper, allowing for quality results even with reflective products. It might still be necessary to experiment with light reflectors for glasses with polarized or mirror lenses. However, for the most part, the workstation simplifies everything. The optical glass plate of the turntable enables shadow-free product photography, while the software makes editing easy. Photographers have tools for automatic cropping, object centering, background removal, image sharpening and much more. All the while, image processing can take place in the Cloud, drastically cutting production times compared to local processing. Users can simultaneously take pictures of glasses while at the same time applying post-processing parameters in the Cloud. The workspace is fully automated with this process to maximize workflow. In fact, the only way to speed up production further would be to prep additional products while simultaneously taking pictures. ## 8 - Taking pictures of transparent frames and glasses In some cases, you’ll photograph glasses with transparent components like see-through frames. To beginners, this might seem a challenge, but it’s actually quite easy to get good results with minor lighting adjustments. The challenge is to make any clear material stand out from the white background. This sometimes calls for lowering light intensity, and then adjusting brightness in post-production. PhotoRobot’s level adjustment tool makes this part quick and simple, providing photographers complete control over brightness. Usually all that’s necessary is a little practice working with the lights. Then, later, thanks to PhotRobot editing software, post-processing becomes both routine and hassle-free. ## 9 - 360 spins, videos, 3D models, and product configurators If you want to enhance the shopping experience even further, consider creating 360-degree spin imagery and product videos. Any interactive viewing features, such as rotation and zoom, help consumers better familiarize themselves with products. Product spins and videos allow shoppers to view products from all sides and zoom into distinguishing features without losing definition. Take it to the next level with photogrammetry [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) and [product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce). These can allow consumers to customize products on the fly, or even view your catalog in [Augmented Reality](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce). ## 10 - Smooth, easy and productive photoshoots From product-in, to prep, shooting, editing, publishing and product-out, PhotoRobot streamlines all workflow processes. Whether it’s a photoshoot for a small webshop, or industrial-scale ecommerce operations, our product photography solutions aim to serve. Photograph anything from the size of a microchip, to eyewear, or even automobiles with our wide range of robots. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-jeans # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-jeans # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-04-08 --- # Fashion Photography of Denim Jeans on a Ghost Mannequin Navigate this fashion product photography tutorial for instructions on how to photograph jeans on a ghost mannequin with PhotoRobot. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## How to Photograph Denim Jeans on a Ghost Mannequin This tutorial shows how to photograph a pair of jeans on a [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/photograph-clothing-on-a-ghost-mannequin). With removable pieces, these special mannequins allow you to photograph clothes as if an invisible person is wearing them. Some also call this a 3D “hollow man” or [“invisible mannequin” effect](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin). Watch the [demo of fashion photography on mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography) within PhotoRobot workflows. Ghost mannequin photography is highly effective at presenting the style, cut, and fit of different types of jeans. It also looks much better online than traditional flat lay photography, which often leaves clothing looking flat and lifeless. To create the ghost mannequin effect with PhotoRobot, we use [the_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), a mannequin, and PhotoRobot_Controls for editing and automation. This setup, with its system for quick mannequin exchange, enables us to photograph a long line of apparel in a single session. *Why not see the photoshoot for yourself? Continue reading for a complete guide on the process. We share how to photograph jeans on a ghost mannequin, including what cameras, lighting, and equipment to use.* ## Necessary Equipment and PhotoRobot Editing Software The star of our setup for ghost mannequin photography with PhotoRobot is the Cube. This robot can quickly transform into a rotating mannequin, and it includes a system for quick mannequin exchange. The design aims to streamline workflow, no matter the volume. Install the Cube either to operate from the bottom of the workstation, or suspend the device above it. We can also fix the mannequin legs onto the Cube right-side-up or upside-down, depending on how we need to photograph the jeans. Meanwhile, our [photo editing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) drastically reduces post production times and time-to-web. Create and automate style guides, and discover Chromakey for automatic pole removal, compositing photos, and creating the ghost mannequin effect. ## Additional Photography Equipment Also for this photoshoot, you need the following photography equipment in the studio. - **Camera -** Both DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) cameras are supported by our systems, with high-end models always recommended for professional results. - **Studio lighting -** For lighting, we combine strobe lighting and LED panels to achieve the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - **Ghost mannequin legs -** For jeans, we only need the legs of the mannequin. If you want, you can also use multiple mannequins, each of which can be quickly exchanged on and off of the_Cube. This way we can photograph and style mannequins simultaneously for higher volume photoshoots. - **A pair of denim jeans -** Today, we’re photographing a staple fashion product, classic denim jeans. For other styles and types of trousers, the process will be the same. - **Styling accessories and tools -** We also have pins and clips, double-sided tape, and tissue paper to style the jeans onto the mannequin. ## How to Style Jeans on a Ghost Mannequin ### 1 - Put the jeans onto the mannequin legs First, with the_Cube set up, we’ll be working only with the legs of our mannequin. Dress the mannequin by pulling the jeans up over the waistline, ensuring the inner-lining is visible.This way the inside of the waistband shows in photos. Here, we also need to style the waistband, legs, and crotch to neatly fit our mannequin. Fasten up the zipper or buttons, and shift the fabric until it looks straight and symmetrical. ### 2 - Use tissue paper and styling clips to style the jeans Now, to start filling out the jeans as if an invisible model is wearing them, use styling clips and tissue paper. At first, we want the jeans to have a nice “rounded” look from the front view. Use clips on the backside of the jeans to give them a tight fit on the mannequin. Tissue paper is then useful for filling out flat areas and hiding creases. Simply pad the inside of the jeans in areas where you need to fill out. Later, after photographing the front of the jeans, you’ll do the same but you need to style the mannequin in reverse position. ### 3 - Tape any parts of the denim you need to stay in place Next, for areas of the jeans that don’t perfectly fit the mannequin, double-sided tape is the solution. Use the tape to fasten the waistline to the mannequin, ensuring there is no visible space between. Also, check there are no awkward bends down the front of the legs. If there are, again use tape to create a more round and even look. Tape the legs to the mannequin in areas that show off the cut of the jeans - straight, slim, boot-fit, etc. ### 4 - Showcase features and the hems of the jeans Moving on, the next step involves showcasing the details that make your jeans appealing and unique. Shoppers of your online fashion store want to visualize themselves wearing the jeans. They also need to be able to trust the quality of the fabric. To help them better visualize the product, turn attention to emphasizing the style of the jeans. If they’re flare out jeans, use lighting over creases and the flare to add more effect. You might even consider flipping up the hems of the jeans, giving them a more “in” and casual style. To do this, again use tape to stick the flipped-up hems to the legs, making sure both hems are even for the photoshoot. ### 5 - Take photos of the frontside of the jeans Now, we’re ready to photograph jeans with a ghost mannequin effect, starting first with the frontside of the apparel. This final step takes no time, and the process then becomes routine for the backside of the jeans. - **Take photos of given angles** (here using predefined positions). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole** of the torso using manual or automated Chromakey retouch. - **Set the lighting** to the product for consistent exposure, shadows, and contrast. - **Control the process** to capture images and deliver ready-made images to the client or to publish directly online. ### 6 - Repeat the process to photograph the backside Finally, visitors of your webshop will want to also see the back of the jeans. Capturing the ghost mannequin effect here will be the same as on the front, but on the opposite side. Use clips on the front rather than back, and again stuff areas with tissue paper and use tape to style the mannequin. Style neat and symmetrically as before, and use PhotoRobot_Controls to complete the process. ## Our ghost mannequin effect denim jeans ### For the latest product photography tutorials and resources Don’t miss out and sign up for our Product Photography Newsletter below. Also follow us on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/user/FotorobotVideo) for the latest tutorials, blogs, and videos showcasing our photo studio solutions. Whether it’s how to photograph jeans on a ghost mannequin or photographing other apparel and products, PhotoRobot handles everything. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-photograph-models # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-04-28 --- # How to Photograph Models on a Catwalk: Directing and Poses Improve your model photography on the Virtual Catwalk with these essential tips on directing and posing models in the studio. - Categories: Live Models & Video ## 9 Essential Tips on Directing Models and Model Poses Knowing how to photograph models on a runway is one thing; taking model photos on the [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk) is another. The Virtual Catwalk transforms any small space available into a rotating platform with a moving treadmill for model photography. It’s much like a treadmill that also spins 360-degrees. Both the belt and the platform rotate at the same time. Meanwhile, there’s adjustable speed for models to easily enter or exit the runway, and to walk safely while on it. See the [Video Guide to PhotoRobot's Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/virtual-catwalk-rotating-platform) for on-model fashion photography. During photoshoots, cameras remain off to the side around the platform, capturing what’s known as a “flying camera effect”. This effect works across the board: applying well to still images, [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), or [filming product videos of live models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models). Whether it’s [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), or video for an [online fashion show](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/catwalk-for-apparel-photography-and-online-fashion-shows), the Catwalk makes photoshoots easy. The real challenge is in working with the models: building relationships, directing poses, and taking the best photos. *And this photography tutorial will share how. Read on for 9 tips on how to pose & photograph models on the Catwalk, from prep to execution.* ## 1 - Prepare well in advance of the model photoshoot Working with models on a photoshoot calls for a lot of preparation in advance. Not only are we working with live subjects, we have numerous extra-photographic conditions to consider. From the lighting setup for photographing models, to camera settings and exposition, this is only the beginning. We must consider unsuspected surprises, and all moving parts in the studio: [product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography), support, and the interpersonal and technical aspects. It’s as the pros always say: preparation is key. This is even more true when planning how to photograph models. It’s necessary to have clear goals, timelines, and strong communication to prevent any misunderstandings (and limit wasted time). Thus, when preparing for a shoot, ask yourself the following questions. - **What is the product, and what kind of photos do we need to capture?** (Is the aim to create still images, [360 packshots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), and / or product videos? Are we photographing for the web, print, or both?) - **Which angles will be most vital for marketing and PR purposes?** (Usually, professional studios will have this information from a brand style guide. Style guides often dictate not only the types of pictures we need, but also angles, backgrounds, retouching and more.) - **What unsuspecting surprises might be waiting for us?** (Will we need any additional scene props, or perhaps a back-up model in case one falls ill?) The answer to these questions will help when building a detailed roadmap of the photo session. Form a detailed plan covering all goals, mapping out processes step-by-step, while taking into account any possible surprises along the way. ## 2 - Have a session support team on hand An experienced, creative support team can provide invaluable assistance to a photographer realizing their vision. Support teams can arrange assistance for models (hairdressing, make-up, etc), and help with technical aspects of scene prep. Not only that, there is always communication to coordinate. Session support can take the load off: working between managers and assistants, or scene and product stylists. They are the studio liaison, taking on everything from setting the scene, to prepping products and attending to models. Meanwhile, the rest of the team can focus on their individual responsibilities. The stronger the coordination, the more efficient the photo session will be. Support can even take on the responsibility of monitoring physical details of the scene, or prepping products for each session. Although, with smaller projects, these responsibilities might be on the photographer. With higher workload, the more value the support team adds to the studio. ## 3 - Use photo examples of model poses you want Next, always have references on-hand for how to pose your model. Show them a few example poses to help them familiarize themselves with both the photoshoot and the [style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide). The more you can show rather than tell, the more likely you are to achieve the specific look you want. If you don’t already have references, just find some examples online to convey the general idea. Then, consider collecting example poses for a manual or style guide, as this will help streamline photoshoots in the future. ## 4 - Direct the model’s attention with non-verbal cues Rather than verbal direction, create a system for non-verbal communication. Simple hand cues or pointing at objects and places in the studio works well. The model won’t have to first hear and then think about directions, allowing for better flow in the photoshoot. This approach is useful when using the Virtual Catwalk as both a rotating platform or when capturing individual angles. The technique can help better direct the model’s stare or elicit expression, and is much easier than vocal instruction. ## 5 - Plan for poses to model handbags or jewellery What about poses for handbags and jewellery? Here, there are a few considerations before you get into positioning the model. First, it’s always crucial to combine products like handbags and jewellery with the right apparel. Colors should bring the product to life on the model while also showcasing any fine details. For any photos of accessories that hang off the arm, you’ll want the item in full view. This tends to call for a close-up product photo, so the focus is usually on the lower-half of the model. Consider arm and hand position, and monitor these during the session. You’ll also want pictures from a 3/4 angle, as well as from the back and sides. ## 6 - Work with static vs dynamic model poses Pictures of models can either create the illusion of movement or appear still. Often, style guides will call for a combination of these two, also known as static vs dynamic model poses. The Virtual Catwalk provides a platform for both. Models can stand still on the platform while it rotates, they can stop at individual angles, or they can walk on the platform. Obviously, taking pictures of a model walking on the runway leads to more naturally dynamic pictures. If trying to create the illusion of movement, typically we do this by posing a model's hands and feet. Position the hands and feet outwards to make it look like the model is approaching the camera. To achieve more static poses, point the feet more towards shoulder width and lay hands by the model’s side. This will capture pictures of a model so that they appear standing still. ## 7 - Find the best model pose for the product Ultimately, how to pose your model for a product photoshoot will depend on the product. If it’s sportswear or sporting goods, such as hockey apparel and equipment, you’ll want dynamic lifestyle pictures. Compare that to for example sleepwear, or casual clothing. The poses in your product pictures need to showcase not only the product, but also the lifestyle associated with it. The more consumers can connect with the model, the more products you're likely to sell on that webstore. Thus, aim to capture the product as well as the lifestyle through your model’s poses. ## 8 - Make work easier on the photographer and the model Working with live models requires a lot of human interaction. While this might again fall on a creative support team, there are ways to better prepare for unforeseen challenges. Sometimes models and photographers are in a bad mood, or even worse, unable to work due to illness. Thankfully, there are a number of techniques to keep everything running smoothly – for the photographer and the model. - **Monitor even the smallest details.** (Notice an irregularity: a dangling label, a blemish or wrinkle? Tend to it as soon as you notice it. The fewer pictures you need to repeat, the better, and you also establish trust with your models.) - **Build a relationship and create the atmosphere.** (Teams should always build rapport with the model. Seemingly little things like a warm greeting, a nice introduction, or a cup of tea can go a long way.) - **Feed your photographer and the model!** (Never forget to have healthy snacks and refreshments in the studio, and breaks for quality meals. Everybody gets hungry, and skipping meals, especially during longer sessions, creates more difficulty for everyone.) ## 9 - Pay close attention to the fine details Finally, paying attention to fine details when photoshooting will save considerable time in post-production. Remember that an extra 2 minutes in the studio can often save 10 minutes in retouching. Look for any minor concerns like dust, wrinkles or creases that may call for major changes in editing. Keep in mind, the rules for post-processing human models are the same as for still life and packshot photography. In the end, the less editing on your fashion photos, the better. Heavily-edited photos more often than not increase product returns, so aim for visual content that accurately represents the product. Also, beware of overemphasizing color saturation or vibrance. Increasing these beyond normal levels is a common mistake in fashion product photography. Always review final pictures and consider a second opinion on what impression the colors make. ### Ready to Upgrade Your Photo Studio? Sign up for our Professional Product Photography Newsletter below, or follow us on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/user/FotorobotVideo). We’re regularly creating content for our clients and photographers alike, from small webshop operations to industrial-scale photography warehouses. From how to photograph models with PhotoRobot to across the industries, we’re here for you. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2021-11-29 --- # Fashion Photography: How to Select the Best Ghost Mannequin Learn how to select the best ghost mannequin for your brand's fashion eCommerce in this guide to invisible mannequin photography. - Categories: Still & Spin Imagery ## How to Select the Best Ghost Mannequin for Your Brand Selecting an effective [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) for your business’ photography can decrease cost-per-image, reduce turnaround time, and eliminate software post-processing routines. These modular mannequins have removable pieces in the neck, arm, chest, and leg areas to make mannequins invisible in photos. This technique is also known as “[invisible mannequin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect)”. It allows us to photograph clothing as if an invisible model is wearing it, creating a more true-to-life 3D effect. Ghost mannequins are available for all builds, sizes and shapes. There are invisible mannequins for men, women, and children, and sometimes we only need the mannequin’s top or bottom half. But how do you know how to select the best ghost mannequin for your brand’s product photography? In this fashion eCommerce tutorial, we will guide you through the options. We share how to select the best ghost mannequin, including what cameras, lighting, and PhotoRobot [automated product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) to use. ## Deciding on a complete body mannequin, a torso, or only legs The first step to selecting the best ghost mannequin for your brand revolves around your brand’s line of fashion. We need to choose a mannequin that best fits the clothing we want to photograph, both now and into the future. If we want to photograph a t-shirt with a ghost mannequin effect, for this we only need the torso. The same is true for photography of other shirts, blazers, [cardigans](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-cardigan), [coats](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-coats), and anything you wear on the upper body. For ghost mannequin photography of jeans or pants, we need only the mannequin legs. Photographing a fitted dress on a ghost mannequin might call for a full body mannequin. Carefully consider your entire range of fashion products. Decide on a mannequin that will meet your current and future needs, whether it’s the torso, legs, or full body. ## Finding invisible ghost mannequins for childrens’ fashion Now, what if your fashion line includes kidswear and childrenswear? In this case, finding the right size mannequin can be challenging. Unfortunately, it’s impossible to find a *one-size-fits-all* for childrens’ mannequins. Instead, it’s important to consider categories for the sizes of clothes we need to photograph. We can then select a mannequin (or mannequins) according to age and size ranges in our categories. But what if the perfect size mannequin doesn’t exist for your childrenswear? Thankfully, this is where styling techniques come into play. We can style clothing that doesn’t quite fit the childrens’ mannequin with clips, pins, and other accessories. With a little styling magic, we can photograph kidswear on a smaller invisible ghost mannequin. Simply clip or pin areas of fabric that require a tighter fit, and let your photographers handle everything else. - For additional tips, see our [guide to photography with ghost mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/photograph-clothing-on-a-ghost-mannequin). ## Choosing a mannequin to suit your brand style guide Next, with any fashion eCommerce, brands have a [style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide) to follow. A style guide in fashion product photography is a “blueprint” detailing how to style, photograph, and present products. It might be with flat lay photography, tabletop, or with a ghost mannequin effect. Following a style guide is crucial to establishing brand consistency. Moreover, it shows commitment to the shopper’s experience. This ultimately attracts more consumers to your webshop, triggers buyer’s confidence, and [boosts conversions overall](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content). Thus, keep consistency in visual content in mind when choosing the best invisible ghost mannequin for your products. If you intend to mostly [photograph suits and ties](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-suit-and-tie), consider getting a mannequin purpose-built for your line of fashion. It might be a rotating torso, legs, or a complete body - all of which you can quickly mount onto PhotoRobot’s_Cube. The main aim is to photograph your product range in a consistent fashion, while also taking into account workflow and productivity. ## Getting the right size mannequin for garments When trying to get the perfect size invisible ghost mannequin, consider your shoppers first. Who is your target consumer? What type of clothing are they looking to purchase? Is it clothes with a specific fit - slim, casual, form-fitting, sportswear? Determine which invisible ghost mannequin to buy according to the style and fit of your main line of fashion products. If consumers mostly buy plus size menswear for example, find a mannequin with a body form that best presents the apparel. Most importantly, you need the clothes to fit on the mannequin. Choose a size that allows clothing to flow naturally along the mannequin’s contours. It’s important the mannequin is not too large. The clothing needs to fit, and the mannequin should not stretch the material. Remember, if the mannequin is a little too small, there are styling techniques to help you give clothes a better fit. Simply use styling clips, pins, and other accessories, all of which you can easily hide during photography. ## Selecting a mannequin around your brand’s budget Another concern when selecting the best ghost mannequin for your brand often is the budget. Invisible ghost mannequins vary widely in price, from lower quality budget-friendly solutions to high-end premium collections. Higher-end invisible mannequin models are of better quality, come in a matte white finish, and have additional features. These include more modularity through extra removable V-shaped pieces for photographing a wider range of neck types. However, premium mannequins can be a significant investment. If you have a smaller product range, you might first consider purpose-made solutions for your fashion line. It’s when photographing many different styles and cuts you should consider getting a premium invisible mannequin. ## Using a ghost mannequin with PhotoRobot Finally, no ghost mannequin photography setup is complete without PhotoRobot’s_Cube and automation software. The_Cube quickly transforms into a rotating mannequin, and includes a system for quick mannequin exchange. The design streamlines workflow and boosts overall productivity. It gives us a way to photograph a long line of fashion and apparel in a single session. Meanwhile, [PhotoRobot editing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) provides automation, control, and drastic reduction in times for post production and time-to-web. We can save and automate style guides, and deploy Chromakey for automatic pole removal, compositing photos, and achieving the ghost mannequin effect. ### To discover more on PhotoRobot studio solutions PhotoRobot is compatible with DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) camera models, while a combination of strobe lighting and LED panels helps to achieve ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. Discover more on our product photography blog and tutorials, or follow us on YouTube for the latest videos. Whether it’s how to select the best ghost mannequin for your brand, or product photography techniques and trends, we share solutions *by photographers for photographers.* --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-05-04 --- # Professional Tips for Footwear Product Photography Get actionable insights into footwear product photography, post-production, and eCommerce product image best practices. - Categories: Still & Spin Imagery ## Product Image Best Practices: Footwear Product Photography Managing a successful [footwear photoshoot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear) requires more than simply choosing a pair of sneakers and taking pictures on set. If you want your product portfolio to impress, quality product photography is key to creating a positive online shopping experience. Basic footwear images, and blurry or poorly-lit pictures of shoes simply won’t convince shoppers to buy your product. Follow the workflow in PhotoRobot's [Footwear Product Photography Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/footwear-photography-workflow). However, with the right cameras & lenses, sharpness, appropriate lighting, [editing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) and some technique, products begin to sell themselves. The key is in preparation as well as some essential best practices to ensure smoother workflows and more effective photoshoots. After all, there’s no time to lose, which rings especially true in fashion eCommerce photography. In this tutorial, we’ll provide our 10 most essential tips on how to take pictures of shoes to sell online. Get insights on product image best practices for shooting footwear: from prep, to types of photography, editing photos, and publishing. ## 1 - Prep and setting the scene to take pictures of shoes Always, the first and most important stage to any [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) is in photoshoot preparation. In fact, sometimes, just a few seconds more spent on prep can amount to minutes saved in post-processing. Either the photographer or a product stylist should ensure both your shoes and the scene are in pristine condition. This will help your shoe photography progress with as little unnecessary work as possible. For every shoot, you’ll want various styling accessories and tools on-hand for cleaning shoes and photographing different types of shoes. Use things like brushes, polishing cloth and canned air (for final touches) to prep footwear for photos. Meanwhile, scissors, paper tissue, and chopsticks can be useful for styling, stuffing, or straightening shoes (like ballet flats). If following a [brand style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide), the stylist will know exactly how to prep the footwear. A style guide tells team members not only how to present products but also other elements. Among which angles to photograph, style guides can specify types of product photos, editing parameters, background removal, and best lighting. These instructions give stylists everything they need to manually prep for a photoshoot. ## 2 - How to light shoes correctly for eCommerce images For the best lighting to take pictures of shoes, use a soft overall [light setup](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography). PhotoRobot supports two types of lights: strobes from [FOMEI](https://www.fomei.com/en/products-studio-strobes-37499) and [Broncolor](https://broncolor.swiss/products), and any type of LED lights with DMX support. Be sure your product photography lighting allows light to shine on both sides of the shoe. Obviously, if you’re using a [motorized photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) like PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table or the_Cube, this is a lesser concern. Overall, a nice even light will make the shoe stand out more, and you want to keep the contact shadow at the sole of the shoe. If there are any distinguishing features like metal-work around lace holders or as a design, consider giving it some shine. You can use a reflector to direct light, and experiment with exposure to find the appropriate brightness levels. ## 3 - Which cameras, lenses and equipment to use It’s important that firstly the camera lens you choose is suitable to keep the shoes in sharp focus. To avoid distortion, check your angle from a good *f* stop to get all parts you want to showcase in focus. Also pay attention to how this affects depth of field. A decent lens for taking pictures of shoes is typically 15mm or above. However, be careful the lens isn’t changing the shape of the shoe. Some distort the look of the product, with wide angle lenses typically unsuitable for shoe photography. When choosing the best camera for product photos, PhotoRobot systems support mid to high-end DSLR and mirrorless Canon camera models. Set up the camera (or cameras) on the Robotic [Camera Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm), or PhotoRobot’s [Multi-Camera system](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) to use any shutter speed you like. Camera tripods like the Robotic Arm and Multi-Cam allow operators to reduce ISO, denoise imagery, and get cleaner product pictures. These devices can capture either single or multi-row [3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) when combined with motorized photography turntables. And while your *f* stop remains steady, shutter speed is no longer a concern. ## 4 - Capture the best angles to sell shoes online Put your best foot forward, they always say. When deciding on the best angles to photograph shoes for sale, consider the types of photoshoots you want to do. Are 360-degree product spins the end-goal? Do you need [product images for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon)? Will still images or a few white-background [packshots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) be enough to meet the requirements of your style guide? What are the most important angles you need to show? The type of footwear photoshoots will depend on firstly your style guide, and secondly on your photography equipment and software. Certainly, PhotoRobot excels with 360 and 3D photography, but in fact many of our clients capture still product images. And for stills, there are some general angles that work well when photographing shoes. These are: - **The single angle profile shot** - Take only one shot of a shoe from the side, showcasing its profile. - **The 3 / 4 side shot** - Take pictures of a pair of shoes together, turning the toes of the shoes slightly from the profile angle towards the camera. - **The backside 3 / 4 shot** - Capture photos with the backside of the shoe forward, creating a detailed shot. Be sure to style distinguishing features, and use zoom to showcase a polished look. - **The front angle shot** - Position shoes for pictures with the toes of the shoe pointing slightly forward, heels back. Focus on the toes of the shoe closest to the camera, taking pictures to emphasize the front shot. ## 5 - Choose the right file format to edit and publish photos Are your product photos going straight to the web, or do you retouch imagery first? If publishing immediately, JPG is the standard choice of file format. However, if you do need to retouch or edit product images further, use a RAW file. In [PhotoRobot Controls software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/february-software-release), you can then mark files for retouching to share with internal team members or external retouchers. Retouch Access Controls allow you to clearly communicate and share tasks, anytime and from anywhere. Specify single photos or entire folders of multiple items for retouching. Project managers can also add instructions in comments before sharing files by marking them as “Ready to retouch”. The responsible retoucher will then have access to the files, be able to download them and do their magic. As soon as they upload the files, the software automatically labels items as “Retouch done”. Project managers can now approve or reject changes, and publish final images in the desired format for publishing. ## 6 - Never take pictures of footwear laying flat Now, for some common mistakes to avoid when shooting footwear, let’s start first with how to position shoes for photography. Shoes simply are not a good candidate for flat lay photography. Laying flat, footwear looks limp and lifeless, providing very limited information to help customers with their purchase decision. Even when positioning shoes to show different angles, shoppers will struggle to imagine how the shoes will look when worn. Instead, what you want to do is create the illusion that the shoe is worn by an invisible person. Some ways to do this revolve around product styling: stuffing shoes with tissue paper, flattening shoes with chopsticks, etc. Taking it a step further, consider using different [types of product images](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs). Animations, [360 spins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model), [product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/do-you-need-a-visual-product-configurator) and videos can really add the third dimension to your footwear product portfolio. ## 7 - Do not clutter the frame of your pictures In many cases, a simple colored background would better serve shoe pictures than a lifestyle setting. Cluttered backgrounds are a major crime in product photography. If your background is too busy, shoppers won’t focus where you want them to: on the product. Instead, plan for a simple product photography background. Keep true to the brand style guide, and try to keep everything in-frame simple and clean. This will draw more attention to the footwear, and allow you to effectively showcase any distinguishing features. Even if props might serve personal branding purposes, best practice is usually photographing the shoes alone. Then, with PhotoRobot, it’s easy to automate [background removal](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images#toc-8), and change the background to fit your style guide. ## 8 - Avoid using harsh lighting setups If you want to save time both in photography production and post-production, lighting is key. This cannot be understated. Harsh, direct lighting can emphasize imperfections, warp colors, and create deep shadows. These issues lead to considerable time in post-production, when minutes would have sufficed with the right lighting. [PhotoRobot lighting](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace#toc-8) supports both FOMEI and Broncolor strobes, and LED lights with DMX support. Combine these to find the perfect lighting for each product and every shoot. Aim to create a soft, natural light for easy background removal and minimal editing later on. ## 9 - Don’t get creative with blurry or soft focus While a product photographer might consider artistic expression through soft focus, avoid the temptation. With pictures of shoes, the more your images are out of focus, the more guesswork shoppers will have to do. Be sure customers can see every detail of the shoes in the picture in sharp focus. Use a higher aperture like *f* /11 on a DSLR, and a camera arm like the Robotic Arm to minimize shake. ## 10 - Never provide only a few angles Be sure to showcase as many angles and views in your pictures of shoes as possible. Especially with footwear, consumers want to see every detail, side, and angle of the product. If they can’t get a complete idea of the footwear, your shoes simply won’t fly off the shelves. Include in the portfolio everything from the full set of shoes, to straight-on side shots, angled side shots, fronts and backs. You also want top views and the bottoms of the shoes. Then, add detailed shots to showcase distinguishing features, like: logos, texture, design, laces, etc. Finally, beware of ineffectively cropping product photos. Shoppers will notice if one image appears more close-up than another. They will also see any inconsistencies in zoom or distance from camera to the product, lighting, focus and more. Check that your product portfolio is consistent from image to image, and frame to frame. PhotoRobot editing software helps here, with [auto product centering](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography) as well as manual or auto crop control. ## Ensure photos never leave shoppers guessing Following these essential rules to footwear photography will ensure your product photos not only engage and inform, but equally impress. After all, the end-goal is in optimizing the shopping experience to the fullest. And at PhotoRobot, this is our area of expertise. To learn more about how to take pictures of shoes, or product photography in general, you know where to find us. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin # SECTION: tutorials > how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-03-24 --- # How to Use a Ghost Mannequin for Fashion eCommerce For this eCommerce fashion photography tutorial, we demonstrate how to use a ghost mannequin with the_Cube and PhotoRobot automation software. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## Invisible Ghost Mannequin Photography Techniques and Tips See how to equip your PhotoRobot production line with an [invisible ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) to accelerate the production of more realistic, 3D and full-bodied clothing photography. Doing so will save photographers a lot of time and effort, especially in post-processing. This is thanks to special removable pieces in the neck, arm, chest, and leg areas that make ghost mannequins modular. They also have matte finishes ideal for eliminating unwanted reflections and glares in photos. Photographers simply remove different parts according to the clothes they need to photograph, and the mannequin becomes invisible. This produces a more true-to-life effect, giving clothing a worn appearance. It also provides shoppers of your online fashion store a way to more effectively visualize how products would look on them. Witness the PhotoRobot Demo of [On-Mannequin Fashion Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). Often, achieving the ghost mannequin effect requires a fair amount of post processing or image compositing techniques. However, with the right modular mannequin and PhotoRobot, even amateur photographers can master the effect in no time. And with no Photoshop required. *In this product photography guide, we’ll demonstrate the process. Learn how to use a ghost mannequin for fashion eCommerce with* [*PhotoRobot’s_Cube*](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube)*and automation software, and what cameras, lighting, and equipment to use.* ## PhotoRobot's Cube and Automation Software At the heart of any invisible ghost mannequin photography setup, PhotoRobot deploys the_Cube. This photography robot can quickly transform into a rotating mannequin. It also supports a system for quick mannequin exchange to streamline studio workflow and boost productivity. Simultaneously [style clothing on one mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-photography-styling-tools) while photographing another, and then easily mount the next mannequin for photography. The_Cube is supported by PhotoRobot [editing & automation software](https://www.photorobot.com/software). The software provides complete control over cameras, lighting, mannequin rotation, style guides, and much more. Its functions also allow us to drastically reduce time necessary for post-production and time-to-web. Much of this is thanks to PhotoRobot’s Chromakey function, with its automatic background & pole removal. Chromakey also manages image compositing, eliminating the need for heavy editing to achieve the ghost mannequin effect for fashion eCommerce. ## Additional Photo Studio Equipment In addition to the_Cube, we also use the following equipment to photograph clothes on a ghost mannequin. - **Camera -** For consistent, professional results, PhotoRobot supports DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) cameras, with high-end models always recommended. - **Studio lighting -** PhotoRobot’s lighting combines strobe lighting and LED panels to achieve the ideal exposure, shadows, and contrast from all angles. - **A modular mannequin -** Here, which invisible mannequin you use will be determined by the clothing you need to photograph. Invisible mannequins come in all sizes, shapes, and builds, so choose one that best fits the style and cut of the apparel. *(See our tutorial* [*“How to Select a Ghost Mannequin”*](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin)*to learn more.)* - **Clothes to photograph -** Commonly, most brands and retailers use the ghost mannequin effect on staple fashion products. These include blazers, coats, dresses, shirts, suits and ties and similar widely-sold garments. - **Styling tools and accessories** - Finally, no setup is complete without tools and accessories such as clips and pins for styling. It’s also good to have tissue paper to give more body to clothing, and double-sided tape to hold garments to the mannequin. ## 1 - Select the best ghost mannequin for your apparel Now, when choosing the best ghost mannequin for your brand, first consider the product range you want to photograph. Invisible ghost mannequins come in a wide range of sizes, shapes, and builds, as well as low-end and high-end collections. Some are more budget-friendly, while premium invisible mannequins come with more features but at a higher cost. Most importantly, the mannequin you choose needs to be the right size and shape for the clothes you’re photographing. Apparel should naturally fit and flow around the contours of the mannequin’s body. That, or you should at least be able to use styling clips and pins to make it fit. The key here is that the mannequin isn’t too large, as this can stretch the fabric of the clothes. With the right mannequins, then it’s time to consider studio workflow. If [photographing coats on a ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-coats), the process will be similar to invisible [mannequin photography of a blazer](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-blazers). The same is true to [photograph a shirt on a ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-t-shirt-with-a-ghost-mannequin). Each of these products can require similar size mannequin torsos, preparation and styling. Plan around photographing similar size, shape, and types of apparel for smoother workflow. Also remember that with the_Cube and its system for quick mannequin exchange, you can accomplish more in a single session. Mannequins are easy to unmount and mount from the_Cube, meaning you can spend more time styling clothes. ## 2 - Determine which pieces to remove from photos Next, let’s say we are photographing a [zip-up hoodie](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-zip-up-hoodie) on a ghost mannequin. The pieces we’ll need to remove from the mannequin will differ from when [photographing tight-fitting dresses](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-tight-fit-dress). For a zip-up hoodie, we’ll need to remove a chest piece so that the inner lining of the garment is visible in photos. Eliminating this V-shaped piece allows us to take photos of the inside of the jacket. Decide how many pieces of the mannequin to remove according to how much you want to leave the jacket open in photos. The deeper the opening, the more pieces we remove. Also, consider removing the piece in the pelvic area of the mannequin. This is how to create a subtle flare at the bottom hem of clothing, and works for a wide range of garments. ## 3 - Clothe the invisible mannequin When dressing an invisible mannequin, start first with the sleeves if working with clothing for the upper body. If you’re [photographing a cardigan](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-cardigan), for example, lightly pull the sleeves over and down the mannequin arms. Straighten the cardigan down and over the body as well. Then, we need to pay careful attention to the shoulders of the garment. Both shoulders need to look perfectly aligned and neat, with no visible creases or bunching. Also be cautious not to pull the clothing too tightly onto the mannequin, as this can stretch the material of the apparel. As we dress the mannequin, the invisible model effect is beginning to take shape. We can now see the inner lining of the garment through the open neck and collar. This provides a clear view for capturing photos of our apparel inside and out. ## 4 - Style your clothes to emphasize details Now, it’s time to style the clothes to perfectly fit the shape and contours of the mannequin. This is when we often use styling clips and pins. Starting on the backside of the apparel, we identify areas to pull tighter to make the front take on a more fitted look. Often, it’s best to clip the fabric vertically down the center of the backside. This way we avoid creating unnatural creases that make the clothes look less appealing. When using pins to hold the fabric in place, pin the underside of the garment to hide pins from the cameras. If any areas of the clothing need more “life”, we can also pad the garment with tissue paper to create a more full-bodied appearance. Ensure the clothing looks natural, neat, and symmetrical on the mannequin, and the job is nearly complete. We can now move onto photographing our product. ## 5 - Photograph your clothes for the effect And finally, for the easy part - [setting the lights](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography) and photographing for the ghost mannequin effect. The key with the lighting and exposure is to emphasize areas of the fabric that give more shape to our “invisible model”. We can also use a light reflector to direct light into hard-to-reach areas like the armpits and the gap between the sleeves and torso. Then, capturing the images takes no time, and the process becomes routine on any mannequin. At the control station, use PhotoRobot_Controls to streamline the photoshoot. - **Take photos of given angles** (set for full-spin, predefined positions, or both). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole** of the torso (using manual or automated Chromakey retouch). - **Set the lighting** to the product for consistent exposure, shadows, and contrast. - **Control the process** to create, review, edit and deliver ready-made images to the client or to publish directly online. ## The final photos speak for themself In little time, our results come out professional, consistent, and ready for a quick review before publishing online. We think the results speak for themself. ## For additional tips on choosing and styling a mannequin Make sure to check out the rest of our eCommerce fashion photography tutorials on the ghost mannequin effect. We share not only tips and tricks, but also instructions on how to create the effect on a wide range of different fashion products. The [PhotoRobot YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/user/FotorobotVideo) channel also has loads of resources to help you develop your product photography techniques. ### PhotoRobot | Solutions by photographers, for photographers At PhotoRobot, we strive to help clients achieve consistency in product photography with smoother workflows and enhanced productivity. For more information, simply contact us today to book a demo for your business. From using a ghost mannequin for fashion eCommerce, to photographing products of all sizes, PhotoRobot produces solutions *by photographers, for photographers.* --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model # SECTION: tutorials > object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-04-14 --- # How to Make a Simple 3D Model with Apple Object Capture API See how to make a simple 3D model using Apple’s Object Capture API integrated with PhotoRobot’s Control & Automation software. - Categories: Still & Spin Imagery ## Apple’s Object Capture API and Photogrammetry 3D Models Immediately on launch, we were itching to test [Apple’s Object Capture API](https://developer.apple.com/augmented-reality/object-capture/) to make 3D models with PhotoRobot. And while it isn’t perfect yet, we must admit that Apple is certainly setting the standard here. Object Capture uses photogrammetry algorithms to transform a series of photos into high-quality 3D models optimized for Augmented Reality. It integrates with PhotoRobot [Control software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) and into professional 3D content workflows. To test Object Capture, the process was similar to photographing 360 spins. First, we photographed two sets of 36 photos. This provides views from above as well as from the bottom of the product. We then used Object Capture to scan our photos and produce a USDZ file. This file we could view in [AR Quick Look](https://developer.apple.com/documentation/arkit/previewing_a_model_with_ar_quick_look), or embed on our webpage using a 3D content viewer, such as [Emersya](https://emersya.com/en/home). But how well did Object Capture perform? Read on to see the results for yourself and get PhotoRobot’s review of the Object Capture API. See where Object Capture excels, versus what still needs improvement. We’ll share what we tested, the results, and how to make 3D models with Apple’s Object Capture and PhotoRobot. Watch the [PhotoRobot 3D Modeling Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo) to see how to transform photos in digitalized objects. ## 1 - Object Capture overview and integration Apple’s Object Capture can function with photos from an iPhone or an iPad. However, in today’s use case, we’re deploying Object Capture on professional product photos we captured with PhotoRobot. Object Capture is available on MacOS Monterey and above, meaning it integrates seamlessly with our automation-driven equipment for [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography). The software’s API, together with PhotoRobot software, uses photogrammetry scanning techniques to [create a 3D model from photos](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model). It takes information about the physical object via recording, measuring, and interpreting our imagery. We then use this information to replicate the object in the form of a 3D digital asset. These assets make for compelling product content for product pages, marketing campaigns, online marketplaces like Shopify, video games and more. They come in the form of anything from basic, interactive 3D models, to [product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce), and immersive [AR experiences](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing). ## 2 - How to photograph a product for Object Capture For our experiment, we chose to build 3D models of a single piece of black footwear from Salomon. We used PhotoRobot’s Case as our [motorized turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography), together with a 26 MP [Canon EOS RP](https://www.canon-europe.com/cameras/eos-rp/specifications/). In the end, we needed to use two product spins (each consisting of 36 photos) to generate the 3D model. One of our spins presented the footwear flat on its side to capture the shoe’s top and bottom. The other spin presented our shoe in standing position, showing 360-degrees from side-to-side. For this, we needed to photograph 36 frames around the shoe, which was placed normally on the turntable. Then, we needed to do the same with the shoe laid on its side, again capturing 36 frames in rotation. Now, rather than using standard studio lighting, we found a few adjustments were necessary. For one, Object Capture encounters issues when working with reflective surfaces. However, we did find a way to work around this and still achieve satisfactory results. ## 3 - Adjustments to the lighting setup Notice, in the resulting model, any areas with glares either bake the reflection into the capture, or confuse the algorithm altogether. For better results, we did find a few techniques we can employ in the studio. - Use a larger light shaper to soften the light. - Set two front lights to point at the object from 45°. - Use no background light. Often, this lighting setup produces results we can work with. However, with some products, the software will still encounter problems with reflections. When this happens, it’s possible to reduce glare using a polarization filter on the camera. If further reduction is necessary, you could potentially accomplish it via cross-polarization. This technique calls for two polarization filters: one on the camera, and one in front of the lighting. The only problem with this is that the resulting 3D model loses all information about the reflectivity of the surface. This means you will have to add this information back later via manual photo editing. ## 4 - Crop photos before generating the 3D model Now, before generating the 3D model, we found it was better to crop all of our photos first. This makes generating the model much quicker. So, in PhotoRobot_Controls, we simply cropped one photo and applied the operation across all 72 of our frames. The Auto Crop function takes **only 5 seconds** to process all photos and apply the editing operation. This is no matter how many photos are in the outline, and despite the fact that each image is a different size. After the operation processes, we can then go to **Generate 3D model** to configure settings before production**.** ## 5 - How to configure settings in Object Capture When working in Object Capture, there are 2 settings we can configure before generating a model from our photos. These can be found after pressing **Generate 3D model.** The first, **Sensitivity**, can be adjusted from normal to high. This corresponds to how sensitive the algorithm will respond. The second, **Object masking**, we can toggle on or off to automatically separate the object from the background. ## 6 - Generating and previewing the resulting model After choosing your configurations, all that remains is pressing **Start.** The photogrammetry algorithm then processes all of the source photos, and produces a USDZ file containing our model. The file is created in **approximately 3 minutes** with Object Capture and average hardware, whereas other methods can require hours of calculation and a professional touch. Instead, in little time after pressing Start, we receive the output as a MacOS file for preview. We can then work with this file on any editing software. When satisfied, we can use files on an e-shop like Shopify, or any other online marketplaces with support for 3D models. To use for your webpages or marketing campaigns, there are dedicated 3D content hosting platforms. These platforms effectively bring 3D product visualization and customization to life, for both product teams and consumers. ## 7 - How to publish 3D models via hosting platforms Finally, to publish 3D models on your own web space, you’ll need an embeddable 3D viewer. At PhotoRobot, our go-to and long-time partner for this is Emersya. The Emersya 3D, AR & VR experience is available for any webpage, device, or operating system. With native HTML5 and WebGL technology, the Emersya viewer requires no plug-ins. Responsive design ensures all product content is viewable and compatible on all devices shoppers might use. Meanwhile, hardware accelerated 3D using WebGL technology guarantees high-quality product content. All we had to do was upload our file into the viewer, an, thanks to Emersya, our 3D model is then embeddable on any page. It’s the same process as embedding a video using a simple iframe code. The advanced API provides control over the 3D model directly from our website, and works on any webpage or CMS e-commerce platform. ## View the embeddable 3D models for yourself ## PhotoRobot’s review of Apple’s Object Capture In the end, we encountered a few issues with Object Capture. The first, we mentioned already, relates to its ability to scan reflective surfaces. It is possible to work around this using cross-polarization, however manual editing is required after. Other issues we noticed are working with transparency, and when scanning smooth or uniform surfaces. Currently, Object Capture does not work well with transparency. Nor does it with objects lacking texture or distinctive features, making it more difficult to detect object shape. Nonetheless, we still think Apple performs remarkably well with Object Capture, and its API integrates seamlessly with PhotoRobot software. Generating a 3D model for some objects can provide a challenge, but, overall, Object Capture makes a welcome addition in the studio. Especially for some products, it generates impressive results without much need for later editing or retouching. Then, with 3D viewers like Emersya, it’s easy to embed 3D models on our own webpage or CMS e-commerce platforms. ### Curious to learn more about 3D modeling and hosting? Reach out to us today or sign up below for our Professional Product Photography Newsletter. Also find us on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/FotoRobot), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/user/FotorobotVideo) to stay up-to-date on everything happening in the industry and PhotoRobot. From how to make 3D models with PhotoRobot, to production of any 360 or 3D product content, we have you covered. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/photograph-clothing-on-a-ghost-mannequin # SECTION: tutorials > photograph-clothing-on-a-ghost-mannequin # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2022-01-19 --- # 9 Tips: How to Photograph Clothing on a Ghost Mannequin Enrich your fashion product photography for eCommerce with these 9 tips on how to photograph clothing on a ghost mannequin. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography ## How to Photograph Clothing on a Ghost Mannequin Photographing clothing on a [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) can make it appear there is an invisible model in product photos. This technique, the ghost mannequin effect (or “invisible mannequin effect”), revolves around special modular mannequins with removable pieces. Photographers style clothing on the mannequin, and then detach pieces to make the mannequin disappear for photography. Special post-processing is also necessary, although production times can be drastically reduced with the right mannequin and photography techniques. Creating the ghost mannequin effect with PhotoRobot involves styling clothes on the mannequin, and finally deploying [PhotoRobot’s Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) and automation software. All we need is a small studio workspace, a PhotoRobot compatible camera, our ghost mannequin, and clothes to photograph. Build your knowledge base with the video demo on [using mannequins with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). *Join us in this fashion product photography guide for e-commerce to discover the process. We share 9 tips on how to photograph clothing on a ghost mannequin, including what lighting, cameras, and editing tricks to use.* ## 1 - Select the best size mannequin for your clothes Invisible ghost mannequins exist for nearly all builds, sizes and shapes. There are invisible mannequins for men, women, and children, with options for full body mannequins, or only ghost mannequin torsos and legs. When choosing an invisible ghost mannequin, always base your decision on the clothes you need to photograph. The mannequin must be the correct size and shape to accurately present the cut and style of the apparel. If the mannequin is too large, you risk stretching the garment’s fabric, or, worse, the clothes not fitting at all. The clothing should fit and flow naturally on the contours of the mannequin, with no unsightly creases or bunching. - For more, see our guide on selecting the [best ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-select-the-best-ghost-mannequin). ## 2 - Style for fit, symmetry, and balance Next, ensure to style clothes on the mannequin to not only fit naturally but also to achieve symmetry and balance. Start with the shoulders if it’s clothing on a torso, like when taking photos of a [blazer](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-blazers) or with a [strap dress](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-spaghetti-dress). The shoulders must be neat, even, and as close to mirror images of each other as possible. Also, pay attention to any hem lines, pockets, or design features that might require additional adjustment. When photographing trousers or jeans, style the waistbands, legs, and crotch to fit evenly on the mannequin legs. Fasten up the zipper (or buttons), and shift the fabric until it’s straight and symmetrical. ## 3 - Use styling clips and pins to hold the fabric Another trick stylists deploy is using clips and pins to better fit clothes onto the mannequin. The secret here is to not pull the clothes too tight on either side, as this can stretch the material. Attach clips vertically and aligned down the center of the side opposite from the one we’re photographing. This way the apparel gets a more form-fitting appearance, while also preventing any unnatural creases. When photographing the other side of the apparel, simply follow the same process but on the reverse side. Ensure pins are also invisible by pinning them to the inside of the fabric. ## 4 - Keep other styling accessories nearby We can use other styling essentials to give clothes more shape, hold fabric in place, and control light and shadow. These include accessories like crêpe paper, double-sided tape, light reflectors, and more. Use crêpe paper to stuff areas like the inside of sleeves or hemlines on the legs of trousers. This rounds out flat places, while double-side tape is useful for holding cuffs, collars, and more in place. Then, using a smooth, white reflective surface, like a whiteboard, we can experiment with the lighting on the apparel. Direct light into hard-to-reach places like the underarms or the space between sleeves and legs to create shape, emphasize the fabric, and showcase details. ## 5 - Showcase the garment’s fine details Consumers browsing your online fashion want to visualize themselves wearing the products. They also want to get from photos an idea of the quality of the fabric, the cut, and the style. To help shoppers better visualize the product, style the clothes on the mannequin just as they would be worn. If there are appealing features such as the inner design, flip-up cuffs or collars, make sure to present them. Overall, it’s important to emphasize the style of your clothing - whether casual, tight or loose fitting, classic or contemporary. ## 6 - Photograph the back, the sides, and for zoom Also, it’s important to present clothing online from front-to-back, side-to-side, and up-close. If [photographing a zip-up hoodie](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-a-zip-up-hoodie), for example, include side views of the arms, as well as the backside with the hood. Then, be sure to show off any logos, branding, or design elements with up-close images. Consumers appreciate being able to zoom into a product’s fine details. It’s also important they are able to closely inspect the quality of the material. Use PhotoRobot_Controls to set the Cube and mannequin’s rotation, define positions to photograph, adjust lighting, and to control the process. Here, we have full camera automation, with flashes running in parallel, as well as valuable editing tools. ## 7 - Take full advantage of PhotoRobot Control Software Now, for the easy part - using [PhotoRobot_Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) to automate the photoshoot, the editing, and file delivery. The software also allows us to create and save style guides as “presets”, which we can then use when photographing similar types of clothing. The process takes minimal time, with little interruption to workflow, and then becomes routine on any mannequin. - **Take photos of given angles** (using manual or predefined positions, or both). - **Separate the background** on all images. - **Retouch the pole** of the torso using manual or automated Chromakey retouch. - **Set the lighting** to the product for consistent exposure, shadows, and contrast. - **Control the process** to capture images and deliver ready-made images to the client or to publish directly online. ## 8 - Style multiple mannequins for a single session Remember also to take full advantage of the_Cube and its system for quick mannequin exchange. This design element aims to streamline studio workflow and boost overall productivity. Simply style other mannequins off to the side while photographing the first product in line. After photographing one product, unmount the first mannequin, and then move onto the next mannequin that’s styled and ready for photography. ## 9 - Strive for consistency in fashion product content Finally, make sure to follow your brand’s style guide across the entire product showcase and anywhere your products appear online. [Consistency in product imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content) is crucial to building an image as a reputable seller, and ultimately in building buyer’s trust. Aim to create a structured, thematic approach to how you showcase product visuals. Whether it’s on a product page or selling through various vendors, consistency will make your brand appear more professional overall. Consider consistency across elements such as product lighting, styling, camera positioning, and [product photography techniques](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). It’s important these complement the general theme of your brand, your webshop, product pages, and product visuals. ## PhotoRobot | Solutions by photographers, for photographers At PhotoRobot, we strive to ensure clients achieve smoother workflows and optimal productivity with all of their product photography. *By photographers for photographers*, our solutions cater to clients across many industries, from eCommerce to brick-and-mortar retail. Contact us to learn more, whether photographing clothes on a ghost mannequin or capturing products of all sizes. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/productivity-fashion-product-photography # SECTION: tutorials > productivity-fashion-product-photography # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2021-12-09 --- # How to Improve Productivity in Fashion Product Photography See how to improve productivity in fashion product photography with smarter imaging practices and smoother workflows for higher output. - Categories: Ghost Mannequin Photography, Still & Spin Imagery ## 5 Obstacles to Overcome in Fashion Product Photography Shaped by the fast-moving fashion industry and the Covid-19 pandemic, today’s fashion eCommerce demands more than ever from brands. The [drastic shift](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/brick-and-mortar-to-online-retail) to shopping online means there’s even greater pressure to deliver a wider range of dynamic, digital visual assets. Not only that, assets must integrate seamlessly with existing brand and retailer platforms, and must be efficient and scalable. Meeting these challenges head-on requires brands to sharpen imaging practices, and ensure both [digital asset management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management) and workflows are optimal. A crucial part of this process involves having the right [photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) to support high-end cameras and also high-volume workflow. Enter PhotoRobot. Our systems integrate cameras, lighting, and machines with [software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) for complete studio automation and control. We aim to help brands stand out and increase conversions with consistent and exceptional imagery. All while streamlining product photography, digital asset management, and studio workflows. Read on to discover more about our solutions for yourself, and how to improve productivity in fashion product photography with PhotoRobot. ## 1 - Managing high-volume imagery In the fashion product photography of today, perhaps the greatest challenge is dealing with high volumes of imagery. Brands in fashion eCommerce need an enormous quantity of digital assets, from content for PR to marketing, vendor platforms, social media and more. A few photos of a product simply isn’t enough. Now the market demands more innovative imagery, from [packshots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) to [360 spins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), product videos and [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). We want consumers to have a virtual product in-hand, and for this we need more images than ever. We often also need to collate product information and attach it to files. This includes recording things like weight, packaging, instructions and other standard or required information. All of this we need to streamline into our studio workflow to ensure optimal productivity. Taking it a step further, many studios who produce [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) are switching from traditional flash lighting to constant LED lighting. This allows for photography of a model / product without having to move from a stills set to a video set to create 360° product content. PhotoRobot uses a combination of flash and LED lighting strictly for this purpose. With remote camera control integrated into our software, we can also quickly change from stills to video settings. We can change file types, control lighting, automate processes, and much more. ## 2 - Streamlining the imaging workflow Another challenge is creating an efficient imaging workflow. It’s important to identify and correct any bottlenecks, from indexing to editing, post processing and exporting visual content. Here, PhotoRobot systems integrate cameras, robots, editing software and digital asset management for the highest levels of productivity. Users adjust lighting and control cameras in the software, viewing changes in real-time with Live View. It’s even possible to automate the removal of mannequin poles and backgrounds to save valuable time in post production. Configure and save settings as “Presets” when photographing batches of similar products, and automatically repeat processes. Our [advanced editing tools](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools) are capable of editing hundreds of images per second thanks to Cloud processing with Nvidia Tesla K80 GPUs. Users can even work with all images in a given folder at once. Auto crop or center photos, denoise, control transparency and more in only a few clicks of the mouse. ## 3 - Achieving the best image quality PhotoRobot supports both DSLR and mirrorless Canon camera models to offer the widest range of top-class camera support possible. We always recommend high-end models such as the [Canon EOS R5](https://www.canon-europe.com/cameras/eos-r5/) or [Canon EOS R6](https://www.canon-europe.com/cameras/eos-r6/). The technology behind these cameras make them particularly effective with photographing live models thanks to their face recognition and Eye AF capabilities. The same is true for ISO performance, which when working with constant LED lighting becomes vital. A much lower luminance means we need to increase ISO. High-end camera models give us the ability to do this while still capturing clean, usable photos. [Canon’s EDSDK](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/canon-eos-digital-sdk) integrates seamlessly with PhotoRobot_Controls and all our product photography installations. Remotely control one or more cameras. Program operations for camera capture, image transfer, and Live View monitor. ## 4 - Capturing true-to-life colors It’s also absolutely essential your photos capture a true-to-life representation of a garment or product’s colors. Accuracy is key, as product returns, especially in fashion eCommerce, can be far too common and costly. Not only are there additional shipping costs. When a shopper receives a product different than advertised, they might abandon the brand altogether. Thankfully, high-end Canon models boast color science highly regarded in the industry for their accuracy. Take for example shooting a product on both a **Canon EOS 5D Mark IV** versus the **Canon EOS R5**. Although these models have different sensors, in post production we can rely on consistent outputs from both cameras. ## 5 - Building visual product content for scalability The sheer amount of imagery eCommerce studios need to produce today means that scalability should always be a consideration. With the challenge of producing still imagery alongside 360s, 3D content and product videos, it’s essential to consolidate processes. Afterall, the more visual assets you can get from a single photoshoot, the more productive the photo studio. This has always been a top priority for PhotoRobot as we develop multi-purpose solutions for scalable visual content production. In fashion product photography, take the Virtual Catwalk for example. This photography robot acts as an in-house runway for taking photos of live models. Its design paired with control and automation software for cameras, lighting and production provides multiple solutions for eCommerce fashion photography. With this setup, photographers can capture video while also photographing a model with additional cameras. More importantly, they can shoot videos, 360s, and stills all at one location, without having to change from a photography set to a video set. The Catwalk’s design, along with the right cameras and lighting, transform it to a multi-purpose set for all product content. ### Ultimately, efficiency is key in fashion product photography In the end, efficiency in any fashion eCommerce studio revolves around many moving parts. From cameras to photography equipment, editing software and digital asset management, integrating each element is essential for ROI and productivity. At PhotoRobot, we work directly with users to identify pain points in their studios and determine the best solutions. Our systems integrate with existing workflows to ensure maximum productivity and uncompromising quality. If you’d like to learn more, reach out to us today. You can also sign up for our newsletter below, and follow us on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/) and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot). We regularly share product photography resources across industries, from fashion eCommerce to 360 & 3D solutions for any online retail. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/remove-background-product-photos # SECTION: tutorials > remove-background-product-photos # TYPE: Tutorial # UPDATED: 2025-07-17 --- # Product Photo Background Removal and Adjustment PhotoRobot presents how to capture product photos with precise background removal, and deploy software tools for background adjustment and optimization. - Categories: Still & Spin Imagery ## Producing Photos with Precise Background Removal Achieving high-quality product photos on a pure white background often requires minimal to zero manual editing when using [PhotoRobot systems](https://www.photorobot.com/robots). This is thanks to wide ranging design features that support automated shadow-free object photography. These include optical glass turntable plates, and diffusion backgrounds in combination with professional studio strobes and lighting. Additionally, software integration connects robots, cameras, lights, and post-production to automatically produce professional photos with precise background removal. In cases calling for more advanced background optimization, there are then multiple PhotoRobot software tools to remove or adjust backgrounds. Read ahead to see how semi-automatic and manual background removal tools function within PhotoRobot Controls App. We share how to remove the product background by level, by flood, and by freemask. Find out about adjusting backgrounds in still images, 360s, and 3D spins, while also configuring presets to easily repeat workflows. ## Semi-Automatic or Manual Background Removal To optimize the background in product photos, PhotoRobot Controls App software features two [standard background removal operations](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images#toc-11). These tools function either semi-automatically or manually to remove the background behind objects by level, or by flood. They allow for setting a levels (brightness) threshold or flood points, choosing the effect level, and algorithmic automation of background removal. - **Removing background by level** uses software analysis of RGB color levels and brightness values to identify the background and foreground. Adjusting these levels in the software will make the background brighter until it is pure white. It is then possible to swap the background with a transparent one in the software, or change it to any color. - **Background removal by flood** functions on similar principles as by-level removal. The operation brightens the background until it is pure white around the item. However, instead of using levels, the tool uses a selected point to identify the background and then “floods” that area. It detects edges of the object, and applies flooding to fill in the available space. Then, it is possible to make the white background transparent, or any other color in the software. In comparison, by-level background removal is more advantageous when photographing bright or white items, and when using a white backdrop. That, and for making an off-white background disappear. Meanwhile, background removal by flood often yields better results when working with darker items. ## Background Removal By Level The by-level background removal tools in PhotoRobot Controls App allows for adjusting the brightness of the background by intensity values. Additionally, there is the ‘highlight white’ tool to detect white areas in images, helping to identify the correct threshold for removal. This is important for exposure correction, and to ensure the image background is consistent with the rest of the page. For example, the background removal by level operation uses a simple slider to adjust the brightness of the background. Other settings allow users to control and customize by-level background removal, and save settings as presets to easily recreate workflows. In the software, by-level background removal settings include the following. - **Level** - Adjust the brightness levels of the background around the object to make the background pure white. Note that if the intensity is too high, the product will also become brighter and start to disappear. Thus, it’s important to find the optimal brightness levels so that only the background becomes white, without bleeding into the item. - **Remove Outside** - Remove any clutter at the edges of the image (e.g. shaders). - **Fuzziness** - Make the threshold fuzzy, leading to smoother transitions between the object and the background. - **Denoise** - Eliminate noise by removing solitary pixels in the background or the object. - **Output Color** - Select the color of background in edited images. - **Input Color** - Set to white for capturing products on a white background. Select black if on a black background. ## Remove Background By Flood Background removal by flood is often more advantageous when working with very dark products. It allows users to make the background white by clicking a specific point in the background. The point helps the software to identify the available space to brighten by flooding. Meanwhile, the software also automatically detects edges of the object to more accurately detach it from the background. If the software does not completely remove some of the background, it is possible to add more flood points manually. There are then only two settings to adjust when removing the background by flood in PhotoRobot Controls. - **Adjust Edge Sensitivity** - Configure the sensitivity to detect object edges correctly. - **Adjust Erode** - Remove any extra pixels from the object edges. ## Advanced Brush and Eraser Tools Sometimes, dust or blemishes will remain after manual or semi-automatic background removal. This can provide challenges, especially when working with 360 product spins. Product spins often contain at least 24 still images, all of which may require slight editing. To this end, the brush and eraser tools in PhotoRobot Controls allow for quickly editing all images in a set. Users are able to edit a single photo, and then automatically apply those changes to all images. If the operation is difficult to automate, like removing dust from a scene, editing single images is easily possible. At the same time, users can return to any image without needing to edit every individual photo again. There are settings to adjust size and edge effect for more precision, and for saving work as presets for future editing. ## Define Scopes of Editing Operations For any editing operations in PhotoRobot Controls, it is possible to [define the scope of operations](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images#toc-1) which will apply. For example, editing operations may apply to an entire folder, to only specific swing angles, or to a single image. This is especially valuable for retouching multi-row images, no matter if it’s stills or 360 spins. Take for instance 3D multi-row photography. 3D spins require different light settings for each row of photos. The same is true when determining the editing settings. There must be different settings to account for the variation in lighting from one elevation to the next. To simplify this, PhotoRobot Controls captures specific swing angles (0°, 15°, 37°, etc) and assigns images to different folders within the item. It is then possible to define the scope of the editing operations to apply to specific folders. That, or across the entire item, as well as to other items that require the same operations. ## Image Masking & Adjustment Also useful to adjust where editing operations apply, there is the PhotoRobot Controls App [masking operation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images#toc-4). Masking helps for instance to instruct the algorithms where not to remove the background. The tool enables users to both limit or to adjust where specific operations apply. It might be to adjust brightness on a specific part of the image. That, or to customize the background, clarity, levels, curves, and other operations. In this way, it is possible to experiment with all the different editing operations, and to apply unique masks for each one. ## Freemask Background Removal Removing a background from product photos by freemask requires more configuration than by level or by flood. However, it can also be one of the most precise and quickest methods. To [remove background by freemask](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started#toc-28), it is first necessary to create an accurate and homogenous mask image. A mask image will reduce the amount of cut-out work after production, and requires only two photos: the main picture, and the mask image. The main picture will light only the product, whereas the mask image will light only the background. This back-lit shot will then serve as a pixel-exact mask within post production. PhotoRobot Controls software will estimate and suggest a color threshold dark enough to represent the object. Anything lighter than the threshold will register as the background, and provide the mask to apply to the main image. It is then possible to place the cut-out object onto any new color background. ## Removing Backgrounds from “Difficult” Objects For some items, freemask background removal is the only efficient way to remove the background from product photos. Take for instance objects with reflective surfaces, or items that have areas with empty space. A perfect example would be a shiny new steel frame wire basket. The material of the object not only reflects light, making automated background removal difficult. It also contains a complex network of empty space inside and around the basket. These properties make background removal by level or by flood nearly impossible. It would require too much manual retouching and editing, and likely still not meet quality expectations in any timely way. However, freemask background removal is able to accurately and quickly manage by first creating the mask of the object. This cut-out mask will help to remove both the glass plate of the turntable and the backdrop from photos. The software also identifies the object versus all empty space, while removing the background inside and behind the basket. Compositing the main picture and the mask image then produces the final photos, with exact background removal in moments. This produces photos without any negative effect on product edges, and with perfect sharpness. It is also possible to accomplish this on 24+ photos in a spinset, often in under one minute. The background can then be semi-transparent, or users can replace it with a color more suitable to their brand style. ## Background Removal with Transparent Items For semi and fully transparent items, software automation for freemask background removal is also available when necessary. PhotoRobot Controls software allows users to set half transparency with a threshold of three values: black, white, and gamma. Anything below the black point will register as the product, whereas anything above the white point registers as the background. Then, variables between the black and white points become transparent, although not completely. It is then possible to experiment with various thresholds to automate background removal on even the smallest structures, details, and transparencies. ## Minimal to Zero Manual Retouching Would your photo studio benefit from smoother workflows, and less manual background removal? PhotoRobot delivers professional, web-ready product photography with precise background removal often without any need for additional retouching. This includes no-retouch still product photography, 360 + 3D product photography, and 3D model photography – with no clipping necessary. Create presets, and repeat workflows while consistently and quickly producing professional product photos with a distraction-free background. Does your business need a faster, simpler, and more scalable solution? Request a personal demo to see how PhotoRobot can answer your business’ unique challenges today. We’ll take your product line and build a solution for you to test and judge by the production speeds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo # SECTION: videos > 3d-object-modeling-demo # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-06 --- # 3D Object Modeling in PhotoRobot Workflows > This presentation video demonstrates how to use PhotoRobot software-driven 360 photography turntables to create a 3D model from images. This instructional video demonstrates how to use PhotoRobot software-driven 360 photography turntables to create a 3D model from images. - Length: 04:59 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/jE4ZTnDX7No - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1057408371 - Categories: Production, Features ## Summary This production demo shows how PhotoRobot automates the capture of [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model) in tandem with [3D spins](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360). To demonstrate, we showcase our dual-axis motorized turntable, the [Frame](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame), while our automated photography software integrates functionality for Apple Object Capture. Object Capture enables the creation of a 3D model from photos using photogrammetry algorithms. The powerful algorithms use photos including top views, bottom views, and side views to generate the 3D object model. Follow the production workflow: from robotized capture of a multi-row 3D spin by presets, to rendering a 3D model in a single click. Capture and post-processing is automatic, with minimal human interaction. In turn, the 3D models in USDZ format are often web-ready for optimization on 3D hosting platforms like Emersya or Sketchfab. See how this is all possible with full automation in the video. In under 5 minutes, PhotoRobot produces a 3D spin, a 3D model, and countless web-ready still images on pure white backgrounds. All automatically post-processed, and ready to publish to websites and eCommerce export feeds. ## Chapters Our 3D Model Workstation - Robot Setup Frame Turntable & Robot Arm - Features Software Presets - Capture and Processing 3D Model Rendering and 3D Preview 3D & AR Object Visualization Platforms ## Transcript *00:00* Hello, and welcome to PhotoRobot. Today, we join our product photographer Erik as he fully automates the creation of an Apple-Powered, Photogrammetry 3d model. For this, he is using a specially designed 360 turntable, and Apple Object Capture integrated with PhotoRobot Controls to create a digital rendering of an item from photos. *00:20* Let’s start first at the Frame Turntable. The Frame is truly unique in that it has dual-axis 360-degree rotation, and an optical glass plate. These speed up the capture of all angles and multiple elevations around an item - including from side-to-side, top to bottom, and even from below the glass turntable. This makes it possible to capture full spherical product spins, without ever having to reposition the product. *00:46* To achieve this, the device has a built-in robotic arm, which positions the camera and the diffusion background at opposite ends of the turntable. The camera can then move along a vertical trajectory, from a negative 60 degree to a positive 90 degree elevation, and moves in sync with the diffusion background. *01:04* For example, if the camera is at negative 60 degrees, the background is at positive 60, so they are always opposite each other. In this way, it’s both easier and quicker to capture quality photos on a pure white background. *01:18* Now, thanks to Erik’s convenient presets, he only needs a single click at the workstation computer to begin the capture process. Watch the presets tell the equipment and cameras which angles and elevations to capture. *01:29* The first row of elevation, Erik captures at negative 60 degrees, photographing the bottom views of the item from below the glass. Then, before the second rotation of the turntable, PhotoRobot automatically adjusts the height of the camera to capture the next row, this time from above the glass at 15 degrees. *01:48* If the item were larger or more difficult to photograph, Erik could capture additional rows in between, but for this product he only needs to capture one more row. PhotoRobot captures this final row from 60 degrees - producing the entire set of images to create a 3D spin, including bottom views, side views, and top views. *02:07* Notice that afterwards, we have folders in our software containing all of our product images. These took under 2 minutes to produce. At the same time, the software automatically post-processes photos according to Erik’s presets. *02:20* Afterwards, Erik can use these photos to generate the digital product model directly in PhotoRobot Controls Software. To do this, Object Capture enables us to scan the photos and digitize the item at a single click of “Create 3D model”. *02:34* There are then only two settings to configure: Sensitivity or Object Masking. Sensitivity relates to how sensitive the algorithm responds, while Object masking automatically separates the background from the object. It's possible to use default settings, or to adjust both accordingly. *02:52* Pressing "Start" then begins rendering the digital model in USDZ file format. It does take a little time to render the file. For comparison, our Apple Mac Studio completed the operation in under 3 minutes, while our Mac Mini did the same in approximately 3 and a half. When complete, we can preview the USDZ file using Finder, or using basic image preview programs on Mac. And truly, it looks like Object Capture performed remarkably well. *03:18* We can rotate our digital model from side-to-side, flip it from top-to-bottom, and zoom into individual parts of the item. Now, if we want to publish this model online, we can take advantage of 3D and AR product visualization platforms like Emersya, or SketchFab. *03:33* Emersya for example is a long-time partner of PhotoRobot, and their platform enables businesses to configure, optimize, and publish digital models online. It even allows businesses to transform USDZ files into complete, digital product configurators that support on-the-fly customization options, hot spots, annotations, and more. *03:54* These are great when selling highly customizable products, such as fashion items or lines of footwear available in a wide range of colors, materials, and designs. Alternatively, you might also import the USDZ file to a platform like Blender to view the output in iOS or on Windows, and export items in various file formats like STL. This way, you are never locked into one technology, just as PhotoRobot ensures you are not limited to one type of product content. *04:22* From this photoshoot alone, and in under 5 minutes, we have multiple web-ready assets in addition to our digital model file. Then, with all of our processed and original photos now stored in the Cloud, we can even adjust the settings of these assets anytime, and from another computer if we want. That’s the magic of PhotoRobot technology. Curious to find out what PhotoRobot can do for your business? Check out the links in the description of this video to request a custom demo, or to simply find more PhotoRobot product photography resources. Thank you for watching. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/c-class-turntables-demo # SECTION: videos > c-class-turntables-demo # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-02-18 --- # Discover PhotoRobot C-Class 360 Turntables in Action This video demo showcases PhotoRobot C-Type motorized turntables for automated 2D + 360 + 3D product photography and 360 product video production. - Length: 07:28 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/ghmKmQ1HfK0 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1057018272 - Categories: Robots ## Summary Discover the C-Class family of motorized turntables by PhotoRobot: the C850 and C1300 models. This robot demonstration showcases how these machines build on the fundamental principles of [flagship PhotoRobot systems](https://www.photorobot.com/robots), while introducing significant improvements in design and functionality. Both the C850 and C1300 feature a robust steel frame for greater stability and performance in comparison to the lighter aluminum frame of the [Case 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850). The C-Type turntables integrate seamlessly into photography workflows, and can optionally connect to a [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) for automated positioning and capturing images at various angles. Watch the entire production workflow, from scanning items into the system, to robotized capture, and automatic post-processing and publishing. You’ll see how we remotely control lighting, camera settings, and editing operations to ensure high-quality output with user-friendly controls. Additionally, this video demo showcases the adaptability of PhotoRobot systems to meet unique customer needs. We share the training procedure as well as information on service and support to promise smooth onboarding of PhotoRobot technology. ## Chapters C-Class Turntables Overview C-Class Machine Setup Robotic Arm Photography Automation Cloud Post-Processing and 3D Modeling Configurable Modules for Any Unique Business ## Transcript *00:00* Meet the C-Class motorized turntables: the C850, and C1300. These PhotoRobot machines build on the basic principles of the Case 850 and Frame robots. The C850 and C1300 have the same size body, while the only difference is that the C1300 accommodates different size turntable plates. *00:20* C-Type models also have a strong steel frame, weighing over 100 kilograms, which is slightly heavier than the Case 850 with its approximately 70 kilo aluminum design. Due to this, the devices are a little less portable than the Case, but they no longer require a support bridge under the turntable, making them more open in design. And it’s easier to light objects from more angles. *00:43* Also, the C-Class remains easy to move around the studio on built-in castors, or to transport from one location to the next in a small moving van. Let’s look closer at the C850 setup, which today also combines with the Robotic Arm. *00:57* The C850 has an 850 millimeter glass plate that supports the photography of small to medium size objects. Along the steel frame of the machine, there is a built-in diffusion backdrop, making it easier to capture photos on a pure white background. There is also a nylon web under the glass to hold black flags under the table if necessary, and to help photographers achieve perfect lighting conditions in no time at all. *01:22* Meanwhile, a docking station perfectly aligns the turntable with the Robotic Arm V8, which has a view range from zero to 90 degrees, and can automatically move the mounted camera into various positions using convenient presets. *01:37* There is also support along the C-Class frame for many accessories which can be shared across multiple machines in the studio, including: a top portal to install a photography tent, studio lights, a top camera, flags, or an optional Cube robot. *01:51* The Cube for example can suspend objects that will not stand on their own in air, and synchronize object rotation with other devices to significantly speed up photography of items like backpacks, handbags, jewelry, light fittings, and more. *02:06* All devices from the robots to the cameras, studio lights, and other equipment are then controllable remotely from the workstation computer, and driven by PhotoRobot Controls Software. PhotoRobot Controls supports every stage of production: workflow, post-processing, and digital asset management. And most often, this begins by uploading a shot list via CSV import. CSV files contain not only the list of product names to photograph, but also unique tracking codes, barcodes, and object dimensions. Upload is automated with the software’s fully documented API connectivity. Properties help to sort items into groups by their photographic requirements, and to easily share any style guides or special instructions for photographing different items. *02:52* But perhaps the most notable properties here are the software’s convenient presets for both the capture and editing operations. Presets enable us to run an entire capture sequence according to an object’s dimensions, and via a simple scan of a barcode. *03:07* Now, watch as scanning the barcode begins the sequence automatically. And notice: the turntable starts a smooth non-stop rotation, with the camera at a positive 15 degree angle to photograph the side views of the object. The presets tell the system which angles to photograph, and trigger cameras remotely in sync with the flash of the powerful strobes. This prevents motion blur, technically “freezing” the object in place, while the camera is able to capture 24, 36, or more photos in a single rotation of the turntable. *03:39* At the same time, presets are running in the cloud in the background, automatically performing various editing operations. There are operations to crop, center, optimize background, and more. While these occur, the machine runs the capture process uninterrupted, and with zero human input. *03:57* Notice as after the first rotation of the turntable, our presets instruct the robotic arm to adjust the height of the camera to positive 45 degrees, while keeping focus on the midpoint of the object. Then, PhotoRobot captures 24 images, again in a single non-stop rotation of the turntable, before making one final automatic adjustment of the robotic arm. The robotic arm moves the camera into its 3rd position, this time to capture one final top view at positive 90 degrees. *04:29* In this case, the capture process takes around 50 seconds, while the software is simultaneously producing the 3D spin. And look, within moments, the spin is web-ready, and we also have a separate folder with individual still images that are immediately publishable online. *04:45* It’s also possible to recapture individual angles, in case there were any misfires, in a simple click of the mouse. We could also take additional photos like detailed shots to upload into our stills folder, or, at this point, use the software to generate a digital product model from photos. *05:01* Digital product models can be created in various ways: using a Robotic Arm, a multi-camera rig, a tripod, or a special camera mount. However, for the photogrammetry algorithms to be more accurate, it is sometimes necessary to reposition the object for additional photos, or to capture an additional elevation. In the end though, and usually in under a few minutes, the software can render a digital model from photos in USDZ file format. You can see more of this process in a previous video, also linked in the description of this demo. *05:34* Now, keep in mind that PhotoRobot modules are highly configurable to meet any business or industry-specific requirements, from the hardware to the software. For example, clients often ask about using LED-based light systems, or opting for a tripod rather than the Robotic Arm. And with PhotoRobot, either is possible, with LED support via DMX Control, or, for example, integration tools to use with a Level Box to support tripod photography. *05:58* Whatever the configuration, training usually takes no longer than 2 weeks after delivery. It helps businesses to adopt the right procedures to be highly productive in image production, and to fully integrate the software with internal IT systems. That includes how to create presets, program sequences, and fully automate data exchange without any human input. The specific capture and editing requirements are also taken into consideration, from types of items, to export and delivery options, automated file naming, GS1 specifications, API integrations and more. *06:31* Then, as PhotoRobot is the manufacturer, it’s easy to accurately quote delivery and costs for every order. There is quicker manufacture and delivery times of new machines, including requesting individual components, spare, or replacement parts. Additionally, PhotoRobot is extremely easy to service, and in most cases, on-site service is rarely necessary. Technicians can often manage everything remotely, while the table and all hardware components are easily replaceable. Customers also receive direct access to development for much shorter innovation cycles around project and OEM requirements. *07:06* Would you like to test a PhotoRobot module? Whether it’s one of the C-Class family of turntables with a robot arm, or the highly portable aluminum-frame Case 850, PhotoRobot will help guide you through building a setup. Find links in the description of this video to book a demo, and to more product photography resources. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/case-850-portable-360-turntable # SECTION: videos > case-850-portable-360-turntable # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-28 --- # PhotoRobot Case 850: The Highly Portable 360 Turntable Watch a demo of the highly portable PhotoRobot Case 850 featuring a 360 turntable that fits into a protective flight case. - Length: 05:42 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/w9tVOOOBICc - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069209297 - Categories: Robots ## Summary See the unique features and production capabilities of PhotoRobot’s highly portable [Case 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) robotic workstation. The video showcases the Case 850 as one of our most compact robots, featuring a 360 turntable that fits in a protective flight case. We demonstrate transport of the device and all its accessories in the protective case, with straight-forward setup in 15 minutes. Watch how the Case 850 even fits in personal vehicles, and suits nearly any size studio, warehouse, or production hall. The demo includes technical details, components, and features of the Case 850 for photographing small to medium size items. Find out about the turntable glass plate, its rotational dynamics, the built-in diffusion background, control unit, and other accessories. In the end, there is also a Case 850 production demo, and a comparison between the Case 850, the Case 1300, and the Centerless Table. Judge the advantages for yourself: from the portable yet highly effective design for automated 2D + 360 + 3D photography. ## Chapters Intro: PhotoRobot’s Case 850 Portable Workstation PhotoRobot Case 850 - Design & Use Shipping & Portability of the Case 850 Flight Case and Accessory Storage Workstation Setup in 15 Minutes Glass Turntable Plate Dimensions & Load Capacity White Diffusion Cloth Background Greater Stability & Dynamic Properties of Motors Rotational Dynamics of the Turntable Automated Photography Sequence Machine Frame & Control Unit Difference of Case 850 and Case 1300 Comparison of Case 850 and Centerless Table Outro: Advantages of the Case 850 ## Transcript *00:04* Different companies mean different things when they claim that their hardware is portable. Sometimes, it's just too small to do any meaningful work. PhotoRobot Case_850 is our idea of a portable product photography workspace. It's small enough to load into a personal car, while still large enough to photograph medium-sized objects. Let's have a look. *00:23* PhotoRobot Case_850 is a foldable workstation designed from the ground up to photograph objects up to the size of a backpack. Let's see how it looks from the point you receive yours to the moment you are taking shadow-free 360s or still images of products such as shoes, handbags and other small to medium-sized items. *00:43* When shipped to you, it comes in this cardboard box on a custom pallet. Complete with the packaging, it weighs 85 kg, while the machine itself weighs around 73 kg. So while you will be able to load it into a larger personal car, it is recommended not to do this alone, unless you are a bodybuilder. *01:01* When you unbox it, you get this durable flight case which was carefully designed to hold all the important accessories, keeping it safe while you travel from one place to another to your own-location product photoshoots. It is equipped with these wheels, making the manipulation on flat surfaces much easier. *01:17* Notice how, when stored away, several parts of the Case_850 are stored in the lid of the flight case – the glass plate, the rods that hold the background, and other small accessories. One of the key advantages of this foldable workspace is that it can be set up and ready to go in about 15 minutes. Let us do just that. *01:37* As we are setting up the machine, you can see that it is still relatively compact. Even with a complete lighting setup and a camera tripod, a floor space of around 3×4m is enough to get you through your own-location photography. The Case_850 is now set up and ready to go. Now, we can shoot stills and 360s with one or two vertical angles. If you need the 90° top view, we have different machines for that, which we will discuss in another video. *02:04* One of the most important parts is this turntable made of optical glass with a diameter of 850 mm. This makes it possible to photograph objects weighing up to 20 kg and as wide as 50 cm, while the maximum height is around 70 cm. All of this without visible shadows. By the way, if you do want shadows in your images, it is no problem to add a second non-transparent layer on the glass plate. *02:30* Another important part is this white background made of diffusion cloth, a similar material to the front part of a photographic softbox. It is held in position using these removable rods. So if your set-up requires more space around it, you can use the machine without it. *02:44* Let's take a closer look at some important details. Despite being compact, this workspace is still powerful. The rotation of the glass plate is driven by two motors mounted opposite each other for greater stability and dynamic properties. These run at 12V and 5A. This makes it possible to complete an entire 360 turn in 2,1 seconds. Or if you need a very slow rotation, it can slow down to a crawl, completing the turn in as many as 4,5 min. *03:12* As is standard with PhotoRobot hardware, these rubber rings on the spindles are user replaceable, and the pressure is adjustable. During the photography process, the position of the turntable is checked 1000 times per second with a precision of 1 degree. This is made possible thanks to this encoder wheel, and this optical sensor with an auto-calibration function. *03:34* The machine is held together by this aluminum space frame with high rigidity, which is important to minimize vibrations while photographing. Let us have a quick look at the bottom section, which includes all the important electronics, including the control unit, which is the heart of the whole setup. This cross laser points up at the centre of the turntable, making precise positioning of the photographed item a breeze. *03:56* Although we always recommend using a LAN cable to connect to the network, the Case_850 can even generate its own Wi-Fi hotspot using an optional Wi-Fi dongle when on the go. This can be useful, for example, when photographing freshly cooked meals in a restaurant, where you may not have good access to a LAN network. *04:15* Here, you will find the built-in support legs which increase the stability of the machine. You can adjust these using the allen key conveniently stored here in this magnetic compartment. You can mount sockets to these points if you need to add accessories such as reflection boards, or you can even add a custom portal above the machine from which you can suspend accessories such as a photographic tent. *04:36* Some of you may ask, what is the difference between the Case_850 and its bigger brother, the Case_1300? Obviously, it's mainly the size. Plus, this one can be expanded with our Robotic_Arm. It was designed for the photography of even larger products, while it can still be transported from one place to another. However, for this one, you are going to need a van. *04:58* Finally, let us compare the Case_850 with our industrial grade Centerless_Table 850. No, we would not call this one portable. It is designed for fixed installations and maximum productivity. Not only does it include a top structure that holds lights as well as other accessories, but it also runs at 48 volts and 10 amps, which translates into an 8 times greater power and a load capacity of up to 40 kg. *05:23* However, if you plan to travel for your product photography, or you are looking for a budget-friendly entry into the PhotoRobot world, the Case_850 is the obvious choice. Get in touch with us, and soon a box like this one can appear at your doorstep. Thanks for watching. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-cube-robot-arm # SECTION: videos > centerless-table-cube-robot-arm # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-28 --- # PhotoRobot Hardware: Centerless Table, Cube, Robot Arm > Watch a video demo of unique hardware anatomy features of PhotoRobot systems: the Centerless Table, Cube, and Robot Arm. Watch a video demo of unique hardware anatomy features of PhotoRobot systems: the Centerless Table, Cube, and Robot Arm. - Length: 07:33 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/FK-7_e3zxl8 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069208569 - Categories: Robots ## Summary In this video, we demonstrate the hardware anatomy of PhotoRobot systems: the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table), the [Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), and [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). Explore the technical specifications of these three photography robots, including their unique hardware components and production capabilities. The video showcases both the individual robots, and each in combination – representing one of the most popular PhotoRobot configurations. See how the Centerless Table syncs with the Robotic Arm, and how the Cube supports staging various items for photography. We explore the many components within each system that enhance overall usability, including the advanced control units allowing for easy upgrades. Watch for yourself: from the robust and reliable hardware, to the imaging solutions that seamlessly integrate with clients’ unique needs. ## Chapters Intro: PhotoRobot Hardware Systems PhotoRobot Centerless Table: Components Centerless Table: Machine Frame PhotoRobot’s Cube Robot: Object Staging Centerless Table: Top Portal Lighting Setup Background Lighting PhotoRobot Robot Arm: Use & Specifications Robot Arm Swing Spindle with Cross Laser Optional Robot Arm Docking Station Robot Arm Height Adjustment PhotoRobot Control Units Learn More Today ## Transcript *00:06* We take pride in how easy it is to use a PhotoRobot. However, in this video, let's geek out on some technical details and study the anatomy of our hardware, by which I mean those heavy-duty black machines behind me that do their magic in all of our videos. By the way, they don't necessarily have to come in black. For example, Louis Vuitton ordered them in white, while Karl Zeiss got them in a multi-color finish. *00:28* Let's begin with our Centerless_Table. This is an industrial-grade machine with a glass turntable. The centrepiece of this model is an 850 mm optical glass turntable with an 8 mm thickness, weighing 11.5 kilograms. It can carry up to 40 kilograms of payload and it has no green color tint at the edges as seen on many entry-level solutions. *00:50* Let's take a closer look at what is under the hood. Here, we have a precisely machined aluminum wheel with a user-replaceable rubber O-ring, which is reading the plate position a thousand times per second. Sometimes, competing products do this, too, but at a lower frequency. *01:05* In addition, there is the optical sensor calibrating the wheel readouts every single turn of the glass plate, constantly recalculating the gear ratio. This allows us to reach unbelievable production speeds. All the pulleys that guide the glass plate are fully adjustable and each has a user-replaceable X-shape silicone ring for perfect geometry. *01:24* As Murphy's Law dictates, whenever you need to replace a tire, it is a thousand miles away, but you need it now. In this machine, there is a zip-bag under the cover, allowing you to replace the rings immediately, and you can use the information on the cover sheet to order new ones for later use. *01:40* The same applies to this large driveshaft wheel. By the way, the robust motor behind it, running at 48V and 10A, is controlled with precise S-curves for acceleration and deceleration. This gives you the power of a racing car at your fingertips. This machine can capture an entire spin set in under 4 seconds, but most cameras or lights can't. So, in real life, it takes about 20 seconds to shoot a 36 image spin. *02:10* All of this sits in a massive machine frame. This is important, as we know that the rigidity of the frame prevents product shake in final images, especially when captured at the high speeds we use here. But there are a lot of other clever functions. *02:23* Here in the front, there is an industrial rack to install not only our 19 inch PhotoRobot control units, but also laser controllers, power distributors, network components, surge protectors and so on. All of this to keep it all perfectly organized. Of course, there are clever paths for hidden wiring inside the entire workspace. *02:44* Next, we have the_Cube. This one is version 5, but we currently have three different models to perfectly cover various configurations of the workspace according to the client's specifications. This machine can work standalone, but here it is used to precisely synchronize the rotation of suspended items: like a handbag, for example, which sits nicely on the glass surface, but its straps need to be suspended on nylon strings. *03:07* There's an extensive set of accessories that fit on the snowflake-shaped output shaft wheel to give you extreme latitude of adjustment. If you photograph electric devices that need to be powered up when photographing, there is a model with an electric socket on the rotating part for powering the item while spinning. *03:25* To make sure the cube is perfectly aligned as well as other accessories, there is a top portal - in this instance with an extended length of the columns, which, unlike the standard length, makes it possible to go all the way to a 90° top view with a camera mounted on a robotic_arm. This portal can carry various holders, such as: pins, sockets, uni-clamps or heavy-duty clamps. This is useful as it is always good to have a third hand to hold some spotlights, reflection boards, or other photography jigs to create the right magic. *03:55* After all, great photography is all about perfect light. And the system of PhotoRobot hedgehog holders integrated into the portal allows you to have the lights, whether they are LEDs or strobes, always at the right place – in front of the object, or evenly illuminating the background for its easy automated software removal. *04:15* As the camera comes to the higher angles, we need to make sure that the background is illuminated perfectly at the furthest point from the perspective of the background lights. That is why we have this reflection surface integrated into the diffusion background set, which distributes the light evenly. We have direct background lighting installed here. This may lead to a stronger effect called light wrap, where there is too much light coming around the object into the camera lens, which leads to the edges becoming softer. *04:43* But we have various ways how to illuminate the background to avoid this. We will demonstrate that in another video. However, the light goes hand in hand with the dark. That is why this machine can hold black flags in the background. These can be placed on both sides of the photographed item or also here, under the glass plate on this nylon string web, which is adjustable in many directions to perfectly meet the required setup. *05:07* Last but not least, this workspace includes a Robotic_Arm - its 8th generation. This takes care of the correct angle of your camera when capturing stills or spins, single-row or multi-row. This brushed stainless steel seat allows you to mount the camera sensor exactly to the optical center of the machine's rotation, as every camera body has different dimensions. It is at the end of a stiff and light telescopic arm, which is delivered in two different lengths. This makes it possible to use it with robotic tables as well as larger platforms. *05:40* The entire arm is mounted on a pivot with position micro-adjustment to set the camera to the perfect position, while a set of counterweights allows you to balance the arm for maximum dynamics of movement. By the way, the swing spindle is hollow to accommodate a cross laser for perfect positioning. It is useful not only when placing the object to the center of rotation, but also for aligning the arm and the table together. If doing this frequently, for example, when using the Robotic Arm partly with a table and partly with a platform, you may want to order an optional docking station where you just push the arm in and lock it in place. *06:19* To unlock it and get it on the retractable wheels, you just move this bar from here to here. This is used not only as a robotic swing to capture the exact angle, but also as the height adjustment of the entire machine to the center of the object's height. This functionality is provided automatically by our control software if the information about the height is available. This can be either in the photography list or by automatic measurement provided by CUBISCAN devices. *06:48* Our 19-inch control units are the heart of the entire system. These controllers are mounted in an industrial rack chassis, which gives you a great freedom of upgrades to the latest generation, or easy maintenance and servicing if required. However, we will take a closer look at these magic computers coming out of our production line in another video. *07:09* But at the end of the day, all of these technical details are not that important. The only thing to remember is that this is PhotoRobot - a precise, robust, reliable and extremely powerful solution that combines hardware, software and firmware all coming from a single source - us. And all of this can be tailored to your specific needs to automate your imagery production. Thanks for watching! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-design-dynamics # SECTION: videos > centerless-table-design-dynamics # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-03 --- # PhotoRobot Centerless Table - Design Features & Dynamics Discover the design and dynamics of PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table for automated 2D + 360 + 3D photography in this production video demo. - Length: 02:29 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/a5DNna-AT2g - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069211807 - Categories: Robots ## Summary Watch a demonstration of the design features & dynamics of PhotoRobot’s [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) for automated 2D + 360 + 3D product photography. This short video demo showcases the power of PhotoRobot Controls software with the unique lighting system of the Centerless Table. Find out about integration of the studio lights, and the built-in diffusion background for perfectly lighting objects. We share information on the 1300 mm glass plate of the Centerless Table, and the motors for maximum movement dynamics. This includes automated calibration and the immediate independent reading of positional data to ensure high accuracy in robotic photography sequences. At the end, the demo covers other convenient features of the Centerless Table, like its hedgehog holders for workspace safety. These enable greater freedom of movement around the studio, with no tripods or cables to stumble over. Meanwhile, software control & automation enables manual or automatic adjustment of lights, camera, and post-processing settings. Judge the Centerless Table for yourself: from its design for small to medium size objects, to its levels of productivity. ## Chapters Intro: Centerless Table Overview The Unique Lighting System Glass Turntable Plate Dynamics 360 Turntable Electric Motors Diffusion Background + Bottom Reflective Section Shading Panels for Optimal Lighting Software Control of All Devices Outro: Perfect Pictures Automatically Produced ## Transcript *00:23* Hello, and welcome to PhotoRobot. The Centerless_Table represents the highest level in the evolution of automated product photography, mainly because of the control software and the unique lighting system. *00:36* The photographed object is lit up from the back and the bottom, thanks to two important features: the glass plate and the diffusion background. *00:45* For maximum precision of movement, the glass plate, which is 1300 mm wide and carries up to 40 kg is made with tempered, highly transparent optical glass and is fit within the wheel system. *00:59* The two electric motors give it maximum precision and movement dynamics. With this sensor, the calibration is automated, and thanks to the immediate independent reading of the absolute position, a correction is made at each stop. *01:13* The diffusion background with the bottom reflective section is integrated for optimal translucence. Even at the top view camera positions. *01:22* The shading panels at the sides and bottom of the construction prevent any reflections on the object. *01:29* Furthermore, we use these hedgehog holders to save space and make the studio a safe and comfortable workplace. No more tripods to stumble over. *01:40* Finally, the lights, along with the lasers, camera and plate movement are software controlled. Adjust the intensity and take a test photo. Check and adjust that again, all from the comfort of your computer. *01:54* The construction as a whole is made for industrial use. The unique lighting system and many details such as these mounting spots for additional accessories, make working with the Centerless_Table highly productive. The Centerless_Table is made to automatically produce a perfect picture. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-eyewear-photography-demo # SECTION: videos > centerless-table-eyewear-photography-demo # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-05 --- # Centerless Table Eyewear Photography Production Demo > Watch a PhotoRobot video demo of the automated production workflow when photographing eyewear and sunglasses for eCommerce. Watch a PhotoRobot video demo of the automated production workflow when photographing eyewear and sunglasses for eCommerce. - Length: 04:05 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/P2IpZThkAKk - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1057407983 - Categories: Robots, Production ## Summary Watch a video demo of the PhotoRobot workflow on the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) to photograph eyewear and sunglasses for eCommerce. This demo presents how we eliminate unwanted reflections when capturing 360 spins of glasses using our automation-driven 360 turntables. See how PhotoRobot quickly produces the hero image, marketing angles, and the 360 spin – with minimal post-processing necessary. This is thanks to special photography techniques to minimize glares during capture, and also the automation of hardware & software that drives production. Our photographer Erik demonstrates, highlighting the use of PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table. The machine is optimal for shadow-free product photography of small to medium size items. Careful automation then enables the capture of predefined, “safer” angles to avoid reflections. This means we can achieve professional quality images in under one minute. In turn, the result is a collection of web-ready still images and a 360 spin that requires minimal to zero retouching. See for yourself just how PhotoRobot’s approach transforms complicated photography procedures into single-click processes. ## Chapters Intro & Eyewear Photography PhotoRobot Centerless Table Approach Automated Photography & Post Production Accelerating 360 Spin Production View the Outputs Yourself ## Transcript *00:00* Hello, and welcome to another product photography demonstration in the PhotoRobot showroom. In today's video, I join our real-life photographer Erik, as we take on another challenge in product photography: How to photograph eyewear on a motorized 360 turntable. *01:15* Sure, glasses and sunglasses look great from a low angle, but what about when some angles of rotation create unwanted reflections? Not only does this pose challenges when capturing image galleries, it makes capturing 360 spins near impossible, right? Well, here, we have to disagree. *00:33* At PhotoRobot, we’ve found a combination of hardware, software, and automation to streamline the creation of web-ready photos of glasses and sunglasses. Ready to see how? Join Erik and me in the studio to follow along with the production process, and get professional insights into eyewear product photography. *00:51* Typically, reflective or glass surfaces act as mirrors in the wrong light, so an item like this might call for extensive post production. So how do we quickly and easily capture these without the need for heavy photo editing later on? For this photoshoot, Erik has positioned the sunglasses on the glass plate of PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table. *01:10* The Centerless Table is PhotoRobot’s solution for shadow-free product photography of small to medium items. Its design aims to maximize production processes, even when shooting more difficult types of transparent or glossy products. *01:25* Now, before the photoshoot, we told our software which angles to capture, identifying “safer” shots that wouldn’t produce a reflection. These, Erik uses to create Presets that tell the software which angle to capture for each image. Erik also designated folders for each output: the hero image, a 6-image gallery, and a 360 spin. *01:44* We’ll start with the hero image and our gallery. At this point, with the product on the turntable, all Erik has to do is scan the “Start” barcode. The software communicates with our hardware & camera, automating the photography sequence to capture our designated angles. Then, in one single rotation of the turntable, PhotoRobot skips all angles that create strong reflections, capturing only the angles we specified. Meanwhile, our Presets fully automate post-production, meaning each photo is immediately available for online publishing. *02:13* But what about for the 360 spin? Here, we found a really simple trick that significantly improves production time. The only thing Erik has to do is increase the elevation of our robotic camera arm, and then photograph the product again. And for this 360 spin output, we have assigned another convenient Preset. The Preset instructs our robotic camera arm to adjust elevation automatically after capturing our still images, and before shooting the next rotation. This enables us to capture All of our outputs in only two rotations of the turntable. *02:46* Take a look for yourself: We have a hero shot, an image gallery and a 36-frame product spin that we photographed at a slightly higher elevation. All of this, we can usually achieve in under 1 minute, including automatic backup of original photos, post-processing and publishing online. We’re talking about no-retouch, highly productive product photography here. *03:07* Our product images are web-ready: automatically cropped & centered, with the background removed around the object. And this is all according to our Preset specifications. The software has even sharpened our image, and notice: there are absolutely no reflections or shadows in our product photos or in our 360 spin. *03:25* This means all of our outputs are now ready to publish, and it looks like Erik’s work here is done. At least for this first pair of sunglasses. He does have several more items on today’s shooting list, but he could easily photograph another 10, 20, or even 50 pairs of glasses before slowing down. In fact, we’ll let Erik get back to work in peace for now. *03:46* If you found this demonstration useful, you can find links to more product photography resources in the description of this video. We thank you for watching, and from the PhotoRobot team to your business, we wish you continued success in all of your creative and photographic endeavors! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/contact-photorobot # SECTION: videos > contact-photorobot # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-10-06 --- # How to Book a Custom PhotoRobot Demo - Contact Us Find out how to contact PhotoRobot to request a customizable demonstration around the products you intend to photograph. - Length: 01:54 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1038869051 - Categories: Onboarding ## Summary Discover how easy it is to [book a custom PhotoRobot demo](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) around your unique business and the items you intend to photograph. This video call-to-action will introduce you to the booking process, present the flexible pricing of PhotoRobot, and share the advantages of PhotoRobot-powered studio technology. If you’re ready to contact PhotoRobot, start your journey here! Our specialist technicians are on standby, ready and waiting to help you choose the best PhotoRobot configuration to meet and exceed your demands. ## Chapters Book a Custom Demo Easy to Proceed Flexible Pricing The PhotoRobot Advantage Contact PhotoRobot ## Transcript *00:00* Hello. Welcome to PhotoRobot. *00:03* If you are on this page, this is your opportunity to book a custom demo of PhotoRobot automated photography systems, and see how we can speed up, standardize, and simplify your business’ photography. *00:14* Every request is unique, so your solution will be tailored around your specific needs. *00:18* All you need to do is complete the contact form to start building your custom solution with a PhotoRobot expert. *00:25* The expert will draft a proposal accounting for your industry of photography, the types of objects to photograph, software integrations, and production benchmarks. *00:34* This includes any custom photographic or software applications your business requires. *00:40* We will then provide documentation with detailed system parameters, sample outputs, and a time study to judge in comparison to your current production speeds. *00:49* We know price is paramount to most businesses. *00:52* But, we don’t start by focusing on only the price. *00:55* We begin by first identifying the right configuration, then verifying the quality of outputs, and finally ensuring seamless integration of the technology within your ecosystem. *01:06* This way, you can be confident that you are purchasing exactly what you need in a system, at a fair price, and with the additional flexibility to easily expand your system in the future as needed. *01:17* With PhotoRobot, you get a future-proof, reliable solution to not only match your project, but also your budget. *01:24* PhotoRobot offers serially manufactured components, advanced workflow automation software, cloud tools, API integrations, and cutting-edge innovations that deliver noticeable savings right from the start. *01:38* Are you ready to build a solution to test and judge by the production speeds? *01:42* Contact us today. Our solution specialist is waiting to connect with you, whether online or in-person. *01:48* Please just complete the information on this page, and PhotoRobot will contact you shortly. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/cube-360-product-photography-bicycles # SECTION: videos > cube-360-product-photography-bicycles # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-04 --- # How to Capture 360 Spins of Bicycles with PhotoRobot’s Cube > PhotoRobot presents how to photograph 360 product spins of bicycles using the PhotoRobot Cube and workflow automation software. PhotoRobot presents how to photograph 360s of bicycles using the PhotoRobot Cube in this production workflow demonstration. - Length: 02:14 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/30VjRqPVkGk - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069173864 - Categories: Robots, Production ## Summary PhotoRobot presents how to configure the [Cube robot](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) to capture 360s of mountain bikes hanging upside-down on nylon strings. The video demonstrates the Cube workstation setup, suspending the bike in air, and sync of rotation with lights & camera capture. Find out how [PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/software) integrates all studio equipment with the Cube, post-processing, and publishing. We are also able to photograph the bike in non-stop rotation. This allows for dramatically faster photography sequences, and produces web-ready images with the 360 in under 2 minutes. The nylon strings are easy to remove in post-processing, while preset editing operations run automatically in the background in the Cloud. There is no interruption from photographing one item to the next in production workflows. See how for yourself. Our photographer demonstrates the PhotoRobot Cube setup, its workflow photographing bicycles, resulting outputs and production times. ## Chapters Intro: Product Spins of Bicycles PhotoRobot Cube Setup for Bikes The Cube in Suspension Mode Other Setups Suspending the Bike on Nylon Strings PhotoRobot Non-Stop Spin Mode Web-Ready Outputs in Under 2 Minutes ## Transcript *00:04* When photographing objects that don't stand on their own, such as this mountain bike, it is a good idea to hang them on nylon strings. PhotoRobot happens to have a setup exactly for this purpose. Let's go downstairs where we can show you. *00:17* Welcome to our dark studio. Right behind me, you can see a Heavy-Duty portal, with one of our smallest PhotoRobots: the Cube_V5. *00:24* When photographing a 360 of a bike, of course, we can use a stand, such as this one. *00:27* But when I want the bike to stand on its own, it is a much better idea to use nylon strings. Those are much easier to remove in post than any kind of visible support. *00:37* On top of that, we can make sure that the bike is perfectly vertical at all times. *00:40* In this setup, we have a 1,5 m long bar equipped with several pulleys and clamps, which make the operator's life much easier. *00:48* Of course, if you want to, you can hang the bike in a normal position, which means by the handlebars and the saddle. You can even combine that with a turntable mounted on the bottom, and that can be synchronized with a _Cube at the top. *00:59* But today, we are going to show you a different method. Now, we will hang the bike upside-down. *01:03* By doing it that way, the removal of the lines will be much easier. You just need to be careful when setting up the lights. And remember the reversed position. *01:12* The standard start-stop photography mode - that everybody else uses - is a complete nightmare. After you pause the rotation, the bike gets a wobble that lasts for ages, which makes this unusable. *01:24* You probably remember our fantastic non-stop spin mode, the one in which we do not pause the rotation to take the picture. But even then, it would get a wobble if we just started the rotation and photography right away. *01:36* Our software makes it possible to set a defined amount of time to let the object self stabilize. So the photoshoot itself starts when everything is perfectly smooth, and it takes just seconds. *01:47* And just like that, it's done. Even with a long, calm-down time, we have 36 images of each bike ready in much less than two minutes, including image processing and online publishing. *01:58* And that's it. You will find the link to the finished spin, in which the nylon strings have not been retouched, in the description of this video below. Get in touch with us, and let us discuss how we can speed up your production workflow. Thanks for watching! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/fast-shot-mode-feature-demo # SECTION: videos > fast-shot-mode-feature-demo # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-06 --- # How PhotoRobot Fast Shot Mode Accelerates Capture Watch a demonstration of PhotoRobot Fast Shot Mode producing 36 still images and a 360 spin 20 seconds after preparation. - Length: 03:30 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/L_g8o9RGhq0 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1057408770 - Categories: Features ## Summary In this PhotoRobot Feature demo, see how Fast Shot Mode produces 36 images and a [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin) in approximately 60 seconds. Actually, it takes only about 20 seconds after we prep the scene to capture all images, automatically post-process, and publish online. There is no need to stop the rotation of the object on the turntable, amounting to significant time savings in every photoshoot. This is thanks to software integration of powerful studio lights, robots, robotized capture, and post production. Fast Shot Mode enables precise synchronization of the powerful strobes with camera triggering to prevent motion blur of the object. This way, PhotoRobot is able to robotize capture, producing high-quality images in rapid succession. The approach differs from traditional “start-stop” motorized turntable photography, which involves stopping turntable rotation to capture items. In comparison, Fast Shot Mode can shave seconds off the production times of every one photo, 360 spin, and 3D model. Additionally, thanks to the high accuracy of PhotoRobot capture, there is minimal to zero need for manual retouching. Watch the demo to see for yourself just how quick production becomes in Fast Shot Mode. ## Chapters PhotoRobot Fast Shot Functionality 360 Turntable & Controls Software Setup Presets - Capture & Post-Processing Automation Start Fast Shot Image Capture by Barcode Up to 36 Images & 360 Spin in 20 Seconds ## Transcript *00:00* Hello, and Welcome to the PhotoRobot Showroom. Today, I join our product photographer Erik, and we'll watch as he shows off yet another feature that makes PhotoRobot truly unique: Fast Shot Mode. With Fast Shot in your toolbox, you can capture 24, 36, or more photos in just 20 seconds from the time you prep the scene. All without stopping the rotation of the turntable. *00:19* In fact, Erik is in the process of a photoshoot that will demonstrate the process right now. Erik is using a signature PhotoRobot 360 turntable, and he has already prepped the product as well as the scene. *00:30* Thanks to laser-guided object positioning, which turns off automatically when the photoshoot begins, Erik knows the item is in the absolute center of rotation on the turntable. Then, in PhotoRobot Control software, Fast Shot Mode is active, and we have a number of convenient PhotoRobot Presets for the photoshoot. *00:47* Presets tell our cameras and the equipment which angles to capture, and, among other operations, tell the software how to process our photos. These presets are assigned to different folders, while each folder represents a different output. See, there is a folder for still images, and one for a 36-frame product spin. Both will begin filling up with images as soon as Erik starts the photography sequence, which it looks like he’s doing now. *01:10* Erik starts the machine by a simple scan of a barcode, and the photoshoot begins automatically. It’s at this point that, with Fast Shot Mode, the turntable begins a smooth, non-stop rotation. This rotation will continue uninterrupted while PhotoRobot detects table position at 1,000 times per second. Then, at the same time, capture signals instruct our camera to trigger precisely in sync with the powerful strobes, preventing motion blur and, in a way, freezing the product in place for each individual shot. *01:38* This enables Erik to get all of his photos, usually up to 36 images in 20 seconds, without ever stopping the turntable. Of course, we do need high-quality studio lights for this. It's also crucial to have precise synchronization of the turntable with the camera and the flash of our strobes. Remember though, PhotoRobot monitors table position, and gives us a margin of error usually well under 1%. This way, in 20 seconds, we have captured all the photos for our spin, all images are immediately backed-up in the Cloud, and the post-processing operations from our presets are already being applied to our photos. *02:11* Thus, in roughly 60 seconds, our production will be complete, and we'll have web-ready photos for review, or for immediate publishing online. *02:19* But how do these production speeds compare to other manufacturers? Well, for one, most competing technologies capture first, download later, then retouch, and even later publish. They also capture in so-called “start-stop” mode. Because of weaker LED lights, they have to pause at each angle to capture the image with a correct exposure and no motion blur. When shooting this way, there’s a production time of approximately 2 minutes. And sure, compared to manual photography, this process works fine. *02:46* However, compare that to PhotoRobot’s Fast Shot, and there’s an easy 1 minute saved for every single product. We also have more outputs, and there is zero to minimal need for retouching. Now, say you’ve got 100, 500, or even 1,000 products to photograph. That’s upwards of 1,000 minutes you can shave off production time, amounting to over 16 hours saved across the entire project. *03:08* Starting to see the difference here? Really, the more products you need to photograph and get online, the more you get out of PhotoRobot. Why not learn more today? Check out the links in the description of this video for example outputs from today’s photoshoot, and a wealth of product photography resources. Thank you for watching, and we look forward to seeing you soon! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/flexible-studio-modules # SECTION: videos > flexible-studio-modules # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-04 --- # How Multiple PhotoRobot Modules Combine - the Flexi_Studio > Find out about how to configure and combine multiple PhotoRobot modules in this video demonstration of the “Flexi_Studio” approach. Find out how to configure and combine multiple PhotoRobot modules in this video demonstration of the “Flexi_Studio” approach. - Length: 04:31 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/OboRyECGmAM - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069169450 - Categories: Robots, Production ## Summary Find out how to combine and rearrange multiple robotic modules in this video demo of the **PhotoRobot “Flexi_Studio”**. The Flexi_Studio approach allows for the configuration of a workspace with multiple robots in many ways. Discover configurations of the **Case 1300** photography turntable, the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform), PhotoRobot’s [Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), and the [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). We demonstrate their use in combination within the studio for photographing various types of objects with different photographic properties. That includes robotic workstation setup with camera & tripod, and rearrangement of robots for photographing different objects. The video also demonstrates how the PhotoRobot Cube is useful for suspending objects in air, and [on-mannequin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography). There is information on the mannequins compatible with PhotoRobot, and integration of flat-lay photography tables for faster workflows. See how the possibilities are endless thanks to the modularity of our systems, offering high levels of flexibility and customization. That, in addition to the durability of hardware, and the functionality of software for speed, consistency, and photo standardization. ## Chapters Intro: Configurable Photography Systems Flexi_Studio: Rearranging PhotoRobots Case 1300 PhotoRobot Turntable PhotoRobot Turning Platform Camera & Tripod Setup Single-Row 360s, Multi-Row 360s, and Stills PhotoRobot Robotic Arm Expansion Turntable and Robotic Arm Setup PhotoRobot Cube for Object Suspension Photographing Clothes On Mannequins Cube and Turntable Installation Flat-Lay Photography Tables Outro: Book a Custom Demo ## Transcript *00:02* When somebody asks me what sets PhotoRobot apart, I often speak about the speed of production, the consistency of the outputs, or the durability of our hardware. But today, we will focus on another aspect. And that is modularity. *00:17* With our help, you can configure your own automated photo studio combining multiple PhotoRobot modules together in many unique ways. *00:26* Why is that important? Well, most solutions on the market come in the form of a nice compact ready-made box, with everything built right in. But, this was never an option for us, because we know all too well that there are no two customers with the same needs. *00:41* So, rather than making your decisions for you, we made sure to leave all the possibilities open. Not only is every customer different, but, even in one studio, each photoshoot can be different. That's why in this video we will talk about what we like to call the “flexible studio” (or Flexi_Studio, for short). *00:59* You can rearrange your PhotoRobot modules depending on what you need to photograph on a given day. Let me give you some examples. *01:07* At the core of most PhotoRobot setups, there are one or more turntable-based machines. We can divide them into two main groups: with transparent turntables for shadow removal, and non-transparent ones for shooting larger or heavier objects with shadows. *01:23* A good example of a PhotoRobot with a glass turntable is our Case 1300, which makes it possible to produce shadow-free still images, 360s, or videos. The photographed objects can be up to 1 meter wide, which means it can photograph larger items than most shadow-free systems on the market. *01:43* That said, many studios need something for bigger and, more importantly, heavier items. Our turning platform is a great choice for that. It comes in three different sizes. This one has a 180 centimeter fiberboard turntable, and it can carry up to 1500 kilograms. On top of that, this one is equipped with our stabilization cross, which also makes it easier to move the turntable around the room. *02:07* Both modules can be used on their own with a camera on a tripod. That way you can produce stills, videos, and single-row 360s. Single-row means that when viewing the product online, you can rotate the object left and right, but not up and down. *02:24* But, what if you want multi-row spins, where you can drag your mouse or finger up and down, viewing the product from higher angles as well? Or, perhaps you want to shoot a series of stills, each from a different angle? *02:36* Well, then you'll want to add another module, our Robotic Arm which can move the camera in two axes elevation and swing. *02:45* But, what if you have both a Turning Platform, and a Case? Do you need two Robotic Arms? Well, only when you plan to use two of them at the same time. Otherwise, you will get by with just one arm. *02:55* This is a docking set on the Case 1300, and this one is attached to the Turning Platform. Thanks to that, you can move the arm between the two workspaces. If, for example, you're planning to use just the platform on the given day, you simply click the arm into the docking station next to it, and off you go. *03:14* Let's not stop there. If you need to shoot products suspended on nylon strings, you'll want to get one of our Cubes mounted upside down on an HD portal. Sometimes, you'll want to leave the space beneath it clear, for example when shooting bikes. *03:29* Another time, you will be shooting clothes on a mannequin. To do that, you just take your Cube off the portal, place it on the floor, put a mannequin on top, and there we go. We just built a fashion workspace! *03:39* Other times, you will want to use the cube on the portal in tandem with your Case 1300. You simply slide the Case under the portal, and make sure the two laser crosses overlap. And, just like that, you can use the two modules together, rotating in a synchronized movement. You can do the same with our Turning Platform. *03:59* Finally, you can add one of our flat-lay tables, which is especially useful when you do a lot of stills with a camera at 90 degrees pointing straight down. *04:08* In this video, we have shown you how to build your own flexible studio using different PhotoRobot modules. You can use them together, or as separate workspaces. We are just scratching the surface here to prevent the video from getting too long. So, if you want to know more, book a call through our website, or contact us through the web form. Thanks for watching! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/footwear-photography-workflow # SECTION: videos > footwear-photography-workflow # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-28 --- # Photographing Footwear in the PhotoRobot Workflow Watch a footwear photography demo featuring style guide automation of still images using PhotoRobot’s Case 1300 with Robot Arm expansion. - Length: 05:29 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/WAYcvUSUKw4 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069209868 - Categories: Production, Robots ## Summary See how customers use PhotoRobot to fully [automate still image capture](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image) of footwear products adhering to a brand style guide. This video demonstrates the footwear photography workflow using the Case 1300 turntable with [Robotic Arm expansion](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). There is also a second table for flat-lay photography, which we show in simultaneous operation with the 360 turntable. Find out about the workstations and the control software, from prep to capture and post-processing – all in under 1 minute! We showcase the greater speeds, quality, and consistency of PhotoRobot automated photography in comparison to manual product photography approaches. ## Chapters Intro: How Companies Use PhotoRobot Footwear Photography Requirements Following a Style Guide Case 1300 Photography Turntable Overview Case 1300 with Robot Arm Expansion Using Two Workspaces Simultaneously Capturing Images the Style Guide Requires Sorting Products to Shelves & Barcodes Capture & Post-Processing Presets Scan Barcode to Start Turntable Scan to Start Second Workstation Outro: Manual vs Automated Photography ## Transcript *00:05* PhotoRobot systems are only useful for those who want to do 360° presentations of their products, right? Well, actually, in our opinion, nothing could be further from the truth. You might be surprised that about half of our customers don't even do 360's at all. *00:20* But why would you even want to have a turntable based automated studio if all you're ever going to do is a series of stills for each product? That's exactly what this video will be about. *00:30* Let's use shoes as an example. Perhaps you run an e-commerce business that specializes in footwear, or maybe you have a company that manufactures shoes. One way or another, you're going to need a set of images that shows off how good the shoes look, what kind of material they're made of, or what kind of sole they have. *00:46* Imagery is what sells the product. And today, this is truer than ever. However, it will do no good if each set of images looks different. Inconsistency will make you look unprofessional. In other words, you need a style guide, a set of instructions that describe how the images should look. *01:05* It is not humanly possible to do this manually, fast, and exactly the same each and every time. This is where PhotoRobot comes in. Perhaps the most important part of a style guide is information about the angles from which the items should be photographed. *01:19* Among other things, this is what you need to automate if you want to achieve consistency and high productivity. The two important angles that should be in every style guide are: the angle of rotation and something we call the angle of swing. *01:34* Let us imagine that the style guide requires eight angles, which include views from the front and the sides, as well as some high angles. Finally, you want to show the customer the sole of the shoe. In other words, the view directly from the bottom. *01:48* Of course, you could do this on a single workspace, and the PhotoRobot _FRAME would be the perfect candidate for this. But today, we will demonstrate the workflow on our _CASE 1300. It is based around a 1300 mm glass turntable that makes it possible to automatically remove not only the background but also the shadow beneath the shoe. *02:08* It can be expanded with our ROBOTIC_ARM v8, which takes care of the swing angle and can go all the way to 90 degrees. But how will you photograph the bottom of the shoe? Well, you have to take it off the turntable, flip it upside down, place it on a jig and then put it back on. Then, you have to wait for the camera to travel to 90° and take the image. All of this can slow down the work unnecessarily. *02:33* And for that reason, we believe that a separate workspace with a second camera mounted at the top is in order - as long as you have enough space for it. *02:42* As you can see, not every PhotoRobot has to be turntable-based. This is our flat-lay table, which doesn't rotate the product, but it still has the advantage of a backlit, transparent surface. In this setup, there is a second camera mounted at the top. This is what we are going to use for the top view images of the jig, which holds the shoe in an upside-down position. *03:02* While this is happening, the next shoe can be placed on the _CASE 1300, speeding up the workflow even more. *03:08* Our photographer Eric will now show you how fast you can get all the images that the style guide requires. First, he's going to import a list of the products to be photographed. This will typically include barcodes. And if you already have presets created for different kinds of footwear, you can begin assigning them to individual items. You can even sort your products on shelves and assign unique barcodes to each of them, along with a dedicated preset. *03:34* As you may remember from our other videos, such presets can control not only the angles but also camera settings, lighting, as well as post-processing and other parameters. Eric will now scan the barcode of the shoe and place the product on the turntable of the _CASE 1300. *03:51* Because we have already assigned a preset, it is enough to scan the start barcode and everything else happens automatically. *04:30* But how about the second workspace? Do you have to change any settings in the software? That sounds like too much work, so we made it possible to simply scan the barcode of a macro that will switch to the second workspace, and the required images are taken without the operator having to touch the computer or the camera. *04:52* And there we have it. The shoe took just slightly over one minute to photograph using two workspaces. In our opinion, it doesn't get much easier than this. *05:01* Imagine you would have to do all of them manually. It would take a long time and there will be inconsistencies. But maybe you don't have to imagine it because you are living it. You know how much hassle manual photography is. *05:13* Don't you want to take the speed, quality and consistency of your photography workflow to a whole new level? If so, what are you waiting for? Contact PhotoRobot right now. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/frame-robot-turntable-demo # SECTION: videos > frame-robot-turntable-demo # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-05 --- # Discover the Frame 360 Turntable with Built-in Robot Arm Watch a video demo of PhotoRobot Frame: the 3D product photography turntable with a built-in robot arm and diffusion background. - Length: 05:22 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/XWJfEzdrLlE - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1057407342 - Categories: Robots, Production, Features ## Summary This video demo presents the [PhotoRobot Frame](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame) 3D product photography turntable. The Frame is our signature 360 + 3D automated photography turntable with a built-in robot arm and diffusion background. See how the Frame enhances production of high-quality still images in tandem with 360 spins, multi-row 3D spins, and 3D object models. This demo also showcases the advanced design features of the Frame, from its optical glass plate to the robot arm that positions the camera and backdrop. The camera always remains perfectly opposite the backdrop, achieving photos on a pure white background from any and all angles. Additionally, automated photography processes run by presets, providing user-friendly controls with high levels of efficiency and consistency. At the same time, in just a few clicks of the mouse, it’s possible to create [3D models in USDZ format](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model) from the machine’s outputs. Find out more, from how the Frame simplifies business workflows, to its quicker capture and editing of product images. ## Chapters Frame Robot Overview & Features Robot Arm & Camera Setup + Automation Image Processing & 3D Models Frame Robot Hardware & Maintenance Technology Onboarding ## Transcript *00:00* Welcome to the product demo of PhotoRobot’s Frame: a 360 turntable and robotic arm in one machine. The Frame is specially designed to automate the production of not only shadow-free still images and 360 spins, but also multi-row 3D spins and digital product models. *00:16* This is in part thanks to the turntable's optical glass plate and built-in robotic arm, which enable the capture of all of these outputs in only a few clicks. Notice. The camera is positioned at a negative 60 degree angle, below the optical glass plate. *00:31* At the same time, the robotic arm mounts the built-in backdrop perfectly opposite the camera and behind the product. This enables the capture of quality photos on a pure white background from below or above the glass. *00:43* A single click activates the capture sequence thanks to PhotoRobot presets. Among other operations, presets act as instructions to automate which angles to capture, turntable rotation, lighting, and more. *00:56* In this case, the turntable is in continuous non-stop rotation, which is possible thanks to the use of powerful strobes that prevent motion blur, technically “freezing” the object in place. This is much quicker than using LED-based light systems, which would require stopping the rotation of the turntable for each photo. *01:15* A single rotation of the turntable then produces 36 images of the object, which automatically upload to the software into two folders: "Stills", and "3D Spin". Then, before capturing the next row, our presets instruct the robotic arm to automatically adjust the height of the camera to positive 15 degrees while keeping focus on the midpoint of the object. *01:37* Presets tell our system not only the object’s dimensions but also instructions for capturing the entire sequence. With this information, the sequence runs automatically, one row after another: capturing elevations from negative 45, to positive 15, positive 45, and positive 60 degrees, all done in around 2 and a half minutes. *01:59* And note, the Frame requires roughly 3 to 3.5 meters squared, and a height of approximately 3 meters to the ceiling for the robotic arm to comfortably fit in the area. *02:10* Now, keep in mind that all this time presets have been automatically post-processing our images, including operations for Crop, Center, Sharpen, and Background Optimization. These presets we reuse on similar types of items to ensure consistent and often web-ready still images and 3D spins. It’s also easy to add, edit, or recapture photos in either folder at any time, even from a different computer. *02:36* Then, it’s possible to create a 3D model in USDZ file format in a few simple clicks, and approximately 3 to 5 minutes depending on the local computer. USDZ files are viewable on Finder and basic image preview programs on Mac, or further customizable on 3D and AR hosting platforms like Emersya, or SketchFab. *02:56* Emersya for example helps businesses transform digital models into fully immersive product experiences and 3D configurators. Alternatively, some clients use platforms like Blender to convert USDZ files into other formats, such as STL files for 3D printing. Find more on 3D modeling in the links in the description of this video, and let’s now demo the hardware. *03:19* The Frame features a 1300 millimeter diameter glass plate and a robotic arm that mounts the camera, backdrop, lighting, and other equipment to the machine. The plate supports items up to 50 by 50 centimeters, and has signature dual-axis rotational dynamics for quicker multi-row photography. *03:36* There is then a basic setup of 4 lights, although it is possible to use additional lighting for higher quality outputs, for example a light below the glass plate, and a top light to avoid harsh lighting of positive angles. *03:50* Laser-guided positioning is also on each side and the bottom of the machine, while a black cloth creates contrast at negative angles, preventing any unwanted reflections from the floor. *04:01* Finally, all cables are hidden within the machinery, with the camera always in front of the turntable and opposite the background. *04:08* But what about maintenance and service of all of this equipment? For one, PhotoRobot is easily serviced, and in most cases, on-site service is rarely required. Our technicians can usually handle everything remotely, while the table and other hardware components are all easy to replace. *04:25* Additionally, with PhotoRobot, clients have the advantage of ordering directly from the manufacturer. This means quicker manufacture and delivery times, including for spare, replacement, or even custom parts. *04:37* More importantly, clients get direct access to development for extremely short innovation cycles. After manufacture and delivery, onboarding takes no longer than a few weeks. The main goal is to help clients become comfortable with the new hardware and software, from adopting the right procedures to be highly productive in image production, to fully integrating the software with internal IT systems. *05:01* Teams learn how to set up and use the machines and workstation, and how to fully automate data exchange without any human input. Why not learn more today? Find resources, including how to book your own custom PhotoRobot demo in the description of this video. Thanks for watching, and we hope to hear from you soon! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/multi-camera-rig-design-dynamics # SECTION: videos > multi-camera-rig-design-dynamics # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-03 --- # PhotoRobot MultiCam - Multi-Camera Rig Design & Dynamics Take a video tour introducing the design & dynamics of the PhotoRobot MultiCam, a multi-camera rig for automated 3D photography. - Length: 01:16 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/bMd2AjylbJM - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069212686 - Categories: Robots ## Summary This short video demonstration introduces the [MultiCam by PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam), a multi-camera rig for automated 3D photography. The design of the system enables the simultaneous capture of multiple product photos by multiple cameras. It synchronizes turntable rotation with the capture of each mounted camera to photograph multiple elevations at once. There are 13 positions with a spacing of 7.5 degrees each for mounting cameras. Every additional camera then exponentially reduces the production time of [3D spins](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360) and [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model). That is in tandem with [still product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image), with often 1 minute total production time for 2D + 360 + 3D assets. Watch how the MultiCam is capable of snapping 100s of photos in an instant, and automatically generating images in 3D. The video showcases automated software control over lighting, camera capture, post-processing and publishing. It also shows the MultiCam in combination with the [PhotoRobot Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) to further enhance the production capabilities of any studio. Find out how PhotoRobot can facilitate the needs of any modern commerce, while addressing both software functionality and product presentation. ## Chapters Intro: PhotoRobot MultiCam Overview Up to 13 Camera Mount Positions Automatic Elevation of Cameras Cube Compatibility of MultiCam Outro: 3D Product Photography Automated ## Transcript *00:05* Hello, and welcome to PhotoRobot. The MultiCam has been developed for the effective multiple photo capturing of large volumes of products. All cameras take a photo at the same moment. So if you have four cameras, like we have here, you will take four photos at one stop. Therefore, the session will be four times faster. *00:31* There are 13 positions on the MultiCam bow at 7.5° increments where the cameras can be randomly placed. *00:41* The elevation is automated, controlled from the Controls software. So you can adjust the position according to the size of the object. *00:51* If an automatic measuring system is integrated, Controls will read it and set up the elevation accordingly. Thanks to this system, the cameras are easily pointed to the center of rotation. The MultiCam can also be used together with the Cube. PhotoRobot. Studios automated. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/ocr-gs1-image-capture-features # SECTION: videos > ocr-gs1-image-capture-features # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-10 --- # PhotoRobot OCR and GS1 Image Capture of Grocery Products Take a virtual tour of PhotoRobot software features for Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and automatic GS1 image capture. - Length: 02:13 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/YRpXH3LnlBE - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069174511 - Categories: Features ## Summary Follow along this video demonstration of [PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/software) features for Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and GS1-compliant image capture. The demo shows how PhotoRobot’s OCR is able to read and extract text on packaging and labels wrapping around items. Watch as we show how to produce all necessary product imagery while also automatically recording product information. This includes weights, dimensions, ingredients, nutritional and on-package data. We show the workflow of capturing and publishing a number of grocery products and canned goods – all in under 1 minute. Find out how we produce 360 spins in tandem with [GS1 images](https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards), from packaging, to informational, planograms, and marketing photos. The OCR feature with the Unwrap tool makes it easy to read, extract, and edit text on labels. Combine that with PhotoRobot automatic delivery, so all processes become “set once and forget” with PhotoRobot automation. ## Chapters Intro: Photographing Grocery Products with Text Photography to Publishing in Under 1 Minute Example Angles of View Image Capture & Download Optical Character Text Recognition Extracting Text with Unwrap Tool Adding Labels to Structure Text Delivery of Extracted Text Discover More Tools Like OCR Today ## Transcript *00:04* When photographing grocery products, we often work with objects like cans and jars, which are rounded. I will show you that PhotoRobot can not only photograph these super-fast, but can also read the text on the packaging – in spite of the fact that the text wraps around the object. *00:17* Let's show you how. As always, we're going to play our favorite game - each product online in under one minute. In that time, PhotoRobot spins the object, places the camera at the centre of the product's height, as well as the selected angle of view. *00:32* For example, 0° looks almost like rolling it on a flatbed scanner... Or, 15 degrees is very useful as a marketing image. We can select any angle up to 90°. PhotoRobot doesn't pause the rotation to take each image. It just freezes the movement at the right time. Images are then automatically downloaded to the computer. Or, even better, directly to the cloud for automated processing. *00:54* Text recognition can be very useful. For example, when you want to get the nutrition facts on your product web page such as these. Or maybe you want to validate the information that you receive from your suppliers. And that's where OCR comes in very handy. Let's test it. *01:09* We need to take into consideration that the smaller the diameter of the can, the more distortion there is in the text. This makes it nearly impossible to read. Luckily, we have a special tool called "unwrap", so let's go ahead and use it. *01:21* As you can see, it makes the can itself distorted, but the lines of text are now perfectly straight. This can be used as a separate image, or we can easily apply our OCR feature by clicking this little icon. *01:34* And just like that, we get the full transcription of the text. Now, we can add labels. For example, let's give this part here a name. This helps us structure the text and decide which parts we want to keep. *01:45* The extracted text can be exported in JSON or XML feeds, the same ones that you are using for the automated delivery of your image content. So it's "set and forget". *01:55* And this is just one of the many special tools that come with your license of PhotoRobot_Controls. Our OCR tool can recognise about 100 different languages, probably including yours. So why not get in touch with us and let's discuss what we can do for you. Thank you for watching. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography # SECTION: videos > on-mannequin-photography # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-28 --- # On-Mannequin Fashion Product Photography Using PhotoRobot View a production demo of on-mannequin photography using the PhotoRobot Cube and Controls App Workflow Automation Software. - Length: 04:19 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/wcF_oDgpukA - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069210762 - Categories: Production, Robots ## Summary Watch a video demonstration of our approach to on-mannequin fashion photography using PhotoRobot automated hardware & software. This demo showcases the versatility of [PhotoRobot’s Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) in all its configurations, and in various scenarios. The first scenario shows how to mount a turntable onto the Cube to support small-to-medium size objects, including mannequins. In this configuration, the Cube turntable becomes a platform to support mannequin torsos, half-body mannequin legs, or full-body mannequin models. The production line operator is able to photograph the mannequin in various positions on the turntable, rotating in 360 degrees. Meanwhile, software post-processing functions to automatically (or manually) center the mannequin in still photos and the 360 spin. Then, the next scenario introduces PhotoRobot’s special mannequin holder, which functions with the Cube as a rotating mannequin mount. This specialized mannequin mount secures into the top of the Cube robot. It enables the quick mounting of mannequins onto the device, as well as the quick exchange of one mannequin for another. In this way, production lines are able to considerably speed up workflows when photographing clothing on multiple mannequins. These can include transparent and colored mannequins, or [configurable ghost mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) such as at the end of the video. The final segment covers the range of different mannequins, and automatic post-processing of product photos and ghost mannequin effects. Discover functionality, speed, and simplicity at the highest levels. ## Chapters Intro: On-Mannequin Photography Using PhotoRobot Cube as a Turntable Mount Photographing Mannequins on the Cube Turntable Software Centering the Mannequin in Photos PhotoRobot Mannequin Torso Holder Using Multiple Workspaces for Faster Workflows Using a Modular Ghost Mannequin How to Remove Mannequin Pole from Images PhotoRobot Cloud Retouching Access Controls PhotoRobot Spin Viewer with Hot Spots Types of Photography Mannequins Portable Mannequin Storage Cart Find the Best Mannequin for Your Business ## Transcript *00:01* Most people will agree that fashion is best photographed on live models, and PhotoRobot systems are great for that. But, today, we're going to talk about the next best thing. Because sometimes it's just impractical and expensive to have live models in your studio all the time, and that's where mannequins come in. We're going to talk about how we can use them with PhotoRobot hardware and software, making your photo shoot several times faster and more consistent than if you were to do this manually. *00:32* The first scenario is the most flexible one. One of the many applications of the PhotoRobot Cube is that you can mount a turntable on it. In this configuration, you can put whatever you like on top, including mannequins. This can be a torso or the bottom part if you're shooting trousers for example, or a full body mannequin. The biggest advantage of this approach is that you don't need to modify your existing mannequins, so if yours can stand on a flat surface like this one, it will work on the Cube turntable. *01:00* The disadvantage is that even if you use lasers to position the photographed object, there will always be some human error. The mannequin will simply never be perfectly centered, which can be an issue no matter if you're shooting 360s or stills. Luckily, our software PhotoRobot Controls counts on this, so our centering algorithm will compensate for the positioning errors. You can do this manually, or leave it up to automation. It's your choice. *01:27* This configuration is for those who don't typically shoot full body images. When you use our special torso holder and adapters that attach to one of the legs, you don't need to worry about positioning. So if you regularly shoot on torsos, having a setup such as this one is a no-brainer actually. *01:44* If you want to be super productive, you may want to have two or even three workspaces. While a product is being photographed on one of them, the operators can put another piece of clothing on the second mannequin, simultaneously undressing the third one. *02:00* The third scenario involves the so-called ghost mannequin, which is useful when you want to remove the neck part, for example, for some photoshoots, or maybe the arms because they're obstructing the view of the product. *02:09* And remember, PhotoRobot is not all about 360s. If you don't want parts of the mannequins to be visible in the neck area, it is a good idea to capture the front and back only. This one attaches to the cube using a rod with a cone-shaped mount. But how will you remove the rod from the images? I'm glad you asked. Of course, manual retouching is a good way to do this, but it can be slow. Why not try our chroma key removal feature, with a workspace prepared specifically for this approach? *02:38* Using a technology that you may know from green screen video shoots, PhotoRobot Controls can remove only a particular color from the whole image, or its part. You just need to make sure that the pole holding the mannequin is a different color than those on the product. No manual removal necessary. *02:55* Of course, there will be situations where you simply cannot do without manual retouching and the PhotoRobot cloud counts on this. Without having to send anything to anybody, you can simply grant access to your internal or external retouchers. When they are done brushing up the images, they can re-upload them to the cloud, which means you can integrate retouching seamlessly into your workflow. With some retouching, you can even make it look as if the mannequin was never there, which you can see in this example with underwear. If you shoot 360s, it is a good idea to take advantage of our spin viewer, which supports hotspots that you can click on to view important details. *03:31* But how about the mannequins themselves? After all, there are so many models on the market, it makes your head spin. For example, these plastic transparent ones are very practical because you can very easily attach the adapter to them and you can modify them any way you like. For example, here we've cut out the neckline. *03:45* Moreover, you can order a special cart from us, which can hold six of them, and you can transport them from one part of the studio to another. It also doubles as a rack of shelves for any accessories that the stylist may want to use for example. *03:59* There are many kinds of mannequins, so if you are not sure the ones you might already have are compatible, just ask. The modularity of the system plays to your advantage, making sure it fits any kind of workflow like a glove. Get in touch with us and find out how we can make your life much easier. Thanks for watching! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/one-click-output-production-demo # SECTION: videos > one-click-output-production-demo # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-06 --- # How One Click Produces 2D + 360 + 3D Outputs in Tandem Watch a demonstration of how PhotoRobot captures multiple outputs in under 2 minutes: still images, 360 spins, and 3D models. - Length: 02:55 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/Ti_gNsb0eSo - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1057409185 - Categories: Features ## Summary Join us in the PhotoRobot Showroom for a video demo on how [PhotoRobot systems](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) capture multiple outputs in a single click. We demonstrate the one-click automation that fully captures, post-processes, and produces web-ready imagery. In under 2 minutes, we capture a hero image, a stills gallery, 360 spin, and 3D model output. The demo showcases the full software integration of studio lights, cameras, robots, and post production for high levels of productivity. In fact, while competing systems might take around one minute to produce 6 images, PhotoRobot does the same in 20 seconds. Not only that, it produces in addition to stills, 360 spins, and 3D models. Then, thanks to software presets, [production workflows are easily repeatable](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line) by anyone with minimal training. It requires only a click to run full robotized capture sequences, post-processing, and publishing operations. There are saveable preset categories as well, meaning that teams can save settings for photographing similar types of objects. See for yourself just how game-changing PhotoRobot automation can be, from saving time to standardizing production. ## Chapters Web-Ready Assets in Under 2 Minutes PhotoRobot Software & Presets Overview Scan to Start Capture, Post-Process, & Publish Stills Gallery & 360 Spin Production Speed Comparison to Other Manufacturers 3D Model Generation in a Single Click Automatic Post-Processing & Publishing ## Transcript *00:00* Hello, and welcome to the PhotoRobot Showroom. My name is Ethan. I'm PhotoRobot’s professional AI Studio Assistant and Virtual Tour Guide. Join me, with our real-life product photographer Erik, and we'll show you how to get all of your product photos in a single click. We’re talking about capturing multiple, automatically post-processed and web-ready assets: the hero image, complete product galleries, 360 spins, and 3D models. *00:26* Take for example this piece of footwear. Each product in the system will have corresponding folders in the software related to different outputs. Then, within the software, we have attached to each folder PhotoRobot Presets, which act as instructions for the photoshoot. Presets tell our software how to automate everything from the robots to product rotation, camera elevation & capture, lighting, angles, and post-processing parameters. This means all we have to do is place the product on our turntable before telling our system to do the rest. *00:55* Now, thanks to laser-guided object positioning, which turns off automatically during photography, finding the absolute center of rotation is quick and easy. When the product is placed, a simple scan of the barcode starts the process. *01:07* See our photography sequence begin, and, after a single rotation of the turntable, each folder for different outputs begins filling up with images. We get everything from the hero image to multiple marketing angles, and our 360 spin. *01:20* But, exactly how long did this take for PhotoRobot? Let's start with a comparison. Many manufacturers deliver approximately 6 images with a transparent background in about one minute. Not bad, right? Well, for PhotoRobot, think again. In today’s demo, our hero image, along with 6 additional angles, took PhotoRobot a total of 15 seconds to capture. Add another approximately 20 seconds to capture the entire series of photos for our 360 spin. All of these, we can post-process, and publish online, in under one minute thanks to the magic of PhotoRobot Presets. Meanwhile, the system continues shooting without interruption, allowing us to capture an additional 72 frames in 30 seconds to generate a 3D model. *02:00* This means that, in 90 seconds, we have: the hero image, multiple marketing angles, our detailed shots, and a 360 spin – all ready for immediate publishing online, while a 3D model is being processed at the same time. The 3D model might take upwards of 2 or 3 minutes to generate, but everything else is ready nearly as fast as you finish snapping photos. It’s really that quick. And, it’s that simple. *02:23* Of course, if you want a more complete product portfolio, including additional detail shots and close-ups, you can take these by hand while other photos are processed. All photos are automatically cropped & centered, with tools for Optical Character Recognition, ChromaKey masking, and tons of other operations. *02:39* Just have a look at the links in the description of this video to learn more. You’ll find today’s example outputs, along with resources on all of the tools and automation that make PhotoRobot so unique. Thank you for watching. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photographing-glass-products # SECTION: videos > photographing-glass-products # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-14 --- # How PhotoRobot Photographs Glass Items in Under 1 Minute See how PhotoRobot photographs glass items including stills and 360s in less than 60 seconds using the Case 850 turntable. - Length: 01:42 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/g9JEG51RIQ4 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069179469 - Categories: Production, Robots ## Summary Find out how PhotoRobot handles 360 product photography of glass objects in less than 60 seconds using the [Case 850 turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850). This video demonstrates how we capture 24 still images and a product 360, automatically post-process, and instantly publish images online. It also answers a common question about PhotoRobot. Learn how we are able to photograph glass items with open photography systems, unlike competing box-like solutions. Follow the workflow: from operating [PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/software), to photographing a glass award, optimizing images by presets, and cloud-based publishing. All in under 1 minute! Our operator guides you through capture to web-ready images: including image cropping, centering, and background removal for the web. ## Chapters Intro - How Does PhotoRobot Handle Glass Products? Robotic Workstation - Case_850 Turntable The Object & Images to Capture The Photography Sequence Post-Processing & Publishing Resulting Outputs ## Transcript *00:04* People often ask us how PhotoRobot, being an open design, handles glass. Instead of just talking about it, why don't I show you? *00:11* For that, I'll use this Case 850with an 85 cm glass turntable. This is a portable design, so it can be folded up - and transported even in a personal car. *00:21* We have also installed this custom portal with a suspended makeshift paper tent, which we have found to work better than most ready-made solutions on the market. *00:30* We'll be shooting a spin of 24 images of this glass award sent to us by one of our Canadian clients. And you will see that it takes less than one minute to shoot, post-process and publish the images in the cloud. Let me place this on the turntable. *00:50* OK, now I can go ahead and trigger the photography sequence. You will see that it takes less than 20 seconds to capture those 24 images and upload them to the cloud. *01:03* When that is done, we will post-process them according to the settings stored in the preset. Let's do just that. *01:10* Now, you see a progress bar has appeared. And, when that has reached its end, you will know that the images have been automatically cropped, automatically centered and the background has been removed. All of that in the cloud and ready to be linked to from any number of Web pages. *01:27* And now it's done. So let's check out the results. I think it looks great. Thank you very much for watching. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-controls-software-prices # SECTION: videos > photorobot-controls-software-prices # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-10-01 --- # Guide to PhotoRobot Controls App Pricing & User Licenses Watch the Customer Video Guide to PhotoRobot Controls Software Prices and Licensing to find the best software plan for business. - Length: 08:21 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1122812434 - Categories: Onboarding ## Summary Find the best PhotoRobot software plan for your unique business in our Customer Guide to [PhotoRobot Controls App Software Prices & Licensing](https://www.photorobot.com/software-pricing). This video presents the differences between purchasing a Local Plan versus a Hybrid Plan or a Cloud Plan. It includes information on cost-cutting Backstage User Licenses, with details on image hosting & PhotoRobot SpinViewer. Discover important data considerations before making a purchase, as well as how to enroll teams in PhotoRobot Academy training courses. ## Chapters PhotoRobot Software Pricing Local Plan Hybrid Plan Cloud Plan Backstage User Hosting & SpinViewer Data Concerns PhotoRobot Academy Bottom Line ## Transcript *00:00* Hello, and Welcome to the PhotoRobot Guide to the Controls Software Pricing and Licenses. *00:06* If you’ve landed on this page, you might be asking yourself which Controls Software plan is the best fit for your business. *00:14* Let’s take a walkthrough together, as we both know that choosing the best plan isn’t only about the price. *00:21* It’s more about the end-value, and, ultimately, how much time and effort you can save overall. *00:27* Follow along as we present the advantages of the local, hybrid, and cloud versions of the Controls software. *00:34* This will include the functionality, features and pricing of the licenses, as well as information on the Backstage User license for additional cost-savings. *00:45* I will also explain image hosting & the PhotoRobot SpinViewer, including important data considerations, and, finally, the PhotoRobot Academy for assistance onboarding new technology. *00:57* First, there is the Local Version of PhotoRobot Controls Software. *01:01* In terms of pricing, this version is approximately one-third of the cost of the Cloud version. *01:07* Although limited in comparison to the Cloud version, the Local Version delivers a lot of advantages straight out of the box. *01:15* It provides full control of robots and lights, with download and post-processing directly to the local computer. *01:22* That includes: automatic background cleanup, color corrections, cropping, and even file renaming according to your own conventions. *01:30* The Local version amounts to a lot of power at a low cost, especially if you are accustomed to working at a single workstation and manually uploading images to your website or system. *01:41* However, keep in mind that distribution and publishing remain your responsibility when using the Local version of Controls software. *01:49* Second, there is the Hybrid Version of Controls Software. *01:53* The Hybrid Version is ideal when connecting multiple workstations. *01:57* It is also approximately two-thirds of the price of the Cloud plan, while offering several advantages in comparison to a Local plan. *02:05* This includes the extremely useful advantage of sharing presets and workflows across the entire organization, even between sites in different countries. *02:14* In this case, there is still local processing of images, but there is also instant transfer to the cloud, with automatic distribution from there. *02:23* There is no need to maintain a server either, as PhotoRobot specialists are on the job. *02:28* The result? Every image follows the exact same procedure, whether it’s producing images by one robot or using fifty. *02:35* Third, there is the Cloud version of the Controls Software, which delivers every studio automation feature PhotoRobot has to offer. *02:44* This one has everything. *02:47* All post-processing runs directly in the cloud over powerful servers, meaning that your local computer no longer has to handle any heavy computing. *02:56* At the same time, you can photograph and process images in parallel simultaneously, with instant backup of every photo, and fully automated distribution via API. *03:06* Your production travels straight from the studio to the customer in an instant, with minimal to zero human input. *03:14* Truly, this is the choice with the greatest return in the long run if you want maximum efficiency, reliability, and the fastest workflows. *03:22* Now, what are the costs of the different user licenses? *03:26* For both the Hybrid and Cloud versions of the software, there is also a cost-effective license called the Backstage User. *03:33* Unlike a standard user license, the Backstage User is not intended for capturing photos, post-processing images, controlling robots, or handling third-party peripherals such as CubiScan. *03:45* Instead, the Backstage User is for support staff who are responsible for essential backstage tasks. *03:51* These include preparing items for photography, checking items in and out of the studio, and returning inventory to customers. *03:59* As these stages of production do not call for software access to image processing or hardware control, the Backstage licenses are significantly more affordable. *04:09* They are also especially valuable in larger studios, where multiple team members fulfill different parts of the workflow. *04:17* With the Backstage license, you can connect your entire team in PhotoRobot Controls Software at a fraction of the cost – boosting efficiency across the entire operation. *04:27* Additionally, another important but often overlooked aspect is image hosting and PhotoRobot’s Spin-Viewer. *04:34* With spin photography, it isn’t as easy as simply dragging and dropping images onto a website. *04:39* It is necessary to have an interactive viewer to ensure smooth on-page product rotation, and to deliver deep zoom into the finest details. *04:47* With PhotoRobot Viewer, hosting spins requires only embedding a short script onto a page to immediately distribute spin photos online. *04:55* To understand the costs, there is also a clear Hosting Price Table on this page, including a slider for quick estimation of monthly costs depending on the number of images. *05:06* What’s more? Hosting up to 10 gigabytes on PhotoRobot Viewer is also completely free-of-charge. *05:12* Of course, there are still similar services from third parties available like those from Sirv. *05:18* Although, if using these, it is at the cost of losing automatic upload and seamless integration with PhotoRobot. *05:24* When using PhotoRobot Viewer, all images flow into the cloud publishing tool automatically – with complete metadata, and zero additional human effort. *05:33* Then, in the end, there are data considerations to keep in mind – in particular, how data is managed within each system. *05:40* For example, in the Hybrid and Cloud versions of the software, there is a central environment storing all data. *05:47* In contrast, the Local version stores all files only on the computer’s file system. *05:52* The downside of this is that switching from one system to another is no longer a matter of pressing a button. *05:59* While moving from the Cloud to Local versions is essentially just downloading, in order to move in the opposite direction, it requires setting up structures and uploading content to the cloud. *06:11* This is why PhotoRobot always recommends careful consideration of your long-term needs right from the very start. *06:18* It is important to identify these to avoid for example the complexity of migration between two very different ecosystems – and to ensure you choose the setup that best supports your growth. *06:30* Finally, what about onboarding the new technology? *06:33* After all, excellence in production requires more than just powerful hardware and software. *06:38* You need skilled people who know how to operate both. *06:41* This is where PhotoRobot Academy offers assistance. *06:45* PhotoRobot Academy provides training courses both on-site in your own studio, or at our headquarters in Prague. *06:51* We teach production line operators how to fully take advantage of the robots; train studio administrators to master workflows; and prepare support staff to efficiently handle backstage tasks. *07:03* The goal is simple. We want to assist your team in unlocking the full potential of PhotoRobot Controls – faster, easier, and with an immediate boost to your productivity. *07:14* And, if you choose the training courses at our site in Prague, you also receive the added bonus of taking in one of Europe’s most beautiful historic cities on your visit. *07:24* Now, here’s the bottom line. *07:27* The Local version provides powerful performance at a low cost. *07:31* The Hybrid Version connects workstations and automates data flow. *07:35* The Cloud version transforms the entire process into a hands-free ride, while Backstage User licenses add cost-effective support for your team. *07:43* All the while, publishing interactive images is effortless with PhotoRobot hosting and SpinViewer, but careful planning is necessary to avoid complex migration procedures in the future. *07:54* And finally, with PhotoRobot Academy, your team can acquire the knowledge and confidence to use the system to its full potential. *08:02* In the end, which plan you choose is your choice to make. *08:05* Although the Cloud plan delivers the greatest overall value, it is crucial to decide around your unique business needs. *08:13* Do you have questions? *08:15* Just let us know how we can help you plan to best utilize PhotoRobot Controls Software around your team and operations. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photorobot-workflow # SECTION: videos > photorobot-workflow # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-10-06 --- # Unlock the PhotoRobot-Powered Production Workflow Watch the video guide to the PhotoRobot-powered production line workflow to learn more about faster, simpler and fully automated photography. - Length: 05:51 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1062756140 - Categories: Onboarding ## Summary This video overview introduces the [PhotoRobot-powered production line workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line). It presents the PhotoRobot solution in detail: from producing interactive 360 + 3D outputs and 360 product video, to accelerating workflows. Discover how PhotoRobot fully accounts for every stage of production, including automatic capture, post-processing, API delivery, and publishing. That includes features for frictionless collaboration, and a remote quality control team for uninterrupted, high-volume productivity. ## Chapters PhotoRobot Solution Interactive Outputs 3D Modeling Product Video Repeatable Workflows Auto Capture & Process Settings & Presets Frictionless Collaboration Remote Quality Control Contact PhotoRobot ## Transcript *00:00* The demand for richer outputs and more efficient workflows is as natural as the need for shorter deadlines and more expedient delivery. *00:07* This has always been the challenge in photo studio production lines, and for our expert technicians here at PhotoRobot. *00:15* It leads to our customers demanding more, while wanting to maintain the same cost or to achieve lower costs with the same equipment. *00:22* In turn, our innovators must build more flexible and scalable solutions, all at competitive market rates, and adaptable to the ever-more dynamic workflows necessary for our customer’s media production. *00:34* To meet these needs in today’s media landscape, this means more than producing only traditional photography, in which photos have simple edited backgrounds, adjusted colors, formats, and shadows. *00:46* While traditional photos like these remain a staple in any portfolio, producing more interactive formats like 360 spins are now commonplace in photo studio workflows. *00:56* 360 spin photography allows consumers to view objects from all angles instead of relying on only a limited number of pre-selected views. *01:05* They often support deep zoom functionality as well, and can display hot spots with annotations to draw attention to unique design and material features. *01:14* This makes product visuals both more eye-catching and informative, helping to build consumer trust through every additional piece of visual information. *01:23* Additionally, after producing a product spin with PhotoRobot, customers are only a few steps away (and seconds) from automatically producing a 3D model from their photos. *01:34* 3D models are optimized for extremely smooth rotation and flawless details, and convert into assets for product configurators, or augmented reality previews. *01:43* Take for example 3D modeling items of clothing to display in a virtual fitting room. *01:48* That, or projecting a PhotoRobot into a studio for presentation. *01:52* Both become easily possible within PhotoRobot workflows. *01:56* Moreover, while more advanced outputs like these might not be the first element a customer discovers about PhotoRobot, these formats on top of classic photo techniques often make the difference in closing a deal. *02:09* Let’s also not forget 360-degree product video, which PhotoRobot can automatically create as part of a series of outputs. *02:17* Short video loops are ideal for social media and email. *02:20* They also in general serve as more dynamic visuals in product listings alongside still images, 360 spins, and 3D models. *02:28* All the while, producing any of these outputs, including 360 product video, becomes as easy as running a single command with PhotoRobot. *02:37* More importantly, it takes surprisingly little time and effort to recreate any workflow. *02:43* Beyond the robotized capture of a comprehensive set of photographic outputs and video, our toolkit supports every stage of studio production. *02:52* That accounts for the endless studio activities in which productivity can be enhanced, and which ultimately define the studio’s overall efficiency. *03:01* Take for instance product intake and return. *03:04* To accelerate these stages of the workflow, PhotoRobot integrates the use of scanners and 2D or 3D codes. *03:10* This enables the automatic assignment of weights and measurements to objects, such as for primary records, or for verification purposes. *03:18* The values are configurable in metric or imperial units, and help to not only configure the robot’s shooting parameters but also to provide metadata for the customer. *03:28* Shooting settings cover specific lighting and camera settings individual to each product and product categories, such as for light, dark, transparent, or reflective objects. *03:39* However, PhotoRobot handles this part elegantly, assigning complex presets for any type of item via simple product placement and code scanning. *03:49* After capture, outputs are then automatically post-processed, correctly named, and instantly published online, or delivered to target presentation systems via API. *04:00* While this might seem like a minor detail, keep in mind that many studios still rely on manual processes, which are often performed by “experts” who incur significant costs. *04:11* In this area, PhotoRobot enables frictionless remote collaboration, so that if any photo requires retouching, it’s as easy as flagging it in the system for an internal or external retouching. *04:23* The one responsible for retouching the image is then able to easily download, edit, and return the images without any manual file transfers – saving both time and effort for all involved parties. *04:36* At the same time, PhotoRobot ensures high quality through our own remote quality control team, capable of overseeing multiple studios across different locations. *04:47* This is thanks to the design of our system which supports clusters of multiple robots in one studio, or in multiple studios worldwide. *04:55* Meanwhile, despite the robust nature of the solution, PhotoRobot remains equally suitable for small studios with only one machine, providing both a reliable and scalable option for future growth. *05:08* But truly, the greatest advantage that PhotoRobot offers our customers is the seamless and effortless automation. *05:15* There is no need for highly complex installations, or for expensive system maintenance. *05:20* Our team tailors everything around the customer requirements, aiming to accelerate and simplify each stage in the production workflow. *05:28* See for yourself on the page below, and let’s discuss how to start standardizing your production, while also maintaining your momentum and cost-efficiency – even when expanding your portfolio to address the latest trends in media production. *05:42* The friction points naturally disappear with PhotoRobot, and you will be pleasantly surprised by the demonstrable return on investment our systems offer. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/product-photoshoots-demo # SECTION: videos > product-photoshoots-demo # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-03-05 --- # Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot Watch the PhotoRobot Production Video Demo of capturing, post-processing, and publishing images of 3 products online in under 3 minutes. - Length: 03:23 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/VolMOFXBLy4 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1057406140 - Categories: Production ## Summary This video demonstration of the [PhotoRobot production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line) showcases high speeds of capture, post-processing, and publishing. Watch as we photograph, post-process, and publish images of 3 products online in under 3 minutes. Each product presents different challenges for tabletop photography, with their own unique photographic requirements. The first is a standard procedure, producing 360 spin photography of an orange suede high-heel shoe. Then, we photograph a wire basket, which poses its own complex challenges. The internal areas require masking, but at the same time have shiny edges. PhotoRobot solves these issues remarkably, however. The third production example is then a shampoo bottle, which also perfectly captures the text on the bottle. This is thanks to the high resolution of the original image files together with PhotoRobot’s built-in OCR reader. All text displays just as the OCR function reads it. Other key functionalities include our non-stop spin feature, which enables high-speed image capture. There is seamless integration of automated features such as barcode scanning, object dimensioning, and automated metadata assignment. These features together with cloud backup and automated processing ensure both user-friendly production, and smooth workflows. ## Chapters Introduction & Object Selection Setup & Background Removal Scan-in & Robot Arm Control Image Capture & Management Cloud Processing & Publishing ## Transcript *00:03* Hi. Today, we'll show you how fast and easy it is to make great 360s of these 3 products with PhotoRobot. We didn't pick the objects randomly. For example: this shoe, a very simple object, very simple shape. And the suede surface will look very vivid and crisp thanks to the fact that we use strobes unlike almost everybody else. Then we have this tray which is far from simple. There are all of these holes in the middle. *00:28* When we're removing background, you might be afraid that part of the objects are going to get removed along with the background, but that's not going to happen. You'll see. We'll show you. *00:36* And then we have this shampoo, which is white, so we can demonstrate how we can photograph white on white. And there is lots of text on it, so we can go ahead and read that with our OCR feature. Let's have a look. *00:50* We have already imported a target-list of the products we want to photograph, and assigned presets to them. We'll show you how to do that in another video. Now, I can just scan the barcodes of the products so that the software knows which item we are about to photograph. *01:05* I can weigh and measure the object on our CubiScan 325. The Robotic Arm, which we are using today, uses these measurements to set the camera at the correct height. I know exactly where to place the shoe thanks to the laser cross, which will be turned off automatically during the photography sequence. *01:20* I can just scan the barcode, and the photography sequence begins. I don't even have to touch my computer. Thanks to our non-stop spin feature, it will only take about 20 seconds to take 36 images of the shoe. *01:32* While this is happening, we check the position of the turntable a thousand times per second, and we send the signals to the camera several milliseconds ahead of the time. That way, we can be sure we're taking the images from exactly the right angles. *01:44* By this time, all of the images have been captured and uploaded to the cloud. From there, they can immediately be published using a secure, encrypted feed. More often than not, you'll want to edit the images in some way, such as cropping, centering, or background removal. *02:00* This is made easy by our automated post-processing. And of course, these settings can be stored in presets as well. It's all happening in the cloud, in the background. So I don't have to worry about that, and I can place another object on the turntable. *02:12* This time we are using a different capturing method called free-masking. We take two images from the same angle, one with just the backlight. This creates a silhouette of the object, also called the mask, which is used to cut out the object from the background. *02:26* This makes it possible to make the background transparent, enabling us to change the background colour to better fit the surrounding webpage. *02:35* Now, we can take the pictures of this shampoo. I have deliberately placed the sample off-center only to show you that this can be fixed in post using our unique centring feature. You can also see how PhotoRobot handles white-on-white. Because both the processed and the original images are stored in the cloud, I can adjust the settings any time I want on another computer. *02:57* For example, here, I am using our unique OCR feature. And this is how easy it is! And it doesn't really matter whether you're doing tabletop photography of smaller objects, perhaps fashion on a mannequin, or maybe even large objects such as a car. The principles are always the same. And so is the quality. So get in touch with us and let us discuss what PhotoRobot can do for your business. Thank you for watching. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/robotic-arm-v8-overview # SECTION: videos > robotic-arm-v8-overview # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-16 --- # PhotoRobot Robotic Arm v8 - Device Overview & Accessories Examine the hardware features and accessories of PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm, the advanced multi-row product photography robot. - Length: 01:23 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/1oC7FWHXA7s - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069181695 - Categories: Robots ## Summary Explore a video showcase of the versatile hardware features and accessories of PhotoRobot’s advanced multi-row photography robot, the [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). This video provides an overview of the Robotic Arm design, including its accessories and sturdy yet mobile base. Find out about the automated elevation of the arm, and its two arm sizes for maximum precision of movement. We show how easy positioning and laser systems ensure high levels of productivity, while docking stations help for quick setup. Discover for yourself how the Arm v8 represents significant advancement in 360 & 3D imaging studio technology. ## Chapters Intro: PhotoRobot's Robotic Arm v8 Automated Elevation Arm Length Adjustment Robotic Arm Docking Station ## Transcript *00:04* Hello, and welcome to PhotoRobot. The Robotic_Arm v8 is the latest model of the very successful multi-row robot. *00:12* The elevation is automated. *00:17* Two shanks are included: one short, one long. *00:22* The arm length is adjusted manually. For easy positioning, there is an integrated laser. The robot is perfectly stable thanks to its robust base, but also easily movable. *00:37* Move it among your workplaces. Use it wherever you need. If used with a docking system, you will always find the correct position. *01:13* PhotoRobot. Studios automated. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/semi-automatic-centering-image-sets # SECTION: videos > semi-automatic-centering-image-sets # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-10 --- # Semi Automatic Centering of PhotoRobot 360 Spin Image Sets > See how to utilize PhotoRobot Controls App software features to automatically center images sets when producing 360 spins. See how to utilize PhotoRobot Controls App software features to automatically center images sets when producing 360 spins. - Length: 01:17 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/t5AB44X8pks - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069175453 - Categories: Features ## Summary Watch a video demo of the semi automatic centering feature of [PhotoRobot Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/software). The video follows the workflow of photographing an oddly-shaped object, which slightly tilts off-axis in photos. This produces a wobble effect in the spin, where the top of the object is slightly off of the vertical axis. However, we demonstrate how to quickly realign the object to the center of rotation. That includes recalculating the center of 36 photos in the image set in only a few clicks. Judge for yourself just how quick and easy it becomes thanks to PhotoRobot Controls. ## Chapters Intro: Semi Automatic Centering Products that Tilt in Photos Centering 36 Photos at Once Example 360 Spin Output ## Transcript *00:04* In 360° photography, items such as this concrete mixer can give us a hard time. We often have to ask, how do we get from this to this? *00:15* When we do 360° photos of products, we very often face a unique problem, which is a tilted product. When you start spinning it around, like I'm doing right now, you see that it gets a wobble at the top, which just doesn't look very good. *00:28* Now, I need to fix this in 36 pictures photographed with a 26 MPx camera, which is quite a lot of data. So luckily, we have PhotoRobot_Controls. *00:38* I click change and I add the centring algorithm, and I click Adjust Manually, which is actually a semi-automatic algorithm. I tell the software in one image, the second image, and finally the third one where the vertical line should be. *00:59* And that's enough. It will recalculate it for the remaining images - which just happened. And now when I start spinning around, you see that the wobble is gone. Job done. And this is just one of the many features that we can offer. Thank you for watching. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/support-contracts # SECTION: videos > support-contracts # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-10-06 --- # Support Contracts for PhotoRobot Customers Find information on PhotoRobot Support Contracts to ensure the quality and functionality of your machines throughout their entire lifecycle. - Length: 02:42 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1058531095 - Categories: Onboarding ## Summary Find information on [PhotoRobot Support Contracts](https://www.photorobot.com/support) to ensure the quality and functionality of your machines throughout their entire lifecycle. This video guide covers the three different types of service plans: the Premium Worldwide Support (PWS) Contract, the Standard Support Contract, and the Ad-Hoc Service Contract. Each tailors to the needs of different size and volume operations so that you can find the perfect solution for your business. ## Chapters PhotoRobot Service Plans PWS Contract Standard Support Contract Ad-Hoc Service Contract Help Selecting a Plan ## Transcript *00:00* For all PhotoRobot customers, we place exceptional emphasis on the quality and functionality of our machines throughout their entire lifecycle. *00:09* To this end, all of our machine control units feature a built-in diagnostic system, allowing for the resolution of any technical issues – often before they occur. *00:19* The system remotely monitors operating temperatures, and various other key parameters to enable timely support responses, and ensure uninterrupted production for our customers. *00:31* Our experienced technical support team is ready to address any challenges – either remotely or directly on-site at the customer’s location. *00:40* Additionally, we maintain an extensive inventory of spare parts for immediate replacements, while PhotoRobot factory-versed technicians are prepared for any situation thanks to hands-on experience with machine production. *00:54* In order to meet service requirements, we offer 3 types of PhotoRobot Service Plans, which you can also find on this page for reference. *01:03* The first type of plan is the PWS Contract. *01:05* The PWS Contract is paid one-time annually, and fully covers customer needs with no additional charges. *01:12* It provides priority technical support, a virtually unlimited warranty on all machine components (excluding consumables), and covers firmware updates. *01:22* PWS contracts may also include travel expenses configurable and dependent on the specific contract terms. *01:29* The plan aims to take care of everything a customer might need. *01:33* Then, the second type of contract is the Standard Support Contract. *01:38* The Standard Support Contract exists for customers who prefer access to technical support, but opt for paid service interventions. *01:46* Standard plans are valid for 12-months at a time on purchase, and provide direct access to PhotoRobot specialist technicians, but with service support on a fee-per-incident basis. *01:58* Third and lastly, there is the Ad-Hoc Service Contract. *02:02* The Ad-Hoc Contract is for clients who are not currently prioritizing machine operability, technical support, or service. *02:10* This agreement offers a high-tier, ad-hoc rate to address any service needs should they arise, and the customer’s priorities unexpectedly change. *02:19* If you have any questions about the different plans, or you would like help tailoring the optimal plan around your business's unique needs, please contact our sales team for further support. *02:32* PhotoRobot is here and ready to help ensure the long-term, reliable operation of your PhotoRobot equipment and for your direct access to technical support. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/turning-platform-demo-quads-dirt-bikes # SECTION: videos > turning-platform-demo-quads-dirt-bikes # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-10 --- # Photographing Quads and Dirt Bikes on the Turning Platform Watch footage of PhotoRobot Studio using the Turning Platform to photograph 360s of dirt bikes and quads for a customer. - Length: 03:15 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/RXoet2UcAWc - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069180005 - Categories: Production, Robots ## Summary Take an inside look at a PhotoRobot Studio photoshoot of Buffler dirt bikes and quads using the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform). This video showcases the workstation setup for a customer, the automation software, workflow, outputs, and total production. Watch as we join the CEO of Buffler to photograph 360s of 10 children’s quads, one full-size adult quad, and two dirt bikes. We manage this in a single PhotoRobot Studio session. That includes post-processing, optimization, and publishing of images with background removal perfect for Buffler’s website. Watch the video of this unique photoshoot to judge the productivity or yourself. ## Chapters Intro: PhotoRobot Studio Project Brief for Buffler PhotoRobot Turning Platform Platform Load Capacity Control Unit Competitor Approach PhotoRobot Approach Total Items Photographed Outro: Contact PhotoRobot ## Transcript *00:06* This video will be different to all PhotoRobot videos that we have made so far. Today, you will see some footage from a real-world photoshoot for a customer. *00:14* This is a showroom and we don't normally operate as a studio. But today, we made an exception, so that we can show you one of the big advantages of PhotoRobot systems: the fact that we can photograph larger items that many systems on the market would have trouble with. *00:29* This is the CEO of the Czech company Buffler, which sells quads, dirt bikes, and other small vehicles.And Buffler has asked us to shoot 360° photos for them because they know that the 360s increase customer engagement. So we will do just that. *00:53* The hero of this video will be this Turning_Platform, high-torque version. And the first thing you may notice about it is that it features the_Catwalk, which we normally use for virtual fashion shows. But obviously, that's not what we are going to use today to photograph quads and dirt bikes. To protect it, we have placed an additional layer of fiberboard on top so that we don't have to worry that the treadmill is going to get damaged. *01:19* Now back to what makes the Turning_Platform unique. One important feature is the above standard load capacity, but it doesn't stop there. This one is controlled using our proprietary control unit, which is actually quite a sophisticated Real-Time processing computer. *01:33* We could go crazy and give you all the geeky details about it, but for now, let us focus on one key feature: our non-stop spin. Let me show you the important difference between the way practically everybody else approaches 360° photoshoots and how we do it. *01:50* Now, I will ask our photographer Eric to show you how it looks when you're shooting 360s with gear other than PhotoRobot. Eric, go ahead. As you can see, in this mode, the turntable pauses to take each picture, or perhaps two pictures if you are using the free masking approach. Not only is it much slower, but with some items, it is downright impractical to have to accelerate and decelerate all the time. *02:16* And this is how PhotoRobot does it. As you can see, when done like this, it only takes several seconds to shoot a 360 of a quad. And while we're at it, we will also post-process and publish the results. This includes background removal, so the images can blend in perfectly with the white background of the Buffler website. *02:37* So it looks like we're done for today. We have taken 360s of ten children quads, one full-size adult quad, and two dirt bikes - all of them by the company Buffler. And each of them took us just slightly over a minute from the moment we placed them on the turntable, so we don't think it gets much easier or faster than this. *02:54* Reach out to us! And together, let's figure out how to bring the product photography in-house for you or streamline your existing product photography workflow. Thanks for watching. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/turning-platform-design-functionality # SECTION: videos > turning-platform-design-functionality # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-16 --- # PhotoRobot Turning Platform - System Design & Functionality Watch a video overview of PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform for 360 product photography of heavy and light objects, large or small. - Length: 01:11 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/G2rb9XTSL-g - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069182155 - Categories: Robots ## Summary Explore a video overview of PhotoRobot’s [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform) for 360 product photography of small to large objects. Our presenter first introduces the 1.5 ton load capacity of the device. This makes the platform ideal for photographing light or heavy objects, from motorcycles to washing machines and smaller items. Find out how to configure the Turning Platform with various accessories, including circular or elliptical plates of different sizes. The video also demonstrates how the Turning Platform is adaptable for [fashion photography using mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/on-mannequin-photography) and various use cases. See for yourself just how versatile this large rotating photography platform becomes in the studio. ## Chapters Intro: PhotoRobot Turning_Platform Turning_Platform Accessories Platform Plate Sizes On-Mannequin Photography Drive-Up Ramp Add-On ## Transcript *00:15* Hello, and welcome to PhotoRobot. What we have here is the Turning_Platform, used best when photographing 360 degrees and 3D photos of large and heavy objects such as a motorcycle. *00:26* There are plenty of Turning_Platform accessories. You can choose from a 2,8 or 1,8 or a 1m diameter circle plate, or a 2.6 by 2 meter ellipse turning plate. *00:38* All sizes are available in black or white. The 1m plate can also be used with a mushroom for photographing lighter objects. *00:47* And finally, the platform can also be used with mannequins for taking 360° fashion photos. *00:54* You may use the optional drive-up ramp for all movable products. PhotoRobot. Studios automated. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/virtual-catwalk-rotating-platform # SECTION: videos > virtual-catwalk-rotating-platform # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-04-16 --- # PhotoRobot Virtual Catwalk - Overview & Hardware Design Learn how PhotoRobot’s Virtual Catwalk functions as an innovative rotating platform for on-model fashion product video & photography. - Length: 01:12 - YouTube: https://youtu.be/q4EVMIlCb0o - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1069182574 - Categories: Robots ## Summary Find out how PhotoRobot’s [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk) functions as an innovative rotating platform for on-model fashion product video & photography. The presentation begins with an overview of the Virtual Catwalk design, which fits in an area of 7 x 7 meters. It then covers the rotational dynamics of the turning plate in combination with the walking belt. See how these enable two directions of movement for the Virtual Catwalk. A model is able to walk on the treadmill-like belt, while the platform simultaneously rotates for 360 video & photo capture. This includes full control to adjust direction and speed, with mobile edge supports for safety and stability. Watch the video to discover this professional, cost-effective and portable solution for your fashion videos. ## Chapters Intro: PhotoRobot Virtual_Catwalk Platform Movement Dynamics Safe & Stable Supports Controls & Hardware Outro: Quick Fashion Video Production ## Transcript *00:08* Hello. Welcome to PhotoRobot and their Virtual_Catwalk. The Virtual_Catwalk is a cost-effective, fast and always available solution for professional fashion videos. *00:18* Everything you need is in this 7×7 meter space. *00:22* The trick is in the combination of two movements: the model walking on the walking belt, and the rotation of the turning plate. *00:30* For safety and stability, we use mobile edge supports. *00:38* The direction and speed are adjustable. Every robot is manufactured in the EU with maximum emphasis on precision, reliability and mobility. *00:48* If you need space, just push the platform aside. *00:52* The Virtual_catwalk is a professional, cost-effective, and portable solution for your fashion videos. PhotoRobot. Studios automated. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/videos/workflow-demonstration-recap # SECTION: videos > workflow-demonstration-recap # TYPE: Video # UPDATED: 2025-05-12 --- # PhotoRobot Workflow Demonstration - Video Recap Watch the video recap of the initial workflow presentation showcasing PhotoRobot technologies for the onboarding of new customers. - Length: 17:17 - Vimeo: https://vimeo.com/1082799544 ## Summary PhotoRobot presents a video recap of the joint sales presentation of [PhotoRobot technologies](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line). Revisit all the highlights our specialist technicians covered in the sales demonstration, with additional information for your consideration. Follow along from importing a shooting list to inventory & workflow management, robotized capture, outputs, post-processing, quality control, and automated delivery. The presentation describes each stage of production, and concludes with example outputs, shooting times, and total production times. Compare the features unique to PhotoRobot hardware and software. That includes setups for faster shooting, and presets for automatic capture & post-processing. We also showcase advanced image post-processing features, like auto centering spin image sets, and background removal by freemasking. Judge for yourself the levels of productivity thanks to full software integration of robots, cameras, lights, post-processing, APIs, and publishing. Also, feel free to access or download the slides to the [PhotoRobot Workflow Presentation](https://docs.google.com/presentation/d/1T8SCe_gSHYvPUvi7Gs8VRsAG18ANNyB0Jh5DVA-hVPY/edit?usp=sharing) from the video for review alongside watching and review at your own convenience. ## Chapters INTRO: PhotoRobot + Presentation Overview Import Shooting List Inventory Management Workflow Management Robotized Capture & Output Types Automated Post Production Cloud-Based Quality Control Automated Delivery & Publishing Outputs, Shooting Times, Production Times OUTRO: Summary & Unique Features ## Transcript *00:00* Hello. First and foremost, Thank you for the time spent with us during the joint presentation of PhotoRobot technologies! *00:09* Often, our demonstration focuses on the primary advantages of the technology as they apply to your business’s unique needs. *00:16* However, this means that sometimes we may overlook or not entirely cover certain solutions that will provide equal benefits to your business. *00:25* This is why we have created an overview of the presentation in video format, with everything in one place for your review. *00:33* Alternatively, the demo is available as a standalone file in the link provided, so feel free to explore each topic further at your own convenience. *00:42* Now, please join me for a complete recap of the PhotoRobot Workflow. *00:46* Since 2004, PhotoRobot has been designing and manufacturing automated photography systems for customers worldwide -- helping to speed up, standardize, and simplify their business’s photography. *00:59* Our line of software-driven photography robots are available in multiple sizes, and serve as an all-in-one solution to support every stage of object photography, from: prep, to capture, post-processing, and publishing. *01:13* Further, all systems feature serially produced components for long-term operations, and software automation to make every stage of production faster, simpler, and more scalable. *01:25* Outputs of PhotoRobot take the shape of still images, 360-degree spins, 3D images, 3D models, animations, and also video. *01:33* Then, at the heart of each system, carefully developed automation enables our customers to realize the highest levels of accuracy, consistency, and photo standardization – from one project to the next, time-and-time again. *01:48* To demonstrate, this presentation showcases the advantages of a traditional PhotoRobot production workflow in six stages. *01:56* We start with shooting list import and inventory management, covering along the way also: studio stock-in & stock-out; sorting items of similar categories to software shelves (or carts); and weighing & measuring objects with CubiScan. *02:11* Afterwards, we deep dive into the advantages of robotized capture, followed by automatic post-production, quality control features, and finally, automated content delivery. *02:22* Now, at the very start of any photoshoot, we can import shooting lists directly into a new project as a CSV file. *02:30* CSV files can contain product information with a name and barcode, as well as settings for an object’s automated photo-shooting. *02:38* This helps teams organize shooting lists by projects, products, names, tags, presets, workspaces, notes, and links. *02:46* Shooting lists will then also often contain capture presets to automate camera and light settings, and editing presets that contain settings to automate post-processing. *02:58* Users can then customize or modify shooting lists at any time, such as to add more rows, products, columns, or additional parameters. *03:07* After shooting list import, PhotoRobot has numerous features to support the easy tracking, sorting, weighing, and measuring of physical inventory. *03:17* This includes a user-friendly barcode system for streamlined inventory management, which supports three stages for receiving items. *03:25* First, there is: Studio stock-in & stock-out, with full barcode reader support. *03:30* Second, users can sort items to shelves with corresponding presets. *03:35* This is a way to visually assign presets before the item arrives at the robotic workspace. *03:40* Third, and finally, there is weighing & measuring items with CubiScan, which also allows for automated metadata assignment for hardware setup and photo export. *03:50* To demonstrate, we can automatically mark an item’s inventory status as received in the software by simply scanning its barcode. *03:58* Alternatively, we could do this manually by using the search feature. *04:02* Received and Sent items are then easily monitored in the software as soon as scanned in, or scanned out. *04:09* This allows for both efficiency and transparency in the product flow, while also making it easy to sort items with the same photography settings into groups. *04:18* Also, if CubiScan is present in the workflow, studios can automatically record product weights and dimensions in the system by scanning the item with the device. *04:28* CubiScan has full integration within PhotoRobot software, with barcode reader support as well as numerous integration features. *04:36* These include tools for immediate import of weights & dimensions in metric or imperial measurements. *04:42* The system can also automatically configure robot settings according to object dimensions, and export items with metadata containing their information. *04:52* After scanning an item, the item’s inventory status automatically changes in the system to "Measured". *04:58* Finally, sorting items to software “shelves” (or “carts”) is another way we ensure high-speed photoshoot prep. *05:04* This stage of inventory management enables users to associate presets for the photography and post-processing of different types of items to various shelves. *05:14* Users can then group items with the same presets to their corresponding shelf for more organized, systematic, and efficient prep before photoshoots involving multiple categories of objects. *05:26* When ready to begin shooting, PhotoRobot workflow management features help to ensure highly productive photoshoots. *05:33* The software organizes images into projects, items, and folders – with projects the highest level data entity. *05:40* Projects will include items from a single photoshoot, or from a one-day or even one-week session. *05:46* Single items are typically a specific, photographed object, and can include one or more folders such as to separate the spin image from the still images. *05:56* Note that the focus is on organizing items by their robotic workspaces rather than human talent. *06:02* We assign an item to its workspace, and then sort it to a corresponding shelf with presets if any. *06:08* This is easily specified in the system either in the CSV file, or manually with barcode reader support. *06:14* Robotized capture of outputs is then possible with total control over the entire studio from one software interface. *06:22* Software integration of cameras, camera settings, lights, strobes, DMX lights, and post production means it often requires only one click to run entire photography sequences. *06:33* There are also convenient tools for automatic download and file-naming, and features completely unique to PhotoRobot, such as non-stop image capture, which takes advantage of powerful strobes to technically freeze the object in place for photos. *06:49* As for PhotoRobot outputs, robotized capture is possible for still images (including GS1 compliant images), 360 spins, 3D spins, 3D models, and video. *06:59* In the software, we can configure and save presets for the operation of different robots, the capture of specific angles, control over studio lights, and running post-processing operations. *07:12* Presets are all reusable once configured, and also customizable for quick adjustments when shooting similar but slightly different objects. *07:21* Additionally, when using PhotoRobot with strobes, robotized capture is possible in Fast Shot Mode. *07:28* Fast shot mode is completely unique to PhotoRobot, and enables the extremely fast, non-stop capture of images without stopping the rotation of the turntable. *07:38* After capture, whether in traditional start-stop or fast shot mode, the software automatically changes the status of the item to Captured. *07:48* And here, users can configure & save all of these settings as presets to repeat capture and editing settings for similar types of objects, outputs, and style guide requirements. *07:59* Presets tell the system for example: which folders to create for images; turntable stops and angles to photograph; camera & light settings; robotic processes; editing settings; and basic to advanced automated post-processing operations. *08:16* This way, teams create presets to streamline the photography for any category of item. *08:21* It might be small & complex objects like jewelry and accessories, fashion products like clothing and footwear, or large and heavy items like automotive parts, bicycles, motorcycles, furniture, and even automobiles. *08:36* Post production is then often fully automated to ensure the fastest time to market possible. *08:42* Automated post production in PhotoRobot software can minimize or even completely eliminate the need for manual retouching. *08:50* Project-driven settings are configurable to set once and forget, process images without asking, backup automatically, and deliver files instantly. *08:59* The software automates basic to advanced post-processing operations, from auto cropping images and centering spins, to background removal by level, flood, or freemask. *09:10* There are also limitless operations to further optimize images, with the ability to save any configuration of enhancements as a preset. *09:18* This is why so many PhotoRobot clients do not retouch manually. It simply isn’t necessary. *09:25* But, nonetheless, we have developed support for companies who do use internal or external talent for manually retouching. *09:32* When the need arises, we can simply change the status of an item to “Ready to retouch” in the system. *09:38* Changing the item status this way then enables 3rd parties to download images from PhotoRobot Cloud, work their magic, and upload the retouched photos back for quality control. *09:49* On upload, the software then automatically labels the item as “Retouch done.” *09:54* In this way, collaboration is completely frictionless between team members and external talent, even remotely from anywhere around the world. *10:03* Next, cloud-based quality control ensures effective collaboration from anywhere, anytime. *10:09* PhotoRobot software allows for remote studio access on top of photoshoot and re-shoot control, with tools for streamlined client communication and review. *10:20* These include the ability to add notes for feedback, additional instructions, style guides, item statuses, downloads, and approval. *10:29* Additionally, to mark an item for quality assurance, users can select any item with the edited status, and change its status to: “Verified”, “Recapture”, or “Fix edit”. *10:41* It is also possible to do this with images with the “Captured” status, and mark them to “Send for retouch” or to “Recapture”. *10:49* Clients can then log into the PhotoRobot Controls Cloud, and only view items with the “Verified” status. *10:56* They can change this status to “Approved” to accept the image, or to “Rejected” to automatically send the image back. *11:04* It is then possible to grant users roles in the app to enable talent from anywhere in the world to access different tasks remotely thanks to PhotoRobot Cloud. *11:14* For this, the app provides four user roles, starting with the Production User. *11:20* The Production User is the team member responsible for capturing and editing images. *11:25* They are also the only user role who use PhotoRobot Controls App. *11:30* All other user roles access the system over the web – with no need to install anything. *11:35* This includes the Backstage user role, which grants user access for planning and review; and the Retoucher role, which provides access to download images, retouch images, and upload images back. *11:49* The Client role is then used to grant customer access to verified images for final review & quality assurance. *11:56* Now, for delivery and publishing, manually copying files and creating different filename structures with every output is a worry of the past. *12:06* PhotoRobot’s Automated Content Delivery system supports a wide range of features and rich API connectivity for fully automated, secure and feed-based XML or JSON format delivery. *12:19* This includes various export formats available for the same content, download, and client review. *12:26* Also, users are able to customize a long list of template variables. *12:30* These include filenames with template variables, such as for project & item names as well as custom metadata with named tags. *12:39* It is possible to configure image format, quality, and resolution, with images downloadable in jpeg, PNG, WebP, and Tiff formats. *12:48* There is also the option to save any export format for later reuse. *12:53* Further, automatic attachment of metadata is possible by item-level, image, camera, and custom configuration. *13:01* For example, item-level metadata stores information like barcodes, tracking codes, dimensions, presets, custom tags, and notes. *13:10* Image metadata contains information such as angles or labels of images. *13:15* Both item-level and image metadata, we can assign manually in the system, or via API connection. *13:22* Then, camera metadata contains info like locations, times, and camera settings; while custom tags enable users to modify at the item-level. *13:31* PhotoRobot’s automated content delivery system makes publishing instantly possible using PhotoRobot Hosting, or API connection to third party systems. *13:42* It’s possible to integrate PhotoRobot Viewer with any webpage to serve complete still image galleries, detailed images, 360 spins with hot spots, object animations, video, and more. *13:54* There is automatic image resizing, as well as instant availability for customers to view newly published outputs thanks to a global CDN. *14:03* There are features for publishing to third party systems like Shopify or WooCommerce, and also the ability for customers to write their own integration using our REST APIs. *14:14* For user-friendly publishing, all outputs have links and codes for easy access and embedded content to the web, with direct links or embedded image HTML codes. *14:25* It’s really as easy as copying and pasting a snippet of code for instant delivery of stills, galleries, and 360s to any web page or image hosting tool, like PhotoRobot Viewer. *14:36* Everything is designed for complete ease of use, including the API integrations. *14:41* Our API allows you to create projects with names, access changes, download new files, and generate custom reports about user activity. *14:50* This way, no matter the system requirements and reporting needs, PhotoRobot rises to the occasion. *14:57* In the end, see the outputs for yourself. *15:00* This example was captured, post-processed, and web-ready in only 1 minute 25 seconds. *15:06* The 360 spin consists of two rows of elevation, with 24 photos around the object in each row. *15:13* For this, we photographed the item using the Case 1300 in combination with a Robotic Arm. *15:20* The same parameters are true for the following example. *15:24* Our workflow provides a 360 spin, and 24 x 2 still images -- all automatically post-processed, and web-ready in extremely little time. *15:34* That’s the productivity we speak of when we present PhotoRobot. *15:39* We aim to support every stage of production, with customizable solutions to meet wide ranging use cases. *15:45* Our toolbox includes solutions completely unique to PhotoRobot, from Fast-Shot mode to automation for 3D object modeling or product video production. *15:55* All the while, ongoing software updates, new features, and regular communication ensure that all clients in the PhotoRobot ecosystem have access to the latest innovations. *16:06* Take for example advanced tools such as background removal by Freemasking, or our many optimizations like Auto Crop & Auto Centering. *16:14* There are also tools like Fix Tilt for items that may have a wobble-effect in 360 spins, quick navigation features for easier digital asset management, and the list is far from complete there. *16:27* Really, is there anything else you can ask for in a system to speed up and simplify your business’s photography? *16:33* We hope this presentation has helped you see how PhotoRobot can help, and we can look forward to tailoring a solution to your business's specific needs together. *16:44* The next step will be configuring a robotic module, which you will demo live to test and judge by the production speeds. *16:51* Our solution specialist will consult with your team on the types of objects you need to photograph, and then create your unique demonstration. *17:00* Just contact us again when ready to proceed, or should you have any more questions about our technology. *17:07* We thank you for your attention. Our team at PhotoRobot looks forward to continuing the discussion soon! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/customer-webhooks # SECTION: blog > customer-webhooks # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-09-30 --- # Introducing: Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud PhotoRobot introduces Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud to connect your DAM, PIM, ERP, or custom automation with signed outbound webhooks. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud Your developers and IT teams can now connect PhotoRobot Cloud to your DAM, PIM, ERP, or custom automation with signed outbound webhooks. Customer webhooks in PhotoRobot Cloud offer reliable, event-driven data delivery – ensuring full connectivity between your studio and systems. ## Close the Loop Between Your Studio and Systems Ensure your downstream systems know when an item status changes or a hosting-availability event occurs. PhotoRobot Cloud Customer Webhooks deliver each event to your endpoints so that integrations remain event-driven – not polling-based. The live events are: - **item.status.changed** – committed capture-status change on one item. - **item.status.bulk_changed** — one event after a Cloud bulk status change. - **hosting.item.availability.changed** — hosted media became downloadable or unavailable. - **webhook.subscription.test** — Send test only. ## Reliable, Event-Driven Data Delivery Customer Webhooks in PhotoRobot Cloud include features for: - **Outbound webhook subscriptions** managed alongside your developer integrations. - **Signed HTTP delivery** so receivers can verify authenticity. - **“Send test” and filters** to confirm webhook subscription and signature verification. - **Delivery log** to inspect the payload, HTTP status, and retries. - **Developer UI under Webhooks** — webhooks and deliveries live next to API keys. ## Speaking Your Language for Production Integrations Customer Webhooks are the missing link between robotized capture and company systems of record. The webhook is a signed signal, carrying only small payloads on purpose. After 2xx, the integration pulls the current item from REST v2 (pull.itemUrl / pull.deltaUrl). Webhooks can notify a publisher, or, after the pull, facilitate your team in kicking off a CDN purge or updating a marketplace listing. PhotoRobot Cloud now speaks your language for production integrations. ## A Signal, Then a Pull Payloads remain small on purpose. Each payload names the **event**, the **organization**, and **(when relevant) the item**, plus **pull.itemUrl** and **pull.deltaUrl**. Payloads do **not** carry image binaries, full folder trees, or a complete product record. The pattern developers should implement is: 1. Receive the POST and verify X-PhotoRobot-Signature against the raw body. 2. Return 2xx quickly — do the DAM import or marketplace update in your own worker. 3. Deduplicate by event ID. Delivery is at-least-once. 4. Fetch the current state from REST v2 hosting using the pull URLs. That split is what makes the integration reliable. PhotoRobot does not wait for your catalog job to finish, and your system never treats a notification as the catalog. ## Common Examples of Customer Webhooks in Use The most common use cases for Customer Webhooks in the PhotoRobot ecosystem include: - **PIM or DAM refresh.** Subscribe to hosting.item.availability.changed. When hosted media becomes downloadable, pull itemUrl and update the product — spins, stills, and metadata in one pass. - **Marketplace listing.** Filter hosting events to “Became downloadable.” Publish or update the listing only after PhotoRobot can actually serve the images. - **Production-board visibility.** Subscribe to item.status.changed when your ERP or QC board needs to know an item moved to EDITED, APPROVED, or PUBLISHED — even before hosting is ready. - **Bulk campaign updates.** After a large status change in Cloud, one item.status.bulk_changed event arrives with a deltaUrl. Catch up the affected set instead of expecting thousands of per-item webhooks. - **Cache or CDN invalidation.** When hosting flips to available or unavailable, purge or warm the paths your storefront already knows. The webhook is the trigger; Hosting API is the source of the new URLs. ## How to Configure Your Customer Webhooks To set up Customer Webhooks for PhotoRobot Cloud, open your PhotoRobot Account in Developers mode and use Webhooks to create a webhook subscription. Then, point the subscription at your staging endpoint to verify the first delivery. 1. Sign in to PhotoRobot Account and open **Developers → Webhooks**. 2. Create a webhook. Paste your HTTPS endpoint, give it an internal name, and pick the events you need. 3. Copy the signing secret when it appears — it is shown once until you rotate it. 4. Click **Send test**. Confirm webhook.subscription.test arrives and the signature verifies. 5. Open **Delivery log** to inspect the payload, HTTP status, and retries. 6. Point the first subscription at a staging endpoint. For more technical information including developer contract and signature examples, refer to [PhotoRobot Developer Portal – Webhooks](https://developer.photorobot.com/#/doc/webhooks). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tracking-production-status # SECTION: blog > tracking-production-status # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-09-24 --- # Tracking Production Status in PhotoRobot Controls Workflows Promote trust in your production line with PhotoRobot Controls features to confirm sync, track activity, and report workflow statuses. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Confirm Sync, Track Activity, Automatically Report Status PhotoRobot Controls delivers software features for greater **transparency**, **traceability,** and **trust** in your production line. Confirm sync at a glance. View status of projects and items worldwide. Track activity, and automatically report workflow status. Know what’s happening, what is ongoing, and what happens next. Read ahead to learn about taking full advantage of **sync status visibility**, **activity audit logs**, and **automatic workflow statuses**. ## Sync Status Visibility – See Pending Sync at a Glance Your _Controls software makes it possible for hybrid studios to see a pending synchronization between the cloud and their workstations. This way, your hybrid studio always knows when the cloud and workstation are catching up. A **sync badge in PhotoRobot _Controls** shows pending local and server changes – so it takes only a glance to know if synchronization is pending. ### Hybrid Studios Need Sync Visibility As PhotoRobot thrives in workflows combining local and cloud operation, sync visibility is crucial. Operators need to see when uploads, downloads, or reconciles are in flight – without opening a debug console. Thus, the _Controls **sync badge** that surfaces pending local / server changes also displays **Cloud sync status** and **Studio Status monitors** for deeper diagnostics. ### What Teams Gain from Sync Visibility In addition to the benefits for hybrid studios, sync visibility supports: - **Immediate awareness** that sync work remains — before closing a session or switching machines. - **Fewer “missing file” surprises** when cloud users expect desktop captures to already be available. - **A bridge to Support 2.0 diagnostics** when something needs investigation beyond a simple wait. ### Quiet Confidence in Your Workflows Sync should be invisible when healthy – and obvious when it is not. The sync badge is that signal, remaining invisible until you need it. In the latest version of _Controls, watch the sync badge during a busy capture-and-upload window. Then, confirm pending work clears before you leave the station. ## Unified Studio & Operational Activity Audit Logs A unified PhotoRobot **activity audit trail** enables your team to trace what happened in the studio and in operations. You gain clarity for support, compliance, and process improvement. ### Know Who Did What and When Teams need a single place to reconstruct the story when something unexpected occurs. This is especially true in high-volume production studios, which generate thousands of actions per shift. **Unified studio and operational activity logs** mean your production-floor activity and operational events share one coherent trail. This way, when an event does occur, it becomes easier to investigate who did what and when for quicker troubleshooting. ### How Studios Integrate Activity Audit Trails Activity audit logs enable teams to quickly reconstruct incidents, follow how the work actually flows, and gain frictionless operational visibility. This aids in: - **Support & diagnostics** — reconstruct sequences of actions around an incident. - **Process review** — see how work actually flows versus how it was designed. - **Accountability** — operational visibility without interrupting production. ### Quiet Power for Serious Operation Audit logs are not flashy — they are foundational. Together with the Help & Support diagnostics in the [Controls Support 2.0 release](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-support-version), audit logs deepen PhotoRobot’s commitment to transparent, recoverable studio operations. To see for yourself, ask your PhotoRobot admin to open activity audit logs after updating to the latest version of _Controls. Then, review a recent production window with your team. ## Configurable Automatic Item Workflow Statuses For instant reporting and greater transparency, deploy **configurable automatic item workflow statuses**. Define how item statuses advance after completing capture, edit, cloud edit, and Touch – so PhotoRobot _Controls mirrors *your* production process automatically. ### Status Should Always Follow Your Work While every studio may name stages of production differently, the labels matter – and so does when they change. From “Captured” to “In retouch” and “Ready to publish,” team members must remain aligned on what each item status means, and what must follow. PhotoRobot _Controls does just that, with support for **organization-level workflow status settings**. Choose the default status for new items, and configure automatic transitions after key production events. ### Configurable Automatic Transitions After Events To support key production events, there are configurable automatic transitions for: - **New items** — start every SKU in the right bucket. - **After capture** — mark work ready for edit or review without a manual click. - **After edit / cloud edit** — keep desktop and cloud pipelines aligned. - **Touch complete** — close the loop when mobile capture finishes on the floor. ### One Settings Surface Visible & Editable for Admins A **unified settings UI** keeps workflow rules visible and editable for admins. This same behavior is available across both cloud and desktop configurations. ### Why Studios Care – A More Reliable Dashboard Manual status updates are the silent tax on high-volume production, and automating them not only supports smoother production workflows. It also helps to reduce questions like “where is this SKU?” – keeping your dashboard truthful. To adjust your workflow status settings, simply ensure you are running an up-to-date version of _Controls software. Then, open your organization workflow status settings, and map each production event to the statuses your team already uses. ## Know Where Everything Stands in Your Studio Tracking production status in PhotoRobot _Controls helps you know where everything stands in your studio at all times. It promotes trust in your production lines by allowing for greater support, diagnosis, and development of workflows. Simply ensure you are running an up-to-date version of _Controls for the latest innovations in automated photography. PhotoRobot _Controls mirrors your production – with features constantly evolving around every unique business in the PhotoRobot ecosystem. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-operator-ergonomics # SECTION: blog > enhancing-operator-ergonomics # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-09-18 --- # Enhancing Operator Ergonomics on Your Photo Studio Floor Explore the latest updates in Controls software to support operator ergonomics on your PhotoRobot-powered studio floor. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Controls Delivers Detached Live View & Quick-Angle Presets Your [PhotoRobot Controls software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) now has **detached Live View** & **quick-angle presets** to optimize operator ergonomics when capturing your company’s visuals. These tools help to accelerate capture workflows and enhance throughput on the production floor. Detached Live View not only gives LiveView the screen it deserves. It allows operators to pay full attention to camera framing while working on multiple monitors. Quick-angle presets are then just one click away. Each saves your favorite angles for PhotoRobot Turn and Swing robots with configurable quick-preset buttons. There are fewer dials, and faster framing. Read ahead how to deploy detached Live View and quick-angle presets in PhotoRobot Controls for greater operator ergonomics in your studio. ## Detached Live View: Multi-Monitor Capture Control A detachable Live View allows operators to pop PhotoRobot Live View into its own window. This way, you can compose on a second screen while keeping PhotoRobot _Controls workflows active on the primary display. ### Providing Live View the Screen It Deserves The Detached Live View window is optimal for multi-monitor studios. After all, on a production floor, camera framing deserves full attention – not a cramped panel beside menus and lists. ### Enabling Photographers, Stylists, and Review Support production floor operators from your capture artists to the stylists and their reviews. - **Dedicated composition screen** for photographers and stylists - **Primary display stays operational** for sequences, folders, and item navigation - **Faster decisions** when reviewing framing, focus, and lighting before the next spin ### A Design to Support Multi-Monitor Studios Detached Live View supports studios running dual monitors, capture stations beside packing tables, and teams that separate “look at the product” from “drive the software.” To access detached live view, open the Capture mode Live View in _Controls, and detach the window onto your second monitor. You can then continue capturing without shrinking your workflow UI. ## Quick-Angle Presets for Turn & Swing Robots The angles your team uses every day are just one click away thanks to quick-angle presets for Turn & Swing robots. Jump PhotoRobot Turn and Swing robots to your favorite angles with configurable quick-preset buttons – fewer dials, faster framing. ### Angles You Use Every Day, Just One Click Away **Configurable quick-angle presets** allow your photographers to quickly return to the angles they use every day with just one click. For example, product photographers return to the same hero angles constantly: front, three-quarter, profile, detail. Quick-angle presets save your repeated positions on Turn and Swing robots and keep them live in the header – not buried in menus. ### Features for Smoother Capture Configuration Configurable quick-angle presets ensure smoother capture sequences for your operators, providing: - **Quick-angle buttons** in the robot header for instant go-to-position moves. - **Configurable presets** (up to four) persisted per robot. - **Configuration from the robot menu** when a campaign needs a different set of angles. ### Support for High-Volume Throughput on the Floor In high-volume sessions, every second hunting for an angle is a second not styling or capturing. Quick-angle presets turn framing into a muscle-memory click to speed up any production line operator. To begin using quick-angle presets in your workflows, ensure you are running the latest version of PhotoRobot Controls. Then, open Turn or Swing controls, configure your four most-used angles, and run the next sequence directly from the header presets. ## Technology to Fully Support Your Studio Teams With every update, PhotoRobot _Controls evolves to better support studio teams and their production of rich visuals. Ensure you are running the most up-to-date version of _Controls to access the latest features like detached Live View and quick-angle presets. PhotoRobot Controls delivers continuous innovation in automated photography directly to your production line. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/productive-studio-management-software # SECTION: blog > productive-studio-management-software # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-09-14 --- # Make PhotoRobot Controls Look Like Your Studio Find your work faster with smarter project item lists, project pinning, organization-wide colored tags, and a cleaner Controls settings experience. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Finding Your Work Faster in PhotoRobot Controls Make [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) look like your studio and find work faster with **smarter project item lists**, **project pinning**, **organization-colored tags**, and a **settings appearance redesign**. - Configure project item lists with customizable columns and faster selection. - Pin active projects to the top of your Projects page so you never lose high-priority tasks. - Set organization-level color tags to convey status and priority. - Manage settings on focused pages with a unified hero UI. Read ahead to see how to find your work faster while making _Controls look more like your actual studio. ## 1 - Smarter Project & Item Lists For better organization of your project item lists, PhotoRobot Controls features **customizable columns** and **faster selection**. This allows teams to work the All-items view like a production console – all without leaving your filtered list behind. ### Lists with a Design for Throughput As project and item lists are the control surface of every PhotoRobot studio, their design must maximize throughput. PhotoRobot _Controls makes it faster to read and select lists, and easier to personalize them. ### Column Selector with Visibility Preferences Choose which columns appear on project and item lists — including optional **Created** and **Created by** — with visibility preferences that persist. Show only what your role needs; hide the rest. ### Selection That Keeps Up Features to support faster selection means selection will never lag behind. - **Cmd/Ctrl+A** shortcuts for table selection speed up bulk actions. - **Row selection on All Items pages** brings the same multi-select muscle memory to cross-project views. - **Pair with filter-aware export** so bulk delivery matches what you selected or filtered. ### Status Icons Refresh The refreshed **Item status icons** change icons into Material Symbols. This allows for clearer, more consistent status reading across the app. ### Less Scrolling, Fewer Mis-Clicks, Adaptable Lists Smarter project & item lists amount to less scrolling for your studio managers, with fewer mis-clicks slowing down production. Better yet, lists are adaptable to photographer, retoucher, and manager roles in the same organization. Simply open any project or list item, use the column menu, and save a layout that matches how you triage work. ## 2 - Pin Your Projects: Quicker Access to What Matters Most Quickly mark & access what matters most by pinning active projects to the top of your PhotoRobot Projects page. With **personal pinning**, your high-priority work never scrolls out of sight. Set your priorities without changing what your colleagues see. There is **less searching** and **more production** thanks to one-click entry into any of your projects. ### End the Long Searches for Active Work In busy studios, the Projects list grows quickly, but PhotoRobot _Controls helps you keep the pace. Controls allows each user to **individually pin projects**, with dedicated **pinning settings** keeping favorites easy to find. This way, your seasonal campaigns, VIP clients, and today’s shoot lists never compete with archived or low-priority folders. ### How Project Pinning Helps Keep the Order Your studio organization remains in place with personal pins and individual settings. - **Personal pins** on the Projects page keep *your* active work visible — without changing what colleagues see. - **Settings control** allows for pinning behavior that matches how your team navigates production. - **Less searching, more shooting** — open the right project in one click at the start of every shift. ### Ideal for Multi-Project Studios Quicker access to your studio’s top priorities is crucial whether you run one flagship brand or dozens of client workspaces. Project pinning turns project navigation into muscle memory, with a design to support multi-project studios. To start pinning projects, simply open the Projects page, pin the campaigns you open every day, and notice the difference in your next session. ## 3 - Organization-Wide Colored Tags Create every tag in a consistent color across your organization so that status, category, and priority jump out of every project and list item. Customize your **organization color scheme**, with **organization-level color mappings**, **colored chips in lists**, and **tags settings management**. ### Color That Means the Same for Everyone Tags are only useful when the whole team reads them the same, so _Controls aligns teams with **organization-scoped colored tags**. Simply define a color once in settings, and see it everywhere tags appear. Set your colors, and align your team. ### Quicker Management, Greater Productivity Fully align teams for quicker management and greater productivity thanks to: - **Org-level color mappings** so “rush,” “retouch,” or “marketplace” always look the same. - **Colored chips in lists** for faster scanning across large catalogs. - **Settings management** to add, update, and validate tag colors without custom CSS hacks. ### Tags to Fully Support Your Production Floors When hundreds of SKUs move through capture, edit, and publish every day, visual coding outperforms text-only labels every time. Colored tags transform triage into a glance – for photographers, retouchers, and project managers. Manage your tags by opening Settings in _Controls, and use Tags (organization) to assign colors to the labels your team already uses. ## 4 - Cleaner Controls Settings Experience – And Appearance Your settings in _Controls are now in **focused pages with a unified hero UI**. This includes a new **Appearance page** for **language**, **folder colors**, and **optional image-folder borders**. Your settings match how your real studio works. ### Settings to Match How Studios Work To ensure configuration feels as intentional as capture, PhotoRobot _Controls has refreshed settings list pages and entity dialogs. Both are now in clearer, focused screens – making them easier to scan, and easier to teach to new operators. ### Consistent Layouts, Smooth Dialogs, Adaptable Pages Comfortably manage _Controls in the studio, now with: - **Revamped settings pages** featuring a consistent hero-style layout for each area. - **Streamlined entity dialogs** for creating and editing configuration without clutter. - **Appearance page** — language and folder colors move out of General into a dedicated home. - **Optional image-folder borders** — opt into a customizable colored border on selected folder thumbnails while keeping the subtle highlight as the default for existing users. ### Reducing Operator Mistakes with Visual Cues Visual cues on folders reduce mistakes when operators jump between Still, Spin, and custom directories under pressure. Appearance settings make those cues a deliberate studio choice — not a hidden preference buried in General. Ensure you are running the latest version of _Controls to access the smoother settings experience and appearance. Open Settings and then Appearance, and tailor folder highlighting to your floor workflow. ## PhotoRobot Controls - Unlocking Greater Studio Productivity PhotoRobot Controls is always evolving with the client ecosystem to ensure greater support and productivity in your automated photography workflows. Find your work faster. Manage quicker, and capture more. PhotoRobot _Controls becomes your studio – connecting your workflows to the robots, cameras, lights, and post-production for full automation in one software. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/channel-ready-export # SECTION: blog > channel-ready-export # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-09-09 --- # From Crop to Channel-Ready Delivery in PhotoRobot Editor Marketplace and web formats leave the editor channel-ready. Crop & deliver at target pixel sizes. Keep image metadata intact. Export exactly what you see. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Achieving Publishable Files Directly in the Editor [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) delivers smarter controls for retrieving publishable files directly from the editor. This includes the function to crop with output resizing, which is especially fit for eCommerce and multi-channel brands. At the same time, smarter export ensures assets are web-ready when they leave the editor – with metadata, formats and filter-aware delivery. Read ahead to learn how these new features in PhotoRobot _Controls help your teams to produce web-ready assets with ease. ## Crop with Output Resizing Directly in the Editor Crop and deliver at the target pixel size in one editorial pass – directly from within the editor. Marketplace and web formats are instantly channel-ready, with product image metadata intact, and targeting the right folders. You export exactly what your filtered list shows. ### Crop Is Not Only Composition Ecommerce channels demand fixed dimensions as often as they demand perfect framing. PhotoRobot _Controls adds **output resizing support to editor crop**, so teams can **crop and size** for delivery without a separate batch tool. ### What Operators Gain The output resizing support to the editor’s crop means your team can: - **Crop for composition**, then resize to the required output dimensions. - **Ensure fewer round-trips** between editor, export profiles, and external converters. - **Produce channel-ready stills** for marketplaces, PDPs, and campaign assets from the same edit session. ### Fit for Multi-Channel Brands When one SKU often requires several crops and sizes, the resize function in the crop workflow keeps high-volume editing inside _Controls – where production already lives. Simply open an item in the editor, use crop with output resizing, and save a channel-ready frame without leaving the _Controls interface. ## Smarter Export: Metadata, Formats & Filter-Aware Delivery Also helping to ensure your operators deliver channel-ready assets directly from the editor, there is **smart export of metadata and formats** with **filter-aware delivery**. This way, you keep your product image metadata intact no matter where it travels. Exports target the right folders every time, while your team exports exactly what their filtered lists show. All directly from PhotoRobot _Controls. ### Export Built for High-Volume Delivery Shipping product imagery is more than clicking Export. Brands need consistent IPTC/XMP keywords. They require correct copyright defaults, folder-specific formats, and confidence that the export matches the items they filtered on screen. Thus, PhotoRobot _Controls treats **export as a guided, production-grade delivery step** – not just a black box. ### Image Metadata That Travels With Your Assets Manage image metadata once, then embed it at export time. - **Preserve EXIF / XMP / IPTC** on FINAL images so camera and rights data survive processing. - **Organization defaults** for artist, company, and copyright keep every delivery on-brand. - **Item tags as keywords** — tags flow into IPTC/XMP for DAM and marketplace pipelines. - **Per-item overrides** when a single SKU needs different rights or labeling. Metadata stays current due to the embedding occurring when you export — not weeks earlier when the file was first processed. ### Per-Folder Output Format Filters Not every folder needs every format. Configure Still and Spin outputs to target specific folder names so galleries, spins, and stills each get the right package. Independent gallery options (HTML preview, SpinViewer, JSON, thumbnails) let you ship exactly what downstream systems expect — nothing more, nothing less. ### Export What You See When selecting nothing, export now respects the **current list filter** instead of dumping the entire project. Combining this with clearer scope messaging in the export dialog, operators know whether they are exporting selected items, a filtered set, or everything. ### Support for High-Volume Production High-volume production studios can lose unnecessary time re-tagging files after the fact, or re-running exports that included the wrong SKUs. These updates to _Controls close the gap between what production sees in the software and what leaves the studio. Simply boot up the latest version of _Controls software, and open export on a filtered item list to see the smarter, stepped export experience. ## PhotoRobot Controls - Evolving Around Your Workflows With smart export to support channel-ready delivery fit for multi-channel brands and high-volume production studios, PhotoRobot Controls delivers. Transform your photos from crop to publishable files directly out of the editor, with image metadata that travels with products. Simply ensure you are running the latest version of _Controls for access to the newest innovations evolving around your workflows. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smarter-photorobot-account # SECTION: blog > smarter-photorobot-account # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-09-04 --- # A Smarter PhotoRobot Account - Rebuilt for Admins The PhotoRobot Account Dashboard now prioritizes account health and expands account control for administrators, finance, IT, and ops teammates. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Prioritizing Account Health on the Dashboard Home Your PhotoRobot Account Dashboard just got smarter, with your home now prioritizing account health. Updates provide your admins with **attention banners**, **overview KPIs**, **package seats**, **storage usage**, **licensing & support status,** and **additional info on how billing works**. Your admins can act before production feels any impact. ### Rebuilding Your Account Home for Action It’s time to eliminate the long hunts across billing, users, and support for your organization admins to resolve issues that arise. The Dashboard now places **commercial and operational signals in one place** – calm when healthy, loud when something requires attention. Admins land on the revamped Dashboard immediately after login, while non-admin users access it through My Profile instead. This way, the Dashboard remains a true command surface for people who manage the organization. ### What the Dashboard Shows Organization admins on the Dashboard home receive all their account health signals in one place. - **Needs attention** – subscription blocked or pending payment, missing invoice email, unpaid orders, support replies waiting, failed webhooks, and pending invitations — with direct CTAs - **Overview** – storage used vs limit, seats used vs ordered, active users, and subscription status at a glance - **Package seat meters** – Production, Backstage, Retoucher, and API seats with remaining counts and clear warnings when you are about to run out - **Storage usage** – compact cloud storage chart so capacity stays visible before it becomes a blocker - **Licenses & support** – robot support (PWS) and local application licenses with active, expiring, and expired counts ### A Design to Fully Support Your Account Admins Whether you manage the organization as a product user with admin rights, or as an **Account-only administrator**, the Dashboard is the place to check posture before the shoot day starts. Healthy items remain neutral, while warnings and risks escalate only when action is necessary. The page stays readable every morning, not busy. Simply sign in to your PhotoRobot Account as an organization admin. Open the Dashboard, and clear anything that **Needs attention** before your next production window. ## Account-Only Admins – Manage without Spending Seats Provide finance, IT, and ops teammates full PhotoRobot Account control – without a Cloud or Desktop license, and without consuming a package seat. Account-only admins receive full control to **manage users, billing, licenses, and support**. ### Organization Management Without Using a Capture Seat Studios often need someone to invite new users, renew subscriptions, and open support tickets — not to shoot or retouch. Until now, that person usually needed a paid Production or Backstage seat plus admin rights. Now, PhotoRobot Account offers a dedicated **Account-only administrator** role. The role does not consume a package seat, and scopes strictly to Account management. ### What Account-Only Admins Can Do Account-only administrators are able to: - **Manage the organization** — invite and edit users, handle billing, licenses, API keys, and support. - **Stay on Account** — land on the admin Dashboard; no Cloud content access, and no Desktop / sync login. - **Cost nothing in seats** — the role does not count toward package seat limits. - **Clear invite UX** — choose “Account-only access” separately from product roles (Production, Backstage, External Retoucher). ### Two Ways Account-Only Admins Can Administer Do you need someone who also photographs and retouches? Assign a product role, and enable **Also manage the organization**. What about someone who only runs the account? Then, invite them as an **Account-only administrator** – focused, and correctly gated. ## PhotoRobot Account – Built for Growing Photo Studio Teams The combination of a **smarter Dashboard** with Account-only administrators aims to support the growth of your PhotoRobot-powered studio teams. As studios scale, finance and operations should not have to burn through production seats. Account-only administrator roles keep commercial control with the right people – leaving licensed seats for people who create content. It’s extremely simple, too. Just open your PhotoRobot Account, and invite a teammate under **Account-only access**. They will then have access to open the smart Dashboard, Users, and Billing – all without a Cloud link. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobot-academy # SECTION: blog > introducing-photorobot-academy # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-08-03 --- # Rapidly Onboard Studio Teams with PhotoRobot Academy Train and certify teams to run studios like production lines in PhotoRobot Academy, the official training program for the PhotoRobot ecosystem. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## What is PhotoRobot Academy? [PhotoRobot Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy) provides studio teams official training & certification for the user roles and speciality domains within the PhotoRobot ecosystem. The curriculum supports the complete and frictionless onboarding of production line operators, studio managers, integrators, network and hardware specialists, and certified instructors. This includes available training courses in five specialty domains (OCR, 3D modeling, PINK - Clinical, Virtual Catwalk, and carpet photography). After all, our [product photography hardware](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) and [automated photo studio software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) are sophisticated. But, with proper knowledge and training, studios can produce upwards of **5x the throughput at 2x the quality**. Thus, PhotoRobot Academy compresses years of operating experience into role-based curricula – so your teams can **reach production fluency in weeks,** not seasons. There are 11 certification tracks, with 62 modules, and one credential per role. Track teams as they progress to certification, and, in the end, obtain the functional knowledge and the credentials to survive any audit. ## From Studio to High-Speed Production Line Among the primary goals of PhotoRobot Academy, the curriculum aims to teach **production cadence**, not improvisation. With capture times often under 20 seconds and automated post-production managing the rest, certified operators are able to run at approximately 1 product per minute. This cadence should scale accordingly to complex setups, such as for heavy and larger items, custom arrangements, or multi-angle styling. Certification in the functional operation of PhotoRobot thus validates that your team has internalized the discipline, not simply memorized the buttons. Certified teams **produce at the same standard, in every studio and during every shift**. The training ensures visually consistent outputs from one operator to the next, location to location. There are standardized capture mechanics, locked color disciplines, and repeatable edit recipes so that your visual catalog never looks like 5 different photographers shot it. Every **certification with 2 years validity** documents the customer’s competence on the platform while providing credentials to survive audits. Customers use the credentials in supplier qualification programs, vendor evaluations, service-level agreements — as **formal evidence of platform fluency**, not self-attestation. Certifications amount to **day-one productivity, not trial-and-error**. A new operator only requires a 2-day intensive program (or equivalent self-paced study) to become immediately production-ready. Compare that to an operator without structured training, whose ramp-up is 6-12 months of trial-and-error, with avoidable mistakes along the way. The cost of just one mis-shot product launch will typically exceed the investment for the entire team’s certification. ## How It Works: Eleven Cert Tracks Across Two Layers There are **six foundational tracks** and **five specialty tracks** consisting of multiple **modules** in PhotoRobot Academy. Each module is a focused learning block (typically 30 to 90 minutes) covering specific topics: workspace configuration, lighting setup, post-processing, machine assembly, network setup and more. Modules also include a textbook for reference reading, a workbook with exercises and self-check questions, and a concept checking quiz drawn from a question pool. At the same time, **packages** combine modules into complete courses tailored to specific roles. For example, the Operator Standard package covers the daily-use modules an operator needs. Specialty packages add advanced topics such as 3D modeling, OCR workflows, and Virtual Catwalk operation. **Certification** is then offered for each main role: Operator, Studio Manager, Network Specialist, Hardware Specialist, Integrator. Online certification exams produce verifiable certificates with **QR-code public verification**. Specialty add-on certifications stack on top of role certifications. | Foundational Tracks (6, Role-Based) | Specialty Tracks (5, Domain-Based — Stack on a Foundational Cert) | | --- | --- | | **Operator Standard** The broadest entry point—for operators running PhotoRobot equipment day-to-day. *13 modules • ~16 hours* **Studio Manager Essentials** For studio leads managing workflows, operators and production quality. *13 modules • ~18 hours* **Integrator Essentials** Installation, deployment and customer handover for PhotoRobot systems. *8 modules* **Network Specialist Essentials** Network configuration, connectivity and system communication. *6 modules* **Hardware Specialist Essentials** Hardware installation, servicing and maintenance procedures. *7 modules* **Instructor Certification (CI)** Qualification for delivering certified PhotoRobot training. *4 modules* | **OCR Specialist** Retail planogram, pharma labeling and GS1 compliance for OCR-heavy deployments. *4 modules* **3D Modeling Specialist** Photogrammetry workflow, capture discipline, QC and delivery integration for AR, automotive and fashion 3D. *4 modules* **PINK Specialist** Certification for the PINK clinical photography system covering patient communication, privacy, kiosk workflow and remote physician video calls. *4 modules* Designed for the small fleet of clinics operating PINK. **Virtual Catwalk Specialist** Live-model motion capture using continuous lighting for fashion video production. *4 modules* **Carpet Photography Specialist** Flat-rollout multi-camera capture, virtual room compositing and robotic turntable workflows. *3 modules* | - **Foundational tracks cover the core PhotoRobot roles in any studio.** - This includes the initial training for the performance of different roles like machine operators, studio managers, and specialists. - **Specialty tracks stack domain-specific knowledge on top of a foundational cert.** - For example, specialty domains include [OCR](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/grocery-product-photography), [3D modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model), [carpet photography](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/carpet-studio), and operation of specialized systems like [PhotoRobot PINK](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pink-the-medical-robot-photographer) or the [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk). This 2-layer system not only ensures that training follows a logical stage of progression for each individual team member. It also guarantees the quick and smooth onboarding of studio teams serving particular industries or product categories. The team members enroll in only the foundational tracks necessary for their roles, and then build on formal certs to specialization, or Instructor Certification. ## One Curriculum, Three Delivery Formats No matter if you need training for a single new hire or a 15-operator studio team, delivery of the Academy curriculum is flexible to meet your logistics, budget, and timeline. Standard programs are available in three delivery formats: **on-site, at PhotoRobot Studio, or self-paced online**. You choose the format that meets your studio’s needs, while the curriculum remains the same. The standard format for training on-site or at PhotoRobot Studio covers 2 days. However, extended formats (5-day deep-dives, multi-week mentoring, embedded instructor weeks) are available on request as separate engagements. ### On-Site Academy Training At Your Studio The on-site PhotoRobot Academy (recommended) involves **2 days of intensive training** with a certified PhotoRobot Instructor who travels directly to your location. This instructor works on your equipment, while training runs according to the specific hardware variant, lighting setup, network configuration, and the workflow your team uses in production. The instruction covers every preset, every recipe, and every habit necessary for production – which all become immediately usable in live shifts the following morning. Your teams keep the configured presets. Recipes remain in the shelf library. The instruction ends, and your team is production fluent. ### 2-Day Intensive Training at PhotoRobot Studio Group training programs at PhotoRobot Studio take place over **2 days just outside of Prague**, in Klecany, Czech Republic. There is hands-on training with real PhotoRobot equipment, all instructor-led over a fixed 2-day agenda per role. The program consists of module knowledge checks, hands-on practice, and a final certification exam. Typically, this option is best for the onboarding of new PhotoRobot customers, teams of 2-15 who can travel together, and customers without already-installed equipment. ### Self-Paced Online Certification The self-paced online certification covers the complete curriculum which is offered during in-person training. Typically, this requires **2-3 weeks at 4-5 hours per week** to complete the online study,and receive formal certification. This option is popular for the onboarding of solo operators, single new hires, distributed teams, or as preparation before an in-person intensive program. ## Academy Enrollment to Formal Certification On enrollment, formal Academy certification involves **training**, **proving**, and **maintaining** knowledge in a specific discipline. Students complete the curriculum at their chosen pace and format, with module-based knowledge-checks to validate progress. For most studios, this often includes a combination of self-paced online study with a 2-day intensive program before taking the cert exam. Students consolidate what they've learned through knowledge checks at the end of each chapter, and then take their final certification exam. Passing an exam then provides the student with a credential valid for two years. The cert provides the employer confidence that their team genuinely knows the platform and will run the equipment efficiently. Certs are also shareable on LinkedIn, defensible in company audits, and usable in supplier qualification programs. Before the cert expires, students take a refresher exam, which is in a lighter format but with a higher pass bar to confirm the current discipline. ## Measurable ROI in Academy Certifications Pass supplier audits without the scramble. Commit to quality SLAs you can defend. Standardize error correction, and provide a transparent career path for your top operators. These are the advantages of the Academy certs. PhotoRobot certification provides **defensible, formal evidence of your team’s competency** on the platform you use to deliver imagery. Every cert documents which student passed which cert exam, when, with what validity period. All auditable, and traceable to specific tracks. At the same time, certified teams provide **measurable and repeatable results** you can rely on and commit to in numbers. Outputs vary at absolute minimum, so turnaround time, image quality consistency, and defect rates are predictable and presentable. Certified teams understand PhotoRobot's most common operational failures as well. This means team members not only **encounter less failures**. They also **recover faster when errors do occur**. Their lessons from specific tracks cover areas from incorrect color discipline to improper capture modes for sample weights, lighting setups which flatten texture-revealing materials, version-control mistakes during reshoot cycles, and more. Then, in the end, certifications stack – **creating a clear career path** to retain your best operators. Certs progress from standard operation to a specialty track, and finally Instructor Certification. The ROI of retaining senior operators then typically far outweighs the initial certification investment. ## How to Enroll Your Studio Team in PhotoRobot Academy When enrolling in the Academy, PhotoRobot sales technicians can help guide you through the best cert combinations, delivery format, and timeline for your business. Academy courses are available whether it’s for a single operator track, or a multi-track rollout across a new studio team of 15. On agreement, PhotoRobot sales will then issue a voucher code for each student per cert track. The voucher unlocks the full curriculum of PhotoRobot Academy plus the final certification exam. Most often, studios arrange bulk enrollment (5-15 operators in one cohort) to achieve the most from their Academy experience. To start your journey to formal certification, simply request more information on PhotoRobot Academy through [PhotoRobot Sales](https://www.photorobot.com/contact). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/smartcode-workflow # SECTION: blog > smartcode-workflow # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-05-27 --- # Practical SmartCode Use in High-Volume Photo Production Find out how high-volume operations use PhotoRobot SmartCodes to directly control software sequences and maximize productivity in production workflows. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## Enabling Smoother Workflows with PhotoRobot SmartCodes The **PhotoRobot SmartCode workflow** involves using a scanner to read print-out SmartCodes that enable direct control of PhotoRobot software sequences. Think of SmartCodes as special trigger codes, which instruct the software to run commands for different stages of production. This allows production line operators to simply scan QR codes or barcodes to begin various workflow processes. For example, larger production halls using PhotoRobot typically print SmartCodes as **stickers** and **labels** to place near workstations. In other cases, SmartCodes go **directly on keychains**, further eliminating unnecessary movement around the studio. Scanning the codes then triggers different workflow stages, from **weighing and measuring items** to **sorting**, **staging**, and **capture**. There is **no movement back and forth** from a robotic workstation to a computer, dramatically speeding up production lines. Productivity is even greater when the SmartCodes are extremely near the objects to photograph. In these cases, operators only need to place products on the machine, and scan a code to instantly signal sequences to begin. Read ahead for your introduction into PhotoRobot SmartCodes, including a practical example of their use in larger photo production halls. ## Typical High-Volume PhotoRobot Studio Production A classic example of a large production hall using PhotoRobot benefits from each workstation offering a production time of roughly **1 minute per product**. That’s nearly **500 items per 8-hour shift for every single workstation**. Take for example a standard, high-volume [PhotoRobot-powered production line](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line). - In larger production halls, there might be **10, 20, or even 60+ robotic workstations**. - Each workstation is **operating simultaneously** **multiple shifts** each day. - There are **5 vital stages of production**: scanning & measuring, sorting & styling, robotized capture, post-processing, API & publishing. - The production hall produces **thousands of assets per shift**, even in natural warehouse environments. - There are fully post-processed **2D galleries**, **360 spins**, **3D models,** and **360 product video**. While PhotoRobot supports each stage of this production, there are then PhotoRobot SmartCodes in convenient locations around the production line. Each code enables teams to easily trigger different stages of the workflow by scanning a code when ready. **Scanning SmartCodes allows direct software control to:** - **Weigh & measure** items with CubiScan. - **Sort items** to software shelves (carts) by photographic properties and presets. - **Ready items** for capture in the system. - **Robotize capture**. At the same time, it is possible to **connect every PhotoRobot workstation** with **control from a single software interface**. There is **automatic post production** with **delivery via API and cloud integrations**, so publishing files becomes automatic & instant after capture. The manual processes simply disappear into the background, ensuring any human talent can easily recreate workflows by simply scanning SmartCodes. ## 1 - Using SmartCodes for CubiScan to Weigh & Measure Items At the very first stages of the workflow, many production halls use a SmartCode for weighing and measuring items with CubiScan. The SmartCode readies the CubiScan device to record an object’s weight and dimensions in the system. This allows for the automatic attachment of product information in the form of metadata to image files. In practice, production halls usually print a SmartCode as a sticker or label and place it directly on or near a CubiScan device. Each SmartCode can be either in barcode or QR code format. Meanwhile, each product also has its own unique ID code or SKU, which informs CubiScan which item it will be measuring. This allows production line operators to simply scan the SmartCode for CubiScan, and then scan the product code of the item to measure. They then run the item through the CubiScan device, and it automatically records the object’s weight and dimensions in the system. ## 2 - Sorting Items to Shelves (Carts) via SmartCode Another advantage to the SmartCode workflow involves sorting items into categories using shelf (cart) codes. In this case, there is a SmartCode to instruct the system to begin sorting items to shelves (carts), and also a unique shelf code. The shelf code stores configurable photographic settings and presets for similar types of items in the system. In practice, this allows for sorting items to software “shelves” to easily group items of similar photographic requirements and for their subsequently automated photography. To do this, the operator first scans the SmartCode, then scans an item code, and finally scans a corresponding shelf code. Shelf codes will contain photography lighting and capture settings, along with any additional presets for capture & post production. Take for example special settings and presets for objects of different color, transparency, size, and unique properties. Groups may include opaque objects, light objects, and more complex objects such as items with transparent or highly reflective surfaces. Various shelf codes then help production teams to sort items by style guides, staging, image overlay, and more. The codes are also fully customizable, so it depends only on the types of products to photograph. Teams then place the shelf codes near the workstations where they prep items for photography, like directly on product racks and carts. The closer to the workstation, the smoother production workflows become. ## 3 - Identifying Items for Photography After sorting products to shelves in the software, identifying an item for photography requires only scanning its barcode. This is the stage just before placing an item on the robot. The item’s barcode will tell the system which product it will be photographing, and its specific shelf code. Scanning the item’s barcode then automatically instructs the system on the robotized capture and post-processing of the item. This is according to the item’s shelf / rack code, and includes any presets for camera and light settings as well as outputs to capture. For example, scanning the product code at this point might activate presets to extract specific [2D product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image) in tandem with a [360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin). It may also include instructions for a capture sequence of multiple elevations around the object to produce [3D product spins](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360) and [3D object models](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model). All of these instructions derive directly from the previous attachment of the shelf code to the item. Thus, teams only need to scan the item barcode to prepare the software for photography automation, and then stage the item on the robot. ## 4 - Changing Workflow Status to “Ready to Shoot” To tell the system an item is ready to enter the photography workflow, there is the “Ready to shoot” SmartCode. Scanning this SmartCode automatically changes the workflow status of an item to “Ready to shoot” in the software. This indicates that the item’s preparation stages are complete, including any additional prep necessary before product staging. Take for example unpacking, assembly, styling, arranging, or configuring products before transporting them to a production line. In these cases, there is often someone managing the additional prep in the backstage part of the workflow. Thus, the system requires a way for backstage managers to indicate to the production line that this prep is complete. In this way, it is possible for the entire ecosystem to start working as one complete package, focusing to achieve maximum overall production speeds. When the item’s status is “Ready to shoot,” the production line knows they can stage the object for photos on a PhotoRobot workstation. In larger production halls, this is often using a [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) together with a [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). The setup features a cross-laser system for easily positioning items into the center of the turntable plate. It also ensures perfect alignment of the robotic arm and 360 turntable at all times. Product staging requires only placing an item in the center of the laser grid. Later, the laser will turn off automatically before the capture sequence, which also requires only scanning another SmartCode to begin. ## 5 - Starting Full Automation of Capture via SmartCode Finally, starting full automation of capture in the SmartCode workflow occurs just after staging the item on the PhotoRobot device. To speed up this process, the production line usually has a SmartCode to “Start the sequence” extremely near the robotic workstation. This allows for instantly starting the sequence after staging an object. Most often, this is from standing directly at the machine, where the production hall has placed the SmartCode for instant activation. Starting the sequence then turns off the laser positioning system, and triggers automatic vertical adjustment of the camera. At this point, the camera’s horizontal level will also align to the absolute center of the object’s height. This is all fully automatic thanks to the earlier recording of the object’s measurements and dimensions from CubiScan. Then, after the camera adjustment, all studio lights, robotic processes, and capture settings trigger without asking. Operations include presets to instruct the turntable to begin rotation, and remote capture triggers in sync with studio strobes. While camera settings follow presets, the powerful strobes help to prevent motion blur of objects. This enables the fast capture of 360s without needing to stop turntable rotation. In parallel, the robotic arm is able to move along a vertical trajectory to automate the capture of multiple rows of elevations. It is thus easily and quickly possible to produce multi-row spins, 3D models, and also [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video) following programmable timelines. All just by scanning a SmartCode. ## Enjoying Automatic Post Production in the Background After capturing an item, the lasers on the machine turn back on for staging the next product, and cloud post-processing begins without asking. The post production also occurs completely in the background in the cloud, so there is no wait in between photography and post-processing. Production lines simply repeat the SmartCode workflow from here. They prepare the next item for photography, scan its barcode, stage and ready it by SmartCode, and scan the start SmartCode to capture, post-process, and even publish. Thanks to the integration of CubiScan with shelf / rack codes and SmartCodes, all stages of production fully connect. There is backup of original images immediately after capture, while background removal and image optimizations run according to presets. All the while, presets instruct the software to store files either locally in a shared folder, or to upload automatically. They may publish files instantly after capture to PhotoRobot Cloud, or via API to eCommerce export feeds. All at the same time the production line is photographing the next batch of products. ## Take Full Advantage of the SmartCode Workflow In the end, the PhotoRobot SmartCode workflow represents not only the unmatched production speeds of PhotoRobot. Moreover, it shows how PhotoRobot supports all parts of the studio workflow, from backstage to the production line. SmartCodes help the entire ecosystem to work as one – connecting every stage of production with fully automated data processing and publishing. The focus is on achieving maximum overall production speeds, from product-in to product-out. For more information on integrating SmartCodes into your workflows, refer to the [PhotoRobot SmartCodes User Guide](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/smart-codes-guide-and-printing). You’ll find print-ready SmartCodes, technical documentation, and steps to easily onboard your human talent for smoother production cycles. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/feature-requests-board # SECTION: blog > feature-requests-board # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-05-06 --- # Help Shape PhotoRobot Controls with Feature Requests Become an active participant in the development of PhotoRobot Controls software using the Controls Feature Requests Board. - Categories: Software ## Introducing the PhotoRobot Feature Requests Board The Feature Requests Board in PhotoRobot Controls welcomes PhotoRobot customers to participate in the development of their software. Submit new feature requests, vote on existing requests, and help shape what PhotoRobot prioritizes next. Welcome to the PhotoRobot Feature Requests Board. When you use software every day, you know what *you* need to ensure faster, clearer, and more reliable operations. The Feature Requests Board provides a single place to share ideas for the development of PhotoRobot software tools. At the same time, you can see what others in the PhotoRobot ecosystem care about, and vote for upcoming features. ## Why Open a Public Feature Requests Board While support tickets are perfect for troubleshooting specific issues, feature requests present a roadmap to the product’s future. Feature requests help to illuminate what capabilities many customers might want. Presenting requests on a shared board then helps bring to light the bigger picture of what to prioritize next. It allows us to: - Group similar needs rather than losing them in one-off tickets. - Show demand for features through votes and linked feedback. - Update the status of feature requests in one place. - Share the story with everyone (under review, planned, in progress, released). ## How to Access Feature Requests in Controls To find Feature Requests in Controls, log into your [PhotoRobot Account](https://account.photorobot.com/), and navigate to the **Support** interface. Then, in the left sidebar, click **Feature Requests** to access the board. Each request has a direct influence on what we prioritize and plan next. You can browse existing requests on the board, open individual requests, and request a feature if nothing on the list matches your needs. ## How PhotoRobot Feature Requests Work The short explanation of how Feature Requests work is also on the board in the “How it works” panel. In general, the flow involves the following elements. 1. **Request a feature or vote** on something already on the board. 2. **Grouping similar requests** ensures relevant feedback helps to strengthen a request item rather than scattering it. 3. **Items with stronger demand** are more likely to move toward planning stages. 4. **Status updates** communicate decisionsas we make them. **Note:** When making decisions on planning, it is a promise of process, not a guarantee of shipping order. Engineering, security, and roadmap constraints still apply. Nonetheless, this ensures that prioritization is transparent, visible, and fair. ## Voting on the Feature Requests Board All organizations receive a **limited number of active votes** at any time. Regarding the voting process, the board displays the following information. - How many **votes you have available in total** - How many of **votes already in use** - How many **votes remain** The total number of votes available relate to your **organization**, not to a single person’s personal quota. Think of each vote as saying that *“this is one of the five features we care most about right now,* ” rather than being simply five guesses per user. When voting for an item, you spend one of your organization’s available votes until the request arrives at a closed outcome. For example, a closed outcome could be “released,” or “not in planning for now.” After which point, the voting rules may no longer apply to that specific entry. **Tip:** Vote on ideas you would genuinely adopt into your workflows, or that would alleviate friction of some kind. Each vote is a signal that helps us compare options, and to identify the best course of action for the entire ecosystem. ## Requesting a New Feature Clicking **Request a feature** will open the **create ticket** flow, which is fine-tuned for product ideas. It provides guidance on what to describe, prompts for the problem you are solving, and a clear subject line. All submissions then become a **support ticket** with a tag marking it at as a feature request. This allows the PhotoRobot team to begin understanding the details of the request, before following up with you directly. We then often **merge that need into a board item** that others can vote on. Thus, you are not shouting into an empty void, and the ticket remains in the thread so that we can notify you as the request progresses. If you start from an **existing feature request**, note that your ticket will **automatically link** to that feature request, connecting the two in context. ## Reading the Feature Requests Board Each request published displays its **title**, **summary**, and **status**. Status communicates whether the request is still in review, in planning, in development, or already shipped. The status may also communicate that we decided not to pursue something for now. It is possible to sort and to explore the list (for example, by demand or title) depending on what the UI offers. - The **Most requested** panel highlights items that are gaining traction. This allows you to align your votes with broader customer interest if you choose. - The **All feature requests** panel displays items by number of votes, while voting moves items up or down the list. ## Following Your Existing Tickets When one of your tickets links to a feature on the board, you will see a **Feature request** card on the ticket sidebar. The card will show the request’s public title, summary, and its status plus a way to **open the board** entry in a new context. This helps ensure clear orientation, without needing to hunt for the correct entry. ## What Feature Requests Are Not **Be aware that the Feature Requests Board is not a replacement for urgent support.** If production is down or you are experiencing a blocker, open a normal support ticket. We will respond through our usual support workflows. **Moreover, items on the board do not represent a commitment.** We intentionally handle feature tickets differently from time-sensitive support tickets. This means that feature tickets may thus stay open longer while we evaluate and schedule work. ## Contribution to Improve the Entire PhotoRobot Ecosystem In the end, the Feature Requests Board exists so that your feedback aggregates into something measurable, and so that we can better communicate back. Use your vote to align with your organization’s priorities, submit ideas when the board does not cover your case yet, and watch statuses as the roadmap evolves. The PhotoRobot team regularly updates the board as decisions land, while your participation helps improve the product for everyone. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/byok-photorobot-intelligence # SECTION: blog > byok-photorobot-intelligence # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-04-29 --- # Bring Your Own Key to Master the PI (π) Infrastructure Bring your own key to the PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) software suite for full organization-level control meeting the highest enterprise standards. - Categories: Software ## BYOK to Meet the Highest Enterprise Standards **PhotoRobot Intelligence (π)** delivers the [photo studio production intelligence](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite) while you fully control the infrastructure with BYOK support. The principle is simple. Bring your own key, and choose your model provider. PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI) supports most major models for provider flexibility, enabling full operation-level control to support your existing Enterprise Agreement. Read ahead to learn how to master PI by bringing your own key for maximum security and greater cost control. ## PhotoRobot Production-Ready Intelligence (π) The PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI) software suite represents a revolutionary production-ready intelligence layer for PhotoRobot-powered studios. [**PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor) radically reduce shooting errors, while [**Macro PI Actions**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action) can eliminate manual metadata entry entirely. The system supports full automation and control for high-throughput production lines, from large enterprise e-commerce companies to global brands. But, if you represent one of these e-commerce enterprises or international brands, a few questions probably remain. - *Where does the data end up?* - *Who controls it?* - *How does this fit into our corporate security policy?* Now, most modern software platforms integrate some form of artificial intelligence model. Unfortunately, this is usually in the form of a “black box.” This “black box” forces the customer to send sensitive data (in our case, product photos which are often protected by strict embargoes) through the software provider’s opaque API interfaces. The data then goes to servers the customers have no control over, along with zero control over hidden feeds and margins for using these models. For IT and security departments at large corporations, this is obviously a nightmare. Thus, at PhotoRobot, we have rejected this compromise. Our approach is radically different, and transparent. PhotoRobot integrates the intelligence layer, you control the infrastructure. ## Introducing Full Organizational Control with BYOK BYOK allows PhotoRobot customers to meet the highest enterprise standards, and offers support with organization-level control for most major model providers. In PhotoRobot Controls, you simply insert your own API key from the provider with whom your company already has an Enterprise Agreement. The PI architecture currently supports the most robust players on the market. - **OpenAI** - **Azure OpenAI** (Critical for corporations requiring strict GDPR compliance, closed data circuits, and local data hosting on Microsoft servers) - **Anthropic** - **Google AI (Gemini)** - **GitHub Models** Thanks to secure connectivity, your studio can perfectly align operations using new intelligence models with internal policies, security requirements, and corporate cost strategies. With PhotoRobot Intelligence, you only pay for the computing power directly to your cloud provider at your negotiated corporate rates. PhotoRobot takes **no hidden data brokering fees**. ## Unlock an Exclusive Intelligence Layer It is important to understand that PhotoRobot Intelligence is not available as a standalone software product or some generic app for everyone. The engineering of PI is specifically for PhotoRobot’s hardware-driven production workflows. At the same time, our development is continuously refining the system for real studio environments. PI (π) is a production-grade intelligence layer for product photography workflows. There is full integration of capture, metadata, analysis, and edit operations. Thus, when you use PhotoRobot, it is not simply just automation of hardware. It is a full production-grade intelligence layer purpose-built for product photography. ## In a Nutshell: PhotoRobot Builds Experience into Systems The introduction of PhotoRobot Intelligence and BYOK marks the closing of one chapter and the opening of an entirely new one. The future of studio production is here. While photography previously required years of personal experience on the job, this expert experience is now part of the system itself. Think: No more immediate loss of production quality because a photographer is temporarily ill or leaving the company. Instead, the PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) software suite redefines the approach to professional product photography. It is faster, safer, cost-transparent, and absolutely consistent. Welcome to the era of PhotoRobot Intelligence. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-pi-action # SECTION: blog > macro-pi-action # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-04-22 --- # Macro PI - From Assistant to Fully Automated Pipeline Achieve unprecedented studio throughput via a fully automated operational layer with Macro PI Action in PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) software. - Categories: Software ## Introducing Macro PI Action in PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) Welcome to the studio **Macro PI Action**, a core operational feature within the [PhotoRobot Intelligence (π)](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite) software suite. Intelligence is useless if it requires constant clicking and manually typing out queries. Instead, Macro PI enables teams to execute PI (π) capabilities directly inside repeatable macro flows, not only through manual dialogs. This transforms PI into a fully automated operational layer offering unprecedented studio throughput. All analytics and data management happens automatically in the background, without any need for human intervention. The magic begins the exact moment the camera finishes shooting, helping to optimize and bring order to data management. ## Fully Automating Pipelines to Bring Order to Data Anybody who runs a high-volume photo studio knows that capturing the perfect 360 spin is often the quickest part of production. The real bottleneck that jeopardizes throughput and ROI is immediately afterwards – data management. Imagine the following case in a large production hall. - An operator has just finished photographing their fiftieth pair of shoes for the shift. - Afterwards, they have to sit down at the keyboard to manually fill out metadata. - They need to enter the correct title, specify material (suede or leather), add search tags, and write a production note. In the end, an experienced worker on a morning shift could usually manage the task at-hand, but take a tired temp at 3AM for example. Chaos can ensue. Typos, missing tags, and inconsistent terminology lead to products being returned from Quality Control (QC) back to the studio. The cycle immediately lengthens, and costs rise. While most software companies respond to this issue with “smart assistants,” the problem with this is that every second still counts. There are chat windows where the operator asks the software to identify the material, typing “*What material is this?* ” But just opening the dialog window and then manually typing in queries steals time off the clock, and from production. With the introduction of PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI), we decided to challenge this isolated, assistant-driven approach. After all, PI is not some manual dialog-driven assistant. It is a full-fledged operational layer allowing your production pipeline to do the driving. Meet: **PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) Macro PI Action**. ## Intelligence Inside Repeatable Macros How does Macro PI Action enable intelligence within repeatable macros? In practice, it revolves around the **Metadata Suggest** tool, and **ASK PI** (a visual QA tool). - **Metadata Suggest as an Automated Contract:** Now, the metadata suggestion module is no longer just a passive advisor. Within a macro, it acts as a fully automated system that assigns and updates item titles, tags, and notes. It does this depending on what it visually analyzes in the images. - **Ask PI Built into the Pipeline:** The visual QA tool (Ask PI) is now configurable with saved prompt selections. There are also target folder and image filters, and structured destination mapping directly into your item’s metadata field. For example, you photograph the back panel of an electronic device, and the macro automatically asks PI in the background questions about the image. The macro asks “*How many USB ports are in the image, and what type?* ” The answer is then instantly and securely written into the corresponding field in your PIM system. ## A Measurable Operational Upgrade for Your Studio What value does this really bring to photo studios, though? For teams processing massive volumes of products, this isn’t just a neat visual gimmick. It’s a considerable and measurable operational upgrade. Macro PI Action provides the certainty that all artificial intelligence actions are absolutely reproducible. The output behavior is perfectly consistent, regardless of whether your best operator or a first-shift rookie is standing at the machine. This transforms intelligence into a layer of macro operations in your studio to: - Drastically shorten capture-to-publish cycles. - Massively reduce manual metadata workloads. - Ensure fewer quality-control loops, with correct and standardized data right from the start. - Receive studio-safe decision support grounded in the reality of your hardware. PhotoRobot Intelligence (π) is not just replacing the manual rotation of the product. It **eliminates manual data entry** and **introduces industrial, machine-like precision to your workflow**. For high-volume product imaging teams, this is a measurable operational upgrade. ## Reproducible PI (π) Actions with Consistent Outputs In a nutshell, Macro PI (π) ensures **reproducible actions** across operators, shifts, and workspaces. There is **consistent output behavior**, and **less manual management** overall. Thus, PI (π) is not just assistant-driven; it is pipeline-driven. And it’s already a part of the PhotoRobot production workflow. Ensure you are running the [latest version of PhotoRobot Controls](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads) to access the PI (π) software suite with Macro PI Action. Then, stay tuned for the next part of our coverage on PI (π): How to integrate your own PI model (BYOK). Find out how PhotoRobot allows integration via a secure infrastructure so that you maintain absolute control over your corporate data. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor # SECTION: blog > pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-04-15 --- # Discover PI Profiles and the Capture PI Advisor Experience the revolution in studio intelligence with industry-specific PI Profiles and Capture PI Advisor in the PI (π) software suite. - Categories: Software ## PI Profiles & Capture PI Advisor in PhotoRobot Intelligence Meet **PI Profiles** and **Capture PI Advisor** in the [**PhotoRobot Intelligence**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite) (PI, **π**) suite. These smart tools within PI help to ensure picture-perfect results across industries. PhotoRobot knows that not all products are equal; nor are they always photographed the same way. To this end, PI delivers industry-specific profiles and real-time hardware analysis for consistent results on products of different photographic properties. The launch of these features coincides with the fully integrated operational production intelligence, PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI, **π**). Read ahead to discover how PI is no gimmick plug-in, but rather a fully production-ready operational layer for high-volume studios. Find information on setting up your PI Profiles, and how to deploy the real-time capture intelligence via Capture PI Advisor. ## Assuming a “Product is a Product” Every experienced studio manager knows that the most common mistake in product photography is assuming “a product is a product.” This assumption is common in traditional photo studio software approaches, and the same is true of software assistants. Software assistants apply the same algorithms to everything in front of them, despite the diametrically different reality that we do not photograph all products the same. Then, there is the common issue of deviations in quality. While a seasoned machine operator may photograph a series perfectly, another less experienced operator may deliver photos with blown-out highlights, or gray backgrounds. These issues then require retouching, call for additional resources, and ultimately delays product time-to-market. PhotoRobot Intelligence aims to avoid these pitfalls, with PI Profiles acting like a senior photographer specializing in your specific industry. At the same time, the Capture PI Advisor functions as a “spin-aware” and “hardware-aware” capture analysis system. These become more than simply a critic, and instead function like an experienced advisor working in real-time by your side every step of production. ## Ending the Generic Approach: Industry-Specific PI Profiles **PI Profiles** help support high-volume photography for specific industries, different types of products, and varying photographic properties. Take the following example of a typical day in a large eCommerce photo studio. - An operator is photographing a collection of black trousers using the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) and a standard preset for dark colored pants. - Then, there are a pair of jeans that are slightly off-black. In this case, if the standard preset is insufficient, the system can instantly fine-tune the preset to the slightly different photographic requirements. - In more extreme cases, the system can even help manage the values to create an entirely new preset if necessary. - Take for example an operator using presets for black and white pants, but there is a limited series of pink denim to photograph. The system can identify the different photographic properties, and suggest a new specific preset to handle the pink color. - The fine-tuned or entirely new preset then seamlessly integrates into your current and future workflow. The same works across industries for items that sometimes call for quick fine tuning of presets. Jewelry demands special lighting to work around brilliance, transparency, and micro details. Automotives call for surface precision, and reflection control. Fashion needs fidelity and accuracy, while electronics must appear clean, sharp, and commercially ready. PI (π) understands these requirements, and works alongside you like an experienced photographer on-hand to instantly make adjustments when necessary. Think of this like an expert specializing in your specific industry. PI (π) works hand-in-hand with your presets and within your workflow to ensure the highest levels of productivity. This is something completely unique to PhotoRobot, and it is not just a generic assistant. PI Profiles provide you with a **fully domain-aware PI photography specialist** on demand. You are able to choose from different system profiles, while each profile understands what “picture-perfect” means for its industry. ## Which Specific PI Profiles are Available? Boasting designs to cater to your specific segment, PI Profiles become specialists with creative expertise in multiple fields. The PI Profiles include: - **Basic Profile** (minimal managed behavior for maximum manual freedom) - **Studio** - **Marketplace** - **Luxury** - **Automotive** But what does each individual profile understand? Think of each profile as a professional in your industry that knows **what buyers expect**, and **what global marketplaces strictly demand**. PI Profiles can **instantly identify visual mistakes** which are absolutely unacceptable in the given field. And, moreover, each profile understands how to ensure the final output is **realistic**, **commercially safe**, and **production compliant**. ## Capture PI Advisor: Hardware-Aware Analysis Now, profiles would be just empty templates without a massive analytical engine in the background, so meet the **Capture PI Advisor**. The Capture PI Advisor is a part of the very core of our PI (π) software suite, and it does not take the standard software approach. Standard software waits until you take the photo, and then tries to “save” it in post-production by digitally brightening or smoothing. The Capture PI Advisor approach is fundamentally different. Capture PI Advisor is a fully **hardware-aware** and **“spin-aware”** system that understands the product is rotating 360 degrees. This enables **image capture analysis in real-time**. The system performs an in-depth evaluation of the scene, exposure balance, highlight clipping, and shadow density. It examines background cleanliness and color neutrality. This is in addition to monitoring depth of field, edge separation of the product from the background, and – the most critical aspect for 360 photography – absolute frame consistency across the entire spin. ## A True Advisor, Not Just a Critic Any analytics is useless if it only issues an “incorrect exposure” error message, so Capture PI Advisor never leaves operators in the dark. Instead, the system primarily recommends rather than critiques. When PI detects a problem, it provides the operator with immediate, actionable recommendations. It does not do some software “ironing.” The system suggests physical and optical corrections. It recommends aperture tweaks, shutter speed corrections, or ISO balancing. It flags the need for light adjustments, or for background illumination corrections. **Imagine it as exactly the kind of professional advice you would expect from a lead studio manager standing right next to you at the machine.** The results are clear. There is a rapid reduction in error rates right from capture, providing an end to expensive reshoots. This is in addition to the certainty that no matter who uses the machine, the PI system will ensure outputs meet the strictest standards of your industry. In other words, it’s automated photography on steroids. ## Experience a Revolution in Studio Production Intelligence Download the latest version of PhotoRobot Controls to unlock the PI (π) intelligence suite with PI Profiles & Capture PI Advisor. These tools are central to PhotoRobot Intelligence, and just one part of the rapidly evolving production intelligence suite. Stay tuned to see how to take these analytical capabilities and integrate them fully into your automated processes with Macro PI Action. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-intelligence-suite # SECTION: blog > photorobot-intelligence-suite # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-04-01 --- # Unlock Operational PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI) Fully integrate operational production intelligence into your studio’s hardware and workflow with the release of PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI). - Categories: Software ## Operational PhotoRobot Intelligence (PI, like π) Goes Live PhotoRobot Controls App 3.0 delivers what we like to call **PhotoRobot Intelligence**, or just “PI” (like **π**) for short. PI aims to solve real-world problems for professional production hall managers and photographers in the daily reality of high-volume production. This means supporting throughput, consistency, and greater ROI for photographing 100s to 1000s of items per shift. Thus, PI is not some generic chat bot integration. PI is operational production intelligence that fully integrates into your studio’s hardware and workflow. ## Introducing PhotoRobot Intelligence While the date of this publication is April 1st, PhotoRobot Intelligence is no April Fool’s joke. Like all PhotoRobot systems, PI aims to support studios processing hundreds to thousands of products daily. It is not simply a generic AI plug-in or some novelty AI, which would only add another layer of uncertainty and unreliability to outputs. Instead, PI is a **production-ready operational intelligence suite** now directly within PhotoRobot Controls software. This is not simply attaching generic AI to a camera app. **PI is operational intelligence for real studio operations.** Take photographing items from highly reflective jewelry to matte black electronic components, industrial machinery, or automobiles. In cases like these, throughput, visual consistency, and robust hardware remain vital for product photography studios. Machines like the Centerless Table and Carousel must perform with uncompromising reliability, while remaining perfectly in sync with all systems. The problem with that is that a high-volume product photo studio is not a sandbox for beta software. This is where PI enters the PhotoRobot Controls software suite. And at PhotoRobot, we do not build toys or cheap integrations; the goal has always been maximum production efficiency. Meet operational PhotoRobot Intelligence, PI. ## More Than Simply An Assistant; An Operational Layer Most product photography software on the market attempts to integrate intelligence at the very end of the process – in post-production. This is not the case for operational PhotoRobot Intelligence. On the contrary, PI integrates into the very core of PhotoRobot Controls software – right from the start – from capture to publish. PI understands what hardware you use. It understands that the product rotates 360 degrees. And it knows your specific production requirements. At the same time, PI consists of four fundamental pillars which completely change the scope of intelligence in automated photography. Meet the PhotoRobot Intelligence software suite: - **Capture PI Advisor** (real-time quality control), - **Metadata Suggest** (routine standardization), - **Ask PI** (quick search), and; - **Edit PI** (production-safe edits). ## 1 - Capture PI Advisor (Real-Time Quality Control) The first fundamental pillar of PhotoRobot Intelligence is the [**Capture PI Advisor**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pi-profiles-and-capture-pi-advisor) for **real-time quality control**. This tool allows studios to forget tedious, routine quality checks after photographing every series of products. The Capture PI Advisor is an analytical system that fully orients to the hardware and is 360 “spin-aware.” In a fraction of a second, the Capture PI Advisor evaluates exposure balance, highlight clipping, shadow density, and white background cleanliness. However, it does not end at only criticism; the system performs much like a senior photographer standing next to the operator. It instantly suggests actionable adjustments for aperture, shutter speed, ISO balancing, or light intensity. The result? There is a drastic reduction in error rates right at the very source of the photography. ## 2 - Metadata Suggest (Bring Order to Metadata) Our next feature within the PhotoRobot Intelligence suite is **Metadata Suggest**, helping system operators **streamline metadata attachment**. Often, metadata attachment is one of the most frustrating parts of the job. There may be typos, inconsistent file naming and thus poor searchability of products in PIM systems. To combat this, the Metadata Suggest module offers structured suggestions for nametags and notes. Its design supports direct workflow integration, rather than some “free text prompt” that results in only chaos. Metadata Suggest ensures your metadata is clean, standardized, and immediately publication-ready. ## 3 - Ask PI (Quick Visual Analysis of Images) When you need to quickly extract data from a photo, there is the Ask PI tool. PhotoRobot’s **Ask PI** enables **visual question-and-answer directly over source product photos**. This means there is no retyping serial numbers or painstakingly examining material details. The system analyzes the photo, and it can assign answers directly to item metadata fields. ## 4 - Edit PI (Production-Safe Edits) The **Edit PI** tool helps ensure **production-safe edits** when enhancing images with operational intelligence. After all, e-commerce does not forgive hallucinations in images, and nor should your customers. The customer must receive exactly what they see in the photo. Thus, Edit PI provides a controlled edit preview / apply flow with strict constraints to preserve realism. This way, all enhancements remain commercially safe and compliant with strict production standards. ## The Future of Studio Production is Here, and It’s Included At PhotoRobot, we know that introducing new technologies into an established studio is often painful – both procedurally and financially. Usually, you learn about a great new feature, only to find out at the end of the presentation that it requires a massive surcharge on your existing license. Well, here’s the only real shock we intended by publishing this on April Fool’s Day: the PhotoRobot Intelligent Suite is already fully integrated into your ecosystem. There is no additional cost, and no additional licensing fees. PhotoRobot Intelligence is available to all Cloud users and all Local users right now. It is not an add-on; nor is it a premium upsell. This is simply the new reality of your studio. While the quality of results were previously dependent on years of accumulated experience by a real photographer, this power is now directly built-in to your system. Welcome to the age of PhotoRobot Intelligence, redefining professionalism in automated photography. [Download the latest version of PhotoRobot Controls](https://account.photorobot.com/downloads) software to ensure you are running the latest and most-up-to-date enhancements. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-support-version # SECTION: blog > controls-app-support-version # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-03-26 --- # Explore the "Support 2.0" Update in Controls App 2.15.0 PhotoRobot _Controls 2.15.0 starts “Support 2.0.” Unlock relentless stability, intelligent diagnostics, and the dawn of native AI. - Categories: Software, About PhotoRobot ## Uncompromising Performance with Controls “Support 2.0” Hot off the developers’ desks, the release of [PhotoRobot _Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/software) 2.15.0 is what we aptly call the “Support 2.0” version. Support 2.0 ensures uncompromising performance and stability, delivering intelligent diagnostics and the dawn of native AI within PhotoRobot _Controls. Read ahead to discover the core philosophy behind the latest updates and new features, including a glimpse at what’s next. ## Lessons from the 3D Product Photography Market At PhotoRobot, our team regularly leverages AI and LLMs to push our development forward. For instance, we recently fed Google’s NotebookLM data on the automated 3D product photography market. We then asked for its analysis of PhotoRobot’s place in the industry, and the results were telling. The critical analysis presents PhotoRobot not as simply just a camera rig. It distinguishes PhotoRobot as a market leader in the field of automated 3D photography. PhotoRobot sits securely among the top five global players in the industry, who together command 66% of the market. But while the rest of the market attempts to cater to everyone with their solution, PhotoRobot’s strategy is laser-focused. PhotoRobot does not build entry-level, plastic “all-in-one” boxes, after all. We manufacture premium, high-capacity engines for professional studios and industrial-scale operations. Here’s how that looks in reality. ## PhotoRobot’s Unfair Advantage **In application, here’s the *unfair* advantage PhotoRobot has over the market.** - **Scale over Single Shots:** Past competitors like Styleshoots who once excelled in creative fashion focused on making every shot an artistic endeavor. Instead, PhotoRobot focuses on large scale, repeatable throughput. This means that if a business’ core metric is standardization across a massive catalog, PhotoRobot stands in a league of its own. - **Heavy-Duty Engineering:** While others (like Orbitvu or Iconasys) target standard e-commerce, PhotoRobot engineers systems for the “extremes.” Does a business need to photograph a 4,000 kg automobile with millisecond precision? PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000 offers a heavy-duty car photography solution with a robust design and hassle-free maintenance for long-term productivity. **PhotoRobot delivers technology that simply works faster.** - **Non-Stop Spin:** Traditional 360° turntables stop for every single frame to take photos. This means 90 seconds or more to capture 36 images, while PhotoRobot’s non-stop spin technology captures during continuous rotation. By combining fluid continuous rotation with world-class strobe lights (like Broncolor or Profoto) that optically freeze the product, PhotoRobot captures 36 high-resolution images in **20 seconds.** There are zero stops and thus faster workflows. - **MultiCam Sync:** PhotoRobot boasts synchronization of turntable rotation with multiple cameras simultaneously down to the millisecond. Complex 3D spins are more than simply possible; they are instantaneous. - **Built to Last a Decade-Plus:** There is no use of lightweight aluminum in PhotoRobot to cut costs. There are only industrial-grade components. Every PhotoRobot system boasts a design to run 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, easily for 10 to 15 years. - **The Power of the Cloud:** No business should have to wait for a computer to process images before photographing the next product. So PhotoRobot shifted the heavy lifting to the cloud. The systems edit hundreds of images in the background while studios are already capturing the next item. The result is **one product per minute**, with a throughput capacity of **500+ items per shift**. Analysts on platforms like G2 and Capterra all recognize this and share the same analysis. They note the higher initial investment, but, at the same time, they always follow it with one conclusion. For high-volume studios, PhotoRobot delivers **"unmatched performance and efficiency.”** ## Remaining True to the Core **To quote PhotoRobot’s founder and CEO, Kamil Hrbáček, “For 21 years, PhotoRobot’s core philosophy has been simple: Do it right from the beginning.”** > "Really, a 'cheap' machine is the most expensive thing you can buy. When it breaks down, staff is idle, and products aren't selling online. That’s why some of our very first machines are still running seamlessly 20 years later. > At the same time, we apply that exact same obsession to PhotoRobot software. We don’t chase trends. We build massive, multi-level architectures where we control every single layer. We design our own PCBs. We write our own real-time operating systems that process data exponentially faster than anything else on the market. We spent over €2,000,000 just developing the core software suite before we simply stopped counting. Because it’s not about what it costs. It’s about how it works. > When you push a single button and the magic happens effortlessly, you don't need to know the complex mechanics behind it. It just works." ## The Dawn of PhotoRobot _Controls “Support 2.0” Now, pushing the envelope often comes with its growing pains, and the second half of 2025 is the perfect example. This is what led to launching PhotoRobot “Support 2.0,” beginning with an incredibly demanding time for the PhotoRobot team. Our ecosystem is integrated with countless third-party libraries, drivers, and protocols. And, at one point, partner updates were launched without proper testing. The fallout required our developers to work days, nights, and weekends to protect our customers. This is when the vital lesson became apparent. From now on, no third-party tools will touch the PhotoRobot ecosystem unless their reliability is absolutely guaranteed. There will be no exceptions, period. Now, enter PhotoRobot _Controls App 2.15.0 – the start of “Support 2.0.” In order to provide a truly premium experience, Support 2.0 ensures our diagnostics are just as advanced as our hardware. This is because we noticed that over 90% of downtime arises from two infuriatingly simple problems: either an IP address misconfigured by IT, or a high-speed tethering cable that someone simply stepped on. Starting with version 2.15.0, the system now boasts **intelligent self-diagnostics**. The system constantly monitors **network health**, **cable-data transfer speeds**, **camera connection quality**, and **lens firmware versions**. Then, if a cable begins failing, the PhotoRobot support team knows before you even open a support ticket. This means it is now possible to pinpoint the exact issue – and often resolve it – before it even becomes a problem. ## The Philosophy Driving the PhotoRobot Ecosystem The core philosophy for the PhotoRobot ecosystem is to never cut corners for our customers, delivering only the highest quality solutions we can provide. We know where we excel, and we know when to step back. For example, PhotoRobot does not manufacture cameras; we use Canon. We do not build flashes; we use Profoto and Broncolor. Why? Because the physics of light and optics matter. PhotoRobot could technically build incredibly inexpensive LED panels in China, print our logo on them, and drastically increase profit margins. In the end, though, the system would just be cheaper, and your photos would look worse. PhotoRobot refuses to deliver lower quality. We will never ask our customers to photograph a product with poor lighting. Nor would we expect you to rely on an AI filter to “optimize” photos after capture. The cost of e-commerce returns due to inaccurate photos is astronomical, and our clients demand better. This includes massive warehouses photographing **100,000+ products a day**, to the world-renown Parisian fashion house shooting only two luxury handbags a session. Both demand **perfect lighting**, and **perfection in automated product photography**. This is where PhotoRobot delivers, helping our customers to achieve maximum productivity without compromise. ## What’s Next: Native Artificial Intelligence Now, speaking of AI, artificial intelligence is revolutionizing business workflows worldwide, and this extends to PhotoRobot _Controls App. Although, in the enterprise space, AI is still a messy business. Handing your team an AI agent with the hopes of producing a miraculous productivity boost is simply not a viable strategy. To maximize productivity, AI must plug natively into workflows, like electricity into hardware – powering your output without anyone thinking about it. In PhotoRobot labs, this innovation is already in development for our _Controls App. PhotoRobot _Controls 3.0 will connect our open-architecture philosophy to AI, and be just like connecting any DMX light to PhotoRobot. This will allow you to natively integrate any AI model directly into workflows via API. **Upgrade workflow productivity with native AI in Controls 3.0.** - **Intelligent Presets:** AI agents will act as your senior studio consultant, reviewing and perfectly optimizing your lighting and camera presets in real time. - **Prompt-Based Editing:** Manipulate complex image data across thousands of files just by typing what you want. - **Automated Data Extraction:** Automatically verify GS1 packaging texts and product labels directly from the high-res photos, eliminating the need for slow, outsourced data entry. What’s the best part? As this is all a direct part of the PhotoRobot ecosystem, the AI agents are not limited to working on only one photo at a time. The agents will be able to work autonomously in the background across your entire massive catalog. Imagine: Cutting-edge AI natively integrated and working with the most robust hardware platform for product photography. That is the next stage of PhotoRobot Controls, and it is arriving soon. Stay tuned for the release of PhotoRobot Controls 3.0. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/developer-portal-cloud-api-v2 # SECTION: blog > developer-portal-cloud-api-v2 # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2026-03-20 --- # Introducing the PhotoRobot Developer Portal & Cloud API V2 Build custom, highly scalable photography workflows for modern enterprise using the PhotoRobot Developer Portal & API V2 for cloud integrations. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## PhotoRobot Developer Portal & API V2 Launch The [PhotoRobot Developer Portal](https://developer.photorobot.com/) & Cloud API V2 represent the next evolution in photo studio automation, ensuring seamless and enterprise-standard cloud integrations. These help bridge the gap to full studio automation, accounting for more than just automating hardware sequences. To be the global leader in high-volume product photography, it is necessary to fully support every stage of production. At the same time, we know the connection between your studio floor, post-processing, and company software stack must be absolutely flawless and remarkably stable. This is where the PhotoRobot Developer Portal and Cloud API V2 architecture release take a massive leap forward for our software ecosystem. The PhotoRobot Developer Portal facilitates modern enterprise, offering the ultimate toolkit to building custom, highly scalable photography workflows. Cloud API V2 ensures seamless integrations connecting the entire studio. ## Frictionless Integration for Every Stage of Production We have developed the PhotoRobot API V2 from the ground-up to provide a strict, standard-driven integration “contract” for your engineering teams. This allows for connecting every stage of your company’s photo studio production with enterprise-grade security and performance. **What makes API V2 an industry standard?** - **Enterprise-Grade Standardization:** We have completely unified our API responses. With standardized payloads, shared validations, and clearly defined error codes, your integrations will be more robust and predictable than ever. - **Bulletproof Data Consistency:** The new V2 architecture introduces advanced safeguards that guarantee flawless synchronization, completely eliminating the risk of accidental local data conflicts. - **Interactive, World-Class Documentation:** Say farewell to static PDFs. Our new portal features modern, interactive endpoint references, allowing your developers to test and implement rapidly. - **Frictionless Migration:** Upgrading to Cloud API V2 is a simple two-step process that requires first updating your endpoint URLs to /api/v2/ and then adjusting your code for the new, standardized response format. Any existing authentication keys will continue to work perfectly. Additionally, we have prepared a comprehensive [PhotoRobot Migration Guide from API V1 to V2](https://developer.photorobot.com/#/doc/migration-from-v1-to-v2) to help your engineering teams seamlessly complete the transition. ## Important Notice for Existing Users: API V1 Sunset Timeline If your current workflows rely on the legacy API V1, your integrations are safe today. However, to maintain our commitment to security and performance, **the Cloud API V1 is now officially deprecated and will be permanently shut down on 30 September 2026.** Therefore, we strongly encourage all engineering teams to review the [PhotoRobot Cloud Migration from V1 to V2 Guide](https://developer.photorobot.com/#/doc/migration-from-v1-to-v2), and begin their transition to API V2 to ensure uninterrupted service. ## Photo Studio Automation: Evolved for Modern Enterprise Take advantage of the [PhotoRobot Developer Portal](https://developer.photorobot.com/) to provide your development teams the foundation to build custom, highly-scalable photography workflows. Fully integrate automated product photography into your catalog and media pipelines, while using PhotoRobot APIs to create product items, automate capture workflows, and deliver processed images through scalable hosting and feeds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-product-visualization # SECTION: blog > ar-product-visualization # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2025-07-08 --- # AR Product Visualization Using 3D & AR Platforms Discover augmented reality (AR) and Web AR product visualization using PhotoRobot’s top 3D & AR content hosting platforms. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Augmented Reality Product Visualization AR product experiences help consumers to better visualize, virtually try out, and try on products. Take for example popular AR product viewers that allow mobile and tablet users to digitally try on shoes, eyewear, and clothing. By simply scanning a QR code, consumers can project items directly onto the body, or into any virtual space. There are also often immersive, on-the-fly customization options, allowing for quick swaps of colors, designs, and other interchangeable features. Other popular examples include AR product visualization of furniture or decor for interior design planning. That, and AR product demos of complex & technical parts across automotive, engineering, electrical, and mechanical industries. But how do photo studios digitize products for 3D & AR hosting platforms? Read ahead for a demonstration of the often [single-click production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line) in the PhotoRobot Studio. We describe everything from the automated photography, to 3D model creation and optimization for AR platforms like Emersya or Sketchfab. ## How PhotoRobot Digitizes Products In the PhotoRobot-powered studio, AR product visualization begins with the robotized 360-degree capture of an item. This is usually using a [3D photography turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame) like PhotoRobot's Frame, which boasts a design for faster multi-row image capture. The Frame also automatically produces photos on a pure white background, while rapidly photographing all sides, top, and bottom views. Automatic image optimization and post-processing then ensures the quality of photos necessary to render a 3D model using photogrammetry software. This takes only minutes with PhotoRobot, which scans photos using Apple Object Capture to generate the 3D model. It is then possible to optimize the 3D model file on 3D & AR product visualization platforms. In fact, the entire production workflow from capturing product photos to generating the 3D model often takes under 2 minutes. Additionally, the procedure produces a series of still images and a 3D product spin in tandem. This way, companies achieve multiple outputs for various marketing campaigns on top of the 3D model for rendering in AR. ## Photographing the Product High-quality photography is necessary to ensure accurate 3D model rendering for AR product visualization. There must be photos from multiple angles and often 2+ elevations around the item. That includes at least one photo capturing a top view of the object, and at least one photo capturing a bottom view. At the same time, precise background removal and optimization needs to ensure all photos have a pure white background. That will improve the overall quality & accuracy when rendering a 3D model from photos. This is also a fundamental use case of the Frame turntable, with its design aiming to streamline 3D model photography. Although other PhotoRobot turntables are similarly capable, the Frame is truly unique with its dual-axis 360-degree rotation and optical plate. These features deliver high-speed precision when capturing all angles, multiple elevations, and top or bottom views. The device has a built-in robotic arm that positions the camera always opposite an integrated diffusion background. Meanwhile, the camera moves along a vertical trajectory, from -60 degrees to +90 degrees. The arm moves in sync with the backdrop as well, allowing for the capture of all photos without needing to reposition the product at all. It also captures each frame according to presets – in only a few clicks of the mouse. PhotoRobot automatically adjusts the height of the camera to capture each row, including from below the optical plate. This often takes no longer than 2 minutes in total to capture & automatically post-process images. Afterwards, PhotoRobot Controls Software can then scan the photos and start creating the 3D model at a single click. ## Rendering a 3D Model from Photos Integration of Apple Object Capture within PhotoRobot Controls allows for 3D model rendering in multiple file formats. The most popular is USDZ, which is best for iOS / macOS AR (although has limited support elsewhere). Other formats include STL (universal support for 3D printing), and OBJ / MTL (wide support across platforms, ideal for sharing detailed models & materials). However, the USDZ file format is the most common when producing content for AR visualization. To produce the 3D model, the Object Capture integration will scan photos and begin rendering a 3D file. After telling PhotoRobot to “Create 3D model”, there are only two settings to configure: Sensitivity, and Object Masking. Sensitivity relates to how sensitive the algorithm responds, while Object masking automatically separates the background from objects. It’s possible to use default settings here, or to adjust both to customize the model before rendering. Pressing Start in the software then renders the 3D file, which requires more or less time depending on the processing power in use. In some cases, it does take a little more time to render the file. For example, an Apple Mac Studio often completes this operation in under 3 minutes, while the Mac Mini takes approximately 3.5 minutes. ## Previewing the 3D Model File After rendering the 3D model, it is possible to preview the file using [AR Quick Look](https://developer.apple.com/documentation/arkit/previewing-a-model-with-ar-quick-look), Finder, or basic image preview programs on Mac. This is the stage where it is important to inspect the digital model from side-to-side and top-to-bottom. It is crucial to zoom into the object, and to inspect for any areas that might not have fully rendered. There may also be visual aspects that could benefit from further customization or optimization. If this is the case, it requires only rendering the 3D file again using the same photos with the new settings in the software. Then, when satisfactory, transforming the 3D model into AR product visualization requires a 3D content hosting platform. ## Publishing to 3D & AR Platforms 3D & AR platforms like PhotoRobot’s long-time partner Emersysa provide interactive 3D & AR viewers embeddable on any website or platform. Available by purchasing an annual subscription, the viewer enables the hosting & publishing of 3D model files online in various formats. - Omni-channel 3D product experiences - Interactive Web-based AR & Virtual Try On - Advanced 3D & AR Product Configurators There are no plug-ins necessary to display content, while embedding the viewer takes only seconds using a simple line of code. It follows the same process as embedding videos to a webpage. Companies embed the viewer using an iFrame with HTML code, using script, or using tags. Viewer options then allow for customization of the viewer size, language, appearance, preset colors / design, and compatibility. These will determine the general display settings for publishing the 3D files online. After uploading a 3D model, users can customize the product on the platform, and instantly preview items in AR mode. Users can experiment with different colorways in AR to best match a room’s decor, or to visualize configurations to scale. This also helps to see if the product will fit into the available surrounding space. ## AR & Web AR Product Visualization While traditional AR requires installing a separate app, Web AR allows customers to experience AR content directly through a browser. This is the case on the Emersya platform, which requires no additional downloads or installing apps. Customers visualize products in their own physical surroundings using a mobile or tablet with an integrated camera. They can seamlessly visualize, virtually try-on, and try-out products by simply scanning a QR code or visiting the product URL. In our opinion, it’s a top-class try-before-buying experience, ideal for trying on items like eyewear and apparel directly from a product page. Customers can also swap colors, design & material options within the AR experience, helping them find the most suitable product faster. ## Optimize in 3D, Visualize in AR 3D & AR platforms enable companies to configure product experiences online in real-time. Users simply switch back and forth between optimizing the 3D model and the AR preview mode. Previews allow for instant inspection of the item, as well as trying it out and resizing it in context of its surroundings. It is also possible to customize default product positioning, and color selection to explore all possibilities. Take for example adjusting the size, color, or interactions of a 3D product like furniture or stackable shelves in a virtual room. Users optimize in 3D, and then test in AR before publishing on product pages to share with customers. ## Other Popular AR & AR Web Product Viewers In addition to Emersya, there are numerous options for AR & web-based AR platforms. Each is often affordable, and easily accessible even if on a tighter budget. If looking into your options, the following might be worth consideration. - [**Emersya**](https://www.emersya.com/)- Many viewer applications at a reasonable price - [**Sketchfab**](https://sketchfab.com/) - Great rendering quality, and a user-friendly environment - **Vectary** - A universal tool, with tools available for creating 3D models - **P3D** - For a completely free platform - **DeepAR Studio** - An application within DeepAR SDK, free to use for up to 10 users a month - **Marmoset** - For high-quality rendering, serving more for presentation of model quality Moreover, 3D data also has native support in Google and Apple. This means that opening and utilizing 3D data is similar to opening a standard image. There is also wide support in terms of augmented reality functions, which is one of the main appeals. Afterall, who wouldn’t want to project a sofa that they see online directly into their living room? That, or virtually try on a pair of shoes, swapping colors & designs in and out on-the-fly? All without leaving the home! ## AR Product Visualization Across Industries Any customizable item or product that calls for trying-on or trying-out may benefit from augmented reality visualization. This is true across eCommerce & industries, from fashion to luxury products, electronics, or complex and technical items like automotive parts and machinery. Augmented reality helps make products interactive through immersive presentation. Take the following common items taking advantage of AR in eCommerce product visuals for example. - Apparel, accessories like designer clothing, bags, or eyewear - Electronics, gadgets, electrical components, eyewear - Furniture, home goods, household appliances - Industrial parts, mechanical products, power tools - Shoes, sports equipment, gear - Museum collection items, antiques, and artifacts ## Integrating AR into Production Workflows Does your business require a faster, simpler and more scalable way to capture, process, and distribute imagery in 3D & AR? Find out how PhotoRobot can help integrate AR into your studio’s production workflows today. We help studios generate content in 2D + 360 + 3D, and for AR / VR product experiences – all at the same time. Discover tools tailorable to each customer’s unique challenges, while also providing benefit to the entire PhotoRobot ecosystem. Just reach out to start connecting or upgrading your studio with AR and PhotoRobot technology. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/enhancing-product-photo-backgrounds # SECTION: blog > enhancing-product-photo-backgrounds # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2025-07-01 --- # Using AI to Enhance Product Photo Backgrounds PhotoRobot presents how to engineer AI prompts to generate custom product photo backgrounds for robotically captured imagery. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## When AI Supports Real Product Photography Using AI in the creation of product photo backgrounds is one way to enhance PhotoRobot [robotically captured photography](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line). While PhotoRobot is able to automatically remove the background from product photos, AI tools can replace backgrounds with brand-accurate flair. Take for example replacing the precise background removal of PhotoRobot with a background that visually showcases the product’s reputation. It could be a color scheme that complements the brand itself, or a full 3D scene hosting the product. The background may be a white veined marble, a deep purple-red velvet, ruby-red silk, or other luxurious textures. Better yet, some product backgrounds may illustrate the item’s actual components, like ingredients specific to a perfume. In this case, AI tools can drastically save time sourcing & aggregating all relevant product information – especially if it’s not on-hand. Teams can then use this information when engineering AI image prompts to generate backgrounds that are brand and product specific. Why not see for yourself below? Find out how PhotoRobot-powered studios are leveraging AI tools to enhance product backgrounds, and to incorporate within studio production workflows. ## The Goal Remains: High-Quality Product Photos Producing great product photos in less time and with less effort remains the cornerstone of the PhotoRobot mission. This is true even when AI can create photorealistic product images purely from text prompts. The starting point remains a real, high-quality product photo. AI can then enrich the story around it. Thus, advances in modern AI only expand the PhotoRobot toolbox. The technology also smoothly integrates into automated photography workflows. With advanced prompt engineering, AI can accelerate in-studio product flows, and enhance real product images which we robotically capture. Robotic capture ensures the high-quality essential to product imagery. It also functions to produce photos that are more compatible for enhancement with image generation tools. For example, using LED lighting with low CRI produces photos where part of the color spectrum is missing. This leads to critical issues for AI image generators, which cannot recreate what is not there. However, PhotoRobot ensures the perfect lighting, background removal, and post-processing of photos to efficiently run through AI. The resulting images are then optimal for additional enhancements, like background swaps or full 3D scene engineering. ## What About Fully AI-Generated Product Images? Why take real photos at all when AI can generate the product images? Sure, for some product marketing, real photos aren’t always necessary. However, deeper inspection of AI-generated images will often reveal flaws. This is why they tend to be useful only in limited applications. The most common issues that occur with AI product photos are odd typography, and minor detail errors. It is not as bad as seeing hands with six fingers, but still noticeable. AI commonly distorts dimensions, while failing quality expectations, or sometimes mismatching advertising and the real goods. This can raise both ethical and legal concerns, supporting the case to maintain investment in real product photography. ## How the Product Background Matters For many companies, producing product photos on pure white backgrounds or transparent backgrounds remains suitable. In fact, the majority of PhotoRobot customers require only its precise background removal. However, some product lines simply call for higher quality product imagery. Think of designer & luxury brands with exceeding reputations – Armani, Apple, Louis Vuitton, Rolex. Companies like these will require professional photos for print in magazines, and advertising on billboards. That, as well as images for online ads & product pages. In all cases, the item must remain the center of focus in photos. However, the background can also function to draw attention to the advert, and to distinguish a product from the competition’s. The background can match the color scheme of the brand itself, or emphasize an item’s material, texture, and design. Take for example adding shadowy tones to the background to illuminate silver, gold, and other bright or reflective products. Backgrounds like these are often popular in photos of designer wrist watches, sunglasses, jewelry collections, and other luxury goods. Although, the primary aim of the background remains to complement the item, and not distract away from it. ## When Authenticity is Key to Product Presentation In most cases, the goal of product imagery is to transfer a real object into the digital world. At the same time, the object should remain true-to-life, informative, and eye-catching. Large brands often do this by investing in highly advanced 3D product models and 3D model rendering pipelines. This way, assets become more immersive, while the items are also easy to place on any type of product background. 3D visualization also allows companies to demonstrate interchangeable, moving, or interactive product configurations. Take for example the embeddable 3D models of PhotoRobot in use with 3D model hosting platforms, such as our long-time Emersya. Even so, expert eyes can tell the difference between a real photograph and a 3D rendering. The same is truer for completely AI-generated images. Authenticity is simply lacking, sometimes in various aspects that the human eye easily discerns. This limits viability in some instances. Although, it does not mean 3D renders & AI image generation have no place at all in product photography. ## Why Automated Photography Remains the Standard At PhotoRobot, the goals remain the same – authentic photos with faster, simpler, and more scalable production workflows. - Thousands of photos per hour - Top-tier image quality - World-class product photography automation - Fully automatic post-production - Perfect & precise background removal - Instant publishing or delivery via API Despite rapid advances in AI image generators, PhotoRobot remains the faster and more reliable solution, with greater return on investment. There are no concerns in regards to consistency or quality of outputs, while trustworthiness and fidelity are a guarantee. ## Where AI Shines in PhotoRobot Workflows When using AI within PhotoRobot-powered workflows, there are a number of areas where AI excels. - **Automatic cataloging** (retrieving product names, product codes, and structured metadata) - **Background replacement** (placing items on marble, velvet, or other textures) - **Thematic visual storytelling** (e.g. illustrating a perfume’s ingredients alongside its bottle) For example, one use case would be photographing a collection of perfumes for a client. However, imagine that the studio has only the products on-hand, with limited product information. This is when AI prompts can easily fetch relevant data, automatically catalog it, and provide structured metadata on items. Studios can then attach the data to the client’s images, and use the information when replacing PhotoRobot’s precise background removal. It might be to create a background that is more representative of a customer’s brand, or of the product by its reputation. ## PhotoRobot Case Study: Photographing Perfumes For demonstration, the following is a real-world case study photographing a series of Armani Privé perfumes in [PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio). The actual flacon of perfume is available in the studio, but there is no detailed metadata with the product. In this case, an AI prompt can aggregate the relevant product information into a structured dataset for review. Moreover, it is possible to fetch data on every item within the complete fragrance collection. The prompt can fetch the fragrance name, collection name, and an EAN code for each item. It can then include instructions to create the data in two formats, for example: a plain TXT file, and a structured CSV table. ### Prompt 1: Fetch the Product List To fetch a product list, we first prompt AI by describing the project. The prompt should then also specify the information to retrieve, and how to format the results. (**Note:** The following example AI prompt engineering and real outputs are from **May 2025**. Keep in mind that output will vary across different platforms, and as the technology evolves alongside PhotoRobot workflows.) The prompt, “fetch the product list”: > I am building a structured dataset of perfumes for use in a product photography and AI automation environment. > Please generate a complete Fragrance Collection Overview of the Armani Privé perfume line, grouped by collection (e.g., Les Eaux, La Collection, Les Terres Précieuses, Les Mille et Une Nuits, Kogane Collection, etc.). > For each perfume, provide: > 1. **Fragrance Name** > 2. **Collection Name** > 3. **EAN Code** – the international barcode for the standard 100 ml bottle > Output the result in two formats: > - A plain, readable TXT file listing, grouped by collection (for human reference). > - A structured CSV table with columns: Collection, Fragrance, EAN. > - Prepare the files for direct download. > Only include perfumes that exist in the official Armani Privé line. If multiple EANs exist for a fragrance, provide the standard 100 ml version (or the closest available). > Do not include marketing language or descriptions — only use structured, factual data. ### Output 1: List of Armani Perfumes The above prompt provides both a plain TXT file and structured CSV table. It includes a structured overview of the complete perfume collection, with names, groupings, and EAN codes: This saves hours of manual work for the studio. That, or unnecessary back-and-forth and sometimes delayed communications between the studio and customer or supplier. ## PhotoRobot - PhotoRoom API Integration After capturing images with PhotoRobot – with clean backgrounds and optimal lighting – it’s then possible to enhance them further with AI. For this, PhotoRobot seamlessly integrates PhotoRoom via API into PhotoRobot’s control system. This allows for: - Automatic background removal, - Adding natural-looking shadows, - Swapping pure white background with luxury surfaces (marble, velvet, wood). ## Visual Storytelling through Product Backgrounds Taking it a step further, visual storytelling is possible through the product background in a number of ways where AI can assist. Take for example visualizing the key fragrance ingredients around each perfume bottle. ### Prompt 2: Find Visualizable Ingredients Finding visualizable ingredients specific to each perfume requires a more descriptive AI prompt. The prompt must ask for results to include key notes, visual themes, and design elements for each item. This information will help in later prompt engineering to generate background images that are accurate to the brand and product. Take the following prompt for example. We start by describing the project, and attaching the output CSV from the first prompt. > I am preparing a detailed dataset for building a mood board or artistic representation. The dataset must provide structured data to generate visual representations of perfumes using AI. Please provide a detailed CSV table for the perfumes in the following file: > - 2_armani_prive_overview_ean.csv (the output from prompt 1) > Select perfumes only in the dataset: > - **La Collection** > For each perfume, create the following columns: > 1. **Fragrance** – The name of the perfume > 2. **Top Notes** – Tangible, visualizable ingredients (e.g. flowers, resins, peels) > 3. **Heart Notes** – Tangible, visualizable ingredients > 4. **Base Notes** – Tangible, visualizable ingredients > 5. **Visual Themes** – A short phrase describing the atmosphere and textures the perfume evokes (for artistic use, e.g. “stone walls, golden light”) > 6. **Bottle Design** – A detailed description of the perfume bottle: color and material of the body, shape, color of the cap, and label > Also, keep all ingredients and design details clearly worded for use in image generation. Take for example: resins, woods, herbs, spices, flowers, fruits, leaves, roots, smoke, or textures – e.g., dry, mineral, creamy. Exclude abstract terms like “elegant”, “sophisticated”, or “sensual”. Focus on concrete visual elements like “black glass”, “gold plate label”, “ivory stone cap”, etc. > Additionally, briefly list the main visual themes or textures the perfume evokes (e.g. "golden glow", "stone walls", "church incense", "earthy forest", etc.) — anything useful for background styling or setting a graphic mood. > Prepare a CSV structure that will later be used to generate visual prompts for AI image models like DALL·E. Please format the output clearly and in full. ### Output 2: The Visualizable Ingredients Table CSV The prompt above results in a detailed ingredients table to specification in CSV file format. For example, the results of the prompt include the following for the first perfume. - **Collection**: La Collection - **Fragrance:** Bois d’Encens - **EAN Code:** 3605520754163 - **Top Notes:** Smoky frankincense resin; Black pepper grains - **Heart Notes:** Dry cedarwood chips; Vetiver roots - **Base Notes:** Patchouli leaves; Smouldering mineral smoke - **Visual Themes:** Stone walls, rising incense, charred wood, twilight silence - **Bottle Design:** Black glass bottle with black lacquered stone cap and gold plate label The second perfume then has its own results which are specific to the item. - **Fragrance:** Pierre de Lune - **EAN Code:** 3605520754170 - **Top Notes:** Powdered orris root; Crushed violet petals - **Heart Notes:** White heliotrope flowers; Soft white musk - **Base Notes:** Ivory suede; Light almond essence - **Visual Themes:** Moonlight reflections, violet shimmer, silky petals, translucent glow - **Bottle Design:** Black glass bottle with ivory stone cap and gold plate label This structured data on all perfumes in the collection will provide the information necessary to start crafting visual prompts. ### Prompt 3: Generate a “Visual Prompt” CSV Column With the visualizable ingredients list, the next stage is engineering the visual prompts for image generators. For this, prompting AI can produce a new column “Visual Prompt” for each different perfume in the CSV. However, this requires very detailed instructions within the new prompt. This begins first with uploading the visualizable ingredients list, and then describing the project. The prompt must then include multiple layers of specific commands. Commands cover the prompt requirements, common errors to avoid, restrictions such as in typography, and output as well as quality expectations. #### Describe the project and materials The first layer of the prompt attaches the CSV file for analysis, and provides general instructions on the task. > You are provided with a CSV file containing structured data about perfumes from the Armani Privé La Collection. Each row includes: > - Fragrance (name of the perfume) > - Top Notes (clearly visualizable ingredients) > - Heart Notes (clearly visualizable ingredients) > - Base Notes (clearly visualizable ingredients) > - Visual Themes (atmosphere and textures the perfume evokes) > - Bottle Design (material, color, shape, label, and cap) > - EAN (used as the name of the image file) > Your task is to generate a new column called "Visual Prompt" that contains a full and direct prompt for AI image generation tools (e.g., DALL·E or Midjourney). #### Define new column requirements The second layer of the prompt identifies the requirements for each new item in the new column of the CSV file. > Each prompt should describe how to transform a product photo of the perfume (named {EAN}.jpg) into a final image with the following properties: - The perfume bottle should stay as the central visual anchor. - Replace the background with a luxurious artistic scene that: - Includes elegant representations of the listed ingredients (Top, Heart, Base Notes). - Matches the color palette and lighting to the bottle's design. - Incorporates the visual themes (textures, moods, environments). - Adds foreground elements like smoke or mist if listed among ingredients. - Preserves the original perspective and camera angle. #### Specify restrictions and common errors to avoid Thirdly, the prompt names specific restrictions, and common errors to avoid. > Do not mention the CSV, or describe the structure. Write each prompt as if addressing the AI directly to generate the image for that perfume. > The result should appear premium, atmospheric, and true to the fragrance identity. It should be indistinguishable from a professionally retouched editorial photograph, but fully AI-generated. The viewer should not be able to tell the image is synthetic. > Also, do not mention or show artificial generation. The image must look authentic and photorealistic. #### Stipulate label design and typography requirements The fourth part of the prompt shares instructions when working with these specific perfume bottles. Typography is a common issue for AI, so it’s crucial to provide very clear instructions on label designs, branding, and styling. > Pay special attention to the design of the front label on the bottle and its graphics accuracy. The gold plate must include the following exact text, as the original image, centered and aligned as on the real product. > - The slash symbol (**" / "**) between ARMANI and PRIVĒ is slightly **taller** than other letters and subtly stylized. It starts slightly below other characters, and ends slightly above the other characters, as on the original image. > - The character "**Ē** " in PRIVĒ must have a **clearly visible horizontal accent mark**, while the letter including the accent mark is the same height as other letters. There is a flat horizontal line above it (not an acute line). The line must be the same width as the E below it, not slanted. It must not resemble an É. This is not a diacritic or an accent – it is a flat macron (horizontal bar). In other words, the horizontal line on Ē must resemble a short flat line, like a hyphen, placed precisely above the E. It must not be diagonal like in É. > - Match the exact label design from the reference product photo. > - The label must be identical in typography, spacing, and accents. The label must be the same visual style as the original image, as it is crucial to the brand identity. > - The typography must be accurate and not estimated or replaced. Caution: the typography may be changed for a single character, so follow the details for each character individually. > - **Do not change, shorten, or paraphrase** any part of the label. #### Describe final expectations The final layer of the prompt continues on the expectations for each visual prompt, and provides instructions for the new CSV. > The bottle plate must retain its **proportion**, **surface finish**, and **embossed print look** under soft lighting. > This label is **brand-critical** – treat it with the same visual fidelity as a logo or trademark. > The bottle shape is **brand-critical** – treat it with the same visual fidelity as a logo or trademark. > Do not alter the text or approximate the type – treat this label as a brand-critical design element that must be accurate and sharp. > The label must retain its real-life proportions, texture, and gold finish – it is slightly embossed with a soft satin sheen under soft light. > Save the result in a new CSV file with all original columns plus the new "Visual Prompt" column. ### Output 3: “Visual Prompt” CSV Column In the end, the resulting CSV table has the complete list of perfumes, names, EANs, visualizable ingredients, and visual prompts. The visual prompts contain full and direct prompts for AI image generation tools like DALL·E and Midjourney. These will help to create custom backgrounds and scenes that creatively complement the real photos of the perfume bottles. ## Custom Background Rendering from Visual Prompts After creating the visual prompts for each item, your favorite AI image generator can do the rest. All it requires is uploading PhotoRobot-captured images, and inputting the visual prompts from the CSV to create custom backgrounds. The generator will render the background according to the prompt engineering, and for rendering in different styles. Meanwhile, PhotoRobot product images with precise background removal make it easy to swap backgrounds in and out. If one does not match perfectly, your quality assurance teams can quickly create one that works. That, or prompt the AI generator to adjust outputs until satisfactory. ## Full 3D Background Scene Rendering Finally, if pushing the limits of AI background generation, even full 3D scene rendering is possible. This goes well beyond more straightforward background swaps, however. Imagine displaying a fantastical 3D environment featuring brand-accurate scenery in addition to the key ingredients. Accomplishing this requires a much more ambitious prompt. ### Prompt 4: Render a 3D Scene in the Background To generate a full 3D scene for one of the perfume bottles, another sophisticated prompt is necessary. It must take into account the scene composition, visual themes, atmospheric elements, color palettes, lighting and more. Take the following prompt for example. #### Describe the entire background scene After uploading a product image into the AI, start the generator prompt by listing all requirements for the background scene. This will include the information for the product from the visualizable ingredients list and visual prompts. > Generate the entire scene, including background, ingredients, textures, and artistic lighting in harmony with the bottle design.**Scene Composition:** Build an elegant, editorial-style environment around the bottle using: - Visual representations of the following ingredients: - Top Notes: Smoky frankincense resin; Black pepper grains - Heart Notes: Dry cedarwood chips; Vetiver roots - Base Notes: Patchouli leaves; Smouldering mineral smoke - Visual themes that express the atmosphere of the fragrance: - Stone walls, rising incense, charred wood, twilight silence - Color palette and lighting that matches the actual product: - Black glass bottle with black lacquered stone cap and gold plate label > Add atmospheric foreground effects such as smoke or mist if a part of the notes, partially overlaying the bottle for realism. Maintain visual balance, depth, and refinement. > Preserve a front-facing, studio-style perspective and camera angle. #### Specify critical instructions on label appearance Next, specify the critical instructions for graphic accuracy of the label and bottle. These are the same commands as in the visual prompts for the appearance of each individual item. The instructions regard accuracy of typography, label design, graphics, and original photo use. #### Include final image specifications Finally, prompt the AI with all final image requirements from the individual item’s visual prompt. This includes copying the same instructions as before on the proportions, finishes, embossed print, and lighting. These list the specific quality requirements for the label, bottle shape, text, typography, and additional design elements. Ultimately, the final output should take shape as a full 3D scene behind the item, which remains the center of focus. ### Output 4: AI-Generated Background Scene Judge the resulting 3D scene for the perfume’s product background yourself. **Note:** In this case, there is no way to fully integrate the real photograph into the 3D world. It is necessary for the AI generator to instead repaint the item digitally to place it within the 3D scene. In this case, there are various limitations, such as no true multi-layer composition like in Photoshop. Also, typographic issues remain with complex characters. Nonetheless, issues like these will not always persist, and may resolve sooner rather than later as the technology progresses. ## PhotoRobot - Fusing Real Automated Photography & AI In essence, the fusion of automated photography and AI tools can dramatically enrich the customer experience across your portfolio. Although the foundation remains a real-life photograph of high quality, AI can expand the storytelling around it. The technology supports thematic visualization, and can serve to highly accelerate photo studio workflows. It enables rapid information sourcing and synthesis, automatic cataloging, and effective background swaps (with knowledge of prompt engineering). To learn more, the PhotoRobot team is always ready to help businesses realize their creative vision. Just ask how we might help. Your project might even feature in future blog posts - if not a closely guarded secret workflow, of course! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow # SECTION: blog > photorobot-controls-app-workflow # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2025-03-19 --- # Experience the Standard PhotoRobot Controls App Workflow Take a virtual walkthrough of the standard production workflow using PhotoRobot hardware and _Controls software in the studio. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots, Software ## A Walkthrough of the PhotoRobot _Controls App Workflow What is an example of the standard studio workflow using PhotoRobot automated photography systems and [Controls App](https://www.photorobot.com/software)? To understand, start with the basic PhotoRobot-powered studio setup. - The standard workflow integrates barcode reader technology to scan items and preset codes. - A CubiScan dimensioning system is present to weigh & measure items, and to auto create metadata. - The use of shelf codes enables sorting items into categories by capture & post-processing presets. - PhotoRobot robotizes image capture (or recording video) by presets on a single command. - Automatic post-processing occurs in the Cloud in the background, so teams can instantly start photographing more items. - There is optional support for taking handheld and detailed shots with an iPhone while other workstations are in simultaneous operation. - Publishing to a global CDN or via API integration occurs automatically, without any interruption in production. This is possible thanks to software integration of robots, cameras, lights, computers, iPhones, post-processing, image delivery, and API connectivity. Discover for yourself each stage of the workflow below. We provide a simple yet complete walkthrough of the standard PhotoRobot studio production. ## 1 - Select a Workspace in the Software **The very first stage of a standard PhotoRobot workflow is selecting a software workspace in Controls App.** In the software, PhotoRobot Workspaces are customizable lists of hardware for specific photoshoots. Among other functions, the workspace tells the software which system will be in operation. [Setting up a workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace) connects the software to the system, which might be one or multiple PhotoRobot modules. This includes connection of cameras, studio lights, and other photographic accessories. The workspace enables full configuration of robots, laser settings, light settings, and capture settings. Although, if using a module featuring a [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) or [Multi-Camera rig](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam), capture settings for all angles are fully automatic. All PhotoRobot devices connect over the same LAN as the workstation computer, while the camera connects to the computer via USB. The devices then communicate and activate via the software workspace. ## 2 - Import Shooting List **After configuring the workspace, the second stage of a typical PhotoRobot workflow is to import a shooting list.** This is often via CSV file import. CSV import enables PhotoRobot operators to create an item with its configurations in Excel to import into the system. However, it is also possible to simply scan barcodes to validate inventory, ID products, and automatically receive items. In combination with CubiScan dimensioning systems, teams can then automatically record product weights & measurements, and automate photography sequences. This is in addition to generating valuable data alongside product imagery. It is also one of the many ways that PhotoRobot simplifies and speeds up photo studio routines. There is less human interaction with the workstation computer, and quicker processes overall thanks to less movement around the studio. Meanwhile, shooting lists are fully customizable in the system with configurable variables. Operators can assign names, tracking codes, barcodes, presets, workspaces, tags, shelf codes, notes, and links to any item. ## 3 - Confirm Item Receiving **Following import of the shooting list, the next stage is confirming reception of the items in the studio.** This is just before weighing and measuring items. The process involves only transporting the items to nearby a robotic workstation, and then scanning barcodes to confirm item receiving. The system will automatically mark the item present in the studio, with validation immediately after scanning the barcode. If items do not have barcodes, it is also possible to generate and print unique barcodes for different items. Additionally, [wizard-guided photo studio workflow software](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/wizard-mode) can simplify this whole process for production line operators even further. There can be instructions for each item, from receiving it in the system, to measuring, prep, capture, and item return. This way, any human talent even with minimal training can quickly recreate production workflows. ## 4 - Weigh and Measure Items with CubiScan **The fourth stage of the standard production workflow involves the use of a CubiScan dimensioning system.** CubiScan is an optional device in the PhotoRobot-powered studio, but its use enables higher levels of automation and overall productivity. The device is widely popular for introducing automation into shipping and receiving lines. It weighs and measures items (in metric or imperial units), and automatically generates valuable data for every item. This enables the automated capture of items by their specific dimensions and measurements. The data also functions to automate elevation of the Robot Arm to the middle of the object before robotized capture begins. Additionally, all information is instantly present in a database for the automated publishing of product details alongside imagery. ## 5 - Sort Items to Software Shelves with Presets **When receiving, weighing and measuring items is complete, the next stage is sorting items into categories using shelf codes.** Shelf codes are a way to store configurable photoshoot settings and presets for similar types of items in the system. The item categories may include color, transparency, size, and many other photographic properties. It is then possible to print unique shelf codes to sort items in the system by their automated photography and post-processing presets. All it takes is first scanning an item barcode, and then scanning its corresponding shelf code to assign its settings. In this way, studios can place shelf codes on racks, carts, or anywhere nearby where they prep items for photography. The closer to the robotic workstation, the quicker the production line becomes. Studios will often have shelf codes to sort items by style guides, various presets, object staging, image overlay and more. Each shelf code is fully customizable, so it depends only on the types of products to photograph. ## 6 - Identify the Item for Robotized Capture **After product sorting, identifying an item ready for photography requires only scanning its barcode.** This will automatically provide the system with its instructions for the robotized capture and post-processing of the item. This might include any presets within the item’s shelf code, such as for camera and light settings, as well as which outputs to capture. For example, presets may contain instructions for the system to extract specific 2D images in tandem with a 360 spin. It may also include steps for the robotized capture of multiple elevations around the object for [3D spin](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360) or [3D model photography](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model). With these instructions, all it takes is positioning the item onto the turntable. Afterwards, automation will take control over the entire photoshoot and post production. ## 7 - Stage the Object on the 360 Turntable **Next, staging objects for photography and aligning the turntable to the Robot Arm is simple using laser-guided object positioning.** PhotoRobot 360 turntables and Robot Arms feature laser positioning systems for quick alignment of machines and objects. These help to streamline the object staging process, and ensure the robot arm and 360 turntable are in perfect alignment. The lasers provide a cross-laser to quickly position items in the center of the turntable’s plate for photography. Also, as soon as the photography sequence begins, the lasers will turn off automatically. These object positioning systems are especially beneficial for automating [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). Accuracy is critical to ensure automation functionality, and to limit or eliminate the need for post-processing afterwards. ## 8 - Automate Capture of the Object **Starting the capture process requires only the scan of a barcode, a single click, or a tap on the spacebar.** Usually, there is a start barcode on the robotic workstation to begin the robotized capture sequence immediately after product staging. That, or the operator initiates capture at the workstation computer. Starting the sequence will then turn off the laser positioning system, and trigger the automatic vertical adjustment of the camera. The camera’s horizontal level will align to the absolute center of the object’s height. This is also fully automatic, and according to CubiScan’s earlier measurements of the object’s dimensions. After adjustment of the camera, the studio lights, robotic processes, and capture settings trigger automatically. These follow the preset commands in the system. Among other operations, the presets instruct the turntable to begin rotation, and trigger remote capture in sync with powerful strobes. All camera settings act according to the presets, while the strobe lights are also able to prevent motion blur. Preventing motion blur enables the fast capture of 360 spins, without needing to stop turntable rotation. Meanwhile, the Robot Arm is able to move along a vertical axis to automate the capture of multiple rows of elevation. This produces multi-row 3D spins, and allows for the quick generation of 3D object models. If recording [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video), it is also possible to automate movement of the camera by pre-programmable timelines. The timelines combine object rotation with camera swing to create for example a flying camera effect, with fast or slow sequences. ## 9 - Process in the Cloud Without Asking **After a capture sequence, the lasers turn back on, and cloud post-processing begins in the background without asking.** Post-processing in the cloud frees up the local computer to enable the start of a new capture process immediately. Backup of original images is automatic, while background removal and image optimizations run according to presets. The presets instruct the software to store files either locally in a shared folder, or upload to the cloud automatically. Presets can also publish files immediately after image capture to PhotoRobot Cloud, or via API to eCommerce export feeds. In this way, there is extremely minimal to zero human input necessary. The next product workflow can begin as soon as one capture sequence completes. Operators can stage the next object on the turntable, or take handheld and detailed shots next if necessary. ## 10 - Start Next Product Workflow **While post production occurs in the background, operators can immediately begin the next product workflow.** The lasers on the turntable and robot arm turn back on automatically, so object staging becomes a quick, repeatable process. At the same time, recreating the workflow requires only quick scans of shelf codes, product SKUs, and the start barcode. Robotized capture is again automatic according to CubiScan’s measurements of the identified object, and the capture & post-processing presets. All the while, images of the first product are post-processing, and often web-ready for publishing within a minute after capture. This includes multiple outputs in tandem: 360 spins, 2D still images, 3D spins, 3D models, and 360 product video. There is automatic file naming, and numerous digital asset management presets for smooth delivery as well. In some cases, production lines may also [take iPhone product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography) if using PhotoRobot Touch in the workflow. These photos and other handheld shots import directly into the system for automatic post-processing and publishing alongside other assets. ## 11 - Capture Upwards of 500 Items Every Shift **When each workstation offers a production time of roughly 1 minute per product, that’s nearly 500 items per 8-hour shift.** That includes full sets of automatically post-processed outputs: product image galleries, [packshot photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), and 360s. The production of thousands of assets is possible in one shift, even in natural warehouse environments without any climate controls. Now, imagine a large production hall with 60+ robotic workstations. These can fit into a space of approximately 25,000 square meters. It is also possible to connect all of these systems, with controls from a single software interface. Then, if one workstation photographs 500 items per 8-hour shift, that amounts to a rough throughput of 30,000 items per shift using 60+ machines. For two 8-hour shifts, that’s upwards of **60,000 items photographed per day**. Outputs are often web-ready, so the majority of images are publishable instantly. Certainly, production will not always go 100% to plan, but PhotoRobot clients have firsthand experience achieving outputs at these volumes. Imagine photographing 40,000 fashion items daily. That is the capability of the PhotoRobot-powered studio. ## 12 - Return Items with Software Wizards **At the end of the shift, software wizards direct production line operators through product return of the shooting list step-by-step.** The process is as smooth as product-in, taking advantage of barcode readers to confirm each product return. Scanning the item out automatically confirms return of the item in the system, and also generates a delivery note for the customer. This ensures that 100% of items leave the studio with 100% of the photos for each item. ## Smart Photography Workflow Software for Any Business PhotoRobot _Controls App offers customers direct access to the latest innovations right after production. Unlock the newest features and fixes with ongoing development, and every update supporting the entire PhotoRobot ecosystem. Every individual customer’s unique experience helps build the software into a platform that meets everyone’s needs. All while maintaining the flexibility to support unique requests for any business’ photography. Would you like to see the PhotoRobot-powered studio live and in person? Learn more about PhotoRobot including how to book a custom demo around your business’ workflow in our [PhotoRobot Onboarding Videos](https://www.photorobot.com/video-category/onboarding). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography # SECTION: blog > iphone-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2025-02-27 --- # Introducing the PhotoRobot Touch iOS Mobile Application The release of the iOS mobile application Touch enables teams to integrate iPhone product photography into PhotoRobot-powered production lines. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## What is the PhotoRobot Touch App? [**PhotoRobot Touch**](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch) aims to fully support iPhone product photography in sync with PhotoRobot-powered production lines. It enables teams to capture **professional handheld stills**, **detailed shots**, and **simple 360s** with one or multiple iPhones in combination with PhotoRobot. Additionally, **wizard-guided software** helps to automate complex workflows, like taking 10s, 100s, or 1000s of still images in order. This makes it easy to recreate complex workflows, time and again, and provides greater mobility in the studio. It also allows for achieving handheld image requirements while one or multiple robotic workstations are in simultaneous operation. One team member captures all the necessary handheld still images: close-ups, and detailed shots using an iPhone. At the same time, other stations focus on the production of **360 spins**, **3D models**, and **360 product video**. This allows for the capture of multiple products and outputs at once, so that teams can achieve all of their photos in even less time. [Download PhotoRobot Touch](https://apps.apple.com/us/app/photorobot-touch/id6462890188) on the App Store. ## How Does the Application Work? As we develop PhotoRobot Touch, we want to provide photo studios the ability to use the latest iPhones for their product photography. In comparison to classic digital cameras, the iPhone provides a lightweight alternative that fully integrates into [**PhotoRobot studio workflows**](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow). The only downside is that iPhones using PhotoRobot Touch do not function with strobe lighting. Instead, the use of continuous lighting is necessary to ensure proper lighting of objects. Otherwise, the advantages of using an iPhone for handheld product photography are many. The iPhone provides a **lightweight** alternative to classic digital cameras. It **fits in the palm of the hand**, but has a **large screen for touch-control** and interaction. This means producing high-quality product photos requires only the tap of a fingertip. That includes macro and tele-lens shots, without any cables necessary. PhotoRobot Touch integration of iPhone camera control directly syncs handheld capture & file delivery in the PhotoRobot workflow. Additionally, **Production Wizards** enable teams to configure **templated-based workflow steps**, with text or visual instructions for operators to easily follow during production. Wizards can include sample images of specific pictures and details to photograph. For example, workflow steps might require taking specific detailed shots as required by a style guide. It can be capturing the logo of a fashion product, or detailed shots for a car reverse engineering manual. The software guides operators through capturing each required photo, no matter if it’s 10 or 1000+ images in order. It also automatically names files, uploads photos to appropriate folders, and exports with unrestricted or preset conditions, thumbnails, and labels. ## Example Studio Setup Using PhotoRobot Touch Take the traditional PhotoRobot workflow consisting of six stages and using the following basic photo studio setup for example. - The studio has **two robotic workstations**, and **one iPhone** on the floor. - One station features a [**360 turntable**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table)**and** [**robot arm**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) installation. - The other station features the [**Cube robot**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) supporting a [**premium ghost mannequin**](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins). **Note:** In this case, **it is possible to use both workstations simultaneously** when there are multiple production line operators on the floor. This means that while the 360 turntable is in operation, another member of the team can photograph the mannequin. They can do this either using the camera at the mannequin station, or handheld with a connected iPhone. Alternatively, they can use the iPhone to capture more high-quality stills of the product at the turntable station when necessary. ## Simple Controls: Scan, Aim, and Touch to Capture PhotoRobot Touch enables the use of an iPhone as both a camera and a powerful barcode / QR code reader in its workflow. This helps for expedient onboarding, as well as for the easy recreation of any processes. A general example of the PhotoRobot Touch in operation would include the following. - Scan the QR code in the desktop app to connect the iPhone to the PhotoRobot account. - Scan the item barcode to connect the iPhone to the item in the system. - Select the folder (project) to complete. - Photograph the item at the touch of a screen. - Confirm the photo. - Repeat until complete. After finishing a set of photos, the app can then direct users to the next folder / task if any remain in the project. At this point, it is also possible to return to previous steps, and re-capture any photos if necessary. Also keep in mind, if one iPhone’s battery is low, replacing it for the next requires only scanning two codes. There is no adjustment of settings. This is why larger companies tend to have a batch of iPhones in a bulk charging station for operators to simply swap in and out anytime. Phones have a longer lifespan in higher volume workflows this way, helping to keep repairs under warranty. ## Integration into PhotoRobot-Powered Workflows When using an iPhone in production, there are then **six stages to the traditional workflow**. 1. **Scan & Measure:** Receive, weigh, & measure inventory from stock-in to stock-out. 2. **Sort & Style:** Auto assign presets by shelf codes, category, style guides, and staging. 3. **Robotize 2D + 360 + 3D Capture:** Automate robotic workstation hardware, cameras, lights, capture & backup. 4. **Capture iPhone product photos:** Take unrestricted photos by hand, or use template-based wizards with visual instructions for each photo to produce. 5. **Post-Process in the Cloud:** Automatically post-process, back up, and deliver files with no interruption to the workflow – and while starting to photograph the next item. 6. **API & Publish:** Auto publish immediately after image capture to PhotoRobot Cloud, or via API to existing eCommerce export feeds. ## 1 - Scan & Measure **When receiving items, the first step is to Scan & Measure the inventory.** Production line operators are able to scan barcodes to validate inventory, ID products, and automatically mark items “received” in the system. Teams are also able to combine barcode support with CubiScan to record product weights & dimensions, as well as to automate robotized capture. This includes the automatic generation of valuable data alongside imagery. ## 2 - Sort & Style **The next stage after receiving inventory is to sort & style items in prep for automated capture.** This involves sorting items into categories with similar photoshoot settings. Teams are able to create unique rack (shelf) codes which are printable and scannable to assign capture & post-processing presets. Simply scan the item, and then scan the shelf code to sort items by style guides, presets, staging, & image overlay. There is also laser-guided positioning on every robotic module to ensure accurate and quick product staging. This makes it easy for machine operators to position objects perfectly in prep for robotized capture. Print unique shelf codes with corresponding presets to place on shelves near similar types of items. ## 3 - Robotize Capture of 2D + 360 + 3D Outputs **After staging an item for photography, PhotoRobot robotizes capture of still images, 360 spins, 3D models, and 360 product video.** For this, control over an entire studio consisting of *one or multiple robotic workstations* is possible from a single interface. That, or by quickly scanning item barcodes, Shelf codes, and Start barcodes. At the click of a mouse or by barcode, PhotoRobot software automates every stage of robotized capture. This includes fully automatic settings for hardware, cameras, strobes, studio lights, capture, backup, download, file naming, and more. It also produces a wealth of still images (often 24, 36 or more) in tandem with every 360 spin, and more for 3D spins and 3D models. ## 4 - Capture iPhone Product Photos **The integration of PhotoRobot Touch into the workflow adds another device to photograph objects to the production line.** Touch features barcode reader support, just as with PhotoRobot _Controls software, and 3 modes of operation. It enables unlimited & unrestricted handheld photography, operation by template-based workflow wizards, or the tethered capture of basic 360 spins. It also allows us to capture all customer-required handheld images at any time in the workflow. Take for example producing 3D models of items at one workstation, while also photographing detailed shots by hand at another part of the studio. The team members with PhotoRobot Touch can walk from station to station, capturing professional product photography by iPhone. The application also syncs with any project, with automatic file naming, image upload to appropriate storage folders, and export with unrestricted or preset conditions. ## 5 - Post-Process in the Cloud **After photography by robotic workstation and iPhone, post-processing then occurs automatically in the cloud – without asking.** The software creates immediate backups, and delivers files instantly. It automates background removal, image enhancement, and basic to advanced editing operations according to configurable presets. Meanwhile, as operations occur in the Cloud, there is no interruption to production workflows. All operations run simultaneously and in the background, meaning it’s possible to immediately continue photography of other items. There is no waiting for local software to post-process files before continuing production. Post-processed files are then delivered automatically to any internal or external CDN. ## 6 - API & Publish **The final stage of production enables the immediate publishing of images after capture to PhotoRobot Cloud, or to eCommerce export feeds.** It allows for direct integration via API to any existing eCommerce export feed (JSON / XML). A global CDN then ensures quick loading & pixel-perfect resolution on any device, with real-time image scaling and support for JPEG / WebP. For example, after producing a 360 spin by robotic workstation, it is possible to automatically publish it to the web. This is possible by API connectivity, or using embeddable links & codes from the software. It can also include upload of all still images from the robotic workstation, as well as the detailed shots from PhotoRobot Touch-enabled iPhones. These, we can display in a gallery consisting of multiple outputs – automatically, or at the click of a mouse to approve publishing. ## Three Modes of iPhone Camera Control For maximum productivity in the studio, the PhotoRobot Touch application supports 3 modes of camera capture. - Unrestricted Batch Handheld Photography - Customizable Wizard-Guided Production - Tethered Capture of Basic 360 Spins ## Unrestricted Handheld Photography Take high-quality product photos at the click of an iPhone screen. There are no restrictions on limits, and no instructions to follow. Simply capture, and the software does the rest: auto file naming, image upload to appropriate storage folders, and export with conditions. - Using Touch in free capture mode is ideal when there is an unspecified number and type of images to capture. - One example is photographing scratches or imperfections on a vehicle, or photographing various labels, logos, and tags on a piece of clothing. - After image capture and confirmation, images upload to a predefined folder for automatic post-processing, renaming, etc. ## Template-Based Wizard Production For automation to easily recreate workflows, configurable wizard templates are able to guide production line operators step-by-step. This helps to expedite onboarding of human talent, and to ensure photographers never get lost during production. Wizards can contain text as well as visual instructions, and sample images of photos to capture. - Customizable template-based wizards help to predefine a list of photos for operators to take in order. - Each wizard can display text instructions for images to capture, sample images, image names, and image descriptions. - It is possible to skip images in wizard steps, or to recapture images at any time. - Wizards can contain output file formats for tailor-made post-processing of images. ## Tethered Capture of Simple 360 Spins It is also possible to create simple 360 product spins by iPhone using a wire-shutter and special adaptor to trigger the camera. In this way, remote camera control in sync with PhotoRobot is possible. The iPhone can function on a tripod, with capture synced to an object’s rotation on a 360 turntable or Cube robot. - Remote iPhone camera capture of a product on a turntable (or Cube) becomes possible via wire shutter and special adaptor. - The iPhone camera is capable of capturing basic 360 spins using still lights, and mostly in traditional start-stop mode of the turntable. - This makes it possible to produce decent 360 spins without a high-end DSLR or mirrorless camera. However, high-end cameras will still produce 360 spins in greater resolution. - Thus, Touch is mostly to support other PhotoRobot workstations by functioning as a solution to capture stills by hand. ## Customizable Camera Settings One advantage of PhotoRobot Touch is the ability to create and lock camera settings in the _Controls App. Camera settings can include: - **Presets:** Enable the customization of aspect ratio, pre-selected camera, auto-confirm, and barcode styles. - **Triggering:** A wire shutter can trigger the camera to automate spin photography by iPhone. In this case, PhotoRobot provides special wiring, uses a lightning or USB-C to stereo-jack Apple original converter, a special triggering box for manual capture, and a cable for the control unit. - **Preview & Touch-Screen Capture**: The iPhone's superb camera, light weight, and interface display are ideal for previewing images, and for displaying wizard-based content. - **Manual or Auto Confirmation:** After capture, it is possible to manually confirm images for upload, or to create a setting for automatic confirmation. If auto, the production line operator will simply accept images in the software, and it will automatically upload with confirmation. ## Easy Connection to Multiple iPhones Integration of multiple iPhones into production is extremely simple. It requires only that each iPhone have the Touch App. After installation, users simply scan a QR code to launch the app on the new device. They can then open any item by scanning its barcode, and then begin photography immediately. Some studios also use iPhone charging stations to dock phones when not in use. This ensures less delays in production workflows when switching from one iPhone to another. ## Is Touch Valuable for Your Unique Business? Overall, PhotoRobot Touch can be an advantage to a wide range of photo studios and their photographic requirements. Take for example some of the following general use cases. - **The customer needs to photograph items in parallel and simultaneously.** In this case, one operator can capture all necessary detailed shots with an iPhone. At the same time, PhotoRobot is capturing 360 spins, still product photography, 3D models, or 360 product video on a turntable or mannequin workstation. This is most common for photography agencies and companies specializing in second-hand textiles, reselling, and recycling. - **There is a requirement to capture specific images in a sequence, and name the photos according to the content.** A typical example is in product photography for selling used cars online. That, or producing photos for a vehicle reverse engineering manual, which can call for 100s or 1000s of detailed handheld photos. - **The customer needs a limited number of robotically captured images (1x36 spin), and a significant amount of handheld images.** In this case, free mode or wizard-assisted handheld capture is particularly useful. Take for example a photography agency offering car turntable photography, or an online car superstore. These might need only a basic 360 spin of the vehicle, but hundreds of hand-held images inside and out of the car. - **You do not want to invest in another DSLR, and instead need a reason to buy the latest iPhone.** All jokes aside, PhotoRobot Touch brings another invaluable and lightweight solution into the workflow on the studio floor. Maybe a DSLR requires charging, or carrying a heavier camera everywhere is tiring. Simply connect an iPhone to do the job! ## Unlocking the App for First-Time Users For [first-time PhotoRobot Touch app users](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual), there is an in-app purchase to unlock the full user experience. Also, users should have an active PhotoRobot Controls App account. However it is still easily possible to test the app without purchasing a Touch license. To experiment for free, the app has a counter that enables users to take 3 test images. The photos are available in full resolution, and post-processing operations run in PhotoRobot _Controls. After taking the test images, users can then restart the app to reset the test image counter. This allows for taking another 3 test shots, without any commitment to purchase a license. If deeper testing is necessary, the best way is then to purchase a PhotoRobot Touch monthly user license. ## App Functionality & Requirements Keep in mind Touch functions only as a remote camera interface featuring touchscreen control. Meanwhile, all configuration of folders, workflows, thumbnails, and other settings is within PhotoRobot _Controls. That includes the selection of which folders will appear in the Touch app when in operation. Users assign specific flags to the folders in the system, which in turn makes the folder visible in the Touch App. Users also create explicit folders for workflows, spins, detailed shots, and miscellaneous images directly in PhotoRobot _Controls. Also, for users with an active PhotoRobot license, the **“Power User” subscription level is necessary** for the account that connects to Touch and the iPhone. In other words, users should have two licenses to make the most of the app. They should have the Touch license, and also the “Power User” license in the PhotoRobot Cloud version of CAPP. This is because the iPhone uses internet connectivity to upload images to the Cloud in real-time, over a Wi-Fi or cellular connection. Are you ready to integrate professional iPhone product photography into your standard workflows? Do you have questions about installation, or connecting multiple devices to your robotic workstations? Let us know how PhotoRobot can help! Our specialized technicians are ready to help tailor automated photo technology around your unique business’ needs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/20-years-automated-photography # SECTION: blog > 20-years-automated-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2025-02-07 --- # PhotoRobot Celebrates 20 Years in Automated Photography Innovation Recap 20 years of innovation in automated photography with the PhotoRobot team, our partners, and customers around the globe. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## 20 Years of Innovation in Automated Photography How does PhotoRobot commemorate 20 years of achievement in automated photography? Join us for the celebration to revisit our many accomplishments, meet the team, and hear the plan going forward. To mark the day, PhotoRobot Founder & CEO Kamil Hrbacek hosted a party at the PhotoRobot Showroom in the Czech Republic. In attendance, there were Managing Director of PhotoRobot - North America, Steve Embree, and experts from nearly all moving parts of the company. This included valued team members in business management, sales & logistics, support, development, manufacturing, and, of course, photography. Receive highlights from the event ahead. We recap 20 years of innovation, showcasing both our milestones, and our ongoing commitment to our customers across six continents. ## Greater Support for North America & Worldwide Let’s firstly celebrate **PhotoRobot North America**. Since 2004, PhotoRobot has installed automated photography systems the world over, and now North America is receiving even greater support. This is thanks to Managing Director of PhotoRobot - North America, Steve Embree, and PhotoRobot’s new business address in the USA. The additional base of operations enables even more direct access to manufacturing, development, and service for the **USA, Canada, and Mexico**. At the same time, this helps us to provide new & existing customers worldwide with the most expedient service possible. In this regard, Steve Embree (formerly President of Snap36) bridges the gap to PhotoRobot North America. His invaluable experience spans 30+ years in Retail, mostly in executive leadership roles in Fortune 500 Retailers. This knowledge helps guarantee client satisfaction with every PhotoRobot installation, from understanding the technology to building tailor-fit solutions. Clients in North America gain the same access to the latest innovations, from manufacturing to development – directly from the manufacturer. All with streamlined distribution and service, just as PhotoRobot clients across Europe, South America, Africa, Asia, and Australia have come to expect. ## Two Decades of PhotoRobot _Controls Next, it’s impossible to talk about the company’s evolution without recognizing the dedicated developers behind PhotoRobot _Controls App. Our Dev Team ensures that _Controls remains a stable, world-class platform that is both scalable and sustainable. They build and optimize code flexible enough to meet specific needs, while likewise ensuring that the entire PhotoRobot ecosystem can benefit from all new features. This includes optimizing features around new as well as existing customers, and brings us to the release of [**PhotoRobot _Controls App 2.12.5**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-updates-new-features). The latest version of _Controls delivers improvements focusing largely on the quality of use for our customers. There are improved automated photography processes, and enhancements for overall usability and stability of the application. These updates also coincide with the launch of [**PhotoRobot Touch**](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch), an iPhone app integrating iPhone photography into automated workflows. Touch enables the capture of handheld still images & detailed shots, or the tethered capture of simple 360 spins. The application features programmable, wizard-guided steps to visually assist production, and to benefit companies that photograph multiple items at once. That, or production lines who simply have longer shooting lists to follow, such as for car reselling or reverse engineering manuals. In the end, applications such as these wouldn’t be possible without our team of extremely talented developers. Their work grants clients access to the newest innovations, with direct communication around every update for quick onboarding and smoother workflows. ## Next-Generation AI-Assisted PhotoRobot Modules Now, for the PhotoRobot showcase, we have to welcome our next-generation, AI-assisted automated photography robots to the PhotoRobot family. Over the years, PhotoRobot manufacturers have always strived to push the boundaries of design, and the latest robotic modules are no exception. First among these, there are the **C-Class Type turntables**. These signature turntables are available in two models to support different size plates: the **C850**, and the **C1300**. Both models build on the basic principles of the [Case 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) and the [Frame](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame), but also add unique value of their own to the automated photo studio. These accompany a new variant of PhotoRobot Cube, the [**Cube Compact**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/cube-compact-photography-robot), and a new [**Air Cargo**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology) robot. There are also now a selection of [**premium ghost mannequins for sale**](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins), and some more niche installations using PhotoRobot technology. For example, recently designed **PhotoRobot ART** installations support the museum & antique photography sector, enabling the automated photography and digitization of valuable collection items. Additionally, [**PhotoRobot PINK**, the Medical Robot Photographer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pink-the-medical-robot-photographer) was designed in cooperation with valued partners to automate the photography of patients in a clinical setting. The system functions as an automated photo booth to optimize the picture-taking of patients in clinical procedures and health centers. It has built-in cameras, automated lighting, and photography automation software automatically editing and delivering images to a clinic’s internal systems. Modules like these are exemplary of what PhotoRobot together with our customers are able to achieve. Meanwhile, the ability to combine multiple PhotoRobot systems into unique configurations means the evolution is only just beginning. ## 20 Years of Excellence with Broncolor Lighting Finally and also noteworthy of the celebration, PhotoRobot received a personalized Broncolor Flashlight to commemorate **20 years in partnership**. Since the start, PhotoRobot software integration of Broncolor photography lights and LEDs has helped customers attain the perfect lighting for automated photography. Outputs range from [shadow-free still images](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image), to [360 & multi-row spins](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360), [virtual 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model), [object animation](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/animation), and [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video). Thanks to the use of powerful Broncolor strobes, PhotoRobot signature turntables are able to capture these outputs often without ever stopping object rotation. The strobes are accurate and fast enough to freeze objects in place for photographs, and thus significantly speed up our customers’ photography. We can also achieve picture-perfect images when using turntables in traditional start-stop mode, or when using LEDs for continuous lighting. All thanks to the reliability of Broncolor lights, and with their full integration inside PhotoRobot Controls Suite. ## Special Thanks to our Longer List of Partners In addition to Broncolor, PhotoRobot must extend our sincerest gratitude to our longer list of partners and integrated hardware providers from past to present: - **Apple: MacOS, iOS** (2014 - Present) - **Canon** (2008 - Present) - **FOMEI: Stobes, LED** (2004 - Present) - **Broncolor Siros**: Strobes (2004 - Present) - **RotoLight**: LED (2004 - Present) - **DMX Standard Compatible Lights**: LED (2016 - Present) - **Profoto D2:** Strobes (2016 - Present) - **Aputure, ARRI:** DMX Standard Compatible, LED (2016 - Present) ## PhotoRobot: From Then to Now 20 years in an industry evolving as rapidly as ours has led to many significant milestones driven by the need for innovation. However, these achievements are largely thanks to our customers, who are at the forefront of PhotoRobot’s technological evolution. It is their specific needs that help build our adaptive technology in automation and AI – assisting to simplify, speed up, and standardize all PhotoRobot workflows. Meanwhile, ongoing development and advances in manufacturing provide a competitive edge unique among the industry. What will be next for PhotoRobot? Why not tell us? For our team, the mission remains the same, but the technology now has more applications than ever. Just reach out to find out how advances in today’s technology can adapt to your business, and continue leveling up your photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/controls-app-updates-new-features # SECTION: blog > controls-app-updates-new-features # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2025-01-29 --- # PhotoRobot _Controls 2.12.5. New Features & What’s Next What’s new in PhotoRobot Controls App 2.12.5? Read the word straight off the developers’ desks on the latest innovations to benefit all PhotoRobot customers. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## The Developers’ Report: PhotoRobot _Controls 2.12.5 The release of [PhotoRobot _Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) 2.12.5 delivers improvements focusing largely on the quality of use for our customers. This includes improved automated photography processes, as well as enhancements for overall usability and stability of the application. True to our mission, these achievements help _Controls to serve as a world-class platform that remains both scalable and sustainable. They enable us to continue building custom features that can meet more specific needs, but still provide benefits to all PhotoRobot users. Why not hear straight from our developers? Read the developers’ report ahead to find out what’s new, and what’s next for PhotoRobot _Controls. ## Directly from the Developers’ Desks From our committed and extremely talented team of developers at PhotoRobot to our customers: > “Hello all, > I’m excited to share an update on our PhotoRobot Controls portfolio, highlighting both recent achievements and our upcoming plans. Let’s start with where we are presently. ### Recent Development > Over the past few months, we have invested significant effort into stabilizing desktop synchronization, improving automated photography processes, and enhancing overall usability and stability. This involved fixing, rewriting, and developing a significant amount of code. > Every decision and code change, we approached extremely carefully with the future in mind, ensuring they not only solve immediate challenges but also lay a strong foundation for growth. Our philosophy has been to build scalable and sustainable solutions that allow us—and our customers—to thrive over the long term. > During this process, we’ve closely collaborated with a number of our key customers to deliver custom features tailored around their needs. However, true to our philosophy, we ensured these **features benefit all customers** in the PhotoRobot ecosystem. Our mission remains: to deliver solutions that meet everyone’s needs while maintaining the flexibility to support unique requests. > And supporting our customers sometimes takes a fair amount of work. This is especially true when users do not possess the technical abilities to follow troubleshooting instructions. Thus, to further assist our amazing support team, we have introduced an **automatic data collection** feature. With just one click, users can attach logs, database, and system information directly within the application, streamlining troubleshooting and enabling us to provide faster and more effective support. This improvement ensures that even the most complex incidents can be resolved more effectively and with less friction. > Thanks to all these changes, we have seen a significant decrease in the number of support incidents requiring development intervention. This frees up our team to focus on building even more value for our customers. ### Looking forward > Looking ahead, we’re thrilled to announce that the launch of the **PhotoRobot Touch** mobile application for [automated iPhone product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-touch) has been a success! It’s been incredibly rewarding to see how much our customers love it. And the best part? Even more exciting features and scenarios are just around the corner. > On the desktop and cloud side, we have added numerous new features. While many are designed to simplify daily tasks for users, others address critical security and business needs, ensuring no money is lost on either side. For this, we extend a sincere thank you to Martin Valenta for the exceptional work on the account interface, billing, subscription handling, and **PWS/Batches** functionality. > Lastly, I would like to spotlight our ongoing commitment to [support of **new Canon models**](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras). We promised—and we delivered! We’re currently beta testing the latest version with selected customers to ensure a smooth transition before the public release. This is because Nikon support is reaching its end of life (EOL) and will no longer be available. This decision allows us to focus on delivering the best possible experience for Canon users. We will share more details on this in the near future!” ## _Controls 2.12.5: Release Notes Find release notes for PhotoRobot Controls 2.12.5 below, and also directly in the app before download. **2.12.5 (Dec 9, 2024):** - Added functionality to remember the application window size, position, and display settings. - Added link preview functionality. - Introduced a new macro HTTP trigger. - Enabled reload from disk for selected items. - Added the 'Last taken' sort option. - Improved conflict resolution for items. - Added data collection for support incidents. - Introduced the 'Hide empty' option for items without pictures. - Added an option to avoid modifying the item status when exporting items without photos. - Resolved an issue where opening an item with a missing workspace would fail. - Corrected tag setting functionality in the macro dialog. - Fixed a problem where test shots failed on certain Canon models. - Ensured that macros, presets, workspaces, shelves, and viewer layouts are unassigned when an item is deleted. - Resolved an issue where the select image dialog would not load under certain conditions. - Fixed an issue where exporting a photo resulted in an incorrect compression level. ## Unlock the Latest Innovations in PhotoRobot _Controls PhotoRobot _Controls provides customers direct access to the latest innovations right after production. Our team of extremely dedicated and talented developers leverage every customer’s unique experience to enhance the entire PhotoRobot ecosystem. Unlock fixes and new features, with ongoing development and every new update offering benefits to all users. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/cube-compact-photography-robot # SECTION: blog > cube-compact-photography-robot # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2024-01-18 --- # Cube Compact - The Universal 360 Photography Robot Discover the expanded functionality and features of PhotoRobot’s Cube Compact, the universal 360 product photography robot. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots ## The Universal 360 Robot Gets an Upgrade - Cube Compact Cube Compact is a variant of the Cube v6, the [universal 360 product photography robot](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube). These multi-purpose devices transform into standalone turntables, rotating mannequin mounts, or to suspend items in air using suspension mode. The robot is thus suitable for an extremely wide range of small to medium size products, and many photography applications. Take for example 360 product photography of items which either cannot stand on their own or need additional support. Think of products such as handbags, bicycles, chandeliers, or light fittings. In suspension mode, the Cube can suspend items such as these above a workstation and rotate them 360 degrees. This is in full synchronization with cameras, strobes, and lighting to automate the capture of any and all angles. The device can mount to the floor or ceiling, combine with many photographic accessories, and is compatible with other photography robots. But what makes the Cube Compact different from other versions? Read ahead for a behind-the-scenes look at the new design and higher throughput of our universal 360 product photography robot. ## Optimized design for maximum performance Other versions of the Cube robot feature many cooling slots on the body of the device. However, these slots can accumulate a lot of dust, especially when photographing textiles on a photography mannequin. These slots are much like the filter of a washing machine. They require regular attention and cleaning for smooth machine operation. Now, the Cube Compact no longer features these slots. Instead, the device’s body is mostly sealed-off to eliminate the dust inlets into the machine. The airflow inside is completely controlled, while the only input is a single fan with a dust filter. At the end of the airway, a single outlet allows air to flow out of the robot. Thus, all air flowing into the system is filtered, and there is no other way for dust to get inside. This helps when photographing large amounts of textiles, or working in a natural warehouse environment. The filter is also extremely easy to clean to ensure minimal interruption in production workflows. At the same time, it is possible to equip the robot with a built-in laser positioning controller. This enables machine operators to connect and power the line-laser head directly with the robot. In this way, there is less cabling to worry about and no need for an additional laserbox. ## More productive photography of clothing and textiles The Cube Compact evolved from the need to improve the device’s functionality when photographing large amounts of clothing and textiles. Surprisingly, even in climate-controlled spaces, items like these tended to accumulate and produce a lot of dust. This was an issue especially when mounting a mannequin torso to the Cube. Thus, the design of Cube Compact aims to combat exposure to dust when working with mannequins, and prevent textile fibers from getting into the machine. And this isn’t only for photographing a few items per session. Cube Compact will support the photography of upwards of **500 objects per workspace, per shift**. Meanwhile, the devices monitor thermal characteristics, and are extremely easy to clean before, after, and in-between photo sessions. This ensures less interruption and maximum productivity in production workflows. At the same time, the hidden control unit and built-in laser output reduce potential points of failure around the workstation. There is no cabling to stumble over, and there is no longer a need for an additional laserbox. These both reduce the amount of machinery necessary for production, and mean more space for photographers to move around freely. ## Same reliable hardware and photographic accessories Really, it’s the same power clients expect of PhotoRobot’s Cube, just more compact in design. The Cube Compact features the same high-quality machining and 130 kg load-bearing capacity as all Cube devices. This is in all modes of operation: using the standalone 100 cm-diameter turntable, the mounting system, or in suspension mode. Meanwhile, zero-clearance transmission provides surgical precision even at maximum loads. Automated control software then syncs the Cube to other devices, cameras, lights, and robots for complete studio control. Further, a quick-mounting system supports the Cube’s easy installation onto various workstations. This makes it easy to set up the device on its own, or in combination with other robots in a matter of minutes. Additionally, it’s possible to compliment the Cube’s quick mannequin exchange system with an optional mannequin storage cart. The cart can transport up to six mannequins of different sizes and shapes from one station to the next. Team members can then prep mannequins in advance and off to the side. They are then easy to mount onto the Cube when ready. There is also more space to wheel carts around thanks to the device’s hidden cabling. ## Rapid development per business’ needs Cube Compact is available for rapid development as per business’ requirements (even unspoken). This includes for small to medium size, or industrial-scale operations. Really, it makes no difference if ordering one or 100+ robots. As the manufacturer, PhotoRobot provides clients direct access to the factory and software development for extremely short innovation cycles. In this way, it’s possible to rapidly develop industry-specific solutions tailor-made to any business, and at a very reasonable price. Together with customers, PhotoRobot technicians account for the quantity of items to photograph, types of products, and their weights & dimensions. It is then possible to suggest a workstation of one or multiple robots around the client’s available space and requirements. Sometimes, it’s updating an existing area, while for others, it is building a completely new studio from the ground-up. Direct communication with hardware and software development ensures smooth onboarding of the technology, as well as optimal functionality. This is in addition to access to the latest tools and features. ## Smart software and convenient presets No technical knowledge, no problem. [PhotoRobot’s smart software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) works across all hardware and makes it easy to connect, synchronize, and control multiple photography robots. It commands all devices (robots, cameras, lights), and enables remote studio control as well as pre-programmable automation. The software integrates workflow, post-processing, and digital asset management to simplify, speed up, and standardize every stage of production. Meanwhile, its unique, built-in industrial operating system runs on MacOS or Windows, supports API connection, and receives remote software updates. Customizable user interface options then make the controls adaptable to various operator levels, and provide a range of smart functions. These include convenient presets for different types of products or outputs, as well as basic to advanced post-processing operations. In this way, anyone can take photos adhering to a style guide or image requirements within seconds. Automation takes on repeatable processes like background removal or image adjustments and enhancements. It can even automatically [create spin images](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), or [generate 3D models from photographs](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). This is often with web-ready results that require minimal to no retouch, from complete galleries of packshots to 360 spins. ## Standardized production for small to large teams The Cube Compact and its software aim to standardize and streamline higher volume production workflows. They help professionals work more quickly and more efficiently while in sync with several other people, or larger production teams. For example, the technology connects all stages of the [production workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line): product prep, photography, post-processing, and file management. For this, the built-in, industrial operating system features real-time, cloud-based workflow software to connect various workers in their roles. This includes production managers, machine operators, stylists, or any internal as well as external talent like outsourced QA or retouching. Moreover, the industrial operating system makes it easy to connect and [synchronize multiple PhotoRobot modules](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/flexible-studio-modules) at once. It connects the Cube to 360 turntables like the [Case 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850), and is compatible with many PhotoRobot devices. Think: multiple workstations, using the Cube standalone or in combination with turntables and robotic camera arm systems. It might even be 10, 20, or 60 Cube workstations operating in the same space. The pre-programmable controls, API integration, and cloud-based asset management makes it possible to align all members of production. ## Exponentially faster with each additional machine Like all PhotoRobot systems, the Cube Compact aims to maximize long-term production and throughput for even the largest scale operations. Imagine for example a manufacturer or distributor working in an industrial warehouse with 60+ Cube workstations at once. In this scenario: - **60 + robotic workstations** fit into a space of approximately **25,000 square meters**. - The space can be a natural warehouse environment, without any climate controls. - Each workstation offers a production time of **roughly 1 minute per product**. - That’s **nearly 500 items per machine per 8-hour shift**. But what about all 60+ machines in operation for two 8-hour shifts per day? - 500 items x 60 machines x 2 shifts = upwards of **60,000 items per day**. - That’s with full sets of **automatically post-processed outputs**: galleries, packshots, and 360s. - Outputs are often web-ready, with **minimal to zero need for retouching**. - It is also possible to **instantly and automatically publish images online**. Obviously, production doesn’t always go 100% to plan, but we know firsthand that achieving throughput like this is possible. In fact, there is a client in PhotoRobot’s portfolio that reaches production levels extremely close to the above scenario. Using 60 Cube robots, this business photographs on average **40,000 fashion items daily**, in only two 8-hour shifts. This is even accounting for delays in production and various obstacles. Thus, we know this setup can reach on average 40k items per day with ease. Now, imagine adding a second factory with 80+ robots to this equation. And remember, all robots and systems are fully integrated via the software and API connection. They also receive remote software updates simultaneously, and are easily cleanable in between shifts. Starting to see the possibilities here? ## Demos tailor-made to the business’ needs Curious to see how PhotoRobot might be able to integrate into your business’ photography? [PhotoRobot demonstrations](https://www.photorobot.com/videos) consist of photographing your product line or similar products with our solution. We first consult on your needs, and then build a tailor-made module consisting of one or multiple robots. On top of this, we measure exactly how long it takes to photograph each item, and create detailed documentation. This includes integration manuals, as well as recommended cameras, computers, and equipment. We then install your custom studio configuration in the PhotoRobot showroom so you can see it in action. In this way, there are no unexpected surprises when clients begin their own production. They can demo everything in-person, or see the live test via video conference. ## Smooth onboarding and integration After agreeing on a configuration, PhotoRobot transfers the technology to the client. This involves installation of all equipment on-site, user training, and help starting production. Usually, this takes only a few days to a week for the entire process. Then, with clearly defined benchmarks from the demo, the business can begin operations. PhotoRobot experts are also at this point on-hand to integrate any new ideas clients have into their studio workflows. Do you have a business idea you’d like to see if PhotoRobot can manage? Just reach out and let us know the unique problem you are trying to solve. Our technicians are ready and available to see you from demonstration to production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pink-the-medical-robot-photographer # SECTION: blog > pink-the-medical-robot-photographer # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2024-01-04 --- # PhotoRobot PINK - The Medical Robot Photographer PhotoRobot launches a medical robot photographer to optimize the picture-taking of patients in clinical procedures and health centers. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots ## Meet PINK, the Medical Robot Photographer PINK is a prototype medical robot photographer to optimize the picture-taking of patients in a clinical setting. Think of it as a high-tech photo booth that runs at the scan of a start barcode. It has built-in cameras, automated lighting, and [photography automation software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) automatically editing and delivering images to a clinic’s internal systems. The solution not only aims to make it easier to obtain high-quality 3D images of patients. It should also make the picture-taking process more comfortable overall, and help reduce time and human resource consuming manual processes. The device also features an integrated secondary display monitor for video-conferencing between a patient and remote doctor. This 100% custom solution results from a collaboration between PhotoRobot and Maria João Cardoso of the Champalimaud Foundation. It is now available in Portugal, Poland, Italy, and Israel, and is part of a wider clinical trial. Read ahead to learn more: from the technology behind PINK, to its implementation within the CINDERELLA Project. ## Automatic 3D Image Production PhotoRobot designed PINK as a 100% custom medical photography robot for clinics and health centers. The prototype device functions as an easy-to-use photo booth-like system to automatically obtain high-quality 3D images of patients. It should optimize picture-taking procedures, and replace the need for professional medical photographers and image editing. The system has a professional built-in camera, an illuminated background with automatic lighting, and an interior video display monitor. Its construction also features the same exceptionally resistant and robust, automation-driven hardware of [PhotoRobot systems](https://www.photorobot.com/robots). Moreover, PINK has extremely simple controls, featuring a clean user interface with barcode reader integration. This system enables health care professionals to run an entire photography procedure by simply scanning a patient’s barcode. Staff simply guide a patient into view of the camera, and the robot takes photos in the necessary positions. The software guides the system to take pictures at pre-programmed angles, and to automatically post-process and deliver images. In this way, all complex operations are completely hidden, making use of the machine effortless. Thus, user-training requirements as well as operational costs are minimal, allowing clinics to better allocate time and resources. ## Extremely Simple Kiosk Mode Controls Kiosk modes within PhotoRobot software help to answer for the learning curves of onboarding complex, [industry-specific control software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation). These modes use pre-programmable settings to simplify machine operation, providing an alternative to manual hardware, camera, and sequence configuration. They also replace the traditional control interface with one free of all complexity, and are customizable for different use cases. Usually, a technician or project manager will configure Kiosk modes, such as the one for PINK. They can also customize different kiosks for various applications, and different procedures. This includes all operations running in the background, from capture to light settings, image post-processing and delivery. The software groups and attaches these to a simple command interface accessible when launching the system in a saved kiosk. PINK for example provides a control system with an extremely simple user interface over an Apple iMac computer. Logging into the system automatically launches it in its Kiosk mode, and displays a custom start screen. Here, the machine runs the pre-programmed processes automatically and in the background at the scan of a patient’s barcode. The software even delivers post-processed images to the clinic’s internal systems, all without human touch. ## Built-in Professional Camera, Lens, and Lights To take high-quality photos, PINK integrates photographic equipment from Canon, and a built-in lighting system. The professional camera and lens support automated remote capture, and feature in the interior of the booth. Meanwhile, a special mounting system can automatically move the camera up or down on a vertical axis. The built-in lighting then illuminates the subject from behind to ensure a clean white background in photos. This helps with both the automatic post-processing of images, and ensures photos are suitable for a range of applications. ## Automated Photography Post Production Automation of photography post production is also integral to PhotoRobot’s DNA, and a fundamental part of PINK. For example, immediately after capture, software operations **automatically remove the background** from photos, **post-process images**, and **deliver files**. This is all according to a clinic’s internal requirements, and automatic thanks to pre-programmable post production settings. These settings can range from [basic to advanced operations](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools), and are configurable on installation or customizable by a technician. In this way, repeatable processes become “**set once and forget**,” and make the system more adaptable to different user-levels. ## Integrated Apple Studio Display Monitor The interior of the photo booth features an Apple Studio Display monitor with a built-in microphone and quality speakers. It has a 27-inch, 5k Retina display, highly advanced audio, and a 12MP ultra-wide sensor camera. Together, these allow for easy video conferencing between a patient and remote doctor. The display shows a large image of the doctor when on call, and also a good quality image of the patient with the camera focusing on their face. ## Hassle-free Maintenance, Long-Term Durability Like all PhotoRobot machines, the construction of PINK uses only the highest quality machining and components. In the end, the goal is long-term, high-use durability. Each part of the device is thus highly resistant to wear and tear. Meanwhile, all surfaces are extremely easy to clean, and cables as well as technical components are hidden within the machine. This ensures maximum protection for all integrated equipment, from the camera and light system to the secondary interior display monitor on a VESA mount. All of these components are then easy to maintain thanks to the quality of construction, and easy to service when the need eventually arises. ## Implementation in the CINDERELLA Project Maria João Cardoso is the Coordinator of the Breast Unit Surgical Team of the Champalimaud Foundation, and Cinderella Project Coordinator. The [Cinderella Project](https://www.fchampalimaud.org/news/cinderella-project-right-see-yourself-mirror-and-what-you-see) aims to propose a way to optimize the prediction of the aesthetic results of reconstructive breast cancer surgery. This in order to improve womens’ satisfaction with their own body image after an operation. The solution should help patients to visualize and be more confident in a choice between multiple treatment options before intervention. Further, the method should lead to higher satisfaction rates after a surgery, as it helps to build more realistic pre-op expectations. For this, the project proposes a combination of photographic technology and AI software to automate and improve assessment and prediction. In its role, PhotoRobot serves to simplify, speed up, and automate repeatable photography processes. Automation also ensures minimal user-training requirements, and reduces time and resource consuming manual operations. The high-quality 3D images PhotoRobot produces are then suitable for use with AI software, in this case BCCT.core. This AI (in development by Maria João Cardoso, and Jaime Cardoso, from INESC TDC in Porto) helps with so-called objective assessment. The algorithm links to a web-based health platform (CANKADO) with information about every possible type of surgery and quality questionnaires. Here, it also connects to the image repositories of multiple centers using CANKADO to help the AI automatically classify the results of different surgeries. ## Images Optimized for Objective Assessment The so-called objective assessment involves taking many photos of a patient to measure distances, compare symmetry, etc. These photos then require assessment typically from an expert not involved in the treatment. It is also preferable that multiple parties provide their assessment to avoid any bias. This usually calls for high-quality digital photographs health care providers can use to take measurements from images on a screen. However, in the scope of the Cinderella Project, AI will take over part of this objective assessment. It will automatically classify the aesthetic quality of surgical results, and have precision equal to a group of human experts. To achieve this, the software learns from the 3D images which PhotoRobot automatically produces. PhotoRobot software also automates post-production to optimize images for AI analysis and internal systems: background removal, post-processing, and automatic delivery. The BCCT.core algorithm is then able to analyze and compare thousands of pre- and post-surgical photos at once. This helps the algorithm to improve its automatic evaluation, and in 99% of cases to distinguish really bad from really good surgical results. For more intermediate cases, however, evaluations still become more imprecise. ## What will your photography automation entail? Custom photography robots like PINK cater to the extremely rare cases in which existing PhotoRobot technology cannot meet business needs. However, one or a combination of robots can unusually answer for any industry, project, or application requirements. From eCommerce photography, to academic, medical and scientific photography robots, PhotoRobot is highly modular to adapt to any unique demands. Curious to judge for yourself? Reach out to request a custom demo around the unique problems your business needs to solve. PhotoRobot technicians will determine the level of photography automation you need, and suggest a unique solution for your business operations. This includes everything from the machinery to the software, cameras, equipment, required outputs, and detailed documentation of integration and production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology # SECTION: blog > photography-solutions-and-technology # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-11-14 --- # Custom Photography Solutions and Technology See new photography solutions and custom modules with wider functionality, including controls adaptable to various user-levels and applications. ## Custom Modules, New Machines, and Wider Controls The latest generation of PhotoRobot Controls makes our [automation-driven photography technology](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) more versatile and modular than ever. Expanded controls now enable wider synchronization and configuration of computer-guided processes across multiple machines at once. This arrives with multilingual controls, and new user interface options adaptable to various operator-levels. Why not see for yourself? Ahead, we’ll introduce some of PhotoRobot’s latest projects. These include variants of existing photography solutions, and some completely new, custom machine designs for various industries and unique applications. ## Industry-Specific Solutions & Functionality PhotoRobot solutions range from **custom product photography modules** to **3D photographic devices** for academia, museum collections, and medical applications. Among these, there is also a new variant of the[**universal photography Cube robot**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube)(the Cube Compact), and a new modular setup for **the Case 850**. Both have evolved in cooperation with customers and partners to better adapt to studio needs. Other recent projects include **PhotoRobot ART**, **Air-Cargo,** and **PINK, the Medical Robot Photographer.** ART and Air-Cargo use modular PhotoRobot technology to serve completely different industries. The first proposes a photography solution for automated 3D documentation and visualization for archeology and museums. Air-Cargo on the other hand acts as a user-friendly solution for photographing luggage, such as in airport terminals or on cruise-ships. Meanwhile, PINK is an entirely new project and custom machine design. It proposes a procedure for health-care providers to automate picture-taking for breast cancer treatment. The device itself functions as an easy-to-use photo booth to reduce time and human resource consuming manual photography processes. It can also obtain 3D images for use in medical AI / AR applications to predict the results of breast cancer surgeries. ## Greater Synchronization & Control Expanded functionality of [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) makes automating complex photography tasks across multiple systems even simpler. The software provides pre-programmable command over one or more robots simultaneously, and ease-of-integration with 3rd party technology. This allows our engineers to design custom modules around existing technology, or to further customize photography machines on request. Either option guarantees the same robust hardware and high-level productivity businesses expect of PhotoRobot. Further, the control software supports various user-levels, from absolute beginner to advanced machine operators. In fact, thanks to software Presets and Wizard modes, even staff with little to no training can functionally use the machinery. All it takes is setting up the automations once to make complex processes easily repeatable by any human resources. ## Wizard-Guided Production Workflow Software [Photoshoot Wizards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production) serve as an alternative to manual hardware and sequence configuration. This feature combines pre-programmable capture and editing operations with a simplified control interface. In this way, teams can configure and save multiple wizards for different types of photoshoots and unique applications. When active, the control interface then displays only the instructions necessary to production, step-by-step with visual guidelines. Complex processes thus become easily repeatable tasks, from connecting the photography equipment, cameras and lighting, to capturing and editing photos. Meanwhile, presets within each wizard can automatically manage sequences, post-processing, and file delivery. All of this is pre-programmable according to production needs and user-levels, and integrates seamlessly with existing or 3rd party technology. ## Kiosk Mode Machine Operation For businesses who want to hide complex controls in the background, Kiosk modes make machine operation nearly fool-proof. Kiosk modes provide machine operators with an extremely user-friendly alternative to the traditional controls interface. These modes are usually set up on machine installation, or customized by a photographer or photography manager. They take advantage of pre-programmed automations, including Presets and Wizards that machine operators don’t need to worry about. In this way, learning curves and onboarding requirements are minimal. Kiosk modes can even simplify machine operation down to a start button, or a quick scan or a barcode. This allows businesses to employ warehouse workers with very little training, including outsourced talent, freelancers, or student interns. ## Multi-Language Machine Controls For further ease-of-use, the local control systems behind each module have multilingual functionality. Users can change languages in software settings to enable automated translations via Google Translate API. Translations then function across the local app, including for Wizards modes, Kiosk modes, viewer configuration and other integrations. ## Integration with Existing Technology Each photography module integrates frictionlessly with other hardware, photographic equipment, and 3rd party technology. For example, PhotoRobot modules can connect: - Multiple robots with synchronized operations; - Professional camera models; - One or more [iPhones for product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/iphone-product-photography) with wireless connection via PhotoRobot Touch; - Strobe lights, continuous lighting, and lights with DMX control; - Barcode scanners; - Object dimensioning & weighing devices (CubiScan); - Export feeds via API (for client delivery, websites, eCommerce); - Digital asset management software for sharing, delivery, and publishing. Every unit is thus highly adaptable to the specific needs of various clients across industries. It’s even possible to build machine variants, or custom units in the rare case that existing technology is not feasible. ## Customizable Photography Modules As the manufacturer, PhotoRobot can build brand-new photography solutions for clients with extremely special requests. However, usually an existing design or a combination of robots can answer for nearly any business demand or photography application. For example, there are multi-purpose 360 turntables like the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform), and different variants of the **Cube** or **Centerless Table**. The modularity of these systems aims to meet the specific space, environmental, technological and output requirements of clients. In cases which a combination of robots will best meet business needs, PhotoRobot modules are highly configurable. It might be for instance combining the **Case 850 turntable** with the Cube for [jewelry photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography). Another example might be integrating the [Robotic Camera Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) or a [Multi-Cam rig](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) into a workspace. Whatever the solution, each module is highly customizable and adaptable for any project or type of photography, large or small. This includes photography for any operation from smaller webshops, to larger eCommerce businesses, and industrial-scale production halls. ## The Cube Compact Variant [**Cube Compact**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/cube-compact-photography-robot) is an upgrade to the universal Cube v6 robot, and provides more support for photographers of clothing and apparel. It offers the same functionality as the v6, but with the controller now inside of the machine’s body. The casing is also completely sealed-off, and features an air-filtered cooling system. This helps control dust exposure for example when using the Cube with a mannequin torso, when exposure is surprisingly high. There is also a built-in output for the laser to remove the need for an extra laserbox. Further, the control unit is inside the machine, so there is no cabling and fewer potential points of failure. - **Built-in control unit** to eliminate cabling and reduce potential points of failure - **Integrated laser output** so that no additional laserbox is necessary - **Sealed device with air-filtered cooling** to control dust exposure - **Same robust steel design** of other Cube variants, with a load-bearing capacity of 130 kg - **Quick setup compatible with various workstations** as a rotating mannequin mount, 360 turntable, or in suspension mode ## Case 850 Turntable Setups Recent modules of the Case 850 better equip this 360 turntable to photograph different categories of products. These include configurations for [jewelry product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography), and **photographing wine collections**. In both applications, the turntable functions in combination with the Cube. Meanwhile, other photographic accessories are in use to stage objects, control background lighting, and position cameras for capture sequences. For this, there is now also an optional, secondary 90-degree camera mount for photographing top views. The mount fixes to a portal directly above the turntable, and trains cameras on the absolute center of rotation. This helps for example when incorporating top-views of a wine bottle, such as its cork, into the natural production workflow. - **Modular setups** featuring the Case and Cube with other photographic accessories - **Cube integration** to suspend objects above the turntable and in a lightbox - **Secondary 90° camera mount** to incorporate top-views into production workflows - **Compact dimensions** suitable for installation in nearly any space - **Easy setup or deconstruction** on-location in 15 minutes or less - **Folds up into a protective flight case** for secure transport of the equipment ## Air-Cargo Photography Modules Air-Cargo aims to make luggage control and security checks for airport terminals, cruise ships, and other means of travel much easier. This photography solution combines PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform with Kiosk mode for simplified user controls and wizard-guided machine operation. In this way, airport and cruise ship staff are able to operate the equipment with limited to no training. All workers have to do is check that luggage is in view of the camera, and scan a start barcode. The machines then automatically take pictures, with complex software operations running out of sight and mind in the background. - **Support for large items or luggage**, light or heavy on the Turning Platform - **Kiosk mode controls** for minimal to zero user training requirements - **Automatic image capture** of specific angles at the scan of a start barcode - **Load capacity of 1500 kg**, zero-clearance transmission, and high torque power - **Long-term, maintenance-free operations**, and easy servicing when necessary ## PhotoRobot ART Technology In collaboration with Prague City Museum, PhotoRobot ART features multiple photography machine setups to support the [**photography of museum collections**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-textile-motion-simulation). These include setups of the **Cube v5** **and v6** (for on-mannequin photography), [PhotoRobot’s Frame](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame), and the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table). The modularity of these systems propose a solution for the advanced digitization of various types of museum collection items. They dramatically reduce production times of 360 / 3D imagery, while ensuring exceptional handling, care, and security of objects. This is for objects of various types, sizes and material, including textiles, apparel and clothing. Thus, each system accounts for the granularity of surfaces, variety of materials, and the requirements to document specific object details. - **Multiple PhotoRobot ART machines** for different types and sizes of museum items - **Wider control systems** to combine and command multiple robots at once - **Pre-programmable capture** of specific angles, 360 spins, and photos for 3D models - **Repeatable automations** of complex production and post-processing operations - **Automatic generation** of spin images and photogrammetry 3D models ## PINK, the Medical Robot Photographer Finally, PINK is a prototype [medical robot photographer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pink-the-medical-robot-photographer) that features Kiosk mode for extremely simple operation. Its design evolved in cooperation with Maria João Cardoso, Coordinator of the Breast Unit Surgical Team of the Champalimaud Foundation. Part of the “Cinderella Project,” PINK features a photobooth-like solution to automate the picture-taking of breast cancer patients. The robot aims to help medical care providers to predict and present the aesthetic results of breast cancer surgeries. It should help patients to feel confident in their choice when presented with multiple treatment options before intervention. PINK takes photos with no photographer at the clinic, and without any training necessary for medical staff to photograph patients. Staff simply guide patients onto a spot, and scan a barcode to begin the photography sequence. All lighting, hardware, picture-taking, image download and post-processing operations are then automatic and run in the background. This ensures the operator’s job is effortless. Further, the machine is able to obtain 3D images for augmented reality applications, such as Breast 4.0. This application is also currently under development by the Breast Unit of the Champalimaud Foundation. At the same time, PINK is in operation in Portugal, Poland, Italy, and Israel. The solution helps to both automate picture-taking, and to centralize all images in one central location for clinics to manage. - **Operator-friendly photo booth** for medical photography - **Kiosk mode operation** for minimal user-training necessary - **Automatic picture-taking** at the scan of a start barcode - **Complex operations invisible** in the background - **Automated sequences** - lighting, hardware, photography, download and post-processing - **Integrated Apple Studio Display monitor** with built-in microphone and quality speakers for video conferencing between a patient and remote doctor ### What will your custom setup entail? Is it a competitive advantage in product photography, or a more scientific solution you need from your photographic equipment? At PhotoRobot, we can suggest custom solutions for any industry, project requirement, or photography application. Just reach out and let us know the problems you need to solve. We’ll take your unique photography needs, and tailor a [PhotoRobot demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos) of your custom solution to judge for yourself. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production # SECTION: blog > product-portfolio-production # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-10-11 --- # Simple Product Portfolio Production: PhotoRobot Wizards Simplify product portfolio production for any team member with PhotoRobot Wizards, the alternative to manual hardware, camera and sequence configuration. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## Wizard-Guided Photography Production Workflow A PhotoRobot Wizard supports the production of any product portfolio according to a business’ branding, styling and imaging requirements. In operation, photoshoot wizards are an alternative to manual [PhotoRobot hardware](https://www.photorobot.com/robots), camera, and sequence configuration. They assist any talent on the team to functionally operate the machinery thanks to pre-programmable control processes and wizard-guided operation. Judge the production speeds in a quick [video demo of PhotoRobot-powered product shoots](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/product-photoshoots-demo). This allows studio managers to configure wizards to simplify the operation of different photography modules, and support various photography applications. These automations guide machine operators through production, while also automating complex, repeatable tasks on the back-end. In this way, outputs consistent with a brand style guide are easily achievable for machine operators of nearly any user-level. But what about for outsourced talent, warehouse operators with limited training, or freelancers completely unfamiliar with PhotoRobot? In these cases, complex photography operations can completely disappear into the background using PhotoRobot Kiosk Mode. This mode further simplifies the operator’s job, and makes operation of the equipment nearly fool-proof. Why not see for yourself? Ahead we share more on wizard-guided photoshoots, their applications, and Kiosk Mode for even simpler product portfolio production. ## Workflow automation for various user-levels Wizards and Kiosk modes aim to reduce the time necessary for user-training, and easily align team members with the [PhotoRobot Controls App workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-controls-app-workflow). However, it is important to distinguish one mode from the other. For example, the more tech-savvy on the team will configure various wizards for different photography applications and products. Machine operators will then need at least some training with the equipment and software to recreate production workflows. Wizard stages can include everything from connecting machines, cameras and lighting, to product prep, capture settings, and post-processing operations. All of these the software separates into stages with visual instructions for different types of product shoots. This for instance may be the production of a [3D / 360 spin](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). It may also automate back-end operations like the extraction of specific still images: packshots, GS1 imagery, detailed shots and more. These wizards, the studio manager can then share with anybody responsible for taking photos. The team member will in turn have step-by-step instructions for machine operation using the traditional PhotoRobot_Controls interface. Kiosk mode, on the other hand, simplifies the operator’s job even further, providing an alternative interface free of all complexity. ## Kiosk mode for when complexity is better hidden Complexity of software is necessary for PhotoRobot modules to cover the needs of product portfolios across various industries. However, complex and industry-specific software can raise concerns about the technology’s learning curves and onboarding processes. This is in part why Kiosk modes exist, aiming to further simplify machine use. On configuration, Kiosk modes provide machine operators with an extremely user-friendly alternative to traditional software controls. The software hides all pre-programmed automations in the background, and a simplified interface displays only controls necessary for the job. Take the control system of PhotoRobot’s **PINK**, the [medical robot photographer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/pink-the-medical-robot-photographer) for example. The Kiosk mode behind PINK enables health-care providers to automate picture-taking for breast cancer treatment. Medical staff simply guide patients onto a spot, and then scan a barcode to start the photography process. There is no photographer at the clinic, nor any training necessary for staff to photograph patients. All lighting, hardware, picture-taking, image download and post-processing operations are automatic and run in the background. The software even delivers images to the clinic’s internal systems, all without human touch. In this way, the operator's job is effortless, allowing them to focus their energy on more important tasks. PINK has evolved in cooperation with Maria João Cardoso, Coordinator of the Breast Unit Surgical Team of the Champalimaud Foundation. Part of the “Cinderella Project,” the device is now available in Portugal, Poland, Italy, and Israel. The solution helps clinics to both automate picture-taking, and to centralize images on one system. ## Custom wizards for easily repeatable workflows For more complex production, businesses can create and save multiple wizards for different workflows and photography applications. Customizable wizards help teams to easily recreate production stages across different types of photoshoots. In fact, wizards can support machine operators through every stage of production. These include: - Connecting robots, cameras, and light groups - Product prep and staging on the photographic equipment (turntable, on-mannequin, etc) - Hardware, camera, and sequence configuration - Single-click capture of 360 / 3D spins - Automated extraction of individual still images (packshots, GS1-compliant images) - Instructions for detailed, macro or hand-held shots - Support for interior, panoramic photos - Viewer integration for automatic publishing of web-ready imagery Truly, most repeatable processes the product portfolio or style guide calls for is programmable into wizards. This means less time aligning team members and outsourced talent with internal processes, and more capacity to produce consistent results. ## Production consistent with any brand style guide The production of a product portfolio consists of many styling elements: branding, outputs, composition, lighting, colors, backgrounds and more. Special care goes into documenting image requirements for long-term workflows, and into ensuring consistency in visual content across sales channels. All of this, photoshoot wizards can help to automate, from taking the first photos to post-processing images, QA and publishing. It’s possible to configure wizards for shooting products as small as microchips to as large as automobiles and heavy machinery. Really, any product line you photograph on PhotoRobot can benefit from wizard automation. Take for example [automotive photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography). Usually, car manufacturers and dealerships require complete image galleries showing both the exterior and interior in their entirety. PhotoRobot Wizards were specially designed for this application. They can instruct photographers from the very first step of parking the vehicle to capturing all gallery assets. Photographers simply complete each step in order, following instructions and clicking next to navigate through the production stages. Steps can include for example taking photos with both the car doors closed and opened. It may be detailed shots of the exterior, interior, imperfections, or shots of the wheels and engine. Whatever the style guide calls for, wizards allow teams to easily recreate and synchronize production processes. ## Reusable settings for products of any size or type As well as automotive photography, wizards can function for any size or type of product. This includes appliances, fashion, furniture, jewelry, tools and heavy-duty machinery. PhotoRobot likewise supports [shooting reflective and semi-transparent items](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear) like glassware or sunglasses, and light, dark, or glossy products. Wizards are completely customizable so that teams can configure and reuse different settings for each type of product photography. Settings may also contain PhotoRobot presets, providing full automation from capture to editing. Presets can for example automate the capture of specific angles, and automatically post-process images according to a brand style guide. Any hardware configuration or photography technique the product portfolio calls for is thus easily repeatable. Teams can configure wizards for multiple product lines as well as various outputs, all with pre-programmed automation for quicker workflows. All it takes is setting up the automation once to synchronize and simplify production practices long into the future. ## Web-ready 2D + 360 + 3D imagery in minutes Product photography automation supports the production of often web-ready 2D stills, 360 / 3D spins, and 3D models in minutes. This is thanks to a range of [basic to advanced photo editing operations](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools) which are pre-programmable and easily repeatable. Preset editing operations may include for example automatic background removal, color enhancements, brightness, contrast, or shadows & highlights. All of these operations PhotoRobot can store in the software, and also run in the background while simultaneously taking photos. For this, Cloud-based technology enables teams to both speed up workflows and synchronize work with internal or external talent worldwide. Production is thus easily accessible and shareable for additional retouching if necessary, QA, and distributing to clients. Further, editing automation provides results with often minimal to no need for manual retouch on a wide range of items. Teams can configure automatic editing operations around their product portfolio guidelines, and automation post-processes images to specification immediately after capture. ## Viewer integration for immediate image hosting To further reduce content time-to-market, deploy PhotoRobot automation with the [360 Product Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer). The viewer supports multiple outputs as well as various layouts for hosting product portfolios online in a few simple clicks. Viewer features enable businesses to host eCommerce image galleries with thumbnail navigation, and configure hot spots in 360 spins. There is also full support for packshot galleries, GS1 compliant images, macro shots, and interior panoramas. The product viewer integrates directly into the production line, creating one system to centralize all your digital assets. There is immediate publishing after capture, and no switching from system to system (copying and publishing files manually or via script). ## Standard eCommerce product galleries A standard, online product portfolio typically showcases a product from various angles in a gallery of still images. Gallery images can consist of a **hero shot** (the first image consumers see), different **marketing angles**, and **detailed shots**. The hero image will be what makes a strong first impression. It presents the product as a whole, sometimes with styling or packaging representative of a brand’s reputation. Meanwhile, marketing angles and detailed shots help to present different views of the item. Photos can zoom into texture and material, or better showcase branding elements like logos and design features. Some brands even complete product galleries with a **360 spin view** to fully immerse consumers in the shopping experience. When on-page together, hero shots, image galleries and 360 spins are then shown from consistent angles, elevation and distance. This keeps attention firmly on products, and in general makes product portfolios look more professional overall. There will often be a **front view** (hero shot), **side view**, and **3/4 view**. Together, these showcase both the front and the profile of items, adding extra dimension to online product portfolios. ## 360 + 3D spins with hot spots Many businesses who produce 360 / 3D spins also incorporate hot spot viewing technology. In operation, hot spots create an area of the spin to emphasize different product parts or features. It might be macro shots to get close-up to a logo, or highlights showing the material feel & texture of products. PhotoRobot Viewer for example enables users to customize any area of a spin with different titles as well as appearances. Configurations allow businesses to adjust the point and visibility range of hot spots, and adjust size, opacity, pulse, or color. It’s possible to select hot spots from within a 360 spin, or upload individual photos to serve as hot spots. If using a PhotoRobot wizard when producing 360s, instructions can guide operators through the entire production process. Steps would include machine operation, capturing the photos, configuring hot spots in a spin, and any specified post-processing requirements. This makes processes easily repeatable for anybody on the team managing similar types of photoshoots. ## Packshot galleries for eCommerce Some product lines may call for only a few packshots online, such as footwear or sunglasses. [Packshot photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) shows an accurate representation of a product as it would appear on-shelf or directly out of its packaging. They likewise often use various styling elements like in magazines and on billboards to represent the brand by its reputation. In eCommerce, packshots are now commonplace due to the strict image requirements of online marketplaces and vendors. For example, Amazon requires product imagery to have a **clean white background** with a **specific product to frame ratio**. Packshots accomplish this by serving imagery with a strong emphasis on the product while also accurately portraying it. They make use of a **distraction-free background**, and also **showcase unique product features**. Producing a packshot gallery with PhotoRobot Wizards would thus account for each of these requirements according to the brand style guide. The wizard would contain instructions on composition, as well as background removal, or adjustments in color, sharpness and clarity. Each operation necessary is then easily automated for quicker production, often with web-ready packshots in minutes. ## GS1 compliant product portfolios [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards) exist to improve efficiency, traceability and food safety for consumer packaged goods, fresh foods and food service. In operation, these standards set the rules for business communication. The name relates to a global system of standards, including unique identification codes as well as data on products, services and locations. In digital marketing, GS1 standards make sure businesses provide accurate, relevant and transparent product information. These specifications dictate **image type**, **resolution**, **file naming conventions**, as well as **final deliverables**. Photos of packaged goods for example must show nutritional information, ingredient lists, packaging and barcodes. There are then strict guidelines for the GS1 image set, from **planograms** to **marketing angles**. It truly can amount to a lot of work for professional product photography companies. However, PhotoRobot Wizards can store all of these imaging requirements to easily automate production long into the future. Better still, the software can automatically extract GS1 images into a separate folder while simultaneously capturing 360 spins. Meanwhile, software Presets support automated digital asset management, from file naming to post-processing operations. ## 360 Car Studio viewing technology For automotive dealerships, superstores and car resellers, [Car Studio 360](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography) hosts product spins alongside a still image gallery. Thumbnail navigation enables consumers to click through product images, with full support for hot spots and deep zoom. Further, image hosting formats include both single-row 360s and multi-row 3D spins. 3D spins for example might show a vehicle from multiple elevations, or take a look under the hood. Companies can customize which frames appear in thumbnails, and then change button layout to configure consumer viewing options. All parameters are then easily configurable and saveable in wizards to guide machine operators through each process. The 360 Car Viewer is easily embeddable on any product page, or integrates with eCommerce export feeds for immediate publishing. A cloud-based CDN provides real-time image scaling, and ensures quick-loading with pixel-perfect resolution on any device. There is also support for hand-held shots, detailed imperfections and interior panoramas. ## eCommerce 3D models Finally, PhotoRobot also supports the [generation of 3D models from photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), offering more versatility to the product portfolio. Usually, 3D product models consist of at least 36 photos around an object, and shots from multiple elevations. Special photogrammetry software then stitches the photos together to produce a digital product experience. 3D models are sometimes customizable or configurable, such as by color or by moving parts and hidden product features. In this way, consumers can browse long lines of highly customizable items, like footwear for order in custom designs. It could also be for clothing and apparel, or even AR / VR home decor and furniture planners. All it takes is a few clicks after capturing a 360 manually or following wizards to generate 3D models. Outputs are then publishable via PhotoRobot Viewer alongside gallery photos and a 360 spin, or deliverable on a 3D content hosting platform. ## All with minimal to no-need manual retouch From PhotoRobot Wizards to Presets, production is *set-once-and-forget* with often minimal to no need for manual retouch. Automated workflows and digital asset management support the consistent reproduction of any output, photoshoot, or process: product-in to product-out. Curious to see how easy the product photography can be for yourself? Consider booking a custom demo for any type of business today. We’ll build your solution, and show you how to save 100s to 1000s of minutes when building that product portfolio. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-textile-motion-simulation # SECTION: blog > 3d-textile-motion-simulation # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-09-14 --- # A Virtual Digital Wardrobe - 3D Textile Motion Simulation PhotoRobot joins Prague City Museum, CESNET, and FEE CTU to propose a procedure for the 3D digitization of cultural heritage. ## Cultural Heritage Textile Objects in 3D Motion Prague City Museum now hosts an exhibition allowing researchers and visitors to physically and virtually view cultural heritage objects. It presents the real and time-limited display of clothes within the investigation of the research project, *the Virtual Digital Wardrobe*. The project aims to propose and verify a procedure for the advanced digitization and presentation of textile objects. Results include a prototype device for automated scanning of textiles, software for presentation, and a virtual dressing room. This is all within the exhibition “[From Prehistoric Times to Tailcoats](https://www.muzeumprahy.cz/en/exhibitions-and-events/from-prehistory-to-the-tailcoat).” In it, visitors view clothing of cultural heritage in real-life and augmented reality. The use of 3D digital models allows visitors to virtually wear the clothing on exhibit against the backdrop of 3D scenes. 3D textile motion simulation then brings outfits to life, replicating on a projector screen how the clothing looks when worn. Surrounding 3D scenes that accompany the objects immerse visitors in the stories behind the items. The exhibition is a joint project of the Prague City Museum, CESNET, CTU’s Faculty of Electrical Engineering, and Improtech - PhotoRobot. It is supported by the program Éta TA CR (Project number TL05000298). Read ahead to see PhotoRobot’s contribution to the project, from the machines in use to digitizing cultural heritage in 3D. ## The Exhibition - From Prehistoric Times to Tailcoats For the exhibition, experts had to faithfully capture textile material, simulate fabric and move it in real-time. The exhibition could then present digital models for visitors to virtually try on clothing using a recording camera and a large scale monitor. Projections immerse visitors in the historical reality of the past, and present clothing in motion with users’ movements. Further, the technology behind the experience aims to propose a method to document the condition of valuable museum textile collections. The result should help to preserve historical items that diminish in quality by age and physical handling. It should also be of invaluable use for museums with extensive textile collections, and in the commercial area of textile sales. ## Preparing for the Project Preparation for the project began in 2021. For PhotoRobot, this began with taking hundreds of photos of various outfits and garments. The CESNET association would later generate digital 3D models from PhotoRobot’s photos to present in the exhibition. PhotoRobot helped to achieve this via its photographic equipment for [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). However, engineers had to specially design modules to meet the needs of the cultural sector. We named these custom designs **PhotoRobot ART**, and each ensured exceptional handling, care, and security of objects. The solutions accounted for the granularity of surfaces, the variety of materials, and the requirements to document specific object details. These factors served as guidelines for the creation of a specialized portfolio for each cultural heritage object. The process then involved taking 100s of photos around each item to first create a 3D spin. These photos act as data points for special software developed by the CESNET Association to generate interactive, 3D textile models. *One collection item consists of 4 - 5 spins, containing 36 images each and photographed from multiple elevations.* ## The Machines Behind the Photography The task of photographing each object fell to Kamil Hrbáček, Michal Benda, and Erik Strakota of PhotoRobot. Together, they identified the PhotoRobot ART machines and software processes necessary to capture various pieces of garments. This included complete outfits from head-to-toe, and thus required installations for on-mannequin and turntable photography. *Photography automation technology helps propose an efficient workflow for creating 3D models of historical textile objects.* For this, PhotoRobot designed multiple ART setups combining different robots and photographic equipment. Setups include the **Cube v5 and v6** (for on-mannequin photography), **PhotoRobot’s Frame**, and the **Centerless Table 850**. The modularity of these systems not only dramatically reduce the production times of 360 / 3D imagery. In combination, they also cater to photographing any fashion product, including torso and leg pieces, headwear, footwear, ornaments and trinkets. Additionally, PhotoRobot ART produced a **special tripod** to mount cameras at precise rows of elevation. It enables the faster capture of both higher and lower elevations when capturing 3D spins. The tripod also combines remote capture and automation software to command cameras in sync with robotic sequences and studio lighting. *A specially designed tripod with multiple camera mounts ensures the accurate and consistent capture of low, middle, and high angles.* ## Photographing the Collection Items To photograph each object, PhotoRobot installed systems both on the Improtech - PhotoRobot premises, and on-location at the Prague City Museum. We were then able to photograph genuine articles of clothing at the museum, and replicas in-house at PhotoRobot. The process required automating the photography of complete outfits as well as individual articles of clothing. Further, we needed enough photos of each item to later generate a 3D model that could simulate textile movement. Thus, we had to photograph both 360 degrees around each object, and from multiple angles of elevation. PhotoRobot’s Cube enables us to photograph items prepared on mannequins in combination with the special tripod. Meanwhile, the Frame and Centerless Table support 360 / 3D turntable photography for different types of clothing. We use these to capture items both on a horizontal or vertical axis, and from multiple elevations. In every photoshoot, we also use a DSLR camera with a 50mm lens positioned at various angles. We photograph high, middle, and low angles to create 4-5 different spins consisting of 36 still images each. It is also necessary to take photos horizontally at every 10th angle, and to capture detailed shots of each item’s material. ## The Photo Digitization Process The CESNET Association is responsible for transforming the photos of each collection item into interactive 3D models. To achieve this, they deploy IH3D ([Interactive Heritage 3D](https://ih3d.cesnet.cz/en/software.html)) software developed by CESNET and tested in collaboration with museum institutions. The software enables 3D presentation through both physical exhibitions and hosting visuals online. It functions across a wide range of devices, including mobile phones and LCD-panel video walls. Visualizations then take the shape of 3D models visitors can view from all sides, even inside, and with supplementary material. The 3D models can contain annotations for additional information, illustrations, video records, and any multi-media content. Further, the software can display collection items in surrounding 3D scenes, such as in “From Prehistoric Times to Tailcoats.” Within the exhibition, IH3D software transforms the photos from PhotoRobot into 3D models to display on a presentation panel. Examples of static 3D models of selected collection items are also available for [online viewing](https://modely.cesnet.cz/vwardrobe/). The software supports all standard 3D model formats, and operates on the museum’s web server. It’s also possible to secure digital assets in the cloud environment of CESNET, or export 3D models in various formats. [See 3D view](https://modely.cesnet.cz/beta/2022_satnik19_damsky-odev/) ## Project Contributors This project and its results would not be possible without its joint contributors in collaboration with the Prague City Museum. Thus, acknowledgement and special appreciation goes out to: - **Prague City Museum** - Linda Daněčková, Tomáš Dvořák - **Programme Éta TA CR** (Project number TL05000298) - **The Research Project** - The Virtual Digital Wardrobe (in Czech, Virtuální šatník) - **The CESNET Association** - Jiří Kubišta, Sven Ubik - **FEE of Charle’s Technical University** - David Sedláček, Jiří Žára - **PhotoRobot** - Kamil Hrbáček, Michal Benda, and Erik Strakota - **Photography** - Jav Vrabec, Ondřej Polák - **Architectural and Graphic Design** - Jiří Sušanka - **Production / Exhibition Management** - Kateřina Veleta Štěpánová, Michal Schneider - **Conservation and Restoration** - Jindřiška Drozenová, Lucie Radoňová - **Editorial Work** - Lenka Hensen - **Translation** - Lucie Kasíková - **Exhibition Installation** - Jiří Leubner - **Special Thanks** - Martin Kavka, Veronika Klimešová, Pavel Vaněk - **Media Partners** - Logo Prague, Museum ### Discover more custom solutions for the cultural sector The advanced digitization of historical objects proposes a method in the cultural sector to better preserve and document history. To this end, PhotoRobot ART offers museums and archeology versatile photographic and 3D scanning solutions to digitize museum collections. These modular systems can meet space or collection demands, while software-driven automation simplifies machine use. Each setup also ensures exceptional handling and care of any type of collection item. Systems account for the granularity of surfaces, a variety of materials, and detailed shots to produce specialized portfolios. Curious to see how to implement PhotoRobot ART into your own museum or archeology project? Consider booking a [custom PhotoRobot Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos) specially designed around your collection today. All you have to do is tell us the objects you need to photograph. We’ll consult on your requirements, and soon propose solutions to meet any photographic or 3D object scanning needs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting # SECTION: blog > photorobot-viewer-image-hosting # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-06-29 --- # PhotoRobot Viewer - 2D / 3D / 360 Product Image Hosting Host eCommerce images in 2D / 3D / 360 with PhotoRobot Viewer, now supporting image galleries alongside spins, hot spots, and panoramas. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## eCommerce Image Hosting - PhotoRobot Viewer In addition to hosting 360 spins and 3D models, [**PhotoRobot Viewer**](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) now offers more ways to present products online. New features enable users to host eCommerce image galleries with thumbnail navigation, and configure hot spots in 360 spins. We’ve also added support for interior panoramas, which feature in the Car Studio 360 and a Carpet & Flooring Visualizer. Ready to see the new and improved PhotoRobot Viewer in action? Below is an intro into our updated product image hosting features. We share each option in detail, along with their many use cases for your [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography). ## Integrated Production, Management, and Publishing PhotoRobot Viewer integrates directly into the [production line](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line), providing one system that centralizes all your digital assets. This is unlike many of today’s solution providers, who photoshoot on one platform and publish on another. Their approach makes digital asset management both time-consuming and expensive. With PhotoRobot, everything is ready for immediate publishing after capture to save time and free up human resources. There is no switching from one system to the next, or copying and publishing files manually (or via script). Everything users capture on the system is instantly ready for upload and automatic publishing via the Cloud platform. Users host image galleries, packshots, 360 spins & multiple product configurations all on a single interface. A Cloud-based, global Content Delivery Network (CDN) provides real-time scaling, ensuring pixel perfect resolution on any end-user device. There is also easy integration with eCommerce export feeds, image optimization, and support for JSON and XML formats. ## Still Images, 360s, and 3D Visuals on a Single Interface The new PhotoRobot Viewer interface offers various image hosting options to cater to different businesses and their products. Now, users can host complete [still image product galleries](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image) of eCommerce packshots alongside 360s and other outputs on one page. Viewing features enable access to each type of imagery via on-page buttons or thumbnail navigation. Dynamic loading features then ensure the viewer and all imagery loads quickly and efficiently. Meanwhile, page visitors can see all your product visuals, with full support for deep zoom, macro shots, hot spots, and more. [See spin](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs/hiking-shoe) ## Customizable Product Visuals in 360 and 3D PhotoRobot’s SpinViewer is a 360 degree product viewer that hosts spin imagery which is compatible on any device. It enables consumers real-time control and configuration of [single-row 360 spins](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin) and more advanced [multi-row 3D spins](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360). Features include options to configure object color, background color, rotation speed & direction, and product size. Embeddable on any product or web page, the SpinViewer has unlimited view count and data transfer, with no additional expenses. Users are only billed according to the data storage they require. In return, the SpinViewer provides one of the fastest and most intuitive 360 image viewing technologies on the market. Animations are easily customizable, with multiple parameters to offer a solution for any brand or product. Spin Options Object color 0 Background 0 Speed 0 Size 0 Direction In addition, tools for digital asset management ensure all product content is securely stored, searchable, and redistributable. In fact, if using PhotoRobot’s Cloud Platform, no file transfer is necessary from the capture stage to publishing. Users can host content on their eCommerce websites and apps immediately and automatically after image capture. ## 360 Degree Product Viewer Hot Spots Hot spots are areas of a 360 spin such as close-ups or highlighted features that add value to the product content. Close-ups often convey intricate details, whereas a shallow depth of field can highlight different aspects of an object. Hot spots might zoom into a logo, showcase moving parts, or present hidden product features. Different angles can also produce different colors and effects, each a possible candidate for a hot spot. To define hot spots in the viewer, users select photos from a product spin, or upload their own images. Product spins usually consist of 24 or 36 frames, but can also be far greater in number. Users select hot spots, edit if necessary, and generate the spin in the software. The software then creates the 360 along with its hot spots as an embeddable javascript code. Copy and paste this code to re-distribute imagery on any web or product page, or via eCommerce plug-ins. Consumers can then view product spins on any device or browser, and select hot spots to view in greater detail. ## Gallery Viewer with Thumbnail Navigation The new & improved PhotoRobot Viewer now enables brands to host entire product galleries of still images online. Photo thumbnails provide quick navigation of galleries, and load full-size single frame images at the click of a mouse. Upload any angle or shot for viewing: front, back, profile, top, bottom, and macro. Useful in fashion product photography, and for items like footwear, sunglasses, and even automobiles, a gallery viewer aims to inform. They help consumers to better visualize and understand the product from its fine details to unique features and selling points. These might be texture or material, or complex technical components in a car or piece of machinery. ## Panorama Viewer Support Need to showcase an automobile including behind the wheel? Perhaps, it’s a room design with a line of furniture you want on the web? Viewer support for special, 360-degree Theta camera photography allows just that. Take 360-degree panoramic photos inside any interior space, and give your website visitors a tour inside. Simply connect a Theta camera to the software workspace, connect to WiFi, and snap photos. The software automatically uploads images after capture, and can immediately publish panoramas to the web. Consumers can then access panoramas at the click of a viewer button, with controls for rotation & zoom. Combine panoramas with image galleries, a 360 spin, multiple configurations and hot spots for a complete car photography viewer. In fact, we like to call this the PhotoRobot Car Studio 360, our immersive solution for online car photography. ## Complete Car Studio 360 Viewing With viewing options for still images, 360 spins, hot spots and panoramas, Car Studio 360 caters to [automotive product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography). This solution enables dealerships, superstores, online retailers and private sellers to better present and sell automobiles on the web. It allows hosting of single-row and multi-row 360 car photography alongside complete image galleries. Thumbnail navigation provides quick access to individual frames or hot spots within the product spin. This works with both single-row 360s, and with multi-row spin photography. Multi-row spins for example might show photos from different elevations, or take a look under the hood. It also commonly presents a vehicle in different configurations, such as with doors closed in one spin, and open in another. Users specify which frames to present in thumbnails, and then generate their Car Studio 360. Just as with the SpinViewer, it’s easily embeddable on any web page, and viewable on any device or browser. Consumers can then view automobiles in 360 degrees, and select thumbnails to closely inspect individual angles and configurations. ## Carpet & Flooring Visualizer - Breno Carpets Finally, the Carpet & Flooring Visualizer is a custom PhotoRobot solution developed in cooperation with Jakub Klaus for Breno Carpets. And while this viewer is exclusive to Breno, it presents another sound example of PhotoRobot product viewing capabilities. This room configurator enables Breno to present their product line of carpets and rugs in a virtual room. It aims to make interior design & home planning with Breno products easier and more interactive. [See visualizer](https://hosting.photorobot.com/demo/carpet-viewer) Consumers can swap between different designs & colors, move products around the room, and change the flooring. There are on-the-fly customization options, and thumbnail navigation to change the view of the room. This way Breno’s shoppers can mix and match items with the interior design. Buttons switch different carpets & rugs in and out of the room, or load a 360 spin of each product. ## Upgrade Your Business’ Product Experience Today PhotoRobot Viewer is designed to support our clients in all their automation-driven product photography. All image hosting features integrate directly with our software-supported product photography machines for high throughput, and high productivity. No matter if it’s for a small webshop or an industrial scale production hall, PhotoRobot has an answer. From image hosting to fully, software-driven product photography automation & hardware, it’s all here. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography # SECTION: blog > car-turntable-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-06-01 --- # Car Turntables - 360-Degree Automotive Photography Discover car turntables from popular manufacturers vs the PhotoRobot automation-driven solution for high-volume, 360-degree car photography and product videos. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots ## 360 Car Turntables for In-House Product Photography Car turntables like PhotoRobot’s [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) offer an automotive photography solution for dealerships, superstores, online retailers & private sellers. These large rotating car platforms feature in garages, warehouses, photo studios and showroom floors. However, there are many car turntable manufacturers on the market, each with varying designs, technology, installation & costs. In fact, some of the best selling car turntables don’t even provide half of what PhotoRobot offers. The machinery *might* be similar, but the real savings are in PhotoRobot’s automation technology that drives the machines. Product photography software can dramatically lower production costs by automating processes. Software like PhotoRobot’s provides control over all studio equipment, and can integrate into existing workflows and technology. It can automate remote image capture, automatically post-process images, as well as manage, distribute & host product content online. But how does PhotoRobot’s solution compare to other turntable manufacturers, from the hardware to the software? Read on to compare PhotoRobot’s car turntable versus other solutions, including their design, manufacturing, software, installation & costs. ## Garage Turntables and Parking Systems vs Studio Turntables Car turntable photography requires more than simple garage turntables or car parking systems. Manufacturers such as **Pre-Motion** or **Hercules** are fine if only for rotating a car in a small garage space. They make for a great parking aid, and are popular for both domestic and commercial use, like promoting new vehicles. Yet, many systems like these possess little to zero software and automation features. On the other hand, turntables for studio use boast software-driven automation & control for high-output, high-volume car photography. Some popular manufacturers include **Carousel USA**, **Car Turner Turntables**, and **Hensel Systems by XY Imager** (NoHa-Tec). Automation serves to speed up photography, simplify post-processing, and streamline content time-to-web. Meanwhile, the machines cater to capturing as many cars as possible in a single session and over long-term operations. Customers tend to be automotive resellers and dealerships who need to photograph sometimes 100s of vehicles in a few days. Thus, the design & durability of the machinery is vital for lower operational costs, and less need for service or replacement. ## Automotive Turntable Design If looking to buy a car turntable for in-house studio photography, often the first concern is turntable design. Dealers, retailers & private sellers need a reliable, space-efficient machine that is able to meet workload demands. The higher the volume of cars to photograph, the more durability matters for cost-efficient, long-term operations. After all, it isn’t only a turntable for auto motor shows or dealer showrooms. Online car retail & reselling can call for photographing an entire car lot over a short period. This requires heavy-duty machinery that is highly resistant to wear and tear, like PhotoRobot’s Carousel. By design, the Carousel is a car turntable to rival popular manufacturers like Hensel turntables by XY Imager. The Carousel has a 4,000 kg load capacity and a 5 meter diameter plate. It weighs approximately 1,500 kg, offering more durability and reliability than competitor machines of max 1,000 kg. The rotating platform can also be installed in a warehouse garage, or recessed into a showroom floor. Its low profile makes placing products as easy as parking, with no access ramp or crane necessary. Additionally, the Carousel supports a parking utility to offer an even more robust design. The parking utility makes it similar to parking systems, and is suitable for use in garage installations. Now, where the Carousel really differs from other automotive turntables is in the technology behind the machine. ## Technology & Software Comparison At a glance, car turntables from PhotoRobot, Hensel Turntables by XY Imager, and rival manufacturers share several technology features. **Each system is:** - The ideal height for positioning large products on the platform, from automobiles to camper vans, tractors, boats, furniture & more - Compatible with strobe or LED lighting, or a combination of both - For use with a light tent to eliminate unwanted reflections and minimize the need for complex post-processing - Controlled over WiFi (via browser) with automatic recording capability However, the real difference between PhotoRobot and other car turntables is in PhotoRobot’s comprehensive automation & control software. **PhotoRobot software gives users all of the above plus:** - [Cutting-edge photo studio software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) for automated image capture, editing, publishing & digital asset management - User-friendly, easily integrated control software that makes it easy even for amateur photographers to consistently capture web-ready photos - Basic to advanced photo editing tools available automatically & immediately after capture, with reusable settings to streamline post-processing - Studio workflow software functions & reports to keep clients, photographers and project managers on task in real-time - API integration of PhotoRobot machines for use with 3rd party software, or for full integration with any corporate system - Automated image delivery to internal or external systems - One of the fastest product viewers on the market for hosting image galleries, 360 spins, 3D photos, panoramas, videos & more ## Car Turntable Installation & Setup Each of these systems requires on-site construction, with customization options and upgrades available. Studios can build their automotive turntable on any existing, level surface, or construct it into a warehouse or showroom floor. The latter provides a great option when building a new car photography studio. Now, some manufacturers offer extremely compact car photo booths. They might even be cheaper than leading hardware, and set up in a small corner space. Yet, when in use, vehicles are extremely close to the walls, making it difficult to capture good photos. At PhotoRobot, we can work with any available space and consult on the best installation for in-house car photography. We install the Carousel 5000 on location, and provide user-knowledge training for the equipment & software. Setting up for 360 photography is as easy as parking a car. The drive-up ramp is 78 mm tall, enabling easy entry from any side of the ramp. In total, it takes around 6 - 12 hours to install the machine on top of an existing surface. If building it into the floor, add time to lay another layer of concrete around the turntable. Meanwhile, the whole training process is no longer than 1 - 2 weeks. The structure of training covers everything in this period: assembly, control, lighting, camera settings, lenses, strategy, integration and more. This includes setup and user training that will enable studios to photograph up to 60+ cars in a single day. Compare that to other manufacturers whose solutions can at best photograph 2 or 3 cars in that time. ## Integration with Existing Technology Another feature that makes PhotoRobot unique is its ability to integrate with existing studio technology. For one, our systems support automated, remote image capture on DSLR and mirrorless Canon camera models. Photographers can adjust camera settings, command studio light groups, and control turntable rotation all from a workstation computer. Programmable control then enables remote image capture in sync with the rotation of the turntable and studio light settings. The software also supports connection with 3rd party software via API, or fully integrates into any corporate system. It can connect to eCommerce websites and apps, and takes advantage of Cloud processing for automatic image delivery after capture. Meanwhile, a global CDN delivers pixel-perfect resolution and quick-loading of product imagery on any device. If using [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer), businesses can also instantly host 360 spins as well as complete image galleries on product pages. Further, all assets are easily organized, secured, searchable & redistributable thanks to a [Digital Asset Management system](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management). There are project sharing features for internal or external processes, and teams can access projects from anywhere in the world. ## Car Studio Control Functions Some car studios come with a controller that has a few buttons and a multi-dot display for turntable control. Usually, settings include command over studio light groups, device rotation, and remote camera capture. However, the problem with this is that somebody then has to be in the studio to press those buttons. With automation software, this is not the case. For example, PhotoRobot Controls enables studios to configure settings once and use them again and again, long into the future. There is no need for somebody in the studio manually pressing buttons to run one process after another. Instead, the software allows users to configure and save hardware sequences, lighting, camera settings, and post-processing for easy, one-click automation. It can then repeat these settings accurately & consistently across similar types of vehicles. Studios can configure settings for light or dark vehicles, capturing multiple elevations, or for generating various outputs. ## Photo Editing Automation **Systems like Hensel’s by XY Imager call for a manual retoucher on the team, or hiring out.** The result is additional costs the more content you produce. This is not the case with PhotoRobot. We have designed the machinery and our automated editing tools so that even amateur photographers can produce professional, high-quality results. **The PhotoRobot solution generates consistent, web-ready outputs on capture**, with minimal or no need for manual retouching. Users can automatically apply a wide range of editing operations, and save parameters as Presets for future reuse. We like to say our software allows users to “Set once and forget.” In fact, by using ready-made Presets, **Kiosk Mode can take all the complexity out of photoshoots**. This mode can launch pre-defined photoshoot and editing operations with a single click of the mouse. A [user-friendly photoshoot wizard](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-portfolio-production) with a cluster-free interface then visually guides photographers to capture each shot in order. The wizard can be set up to shoot individual items, or to function across entire projects. For complete control, photographers can manually choose which Presets to run, and configure control or editing processes. A simple click of “Apply All” **automatically edits hundreds of images per second,** with basic to advanced editing settings. Automate everything from image cropping & object centering to advanced tools for background removal, image overlay, and more. Whatever your product photography calls for, the software does the *heavy-lifting* for dramatic savings in time & costs. ## Turntable Service & Replacement Using the most durable materials for the Carousel, the machine boasts capacity for hassle-free, long-term operations. The robust design consists of CNC machining and the latest laser burning technologies. It places great emphasis on resistance to dirt, wear, and mechanical damage. The Carousel is thus easy to maintain and keep in pristine condition. It has replaceable flooring material, as well as grooves along the plate’s perimeter for air-driven dirt and dust removal. Quality design materials in turn ensure long-term, maintenance-free operation. A massive central bearing unit only requires tension adjustment and lubrication once every 12 months at high-volume workloads. Also, the drive & control units as well as the flooring material are accessible for easy service or replacement. This need will eventually arise over time and with higher volume workloads. When it does, both the drive and control units are outside of the machine for easy replacement as well. The flooring material is also just as easy to replace if it suffers wear and tear. Simply remove it, replace, and get back to the photography. ## PhotoRobot’s Automated Car Photo Studio In addition to the turntable, a complete car studio for 360 product photography calls for: - A camera tripod and compatible cameras for remote image capture - Professional, wireless Canon camera for detailed shots - A panoramic camera for capturing the interior - Studio lighting, a light tent, or backdrop - A workstation computer to operate the hardware - Software to sync and control turntable rotation & speed with other devices - Photo editing software for post-processing images - Content distribution, syndication & image hosting solutions This equipment & software together with a car turntable dramatically simplify the production of 360 spins & multi-row 3D photos. They allow photographers to automate complex processes, and to produce consistent, high-quality imagery. It also enables studios to capture complete image galleries alongside 360 spins and product videos in a single process. Moreover, effective post-processing software means outputs can be retouched immediately on capture and web-ready within moments. ## Car Studio Workflow A typical car studio workflow with PhotoRobot using only one Carousel 5000 can photograph 60+ cars in a single day. And this always begins at the product-in stage. Here, studios receive, verify & sort inventory in the software. It is also at this stage that users configure hardware & software settings, or load saved configurations. Settings include remote camera capture, lighting controls, robotic processes, post-processing & content distribution. With these instructions, the next stage is simply parking the vehicle and prepping the scene. Studios have to ensure both the car and the turntable are in pristine condition for photos. Photographers might also preview the scene through a camera Live View before starting the photoshoot. When ready, all it takes is a click of the mouse or scanning a barcode to start the photoshoot automatically. Cloud-processing enables automatic photo editing near-simultaneous with image capture. Imagery then goes through quality assurance, or for additional retouching before publishing online via PhotoRobot Viewer. Studios can publish imagery immediately after capture, with RSS feeds directly to e-shop pages or eCommerce apps. This means less delays in product content time-to-web, and likewise more time for getting products in and products out. ## Capturing the Best Angles Car photography usually entails a straight-on photo at eye-level, side views, and 45-degree shots at each corner of the vehicle. In fact, they say every car looks best at a three-quarters angle, but what about capturing the fine details? Using a panoramic camera to showcase a car’s interior is one approach, but sometimes the resolution is low. Panoramic images also aren’t really a marketing image, so it’s important to capture detailed shots and close-ups as well. Detailed shots are useful for vehicle assessment, like zooming into dings, nicks, or scratches on the body of a car. They also might show a steering wheel in high resolution, or present other interior features like the gearshift or the seating. In this regard, some businesses will follow an automotive photography manual, which details specific angles and photos to capture. However, photographers can also take advantage of [**PhotoRobot Touch**](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/photorobot-touch-iphone-app-user-manual), an iPhone workflow app that delivers visual photoshoot guidelines. The photoshoot wizard visually guides photographers to capture the correct detail at the right time. It supports one or multiple cameras to make exterior shooting easier and quicker. Pre-defined screens, all with remote operation, show which angles to shoot, including close-ups alongside standard marketing images, and interior panoramas. ## Integrated vs 3rd Party Software Some car studio systems rely on 3rd party software for image processing, RAW file development, or content delivery. Special tools such as those from the [Adobe](https://www.adobe.com/creativecloud/tools/photo-editing-software.html) family or [Capture One](https://www.captureone.com/en) can do this. Their licenses are also surprisingly inexpensive, but finding someone to operate the software is far from cheap. An alternative is outsourcing image post-processing to external retouchers. And sure, it’s possible to find relatively low-cost services. They won’t be as cheap as cloud automation automation, but they can be affordable. Yet, you still need someone responsible for sending and receiving files, handling claims, and managing the entire process. The cost increases every month of your rig’s lifetime, with higher expenses the more your studio produces. You might also have to account for content distribution and syndication costs. Thus, the more studio processes like these are integrated into a system and automated, the better. This is why PhotoRobot’s studio software supports every stage of production, from receiving to capture, post-processing, and image hosting. The mission is to drastically reduce or fully eliminate the need for outsourcing complex and often expensive processes. ## Image Hosting & Content Distribution Finally, car studios need an effective image viewer that is either self-hosted or via 3rd party software. With PhotoRobot, studios take advantage of our integrated image hosting & SpinViewer. The viewer can host multiple outputs on a single page, including complete image galleries, 360 spins, hot spots, interior panoramas & more. The software can also integrate with publicly accessible VIN databases such as [Autodata](https://www.auto-data.net/en/) software. A VIN decoder allows studios to identify specific information encoded in a vehicle’s number. This info can then be automatically attached as metadata across entire batches of image files. PhotoRobot Viewer comes standard with our machines, and is easily embeddable on any webpage. Businesses only pay for the data they use, and get unlimited view count and data transfer. Meanwhile, a global CDN ensures quick, pixel-perfect loading on any device or browser. All animations are highly customizable, with image compression and automatic publishing options. There is real-time scaling, and full support for deep zoom, and JSON or XML formats. ## The Cost - PhotoRobot vs Other Car Turntables Ultimately, there are many factors to take into account when estimating the cost of one car turntable vs PhotoRobot. Most are capable of only photographing 1 - 2 cars per day, while PhotoRobot can manage 60+ over 24/7 operations. Many manufacturers also focus exclusively on the hardware, so clients have to consider all the additional costs beyond the machinery. These can range from content delivery services, to external retouching, image hosting, licensing fees and much more. PhotoRobot systems account for all workflow stages, with software-driven automation to reduce long-term production costs. The software eliminates manual processes, and minimizes the need for complex photo editing. Meanwhile, cloud-based processing enables image hosting as soon as studios capture photos. And that’s only part of the ROI that comes with the initial cost of the turntable and software. Turntable installations include custom setups to meet any studio demand, and to integrate with existing technology and available space. This is why we consult with clients long before quoting any exact price. Studios might benefit from additional equipment, robotic camera arms and multi-camera rigs, so we consider the entire studio operation. We also take into account user training, and any additional software technology our clients might require. ## Request a Demo of the PhotoRobot Car Carousel Curious to discover the PhotoRobot solution for yourself? Don’t hesitate to [contact PhotoRobot technology specialists](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/contact-photorobot) to book a custom demo and start building your car turntable module today. We’ll demonstrate the advantage of automation-driven photoshoots, while consulting on the best possible configuration for your car photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography # SECTION: blog > jewelry-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-05-25 --- # Jewelry Photography - Behind the Scenes Production See how to set up for jewelry photography on-location in this behind-the-scenes look at PhotoRobot’s transportable, motorized turntable setup. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots, Software ## A PhotoRobot Setup for In-House Jewelry Photography Jewelry photography on items like bracelets, necklaces, rings and earrings calls for specialized equipment and accessories adaptable to [macro photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography). The goal is to quickly create **visually-rich images that showcase multiple details**, **ornamentation and true-to-life colors**. To do so, we must afford attention to not only **the product** but also **camera settings** and the **studio setup**. In this post, we’ll demonstrate each stage production to answer the most important questions about jewelry product photography. Find answers to: - Which equipment and accessories do you need to photograph jewelry? - What is the best camera to photograph jewelry? - Do you need a macro lens for jewelry photography? - How do you minimize reflections in jewelry photos? - How do you prep jewelry for product photography? - What are the best camera settings for jewelry? - What kind of lighting setup is best for jewelry? - How do you ensure your jewelry is in sharp focus? But before we set off, let’s make one thing clear. This post isn’t about a traditional product photography setup. Instead, we demonstrate a specialized, mobile module for 360 and 3D jewelry photography. It offers mobility, versatility, and studio automation technology for extremely quick photoshoots from one location to the next. ## 1 - Equipment for 3D and 360 jewelry photography PhotoRobot designs a number of [studio automation technologies](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) for still, 3D and 360 jewelry product photography. Each serves as an alternative to traditional product photography setups, which require expert knowledge and advanced post-production techniques. This is not the *case* with PhotoRobot. Instead, automation serves to simplify shooting and post-processing in a way that even amateur photographers can effectively manage production. Take for example the [Case 850 motorized turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850), which is both easily transportable and quickly installable on-location. Together with automation software, this device becomes the heart of our jewelry photography setup. It syncs cameras and lights with the rotation of the turntable, or combines with the Cube to suspend products in air. An integrated light tent supports taking photos on a pure white background, and enables easily automated background removal. Below is how to set up the turntable on-location for a photoshoot. ## 2 - Motorized turntable setup for jewelry photography The design of the Case 850 turntable offers a truly unique, mobile solution for on-the-go product photography. It packs up neatly into a protective flight case that accommodates every piece of the machinery as well as accessories. Inside the casing, there is everything necessary to set up a photography workstation in minutes. There is space for the glass plate, the hardware, an integrated diffusion cloth background, background holders, and other items. After unpacking the device, setup involves attaching the turntable’s glass plate, and installing the diffusion cloth background. For photographing jewelry, we also use an integrated light tent, top lights, and backlighting for optimal translucence. Shading panels at the sides and bottom of the construction prevent any shadows on objects. We then use a tripod to stabilize our camera to the center of the object inside of the tent. Above the turntable, the Cube robot is set up in suspension mode. The Cube enables photographers to suspend products in air for photos rather than shooting them flat lay. The device can synchronize with the turntable and other devices, and requires minimal time to install. In fact, we built the entire setup on-location in under an hour. ## 3 - The Cube - product staging for loose-fitting jewelry [The Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) is a multi-functional product photography robot. It can serve as a standalone motorized turntable, a rotating mannequin stand, or combine with motorized turntables via suspension mode. Suspension mode makes it easy to stage hanging objects like jewelry, handbags, chandeliers, light fittings, and even bicycles. To photograph a bracelet for example, we install the Cube above the glass plate of the motorized turntable. The device securely fixes to a top portal that also holds lights and has mounting spots for additional accessories. On the Cube itself, there is a rod to extend its suspension range into the light tent. It inserts into the tent via a small eyelet, and holds a snowflake-shaped wheel to suspend objects on nylon string. Rods for lasers also attach to the top bar and side frame, and insert into the light tent via small eyelets. This enables laser-guided object positioning for any products (like our bracelet) that we hang inside the light tent. A setup like this is best for when we need to photograph a higher view point. It provides more diffused light on the object, and supports photography of items such as bracelets, rings, earrings and necklaces. ## 4 - DSLR cameras for jewelry product photography Macro photography of jewelry calls for an SLR camera with either an APS-C or Full Frame sensor. However, the full format version offers the highest quality image rendering at this range. They help to maintain sharp focus on smaller products, eliminate motion blur, and provide a much larger depth of field. If on a budget, there are some very capable entry-level full-format DSLR cameras. These start at the **Canon EOS 6D Mark II**, with the **5D Mark IV** following close behind. For this particular photoshoot, we used the **Canon EOS 5DSR**. This is both for the **15 MP** sensor and its **larger depth of field** suitable for smaller pieces of jewelry. Alternatively, you could use any Full Frame camera you are comfortable with. Really, it all comes down to finding the right balance between the camera and the lens within your budget. ## 5 - Using a macro lens to capture the fine details Using a macro lens with a fixed focal length is essential for jewelry photos. This type of lens is both sensitive to light and achieves much higher quality renderings than any zoom lens. Macro lenses work well for example to photograph gold or silver jewelry with detailed patterns or ornamentation. Typically, a macro lens will have a focal length between 35 and 100 mm. To photograph jewelry, you’ll usually want a focal length of 100 mm or higher. The lens should have a large aperture (F2.8), and a 1:1 ratio to photograph products at their actual size. For this photoshoot, we used the **Canon EF 100 mm f2.8 L Macro IS USM lens**. The 100 mm lens enables us to get close enough to the product while maintaining sharp focus. Alternatively, we could use a 50 mm lens to get much closer to even smaller objects, such as an engagement ring. 50 mm is capable of capturing the close distance shot, while still maintaining a similar depth of field. ## 6 - The photo tripod to keep items in focus Set up in front of the motorized turntable, a quality tripod is essential to stabilize the camera and maintain focus. Together with the lighting setup, this will help us avoid motion blur when photographing the product as it spins in air. There are a number of quality tripods on the market, including Manfrotto, Gitzo, and Vanguard. Price ranges vary depending on design and material. Aluminum tripods often provide a decent balance between stability, weight, and cost. Meanwhile, carbon fiber boasts great stability and weight, although at a slightly higher price. Plastic tripods, on the other hand, have no place in the studio due to their extremely poor functionality. For the tripod in this setup, we use a Manfrotto 058B. Alternatively, you could use any quality tripod such those from Gitzo, or Vanguard, as long as it isn't plastic. ## 7 - Continuous, multi-source, and strobe lighting A good lighting setup for jewelry photography will help to avoid unwanted shadows and reflections in photos. It will also render both color and materials in a way that is true-to-life, without advanced photo editing necessary. To achieve the best lighting, PhotoRobot supports two types of lights. These include strobes from **FOMEI** and **Broncolor**, and any type of **LED lights with DMX support**. Additionally, the design of the Case 850 integrates a diffusion cloth background, and combines with a light tent. For items like jewelry, the setup uses two front lights on the right and left, top lights, and backlighting. The front lights on the left and right create the main lighting on the product, and illuminate the material in high clarity. Meanwhile, the two background lights, one at top and the second at bottom, create the white background behind the product. When shooting, we then use powerful strobes to support fast-spin mode. In fast-spin, the turntable rotates non-stop, without interruption, while the strobes “freeze” the product in place. In this way, we get dramatically quicker production times in comparison to the “start-stop-capture” of traditional photography systems. The strobes prevent motion blur while the object is in rotation, and provide sharper details in greater illumination. All lights are completely software-controlled, and in sync with the cameras, lasers, plate movement, and the Cube. This makes background removal easier to automate, and provides advantages in speed, quality, sharpness and dynamic range. ## 8 - Product prep for jewelry photography Prepping products such as jewelry calls for careful handling and attention to detail. It’s crucial to inspect products for any blemishes, dust, dirt, or fingerprints that might show up in photos. Thus, you should use cotton gloves when handling items, and have cleaning solutions for different materials on hand. Use a microfiber cloth to apply a final polish before photos, and consider using compressed air to eliminate dust. Then, before shooting, inspect both the item and the glass plate of the turntable for any unsightly blemishes. Keep in mind that spending even a minute more during product prep can save hours in editing later on. For items that you photograph in suspension, like the bracelet, nylon string suspends the item above the turntable. The nylon string tightens around a snowflake-shaped hanger attached to the Cube’s suspension rod to hold the bracelet in place. Laser-guided positioning then makes it easy to adjust product positioning to exactly where you need it. When set up, the product can spin 360 degrees with the Cube’s rotation, and with minimal object movement. This approach makes it easy to capture any angle of the item. In this case, it would take approximately **30 seconds to capture 24 photos** around the product. It’s also possible to adjust the speed of rotation, and to save specific settings as software Presets for future automation. Different settings can apply for example to different types, sizes, and categories of products. ## 9 - Camera settings for jewelry Some might say the ideal aperture **f-stop value** for jewelry is between f/11 and f/13. But, in this range, the photos come out with one part of the object out of focus. Instead, we found an f-stop of f/16 was ideal for this specific piece and our desired sharpness. When shooting with strobes and a tripod, **shutter speed** is less of a concern. The combination of the two together with PhotoRobot’s fast-capture mode eliminates any risk of movement-induced blur in photos. As for **ISO speed**, this depends on the power of the strobes. In this case, we used ISO 100, which is often suitable for many types of jewelry. Typically, between ISO 100 and ISO 200 is most common to ensure less noise in photos. However, there are also some mirrorless camera models that can reach ISO 400 without any noise difference. ## 10 - Taking a test shot Before running the photography sequence, it’s important to take one or more test shots. Test shots help to fine-tune camera settings, lighting, and composition for photos. All of these photographers can test without ever leaving the workstation thanks to remote control via the PhotoRobot software interface. The software enables users to take a test shot at the press of a hotkey or the start button. After capture, test images are then accessible for inspection via a preview window. If any settings need adjustment, photographers have complete remote control over the camera and light group settings on one interface. Usually, we take a test shot, review the results, adjust light intensity, and repeat this process until we’re satisfied. The software also stores test shots in their own folder, making it easy to compare the results of different settings. ## 11 - Running the photography sequence After fine-tuning settings in test shots, we can remotely start the 360 degree photography sequence. In this case, the sequence involves capturing 24 product photos around the bracelet. These photos, the system will capture in approximately 30 seconds, without ever stopping the product’s rotation. All of this we control via a simple press of the start button, or by scanning a unique “start” barcode. PhotoRobot technology then automates the entire process, from the machines and lights to the precise capture of our desired angles. The sequence completes when all photo thumbnails in the software fill up with images. As this happens, we observe for any potential misfires of the strobe lights. Sometimes misfires do occur, but we can mark these images and then reshoot without re-running the entire sequence. After capturing all images, we then switch to edit mode in the software to apply post-processing operations. ## 12 - Software post-processing For many pieces of jewelry, there will always be some manual retouching necessary after the photoshoot. However, there are many editing operations which PhotoRobot can automate on capture. These reduce the need for manual retouching to a minimum, and amount to less time (and costs) for further post-processing. When shooting this bracelet for example, our Presets included a number of basic to advanced editing operations. Automation automatically cropped photos, applied padding value, and removed the background around the object. It enabled us to choose the new background – in this case, transparent – and also automatically sharpened our photos. For additional retouching, we can then manually edit photos, or easily share with external talent. The workflow software allows the sharing of select images or entire image folders for retouching at a few simple clicks. Retouchers can then download images, work their magic, and import product photos for review and approval. ## The final photos and 360 spin In the end, this photoshoot required minimal manual retouching to achieve web-ready results. The software handled much of the post-processing, and we were able to manually edit out the nylon string without difficulty. See how the resulting pure white background stills and the 360 spin deploy online via [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer): - **Number of images:** 1 x 24 - **Shooting time:** 0 minutes 42 seconds - **Production time:** 0 minutes 58 seconds - **Retouching necessary:** Minimal ## More product photos from the jewelry portfolio ### Women’s multi-layer bracelet - **Number of images:** 2 x 24 - **Shooting time:** 0 minutes 56 seconds - **Production time:** 1 minute 25 seconds ### Fashionable ring with engraving - **Number of images:** 1 x 36 - **Shooting time:** 1 minute 45 sec - **Production time:** 2 minutes 30 sec - **Retouching necessary:** Basic to advanced ### Equip your business for smarter, faster product photography Jewelry photography will always pose a challenge owing to the reflectivity and small size of objects. Thankfully, today’s studio equipment and technology can dramatically simplify and speed up each stage production. There will still be countless adjustments and corrections to make along the way, but automation-driven devices make everything more manageable. Curious to learn more? Perhaps you run a product photography studio or an eCommerce business? Either way, reach out to see how PhotoRobot can help. We construct custom solutions tailored to any business, build studios from the ground-up, and can better equip any existing operation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography # SECTION: blog > ecommerce-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-03-24 --- # eCommerce Photography - How to Optimize Production In eCommerce photography, production speeds matter. Discover 9 stages to optimize your in-house studio for high-speed, high-volume production. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots, Software ## 9 Stages to Efficient Ecommerce Photography In eCommerce, manufacturers and retailers alike take on [product image production](https://www.photorobot.com/production-line) for greater brand consistency, maximized sales, and reduced returns. The measure of a studio’s success thus becomes how fast it can: - Source products - Produce product imagery - Create ‘web-ready’ results - Sell products online To optimize performance in each area, workflows account for the use of [specialized photography robots](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) together with automation technology. Product photography software can then centralize & automate processes on one system: producing, QA-ing, publishing, formatting, sending, and managing digital assets. In this way, the product photography studio realizes higher production speeds, greater accuracy, and reduced product content ‘time-to-market’. The studio also benefits from higher levels of organization, customizable workspaces, simple processes, as well as free & effective collaboration. Follow along as we detail the 9 stages to efficient eCommerce photography, including: 1. Organization 2. Preparation 3. Studio planning 4. Ecommerce photography machines 5. Test shooting 6. Shooting 7. Post-production 8. Publishing images 9. Digital asset management We’ll guide you through the production process of eCommerce photography, from product-in to product-out. Read on to discover the process, hardware, and software to help you get the best photos for your online store. Watch a video demo of [PhotoRobot product photoshoots](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/product-photoshoots-demo): capturing, post-processing, and publishing images of 3 products online in under 3 minutes. ## 1 - Organization ### Categorize your products The first stage of any ecommerce photoshoot involves cataloging inventory. Different types of products will call for different camera settings, equipment, lighting, and post-processing. Thus, grouping items together by size, shape, color, and transparency is where every project begins. These categories we will use to automate capture sequences, robotic processes, light control, and post-processing. For example, PhotoRobot software has what we call Presets. These are configurable software settings users can apply to similar types of products. Once configured, studios create a unique barcode for the Preset. This barcode represents a “shelf” both in the physical studio and in the software according to the type of item. Assigning items to their virtual shelf requires only scanning the product’s SKU followed by scanning the shelf code. This sorting to “shelves” groups products together in the software by their photoshoot and post-processing settings. It enables us to prepare for shooting various types of products: light, dark, transparent, reflective, etc. The system also stores identifying product information attached to its barcode: name, color, description, size, and associated tags. If you sell unique products, you can manually input all of this information. It’s also possible to generate unique barcodes, or add custom tags so items are easy-to-access and identifiable. Scan barcodes to validate inventory, ID products, and automatically mark items “received." ### Develop a file naming, tagging, and metadata structure To further organize for photoshoots, set up a file naming convention and a tagging structure. It’s also important the item number corresponds to any folder where the digital assets will exist. The naming and tagging structure will then ensure images are easily searchable and retrievable. This will help to decrease project management errors on the eCommerce backend. In this regard, automation technology can enable automatic file naming & tagging for different products, projects, customers, or organizations. With PhotoRobot, users can also manually import any type of data via CSV import, or by calling an API. If [CubiScan](https://cubiscan.com/) is present in the workflow, you can scan products when receiving them to obtain their exact weights, measurements, and dimensions. This information the software can then automatically attach to files and store in a database as soon as we record it. In this way, you prepare for the photoshoot long in advance: from file naming and asset management to metadata assignment. Integrate barcode support and CubiScan to record product weights & dimensions, automate photography sequences, and generate valuable data alongside imagery. ### Catalog product images It’s equally vital when organizing for a photoshoot that you have an organized system to catalog your digital assets. In eCommerce photography, businesses often have multiple assets for every one product. There can be still images, marketing angles, close-ups, 360 spins, video, and 3D product models. This means you need a digital asset management system that: 1. Shows which images are web-ready versus those still in production 2. Organizes various outputs into easily located folders (still images, packshots, 360s) 3. Allows for file renaming and structured content delivery 4. Enables batch processing for editing multiple images simultaneously Ecommerce photography software such as PhotoRobot centralizes production with digital asset management on one platform. It gives studios the power to edit hundreds of photos at once, catalog progress, attach timestamps, and easily search content. In the end, each product has its name, description, number, date and metadata in every file folder where it appears. Nothing gets lost in transit. All product information is in one central location, with no copying and transferring files from one system to another. ### Backup product images Ecommerce studios also need a system in place for backing up images after production. This is another area that PhotoRobot integrates into the workflow. With Cloud-driven technology, images are backed up immediately and automatically after capture. This is before the automated post-processing operations of the software, meaning original files never go missing. Cloud technology also makes it so that projects are accessible from anytime, anywhere – for internal or external talent. Team members, project managers, retouchers, and clients alike simply log into the system for remote access to digital assets. The system backs up original files in case anything goes wrong, and there is no need for duplicate files. Automation then enables real-time image scaling with support for JPEG and WebP image formats. Together with the Cloud-based, global Content Delivery Network (CDN), these ensure quick-loading and pixel-perfect resolution on any device. ### Create a structured workflow plan If you want to be consistent, especially as your business grows, your studio should have workflow documentation. It should detail each stage of production, from shooting methods to style guidelines, post-processing, and content delivery. In this way, as the business takes on more and more customers, it’s easier to maintain consistency. A structured workflow for example will document step-by-step how to organize for a photoshoot, prepare products, and set the scene. It will include instructions on file naming, file types, formatting, and delivery requirements. As you document each stage, both your human resources and outsourced talent will be able to easily recreate processes. After all, communication is key to business. When everybody is on the same page, operations can run smoothly and efficiently no matter how large the operation becomes. ## 2 - Preparation ### Create a shooting list Preparing for the actual photoshoot begins with the shooting list. With PhotoRobot, users create a shooting list via CSV file import, or by calling an API. Users can import any type of data, and also change the structure of shooting lists by customizing columns and tags. The shooting list records product names, SKUs, ID numbers, and sometimes additional product info. It will contain each item to photograph in a single photoshoot, or over the course of days / weeks. After creating a shooting list, the system will then organize image files into projects, items, and folders. The project is the highest level data entry, consisting of all the items to photograph. It is possible to incrementally import new items into existing projects, or to add new parameters and tags. In this way, users can modify any project even after the shooting begins. Within the project, individual items usually represent a specific, photographed object, e.g. one product. Items then include one or more folders to keep different kinds of images (still images, 360s) separate and organized. A common example would be an item containing one folder named “marketing angles”, and one named “360 spin”. Before shooting, you would create these two folders within the item, which will later fill up with images as you capture them. ### Prep the product line When your workspace is ready and the products arrive on-floor, the next step is prepping each product. Be sure to spend extra care, ensuring each item is in mint condition. It’s important products don’t get damaged, dinged, or scratched before the shoot. Even the smallest defect or speck of dust can mean hours of advanced editing and post-processing later on. Thus, product prep is vital to saving on time (and related costs). For example, if shooting clothing or footwear, the product should be: - Brushed clean depending on the material, with no visible dirt, dust, or grime - Not showing any product tags that distract away from the item - Steam cleaned or pressed if possible - Free of any wrinkles, creases, or threads showing - Shined or wiped if it has any reflective or transparent materials - Examined for any defects No matter the type of product, teams should closely inspect every detail that might show in product photos. After ensuring each product is in pristine condition, you can then begin grouping products together for the photoshoot. ### Group similar products together There are many ways to group products together to streamline eCommerce photoshoots. For example, PhotoRobot software Presets act as configurable settings users can apply across batches of similar types of products. Users can create settings for groups of products based on: - Size (from as small as a microchip to as large as automobiles) - Shape (for products that require advanced background removal operations) - Color (light, dark, reflective, semi- or fully- transparent) - Capture settings (camera, equipment, angles, elevation, lighting, post-processing) Grouping products together by Presets will help to simplify processes and editing later on. Studios configure and save each Preset in the software to automate by style guides, staging, and image overlay. Sort items into categories with configurable photoshoot settings. Simply add rack or shelf codes to the system, and scan the item’s barcode to organize products and assign them photography and post-processing presets related to each rack. ### Adhere to a brand style guide No matter if you produce visual content for your own eCommerce business or for a customer, consistency is key. In fact, many businesses will have their own [brand style guide](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide) which details how their product content should appear online. It helps stylists and photographers know which angles to photograph, the types of content (still images, 360s), and post-processing guidelines. In fashion eCommerce for example, a style guide would describe how to photograph clothing, accessories, footwear, etc. It would include instructions for on-model photoshoots versus using a mannequin, or for lifestyle versus flat lay photography. These instructions can also contain example photos, diagrams, or post-processing parameters for different types of products. If you don’t already have a style guide, start by identifying who the brand should appeal to most. From here, you can develop instructions for visual content around the brand’s purpose and target consumer. Consider color themes, photography scenes, product styling, types of eCommerce images, and additional branding approaches to help you stand out. In this way, you’ll have detailed instructions to help you quickly realize consistency across all photoshoots. These instructions can also function as configurable Presets in PhotoRobot software to help studios automate repeatable and repetitive tasks. ### Determine which types of images you need The type of product as well as the target consumer will determine the format of eCommerce product images you need. Some categories of products will benefit more from 360 and 3D product visualization, while others need only specific marketing angles. Usually, the more complex or aesthetic the product, the more it benefits from immersive product visuals. The goal after all is to help consumers make an informed decision about a product they can only view online. Items with moving, hidden, or technical parts (automobiles, machinery) require additional photos, angles, or close-ups. Further, fashion products like clothing or [jewelry photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography) call for imagery that helps consumers effectively visualize wearing the product. Thus, decide if your products need only still images from a few angles, or the complete 360 / 3D experience. You can then plan for which techniques your photographers will deploy in the studio. ### Plan around eCommerce image standards Among today’s leading brands, retailers and manufacturers, popular eCommerce photography formats include: - [**Packshot photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) (also “pack shot” or “packaging shot”) are still or moving images of a product, sometimes including its packaging and labeling. Packshots attract attention firmly on the item, usually with a plain background to showcase fine details & design features. They might also include close-ups, such as a closer view of a logo, the fabric, or the material. - [**360 product photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) uses special software to stitch together photos into a 360-degree product visualization. The standard 360 product spin consists of a single row of elevation around the item at each frame, usually at 10° elevation. - [**3D product photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography)(also multi-row spins, or hemispherical / spherical spins) entails a spin capturing two or more rows of elevation around the product. The first row is usually at 10 degrees, while subsequent rows capture several vertical angles. This makes a 3D product experience, with both a horizontal and vertical viewing axis. - [**Ghost mannequin photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/photograph-clothing-on-a-ghost-mannequin)such as with PhotoRobot’s Cube produces a true-to-life, 3D effect, giving clothing a “full-bodied” and “worn” appearance. This is thanks to modular mannequins and photo editing to make clothes appear as if an invisible model is wearing them. - [**Ecommerce 3D modeling**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce) utilizes special photogrammetry scanning techniques and software to generate digital 3D product models. These usually consist of at least 36 photos around a product, multiplied by shots from two or more rows of elevation. 3D models are popular in eCommerce for use with 3D product viewers, product configurators, and AR / VR. After determining which formats your eCommerce images will take, you can then move onto prepping the workspace. ### Prepare the workspace A common setup for eCommerce photography will include space for a motorized turntable, a lighting setup, and a workstation computer. This might be in a warehouse, a studio, or a larger production hall. Ideally, the products will also be on nearby shelves, sorted into categories according to their photography and post-processing presets. There can also be a robotic arm or multi-camera rig to synchronize camera capture with the rotation of the turntable. These software-driven devices enable remote camera control with smooth, mechanical precision. They stabilize cameras along a chosen trajectory, and can automate elevation according to object dimensions to quickly produce multi-row 360s. Whatever the setup, there should be enough space for the photographer to freely move around the area. Be sure there are no obstacles or cables that might get in the way, and inspect all equipment. There should be no dirt or dust that might appear in photos, such as on the plate of the turntable. Afterwards, all that’s left is to virtually prep the workspace in the software. Workspaces in the software list hardware for the photoshoot, and settings for PhotoRobot modules, cameras, lights, and other accessories. ## 3 - Studio planning ### Space If building a new eCommerce photography studio or adding on, space considerations are key to accommodate the machinery, inventory, and team. This is especially true for 360 product photography. Photographers need room to move around and make adjustments without hassle. They need easy access to products. There must be space for product prep and temporary storage, as well as solid, level floors to support the system. The area should also have room for a workstation computer, and for any additional staging tools like mannequins or props. ### Equipment What equipment you outfit your studio with will depend on available space and the scope of your business. Smaller webshops and retailers may take advantage of more compact turntable setups. Meanwhile, larger manufacturers deploy entire production lines of robots, from different size turntables to multi-camera rigs. The studio then requires professional lighting, softboxes, background diffusers, and sometimes equipment for product staging (like PhotoRobot’s Cube). ### Electrical Electrical consumption is only a minor concern with eCommerce photography modules like PhotoRobot. This is because the turntables themselves require only a moderate amount of electricity. The same is true if also using the Robotic Arm, or the MulitCam. However, you do need to ensure you have adequate power for the combination of strobes, cameras, and a workstation computer. These can add up, but usually four 20a 115v circuits in the studio is more than enough for daily operations. ### Environment If considering a fixed installation, a clean climate-controlled environment will be ideal for your eCommerce photography. It helps ensure products and the photography scene require less attention. Yet, this isn’t always necessary. For example, PhotoRobot’s design enables it for use in any product’s “natural” environment. This is thanks to the extremely quick installation times of the devices. Disassembly is also just as easy, making the environment less of a concern for the equipment’s correct operation. It can be set up and taken down in any space such as a warehouse or garage in sometimes an hour or less. ### Proximity Another concern is the proximity of the products from storage to where you prep them. Inventory needs to travel from storage to prep, to sorting, shooting, and back again. The quicker this process, the more items your photographers will be able to handle every session. Logistics also plays a vital role by ensuring products are less likely to get damaged during transport. Thus, consider a location for your 360 turntable that is nearby storage, prep, and the workstation. ### Network access The 360 turntable and compatible devices communicate with the software and camera over a local area network (LAN). This enables teams to install and manage multiple systems at one time. The hardware connects to the same local area network as the computer to control all studio equipment and devices. Internet connectivity is necessary to activate robots, download firmware updates, and for software control of the machinery, camera & lights. Alternatively, users can access Cloud services over the internet, while cameras connect to the system via USB for tethered shooting. ### Camera Photography of eCommerce products calls for capturing fine details and showcasing unique product features. Product photos must be high-resolution, display various angles, and sometimes include deep zoom, hot spots, or macro shots. It might be zooming into an item’s material design, or a photo to better present branding or a logo. Yet, with PhotoRobot you don’t need the most expensive or high-end camera on the market. PhotoRobot modules support DSLR and mirrorless Canon cameras, with 26 MP models usually more than efficient. Models such as the [Canon EOS RP](https://www.canon-europe.com/cameras/eos-rp/specifications/) (26 MP) can capture photos customers can zoom into as much as 10x at any angle within a 360 spin. Its tethered shooting and remote capture integrates seamlessly into the software controls, and across all PhotoRobot product photography modules. ### Lens Choosing an appropriate camera lens will depend on the type of products to photograph. Extremely small products (jewelry) will call for [macro lens photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography) to capture intricate details and a deeper depth of zoom. For shooting larger products that don’t require extreme close-ups, a standard lens often performs well. However, they limit the depth of zoom your images can achieve, losing more focus the closer they get to the object. Wide-angle lenses are more for landscape or lifestyle photography, such as product photos of a car on the road. Another example could be a tennis player swinging your brand’s racket. In these cases, a wide-angle lens can capture a wider field of view without having to further distance the camera from the subject. On the other hand, these lenses are terrible at capturing fine details. They lose resolution and produce blurry images at deeper depths of zoom. Thus, eCommerce product photographers usually have both standard and macro lenses in the studio. They also tend to avoid 3rd party lenses, instead purchasing directly from the manufacturer who produces the camera. In this way, both quality of glass and internal structure of the lens is ensured for greater consistency over time. ## 4 - Ecommerce Photography Machines ### Motorized turntables At the heart of any eCommerce photography setup, there is often a motorized, 360-degree photography turntable. Motorized turntable photography tends to have a greater positive effect on the eCommerce experience. This is because today’s consumers enjoy more interactive content when shopping online. It helps shoppers to better familiarize themselves with products, and to view items similar to how they would appear in-person. 360 photography turntables come in a range of sizes for products as small as microchips to as large as automobiles. Plate diameters thus vary in diameter and load capacity. Meanwhile, 360 turntables can serve as a fixed installation, while others set up easily on-location. The photography turntable might also support workflows with a robotic camera arm, multi-camera camera rig, or the Cube robot. Robotic arms and multi-camera rigs drastically reduce the production times of 360 and 3D imagery. The Cube helps with product staging, such as to suspend items in air, or for installation with quick-exchange mannequins. Ecommerce photography modules integrate motorized turntables, robotic camera arms and multi-camera rigs for automated control over the entire studio. ### The Centerless Table The [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) is a universal solution for shadow-free eCommerce photography of small to large items with no clipping required. This is thanks to a unique lighting system, an optical glass plate, and diffuse background to light products from all sides. These make it easy to capture shadow-free images of transparent, reflective, dark, and light objects. It could be any object from the size of an engagement ring, to consumer packaged goods, handbags, or small suitcases. The system features laser guided positioning, a white fabric background, as well as integrated flags, light booms, and other accessories. These enable photographers to naturally create a white background for high-quality photos, from still images and packshots to 360° imagery. The Centerless Table has a load capacity of 40kg (88lb) and supports two plate sizes: 850mm (appx. 33’’), or 1300mm (appx. 51’’). Studios also sometimes combine the Centerless Table with the Cube robot to synchronize turntable rotation with an item suspended in air. In other cases, they add a robotic camera arm or multi-camera rig to the module for faster production speeds. ### Robotic Turntable For small to medium size, heavier objects, studios might use an eCommerce product photography turntable like the [Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable). The Robotic Turntable is a heavy-duty 360 turntable, supporting objects up to 200kg (appx. 440lb). Its plate supports small yet heavier objects like machinery, tools, engines, automotive parts, milling machines, and other heavy products. Useful features for 360 product photography include integrated mounts for lighting, and cabling through the interior of the machine’s frame. These ensure freedom of movement in the studio, with no obstacles or cables for photographers to stumble over. Like other 360 turntables, the machine also features laser-guided object positioning, and integrated accessories. The Robotic Turntable can function in a module with the Cube robot, and the Robotic Arm or MultiCam. It has two plate sizes: 850mm (appx. 33’’), or 1300mm (appx. 51’’). ### The Turning Platform If photographing larger or heavy objects from furniture to garden tractors, your photography module might revolve around the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform). This heavy-duty, motorized 360 turntable has a robust design, and, like other PhotoRobot turntables, an extensive range of integrated accessories. The platform has a load capacity of 1500kg (3,307lb), and a plate diameter of 280cm (9.2ft). Zero-clearance transmission, high torque power, and software-driven controls then ensure smooth turntable rotation in sync with precise camera capture. Together, these make automated, high-speed 360 image capture and post-processing possible for a wide selection of products. The device supports items small to large, light or heavy, and modules often combine it with the Robotic Arm. Optional accessories include mannequin stands for fashion product photography (such as the Cube). The platform is transformable to support even heavier objects, or to extend into an infinite runway for [on-model photography](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk). ### Carousel 5000 Extremely large and heavy objects call for a 360 turntable such as the [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000). Large 360 turntables like this often feature in garages, warehouses, photo studios, and showroom floors. They support photography of products from automobiles to motorcycles, household furniture, pianos, or heavy machinery. The Carousel itself features a 4,000kg (appx 8,818lb) load capacity, and a 5m (appx 16.4ft) plate diameter. It comes in two versions. One installs on top of any existing space, while the other becomes a natural part of any studio or showroom floor. The turntable plate of both versions also has an extremely low profile. In this way, you can place products on the device even without an access ramp or a crane. With automobiles for example, all it takes is parking the vehicle. By design, the Carousel is exceptionally resistant and robust for long-term operations and hassle-free maintenance. Even at high-volume workloads, the massive central bearing unit only requires tension adjustment and lubrication once every 12 months. Meanwhile, the drive and control units as well as the flooring material are accessible for easy service or replacement. ### Case 850 If your eCommerce photography calls for on-the-go tabletop photography, the [Case 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) is a mobile 360 turntable. Its design enables quick set-up in 15 minutes or less. The device also folds up into its protective carrying case for easy transport after disassembly. All components and integrated accessories are thus quickly transportable from one location to the next. Featuring an 850mm (appx 33.4’’) optical glass plate, the turntable offers sufficient workspace for small to medium size objects. Software-driven controls then ensure smooth turntable rotation in sync with remote camera capture to enable automated post-processing. Retractable wheels also make the device easy to move around any photo studio, warehouse space, or production hall. After photoshoots, simply fold the device up into its case, and move onto the next location. It’s even possible to transport the device by small car, with the case able to fit into cargo spaces or backseats. ### The Frame In the family of motorized turntables, the [Frame](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame) is a universal solution for 360 eCommerce photography and 3D modeling. The device combines a 360 photography turntable with an integrated robot camera arm and built-in background. Both the camera and background travel around the optical glass plate, enabling photography from both above and below the glass. The glass plate’s diameter of 130cm (appx 51.1’’) supports objects small to medium size. It has a load capacity of 40kg (appx 88.1lb), and features dual-axis 360 plate rotation. In this way, studios can capture any angle quickly and accurately. The glass plate and diffuse background produce quality product photos on a pure white background. These ensure no clipping is necessary for transparent, glossy, light, or dark products. The device automates the capture of complete image galleries as well as single-row and multi-row spins within minutes. It also makes capturing photos to generate photogrammetry 3D models possible in a single click. ### Robotic Arm Together with a 360 turntable, the [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) streamlines single-row 360 and multi-row 3D image capture. The device elevates cameras from 0 to 90 degrees to capture photos up and over an object. This movement synchronizes with the 360-degree rotation of a compatible turntable to capture the upper hemisphere of products. The software can fully automate elevation of the device, or operators can direct the Robotic Arm manually. Two shank sizes (one short, one long) provide a large mounting range and flexibility in choice of tripod heads and cameras. Operators adjust arm length manually, with an integrated laser for easy positioning. All the while, a robust base ensures the device is completely stable, but also easily moveable. It has retractable wheels for transport between workstations, and a docking station for quick setup with compatible devices. ### The Cube For items that don’t stand on their own, the [Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) is a simple yet effective product positioning device. It works standalone or can combine with a photography turntable by installing it in the upper structure of the table. It then hangs upside-down above the turntable’s plate to partly or fully suspend objects in air. The Cube likewise rotates in sync with the turntable’s rotation. Suspension mode positions items such as handbags, chandeliers, light fittings, and even bicycles for 360 product photos. The device supports unstable or odd objects as heavy as 130kg (appx 286.6 lb). It combines with devices like the Robotic Arm, or functions as a standalone turntable with a 100 cm (appx 39’’) diameter plate. ### MultiCam A [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) in the studio enables extremely fast capture speeds for multi-row 3D product photography and 3D modeling. This multi-camera camera rig combines simultaneous image capture from multiple cameras in sync with a 360 photography turntable. In this way, cameras capture multiple elevations 360-degrees around a product in a single turntable rotation. Photographers can then capture complete 3D experiences including top views, as well as photos to generate eCommerce 3D models. The MultiCam captures 144+ images in approximately 20 seconds. Precise camera control and image capture then enable automated post-processing across individual images and entire 3D spins. The camera rig has 13 positions available for attaching multiple cameras at a spacing of 7.5 degrees. There are two sizes for the arch supporting the cameras, and motor-assisted height adjustment. In this way, photographers can quickly adjust cameras to the center of any object for synchronous shooting with turntable rotation. ## 5 - Test shooting ### Take studio measurements When you have your equipment and customized studio space, the next stage is taking measurements. This starts with setting up the equipment, positioning a product for photography, and taking a few test shots. Test shots will help you find the right camera settings and composition for the photos. If using a camera tripod, a robotic arm, or MultiCam, document the distance from the floor to the top of the shooting surface. You’ll also want to know the distance of any camera rig and the camera to the center of the product. Here, integrated laser systems help with positioning objects to the center of the turntable. Images may still need additional software centering, especially if shooting 360 spins, but this is simple with PhotoRobot [Auto Centering](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography). The software provides near fully-automatic image centering, so photographers can focus more on shooting products. Thus, focus on getting your measurements in the software for future automation. These configurations you can save as Presets to use across similar types of photoshoots. ### Determine the best camera settings Compatible cameras with PhotoRobot include recent DSLR and mirrorless Canon camera models. Usually, for 360 product photography, 26 MP cameras are more than suitable. This also applies to still shots, marketing angles, and taking photos to create photogrammetry 3D models. After choosing a camera, it’s important to document camera settings, especially if using the camera in manual mode. Camera settings can later serve as software Presets to automate shooting across similar categories of products. For example, Presets might save camera settings for shooting light versus dark objects, or transparent versus reflective objects. Take into account and document all camera settings, such as: - Shutter speed - Aperture - ISO - White balance - Focal length - Any unique settings that might change from one shot to the next Also be sure to document which lighting you’re using, whether natural, artificial or a combination of the two. Information like this will help talent easily recreate processes, and ensure more consistency across photos. It’s important everything is well-documented such as you would in a brand style guide. You’ll save time in the end, and also be able to save configurations for future reuse in the software. ### Set up a software workspace Before you can start shooting, you will also need to configure a [software workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace). In the software, a workspace is a list of hardware you will use for a specific photoshoot. It can include PhotoRobot modules, cameras, lights, and other accessories. To start using actual (as opposed to virtual) hardware, all PhotoRobot devices connect over the same LAN as the workstation computer. The camera connects to the computer via USB. All devices then communicate and activate via the software workspace. The workspace enables configuration of robots, laser settings, cameras, angles (if not using a Robotic Arm or MultiCam), and lights. ### Configure studio lighting Compatible light systems with PhotoRobot include strobes by [FOMEI](https://www.fomei.com/en/products-studio-lighting-for-photography-and-video-35087) and [Broncolor](https://broncolor.swiss/), or any LED lights with DMX support. The software enables users to first select lights by manufacturer. If using lighting by Broncolor, you can choose which studio group of lights to control. For FOMEI lighting, there are two control options, although FOMEI LAN Transceiver is recommended. To control LED lights with DMX support, the lights connect via an RJ45 or USB cable to the robot. Users can then configure these lights by two different channels in the software. The brightness channel enables control over selected brightness, while the color channel enables adjustment of color levels. ### Create a new project After configuring a workspace, you have to create a new project, and at least one new item. In the system, a project usually includes items from a single photoshoot, or sometimes a single shooting day / week. Projects can consist of one or more items, and a single item is usually a specific photographed object. Items also contain one or more folders to store different kinds of images of the product. A common example is creating one folder to store still images, and one folder for a 360 spin. ### Add a spin or still image folder With a 360 spin folder, the software will automatically add frames based on how many images per spin you select. Most often, product spins consist of 24 or 36 individual frames, with 36 the default in PhotoRobot software. This is the standard single-row spin, while 3D spins require exponentially more frames with each additional row of elevation. Creating a still image folder will require manually adding each frame to shoot. This includes the turn angle (the rotational angle) and swing angle (the vertical position of a camera along a circular trajectory). The swing angle is important for using the Robotic Arm, or other modules that can change the horizontal position of the camera. ### Take a test shot After creating the project, items, and folders in the software, you can begin taking test shots. This is always good practice before taking any final photos. It helps you experiment with any settings from the lights to cameras, and robots. The software then stores test shots in their own folder, which is easily accessible via the capture mode interface. In capture mode, there is also a preview window. The window displays either the current image (if you’ve already taken one), or the Live View stream from the camera. Live View is useful for checking composure and focus, and is part of the camera control user interface. ## 6 - Shooting ### Start a photography sequence After finding the settings from your test shot satisfactory, you can run the photography sequence. The photography sequence activates via software control at a click of the start button in the capture mode interface. If you have a barcode scanner, it is also possible to download a unique “start” barcode to activate the sequence. You can then place the barcode near your production line to run sequences without having to move to the computer. Sequence options include: - **Workspace configuration** to access one or more workspaces - **Normal versus fast shot mode** to either pause turntable rotation for each photo (normal), or to shoot during non-stop rotation - **Pause on frame** to command turntable rotation to stop after each frame (useful for creating product animations) - **Edit automatically** to configure automated editing immediately after capture - **Elevate automatically** to automate elevation of the camera to the center of the product before starting a sequence On start, software-driven controls run the sequence: activating lights, turntable rotation, image capture, and any other connected hardware. The sequence is then complete after all image thumbnails in the item folder appear. Here, the software also automatically backs up original images to a new folder to store originals separate from edited files. ### Fast shot mode For significantly faster photography sequences, fast shot mode combines image capture with non-stop turntable rotation. Powerful strobes prevent motion blur, while capture signals trigger cameras precisely as the product “freezes” in place. This allows the capture of a spin, usually up to 36 frames in 20 seconds, without ever stopping the turntable. Add another 25 seconds on average to automate post-processing in the cloud. That amounts to roughly 45 seconds production time for a 36 frame spin, with all photos automatically edited and web-ready. It’s about 1.5 seconds total per image, and nearly half the production time of traditional “start-stop” turntable photography. ### Multi-camera shooting If using multiple cameras, PhotoRobot utilizes special hardware to control each camera down to the millisecond. This makes shooting in fast shot mode even possible with devices such as the MultiCam. Each camera can trigger milliseconds apart, and in time with the powerful strobes to capture multiple angles simultaneously. For example, if using 4 cameras on the MultiCam, usually all it takes is 20 seconds to capture 144 images. That’s 360 degrees around the product, including top-view elevations, in a single non-stop rotation of the turntable. But what about post-processing the imagery, especially such a large amount of photos? Here, the answer is in integrated post-processing software and cloud technology. ## 7 - Post-production ### Batch processing with PhotoRobot After a capture sequence, edit mode in the software provides a range of basic to advanced [photo editing tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing). Editing operations by default apply to all images in a folder at once. However, you can apply changes to photos individually by adjusting “scopes” in the software. The most common editing operations include: crop, auto center, and background removal. Background removal functions are some of the most advanced, with automated background removal by level, and by flood. It is also possible to remove the background by freemask, although this requires additional configuration of studio lights. Other editing tools control clarity, color enhancement, brightness & contrast, shadows, highlights, chromakey operations and more. These you configure in the software, and then apply across your photos based on the scope of images to edit. The software is capable of processing large amounts of images at one time. Meanwhile, you can also save all settings as Presets to apply in the future across similar batches of products. ### Image background removal In PhotoRobot software, there are 3 different ways to remove a background from eCommerce photos. Background removal by level utilizes an RGB (red, green, blue) color of each pixel to remove colors above a certain threshold. This helps to quickly remove the background on photos with a white backdrop, or for making an off-white background disappear. The background removal by flood method functions by detecting the edges of an object. It then applies flood points to fill in the available space. This can effectively remove the background from photos when working with for example a transparent background, or very white items. Freemask background removal requires more configuration than removal by level or by flood. However, it can be one of the quickest and most exact methods of image background removal. To remove a background by the freemask function, you must configure your lights to capture both a main and a mask image. These, the software can composite together to accurately remove the background around even oddly shaped objects. ### Automated image editing software After determining the editing operations for an item, you can save all settings to apply automatically and immediately after capture. This enables one-click automation for outputs of similar groups of products in the future. Presets contain all editing operations to apply to an item and its outputs. They can include cropping, centering, background removal, color enhancements, and all standard image editor functions. One click can then produce web-ready deliverables: complete eCommerce image galleries, packshots, 360 spins, 3D models, and video. In this way, studios eliminate manual tasks for dramatic savings in time and costs in the editing process. It also helps set the standard for how you edit images for greater consistency and less mistakes in the end. ### Local and cloud processing For processing images, PhotoRobot utilizes local or cloud processing, or a combination of the two. Local processing supports projects who need to work offline, or when processing confidential data. The software works best with Apple computers, but is also manageable on Windows, although with a somewhat slower experience. However, there is a dramatic difference in speed from local to cloud processing. For example, processing locally usually requires 30 to 60 seconds to generate a traditional, 36-frame spin. During this time, studios have to wait for processing to complete before moving onto shooting the next product. If using both local and cloud processing, the software can edit hundreds of images in the background per second. This means no interruptions in shooting. Studios simply photograph products, while the software simultaneously and automatically edits outputs. There is no limitation on image resolution, and full support for up to 50 MP cameras (8688 x 5792 pixels). Automated post-processing in the background then amounts to a production time of roughly 1 minute per product. That’s up to 500 items in every 8-hour shift, with web-ready outputs, and minimal to no need for additional retouching. ### Internal and external retouching For retouching internally or via outsourced talent, PhotoRobot enables a range of project sharing and quality assurance features. This is thanks to integrated digital asset management and workflow software. Retouch access controls enable project sharing with anybody via a link they can access from anywhere, anytime. Project managers can then share instructions as comments on individual photos or across entire folders, while workflow status reports communicate progress. The user interface unifies the local and cloud part of the app. Thus, all details you attach locally are immediately visible in the cloud, and vice-versa. Item statuses include “ready for retouching” and “retouch complete”, while clients approve or reject “verified” work in a single click. Further, it’s possible to attach feedback or instructions if any additional retouching is necessary. Tags also allow you to notify recipients of new comments, and to mark comments ready for action, resolved, or completed. ## 8 - Publishing images ### Bulk image export After successfully editing images, you can find files either in the local drive or via PhotoRobot Cloud storage. Where the images exist will depend on whether you’re using the local app or the cloud version. When exporting, bulk image export allows you to fetch all images in required quality, filename structure, format and resolution. Users can do this from within the application, or via a standalone export utility. On completion, you can access the exported images in a new folder. Folders can contain sets of still images, 360s, 3D models, or video. ### Publish images via the cloud If publishing photos to the web via PhotoRobot Cloud, it takes only moments. The software interface provides links and codes for both individual images and a 360 spin or 3D model. These allow you to preview images in the cloud, and to copy an HTML code to publish images online. For example, the direct link accesses an image preview, either a single frame or the complete 360. If you deem the output web-ready, you can then copy the embeddable HTML code and paste it onto your page. This will embed the individual image or the complete 360 spin anywhere you need it. ### PhotoRobot image hosting The [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) cloud platform enables immediate and automatic eCommerce image hosting after capture. It supports a gallery viewer, 360 spin viewer, hotspots, annotations, and more for any eCommerce product images. There is full support for deep zoom, macro shots, animations, and single-row or multi-row 360 spins. PhotoRobot Viewer offers customizable layouts, thumbnails, buttons, icons, and viewing features. It hosts images via a cloud-based, global content delivery network (CDN), and provides real-time scaling with pixel-perfect resolution. Further, integration with eCommerce export feeds, image optimization, and support for JPG / WebP / JSON / XML make content delivery easy. The software can also connect to numerous structures via API, such as for processing undeveloped RAW files. ### 360 product viewer - spin hosting An integral part of PhotoRobot Viewer, the SpinViewer is a 360 degree product viewer for eCommerce product photography. The viewer hosts product 360s that are compatible on any device. It enables real-time control and configuration of single-row and multi-row spins. Features include options to modify object color, background color, rotation speed, spin direction, and product size. Animations are thus easily customizable, with multiple parameters to match your brand’s eCommerce platform. In addition, the viewer supports hot spots and annotations. Hot spots can emphasize areas of a 360 spin, such as close-ups or unique product features. They might zoom into a logo, showcase moving or complex parts, or present hidden product features. Hot spot titles then tell consumers exactly what they’re looking at, or share additional product information. Integrated digital asset management also provides secure storage, with easily searchable and redistributable assets. If using the Cloud platform, there is in fact no file transfer necessary to publish after capture. You can immediately and automatically publish images to eCommerce websites and apps to dramatically reduce time-to-market. ## 9 - Digital Asset Management ### Storing eCommerce assets It’s important businesses safely store all of their eCommerce assets, from archived originals to post-processed results. For this, PhotoRobot’s integrated [digital asset management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management) provides unlimited and reliable storage for any product content. It enables the storage of all assets in a centralized system, offering multi-regional deployment with disaster recovery. All data is in ISO 27001, with security via Google Cloud and access only via TLS-encryption. The software also automates backups, with regular audits to provide the highest levels of security possible by today’s standards. ### Disaster recovery To prevent worst-case scenarios, whatever platform you use to store digital assets must also ensure disaster recovery. For this, Cloud technology can store data redundantly in at two or more geographic locations. With PhotoRobot, this multi-regional, geo-redundant storage safeguards eCommerce assets immediately on upload. Storage locations are then always at least 100 miles apart within the multi-regional location bucket. Geo-redundancy occurs asynchronously, and any asset you upload is instantly accessible worldwide, just as with all Cloud storage data. ### Asset organization Proper organization is vital to ensuring you and your customers have easy access to the latest digital assets. The more eCommerce images you produce, the more crucial this becomes. All content should be easily searchable and redistributable, from RAW files to post-processed still images, 360s, and 3D models. In this regard, features for easier navigation and asset categorization are essential. PhotoRobot software for example provides full-text search for quick navigation between projects, items, clients, and users. It enables additional search queries for items and item statuses, and supports tags to categorize eCommerce images. There is full support for multiple types of assets. These include still images, image galleries, single-row or multi-row 360 spins, eCommerce 3D models, and product videos. Meanwhile, supported file formats cover JPG, PNG, WebP, as well as RAW files, camera downloads and naming conventions. ### Bulk operations To ensure optimal studio workflow, digital asset management software can allow for bulk cloud processing. In this way, studios can shoot products while bulk post-processing operations run simultaneously in the background. There is thus no need to interrupt photoshoots, and more time for getting stock in and out of the studio. Using PhotoRobot, an entire batch of images with less complex editing operations takes on average 1 minute to post-process everything. For more complex operations, post-processing times can vary, but neither speed nor productivity is compromised. Teams simply focus on the photography, while editing is automated, out-of-sight and out-of-mind. ## Accelerate your eCommerce photography In the end, improving the productivity of your eCommerce photography can amount to a lot of work. If running your own studio, the hardware and software will be a crucial component to overall productivity. Studios must account for each stage of production to optimize workflows, from organization, to prep, test shooting, shooting, and post-production. This is where finding the [right level of studio automation](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation) for your business truly matters. The faster you can accurately recreate production processes, the more products you get online and into the hands of consumers. This is why PhotoRobot works directly with businesses around their product lines to design custom solutions for their operations. PhotoRobot takes into account everything from available space, to specialized robot modules, intended operation, and software functionality. We work around the needs of your studio to support high-speed, high-volume eCommerce photography. It does not matter if it’s for a small webshop, a distributor, retailer, or an industrial-scale production hall. Ready to learn more? Book a demo tailored around your business model to see how PhotoRobot can support your eCommerce product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers # SECTION: blog > digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-02-13 --- # Digital Asset Management for Large-Scale Manufacturers Discover 5 key innovations in digital asset management to support high-volume production, reduce costs, and free up valuable human resources. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## 5 Key Innovations in High-Volume Digital Asset Management The [digital asset management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management) demands of manufacturers widely differ from those of retailers, etailers, and smaller webshops. For one, the product line of the manufacturer is much larger. It also has to be regularly updated and distributed to ensure all of the manufacturer’s customers have the latest product content. Additionally, manufacturers are responsible for supplying their customers with the product information necessary to sell their products. This entails meeting industry image standards, formatting specifications, and customer file delivery requirements. There are also a range of digital assets to manage, from [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) to [360 spins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), video, audio, data sheets, marketing leaflets and more. An effective DAM system will support not only the mass production of digital assets. It will also enable high-speed content delivery. It should centralize both the production workflow and DAM in one system for quick, easy & productive management. In this way, even extremely large-scale manufacturers can ensure all customers have relevant, up-to-date digital assets. Read on to see how PhotoRobot connects all stages of production for effective digital asset management. We’ll share 5 key innovations to handling high volumes of product content, going in depth into PhotoRobot’s unique DAM system. ## 1 - Integrating the production workflow with a DAM system The wider the product line, the more important it becomes to centralize your production workflow with digital asset management. Working across numerous disconnected tools and databases is often resource-intensive, costly, and involves too many manual steps. There is also the workforce necessary to keep operations running smoothly. This is in part why [PhotoRobot workflow software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) supports DAM to connect every stage of production, from product-in to product-out. The software integrates hardware control along with automation features for producing, QAing, publishing, formatting, sending, and managing digital assets. It aims to enable sustainable, high-volume production and content delivery suitable even for large manufacturers and production halls. Let’s consider the benefits of integrating production with digital asset management. - A centralized system enables easy access, tracking, reporting, and management of digital assets. - Workflow status reports provide oversight on each stage of production: ‘item received’, ‘captured’, ‘ready for retouch’, ‘edited’, ‘approved’, ‘published’. - Photographer pages make it easy for production teams to stay on task, find assignments, and communicate progress. - Retouch access controls simplify sharing work with internal or external team members. - Automation technology allows for automatic post-processing and immediate content delivery after approval. - Client sharing tools and client pages allow for quick QA, verification, and downloading the latest product content. ## 2 - Connecting digital asset management to customer profiles Manufacturers also must maintain unique relationships from one customer to the next. Consider a general customer profile: - The distributor, retailer or etailer has their own subset of the manufacturer’s products. - They require sometimes 1000s of images for all the products they sell. - Images must meet specific requirements: file naming, formatting, resolution, size, frequency and method of delivery. - The customer requires additional data for their digital assets: name, SKU, ID, timestamps, weights, dimensions, etc. - These requirements are unique to the customer within a wider network of the manufacturer’s sellers, each with their own specifications. Now, manufacturers can have a few or hundreds of suppliers. The more suppliers, the more complex, costly, and time-consuming meeting each of their unique demands can become. Thus, an effective DAM system will help to: - Organize customer profiles within a wider network. - Automate formatting requirements according to customer needs (such as with PhotoRobot Presets). - Automatically generate industry-standard product data (GS1, PIES) alongside the production of digital assets. - [Automate image editing](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) according to unique customer & branding requirements: size, image optimization, background removal, etc. - Distribute digital assets immediately after production to each customer. - Provide a platform for customers to easily access, QA, approve, download, and publish the latest product content. ## 3 - Reducing time & costs on repetitive tasks The level of automation within a DAM system is a crucial factor to determine its overall value. This is because of the countless repetitive and thus repeatable tasks that go into digital asset management. Let’s consider the benefits to PhotoRobot’s integrated DAM system. - The software can partially to fully automate repeatable, time-consuming tasks. - It eliminates many manual processes: file naming, structuring, formatting, attaching data and metadata. - Software Presets (saveable configurations) automate repeatable capture and post-processing operations. - Users create unique presets to apply across batches of similar types of products (e.g. footwear, jewelry, light or dark products, etc). - The PhotoRobot Cloud enables batch processing and automatic bulk editing of 100s of product photos simultaneously. - Automated post-processing often produces web-ready results, with minimal to zero need for manual retouching. By automating repeatable tasks, manufacturers can focus more on their core business. They likewise free up human resources, reduce operational costs, and improve product content ‘time-to-market’. ## 4 - Simplifying file delivery for product content distribution In PhotoRobot’s workflow software, content distribution takes only a few clicks. There is no switching from one system to another, or copying & transferring files manually (or via script). Instead, all imagery is immediately ready after capture for upload and automatic publishing via the Cloud platform. Customers logged into the system can mark images ‘approved’ to publish instantly. They can host images via PhotoRobot's [360 Product Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer), or connect directly with eCommerce export feeds. It's also possible to integrate with their own platforms via API. Meanwhile, the cloud-based global CDN provides real-time image optimization for pixel-perfect resolution on any end-user device. Support for JSON and XML formats are available, as well as JPEG and WebP image formats. Customers can export images in bulk in the desired quality, format, and resolution from within the app or via a standalone export utility. Each item is in computer-readable format, with properties for: Name, ID, SKU, Status, Timestamp and more. ## 5 - Accommodating industry image standards & formatting Manufacturers must also adhere to product image standards such as the Product Information Exchange Standard (PIES) or GS1 standards. These standards stipulate digital asset file type, file size, dimensions, resolution, and various data that must be included. They also describe how suppliers must deliver digital assets for more efficient and cost-effective data transfers. For consumers, standards exist to provide accurate, relevant, and transparent product information. In the context of digital supply chains, they provide visibility and traceability superior to spreadsheet or ERP-dependent supply chains. This is why PhotoRobot systems can automate for example the production of GS1 images in tandem with 360 spins. While producing the 360, the software simultaneously extracts [GS1 images](https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards) (marketing angles, planograms), and organizes them in a separate folder. The software can also automatically attach product weights and dimensions to files when CubiScan is present in the workflow. Further, unique capture solutions make it possible to extract for example ingredient lists, as well as nutritional or on-package data. If more data is required, users can manually enter or import data to attach to files. All file delivery then benefits from automated formatting, uploading, and organization for extremely quick ‘time-to-web’. ## Take full control over your digital asset management Digital asset management on any level can be a complex process. However, automation technology enables even industrial-scale manufacturers to simplify production, QAing, publishing, formatting, sending and managing digital assets. Combine that into a centralized system utilizing specialized photography robots, lighting, and cloud-based workflows, and you have PhotoRobot. It’s the complete studio automation for any digital asset production & management, no matter the size or scale of your business. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images # SECTION: blog > automate-sending-product-images # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-02-07 --- # Automate Sending Product Images with Integrated DAM Software Read how integrated digital asset management software in a production workflow equips large-scale manufacturers for high-speed, high-volume operations. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## How DAM Software Simplifies Product Image Distribution Manufacturers know all too well the challenges of producing, QAing, publishing, formatting, sending, and managing product images. This is part of why digital asset management is an integral part of PhotoRobot’s [studio workflow software](https://www.photorobot.com/software). It helps in particular industrial-scale manufacturers whose customers range from distributors to retailers and e-tailers. All of these customers require up-to-date product content as soon as it’s available. This includes product images, price sheets, information leaflets, video and more. Anything the manufacturer produces must pass through the network quickly and in a cost-efficient manner to all sellers. Successfully doing so equates to more sales, and, likewise, fewer returns. This is because the manufacturer’s customers will have the most recent product content to sell more products online. Additionally, consumers can make more informed purchases, and thus be more likely to buy the product they require. *In this post, we’ll share how sending product images with* [*DAM software*](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software)*reduces costs & time in high-volume content distribution. Follow each stage of production: from integrated DAM in the capture process to client management, file formatting, and automated delivery.* ## The difficulties of high-volume product image delivery The larger the manufacturer, the more complications arise in product image production and distribution. Take for example a typical, large manufacturer. - The manufacturer has 1000s of products - Each product requires regular updates: images, prices, info, etc - New products come out frequently - For every product, there are multiple digital assets: still shots, marketing angles, [360 product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), etc - The manufacturer has hundreds of customers: distributors, retailers, e-tailers - Every customer requires up-to-date product content - Each customer has specific requirements related to image formatting and file delivery - All images call for customer-specific file naming conventions: branding, customer codes, product SKU, number, type, etc - File types exist in various formats: jpg, tiff, gif - Each customer demands a specified frequency and means of content delivery Without an effective system for digital asset management, large manufacturers would have a complex task to say the least. It becomes even more complicated when digital assets are spread across numerous, disconnected systems. However, various levels of automation make large-scale, high-volume image production and delivery easier and more cost-efficient. Combine that with a centralized system that integrates the production process with content delivery, and it’s even more so. Let’s look at how. ## How DAM software decreases content distribution costs DAM software can automate many repetitive and repeatable tasks to decrease distribution costs and product content ‘time-to-market’. This means less manual work in the end, and, at the same time, more product images in front of the consumer. ## 1 - Centralized image production and DAM Centralizing image production and DAM software is one way to ensure smoother workflows and better digital asset management. Here’s how it works with PhotoRobot. - Everything from production to QA and publishing is centralized on one system - There is no waiting for an asset manager to copy and paste files from a production system to DAM software - Team members can quickly navigate between projects, items, folders, clients & users - Search features allow responsible parties to find tasks, works in progress, items for editing, review, etc - Various tags categorize data for better digital asset management, with full-text or single-click search - Status reports detail every stage of image production: ‘to capture’, ‘captured’, ‘ready for retouch’, ‘retouch done’, ‘verified’, ‘approved’, ‘published’ - Integrating the production process with digital asset management enables automatic editing and publishing immediately after capture - Client pages enable QA of items or entire folders as soon as they are marked ‘verified’ Further, unification of the Cloud and local part of the PhotoRobot app means everything is visible on a single page. All details users attach locally are immediately available in the Cloud, and vice-versa. Users can thus access up-to-date photos as soon as they’re ready, including information, comments, additional details and instructions. ## 2 - Automated project sharing with clients and retouchers Without a centralized system, it can be both costly and time-consuming to collaborate with retouchers to meet customer requirements. It becomes even more complicated when working with external parties. Files need to transfer from one system to the next and back again. Images also require specific formatting, file naming conventions, frequency of delivery, and more – each different for each customer. This is partly why PhotoRobot software provides automated client sharing features along with retouch access controls. Client pages enable customers to log directly into the system. Then, when items are marked ‘verified’, clients have automatic access to images that are ready for approval. If rejected, clients can attach feedback or additional instructions, and send it back to the retoucher. Retouch access controls make it easy to share projects, both internally or externally at the click of a mouse. The retoucher then works their magic, and marks photos as ‘retouch done’ to automatically send images to the client. It’s free and effective collaboration in real-time, with all product information, details and instructions on one page. ## 3 - Real-time image optimization Shooting on one platform and formatting on another is both time-consuming and unnecessarily expensive. With PhotoRobot, there is no switching from one system to another. There is no copying and publishing files manually (or via script). Instead, all imagery after capture is immediately ready for upload and automatic publishing via the Cloud platform. The cloud-based global CDN provides real-time image scaling, and pixel-perfect resolution on any end-user device. Meanwhile, users can host any [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) on a single interface: [product page galleries](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting), [packshots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), 360s, 3D product photos, and video. There is also direct integration with eCommerce export feeds, image optimization, and support for JSON / XML formats. ## 4 - Automated file delivery according to client specifications Any items in the system that clients mark ‘Approved’ can be automatically published thanks to the PhotoRobot Cloud. Clients can host images on [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer), connect directly with eCommerce export feeds, or integrate with their own platforms via API. All items are in computer-readable format, with properties such as: Name, ID, SKU, Status, Timestamp and more. Further, JSON and XML formats are available on the level of the project, organization, or client. There is also no need for duplicate files, with real-time image compression and support for JPEG and WebP image formats. Bulk image export also enables image retrieval in the desired quality, format, and resolution. This is from within the app or via a standalone export utility. ## 5 - Item status reports on every stage of production Workflow status reports within PhotoRobot software provide oversight on every stage of production. The system records stock-in to stock-out, and all processes in between. Users can easily find which images are still in production, which are ‘web-ready’, images already sent to customers and more. Further, integrated image formatting and delivery processes allow for complete, actionable reports to organize production. In the PhotoRobot workflow, reports allow for: - Cloud-based collaboration with remote access to any project, anytime & anywhere - The import of any type of data via a CSV import tool: shooting lists, customizable structures with column tags, and various properties - Individual photographer pages to share assignments and report on production - Approval processes for studio managers, quality assurance teams, and client review - Client pages to view projects, stages of production, and approved product images - Retouch access controls for internal or external retouchers to edit photos and communicate finished work - Project sharing features with a comment system to attach feedback, instructions, or additional info to images - Real-time reporting on progress thanks to the direct connection between PhotoRobot hardware and software - Reports on what products still require images, what needs retouching, and what has been sent to customers - Timestamps on completed and delivered work ## Is PhotoRobot’s integrated DAM right for your business? PhotoRobot’s integrated digital asset management is an integral part of the production workflow. It incorporates our specialized photography robots with software automation to centralize production on one system. The hardware and software together make high-volume shooting, editing, and digital asset management quicker and easier. It’s a complete solution: from the [automated photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-photo-studio-manufacturers) to the software. Curious to learn more? Consider booking a demo to see how PhotoRobot can equip your studio for automated product photography and digital asset management. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software # SECTION: blog > digital-asset-management-software # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-01-30 --- # Does Your Business Need Digital Asset Management Software? Discover how digital asset management integrated into workflow software improves overall productivity for high-volume content creation and distribution. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## DAM Software - What It Can Do For Your Studio [Digital Asset Management software](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management) enables businesses to securely store, manage, and share modern web content & digital experiences. These include product imagery, PDFs, and most often video to effectively sell merchandise online. There are also data sheets, product demos, and brochures to manage for both digital and print advertising. If you don’t use DAM software, most likely your business has a system combining processes. Usually, this is with many disconnected tools and databases. However, systems such as these are often resource-intensive and costly. They involve many manual steps, as well as the workforce necessary for each stage of production. But when is it time to invest in a more comprehensive DAM solution? In this post, we’ll help you evaluate how you manage and share digital content today. We’ll look at the pain points different types of companies encounter, and how DAM systems impact overall costs and sales. Read on to find out more, including when your business can benefit most from DAM software. ## When to Consider Investing in DAM Software In general, the more content you produce and distribute, the more your business can take advantage of DAM software. For one, DAM solutions eliminate many manual and repetitive processes. This reduces both long-term and high-volume operational costs. DAM software can also connect multiple systems. They enable businesses to accomplish more in less time, and with fewer people involved. But, these aren’t the only advantages to DAM solutions. Let’s get right into it. Below are the reasons why different businesses use DAM software, along with how PhotoRobot meets client needs. ## 1 - Managing high volumes of digital assets is complicated One of the main reasons companies consider DAM software is to reduce time necessary for managing and sharing digital assets. Typically, this is when a business needs a more sustainable approach for high-volume content production & distribution. For example, PhotoRobot clients often manage a wide range of digital assets. This is with the help of automated, [eCommerce product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) studio solutions that drastically speed up content production. All it takes is a single photoshoot to capture complete image galleries alongside marketing angles, video, and [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). Outputs then need to go through quality assurance, and finally for publishing or sharing across any channels the product appears. Yet, each of these processes can be complex, especially without a software that centralizes your digital assets. This is why PhotoRobot integrates DAM into its suite of software. ## How a centralized DAM system makes management easier By integrating DAM into client workflows, PhotoRobot helps companies to: - Centralize digital content for easier management, redistribution, monitoring, and security. - Limit the need for additional team members to handle and distribute digital assets. - Automate a wide range of repeatable, repetitive tasks. - Reduce operational costs, and generate more sales opportunities. ## 2 - Digital Asset Management tasks take up too much time Another common problem companies face is that it simply takes too much time to manage their digital assets. And usually, this is due to the countless repetitive tasks that go into content management and sharing. Just to name a few of many, these involve tasks such as: - File naming, structuring, and formatting for internal use (product catalogs, eCommerce feeds) vs external use (distribution to resellers). Often, each will have different specifications for different outputs. - Managing digital rights and permissions, distributing content to resellers, and recording what goes out to who, and when. - Working with digital assets spread across numerous databases and platforms. - Attaching, controlling, and associating metadata across all product content. - Trying to reduce ‘time-to-market’ to improve sales opportunities. - Automating as many processes as possible to lower the costs of managing and distributing assets. ## How DAM software saves time and costs on repetitive tasks Much of the value of DAM solutions can be measured by the level of automation it brings to the studio. An effective DAM solution will: - Partially or completely automate repeatable, time-consuming tasks. - Free up human resources so your team can focus more on your core business. - Reduce operational costs of managing and distributing digital content. - Improve product content ‘time-to-market’ and thus increase sales overall. *DAM software can partially to fully automate repetitive tasks such as adhering to* [*GS1 image standards*](https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards)*: file naming, structuring, and formatting for internal use vs external use (distribution).* ## 3 - Keeping track of all digital assets is a complex process Losing digital assets can amount to losing sales. This is as true in eCommerce as it is in any sales and marketing. And, truly, it’s easy to lose track of digital assets without centralized tools and databases. If any go missing, it can be a long, complex process to retrieve them. It’s even more so at higher volumes of digital asset management. Let’s take for a general example one of PhotoRobot’s larger manufacturing clients. - Imagine a manufacturer who produces lines of 5,000 to 10,000+ products. - For each product, the manufacturer has a complete still image gallery, marketing angles, and a 360 spin. - Some products also have PDFs, product demos, and an eCommerce 3D model or a product configurator. - There are also brochures, informative pamphlets, and tutorial videos. - Some products still require images, some are missing other assets, and some are ready for publishing. - Others remain works in progress at different stages of production. - None of these digital assets are centralized on a single database. In this case, how could any one person — or team – accurately and consistently ensure every product has its required assets? It’s simply impossible. ## How DAM software makes high-volume management possible An effective DAM solution will make high-volume production easier to manage for the entire team: project managers, photographers, and QA. Let’s take PhotoRobot’s integrated Digital Asset Management for example. - The software centralizes digital assets and all associated properties. - All assets are organized into different folders by outputs, each easily searchable. - Data and metadata serve as signposts for searching, retrieving, and accessing control of digital assets. - Team members can easily access the tasks they are responsible for, with pages for studio managers, photographers, clients, or retouchers. - Real-time reports show team members’ work in progress, completion of tasks, assignments, and upcoming projects. - Together with PhotoRobot workflow integration, teams have real-time visibility of digital assets in every stage of production. ## 4 - It’s impossible to grant access to digital assets anytime, anywhere Without centralizing digital assets, granting access to internal or external parties when they need it can be complicated. In fact, sometimes it’s simply impossible. Team members, external parties, and clients are often spread across different time zones. This can mean requests for access to digital assets around the clock. When team members can’t access what they need when they need it, everything slows down. They either have to produce new assets to replace what’s missing, or, worse, distribute an incomplete product portfolio. Each costs more time, can result in less sales, and comes at higher operational expenses. Take for example an outsourced retoucher on a tight deadline, or a project manager who needs to publish content on-time. If they can’t access what they need when they need it, sales as well as the business reputation are on the line. ## How DAM software ensures ease-of-access DAM software will ensure responsible team members, external parties, and clients can access their assets at absolutely any time. Take Digital Asset Management with PhotoRobot for example again. - The software helps businesses put an end to digital asset ‘silos’. - Users can organize assets by projects and folders, all within one system. - A central database allows for easy search and retrieval of assets at any time. - External sharing features make granting access to clients and outsourced talent easy. - Users can attach or view comments and information as metadata within files. - The software is browser-based, enabling remote access to digital assets. - Responsible parties can always find the assets they need, and monitor work in progress. - User permission levels ensure team members have access to only the tasks they’re working on, with only information relevant to them. ## 5 - It’s difficult to secure and monitor all digital assets Another challenge is securing all digital assets, especially any unfinished, confidential, or top secret company materials. With disconnected systems, this can quickly become unmanageable. First, somebody has to take on strategizing, developing, and implementing a security plan across multiple systems. They then have to find a means to monitor activities, enforce security, and backup all company assets. This is an extremely tall order, one that more often than not leaves assets vulnerable to loss or theft. Just consider how much time – and cost – goes into producing content, from the photography itself to the editing and QA. Your assets are also extremely vital for sales, with time-to-market a top priority for marketing in high-volume operations. Assets thus need reliable security, as well as regular backups just in case. ## How PhotoRobot’s DAM enables higher security In order to secure storage of all your digital assets, PhotoRobot boasts several unique security features. - PhotoRobot allows users to store all assets in a centralized system. - Backups are automated, with regular audits ensuring the highest levels of security. - The software enables multi-regional digital asset deployment with disaster recovery. - All data is in ISO 27001 and secured via Google Cloud, with access only via TLS-encryption. - Multi-regional, geo-redundant storage uses Cloud computing to store data redundantly in at least two geographic locations for reliable disaster recovery. - Storage locations are always at least 100 miles apart to avoid any downtime. - Geo-redundancy happens asynchronously, while multi-regional storage data is redundant within at least one geographic location immediately on upload. ## 6 - Content redistribution involves too many manual steps If working with distributors or resellers, they will have their own formatting requirements and regular deadlines. If you don’t meet expectations, sales can quickly take a downturn, as clients won't have up-to-date content to distribute. Yet, formatting and distribution can be a regular chore to say the least. It can also be a pain-stakingly slow and expensive process. Let’s take larger manufactures as an example again. - Manufacturers can have hundreds of resellers, each demanding the latest content in a timely manner. - Each reseller sells different sets of products from the manufacturer. - The manufacturer has different format requirements for each reseller. - Resellers expect specific formatting: such as file naming conventions, file types, image resolution, and more. For medium to large manufacturers, this usually calls for a full-time employee responsible for formatting and distribution. However, DAM software can still manage much of the *heavy-lifting*. ## How DAM software eliminates manual delivery processes Content formatting and delivery is another area that DAM software can partially to fully automate. Let’s take for example the PhotoRobot content delivery process. - The software enables users to mark digital assets as “Verified” to instantly share work with clients for review and publishing. - Cloud processing enables immediate and automatic file delivery after image capture. - Client pages in the software create a personal space for clients such as distributors and resellers to receive digital assets. - Clients can log into their page for a quick overview of projects, items, and item statuses. - All it takes is a few clicks to download web-ready assets. - Direct integration with eCommerce export feeds, websites & apps allows for immediate publishing on approval. - All items are in computer-readable format, with support for JSON and XML formats available on project, organization, or client level. - Users can set item properties such as Name, ID, SKU, Status, Timestamp and more. Automation further allows for automatic formatting according to each client’s individual profile. The goal is to simplify getting digital assets to all relevant clients, while meeting the unique requirements of each. ## 7 - Product content time-to-market is too slow The longer it takes product content to reach the market, the longer it takes assets to generate value. Consider the typical stages of production that go into getting content to the consumer. - The business determines the scope of content production, from which products to the types of media. - A studio produces the digital assets. - The studio publishes assets to a DAM system for review and QA. - A project manager approves digital assets, or sends them for additional retouching (sometimes to outsourced talent). - The business publishes web-ready assets on an internal system (such as a product page, or eCommerce feed). - Digital assets go out to distributor or reseller channels. If each stage of production is spread across multiple systems, as well as internal & external human resources, it gets costly. It’s even more so when using tools disconnected from your workflows, and with little to no automation. ## How DAM software can drastically reduce time-to-market In addition to automated file formatting and delivery, PhotoRobot’s DAM solution can reduce time-to-market in several ways. - DAM is an integral part of PhotoRobot’s workflow software, meaning users can centralize data on digital assets, production, and progress. - Photographer pages provide easy access to assignments, search and navigation, as well as item statuses to communicate workflows and production. - Integrated approval processes within the application make QA possible for internal and external team members, or clients. - Full-text search enables navigation between projects, items, folders, clients & users, with conditional search queries for items and item statuses. - Bulk image export is available within the application or via a standalone export utility. It enables users and clients to fetch images in required quality, filename structure, format and resolution in a single click. Together, these features help centralize all stages of production. They amount to less delays, and less moving assets between systems or resources. In the end, this means significantly reduced time-to-market, and thus more content in the hands of consumers. ## 8 - It’s difficult to standardize and manage metadata When assets are spread across multiple systems, another challenge suppliers face is standardizing and managing metadata. An example of this is attaching metadata to a file with product information like its description, weight, or dimensions. It could be a date of ownership, info tags, or image alt text for online publishing. By adding metadata to a media file, it becomes indexable, searchable, and more manageable. However, this often requires a lot of manual input. Then, with more and more media to manage, implementing standards across multiple platforms grows ever more complex. Imagine trying to standardize metadata across 1000+ products, each with their own portfolio of digital assets. Some contain marketing angles, close-ups, and detailed shots. Others might include a 360 spin, video, or 3D model. Attaching metadata to all of these assets quickly and in a cost-efficient manner just isn’t possible without the help of DAM Software. ## How DAM software simplifies metadata management An effective DAM software will automate many stages of standardizing metadata. Take for example how PhotoRobot has integrated CubiScan into workflows and digital asset management. CubiScan allows us to obtain the exact weights, measurements, and dimensions of products before we begin photoshooting. This information we can then store in a database as soon as we record it. Beyond this. PhotoRobot’s DAM system provides several solutions for metadata management. - The software can provide remote access (anytime, anywhere) to manage metadata on the central repository of digital assets. - Users simply grant log-in credentials to internal team members or an external party to enter or modify data. - Settings allow users to create and save automated parameters for different categories of products, projects, clients, or organizations. - Automation enables automatic file naming. - Users can import any type of data via the CSV import tool, or by calling an API. - The system enables the import of product data, descriptions, customizable structures with column tags, and support for various properties. ## 9 - Quality Assurance is lacking or entirely missing Over time, digital assets can reside across more and more systems, making quality assurance difficult or missing entirely. This is even more true when working with different departments, suppliers, distributors, or resellers. Some images are in catalogs. Others are in marketing promotions, distributed to resellers, or in various sales initiatives. Yet, you need each of these to represent the brand as it is today, and with its best photos forward. Without a centralized system, this can become impossible. It simply isn’t easy to monitor and ensure the highest quality for your digital assets across all channels they appear. High-quality marketing shots eventually get mixed in with lower quality product content. And, in the end, lack of consistency makes the business look unprofessional. Even worse, it isn’t good for sales. ## How DAM software enables free and effective collaboration DAM within PhotoRobot software helps teams to better monitor and enforce quality assurance processes, whether internal or outsourcing. This is thanks to a wide range of project sharing and client approval features. - PhotoRobot software makes it easy to share projects with clients, or grant project access to external retouchers. - Navigation tools allow for quick browsing between items, and reports with detailed information and statistics on folders or selected photos. - Users can attach instructions as comments to individual digital assets or entire folders. - The user interface unifies the cloud part of the application with the local app. This means all details you attach locally are immediately visible in the cloud, and vice-versa. - Users can enter a comment, and specify for whom it will be visible. - Tags allow users to notify recipients of new comments, and to mark comments ready for action, resolved, or completed. - Workflow statuses communicate progress, with retoucher states to mark items ready for retouching, or complete. - Clients can approve or reject “Verified” work in a single click of a mouse. They can also attach feedback or instructions if additional retouching is necessary. ## 10 - Duplicates of digital assets are across different systems Another complication when working with digital assets over time is dealing with duplicates across different systems. Duplicates occur when formatting media to meet different client requirements (file type, quality, resolution, etc). In turn, storage requirements and storage costs increase. Duplicates also make it difficult to index and search for content, and thus equally difficult to manage. With 1000s of assets, it can be an expensive, time-consuming process at the very least. ## How PhotoRobot reduces the need for duplicate content With PhotoRobot’s DAM integration, it’s possible to completely eliminate the need for duplicate content. Users also have access to all digital assets, from original files to the final outputs for various client networks. - Direct DAM integration with the workflow immediately creates backups on image capture, and uploads original files to cloud storage. - All files are remotely accessible by all users at any time - Users can automate formatting as well as post-processing to client specifications. - There’s no need for duplicate files with real-time image scaling and support for JPEG & WebP image formats. - A Cloud-based, global Content Delivery Network (CDN) ensures quick loading & pixel perfect resolution on any device. - Unlimited view count and data transfer means no additional expenses. Users only pay for the data storage they use. ## Is PhotoRobot the DAM solution for my business? PhotoRobot integrates digital asset management with studio photography hardware, automation technology, and workflow software. Because of this, we know PhotoRobot won’t be right for every business. The software connects all stages of production, and is the driving force behind our automated product photography equipment. It does not and never will integrate with other hardware manufacturers, nor will our hardware function with other control systems. Thus, PhotoRobot is for businesses looking for the complete studio solution. We manufacture various size 360 turntables, robot camera arms, multi-arm systems and more – each with software-driven, workflow automation. Curious to learn more about what PhotoRobot can do for your business? Consider booking a demo today. We’ll take your product line and create a custom studio configuration for your specific demands, from production to digital asset management. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation # SECTION: blog > studio-automation # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2023-01-24 --- # Photo Studio Automation - A Buyer’s Guide by PhotoRobot Determine the level of studio automation your business demands in this buyer’s guide to automated product photography hardware & software solutions. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots, Software ## How Much Studio Automation Does My Business Need? How much photo studio automation does your business really need? Automated product photography integrates studio equipment, software & eCommerce to streamline visual content production & delivery. However, there are many [studio automation solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/robots), each with varying benefits to different types of businesses. Thus, often the first question PhotoRobot asks clients relates to what problems their business needs to solve. If it’s only background removal on a set of 500 images, there are many ways to do that without PhotoRobot. You don’t need to invest in expensive machinery, or into software to integrate it into existing workflows. The same is true if the business has only a small catalog of products to get online. When it comes to producing content for 1000s of items or more, PhotoRobot excels. Its design enables studios to automate repeatable tasks to reduce costs, production times, and content time-to-market. Software-driven equipment & automation ensures high-speed, highly productive photoshoots, with automation to simplify, manage & streamline all stages of production. *Read on to discover the appropriate level of studio automation for your business, whether with PhotoRobot or other solutions.* ## What is PhotoRobot Studio Automation? Kamil Hrbecek describes PhotoRobot as “the complete solution for high-volume, in-house product photography, digital asset management, and content delivery.” Watch the [PhotoRobot Product Photoshoots Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/product-photoshoots-demo). PhotoRobot delivers machines with [cutting-edge automation software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) to consistently manage repetitive or time-consuming studio tasks. These include everything from taking photos to automatic photo editing, digital asset management, content redistribution & [product image hosting technology](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting). The mission is to help studios save on large-quantity content production, speed up photography, and produce high-quality product content. User-friendly hardware & software provides creative freedom for professionals, and ease-of-use for even amateur photographers. Their design makes it easy to create web-ready photo galleries, 360 spins, 3D models, and product videos. With 16 state-of-the-art devices, PhotoRobot has a variety of solutions for [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), from turntables to robotic camera arms. Space efficient hardware aims to support any in-house content production, whether in a small studio or warehouse space. Meanwhile, the software drastically reduces or completely eliminates the need for outsourcing production processes, such as to eternal retouchers. In the end, PhotoRobot automation supports speed rather than creativity in the studio. But what exactly do we mean by that? ## Studio Automation for High Speed vs for Creativity If your business’ product photography entails more artistic vision than production, PhotoRobot may not be the answer. Take for example on-model photography. This is an area where competing solution providers like StyleShoots lead the market. Their systems allow for creativity and on-the-fly lighting adjustments when every photo is different. PhotoRobot systems focus on high production speeds with automation for pre-defined, repetitive photography processes. Automation software provides control over all photography equipment, remote camera capture, lighting, and parameters for automatic post-processing and image hosting. But rather than claiming like other manufacturers we have “the fastest solution on the market,” we provide quantifiable results. For example, other solutions promise 6 images with background removal in under 1 minute. Compare that to PhotoRobot, which can capture 144 images of a product in 22 seconds. Add another 20 seconds to back up and upload all photos to the cloud. Then, in under a minute from pressing a start button, all images are automatically post-processed and published online. This is what we mean by the “high productivity” and “unparalleled speeds” of PhotoRobot. Our technology supports extremely fast photoshoots for high-volume product photography. We also take a *knowledge-first* approach with clients, providing clear data before suggesting a solution. ## User-friendly Photo Studio Equipment & Software A simple studio automation system isn’t always the best option. Sure, there are many low-cost, *plug-and-play* devices. Usually, these combine a backdrop or light tent, lighting, and a 360 turntable into one photo booth, box-like solution. Operators can then press a button to produce a handful of product photos on a transparent background. The simplicity here is the selling point. *PhotoRobot differs from box-like solutions by using only the highest quality hardware and lighting to support sustainable, high-volume product photography.* It’s when you start to compare overall productivity that all-in-one systems begin losing their value. For one, there is limited functionality, and thus less versatility in the studio. Moreover, basic studio automation systems don’t take into account long-term, high-volume operations. They might be useful for capturing 10, 20, or up to 50 items in one session. But compare that to the average studio output of 100 - 250 items per shift. Meanwhile, market leaders produce 500+ items per day. That’s everyday, with full sets of outputs. It isn’t only a few still images; it’s complete galleries, 360 spins, sometimes 3D models & product videos. This is the level of productivity PhotoRobot targets. More importantly, PhotoRobot aims to simplify the entire production process with intuitive workflow software. Its integration means studios need less people on the floor, and incur less overall production costs. ## Lower Production Costs, More Outputs How much can a single click accomplish on your product portfolio? This is the question to ask to determine the value of studio automation for your business. It isn’t only how many photos you can take per day. The end goal is getting the most product content to market with minimal delay, less effort, and at lower cost. Think of how much it costs to hire somebody for file management alone. They have to back-up original files, send imagery to a retoucher (via FTP, AirMail, or WeTransfer), and publish content online. All of this means interruptions in content time-to-web, and accrues additional costs each month of your studio rig’s lifetime. However, when tasks such as these are automated, not only can related costs drop to zero. Businesses can focus more on getting products in and out of the studio, and on creating more visual assets. Single-click output production then makes it easy to generate multiple outputs like galleries & 360s from each individual photoshoot. ## Automated Studio Production It is far more time-consuming to get products in and out of the studio than anything else. In fact, the capture process is only a fragment of the time in comparison. This is true no matter the speed of the equipment. That is why PhotoRobot suggests that clients invest more time into each photoshoot, even if only a few seconds. It takes only moments to produce multiple outputs, and in the end dramatically expand a product portfolio. The software automates post-processing as soon as cameras trigger, and generates 360 spins alongside complete photo galleries. One click is all it takes to produce a high-resolution hero image, marketing angles, close-ups and detailed shots. All the while, the software stitches individual photos together to create a single- or multi-row 360 spin. Some studios even take it a step further and incorporate photogrammetry scanning to [make 3D models from photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). 3D modeling is highly scalable and future-proof, allowing studios to generate configurable assets for long-term use. These provide value especially for product lines of similar types of products with customizable elements. They are also easy to produce in the workflow with software integration by Photorobot coupled with 3D model hosting platforms. ## More than Simply Tethered Shooting With some systems, you simply connect an iPhone, and with tethered shooting capture product photos. Some of these solutions sell for as low as $5 on Amazon. And, sure, they might perform well compared to manual shooting. However, they do not take into account the entire orchestration that is studio product photography. At PhotoRobot, we know that streamlining photography operations isn’t only about turntable speed or rotation. Nor is it the remote camera capture, or simply removing the background from product photos. The majority of the work goes into inventory sorting, product prep, and meeting the demands of unique styling guidelines. This is why PhotoRobot takes every stage of studio production into account. The software integrates CubiScan for receiving, weighing & measuring items if required. It can then automate photography sequences to adapt to item dimensions and various sizes or styles of products. The system can post-process images without asking, and edit hundreds of photos simultaneously. Users configure Presets once, and deploy settings across entire batches of similar items again and again. Then, with instant back-ups and web-ready results within a minute, PhotoRobot immediately publishes images to a target system. All without any manual input or additional labor costs. ## Achieving the Perfect Studio Lighting In product photography, lighting is a key factor to producing a successful image. This is why PhotoRobot integrates only professional studio lighting into its systems. Unlike other manufacturers, there are no built-in, cheaper LED panels to save on production costs. Instead, PhotoRobot relies on highly specialized light manufacturers. We support [Profoto](https://profoto.com/int) strobes, as well as [FOMEI](https://www.fomei.com/en) and [Broncolor](https://broncolor.swiss/), and any LED lights with DMX control (like [RotoLight](https://www.rotolight.com/), [ARRI Lighting](https://www.arri.com/en/lighting) and others). These ensure optimal studio lighting, from effective command over light intensity to capturing the full spectrum of color. Software-driven automation then provides manual or automatic command over all studio light groups. The software synchronizes lighting with camera capture and other devices, such as the 360 turntable or a robot camera arm. And sure, professional studio lights might be more of an initial investment than an all-in-one system. However, built-in lighting usually provides only basic control, and tends to generate lower quality results. These systems then rely on software or external retouchers to fix images afterwards. Yet, if a part of the color spectrum is missing, it’s simply missing. PhotoRobot aims to provide high levels of control and consistency in lighting for the best results with every shot. There is no compromise on quality for a lower initial cost, and thus higher consistency for every photoshoot. ## Buying Local Solutions vs PhotoRobot Some studio automation solutions rely on an extensive network of local dealers & resellers, while others ship directly from the factory. Which is more advantageous for your business can depend on several factors, however. For one, if buying locally, your business likely shares the same tools, software, and knowledge as many of your competitors. In this case, nobody has a real advantage, but you’re all at least on the same page. Everybody relies on the dealer to distribute the latest information & innovations across the network. *PhotoRobot configurations integrate unique 360 turntables, robotic camera arms and multi-camera rigs for complete, automated control over the entire studio.* When choosing PhotoRobot, clients get automation systems from the factory, with direct access to the latest innovations. Modular configurations provide versatility in design, and enable clients to build [custom industry-specific photography workstations](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology) for their business. Clients also have direct communication with software development to ensure optimal functionality, and get updates on new tools & features. More importantly, PhotoRobot is currently unique to many markets, with only a little over 2000 installations around the world. Customers work directly with the factory and developers for extremely short innovation cycles. This not only helps businesses stay on top of the trends in this rapidly evolving industry. It also means clients get tools to distinguish their business from others in their local region. ## High-Durability vs Budget-Friendly Machinery Many automated equipment manufacturers offer lightweight machinery and promise the same functionality as others. Some might even be decent machines for single-purpose use, but they compromise durability for a lower manufacturing cost. These solutions then break down quicker, and require regular service with use over longer periods of time. Take for example some motorized, [car turntables for 360-degree automotive photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography). There are many car turntables on the market weighing at or below 1000 kg, with aluminum components and lightweight materials. These are fine if looking for a turntable only for a trade show. But, if you need to photograph 10, 20, or even 100s of cars, your business demands a more heavy-duty solution. The more reliable the construction, the less need there will be for service or replacement. This is why machines like PhotoRobot’s [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) consist of only the highest quality machining and components. It weighs more than lightweight solutions at 1,500 kg, but it delivers in long-term durability and reliability. Every part is highly resistant to wear and tear, and the flooring is easy to both maintain and service. In the end, the goal is long-term, high-volume use. Think: machinery that’s still operational 10 to 15 years from now. That’s the quality of machinery clients have come to expect of PhotoRobot. ## Overall Productivity vs Fast Capture Speeds Many customers have asked us to pitch them a competitive offer to systems that can capture X photos in Y seconds. In fact, we can usually identify the competing system immediately, but the answer isn’t always so simple. This is because the value automation brings to the studio is far more than simply the capture speed. For example, consider long-term productivity over 3, 5, or 10 years. Then, ask what competitive advantage each system offers. Automating the capture of a few marketing angles might immediately produce results, but what about 360s or 3D models? With the amount of competition in [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), it’s crucial your level of studio automation can adapt to the latest trends. This is why PhotoRobot develops automation not only for capturing pure white background stills, but also 360 product photography, video, and photogrammetry 3D models. Software-driven automation then makes it easy for even small studios to produce multiple web-ready assets in a single photoshoot. Thus, PhotoRobot’s value revolves more on how much the system produces, rather than simply how fast it captures photos. ## Non-Stop Spin vs Traditional Image Capture Another difference from one automated system to the next is how each handles image capture. For example, most 360 turntable systems use a traditional “start-stop” mode to take photos. This is in combination with a continuous lighting kit. Sometimes, the lighting kit supports DMX control, while in others it is simply set to a given level. The turntable positions the product to a certain angle, the machine stops, cameras trigger, and the rotation of the turntable resumes. On average, this process results in 36 images around a product in about 90 seconds. That’s approximately 3 seconds per image on shooting time alone. Now, let’s compare that to PhotoRobot’s non-stop image capture, which uses powerful strobes to prevent motion blur. During turntable rotation, capture signals trigger cameras precisely when the strobes “freeze” the product in place. This allows us to capture all our photos, usually up to 36 pictures in 20 seconds, without ever stopping the turntable. Then, add another 25 seconds on average to automate post-processing in the Cloud, with no need to buy a high-end computer. It’s about 45 seconds total (1.5 per image). That’s with automatic editing, while amounting to half the capture time of traditional “start-stop” turntable photography. Think: saving 75 minutes every 100 products, 12 hours every 1000 products, 6 months off every year’s operation. ## Single-Camera vs Multi-Camera Functionality Most systems will also support a [multi-camera rig](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) which synchronizes remote capture of multiple cameras with product positioning. Shooting with multiple cameras at once allows photographers to capture even more photos in less time. It is also a common approach to reduce the production time of multi-row 3D spins and eCommerce 3D models. Standard systems simply shoot images without needing precise camera sync. This is easier because turntable rotation stops for the cameras at each frame. PhotoRobot utilizes special hardware to control each camera down to the millisecond to perfectly sync cameras with robotic movements. Each camera can trigger milliseconds apart and in time with the strobes to capture multiple elevations simultaneously. Watch a video demo of the [PhotoRobot MultiCam design and dynamics](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/multi-camera-rig-design-dynamics). With 4 cameras, usually all it takes is 20 seconds to capture 144 images. This is in a single, non-stop rotation of the turntable. But, what about post-processing this large amount of imagery? We have 144 images (say at 30 - 50 MP) that we need post-processed, and ideally published online without delay. Here, the solution is in utilizing both local and cloud processing. ## Local vs Cloud Processing PhotoRobot provides full automation for both local and cloud processing. Local processing supports studios who need to work without an internet connection, or when processing confidential data offline. The software is compatible with Apple computers, and is also manageable on Windows, although with a somewhat slower experience. Yet, there is a significant difference between the production speeds of local vs cloud processing. Local processing usually takes 30 to 60 seconds to generate a traditional 360 spin from 36 photos. During this time, studios have to wait for the process to complete before moving onto shooting the next item. This is why PhotoRobot takes advantage of both local processing and extremely fast cloud computing technology. Our cloud-based photo editing software can edit hundreds of images in the background per second. Studios can then simultaneously shoot more products, while the software automatically edits photos and publishes content to the web. This is thanks to extremely powerful GPUs running in the PhotoRobot Cloud. There is no limitation on image resolution, and full support for up to 50 MP cameras (8688 x 5792 pixels). Then, a production time of roughly 1 minute per product means capturing up to 500 items in every 8-hour shift. The software automates basic to advanced editing operations, and generates single-row or multi-row 360s. Each output is most often web-ready as well, with minimal or no need for additional retouching. ## Support for Hybrid Local and Cloud Processing It is also possible to combine both local and cloud processing when the need arises. This might be for example if you need to post-process files locally while synchronizing data across locations using the cloud. Studios might also choose to capture photos now, and post-process in the cloud later. In this way, connectivity is less of an issue. You can still conduct photoshoots in places with an inconsistent or no internet connection. Simply upload images to the cloud for post-processing later when you have better connectivity or capacity to do so. ## Finding the Best Price Studio Automation PhotoRobot customers often ask for a competitive offer to one solution or another. Yet, many times, they only take into account the initial cost of the competing system. They neglect to account for overall functionality, as well as long-term operation. Will your business require additional equipment, software, or training in the future? What about routine service and maintenance costs? This is where the real price of one system over another becomes noticeable. Further, it isn’t one-size-fits-all in the industry of studio automation. Because of this, PhotoRobot has both standalone and modular systems for any type of studio operation. Some integrate a turntable and robotic camera arm into one workstation. Others feature our own [robotic arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) or multi-camera rig with a PhotoRobot turntable, like the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table). Thus, at PhotoRobot, we first suggest a solution around the customer’s needs before we can quote any price. We help businesses work with available space, and to calculate studio output as well as staff considerations. In this way, clients better understand what they receive from the solution, and their savings on external expenses and licensing. ## Will PhotoRobot Be the Best Option for Your Business? In most cases, PhotoRobot caters to customers with extremely high-volume, eCommerce product photography. The focus is on automating repetitive studio tasks for mass production and speed. It isn’t only automating the capture of a small line of products. PhotoRobot has built custom solutions for customers like this in the past, however. Take for example Louis Vuitton. They use our machines in Paris, where the target is not mass production. Rather, their need was for precise control over product positioning and lighting. And while this is a special case, it is within the realm of PhotoRobot. If it’s a simpler solution like this for a business on a budget, we might suggest an inexpensive photography service. That, or a standard system with limited impact on overall production costs. The same is true if the business needs a solution for more creative photography, like on-model photoshoots. In this case, we might suggest a system like StyleShoots, or one of its competitors. It’s when the business demands automation for shooting thousands of items that PhotoRobot stands out. Our systems tailor to studios who want hero images alongside complete galleries, 360 spins, product videos, and 3D models. The more outputs the business requires, the more long-term ROI. ## Does PhotoRobot Integrate with External Workflow Software? PhotoRobot’s workflow software is an integral part of our systems, and a crucial component to overall studio productivity. Some of the other hardware manufacturers rely on external workflow systems like [Creative Force](https://www.creativeforce.io/), [ShotFlow](https://www.shotflow.com/), or [Visual SKUs - Amplify](https://www.visualskus.com/). These solutions are fine when the business focuses more on creative photography, developing RAW files, or manual post-processing and retouching. In fact, we have been asked by numerous software providers to combine systems. But the answer is always the same: No. This is because these systems simply don’t add any value to PhotoRobot’s workflow. Sure, they combine numerous systems in one, like support for barcode scanners or processing RAW files. Yet, PhotoRobot can connect to the same structures via API. Moreover, integrating an entirely cloud-based system into a legacy workflow only slows down production. It also amounts to additional licensing costs, with workflow software often the most expensive software in the studio. Some range upwards of $1000+ per month, and integrating these with PhotoRobot doesn’t make sense for our customers. These systems also tend to measure and report on operations that require little to no supervision with PhotoRobot. For example, other workflow software tracks time on developing RAW files, or post-processing. But, with PhotoRobot, many of these operations are fully automated and run in milliseconds. The software then helps team members track only what’s necessary, while automating repeatable tasks at extremely high speeds. Thus, the workflow supports studios in managing their weakest points of production. It revolves around feeding machines with more products to photograph, and enables studios to focus more on their core business. ## What are the Alternatives to PhotoRobot? Beyond those already on the list above, there are many active companies in automated photography solutions around the globe. Each has its own value proposition, with varying degrees of automation for different types of businesses. Some produce both hardware and software, while others rely on external manufacturers for one or the other. For reference, below is a comprehensive list of active, automated photography companies: - 360Shots (DE) - 360Photo (CZ) - 3Doid (UK) - 3DFotoScan (NL) - 3D Photomation (AU / NZ) - All Axis Studio (USA) - Arqball (USA) - Arqspin (USA) - AutoCam360 (USA) - AutoExact (NL) - AutoLoadIT (UK) - AutosOnShow (UK) - Benel / Foto360XL (NL) - Carousel USA - CarTurner (USA) - Compendium Digital (UK) - EME Digital (UK) - Foba Turna (Swiss) - FotoCube (NL) - Hensel (DE) - Iconasys (USA) - ImageDatasets (USA) - Looklet (SWE) - Mark Robers Motion Control (UK) - Orbitvu (PL) - Ortery Technologies (USA) - Packshot Creator (FR) - Photo-Motion (NL) - Picup Media (USA) - RotoImage (CA) - StyleShoots (NL) - Vivition (NL) - VR Model Factory (CZ) - WebRotate 360 (USA) - XY Imager by NoHa-Tec (AT) Curious to learn more about each system vs what PhotoRobot automation can do for your studio? Let’s talk about how to get started. ## How to Request a Studio Automation Solution If you think PhotoRobot might be a good fit for your studio, first ask what problems you’re trying to solve. How many products do you need to shoot, and what formats does your content demand? The answers here will shape the process going forward. PhotoRobot technicians will ask about the quantity of items to photograph, types of products, their weights and dimensions. Some products stand easily on their own, while others call for product suspension devices. Your business might deal with sensitive products to handle with care, or photograph for example fresh vs frozen food. The type of product (or products) will determine the right solution for your business. There are also space considerations, whether adding onto an existing studio or building a new one from scratch. For this, we have a range of space-efficient hardware for photographing products of various sizes and weights. These include turntables for small to medium size items, or large turntables for supporting cars and heavy machinery. There are also robot camera arms and multi-camera systems to consider for different types of content production. Thus, we need to first find the best configuration to meet your needs before we can demonstrate it in the studio. ## Receive a Demo Tailored to Your Unique Business After requesting a configuration, PhotoRobot demos consist of photographing your product line or similar products with our solution. We measure exactly how long it takes to photograph each item, and provide detailed documentation. This includes integration manuals, as well as recommended cameras, computers, and equipment. We also install your custom studio configuration in the PhotoRobot showroom so you can see it in action. This way, there are no unexpected surprises when you begin your own content production. You can demo everything in-person, or see the live test via video conference. ## Installation & User Training In the end, if the studio configuration is right for your business, PhotoRobot transfers the technology to you. We install all equipment on-site, provide user-training, and help you get your content production running. This usually takes only a few days to a week for the entire process. Then, with clearly defined benchmarks, your business can begin content production. All the while, you can expect the same results as we tested in the demo. PhotoRobot experts are also now at your disposal to integrate any new ideas you may have into your studio workflow. This is the PhotoRobot mission: providing studios with comprehensive, tried-and-tested solutions. We aim to build automation around your business, and demonstrate its worth long before you make any commitment. ### The Bottomline While other studio automation providers might promise the “simplest, fastest” solution on the market, PhotoRobot demonstrates its worth. Customers know exactly how much output they can expect, and have direct access to developers for the latest innovations. Modular solutions also ensure studios can adapt to any demands, and integrate with the latest technologies. Ready to learn more? Contact us to see if PhotoRobot one-click content production might be the right level of studio automation for your business. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography # SECTION: blog > 360-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2022-10-12 --- # 360° Product Photography - Content Formats and Production Discover 360° Product Photography, from different formats of 360s to automated photography equipment, software, workflows and content production. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots, Software ## What is 360° Product Photography? [360° product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery) (also **360° spin**, **spin photography**, or **360° packshot photography**) appears mainly on webshops and e-commerce product pages. Widely popular across online marketplaces like Amazon and various social media shopping platforms, 360° content aims to capture consumer attention. Through more interactive product experiences, 360° photography engages in a way flat lay or still life photography simply cannot. 360° imagery allows brands to showcase multiple angles of a product, giving shoppers more information to make confident purchases. Typically, 360° content comes from stitching together a row of single product photos at specific angles around an object. The result is an interactive, 360-degree product experience (a **360** or **spin**) that shows an object in rotation. There are various types of 360s: from single- to multi-row spins, time-lapse animations, product videos, and virtual product demos. Some display a product in continuous rotation at the click of a mouse, while others allow for interactive click-and-drag control. In this guide, we’ll zoom into the types of 360 product content while sharing how to make each. Read on for a closer view of the industry, including today’s solutions, equipment, and software for 360° product photography. ## Why invest in 360° product visualization? Leading brands often use a combination of 360° product imagery, animations and product videos to sell products online. Visually-rich product experiences are a way to bridge the gaps between in-person and virtual shopping. They help consumers better visualize and become familiar with products without having to physically inspect them in-store. Along with consumer-value, the benefits of utilizing 360° product photography are many: - **enhanced buyer’s confidence** – 360° visuals lead to more [informed purchases](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photos). They allow shoppers to better visualize information like shape, size, material, or features that may otherwise go unnoticed. The gap between the imagery and reality is minimal, helping consumers to make a decision with all available information. - **more e-commerce conversions** – 360-degree product experiences can also generate more [website traffic](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/boost-conversion-rates-in-e-commerce), on-page time, and higher SEO, which in result means conversions. That is, if your product visuals are both engaging and answering all of those shoppers’ questions. - **reduced overall returns** – the more informed consumers are about products, the less likely they are to return them. 360 spins and [360 packshots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) eliminate much of the guesswork to online shopping. - **stronger brand image** – the more satisfied customers, the more they shop again, give referrals, spread word-of-mouth and overall boost brand image. ## Key terminology: Stills, 360s, 3D spins and 3D models To avoid any confusion, let’s clarify some key terms in the industry. In general, common terms in 360° content production include the following. - [**Still images**](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image) (also **stills**) are individual photos from specific angles (frames) around an object. Usually, a 360-degree product spin will consist of 36 still images at 10-degree intervals stitched together with special software. - [**360s**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography) (also **360 spins**, **spins**, or **360° packshots**) often refer to standard, single-row spins. A row is the angle of camera elevation for each frame, and is usually at 10° elevation. - [**3D spins**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-product-photography-ecommerce) (also **multi-row spins**, or **hemispherical / spherical spins**) consist of two or more rows of still images. While the first row is usually at 10 degrees, subsequent rows capture several vertical angles. The result is a 3D product experience, with both a horizontal and vertical viewing axis. - [**3D models**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce) stitch together a series of photos using photogrammetry scanning and special software. Creating 3D models usually requires at least 2 rows of 36 frames around a product. Photogrammetry software then composites images into a 3D model for hosting on 3D product viewers or [3D product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce). ## What are the different types of 360° product spins? Since 360° product photography emerged in ecommerce, it has developed into a wide range of formats. What began as non-interactive 360s has now become a range of interactive experiences. There are **360 deep zoom spins**, **3D spins** (multi-row, **hemispherical / spherical spins**), **product animations**, **virtual product demos** and **3D models**. Below we’ll look closer at the different types of 360° product photography, and how product photographers capture each. ## Traditional non-interactive 360° animations Let’s start where it all began: the more traditional, non-interactive e-commerce product spins. Most commonly in GIF format, these animations remain in popular use for social media product marketing and email campaigns. GIF 360° animations display a product from all angles and in continuous rotation. Businesses embed GIFs as a single image file on a product page or in email. These animations are compatible with the vast majority of web browsers, email platforms, and most of today’s product viewer technology. However, this format does have its limitations: - **Image quality** – GIFs have lower image quality (limited to 256 colors, 8-bit), whereas other formats provide 16M+ colors. Thus, optimizing 24-bit images as 8-bit GIFs can subtract colors from the original image. - **File size** – File sizes are much larger in comparison, and are not easy to compress. - **Consumer engagement** – Without interactive features like movement control or zoom, GIF animations engage on a much lesser scale. ## Non-interactive 360° animations Alternatives to GIFs include newer animation file formats, although they are not standardized across all web browsers. APNG Animated WebP, for example, allows for better quality and smaller file size, but remains problematic for SEO. Instead, sellers commonly opt for MPEG-4/H.264 video using html5. This format, like GIF, translates across the majority of browsers, email clients and software. It also allows for more, albeit very limited levels of viewer control. Viewers can navigate the video timeline to control a product’s rotation, and also preview spins in full-screen. ## Interactive 360° spin photography 360 spins with interactive features enable control over the movement and rotation of product visuals. Often with zoom capabilities at the click of a mouse and “drag-to-rotate” mechanics, interactive 360s require special [product viewing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer). A custom script provides the additional spin functionalities (rotation, zoom, hotspots), and works to embed images into web pages. Consumers can then experiment on-page with products and inspect various hotspots and details at their own pace. ## Multi-row 3D photography **Multi-row spin photography** (also **hemispherical / spherical** or **3D product photography**) stitches together two or more rows of single product photos. While the first row is typically shot at 10° elevation, subsequent rows capture several vertical angles. For hemispherical spins, 2-3 additional rows provide a 360° horizontal view of the product with a 180° bottom-to-top view. Meanwhile, spherical 3D product photography stitches together single photos from 4 to 6 vertical rows. The result is a complete 360° product experience, with no limitation on the vertical or horizontal viewing axis. However, hemispherical / spherical product photography requires far more photos than traditional spins, as well as special photography equipment & software. For example, 3D photography often calls for optical-glass plate turntables, 3D camera tripods & mounts, and multi-camera systems. Usually, a standard spin will consist of 24 or 36 photos from even angles 360-degrees around the product. For 3D photography, multiply the number of photos by each additional row. If shooting *only* 3 rows of 36 photos, that’s 108 images to combine into a single image file. What this means is that image file sizes are significantly larger, calling for more sophisticated 3D image viewing technology. ## Two-axis 360° spins Next, **two-axis 360s** (also **double-** /**dual-axis 360° spins**) combine two separate 360-degree image files, one horizontal and one vertical. The result is similar to 3D product photography, although sacrificing on image quality for lower production times and smaller file sizes. However, due to the production times, double-axis spins don’t make sense for companies to produce. In fact, with special 3D photography equipment (like PhotoRobot’s), producing multi-row spins is easier, less time-consuming, and more efficient overall. ## Time-lapse product animations Another popular medium, time-lapse product animations enable viewers to see products with moving parts in motion. Sometimes also consisting of a 360° spin, animations are useful for showing off a wide range of items. Take for example household appliances, kitchenware, home decor, or furniture. Time-lapse animations can help consumers get familiar with all parts of a product, both inside and outside. ## Virtual product demos Virtual **product demos** (also 2D / 3D **product tours**) are increasingly popular both in e-commerce and for b2b sales presentations. A product demo usually stitches together 360° product photos, packshots and video into an interactive product viewing experience. The format is extremely useful for demonstrating technical products like hardware and machinery components. It often provides exploding views alongside annotations, as well as zoom-able hotspots to showcase key product features. ## Video clip animations 360° product video-clip animations are widely popular in fashion e-commerce. It does however require special studio equipment (like PhotoRobot’s [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk)) to shoot. Video animations can show for example a fashion model walking on a runway. Consumers can start, pause and rotate the model to see clothing in motion and to closely inspect fine details. It’s a way to really showcase elements like fabric, material & design, while also bringing more life to fashion & model photography. ## Photorealistic 3D models E-commerce 3D models are generated from multiple, overlapping photographs to create a photorealistic 3D rendering of an object. The process uses special photogrammetry scanning software to record, measure and interpret imagery to create a digital model. Shooting is similar to taking multi-row 3D spins, calling for photos from at least 2 vertical rows. Each row will also tend to consist of 36 or more frames. These photos the software then runs through photogrammetry algorithms to generate the 3D model. 3D modeling is often deployed for online [product configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/advantages-product-configurators) software, [AR product viewing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce), and B2B product demos. Any products that are either highly customizable, difficult to transport, or extremely technical in nature might benefit from these experiences. Among other functions, they enable *on-the-fly* product customization for product lines such as clothing and footwear. 3D modeling might also serve to project furniture or heavy machinery into an AR (augmented reality) space. 3D models can show moving parts in motion, and include annotations, hotspots or exploding views to better inform their audiences. ## Which products benefit most from 360° images? In comparison to traditional flat lay and 2D product photography, producing 360° or 3D imagery takes time & resources. From investing in the photography equipment and software, to production and post-processing teams, costs are no doubt higher. So how do you know if your product would benefit from a 360° or 3D viewing experience? Usually, the answer depends as much on the consumer as it does the product. Ask yourself: - **Do customers need to visualize the shape of the product?** Take for example a carpet or rug in comparison to footwear and fashion products. Can customers get familiar with the product in only a few packshots? If the product looks flat and lifeless in photos, consider 360° or 3D photography. - **Is it a product that consumers really need to inspect in-hand?** Think of a lady’s handbag or a designer wristwatch. Shoppers want to really inspect products like these, often considering every centimeter of material and design. - **Are there any selling points missing?** Perhaps there’s an engraving along the inner band of an engagement ring, or other partially hidden features of a product. In these cases, 360° spins with Deep Zoom technology or 3D photography can be worth the effort. ## Adding the third dimension to complex products For the most part, any three-dimensional product can benefit from 360° product photography and 3D viewing experiences. However, some products are more suitable candidates than others. After all, 360 / 3D photography requires more time and resources to produce in comparison to capturing a few packshots. It also depends on the product, and how much additional value exists in presenting it in 360 degrees. Take for example more expensive purchases like dirt bikes, motorcycles, or quads. Products like these are highly technical, consisting of many mechanical & design elements to inspect. In these cases, hemispherical and spherical product experiences can provide the level of information consumers demand. Multi-row 3D spins convey shape & definition in a way that simply cannot be matched by a set of still images. ## Showcasing material and texture Another popular use case for 360s, animations & 3D photos is to more accurately present material & texture online. Take for example fashion products like stylish clothing, apparel & accessories. From leather to suede, handbags to designer sunglasses & watches, a 360 view can capture details similar to the in-store experience. It can showcase how light reflects off glossy material, or zoom into gemstones, diamonds and other unique design features. Truly, any product that shoppers would want to closely examine in-store or by touch can benefit from a 360 view. This also includes items like furniture & home decor, gadgets & electronics, or anything with material that’s difficult to show in 2D. Overall, the goal is to help shoppers get a real hands-on *feel* for items often purchased in-person. ## Demonstrating technical products Other items like machinery components, tools, appliances, and gadgets call for more advanced viewing experiences. In some cases, a 360° view can suffice, whereas highly technical products might benefit more from immersive product demos. Product demos may consist of configurable 3D models, product animations, or product tours with exploding views and annotations. Take for example an automobile engine or spare motorcycle parts. A product tour will not only show every important angle of the machinery. It can demonstrate moving parts in action, or zoom into hidden mechanical elements & electronic components. This information is often vital for consumers to make an informed decision. Think of a mechanic or technician determining the correct component or spare part to buy. Thus, in general, the more technical the product, the more it benefits from a more advanced product viewing experience. ## How to produce 360° product content? Now, how do you produce 360° product content? For one, you have to produce content either in-house with suitable [studio equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography), or hire a product photography studio. However you produce it, you’ll want to prioritize areas like: 1. **Image Quality** – 360° product imagery requires high-quality, high resolution photos to produce. You also need many photos, as well as the time and resources for production. 2. **The Budget** – Professional, in-house product photography equipment and software can stretch the budget. Consider if in-house or hiring out is the best option. Also, decide on the types of 360° product content you want to produce, whether 360s or in 3D. 3. **Product viewing technology** – For any 360° product experience, find a product viewer suitable to host the content on your website. Product viewers need responsive design for viewing on both mobile or desktop. They should also be optimized for SEO, from page-loading times to the interactive viewing experience. 4. **The Workflow** – Finally, consider workflow, whether it’s in-house or a product photography company. Plan for aspects such as product styling, or post-production workflows like photo editing, file naming conventions, or review & publishing. ## Where to find a quality 360° product viewer A **360° product viewer** (also **360° object viewer** or **spin viewer**) enables users to embed 360° spins on a website. Take for example PhotoRobot's [Product Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer). With this software, it’s easy to embed a 360° spin on any web or product page. As soon as images are uploaded in the software, copying and pasting an embeddable Javascript allows for immediate image hosting. The script enables 360-degree presentation, optimizes file sizes, allows for zoom and for full-resolution downloads. Meanwhile, the product viewer also has customizable animation parameters, image compression, and automatic publishing. It enables immersive interaction, lazy loading, and comes with a range of SEO benefits. Beyond these, with unlimited view count and data transfer, users pay for only the data storage they consume. ## Examples of high-quality 360° imagery Now, what makes a 360 a “good” 360? For one, it should effectively do its job of conveying information about a product’s shape, texture and features. To do this, not only do photographers need to capture a product in the right light. They also have to find the best angles, and the right camera settings for high-quality imagery. Then, there’s finding the best 360° product viewer to host spins on a website or e-shop. A good product viewer will provide high resolution imagery that is SEO-friendly and easy to host online. Like PhotoRobot’s Product Viewer, 360° viewing software should also provide responsive design for a smooth mobile or browser viewing experience. Images should load quickly on product pages, with higher-frame images lazy-loaded (only activating on user interaction). Thus, it’s important product viewers have lazy and dynamic loading functions. Dynamic loading allows for immediate interaction with images preloaded in the background. Meanwhile, lazy loading prevents larger image files from slowing down page load times, and harming overall page performance. ## 360° product content production workflow Next, how is 360° product content produced? Whether it’s professional product photography studio services or in-house, the general workflow includes numerous stages. Certainly, these vary depending on factors like the photography equipment, software, the team, workload, products, etc. However, in general, the [360° product content workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow) includes: 1. **Product-in**: receiving items, verifying inventory, sorting products (weighing & measuring); 2. **Product prep**: observing [style guides](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide), setting the scene, hardware & software prep; 3. **Image capture**: the photoshoot; 4. **Post-production**: photo editing and retouching (background removal, image enhancements); 5. **Quality Control**: photo review & approval; 6. **Content Delivery**: file naming conventions, publishing to the web; 7. **Product Return**: ensuring items only leave the studio after all images are captured. Each stage of 360° product content production entails various responsibilities. Teams need to decide on who is responsible for editing or retouching, whether internal or external. They also need to determine quality control workflows, as well as how content is delivered to the web. There are file naming conventions to consider, and overall organization of production processes. Often, these processes benefit from complete automation thanks to product photography automation software. In fact, automation software (like PhotoRobot_Controls) can streamline nearly all studio workflows & processes, but more on this later. ## Does my business need 360° product content? Businesses need to consider whether to hire a professional product photography studio or produce content in-house. Obviously, if doing in-house product photography, initial costs will be steeper than hiring a studio for only a few 360s. However, over time, return on investment can also grow dramatically with the right in-house photography equipment & automation software. The ROI becomes even more significant with higher volumes of products to photograph. ## Costs for 360° product content services If hiring out, costs vary widely from project to project. Prices for a single 360 spin can depend on many factors. These are: - **The product**. Will a standard photography turntable work, or will the product wobble or require special prep? You might need equipment and accessories for product staging, which brings up the price, whether hiring out or doing it in-house. - **Volume**. How many products do you need to shoot? Is it only a few packshot 360s, or do you have a wider line of products to photograph? The more, the higher the cost. - **Logistics.** How difficult will transport be? Do you need special handling insurance, or a larger studio space? Think product photography of automobiles and heavy machinery. The more difficult the logistics, the higher the price. - **Types of product photography**. Do you need to photograph products in 3D? Product photography service prices will vary depending on the required equipment, time, and editing. - **Image resolution & overall quality**. Images must showcase all features and details that make your product unique, while conveying product shape, size, and texture. - **Licensing**. Is all of the imagery yours to use, or are you only licensed to use the 360? If purchasing a gallery of still images alongside your spin, the service might cost more. ## How product photography services provide spins When purchasing 360° photography services, it’s necessary to decide on content delivery. In which format should the business deliver the 360s? - **Do you have your own 360 product viewer?** If yes, the content provider can deliver single image files for upload into your viewer. In this way, you have complete control over quality and choice in product viewing technology. - **Is it a complete solution you need, including the viewer?** Content suppliers can deliver a folder of image files along with the 360° viewer embedding script. However, keep in mind, this prevents you from using other product viewing technology. It’s always recommended to instead research and choose a viewer you’ll use across all channels. - **Does your e-shop have a 360° viewer plug-in?** Some e-shopping platforms support special plugins to host 360s. These enable providers to upload spins directly to a webshop. However, on most platforms, HTML code works fine. In fact, nowadays, usually there is no need for special plug-ins. - **Do you need a 360° hosting service?** Take for example PhotoRobot’s special image CDN (Content Delivery Network). Cloud-based processing enables image scaling in real-time and with pixel perfect resolution for any end user device. All files are easily organized, searchable and secure within a digital asset management system, with JPEG, PNG and WebP supported. ## Automated 360-degree photo studios The higher the volume of products to photograph, the more likely businesses are to consider in-house solutions for automated product photography. These consist of software-driven machines & automation. They integrate photography devices, cameras, lights, image capture and post-processing functions. Among other equipment, a fully automated 360° photo studio often consists of a motorized, rotary photography turntable. It will also have a camera tripod / mount, and likely a robotic camera arm to automate camera elevation. Control software then automates many processes, from product rotation on a turntable, to triggering strobes & cameras. Editing operations can be automatic with reusable settings, or allow for manual editing and retouching of photos and videos. Software features usually also include tools for quality assurance, review & automatic publishing. They can automate file naming and much more. An automated 360-degree photo studio dramatically simplifies the production of 360° spins and multi-row 3D photos. It also makes creating still image galleries, packshots, GS1 imagery, and product videos possible in a single process. With multi-camera systems, usually all it takes is a single rotation of the turntable to capture everything. In fact, with PhotoRobot, it often takes under a minute to produce 360s alongside stills, packshots, and GS1 photos. ## What do you need for in-house production? Now, the cost of an in-house, automated product photography studio varies from business to business. Calculating the total investment must account for areas such as logistics, labor, equipment & installation, training, floorspace, and scalability. There are also many product photography installations for different industries, from fashion to furniture, jewelry, industrial or automotive. What combination of hardware is necessary thus depends on the product line, from volume and size to shape & weight. ## Standard 360 photography equipment Usually, at the heart of any setup, there is a motorized **photography turntable**. Then, there is the **camera**, **tripod**, **lights**, and **backdrop**. The size of the turntable will depend on the type of products, from size and shape to weight. For example, PhotoRobot manufactures a long line of different turntables for positioning all sizes and types of products. Combine any PhotoRobot motorized turntable with additional robots like the **Robotic Camera Arm** or the **Multi-Cam**. These automate camera elevation & image capture, while the Multi-Cam allows for the quick capture of multi-row 3D photography. Other equipment you might find in an automated studio include solutions for **mannequin photography**, and **product staging devices**. Take for example PhotoRobot’s Cube. It provides a system for quick mannequin exchange, or it can be installed upside-down above a turntable in suspension mode. This mode makes it easy to partly or wholly suspend objects in air, and to synchronize product and turntable rotation. ## Automation software On top of the equipment, automation software paves the way for complete automation of content production and digital asset management. A comprehensive suite of software (like PhotoRobot’s) will integrate control of equipment, cameras, lighting, post-processing, review processes and publishing. With PhotoRobot’s **automatic object centering**, **cropping**, **scaling**, **background removal** and more, usually product photos are web-ready immediately after capture. Users can configure as well as **save and reuse settings** to automate editing parameters and style guides. This can include the automation of editing across entire still image galleries, 360s, 3D photos and videos. From product-in, to production, publishing and product-out, PhotoRobot software aims to improve all studio workflows and strengthen communication across teams. Other valuable features include **automatic file naming**, tools for **content sharing, file delivery** and **inventory tracking**. Combine these with PhotoRobot’s integrated **image hosting & SpinViewer** for a global**CDN** with **real-time image scaling** and pixel-perfect resolution. ## User-knowledge The next component necessary for an automated studio is a team well-equipped with enough knowledge for the job. This begins with a professional studio photographer capable of operating the equipment and software. Special knowledge as well as training will be necessary, although how much depends on the system’s complexity (or simplicity). PhotoRobot for example delivers a solution that even amateur photographers can learn to operate. It is necessary to learn both hardware and software operations, but usually all this takes is a few days’ training. ## Available space Finally, your studio needs available space for the machine and for a photographer to freely walk around it. There should also be room for a workstation, including the computer and connections to electricity and a network. Then, how much space is necessary will vary depending on the selected hardware for the photoshoots. Some 360 photography devices can fit nicely and neatly into any available space, like the corner of a small webshop. Others solutions call for installation on a larger showroom floor, or, for example, in a warehouse space. Wherever the location, climate control is important, and you also want a dust-free environment. This will ensure products remain in pristine condition, and in general ensure hassle-free product preparation. ## The PhotoRobot in-house 360° photo studio Now, what equipment do you need to build a PhotoRobot in-house 360° Photo studio? Let’s begin with the lights, cameras, and camera lenses. - **Photography lights** – PhotoRobot compatible light systems include two types of lights: [FOMEI](https://www.fomei.com/en/products-studio-strobes-37499) and [Broncolor](https://broncolor.swiss/) strobes, or any LED lights with DMX support. Software integrates control over studio light groups, and automation of flash or constant lighting. - **Cameras** – [Connectible cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras) include DSLR or mirrorless Canon camera models. The software provides remote camera capture and settings control over one or multiple cameras. Usually, a Canon between 20 - 30 megapixels is sufficient. If using constant lighting, exposure simulation in LiveView is also useful. - **An appropriate camera lens** – For micro products like jewelry, a [macro lens](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography) is necessary in the studio. However, when shooting most larger products, all you need is a lens capable of keeping the product in frame. Usually, a zoom lens with 40 - 100mm focal length accomplishes this. Next, you need a **360° photography device** like a **motorized turntable** (or rotating mannequin). Then, there is the camera **tripod / stand** with **camera head**, and a **workstation**. There will also be a lighting **backdrop**, and sometimes accessories & product staging features for 360° photos. ## 360° turntables, camera systems & software control If doing turntable photography, you’ll need an appropriate size 360° turntable. These work standalone or in combination with other photography robots, like a robotic camera arm or a multi-camera system. - **Motorized 360° turntable** – For [360° turntable photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography), there are a range of different size rotary turntables. These consist of smaller mobile turntables, larger turntable installations, and turntables with optical glass plates for 3D photography. - **Backdrop** – Some PhotoRobot devices integrate a white diffusion cloth backdrop into the system. These make it easy to photograph products on a white background, or to automate background removal for a transparent background. - **Robotic camera arm** or**multi-camera system** – For maximum precision and freedom of movement, the [Robotic Camera Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) or the [Multi-Cam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) work in combination with 360° turntables. Both act as a combo- tripod / stand with an integrated camera head to control one or multiple cameras in the studio. Use the Robotic Camera Arm for single-row 360 spin photography, or the Multi-Cam for quick multi-row 3D image capture. - **Software-driven workstation** – A single software-driven workspace computer (MacOS or Windows) provides control over all equipment, cameras, lights and production processes. ## How to produce 360° content with PhotoRobot Among many factors, a 360° content production process will vary depending on the studio setup and the type of product. From footwear to sunglasses, furniture or automobiles, each product category calls for a different approach, and for different photography kits. Nonetheless, there are stages of production that in general apply to all 360° content production with PhotoRobot. ## 1 - Create a workspace Within PhotoRobot Control software, a [workspace](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/setting-up-workspace) is a list of hardware that will be in use for a specific photoshoot. It connects via one software interface all photography modules, cameras, lights, and other accessories. Users can activate Fast Shot mode for image capture during non-stop turntable rotation, configure lasers & lights, and add cameras. ## 2 - Start a project After configuring a workspace, a **project** will include items from a single photoshoot or perhaps a single shooting day/week. Projects are the highest level data entry, consisting of one or more **items** (photographs of a specific product). Within each item, there are one or more **folders** to organize different types of imagery (e.g. spins, stills, video). To begin shooting, you must first add a new project (unless one already exists), as well as at least one item. ## 3 - Add a spins folder When creating a spin folder, the software automatically adds frames according to how many images per spin you select. The default number of frames is 36. With a higher number of frames, the rotation becomes smoother, although resulting spins require more storage space. ## 4 - Style the product (product prep) From here, it’s important the product is in pristine condition from all sides that will show in photos. This includes for example the soles of a shoe if photographing from the bottom for 3D spins. Look for any dust or blemishes on the material, using a brush or compressed air to clean the product. Also keep in mind product staging (e.g. how the product will be positioned). Usually, the stylist will decide on product staging based on the type of product, a style guide, and expected outputs. Among other factors, the style guide will dictate how many images to take, which angles to capture, camera and light settings, and post-processing parameters. Make sure to style the product accordingly, taking into account your brand style guide and desired results. ## 5 - Set the scene (product positioning) After styling, place the product on the plate of a PhotoRobot 360° turntable. This is easy thanks to PhotoRobot features for precise object positioning. For example, both motorized turntables and robotic camera arms feature laser-guided positioning to easily locate the absolute center of rotation. They also make aligning the camera arm and the table simple. In addition to this, PhotoRobot systems provide numerous features for product staging. Does the product need to be partly or wholly suspended in air, like the straps of a handbag? Consider using nylon strings, or combining your turntable with a product suspension device like PhotoRobot’s Cube. The Cube’s top portal can also carry various holders, such as for pins, sockets, uni-clamps or heavy-duty clamps. Use these to hold spotlights, reflection boards, or other photography jigs to set the scene. Finally, be sure to check the turntable, just as you did the product, for any dust or unsightly blemishes. Also be on the lookout for any smudges or fingerprints if using a glass-plate turntable. ## 6 - Adjust product lighting In the software interface, users can assign individual light positions, select predefined positions, or create a custom position. Generally, light positions will include **product left / product right**, and **background top / background bottom**. Be sure the product–left and product-right light groups illuminate the product in a natural light. It shouldn’t be too dark, nor too bright. It’s important the lighting exposes texture and makes the product look its best in photos. Software control allows users to adjust lighting, or switch lights on or off via a power button. Use this for example when doing freemask background removal. In this approach, it’s necessary to switch off the front light to take a mask image. Beyond adjusting intensity, some DMX-controlled lights also provide control over color temperature. Users can then save all light groups and light settings in the software for future automation. Software Presets allow users to create and save settings for machinery, cameras, lights, and post-processing. Each of these we can then automate for individual photoshoots, or across entire batches of similar types of products. ## 7 - Set background lighting Next, set the background lighting to achieve a pristine white background. In the software, choose the background light groups, and adjust intensity to illuminate the background from behind. The software will automate background removal after capture, creating either a white or transparent background according to user settings. ## 8 - Check composure and focus In the capture mode interface, the most central element is the preview window. This displays either the currently selected image (if one has been taken), or the Live View from the Camera. Live View is particularly useful for checking composure and focus before taking photos. ## 9 - Take a test shot Before taking final images, it’s always a good idea to take one or more test shots. Do this either from the interface or via keyboard shortcut (press “T”). This helps users test settings of lights, cameras, and hardware before the capture sequence. All test images go to a folder for test shots, which users can access immediately after capture. ## 10 - Capture a 360 spinset At this point, all that remains is pressing the “Play” button on the software. Press Play and the photography sequence begins. Additionally, users can begin the sequence via keyboard shortcut (space bar), or by scanning a special “Start” barcode. When the sequence completes, all thumbnails within the item will fill with images of individual frames. ## 11 - Post-processing images After image capture, use Edit mode in the software interface to access [post-processing tools](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images). These provide a long line of editing operations, like automatic cropping and object centering. Object centering is particularly important for 360 spins. Even though most PhotoRobot machines provide laser positioning, some 360s will need additional software centering. This process is automatic by default, although there is also manual control. Other useful post-processing automation tools include semi-automatic background removal (by level, by flood, or freemask). Use these operations to adjust the background of an image, or to completely remove it. Achieve different results by selecting the level, flood, or freemask method. Keep in mind that how well the software performs background removal depends mainly on how the scene is lit. Sometimes, it will be necessary to experiment with light settings and reshoot frames before achieving satisfactory results. In the end, users can save their unique settings for each editing operation as a Preset to reuse in future photoshoots. Apply operations across entire folders, or select individual images to apply edits by setting Scopes in the software. Configuring scopes allows for per-picture edits, specific swing angle edits, or editing the entire folder spin. ## 12 - 360° spin creation, review & publishing Immediately after image capture, your spin folder will begin filling up with images for each individual frame. The software post-processes each one according to user settings, and then stitches together final images to produce a 360° spin. In fact, usually these spins come out web-ready without any need for additional or manual retouching. Users can work with images locally or in the cloud, now with broader unification of the local and cloud apps. Get everything on a single page, including info about photos, comments, or additional details & instructions. Additionally, software workflow statuses enable more effective communication & workflows across teams. Set status levels to assign tasks, communicate progress, and approve or reject work at stages. Also, Retouch Access controls make it easy to clearly communicate and share tasks with external retouchers. Simply attach instructions in comments before sharing files to the responsible retoucher as “Ready to Retouch”. Retouchers can then access, download, and work on files from anywhere in the world, and then quickly upload final results. After upload, the software automatically sets files as “Retouch Done”. A project manager or client can then approve or reject changes, and choose to immediately publish images online. ## How to produce 3D (multi-row) product content To produce multi-row 3D spins (hemispherical or spherical), more complex equipment, prep, and camera setup is necessary. For the most part, this is because of the additional time that goes into photographing multiple rows around a product. With single row 360° spins, a robotic camera arm paired with PhotoRobot’s non-stop Fast Spin mode more than does the trick. However, if shooting 4 or 5 rows at different elevation, a **multi-camera rig** dramatically reduces production times. These devices (like PhotoRobot’s Multi-Cam) support cameras at each vertical angle to photograph multiple rows simultaneously. They connect to motorized turntables like the Centerless Table, with software providing [remote camera control](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/canon-eos-digital-sdk) and complete system integration. Operators will have to adjust settings for each individual row, although this is quickly managed in the software. Users can adjust settings for lighting, camera capture, or camera & editing parameters, and apply unique settings to each row. PhotoRobot equipment and software then manages the rest on command, automating photography sequences and post-processing to produce the 3D spin. In fact, usually in under a minute, PhotoRobot produces post-processed, web-ready results we can publish online immediately. ## Choosing 360° spins vs 3D content production When deciding whether you need single row 360° spins or 3D spins, firstly consider the product. Is there any benefit to showing it in 3D that justifies the additional time (and costs) for production? Usually, it’s the more complex and technical products that benefit the most from 3D photography. However, it may also be clothing & apparel, or products like footwear. Really, anything that consumers need to view from all sides and top-to-bottom might call for 3D photos. For more simple products, one row is usually enough to create a lifelike impression of an object. While these spins only move left and right on a horizontal axis, this can be more than enough for consumers. Think of a 36-frame spin of a pair of sunglasses. Combine that with a hero shot and few marketing angles on a product page, and your job is complete. Now, it is important to consider costs and production workflow, whether doing it in-house or outsourcing. In general, 3D product content will cost more to produce than single-row 360s. It will also require more time, effort, and equipment. Always keep this in mind, especially if outsourcing, as costs and time-to-web vary from one provider to the next. ## The bottomline Single-row 360° product photography and multi-row 3D photography call for either in-house solutions or hiring a professional product photography studio. Among other factors, costs vary depending on the complexity of the photos, equipment necessary, and post-processing needs. There are also volumes, logistics and workflows to consider, as well as user training if doing production in-house. Nonetheless, with the many solutions available today, 360° content production can be cost-efficient and planned around a budget. Look for a solution that best meets your consumers’ needs, as well as those of your business. There is a wide range of in-house 360° product photography equipment for projects of any scale or size. That, or professional product photography studios with the right tools for the job. Just keep in mind that outsourcing comes with many additional costs, and, with more volume, less ROI than in-house photography. ## PhotoRobot-Powered 360 Product Photography Ultimately, PhotoRobot aims to enable simple & cost-efficient 360° product photography, and overall improved online product experiences. 16 cutting-edge robots provide a solution for any type of product photography and 24/7 operations – large or small. Meanwhile, a unique, real-time operating system with cloud-based workflow and high-level automation drives each device. Our suite of automation software manages studio workflows, digital asset management, and image hosting. Further, automatic image capture and post processing tools are easy to integrate with 3rd party software for maximum productivity. To learn more, browse our line of photography robots to see if a solution might fit your business needs. We have hardware for photographing products as small as a microchip to as large as automobiles and heavy machinery. Some are compact and easily transportable, while others can compliment studio, warehouse, or showroom floors. Have a look yourself, and let us know if PhotoRobot might be able to meet your 360° product photography needs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce # SECTION: blog > 3d-ecommerce # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2022-09-14 --- # 3D eCommerce - What is it, Why it Matters, and Production 3D eCommerce uses 3D modeling to create an advanced product viewing experience. Read on to find out exactly what it is, and how to produce 3D models in-house. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots, Software ## What is 3D eCommerce? A Business Guide to 3D Modeling 3D eCommerce deploys 3D modeling for online product visualization, product configuration, and VR / AR to bolster digital marketing and sales. Sometimes also called **3D commerce**, **3D modeling commerce**, or **immersive commerce**, 3D formats offer more informative and visual [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography). Meanwhile, brands and retailers use it to generate higher customer engagement, better conversion rates, larger average orders, and reduced returns. In this guide, we’ll cover the basics of 3D eCommerce, key terminology, best practices and 3D model production. We’ll answer: - What’s the difference between 360 spins, 3D photos, and 3D models - What is 3D eCommerce, why it matters, and how to produce it - How businesses can adopt 3D modeling technology - Which benefits do eCommerce 3D models provide - How does 3D modeling work in VR vs AR - What equipment and software do businesses need for 3D modeling - How to use 3D model hosting platforms - How to measure 3D eCommerce performance Read on to learn more, including how to adopt 3D eCommerce technology to develop your business and overall product experience. ## Terminology: 360s vs 3D photos vs eCommerce 3D models Let’s not confuse 3D eCommerce with [360 spin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), or 3D product photos. To clarify: - **Single-row 360 spins** (also **360s**, **spins**, or **360° packshots**) refer to standard, single-row spin photography. A row is the angle elevation, usually at 10°, or another product configuration, e.g. a car with open or closed doors. Single-row spins provide online product visualization only on the horizontal axis. - **Multi-row 360 spins** (also **multi-row spins**, **3D spins**, or **hemispherical / spherical spins**) consist of two or more rows of still images. Due to the terminology, 3D spins might be confused with 3D models. However, a 3D spin is only a spin with an additional vertical viewing axis or a product’s configuration. - **3D eCommerce (3D modeling)** requires special photogrammetry scanning techniques and software to generate a digital product model. These usually call for at least 36 photos around a product, and shots from two or more rows of elevation. The software composites photos into a digital model for use with 3D product viewers, product configurators, and AR / VR. This is what we mean by 3D ecommerce. ## Examples of 3D eCommerce applications 3D modeling in eCommerce has evolved along with a wide range of use cases. Some common examples of today’s applications for 3D modeling include: - [Online, on-the-fly customization](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce) and configuration of highly customizable products - Product demos of complex or technical products with exploding views and annotations - Presentation of moving parts, unique design features, and interior components - [Projecting products into a virtual space](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing) via AR / VR, for example furniture or machinery - Virtually trying on fashion products like footwear and clothing - Configurable B2B sales presentations and digital product showrooms - Multimedia and video gaming experiences - [AR Shopping Apps](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-shopping-apps-2020) and Metaverse shopping These applications allow shoppers to browse virtual catalogs, and to see virtual previews of product features. They also provide the ability to run product simulations, and overall create a more informative and immersive product experience. ## How does 3D modeling for eCommerce work? In order to produce 3D eCommerce content, it all begins with 3D modeling. 3D modeling enables us to create an accurate, photorealistic representation of an object, which consumers can view digitally. Getting started calls for special scanning or [photography studio equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) and software to render a 3D model. However, there are three main approaches to 3D modeling: - **3D scanning.** By using a 3D scanner, it’s possible to bounce light off an object to gather data about its size and shape. This data becomes points and shapes on a mathematical coordinate system to generate a 3D model of the object. - **Photogrammetry.** This technique uses a digital camera to capture multiple angles of an object. Photogrammetry software then stitches photos together into points and shapes on a coordinate system to create a 3D model. - **3D design.** Here, a graphic designer creates a 3D model from scratch, using special software and working with product descriptions and images. Businesses host 3D models online with a 3D product viewer, or with VR / AR technology. 3D viewers enable both web and mobile viewing. VR can simulate the physical experience of a product. Meanwhile, AR uses smartphone / tablet cameras and displays to project objects into a virtual space. ## Photogrammetry in 3D eCommerce In eCommerce nowadays, and at PhotoRobot, we support our automated photography equipment with the photogrammetry scanning technique. Most recently, we experimented with [Apple Object Capture](https://developer.apple.com/augmented-reality/object-capture/) to make a simple [3D model from photographs](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) in under a few minutes. Other popular solutions today include [RealityCapture](https://www.capturingreality.com/), Adobe’s [Substance 3D Painter](https://www.adobe.com/products/substance3d-painter.html), and [Blender](https://www.blender.org/) (a free open source software). You might also be familiar with Alice Vision’s [Meshroom](https://alicevision.org/#). In fact, Meshrom’s open source photogrammetry software has helped advance the software to what we know today. They also provide an apt definition of photogrammetry technology. *“Photogrammetry is the science of making measurements from photographs. It infers the geometry of a scene from a set of unordered photographs or videos. Photography is the projection of a 3D scene onto a 2D plane, losing depth information. The goal of photogrammetry is to reverse this process. The dense modeling of the scene is the result yielded by chaining two computer vision-based pipelines: “Structure-from-Motion” (SfM) and “Multi View Stereo” (MVS).”* In other words, photogrammetry involves obtaining reliable information about a physical object via recording, measuring, and interpreting imagery. We then use this information to replicate the object in the form of a digital 3D model. ## Business benefits of 3D modeling Using 3D product content in eCommerce provides brands and retailers a wealth of benefits. Among these, some of the most prominent include the following. - Global retail B2C e-commerce is projected to grow 1% annually to account for [22% of global sales](https://www.trade.gov/ecommerce-sales-size-forecast) by 2024. As eCommerce grows, so does the technology driving multimedia marketing and sales, making 3D content ever more vital to compete. - Adding the third dimension to product experiences more closely replicates the real-life, in-store shopping experience. 3D models generate greater consumer interaction, drive conversions, and reduce overall product returns. - 3D modeling allows businesses to visually pitch products to clients and investors, even if products aren’t on the market yet. It enables consumers to realistically conceptualize product design, and to run test simulations on products. - The adoption of 5G with its accelerated connectivity will enable smoother, high-speed 3D, AR and VR experiences. Advances in these technologies will also mean they become more accessible and affordable for businesses. ## Augmented reality in 3D eCommerce The use cases for [AR in e-commerce and retail](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce) are numerous. Shoppers can now use their mobile phones to virtually try on clothes or footwear. They can project furniture into a virtual space to see how it fits and if it suits their home. Brick-and-mortar stores even use AR to help shoppers compare prices or learn more about products on shelves. Further, AR shopping apps make the customer both the content consumer and the content creator. They give users the ability to personally interact with, customize, and personalize products both online and offline. Consumers can customize colors, sizes, styles and designs, however and wherever they wish. AR provides an immersive product experience, from rotation and zoom to exploding views, annotations, and animations of moving parts. It can demonstrate complex items, as well as large or heavy products that otherwise would be difficult to transport. Take for example refrigerators or heavy-duty automotive parts. AR can transport items like these directly to consumers, clients or investors to experiment with, and see how they operate. ## How to start 3D modeling in-house To begin creating 3D models in-house, special [3D product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) and 3D modeling software is necessary. Usually, this includes a special product photography turntable with an optical glass plate for 3D photography. Many businesses also deploy a robotic camera arm or multi-camera rig to automate camera elevation and achieve consistent image capture. Devices (like [PhotoRobot’s Frame](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame)) allow the camera and background to travel completely around the product, even under the glass. This provides shadow-free views from all sides and top-to-bottom that can be used to generate a 3D model. Studios also often combine turntables with the Multi-Cam to capture photos from 2 or more cameras. These dramatically reduce production times, allowing photographers to capture multiple rows of photos simultaneously. Software like PhotoRobot’s can then post-process images (automatically), and integrate with photogrammetry software. Photogrammetry algorithms measure, record, and interpret images to produce a photorealistic representation of the product. With software like Apple’s Object Capture, the 3D model is produced in USDZ file format. USDZ 3D models can be viewed in [AR Quick Look](https://developer.apple.com/documentation/arkit/previewing_a_model_with_ar_quick_look), or via [](https://modelviewer.dev/). 3D model files can then be embedded on any webpage using a 3D content viewer. Take for example Emersya, an end-to-end [3D & AR experience platform](https://emersya.com/en/home). ## Cameras, lenses, and lighting for 3D modeling The initial investment into 3D modeling will begin with an appropriate camera, a suitable lens, lighting, and a rotary turntable. Let’s look at the most popular choices when working with PhotoRobot in-house systems. - **Cameras** – [Connectible cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras) include DSLR or mirrorless Canon camera models. Control software enables remote camera capture, and settings control over one or numerous cameras. Usually, a camera between 20 - 30 megapixels is sufficient for 3D modeling. If using constant lighting, exposure simulation in LiveView is also useful. - **An appropriate camera lens** – For extremely small, complex products like jewelry, your photographer will need a [macro lens](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography). However, when shooting many larger products, a lens capable of keeping the product in frame is enough. Often, a zoom lens with 40 - 100mm focal length achieves this. - **Lighting setups** – PhotoRobot systems support two types of lights: [FOMEI](https://www.fomei.com/en/products-studio-strobes-37499) and [Broncolor](https://broncolor.swiss/) strobes, or any LED lights with DMX support. Users can command studio light groups, and automate flash or continuous lighting via software controls. ## 3D modeling turntables, equipment & software Now, the most important element to cost-effective, in-house 3D modeling will be the additional hardware, the software, and automation. - **Motorized 360° turntable** – For [360° turntable photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography), there are a range of different size rotary turntables. For 3D modeling, often the best choice of turntable is one with an optical glass plate. These allow for photographing both top-views of products, and bottom-views from underneath the glass plate. - **Backdrop** – Some PhotoRobot devices integrate a white diffusion cloth backdrop into the system. These make it easy to photograph products on a white background, and to automate background removal for a transparent background. - **Robotic camera arm** or**multi-camera system** – Photographers deploy either a [Robotic Camera Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) or the [Multi-Cam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) for automated camera elevation and movement. These act as a combo- tripod / stand with an integrated camera head to control cameras in the studio. They enable remote camera capture with high precision and smooth movement along a chosen trajectory. Both work in combination with 360° turntables and software for quick, 3D image capture. - **Software-driven workstation** – A single [software-driven](https://www.photorobot.com/software) workstation computer (MacOS or Windows) gives operators control over all equipment, cameras, lights and production processes. Watch a video demo of [PhotoRobot-powered 3D object modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo). ## Software and hosting platforms for 3D modeling Software like **Object Capture** and **RealityCapture** allow businesses to generate a 3D model from photos. Usually, this calls for a multi-row spin consisting of photos from at least 2 or more rows. Uploading these photos into 3D modeling software then renders a file which can be viewed as a 3D model. These can be embedded on webpages, or transformed into product configurators or AR / VR experiences with [3D content hosting platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/platforms-3d-product-photography). 3D hosting platforms such as **Emersya** can also use 3D models to generate a range of visual assets, whether 2D or 3D. The higher the quality of the 3D model, the higher the scalability. In fact, sometimes all you need is an individual photoset to produce hundreds of 2D / 3D visuals. The platform enables businesses to represent products in different colors, designs, patterns and formats, nearly eliminating logistical concerns. For companies with a wide stock of highly customizable products, 3D model hosting platforms can be extremely effective. A capable hosting platform will facilitate easily organized, accessible and deliverable content. It can provide a wealth of customizable, visible assets to deploy on demand, while saving on time, energy and costs. ## How to measure your 3D eCommerce performance Finally, with 3D product content online, it’s important to see how much return on investment you’re achieving, right? Your marketing teams will already deploy a range of tools to track performance. However, there are a few major KPIs to focus on to determine the overall efficiency of your 3D eCommerce strategy. - **Pre-sales marketing KPIs** revolve around website visits, accessed content, and time-on-page. These should lead to a measurable visitor-to-conversion rate, as well as the cost of acquisition. They will all shed insight into how well your 3D content campaigns are performing. - **Sales KPIs** account for sales volume, conversion rates, revenue per sale, average order size, and customer profiles. These along with average customer lifetime value amount to significant data points to analyze marketing efforts. - **Post-sale KPIs** measure areas such as product return rates, technical support costs, and Net Promoter Score. These KPIs provide key data on customer satisfaction and retention. They also serve to better monitor overall business costs in relation to your 3D eCommerce strategy. Tools to analyze KPI data include those for: web analytics, social media analytics, shopping eCommerce analytics, and AI business intelligence apps. ## Establish an effective 3D eCommerce strategy PhotoRobot is here for all of your 3D ecommerce needs, for businesses large or small. Whether it’s a small webshop or an industrial-scale photography warehouse, our solutions meet a wide range of needs and budgets. Simply reach out to discover if PhotoRobot can assist with your 3D ecommerce planning, strategy and production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-photo-studio-manufacturers # SECTION: blog > 360-photo-studio-manufacturers # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2022-08-30 --- # Photo Studio Equipment & Software: Today’s Industry Leaders Read a list of today’s photo studio equipment & software manufacturers. We share who’s who, and how these product photography solutions fit into the market. ## Automated Still Image & 360 Photo Studio Manufacturers We know PhotoRobot still & [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) solutions aren’t the only photo studio equipment & software options on the market. Surely, you’ve already encountered competing manufacturers, each offering their own unique software-driven photo studio systems. Their mission is to reduce product content time-to-market by automating still & 360 [product photography hardware & software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) processes. Some competing manufacturers provide all-in-one, *turnkey* photo studio solutions, with lighting & background built into a “photobooth-like” system. Others (like PhotoRobot) provide comprehensive setups with [software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) to connect, control & synchronize lighting and camera settings with any photography devices. The most common photography setups include motorized turntables and platforms for taking both still and 360 product photos. Take a video tour of [PhotoRobot Hardware Anatomy](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-cube-robot-arm), featuring modular systems for automated photography. Other popular solutions are multi-camera systems for 3D product photography, and larger systems for model & fashion photography. Manufacturers also commonly provide tripods or a robotic camera arm, and accessories like mannequins for photographing different types of products. All systems boast varying levels of photoshoot automation & control, from studio workflows to post-processing, review & publishing. Overall, each aims to streamline the content production process, from photography to content delivery. Read on for our list of today’s leaders in photo studio equipment & software for still & 360 product photography. ### Types of Content Production A 360 photo studio, as the name suggests, focuses on the production of 360-degree product content. However, there are different types of 360 content. We’ll clarify the terminology below. - [**Still images**](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image) (also **stills** or **frames**) are individual photos from specific angles (frames) around an object. Usually, a 360-degree product spin will consist of 36 still images at 10-degree intervals stitched together with special software. - [**360s**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography) (also **360 spins**, **spins**, or **360° packshots**) often refer to standard, single-row spins. A row is the angle of camera elevation for each frame, and is usually at 10° elevation. - [**3D spins**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-product-photography-ecommerce) (also **multi-row spins**, or **hemispherical / spherical spins**) consist of two or more rows of still images. While the first row is usually at 10 degrees, subsequent rows capture several vertical angles. The result provides a 3D experience, with both a horizontal and vertical viewing axis. - [**Photogrammetry 3D models**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce) stitch together a series of photos using photogrammetry scanning and special software. Creating 3D models calls for taking at least 2 vertical rows 36 frames around a product. Photogrammetry software then composites images into a 3D model for hosting on 3D product viewers or [3D product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce). ## Leading Automated 360 Studio Manufacturers Now, there are numerous manufacturers of 360 product photography studio solutions. Below, we’ll list some of the most influential industry leaders, and compare their offerings to PhotoRobot. ### Iconasys – Still & 360 Degree Product Photography Solutions With its beginnings in 2013, [**Iconasys**](https://www.iconasys.com/) was officially founded in 2014 by Michael Atman. Iconasys first entered the industry with still photography automation tools, and the development of Shutter Stream product photography software. These solutions integrated photo capture, editing & post-processing software for in-house operations. ***PhotoRobot streamlines the capture of*** [***packshots***](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography)***and marketing angles for sunglasses, eyewear, and other*** [***reflective or semi-transparent products***](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear)***.*** Proceeding the Shutter Stream release, Inconasys began working on their software to further support 360 product photography. This led to the Shutter Stream 360 software release, with a full line of product photography software to follow soon after. Later in 2014, Iconasys began manufacturing integrated hardware, releasing a line of LED lighting kits and automated 360 photography turntables. The Iconasys product range then grew to include software-supported solutions for both still & 360 product photography. There was a line of stand-alone 360 software, photography turntables, and lighting kits for different requirements, budgets, and skill levels. These in-house solutions served a range of industries and ecommerce product photography ventures. **Note: As of 2025, Iconasys is undergoing a transition to new ownership, with their future roadmap and support status remaining unclear.** Thus, verification of the current state of the brand is necessary before considering any investment decisions. ### Orbitvu – Automated Product Photography Solutions Next on the list are [**Orbitvu**](https://orbitvu.com/) automated product photography solutions. Orbitvu dates back to 2010 and is headquartered in Tarnowskie Góry, Poland. Its founder, Tomasz Bochenek, acts as Chief Executive Officer, with Abris Capital Partners having acquired the company in 2022. Orbitvu is among the leading manufacturers in e-commerce imaging solutions, providing photo & video content creation machines. They develop both hardware and software aiming to reduce product content time-to-market while increasing product page conversions. Currently, Orbitvu serves a range of industries, including: e-commerce product photography, electronics, jewelry, apparel, footwear, and tools. They offer various photography turntables, “photobooth”-like devices, flat lay photography solutions, and other 360 photo studio equipment. ### Ortery Technologies – DIY In-House Product Photography Another well-known name on the market, [**Ortery Technologies**](https://www.ortery.com/) positions themselves as professional DIY in-house product photography solutions. Having set out on their mission in 2002, Ortery was founded by Mr. P.C. Lai. Ortery holds headquarters in Irvine, California, and entered the industry with a desktop product photography studio: the Coloreal eBox. The Coloreal eBox shaped how Ortery would define its product line, from its equipment to the Photosimile Series. Now, Ortery provides a range of “business photography machines”. These include stand-alone 360 turntables, all-in-one Lightbox solutions, and multi-camera systems for 3D product photography. With these, Ortery aims to help companies streamline studio processes with software-driven automation & equipment for various product photography demands. They offer in-house technology for still, 360 & 3D image capture, and for filming product videos. There are numerous industries Ortery supports, including: ecommerce, jewelry, fashion & apparel, home decor & furniture, and items ranging from small to large. ### Packshot Creator – In-House Product Photography Systems Going back to 2003, [**Packshot Creator**](https://www.packshot-creator.com/) (also Sysnext) entered the market of product photography studio equipment & software. Packshot Creator is now headquartered in Levallois-perret, Ile-de-France, France, and manufactures computer-controlled, in-house studio systems. These include turntables, equipment, lighting, and software for 360 & 3D product experiences on a white or transparent background. Packshot Creator in 2004 introduced their software, and later, in 2006 produced their first software-synchronized turntable. In 2010, the company developed technology for 3D modeling. Then, in 2011, these technologies merged and were introduced in Packshot Creator’s 360 photo studio. Zoom-forward to today, and they now also manufacture photo tables, multi-camera 3D photography systems, and their LiveStudio. Among many industries they support, Packshot Creator manufactures solutions for gemstone & [jewelry product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography). Other industries they aim to support include many: from art & antiques to fashion products, eyewear, sports, beauty, electronics and more. ### Styleshoots – Fashion Product Photography Equipment Continuing our list of photo studio equipment & software manufacturers is **Styleshoots**. With beginnings in 2011, Styleshoots has its headquarters and showroom in Haarlem, Netherlands, just outside of Amsterdam. Styleshoots primarily supports companies in fashion-ecommerce with photo and video automation tools. The Styleshoot product line now includes “all-in-one” product photography devices for tabletop photography, still & 360 images, and product videos. Their first “all-in-one” device, StyleShoots Horizontal, came in 2011, while 2014 saw StyleShoots Vertical for ghost mannequin photography. Since then, they’ve designed StyleShoots Live for photography and filming videos of live models, and the Eclipse for capturing footwear. ### The PhotoRobot-Powered Photo Studio Approach PhotoRobot knows that every client has different needs. What solution is best always varies depending on the business, the budget, available space, and user-level requirements. In fact, we take pride in both our tailor-made solutions for businesses small to large, and our “knowledge-first” approach. We consult with all our clients not only on the PhotoRobot solutions available to them. We also compare different techniques, equipment & software solutions to demonstrate the ROI clients can expect of PhotoRobot. ### Our Automated, Software-Driven Line of Photo Studio Equipment Since 2005, PhotoRobot has outfitted webshops, warehouses and studio spaces with thousands of custom installations across 6 continents. Our line of [software-controlled](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/image-capture-control-tools), product photography robots resides with both big name brands and small companies alike. The goal is to help companies focus on their core business while content creation is automated. Among our solutions, we manufacture a wide range of customizable, [motorized turntables](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography). Solutions vary for objects as small as a microchip to as large as furniture and heavy machinery. There is even the Carousel [car turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography) for 360 product photography of automobiles, tractors and campers. Other robots include automated, robotic tripod solutions like the [Robotic Camera Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm), and the [Multi-Cam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) for multi-row 3D product photography. We also manufacture many of our devices to automate the creation of 360s, 3D models, and product videos. ***Look into a PhotoRobot*** [***in-house photo studio***](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-360-product-photography-studio)***, equipped with 360 turntables, lighting, camera rigs and workstations for 360 product photography.*** PhotoRobot’s stand-alone automation & control software integrates with all robots, compatible cameras and studio lighting. Control the entire studio from a single interface, with automatic post-processing tools and features for sharing content, review, and publishing. Meanwhile, software [workflow enhancements](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow) cover everything from product-in, to photography processes, post-production, and product-return. ### Take Advantage of PhotoRobot-Powered Studio Photography Don’t hesitate to schedule a demonstration today. Our solutions in [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) cater to operations from small to large. Whether you’re a professional product photographer, or running a webshop, enterprise, or an industrial-scale photography warehouse, PhotoRobot can assist. We guarantee tailor-made product photography studios with top-class software, image consistency, workflow enhancements, user training, and wide functionality. Just reach out to learn more. We’ll get you set up with photo studio equipment & software for all your still, 360 & 3D imaging needs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography # SECTION: blog > packshot-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2022-07-18 --- # Packshot Photography - What is it, and How to Produce It Branching off product photography, packshot photography sets guidelines to taking photos of a product typically with its packaging and labeling. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## What is Packshot Photography? Packshot photography (also “pack shot” or “packaging shot”) is one of the latest branches of [product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery). Popular across everything from magazines and billboards, to catalogs and ecommerce pages, packshots are still or moving images of a product. Packshots aim to show an accurate representation of the product, sometimes with its packaging and labeling. This displays products not only as they would appear in-store, but also in a way representative of the product’s reputation. Sharing similarities with [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards), packshot photos are a valuable tool to marketing and sales teams worldwide. Beyond enriching print and online product presentation, packshots can be a powerful stimuli to elicit in-store, on-shelf product recognition. Accurate product representations then in turn funnel into more sales, while at-the-same-time growing both the product’s and the brand’s reputation. However, just as with any product photography, quality matters. And quality revolves around possessing the know-how and the equipment. In this product photography guide, we’ll share the resources photographers require for packshot photography. Read on for the tricks of the trade, including: what cameras, lenses, and photography lighting to use. We’ll also cover photography equipment and turntables, automated workflow software, post-production with PhotoRobot and more. ## Primary aims of packshot photography When done well, packshots **accurately present a product** in photos to support sales across various marketing channels. Primarily, we’re talking about hard and soft copy, whether for in-print or online product advertising. The main aim of the packshot is to display the product exactly how customers will find it in its packaging. Packshots might also show the product in a way mirroring its on-shelf display. It is not to make products look better than in reality. Unlike lifestyle photography, which aims to create a story around the product, packshots inform on a different level. They attract attention firmly on the product, showcasing fine details & design features. Elements of a good packshot thus might include close-ups zooming into various parts of the product. Product photos might give customers a closer view of a logo, the type of fabric, or the material. In addition, some brands use packshots to show their product alongside its packaging or labeling. Shots might also include other contents of the package, like: manuals, promotional items, or included accessories. Overall, the goal here is to accurately present the product, showing everything the customer can expect of their purchase. ## Popular marketplaces & uses for packshots While 360-degree imagery has made a splash on [**Amazon**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon) and other marketplaces, packshot photography is also commonplace in eCommerce. This is due to the image requirements of online marketplaces & vendors, with many setting strict guidelines. For example, Amazon and others require products to have a pure **white background with specific product to frame ratio**. This helps consumers by ensuring retailers and product imagery better represent the product, something packshot photography accomplishes. After all, the goal of a packshot is to place **strong emphasis on the product** while also **accurately portraying it**. Thus, a **distraction-free background** is already important, equal to **showing off the details** that make the product unique. Good packshots on a white background can also meet photography requirements for wider sales and marketing channels. It might be for a major brand **billboard campaign**, or **magazine ads**, **brochures** and **banners**. High-quality packshots go a long way, allowing you to meet sharpness and contrast requirements, or compose imagery well with text. They can make for effective product infographics, and / or showcase extremely small details and design features. ## Packshots on transparent or colored backgrounds Shooting on a white background isn’t the only approach to packshots, however. Creating packshots with transparent or colored backgrounds sometimes better aligns with marketing goals. Certainly, it depends on the [**brand style guide**](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide), as well as where and in which format they’re advertising. In any case, PhotoRobot equipment & software makes background removal from nearly any object quick and hassle-free. And while many might think PhotoRobot is all about shooting **360s**, nothing could be further from the truth. In fact, many of our clients don’t even shoot 360s at all. They photograph still images and packshots, and, with advanced **background removal** tools, apply any background they want to their product photos. From transparent backgrounds for print advertising, to colored backgrounds for evoking emotion, the form depends on what you must show. Is it every detail of the product? Do you want the product shown exactly how it looks in the box? Will a colored background draw more attention to product details or fit your brand style guide? The answer to these questions will dictate the type of photoshoot, and whether it's still life or packshot photography. ## Packshot requirements and guidelines A good setup for packshot photography might revolve around one of PhotoRobot’s [**motorized turntables**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) and [**automation software**](https://www.photorobot.com/software). These solutions for 360 & [**3D photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) offer complete control over photoshoots, from compatible cameras to lights and the workstation. Photographers can automate camera elevation & swing, turntable rotation, image capture, light intensity, strobes, post-production and even publishing. Meanwhile, each turntable works in combination with a **white diffusion cloth background** for photoshoots, perfect for ecommerce packshots. Typically, if the destination is e-commerce, the white background will be a requirement. Resolution requirements then vary by vendor specifications. If photographing packaging or labeling with text, PhotoRobot has a tool for [Optical Character Recognition](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/optical-character-recognition) (OCR). Deploy OCR when capturing stills, packshots, or 360s. It extracts text directly off items to include in export feeds to webshops and product management tools. In all cases, photographers should **avoid using a blurry background** or applying a creative touch to **product sharpness**. This breaks the guidelines of packshot photography by distorting products and distracting away from unique features. ## Which cameras to use for packshot photoshoots When deciding on cameras, PhotoRobot [compatible cameras](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras) include Canon DSLR and mirrorless models. Choosing between [**mirrorless or DSLR**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/dslr-vs-mirrorless-cameras-in-2020-comparison-and-review) often comes down to preference, with both proving capable in the PhotoRobot studio. In fact, photographers don’t even need a high-end model to capture high-quality packshots with PhotoRobot hardware & software. Often, a **26MP** [**Canon EOS RP**](https://www.canon-europe.com/cameras/eos-rp/specifications/) is more than enough to do the trick. Thus, the consideration tends to fall on camera sensor size, as this will have more impact on product photos. ## Packshot camera sensor sizes The decision of what camera sensor to use for packshots comes down to the category (and size) of the product. Most commonly, photographers use **full frame** (35 mm width) **APS-C** (24 mm) camera sensor sizes. These provide a higher depth of field, allowing for greater sharpness of products within frame. For smaller, more complex products like electronics or jewelry, full frame cameras capture higher levels of resolution. This in turn allows photographers to accurately show the microscopic details consumers will want to inspect in product photos. PhotoRobot software then provides many advanced [image processing tools](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/high-quality-photos-advanced-image-processing) to ensure a full depth of field and quick post-processing. Find processing techniques integrated into the software, with tools for clarity, colors, brightness, sharpness, focus stacking and much more. ## Best lens for packshot product photos Now, just as with choosing a camera, choosing a camera lens type will depend on the product photography. Let’s compare the most common camera lenses product photographers use. - **The traditional 50mm camera lens** – For product photography, this is often the go-to lens because of its depth of field. It allows photographers to capture most items larger than 6 inches without distorting the product. Typically, we suggest a focal length of at least 50mm, although higher is better. - **Macro lenses** – A [macro lens](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography) is a specialized optic to photograph objects with a magnified ratio, usual 1:1. Macro lenses allow for the capture of life-size images of a product. They can capture photos of extremely small items in sharp focus, detail-rich quality and peerless resolution. On any small or complex product, a macro lens helps capture and convey the details that make the product unique. Use a macro lens when creating from multi-angle still images, to packshots and 360 spins. ## How to light the product For product photography studio lighting, PhotoRobot [compatible lights](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/getting-started#toc-4) include [**Broncolor**](https://broncolor.swiss/products/lights) and [**FOMEI**](https://www.fomei.com/en/products-studio-strobes-37499) strobes, and any lights with **DMX** support. Combine these with a motorized turntable like the Frame, and lighting products for packshot photography becomes standard routine. PhotoRobot systems check position of the product 1000 times per second, allowing for image capture without stopping turntable rotation. Instead, we freeze the object’s movement via flash, capturing photos during **non-stop spin** to shave significant time off each photoshoot. In this way (depending on the product), the capturing process usually takes, at most, 20 seconds. Now, some manufacturers who only work with continuous lighting might argue you don’t need strobe lighting. However, shutter speeds are never an issue with PhotoRobot. Nor is capturing texture, or working with white balance and color temperature. The quicker you create product photos and get them online or in print, the better. The main concern is that you capture realistic renderings of shape, texture and color in less time. Thus, always consider long-term profitability such as with PhotoRobot, rather than short-term savings with the competition. ## The best angles for packshot photography There are 6 important angles in product photography, each with its own value-add to packshot photography. For example, the right angle might get the best view of a product’s label. It can showcase product design, and all the relevant information shoppers require. Keeping this in mind, let’s review some of the best angles for packshots. - **The front angle** – Quite often the first image on a product page, this angle is the most common. Front angle shots can mirror how shoppers would encounter the product in-store, and generally showcase the product’s key features. - **Profile shots** – Use profile shots to show only one side of the product, showcasing its profile. More useful on some items than others, consider profile shots to show details or branding such as in [footwear photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes). - **45-degree angle** – Show off both the front-angle and profile view of a product with 45-degree angles. Aim to capture as much visual information as possible, informing shoppers through the details in the shot. ## Other useful angles for packshots Other angles will vary again depending on the type of product to photograph. In packshots, these might include the following. - **The back angle shot** – If your product has consumer information on the backside, use a back angle shot to convey it. These are typically one of the last images you find on product pages, tending to lack branding or eye-grabbing designs. - **Top-view shots** – Useful for flat lay photography or getting a “birds-eye view” over the product, top shots are taken from the top-down. Top shots capture different sizes and shapes well, and can be useful for featuring a product in its package. - **The macro shot** – Macro shots are a zoom into a product design feature to emphasize important details. Also a “close-up shot”, use these to showcase a product’s material, texture, or perhaps the logo. ## Stages of post-production (with minimal retouching) Post-production of packshots with PhotoRobot calls for minimal editing, with automation accomplishing the majority of the *heavy-lifting*. - [**Background removal**](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/editing-images#toc-8) – Adjust or remove the background semi-automatically or manually. Choose between 3 types of background removal functions: by level, by flood, or freemasking. After removal, choose a background, usually white for packshots. - **Surface retouching** – Brush, set as automatic by default, allows removal of any part of the image, and adjustment of size & edge softness. Use Brush before tools for clarity and color correction. - **Clarity & Colors** – Improve clarity with tools to sharpen or unsharp masking of product images. Then adjust hue, saturation and lightness to find the best color pallet for your brand’s packshots. ## Post-production automation tools Thanks to PhotoRobot software Presets, photographers can automate much of the workflow for similar types of items. Configure and save capture as well as editing settings as Presets to apply across batches of products or entire folders. All it takes is a simple click of “Apply All” to edit hundreds of product images per second. Automate basic editing like **image cropping** and **object centering**, or deploy [advanced tools](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools) for **background removal**, **image overlay**, and more. Whatever the product photography requires, PhotoRobot’s advanced algorithms do the work for you. Save valuable time by adjusting contrast and sharpness automatically, and applying edits immediately after capture. ## Professional packshot photography equipment Finally, when considering equipment for packshot photography, PhotoRobot has a range of solutions. With motorized turntables for products of any size, consider which best fits your studio’s needs. Are you photographing small to medium-size objects? The [**Centerless Table**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) might be for you. Do you need a more mobile, transportable solution? Consider [**the Frame**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame), a rotary turntable for easy movement to and from location. For heavier objects like machinery, there’s the [**Robotic Turntable**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable), or for furniture and large items, the larger [**Turning Platform**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform). There’s even a solution for motorcycles, quads and automobiles with the [**Carousel**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) (in 2 different sizes, 3000 or 5000). Many of these turntables work perfectly in combination with the [**Robotic Camera Arm**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) for smooth precision and automated movement. Precise movement, robust construction and support for two camera sizes enable photographers to capture objects of any size. ## Using PhotoRobot photography turntables Keep in mind, PhotoRobot isn’t one of these product photography booth solutions you commonly find on the market. All-in-one solutions like these can offer value on a budget, but they simply aren’t half as effective as PhotoRobot. Now, photographers will require some knowledge of flashlight operation and using light diffusers. However, beyond this, the PhotoRobot software-supported studio makes it easy to streamline processes. It also ensures quality results with minimal effort in post-processing. Our goal was straightforward: save time where it matters most, without sacrificing on quality. Stage-by-stage automation was thus crucial, as was providing tools for immediate editing and publishing to product pages. ## Revolutionizing studio workflow Others capture locally, create backups, transfer files, post-process, backup again, upload, and then finally share – all manually. PhotoRobot flips the workflow upside-down: enabling image capture in the cloud, instant backup, automatic post-processing and publishing to the web. All while minimizing user input & effort at each stage of production. Whether it’s capturing still images, packshots, 360s or photogrammetry 3D models, PhotoRobot enables high-quality, cost-effective photoshoots. Capturing true-to-life packshots, reducing effects and applying a background has never been so easy. All you have to do is choose the photography equipment that best aligns with your goals and your workflow. Why not reach out to us today? Beyond tips and techniques for product photography processes, we can begin equipping you for the task. Simply contact us to learn about our solutions for you and your brand’s packshot photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/february-software-release # SECTION: blog > february-software-release # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2022-03-02 --- # What’s New in the February Controls Software Release 2.6.0 February delivers the latest software release of PhotoRobot_Controls, offering new tools & features for smoother workflows and smarter project management. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## February Software Release 2.6.0 - New Tools & Features Building on our [previous software release](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/november-software-release), February brings new tools & features for smoother workflows and stronger communication between teams. Read on to see what’s new with our [workflow software](https://www.photorobot.com/software), and how to deploy these solutions in the photo studio. PhotoRobot Control software paves the way for complete automation of [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) and [digital asset management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software). Command robots, high-end Canon DSLR and mirrorless camera models, lights, post production, publishing, review processes and more. All from a single interface, with configurable presets you set once and use for the long-term. Keep reading to discover the latest tools & features in the February software release. We introduce improvements to the Cloud Interface, new workflow tools, enhancements to project sharing, and client-approval workflow. ### 1 - Improvements to the Cloud Interface Now, users can benefit from more comprehensive unification of the Cloud part of our application with the local app. All details you attach to items locally will be visible in the Cloud, and vice-versa. Get everything on a single page, including information about photos, comments, or additional details & instructions. Further enhancements include: - **Quick browsing between items**, now without having to first go to the item list; - **Reports with detailed information and statistics** about folders and selected photos; - **Support for zoom and spin rotation** in the detailed view. ### 2 - Comments and Comment Visibility Next, we’ve made it so that comments can always be found alongside your photos. We can now also limit comment visibility by item-level or by specific image. Simply enter a comment and specify for whom it will be visible – whether the client, a retoucher, or internal. Notify users of comments by tagging recipients, and then mark comments ready for action or resolved / completed. ### 3 - Brand New Workflow Statuses Our software now also enables more effective workflow communication between teams and clients. This is thanks to several new status levels to assign tasks, communicate progress, and approve or reject work at stages. - **New states for retouchers** include: “Ready for retouch” and “Retouch done”. - **Available client statuses expanded** to: “Verified”, “Approved”, “Rejected”. ### 4 - Retouch Access Controls Clearly communicate and share tasks with external retouchers thanks to retouch access controls. Select specific photos or entire folders containing multiple items for retouching. You can then attach instructions in comments before sending files to the responsible retoucher as “Ready to retouch”. Now, your retoucher will be able to access and download the files, do their magic, and import their results. After uploading the image, automatically the software marks items as “Retouch done”, communicating progress on the project. From here, the project manager can approve or reject changes and mark them accordingly. If satisfied, they can also choose to immediately publish the final images. ### 5 - Project Sharing between Client or Retoucher We’ve also built on our software’s project sharing capacities. Now, users will experience improved user interface for project sharing, including project access for external retouchers. Everybody on the team gets easy access to the projects they’re working on, while ensuring better communication along the way. ### 6 - Client Sharing and Approval Workflow Finally, clients can now see completed tasks when items or folders are set to the “Verified” status. Simply share the project with the client, and they can approve or reject “Verified” work in a single click of the mouse. If rejected, the client can also attach feedback or instructions via comments before sending items back for further retouching. It’s approval as you work, with feedback as ready as the client is available. ### Take complete control over all your studio workflows PhotoRobot_Controls is automation at your command, aiming to deliver the most effective product photography solutions on the market. Sign up for our Product Photography Newsletter below to stay up-to-date on our progress and everything happening in the industry. Also follow us on [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot) and [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/) for the latest videos, blogs, tutorials and software updates for your photo studio. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-photograph-furniture # SECTION: blog > how-to-photograph-furniture # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2022-02-01 --- # How to Photograph Furniture - Logistics, Prep and Execution Photographing furniture for eCommerce and online retail calls for high-quality, dynamic visuals that can meet the expectations of today’s consumers. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots ## The Complete Guide to Furniture Photography with PhotoRobot There’s few items more difficult to sell online than furniture. Your product images have to give online shoppers a real *feel* for the product, from aesthetics to weight and dimensions. To do this, brands and retailers often employ [professional photography studios](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) to create dynamic and visually-rich product content. You need a proper support team, the right equipment, and a strategy. Then, any piece of furniture becomes the ideal subject for engaging product photography, from stills to immersive [360 product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). Also considerations, there are the location and logistics necessary to photograph furniture, but this is where PhotoRobot comes into play. Both the [Turning_Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform) and [Carousel](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) motorized turntables take up minimal space in any [product photography setup](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), studio, warehouse or production hall. These 360 turntables can handle high-volume, high-output photoshoots of medium to large, heavy objects like furniture, machinery and even automobiles. Watch the Video Overview of the [PhotoRobot Turning Platform Design & Dynamics](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/turning-platform-design-functionality). The Turning_Platform has a plate diameter of up to 280 cm (9.2 feet). Meanwhile, its larger counterpart, the Carousel is available for manufacture with two different plate sizes. The standard platform size for the Carousel is 5,000 mm (16.4 feet). For a smaller platform, it can be built with a 3,000 mm plate. Together with PhotoRobot software, teams can automate processes, control robots, lighting & cameras, streamline workflows, and manage digital assets. Whether it’s photographing chairs, sofas or a full set of furniture, read on to get a better idea of the process. Here’s our guide on how to photograph furniture, including logistics, prep, and execution. ## Preparing the location and the furniture The first consideration is always location. You need available space for the photoshoot. Some have their own photo studio, while others might use a warehouse or showroom floor. All that’s needed is space for a larger [turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) and room around it for the lighting and photographers. Certainly, it’s possible to hire out a studio to do the work for you. However, the logistics involved and the burden of moving furniture long distances can accrue costly shipping charges. Instead, some choose to invest in their own equipment and bring in or train a support team. Let’s look closer at the latter, and the logistics involved when working with PhotoRobot out of your own space. ## Working on-location with PhotoRobot Depending on the size of the furniture you need to photograph, there are two options in photography robots. One, the Turning_Platform, is perfect for large and/or heavy objects. The second, the Carousel_5000, is for even heavier furniture and larger pieces or sets. Both come equipped with an extensive range of accessories. The goal was to ensure that you can use a single device for the widest possible selection of products. Each is suitable for items small and large, light or heavy, for small online stores to industrial photography warehouses. When set up on-location, the primary concern becomes logistics. Obviously, the closer the furniture is to the photoshoot, the better. However, if shipping or when transporting items, be sure to take precautionary measures to protect the products. Any damage, scratches or dirt can at the least cost you valuable hours in post-processing, or worse, ruin product photos. Other areas to account for include time for assembly, styling products, and prepping the scene. These can be especially important when photographing numerous items over a single day. Support teams need to plan for the most optimal workflows and agree on how to achieve them. ## Choosing the photography equipment After shipping, transportation, and assembly, the photography process can begin. However, unlike with smaller objects, you’ll need special pieces of equipment for 360-degree photography of furniture. Enter PhotoRobot’s turntable solutions: the Turning_Platform and the Carousel_5000. The Turning_Platform supports 1500 kg (3307 lb) with a plate diameter of 280 cm (9,2 ft). Its companion, the Carousel_5000 is even larger, supporting 4,000 kg with a plate diameter of up to 5 meters. Between these two robots, it’s possible to photograph chairs or full-size sofas, larger pieces, entire furniture sets and sectionals. As for taking photos, you’ll need PhotoRobot supported cameras, such as high-end DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.canon-europe.com/) models. For lighting, compatible lights include two types of lights: strobes from [FOMEI](https://www.fomei.com/en/products-studio-lighting-for-photography-and-video-35087) and [Broncolor](https://broncolor.swiss/products/lights), or any LED lights with DMX support. ## Capturing the perfect product photos When photographing furniture for online presentation, you’ll want straight-on, well-centered product photos. Furniture doesn’t call for any creative angles. Instead, we’ll aim for the same composition in every angle. For larger items, use a wide-angle lens to keep products in the center of photos. With smaller items, use a macro lens for closer focusing distances. Now, for image composition, every item you photograph will differ in some way or another. Be sure to give each product its own styling, lighting, and arrangement. ## 1. How to style products With 360-degree photography, your products will need to be prepped, cleaned and styled for photos from every angle. From the front to the sides and back of the piece, stylists must afford extra care. They need to ensure products are pristine, blemish-free, and ready for photos. This means steam cleaning, removing wrinkles, and polishing any wood or reflective surfaces. You’ll want products to look in perfect condition to save time when it comes to post-processing the photos. Try your best to remove any specs of dirt or dust, wrinkles, or blemishes. ## 2. Lighting the products Next, the lighting setup will be essential to producing quality spin photography. Often with furniture, you want to use large, soft lights for consistent illumination as the product rotates. This will ensure colors come out as close to true-to-life in photos as possible. Other times, pieces of furniture might look better with “harder” lighting, which can emphasize contours and dimensions. This type of lighting also allows for more “moody” photos, creating an impression to elicit an emotional response from consumers. ## 3. Product arrangement Finally, consider what makes the most sense visually for your online shoppers. They’ll not only want to get an idea of what entire sets of furniture look like. It’s also important they can inspect pieces individually, zoom into ascetic details, and get that real *feel* for what you’re selling. To do this, it’s often best to provide still images of entire sets, whereas individual items get 360 spins. This way shoppers can see both the entire collection, and then select other pieces to examine closer in 360-degrees. When arranging a collection, how you do so will vary depending on the set. Is it a living room or a dining room set? Show the entire collection together so consumers can envision the entire set in their homes. Then, capture each piece like chairs or sofas and tables separately in interactive, 360-degree spins. Consumers will appreciate being able to inspect each part individually and in detail as well as in the complete collection. ## Productive furniture product photography with PhotoRobot Effective furniture product photography revolves around many moving parts in the studio. It requires time, energy, equipment and experts. That’s not to mention the space necessary for operations, as well as effective logistics and planning. At PhotoRobot, we aim to not only simplify but optimize all of your product photography production, from prep to execution. Whether it’s how to photograph furniture, household appliances or items small and large, contact PhotoRobot to learn how we can help. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/november-software-release # SECTION: blog > november-software-release # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-11-29 --- # What’s New in the November PhotoRobot Software Release November brings the latest software release, showcasing new tools and features for freemask support, product videos, and auto tilt correction. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## November Software Release - New Tools & Features The latest release in [PhotoRobot_Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) delivers new tools & features for background removal, photo tilt correction, and product videos. In this post, we’ll share what’s new, and how to deploy these solutions in the photo studio. PhotoRobot_Controls is the software package for complete automation of all [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) and [digital asset management](https://www.photorobot.com/software/management). Command robots, turntable rotation, cameras, lighting, post production, and more. All from a single interface and with configurable presets you can save and use again & again to streamline studio workflow. Read on to discover the latest tools and tricks now available in this release. We introduce freemask support for background removal, automatic image tilt correction, and timelines for automation of filming product videos. ## 1 - Freemask support - background removal When removing the background from product photos, freemask is one of the quickest and most exact methods. Creating an accurate and homogenous mask image, we reduce the amount of cut-out work after production to a minimum. We create the mask during the picture taking process. Here, we capture two pictures: the main photo, and the mask picture. The main image we create by lighting only the product, whereas in the mask image we light only the background. This back-lit shot serves as a pixel-exact mask within post production. With this, the software estimates and suggests a color threshold which will be dark enough to represent the object. Anything lighter than the threshold registers as background, and users automatically get a mask to apply to the main picture. The software automates all of this, from capture to post production. Users can then place the cut-out object onto a new color of their choosing. ### Removing the Background from “Difficult” Objects Some objects, like those with reflective surfaces or areas with empty space, make background removal without freemask almost impossible. For example, see a mask image of a steel, wire basket we captured below. We use this cut-out mask to remove both the glass plate of the turntable and the backdrop from photos. The software distinguishes the product from all empty space, and removes the background inside and around the basket. We then composite the main picture and the mask image to produce final photos. Notice how precisely the background is removed without any effect on product edges or sharpness. We’ve done this across the entire item folder containing 24 photos of a spinset, all in under a minute. Users can make the background semi-transparent, or replace it with a color suitable to their brand style. ### Background Removal from Transparent Objects Our capture & control software even has freemask support for transparent objects. Set half transparency with a threshold of three values: black, white, and gamma. Anything below the black point registers as the product. Everything above the white point becomes the background. Variables between these two points are made transparent, however not completely so. Experiment with different thresholds and then automate background removal on even the smallest structures, details, and transparencies. ## 2 - Product Video “Timelines” November’s software release also brings with it a brand new “Timeline” feature to automate the filming of product videos. Now we can define when and how to move robots when recording - all from a single interface. Set commands to direct movement including the camera arm, turntable rotation and lighting from one millisecond to the next. Direct the camera arm to start, pause, stop, turn, swing and lift. Tell the rotary glass plate the timing and which angles for product rotation. You define the movement and angles for each robotic process, and simply press record. The software then follows instructions down to the second, automating robotic processes to film the desired video. Deploy Timeline automation to create for example the flying camera effect. This visual effect makes the camera hover around and above a product rotating 360-degrees. Program each movement for the effect on the timeline, and take complete control over product videos with robotic precision. Then, save settings to reuse again and again as configurable “Presets”. ## 3 - Auto Tilt Correction (packaged products) Finally, November also delivers a new editing tool for auto tilt correction on product photos of packaged goods. This tool is particularly effective for grocery product photography in accordance with [GS1 image specifications](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards). When photographing boxed products, GS1 images provide product information such as ingredient lists and nutritional facts. The standard GS1 image package includes views of the packaging, the labels, and any barcodes. One part of a GS1 package consists of planogram images, which display a box from the front, back, sides, top, and bottom. However, sometimes when photographing these angles, it’s not always easy to shoot the box perfectly. This is when we deploy auto tilt correction. This new editing tool detects the position of boxed products in photos, and automatically corrects any tilt in final images. Automate tilt correction across entire items, and ensure every deliverable is perfectly straight in photos in only a few clicks. ### Automation at Your Command: PhotoRobot_Controls Discover more product photography solutions and editing tricks with PhotoRobot today. Follow us on [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot) and [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), or sign up for our Product Photography Newsletter below. We regularly share blogs, tutorials, updates, and videos to help others get the most out of their product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/carousel-5000-at-stellantis # SECTION: blog > carousel-5000-at-stellantis # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-11-23 --- # Installation of PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000 at Stellantis See a partner’s recent installation of PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000, our heavy-duty turntable solution for photography of cars and heavy machinery. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots ## The Carousel 5000 - PhotoRobot in Action at Stellantis Today, we’d like to share a recent [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) car turntable installation at [Stellantis](https://www.stellantis.com/en). Courtesy of a partner in France, **PixMyCar**, the installation shows how the Carousel performs in the photo studio. The Carousel is a heavy-duty, motorized turntable designed for [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) of exceptionally large objects like cars and heavy machinery. The design provides convenience and durability, able to transform a small space into a compact workstation with a high-capacity turntable. PixMyCar set up their Carousel installation to showcase how effective it is in the studio. The Carousel has a load capacity of 4,000 kg (8,800+ lb) and a diameter up to 5 m. Its rotating platform can support everything from cars and garden tractors to small boats or furniture. The turntable’s low profile makes it as easy to place any car on location in seconds. It’s literally just parking the vehicle. PhotoRobot software then provides control over everything, from turntable rotation to cameras, post processing and publishing to the web. *Join us to see the Carousel installation at Stellantis, and discover more about product photography with PhotoRobot.* ## PixMyCar 360° at Stellantis - Showcasing the Carousel 5000 Have a look below at photos from the PixMyCar 360° installation at Stellantis. Starting first with the photo booth: Notice how little space is necessary to create the workstation. The Carousel can be installed in approximately 6 hours, and allows for [high-volume car turntable photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography). Photograph up to 60 vehicles per day of all types thanks to this installation. Simply drive a car onto the ramp, prep the scene with air-driven dirt removal over the turntable’s surface, and begin the photoshoot. The drive-up ramp is only 78 mm tall, making it easy to drive a car onto the turntable from any side of the ramp. It also ensures that preparation and photography are extremely quick and uncomplicated. Notice the camera setup. All photos captured can be used as 360° spins without limitations regarding resolution or zoom. Use 360-degree photos produced on the Carousel individually for both online or print publication. [PhotoRobot_Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) provides precise control over turntable rotation, camera capture, image processing, and publishing to the web. All on a single, easy-to-use interface, with configurable settings you can save and reuse again and again. Install the Carousel 5000 for higher-volume photoshooting of automobiles. A Carousel installation makes it possible to photograph up to 60 vehicles in a single day. ## Easy Clean-up Before, During, and After Photoshoots We designed the Carousel with small grooves for dirt collection along the entire perimeter of the turntable. The design makes it easy to ensure the scene is perfect for 360-degree photography. The same airflow that cools the machine and its controller continuously cleans the collection grooves. Doing this, we minimize the need for cleaning and prolonging service intervals. Simply drive onto the ramp, prep the scene with air-driven dirt removal over the turntable’s surface, and begin the photoshoot. The drive-up ramp is extremely short, ensuring that photoshooting, as well as preparation of the vehicle, is quick and uncomplicated. ## Extremely Durable and Easy to Maintain The Carousel 5000 is built to last, offering a heavy-duty solution with hassle-free equipment for long-term operations. We use only the most durable materials for the Carousel, aiming for uncompromising quality of manufacturing. The robust design owes thanks to the latest laser burning technologies and CNC machining. It places great emphasis on resistance to dirt, wear, and mechanical damage. Its massive central bearing unit only requires tension adjustment and lubrication once every 18 months. The drive and control units as well as the flooring material are all accessible for easy service or replacement. ## Trouble-Free Service and Replacement The Carousel’s drive and control units, as well as the flooring material are easily replaceable when the need arises. At high work loads, this will eventually occur. Both the drive and control units are outside of the machine, making service and replacement easy at any time. The flooring material is also just as easy to replace if it suffers wear and tear. Simply remove and replace. ## For 360 Photography or Showroom Floors There are two versions of the Carousel. One installs on top of the existing surface in the workspace. The other installs directly into a studio floor. When in the floor, the Carousel becomes near invisible, with the motor safely outside of the turntable plate. This reduces the need for post production of photographs to an absolute minimum, and quicker production times overall. ## High Quality is Top Priority Product photography in today’s world demands cutting-edge equipment, software, and automation. The goal is to save on costs and effort without compromising quality. This is true for 360 photography of cars and heavy equipment, and even more so for large-scale photography operations. At PhotoRobot, we design solutions like the Carousel 5000 to make 360 product photography easier, safer and more productive. With the Carousel specifically, we designed it to be exceptionally durable, using only the strongest materials so that it can last longer for industrial-scale usage. ## Bring the PhotoRobot Experience to Your Studio Want to see more of PhotoRobot? Find regular updates, news, blogs, videos, and installations on [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot) and [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/). Need product photography guides, tips, and tutorials? Sign up for our Product Photography Newsletter below. We’ll keep you up-to-speed on all the new content and resources to help you get the most out of your still image and spin product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/canon-eos-digital-sdk # SECTION: blog > canon-eos-digital-sdk # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-11-19 --- # Remote Camera Control with Canon’s EOS Digital SDK Unlock the remote capture capabilities of EOS and PowerShot cameras with Canon’s Software Development Kit for camera control. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## Customized Digital Solutions for Controlling Canon Cameras Canon’s Software Development Kit (SDK) delivers a wide range of remote control features for Canon EOS and PowerShot cameras. Configure camera settings, capture photos & record videos, transfer and delete files from memory cards - all remotely. It’s even possible to operate zoom on compatible PowerShot cameras. More modest options for camera control include [EOS Utility](https://www.canon-europe.com/support/consumer_products/software/eos-utility.html) for Mac and Windows, or [Camera Connect](https://www.canon-europe.com/apps/canon-camera-connect/) for wireless smartphone connectivity. However, when working with higher volumes of imagery, or integrating cameras into an automated workflow, we need a more robust solution. This is when we go to Canon’s SDK. This Software Development Kit provides software developers and computer programmers customizable, digital solutions for Canon camera control. Canon SDK consists primarily of two main parts: EDSDK (EOS Digital SDK) and CCAPI (Camera Control API). *Read on to discover Canon SDK, EDSDK vs CCAPI, and how to use Canon SDK in automated photo studio workflows.* ## Canon SDK: EOS Digital SDK and Camera Capture Control API With Canon SDK, there are essentially two main parts, EDSDK & CCAPI, which provide the same core functionalities. These include remote camera capture, auto click focus, fast shot, image transfer, and Live View monitor. The difference is that with EDSDK, a wired connection is required, whereas CCAPI provides wireless camera control. European Product Marketing Manager at Canon Europe, John Maurice, explains EDSDK and CCAPI. “They’re both ways of interacting with the hardware via the software, and the gateway to controlling a camera remotely.” John adds, “The reason you come to the EDSDK or the CCAPI is that you have a problem that you need to solve by remote camera control. The ability to do this and integrate it with software has benefits for organizations across industries and across use cases.” ## “Across industries and across use cases” John Maurice provides e-commerce companies as one of his examples of when we need repeatable, reliable processes. In e-commerce, cameras need to perform often and regularly, and we need software to ensure processes are accurate and smooth. Image capture also needs to integrate seamlessly with our editing workflow. Additionally, John lists photo booths for corporate events as another case for automated photography solutions. "Maybe you want to take pictures of the attendees in order to create souvenirs of the event, or to add their pictures to a database for ID cards. So you might have a software application that is controlling that." Beyond these examples, imaging solutions can solve a wide range of industrial challenges. Carry out remote inspection processes, or use [3D photogrammetry](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) to document physical objects from multiple angles in 3D models. Canon’s SDK is a solution for all these problems and more. It’s for companies both large and small who need to integrate camera control with software processes. ## Get Access to the Canon SDK Download Canon EDSK enables control over a range of camera functions from within your own software. Access the Canon SDK download by registering interest through the [Canon Developer Programme](https://developers.canon-europe.com/developers/s/). Approval grants the ability to download the application library files and begin using the software. Receive technical support in the EMEA region, or join [a forum](https://developers.canon-europe.com/s/forum) for developers to discuss the SDK. ## Canon EOS Digital SDK vs CCAPI Canon launched its EDSDK in September 2006. Based on an older, yet proven protocol, it requires tethering via USB from a camera to a Windows or Mac computer. EDSDK supports a wide range of Canon camera models, from the [EOS-1D X Mark III](https://www.canon-europe.com/cameras/eos-1d-x-mark-iii/) down to the [EOS 2000D](https://www.canon-europe.com/cameras/eos-2000d/specifications/). It also has support for select PowerShot cameras, as well as EOS DSLR and mirrorless models. Thanks to this wider range of camera support, PhotoRobot chose the EOS Digital SDK to integrate with our systems. Compared to the CCAPI, which is a new release (2019), EDSDK gives us the widest possible range of camera support for our clients. It also offers higher image transfer speeds, whereas the CCAPI is essentially a mobile version of the SDK. The CCAPI uses a web-based HTTP protocol to communicate over WiFi, and works on platforms like Android and iOS. Just like the SDK, it gives users control over multiple cameras at the same time, but does so without cabling. This can keep studios less cluttered, although at the cost of limited camera support and WiFI bandwidth constraints. ## Deploying Canon SDK in automated PhotoRobot workflows Canon’s EDSDK integrates seamlessly with [PhotoRobot_Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) and all our [3D product photography installations](https://www.photorobot.com/robots). Remotely control one or more cameras. Program operations for camera capture, image transfer, and Live View monitor. Simply plug the cameras straight into our software, and take control over photo studio workflows all on one interface. Configure settings to automate photoshoots, and save configurations as “presets” to reuse again and again. Automate photography processes for everything from [packshot photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) as well as [360 spins](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery), to multi-row [product stills](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs), [product videos](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models), and more. The software handles the *heavy-lifting*, synchronizing cameras and robots to ensure accurate, consistent, and productive photoshoots. ## Find more product photography resources Discover more about PhotoRobot solutions and integrations today. Join us on [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot) and [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz/), and sign up for the newsletter below. We share blogs, tutorials, updates, and videos to ensure you get the most of your product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/image-capture-control-tools # SECTION: blog > image-capture-control-tools # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-10-27 --- # Advanced Software Tools for Image Capture & Control Discover advanced PhotoRobot software tools for image capture & robotic process automation in this quick guide to our hardware control software. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## Comprehensive Image Capture & Hardware Control Software PhotoRobot’s [Image Capture & Control software](https://www.photorobot.com/software/capture-control) gives you complete control over all of your hardware on a single interface. Command multiple cameras, lighting setups, robotic processes & hardware sequences for [still product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/still-image), [spin product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-spin), [3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360), and [3D object modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model). Configure and save settings as “Presets” to reuse long into the future when photographing similar types of products. *Set once, use forever; we like to say.* In this guide, we’ll demonstrate how. We’ll introduce you to our image capture & control software, and share some advanced tricks to streamline your product photography. ## Complete Image Capture Control Take complete command over when and where to trigger cameras with PhotoRobot's [image capture automation](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images). Specify individual angles to capture, or quickly re-capture angles with fast sequence repeat. Were there only a few misfired photos? Select the angles you need to re-shoot, and streamline the sequence to only capture specific images. ## Configure and Save Presets Unique to PhotoRobot, configure and save capture settings as “Presets” to use again and again. Presets allow you to streamline processes in the studio for both image capture and editing. Extremely valuable when photographing a range of products, define commands to apply to objects in similar categories. This way you automate outputs for various types of products - whether it’s clothing & apparel, household appliances, or any other [eCommerce product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography). Simply create presets for your most-used settings, from camera and row automation to arm elevation, lighting, sequences, and post processing. Presets are applied automatically and immediately at just one click of the play button. ## Fast Shot Mode Another function unique to PhotoRobot is our Fast Shot mode. With this tool, we’re able to capture up to 24 pictures in 15 seconds from the time we prep the scene. To do this, our image capture and control software reads the position of the turntable 1,000 times per second. It’s even possible to reach up to 24 photos in 10 seconds, although for this we need exceptionally fast lights and cameras. While reading table position, PhotoRobot then sends capture signals with the precise moment for cameras to trigger. All the while, the rotary turntable remains in non-stop rotation, shaving valuable seconds off each product photoshoot. ## Create Unique Settings for Each Row With 360-degree product photography, there are single-row and multi-row spins. Each row consists of a specific angle which you photograph 360 degrees around an object. Single-row spins are the easiest to capture, and one row is usually enough to create a lifelike impression of an object. These spins can only move left and right on a horizontal axis, and often consist of 36 images at 10-degree increments. Multi-row spins (also known as “3D spins”) require more time and effort. They usually have 3 or 4 rows of photos with 12 or 18 images per row. We photograph each row at different camera angles to create a spin that moves up and down as well as left and right. Capturing multi-row spins often calls for configuring settings for each individual row. You might need to adjust lighting, camera capture, or camera & editing parameters. Our image capture & control software allows you to do precisely that. Apply unique settings to each row, and PhotoRobot handles the rest. ## Robotic Camera Arm Automatic Elevation For further time-savings, take advantage of automatic elevation of the robotic camera arm. Using CubiScan, we detect the object’s size and shape, weigh & measure it, and save dimensions to the specific item. We can then open items in the software to trigger automatic elevation of the Robotic_Arm. The camera arm will then adjust its position to the absolute center of the object, without any more manual input from the user. ## Robots Remote ### Remote Control for All Robots Using a single interface, you have complete control over all photography robots thanks to our image capture & control software. Control everything: from speed & rotation of motorized turntables to camera arm elevation, swing angles, and every robot in the studio. It’s all at your fingertips. A special widget with a clean and intuitive interface gives you control over robotic processes and movement. Control robots from your studio workstation, or even remotely from anywhere in the world. ### Multiple Camera Support Support & control up to 7 cameras at one time with PhotoRobot’s Multi_Cam. This multi-camera system allows for simultaneous photography of several top view angles in a rotational range of 360°. Create 3D photographic presentations of objects while also capturing predefined angles for individual images to use online or in print advertising. Our image capture & control software streamlines the entire process, giving you complete control over every camera. Seamlessly integrated with the system, command cameras to capture simultaneously to create 3D photos in a single rotation. ## Live Review & Camera Remote ### PhotoRobot’s Live Viewer Use PhotoRobot’s Live Viewer to preview image capture in real-time and across multiple screens. Your photographers as well as the product stylists will thank you. Dedicate one or more monitors near the workstation for a better overview of the entire photography scene. Our server streams the camera Live View to your monitors, allowing you to watch the magic as it happens. ### Camera Remote With support for both DSLR and mirrorless [Canon](https://www.usa.canon.com/internet/portal/us/home) camera models, PhotoRobot’s Camera Remote allows you to configure and save camera settings as Presets. Create Presets for multiple cameras and simultaneous capture, and deploy to reuse for all similar photoshoots. - For more information, see the complete list of PhotoRobot [supported camera models](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/compatible-cameras). ## Light Remote & Freemask Support ### All Lights Remote Control lighting and flashes directly from the interface. With support for Broncolor, Profoto, Fomei and DMX, you can adjust energy, cell sensors, modeling light, and power on / off. All remotely from your workstation. Save all light settings as Presets to automate lighting parameters for future photoshoots. Combine these with presets for hardware & camera control, and you have complete automation in the studio. ### Freemask Support Freemask is one of the quickest and most exact ways to remove the background from product photos. The mask is created during the picture taking process, reducing the amount of cut-out work after production to a minimum. With the aid of our software, we take two pictures - one main image, and one mask image. In the main image, only the product is lit, and during the second mask only the background. The backlit shot then creates a pixel-exact mask within post production. Our image capture and control software provides an approximate estimate of the color threshold which will be considered dark enough to be the object. Anything lighter than the threshold registers as the background, and then you get a mask to apply to the main picture. The software does this completely automatically, and lets you place the cut-out object onto a new color of your choosing. ### Freemask Support for Transparent Objects Our image capture & control software even has freemask support for transparent objects. It allows you to set half transparency with a threshold of three values: black, white, and gamma. Anything below the black point registers as the product. Everything above the white point becomes the background. Then, anything between these two points is made transparent, however not completely so. Experiment with the threshold and automate background removal on even the smallest structures, details, and transparencies. ## Deploy the full range of PhotoRobot image capture tricks Curious to learn more about PhotoRobot hardware and software? Why not contact us, or even sign up for our Product Photography Newsletter below? You can also follow us on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/fotorobot-cz) and [Youtube](https://www.youtube.com/c/PhotoRobot). We regularly share blogs, guides, tutorials and videos to keep you updated on everything happening at PhotoRobot. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards # SECTION: blog > gs1-image-standards # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-10-19 --- # GS1 Image Standards and Digital Asset Management Gain a better understanding of GS1 image standards and digital asset management (DAM) with PhotoRobot systems and control software. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software **Updated October 2026:** the current GS1 Product Image Standard is Release 5.0 (July 2026). For image types, file names, formats and the rules that differ by country, see our [GS1 image standards guide](https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards). ## Understanding GS1 Standards and Digital Asset Management [GS1 image standards](https://www.photorobot.com/gs1-image-standards) are more than simply the new standard for product images. These standards lay the framework for a global language of business via a universal digital asset management (DAM) policy. For those with no experience or familiarity with the system, GS1 simply is a set of rules for business communication. The name relates to a global system of standards, including unique identification codes and data on products, services, and locations. Additionally, GS1 image guidelines ensure businesses provide accurate, relevant, and transparent product information. These “[GS1 Product Image Specifications](https://ref.gs1.org/standards/product-image-specification/)” dictate image type, resolution, file naming conventions, and final deliverables. PhotoRobot systems follow GS1 Image Guidelines to mass produce GS1 images in parallel with [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). You focus on capturing the product photos. Our software extracts GS1 images, organizes files in a separate folder, and publishes marketing images and planograms. ## What is GS1? (It isn’t an acronym) Without realizing it, even if they aren’t familiar with the [GS1 organization](https://www.gs1.org/), consumers encounter GS1 products everywhere. Take for example the barcode, present on every product on every shelf. This barcode is one of many GS1 products in today’s world. The barcode and other widely-adopted GS1 products serve to create universal electronic communication standards for worldwide usage. They define requirements in processing, storage and exchange of product imagery. ## The Standard GS1 Product Image Package First published in 2006 and revised many times since, the GS1 product image specification is a full-featured document of guidelines. Its current version is Release 5.0 (July 2026), now called the GS1 Product Image Standard. These guidelines dictate for example: margin, dimension, clipping, file format & naming, product views, and far more. In the most recent version, find even specifications on standards for 360-degree product photography, detailed imagery, and metadata for branding. PhotoRobot uses GS1 image guidelines as part of our default product photography and file naming conventions. Our systems ensure you identify, capture, and share all relevant product information, while at the same time capturing 360° product images. ## Standard GS1 Images and File Naming Conventions Let’s look now at standard GS1 images and file naming. These images display important information such as ingredient lists, nutritional facts, the packaging, barcode, and more. There is then a universal naming convention product images must follow. See the most common set of images businesses require below. In the images above, the first row represents what we call **Planogram images**. Retail stores use this category of GS1 imagery to determine product placement on shelves. Product photographs include all six sides of the packaging, and a view straight on / of the frontside. Next, the second row in the illustration shows two different categories of GS1 images. **Marketing images** consist of three product photos capturing the package from a slight downward angle. We mostly use these images for marketing purposes, often in [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), in print, and digital grocery store circulars. Finally, there are secondary product images (**Informational images)**, which consist of a variable number of photos. Most commonly, these images show informational elements such as barcodes, ingredient lists, and nutritional facts. Other images that fall under this umbrella include Drug and Supplement facts, and Guarantee panels. ## Packaging Levels of a GS1 Image Set A complete GS1 image set might also display all levels of packaging. This is dependent on the end consumer, but might include views of the case, the inner packaging, and retail or consumer units. See the image categories below for example. ## GS1 Standards for 360-Degree Spin Photography Guidelines for GS1 imagery now also exist to cover 360° spin photography. Spins have become increasingly popular in product marketing. Retailers deploying spin imagery across their eCommerce platforms include Amazon, Home Depot, Lowes, Shopify, Walmart, and more. In order to capture a spin set, we usually need between 24 and 72 images. These are photographed at 5- to 15-degree increments around a product. Special software (like [PhotoRobot_Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software)) then stitches photos together into an interactive video. For this, the GS1 standard calls for a minimum of 24 and a maximum of 360 frames, rotating clockwise seen from above. Smaller sets, such as 12 frames, work in web viewers but fall below the GS1 minimum. Here, PhotoRobot captures spins of 24 to 72 frames in tandem with additional GS1 images. ## PhotoRobot Spin and GS1 Image Capture Get both the product spin set and all angles for GS1 images utilizing “preset” parameters in the control and automation software. In **under 1 minute**, we capture an entire product in 360-degrees and with all necessary GS1 images. This requires little effort on the operator’s part. It includes time to move the camera to the other up-view angle (3 seconds with the [Multi_Cam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam)). Then, we still have time to flip the product upside-down and move the camera to 90° to photograph the bottom. Smart scripts then extract necessary images into a separate folder and publish files as marketing images, planograms, or informational images. Alongside the imagery, PhotoRobot reads the text on ingredient and nutrition panels into structured data. Meanwhile, it also produces in parallel a 2-row 360-degree spin. We can then work with images locally or in the Cloud to share, review, retouch, post process, and distribute. ## Digital Asset Management (DAM) with PhotoRobot Although many examples thus far have been consumer packaged goods, GS1 applies to any consumer-based trade item. As long as it’s packaged or labeled with an identifiable retail barcode, it can fall under GS1 digital asset management. Digital Asset Management includes management tasks, and digital asset decisions on ingestion, annotation, catologing, storage, retrieval and distribution. For this, data and metadata serve as signposts for searching, retrieving, and accessing control of digital assets. Take for example batch processing with PhotoRobot. Utilizing data from barcodes in combination with image capture presets, we can define settings for photographing different types of products. For example, if you have preset configurations you want to use for similar types of sporting goods or toys, simply assign these to individual items. It’s even possible to sort products on shelves, and assign different barcodes with dedicated presets to each. PhotoRobot presets also control not only angles, but camera settings, lighting, post processing, and other parameters. ## GS1 Product Image Specification and DAM When adopting GS1 product image standards, you likewise create a strong foundation for your digital asset management. Their comprehensive standards lay the groundwork for saving both time and money while ensuring you speak in the global language of business. More importantly, businesses ensure consumers have readily available access to accurate, relevant, and transparent product information. In supply chain management, businesses also achieve visibility and traceability far superior to spreadsheet or ERP-dependent supply chains. *Learn more about capturing GS1 images with PhotoRobot today. Contact us. We’ll help you begin mass producing 360s in parallel with GS1 images.* --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photo-editing-tools # SECTION: blog > photo-editing-tools # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-10-11 --- # Pro Tips: Advanced Photo Editing Tools and Techniques Utilize advanced photo editing tools and techniques in PhotoRobot’s control and automation software for product photography. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## Cutting-Edge Photo Editing Tools for Product Photography PhotoRobot editing software delivers both standard and advanced photo editing tools with unique features for 360, 3D, and [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography). Edit product images immediately after capture, automatically and to preference. Our photo editing software does the work, eliminating manual operations from workflows. Save [image capture](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images) and editing settings as presets to apply across batches of similar products or entire file folders. Simply click “Apply All” to edit hundreds of images per second. Automate everything from basic editing like image cropping & object centering, to advanced tools for background removal, image overlay, and more. Whatever your product photography calls for, our [image editing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing) does the *heavy-lifting*. *Read on to learn how in this tutorial. Today, we look closer at our editing software, and share our photo editing tools and features for streamlining product photography.* ## Features Available Anytime, Anywhere ### Work anywhere on almost any device with cloud processing Let’s start first with our software’s cloud processing. Our photo editing software utilizes [Nvidia Tesla K80 GPUs](https://www.nvidia.com/en-gb/data-center/tesla-k80/). These provide all the processing power we need and more. Moreover, this processing power has no limitations on image resolution. Although we do recommend a maximum of 26 / 30 MP in the Cloud, up to 50MP (8688 x 5792 pixel) cameras such as the [Canon 5 EOS 5DS R](https://www.canon.co.uk/for_home/product_finder/cameras/digital_slr/eos_5ds_r/) can be supported with local processing. This means all you have to do is simply click “Apply All”. The software then applies edits and delivers the final results for review. Work from anywhere and on nearly any device, whether a personal PC at home or on-the-go. Thanks to the power of cloud processing, you no longer need a top-of-the-line workstation to complete your work. ### Work with all images in a given folder Among our software’s unique functions is the ability to deploy editing tools across all images simultaneously. To achieve this, we use the latest web standards to access your GPU directly. Apply edits, and then start or pause a product animation to review all desired effects and edits in real-time. Not 100% satisfied with the results? Simply retouch one of the images and apply your editing across the entire folder again. Press play, review, and repeat until your multi-row still images or 360s meet expectations. ## High-Level Automation at your Fingertips ### `Automatic` configurations - Presets Save all of your go-to editing parameters as presets in our automation software. Presets apply automatically and immediately after the robot completes the capture sequence. Useful for [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) across a range of items, define edits to apply to objects in similar categories. This way you automate outputs for various types of products - whether it’s clothing & apparel, footwear, or whatever products you’re marketing. At just one click of the play button, we receive the production output according to our preset configurations and editing parameters. ### Auto image cropping of an entire folder Our photo editing software also allows for automatic image cropping across entire folders. The AutoCrop tool uses intelligent detection to identify object positions and define where to crop product images. All you do is press the AutoCrop button, and our software will crop entire product files accordingly and automatically. ### Aspect ratio and padding Another automation feature in our editing toolbox includes configurable aspect ratio and padding. Specify the ratio of width to height, and how much padding to apply on all sides of product images. Combine this with AutoCrop for considerable savings in time. Then, with presets, store your crop, aspect ratio & padding settings for editing similar image files in the future. ## Tools Unique to Our Image Editing Software ### Automatic object centering One feature that really sets our suite of software apart from the competition is [automatic object centering](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography). This tool is completely unique to PhotoRobot. It has two functions to ensure every photo in your spinset or gallery is in the perfect center. There is **fully automatic product centering**, or **semi-automatic**. With fully-automatic, the system identifies object edges, calculates the center of each image, and adjusts all images in a folder. If completely automatic centering encounters problems or obstacles, all it requires is a few simple steps to correct images. Here, use semi-automatic centering to manually select edges (or centerline), and the algorithms do the rest. Centering is available for both the horizontal and vertical axis. Simply select 3 images from a series of photos, and our software applies centering to the complete set or gallery. ## Advanced Editing Tools and Techniques ### Background removal (by level) More advanced editing tools include our background removal operations. Currently, there are two operations to **remove background - by level and by flood**. With **background removal by level**, we utilize an RGB (red, green, blue) color of each pixel to remove colors above a certain threshold. This is advantageous when shooting products with a white backdrop, and for making an off-white background disappear. Use the ‘highlight white’ tool to detect the white areas in images. Use this tool to detect the correct threshold for by-level background removal. This is important for exposure correction and to be sure the image background is consistent with the rest of your page. ### Removing background (by flood) **Background removal by flood** might provide better results if working with for example a transparent background or very white items. This operation detects edges of an object, and then applies flood points to fill in the available area. Particularly useful for removing backgrounds without affecting objects, you can manually set flood points in areas that weren’t removed. Simply set the flood point, and our photo editing software fills in the blank spaces. ### Deploying the All Image Overlay tool Another useful tool for spin and 3D photography for the web is our feature for all image overlay. The software superimposes photos on top of one another to show all images in a set or gallery within a single frame. You get a view of the product photos in all of their iterations and in-frame, all together. This way, it’s easy to check object centering, and that items don’t touch the edge in any frames. This review feature particularly helps for 360-degree product photography. Just access image overlay to review product photosets and ensure each image comes out professional, consistent, and to preference. ### Advanced brush and eraser techniques Next, our brush and eraser feature is nothing new, but we do have some advanced features especially for spin photography. We often use the brush / eraser to remove dust or blemishes from product photos. In the case of a 360 spinset, this can provide a challenge as you’re working with at least 24 photos. To this end, our photo editing software allows you to retouch an individual photo and apply the changes to all images. If this isn’t ideal, like when removing dust from a scene, it’s also easy to enter images individually for a quick, final retouching. At any time, you can return to any image to brush it up without having to retouch every individual photo again. Set size and the edge effect for more precision, and then save work as presets for future editing. ### Keyboard shortcuts for menu items It’s also possible to use keyboard shortcuts to drastically reduce time spent editing photos. Access shortcuts to menu items such as image cropping, auto centering, background operations, image overlay and more. For PhotoRobot operators, this means all of your standard and advanced editing tools are just a few keystrokes away. No more time lost clicking through menus to find your tools. Process higher volume photoshoots effortlessly and in less time. ### Define editing scopes across entire folders For further time-saving, users can also define the scope at which editing operations will be applied. Set the scope across an entire folder, to specific swing angles, or for an individual image. This is particularly valuable when editing multi-row images, whether it’s stills or 360s. With multi-row imagery, we have to set the lighting according to each row for photography. The same is true when editing. We capture specific swing angles (0°, 15°, 37°, etc), each of which we assign to different folders within an item. These folders then require different editing operations, which we define by setting the scope to apply to a target item (or items). ### Image masking and adjustment Masking enables us to adjust where specific operations will apply. We can mark places we don’t want certain editing operations to modify, such as where not to remove the background for example. Perhaps we want to limit where some operations occur, such as adjusting brightness on a specific part of an image. Here just adjust where and to which scope editing should apply. In this way, we can experiment with each editing operation, and apply unique masks for each one. Set masks from background removal to clarity, levels, curves, and more. ## Automation at Your Command: PhotoRobot_Controls All standard and advanced photo editing tools are available no matter the PhotoRobot subscription level. While speed and processing times vary, users have all our tools to maximize productivity when editing still, spin & 3D photography. Ready to discover more? Don’t hesitate to contact us today. We’ll answer all your questions regarding our photo editing software, its tools & features, and our robots for any product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/new-features-updates # SECTION: blog > new-features-updates # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-09-27 --- # PhotoRobot Hardware and Software Updates & New Features Delivering the latest updates and features from the PhotoRobot team on the evolution of our hardware and control software. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## Updates and Features of PhotoRobot Hardware and Software [**PhotoRobot_Controls**](https://www.photorobot.com/software) delivers new features, tools, and performance enhancements in its latest version 2.4.0 released in September. Experience **smoother, simplified workflows**, and a **more robust user experience** for all of your automated product photography. Many of these features have been developed in coordination directly with our users to ensure solutions meet specific demands. We aim to cater to all our customer needs across numerous industries and reply promptly with new functionalities and improvements. The latest version thus brings **support for a new Frame_robot**, further **optimization of the Robotic_Arm**,new **advanced tools** **& macros**, and **physical workflow enhancement.** Keep reading to discover what’s new and improved with PhotoRobot and its software suite for automation and control. ## Support for the Frame Turntable Due to popular demand, **support is now available for** [**the_Frame**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/next-gen-motorized-turntable-photography), one of our newer product photography robots. The_Frame is an all-in-one solution combining a [motorized turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360-product-photography) and robotic camera arm. Precise and versatile, this robot can capture photos for perfectly positioned still images, [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), and constructing [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model). Its design enables the cameras and background to travel seamlessly around a rotating product. It even provides a flawless view from under the optical glass plate of the turntable. While you photograph still images and 360s, you can also automatically capture all imagery necessary to render products into 3D models. ## Quicker Sequencing of the Robotic_Arm Take advantage of **faster sequencing of the** [**Robotic_Arm**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm), now optimized for higher movement speed. Save between 2 - 4 seconds with each arm movement, decreasing overall time to capture complete sequences. For example, if photographing 3-row sequences, that’s upwards of 8 seconds in savings for every individual product. The Robotic_Arm is the ideal solution for online shops and is compatible with the majority of PhotoRobot rotary turntables. Add the third dimension to objects and present them from all angles, both as a whole and as a detailed view. Robust construction, precision of movement and two arm sizes provide the ability to capture objects of all sizes. Meanwhile, automation in elevation control and two shanks (one short, one long) provide both precision and versatility in the studio. ## Quick Navigation Feature Introducing **new features for quick navigation**, PhotoRobot_Controls now makes it easier to explore the system. Experience an expanded navigation range, now with quick search for items across all projects. Easily access and jump between items, projects, presets, macros and more. PhotoRobot makes it all a simple search away. Access navigation via the magnifying glass icon in the top-right corner of the User Interface, or by keyword shortcut. Use the slash ("/") key on MacOS or on Windows. ## Updated Macros for Cloud Subscription Power Users PhotoRobot also now offers **more robust macro support** to meet the diverse needs of users across multiple industries. This update is **available for Power Users**, and brings with it countless possibilities for macro definition. Automate image capture and editing with specific instructions for photographing, retouching, and post processing products. It’s all just a few clicks away. You categorize the products and processes, attach macros to barcodes, and PhotoRobot streamlines the workflows. Save camera settings, photo angles, lighting, editing, and more to match your products and your projects. ## Enhanced Physical Workflow **Subscription Power Users** can also ensure frictionless physical workflow in the studio with **enhancements for product ingestion and product return**. Import items to be photographed into a project, validate if received, scan weights and measures, sort, prepare and more. Improvements include development on barcode scan-in and scan-out, Cubiscan for measuring and weighing products, and inventory workflow. Sort items on shelves, and generate barcodes when missing. It's a smooth workflow-in and smooth workflow-out. Confirm that every item that enters the studio leaves with 100% of the images delivered. ## PhotoRobot | Solutions by photographers, for photographers At the end of the day, PhotoRobot’s mission is to develop solutions to meet the product photography market’s growing demands. No matter if it’s a small webshop or an industrial-scale photography warehouse, we design hardware and software for the job. Stay up-to-date with all the latest from PhotoRobot by signing up for our newsletter. We share updates and new features, product photography resources & guides, blogs, videos, and much more. All to optimize your productivity while you handle your business. *Be productive. Handle your business. PhotoRobot manages the imagery. Consistently, effectively, productively, & automatically.* --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/shoe-photography-workflow # SECTION: blog > shoe-photography-workflow # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-08-12 --- # Shoe Photography - Still Images, Style Guides and Workflow Streamline shoe photography and capturing still images of footwear for the web with automated studio solutions and style guides. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## E-Commerce Shoe Photography With shoe photography for e-commerce, both quality and consistency in visual content is key to selling footwear to online consumers. And while you might think PhotoRobot is only useful for creating [360-degree product presentations](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography), nothing could be further from the truth. You might be surprised to learn that approximately half of our clients don’t even use our systems for 360s. But why use a [turntable-based automated studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography) if only photographing a series of [still images](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs)? To demonstrate, we produced the video below of [footwear photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-take-pictures-of-shoes) in still images with our systems. In this instance, we’re using the [Case_1300](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) with the Robotic_Arm and [PhotoRobot software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) for light synchronization, camera & turntable control, and automating workflow. Take a quick video tour of the [PhotoRobot footwear photography workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/footwear-photography-workflow). PhotoRobot automates image capture and post production, streamlining workflow to create professional still shots in no time. Software “presets” allow you to save and re-use settings and style guides, improving shoe photography speed and consistency. *Continue reading for more on the Case_1300 and using our systems to photograph footwear for the web.* ## The Importance of Consistency in Visual Content Maybe your [eCommerce product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) involves shooting mostly footwear. That, or perhaps you have a company that manufactures shoes. One way or another, you’ll need a set of images that shows off all the features of your product line. Your imagery should show the quality of the shoes, which material they’re made from, and what kind of soles they have. It has to both inform shoppers and represent your brand in a professional and reliable manner. This is where consistency in visual content is key. Inconsistency from one set of images to the next will make you look unprofessional. What you need, in other words, is a [**style guide**](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-create-a-fashion-photography-style-guide) which you follow when photographing shoes for e-commerce. ## Automating Style Guides with PhotoRobot Software A style guide is a set of instructions that tells you how your images should look. Manually, it simply is not humanly possible to do this quickly and exactly the same each and every time. This is where PhotoRobot comes into play. Perhaps the most important part of the style guide is the information about the angles at which you photograph the object. Among other parameters, this is what you need to automate to achieve consistency and high productivity. In every style guide, there are two important angles you must have. There is the angle of rotation, and what we call the angle of swing. With these, you need more angles that show views of the footwear from the front and sides, as well as some high angles. And then you want to show online shoppers the sole of the shoe, too, meaning a view directly from the bottom. For this, you could manage the entire photoshoot on a single workspace, such as PhotoRobot’s_Frame. However, today, we want to show off the workflow of the Case_1300 for our shoe photography. ## Using the Case_1300 to Photograph NOT ONLY Footwear The Case_1300 features a 1300mm glass turntable. With this, we can automatically remove not only the background but also the shadow beneath the shoe or other products. - [PhotoRobot’s_Case for Automated Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography) Further, the [Robotic_Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) v8 serves as a welcome expansion device to the_Case. This robot camera arm manages the swing angle, supports [Canon](https://global.canon/en/) DSLR and mirrorless camera models, and is also able to go all the way up to 90 degrees. Together with PhotoRobot_Controls, we can apply our style guide settings to automate the [image capture](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/image-capture-control-tools) of our top and side views. ## Photographing the Bottom of the Shoe Now, this is where if we want to streamline our shoe photography even further, we use an additional workstation. Otherwise, we need to take the shoe off the plate, place it on a jig upside-down, and then put it back on. All of this before waiting for the camera to get into place at 90° before we can take photos. Instead, as you can see in the video, we utilize a separate workspace with a second camera mounted at the top. In this case, we use our flat-lay table. It doesn’t rotate the product, but it maintains the advantage of a backlit, transparent surface. Our second camera is then mounted to the top, providing the angle for the top-view images of the jig, which is holding our shoe upside-down. In this way, we are ready to take photos of the sole of the shoes, and can also prepare other shoes to photograph on the Case_1300. Doing this, we considerably increase workflow, while saving valuable time on high-volume photoshoot days. ## Achieving Images Exactly According to Style Guides Just how fast can you achieve all the images required by your style guide? You start first by importing your list of products to photograph. This often includes names of products and barcodes, and any presets you might have. If you have preset configurations you want to use for different types of footwear, simply assign these to individual items. It’s even possible to sort products on shelves, and assign different barcodes with dedicated presets to each. PhotoRobot presets control not only angles, but also camera settings, lighting, post processing, and other parameters. ## Simply Scan and Automate After importing your shot list, you simply scan a barcode of the shoe, and place it on the turntable of the Case_1300. Now, with our presets, the entire photoshoot happens automatically, and often takes no longer than a minute to apply your style guide. But what about if you’re using the second workspace to take photos of the bottom of the shoe simultaneously? Do you have to change any settings in the software? For this, it’s as simple as scanning an additional barcode of a macro at your control station. This switches to the second workspace, and all photos are taken without the operator having to touch the computer or camera. ## Taking Speed and Consistency to New Heights In just slightly over a minute, we manage both workspaces and the entire photoshoot, capturing photos of our shoes from top to sides and bottom. Pictures all come out shadow-free, well-lit, and ready for any post production before publishing online. All the while, it takes only minutes to prepare the scene for the next shoes to photograph. Photography workflow in this way is taken to new levels of speed, quality, and consistency — as clients have come to expect of PhotoRobot. Learn more about our solutions and PhotoRobot by contacting us today to schedule a 1:1 consultation. We’ll assist you in finding tools around your needs, whether for shoe photography or any product content production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/spin-photography-dirt-bikes-and-quads # SECTION: blog > spin-photography-dirt-bikes-and-quads # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-08-09 --- # 360 Degree Spin Photography of Dirt Bikes and Quads See PhotoRobot turntables in action in this article featuring 360 degree spin photography of dirt bikes and quads by Buffler. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## Buffler Dirt Bikes and Quads in 360 Degree Spin Photography In this post, we’re featuring 360 degree spin photography of dirt bikes and quads by [Buffler](https://buffler.eu/). This client is a Czech manufacturer of ATVs, childrens’ ATVs, scooters, and rickshaws. Buffler’s CEO, Radek Michalčík, needed 360 degree spin photography of their dirt bikes and children’s quads. Buffler knows that [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) increases customer engagement. Further, they came to PhotoRobot knowing we can photograph larger items that many systems on the market would encounter problems with. For us, this photoshoot was the perfect opportunity to show off our high-torque [Turning_Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform). We even created a video of the entire photoshoot, which you can watch below, and we wrote this post to provide more information. Watch the footage of PhotoRobot Studio [photographing 360s of dirt bikes and quads](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/turning-platform-demo-quads-dirt-bikes) for a customer. *Enjoy the quick video above, and keep reading to discover more on 360 degree spin photography of dirt bikes and quads with PhotoRobot* [*automated product photography equipment*](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography)*.* ## On Location: the Photography Studio For the location of our product photoshoot of Buffler dirt bikes and quads, we hosted at the PhotoRobot Showroom. We don’t often operate our showroom as a photography studio, however for this photoshoot we made an exception. The hero of this photoshoot is the high-torque version of the **Turning_Platform**. Its extensive range of accessories and [PhotoRobot automation software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) makes it highly effective at photographing heavy objects, like dirt bikes and quads. - [PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turning-platform-360-product-photography) Further, the Turning_Platform can take hundreds of photos in an instant, and immediately publish 360s to the web. Also, this model features [the_Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk), which we normally use for [creating virtual fashion shows](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/catwalk-for-apparel-photography-and-online-fashion-shows), but it’s covered and protected for this shoot. To protect it, we have an additional layer of fiber board on top, so there’s no worry the treadmill will get damaged. Now, we can focus on the Turning_Platform, and begin photographing dirt bikes and quads. ## The High Torque Version of the Turning_Platform So, what makes the Turning_Platform so special for 360 degree spin photography of dirt bikes and quads? Let’s look at its technical specifications to find out more. This version of the platform has a 1500 kg load capacity, with the rotating plate at 280 cm diameter. With this high-torque, larger version, we have the perfect setup for photographing Bufler dirt bikes and children’s quads. Now, we’re using our standard setup for 360 degree spin photography, along with [FOMEI](https://www.fomei.com/en) lighting and high-end [Canon](https://global.canon/en/) cameras. Beyond the above average load capacity, another unique feature is control via our proprietary control unit. The control unit is a sophisticated, real-time processing computer. This provides us with many functions for automated product photography. It also provides one key feature for this particular photoshoot — non-stop spin and capture. ## Non-Stop Spin vs Other Approaches Unlike most systems on the market, PhotoRobot utilizes a non-stop spin and capture mode. This is crucial for our process of photographing dirt bikes and quads, providing greater results and significant savings in time. With other systems, oftentimes the turntable pauses in order to take each picture (or two, if using the free-masking approach). The turntable then has to accelerate and move into the next position before cameras can take more photos. Not only is this approach much slower, with some items it is downright impractical to accelerate and decelerate all the time. PhotoRobot’s approach, on the other hand, involves rotating the quads and dirt bikes 360-degrees non-stop. Meanwhile, the strobe lighting triggers and cameras are constantly taking photos, with the photoshoot complete in a matter of several seconds. ## Simultaneous Post-Processing and Publishing What is more, in the time it takes to capture photos 360 degrees around the product, we’re simultaneously post processing and publishing. This includes background removal, making the images perfectly match the white background of Buffler’s website. Time-to-web is significantly reduced, while all images are delivered in perfect 360 spins of the photographed dirt bikes and quads. By the end of our photoshoot, we’ve created 360 spins of 10 childrens’ quads, 1 full-size adult quad, and 2 dirt bikes. Each of these took slightly over a minute from the moment we placed the product on the turntable. ## PhotoRobot | Faster, Easier, Streamlined Whether you need to bring product photography in house, or streamline your existing workflows, PhotoRobot is here to help. Contact us today to schedule a free 1:1 consultation with one of our technical specialists to discover more. We’ll show you that no matter the size or volume of the product photography, we have solutions to meet any demand. From 360 degree spin photography of dirt bikes and quads, to cars, heavy machinery, and more, PhotoRobot does the job. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/hardware-automated-product-photography # SECTION: blog > hardware-automated-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-08-04 --- # PhotoRobot Hardware for Automated Product Photography Introducing PhotoRobot hardware features for automated product photography, still & 360 image capture, and production of spin videos and 3D models. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots ## Anatomy of PhotoRobot Hardware for Automated Product Photography In this post, we’re showcasing our latest YouTube video on PhotoRobot hardware for automated [360 / 3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography). See under the hood of three [PhotoRobot solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-360-product-photography-studio): the [Centerless_Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table), [the_Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), and [Robotic_Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). Watch the [PhotoRobot Hardware Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-cube-robot-arm) showcasing the Centerless Table, Cube, and Robot Arm. In the video above, we decided to really *geek out* and dive into the technical specifications of our machines. There’s a lot in the video to unpack, so we’ve also written this article for further reading. *Continue reading to learn about the anatomy of our hardware, its technical details, and automated product photography with PhotoRobot.* ## The Centerless_Table: Setting the Standard in the Studio PhotoRobot takes pride in solutions to automate the [product photography studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), and the Centerless_Table is no exception. The Centerless_Table is a universal, motorized turntable for shadow-free product photography of small and medium size objects. Deploy it in the studio to automate the production of [packaging photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), still images, [360 product images](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), and [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). - [Introducing PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table) This solution is an industrial grade machine with a glass turntable. The centerpiece of this model is an 850mm optical glass turntable, with 8mm thickness and weighing 11,5kg. It can support up to 40kg, and has no green-color tinted edges, as seen on many entry-level solutions. ### Under the Hood of the Centerless Table Inside the Centerless Table, we have a precisely machined aluminum wheel with a rubber O-ring reading the plate position 1000 times per second. Some competing products do this as well, but at a lower frequency. Additionally, there is an optical sensor calibrating the wheel readouts every single turn of the glass plate. This sensor constantly recalculates the gear ratio, allowing for unparalleled production speeds. Fully adjustable pulleys guide the glass plate. Each pulley has a user replaceable X-shaped silicone ring for perfect output geometry. There is also a storage place for a zip bag with replacement rings and instructions for ordering more rings, inside the machine. ### Power, Precision, and Stability Now, let’s talk about power running this machine. This drive shaft wheel, which is also user replaceable, has a robust motor behind it. The motor runs at 48V and 10A, and is controlled with pre-sized S-curves for acceleration and deceleration. It’s literally the power of a racing car at your fingertips. This machine can capture an entire 360 image in under 4 seconds, more than the output of most cameras and lights. In reality, it takes around 20 seconds to take a 36-image spin. All of these components are housed in the massive frame of the machine. The frame prevents product shake in final images, even at high speeds, thanks to its uncompromising rigidity. ### Additional features The Centerless_Table for automated product photography also has a number of other additional features. For example, in the front, there is an industrial rack to install our 19-inch control units, laser controllers, power distributors, network components, surge protectors, and more. All of these features help you stay better organized. There are also clever paths for hiding the wiring inside the entire workspace. ## The_Cube for Automated 360 Product Photography The next piece of today’s automated product photography setup includes the [Cube_V5](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube). There are currently 3 different models of the_Cube to perfectly cover various configurations of the workspace, according to client specifications. This machine can work as a stand-alone device, or you can pair it with other PhotoRobot machines. It also has features for [ghost mannequin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin) and quick-mannequin exchange for shooting fashion products. In another setup, the_Cube acts to precisely synchronize the rotation of a suspended product with the Centerless_Table. Nylon strings suspend the product in place. There is also an extensive range of accessories that fit on the snowflake-shaped output shaft wheel. These accessories provide an extreme latitude of adjustment for all of your automated product photography. ### The Anatomy of the_Cube The design of the_Cube also allows you to photograph electric devices, even when they are on. For this, there is a model with an electric socket and a rotating part for powering up the item when spinning. To keep the_Cube as well as other accessories perfectly aligned, there is a top portal with extendable columns. These, unlike with standard length columns, allow you to go to a 90° top view with a camera mounted onto a robotic camera arm. ### The Portal to Lend a Helping Hand Also, the portal can carry various holders such as pins, sockets, uniclamps, or heavy-duty clamps. Always useful, this ensures you have a third hand to hold spotlights, reflection boards, or other photography rigs. The system of PhotoRobot hedgehog holders integrated with the portal allows you to have the lights, LED or strobes, always at the right place. Whether it’s in front of the object or evenly illuminating the background for its easy automated removal. As the camera reaches higher angles, we ensure the background is illuminated perfectly at the furthest point from the perspective of the background lights. For this, we have a reflection surface integrated in the diffusion background set to distribute the light evenly. The machine can also hold black flags, which you can place on both sides of the object you’re photographing. It’s also possible to place these under the glass plate on a nylon string web, which is adjustable in many directions. This gives you absolute flexibility to meet the needs of any setup. ## The Robotic_Arm for Camera Control Finally, PhotoRobot’s Robotic_Arm in this automated product photography workspace is in its eighth generation. The Robotic_Arm ensures the correct angle of the camera when capturing still images or spins, single-row or multi-row. - [PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm for 360 Object Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robotic-arm-360-object-photography) A brushed stainless steel seat provides a way to mount the camera sensor exactly to the optical of the machine’s rotation. The camera seat is at the end of a telescopic arm, which comes in two different lengths with the device. This makes it so that you can use the Robotic_Arm with robotic tables and with larger platforms. The entire arm is also mounted on a pivot with position micro adjustment to perfectly position the camera. Meanwhile, a set of counterweights allows you to balance the arm for maximum precision of movement. ### Precise object positioning What’s more, the swing spindle of the Robotic_Arm is hollow to accommodate a cross laser for precise positioning. This is useful not only when placing products in the center of rotation, but also for aligning the arm and the table together. If doing this frequently, like when using the Robotic_Arm partly with the table and a platform, there is an optional docking station. This allows you to simply push the arm and lock it into place. Then, to unlock it and get it on its retractable wheels, a sliding bar on the docking station makes it easy. This is used for two purposes. Use it as a robotic swing to capture the exact angle, or as the height adjustment of the entire machine to the center of the object’s height. This is an automatic functionality of our control software if the information is available. It can be either in the shooting list, or via automatic measurement of CubiScan devices. ### The Heart of the System: the Control Unit At the heart of the entire system, there are our 19’’ control units. These controllers are mounted in an industrial rack chassis, providing easy access to upgrades to the latest generation. It also makes for easy maintenance and servicing if you require it. ### Find photo studio automation for your unique business At the end of the day, PhotoRobot is more than simply all these technical details. PhotoRobot comprises solutions for photographers, by photographers. Moreover, we aim to provide product photographers with precise, robust, reliable, and extremely powerful tools and software. Want to learn more? Contact PhotoRobot today. One of our technical strategists will introduce you to automated product photography solutions suitable for your operations. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photoshoots-case-850 # SECTION: blog > product-photoshoots-case-850 # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-07-29 --- # Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot’s CASE 850 Find our latest video for product photoshoots with PhotoRobot’s CASE 850, and read more to discover what makes this solution so versatile. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots ## Streamline Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot’s CASE 850 PhotoRobot designed the [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) to be a truly portable robotic workstation for product photoshoots. While much of the competition markets their hardware as “portable”, oftentimes these devices are just too small to do any meaningful work. With the CASE 850, you get far more. This robotic workstation is compact in size, extremely mobile and equally effective for high-quality product photoshoots. Its design makes it suitable for nearly any [product photography setup](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), eCommerce studio, online shop, warehouse or production hall. Watch the [PhotoRobot Case 850 Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/case-850-portable-360-turntable) to judge this mobile turntable workstation by its functionality. Would you rather see the CASE 850 in action than read about it? Check out the video above. See how the CASE 850 can be packed or unloaded from its protective case in a matter of minutes. Discover its easy setup, and learn how the CASE streamlines product photoshoots. *Want to learn more about the CASE’s technical specifications, installation, and functionality? This post is for you. If looking for even more info, see our previous post on* [*automated 360 product photography*](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography)*and product photoshoots with PhotoRobot’s CASE 850.* ## The unique design features of PhotoRobot’s CASE 850 The CASE 850 is **small enough to load into a personal car**, but still large enough for product **photoshoots of medium size objects**. It’s a foldable, portable product photography workspace, designed from the ground-up to photograph objects up to the size of a backpack. Inside the casing, you have everything you need to set up your robotic workspace. There is space inside for the glass plate, the background made of diffusion cloth, background holders, and other small accessories. After setup, capture shadow-free [packaging photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), [360 images](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) and photos to generate [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce) of products like shoes, handbags, and other medium size items. [PhotoRobot_Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) provides complete control over the workstation, from plate rotation to lighting and cameras. ## From delivery to setting up your workspace When we ship the CASE 850 to you, it comes in a cardboard box with a custom pallet. Complete with the packaging, the CASE 850 weighs 85 kilos, while the machine itself weighs only 73 kilos. This means that while you can load it into a larger personal car, it’s better not to do it alone. (That is, unless you’re a professional bodybuilder of some kind.) However, with assistance, the CASE 850 was made to be lifted and fit neatly into the trunk of a vehicle, with special protection for everything inside. ## The hardware and accessories After unboxing, the CASE 850 comes in a durable flight case. This flight case houses all of your important photography accessories securely inside. We have also equipped the case with wheels for easy mobility on flat surfaces from place-to-place. Inside the CASE 850, there is space for the glass turntable, the diffuser background with rods to prop it up, and other small accessories. Transport everything safely on wheels to a suitable area for setup, and unload the flight case to get started. ## Easy Setup: approximately 15 minutes One of the key advantages of the CASE 850 is that you can set it up and be ready for product photoshoots in about 15 minutes. When setup is complete, the workstation remains relatively compact, even with the lighting setup and camera tripod. You only need a floorspace of around 3x4m, which is enough for your on-location product photoshoots. When finished or packing up for another shoot, it only takes around 15 minutes to disassemble the CASE 850, load it, and make it mobile again. ## Product photoshoots with the CASE 850 When conducting product photoshoots with the CASE 850, you can take still photos and 360s with one or two vertical angles. If you need a 90-degree top view, we have additional machines for that as well. The optical glass plate of the turntable is 850mm in diameter, and can photograph objects weighing up to 20kg. It has a max width of 50cm, and a max height of 70cm. All of this without creating any visual shadows. If you would like shadows in your images, you can add a second transparent layer on the rotating plate. This will create the effect you’re looking for, providing a subtle shadow to emphasize your product. ## The diffusion cloth background Another important element of the CASE 850 is its white background made of diffusion cloth. It’s a similar material to the front part of a photographic light box. Fix the background in position with removable holding rods. You can also remove these rods should you need more room around the workspace for your product photoshoots. ## Power, precision, and stability Now, what about the power and precision of the CASE 850? Despite being compact, this workspace is still incredibly powerful. Two motors mounted opposite each other drive the rotation of the glass plate for greater stability and dynamic properties. These motors run at 12V and 5A. This makes it possible to complete an entire 360-degree rotation in 2,1 seconds. If you need a very slow rotation, it can also slow down to a crawl, completing the turn in as many as 4,5 minutes. Then, as is standard with PhotoRobot hardware, you have rubber rings on the spindles that are user replaceable. The pressure is adjustable, and during the product photography process the position of the turntable is checked 1000 times per second with the precision of 1 degree. All of this is possible thanks to the decoder wheel and an optical sensor with auto calibration functions. The machine is held together by an aluminum space frame, with the high rigidity important for minimizing vibrations during product photoshoots. ## The electronics and control unit As for the system’s electronics and control unit, these are at the bottom section of the hardware. Here you have all the important electronics, including the control unit which is the heart of the entire setup. We have a cross laser that points up from the control center as well. This makes it simple and easy to find the absolute center of products, every time. And while we recommend using a LAN cable to connect to the network, the CASE 850 can even generate its own Wi-Fi hotspot. This gives you the ability to photograph on-the-go, and do product photoshoots in locations where you might not have access to a LAN network. ## Additional accessories for your product photoshoots The CASE 850 also supports a range of accessories for product photoshoots. There are built-in support legs for extra stability. Adjust these using an Allen key, which is conveniently located in a magnetic compartment near the legs. Also, you can mount sockets to ports in the CASE for using additional accessories. Mount reflection boards, or even add a custom portal above the machine to suspend accessories like a photographic tent. ## The difference between the CASE 850 and the CASE 1300 When comparing the CASE 850 with the CASE 1300, there is one main difference: the size. The CASE 1300 is the “bigger brother” of the 850, and the 1300 can be expanded with PhotoRobot’s [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). This was designed for product photoshoots of even larger items, while still remaining portable. However, with the 1300, you will need a larger vehicle, like a van, for transportation of the machine from place to place. ## Comparing the CASE to the Centerless Table Finally, let’s compare PhotoRobot’s CASE to our industrial grade Centerless Table for product photoshoots. The difference between these two solutions is that the Centerless Table is designed to be a fixed installation rather than portable. This machine aims to maximize productivity. It has a top structure that holds lights and other accessories, and runs at 48V and 10A for 8 times the power and a 40 kg load capacity. While the Centerless Table makes a great addition to any warehouse or studio, the CASE is the obvious choice if you plan on traveling with your machine. It’s also a budget-friendly entry point into the world of product photography. ## Discover automated product photography by PhotoRobot Looking for more information? Perhaps you’re ready to book a live demo? Contact PhotoRobot today. One of our technical strategists is ready and waiting to introduce you to all of our many solutions for your product photoshoots. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/social-media-product-photos # SECTION: blog > social-media-product-photos # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-07-26 --- # The Latest Trends in Social Media Product Photos Get the most out of your social media product photos with PhotoRobot’s tips, trends, and strategies for 2021. - Categories: Product Photography ## Product Photos for Social Media: Tips, Trends, and Strategies Are your social media product photos generating the level of conversions you imagined? Your [product imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery) on social media has to be more than simply compelling enough to grab attention. It has to [drive traffic to your product pages](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/improve-product-page-conversions). On social media, you have only seconds to attract someone’s attention if you really want them to stop scrolling. Then, the challenge becomes convincing them why they should stop what they’re doing long enough to hear your message. To do this, you really have to make your post (and your [product photography for the web](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/professional-photography-for-websites)) not only eye-catching. It has to also be mobile-friendly, reactive, and interactive. These are the cornerstones to communication strategies on social media today. Moreover, they are essential for building a great customer experience. *In this post, join PhotoRobot to discover how leading brands are using social media to promote their products. We’ll share current trends, our tips, and some strategies for getting the most out of your social media product photos.* ### 1 - Showcase your brand and your product on social media First and foremost, your social media product photos are the face of your brand. You must ensure product imagery matches the visual theme of what you’re trying to sell. This is true whether it’s clothing, electronics, toys, luggage, sporting goods, or anything else. Consumers expect [consistency across visual content](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content) on all channels where your product appears. Anything that doesn’t quite *fit* or *match* your visual theme can quickly produce red flags, leading to consumers scrolling right on by your ad, post, or product. This is where you want to research and determine specific styling and formatting practices for each social media network. For example, consider using Facebook to promote new products, special offers, and things like gift boxes or discounts. Conversely, you might want to develop a strategy for Instagram or Pinterest using image sets around a specific or trending theme. It might be a photo set showcasing a collection of summer [sunglasses](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear), or a tableau of photos for your new line of bicycles. ### 2 - Build a connection and interact with online shoppers Want a product marketing campaign to *go viral*? The whole point of social media is to share and connect with others. Consumers online are retweeting, sharing, liking and commenting on posts they enjoy and think others will enjoy too. This is a key element of social media, and one that leading brands are learning to capitalize on. Unlike with marketplaces like [Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon), where conversions rely more heavily on presentation, success on social media calls for consumer engagement. Obviously, your product photos matter, but remember why you (and the consumer) are using social media in the first place — to communicate. Social media product photos should engage their audience with compelling stories and questions, or anything that encourages conversation. Then, how you as a brand respond (including how quickly / often) says volumes about your brand overall. It shows consumers how responsive your brand is, along with your commitment to and involvement in your community. Ultimately, it’s another means of public relations. ### 3 - Utilize social media tools as a sales channel From e-commerce integrations to shoppable product feeds, social media has merged with e-commerce. There is [Google Shopping](https://shopping.google.com/), [Facebook Shops](https://www.facebook.com/business/shops), Instagram Shopping, and shopping you can do on [Pinterest](https://business.pinterest.com/en/shopping/). Rather than directing consumers to a product page, these channels allow for directly purchasing products on an app for the social network. Often, this is a seamless experience, with a CTA (Call to Action) which consumers can click to make a purchase. Another way to direct sales, which has been made popular by Facebook Messenger, is to set up a chatbot. These automated bots can answer customer queries, suggest products, and assist through the buying process. ### 4- Stay up-to-date with the latest product photo trends While countless trends have come and gone on social media, there are a few poised to continue making their presence felt. Flatlay and still images, while successful in the past, simply aren’t as impressive or as eye-catching as they once were. Today’s shoppers are inundated with immersive product experiences, even on social media. 360 [packaging shots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) and product spins are among these, often displayed in GIF format in a slow rotation, or on-page in a way consumers can move and interact with. Another impressive format is 3D modeling and [3D product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce). These allow consumers to experience more complex and configurable products, see moving parts in action, and deploy on-the-fly customization options. Then, many are also turning to product videos on social media. A quick video is a great way to catch attention, inform about a product, and show products in action. It’s also very easy to accomplish with modern technology, with videos now much more compact and deliverable. ### 5- Improve processes for your social media product photos Social media product marketing requires effort and involves many processes, often both internal and external. There is transforming physical stock into product imagery, uploading product photos online, making announcements, and running promotions. All of this and more has to be coordinated across all of the social media networks where your product photos appear online. The more products or new arrivals and trends you have to contend with, the more demanding your processes become. This is where some consider hiring out in-house service providers, or even investing in their own cameras and [professional product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography). Doing this allows you to streamline workflows and time-to-web, while keeping everything in-house and on schedule. ### Unlock PhotoRobot fully automated product photography At PhotoRobot, we take great pride in our line of robots for product photography and our software for automation and control. In fact, we believe we have a robot for any order, no matter the product size or volume of products to photograph. PhotoRobot is a modular solution, adaptable to scale and demand while likewise able to grow with your expectations. We can help you find the perfect set up for you (and your operations), while ensuring efficient delivery, installation, and training around the globe. Simply contact PhotoRobot to speak with one of our technical specialists. We’ll help you start rethinking production, and improving your social media product photos today. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-spin-photography-bicycles # SECTION: blog > 360-spin-photography-bicycles # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-07-19 --- # 360 Spin Photography of Bicycles with PhotoRobot Overcome the challenges of photographing objects that don’t stand on their own with this perfect setup for spin photography of bicycles. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## Quick, Easy, and Effective 360 Spin Photography of Bicycles Today, you’ll learn just how quick and effective PhotoRobot is for [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) of bicycles. Photographing bikes can be challenging, especially with 360-degree photography. Any product that doesn’t stand on its own can present these challenges. With bikes, you either have to prop them up, or they need to be suspended in the air. You can then photograph the bicycle from all angles, but you still need to combat the “wobble” products get during rotation. Thankfully, the [PhotoRobot Cube setup to photograph bicycles](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/cube-360-product-photography-bicycles) offers a simple solution in combination with our automation & control software. This setup allows us to synchronize rotation of the object in air with no wobble for the capture of still images & the 360 spin. Join us in our dark studio in the video below to see for yourself. As you can see, we’ve chosen to photograph this mountain bike by suspending it on nylon strings. [PhotoRobot’s Cube_V5](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), along with our software for automation and control, then handle all the *heavy-lifting*. Curious to learn more, from the hardware to the software automation? Keep reading to discover the magic of the PhotoRobot Cube for 360 spin photography of bicycles. ## Our 360 Product Photography Dark Studio For this photo shoot, we have a heavy-duty portal and PhotoRobot’s Cube_V5, one of our smallest yet most versatile robots. - [Introducing the Cube_V5](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube) While we can use a bicycle stand to prop up our bike, we instead use nylon strings to make it stand on its own. These nylon strings are much easier to remove in post processing than any kind of physical support or bike stand. On top of this, we can also ensure that the bike remains perfectly vertical at all times. This way we can photograph it from all angles during rotation, quickly and with minimal wobble. For photographing bicycles in 360-degrees, we simply find this setup the best. ## The PhotoRobot-Powered Studio Setup In our photography setup, we have a 1,5 m long bar equipped with several pulleys and clamps. These make life in general much easier on operators when suspending objects in the air. For one approach, you can hang the bike from an up-right position, attaching the nylon string to the handlebars and saddle. You can even combine this with one of PhotoRobot’s [turntables for spin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) mounted at the bottom. This will then synchronize with the Cube_V5 on top. ## Suspending the Bike Upside-Down for Photos Instead of photographing the bicycle in the up-right position, in the video we take a different approach. We hang the bike upside-down, attaching strings around the bike’s spokes and tires. This makes removing the nylon strings in post production even easier. All you need to do is be careful when setting up the lights, keeping in mind that they should be in the reverse position. Now, for the real PhotoRobot magic: our non-stop spin feature. Standard start-stop photography just doesn’t cut it for photographing bicycles suspended in air. Every stop makes the bike wobble for what can seem like ages, ultimately making it impossible to photograph all angles in any timely manner. ## Photographing the Bike in Non-Stop Rotation To avoid the complete nightmare of standard start-stop photography, which everybody else uses, PhotoRobot has its non-stop spin mode. In this mode, we do not pause the rotation to take each photo. Now, as the rotation begins, there will be a natural amount of wobble until the bike stabilizes. To work around this, PhotoRobot software allows you to define a set time to allow the object to self stabilize. The photoshoot itself will then start after this time, ensuring the bicycle is in perfectly smooth rotation before taking photos. In just a few seconds, PhotoRobot takes photos 360-degrees around the bicycle, and uploads them to your computer or, better yet, the cloud for immediate post processing and retouching. ## Capture, Post-Process, and Publish - in Under 2 Minutes! Even with the cool-down time for the bike to stabilize, PhotoRobot has taken 36 images 360 degrees around the product in under 2 minutes. This also includes image processing and online publishing. Our [high-resolution results](https://bit.ly/3e9HxNE) show picture-perfect details from the handlebars to the spokes, tires, pedals and frame. The nylon strings weren’t retouched here, but you can imagine the final results after a little more time with the photos. ## Customize Any Product Photography Kit [Contact PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) and discover our solutions for yourself. One of our technical strategists will help with your spin photography of bicycles, cars, or products of any shape, size, or transparency. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/grocery-product-photography # SECTION: blog > grocery-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-07-15 --- # Grocery Product Photography Solutions and OCR | PhotoRobot Discover PhotoRobot solutions for grocery product photography, optical character recognition (OCR), and photographing packaged products with labels. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## Photographing Groceries and Packaged Products Certain grocery product photography can provide challenges. This is particularly true when photographing rounded, packaged products with labels. Often, these are products that come in cans or jars, with text wrapping around the areas you need to photograph. Thankfully, [PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) can photograph groceries and other packaged products with labels extremely quick and easy. PhotoRobot can even read text on the packaging, flatten it out into straight lines, and allow you to pick and choose which text to showcase. See the Video Demo of [PhotoRobot OCR & Automatic GS1 Image Capture](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/ocr-gs1-image-capture-features). Just have a quick watch of the video above. Here, you see how PhotoRobot’s Optical Character Recognition (OCR) perfectly reads text even as it wraps around the object. You can also see how OCR is just one among many of PhotoRobot’s advanced [software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) functions. *In this post, we’ll help you learn more about* [*PhotoRobot’s OCR*](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/optical-character-recognition)*, grocery product photography, and photographing packaged products.* ## “Each product online in under 1 minute” A “larger” photoshoot day for PhotoRobot means capturing approximately 500 products in an 8-hour shift. This might sound like a tall order, and it certainly can be. For PhotoRobot, however, it just brings us to our favorite game, ***“each product online in under one minute”.*** In fact, you see in the video just how much PhotoRobot can accomplish in 1 minute. In this case, we are able to control, automate, and manage: - [**360 product photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) (with precise camera triggering, height, and angle control). - **File backup and delivery** to a computer or the cloud (for automated processing). - **Text recognition** through PhotoRobot’s OCR. - **Post image processing** (background removal, polishing, etc) in the cloud. - **Publishing reviewed photos online** and for automated delivery. PhotoRobot [automated product photography systems](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) are even designed to help us streamline workflows, including: sorting, transport, and distribution of products. ## Images directly and immediately to your computer or the cloud Again, within 1 minute, PhotoRobot rotates the object, and places the camera at the right height and selected view. The rotation of the machine in fact never pauses as the cameras trigger. PhotoRobot just freezes the movement of the grocery product at the right time. Images are then automatically downloaded to the computer. Take it a step further, and you can send your images directly to the cloud as we do in the video. This allows us to automate our processing, and also to begin quicker on our next product for photography. ## Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Text recognition, as with PhotoRobot’s OCR feature, can be very useful for grocery product photography. It’s especially so when photographing grocery products like packaged goods, cans, jars, and other rounded objects with labels that also need to be read. This is great for getting nutrition facts onto your webpage. Maybe you want to validate information you receive from suppliers. This is where OCR becomes a valuable product photography solution. Also, notice in the video how with the smaller diameter of the can, the more distortion you get in the text. It makes the text nearly impossible to read, but with PhotoRobot’s **“unwrap” tool** this is no problem. Our “unwrap” makes the can distorted while perfectly straightening out the text. Use this straightened text as a separate product image, or you can apply our OCR feature in one quick click. OCR then immediately provides you with the full transcription of the text. ## Label all your files for easy organization Next, our OCR feature also allows you to **add labels** to each piece of text. This helps us structure the text and decide which parts to keep. You might for example only want to showcase parts of the text, or you might want to ensure the majority of it is readable is your product photos. All of this extracted text can be exported in **JSON** or **XML** feeds, the same ones you’re using for your automated delivery of image content. This is PhotoRobot’s signature **“Set and Forget”** trademark, and is just one among many of the unique features which set us apart from the competition. ## Our OCR tool can recognize 100 different languages PhotoRobot’s OCR tool can recognize roughly 100 different languages, most likely including yours. After all, we pride ourselves in being a global supplier of product photography solutions, and we aim to be as inclusive and versatile as possible for our growing list of clients worldwide. ## Streamline photography of groceries and packaged products Grocery product photography and photographing packaged products doesn’t get any easier or quicker than it is with PhotoRobot. We manufacture a diverse line of product photography solutions, from the hardware to the software for complete control and automation. In addition, our cutting edge photography solutions and software gives you the ability to create interactive 360 photos, 3D animations, and impressive product videos. PhotoRobot systems are perfect for beginner and expert photographers alike, from small webshops to industrial scale photography operations. *To learn more, simply contact* [*PhotoRobot configuration specialists*](https://www.photorobot.com/contact)*today to discover our solutions for yourself. Schedule a 1:1 consultation with one of our technical strategists, and we’ll help you find the perfect tools for your grocery product photography and more.* --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/beyond-the-price # SECTION: blog > beyond-the-price # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-07-12 --- # Beyond the Price: PhotoRobot’s Value to Product Photography Discover the long-term value, scalability, and versatility of PhotoRobot solutions for product photography studios and photoshoots. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots ## Product Photography Studio Solutions: PhotoRobot vs the Rest Our clients often do a lot of research before choosing their [product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/robots). It might be for equipping a professional photography studio, a small warehouse, or even industrial scale operations. For this reason, PhotoRobot solutions are flexible, customizable, and various to meet the wide ranging needs of product photographers. No matter the product photography (jewellery, luggage, motorcycles, cars, even clothes on live fashion models), PhotoRobot has the tools. Watch a [PhotoRobot-powered photoshoot](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/product-photoshoots-demo) of capturing & publishing 3 items in under 1 minute each. PhotoRobot takes a new approach to traditional product photography techniques, accompanying hardware with software for control and automation. Our robots include [motorized turntables](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography), [robotic camera arms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robotic-arm-360-object-photography), [portable devices](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography), [mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect), and accessories. Control and automate robots, cameras, photography, post processing, publishing, and more. *It sounds like a lot, and to be honest, it is. It also often leads to many questions about PhotoRobot. In this post, we’ll answer the* ***most common*** [***FAQs*** ***about*** ***PhotoRobot***](https://www.photorobot.com/faq)***pricing*** *, and help you discover everything inside our* ***customizable packages*** *.* ## FAQ #1: What is the exact price of this or that robot? One of the most commonly asked questions we receive is about the [pricing of our robots](https://www.photorobot.com/hardware-pricing). And while we can provide estimates, it isn’t always as easy as saying this robot comes at this exact price. Rather, prices are tailored to each individual client and installation. This is due to many factors. First, we need to be sure that the robot the client is considering is the best solution for their needs. It might also be the case that the client requires custom modifications, which sometimes moves the price up or down. Then, we have to consider areas like setup and installation, training, and the geographic location of the client. Absolutely none of these are an issue for us, but they do play into the final price of each piece of hardware. ## Question #2: What comes standard in a PhotoRobot package? As soon as we know exactly *why* and *what* clients need from PhotoRobot, we then help plan *how* to realize these goals. This always involves firstly choosing the best product photography solution (at the best price) for the job. Next, we create a detailed schedule for installation, onboarding, training, support, and transport. PhotoRobot ships globally, and [can be installed on-site fully operational](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/about-photorobot-packaging-and-distribution). We integrate company systems with the hardware and software, and offer many other services to make life easier for clients. Our team of technical specialists will ensure all staff receive necessary training also on-location. Likewise, included in the pricing is the comfort of regular support from PhotoRobot. In the end, we expect clients will be using our solutions for many years to come, and we plan on supporting them every step of the way. ## FAQ #3: Why choose PhotoRobot over the competition? Obviously, if just starting with product photography, there are extremely basic solutions like $5 motorized turntables from Amazon, or the Lazy Susan. While great for learning basic principles of spin photography, they don’t make the job any easier. Then, you have PhotoRobot’s competition in [product photography solution providers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-photo-studio-manufacturers). Some competitors offer solutions at bargain-bin prices. However, they fail to live up to expectations after you have their product in-house. They claim to be all-in-one, long-term solutions, but are often very limiting compared to PhotoRobot. Where PhotoRobot really pays off in ROI is here. All of our hardware is built durable and sturdy for long-term usability and easy maintenance. PhotoRobot packages are highly customizable, and we also let you see exactly what you’re getting in-house **before** you make a decision. Keep in mind, it isn’t the hardware and software we’re selling. It’s the overall solution. And while we do produce hardware, software, and firmware, we do this all in mutual cooperation with clients to create the perfect solution for them. This way we can meet expected results (including production and post-processing times, speed, quality, and more) — all working around clients’ ideas, goals, and budget. ### The Bottomline In the end, we know all of our clients are considering ROI. This is why we design solutions for long-term usability, functionality, and scalability. Our tools are constantly evolving and under active development, both internally and with our clients. If you’d like to learn more about product photography solutions or book a PhotoRobot demo for yourself, [contact PhotoRobot sales specialists](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) today. We’ll show you how PhotoRobot streamlines workflows, reduces time to web, and makes it easy even for amateurs to produce excellent product photos. No more hiring out various teams, or outsourcing work. Discover how to handle all of your product photography easily, effectively, and in-house with PhotoRobot. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/improve-product-page-conversions # SECTION: blog > improve-product-page-conversions # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-07-08 --- # How to Improve Product Page Conversions Join PhotoRobot to discover how to improve product page conversions while driving more traffic to your products online. - Categories: Product Photography ## Compelling Product Content Improves Product Page Conversions In this post, we’ll share how compelling product content improves product page conversions and drives more traffic to the places your products appear online. This is increasingly important for companies today, with [shopping trends](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/brick-and-mortar-to-online-retail) shifting heavily towards e-commerce. There have also been significant spikes in shoppers researching products online before making final purchases at stores. This was true even before consumer behavior started responding to the global pandemic, but has now been magnified considerably. This is where digital product content takes center stage. It helps bridge the gaps between online and offline shopping, and is becoming one of the more significant sales drivers in light of current trends. Let’s look now at how to create more compelling product content, and at how this can improve your product page conversions. ## Evidence suggests that engaging product content is increasingly vital To illustrate the current state of e-commerce, let’s look at some of the key findings from an Avionos data report from 2019 on [Consumer Expectations](https://www.avionos.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/Avionos_B2C_Datareportv3.3.pdf). ### 1. Online shoppers expect 5-star commerce experiences With so many brands and marketplaces to choose from online, this should come as no surprise. Consumers now have virtually endless options available at their fingertips, and they won’t hesitate to abandon a company or retailer altogether. In fact, **73%** (nearly 1 in 3) of shoppers admitted they were likely to avoid brands after a single bad experience. This illustrates the importance of not only the commerce experience, but also of being able to stand out in the online competition as a trustworthy vendor. Creating engaging product content is one way to get attention, but in order to improve conversions on your product pages your content must be as informative as it is eye-catching. Online shoppers are looking to research products, and they expect product pages to provide the information they need to make confident and informed decisions. ### 2. Individualized product content is more valuable Another critical finding was that individualized product experiences improve conversions on product pages. Of those in the survey, **78%** stated they were more likely to buy from a company that allows them to personalize products online. This was true even when comparing two digital brands or retailers that are for the most part identical. When there’s no distinguishing factors that make one brand or retailer stand out more than another, consumers look to how they can personalize products on the product pages. Features for product design or color customization help shoppers feel more in control, and to personalize products to their own specifications and preferences. This gives consumers the feeling their product is “unique”, setting the item apart from any competition that doesn’t offer personalized experiences on their product pages. ### 3. Younger generations demand more unique product experiences Evidence also suggests that if you want to improve product page conversions, you’ll have to cater to the upcoming generations. These generations’ shopping behaviors revolve around their affinity for technology. They’re shopping on mobile and on tablets, on desktop and from one device to the next. This presents challenges for product pages, as they have to be seamless and responsive across any device consumers use for shopping. Of those in the survey, **69%** (over two-thirds) believe digital brands and retailers need to be more aware of the devices they use. The number rises considerably among newer generations, with **83%** of Gen Z and **84%** of millennials stating the same. They want [consistent product page experiences](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content) across all the platforms and devices they use to shop online, encouraging brands and retailers to keep up with their device preferences. ### Compelling product content drives confident commerce The next factor to improving product page conversions is contributing to confident commerce. In e-commerce, this means ensuring that product pages are a selling point rather than a breaking point. After all, in an online sale, your product photos are your most valuable asset for conveying information to help consumers decide whether or not to buy your product. A [Digital Commerce 360 survey](https://www.digitalcommerce360.com/2020/06/26/the-shopper-speaks-the-pandemic-is-a-gift-to-ecommerce/) even showed that at the time **45%** of shoppers had visited product pages that didn’t provide enough images for them to adequately visualize products. That amounts to a large number of consumers who we can safely assume did their shopping elsewhere. It also demonstrates that, as much as possible, you have to replicate the in-store shopping experience of physically inspecting products in hand. Multi-angle still images are one way to do this, while technology like [360 product viewers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/examples-3d-and-360-product-viewers) and [visual product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce) offer even more immersive and informative product experiences. In fact, simply deploying product spins has shown to increase conversions on product pages by up to **47%**. ### Impressive product experiences drive awareness, engagement, and trust Product pages that emphasize high-quality product experiences simply translate to higher conversions in today’s world. The stronger the product content, the more likely you are to not only drive more traffic to your product page, but also to keep traffic on-page longer. Strong product pages in this way also help build brand awareness and develop trust through SEO-friendly and consumer-centric content. [Packshots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), 360-degree spins, GIFs, and configurable 3D models all provide value to the consumer by ensuring their expectations of products live up to reality. This in turn provides value to the brand in less returns overall, and, often, steadily improving conversions on the product page. ### Upgrade your product content production today At [PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/), our mission revolves around product photography for e-commerce and developing solutions to help clients realize success with their product pages. We know that simply having a strong online presence isn’t enough in today’s world; your product content has to impress, and it has to stand out in the growing competition. To learn more about PhotoRobot solutions and how to start improving conversions on your product page today, contact PhotoRobot to [schedule a free 1:1 consultation](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) with one of our team's technical strategists. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/boost-conversions-with-product-content # SECTION: blog > boost-conversions-with-product-content # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-07-02 --- # How to Boost Conversions with Your Product Content E-commerce is a game of product visualization, and much of it revolves around boosting conversions with product content. In this post, we’ll share 3 valuable tips to ensure higher conversions anywhere your product content appears online, from webshops to online marketplaces and e-commerce vendors. - Categories: Product Photography ## 3 Ways to Leverage Product Content to Boost Conversions Producing engaging content from pure white background [packshots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) to [360 product spins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) is crucial to success in [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography). In fact, there are a number of ways you can leverage your product content to drive engagement and in the end boost conversions. But, *how many images should you have per item? And what does your product content need to show? What about the background, and image requirements for Amazon and other eCommerce marketplaces?* These are the most common questions when it comes to using product photography to boost conversions. And with shopping trends now shifting heavily online, brands the globe over are revisiting their online presence to again ask these questions. To help, we’ve written a quick guide on how to boost conversions with your product content. These tips apply whether you’re looking to start a webshop or simply trying to boost conversions with existing content. Keep reading for 3 tips to help boost conversions with your product content, and to learn more about how [PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/) is assisting clients in these ventures. ### 1 - Reliable product content translates to reliable products Online, your product content is more than just a representation of the product; it’s a representation of your brand. This may even go without saying but calls for repeating: you want [professional product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/professional-photography-for-websites) on your website and anywhere your product appears online. Images must be of the highest quality and resolution, with deep fields of zoom and / or spin features for shoppers to engage with. Visual product content has the potential to replicate the in-store experience of physically inspecting an item in-hand, and you want your product content to do nothing less. Ultimately, your product content will either drive confident e-commerce, or it’ll send consumers to shop elsewhere. You want your product content to bridge the gap between online and offline shopping, showcasing products in their best light and from all angles of interest. ### 2 - Display all relevant angles and views of your product Another way to ensure your product content boosts conversions is by leaving nothing to the imagination. Put yourself in the customer’s shoes. If there are any questions they might have, your product content needs to answer them. After all, there’s no in-store sales representative to help shoppers discover your product. This means the product content needs to highlight all of the relevant product features consumers are considering before making their purchase. - [7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo) It might be a deep field of zoom into the sole of a pair of trainers’, the studs on a leather jacket, or interior pockets of a handbag. It might be reflective or transparent [eyewear](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear) or a fashion product better visualized on a [live model](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models). Whatever it is, your product content should answer any questions or requests consumers might have by showing them all relevant angles and views of the product. ### 3 - Exercise consistency in visual content Finally, [consistency in visual content](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content) across all channels where your product appears online is critical. If you choose a theme for product backgrounds, light settings, or image styling, deploy that theme consistently and everywhere. Consistent high-quality product content assists consumers in overcoming initial hesitations, and feeling more confident about purchases. It also helps them better familiarize themselves with your product and your brand. All of these factors play into reducing overall returns, while consistency in product content also builds brand trust, which ultimately leads to boosting conversions with your product content. ### PhotoRobot: Helping clients excel in product content At PhotoRobot, our entire line of robots and software are dedicated to helping clients achieve excellent product photography for objects of any size. We have motorized turntables, portable devices, mannequins, camera arms, and software for full product content automation and control in the studio. If you haven’t already discovered our full line of solutions for product content production, editing, and publishing, [contact PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) to learn more. You can schedule a free 1:1 consultation to meet our robots, and find better strategies to boosting conversions with your product content. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photography-sunglasses # SECTION: blog > product-photography-sunglasses # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-06-21 --- # Product Photography of Sunglasses with PhotoRobot Shooting product photography of sunglasses can be a challenge. Eyewear and other reflective items require a certain level of expertise. You need to master lighting setups, special photography techniques, and image post processing. In this article, we’ll share some tips for product photography of sunglasses, and look at getting the most out of your product photos for fashion e-commerce. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## 3 Essential Tips for Product Photography of Sunglasses Product photography of sunglasses can present numerous challenges. There is working around reflective surfaces, highlighting tiny details in the right light, and capturing the best angles to [showcase eyewear online](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear) and in print. When selling eyewear exclusively online, there is even more emphasis on the product photography. The consumers can’t physically inspect items in store, so the product photos have to provide more than just a realistic representation of the product. They have to allow the consumer to truly experience the product, as if it were in-hand. To accomplish this, brands deploy several approaches to [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) of sunglasses. Rather than lifestyle photography, nowadays it’s multi-angle still images and [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). The product photography itself requires [professional photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography), oftentimes at least a small team, and knowing techniques for photographing sunglasses and other reflective objects. Discover our techniques in the [Centerless Table Eyewear Photography Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-eyewear-photography-demo). ## Tip #1: Eliminating reflections in product photography The first essential tip to product photography of sunglasses is beware of reflections. Sunglasses have reflective surfaces such as the lenses and sometimes the frames. Capturing subjects like these perfectly often requires the right equipment, some props, and a few special techniques photographers employ. First, you’ll need **the right table** for product photography of eyewear. PhotoRobot’s [Centerless_Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) is a welcome studio companion for this, providing all the functionality and versatility you need for multi-angle still shots or 360-degree photography of eyewear. Next, you need a few props: possibly **a white cloth** to put under the sunglasses, some **white and black cards**, and **something to stand the cards** in position. The background as well as the surface of the table should be white, which is easily accomplished with the Centerless Table’s built-in backdrop. The white of the cards can be used to reflect into the sunglasses, while black cards can add negative fill if reflections are too strong or in unwanted areas. Photographers can experiment with the position of the cards, standing them closer or further away until they eliminate all unwanted reflections. The goal is to have clear edges and fine details, all without any reflections distracting away from the product. ## Tip #2: How to add context to product photos Another tip to consider when photographing sunglasses for e-commerce is adding context to your product photos. This is where you get a chance to really present not only your product but also your brand to consumers. Shoot some **branding** alongside the product (if only for an extra shot in the online showcase). It might be a photo including **the case** of the sunglasses. Maybe it’s [**packaging photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), or a product photo next to the box with your brand’s **logo** on it. Whatever it is, show consumers that you’re willing to go the extra distance to inform them about your product and everything they get with it. Just remember, the sunglasses remain the star of your photoshoot. While you shouldn’t shy away from including some branding in your shots, be sure anything you include doesn’t distract away from the product experience. A glance of the logo or a little bit of branding is more than enough to present your brand while keeping primary focus on the product. ## Tip #3: How to find the perfect angles for your hotspots The final tip involves experimenting with angles to find the perfect “hotspots” for your product photos. Different angles will produce different colors and effects on your sunglasses. Experiment with close-ups to capture intricate details, or aim for a shallow depth of field to highlight different aspects of the product. It might even make sense to shoot a quick product video to see how your studio’s light moves across the lens and down the frame. This can help you see how the colors change from angle to angle, and assist in planning the perfect still shots of your sunglasses. If using PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table, you’ll have a variety of advantages for this, from the rotating turntable to camera control and image post processing. The clear glass plate of the turntable means there is camera access from bottom as well as top-views, and the rotation of the plate allows for consistent image capturing from all sides. It’s the perfect studio companion for capturing multi-angle still shots or 360-degree photography of sunglasses. ## Discover more tips for rapid, robotized automated photography At PhotoRobot, we know the importance of product photography cannot be stressed enough. Online, your images are just as much your products as they are your brand. This is why we develop e-commerce solutions, including robotics and software for full product photography automation. We have a line of robots for any size product and love to share tips and techniques for getting the most out of your imagery for online sales. Learn more about product photography of sunglasses and other reflective products with PhotoRobot today. [Contact PhotoRobot sales specialists](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) to book a custom demo to judge by the production speeds. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photos # SECTION: blog > 360-degree-product-photos # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-05-27 --- # 360° Product Photos: Enriching the Sales Experience 360° product photos are a valuable asset in e-commerce and retail. Not only do they grab attention, they allow consumers to get a real “feel” for products. In this quick guide, we’ll discuss 360° product photography, and share how to use 360° product photos to enrich the sales experience. - Categories: Product Photography ## Why take advantage of 360° product photos? If you really want to show a product from all its sides, there are few better ways to do it than with 360° product photos. [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) (also known as “spin photography”) allows you to create an interactive animation of an object that revolves around itself, or that consumers can spin manually on web pages and apps. Creating 360° product photos requires high-resolution static images from different product positions. This series of images (known as a “spinset”) is then stitched together by special software to make the object appear to rotate on either a vertical or horizontal axis. Product experiences like these are a great way to grab attention, whether for [fashion photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing), [sunglasses](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear), [automobiles](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/carousel-5000-360-photography-cars) or any lifestyle items really. They also serve to provide consumers with information that can help them make important decisions. This is extremely crucial in [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), and perhaps more so now that shopping trends are shifting away from brick-and-mortar stores to webshops and online marketplaces. ## Images are your most valuable asset in e-commerce When you only have [8 seconds](https://time.com/3858309/attention-spans-goldfish/) (if that) to keep the average online shopper’s attention, your product photography will make or break your bottom line. You need to grab attention, make an impression, and give shoppers a reason to buy products. A well-placed spinning GIF or a [360-degree product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) is a great way to do this. It’s even better if the consumer has complete control over the spin experience, from the rotation to the zoom. On-page controls for color and design customization, product configuration, or exploding views and [product animation](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/animation) further elevate the customer experience. In all of these ways, 360° product images help consumers get a better “feel” for products online. Consumers can inspect the product almost as if it were in their own hands. The higher the quality and richer the detail, the closer you get to replicating the in-store shopping experience, which, after all, should be the main goal of your product photos. ## Improve the customer experience The most important use case of spin photography is **improving the customer experience**. 360° product photos answer questions by conveying helpful information about products. Moreover, they give consumers a feeling of complete control over the decision making process, without any pressure like you might experience in store. This means, ultimately, your 360° product photos have to do the selling for you. There’s no sales team on-hand to assist or answer questions. It’s really just the consumer and your product photography, maybe a brief product description, and the website where it appears. To really improve the customer experience, you thus have to ensure that all of your product images are high-resolution, rich in detail, and capable of truly helping the consumer. After all, the more information you provide, the more comfortable they will be shopping at your online store. ## Leverage 360° product images online, in videos, and in print Beyond improving the customer experience, 360° product photos are highly scalable. The images you capture in spin photography provide a repository of visual assets you can recycle, reuse, and repurpose for marketing your product in a multitude of ways. Use them nearly anywhere. - **Webshops:** Give shoppers a 360-degree view of each product, either on the web or in the mobile app. - **Product videos:** Transform your spinsets into quick product videos, saving you time and costs in recording. - **In-store displays:** Place 360° product photos and product spins on screens in physical locations, such as in your stores or shopping malls. - **Advertising campaigns:** Create GIFs for social media and online marketplaces, use short and long videos, snippets, banner advertisements, and more. - **B2C and B2B sales presentations:** 360° product images are also a valuable asset when prototyping products or showing off final designs for partners or end customers. - **Catalogues and in print:** The high-quality images that go into creating product spins are also useful in enriching print product advertisements, such as catalogues and brochures. ## Why 360° product photos are more effective - Product spins replicate the in-store shopping experience. - 360° photos allow shoppers to inspect products almost as if they are physically in-hand. - They provide valuable and more information to consumers. - Spin photography boosts purchasing confidence and leads to less returns overall. - Interactive elements increase on-page time and boost SEO. - 360° photos support the buying experience while likewise reinforcing your brand image. ## How to shoot 360° product photos To capture the perfect 360-degree product images, you use all of the tools you would expect with traditional product photography. - Utilize the right camera for the job. - Invest in [professional product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography). - Find the [right lighting setup](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography) for 360° photography. - Prepare the available space to [set up your workstation](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-360-product-photography-studio). When shooting, you then need to take at least 24 images (sometimes 36 or more) around the product to snap enough photos to create a spinset. The more photos, the higher the quality. After the photos are stitched together, they then need to be post-processed and approved before publishing to the web or for use in other formats. Obviously, you can hire professionals to manage this entire process for you, but there are also solutions like PhotoRobot that make all of this quick and easy even for amateur photographers to accomplish. ### PhotoRobot: Professional 360 Product Photography Modules & Software At PhotoRobot, our mission is to aid clients in streamlining product photography workflows, enriching product imagery, and reducing time-to-web for product content and media. Our line of robots and software support full automation and control for product photography from multi-angle still images to 360° photos, and scanning products to build 3D models. If you like to discover more leveraging PhotoRobot to improve your 360° photos and enhance your sales experience, contact us to [schedule a free 1:1 PhotoRobot consultation](https://www.photorobot.com/contact). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/content-creation-and-marketing-2021 # SECTION: blog > content-creation-and-marketing-2021 # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-05-24 --- # E-Commerce Content Creation and Content Marketing in 2021 2021 will see more competition than any year on record in e-commerce content creation and content marketing. From SMEs to major brands and retailers, everybody is pivoting focus to their online presence to meet the evolving needs of consumers. In this post, we’ll look at what today’s consumers need from your content, and how to utilize content creation and marketing as either an exercise in cost-savings or as a survival strategy in 2021. - Categories: Product Photography ## 5 tips for eCommerce Content Creation and Marketing With the sudden and drastic shift in consumer behaviors and growing demand for [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), post 2021 has seen a boom in digital product content creation and marketing. The “new normal” of the pandemic transformed the ability to shop online from non-essential to essential seemingly overnight, and the trend remains even after lockdowns eased the world over. This has forced SMEs, major brands, and even brick-and-mortar retailers to reassess their online presence, and how they engage today’s consumers. For larger businesses with enough cash flow, this doesn’t pose as much of a threat as it does to SMEs. These businesses now find themselves at a “make-or-break” moment, needing content creation and marketing more than ever. They also need to deliver on often slim or dissipating budgets, and to address [post pandemic change drivers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/post-pandemic-change-drivers) in their industry. Let’s look now at how some are doing this, and at tips to improve your e-commerce content creation and marketing in 2021. ### 1. Monetize all available resources With businesses around the globe looking for ways to cut costs and improve engagement, now might be the time to look to others for inspiration. Somewhere in your network of partners (or among the competition), somebody is finding opportunity in adversity and succeeding where others are not. Maybe you’ve had to shift from a majority of brick-and-mortar sales to mostly online operations. Your shop is no longer making the sales it once did, and you’re spending more and more on costly returns. Even worse, traffic to your webpage and conversions are in decline. It might feel like the apocalypse is fast approaching, but just know many others are in the same situation. Somewhere in your network, there is a business responding well to the current market demands. Look at how those in similar industries are responding, and look closely at their e-commerce content creation and content marketing. Do they have better product images? What stands out on their page? How do they actively engage consumers? Answering questions like these might help you better monetize all of your resources and find the inspiration you need. ### 2. Look for opportunity in adversity Let’s face it, the current changes in consumer behaviors are here to stay for some time yet. Some even say permanently, but really it’s anybody’s guess. Either way, businesses now must face the reality that a lot more shopping is going to be conducted online. This means business ventures in e-commerce need to pivot focus onto product content creation for the web, and to content marketing. Sometimes all it takes is a well-timed marketing campaign on the right sales channel to trigger that next conversion. For many retailers and webshops, this calls for investing in professional product photography, whether it’s the [equipment to outfit a studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) or a team to manage everything. When your primary sales channel is the web, **your product photos become your product**, and they can’t leave anything to the imagination. ### 3. Focus on quality content When consumers can’t physically inspect a product, your online product content needs to do more than simply convey helpful information. More importantly, it needs to replicate the [in-store](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography) shopping experience, providing a realistic view and *feel* of the product. This is especially true for products like [clothing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect) and [footwear](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear), or anything that shoppers can truly benefit from trying on or inspecting in-hand before making a purchase. The same is true for furniture, or complex luxury items like watches and jewellery. Consumers want to examine products like these from all angles and depths of zoom. They also appreciate seeing moving parts in action. The same is true for a wide range of products, as e-commerce consumers look for content creation and marketing that emphasizes quality. For the consumer, it helps them find answers to questions and be confident in making purchases. For the brand, it shows you value the consumer experience, and overall that you value your product. ### Types of product content in e-commerce While there are many types of “content” in e-commerce, let’s look to the categories relating to product photography. Among many, there are the most basic — **lifestyle** and **packshot** photography. Lifestyle photography shows subjects in action (think of a photo of a chef in the kitchen to market a restaurant venture). On the other hand, packshot photography focuses on comprehensive views of products. In 2021, this includes **multi-angle still shots**, [**spin photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography), or using photogrammetry scanning techniques to build [**3D models**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing). Software such as a [360 product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) or [3D product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce) make it easy for businesses to host product content online. These allow direct integration of spin and 3D content with websites and marketplaces, and opens marketing opportunities across all available e-commerce channels. In this regard, spin photos, 3D models, GIFs, and product videos are proving to be valuable assets for drawing attention to brands and ultimately converting conversions. ### 4. Prioritize e-commerce content creation and marketing in 2021 Be aware that e-commerce content creation and marketing is a long-term strategy. You don’t simply build your online presence somewhere like LinkedIn or YouTube and forget about it. Somehow, your new product content needs to regularly reach the consumer, and this is where the content marketing comes into play. If you want to see meaningful ROI on your content creation efforts, you have to find a way into the already crowded virtual space. Extending your network and connections is one way to go about this, but you also have to consider **product advertising campaigns**, as well as additional **marketplaces** and **retailers**. You have to join your consumers everywhere they frequent online. This involves ensuring that your brand and anywhere your product images appear online shows up in search results (SEO), and that you have [consistent visual content](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content) across all platforms. Remember, quality and now even consistency is key to visibility online, as well as to establishing brand image and trust in retail dominated by online shopping. ### 5. Ensure the most from you visual content creation and marketing While adopting and following a visual content creation and marketing strategy in e-commerce might seem a daunting task, remember that you can always start small. Even seemingly simple product content and marketing approaches can have significant impacts on your business. It might be optimizing and repurposing existing content for social media campaigns, or deploying a new product viewer for your webshop. Maybe it’s investing in professional product [photography solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-360-product-photography-studio) and services. Anything that helps online shoppers get a better overall understanding of your products and your brand is valuable in e-commerce content creation and marketing in 2021. The key is to regularly reassess your efforts, look at how individual content and marketing approaches are performing, and make adjustments accordingly along the way. ### Stay informed, get equipped How businesses respond to the challenges of e-commerce content creation and marketing in 2021 will ultimately define their success. There are more companies than ever depending on successful online product marketing and sales, so the competition is strong. This means more than ever the emphasis is on delivering high-quality product experiences to wider audiences. At PhotoRobot, we aim to help businesses get the most out of their product photography, no matter the budget or the project. If you’re looking for simple solutions for a small webshop, or industrial scale equipment for high-volume photoshoots, we know our tools. We’ll help you get the most of your existing content and start looking to the future. [Contact PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) today to discover our line of robots and software solutions for content creation and marketing. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/post-pandemic-change-drivers # SECTION: blog > post-pandemic-change-drivers # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-05-20 --- # Post Pandemic Change Drivers in E-Commerce Post pandemic change drivers in e-commerce have provided many lessons across the market. From brick-and-mortar retailers to e-commerce, SMEs and major brands alike have had to quickly rethink how they engage consumers. Behavior and shopping habits have changed, and now for the first time ever the ability to shop online has become essential. In this post, we’ll examine the main post pandemic change drivers for e-commerce, and look at how brands are finding opportunity in adversity. - Categories: Product Photography ## E-Commerce in a global pandemic: lessons and change drivers 2020 upended lives around the world, changing daily routines and habits in drastic and sudden ways. Everything from what we do, to how we conduct business, and how we shop has had to change almost overnight. For retail, consumers are flocking to online shopping. The [transformation](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/brick-and-mortar-to-online-retail) has forced even traditionally brick-and-mortar stores to focus on strengthening their online presence. On the other hand, brands without one are scrambling to cushion the impact of plummeting sales at physical locations. Some say these shifts will be permanent, but truly it is anybody’s guess. For now at least, the fact of the matter is that in a global pandemic e-commerce is not just a luxury, it’s essential. Let’s look now at the primary post pandemic change drivers to e-commerce, and deeper into how brands are leveraging [professional product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/professional-photography-for-websites) to find opportunity in adversity. ### Post pandemic change drivers, from businesses to the consumer A change driver is an event relating to either internal or external pressure that shapes change in an organization. This might include strategy, roadmaps, operations, services, and more. In e-commerce, **the main post pandemic change drivers can include but are not limited to the following.** - Consumer needs, perceptions, and expectations - Technology - The socio-economic environment - Supply chains, delivery, and fulfillment Any business in today’s climate will have to address these primary post pandemic change drivers. For many, it might even be a *make-or-break* moment. Only by catering to the current demands of the times will brands cushion any declines in revenue they might be facing. ### Actions now will become valuable lessons for the future Brands and businesses who overcome post pandemic challenges will discover vital lessons in flexibility and sustainability. However, the sad fact of the matter is that many SMEs and small businesses won’t survive post pandemic. In fact, many around the globe have already gone out of business, citing Covid-19 among the primary reasons. How quickly and efficiently businesses address the change drivers, particularly in e-commerce, will ultimately determine their chance for success in the current market. Consumer behaviors and shopping habits are shifting rapidly, so we all will have to learn as we progress. This means leveraging all available assets, adjusting strategies accordingly, and agile planning. ### Proving to consumers that it’s more than “just a brand” With any business, people want to buy from real people. It’s not the brand; it’s the idea and the face of it. It’s the real value of the product, its usefulness, and the thought put into it. In stores, you have a sales team or a representative to convey this information. Online, your product content has to do it. Your product content has to speak for your brand. It also needs to show the brand is authentic and consumer-centric, rather than profit-centric. Remember, consumers still want a face to the brand, even when shopping online. This means your product images should be just as helpful as a sales team would be in-store. They should convey all of the information about products that consumers are looking for, leave nothing to the imagination, and in general act as a change drive to prove you’re more than “just a brand”. ### Putting the consumer at the center of your business model In e-commerce, putting consumers at the driving wheel has always been critical. Strong product content puts consumers in control of the product experience, replicating the feeling of actually being in-store as much as possible. Post pandemic, this can be crucial for sales, especially when dealing with products that consumers are used to physically inspecting before making a purchase. This is where brands are leveraging professional product photography such as [spin product images](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography), [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-photography-3d-models-for-e-commerce), and even [AR / VR shopping apps](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-shopping-apps-2020) to give consumers that in-store feel online. Professional product content allows for detailed inspection of even intricate or complex products, deep fields of zoom, and high-resolution imagery to show consumers you care about their product experience. ### Embracing professional product photography Even if it’s by utilizing online marketplaces like Amazon or Ebay, there is no excuse in today’s market not to establish an online presence with professional product photography. When you can’t host images on your own website, online marketplaces can still host for you. They support professional product images, spin photography, and even 3D models. If you have your own webshop, you might want to consider investing in some [equipment and software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) for professional in-house product photography. In a post pandemic market, with more consumers online than ever, there can be high ROI for not only the tools but also for the product images you create. The emphasis now is on digital product presentation and immersive product experiences. These are some of the most significant post pandemic change drivers and e-commerce, and the situation might likely be like this for some time yet. ### Discover Modern Solutions to Modern Photography Problems At PhotoRobot, our mission is to help businesses get the most out of their product photography. Our line of robots and suite of software for automation and control simplify processes, streamline workflows, and ensure you get picture-perfect product images online quick and easy. To learn more about PhotoRobot or leveraging product photography as a post pandemic change driver in e-commerce, contact us today to [schedule a free PhotoRobot consultation](https://www.photorobot.com/contact). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/macro-lens-product-photography # SECTION: blog > macro-lens-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-05-11 --- # Using a Macro Lens for Product Photography In product photography, capturing photos of small items with microscopic details requires special equipment and a macro lens for high-quality results. This type of camera lens is for photographing even the most minute details of micro products or products with micro components. These include items like microchips, circuitry components, earrings, jewellery, and any smaller product in general. In this post, join PhotoRobot to look closer at macro lens product photography, and to discover some of PhotoRobot’s solutions for improving your photography of small objects. - Categories: Product Photography ## Macro Lens Product Photography: Professional Photos of Micro Products Macro lens product photography allows you to capture photos of extremely small objects in sharp focus, detail-rich quality, and peerless resolution. This is especially true for products with details and features so small they are nearly invisible to the naked eye. Maybe it’s something like a microchip. Or it’s a multi-faceted diamond ring. In both cases, and with other types of small or intricate products, a macro lens helps photographers capture and convey the finest details that make products unique. If it’s a small or complex product, truly any approach to product photography can benefit from a macro lens. Use macro lenses for creating still, multi-angle, or [360-degree imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery). For even better results, support your macro lens photography with devices like [PhotoRobot’s motorized turntables](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) and [multi-camera configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam). ## The difference between standard, wide-angle, and macro lenses While standard and wide-angle lenses do have their place in [product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs), if you’re shooting extremely small or complex products, you need a macro lens. A macro lens is basically a magnifying glass for cameras. They are optimized for shooting microscopic subjects and capable of capturing extreme close-ups. With a 1:1 magnification ratio and a minimum focal distance of 12’’, the sensor of a macro lens produces *larger-than-life* imagery of the target. On the other hand, standard camera lenses are more often for lifestyle product photography and shooting larger products that don’t require extreme close-ups. Standard lenses limit the depth of zoom your images can reach, losing more and more focus the closer you try to get to the object. For some products, this isn’t a problem. For those with extremely small features, however, your best bet is going with a macro lens. Wide-angle lenses are often best for landscape as well as lifestyle photography. If you’re capturing product photos of a car on the road, or a tennis player using your racket, then you might use a wide-angle lens. These provide a wider field of view without having to distance the camera further from the subject. They’re terrible at capturing fine details, however, producing low-resolution and blurry imagery at deeper depths of zoom. ## What types of products benefit most from macro lens photography? Any product that has extremely small or intricate design features calls for macro lens photography. These are often technical products, electrical goods, industrial or automotive parts, and products like designer jewellery. Imagery for products like these, especially in [photography for eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), need to provide consumers with a complete view of the product. This includes extreme close-ups for aspects like connections, wiring, machinery components, or any elements essential or unique to the product. Highlighting these features not only ensures you are adequately informing consumers about your product, but also that your product experience leaves nothing to the imagination. ## How to accomplish 360-degree product photography with a macro lens Producing [360 degree product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) with a macro lens oftentimes requires special automated equipment for better precision and savings in time and effort. Products need to be on a steady surface with a smooth rotation so that cameras can capture all 360 degrees of the product. Products also need to be perfectly centered in each photo, while cameras need to capture all bottom and top-view angles. Motorized turntables and multiple camera configurators are particularly useful for this, working well in combination with macro lens photography. PhotoRobot’s [Centerless_Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table), for example, ensures cameras remain on the absolute center of rotation throughout the entire photoshoot. It also provides machine-level accuracy and precision, and allows operators to automate repeatable tasks for higher volume photoshooting of similar types of products. ## Want to get even more out of your macro lens photography? At PhotoRobot, we know that product photographers have a wide range of needs, from the camera equipment to the post-production. This is especially true when shooting smaller and micro size products, where precision and accuracy is key. If you want to learn more about macro lens photography with PhotoRobot, [contact PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) to discover our solutions for product photography and image hosting firsthand. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-and-3d-imagery # SECTION: blog > 360-and-3d-imagery # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-05-10 --- # Make the Most of Your Brand’s 360° and 3D Imagery 360° and 3D product imagery is highly scalable. These assets become valuable resources for new product content. It might be videos, brochures, social media engagement, or email and marketing campaigns. In this post, we’ll share our top 3 strategies for making the most of your brand’s 360° and 3D product imagery. - Categories: Product Photography ## 3 Ways to Maximize the Value of 360° and 3D Product Imagery When trying to make the most of your brand’s [360° product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), there are 3 simple strategies to help you succeed. These include **recycling existing imagery** for future marketing campaigns, **using new file formats** for engagement, and **converting spinsets** into product videos. Many e-tailers, manufacturers, and distributors often overlook this potential, however. They simply don’t realize how scalable spin and 3D photography is in today’s world. The amount of photos that go into creating product spins alone, not to mention when scanning for [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), provides a wealth of visual assets for future marketing and sales needs. This allows brands to not only scale up their product content, but to do so in a time and budget-friendly manner. It also provides a wealth of opportunities to spruce up not just product pages, but rather all of your product content in both digital and print forms. Keep reading for the top 3 strategies you can use to make the most of your brand’s 360° and 3D product imagery. ## Cherry-pick still images from spinsets To capture the entire picture, let’s start first with the process of shooting for 360° and 3D product imagery. 360° spins and 3D product photos are nothing more than a series of still images known as a **spinset**. Each spinset is compiled together and then distributed via a [360 product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) (rich media viewer) that produces a fluid, frictionless 360-degree product experience. On average, 360° product spins consist of **24 still images**, snapping photos on one row at every 15 degrees of rotation around the product. [3D product spins](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/multi-row-360) on the other hand require more photos of the product, on average consisting of 24 images at every 15 degrees on two or sometimes three rows. This amounts to 48 / 72 images for each 3D product spin. Add that up, and it’s at the very least 24 images you now possess of the product at different angles. These visual assets can then be individually cherry-picked, edited, outlined, resized, and reformatted for reuse in marketing and sales materials. Better still, you also don’t have to worry about your imagery complying to industry standards. Snapping products in spin ensures you meet [GS1 Guidelines](https://www.gs1.org/standards/gs1-product-image-specification-standard/current-standard#2-Marketing-image-types+2-2-Rendered-images), and that you adhere to product imaging best practices. ## Engage consumers with GIF file formats Another way to make the most of your brand’s 360° and 3D product imagery is to leverage it for enhanced marketing assets. Spinsets in particular are easy to transform into resource-friendly GIF file formats to display on the web, in presentations, through email campaigns and on social media channels. GIFs are considerably powerful visuals for communicating elements of your product like design, features, and moving parts. They are also quite easy to build when you already have spinsets. There are various online tools for this, some for free and others that you pay for, and as soon as you have your GIFs there are then endless possibilities of where you can use them. ## Examples of where to leverage your GIFs - **Landing pages** — Greet visitors to your website and draw attention to your products with a subtle, resource-efficient GIF that won’t slow page loading times at all. - **Campaigns for social media —** Marketers know very well the challenge of capturing attention on social media. Generate more engagement with product GIFs on advertising hotspots like Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, LinkedIn, etc. - **Email campaigns —** Trying to improve your email outreach? Impress your mailing list by attaching an animated GIF to that email. - **B2C and B2B sales presentations —** If you really want to impress your audience, insert some GIFs directly into your presentation slides. Animated product spins are an extremely effective way at showcasing your product, even without internet connection. ## Convert spinsets into product videos Finally, to really make the most of your brand’s 360° and 3D product imagery, consider transforming some of your spinsets into product videos. Videos are not only extremely effective at communicating products to wider audiences, they are also in high demand. There is a wealth of research to support this, showing that product videos have a serious impact on e-commerce conversion rates. Traditionally, creating a product video requires a lot of time and money, but this isn’t the case when you have a repository of visual assets from spinsets. This imagery is easy to compile together into impressive product videos, amounting to significant savings in time and workload. There are a wide range of tools for video editing available, enabling even amateurs to quickly and easily create remarkable product videos. Videos can be a great tool for online marketplaces like Amazon and Shopify. This is especially true in regards to vendors, who might use videos to enrich their product content or to pull still images from each video. By using the same spinsets, these vendors ensure the product photos they upload immediately comply with the marketplace’s image standards. ## To discover more product photography tricks of the trade At PhotoRobot, developing product photography solutions isn’t simply our mission, it’s our passion. Our line of robots and their suite of software for control and automation are testament to this, and they make welcome additions to any type of product photography studio, warehouse or workplace. To learn more about making the most of your brand’s 360 and 3D imagery, or to discover PhotoRobot solutions firsthand, [contact PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) today for a free 1:1 consultation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/brick-and-mortar-to-online-retail # SECTION: blog > brick-and-mortar-to-online-retail # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-05-10 --- # A Change in Balance: From Brick-and-Mortar to Online Retail Is the world seeing the end of brick-and-mortar retail? The short answer is no. In detail, it’s more complicated, but e-commerce is noticeably thriving in comparison. Consumer shopping behaviors, for now, have changed drastically. Some say even permanently. Brick-and-mortar shops are finding ways to adjust to the changes, however. In this post, we’ll look in more detail at the changes in shopping behaviors, and at how brick-and-mortar to online retail is adapting. - Categories: Product Photography ## From Brick and Mortar to Online Retail 2020 upended brick-and-mortar retail when the global pandemic forced all of us to drastically change our daily behaviors, habits, and routines. Now, in 2021, not much has changed, particularly in our shopping habits and for retailers. Brick-and-mortar stores are still having to adjust to growing consumer trends towards online rather than in-store shopping. In the U.S. alone, online shopping increased by **53%** as consumer habits responded to Covid-19. It was also reported that **45%** of consumers had products delivered to their homes, and **92%** use “click-and-collect” to make purchases online and pick them up in-person or curbside. Rapid changes like these are now forcing more and more brick-and-mortar retailers to step up their digital presence. They have to meet growing demand, and, more importantly, to make up for declines in revenue. To cushion the impact, even traditionally brick-and-mortar stores look to [professional product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/professional-photography-for-websites) for their e-shops, websites, and anywhere their products appear online. By using professional product photos, 2D/3D photorealistic images, and more immersive product experiences overall, brands are finding ways to again put products “in the hands'' of consumers. Let’s look now at how brands are finding opportunity in adversity, and the shift from brick-and-mortar to online retail in 2021. ### Significant facts and statistics on brick and mortar vs online retail Just to capture a better picture of the overall shift in brick and mortar and online retail, here are a few telling statistics. - In the last quarter of 2020, **NIKE Inc.** Chief Executor John Donahue reported a **38%** drop in sales which they said was due to the closure of physical stores. NIKE’s app use and online sales, however, softened the overall decline with an increase of **75%.** - Similarly, clothing retailer **H&M** saw a massive decline in revenue by **50%**, while online sales increased **36%.** They have announced many store closures to offset the losses in revenue. - **INDITEX**, owner of brands like **ZARA**, reported a **95%** spike in online sales, and like others announced the closure of many of their physical locations in the coming year. Across the market, consumer shopping behaviors have already changed significantly since 2020. This is evident around the globe. People simply aren’t shopping as they once did. How long these changes will last is hard to say, but for now it’s clear that brick-and-mortar stores have a lot of changes to address. ### Responding to the market trends In the current situation, the truth is that it has now become essential that consumers can shop online. It’s also equally vital that businesses can still *deliver* online, even if they come from brick-and-mortar roots. Larger, more established businesses will have more time and leeway to adapt to these new market demands. For SMEs and growing businesses, however, how they respond to the new climate can make or break their business. With more online consumers and expectations higher than ever, standard product images simply aren’t enough. You need photos that stand out, grab attention, and keep consumers on your page rather than taking that *click* away to the competition. Product images are not only the face of your brand, they are now a valuable sales driver in a time of increased online retail. ### Responding to new consumer habits With the shift to online shopping, one of the most significant pain points consumers experience is not being able to physically inspect products. They have to judge the quality of the brand and the product with only the brand’s product photography to form their opinion. This means for retailers to succeed, not only do they need professional product photography on their website, they also need product images that leave nothing to the imagination. Product images need to be in high resolution, possess deep fields of zoom, and must convey vital information about products so that consumers can make confident purchases. To meet these demands, brands are competing with high-quality product images and more immersive product experiences. These include [360 spin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), and [visual product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce). Professional 2D / 3D product content like this can show [significant impacts](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/boost-conversion-rates-in-e-commerce) on conversion rates, returns, and overall revenue. More importantly, it can also establish and reinforce your brand’s digital image in a market shifting to favor online retail. ### Making product images the face of your brand For larger businesses who already have a product photography studio running, the main goal is [consistency across visual content](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content). For SMEs and growing brick-and-mortar stores, however, the challenge is finding where to begin in the first place. Professional product photography traditionally requires a studio for pre production, a photographer for production, and image editing software for post production. Then you need the web tools like PhotoRobot's [360 Product Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) to host product images online. This can seem a tall order on a tight budget and not knowing where to look. Certainly, one way is to hire out a professional product photography team, and have them handle all the *heavy-lifting*. Another is to find your own in-house [solutions for product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-360-product-photography-studio). While these might require an initial investment, the ROI and scalability this route provides is worth consideration even for smaller webshops and online retailers. ### Finding the best tools for the shifts If you’re looking to start producing your own professional product photography, or if you want ways to get more out of your studio, [PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/) is here to help. We assist clients with both launching and improving on product photography operations for e-commerce and online retail. Our photography robots and our software for control and automation are designed for product photography operations of any scale. If it’s for a small webshop or an industrial-scale photography studio, PhotoRobot has the solutions to meet all of your demands and more. Find out what PhotoRobot can do for your brand, and book a demo with PhotoRobot Sales specialists today. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/2d-3d-product-configuration-software # SECTION: blog > 2d-3d-product-configuration-software # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-05-08 --- # Examples of 2D and 3D Product Configuration Software 2D and 3D product configurators are great for companies who sell highly customizable products. They also benefit business models focusing on B2B sales, and companies who already use 3D product and product component models. In this post, we’ll look at some leading brands using 2D / 3D product configurators, and showcase a range of use cases for these tools. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## 2D and 3D Visual Product Configurators in Use More and more brands in 2021 are utilizing [visual product configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce), both 2D and 3D, to showcase wide ranges of customizable products online. Visual product configurators allow brands to not only create stronger product presentations for both business-to-consumer (B2C) and business-to-business (B2B) sales, but also to streamline time-to-market for new product content in a cost-efficient manner. - [Advantages to Using Visual Product Configuration Tools](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/advantages-product-configurators) - [Does my Business Need a Visual Product Configurator?](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/do-you-need-a-visual-product-configurator) For consumers, visual product configuration tools provide an overall better *sense* of the products online. More importantly, they help to become familiar with the brand’s complete range of product customization options, models, and designs. This helps consumers feel confident they are making a purchase from a position of knowing all the options available to them and being able to choose something that meets their individual needs and preferences. Whether it’s footwear and fashion, cosmetics, furniture, sporting goods or any customizable product in general, there are many valuable use cases for configurable product experiences from today’s leading brands. Let’s now look at 3 of these examples, and more specifically at what 2D and 3D visual product configurators do for these brands and their products. ## 3 examples of visual product configurators Some strong use cases of visual product configurators in action come from Nike, Kiko Milano, and NZ Aerosports. These brands in particular demonstrate what configurable product experiences can do for a range of different types of products. They also provide some interesting examples for visual product configurators in general. ### 1 - Nike By You, Nike’s answer to configurable shoe experiences While Nike isn’t the only footwear brand utilizing visual product configurators, Nike’s shoe line ([Nike By You](https://www.nike.com/nike-by-you)) serves as a strong example of this technology in use. With complete customization options for color and individual component parts, Nike provides consumers with a way to participate in the creation process and design shoes that are truly unique. This *design-your-own* product experience includes a step-by-step building process which begins with users selecting their footwear needs from sport or lifestyle. They can then customize shoes for any type of activity (walking, running, athletics, golf, etc), and from there have access to a range of customization options according to their chosen style of footwear. Users can configure nearly any element of the shoes, from the model of footwear to the colors, textures and designs of individual components like mudguards, laces, airbags, text, logos and more. The only limitation to Nike’s configurator is the lack of zoom features or 360-degree viewing, but the tool does provide a series of multiple close-up images to showcase the results from all angles, top to bottom. ### 2 - NZ Aerosports Parachute Personalization Zooming out further, the next noteworthy example of a 3D product configurator comes from [NZ Aerosports](https://www.nzaerosports.com/), a designer and manufacturer of Icarus Canopies parachutes. This brand was able to take their product experience to the next level with the help of [Emersya](https://emersya.com/en/home), a platform for fully interactive 3D product experiences and configurators for e-commerce. NZ Aerosports needed to enhance the user experience of their visual product configurators, but they also wanted to be able deploy new product models easier and in a way that could link with their ordering management system and their production line. Together with Emersya, they were able to do all of this and create a unique way to customize canopies with a paint feature that users can now click to change. ### 3 - Kiko Cosmetics for Custom Content and Packaging Another use case of product configurators is for selling cosmetics with customizable elements. Among other cosmetics brands now taking advantage of this technology, Kiko Milano presents a good example of what a product configurator can do for skin-care products and cosmetics for the eyes, lips, and face. With Emersya’s configurator technology, Kiko Milano launched a new in-store concept to allow shoppers to customize the content and packaging of their lipstick, mascara and brushes. There are predesigned icons and customizable fields for text, all which consumers can preview on-the-fly, as well as select, order, and print custom engravings inside the store. ## Don’t be left behind in the e-commerce race If your business sells complex, customizable, or configurable products, there is no better way to showcase their moving parts and features than with a visual product configurator. Both 2D and 3D configurators allow for product experiences that are as impressive as they are informative. Whether it’s for business-to-consumer (B2C) or business-to-business (B2B) sales, product configuration software will ensure your sales presentations leave nothing to the imagination. If you’d like to learn more about visual product configurators to meet your needs or how PhotoRobot can help, contact us today. One of our technical specialists is on standby to [schedule a free 1:1 PhotoRobot consultation](https://www.photorobot.com/contact). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photoshoots-photorobot # SECTION: blog > product-photoshoots-photorobot # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-04-30 --- # Quick, Easy, and Effective Product Photoshoots with PhotoRobot In this post, we’ll demonstrate the capturing, post processing, and publishing of 3 product photoshoots in under 3 minutes. Discover PhotoRobot functions to automate 360 product photography, streamline workflows, and maximize productivity. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots, Software ## PhotoRobot Product Photoshoots: 3 Products in Under 3 minutes In this post, we’ll demonstrate the capturing, post processing, and publishing of 3 product photoshoots in under 3 minutes. Discover PhotoRobot functions to automate [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), streamline content production workflows, and maximize productivity in the photo studio. Watch the [PhotoRobot Product Photoshoots Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/product-photoshoots-demo) of capturing 3 products in less than a minute each. The video above shows just how quick and easy the process can be, even with 3 different types of products. For these, we chose the following 3 products, each calling for different product photography techniques. 1. **A high-heel shoe with a suede surface:** To showcase how powerful strobe lighting is for capturing vivid and crisp details. 2. **A metal tray with lots of edges and empty space:** To demonstrate the capabilities of our background removal tool. 3. **A shampoo bottle with white on white and lots of text:** To introduce our Optical Character Recognition ([OCR](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/optical-character-recognition)) feature. We wanted to show you that no matter the order, product photoshoots with PhotoRobot are extremely quick and easy. Keep reading to learn more about photoshoots with PhotoRobot, our [line of robots](https://www.photorobot.com/robots), and our [software for automation and control](https://www.photorobot.com/software). ## Photography equipment and software In the video, we have already imported a shot list of the different products in the day’s photoshoot. We have also given each product its own presets, which the software will use to control the photoshoot. Now, we can simply scan the barcodes on each object, and the software knows which product we are going to photograph. Next, we can weigh and measure the product on our _CubiScan-325, which communicates with the [_Robotic_Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) to set the camera at the right height. The laser cross on our [motorized turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) then shows us exactly where to place the product, which turns off during photography. After placing the item, a quick scan of its barcode informs the software of its target, and the product photoshoot begins. ## Photographing the first product: a suede, high-heeled shoe Now, this first product represents a relatively simple product photography procedure. The suede material however can pose a challenge, but not with PhotoRobot. This is thanks to the fact we use strobe lighting, unlike almost everybody else. Notice as well, PhotoRobot takes a series of images from precise angles, all without stopping. In 20 seconds, the non-stop spin feature captures 36 images around the shoe, downloads the series of photos, and saves files to the cloud. While all this is happening, we check the position of the turntable at 1000 times per second. Signals are sent to the camera several milliseconds ahead of time, ensuring cameras target exactly correct angles. As we capture photos, the system also auto crops each, manages background cleanup, and color adjustment. *All original image files are immediately backed up, and finished photos are published instantly via a secure feed. All in* ***under one minute*** *.* ## 360-degree spin image example results Keep in mind that the normal capturing process of a spinset involves between 24 photos (at minimum), to 36, or 72 around the product. Just to give you an example of the power of PhotoRobot, we wanted to take this to the extreme. Rather than our usual 36 photos, we took 180 photos (one shot at every 2°) around our suede, high-heeled shoe. We wanted to demonstrate just how seamless our image viewer deploys on-page, even at a fairly large file size of 1.4 GB. View the results for yourself. Thanks to PhotoRobot’s [360 Product Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer), deploying high resolution imagery that still loads fast and performs well on-page is no problem. See how clear and crisp the product photos capture the suede fabric. *It’s also noteworthy that this product photoshoot with PhotoRobot is complete in* ***under 2 minutes*** *. Simply run your photoshoot, and instantly after you can prepare your workspace for the next product.* ## Capturing the second product: the wire basket Next up: our product photoshoot with PhotoRobot on the wire basket. You might believe this would be a challenging product photoshoot. This is due to complex internal areas, empty space, and details that need masking but also shiny edges. For this order, we are using a different photography technique: **free-masking**. With this approach, we take two images from the same angle, one with only the backlight. This gives us the silhouette of the object (“the mask”), which enables you to cut the object out of the background. Now, it’s possible to make the background transparent, enabling us to change background colors to better fit the surrounding webpage. With PhotoRobot, there’s no worries that some parts of the object will be removed with the background. *See the results (above) from our rough image files (12 x image + 12 x mask). This example is 36.8 MB, including intentionally untuned transitions on the edges and remaining adhesive.* ## Getting the third product: the shampoo bottle Finally, our product photo shoot of a white-on-white shampoo bottle with lots of text. In the video, we deliberately place the bottle off-center. This is to showcase how easily you can fix this in post processing with our [**semi auto centering**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography)feature. The results above show how effectively PhotoRobot handles centering and white-on-white photography. All processed images and originals are in the cloud, so you can adjust settings any time, even from another device. PhotoRobot’s unique OCR feature renders all of the text crisp, clean, and readable. Even in the example above, before applying color adjustment and auto centering, all text is sharp. ## Experience your own PhotoRobot demonstration PhotoRobot aims to change the game in [automated eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), product photoshoots and solutions. To discover more about our robots or to even book a free demo, simply contact PhotoRobot. One of our technical experts is ready to introduce you to quicker, easier, and more effective product photoshoots with PhotoRobot. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/do-you-need-a-visual-product-configurator # SECTION: blog > do-you-need-a-visual-product-configurator # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-04-20 --- # Does your Business Need a Visual Product Configurator? E-commerce businesses across many industries utilize visual configuration tools to better showcase products with customizable elements in digital format. These tools take 2D / 3D photorealistic imagery and transform it into configurable experiences for B2C or B2B sales presentations. In this post, we’ll look closer at today’s visual product configuration tools and to which businesses benefit most from deploying one. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## When to Invest in Visual Product Configuration Tools How much your e-commerce business will benefit from using [visual product configuration tools](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce) will depend largely on the type of products you sell. Obviously, if you’re selling products like convenience goods or office supplies, investing in this technology simply won’t make much sense. The businesses who can benefit the most include those who sell highly advanced, complex, or customizable products. It might be luxury goods, fashion and apparel, or even industrial-grade machinery and component parts. They can also include companies whose business model revolves around B2B (business-to-business) product presentation and prototyping, or those who already have a repository of [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model)on hand. This is when the [advantages to visual product configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/advantages-product-configurators) tools are most noticeable. They help not only for more immersive and informative product visualization but also for market research, product testing, and for generating considerable ROI in the right industries. Let’s look now to these industries, their needs, and how businesses benefit from using visual product configuration tools. ## 3 reasons to use 3D product configurators Visual product configurators allow businesses to enrich 2D / [3D photorealistic imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) with exploding views, product animations, annotations, and interactive customization features. This helps consumers not only get a better sense of the product but also of all possible product iterations, changeable parts and design options. Certainly, some businesses will benefit more from product experiences of this kind than others, so the question is which businesses really*need* advanced product visualization? Here are three signals to help you decide if and when your business needs a visual product configuration experience. ### Does your business involve complex or technical products? When shopping online, consumers don’t really need to see a 3D model of an ink cartridge before hitting that order button. There’s little emotional involvement in the purchase, and it is not one that involves much expense or a range of options. When the purchase involves something like shoes or fashion, the product experience has a much stronger impact on consumers making a decision. It’s the same in [jewelry product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography) as it is for furniture, medical devices and the like. This is particularly true for significant purchases, and in general for lines of complex or technical products. Take for instance, [**Nike By You**](https://www.nike.com/cz/en/nike-by-you). With hundreds to thousands of possible configurations to their long line of shoe designs and customization options, Nike’s visual configuration tool allows online shoppers to “build” their own footwear. Users can customize every part of the shoe from materials, textures and colors down to the treads to create truly unique footwear, personalized according to their own individual preferences and needs. Beyond providing a product experience likely to impress shoppers, this also helps Nike to showcase limitless iterations of their products. More importantly, this is without Nike needing to conduct individual photoshoots for every new addition to their product line. This not only makes good business sense, it provides a scalable solution for long-term operations. As the brand generates 3D renderings of customizable product components, they have more reusable visual assets to get new products online both quickly and cost-efficiently. ### Do you have a B2B business model that needs higher sales enablement? Another reason why a business might need visual product configuration tools is for higher sales enablement in a B2B business model. In these highly competitive markets, product visualization plays a vital role in helping brands not only impress potential consumers but also in those consumers being able to make easier and more informed purchases. Take for instance a consumer who needs to equip hundreds of employees with office equipment and machines. This consumer needs to be able to quickly and easily access entire lines of products, while also being able to choose between different sizes, color options, and designs to best fit their office needs. Configurable 2D / 3D photorealistic images are especially useful in this regard. They enable businesses to utilize product models to streamline the shopping experience, and to likewise make it as stress-free as possible for the consumer. ### Does your business already have 3D models on hand? Finally, if your business is already [3D modeling in-house](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), it is more ready than others to invest in a visual product configurator. Maybe you have already built a few product models and you’re looking to make the most of your efforts. With the right visual product configuration technology, your business will be able to multiply existing visual assets into countless product iterations based on the product and component models you create. To set the stage for further development and scalability, there are a few ways businesses can go forward. If you don’t have your own in-house solutions for [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), you can always hire a company to do the scanning of individual product components for you. Then, there are various [hosting platforms for 3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/platforms-3d-product-photography) that can deploy your product scans across the web or on your e-commerce website. ### Find the best visual tools for your products Thankfully, finding the best visual product configurator to meet your business needs doesn’t have to be a daunting or time-consuming task. Nor does finding the best equipment and accessories to manage everything in-house. At PhotoRobot, we specialize in hardware and software solutions to automate, capture, edit and publish product photography for e-commerce and online retail. Our line of robots are extremely effective at multi-angle product photography, 360 spin and 3D product photography, and particularly for 360-degree scanning of objects to build 3D models. If you’d like to learn more about our solutions or visual product configuration tools for your business, don’t hesitate to [contact PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) today to schedule a free consultation with one of our technical strategists. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/advantages-product-configurators # SECTION: blog > advantages-product-configurators # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-04-16 --- # Advantages to Using a Visual Product Configurator The advantages to using visual product configurators are numerous in e-commerce, whether it’s for B2C or B2B operations. Both 2D and 3D product configurators provide valuable information about products to potential consumers. More importantly, they help users to easily discover complete lines of products with customizable elements, as well as to feel confident in pressing that order button. In this guide, PhotoRobot will examine the advantages to deploying a visual product configurator, provide some example use cases, and help readers find the right solution to meet their business needs. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## 3D Product Configurators for eCommerce In short, a [visual product configurator](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce) is a type of software technology which allows e-commerce businesses to showcase products with many customizable elements online. These might include products with customizable component parts, designs, colors and more. In function, these tools enable shoppers to view, manipulate and customize products according to their own preference and the options available. How much your business will benefit from using a visual product configurator will depend on several factors, including: the type of products you sell, the range of customizable elements to your products, and the overall business model of your company. For some, 2D visualizers might be enough to start realizing immediate advantages, while other businesses might be better positioned to invest in immersive [3D eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). Nonetheless, any effective visual product configurator is likely to create a more positive customer experience, reducing friction and boosting buyer’s confidence. More importantly, these tools can ensure buyers receive exactly what they expect of their purchase from what they saw online. Product viewers also help on the business-level in general to increase engagement, improve conversions and reduce returns, all while serving as a scalable investment towards more advanced product experiences like augmented reality. ## 5 advantages to using a visual product configurator Looking to the advantages of using visual product configurators in e-commerce, here are the top 5 worth mentioning. ### Enhance engagement for both visitors and returning shoppers Today’s online product viewing technology is not only advanced, it’s everywhere. Whether it’s online marketplaces like Amazon and Shopify, or small to medium webshops and retailers, impressive product content isn’t hard to find. Online shoppers are now so inundated with [3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography), [360-degree spins](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) and visual product configurators that it’s becoming increasingly difficult to meet the [all-time high customer expectations](https://www.salesforce.com/research/customer-expectations/). Configurable product experiences place products and product customization in the hands of potential consumers, allowing them to get a better idea of all the options available, and to ultimately make a confident and informed purchase. On these lines, deploying one on your website can also increase on-page time for visitors, while potentially making a lasting impression on both new and returning consumers. ### Boost conversions anywhere the product appears Another advantage to using a visual product configurator in e-commerce is boosting conversions. Online, your product imagery is often as valuable as your product, and it can make or break your bottom line and ultimately determine how well you stand against the competition. This is because of the fact that one of the most common reasons consumers cite for hitting that order button nowadays is product visuals. It’s not rating systems, recommendations or other elements in the purchasing process. In this regard, visual product configurators help make content not only stand out and impress, but they also encourage consumers to make that very first order. ### Reduce overall returns The next benefit companies realize when deploying a visual product configurator is in reduced returns. After all, when a shopper knows exactly what to expect from their order, they are much less likely to send items back. In this regard, the impact of 2D / 3D configurable photorealistic product experiences is simply difficult to match. The educational value in configurable visualizations helps ensure shoppers find the exact product, model, make and design they are looking for, and that they are aware of the many options available at their fingertips. This in turn leads to less returns alongside considerable benefits to your business for the long-term. Not only are returns costly for shipping and handling, they can also lead to consumers abandoning the brand altogether, negative reviews, and, not to mention, the negative environmental impact of shipping back and forth. ### Invest in a scalable solution When investing in an e-commerce business, product visualization software provides a considerable return on investment for long-term operations. This is seen through savings in time and costs for photoshoots, and, more importantly, streamlined time-to-market. Visual product configuration software allows you to take an individual photoset or 3D model and multiply it into hundreds or even thousands of different iterations of a product. **There's no need to hire out photographers or rent a studio every time a new item arrives in stock.** Rather, with visual product configurators, businesses can render images not only of complete products but also a wide range of component parts. These components can then be stitched together with the complete product time and again to scale your image repository and showcase products in their entire range of customizable elements. ### Augmented Reality A final noteworthy advantage of deploying a visual product configurator is the ability to transform 2D / 3D configurable photorealistic imagery into augmented reality experiences. Particularly beneficial when selling highly complex or customizable products, augmented reality is an effective way to showcase all of the moving parts and features that make a product function. Augmented reality product experiences also make for buzzworthy marketing campaigns, interactive B2B sales presentations, and impressive product content in general. ### To discover more on visual product configurators for e-commerce Does your business sell complex, highly customizable or configurable products? Are you looking for stronger sales enablement technology? Would potential consumers benefit from visualizing your products in augmented reality? If yes, PhotoRobot can help. Not only does our Cloud Platform come stock with our customizable Spinviewer, it also has unlimited view count and data transfer. [Digital asset management](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/automate-sending-product-images) ensures all your imagery is perfectly organized, searchable, and secure. The Spinviewer also has configurable JPEG compression for better loading times, and automatic publishing with no file transfer needed. To learn more, don’t hesitate to contact us at PhotoRobot today. Our technical strategists are on standby to help you learn everything you need to know about PhotoRobot and visual product configurators. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/visual-product-configurators-e-commerce # SECTION: blog > visual-product-configurators-e-commerce # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-04-13 --- # Visual Product Configurators for E-Commerce There are 2 types of visual product configurators in e-commerce: 2D product visualizers and 3D configurators. 2D product visualizations utilize static, flat imagery of products. 3D configurators take it a step further, providing consumers with a 3D rendering of a product that they can rotate in 360 degrees. In this post, we’ll examine both types, share some viable use cases, and provide some tips for deploying visual product configurators for e-commerce. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## What is a Visual Product Configurator for e-Commerce? Effective product visualization is crucial for success in [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), and visual product configurators are one way businesses stay ahead of the curve. Visual product configurators are online tools which enable shoppers to customize and visualize a product according to their own specifications. They are particularly effective for companies who produce or sell highly customizable products, providing consumers with a *“build-your-own”* product experience. There are 2D and 3D product configurators, and both of these solutions help consumers get a better idea of the products they are ordering. They can present intricate and moving parts of products, allow for on-the-fly customization, and in general make the entire product experience more helpful and informative. - [360 Product Viewers for E-Commerce Businesses](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-viewers-for-e-commerce-businesses) - [7 Advantages to Using 360 Product Viewers](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-advantages-360-product-viewers-for-websites) On the business level, product configurators are valuable tools for digital marketing with 3D models, online product presentation, and for B2B product demonstrations or prototyping. They allow companies to deploy still images, [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), and [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce) in 2D / 3D photorealistic product visualizations or for rendering in augmented / virtual reality. Effective visual product configurators in this way aim to eliminate the guesswork for online shoppers browsing customizable products, and to create an avenue for worry-free transactions. ## 2 approaches to visual product configurators There are two categories of visual product configurators: static 2D, or interactive 3D. Both involve using software viewing technology to render products into configurable product experiences for e-commerce. ## 2D product visualizers 2D visual product configurators deploy a flat, static product visualization online. While shoppers cannot view the visual in 360-degrees, they can interact with the product by changing between different customizable elements. These might be for example, component parts like colors, materials and textures, or various add-on features that might be available. Imagine a business selling office chairs online. With a visual product configurator, shoppers can swap in and out different parts like headrests, arms, fabric colors and more to find the most suitable chair to meet their needs. The same extends to other types of furniture, household appliances, and on the whole any product with customization options. 2D visual configurators can also include exploded views to highlight complex or moving parts, or product annotations to help shoppers discover more information about a product. ## 3D product configurators 3D visual product configurators use responsive design to provide shoppers with a third-dimensional, 360-degree rendering of a product which they can spin and view from every angle. Beyond this, just like with 2D configurators, consumers have the ability to choose between different customizable elements such as product features, color schemes, styles, component parts and more. Interactive 3D is especially useful and seeing wider popularity for online furniture sales. These oftentimes high-cost purchases greatly benefit from 360-degree product visualization. There is simply no better method to ensure that shoppers are not only confident in pressing that order button but also will be satisfied when their product arrives exactly how they visualized it. Businesses can also utilize 3D visual product configurators alongside augmented reality to create a truly immersive product experience. Again, take furniture shopping for example. Shoppers can project different pieces of furniture into a virtual space, configure customizable elements, and view the product in various positions and from different angles to find where it might fit best in their home. At the same time, this allows companies to better educate potential consumers about their entire line of products and the range of customizable options available. ## Finding the perfect configurator for your business Whether it’s for B2C or B2B operations, a visual product configurator can drive online sales, bolster customer confidence, limit buyer’s remorse, and boost overall customer satisfaction. At [PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/), we know very well the advantages to using professional product photography for e-commerce. Our line of [robots and software solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) have been developed to help our clients capture all the imagery they need for visual product configurators, 360-degree spin photography, and 3D models. If you’re already using PhotoRobot, then you also have access to PhotoRobot’s free spin viewer that comes standard with our cloud-based image hosting. With unlimited view count and data transfer, there are no additional expenses. [Digital asset management software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-software) ensures quick access to perfectly organized imagery, which are searchable, secure, and easily distributable. Additional features such as JPEG compression, automatic publishing, and integration for e-commerce provide everything businesses expect in a 3D visual product configurator. To learn more about PhotoRobot, or about our solutions for product photography and visual configurators, don’t hesitate to reach out to us today. Our technical strategists are waiting to arrange a free consultation to discuss your needs and propose solutions. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/auto-centering-360-product-photography # SECTION: blog > auto-centering-360-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-04-09 --- # PhotoRobot_Controls: Auto-Centering 360 Product Photography Among the many functions of PhotoRobot_Controls is automatic centering for 360 product photography. Whether it’s the vertical or horizontal axis, PhotoRobot can help you find the absolute center of your product’s rotation and correct any misplaced products in a few simple steps. Join us in this quick guide to discover PhotoRobot_Controls, and to learn how to quickly master auto-centering for 360 product photography. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## Automatic and Semi Auto-Centering for 360 Product Photography One of PhotoRobot’s truly unique software solutions includes [auto-centering](https://www.photorobot.com/software/image-editing#iecentering) for 360 product photography. Often, when shooting [360 product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), you encounter the problem of objects not staying in the center of rotation. This makes the product appear to “wobble” or tilt when in spin, and generally can cause headaches when editing images for the web. See how it works in the [PhotoRobot Automatic Centering Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/semi-automatic-centering-image-sets). With [PhotoRobot Controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software), however, there are two functions to ensure every photo in your spinset or gallery is in the perfect center: **fully automatic product centering** or **semi-automatic**. In the fully automatic version, the system recognizes the edge of products, calculates the center of each image, and adjusts all accordingly. If fully automatic centering encounters problems or obstacles, all it requires is a few simple steps in our semi-auto centering to ensure every photo in the spinset or gallery is in the perfect center of rotation. Here, you can center products by manually selecting the edges (or the centerline), or automate the centering according to a similar principle but by vertical axis. As an additional security mechanism, the system also creates a backup of the original image files. Your Quality Control team will always have access to the images, and if necessary can easily go back into them to adjust settings manually. This rapidly and significantly speeds up productivity in the studio, providing automation for product centering and backups for if any of the advanced algorithms miss the mark. ## How does semi auto-centering work? Let’s say you have 36 photos in your product spinset, but they aren’t perfectly aligned in the center. To eliminate the wobble from your spin with PhotoRobot_Controls, all you need to do is open the editor and fix 3 images to automatically center your entire spinset. To do this, first go into **PhotoRobot_Controls**. From the **“Edits”** bar, navigate to **“Change”**, and then click **“Add”** to access the software’s editing tools. Here, you find the auto-centering for 360 product photography in the function labeled **“Center”**. Add the centering algorithm by selecting **“Adjust manually”**. Then, select **“Fix tilt”** under the image in your spinset. From here, you can now program the software by manually centering 3 images. The powerful algorithm will then handle the *heavy-lifting*, automating the editing process so that the rest of your spinset is in the perfect center of rotation. ## Additional photo editing functions in PhotoRobot_Controls Beyond auto-centering, PhotoRobot’s suite of software comes with many powerful functions for the automation and editing of 360 product photography. Easily create a [**ghost mannequin effect**](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin), automatically **crop photos**, handle **background removal and more** with PhotoRobot. ## Automatic Editing and Automation - **Automatic presets —** Automate your output for similar types of products with automatic presets. Define your settings in the Control suite, and PhotoRobot can help you realize truly automated product photography. - **Auto crop —** Using intelligent detection, automatically crop all your 360 product photos according to the product’s position. - **Aspect ratio and padding —** Save time with configurable aspect ratio and padding for all of your 360 product photos. Combine this function with auto-cropping for even more time-savings. ## Image Editing Tools For editing images, PhotoRobot has a wide range of solutions. Among the most popular is the **Chroma Key** function for [removing mannequin stands](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect), holders, and other tools from your scene. There are also standard image editing tools for enhancing **color**, **lightness**, and **clarity**, and for working with **shadows**, **highlights**, and **curves**. Beyond these, other functions include the following. - **Background removal** — Set the effect and the system automates the process, eliminating the background from all of your product photos. - **Highlight white** — Detect white areas in your product photos for exposure correction and ensuring the background is consistent with the rest of your page. - **Denoise** — Remove dust and dirt from the scene after background removal or Chroma Key operation. - **Transparency** — Set transparency in one click and make changes later in the Spin Viewer settings. ## Solutions unique to only PhotoRobot If you want to save time and energy in post image processing, auto-centering for 360 product photography is only one of the unique solutions PhotoRobot_Controls offers. PhotoRobot takes pride in developing solutions *by photographers for photographers*, and we aim to deliver everything our clients need for streamlining workflows and enhancing product photos. To learn more about auto-centering and PhotoRobot-powered 360 product photography, [book a 1:1 PhotoRobot consultation](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) with one of our business strategy specialists. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/examples-3d-and-360-product-viewers # SECTION: blog > examples-3d-and-360-product-viewers # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-04-06 --- # Examples of 3D and 360 Product Viewers | PhotoRobot 3D and 360-degree product viewers exist in many forms, so it’s important to look at some examples before deciding what might be best for your business. Everything from apparel and fashion, to jewellery, furniture, household appliances and nearly any product imaginable comes to life when put in either 3D or 360-degree format. To discover examples of today’s 3D and 360 product viewers for online retail, dive into this guide with PhotoRobot to learn more. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## 3D and 360 Product Viewers for Online Retail An effective 3D / [360 product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting) enables businesses to deliver product content to consumers that is as equally immersive as it is impressive. This is oftentimes in fully interactive consumer experiences like 360-degree product spins, [3D models and configurators](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). The advantages to deploying product viewing software (like [PhotoRobot Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer)) are numerous, but some will provide more benefits than others. [Choosing the best product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/which-businesses-need-360-product-viewers) will thus depend on the stage of the business, available resources, and the overall business model. There are product viewers that deploy multi-angle still shots, viewers for complete 360-degree [spin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery), and viewers for customizable or configurable [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model). These create value in many ways: from better product presentation and customer satisfaction, to buyer’s trust, conversions and revenue. To illustrate this better, let’s look now at some examples of leading brands leveraging 3D and 360 product viewers to success. ## Examples of 3D and 360-degree product viewers in use Currently, there is no better way to replicate the in-store shopping experience than with 3D or 360-degree product viewers. Not all brands are utilizing full 360-degree spins or [3D photography](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs), but those who do are realizing significant benefits. Here are 6 examples of brands using these formats and other media to provide shoppers a closer look at the products on offer. ### Apple’s 360-degree visualization A pioneer and leader in consumer technology, Apple spares little expense in their marketing ventures, and their use case for 360-degree product viewers is one of the most engaging to date. Looking specifically at their iPhone launch videos for example, Apple’s product viewer demonstrates both pride in how their hardware operates and in how it appears online. To accomplish this, they utilize nearly entirely 3D rendered phones. Just take a look at the launch video for the iPhone 12 Pro for example. It features extreme close-ups, views from absolutely every angle of the device, and various lighting arrangements to showcase the phone’s design. Beyond this, Apple is also a pioneer in using 3D models to provide consumers with an X-ray view inside of their devices, providing a way to see how all of the latest technology looks on the inside. ### BMW “Build Your Own” Another valuable example of deploying a 360 / 3D product viewer comes from one of the leading brands in luxury vehicles, [BMW](https://www.bmwusa.com/). With [BMW’s Build Your Own](https://www.bmwusa.com/build-your-own.html#/series), anyone looking to make a significant purchase can first browse their high-end vehicles online from nearly every angle and in rich detail. Their product experience also provides close-up views of each automobile’s distinguishing features, including side moldings, sculpted edges and more. The only drawback to this viewer is that the viewing experience is limited to only a horizontal spin. This means the viewer doesn’t present every possible viewing angle, so consumers will likely still want to view the automobile in person before deciding on taking it for a test-drive. Despite this, BMW’s product viewer is quite capable of encouraging potential customers to phone their local dealership and arrange to view the automobile for themself. ### Logitech’s 360 product viewers for product launches Next, there is [Logitech](https://www.logitech.com/en-us), a leading manufacturer in computer peripherals and software. Logitech makes particularly good use of 360 product viewers for new product launches. Their marketing campaigns most often feature keyboard, mouse, and headset launch videos, combining detail-rich product spins and explosive animations to showcase the moving parts as well as all the technology that goes into their products. Logitech also deploys 360-degree product images on their website for laptops and other electronic devices. In this way, consumers have the ability to view each and every angle of the products, and they can even view devices from opening, closing, and folding positions. ### Nike’s 3D strategy for customizable footwear If looking for a leader in 360-degree product visualization, [Nike](https://www.nike.com/) definitely ranks among the best. By utilizing 3D photography techniques and 3D models, Nike has become a game-changer in online footwear shopping and customization. Their product viewer, [Nike By You](https://www.nike.com/nike-by-you), allows consumers to customize their shoe choices from color to design, texture and more. In this way, the software allows shoppers to essentially build their own product. They can design tailor-made solutions around their footwear needs, while Nike saves both time and money in production as the company only needs to produce what’s currently in demand. This approach is of particular advantage to major brands with a wide range of customizable products, and for companies like Nike who already have a repository of 3D models for use. ### KitchenAid For further examples of using 3D models for a product viewer, take note of American home appliance brand [KitchenAid](https://www.kitchenaid.com/). Their 3D product viewer helps customers choose the best refrigerator to meet their home needs and includes a long line of models and options. Now, online shoppers can open and close all doors and drawers with triggered product animations, explore compartments and moving parts with product annotations, and even switch between available customization options on the fly. This is all thanks to the [Emersya platform](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/emersya-product-experiences-in-3d-ar-and-vr), an online publishing software for product experiences in 3D, AR, and VR. ### Vitra Finally, another industry example worth mentioning is [Vitra](https://www.vitra.com/). This brand has leveraged the Emersya platform to create a more advanced [configuration experience](https://www.vitra.com/en-ch/office/product/details/pacific-chair#product-information-3) for the billions of possible combinations for their products. Vitra also wanted to provide higher quality close-ups of materials along with the 360-degree spin product experience. Now, Emersya’s OFML importer ensures that Vitra can upload existing OFML data directly onto the platform to create fully interactive configurators in seconds. Vitra has also utilized Emersya to build *3D digital user instructions* for their wide range of ergonomic office chairs. There is now a custom interface (designed by Vitra) linked to the 3D product viewer, which allows customers to find detailed explanations and animations for optimal use of the product. ### Discover more techniques to streamline your product photography Looking for the best 360 or 3D product viewer to meet your e-commerce business needs? At PhotoRobot, we specialize in product photography solutions for businesses small and large, and we have helped many clients exceed their product content goals. Whether it’s for utilizing existing content or looking for the best hardware and software to create even more, PhotoRobot can advise on what’s best for your situation. Don’t delay and [contact PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) to book a custom demo around your business' automated photography needs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photographing-glass-products # SECTION: blog > photographing-glass-products # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-04-01 --- # Photographing Glass Products | PhotoRobot Using PhotoRobot’s portable device, the CASE 850, in under 1 minute you can photograph glass products, post-process, and publish images in the cloud. Discover more in this guide to photographing glass products for e-commerce, and see how PhotoRobot’s CASE can streamline workflows in the studio. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots, Software ## Photography of Glass Products for E-Commerce Photographing glass and other reflective or semi-transparent products for e-commerce presents various challenges for photographers. To capture the perfect [product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery), you often have to master lighting setups, camera settings, and post-processing for glass product photography. There can’t be any visible reflections, nor should there be poorly defined edges, or missing details. This is true from crystal and glassware, to [sunglasses](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear), gems, [jewelry photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography), or any products with reflective or semi-transparent elements. In this post, we’ll share how to photograph glass and reflective products quickly and easily using PhotoRobot’s [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850). Among our [automated studio photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography), this is one of our more portable robots, able to fit in a personal vehicle and set up in a little over 20 minutes. Keep reading to discover the CASE in action, and to see just how effective PhotoRobot’s open design is for photographing glass products. ## The Challenge: 360-degree photography of a glass cube To show you just how fast PhotoRobot can photograph glass products, we’ve chosen to share how we recently went about [photographing a glass cube](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photographing-glass-products) for a client’s request. The order was to capture a single-row spinset of **24 images** around a cubic, glass award. Watch how yourself in the [PhotoRobot Glass Photography Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/photographing-glass-products). For this type of [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), we chose to use our standard portable turntable device, the **CASE**. For lighting, we improvised a simple paper tent to negate unwanted reflections. Obviously, we could have chosen a standard photography tent, but we wanted to demonstrate the versatility of this workspace. It provides a range of creative options by using diffuse paper, allowing you to easily adapt the space for photographing various types of products. ## The Equipment: the CASE 850 and PhotoRobot_Controls PhotoRobot’s CASE 850 is **compact** in size, highly **portable**, and fits into nearly any space available. The **850 mm glass plate** ensures **shadow-free photography**, and finding the center of the product’s rotation is easy thanks to PhotoRobot’s **laser positioning**. For this project, we also installed a custom portal to work in combination with our improvised paper tent. We find these to work much more effectively than other ready-made solutions on the market. ## Assembly and prep time Unloading and assembling the CASE took **less than 20 minutes**. This is standard for the device, as it's our most portable and mobile photography robot to date. In no time at all, we were set up on location and ready to begin shooting. All we had to do was prep the product. From here, **photographing our glass product can be done in under a minute.** This is thanks to PhotoRobot’s [software suite for automation and control](https://www.photorobot.com/software), which also manages the heavy-lifting in publishing to the cloud and image post-processing. ## 360-degree shooting With this glass product, it takes **less than 20 seconds to snap all 24 photographs** and upload them to the cloud. In less than 1 minute total, we can **shoot**, **post-process**, and **publish** to the cloud to be linked to any number of webpages. Simply trigger the sequence, and PhotoRobot_Controls takes over to automatically post-process according to the presets we have programmed for photographing glass products like this. For this glass product, we used the following presets, and PhotoRobot handled the rest immediately after capturing the photos. - **Automatic Cropping** - **Product Centering** - **Background Removal and Cleaning** - **Image Sharpening** ## Image post-processing and publishing to the cloud All of the image post-processing is driven by PhotoRobot_Controls, our suite of software for full automation and control of our robots, post-processing, and image publishing. In this example, we were using our Cloud version, which enables speedier production. Local post production would have required more time, approximately 10 seconds per image, so 4 minutes per spin. Using the Cloud version, this time is cut nearly in half. This is due to the fact that you simultaneously capture product photos while at the same time post-processing in the Cloud. The machine is fully automated with this entire process, meaning the only way you could possibly streamline workflows further is by prepping the next product in line for shooting. ## The Results In under 1 minute, PhotoRobot was able to accomplish the following output. - **Number of images**: 24 - **Capture speed**: 18 seconds (all 24 images) - **Postprocess speed**: 25 seconds (all 24 images) - **Total production time**: 43 seconds (all 24 images - including on-line CDN publishing via hyperlink / feed) ### Technical Specifications and Equipment - **Original image resolution**: 26,2 Mpx (6240 × 4160 pixels) - **Camera**: Canon EOS RP (full-frame) - **Lens**: Canon RF 24-105 mm - **Lights**: Broncolor Siros 800S Wi-Fi - **PhotoRobot**: [CASE 850](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) - **Software**: [PhotoRobot_controls](https://www.photorobot.com/software) - **360° viewer**: Integrated [PhotoRobot 3D / 360 Product Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) ### Enrich your product photography with PhotoRobot PhotoRobot specializes in product photography solutions, no matter the type of product. Whether it's for glass or other reflective and transparent objects, or another industry entirely like automobiles or heavy machinery, our line of robots include solutions for 360 product photography of products of all sizes. To discover more about photographing glass products, or to meet our line of robots for yourself, contact us today to [book a custom PhotoRobot demo](https://www.photorobot.com/contact). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/which-businesses-need-360-product-viewers # SECTION: blog > which-businesses-need-360-product-viewers # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-03-25 --- # Which Businesses Need a 360 Product Viewer There are several factors you can use to determine when your e-commerce business needs a 360 product viewer. While some businesses might be more ready than others, nearly any company with an online presence can benefit from deploying a product viewer. This is particularly relevant to vendors of highly complex, technical or luxury products, as well as for growing brands and businesses who already have 3D models. Read on to discover if your business is ready for a 360 product viewer, and to learn who benefits most from using them. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Does my e-commerce business need a 360-degree product viewer? The advantages to image viewers for [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) are many, but finding the right time and the perfect software to invest in depends on a number of factors. Thankfully, there are a lot of different product viewers available on the market to meet different needs. These range from those with limited customization options and features to those with full functionality for complete control over the look and feel of the product viewer on the website. [360 product viewing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) is particularly effective for vendors of highly complex or technical products, as well as for those of luxury items and goods. They also serve as a valuable asset for growing e-commerce businesses, and for brands who have already begun utilizing 3D models in their product marketing strategies. Product viewers help companies who need to spice up their online presence, and they are a tool that becomes highly scalable and versatile in any e-commerce business model. ## Which businesses benefit most from 360 product viewers? Bearing in mind that different product viewers will be more advantageous to some e-commerce businesses than for others, let’s look now at which companies will benefit most and more immediately. ## Does your retail involve highly complex, technical, or luxury products? With complex or technical products like appliances, electronics, and machinery, [360-degree product showcases](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting) are an effective way to provide consumers with helpful, actionable information. The same is true for luxury items such as jewellery, watches, automobiles, recreational vehicles and robotics. All of these product categories greatly benefit from advanced and highly-informative product experiences. Products like these tend to be considerably expensive purchases, ones which consumers might rather do in-person. This makes it crucial to replicate the in-store shopping experience as much as possible in the online product experience. The goal is to ease the shopper’s concerns and trigger confident purchases, which in turn leads to less costly and time-consuming returns when a product doesn’t live up to the consumer’s expectations. ## Is your business operating exclusively online? If your business operates exclusively online, your product content is often as equally important to generating sales as the product itself. When consumers can’t inspect a product in-hand, to feel confident enough to make a purchase they need to obtain as much information from the online experience as they would from in-store shopping. Product viewers are one way for businesses to accomplish this, allowing for detail-rich product spins, high-resolution zoom capabilities, and more immersive product content overall. 360 product viewers also provide businesses with a means to achieve [consistency in visual content](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content) across all channels where their products appear. This makes the brand look not only more professional but also more reliable, two essential elements to boosting revenue in online retail. ## Are you a growing brand looking for more revenue and investment? Another way to leverage 360 product viewers is for growing brands and businesses looking to boost revenue or to obtain important investments. Product viewers are cost-effective and logistically smart, especially for new businesses who need an affordable way to present their entire range of products online. In this regard, they make for a valuable tool for boosting brand awareness as well as for introducing growing businesses to potential investors and partners. ## Do you already have 3D product models? Finally, if your business is already utilizing [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce) or has 360-degree product photography, you are more ready than most to start using a 360 product viewer. With today’s product viewing software, you can further enhance any 3D models you have on-hand to include every side and angle of the product, or also to create 3D product visualization videos. Enhance the experience even further with product customization options, and consumers can explore products in different colors, textures, sizes and more on-the-fly through the product viewer. ## How to find the best 360 product viewer for your business When you decide your business needs a 360 product viewer, there are a number of places you can begin looking. What viewing software best meets your needs, however, will depend on the stage of your business, the type of products you sell, and your overall business model. ## Power-up any photo studio with PhotoRobot technology At PhotoRobot, helping companies present their products online in rich detail is only one of our areas of expertise. First and foremost, we design [automated studio photography solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) through hardware and software for in-house product photography. These include all the equipment necessary to simplify and capture remarkable 360-degree product images, scan for 3D models, and to ultimately streamline workflow for photoshoots of products of any size. If you want to learn more about 360 product viewers to meet your business needs, PhotoRobot can help. Don’t hesitate to [contact PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) for a free consultation on product viewers and PhotoRobot-powered product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-advantages-360-product-viewers-for-websites # SECTION: blog > 7-advantages-360-product-viewers-for-websites # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-03-23 --- # 7 Advantages to 360 Product Viewers for your Website Almost any business with an online presence and products to sell can realize significant advantages from deploying a 360-degree product viewer. The latest advances in product viewing technology, including options for both hosted and non-hosted solutions, make it not only easier but also more budget-friendly for businesses to create immersive and informative product visualizations that sell. Keep reading to discover the advantages of using a 360-degree product viewer for your webpage and for your online retail. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Deploying a 360-Degree Product Viewer [360-degree product viewers](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) offer a wide range of advantages for websites and e-commerce on both the business and the consumer level. There are hosted viewers (via a third-party platform) and non-hosted viewers (which integrate directly onto a website). Both provide viable solutions, and they allow companies to create immersive, detail-rich and informative product experiences. Specifically, product viewers provide advantages in everything from product presentation to customer satisfaction, conversions, engagement and time-to-market. Further, these benefits can extend to buyer’s confidence, reducing returns and significantly boosting overall revenue. Let’s zoom in closer, moving onto 7 of the most noteworthy advantages to 360 product viewers for your website and online retail. ## 7 advantages to using a 360 product viewer If a picture can convey 1000 words, imagine what an interactive experience through a 360 product viewer can accomplish. Image viewing software like PhotoRobot's enables businesses to host 360 spins with hot spots, [eCommerce product galleries](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting), panoramic shots and more - all on a single page. ## 1 - Trends from traditional in-store shopping to e-commerce Even before the major shift to e-commerce influenced by Covid-19, there was a strong trend growing in online shopping. The need for high-quality imagery was there, and now it’s here more than ever. Thus, the most important aspect in [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) has become the ability to replicate the in-store shopping experience online. Consumers want to see as many images of a product as possible before making a purchase, and they expect to view products from all angles and with deep fields of zoom. [360 spin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), spin videos, and [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), allow businesses to meet these demands and more. ## 2 - Boosting customer satisfaction The next advantage to deploying a 360 product viewer on your website is the level of customer satisfaction it generates. A spin image allows consumers to not only manipulate products on the fly and zoom into rich detail, it more importantly makes them feel they are in control of the entire experience. This provides a level of comfort that simply does not exist with in-store shopping, allowing consumers time to carefully consider products before making a decision for themself. All without any sales representative or vendor pressuring them to do so. ## 3 - Decreasing overall returns Another advantage inherent to 360 product viewers is their positive influence on product returns and boosting overall revenue. With the information consumers receive from a product viewer, they are much more likely to be accurately informed about the product and thus make more confident purchases. This in turn leads to less overall returns and less expenses for businesses, as product returns can be not only costly but also time-consuming and inconvenient for both the consumer and the vendor. ## 4 - Increasing conversions [Boosting conversion rates in e-commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/boost-conversion-rates-in-e-commerce) is at the top of the priority list for business managers. One way to do this is through SEO strategies, strong website designs and extensive advertising and marketing campaigns. Nonetheless, to see any significant progress in conversions, your product presentation is crucial. The more exciting and rewarding the product experience, the more likely you are to firstly attract viewers to your website, and secondly to peak their interest potentially enough to trigger a purchase. ## 5 - Enhanced product presentation Beyond the long list of benefits to using [professional product photography for websites](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/professional-photography-for-websites), product viewers enhance product presentation with accurate, detail-rich and helpful information. This can be for example viewing the full dimensions of a product from top to bottom, such as shoes, or even viewing 360-degrees of a luxury item like jewellery, watches, high-end furniture or automobiles. When all it takes is a click and a drag to view a product from all angles and zooms, there are few better ways to present your product. ## 6 - Reduced time-to-market The majority of 360 product viewers begin with a 3D model, and this opens up a lot of opportunities for what you can do with product content. 3D models allow businesses to take a single model and multiply it into hundreds of different product iterations of various colors, designs, textures and more. This makes it possible to visualize products even before beginning production. It also allows for valuable market testing and product research, as well as B2B presentations to define consumer’s needs before manufacturing the product. ## 7- Amplified engagement Finally, the simple fact of the matter with 360 product viewers is that they’re modern technology and they excite consumers. Visitors to your website have an active role in the experience like never before, allowing them on-the-fly customization choices and introducing them to a completely unique and new way to shop. Further, for businesses, this increases on-page time, engagement, and can also provide valuable insights into consumer behavior and interaction with different products and models. ## The bottom line Spin photography, 3D models, and 360 product viewers on websites are today’s solution for boosting performance in e-commerce. At [PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/), we specialize in product photography and product photography solutions, including hardware and software for control and automation of photoshoots, image processing, file storage, and direct publishing to the web. Learn more about 360 product viewers for your website, and speak with one of PhotoRobot’s technical strategists about all the solutions available for your business. Don’t hesitate to reach out to us today to [schedule a free PhotoRobot consultation](https://www.photorobot.com/contact). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/which-businesses-3d-product-photography-platforms # SECTION: blog > which-businesses-3d-product-photography-platforms # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-03-19 --- # Which Businesses Benefit from 3D Product Photography Platforms? 3D product photography platforms can provide a scalable, long-term solution for businesses in e-commerce and retail. How much you will need to invest to get started, however, hinges on the current stage of your business. In this post, we’ll examine this emerging technology, provide some examples of brands utilizing it, and detail times when businesses can benefit most from employing a 3D product photography platform. - Categories: Product Photography ## What is a 3D product photography platform? [3D product photography platforms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/platforms-3d-product-photography) enable businesses to generate fully interactive product experiences and configurators for e-commerce and retail. These platforms inherit their name from “[3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-product-photography-ecommerce)” (also known as “virtual product photography”), which entails complex product photoshoots consisting of either multi-angle [still shots](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs), [360-degree spins](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery), or [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model). Photoshoots like these can be not only time-consuming but also costly, especially if you don’t already have a professional studio for 360-degree photography. In this case, employing a 3D product photography platform still has its advantages. They allow growing businesses even with smaller product portfolios to generate high volumes and variety in product visuals. This is without the need for individual photoshoots of every product, or even needing the product in stock. If you do already have a professional studio or a wealth of visual assets, these platforms become even more advantageous for your business. The software technology inherent to these platforms produces 2D imagery from 3D product visuals or product component models. Then, when employing, the software enables this 3D imagery or the model components to come to life in a wide range of formats. These include 2D photorealistic images, 360° spins, [3D configuration](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), or highly advanced augmented and virtual reality experiences — all in high-resolution, detail-rich display and ready for the web thanks to the 3D product photography platform. ## Examples of 3D product photography in use While 3D product photography comes in many formats, the focus of this post will be utilizing 3D models and configurators on the virtual photography platform, [Emersya](https://emersya.com/en/home). This platform provides technology to create, embed and share top-quality, immersive 3D product experiences. - [The Emersya Product Experience](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/emersya-product-experiences-in-3d-ar-and-vr) 3D models and configurators are particularly useful for businesses whose products have a lot of customizable elements, complex parts, or moving features. They are also very effective tools for digital marketing, for B2B product presentations, or for market testing and product research. To provide examples, let’s look now at 3 brands among many who are successfully utilizing Emersya’s 3D technology on their websites. ## Samsonite 3D product viewer [Samsonite](https://www.samsonite.com/home/home.html), one of the leading brands in travel luggage, uses Emersya’s 3D technology to replicate the in-store suitcase experience, online. This company has even replaced their 360° spin imagery to do this, now offering a more fluid and complete product experience. The technology allows online shoppers to open up and explore the insides of suitcases, change color options on the spot, or even input custom text for a real-time preview of laser engravings. Want to see an example of the 3D software in action? Check out [Samsonite’s 3D product viewer](https://www.samsonite.co.uk/lite-box-spinner-75cm--black-copper/79300-4340.html). ## Billabong - Customization of wetsuits Another great example of 3D product photography technology in action is [Billabong](https://www.billabong.com/), a leading lifestyle and technical surf clothing and swimwear brand. Billabong uses Emersya’s technology to provide shoppers with the ability to customize wetsuits online. Their product configurator enables consumers to preview and select various customization options for the different colors and panels that make up their wetsuits. ## KitchenAid 3D kitchenware experience Next up for the examples is [KitchenAid](https://www.kitchenaid.com/), one of the leading American home appliance brands. They have incorporated Emersya’s 3D technology to provide customers with an interactive product discovery and customization experience for their built-in refrigerators. Thanks to the 3D product experience platform, KitchenAid’s customers can now trigger animations of product functions to understand how they work, see exploded views of each design, and find technical annotations for further clarification. Experience the products for yourself on [Emersya’s showcase for KitchenAid.](https://www.kitchenaid.com/major-appliances/refrigeration/built-in-refrigerators/emersya.html) *For even more examples of the different types of interactive 3D product experiences that can be created using Emersya’s 3D product photography platform, from furniture and home decor to heavy machinery and more, visit Emersya’s page to view their* [*Use Cases*](https://emersya.com/en/useCases)*.* ## Does my business need a 3D product photography platform? Now, for the important question, *what businesses really need to employ a 3D product photography platform?* This technology will be more of a game-changer for some than for others, but there are some clear indicators to help brands and B2B businesses decide if this software should be more or less of a priority in the roadmap. ### 1 - Do you have a wide portfolio of customizable product visuals? Do you have a wealth of customizable or configurable product visuals? These might be, for example, apparel or footwear with various options in color, style, material or texture. If the answer is yes, it’s definitely possible to significantly cut costs, time and energy while getting more products online for consumers. With 3D product photography software, you can multiply an individual photoset or 3D model into hundreds of different product variations or concepts. This is sure to impress shoppers, increase on-page time, and ultimately to trigger purchases. ### 2 - Does your industry demand product content of the highest standard? Are you in a highly competitive industry in which reputation and quality truly matters? For both growing and leading brands in these markets, the importance of immersive, interactive and high-quality imagery cannot be understated. Product presentation in this case is not only crucial for increasing the potential for conversions but also for reducing the likelihood of returns. The more information an image conveys to a shopper, the more likely that image is to live up to the shopper’s purchase expectations. ### 3 - Does you already have 3D models and want more from them? Have you already started exploring 3D visualizations and configurators for your business? If yes and there are 3D models on hand, you should take advantage of these immediately. A 3D product photography platform can provide a repository of product iterations in detail-rich 2D and 3D formats all from a single 3D model. No longer are the days when you need individual photoshoots for every new addition to the product catalogue. Simply look to 3D models as the solution to significantly expand your visual assets. 3D product photography platforms also make it simple to transform 3D models of products into interactive 3D experiences, making it more than simply a visual asset. Leverage interactive experiences for driving consumer engagement, while also providing product insights in a truly unique way. ### Getting started in 3D with PhotoRobot Keep in mind, PhotoRobotcomes with everything you need to get started hosting your product imagery online. If you’re already using our robots, any time you capture products, our software instantly publishes the image files to our CDN-based viewer. The viewer is easy to integrate with any e-shop or webpage, and streamlines time-to-web for all of your product photos, galleries, 360-degree spins and 3D models. To learn more about our product viewer or 3D product photography platforms for your business, [book a free consultation with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) today. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/platforms-3d-product-photography # SECTION: blog > platforms-3d-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-03-12 --- # Hosting Platforms for 3D Product Photography Hosting platforms for 3D product photography (also known as virtual product photography) are a vital asset to growing webshops, e-commerce vendors and B2B businesses. This is particularly true for businesses who possess a wide portfolio of products with customizable elements. In this case, the business needs hundreds or even thousands of product photos to effectively showcase their range of designs, colors, textures and more. Platforms for 3D product photography allow businesses to meet this demand in the most cost-effective and scalable way possible — without the need for a new photoshoot for every variation of the product. - Categories: Product Photography ## 3D Product Photography Platforms With the rising demand in [3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), virtual photography platforms are drawing a lot of attention for their ability to help brands generate high volumes and variety in product content. There are various product image viewers and 360° spin viewers, and then there are platforms for rendering 3D models into highly advanced product experiences. In this post we’ll focus more on the latter, using photogrammetry scanning techniques and hosting them online. 3D product content allows brands to better engage both online and in-store shoppers. In print, 3D product content comes to life in product brochures, leaflets, packaging, labels and more. The high quality and the sheer number of images that go into 3D photography creates a repository of visual assets for businesses to use and recycle on demand. Managing a 3D photoshoot, however, can be a time-consuming and even costly venture, especially if you don’t already have a [product photography setup](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography). This is where platforms for 3D product photography come in, allowing businesses to utilize software to generate photorealistic 2D images from 3D product photos or product component models. ## Why use a 3D product photography platform? Platforms for 3D product photography allow brands to more effectively leverage their visual assets in a variety of ways. They allow for less complications in logistics, cost-effective visualization of products, unmatched image quality, and even for market testing and research. ## Reduce costs and concerns in logistics When all you need is an individual photoset of a product to create hundreds of different 3D visuals in various colors, designs and patterns, logistical concerns become much less demanding. This is due to the software that allows you to utilize existing content from previous photoshoots to recycle and reuse in many formats. These include 2D photorealistic images, [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), 3D configuration, and even augmented / virtual reality experiences. All of the content on these platforms is easily organized, accessible and deliverable, meaning brands can have a wealth of customizable assets on demand. With 3D product photography for e-commerce, it’s possible to generate tens of thousands of images all from one design file. If you’ve ever planned a [product photoshoot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-photoshoots-photorobot), you know very well how much savings this amounts to in time, energy, and costs. Everything including moving the product to the shoot location, setting up the photography equipment, hiring a photographer and conducting the shoot requires time, logistical planning and money. With 3D models, however, the only logistics is in attaining the initial product model, and this can even be completed remotely. The software then does the rest, allowing you to effectively produce more product content without the need for more in-person photoshoots. - [How to Improve Workflow in a Product Photography Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio) - [Equipment for 360 and 3D Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) ## Cost-effective visualization of the entire product portfolio For companies selling a wide stock of products with customizable features, 3D product photography platforms are extremely effective. No longer are the days when companies need individual photos of every single item in stock. Rather, product photography software enables you to photograph individual product components and stitch them onto a 3D model to create digital variations in product designs. Take footwear for example. With a line of shoes in different colors, designs and textures, it can be a daunting task to photograph everything in stock. Instead, it’s possible to build models for each individual component. Then, the software converts this imagery into high-resolution product content to showcase your entire line of products. This means you can consistently provide customers with content for your entire stock, without any need for manufacturing or for shipping. ## Unmatched product image quality and realism Another advantage to 3D product photography platforms is their uncompromising visual quality and the overall realism of 3D imagery. 3D photography allows for truly immersive product experiences, putting shoppers in control of elements such as spin, deep fields of zoom and moving parts to replicate that feeling of having an item in-hand. In the past, this wasn’t as easily accomplished. It was much more challenging to convey a product’s true value to a shopper online and trigger confident purchases. With today’s 3D technology, however, product imagery can match and even be indistinguishable from traditional, high-end product photography. In the case with 3D models, you can also provide views of moving features and technical components to help consumers get a better *feel* for the product. ## Economical market testing and product research The final benefit to using 3D product photography platforms is their convenience for market testing and especially for product research. By using CAD or photogrammetry scanning techniques to build 3D models, companies can now visualize, present and demonstrate products before beginning production. This can be particularly useful for B2B product presentations, and likewise for testing products before putting them on the market. If consumers don’t show interest, then the business has at least saved time and costs in production. If the consumer does, however, the product can be further tailored to the consumer’s needs or be put into production based on how consumers interacted with the product and the perceived demand for it. ## 3D product photography solutions and platforms If looking for a reliable 3D product photography platform for your business, [Emersya](https://emersya.com/en/home) provides a platform for transforming 3D models into fully interactive product experiences and configurators for e-commerce and retail. With Emersya, you can visualize all product customizations online, as well as explore, animate and personalize in 3D and AR. - [Emersya: 3D Product Experiences](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/emersya-product-experiences-in-3d-ar-and-vr) ## Wide ranging solutions for any business' product photography At PhotoRobot, the team is constantly looking for more impressive tools to compliment our solutions for the 360 product photography studio, and Emersya is a valuable asset. To learn more about PhotoRobot’s line of robots for 3D product photography and e-commerce imaging, [contact PhotoRobot technical strategists](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) for a free consultation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/product-viewers-for-e-commerce-businesses # SECTION: blog > product-viewers-for-e-commerce-businesses # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-03-04 --- # 360-Degree Product Viewers for E-Commerce Businesses 360-degree product viewers provide a digital view of a product from all sides and angles, top to bottom, and they are a valuable asset for online retail and e-commerce. There are both hosted and self-hosted product viewers. Hosted viewers involve hiring a third-party platform who allows for uploading, housing and delivering product images onto a webpage through the viewer. A self-hosted viewer, requires direct integration with a webpage through the purchase of a viewer code. In this post, we’ll look at the advantages and disadvantages to 360 product viewers for e-commerce businesses. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## 360-Degree Product Viewers - the e-Commerce Industry Standard [360-degree product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) calls for a product viewer that is compatible with your website while having the capacity to smoothly deploy and host visual assets online. 360° product viewers are tools for this purpose, allowing you to load a set of still images (usually 24 to 72) to create a spin experience you can utilize for e-commerce. Commerce is leaning heavily towards digital shopping, and this was true even before the onset of Covid-19. Consumers want the convenience of shopping from home, on-the-go or on mobile. This makes the product image the dominant digital asset for online businesses, webshops and e-commerce vendors. Businesses with more immersive and visually-rich [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) than the competitors rise to the top, while those who can’t keep the pace risk serious blows to their bottom line. Fortunately, there are a range of choices for uploading, managing and hosting product spins, and PhotoRobot is your expert in the industry for 360 product photography and for choosing the best product viewer for your webshop or e-commerce website. ## What is a 360-degree product viewer? In short, a [360 product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-viewer-image-hosting) consists of any digital view of a product that presents it from all sides and angles, from top to bottom. These visuals often come in formats such as marketing images, interactive images, [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), and [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video). To deploy these visual assets, [360 product photography software](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) runs through a device’s browser to create the interactive experience. There are hosted third-party product viewers, and there are product viewers for integration directly onto your website. Both can make great choices for businesses, but which is better will depend on your business model and what makes the most sense for you. Let’s look now at a comparison between hosted and self-hosted 360 product viewers. ## Hosted viewers When you use a third-party platform to deploy a product viewer on a webpage, this is a hosted viewer. These hosted viewers allow you to use the provider’s software to publish, house, and distribute imagery onto your website. This involves a process very similar to embedding a YouTube video on a webpage, in which an embeddable code enables access to the external video player directly from the main website. Simply plug the code into your page, and YouTube handles the rest. It’s the same as with hosted viewers. These platforms, rather than displaying video, create a spin experience from a product photoset to display on the web in 360-degree format. ## Advantages of hosted viewers Among the advantages to employing a hosted product viewer are file delivery, load time, and their capacity for high-quality imagery. When working with high-resolution product images for e-commerce, this can be particularly valuable. Hosted viewers enable you to upload this imagery while the platform ensures responsive web design by automatically resizing images according to the viewer’s device and page dimensions. This optimizes page load time, and it also leads to consistent and uncompromising image quality. Another advantage to hosted viewers is their convenience for image distribution. All it requires to distribute product visuals across additional websites is an individual link. This link, provided by the platform, creates the product spin on any page, without anybody needing to edit a single line of code. Beyond spins, some of these platforms even allow businesses to create downloadable product spins as videos or in GIF file format. Take for example PhotoRobot’s [CDN-based 360 / 3D product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer), which comes standard in PhotoRobot_Control software. The advantage provided by this product viewer is that everything you upload from files to links for publishing and more are automatically generated without any manual input required. Set it once, forget, and the viewer does the rest of the work. ## Concerns of hosted viewers When looking at the disadvantages of hosted product viewers for e-commerce, the first of concern is the price point. Traditionally, hosted viewers are a fair amount more expensive than self-hosted viewers. They also have recurring costs. If the business already pays for a Content Delivery Network (CDN) or image hosting of some kind, this means employing a hosted viewer would double the cost for this one service. Another point of contention is that you have less control and customization with hosted compared to self-hosted solutions. ## Self-hosted viewers A self-hosted viewer is a product viewer which you integrate directly onto your website. In this case, the business often has to purchase a viewer code. The code enables the business to utilize the viewer on their own webpage. The viewer then accesses images which you host on your own web server or CDN. It’s no different than hosting your current repository of static images, only now it’s with an additional tool to manage and operate. With many self-hosted viewers, take **Garden Gnome** or **Magic Toolbox** for example, there is a licensing fee per domain. **PhotoRobot**, however, recently introduced its own self-hosted viewer which is available at no additional cost. With unlimited view counts and data transfers, the only costs you will incur are for the data storage used. ## Advantages of self-hosted viewers Among the advantages to self-hosted viewers are their one-time cost, their integration and customization options, and the fact that they are development friendly. This means they might be more suitable for some business than for others. However, if you have a team of developers or a third-party website operator, a self-hosted viewer becomes much more easy to leverage. Moreover, most of the leading self-hosted viewers have direct plug-ins for many popular e-commerce platforms, so images are immediately available for use across multiple channels. ## Concerns of self-hosted viewers One drawback to self-hosted product viewers affects businesses who need product images on numerous websites. Oftentimes, self-hosted viewers require one license per domain, so with more websites comes more costs. This also brings complications in image distribution, as you might require the same product image on numerous platforms or need to update images on all of these channels. Another concern is that self-hosted viewers do not provide control over image load time, so on-page speed is wholly dependent on the speed of your image server. ## Tips for using a spin product viewer on your website Whether using a hosted or a self-hosted viewer, there are a few general rules to follow that will ensure the best performance on your webpage. ## 1 - Exclusively use the WebP file format TIFF and PNG file formats are simply too large, and they negatively impact page performance with spin images. The most reliable format now is WebP, which employs both lossy and lossless compression. It also supports transparent backgrounds, and the final image size is comparable with that of JPG. This ensures the same quality of resolution and clearness without compromising page speed. ## 2 - Set the product image for auto-spin The auto-spin design feature makes the image begin spinning only after the page completely loads. In this way, you not only demonstrate the experience to the consumer but also make them aware of when they can interact with the product. ## 3 - Minimize page load times with less spins per page While one or two spins is easily manageable on-page, page load-times can be drastically affected if you overload a single page with spins. This is why as a general rule it’s best to aim for only one or at maximum two spins for every one product page. ## Looking for the best product viewer for your business? When choosing a product viewer for your business, both hosted and self-hosted solutions are viable. The answer of what’s best, however, will depend on factors such as the scale of the business, the business model and available resources. At PhotoRobot, we specialize in product photography solutions and understand very well what it takes for businesses of any size to succeed in e-commerce. We have even designed our own free online image viewer as part of our hosting services. If you’d like to learn more about PhotoRobot solutions or get advice on the best product viewer for your business, don’t hesitate to [contact PhotoRobot today](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) for a free consultation with one of our technical strategists. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/effective-equipment-360-spin-photography # SECTION: blog > effective-equipment-360-spin-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-02-16 --- # Effective Equipment for 360 Spin Photography Looking for the most effective equipment for 360 spin photography? Accelerate your visual content production with this guide on 3D product photography solutions, including devices and software for control and automation. Discover motorized turntables for products of any size. Learn about companion accessories and equipment, and find the best cameras and lighting setups to make your 360 spin photography even more effective and scalable. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## Effective 360 Spin Photography Equipment and Solutions Automated photography solutions and equipment for [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) not only cut operational costs but also help to streamline workflow in the studio. Cutting-edge technology like [motorized turntables](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography), [robotic camera arms](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robotic-arm-360-object-photography), [rotary devices](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube) and [software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) for control and automation transform areas even with limited space into professional workstations for 360-degree product photography. No matter if it’s a product as small as a diamond engagement ring or as large as an automobile, [PhotoRobot’s line of robots](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) lead the industry in 360 spin photography solutions. With easy-to-master equipment and automation software for valuable savings in time and money, these systems can rotate products for spin photography, control cameras, trigger studio lights, and even automatically process images and publish final results to the web in minutes. - [Guide to 360 Product Photography for E-Commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-360-product-photography-for-e-commerce) - [Professional Product Photography for E-Commerce Websites](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/professional-photography-for-websites) All you need is the right PhotoRobot system for the job, the lighting setup, a high-end camera, and a computer for the workstation. Thankfully, PhotoRobot supports most lighting setups, cameras and computers, so you might already have everything you need for the task at hand. If you don’t already have an operational in-house studio, however, this guide should serve as an overview of all the equipment you need to produce 360 spin photography easily and effectively. See a single click produce all product images in the [PhotoRobot Output Production Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/one-click-output-production-demo). ## Components of the in-house studio The in-house studio for 360 spin photography requires a few essential components to perform at maximum efficiency. These revolve around the photography equipment as well as the software for control and automation to streamline photoshoots and workflow. 360 spin photos are especially effective at triggering conversions and boosting overall sales and revenue. You simply can’t achieve the same realism or effect as you can with high-quality 360-degree spins without customers shopping in-store. This is why more and more brands, webshops and vendors are looking to 360 spin photography for online retail, e-commerce and marketplaces like Amazon. What equipment you need for [3D / 360 product imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) will depend on the type of products you're shooting. For small to medium size objects, oftentimes a motorized turntable like the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table) is perfect. For medium size and heavier objects like furniture, there are larger versions of turntables like the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turning-platform-360-product-photography), and there is even the Carousel [turntable for automobiles and heavy machinery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography). There are also systems for fashion photography of live models on a [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/catwalk-for-apparel-photography-and-online-fashion-shows), or devices like [the Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) for rotating mannequins or suspending products in air to snap 360 spins of apparel, clothing and more. ## Motorized turntables for 360 spin photography **Motorized turntables** are especially effective at capturing 360-degrees of a product, from top to bottom, all in short time. If you aren’t familiar with motorized turntables, think of them as something like a **Lazy Susan**, only their design is for rotating products rather than food and drink around the table. These computer-assisted rotary devices rotate objects 360 degrees on a transparent glass plate to capture photos from select angles. The plate enables photography of the product from underneath through the glass, making products appear to float in thin air. In this way, motorized turntables are particularly effective at capturing everything from traditional still shots to 360° spins, as well as for scanning products to construct 3D models for AR / VR experiences. - [Tips for 360-Degree Motorized Turntable Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography) - [Setting up a Motorized Turntable for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360-product-photography) There are also a number of different models, companion accessories and equipment to consider when setting up for spin photography with a motorized turntable. The turntable must be sturdy enough to support a smooth rotation of the product, while also taking up only enough space to allow for free movement of the photographer around the scene. Then, there are accessories and equipment like robotic camera arms, rotating mannequins, and suspension devices to provide even more space and versatility for your 360 spin photography. ## Companion equipment for motorized turntables Other equipment and companion accessories worth consideration for 360 spin photography include PhotoRobot’s Cube, the Robotic Arm, and the MultiCam. The Cube’s design makes it a particularly popular solution in the industry for product photography of apparel and fashion, as well as objects that need to be suspended in air like bags, chandeliers and light fittings. As for the Robotic Arm, this device builds on the concept of the traditional camera arm, and it combines well with many motorized turntables like [PhotoRobot’s Case](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850). The Robotic Arm allows for precision in camera control as well as movement, and comes standard with two arm sizes to capture objects of any size. - [PhotoRobot’s Case for Automated 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography) There is also the [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam), PhotoRobot’s multi-camera system designed to simultaneously capture 3D and multi-row images. Capable of snapping hundreds of photos in an instant, this device also pairs well with motorized turntables and has been developed for effective multi-room shooting of large volumes of products. Better yet, all of these robots and companion devices come standard with software for synchronous control and automation in the studio. ## Professional strobes and LEDs for bright and even lighting The next component to setting up for spin photography is professional lighting. With PhotoRobot, this is accomplished by a combination of strobe lighting and LED panel lights. These offer the perfect lighting from all angles for 360 spin photography. Strobe lighting is extremely bright and with high output that creates a deep depth of field. This also ensures sharp focus on products and makes them appear to freeze in motion. The intensity of the strobes enables the use of higher aperture to reach this deeper depth of field, and it also plays a vital role in shooting larger products. Smaller objects, like mobile phones for example, often don’t require the strobes but rather are easily captured with LED lighting. - [Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography) ## A suitable camera for high-quality 360 spin photography PhotoRobot’s systems support the majority of cameras, although [Canon](https://global.canon/en/index.html) cameras integrate best with the control and automation software and provide the most versatility. While a high-quality consumer camera is more than suitable for capturing spin photography, a professional-grade camera is always preferable if wanting to use spinset imagery later on in print formats. The main goal is having a camera capable of reaching a deep depth of zoom and an overall quality of photos for realistic and immersive 3D product content. For this purpose, consider a standard zoom lens to cover a wider range of product sizes. - [DSLR vs Mirrorless Cameras: Comparison and Review](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/dslr-vs-mirrorless-cameras-in-2020-comparison-and-review) ## A computer to manage studio equipment and software Regarding the computer, the main concern is that you have a high-end processor and enough RAM for the job. With all of the images that go into creating, processing and storing 360 spin photography, you need a top-of-the-line machine. After all, why invest in state-of-the-art automation equipment and software if only to waste all the time you should be saving while you wait for extended loading times and deal with untimely crashes? With PhotoRobot, however, this becomes less of a concern, especially if using the cloud-based software. The local version of the software, even with a powerful computer, only allows for sequential workflow: shooting first and then post-processing. If using the cloud-based version, local processes are much less demanding on the computer, as all imagery is uploaded to the cloud and processed from there. This means that immediately after shooting a product, the operator can move to shooting the next in line while the software handles all processing in the cloud. By splitting the workload between the local computer and the cloud system, productivity is effectively doubled. As for PhotoRobot’s control suite and automation software, it is available and responsive on any modern web browser. Use PhotoRobot software on [MAC or Windows](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements), and utilize the web-based UI on iOS, Android or Windows Mobile. ## The studio control suite and automation software Finally, what makes PhotoRobot an industry leader and what clients value most is all the features available in the control suite and automation software. Users can control machine movements (including all robots, cameras and lighting), save and work with settings, manage the capturing process and image post processing, and even automate publishing directly to the web. All these features support complete automation in the studio and have become the standard across PhotoRobot devices. ## Invest in customers. Invest in product photography. PhotoRobot’s flexible tools for 360 product photography have been designed to meet any product photography needs, no matter the product. Whether it’s traditional still shots, 360-degree spins, or 3D models for AR / VR experiences, PhotoRobot has the machines and the software to automate all of the studio processes that go into creating remarkable product content. To learn more about our solutions and if they would be right for you, [connect with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) to plan your free consultation with one of our technical experts. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-product-photography-ecommerce # SECTION: blog > 3d-product-photography-ecommerce # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-02-14 --- # 3D Product Photography for eCommerce In today’s highly competitive e-commerce market, 3D product photography has become an invaluable asset for brands looking to step up their game and convert more customers. Traditional product photography and standard stock photos from distributors might still be convenient for companies to access or achieve. They however simply don’t have the same impact as cutting-edge 3D photography does on conversions and overall revenue. Keep reading to discover more on the current trends in 3D product photography for e-commerce, 360° spins and 3D models for AR / VR experiences. - Categories: Product Photography ## Why 3D Product Photography? [3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) is turning heads in digital product marketing. No matter if it’s for online marketplaces like Amazon and Shopify, or smaller webshops and brand pages, 3D product content is setting the standard in [photography for eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography). From high-quality multi-angle still shots and [**360 spins**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), to [**360 product video**](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video) and brands utilizing [**photogrammetry scanning**](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) to build [**3D models for AR / VR**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce) content, today’s online shoppers aren’t as easily impressed as in the past. Consumers *are* doing more shopping online, however, providing even more advantages to leveraging 3D photography for product marketing. 3D product visuals allow brands to assist the consumer on numerous levels. They help shoppers find the right product, ensure they purchase exactly what they expect, and even enrich the shopping experience with spin and zoom features as well as 3D models for more informative and interactive product content. Moreover, when brands utilize 3D product photography for e-commerce, they prepare themselves for long-term, scalable operations. ## 3D product photography in comparison While traditional product photography in e-commerce does provide numerous advantages, in comparison to photography for 3D product content it simply isn’t as effective or as scalable. Traditional product photography does allow for interesting approaches to showcasing products, like with lifestyle photography or nature photography. These static, *stock image repository* photos, however, simply don’t go far into the long-term when you have a large catalogue of products to regularly update on a webshop or across several marketplaces. Nor can traditional product photos convey the wealth of information that 3-dimensional product visuals can, to truly immerse shoppers in the product experience. Sometimes hundreds of photos go into creating a single 360° spin, and even more go into the creation process of 3D models. These become not only interactive 3D product content, they also build a repository of visual assets for the brand for future reuse in marketing or creating new product content. ## Advantages to 3D product photography Again, the more product photos you possess, the better. When you’re shooting for 3D product photography, you’re sometimes capturing hundreds of photos of a single product, and this steadily builds a repository of visual assets for later use. Then, with the right software, this imagery is easy to edit and change to provide variations and even customization options for potential consumers. This is where aspects like variety in product color, patterns, textures, aesthetics and styles can really enrich product content. These assets can also deliver in a variety of other formats, from use in print content like product displays, brochures and packaging, to digital formats for product webpages, webshops and marketplaces. Take it a step further, and 3D models can be used to create even more immersive product content like a projection of furniture or heavy objects into a virtual space, AR demonstrations for technical products, and even effective B2B sales presentations. ## Helping shoppers find the perfect product for them Today’s software allows you to take a single product image and multiply it into imagery for hundreds of other product photos with different color combinations, designs, styles and more. This means that shoppers not only have more choice but also that brands have the ability to create even more product content from individual photoshoots. This way they can showcase all of their range of products in-stock, while also helping shoppers compare product variations and visualize in rich detail exactly what they will be purchasing before making an order. ## Providing an interactive and informative product experience If you want to better inform potential shoppers about products, there really is no better way than with 3D product photography. You simply can’t achieve the same quality and realism with traditional photography compared to an interactive product experience. 360° spins and software like PhotoRobot's [3D / 360 product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) effectively showcase products in ways only comparable to the in-store shopping experience. With spin features to view products from all angles, a deep field of zoom, control and customization options, it’s virtually as close as brands can get to putting products directly into the hands of shoppers. ## From passive shopping to active shopping Another advantage to utilizing 3D product photos is that you put the shoppers in control. They have both control of the product experience and the shopping experience. From comparing different models to making a purchase in their own time, online shoppers have all the visual benefits of shopping in-store without the stress of a salesperson looking over their shoulder. This transforms shoppers from passive viewers into active participants in the shopping process, all the while providing the comforts of being able to shop anywhere at any time. ## Wider ranges of product visuals for individual products With 3D product photography, you also have the ability to adjust and edit everything in real-time, from colors and designs to even the background. Literally everything can be changed, meaning there’s no need to snap photos of every product variation. Rather, 3D visualizations provide the advantage of revisions, editing and corrections to product content even long after the photoshoot. This means you can expand your online catalogue all without needing different designs, colors and textures of your product in hand. ## Demonstrate products “in-action” Finally, interactive 3D product experiences for e-commerce have real potential to demonstrate products in-action in their natural environment. This includes aspects like moving parts and features, complex machinery constructions, product projections into virtual space and more. [Augmented reality for e-commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce) is particularly effective in this regard, allowing shoppers to experience a realistic representation of things like usage, aesthetics and size. [AR shopping apps](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-shopping-apps-2020) are booming in popularity because of this, and it’s likely this trend is here to stay. ## PhotoRobot Solutions for 3D Product Photography The primary goal of 3D product photography for e-commerce is to effectively convey valuable information about products to consumers. The more detail-rich and informative the product experience, the more likely the brand is to boost conversions, sales and overall revenue. [PhotoRobot’s line of robots](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) for 3D e-commerce product photography are designed specifically to meet this purpose, with robotic and automation software solutions for a wide range of product photography needs. If you want your product photography strategy to have a real impact among today’s competition, don’t overlook any of today’s technology and equipment for 360 and 3D product photography. To discover more, dive into our resources or [contact PhotoRobot today](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) for a free consultation with a PhotoRobot specialist technician. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/next-gen-motorized-turntable-photography # SECTION: blog > next-gen-motorized-turntable-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2021-01-28 --- # The Frame: Next-Generation Motorized Turntable Photography PhotoRobot’s Frame is a next-generation solution for motorized turntable photography. Extremely precise and versatile, this robot can capture photos for perfectly positioned still images, 360° spins and even for building 3D models with photogrammetry. Its design allows for the cameras as well as the background to travel around an object on a transparent glass plate. The glass plate of the motorized turntable thus provides an additional angle for cameras underneath the product, meaning you can automatically capture all the imagery necessary to construct 3D models alongside still images and 360° spins. - Categories: Robots ## The Frame: Motorized Turntable for Stills, 360 spins & 3D models [PhotoRobot’s Frame](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/frame) is an all-in-one solution combining a motorized turntable and a robotic arm for capturing still images, 360° spin photography, and for compiling imagery for 3D models. Its cutting-edge design enables the cameras and the background to travel seamlessly around a product, even under the optical glass plate of the turntable. This means that while you snap photos for still images and 360° spins, you can also automatically capture all the imagery necessary for rendering products into 3D models. Take the Video Tour of the [PhotoRobot Frame 3D Photography Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/frame-robot-turntable-demo). With the Frame’s signature, **double 360° rotation**, it’s particularly effective at capturing consistent, high-quality product photos in remarkably short periods of time. Use the Frame for products from the size of engagement rings to suitcases, as well as for transparent, glossy, light or dark products. Combine all of this with PhotoRobot’s **suite of software for automation and control** and the Frame becomes an all-in-one workspace. Control everything (from cameras to the robot, turntable rotation, workflow, image post processing and more) all on one intuitive interface for more effective motorized turntable photography. ## Versatile equipment for 360° motorized turntable photography The Frame is a truly flexible and versatile motorized turntable combined with a robotic camera arm.Its compact design allows for easy access to the operation area and makes it suitable for most warehouses, workspaces or studios even with limitations in space. Its design also allows for self-installation, and the entire workspace can be moved on castors from one location to the next for maximum mobility. The motorized turntable supports a wide range of products, from small to medium and large objects, to more complex items like those with reflective, glossy, light or dark surfaces. Utilize various backgrounds with the Frame to further enhance product photos. Choose from solid screens, white light or color, or even picture screens to find what best compliments the product. ## Dual-axis 360° rotation With double 360° plate rotation, there really is no clipping required for standard still images, spins and photography for 3D models. The optical glass plate and the diffuse background enable lighting of the photographed product from all angles. This means that the hardened glass table can naturally create high-quality photographs even on a pure white background. ## Capture products from top to bottom all in a single click The turntable’s plate is 130 cm in diameter and has a load-bearing capacity of up to 40 kg, making it the largest workstation for 360° turntable photography on the market. The ability to photograph products through the glass makes it effective at capturing all the images necessary to create full 3D models in a single click. Additionally, the built-in background screen travels opposite the cameras, ensuring the background is always directly behind the products. Built-in positioning lasers, position sensors, and control units help keep the workspace tidy and free of cables while also ensuring simple automatic calibration and easy setup of products to the center of rotation. ## Perfect positioning for stills, 360 spins, and 3D models Owing to the fact that lasers focus on the product not only from the bottom but also from the sides and under the camera, finding the perfect position for 360° product photography is quick and easy. All lasers are protected from unwanted contact or crashes in the body of the machine, while the camera portal allows for installation of several cameras and even projectors for special 3D scanning techniques. The lights as well as the cameras travel around the motorized table, creating a more natural lighting similar to that achieved by manual rotation of the object in existing light conditions. Then, with the camera’s ability to shoot also from underneath the glass, capturing a single photo or a set of images from the bottom of the object is easily accomplished without even touching the product. This is particularly useful when creating full 3D models of products with photogrammetry. ## Software for automation, control & photo editing With a modern intuitive design, **PhotoRobot_Controls** provides users with the best comprehensive studio management available on the market. Control the entire workspace remotely (from robots to cameras and lighting), manage workflow and realize effective automation at a click for image post processing, file management, delivery to the web and more. ## Motorized turntable photography and 3D models made easy At PhotoRobot, we design tools *by photographers for photographers*. Not only are these robots designed to optimize making 3D product content, they are also made for long-term, scalable photography operations. The next-Gen Frame is no exception, taking motorized turntable photography even one step further. To discover if PhotoRobot’s Frame is suitable for you or to meet our wide range of robots for product photography, don’t hesitate to contact us today for a free consultation. One of our specialist technicians can discuss all of the options available for you to invest in your business by investing in your product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/professional-photography-for-websites # SECTION: blog > professional-photography-for-websites # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-12-07 --- # Professional Product Photography for E-Commerce Websites When you have professional product photography on an e-commerce website, it generates trust, engagement and also conversions in today’s highly competitive market. This is true for both returning consumers and for first-time visitors to your website. Thankfully, with the last decade’s advances in professional product photography equipment and with in-house solutions now more cost-effective, creating truly professional photography for e-commerce webpages is achievable even on a budget. - Categories: Product Photography ## Advantages to Professional Product Photography for E-commerce Websites While there are a wealth of reasons to use [professional product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) for your e-commerce website, they all primarily revolve around the customer. In today’s highly competitive market, this entails utilizing rich media and detailed product content like [360-degree spins](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery), [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) or [product videos](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models) in order to stand out in the crowd. In the past, webshops simply could not compete with the experience of in-person shopping. This is no longer the case however. With better equipment for product photography and budget-friendly solutions for [photography for eCommerce.](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) [PhotoRobot’s line of robots](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) for product photography are designed specifically for this purpose, providing companies the tools and automation software for the job. Continue reading to learn why you should use professional product photography on your e-commerce website, and to discover how PhotoRobot can amplify your product content while saving you time and effort. ## Exceed customer expectations with a professional website With so many successful marketplaces, webshops, and e-commerce vendors, today’s shoppers have an overabundance of options for shopping online. Moreover, these shoppers are inundated with professional product images like 360 [packshots](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), 3D models and even AR / VR experiences, and consumers now expect nothing less. This amounts to strong competition in the e-commerce market, and it also means that high-quality, detail-rich and professional images are of great value. To truly engage shoppers and to exceed expectations, the product photography on your website must convey all the information necessary to leave nothing to the imagination and to trigger purchases. Any absence of information or low-quality imagery is likely to turn shoppers away. With professional product photography, however, this becomes less of a concern. Professional [product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) enables brands to not only efficiently achieve the volume of photos customers expect but to also improve the overall quality of their e-commerce website. ## Generate buzz and boost trust in your brand The next advantage to using professional product photos for an e-commerce website revolves around generating buzz and trust for your brand. The quality of your images builds trust, while higher quantities of professional photos and varying content formats can generate a fair amount of buzz. This is especially true for AR / VR product experiences, which are seeing more and more use in digital product marketing strategies. Buzz-worthy marketing campaigns might involve for example a scannable code that leads to an interactive product experience in virtual or augmented reality. Take Coca-Cola for instance, who as of 2019 [embraced AR](https://www.thedrum.com/news/2019/09/10/coca-cola-embraces-augmented-reality-with-interactive-experience) to enable access to users to interactive stories by pointing their phone’s camera at a can of Coke. This in turn generated a lot of buzz, while having very little to do with the actual product. Similar efforts in AR / VR product experiences have been embraced by major brands like Nike, Puma, Sephora, LEGO and more. Some of these marketing campaigns promote product features and presentation, while others are simply exciting interactive experiences to promote the brand. ## Utilize professional photography to create interactive 3D product experiences Another advantage to using professional product photography for your website is that you’ll capture all the imagery necessary to create 3D product content. These formats include still shots from various angles, 360 spins, or 3D models to build AR / VR experiences. 360 spins in particular have become commonplace in digital marketing strategies and for online marketplaces like Amazon and Shopify. 360-degree photography, which assembles a collection of professional photos to create a frictionless “spin”, allows shoppers to not only view products from all angles but also to zoom into microscopic details. This is one way of replicating the in-store shopping experience, and ultimately helps to further build trust in your products and your brand. ## Save time and effort, and enhance workflow With effective photography equipment and solutions for the job, capturing professional product photography for your website does not need to be time-consuming. In many cases, and especially with PhotoRobot’s flexible tools for eCommerce product photography, the process becomes effortless and even enjoyable for photographers of any level or experience. PhotoRobot also prioritizes workflow in every family of its robots and within its suite of software for [studio product photography automation](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation). Everything from the packaging and distribution to the functionality and automation of these robots is aimed at maximizing workflow and getting the most possible complete in a single day. In order to achieve the quality of 360-degree photography to impress online shoppers, however, it’s crucial to properly manage the shooting, quality assurance, image post production and editing. This is where you might want a professional in the studio or can consider hiring somebody out, but, again, PhotoRobot solutions are very much like having a pro on the team. ## Professional product photography is scalable for long-term operation The more professional your product photography, the more scalable your project becomes. Possessing a wide catalogue of product photos for 360-degree imagery enables brands and sellers to build a repository of visual content for later use — for building 3D models, or creating AR / VR product experiences. There is one concern, however, and that’s volume. If running a small webshop with a large catalogue of products, the task to photograph, categorize, edit and upload imagery can quickly become daunting. This is where tasks like automated file management and delivery should be prioritized for maximum efficiency. PhotoRobot’s suite of software is optimized specifically for this, including file backup as well as delivery to the e-shop — all without renaming a single file. If you have a long list of products but aren’t running a professional product photography studio, this is where you might consider hiring out help to get your e-commerce website in better shape. A professional studio can assist in not only capturing the high-quality imagery for the website but also in specializing and managing product categories. ## Impressive product photos reduce returns and boost conversions Consistency in visual content promotes brand consistency while also reducing returns and boosting overall conversions and revenue. This is due to the fact that with professional photography, shoppers are much more likely to receive the products they expect. Not only that, but they are better informed about product features and functionalities that might trigger a purchase and also reduce the likelihood of returns. Returns, especially on high-value products, can be costly for business. This means that in today’s market, when shoppers want to receive exactly what they see in the photos online, your product photography matters. Unprofessional photos or blurry images are very likely to either dissuade shoppers from making purchases or lead to their dissatisfaction and ultimately to them returning products. ## Invest in product photography. Shoppers will invest in your business. Online, your product visuals should be just as valuable to shoppers as the product itself. Product photography needs to convey an accurate presentation of the product. The higher the quality and the more detail-rich the product content, the more likely you are to distinguish your brand from today’s competition. To discover more about PhotoRobot-powered product photography equipment and software to maximize efficiency and workflows, [contact PhotoRobot technology specialists today](https://www.photorobot.com/contact). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360deg-photography-and-heavy-objects # SECTION: blog > turntable-for-360deg-photography-and-heavy-objects # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-12-02 --- # Robotic Turntable for 360° Photography and Heavy Objects PhotoRobot designed the Robotic Turntable to be effective and versatile for 360° product photography and for photography of heavy objects. Extremely heavy-duty, this robot has a load capacity of up to 200 kg and is suitable for small to medium size products such as tools and machinery. It’s simple to pair the Robotic Turntable with any arm for simple and comfortable shooting of 360° photos, or even to combine it with PhotoRobot’s Cube for synchronous rotation with a partially suspended product. - Categories: Robots ## Motorized turntable for 360-degree photography of heavy objects [PhotoRobot’s Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable) is a universal tool for 360° product photography and photography of heavy objects. Its design features as well as PhotoRobot’s suite of software for automation and control makes this heavy-duty motorized turntable easy to integrate into any existing workflows or to set up in nearly space. [Motorized turntables](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) are extremely effective at capturing imagery for immersive and interactive product experiences, and the Robotic Turntable is no exception. What sets it apart from other turntables, however, is its extremely high load capacity and its versatility. - [Tips for 360-Degree Motorized Turntable Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography) - [Setting up a Motorized Turntable for 360 Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360-product-photography) The Robotic Turntable operates well with any simple arm and can also work in combination with PhotoRobot’s Cube or with a transparent plate on distancing columns. These features provide more options for 360° product photography, ensuring productive and consistent photoshoots for a wide range of heavy objects such as machinery and tools like milling machines, engines, spare parts and more. ## Accessories, features and functionality of the Robotic Turntable ### Heavy-duty With motorized turntable photography of exceptionally heavy objects, you need an extremely sturdy turntable. This is why PhotoRobot’s first design consideration for the Robotic Turntable was stability. We designed the turntable to hold up to 200 kg and to maintain a smooth rotation so that cameras can easily capture 360-degree photography of the product. The motorized turntable was designed for automating 360° product photography of small yet heavy objects. For this purpose, the quality manufacturing of the turntable emphasizes both uncompromising accuracy and robustness, while also serving to resist wear and tear or to pair with other PhotoRobot robots and photography accessories. ### Effective 360-degree photoshooting in the studio One advantage to utilizing an automated photography workstation is that you can save time and energy in the studio. You can also maintain standardization when creating product content for online showcases in webshops, e-commerce or wherever necessary. The Robotic Turntable meets both of these demands, with software for automation, control and workflow management. Along with this software, the Robotic Turntable also has numerous design features for effective photoshooting. These include: - **Integrated mounts for lights** and **cabling conducted through the machine** **frame** to ensure adequate room for movement around the workstation. - **Remote control of the lights** to make work both faster and more comfortable. - **Numerous fastening points** for mounting a wide range of standard photography accessories. - **A robust opaque plate with overhang** over the table edge so that you can capture non-retouch photos at zero angle. ### Consistent and versatile photography equipment The next advantages of the Robotic Turntable for 360° photography and heavy objects revolve around consistency, ease of use and versatility. Thanks to the laser positioning system to locate the center of rotation, product photography on this motorized turntable becomes easy even for amateur photographers. There are also numerous other design features and accessories for precision, versatility and even mobility. These include: - **A built-in 19’’ rack** for installation of control units, laser controllers, network elements and additional accessories. - **A transparent plate on distancing columns** which is easy to install and which is included in the turntables standard equipment. - **Carriage wheels for effortless transportation** in the studio and **large legs** for setting up a precise working plane. - **Compatibility with PhotoRobot’s Cube** for synchronous rotation of a product in partial suspension in the air. ### Compatible with the PhotoRobot Cube robot Another alternative for using the Robotic Turntable is utilizing it in combination with PhotoRobot’s Cube. [The Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) is particularly useful for suspending heavy objects in the air to get better photographs from all angles of the object including from the bottom-up. Products suspended by the Cube are also synchronized to the rotation of the motorized turntable. - [Introducing the Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube) ### PhotoRobot’s suite of control and automation software PhotoRobot_Controls provides users with all of the control and automation features clients have come to expect of PhotoRobot. This software suite boasts a modern, intuitive design and is the best comprehensive studio management available on the market. Remotely control the entire workspace (robots, cameras, lighting), manage workflow and benefit from effective automation in image post processing for 360° product photography. ### 360° product photography of heavy objects has never been easier At PhotoRobot, we know that quality is key, especially in product photography. Online, your images are truly your products, and quality should never be compromised for efficiency. The Robotic Turntable for 360° photography and heavy objects is thus both robust and versatile in design, aiming to improve on everything from the workstation to workflow and image post processing. ## Upgrade Your Photo Studio with Tailorable Automation Technology To discover more about PhotoRobot’s motorized turntables for 360° product photography, contact us today for a free consultation. Our specialist technicians are ready to discuss all of the options available to meet your needs no matter if it’s for a small webshop or an industrial-scale photoshoot. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turntable-for-360-product-photography # SECTION: blog > turntable-for-360-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-11-24 --- # Setting Up a Motorized Turntable for 360 Product Photography PhotoRobot designed its family of motorized turntables for 360 product photography to prioritize not only performance but also installation and mobility. Setting up these robots is an easy process that takes under an hour, providing mobile workstations wherever space allows. All turntables can neatly fit into compact spaces or corners, making them efficient for everything from small webshops to industrial size photography studios and warehouses. No matter if it’s for 360 photography of products as small as diamond rings or as large as cars and heavy machinery, PhotoRobot has compact and sturdy motorized turntables for the job. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots, Product Photography ## Motorized Turntable Photography: Tips for setup and installation Setting up PhotoRobot’s [motorized turntables for 360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) is an easy task in any photo studio, showroom or warehouse space. It takes no longer than an hour for unpacking and installing any of the entire family of devices. This is thanks to PhotoRobot’s [packaging and distribution](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/about-photorobot-packaging-and-distribution) of products, as well as the design of the robots themselves. See for yourself in the video below demonstrating an installation of the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform), one of PhotoRobot’s larger rotary turntables for medium size and heavy products. Construction in this case took approximately a half-day, with the rest of the day remaining for fine-tuning the machinery. This is what to expect for assembly of the majority of our motorized turntables. All it takes is some simple construction on the table and then positioning the [Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). Notice also how compact the workstation is. PhotoRobot’s motorized turntables can fit nearly any workspace, and their design makes them suitable for both low and higher volume [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). ## Tips for setting up a workspace for 360-degree motorized turntable photography While all PhotoRobot devices are designed for quick and easy assembly, there are a few tips and considerations for setting up the workspace for motorized turntable photography. These are mostly minor considerations, however. This is thanks to the packaging of the robots as well as the design features for intuitive setup, ease of use and mobility. - [**Tips for 360-Degree Motorized Turntable Photography**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography) - [**Robots Designed for Quick and Easy Assembly**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography) Areas you want to consider before setting up a motorized turntable for 360 product photography include space available, the condition of the environment, electricity / network access, and most importantly workflow. In this regard, setting up a workstation for the smoothest workflow should be among the top priorities after choosing the location for the rotary turntable. ## Total workspace area PhotoRobot has various sizes of motorized turntables for 360 product photography. There is the Centerless Table for smaller objects, or the Turntable for medium size or heavy objects. Then the Turning Platform is for products like furniture or even motorcycles, while the Carousel [car turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography) is for 360-degree turntable photography of automotives and heavy machinery. - [**Centerless Table**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table) for 360 turntable photography of small to medium size products - [**Turning Platform**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turning-platform-360-product-photography) for photographing heavy or light objects, large or small - [**Carousel 5000**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/carousel-5000-360-photography-cars) for 360-degree photography of cars and heavy machinery All of these robots are however built to either fit into compact spaces, to compliment workflow in a studio or warehouse, or even to become completely invisible in a showroom floor like the Carousel 5000. When setting these robots up, this means all you need is space to accommodate 360-degree photography. There should be room enough for the machine, the lighting and for the photographer’s workstation with space to move freely around the rotary turntable. ## Electricity / Network Access Another minor concern for setting up one of PhotoRobot’s motorized turntables is access to electricity and network access. The motorized tables themselves do not use too much electricity, but you do need to ensure adequate power to the workstation’s computer, the strobe lighting and the cameras for 360 product photography. PhotoRobot’s turntables also come in a **RotoPower** version, which includes a power socket in the rotating section to enable operators to rotate electrical appliances even when they’re plugged in. This way photographers can capture 360-degree photos of products while in operation, like for example a refrigerator with an open door and the lights on inside. ## Condition of the environment When choosing a location to set up for motorized turntable photography, oftentimes a clean climate-controlled environment is ideal, but it isn’t always necessary. Certainly, photographers will have an easier time setting the scene and prepping products for photoshoots in dust-free conditions. However, PhotoRobot [product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) is designed for use in the product’s “natural” location, including in a warehouse or, for automotive photography, even in used car dealerships and on showroom floors. With assembly times of approximately an hour or less and disassembly just as quick, the environment becomes less of an issue. If you’re planning on permanent installation of the motorized turntable, then you want to choose a cleaner, climate-controlled space to protect the machinery and the photography equipment. ## Workflow considerations The final and most important area you want to consider when setting up a motorized turntable for product photography is logistics and overall workflow. Proximity of products from storage to the workstation should be optimized. - [How to Improve Workflow in a Product Photography Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio) Motorized turntables by design increase throughput considerably, and they are effective tools for capturing a high volume of products in a single day. This means you should choose a location for the turntable that is relatively near to where you store products and also near to your workstation for product preparation. In these ways, it’s possible to realize smoother workflows and also to ultimately process more products in shorter time. ## PhotoRobot: Developing Modern Turntables for 360 Product Photography At PhotoRobot, our mission is to deliver cutting edge tools for 360 product photography, and our family of motorized turntables represent one of our many solutions. We develop not only hardware and machinery but also comprehensive software for automation and control, and workflow management including remote operation of the entire workspace and image post processing. To learn more, [connect with PhotoRobot sales strategists](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) for a free 1:1 consultation around your business' unique automated photography needs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography # SECTION: blog > tips-360-degree-motorized-turntable-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-11-20 --- # Tips for 360-Degree Motorized Turntable Photography Following up on our guide to motorized turntables are these tips for 360 turntable photography covering installation and implementation in the studio. Motorized turntables are extremely effective for producing 360 and 3D product content, and PhotoRobot has a family of turntable robots and companion devices specifically for these purposes. To learn more about these turntable robots as well as tips and tricks for usage and setup, dive into this quick guide on PhotoRobot’s motorized turntables for 360 product photography. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots ## Tips and Tricks: Motorized Turntable Photography [Motorized turntables](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography) for 360 product photography are among the most effective solutions for creating 360-degree product content for the web and digital presentation. This is why PhotoRobot has designed a family of motorized turntables and companion devices strictly for turntable photography. These robots range in capabilities for items as small and complex as an engagement ring to products as large as cars and other heavy machinery. The trick is learning how to best utilize the machinery, from the workspace to the lighting, cameras, post image processing and more. - [360 Product Photography - Content Formats & Production](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) - [7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo) Thankfully however, the intuitive design of PhotoRobot’s motorized turntables and companion devices makes them all easy to learn and master. In this guide, we’ll offer advice and tips for 360-degree motorized turntable photography, from installation to use and additional features of these products in the studio. ## Tips for motorized turntable photography PhotoRobot has a range of motorized turntables for [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) of various size products. However, the same tips and considerations apply across the entire family of turntables. There are models like the [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) for small to medium size products, as well as the [Robotic Turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable) and the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform) for medium size or heavy objects. There is even the Carousel 5000 motorized [car turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography) for 360 photography of automobiles and heavy machinery, which possesses similar tips for best usage. Learning how to best utilize these products involves considerations typical for any photoshoot. You want to consider elements such as lighting, space for devices and equipment, planning for smoother workflow, and post photoshoot tasks like reviewing, editing and distributing photos. ## Attaining the perfect lighting With 360-degree turntable photography, there are in fact less concerns than with traditional product photography. You still want to create well-lit and color-balanced photos, however the main objective involves eliminating distracting hard shadows to obtain more natural and balanced illumination. In this way, spin presentation of the product comes to life in both the shape and depth expected of 360 imagery. - [Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360-Degree Product Photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography) This is why PhotoRobot’s motorized turntables work best with quality strobe lights, LED panels, or a combination of both. The goal is to paint the product in extremely bright light from all angles to then capture the photos necessary for creating 360° spin imagery. For this, PhotoRobot suggests lighting equipment from trusted brands like [Profoto](https://profoto.com/int), [Broncolor](https://broncolor.swiss/) and [Fomei](https://www.fomei.com/en). The high intensity of the strobe lights allows the use of higher aperture and makes it possible to reach a deep depth of field, while also playing a crucial role in shooting larger products. With smaller products, such as a new smartphone, [RotoLight](https://www.rotolight.com/) LED lighting or any other DMX controlled lighting is often sufficient. PhotoRobot has direct support for the DMX protocol, opening the doors for photography automation. ## Make use of a pure white background Another tip for 360-degree turntable photography involves utilizing the appropriate background. When using a motorized turntable with a glass plate, such as PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table, this is however less of a concern. This is due to the integrated white fabric background. Together with the transparent plate, the integrated background makes products appear to float in thin air and allows for illumination of the background in standard 255 white and simultaneously the independent lighting of products. The division of lighting enables the use of traditional photography techniques, while also sharpening and better defining product edges to minimize the need for post image processing. When using larger PhotoRobot turntables without a glass plate, like the Robotic Turntable, the Turning Platform, or the Carousel 5000, similar tips on backgrounds for 360-degree turntable photography apply. You’ll want a background and lighting conditions that eliminate distracting shadows. The product must be fully illuminated, and there should be a separation of light levels for the chosen background and the product. ## Utilize the best cameras for zoom, details, and color The next tip for 360-degree turntable photography is obvious: utilize the best camera for the job. To create high quality 360-degree imagery, your cameras must be able to capture not only high resolution photos but also a deep field of zoom on products. Color balance is equally important. The goal is to create detail-rich product content that customers can zoom in and out of from any angle of the 360 spin. PhotoRobot motorized turntables support DSLR and mirrorless Canon cameras for this. These long-trusted camera models provide the capabilities necessary for capturing 360-degree photos, and together with PhotoRobot machines meet all the requirements for creating remarkable product content. ## Review and edit as necessary Oftentimes with 360-degree turntable photography, there is less need to edit or retouch photos after the photoshoot. This is due to the fact that creating 360° spin photos involves many photos from all angles and creating a more ‘moving’ experience, much like a product video. PhotoRobot’s suite of software for automation and control also reduces the need for image post processing. As much of the photoshoot is automated (from robots to cameras, lighting and more), operators can remotely control the entire workspace, manage workflow and also enjoy the benefits of effective automation in image post-processing. ## Plan for higher output with smoother workflow The final tip: utilizing a motorized turntable in the studio leads to higher output capacity, and thus to better workflow overall — if you plan for it. With one station alone, it’s possible to shoot over 7000 images per day, so you want to plan photoshoots to realize maximum output and efficiency. This involves elements such as setting the scene, [styling products](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-photography-styling-tools), quick exchange and the like, which will vary depending on the scale of the photoshoot and the size of the studio. Then you have PhotoRobot’s suite of control and automation software, designed specifically for improving studio workflow. This software provides control and automation features for often time-consuming tasks like file management and delivery, naming conventions, image post processing and publishing to the web. This means photographers have more time to focus on what they do best, the photography. ## PhotoRobot’s Family of Turntable Robots No matter if it’s for a small webshop or an industrial scale photoshoot, PhotoRobot has designed its family of motorized turntables to meet the demands of any space and any product. Whether it’s [jewelry product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography), or shooting cars and heavy machinery, there is a rotary turntable for products of any size. - [Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table) for 360 turntable photography of small to medium size products - [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turning-platform-360-product-photography) for heavy or light objects, large or small - [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/carousel-5000-360-photography-cars) for 360-degree photography of cars and heavy machinery ## Ready to Upgrade Your Photo Studio? Online, your images are your products. Make the most of your 360-degree product content with PhotoRobot. Contact us today to meet our family of motorized turntables, or to start upgrading your photo studio today. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography # SECTION: blog > motorized-turntables-for-360-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-11-12 --- # Motorized Turntables for 360 Product Photography If you want to create an immersive and interactive product experience, the most efficient way forward is with a motorized turntable for 360 product photography. Whether attempting to reach shoppers on desktop or on mobile, products from jewel-studded watches to trainers can truly benefit from this format. This is where PhotoRobot’s family of rotary turntable robots for 360 product photography comes into play, providing companies with a wide range of turntable solutions in various models, sizes and shapes — all supported by PhotoRobot software for effective control and automation. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots, Product Photography ## Guide to Motorized 360 Photo Turntables Producing [professional 360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) means mastering a wide range of moving parts, from machinery like motorized turntables to lighting setups, control and automation of the cameras and equipment, image post-processing and more. Discover the latest 360 turntables in the [PhotoRobot C-Type Turntables Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/c-class-turntables-demo). The goal is to create truly immersive, interactive product experiences for online shoppers. The more detailed and informative, the more likely content is to not only trigger purchases. It will also generate buzz and awareness around your products, and ultimately your brand. In this guide, we’ll look in depth at an [eCommerce photography setup](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) for motorized turntable photography. We'll share more on PhotoRobot’s family of 360 photo turntables, and describe how to use a motorized turntable to effectively showcase products in today’s digital world. ## Motorized turntable photography in the studio A motorized turntable is a computer-assisted rotary device for rotating objects 360 degrees on a transparent glass plate in order to capture photos from select angels. Whether it’s [packaging photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/packshot-photography), 360° spins, product videos or even [3D models for digital marketing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing) and [AR / VR experiences](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce), it’s all possible with a motorized turntable for 360 product photography. A clear glass rotary plate enables cameras to capture photos underneath products, while also serving the purpose of making the items appear to “float” in thin air. This gives photographers complete control over how the product is illuminated, and likewise reduces the need for time-consuming image post-processing after the product photoshoot. While rotary turntables serve many purposes as stand-alone devices, it’s also advantageous to pair them with additional accessories and other machinery. There are tools for lighting setups, which are especially beneficial for 360 product photography, and there is also a wide range of compatible PhotoRobot machines such as the Robotic Arm or the Cube to better manage the entire photoshoot process. ## Advantages of effective motorized photography turntables Synchronous rotation devices such as PhotoRobot’s motorized turntables, the Cube and more make it not only easier to capture perfect photos for 360 photography but also to automate everything from the photoshoot to the image post processing and publishing to the web. ## For a richer, more informative product experience One obvious advantage to the imagery created on motorized turntables is the positive impact on the product experience. By presenting products from various angles or in 360-degree formats, brands provide customers with more interactive and immersive product content, while also serving the purpose of better informing consumers about the product itself. ## For online marketplaces like Amazon and Shopify Then, there’s [360 product photography for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon) and Shopify, who both have begun supporting spin imagery on their product pages. 360° spin photos often have a positive impact on triggering purchases as well as on reducing overall returns. This is likely due to the fact that shoppers are more likely to receive exactly what they expect from their purchase, as they have more information on hand and a better understanding of the product before they buy it. ## For B2B marketing and sales presentations Motorized turntable photography also has benefits in regards to B2B sales, in which more informative and interactive product presentations can show all the moving parts of a product. This can be especially true for more complex or larger products such as appliances, electronics and heavy machinery. With product presentations in 360-degrees, product spins, or even 3D models for AR / VR content, products can be brought to life anywhere in vivid detail. ## Devices and products for 360 motorized turntable photography Now, what products do you need for 360 product photography with a motorized turntable? This is where PhotoRobot comes into play, with a wide range of turntable robots as well as companion devices to enhance your photography and maximize workflow in the studio. ## PhotoRobot’s Wide Glass Centerless Table [PhotoRobot’s Wide Glass Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table) represents a flagship in the evolution of 360 product photography with motorized turntables. Thanks to PhotoRobot automation and control software as well as its unique lighting system, the Centerless table makes a welcome addition to any studio. It’s 50 inch glass plate is suitable for a wide range of objects, and the machine comes with various features including line lasers, a clean white fabric background, integrated flags, light booms and more. ## PhotoRobot’s Robotic Camera Arm [PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robotic-arm-360-object-photography) makes a great companion to the Centerless Table and is likewise compatible with the majority of PhotoRobot’s rotary devices. It is the ideal solution for online shops, transforming product content from a single 360° spin to a 3D product experience. The robotic swing arm provides cameras complete range over the 0-90° axis, and together with the rotation of the table allows for image capture at any angle of the top-view of the product. ## PhotoRobot’s Cube [PhotoRobot’s Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube) is another device worth considering for 360 turntable photography. Its design makes it extremely useful for shooting products like apparel and fashion accessories or items that need to be suspended in air like bags, chandeliers, and light fittings. The Cube is particularly popular for its versatility and functionality, providing a universal and portable solution for motorized turntable photography. ## Replicating the in-store shopping experience Online, your images are your products, so it makes sense to replicate or improve on the in-store shopping experience with 360-degree turntable photography. In this way, not only are you better informing potential consumers about your products, you are also enriching the digital experience of online shopping. Along these lines, PhotoRobot [automated photo studio equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) for 360 product photography are solutions made by photographers for photographers. PhotoRobot knows very well all of the complex moving parts of product photography, and our solutions aim to maximize efficiency, workflow, and all processes relating to the photoshoot. To learn more, reach out to us today for a free consultation with one of our specialist technicians to discuss all of the options available for your needs. No matter if you’re running a small online shop or an industrial-scale photography operation, PhotoRobot has tools to meet the demands of any 360 product photography project! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-360-product-photography-studio # SECTION: blog > photorobot-360-product-photography-studio # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-11-06 --- # PhotoRobot Solutions for the 360 Product Photography Studio PhotoRobot solutions can transform any workspace into a professional-looking 360 product photography studio. Whether it’s for a business looking to succeed with a small webshop, a vendor in e-commerce, or even retail at an industrial scale, PhotoRobot’s versatile hardware and intuitive software for automation and control can make any workspace ready for the task at hand. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## 360 Product Photography Studio - Equipment & Automation Software In a PhotoRobot [360 product photography studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), every piece of machinery prioritizes efficiency and workflow to create a professional studio in nearly any space available. Even amateur photographers can achieve excellent results with ease and confidence on a wide range of products, from smaller complex items like rings and jewellery, to fashion photography on live models or even shooting exceptionally large products like cars and heavy machinery. ## Designed by product photographers for product photographers PhotoRobot’s professional [360 product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) coupled with a suite of software for automation and control have been designed by product photographers for product photographers. Whether it’s capturing traditional still shots, 360° spins, filming product videos or making [3D models for AR / VR product content](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), overcome any obstacle in the 360 product photography studio in style with PhotoRobot. ## Remote control of the entire 360 product photography studio Remotely control the entire studio (robots, cameras, lighting and more), manage workflow, automate time-consuming image post-processing or replay repeatable robotic processes as “scenarios” that you can save and reuse again and again. All you need to do is prepare the scene and place the product, and PhotoRobot manages the *“heavy-lifting”*. The majority of our robots are available in a variety of models and sizes and can also be tailor-made into [custom 360 photography studio solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photography-solutions-and-technology) for webshops, e-commerce and online retail. ## Versatile for maximum functionality and effective workflows Each PhotoRobot machine is designed to be versatile while also remaining extremely portable and compact to meet a wider range of needs for the 360 product photography studio. Some robots can blend in perfectly with a showroom floor, others can fit nice and neatly into nearly any available space, and all of these are customizable for maximum functionality and to tailor to more client needs. ## Hardware and accessories for any project, workspace or studio We want our clients to realize smoother workflow while also accomplishing more tasks with less equipment. Because of this, PhotoRobot has engineered its robots with various hardware features and accessories from one robot to the next, improving on aspects such as mobility, ease of installation, functionality, transport between workstations and more. Take PhotoRobot’s **RotoPower** for instance, a popular feature to the family of rotary turntable robots. This feature makes it possible to photograph electrical appliances that require power during photoshoots. The appliance can rotate smoothly for 360 photography while also remaining plugged in, allowing photographers to capture the product in use. There are also hardware features like the built-in chassis for PhotoRobot’s Catwalk for easy transport of the robot from one side of the studio to the other. There are access ramps for PhotoRobot turntables for photography of furniture or exceptionally large products like cars and heavy machinery. Take for example the Carousel 5000, the [360 car turntable](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography). Then, there are accessories for any type of 360 product photography studio, from mannequins and catwalks for fashion photography, to a range of rotary plates for different types of objects, undercarriages for hiding or moving robots, additional storage and more. ## Our Product Photography Robots PhotoRobot currently has on offer [16 various robots](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) for 360 product photography studios and workspaces. Each robot is run by a unique real-time operating system and is managed by a cloud-based workflow consisting of automation tools for image-capturing and image-processing, all easy to integrate with 3rd party software for maximum productivity. ## Not only high quality but also efficient 360 product photography With PhotoRobot’s comprehensive range of equipment, clients can create quality photos, 360° spins, videos and even 3D models for products of any size. Operators can utilize presets to automatically capture all (still and spin) images of the product, upload imagery to the cloud, post-process and prepare results for final review and immediate online publishing — all in one minute or less and with only a few clicks of the mouse. ## Visual content examples ### Still shots, multi-row tri-shots, and 360 spin ### Product videos ### 3D models for digital marketing ### Augmented and virtual reality 3D product experiences ## PhotoRobot: Reinventing 360 Photo Studio Workflow While others capture locally, create data backups, transfer, post-process, backup again, upload and then finally share — all manually — with PhotoRobot you can capture images directly to the cloud, backup instantly, post-process automatically and publish to the web immediately. Whether you’re looking to [improve studio workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio), equip a workspace with better equipment for 360 and 3D photography, create [3D models for e-commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing), or all of the above and more, PhotoRobot can advise you on the solutions that best meet your needs in a 360 product photography studio. [Contact PhotoRobot sales strategists](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) to book a free consultation to discover the advantages of the PhotoRobot-powered studio firsthand. No matter the job, PhotoRobot is an all-in-one, fully automated and cloud based solution for all of your product photography demands. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/catwalk-for-apparel-photography-and-online-fashion-shows # SECTION: blog > catwalk-for-apparel-photography-and-online-fashion-shows # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-11-03 --- # PhotoRobot’s Catwalk for Apparel Photography and Online Fashion Shows Thanks to PhotoRobot’s Virtual Catwalk, clients can transform any small space available into a professional-looking studio for apparel photography and online fashion shows. The Catwalk allows operators to capture 360° photos of live models, film content for product videos, or develop buzz-worthy virtual and augmented reality product presentations. All with only standard studio lighting. Keep reading to find out how to enrich your apparel photography and create remarkable online fashion shows with a virtual catwalk in the studio. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots ## An Infinite Runway for Photographing and Filming Models [PhotoRobot’s Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/virtual-catwalk-rotating-platform) for apparel photography and online fashion shows is a solution for in-house photoshoots of live models. Its design as well as PhotoRobot’s suite of control and automation software makes the Virtual Catwalk the perfect robot for any studio looking to produce [360° product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) of apparel on a live model, [film models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-film-models) for product videos, or enrich product content with virtual or augmented reality experiences. Watch the [Video Demo of the PhotoRobot Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/virtual-catwalk-rotating-platform) for on-model fashion product photography. ## Presentation in motion With the Virtual Catwalk, you can create a professional-looking fashion show quickly and effectively with only a very small space and standard studio lighting. PhotoRobot designed the Catwalk so that models can safely and easily walk on a moving belt while a platform simultaneously rotates. The cameras remain trained in place, resulting in a video with a flying camera effect. Additionally, the workstation is suitable for common [360° photography of live models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models), or operators can shoot objects when the belt is not in operation. ## Taking fashion shows online A professional fashion show can take place even in the world of online presentation. The likes of Chanel and Dior took to virtual catwalks, while leading designers across Europe and the US promoted their new lines of apparel in digital fashion shows as well as in virtual and augmented reality. This has since inspired a new wave of online fashion shows and created even more demand for apparel and fashion [photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography). Now, PhotoRobot’s Virtual Catwalk for [apparel photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing) and online fashion shows provides all the tools necessary for photographing clothing and apparel on live models and for effective automation in the studio. Impressive videos only need to last a few minutes, and the Catwalk makes it possible to shoot dozens of models for an entire digital fashion show all within a single day. Thanks to this simple piece of equipment, clients can confidently create a private fashion show for customers to view in the comfort of their own home. ## A Catwalk for any space: secure and portable The Catwalk is a machine for professional apparel and fashion photography, both cost-effective and tailored to the equipment needs of photographers and studios. It supports all the automation and control features as well as the quality in hardware and design that clients expect of PhotoRobot. ## Customizable to tailor to your needs Operators can easily control belt speed and turntable rotation on the Catwalk so that they suit the model perfectly. This is thanks to the massive drive of the machine, which also allows for smooth adjustment of the start and stop to ensure maximum safety and support. Settings can be saved at any time and used again and again as a “scenario” for recording. These scenarios save both the rotation and the belt speed, any adjustments for the model when starting or stopping, gentle control of acceleration as well as reversals in direction and much more! ## Easy and safe entry and exit One of PhotoRobot’s top priorities for the Virtual Catwalk for apparel photography and online fashion shows was safety. We designed the turntable especially with this in mind, aiming to reinforce it with a strong system of supports for maximum stability both in and out of motion. The wide plate is also secured with supports which serve for easy entry to and exit from the platform. ## Hassle-free transport The Catwalk’s versatile design means that clients can easily transport the robot from one location to the next. Simply fit it with an undercarriage with a stabilization cross, and you can easily lift it in a single movement and quickly relocate it to a different place in the studio. ## Adjustable to better meet the dimensions of any workspace The PhotoRobot Catwalk can exist in the studio as a fixed installation. Clients can install it sunk into the floor, making the working area completely level with the ground. When installed this way, all of the photography equipment can remain in place, as any issues relating to background, lighting or lack of space are easily eliminated and resolved. The belt can also be removed so that the robot can be used for capturing 360° images even in RotoPower mode. ## PhotoRobot control and automation software Finally, the Catwalk wouldn’t be complete without PhotoRobot’s suite of software for control and automation. Remotely control the entire workplace (from robots to cameras, lighting and more), [manage workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow) and enjoy the benefits of effective automation in image post-processing. ## Professional apparel photography & online fashion shows Create stunning product videos or realistic [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce) for apparel and online fashion shows like the video above, or enhance your product content even more with virtual and augmented reality. Especially with ongoing developments in CGI, 3D design, image capture and body mapping, there is emerging potential and a new trend coming in digital, virtual and augmented reality fashion shows. As an additional bonus, you can use a solid plate to cover the Catwalk and make the machine immediately ready to capture standard spin photography of an object. It’s also possible to easily transport the robot across the studio utilizing a built-in chassis, or, conversely, the Catwalk can be completely removed from the floor and used for storage elsewhere, with enough room inside to safely secure any accessories like the table or the large plate. ## Find PhotoRobot Studio Tech Tailorable to Your Unique Business To learn more about how PhotoRobot can help you gain a foothold in this rapidly evolving market, reach out to us today for a free consultation with one of our specialist technicians to update you on all of the solutions we have available for 360 product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/case-for-automated-360-product-photography # SECTION: blog > case-for-automated-360-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-10-30 --- # PhotoRobot’s Case for Automated 360 Product Photography The Case for automated 360 product photography is a robotic workstation, compact in size to fit into nearly any space and extremely mobile for easy transport. Its design makes it suitable for use in all photography studios, online shops, warehouses or production halls. Pack or unpack the workstation from its protective case in a matter of minutes, benefit from its easy set up, and capture 360-degree product photography with all the robotic-process automation and image post-processing features clients expect of PhotoRobot. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots ## PhotoRobot's Portable, Robotic Photography Workstation: Case 850 [PhotoRobot’s Case](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) for automated 360 product photography of small to medium size items is a portable workstation to support a transparent glass rotary table for object photography. Its design makes it especially compact and easily portable, as well as quick and easy to set up in any available space. Use PhotoRobot_Controls to control the workstation from the plate rotation’s to the lighting and cameras. Operators can even automate repeatable tasks for 360 photography of objects of similar size, shape, or transparency. With the Case and PhotoRobot’s control software, even amateurs can capture professional-looking [360 product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) with confidence and ease. ## Easy Setup in Any Small Space Available Build a small studio for automated 360 product photography anywhere with little hassle or effort. Everything is secure in the protective case, from the glass rotary plate to the diffuse background and the supporting arcs (available in two sizes) for carrying cameras. All it takes is 15 minutes to build a workstation, and you’ll have a rotary turntable that provides a sufficiently large work surface for capturing high-quality 360-degree photos of your products. ## Highly Portable and Compact Designed for portability, the Case can be packed, unpacked, or transported anywhere it’s needed in a matter of minutes. There’s no concern about damaging the robot or any of the photography equipment, as its protective case is durable and firmly secures everything inside. It’s even compact enough to fit into any car and transport in between locations, making it a truly mobile 360 product photography workstation. ## Compact Yet Sufficiently Large Despite its compact design, the Case’s 850 mm diameter rotary plate provides sufficient work surface for 360 product photography of small to medium size objects. It’s great for shooting products like handbags and apparel, or even complex reflective items such as in [jewelry product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography). The plate is translucent so cameras can capture photos from all angles, from top to bottom, all in a single rotation. ## Everything Packed in a Single Case From the optical glass plate and the diffuse background, to the arcs for camera support and the tools for precise remote control of the robot, the Case truly is *everything in a single case* for automated 360 product photography. ## Transparent optical glass for capture below the plate With 360 product photography, a glass plate serves the purpose of allowing photographers to capture photos of a product from all angles, including from the bottom looking up. Cameras must capture photos underneath the object, as well as from top angles and from all sides during rotation. The Case’s glass plate is therefore a hardened, high-transparency optical glass which is precisely positioned in a system of pulleys for accurate, consistent and smooth operation. ## Built-in cross laser positioning The Case also features a built-in cross laser system to facilitate operators in finding the center of rotation for every product. Meanwhile, the rotation covers 360 degrees of the object in 2.1 seconds, all while an operator sets the cameras to trigger and capture all angles of the product. This is especially beneficial for automating 360 product photography, as accuracy is critical to ensure automation functionality and to limit the need for post image processing afterwards. ## Diffuse background for attaining the perfect lighting The optical glass plate and the diffuse background enable the lighting of the object from all sides. This means the Case can naturally create high-quality 360-degree photographs on a pure white background, nearly eliminating the need for post image processing. Supported by an intuitive web interface to automate the process, the Case provides operators with precise control over the robot, shutter release and even smart functions like automatic background removal. ## Responsive web interface for precise control PhotoRobot’s control suite and automation software is available and responsive on any device. You can use the software on [MAC and Windows](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/system-requirements), while the UI is web-based and can be operated using any browser, from iOS to Android or Windows Mobile. Control machine movements, save and work with settings, manage the capture process and more. Compatible with all PhotoRobot robots for automated 360 product photography, PhotoRobot_Controls provides savings in time and an advantage over the competition thanks to its higher quality image output. ## Never compromise quality for efficiency; achieve both At PhotoRobot, we design our [equipment for 360 / 3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) like the Case to suit the wide range of photography needs for companies in any sales operation, whether it’s for online retail, a small webshop, e-commerce or industrial-scale product photography. The Case for automated 360 photography is also available in an additional *bigger brother size,* in the form of the Case 1300. Originally a custom build for Carl Zeiss AG, this version of the Case is for more specific needs in the studio, such as for connection with a robotic arm and use for [photogrammetry 3D modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). As PhotoRobot’s Case and other Frame family machines can be used to photograph objects from the bottom, clients often use these solutions to quickly and easily create 3D models. ## Rapidly Photograph Products of All Sizes, Shape, and Dimension Our robotic solutions and automation software can capture high-quality 360 product photography for items of any size, from smaller objects like rings and jewelry to cars and heavy machinery. To learn more, dive into our blog for further reading or reach out to one of our specialist technicians for a free consultation today. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robotic-arm-360-object-photography # SECTION: blog > robotic-arm-360-object-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-10-27 --- # PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm for 360 Object Photography PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm for 360 object photography is an ideal solution for online shops and is compatible with the majority of PhotoRobot’s rotary robots. Built for precision and durability, the Robotic Arm provides companies valuable savings in costs, time and effort when creating 3D product content for objects of any size. Read on to discover the versatility of the Robotic Arm, its features and its automation capabilities that make it possible to transform any studio space into the perfect workstation for 360 object photography. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots ## The Robotic Camera Arm for Impressive 360-Degree Object Capture [The Robotic Arm V8](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) is PhotoRobot’s latest model of the multi-row robot for [360 object photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). Add the third dimension to objects and present them from all angles in impressive 3D product content, both as a whole and as a detailed view. Robust construction, precision of movement and two arm sizes provide the ability to capture objects of all sizes. Thanks to automated elevation control and two shanks (one short and one long), the Robotic Arm is not only precise but also versatile in the studio. The [Robotic Arm design features](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/robotic-arm-v8-overview) allow operators to adjust the arm length manually, while the robot remains perfectly stable due to its robust base. The Manfrotto tripod head with micro travel in 3 axes supports DSLR as well as larger cameras with digital backs. Pair the Robotic Camera Arm with 360 motorized turntables and photography platforms to capture medium to large objects. The range of the camera arm enables smooth, 360-degree photography of items like household appliances, furniture, luggage, sports equipment and more. It quickly achieves 3D photoshoots, with no limitations on camera resolution, meaning you can produce images in print as well. See the [Video Overview of PhotoRobot's Robotic Arm v8](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/robotic-arm-v8-overview). ## A robot camera arm for precise 360 object photography Among the many benefits of the Robotic Camera Arm is its ability to capture the perfect angles for 360 object photography in every photoshoot. Particularly useful when combing the Robotic Arm with compatible [3D product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography), such as the Case for example, the Arm is capable of moving in tandem with the photographed object’s rotation to create an extremely realistic 3D display of the image. Also, the number of top view angles is not limited in any way, so it’s possible to capture objects in a single series of photographs in the 0-90° range, or to snap dozens or even hundreds of photos for maximum fluidity and smoothness. To support [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), the Robotic Arm’s precision enables standardization in the display of products in classic still images and packshots. Meanwhile, a suite of automation software enables photographers to utilize presets to automate the capture of similar objects again and again. These presets can be automated to capture photos at angles identical to previously photographed objects, making it easy to create a collection of 3D product content without disruptive differences or discontinuities in the portfolio. ## The precision of the Robotic Arm Another advantage to the Robotic Arm is that its robust construction and quality manufacturing enables the camera to move smoothly along a precise trajectory. The large arm will never oscillate or stray off-track. This makes capturing 360 object photography in the studio a routine and friction-less process, with no distraction due to mechanical error. The stainless bearing surface with scale ensures accurate camera elevation setting, while the electrical lift enables operators to easily set the elevation based on the size of the photographed object. For perfect positioning, there is an integrated cross laser feature for the precise set-up of the Robotic Arm on a rotary device. ## Large range of elevation and top-view With a motor-assisted (SW controlled) 400 mm elevation range and a top view range from 0-90°, the Robotic Arm’s large mounting range provides variability in choice of tripod heads and cameras. PhotoRobot compatible cameras include DSLR and mirrorless Canon camera models, enabling operators to equip the Robotic Arm with the latest gadgets. ## Easily transportable between workstations The next consideration PhotoRobot had for the Robotic Arm was transportability. This is why the base of the Robotic Arm has retractable wheels for easy transport to and from studio workstations. Simply roll the robot from one station to the next, connect the Arm’s docking station to a compatible rotary device or just lock the robot in place and benefit from how easy it is to set up on location. ## Quick set-up for on-location installation Another feature of the Robotic Arm for 360 object photography is its capabilities for quick and easy set-up. With its docking station for compatible devices, the Arm can be connected to a rotary device and ready for the photoshoot in a matter of minutes. It is also compatible with the majority of PhotoRobot rotary robots for 360° photography. ## Compatibility with the majority of PhotoRobot rotary devices Whether it’s 360 object photography for fashion apparel and accessories, or for large household products like appliances and furniture, operators can connect the Robotic Arm to the majority of PhotoRobot rotary turntables for objects of ranging in size. - **Combine the Robotic Arm with** [**PhotoRobot’s Cube**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube) for 360 photography of fashion products like clothing and accessories. - **Utilize the Robotic Arm with the** [**Case**](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/case-850) to create a compact and portable workstation on the go. - **Use the Arm with the** [**Centerless Table**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table)**or the** [**Turning Platform**](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turning-platform-360-product-photography) to automate 360 object photography with larger or heavy objects like furniture, motorcycles or machinery. ## Automation control software for remote operation and repeatable tasks Finally, any PhotoRobot equipment for 360 object photography wouldn’t be complete without a cutting-edge suite of automation software so that operators can remotely control the entire workstation, from the robots to the camera triggering and trajectory or the lighting set-ups. PhotoRobot_Controls software boasts a modern intuitive design as well as comprehensive studio and workflow management tools for effective automation and post image processing. Operators can control everything in a few clicks, while also having the ability to review and edit imagery on the fly and near-instantly publish high quality photos to the web. ## Ensuring maximum quality and efficiency The Robotic Arm for 360 object photography is a staple solution for a wide range of 3D product content and automation needs. With the competition in today’s marketplace, especially in product marketing, there is high demand for cutting-edge equipment, software, and automation tools to help businesses save on costs and effort without compromising quality. This is where PhotoRobot aims to accommodate, designing solutions like the Robotic Arm or our wide range of rotary turntables for 360 object photography. ### Photo Studio Technology Tailorable to Unique Business Operations The goal is simple — design solutions for problems we ourselves face, aiming to make 360 product photography easier, safer and more productive for any business. To learn more, reach out to book a [custom production demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos) and learn how PhotoRobot can improve your business' product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/carousel-5000-360-photography-cars # SECTION: blog > carousel-5000-360-photography-cars # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-10-22 --- # The Carousel: 360 Photography of Cars and Heavy Machinery Automate 360 degree photography of cars, heavy machinery and more with PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000. Built for convenience and durability, the Carousel can transform any space into a compact workstation with a turntable for capturing 360-degree photos of your largest products. PhotoRobot automation control software assists in managing the Carousel’s rotation and also provides operators precise control over cameras, post-image processing and publishing to the web. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots ## The Heavy-Duty, Motorized 360 Car Carousel [PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) is a turntable designed for 360-degree photography of exceptionally large objects like cars and heavy machinery. With a load capacity of 4,000 kg (8,800+ lb) and a diameter up to 5 m, its rotating platform can support everything from cars and garden tractors to small boats or even [furniture](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-photograph-furniture). The turntable’s low profile makes it easy to place any moveable object on location in seconds, all without an access ramp or even a crane. When photographing cars especially, it’s literally just parking your vehicle. ## Resistant, robust and precise 360 photography [Car turntables for automotive photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography) like the Carousel 5000 are exceptionally resistant and robust, designed for durability, easy maintenance and trouble-free replacement. Owing to these factors and its precise design, clients can achieve optimal workflow and capture upwards of 60 or more cars in a day’s time. All photos captured can be used as [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) without limitations regarding resolution or zoom, all thanks to high quality image capture. It’s also possible to use these 360-degree photos produced on the Carousel individually for both online or print publication. The carousel was built for easy cleaning of the car turntable before, during, and after photoshoots as well. This makes preparing the scene in between cars or product photo shoots a quick, hassle-free process. ## Design for easy cleaning before, during and after photoshoots With small grooves for dirt collection along the entire perimeter of the car turntable, the Carousel’s design makes it especially easy to ensure the scene is pristine for 360 photography. These grooves are also continuously cleaned with the same airflow used for cooling the machine and its controller, minimizing the need for cleaning and prolonging service intervals. Simply drive a car onto the ramp, prep the scene with air-driven dirt removal over the turntable’s surface and begin the photoshoot. The drive-up ramp is only 78 mm tall, making it easy to drive a car onto the turntable from any side of the ramp and ensuring that photoshooting, as well as preparation of the vehicle, is extremely quick and uncomplicated. ## Built to last, easy to maintain When taking 360 photos of cars, heavy machinery or furniture, clients need heavy-duty and hassle-free equipment for long-term operations. This is why PhotoRobot uses only the best materials for the Carousel 5000 to ensure uncompromising manufacturing quality. The robust design of the Carousel owes thanks to the latest laser burning technologies and CNC machining, and it places great emphasis on resistance to dirt, wear, and mechanical damage. Its massive central bearing unit only requires tension adjustment and lubrication once every 18 months, and the drive and control units as well as the flooring material are all accessible for easy service or replacement. ## Trouble-free replacement At high work loads, the need to replace some parts of the Carousel can eventually arise. Knowing this, PhotoRobot designed the drive and control units, as well as the flooring material, for quick and simple replacement. Both the drive and control units are outside of the machine for service or replacement at any time, and the flooring material, which can suffer wear, is just as easy to remove and replace. ## A car carousel for 360 photography & showroom floors The low profile of the Carousel’s car turntable not only serves as a convenient access ramp from all sides but also helps the machinery to completely blend into a [showroom](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/carousel-5000-at-stellantis) floor. There are two versions of the Carousel, one which is placed on the existing surface, or another that is built into the studio floor and becomes an integral part of the space.When installed in the floor, it practically becomes invisible, with the motor safely on the outside of the turntable plate. This reduces the need for post-production of photographs to an absolute minimum, and overall leads to stunning 360-degree car photos. ## Comprehensive control software, automation & remote operation Finally, equipment for 360 photography of cars and other heavy machinery wouldn’t be complete without a suite of software to help operators remotely control the entire workspace from the robots to the cameras and the lighting. PhotoRobot [_Controls software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) boasts a modern intuitive design as well as comprehensive studio and workflow management tools for effective automation and post image processing. Operators can control everything in a few clicks, while also having the ability to review and edit imagery on the fly and near-instantly publish high quality photos to the web. ## Quality is key for 360 photography of cars and machinery 360 photography in today’s world demands cutting-edge equipment, software, and automation tools to save on costs and effort without compromising quality. This is especially true for 360 photography of cars and heavy equipment, and even more so for large-scale photography operations. ## Faster, simpler, more effective 360 photography At PhotoRobot, we design solutions like the Carousel 5000 to make 360 product photography easier, safer and more productive for businesses of any size. With the Carousel specifically, we designed it to be exceptionally durable, using only the strongest materials so that it can last longer for industrial-scale usage. We know that downtime for servicing broken machines can be costly, so we have built a machine with long-term usage as a top priority. To learn more about the Carousel for 360 photography of cars or to discover other PhotoRobot robots, feel free to dive deeper into our blog or reach out to one of our technical specialists for a free consultation today. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/turning-platform-360-product-photography # SECTION: blog > turning-platform-360-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-10-20 --- # PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform for 360 Product Photography With an extensive range of accessories and state-of-the-art automation software, PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform for 360 product photography makes a welcome addition to any photography studio shooting heavy objects. Snap hundreds of photos in an instant and immediately publish 360 product photos and 3D models to the web. Discover more in this quick overview of the Turning Platform. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Robots ## The PhotoRobot Motorized 360 Photography Turning Platform [PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform) for 360 degree product photography is a universal solution for rotating and photographing heavy or light objects ranging in size from small to large. Thanks to the [Turning Platform design features & extensive accessories](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/turning-platform-design-functionality) with PhotoRobot controls, the devices is fully automated for product photography and suitable for photographing heavier objects. Combine it with [PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm) and it’s perfect for shooting products such as motorcycles, household appliances like washing machines or refrigerators, beds and mattresses, baby carriages or anything of similar size and weight. The Turning Platform is amazingly versatile. It can also be used with a mushroom for shooting lighter objects like lamps and vases on a tabletop, or as a rotating stand with a mannequin for shooting 360 fashion photography. It’s even possible to use the Turning Platform in conjunction with [PhotoRobot’s Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk) to turn any studio space into a compact, infinite catwalk for shooting live models. See the [Video Overview of PhotoRobot's Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/turning-platform-design-functionality) for photography of large and heavy products. ## The Turning Platform’s Power and Precision PhotoRobot has designed the Turning Platform for [360 degree product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) to capture the widest possible selection of products all on one device, and it is not only powerful and precise but also durable. The Turning Platform’s standard circle plate has a diameter of up to 280 cm (9.2 ft) and a load capacity of 1500 kg (3307 lb). With these parameters as well as zero-clearance transmission and high torque, the Turning Platform ensures excellent performance when capturing photos of anything from chairs to garden tractors. ## Robust Design for a Wide Range of Products The Turning Platform’s turntable is both strong and sturdy in construction. All 3 available sizes for the circle plate or the ellipse turning plate support high load capacities and high torque to facilitate smooth rotation at any speed and for any object. ## Versatile for All Photographic Requirements With optional accessories, the Turning Platform becomes a solution for a wide range of 360 product photography needs. Use a mushroom to transform the platform into a rotating table, or shoot 3D fashion photography with a [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin) or an [infinite catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-models). The Turning Platforms plates are available in black or white variants and come in 3 different sizes for the circle plates (2.8m, 1.8m, or 1m) or with a 2.6 x 2m ellipse plate. ## Transform to Use With Other Robots & Accessories Use as a platform, a robotic table, a rotating mannequin or even a catwalk. The transformable features of the Turning Platform allow clients to easily attach various accessories and extensions to create a workstation that meets their needs. Beyond automobiles, it’s nearly an all-in-one workstation for any [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography): pure white background stills, 360s, videos, and 3D modeling. ## A Photography Platform Stable Enough to Walk On No matter the load, whether it’s a live model or a parked motorcycle, PhotoRobot designed the Turning Platform with stability as a top priority. Strong supports guarantee that when the plate is in rotation, it stays in rotation, and it also cannot be moved and will not shift when locked in place — ensuring the safety and protection of all products on the plate. ## Features for 360 Product Photography of Motorcycles With the optional drive-up ramp, navigating motorcycles or any moveable product is simple and easy. Ensure no damage will be done to products. This means there is no more need for cranes or heavy-lifting in the studio, and ultimately ensures better overall workflow and less risk to products when moving them on and off the Turning Platform. ## Setup for 360 Product Photography of Furniture With dimensions suitable for heavy loads and larger furniture like sofas and chairs, the Turning Platform is capable of [photographing home furnishings](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-photograph-furniture) in rich detail, snapping hundreds of photos over the course of a quick rotation. PhotoRobot controls and automation software allow photographers to manage settings, work with presets for better workflow, post-process imagery and near-instantly publish photos to the web. One more option for 360-degree photography of furniture, similar to the Turning Platform, is [PhotoRobot’s Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000). This is becoming increasingly popular with furniture retailers who need to photograph lots of furniture, as the Carousel comes equipped with a low-profile loading ramp perfect for photoshoots involving a range of pieces. ## 360 Photography for Fashion or Smaller Objects of Any Shape Need to shoot 360 fashion photography of smaller products like watches, briefcases or luggage? What about an engagement ring? With the mushroom extension for the Turning Platform, it’s easy to quickly transform the workstation into a robotic rotating table perfect for smaller objects. Combine this with the Robotic Arm, and creating highly [realistic 3D images](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) becomes easy enough for even amateur photographers to master. Alternatively, operators have a range of options beyond the mushroom extension, such as [PhotoRobot’s CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube) or PhotoRobot’s tables for 360 product photography. The Cube is great especially for photographing fashion products, while the various tables might be used for better stability and rotation or for additional levels of background and shadow removal (which is what PhotoRobot’s glass tables are best for). ## Never compromise quality photography for efficiency PhotoRobot’s flexible tools for 360 product photography are built for both quality and efficiency, and we believe neither should be compromised for the other. The Turning Platform is only one of our catalogue of 13 robots, all powerful and versatile technological solutions for photography studios. Dive into our blog to discover more, or feel welcome to reach out to one of our specialists technicians today for a free consultation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography # SECTION: blog > equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-10-15 --- # Equipment for 360 and 3D Product Photography PhotoRobot equipment for 360 and 3D product photography provides cutting-edge technological solutions to meet the needs of any e-commerce project. Fully automate an in-house product photography studio or simply find the right tools to capture photos for a smaller webshop or online retail. With PhotoRobot’s versatile equipment, lighting setups and automation software, companies can quickly capture perfect photography for products of any size, streamline the process of uploading 360 and 3D imagery to the web, and improve overall workflow by automating robotic tasks and post image processing. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots, Product Photography ## Equipment, Accessories & Software for 360 + 3D Product Photography In [360 and 3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), there are many moving parts including the equipment and the software for capturing, editing, and publishing photos to the web. From creating the perfect [lighting for 360 photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography) to ensuring [optimal studio workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio), oftentimes with larger projects the goal is to create more content in less time and with less effort. For smaller to medium size ventures in online retail, while the goals are similar, there’s more focus on consistency and quality in 360 or 3D imagery. PhotoRobot’s automation-driven hardware for [eCommerce product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) answer all of these concerns to meet the project needs for any size studio or production hall. Whether it’s for fashion, home and [furniture](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-photograph-furniture), perhaps jewelry, shooting [eyewear](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-photograph-eyewear), or even [car turntable photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/car-turntable-product-photography), PhotoRobot equipment provides solutions for any 360 or 3D product photography. Watch the [PhotoRobot Hardware Video Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-cube-robot-arm) showcasing the Centerless Table, Cube, and Robot Arm. ## 360 and 3D fashion product photography equipment Take [PhotoRobot’s Cube](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube) and mannequin for example. This piece of equipment makes it easy to capture and process [360 and 3D photography of apparel and fashion](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing) products, as well as to quickly publish the polished results to the web. The Cube is also designed with speed and workflow in mind. It boasts a system for [ghost mannequin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin) and quick mannequin exchange. Stylists can prepare separate mannequins off to the side and quickly mount them onto the Cube when ready. ## Photographing shoes for 360 and 3D product photography For footwear or in combination with the Cube, PhotoRobot clients have realized great results with the [MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobots-multicam). This multi-camera system (supporting up to 13 cameras) simultaneously captures 3D and 360° multi-row images and is capable of snapping hundreds of photos in an instant. To learn more, be sure to check out PhotoRobot's [footwear product photography kit](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear). ## Shooting live models for 360 and 3D product photography If shooting live models, there’s [PhotoRobot’s Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk), composed of a rotating platform with a moving belt to create a professional-looking fashion show in just about any studio space. Models can walk on the conveyor belt while cameras can be trained for a flying effect on product videos or for shooting 360° photography of the live models. ## Equipment for 360 and 3D furniture and home photography In regards to equipment for 360 and 3D photography of furniture and home products, clients benefit from [PhotoRobot’s Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table) for smaller household items like vases or table pieces, or from the [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform) for heavier objects like furniture. These solutions make it easy even for amateur photographers to bring new life to home decor and furnishings, and even professional photographers appreciate the [fusion of robotic process automation and creativity](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-photography-creativity-and-robotic-process-automation). Manage and control everything in a few simple clicks to rotate products, trigger cameras, automatically edit imagery or remove backgrounds to create 360 spin photos or generate [eCommerce 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). ## For jewelry and reflective products Even complex or reflective products such as in [jewelry product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/jewelry-photography) or capturing glassworks is simple with the right automated equipment. From the MultiCam to the Centerless table, and the software for automation, quick editing and publishing to the web, PhotoRobot equipment helps companies capture the perfect product photo for 360 or 3D imagery. ## For automobiles and heavy machinery Then there is the [Carousel 5000](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000), PhotoRobot’s heavy-duty piece of equipment for shooting 360 and 3D photos of vehicles and other machinery. Built for convenience, the Carousel is designed to photograph exceptionally large products, such as cars, machinery or heavy furniture. Its low profile and capacity to hold up to 4,000 kg makes it possible to place a vehicle or another heavy object onto the platform in seconds and without the need for an access ramp or crane. ## For 360 and 3D photography for Amazon No matter the product or scale of the operation, PhotoRobot equipment is designed to help companies near-instantly upload all of their [360 and 3D imagery for Amazon](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon), similar online marketplaces like Shopify, or for e-commerce websites. Software controls give you complete control over the shooting, and it is also the software that assembles all image files to generate the resulting 360° animation in HTML5 format. This format makes these visuals readable across all types of media, and is all you need to distribute your in-house animations to online marketplaces, no matter the file requirements. ## Equipment & software for automated 2D + 360 + 3D photography No matter if it’s [360 photography, 3D models or both](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-photography-3d-models-for-e-commerce), PhotoRobot aims to deliver quality tools across all industries where product photography thrives. Our equipment, software and accessories can be suitable for nearly any studio space or photography projects, and our specialist technicians remain ready to provide you with more information or a free consultation at any time. Reach out today to learn more! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/use-cases-augmented-reality-marketing # SECTION: blog > use-cases-augmented-reality-marketing # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-10-13 --- # 5 Use Cases: Augmented Reality in Marketing Augmented reality is seeing wider adoption in marketing strategies for retail both in-store and online. This is in part thanks to advances in technology, but more so connected to the rapidly evolving behaviors and needs of today’s consumers. Along these lines, brands are developing marketing strategies with AR to meet these demands, generate buzz for their brands and promotional efforts, and to exploit augmented reality for B2B sales. - Categories: Product Photography ## Top 5 Use Cases for AR in Marketing While [augmented reality for online retail and e-commerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce) is one industry in which AR excels, it is also becoming more and more common in traditional, print and in-store product marketing strategies. Online strategies for AR most often involve providing online shoppers with an interactive and more informative product experience, and the same is true when leveraging AR *off-line*. The list of AR shopping apps is growing, as are the [use cases for AR in digital marketing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing). It’s important, however, to *zoom out* and examine the role of AR in general marketing strategies, where and how it’s utilized and what this might mean in terms of generating revenue. ### Leverage AR so customers can try products before buying The first use case for AR in marketing involves augmenting the product experience. In-store, potential shoppers have fitting rooms to try on clothes, samples for products like cosmetics, electronics on display, or the ability to take a new car out for a test-drive. The list of ways shoppers can experience different products goes on and on, and it revolves around one of the most essential and effective sales strategies — satisfying shoppers’ curiosity. With augmented reality, the in-store product experience can be replicated and brought to life in virtual form. Many AR shopping apps of 2020 allow shoppers to experiment with a wide range of products, from furniture to cosmetics, clothes, footwear and more, all without leaving the comfort of the home. Along these same lines, for retailers AR eliminates the need for a large physical inventory, and it also allows retailers to streamline a much wider catalogue of products to shoppers to try on, sample, or experiment with and compare against similar products. ### Make use of AR to augment tours and customer support Another innovative way AR is taking shape in marketing is in augmenting venue tours and additional information or support for customers. Augmented reality creates the potential to implement a digital component in physical locations and on physical products. In this way, by scanning a QR code either on a product or at a location, customers can receive information about the product or find additional promotional material and brand-related experiences. AR is crossing over to numerous industries because of this, going beyond use cases solely for product marketing. Take for example StubHub, a leading ticket marketplace who utilized an AR application to support Super Bowl fans in choosing their seats in the stadium. By augmenting the venue, Stubhub provided customers with a virtual view of the stadium so they could visualize the view from different seating locations and find the best seat for them. Other examples of this include Starbucks, who now provides the digital experience of touring one of their cafes, or Hyundai and Mercedes in the automobile industry. Hyundai is now the first to incorporate AR in drivers’ manuals, while Mercedes is now exploring an AI-assistant with an interface powered by augmented reality. ### Utilize AR for augmented branding materials AR can also bring traditional print materials like packaging, brochures and even business cards to the next level. **LEGO** is one prime example of using AR on packaging and for catalogues, allowing customers to scan a code and see what’s inside the package or on the catalogue page come to life. In this way, LEGO can demonstrate how dynamic moving parts operate, and users can see and interact with a life-like virtual presentation of the product to learn more and decide if they will make a purchase. Any branding materials with static text can be enriched with AR. Whether it’s packaging or catalogues like LEGO’s, or even business cards, AR provides a wide scope of new possibilities for branding materials. AR allows marketers to embed videos, manuals, visual instructions or contact links and more directly onto print materials to increase engagement and improve the overall experience. ### Generate buzz around products with AR Augmented reality is generating a lot of buzz for in-direct sales and marketing as well. In the previous examples, the use cases for AR were more focused on direct tactics to facilitate sales, but brands are also starting to utilize AR experiences to boost brand awareness. AR is still a relatively new and novel concept to many of today’s shoppers, so when brands can create an exciting or unexpected AR experience, it has the potential to generate a lot of buzz and visibility. Take for instance Pepsi, who created considerable buzz with a random AR app to make waiting for a bus a little more exciting. Users were able to access a virtual window located on the wall of a bus station, and in this window users could see various animations in augmented reality. The application had nothing to do with product marketing, but did wonders for in-direct marketing and ultimately reinforcing their brand image. ### Exploit AR for advantages in B2B sales In regards to B2B, the customer/vendor experience can be enriched in several ways with augmented reality. AR allows vendors to create informative and detail-oriented sales presentations for products with complex designs or features that would otherwise require hands-on product presentation. In the past, product presentations might call for informative fliers, brochures or even a video presentation. With AR, these same products can be brought to life in meeting rooms or on showroom floors in real-size for all to see. Tools and features of AR apps provide customers with the ability to manipulate, customize and gain insights on products. Particularly, for larger or heavy-duty machinery and equipment that is complicated and costly to transport, augmented reality becomes a considerable advantage for B2B presentations and marketing. The same is true for the customization options that become available, with customers often seeking specifically tailored products and solutions. Along these lines, with augmented reality, customers can actively participate in the design process. Input can be directly communicated to the vendor, creating an overall more frictionless chain of feedback while also ensuring clients receive exactly what they need and that vendors can provide this to them in a constructive and timely manner. ### The Bottomline For the right businesses, augmented reality deserves more attention in the marketing strategies of 2020 and going forward. This is particularly true for branding, customer service, generating buzz or in B2B sales. While still a relatively novel concept, the potential now exists for forward-thinking businesses to leverage this emerging and exciting mobile tech to improve their customers’ experience, create more opportunities and generate more sales. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ar-shopping-apps-2020 # SECTION: blog > ar-shopping-apps-2020 # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-10-08 --- # Examples of AR Shopping Applications: Then to Now The list of examples for AR shopping apps in 2020 is evolving at a steady pace, with more top brands and e-tailers using AR to enrich product content for online shoppers. Not only are these apps changing the way companies market products for sale, they are also beginning to shape the very way people shop online while revealing new opportunities for business in e-commerce and online retail. Dive into this post on AR shopping apps in 2020 to discover the best examples of AR apps for shopping today and to learn more about what makes these apps successful. - Categories: Product Photography ## Recent Examples of AR Shopping Apps Whether shopping for apparel, cosmetics or footwear, furniture, jewellery, toys or more, 2020 has AR shopping apps for just about any online product retail. Examples of these apps include IKEA, Tesco, Converse, Nike, LEGO and beyond — all trendsetters in the space of the AR shopping apps of today. And while [augmented reality for e-commerce and online retail](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce) is nothing new, it still remains a novel concept to the majority of online retailers. [Challenges to mass adoption](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/challenges-ar-shopping-apps) for AR shopping apps might be behind this, as 52% of online retailers admit they remain unprepared to support this emerging mobile tech, but in 2020 these challenges are becoming a concern of the past. [Statistics on AR apps](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/statistics-ar-apps-online-retail-2020) also suggest it’s time for companies to take AR for shopping seriously, and to do this it’s crucial to look at the best examples of AR shopping apps on the market. These apps not only pave the way for future app design and online shopping, they also serve as prime examples of what other companies should be looking to do with augmented reality. ### IKEA’s AR shopping app The first example of an AR shopping app worth mentioning in 2020 is the [IKEA Place](https://www.ikea.com/au/en/customer-service/mobile-apps/say-hej-to-ikea-place-pub1f8af050) app for viewing and placing 3D models of furniture. This app allows online shoppers to select, customize, and then project a 3D model of furniture from the IKEA catalogue into a virtual space. **Among others, one of the benefits to this AR product experience is in limiting the amount of returns due to shoppers purchasing furniture of the wrong size.** This occurs more than 14% of the time according to one of IKEA’s shopper surveys, and AR helps counter this. Shoppers can design furniture or room decor in real-size, customize it on-the-fly, and then through augmented reality bring products to life in every room of the house from the kitchen to the living room and bedrooms — all with the IKEA AR shopping app. ### Home Depot The next example of an AR shopping app in wide use in 2020 is Home Depot’s, a mobile app launched in 2017 that provides users the ability to project a wide range of Home Depot merchandise into any room of the home. From chandeliers to refrigerators and more, this app can project items from the Home Depot catalogue true-to-dimensions and in 3D into any space where shoppers want to see the product. In 2019, Forrester Research even granted Home Depot’s mobile app the award of [#1 mobile app in retail](https://corporate.homedepot.com/newsroom/forrester-rates-home-depots-mobile-app-1-retail) for excellence in functionality and user experience. ### Topshop Clothing retailer Topshop provides the next example of AR shopping apps, with an innovative feature for fitting rooms with AR support. In these rooms, there is an augmented reality kiosk that provides shoppers with a digital reflection of themselves just like being in front of a mirror. When at the kiosk, shoppers can select different clothes, customize colors and designs to *try-on* and see how they would look on their digital reflection. They can quickly swap between apparel or find similar items to what they’re looking for, and overall the experience is intuitive and user-friendly — making it fun for groups of friends or even the whole family to enjoy. ### Tesco Discover Tesco PLC is the third largest retailer globally, and its mobile shopping app combines the best features of apps for grocery shopping with AR support for in-store Tesco products. Their AR app, **Tesco Discover**, allows shoppers to scan in-store product labels to receive additional information about products, to interact with customizable features, add items to cart or engage with in-store experiences. ### Converse’s “shoe sampler” Converse’s “shoe sampler” is a prime example of the capabilities of AR shopping apps for selling footwear. This app provides shoppers the ability to try on different shoes simply by aiming their smartphone camera at their feet. It’s a simple process: select, customize, aim and then view. This app has a wide range of features for footwear-lovers, and it can also be connected with social media channels to share 3D shoe designs with friends and family. ### Nike “Fit” Also in the footwear examples, Nike has taken a unique approach to AR shopping apps in their mobile app. [Nike “Fit”](https://news.nike.com/news/nike-fit-digital-foot-measurement-tool) allows users to scan their feet and find their true shoe size. It’s as simple as pointing the camera at the feet, and then the app determines shoe size in less than a minute. It also then produces a QR code which shoppers can use in-store by showing to a sales’ representative who can instantly retrieve the user’s shoe size. ### PhotoRobot in the context of AR product photography These are just a handful of examples for the AR shopping apps in 2020, and the list is steadily growing. The examples above all demonstrate keen steps forward that will likely change the very shape of shopping in the near future. As technology advances to meet the demands of e-tailers and online shoppers, the more rapidly these apps will develop, and the more augmented reality will be looked to in business models, digital marketing and online retail. At PhotoRobot, we specialize in preparing businesses for all of their product content needs, from spin photography to scanning for 3D models for augmented reality. To learn more about our [flexible tools for product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/flexible-tools-for-e-commerce-product-photography), contact us today for a free consultation with one of our technical specialists to learn what we can do for your business. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ghost-mannequin-effect # SECTION: blog > ghost-mannequin-effect # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-10-06 --- # Ghost Mannequin Effect for Apparel Photography With apparel photography for e-commerce, online retailers and vendors often showcase apparel either on a live model or on a mannequin with a ghost mannequin effect. The ghost mannequin effect essentially allows you to combine photographs of a product on a model or mannequin and then make the mannequin invisible through post-product processing. The outcome is an authentic, true-to-life image that maintains focus strongly on the product. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## How to Create the Ghost Mannequin Effect For fashion product photography, PhotoRobot integration of [premium ghost mannequins](https://www.photorobot.com/ghost-mannequins) make it easy to create an invisible mannequin effect. Whether it's for photographing still photos or 360° spins, PhotoRobot's CUBE and supported mannequins are designed with speed in mind. Meanwhile, our automation software streamlines the post-product processing to help you achieve the perfect ghost mannequin effect every time with your apparel photography. [PhotoRobot’s CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube) provides studios with a system for quick-exchange, in which one mannequin can be quickly and easily swapped out for the next in line. This means that, with multiple mannequins, you can shoot a product while also styling the next mannequin for the shoot, thus improving your overall studio workflow and helping you capture and upload more apparel photography to the web at a much faster pace. Additionally, with PhotoRobot’s Chromakey automation software, the mannequin’s pole is automatically removed as soon as your collection of photos is ready. The software combines photos immediately and removes the pole from the final images to create the ghost mannequin effect, even on apparel with complicated edges like lace! ## Significance of the ghost mannequin effect in e-commerce With apparel photography for social media, it’s more common to use lifestyle product photography with live models in public settings. For [Amazon product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon), vendors are required to shoot apparel either on live models or in a flat lay style. In apparel photography for e-commerce, however, there is either the live model, or, more commonly, a ghost mannequin to enhance the apparel and better showcase the product. The ghost mannequin effect provides shoppers with a distraction-free experience, in which the focus remains firmly on the apparel rather than the display. ## Most important considerations for the ghost mannequin effect ### Using the best ghost mannequin for the job **Among the most important considerations when creating a ghost mannequin effect is the mannequin itself.** The mannequin needs to be versatile, easily configurable and ideally should consist of moving and removable features (like a removable neck or removable arms). While these mannequins are often more expensive, they are an investment for long-term savings in time and effort in post image processing and editing. Especially with medium to large-scale apparel photography operations, the more versatile the ghost mannequin (or mannequins for quick-exchange), the more effective overall studio workflow becomes. PhotoRobot’s [CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) is a robot with all of this and more in mind, providing a solution that can transform into a rotating mannequin for shooting fashion photography and creating the ghost mannequin effect for all of your clothing. Its design allows photographers to [prepare and style apparel](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/fashion-photography-styling-tools) on a separate torso which is easy to mount onto the CUBE. For larger scale apparel photography, the system can be complemented with storage for up to six additional mannequins of varying sizes and shapes. ### Creating the right lighting for the ghost mannequin effect **Beyond choosing the right mannequin for the job, the next concern is making sure you have the correct lighting for the ghost mannequin effect.** To achieve this, PhotoRobot systems support strobe lighting or LED panel lights, using these to [create the ideal lighting for all angles](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography). Extremely bright and with high output, this setup provides not only a deep depth of field that maintains sharp focus on the apparel, it also appears to freeze apparel in motion so that you can capture photos without having to stop the mannequin’s rotation -- saving valuable time for each apparel photoshoot. ### Compatible cameras for PhotoRobot’s ghost mannequin PhotoRobot’s CUBE, mannequins and automation software are **compatible with both DSLR and mirrorless Canon camera models** to support all your apparel photography needs. These cameras work in cooperation with the software to provide users the ability to control the capturing and composition processes directly from their computer. The software also comes with a wide range of editing tools for tasks like automatic background removal, color or exposure optimization, and various tools for enhancing imagery. User-friendly and suitable for users of any level, this software makes controlling the cameras quick and easy, and achieving a ghost mannequin effect ready for online publication in a matter of minutes. ### The process: Creating the invisible mannequin effect in minutes With PhotoRobot, the entire process for applying the ghost mannequin effect to apparel takes no longer than a matter of minutes. The software manages all post-processing and publishing online, with all of these features available as part of our PRESET categories -- a set of commands that lets you record and apply commands to all later items based on this *style*. The process then becomes routine, no matter if you’re using a regular or an invisible torso. 1. **Capture given angles** (using full spin, a few predefined positions, or both). 2. **Separate the background** on all images. 3. **Retouch the pole** used for the standing torso using Chromakey retouch or the automated Chromakey retouch feature to create the ghost mannequin effect. 4. **Set the lighting** according to the product. 5. **Control the process** to deliver ready-made apparel imagery to the client or publish directly online. ### For more on apparel photography and obtaining perfect ghost mannequin results To learn more about [mastering apparel photography with PhotoRobot](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing), feel free to dive into our blog or contact us for a free consultation with one of our specialist technicians. PhotoRobot has been in the e-commerce product photography industry for years, and our robots are designed for any operation, no matter how small or large. Discover the solutions we have on offer for e-commerce, webshops and online retail today. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/challenges-ar-shopping-apps # SECTION: blog > challenges-ar-shopping-apps # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-10-01 --- # Challenges to Mass Adoption for AR Shopping Apps Numerous challenges face the mass adoption of AR shopping apps in online retail, but many leading brands are already ahead of the game. This is thanks to rapid advances in the technology as well as in the hardware and software options of 2020. Today’s solutions make it simpler and more affordable for brands to create innovative, cutting-edge product experiences and stand out in the booming competition. To discover how e-tailers are doing this to success, dive in to learn about some of the best AR apps for shopping and the challenges these companies face in their adoption of augmented reality. - Categories: Product Photography ## AR shopping apps and challenges to adoption Statistics on AR apps suggest it’s time for online retailers to consider the adoption of augmented reality for shoppers in 2020, but this doesn’t come without its challenges. With [52% of online retailers admitting they remain unprepared](https://www.mobilemarketer.com/news/52-of-retailers-feel-ill-prepared-to-support-emerging-mobile-tech-study-s/560947/) to support this new mobile tech, there is no doubt that a gap in the online retail market is emerging in AR shopping apps. Consumers are making more and more purchases online, especially in lieu of the global pandemic, and e-commerce is not only booming, it’s becoming increasingly more competitive. To stand out among the competition, online retailers are adopting innovative and exciting ways to enrich the customer’s shopping experience, and some brands are doing better than others. Keep reading to discover how these brands are leading the pack, and the challenges facing wide adoption of AR shopping apps in 2020. ### Challenges for supporting AR shopping apps and mass adoption To get to the heart of the challenges facing the mass adoption of AR shopping apps, it’s first necessary to consider what online shoppers really want from this technology. Doing this, brands get a better picture of what features their apps should provide and what ultimately triggers purchases in their target shoppers. ### Obstacles in advertising AR apps for retail With [AR for e-commerce and online retail](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce), one of the main obstacles is in providing not only enough content but also the most appropriate content for online shoppers. One way brands are doing this with AR shopping apps is more so focused on using [AR for digital marketing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing). In this way, brands promote new product showcases to AR app users, both encouraging more use of the app while also creating a channel to promote products with discounts or other deals. This comes with additional challenges, however, like, for example, how do you reach AR shopping app users if they don’t log into the application? This forces brands to advertise their new AR product content either on the web, by print content or some other means of promotion. LEGO found one innovative solution to this, the *Digital Box*, which allows customers to use their AR app to see inside of the physical box at store locations. In this way, shoppers can view and interact with the content in the store, as well as find additional deals and promotions. ### Difficulties in localisation In 2017, sales in e-commerce accounted for only [9% of all US retail sales](https://www.statista.com/statistics/379112/e-commerce-share-of-retail-sales-in-us/), with this figure expected to account for 12.4% by 2020. Take the global pandemic into account, and it’s likely this increase will be much higher as more and more consumers turn to online shopping. This means that the majority of sales are still done in-person and offline, and this is the challenge in localisation. Most consumers still want to see products with their own eyes before making a purchase, so AR and VR apps for shopping are starting to bridge this gap by using shoppers’ GPS data to promote nearby stores where products can be purchased. With this location data, retailers can lead users to things like the nearest retailer, product, or points of delivery, or even promote current offers from various businesses and locations. ### Providing incentives and discounts The next challenge retailers face is in incentivising consumers to use AR shopping apps, and one way companies are meeting this challenge is with various incentives, discounts and gifts. Shoppers can be enticed to spend more time and make more purchases in stores or webshops when they receive something for their time. It might be something for free or even a special offer only available to shopping app users, anything that leads potential consumers to the shop. ### Offering personalisation in AR apps Different users have different needs. What one shoppers desires in an AR shopping app, others might find completely useless. This is why developers need to pay special attention to each individual shopper and tailor applications to the user’s needs. In this case, things like special features, search options, filters, purchase history and more can help retailers rise to the challenge and allow them the ability to analyse shopper behaviour and meet various needs to support users with personalised content that interests them. ### Creating a truly interactive product experience with AR The more product customisation options shoppers have, the better. Today’s online shoppers are becoming more selective than ever, so online retailers need to provide AR shopping app users the chance to consider a wide range of sizes, styles, colours, accessories and more. AR allows shoppers to interact with product models, see how products would look in person, learn how products operate and, ultimately, create a solid user experience. The challenge is in driving interest with the shopping experience, as well as in providing a product experience that builds trust in shoppers and makes them confident in purchases. ### Increasing discoverability The next challenge for successfully running AR shopping apps is discoverability, i.e. how in-store shoppers learn about the app. Simply adding a QR code and some text to product boxes or showcases isn’t enough, as this doesn’t ensure shoppers will be aware of the shopping app. This means AR apps need extra promotion, from promotionals on social media to email campaigns, direct or digital marketing and public relations. Shoppers today aren’t wholly aware of the possibilities for AR shopping apps, so it’s important to entice app use in every way possible. ### Ensuring both safety and privacy for AR users **Information leakage** is of high concern for online shoppers, and happens when revealing information about a user is granted to unauthorised parties. This is especially concerning for online shoppers with mobile apps that require users’ personal identification, data that might identify a user, bank details and the like. This is why AR shopping apps need to place an emphasis on and stress the importance of privacy and safety for users. In this line, these apps need to meet local, national and regional regulatory compliance for the processing of user data as well as adherence to privacy laws, and should also allow users to manage what or how much data is broadcast outside of the application. ### Offering a simple interface for AR shoppers The final challenge worth mentioning is one involving the AR shopping application’s design. Just as with any mobile app, applications should be designed with a simple, intuitive user interface. The more user-friendly, the better, as anything that might confuse users might also make them quickly uninstall the application and never use it again. Components such as language localisation, simple instructions for app use and details of special features are top priorities in this case, as are any features that might make the user’s shopping experience frictionless and engaging. ### PhotoRobot-Powered AR Shopping As more and more retailers overcome the challenges in adopting and supporting viable AR shopping apps, wider adoption among retailers will surely happen over time. This means that the competition among retailers for the best product experience as well as marketing will only increase, and the race to further develop this emerging mobile technology will be in full swing. It also means that demand for affordable and versatile solutions for creating 3D models for AR shopping apps will develop, and that retailers should start considering these solutions sooner rather than later. At PhotoRobot, we’ve had our eyes on this prize for some time, and [our versatile tools for product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/flexible-tools-for-e-commerce-product-photography) are designed for every product photography operation from still shots, to 360-degree spin photos or scanning products for 3D models and AR/VR rendering. To learn more, contact us today for a free consultation with one of our specialist solution technicians. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/statistics-ar-apps-online-retail-2020 # SECTION: blog > statistics-ar-apps-online-retail-2020 # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-09-29 --- # Statistics on AR Apps for Online Retail in 2020 Statistics show that the role of AR apps for e-commerce and online retail has seen noticeable and steady growth every year, from early 2012 to today’s 2020. According to studies, however, many online retailers remain ill-prepared or simply hesitant to adopt this emerging mobile technology despite the growing use and appeal of AR apps among consumers. Due to this, it’s important to look at the statistics and at what the numbers mean to understand the new opportunity for AR apps for online retail in 2020. - Categories: Product Photography ## Significant statistics on the role of AR apps for online retail in 2020 [Augmented Reality for online retail](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce) is advancing rapidly, with major brands and e-tailers supporting AR apps to enrich product content, to stay competitive in 2020 and to meet the growing demands of online shoppers. This emerging format for product visuals is especially exciting from both a retailer’s and a consumer’s perspective, as AR offers new ways to view, learn about and interact with products. ### The emerging gap in the online retail market In particular, the use of 3D models and [Augmented Reality in digital marketing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing) provides brands the cutting-edge over competitors today. This is especially considerable in light of the fact that statistics from recent studies show that [52% of online retailers remain unprepared to support this new mobile tech](https://www.mobilemarketer.com/news/52-of-retailers-feel-ill-prepared-to-support-emerging-mobile-tech-study-s/560947/). Examine this in the lens of statistics from a 2016 US study, [‘The Impact of Augmented Reality on Retail’](https://www.businesswire.com/news/home/20161018005039/en/New-Study-Explores-Impact-Augmented-Reality-Retail), and see the use of AR apps for online retail even then was trending and exposing a new gap in the market. Compare that to today, with the United States Census Bureau (USCB) estimating that for US online retail in Q2 of 2020 [$221.5 billion](https://www.census.gov/retail/mrts/www/data/pdf/ec_current.pdf) accumulated, at an increase of 31.8 (±1.2%) percent from the first quarter of 2020. Looking at [growth over time](https://www.statista.com/statistics/272391/us-retail-e-commerce-sales-forecast/), there is also a significant and steady increase, meaning not only more consumers on the market but also stronger competition and more need for innovative product marketing. ### Statistics from the Impact of Augmented Reality on US Retail The statistics in ‘The Impact of Augmented Reality on US Retail’, together with the steady trend upwards for e-commerce, reveal a significant gap for AR technology emerging in the online retail market. Further, they show new trends in consumer behavior, in digital and product marketing, and in how consumers prefer to interact with product content. In conducting the study, 1,100 adults from the US were chosen, including both female and male (represented at 58% to 42%), with 40% between the ages of 18 and 34 and 18% between 55 and 64. This group yielded the following results. ### AR apps are currently trending among consumers - 34% of those who were surveyed confirmed they already use some AR applications when shopping. - 47% of those confirmed using AR apps both for in-person as well as for on-line shopping. ### Popular use cases for AR apps - 77% who use AR apps answered that they use them to exploit them to search for product differences, for example to find a variety of colours or different designs. - 65% of these consumers admitted to often using AR apps to find more detailed information about products. ### Influence of AR apps on the shopping experience - 71% of everybody in the survey indicated they would be likely to shop more often if they were using AR apps. - 61% claim they preferred stores with AR apps over those without. - 55% assert AR apps make the shopping experience more exciting and enjoyable. - 40% even admit they might pay more for a product if they were able to first test it through Augmented Reality. ### AR apps drive impulse purchasing - 72% say they have purchased products they didn’t really need after using an AR app. - They admit they only made the purchase because of the AR experience. ### Consumer interest and time on-page - Of AR app users, 45% believes the apps save them time. - Another 68% admit they would spend more time during in-person shopping if stores had AR apps. ### The impact of AR apps on final purchases - 41% of AR app users said they mostly preferred using AR apps because of the special details and promotions attached to using them. - Holographic interaction has also been shown to enhance the perception of products as well as to create an immediate positive effect on shoppers. ### What the statistics suggest for the future of AR apps in online retail For companies hesitant to onboard this emerging mobile tech, the statistics suggest that now is the time to start considering new mediums and especially AR apps for online retail in 2020. Engaging consumers in the online shopping process is becoming progressively more competitive, but augmented reality allows brands a new way to stand out among the competition. This format provides a truly unique customer experience that not only leads to more sales but also to increased customer satisfaction. And while the task might seem daunting for some companies, advances in technology are making it easier and more affordable than ever to compile imagery for 3D models for AR apps and to begin including augmented reality in the product experience. To learn more, feel free to dive into the PhotoRobot blog for more reading on creating 3D models for augmented reality, or reach out to us today for a free consultation with one of technical specialists to discover [PhotoRobot’s wide range of hardware and automation software](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/flexible-tools-for-e-commerce-product-photography) for product photography. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/emersya-product-experiences-in-3d-ar-and-vr # SECTION: blog > emersya-product-experiences-in-3d-ar-and-vr # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-09-24 --- # Emersya: Interactive Product Experiences in 3D, AR and VR Emersya is an online publishing platform for fully interactive product experiences in 3D, AR, and VR. With award-winning 3D technology and in partnership with PhotoRobot, Emersya’s platform provides a new realm of possibilities for showcasing and customizing products online and in-store. Read on to learn more about Emersya’s platform and to discover how PhotoRobot solutions make it easier than ever to quickly capture and publish impressive and fully immersive product content online. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography, Software ## The Emersya Platform: Hosting 3D Models, AR and VR Content Beyond spin photography, one of the most engaging ways to promote products online today is [3D product modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/3d-model). Still photos and simple, flat imagery just isn’t enough to satisfy the curiosity and trigger purchases in today’s digitally savvy shoppers. The more diverse and immersive the product content, the better. Think: 3D product configurators for highly customizable products, AR / VR product experiences, or fully digitized collection items and objects of study. See how to create 3D models in the [Demo of PhotoRobot-Powered 3D Product Modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/3d-object-modeling-demo). This is why more and more major brands and online marketplaces are providing shoppers with interactive product experiences, either through 3D imagery, or Augmented and Virtual Reality. These mediums work for both online and in-person shopping, allowing shoppers the ability to browse products in vivid detail; interact with, spin, and zoom into objects; customize and personalize items; find additional, technical information about more complex products; or even to project and manipulate larger products into a virtual space. Thankfully, [Emersya](https://emersya.com/en/home) is your 3D, AR/VR publishing platform for all of the above, and [PhotoRobot solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-photography-creativity-and-robotic-process-automation) make it easier than ever to capture, collect, and distribute all the imagery that goes into creating not only 360-degree product photos but also 3D models for rendering into impressive AR and VR product experiences. What’s more, if you’re already utilizing PhotoRobot solutions in the studio, you likely possess all the tools you need to get started both quickly and easily. Read on to learn what Emersya has to offer and more about their partnership with PhotoRobot. ## Navigate, animate and personalize products in 3D, AR and VR **Emersya is *one medium with endless possibilities***, providing a platform for 3D visualization, full interactivity, customization, and, overall, an enriched product experience through 3D, AR & VR technology. Now in partnership with PhotoRobot, Emersya can utilize all of your PhotoRobot 360° photography and 3D models to create visually-rich, immersive and interactive product content for online or in-store sales. With Emersya, turning 3D models into advanced product experiences and embedding them in any website is quick and easy. You can publish online in minutes and embed content in seconds. Brands can then share the 3D experiences they create across their larger retail network, or simply embed the 3D viewer into their website to start showcasing products in a more interactive way. Whether you’re running a small webshop or an industrial-scale operation, there are numerous benefits to fully interactive product experiences in 3D, AR & VR. - Display products in every intricate detail and depth of zoom. - Allow shoppers to interact with products and explore mechanisms, construction and exploded views. - Provide shoppers with customization options for details, colors and designs. - Give shoppers more information about product features and technology. - Project products to scale in Augmented Reality, on mobile devices and tablets, and to position products in the surrounding space. - Customize and animate products in Augmented Reality, without ever leaving the product page. - Empower shoppers to experience products digitally, just as they would in-store by interacting with products in Virtual Reality. ## Observe every intricate detail of the product When publishing 3D models for digital marketing or for Augmented and Virtual Reality sales, the goal is to provide shoppers with a level of confidence from the product experience that not only triggers purchases but also reduces the likelihood of returns. To do this, brands need to provide consumers with all of the valuable information they need to make an informed and confident purchase, and this is where Emersya can help take product showcases to the next level. Emersya’s platform allows brands to market products with detail-rich product experiences in 3D, AR & VR. All you need is the 360° imagery generated by PhotoRobot solutions to create a 3D model, and Emersya does the rest to create a flawless product experience for shoppers. Shoppers can observe products in every detail, rotate objects, zoom in and out, or control product movement on the page through the embedded 3D viewer. You can even choose preset viewpoints for product showcases. ## Interact and explore The next advantage to providing shoppers with product experiences in 3D, AR and VR is that shoppers can interact with products to learn how they work, how they’re assembled, or how they operate in motion. With the exploded view, shoppers can learn about the construction of a product, and they can discover additional information about the internal parts and product technology. Product animations can also be used to enable consumers to trigger specific product features and to see moving parts in action. Shoppers also have the ability to switch between product & design options, like for example when shopping for furniture that comes with a variety of pieces or in different designs, colors and textures. Then, when satisfied with their choice, shoppers can save their design and generate a unique URL to replay their custom design in a separate 3D viewer that can also be shared on social media. They can return to and edit their saved design later and before making their final decision. ## Change colors and materials on the fly Another benefit of implementing a 3D, AR and VR product marketing strategy is that shoppers can alter colors and materials on the fly to compare all options and select their favorite or find what best meets their needs. With the ability to customize every detail or to switch between available colorways, shoppers have more variety and more control. They can even create their own unique design by applying custom text(s) or images to products and preview results in real-time. ## Learn more about the product 3D, AR and VR product experiences also help shoppers discover the product’s story, including insightful explanations about a product’s features and its technology. Brands might want to convey more information about the product’s material, structure, base, or any moving parts that may be of interest to consumers. This is where informative product content will help educate shoppers, enhance buyer’s confidence, and hopefully boost sales while reducing returns over the long-term. ## Suitable for any webpage and on any device The Emersya 3D, AR & VR experience is also available for any webpage, device or operating system. With native HTML5 and Webgl technology, no plug-ins required for the embeddable 3D viewer. Responsive design helps ensure your product content is viewable and compatible on all devices shoppers might use, while hardware accelerated 3D using WebGL technology guarantees high-quality content. For easy sharing and friction-free integration, Emersya provides the ability to embed 3D models into pages just as you would with video, using a simple iframe code. The advanced API allows you to control the 3D product content directly from your website, and works on any website or CMS e-commerce platform. Finally, the intuitive controls on any device provide multi-touch support, and there are also image-based fallbacks for when 3D images fail to load on older devices. ## Publish directly to the web in minutes In 4 easy steps, you can upload your own 3D models to transform your product content into advanced shopping experiences. All you need to do is upload your 3D model; fine tune parameters such as color, texture and intensity; enrich your content by preparing possible options for a configurator, animations and/or annotations, and then simply embed the 3D content in your webpage to begin sharing. ## PhotoRobot and the Emersya Publishing Platform The goal at Emersya is to streamline the process of publishing 3D, AR & VR content on the web. The platform is designed to be user-friendly while also providing brands with a comprehensive interface that can meet all of their product content needs. It is also designed for easy linking with ordering systems and ERP, and, as a fully manageable SAAS platform, there is no software to install. All of this makes Emersya an exceptional partner for PhotoRobot and our clients in e-commerce and product photography. With PhotoRobot hardware and automation software, capturing all the images you need to build 3D models for AR & VR product experiences is quick and easy. Emersya then makes it just as quick and easy to publish 3D product experiences online. And while PhotoRobot helps brands capture, process and distribute imagery, Emersya has helped many industry leaders overcome their product content challenges, including brands like Samsonite, Salamon, Whirlpool and more. Just have a glance at some of Emersya's latest [3D product configurators](https://emersya.com/en/articles/configure-modular-products-online-in-interactive-3d) to get a better idea. If you’d like to learn more about 3D, AR & VR product experiences with Emersya, or how PhotoRobot can help you accumulate all the imagery you need for 3D visualizations, reach out today for a free demo with one of our specialist technicians! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/optical-character-recognition # SECTION: blog > optical-character-recognition # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-09-22 --- # Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and Integration with PhotoRobot With PhotoRobot, creating high-quality, detail-rich product content is easy, but what if you need to capture text on a photographed object? This is where Optical Character Recognition (OCR) comes into play. No matter if you’re capturing product spins, stills or planograms, the PhotoRobot_controls software suite has you covered with OCR support for all of your imagery. This tool comes at no extra cost, and it can extract text directly off of items to include in your export feed and easily upload to webshops or product management tools. All you need is time for a quick review before publication to the web! - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## PhotoRobot's Optical Character Recognition With online product content, there is high demand for not only quality product photos but also text related to the product itself. The text is necessary for captions, quick search features, and streamlining indexing into a product portfolio. However, extracting text – even if it wraps around items like cans or jars – is easy thanks to [PhotoRobot Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Integration](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/ocr-gs1-image-capture-features). Some online marketplaces even require labels to be presented in writing, which provides us with another considerable reason for digging deeper into **automation for text recognition**. Watch the PhotoRobot OCR & Grocery Product Photography Demo. The PhotoRobot solution is powered by many Google cloud technologies, and it’s here Google Cloud’s Vision comes to the scene with its extremely powerful pre-trained machine learning models that assign labels to images and quickly classify them into millions of predefined categories. With this solution, you can detect objects and faces, read printed and handwritten text, and build valuable metadata into your image catalogue. Our OCR module is based on functions related to the printed and handwritten text functions. ## How does PhotoRobot’s OCR module work? As the text field is frequently split into more images of the product, PhotoRobot_controls**combine more images together automatically and then flatten the text** in a way that makes it easy to recognize the texts in logical groups and then provide you with an extracted ready-made text source four your final inspection before online publication. The human operator has a product spin available online, so this becomes very much like holding the product in hand. Texts are immediately extracted and ready for pre-publication review. The optimized output is then a part of the data which is exported alongside the images using our standard dynamic export feeds. A great advantage to this is in the fact that the operator can work with everything remotely, meaning even freelancers and home-office workers can assist with this process. A license covering general output supervision and performing **OCR** costs less than **€2 per day,** so what are you waiting for? Contact PhotoRobot experts today to help you find the best setup for your zero-friction imagery production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing # SECTION: blog > augmented-reality-in-digital-marketing # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-09-17 --- # 3D Models and Augmented Reality in Digital Marketing Understanding how to utilize 3D modeling and augmented reality in digital marketing can be of great importance in 2020, especially in e-commerce. Whether for a product photography studio, a webshop or online retail, 3D models can bring new life to digital product experiences, provide more valuable information to potential customers and better promote brands and websites overall. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## 3D Modeling and Augmented Reality in Digital Marketing Today’s digital marketing in e-commerce revolves around communication and how well marketers can communicate information about online products to potential customers. Brand promotion relies just as heavily on things like [product presentation](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs) and web page design as they rely on advertising and promotional campaigns, so the more life you can give to the product experience, the better. Especially nowadays, it’s difficult to not only attract customers’ attention but also to keep customers on your webpage for longer periods of time. Because of this, advertising trends are rapidly evolving to look *less like advertising*, to be more suitable for readers on mobile or to utilize smart technologies like [3D modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) for augmented reality to reach wider audiences. In this article, we’ll look in depth at [3D eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), 3D models, and how 3D modeling and augmented reality play into today’s digital marketing strategies. ## Use of 3D objects in marketing Until recent years, the primary domain of 3D modeling and augmented reality was mostly in the training of new employees, especially for those in highly technical or specialized fields. This provides new employees the ability to experiment with and learn from complex tasks earlier than with standard training and before they need to perform procedures in reality. Nowadays, however, advances and cost reductions in this technology mean that 3D modeling and augmented reality are becoming more and more popular, in wider use and available on various platforms including with support for mobile interfaces. Apple and Google specifically are now [at the forefront of pushing augmented reality forward](https://www.forbes.com/sites/jonmarkman/2019/08/31/augmented-reality-via-google-and-apple-will-be-the-biggest-star-of-5g/#658825eda760), and many others are likely to follow suit, especially as 5G technology brings new opportunities to this sector. The benefits to utilizing 3D modeling and augmented reality, particularly in digital marketing, are clear. - **Offer potential customers something extra** in the flood of webshops and online retailers. - **Provide more information on products** with 3D presentation, product descriptions of individual parts, or animations to help viewers understand product operation or features. - **Benefit from small file sizes of 3D objects** (the typical 3D file size is approximately 10-30 MB), as well as from **animation options and color variants**. ## Photogrammetry: Scanning objects for 3D modeling Photogrammetry is one of the most commonly used methods for scanning objects for 3D modeling. It involves obtaining reliable information about the physical object by recording, measuring and interpreting imagery in order to replicate the object in a digital 3D model. Why photogrammetry, however? - **For objects of different sizes.** Most widely used scanning methods require the exact position of the scanner from the object being scanned. Today, mainly "targets" are used for this. With photogrammetry, these targets aren’t necessarily needed. - **For a wide range of scannable surfaces.** In this respect, photogrammetry is somewhere in the middle when it comes to versatility. There are also systems that cope well with glossy surfaces, but these have other limitations, such as the size of the scannable object, that need to be weighed in comparison. - **For speed.** With photogrammetry, the scanning for 3D modeling alone will take no more than an hour. Compare this to other systems, and photogrammetry is often up to 10 times faster. Then, with PhotoRobot, scanning time can be reduced even further, down to a few minutes per product. - **For texture quality.** Another one of the key features for use in digital marketing and the main advantage of photogrammetry is that you can offer a texture resolution of up to 16384 x 16384 pixels, truly enriching your product experience. ## How objects are scanned for 3D modeling Photogrammetry uses a series of photographs to create a 3D object. At PhotoRobot, we found photogrammetry was a perfect fit for integration with our hardware and software [solutions for product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/flexible-tools-for-e-commerce-product-photography), 360 degree photography and 3D modeling. PhotoRobot’s [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table), for example, makes shooting the photos for 3D models quick and easy. Its design means it is suitable for a variety of objects. Whether you’re shooting small or large objects that are glossy, light, or dark, the spinning glass table allows you to capture images of anything from the size of a ring to a suitcase. Shooting through the glass is also possible, so you can capture the 3D object from below as well as above. After the shoot, photos must then be processed by special photogrammetry software before they can be used as 3D models or for augmented reality. This open-source software is available to professionals, and there are [numerous options for photogrammetry software in 2020](https://all3dp.com/1/best-photogrammetry-software/). ## Photogrammetry software **Differences between photogrammetry software are considerable in price, speed of calculations, and in their ability to recreate individual objects in general**. With photogrammetry, the calculations that the software has to make to create a 3D object are very demanding. It takes up to several hours to create an object, and the degree of automation in the whole process of creating the 3D model obviously has an effect on the overall cost of the model. **Quality then revolves around the know-how and efficiency of the software’s tools.** Data from the software can have up to several million polygons, so it is necessary to regularly clean files and adjust their size to meet the customer's needs. Adjusting the models to the final form is one of the key stages in creating a 3D model. As with any method for capturing 3D models, however, Photogrammetry also has its limitations and some details need to be done manually in the models. A typical case is with the definition of surface gloss. ## 3D modeling with CAD data 3D modeling consists of three crucial components. 1. **Geometry**: the object’s shape. 2. **Texture** of the object. 3. **Surface**: Nowadays, physically based rendering (PBR) is mainly used for this to define how and in what place the surface has color, gloss, etc. 3D models can also be created other than by scanning. For example, using CAD models or, an option that is becoming increasingly appealing, [3D sculpting](https://all3dp.com/2/6-best-3d-sculpting-software-tools-4-are-free/). Modeling an object is very time-consuming and up to 10 times more expensive compared to scanning. In addition, the quality of the model in most cases does not reach the quality of the model from a scan, and the texture for a 3D object created through modeling or CAD data must be done manually. ## 3D models compared to standard product photography In order for a 3D model to complement or even replace product photos in webshops, the 3D model must look like a real object. Here, photogrammetry has a clear advantage over other scanning systems. It uses photographs to create an object, even for texture. Thus, it is clear that such an object’s texture is incomparably more detailed than a hand-crafted texture and contains, for example, tiny shadows that indicate the nature of the surface as rough, rugged, etc. If the 3D model is good enough, it can be used to regenerate 2D images for use in digital marketing, but also for static photos in the webshops or in print. ## Rendering and Augmented Reality For the model to look like it would in real life, it is necessary to have not only a well-made 3D model but also a program that renders the 3D model itself. If considering applications for this task, then [Unity](https://unity.com/) and [Unreal Engine](https://www.unrealengine.com/en-US/) are clearly leading the pack here. If considering 3D rendering on the web, then all browsers used today on almost all platforms support WebGL. This is one of the easiest solutions to create 3D objects for your website, and can be found hosted on a variety of platforms. ## 3D rendering platforms for your website and digital marketing One of the easiest solutions to create 3D objects for your website is through one of the many platforms to publish, share, discover and sell 3D, VR and AR content. These are often affordable and easily accessible solutions for your digital marketing campaigns with 3D modeling, especially when on a tighter marketing budget. If seeking some worth mention, check out the following list. - [**Sketchfab**](https://sketchfab.com/) - Great rendering quality, and a user-friendly environment. - [**Emersya**](https://emersya.com/) - A variety of configurations at a reasonable price. - [**Vectary**](https://www.vectary.com/) - A universal tool, also tools available for creating models. - [**FinalMesh**](http://www.finalmesh.com/) - For CAD assemblies. - [**P3D**](https://p3d.in/) - For a completely free platform. - [**Marmoset**](https://marmoset.co/) - For high-quality rendering, serving more for presentation of model quality ## 3D rendering platforms for implementation on the web If you feel like implementing directly onto the web, there are a few more options worth consideration. - [Babylon.JS](https://www.babylonjs.com/) - wide range of uses, great documentation, great rendering quality - [Threejs.org](https://threejs.org/) - [Blend4web](https://www.blend4web.com/) Finally, 3D data is also for native support through Google and Apple. In this way, the opening and utilization of 3D data is similar to opening a standard image. However, the main appeal to this for digital marketing is in regards to their augmented reality functions. Afterall, who wouldn't want to project a sofa that you see online directly into their living room to see not only if it suits the room but also fits there? Or, who wouldn’t want to try on a dress or an item of clothing, all without leaving the home? These opportunities are now real and need to be addressed in digital marketing strategies with 3D models and augmented reality. They bring products to life, and, at the same time, keep companies up-to-date with the competition and ready to continue pushing forward new models of marketing products online. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce # SECTION: blog > augmented-reality-for-online-retail-and-e-commerce # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-09-15 --- # Augmented Reality for Online Retail and E-Commerce Augmented Reality (AR) for online retail and e-commerce is rapidly increasing in popularity, providing webshops and e-tailers a new format to enrich the product experience. AR is useful for tasks like conveying additional information about a product, projecting and fitting life-size objects into a space, or showing how the many moving parts of a piece of complex machinery might operate. What’s more, with the wider use of AR apps for shopping both in-store and online, AR is becoming more and more familiar to today’s consumers and more likely to become a significant sales driver for online retail and e-commerce. - Categories: Product Photography, Software ## Boost Online Sales with Augmented Reality for Retail and E-commerce Augmented Reality apps for online retail and e-commerce possess great potential to boost sales and improve revenue. They are also seeing an uptick in viability and investment, as major giants in the tech industry such as Google, Apple, Facebook, Microsoft and others are now investing serious money into advancing AR technology. To give you an idea: - Google’s Tango Project was an early effort to bring AR to phones. While Tango never quite worked out, Google went on to invest with the likes of Alibaba, J.P. Morgan and others into an American startup, Magic Leap. This AR-centric project saw lavish amounts of funding, totaling $2.6 billion across 9 rounds. - Apple Inc. has launched a platform to develop Augmented Reality for iOS devices, known as ARKit, supporting regular updates and including new features. - Facebook purchased the rights to the Oculus Rift, paying over $2 billion USD for the acquisition. - Snapchat, before its take-over by Facebook, purchased an Israeli-based AR startup, Cimagine Media, for somewhere between $30-40 million in 2016. - Then, you have other software companies like Microsoft with the HoloLens 2 and IBM also in the AR market, developing their own solutions and advancing research in the sector. These are just some of the many examples of investment going into Augmented Reality. Many analysts, in fact, project numbers for the AR market were somewhere between $100-130 billion in 2020. The use cases for AR in online retail and e-commerce are numerous. Shoppers nowadays can use AR technology in-store to compare prices or learn more about products on the shelves. Then, online shoppers can use AR apps to see if, for example, furniture not only matches but also fits into their homes. They can even customize, interact with, and personalize items, [virtually try on clothing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-textile-motion-simulation), or see how items operate. ## Advantages of using Augmented Reality in retail and e-commerce Just as with any [product photography for eCommerce](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) and online retail, ultimately, the goal is to boost conversion rates and reduce overall returns. This means delivering content that not only impresses online shoppers. The content must also provide all the vital information consumers need to be confident in making a purchase online. This is where AR content can provide many advantages to businesses, marketing, services, and especially in online retail. AR provides webshops and *e-tailers* a new format to deliver more detailed and intuitive product information to shoppers. It makes the product experience more interactive and immersive overall, and this reflects well on brands and also helps to establish brand trust. ## Providing a more interactive user experience with AR With Augmented Reality shopping apps, customers can become both content consumers and content creators.AR provides users the ability to personally interact with, customize and personalize both offline and online products. - For online products, AR allows users to **view items however and wherever** they wish. - Users can**change colors, sizes, styles and designs** of items they browse. - For in-store purchases, items with AR experiences require only a quick scan of a QR code or product ID number for shoppers to **learn more** about similar items on sale, compare prices, or even find nearby stores that might have the product available. ## Using AR to create customizable content for each user’s needs From mobile applications to Virtual and Augmented Reality, the way shoppers are using technology in today’s world shapes how businesses must market products for online retail and e-commerce. It revolves around the shopper, and as shoppers’ demands grow, so too must brand leaders look to improve product content to meet the individual shopper’s needs. In product marketing, this means that businesses need more than simply high-quality, visually rich product images. A shopper might want to view a product from all angles or in a deep field of zoom to check the tiniest of details before deciding if they make a purchase. On the other hand, the shopper might want to interact with a complex or heavy item, see how it works or try it out, all without leaving their home and on the device that is most convenient to them-- whether it’s on one operating system or another, on mobile or on desktop. This is where you need to meet each user’s often-varied needs and provide them with customizable solutions for their everyday lives. ## Connecting online shoppers with printed content The next advantage to Augmented Reality for online retail and e-commerce is in, *believe it or not*, bringing new life to print product content. With companies working to bridge the gap between print and digital content, one of the main challenges is in understanding how consumers use and interact with printed content, and AR provides new advantages in this regard. Data isn’t often or widely available for print content consumption, but by adding AR features to print advertisements and showcases, businesses can get a better understanding of their print engagement, and then continually work from there to improve how they deliver their content. Have a look at the following list of major brands and companies now utilizing AR technology: - **Vespa**, the world-renown Italian scooter, now has AR codes for magazine readers to scan, at which point readers can build customizable scooters from the options available: from colors to styles and accessories. - **Volkswagen** has taken a truly unique approach, experimenting with AR and billboards. By pointing an AR app at one of these billboards, customers will see a display of the car pop out of the billboard on their phone screen. - **Lego and IKEA** have both begun support of AR in their printed catalogues, allowing readers to scan pages to see how objects would look in life-size. This content not only comes to life, but also provides shoppers with additional information, tips for use, or an option to purchase instantly. - **Manor**, a Swiss-based retailer, does similar to Lego and IKEA, and integrated AR into its application. Now, users can scan pages from their catalogues to receive video clips from their cover shoots or to receive additional information and extra content. ## Overcoming language barriers to appeal to a global market Another challenge to online retail and e-commerce is appealing to a global market, and, in this area, Augmented Reality can help bridge the language barrier. Language challenges can be not only time-consuming and costly for companies but also poor translations can disengage shoppers completely and leave them looking for alternative places to shop online. This is where AR and translation software becomes an advantage. With international companies and sales especially, AR can provide valuable and accurate information in many languages across all channels, from team members down to the customer. Things like technical demonstrations of complex products or machinery, presenting blueprints and 3D models, enhancing user manuals, or just about anything that calls for more information and needs translation for a global audience can be enriched with today’s AR technology and AR apps. ## Boost consumer confidence, trigger purchases and reduce overall returns Ultimately, the goal with using 3D models and AR technology for e-commerce apps and online retail is to make shoppers feel more confident in the products, triggering purchases and reducing overall returns. This becomes more likely to happen in today’s world if you make your product experience more interactive, informative, and tailored to the needs of the customer. This way, consumers’ curiosity is not only satisfied, but also the real product often lives up to the customer’s expectations and leads to less returns overall. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-photography-3d-models-for-e-commerce # SECTION: blog > 360-degree-photography-3d-models-for-e-commerce # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-09-10 --- # 360-Degree Photography and 3D Models for E-Commerce: Why both? 360-degree photography and 3D models are two formats helping top brands and retailers stay ahead of the competition in today’s e-commerce. Now in wider use than ever before, these formats enrich the customer’s shopping experience, reduce costs for long-term operations, and ensure scalability for product content strategies. - Categories: Product Photography ## Enhancing Product Experiences with 3D Models & Spin Photography Oftentimes, PhotoRobot clients ask if they need both [360-degree photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) as well as [3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) for e-commerce retail and webshops. The answer to this often depends on a number of variables, but the truth is that every brand and retailer can benefit from doing both. Now more affordable and accessible than ever, in-house product photography solutions for 360-degree photography and 3D modeling provide brands and retailers the ability to create a product content strategy that will be cost-effective, efficient, and scalable over long-term operations. Afterall, the future of [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) is now moving towards augmented and virtual reality enabled product showcases, immersive and engaging online storefronts, interactive web experiences, and photorealistic product renderings. This means that, to prepare for the future and maintain a competitive edge, every brand and retailer should have a digitized [product content catalogue](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery) composed of 360-degree spin images, product videos, and 3D models. Moreover, companies don’t need to invest much extra to offer online shoppers all of the above, especially if they already have an online product showcase of 3D imagery. This is achieved by using catalogues of 360-degree photos to compile data and build or improve on 3D models, making the process not only easier but also more affordable. There is also now a wider variety of quality 3D modeling and rendering providers, as well as many platforms for hosting 3D models and renders on the web. ## Why use 360-degree photography? 360-degree product photography is used to create an interactive “spin” comprising high-resolution still images showcasing all angles of a product. By collecting spin imagery, brands and retailers amass a wealth of digital data they can use for all of their future marketing needs, from in-store displays and pamphlets, to promotional campaigns, webshops, and even [3D renderings for augmented reality](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-textile-motion-simulation) and virtual reality. This toolbox means that companies get everything they need for future, repeatable actions in a one-time photoshoot. 360-degree photography provides shoppers with an interactive, 3D product, which they can spin from side-to-side and top-to-bottom as well as zoom in and out for detail, ultimately keeping shoppers on pages for longer. ## Improving the customer’s experience with photorealism Driving sales and increasing revenue in e-commerce revolves around professionalism, digital presentation, and high-quality product content. Products need to not only look life-like but should also replicate the in-store shopping experience, leaving no detail to the shopper’s imagination. This is where 360-degree product imagery creates the element of photorealism that is so critical for sales, and also makes companies look more professional to establish brand trust and encourage buyer’s confidence. ## Replicating the in-store shopping experience with 360-degree imagery Moreover, when 360-degree content is rich in detail and high in quality, online shoppers are not only more likely to go into *purchase mode*, they are also less likely to return products overall. This returns to leaving nothing to the imagination. In 2019, a study by the [Marketing Science Institute](https://www.msi.org/working-papers/the-impact-of-online-product-reviews-on-product-returns/) concluded that in-store products were returned at a much lower frequency than products purchased online, as shoppers had the opportunity to examine products in-hand for quality. This means that, for product content strategies, quality and digital presentation, above all, need to be top priorities for brands and online retailers to increase sales while also reducing returns and ultimately improving their bottomline. ## Enriching the browser and mobile experience 360-degree imagery is also now affordable and easy for brands and retailers to integrate into their webshops. PhotoRobot’s [360 Product Viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer), for example, comes at no cost and can be simply and quickly added to any webshop to display product spins. Moreover, it offers seamless integration for the browser and mobile experience, meaning online shoppers have a similar experience no matter if they’re shopping from desktop or on-the-go. ## Cost-cutting and scalable Whether seeking for in-house 360-degree product photography solutions or for third party providers, meeting your 360 photography needs doesn’t have to be expensive. PhotoRobot has provided tools and services to manufacturers, distributors, and e-tailers for years, helping them achieve their product content targets or to [increase their own studio workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio). No matter how many product photos you need online per day, PhotoRobot’s goal is to help companies meet throughput needs and quickly distribute visual product content online. ## The advantages to using 3D models Firstly, what exactly is a 3D model or rendering for e-commerce? Until recently, a 3D model was most often used in creating graphics for film or developing video games. Nowadays, however, due to advances in technology and the rise of more and more platforms providing or hosting 3D models and rendering, more and more 3D models are being used in digital advertising and marketing, especially for online marketplaces, e-tailers and vendors. These models are particularly useful for products like furniture and home goods, as shoppers can utilize augmented reality to digitally project and place objects in their home to decide if they fit or match the environment. ## No need to pack and ship a physical object The next advantage to using 3D models for e-commerce is in the fact that products don’t need to be shipped before customers see or larger products. Imagine trying to sell a complex piece of heavy, technical equipment. Rather than moving this equipment to a showroom or transporting it to a customer for a demonstration, instead you can make use of augmented reality to not only show the potential customer a life-size model of the product but also to include additional information about complex components of the equipment. You also cut costs and time on all of the packaging, shipping, distribution and set up involved. ## Enhanced customer experience 3D models allow shoppers to imagine the product and experience it in a way similar to how they would in-store, or even better, as they would in their own house. 3D models can be projected to “stand” in place and display in life-size detail and color. Imagine a shopper trying to find the perfect size and color chair to fit and complement their new living room scheme. Rather than having to measure and compare dimensions and use online photos, they can project the chair directly into their living room to test out different sizes, colors, or even completely different pieces of furniture. It brings new, interactive life to the customer experience, and, moreover, it’s fun for customers and makes companies look like they truly value the customer and their product experience. ## Utilizing 360-degree imagery to save time constructing 3D models Without high-quality 360-degree product imagery, 3D models will suffer, so it’s crucial companies create and maintain a rich library of digital assets. In the past, creating 3D models was time-consuming, often done by hand, and required high-level professionals and specialized software to do the job. Nowadays, however, and thanks to evolving strategies in 3D modeling, 360-degree photography can now make the entire process much easier, more affordable, and more effective. ## Extra imagery leads to better 3D models The process of photogrammetry allows designers of 3D models to utilize 360-degree photos to create and improve on 3D models and renders. This is owing to the fact that, with 360-degree photography, many, sometimes hundreds of images are captured in one photo session, and all of these individual photos can then be stitched together with photogrammetry-based software. When combined, this imagery then forms and enhances 3D models. ## Creating scalable product content End game, the goal in digital marketing is to always create not only quality but moreover scalable content strategies that can keep brands and retailers ahead of the times and ahead of the competition. In this regard, the way forward is no doubt in creating a repository of 360-degree photography to use either now or later for 3D models, rendering, and augmented and virtual reality experiences. These product experiences are what will define online shopping and e-commerce success stories in the rapidly approaching future, and they will also help brands establish their professionalism and credibility among the widening pool of today’s online marketplaces, vendors and e-tailers. If you want to learn more about photography for e-commerce, 360-degree product photography, 3D models or renders, feel free to visit the [PhotoRobot blog](https://www.photorobot.com/blog) for more articles like this, or reach us today to talk to one of our experts and see if any of our solutions might meet your product photography needs. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content # SECTION: blog > consistency-in-visual-content # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-09-08 --- # How Consistency in Visual Content Boosts Revenue Consistency in visual content boosts revenue by establishing brand consistency, attracting shoppers and triggering buyer’s confidence in visitors to your webshop. A single, perfect image simply doesn’t do enough to sell products in today’s world, so you have to consider the overall shopper’s experience— from the web page and the product showcase to individual product visuals. Whether presenting still imagery, 360 degree photography, product videos or even 3D models, consistency in your visual content should be a top priority if trying to boost revenue for product pages. - Categories: Product Photography ## Consistent visual content drives sales Consistency in visual content across all channels a product showcases on helps drives sales and make brands look more professional overall. It’s a mistake to think that an individual, high-quality image is enough to satisfy shoppers’ curiosity and to build the trust you need to actually trigger a purchase on your product. What you really need is a well thought-out, structured and thematic approach to how you showcase your [product visuals](https://www.photorobot.com/gallery). This is crucial for your own product page and for selling products on a variety of vendors’ pages. Moreover, you want your visual content to represent your brand, and for this, consistency is key and one way of maintaining a competitive edge in digital marketing and sales. You need to consider elements like consistency in lighting setups, camera positioning or even camera movement for product videos. And these should all be consistent and complement a general theme for your webstore or product visuals. ### Utilize consistency in light setups and camera positioning No matter how impressive your product content or videos are, if they are presented with inconsistent lighting and camera positions or camera movement, they will challenge people’s impression of your brand. **Even tiny inconsistencies can negatively impact the visual power of your total grid of visual content.** Online shoppers today tend to disengage when presented with a disorganized grid of products, so it’s crucial to strive for consistency in areas like color accuracy and angle shots in order to ensure each product is presented equally on the website. After all, a mixture of different styles and inconsistency with all of the elements that make up a product showcase does not make for an appealing webshop. Even if the product visuals are visually-rich, high-quality masterpieces in their own right, lack of consistency across these visuals are likely to, at the very least, make your brand appear unprofessional, or, at worst, destroy your webshop’s conversion rates and revenue altogether. ### Develop complex visual content and a well-organized product page According to a case study by e-Business Institute, conversion rates for e-commerce product pages often revolve around the level of thought and complexity invested into the visual content. **These conversion rates see dramatic rises or falls that can be connected to product content, and, in particular, consistency in product showcases.** This means that, in today’s world, your product visuals are just as important as the products you’re trying to sell. The more time and effort you put into visual content and ensuring that your showcase is consistent across all platforms, the more online shoppers will take notice, and the more likely you are to attract even more visitors to your webshops and product pages. ### Offer a flawless website journey and experience With any webshop or product page, your ultimate goal is to attract and direct more visitors to your website and convert them into paying customers. To do this, you really need to provide shoppers with an impeccable website journey and product experience. The primary consideration here is that the customer should never be confused or distracted by the webshop. In this regard, query results should always lead customers to answers rather than down a confusing rabbit-hole to products which hadn’t interested them in the first place. If the shopper is asking about shoes, you definitely don’t want query results leading them to jewelry! **Make it easy for shoppers to find exactly what they want and relevant products to their search.** Query results should be tailored, well-organized and styled around your brand image, paying special attention to consistency in visual content and product showcases. Then, when everything is simple and consistent, it activates customer purchases rather than leaving them looking for tiny differences in focal point, lighting, or camera height and angles. ## Make it simpler for the shopper to make their choice Ultimately, what you are trying to achieve is putting visitors to your website into *purchase mode*. To do this, you need to be aware of distracting traps that can make it difficult for potential customers to make a choice and trigger a purchase, and this is also where consistency in visual content becomes a significant revenue booster. This is why here at PhotoRobot, we develop [automated product photography hardware](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) and automation software to make both quality and consistency top priorities. All of our specialized product photography solutions utilize the same top-quality lighting setups and come equipped with software for customizable and fixed presets as well as streamlined uploading and web integration capabilities. Whether shooting a collection of still shots, images for [360 degree product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), or imagery for [eCommerce 3D modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), PhotoRobot machines are designed to meet any e-commerce retailer or product photography studios needs. Our machines support products of any size— from items as small a microchip, to [clothing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing), footwear, and even larger objects like automobiles and heavy-duty factory equipment. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/high-quality-photos-advanced-image-processing # SECTION: blog > high-quality-photos-advanced-image-processing # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-09-03 --- # High-Speed, High-Quality Photos and Advanced Image Processing More than just fast, PhotoRobot also provides advanced image processing features great for shooting challenging items like reflective or transparent products. With complicated objects like these, it’s better to reduce the speed and focus on high quality. When such a need arises, PhotoRobot puts our renown “high-speed shooting” aside and returns instead to the oldschool start-stop-capture mode. Then, at every stop, we automatically take several images under different light conditions and combine them to create perfect results. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Software ## High-Speed Product Capture and Advanced Image Processing While most known for high-speed, high-quality [product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography), PhotoRobot also has advanced image processing features for shooting challenging products like reflective or transparent items. These features come from how we utilize lighting, the turntable and its rotation, automated camera positioning and PhotoRobot image processing [software](https://www.photorobot.com/software). With PhotoRobot’s capability to check the position of the photographed object 1000 times per second, it’s easy to capture each image without stopping the rotation of the turntable. Instead, what we do is we freeze the object’s movement with a flash, and this leads to a noticeable and significant reduction in the time for individual photoshoots. In this way, the capturing process usually takes, at most, 20 seconds. Manufacturers who only work with continuous lighting are likely to give you a very long explanation on why you don’t need strobe lighting (which is not always true) and then offer you a *generous* discount, and while this is good to know if you want to save money, you might be doing so at the cost of long-term profitability. ## Powerful algorithms for image assembly No matter if you’re utilizing continuous or strobe lights, PhotoRobot supports both from various manufacturers and provides advanced image processing features with powerful algorithms for image assembly. Today, to provide an example, we will slow down the capturing speed to a speed almost as slow as other techniques so that the capturing speed itself is of no consequence. The difference will be found in the power of the algorithms running in the background. ## What’s the trick, you ask? With these algorithms, a final image is *assembled* from 2 (or more) images captured under different lighting conditions. Automatically controlled lights change their intensity, or can be switched off completely to capture the different images. One of these resulting images is then used only to recognize the shape of the object. Then, the rest of the object’s details are extracted from the other image, which is the one in regular lighting conditions. In this way, the final image from the collected photos is both rich in detail and perfect in shape. Finally, the masking image can be set to transparent as well. This allows you control over object transparency during image post processing (which is also heavily automated, just as clients have come to expect from PhotoRobot solutions). ## Impressively quick image processing It really can be impressive to see in live action, as the first images are processed even before the next angle of the object is captured. This means that in the end, as soon as the machine stops moving, the ready-made output is ready for you on the screen. Moreover, it’s already online and ready to be published via hyperlink! For other challenging items to shoot, there are many other techniques integrated into the PhotoRobot_controls software suite. For more information on these, search our blog for more on: Chromakey-masking or Focus Stacking. ### Photo studio technology for engaging e-commerce What’s more, these advanced image processing features come along with all the other benefits of PhotoRobot solutions. These include capabilities such as Optical Character Recognition ([OCR](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/grocery-product-photography)) of text preset within images, auto cropping, centering and all the other functions that are bundled together into the PhotoRobot_controls software package, with the most expensive license costing less than €5 per user per day. To learn more, feel free to dive into our blog or reach out to our [technical specialists](mailto: sales@photorobot.com) to learn all about our PhotoRobots, automation solutions, and advanced image processing features. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/boost-conversion-rates-in-e-commerce # SECTION: blog > boost-conversion-rates-in-e-commerce # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-09-01 --- # How to Boost Conversion Rates in E-Commerce Learning how to boost conversion rates in e-commerce with your product photography is critical to success, especially when trying to increase sales for a small or newer webshop. Ultimately, you need to convince potential customers to purchase a product without them seeing it in person or holding it in hand. It’s a tall order, and while increased website traffic might be a good starting point, one of the most effective ways to boost e-commerce conversion rates is through your product visuals. Read on to learn the 6 safe practices to boost your online store’s conversion rates with your product photography. - Categories: Product Photography ## It's simple: Impressive Product Visuals Boost Conversions In e-commerce, conversion rates measure success and boosting these are top priority. They report the proportion of visitors who, in this case, visit a webshop or online marketplace and then go on to make a purchase. When you boost conversion rates, what you ultimately do is increase turnover and generate higher revenue for the webshop. **Obviously, one consideration is in website traffic, SEO, and visibility in general.** Websites need to generate clicks, on-page time, organic traffic, and, ultimately, sales. Unfortunately, even with the best SEO practices, a 7% increase in traffic **does not** amount to a 7% increase in conversion rate. This is where product visuals come into play. The fierce competition between today’s webshops, e-commerce vendors, and, especially the product photography studios, means that you need impressive product visuals to truly stand out in the crowd. Great product visuals also serve to generate more website traffic, as well as on-page time and higher SEO value. More importantly, however, visually rich product content inspires greater buyer’s confidence in potential customers when browsing your online products. This is where bringing products to life matters, and there are a number of strategies employed by webshops and online retailers. From pure white background [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) to [360 spin photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), [3D product modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce), and [360 product video](https://www.photorobot.com/output-type/360-product-video), many of the leading retailers and product photography studios offer it all. Read on to learn more about what to consider when doing any or all of the above to boost conversion rates for your online products or e-commerce webshops. ### Boost conversion rates with alternative and detailed visual angles **It's crucial not to leave any room for imagination.** This is why [studio automation solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation) like PhotoRobot enable extremely high-speed image capture and post-processing of product photos from every angle. After all, detail and variety both satisfy curiosity, and, in this regard, you want those viewing your online products to be able to effectively visualize what you're selling. If one detail in particular stands in between the shopper and them feeling confident in their purchase, provide them with that detail! Give them more angles to look at, various distances to view the product from, and offer as many shots as possible to satisfy the shopper’s curiosity. They might be looking for shoes with a certain tread or with a very specific length or feature, and if they can’t easily find it, they are very likely to look elsewhere. **More importantly, when you offer shoppers a variety of product photos to consider, it is a display of professionalism on your part.** It will reassure shoppers when they have doubts, boost their confidence in your online products, and, potentially, boost your ecommerce shop’s conversion rates in the process. ### Value high quality product content over quantity product content **And while you do want quantity with product photos, you should never sacrifice quality.** Blurry photos will not sell products. Nor will any images that aren’t representative enough of what you’re trying to sell. Remember, you’re trying to instill confidence in online shoppers. Ergonomic studies show that images attract viewer attention more than any other component of websites, but they can also negatively impact viewership, SEO, and conversion rates when they are not up to today’s standards in quality. Widely used stock photos are not enough to successfully promote your brand. Aim for quality and consistency above all else with your product visuals to start boosting conversion rates. ### Promote product images with meticulous attention to detail **When displaying images on a webpage, there are a lot of important micro-tasks to consider.** All of these revolve around effective SEO practices and general page design, and involve tasks like image optimization for page-load time, including a variety of images, as well as objectives like adding captions to product photos for more information or for the visually impaired. Adding captions to product photos, for example, not only provides shoppers with an additional layer of information for products, it also shows that you pay close attention to detail on your website and inspires more buyer’s confidence in shoppers. On the other hand, when adding captions, you also need to consider the length of the caption and how it appears on the web page in general so that it is not a distraction. If descriptions are too long or seem unnecessary to the viewer, they might not highlight your product images and attention to detail as they otherwise should. ### Consider product photo image projection The next consideration for boosting ecommerce conversion rates with your product photography is how you project your images. **The background matters just as much as the page’s theme and appeal to online shoppers, so always choose a background that highlights the products on-page**. Shoppers need to be able to imagine holding the product in their hand, spinning it around and viewing it from various angles, and this should be a natural experience set on a background that complements the shopper’s experience on your webpage. A standard approach is using a white background for better contrast control and enhancement of products, but there are various other background styles to experiment with to enrich your online product experience. Sometimes you might even want to employ real people into your photographs, particularly on homepages, to add even more context for visitors. ### Utilize rich zoom capabilities to boost conversion rates The next conversion tool worth consideration is deep, detail-rich zoom capabilities for product photos. This returns to the idea of satisfying your shoppers’ curiosity while also leaving nothing to the imagination. **The power of zoom is often underutilized by webshops and online vendors, but it provides a strong competitive advantage for boosting buyer’s confidence and triggering purchases.** After all, the more zoom features you have with product images, the more time viewers stay on your page and, ultimately, the more ranking your webpage will have when tracked by algorithms. This means you should spend just as much time optimizing the experience on your webpage as you do with the product imagery. When you give page viewers more to interact with, they’re more likely to make purchases, and your page will be more likely to attract more visitors. ### Enrich the product experience with 360° spin photography, product videos, or 3D models Finally, consider enriching your product experience and boosting conversion rates even further with 360° spin photography, product videos, or 3D models. **Give shoppers a completely immersive, interactive experience than with 3D product visuals.** Then, you can even add captions or a fact sheet to these visuals, further extending the on-page time of visitors on your webpage. This is a very effective method to not only keep viewers’ attention but to also boost your ecommerce conversion rates over the long-term. And while this might seem out of reach, expensive, or even too complicated to begin with, it doesn’t have to be. With the technology of today, there is a wide range of equipment available for producing rich product visuals, from still shots with deep fields of zoom to 360 degree photos and 3D models, all at a reasonable cost and within reach for webshops and product photography studios. There is also [robotic-process, automation technology and hardware](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-photography-creativity-and-robotic-process-automation), like what we here at PhotoRobot specialize in and offer to help studios meet their photography needs. If you’d like to learn more or even set up a free consultation with one of our support specialists, reach out to us today or feel free to browse our website for more information. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation-solutions-for-ecommerce # SECTION: blog > studio-automation-solutions-for-ecommerce # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-27 --- # Studio Automation Solutions for E-Commerce Product Photography Studio automation is a crucial component to realizing success in e-commerce product photography in 2020. Automation solutions allow studios to better utilize their teams’ time, to increase throughput, and, ultimately, to reduce overall costs. Thankfully, studio automation for product photography is becoming not only more advanced but also more affordable and accessible to a wider audience. Read on for all the reasons why online sellers, vendors, and photography studios in 2020 are embracing studio automation for e-commerce product photography. - Categories: Product Photography ## How E-commerce Product Photography Studios Benefit from Automation [Studio automation solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/studio-automation) for e-commerce exist to save companies valuable time, energy, and money with their product photography. No matter the scale of the operation, whether it’s through external vendors for a small e-commerce shop or an in-house industrial scale photoshoot, every talented studio or e-commerce manager has 3 primary objectives. 1. **Speed and timeliness.** Commission deadlines must be met, no matter the time constraints or the demands of the customer. 2. **Excellent content.** This is especially true in product photography for e-commerce. High-quality, visually rich content not only sells products, it’s also what clients and consumers expect and demand. 3. **Significant cost savings.** Managers should always be looking for ways to reduce expenses, whether it’s on studio equipment, labor hours, processing and distribution or in-house practices. With the right photography [studio setup](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography), it’s possible to effectively reach all of these goals. However, if working with the same old setup, a limited budget, the same amount of team members and the same amount of hours, this is when realizing all 3 goals becomes more difficult for project managers. No matter how much effort the manager puts into the traditional studio, they often have to choose to focus on 2 of these 3 goals rather than having it all. This is where studio automation comes into play. Automation technology for [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) has not only come a long way in recent years, it has become much more affordable and accessible, even for traditional studios on limited budgets. At PhotoRobot, we develop custom solutions for [360-degree product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) and projects of any size. Our [software-driven photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) help companies realize effective studio automation, increase throughput, reduce costs, and create consistent, visually-rich product content. Read on to learn more about studio automation, today’s studio automation solutions, and the benefits to automating your product photography studio. ### E-commerce product photography companies embrace automation With today’s studio automation technology, product photography studios can get the best of both worlds. They can see increased product throughput, reduce photography costs, and, with the right equipment, increase image accuracy, improve brand consistency and ultimately increase customer satisfaction. US-based **Snap36** (now [1WorldSync](https://1worldsync.com/platform/product-photography/360-degree/)), for example, is a 360 degree and 3D modeling product photography company who has not only realized the efficiency of studio automation solutions but also now helps other e-commerce stores and distributors to deliver content around the globe. They specialize in cost-effective, high-volume photography services and solutions for e-commerce, and their studio is outfitted with a range of PhotoRobot equipment. One cost-effective solution they put to use in the photography studio is [PhotoRobot’s Robotic Arm](https://snap36.com/360-gallery/robotic-arm/), a simple solution for 360 degree photography or [eCommerce 3D modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). This robot has automated lift systems to manage the height of the camera for products of varying sizes, as well as PhotoRobot control software to help with controlling spin, lighting, camera triggering, and even automating repeatable tasks. This product photography studio automation solution is only one among numerous PhotoRobot solutions Snap36 used to provide clients with high-quality, consistent imagery, while increasing overall workflow and reducing costs. ### The challenges to running any product photography studio With any product photography studio, the challenges are often numerous. There are tedious, routine tasks that can be time-consuming for the team, from the project managers to the photographers. There’s also the time needed for setting the photography scene, prepping products, doing photoshoots, or exchanging one product for the next. Then, there’s all the work that goes into image post production and finally distribution. ### The answer: Product Photography Studio Automation The amount of tasks that goes into capturing great product photos and then distributing them online or putting them into print can be daunting, but thankfully studio automation solutions exist to make studios more efficient and to improve overall workflow, especially in regards to routine tasks. While companies do need to invest something to get started, they also need to consider the long-term goals and benefits to studio automation. Sometimes, all it requires is a handful of tools, or, simply, the right tool to meet the studio’s needs. These tools are like a long-term investment in the studio, one that potentially pays for itself and more over time. Ultimately, the benefits to studio automation revolve around saving time, energy, and money. Photographers can benefit from having more time for photoshoots and tasks not only more suited to their creative skillset but also which they enjoy spending their time on. Managers will benefit from increased product throughput, more products online and in print, and ultimately more sales. **The bottom line: Studio automation allows studios to get more product photos online faster, easier, and at reduced costs. Moreover, it is a way to protect existing investments like still and spin photography, as studio automation paves the way for industrial-scale 3D modeling for augmented and virtual reality showcases.** ### Studio automation to assist your photography team, not to replace them Studio automation isn’t about replacing workers. Rather, it involves saving workers’ time, energy, and effort for tasks more suitable to their skillset. Why force a photographer to do work that’s better handed off to their mechanical assistant? In the end, the goal of product photography studio automation is to provide teams with tools they need to do their jobs more efficiently. Once expensive, automation solutions are now becoming easier than ever to access, even for smaller scale product photography studios. Large industrial-scale operations are already on board, so the real question is why wait when you can save time and resources with automation. Studio automation can not only do wonders for your staff but can also improve workflow and business overall. If you’d like to learn more or even begin the transition to product photography studio automation, feel free to check out PhotoRobot hardware and software solutions, or even reach out to us for a free consultation with our specialist technicians. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table # SECTION: blog > photorobots-centerless-table # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-25 --- # PhotoRobot's Centerless Table, a Motorized Photography Turntable Thanks to control software and a unique lighting system, PhotoRobot’s CENTERLESS TABLE represents a flagship in the evolution of automated product photography. Read on with us to learn all about this universal solution for capturing shadow-free product photos on an industrial-scale. - Categories: Robots ## Discover the PhotoRobot Centerless Table Advantage PhotoRobot’s [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) is designed to achieve perfect product photography with small, large, transparent, glossy, light or dark objects. Capture [360 & 3D images](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) or stills of anything from the size of a small ring to a suitcase. Simply place items on the turning glass plate and use our automated control & [photo editing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) to manage everything else. Take the [Virtual Tour of PhotoRobot's Centerless Table](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/centerless-table-design-dynamics) to discover its integration in the photo studio. The photographed object is lit up from the back and the bottom, thanks to two important features: the glass plate and the diffusion background. With these solutions, you no longer need to find a compromise between quality and efficiency. Our control software coupled with a unique lighting system allows you to handle high-volume, industrial-scale photoshoots easily, quickly and with reliable and consistent output. ## The Centerless Table’s glass plate The glass plate is designed for maximum precision of movement. It is 1300 mm wide and has a load capacity up to 40 kilograms. Made with tempered, highly transparent optical glass, the plate fits within the wheel system, with two electric motors providing maximum precision and movement dynamics. Calibration is automated and monitored by a sensor, and thanks to immediate, independent readings of the absolute position, corrections are made at each stop. In the past, a suction pad with a magnet achieved this calibration in one turn, but now a tiny notch at the edge of the plate accomplishes the same. An optical reading of the small cut on the edge is enough, and this reading can be automated and performed by the click of a mouse when calibration is required before usage, or the reading can be running in the background during regular operation. ## A unique diffusion background The diffusion background with the bottom-reflective section is integrated for optimal translucence, even at the top-view camera positions. The shading panels at the sides and bottom of the construction prevent any reflections on the object. Taking it a step further, there are also hedgehog holders to save space and to make the studio a safe and comfortable environment. No more tripods and cables to stumble over! ## Software control of lights The lights, along with the lasers, cameras and plate movement, are all software controlled. You can quickly and easily adjust the intensity and take a test shot. Check, and adjust again -- all in a few touches of a button and from the comfort of your computer. ## No clipping necessary Another feature of this solution is that the combination of the optical glass plate and the diffusion background allows you to naturally create quality photographs on a pure white background. No more clipping required in post processing! This provides you with more time to spend on the photography itself and photographing additional products. ## Design for industrial use The construction as a whole is made for industrial usage. The unique lighting system, and many details, such as mounting spots for additional accessories, make working with the Centerless Table highly productive. It is durable, versatile, and, above all, can be an economical addition to just about any studio workspace. ## For more 3D product photography solutions The Centerless Tables is just one of the many product photography solutions we produce at PhotoRobot. Our aim is to revolutionize automation in product photography, and to recommend the best tools for any job, studio or project from small to industrial-scale operations. Whether you cater to ecommerce retailers, websites and online marketplaces, or you run your own and are looking for more photography equipment, PhotoRobot specialists are ready to consult with you today on what tools we can provide for your work. Don’t hesitate to reach out today for a free consultation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-degree-product-photography-amazon # SECTION: blog > 360-degree-product-photography-amazon # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-20 --- # A Quick Guide to 360 Product Photography for Amazon With the launch of Amazon 360, vendors on this online marketplace can now utilize spin photos to boost product listings. Amazon aims to increase conversion rates through enriched visuals, and there are several solutions that exist to produce 360-degree photos that meet their image requirements. In this guide, we’ll look at the benefits of using Amazon 360, how to get started, and, most importantly, simple and cost-effective solutions to drive sales and improve conversion rates on online marketplaces with 360-degree photography. - Categories: Product Photography ## 360-Degree Photography and Amazon: The numbers Vendors around the globe are using Amazon 360 to showcase their product content to online shoppers through visually-rich [360 degree product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). One of the world’s largest e-commerce retailers, Amazon accounted for nearly [$469.822B in sales in 2021](https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/AMZN/amazon/revenue), and has become one of the first places where consumers begin their shopping. Luxury jewellery brands, car manufacturers, and large online sellers are making the most of this platform and, especially, the potential of spin visuals. Amazon first introduced 360-degree imagery in 2018, starting slow with a limited number of select retailers. After an initial 60-day pilot, the results were promising, showing higher conversion rates across all of the select retailers, and Amazon began launching this feature across its platform. Since then, the company has rolled out this capability to millions of online sellers as a standard feature for a range of product categories. These include products like automotives, cameras, home and home improvement, furniture, lawn and garden, the kitchen, jewelry, sports and outdoors and more. ### Photography solutions for creating visually rich, in-house product imagery The goal for Amazon is to increase conversion rates by enhancing product imagery. For retailers who want to utilize this feature, this means finding cost-effective solutions to produce [eCommerce photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) that meets Amazon product image requirements. Thankfully, there are several solutions available for retailers, from external service providers to suppliers of studio equipment for in-house product photography. At PhotoRobot, we design [3D product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) to fit any studio or workspace, and to make it not only easy to manage and automate photoshoots but also to instantly upload imagery to e-commerce websites or online marketplaces like Amazon or Shopify. [PhotoRobot solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) exist for any product large or small, from the size of an earring or the intricacy of a microchip to automotives and heavy-duty warehouse equipment. Whether it’s for a home-owned retailer website or an industrial-scale photography studio, PhotoRobot hardware and software provides sellers with tools to create consistent product photos no matter if there is an amateur or a professional photographer at the controls. ### Basic equipment needs to create in-house 360° animations 360° animations are an assortment of JPEG or PNG format images, ranging from 24 to 1024 photos. This assortment of images is often created by a complete 360° rotation and image capture of a product which is positioned on a turntable. Take for example PhotoRobot’s [TURNTABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable) or the [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobots-centerless-table). Depending on the size and weight of the object you need to shoot, you can use either of these robots to find the perfect center of an object and capture photographs in sync with the rotation of the turntable. Software controls make it easy to control the shooting, and it is also the software that assembles all image files to generate the resulting 360° animation in HTML5 format. This format makes these visuals readable across all types of media, and is all you need to distribute your in-house animations to your e-commerce website or to online marketplaces like Amazon. ### Publishing 360° imagery onto an online marketplace After an HTML5 file is created, it is then hosted on an FTP server or on the cloud. From here, an integration link is extracted, and a simple copy and paste of the code onto your website immediately creates and displays the animation. It’s even possible to utilize PhotoRobot software to automate repeatable tasks and set up a workflow for future projects. You can capture photos of products while simultaneously automating the creation of your 360° imagery and uploading it to your website. ## The benefits of using 360 degree product photography on Amazon ### Creating interactive product experiences with Amazon 360 One of the main obstacles to remote sales is establishing buyer’s trust with your online shoppers. These shoppers want a hands-on experience, so your product photos should come as close as possible to replicating the real-life, in-store shopping experience. Your 360 degree photography should not only allow shoppers to spin a product as if it were in their own hands, the photos should also provide a deep level of zoom so shoppers can inspect all the minute details of your product. You also want product imagery to stand out among competing images online, and likewise to generate valuable SEO for your website. In this regard, the richer the product experience, the better. When shoppers have the freedom to interact with the product online just as they would in the shop, they will have the confidence that they are making the right decision at the moment of purchase. ### Establishing brand consistency with Amazon 360 By providing the highest quality product imagery online, brands build trust by showing that they strive to provide shoppers the best possible product experience. When this product experience is consistent across all platforms, from retailer websites to online marketplaces like Amazon and Shopify, retailers generate more awareness and customer loyalty. Shoppers become more likely to not only trust the brand but also to purchase the products. Ultimately, what brands must demonstrate is that they are building and utilizing consistent and scalable content creation processes from online distributors, to retailer websites and major online marketplaces. ## Getting set up on Amazon 360 ### Spin photography image requirements on Amazon At the moment, in order to use spin animations on product images on Amazon, you must be recognized as an Amazon Vendor. While in the future Amazon does intend to allow third-party sellers to use the spin feature, for now these sellers must wait. For vendors, Amazon has guidelines on their [product image requirements](https://www.amazon.com/gp/help/customer/display.html?nodeId=200109520): - TIFF (.tif/.tiff), JPEG (.jpeg/.jpg), GIF (.gif) and PNG (.png) format - Image pixel dimensions of at least 1000 or larger in either height or width preferred - sRGB or CMYK color mode - File names must consist of the product identifier (Amazon ASIN, 13-digit ISBN, EAN, JAN, or UPC) followed by a period and the appropriate file extension (Example: B000123456.jpg or 0237425673485.tif) ### What to monitor to measure success Unfortunately, with Amazon, it isn’t easy to track analytics, numbers or percentages without third-party tools. You won’t be able to see your sales lifts, conversion rates, or anything directly connected with Amazon sales. However, there are other methods for vendors to measure performance metrics when spin imagery goes online. 1. **Monitor any increase or decrease in sales or conversion rates** since the spin images went live. 2. **Observe product rankings on Amazon** both before and after you publish your product images online. 3. **Seek out an agency for assistance** with your Amazon strategy and data management. The goal on Amazon is to reach high rankings for your products, and you can’t do that without constantly enhancing your product content. Ultimately, the better and more consistent the content, the higher Amazon ranking and the higher sales. ## Advantages to Amazon 360 for online sellers ### Enriching mobile product experiences There can be no doubt that ecommerce has seen a massive boom, with ecommerce revenue representing 10.7% of total U.S. retail sales in 2020, and 47% of that representing transactions in ecommerce. That is 5% of all U.S. retail sales transacted online and a contributing factor to why Amazon recently surpassed Walmart as the world’s largest retailer. As these sales processes shift from in-person to desktop to mobile, digital presentation of products is becoming increasingly and rapidly more important for brands to succeed online. And for Amazon, this means ensuring their app and mobile platforms provide as much value to shoppers as desktop versions, while also continuing to improve the user experience overall. One way Amazon is considering doing this is by means of product video search ads, hoping to make informational videos to help shoppers make purchases with confidence. For some vendors, this means spending lots of money on video production, but it doesn’t have to be that way -- especially with Amazon 360 and spin photography. It can be not only cost-effective but also provide just as much valuable information to shoppers when using spin rather than video, all the while enriching your mobile product experience. ### Enhanced image search visibility The next advantage to using spin photography to showcase your products on Amazon is in the retailer’s visual browsing features such as “Scout search”. In this feature, users can rank product images with a thumbs-up or a thumbs-down, and when the user likes a certain product, Amazon will show them a range of similar products. The more visually-rich and informative your product imagery is, the more likely your product photos will be recommended to shoppers using image search features. This is where 3D images, spin photography, and 360° photos can help you attain more visibility and the potential to generate more sales. ### Driving sales and conversion rates Finally, with 360-degree imagery now the most influential category of product content when accounting for sales and conversion rates, you have yet another reason to take advantage of Amazon 360. With interactive product experiences providing spin and zoom capabilities, any vendor on Amazon can start boosting their product listings today. Spin imagery will soon become the standard on online marketplaces, and as sales processes shift even more towards mobile platforms, vendors will need to make the necessary steps to ensure their product experiences are accordingly scalable across all devices and platforms where they sell their products. The competition is now in imagery optimization, and there’s no better way to increase conversion rates, boost customer satisfaction, and reduce overall returns on Amazon than with 360° spin photography. ### To learn more about in-house solutions and PhotoRobot Contact us today to receive a free consultation with our support technicians and learn how PhotoRobot can help you automate, simplify, and perfect your product photography, whether it’s for 360° modeling, 360° photography, or still images. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/flexible-tools-for-e-commerce-product-photography # SECTION: blog > flexible-tools-for-e-commerce-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-18 --- # PhotoRobot: Flexible Tools for E-commerce Product Photography Success in ecommerce and with online marketplaces all revolves around customer confidence, and one way marketplaces establish this trust is through high-quality, visually rich product content. The more realistically you can replicate the in-store shopping experience, the more likely shoppers are to have confidence in their purchasing, to make more purchases, and to ultimately return less products. And with all the competition among online marketplaces, shoppers not only expect detail-rich product imagery, they often demand it before they will even consider making a purchase. - Categories: About PhotoRobot ## Higher Engagement, Stronger eCommerce Visuals In [eCommerce product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography), your brand's imagery needs to be picture-perfect to attract online shoppers and drive more sales. Shoppers expect visually rich, high-resolution images that they can view from numerous angles and zooms, all while staying in clear focus. When a marketplace provides this, the sellers are more likely to generate higher revenue and also to reduce overall returns. Customers will have more confidence in their purchases as well as in the marketplace, and they’ll ultimately be more likely to become repeat customers. At PhotoRobot, our goal is to provide studios with [product imagery tools](https://www.photorobot.com/software) and solutions not only to produce consistent, high-quality photos but also to save time and costs on photoshoots, image post processing, and data storage and management. ## Product imagery from the studio to the customer to sales No matter the size of the project, PhotoRobot’s catalogue of hardware, software, and data management tools is designed to help photographers capture the perfect still shots, [360 degree product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), and [photogrammetry 3D models](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce) of products of any size in record time. We believe the future of e-commerce product photography is in tools that will cut costs and save time on more routine tasks like file management and content delivery. When you can do this, you provide photographers with more time to focus on what they love -- the more creative elements of the photoshoot, from lighting to product positioning and setting the ideal scene. Our tools are not only designed for professional photographers either. Even “amateur” photographers can benefit from PhotoRobot solutions, as our software allows for category presets that can be applied to a wide range of product photoshoots. These presets allow the photographer to automate repeatable tasks, from triggering camera shutters and strobe lighting to controlling table rotation and more, all to help photographers produce consistent high-quality photos with items of similar size, shape, and transparency. This is even true for 360 degree photography and 3D modeling, which, thanks to developments in automation technology, have never been easier or more affordable to master. ## 360 Degree Photography Solutions With 360 degree photography and 3D modeling for ecommerce, the aim is clear: give customers more, sell more. Online shoppers of today want that in-store shopping experience. They want to imagine holding a product in their hands, spinning it around, and viewing it from various angles before making a purchase. When an online marketplace can provide this, not only do shoppers feel more confidence in their purchases but they are also less likely to return products, ultimately generating [higher revenue for the marketplace](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/content-creation-and-marketing-2021). 360 degree photos and 3D spin models are as realistic as you can get in a digital format, allowing you to showcase products from all angles and zooms in a fun and interactive way. Shoppers will be able to zoom into amazing detail and spin products any way they want, just as they would if shopping in person. Again, give more, sell more. ## Discover more on automated eCommerce product photography It’s never been easier to produce high-volume, high-quality product photos. At PhotoRobot, our support specialists are ready to help equip any sized studio with the equipment they need for the job. We have detailed documentation for IT teams and ready support to ensure the zero-friction integration of PhotoRobot solutions into your studio. Reach out to us to find out how you can shoot more and work less. Our mission is to help you improve your studio workflow and meet your targets quicker and easier, all thanks to PhotoRobot hardware and automation software. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear # SECTION: blog > mastering-product-photography-shoes-and-footwear # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-18 --- # Mastering Product Photography: Shoes and Footwear When capturing product photography with footwear, it’s crucial that your image showcases the product in every miniscule detail -- from the quality of the material to the design of the shoe tread. The more you can improve your digital customer experience, the more likely you are to increase sales and reduce returns overall. This is where having a suitable product photography kit for footwear and knowing how to use it comes into play. Dive into this guide to learn about how to improve your footwear photography with PhotoRobot kits and automation software. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## Getting Started: the Best Photography Kit for Footwear Improving your footwear product photography all begins with the right product photography kit for the job. This is especially true if capturing [360 degree product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), but also remains vital if only capturing photos from a given set of angles. Ultimately, what you are trying to create is an image as rich in detail as the product would be in the customer’s hands during the in-store shopping experience. At PhotoRobot, we strive to offer state-of-the-art [3D product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) for e-commerce stores, websites, and distributor and retailer channels. Our robust and versatile hardware, coupled with our software for automation and post-processing provide studios with the tools photographers need for high-volume, high-quality product photo shoots -- no matter the size of the product or the company. Read on to learn more about PhotoRobot’s approach to footwear and the photography equipment we use for the job. ## Components of the 360 degree footwear photography kit The PhotoRobot 360 degree product photography kit for footwear consists of industry-leading photography equipment, PhotoRobot hardware, and a single or multi-camera setup for spin photography. In our footwear kit, the [MULTICAM BOW](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) has three high resolution Canon cameras mounted to it, all suspended in an arch over the [NARROW GLASS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table). The MULTICAM can support up to 13 cameras, but for shooting shoes and footwear, 3 cameras does the job well. The pinpoint triggering of the cameras and the strobes, along with the rotating table allow precise image capturing in short time. A single rotation, for example, allows photographers to capture 24 images around, or every 15 degrees, and, for footwear, this provides 72 angles of the shoe. The system also captures 3 images at every stop (or more should you decide to utilize more cameras), so there is no need to repeat rotations each time the cameras move over the product. ## Advantages of PhotoRobot-powered footwear photography With perfect product photography becoming the industry standard, especially with footwear, to truly compete in today’s market it’s crucial to produce product photos that not only stand out but also create the in-store experience online shoppers are seeking. Success in e-commerce marketplaces revolves around customer trust, and to win this trust perfect product photography is key. Online shoppers want to view products in real detail, from various angles and zoom, and all at high quality resolution. When a marketplace can execute this and provide customers with flawless, visually-rich product experiences, not only does trust increase but it also builds brand loyalty, and increases conversions and revenue. ## Equipment and accessories to improve footwear photography ## PhotoRobot’s MULTICAM hardware The [MULTICAM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) is PhotoRobot’s solution for capturing multiple overhead camera angles in a single rotation of the accompanying Narrow Glass Table. Consisting of a structural arch or bow that extends outwards from the narrow glass table to the upper structure, this apparatus can hold multiple cameras that can be installed in various angles in 7 different 5 degree increments, from 0 to 90 degrees. This setup can raise or lower according to the product’s height at the command of the software. This software allows photographers command of the workstation, as well as [image capture](https://www.photorobot.com/manuals/capturing-images), presets, image reporting and management, and tools for quick post-processing. Overall, with these tools, production time is cut by up to two thirds due to the extreme speeds at which you can accomplish routine tasks -- providing photographers more time to set the perfect scene, brush up the entire footwear setup or shoot more products. ## Strobe lighting and the right softbox The next component to getting the best footwear product photos is in the lighting and softboxes. Especially with 360 degree photography, broncolor [Siros S](https://www.broncolor.swiss/broncolor/products/monolights/showproducts/siros-s/) strobes are known to produce consistent color accuracy and overall output. By producing a lot of light, these strobes can keep every shot in focus, even with the deep depth of field which is necessary when producing spin photography. Combine this lighting with the legendary Chimera Softboxes, and light is evenly distributed across products and all details are distinct and in focus for spin presentation. ## Camera synchronization The next tool in the footwear kit is the ***camera synchronization box*** *.* This is paired with the MULTICAM in order to command the cameras to trigger precisely when the strobes fire. With the PhotoRobot web interface, photographers can control all the cameras with *camera-specific millisecond adjustable sliders*. These sliders provide users accurate and consistent control over when shutters will open and in what order to capture photos in the illuminated during the flash duration. ## The right cameras for the job One of our go-to cameras for shooting shoes and footwear in the studio is the Canon 5D IV. It is well-renowned for its durability and its 30-megapixel CMOS sensor, and provides high quality photos with deep zoom capacity. Its zoom lens at 24-105 is also perfect for making quick adjustments in the studio based on the size, shape, and overall design of the shoes and footwear. ## PhotoRobot’s Narrow Glass Table PhotoRobot’s **NARROW GLASS TABLE** is fully configurable, with many options to choose from to control table rotation and the amount of images captured in every spin. You can, for example, designate the table to capture 24 images around, or at every 15 degrees, and it’ll do that and more in under one minute, including uploading imagery to the cloud, image postprocessing and even automated publishing directly to the web! The tempered glass plate is 850mm, rotates 360 degrees, and is operated by a stepper motor controlled by a computer. This, together with an encoder wheel which is capable of reading back the glass’ position for accurate and fast movement. ## Considerations before installation and set up ### Area Before starting any product photography operation, it’s important you have the space for the job. There needs to be areas for receiving products, vetting, temporary storage, and, then, there needs to be space for product preparation and photography workstations. How well this space is organized greatly impacts [product photography studio workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio), and, ultimately, efficiency, throughput capacity, and revenue. Then, with 360 product photography or heavy equipment, there are extra concerns. There needs to be solid, level floors, ideally concrete for the heavy machinery. There also needs to be enough space allocated to ensure systems operate smoothly and maintain optimum calibrations. ### Electricity With all of the photography equipment, cameras, workstations and computers, a photography studio can consume a lot of energy. This is why, before beginning any photography operation, all circuity should be considered and chosen to enable day-to-day activities without risk of complication. Thankfully however, with modern solutions, a single workstation can operate smoothly on a regular 230V / 16A socket (and with PhotoRobot units also switchable to 115 / 230V), meaning that energy consumption can be reduced to lower than that of an electric kettle. Then, when you add more robots to the studio, energy can be distributed in phases and with other tricks to keep consumption to a minimum. ### Climate When choosing a warehouse or studio space, it’s important to consider the products being photographed. While some products can be shot in a dusty warehouse, other more sensitive products need to be in a pristine, clean and climate-controlled environment. Then, there’s also the issue that hot environments can damage not only electronics but also lighting equipment, so, overall, it is always best practice to find an environment suitable for your specific, long-term photography operations. ### Logistics The next consideration for studio workflow is proximity of product storage to the photography stations. Ideally, you want to have the products as close to the photography stations as possible, making it easy to transport them to and from each photo shoot. If the products are off-location, time is lost in packing and shipping, so it’s always best to consider the distance from your product to the photographers. Also related, consider devising a sound sorting strategy for your products. When effectively sorted, similar setups can be used for entire groups of objects, ultimately reducing overall production time. You can also use trolleys with castors to feed machines, or other tools to help save time transporting your products from storage to the workstation. ### Network accessibility With the PhotoRobot footwear kit, you’ll also need network accessibility so the photographer’s computer can communicate with the cameras. This is done through traditional computer networks or LAN connectability, and allows for teams to easily install and manage multiple systems. Also, with internet access and use of the proper network protocols, the units can find and install firmware updates as well as allow the workflow tool to distribute final product images. ## Accelerating footwear product photography with PhotoRobot When selling anything online, the product showcase matters. This is especially true with shoes and footwear, as the best way to inform shoppers about the product is through photography. The stronger your images, the more likely they are to sell shoes! At PhotoRobot, our solutions are designed to complement any studio warehouse, large or small, or any product photography project. With versatile hardware and equipment capable of fitting just about any space, and PhotoRobot automation software, we strive to deliver customizable, plug-and-play solutions to reduce overall production time, increase throughput, and to ultimately generate more sales for online sellers and marketplaces. To learn more about our process, our robots, and our software, reach out to us today for a free consultation with the team. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/robots-for-quick-and-easy-assembly # SECTION: blog > robots-for-quick-and-easy-assembly # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-18 --- # PhotoRobot: Robots Designed for Quick and Easy Assembly At PhotoRobot, our versatile robots are designed, packaged, and delivered for quick and easy assembly in any product photography studio, workspace or warehouse. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Robots ## Assembling Photography Robots Doesn't Get Easier In a previous post on [PhotoRobot Packaging and Distribution](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/about-photorobot-packaging-and-distribution), we showed you how much consideration goes into dispatching our robots worldwide. In this post, we’ll demonstrate how to quickly and easily assemble our robots in your workspace, looking specifically at how to set up PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform and Robotic Arm. While our robots aren’t smart enough to assemble themselves *yet*, they are relatively simple to build by hand and can be installed in any studio in short time. Read on to learn more about PhotoRobot’s Turning Platform, the Robotic Arm, and to find a video demonstrating how quickly these product photography solutions can be fitted into any studio. ## The Turning Platform for 360-degree product photography PhotoRobot’s [Turning Platform](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turning-platform) is a universal turntable built to rotate both light and heavy objects while your cameras capture photos from every angle. The turntable is designed and supplemented with an extensive range of accessories so that you can use a single device to capture the widest possible selection of products -- from small to large, and light to heavy -- for use in small online stores or industrial-sized plants. The Turning Platform is well-suited for any task, with a load capacity of 1500 kg (3307 lb) and a plate diameter of up to 280 cm (9.2 ft) or with customizable accessories up to 4 m. The turntable has zero-clearance friction and high torque to ensure exceptional performance regardless of whether you are taking photos of a lawn chair or a garden tractor. Combine the Turning Platform with the Robotic Arm, and you have the ideal, compact workstation for producing 3D spin photography of large products. If you want to take it a step further, you can even use the Turning platform in conjunction with PhotoRobot’s [Virtual Catwalk](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/catwalk), transforming any studio into an infinite catwalk for shooting live models. ## The Robotic Camera Arm Replicate the in-store shopping experience and welcome online shoppers to a visually-rich 3D world with PhotoRobot’s [Robotic Camera Arm](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/robotic-arm). Easy to assemble and use in combination with the Turning Platform, the Robotic Arm is designed to add the third dimension to your product photography and present objects in all angles, both as a whole and in detailed view. The Robotic Arm’s robust construction, precise movement, and two arm sizes allow you to capture objects of many sizes. Combine the arm with the Centerless Table or the Turning Platform, and you have the ability to simultaneously rotate objects and move the arm, creating a realistic 3D display of the photographed object. As the Robotic Arm does not oscillate, the camera moves along a precise trajectory, and its large mounting range provides variability in your choice of tripod heads and cameras. Its docking station allows for quick set-up on compatible devices, and its retractable wheels make it easy to transport between stations within the studio. ## Assembling the Turning Platform and Robotic Arm in the studio To demonstrate just how quick and easy it is to assemble our robots in the studio, have a look at this short time-lapse video by our former distributor in the US, **Snap36** (now [1WorldSync](https://1worldsync.com/platform/product-photography/360-degree/)), included below. In the video, you can watch a team of two equipping their studio with the Turning Platform and the Robotic Arm. In less than an hour, this small team’s workstation is ready for the photoshoot. All it takes is some simple construction on the table and then positioning the Robotic Arm. After construction, your studio is now equipped to produce consistent and powerful product imagery, spin photography, or 3D models of any objects you can fit on the turntable. These solutions are ideal for product photography studios large or small, can fit into just about any space no matter how limited, and are designed for both lower and higher volume photo shooting. ### For professional product photography solutions For more information, contact us at PhotoRobot for a free consultation to learn how our product photography solutions can be seamlessly integrated into any studio or workspace. Our aim is to provide powerful and flexible tools for any photography operation, from small-scale online stores to large-scale industrial warehouses and plants. We know that the efficiency of every studio revolves around many moving parts, and we strive to tailor each of our orders around the needs of our clients. Reach out to one of our support professionals today to learn more! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio # SECTION: blog > how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-13 --- # How to Improve Workflow in a Product Photography Studio The success of any product photography studio revolves around many moving parts to improve efficiency, throughput and overall workflow. Every studio should be tailored to the needs of the client and should take into account the volume of media content, the types and sizes of objects, as well as any specific demands the studio teams and photographers may have. In this guide, we’ll examine the ideal studio setup and suggest how to improve product photography workflow. - Categories: Product Photography ## Efficient workflow in product photography studios [360 / 3D product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) studios consist of numerous workstations, and overall workflow is dependent on how well all of these moving pieces operate together. Products need to be checked in, vetted and categorized, and later prepared for delivery to the correct photographer’s workstation. Along with the product photography, there is also data recording, image post-processing, management and distribution -- all vital elements to enhance [photo studio workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/production-workflow), increase throughput and generate higher conversion rates. This means that every [product photography setup](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) should be tailored to the volume of media content, the types and sizes of objects, and any specific demands the studio teams and photographers may have. In this guide, we’ll examine the ideal studio setup, and suggest how to improve all of your product photography studio workflows. ### The five moving pieces to improve studio workflow Keeping in mind that every photography studio has varying needs, capacity, and limitations, there are five vital components all studios share to optimize throughput and workflow. Everything must be taken into account, from receiving and processing products, to managing and reporting data, and automating processes that can be automated. It’s all about making the most of the studio team’s valuable time and ability, and likewise providing them with the most effective setup for the tasks at hand. ### 1. Structured processes Every product photography studio has repeated processes that need to be first identified, and then documented, executed, and tracked to build a studio for optimized workflow. This is especially true for any large-scale projects, in which there is a crucial need for solid processes in place to track a studio’s efficiency and profitability. At PhotoRobot, we have learned to work with any product photography work space, from small to medium and large operations, to help companies identify their needs and to choose the best [photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/robots) to deliver high-quality content and improve the pace of their studio workflow. ### 2. Automation technology The more routine tasks you can automate in a photography studio, the better. And in any product photography studio, there are many repeatable tasks better handled by [automation software](https://www.photorobot.com/software) and machines rather than at the hands of one of the team. Specifically, file management and content delivery rank among the most tedious and time-consuming tasks for photographers. They often require valuable time and energy that could be utilized in more creative tasks, like optimising setup and lighting for product photoshoots. This is where PhotoRobot tools, accessories and software can help improve your studio workflow. Our robots and hardware are designed to operate with AI-driven imagery post production software, along with features like auto-triggered file export and delivery to make your studio processes consistent and seamless. ### 3. Managing and Reporting Data Record keeping and data analysis are other crucial elements to improving workflow in a product photography studio. Data comes in many forms and is utilized in numerous ways, from the client side to the production, distribution, and retailer channels. When a single product might be displayed on many retailer websites, it’s important to keep solid internal records of data to track products from delivery to their final sale. This is especially true as each retailer site a product appears on is likely to have different [naming conventions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/gs1-image-standards), shipping information, as well as metadata practices. ### 4. Team Collaboration and Integration Every member of the studio team plays a vital role in the success of a photography studio, and it’s important to have the right players in the right roles to maximize workflow. There needs to be thorough collaboration and integration from sales to customer success management, merchandise teams, quality control, and the photographers. Ensuring there is effective communication and cooperation across all these departments is key to improving any product photography operation and fine-tuning studio workflow. ### 5. Studio solutions individualized for every work space With any product photography studio, there is no *one-size-fits-all* solution. What works for a small or medium business won’t [scale up to large operations](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/digital-asset-management-for-manufacturers), so it’s important every studio is designed around the client and their individual needs. At PhotoRobot, we understand this, and we have robots, hardware and accessories to fit any studio space. We approach studio design and operations on a client-by-client basis, and advise what we believe would be the best ways and equipment to improve studio workflow around the client’s operations. ## Product photography studio solutions With so many moving parts to running an effective product photography studio, it’s important to have not only the best space optimized for your operations but also the best equipment and automated technology for the job. PhotoRobot aims to help businesses identify and find solutions to their studio needs, while also providing the tools to maximize workflow, streamline data management and reporting, to automate post-processing and more. If you would like to learn more about how PhotoRobot can assist in planning and realizing an optimal product photography studio, don’t hesitate to contact us today for a free consultation! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/dslr-vs-mirrorless-cameras-in-2020-comparison-and-review # SECTION: blog > dslr-vs-mirrorless-cameras-in-2020-comparison-and-review # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-11 --- # DSLR vs Mirrorless Cameras in 2020: Comparison and Review It is 2020, and that means it’s time for a quick review and comparison of the latest models of mirrorless cameras versus the latest DSLR cameras. With mirrorless cameras booming in popularity, the debate is currently raging around which is better in terms of image quality, size, weight, and speed. Dive into this quick guide with PhotoRobot to get up to speed on your camera options in 2020 and learn more about which camera best meets your needs. - Categories: Product Photography ## 2020: The year of the mirrorless camera, or is DSLR still the top choice? In this post, we’ll review and compare the traditional Digital SLR cameras of 2020 versus newer model mirrorless interchangeable-lens cameras. DSLR (Digital Single Lense Reflex) cameras have set the standard for professional photography for years. Any serious photographer knows the DSLR -- a large, durable camera with numerous features, larger image sensors, and an array of change-out lenses to best match what you’re doing. Always popular with photographers, these cameras support telephoto, wide angle, and prime lenses for portraits and low-lights, and, while heavier than mirrorless cameras, they come with long-lasting battery life. Now, however, thanks to advances in technology, mirrorless cameras could be gaining ground on DSLR cameras. They could even be set to become the next *go-to* camera for both amateur and professional photographers. Both produce great photos, and both come with their pros and their cons, but which is truly better? Let’s dive in now for a quick 2020 comparison and review. ## What is a DSLR camera? With standard DSLR cameras, the light passes through the lens of the camera and through a prism, before then going into the viewfinder that you use to frame the shot and focus. In many modern cameras, only part of this light goes through the OVF (Optical View Finder), while part of it hits the autofocus sensor. When you want to take the picture, you press the shutter button and the entire mirror assembly flips up, making that distinctive *click* sound of snapping a picture. It’s very much like the 35mm cameras of the past, utilizing the shutter and light to capture the final image. Basically, you see approximately the exact same amount of light levels that the camera experiences, so if it’s dark, you have a dark viewfinder. This can make it difficult to find a shot in dark lighting. ## Examples of top-selling DSLRs in 2020 There are many options on the market for DSLR cameras in 2020, whether you’re an amateur, an enthusiast or a professional. Some of the best and most widely used in 2020 include: - The [Nikon D3500](https://www.nikonusa.com/en/nikon-products/product/dslr-cameras/d3500.html), for example, is one of the best options **for amateurs, students, and the photographer on a budget.** These affordable and user-friendly, high-resolution cameras are considerably one of the better buys in 2020 if you want a decent camera but don’t want to spend a lot of money. - **For the enthusiast**, it’s worth considering the [Canon EOS 90D](https://www.usa.canon.com/internet/portal/us/home/products/details/cameras/eos-dslr-and-mirrorless-cameras/dslr/eos-90d-body), or, if trying to save some money at the cost of some specs, the [Nikon D7500](https://www.nikonusa.com/en/nikon-products/product/dslr-cameras/d7500.html). Both are great for hobbyists; it just depends on how much you’re willing to spend. - Take it one step further **for DSLRs for professional photography**, and some of the best options in 2020 are split into 2 or 3 main groups. There are high-resolution models like the [Nikon D850](https://www.nikonusa.com/en/nikon-products/product/dslr-cameras/d850.html), designed above all else for image quality, trustworthy *all-around* models such as the [Canon EOS 5D IV](https://www.usa.canon.com/internet/portal/us/home/products/details/cameras/eos-dslr-and-mirrorless-cameras/dslr/eos-5d-mark-iv), or cameras for high-speed sports photographers like the new [Nikon D6](https://www.nikonusa.com/en/nikon-products/product/dslr-cameras/d6.html) or the [Canon EOS-1D X Mark III](https://www.usa.canon.com/internet/portal/us/home/explore/product-showcases/cameras-and-lenses/1dx-mark-iii). ## What is a mirrorless camera? With mirrorless cameras, there is no mirror and no optical viewfinder. Instead, light passes through the lens to a sensor, which then handles autofocus and conveys the digital image to either the electronic viewfinder or the big screen. Because there is no mirror mechanism, cameras can be much smaller and lighter, while still being able to deliver the same quality of photos that DSLR cameras provide. One of the downsides to this, however, is the lower battery life of mirrorless cameras. ## Examples of top-selling mirrorless cameras from 2020 Finding the best mirrorless camera will depend on exactly what you intend to shoot. After all, a camera for shooting your family holiday will be very different from the best mirrorless camera for shooting a sporting event. That said, there are great mirrorless cameras in 2020 for every photographer from amateurs, to bargain-hunters, to enthusiasts, and professionals. There are incredible all-around mirrorless cameras, some that are for beginners and cost-friendly, and mirrorless cameras for the professional making a living with their photography. Some of the best in 2020 to mention include: - **For beginners and photographers looking for simple and affordable cameras**, a mirrorless camera can be ideal. If size and usability is your selling point, the [Panasonic Lumix GX85/GX80](https://shop.panasonic.com/products/gx85-mirrorless-camera-12-32mm-45-150mm-lenses) is designed for beginners with intelligent auto features or for the photographer who wants complete manual control over all exposure settings like shutter speed and aperture. Another option if on a budget could be the [Sony A6000](https://www.sony.com/electronics/interchangeable-lens-cameras/ilce-6000-body-kit), launched in 2014 but still an excellent entry-point into mirrorless photography. - **For enthusiasts seeking great all-around cameras,** the latest mid-range mirrorless cameras can match or even outperform the best DSLRs in regards to features and performance. Take for example the [Nikon Z50](https://www.nikonusa.com/en/nikon-products/product/mirrorless-cameras/z-50.html), arguably one of the best mirrorless cameras for the price in 2020. This APS-C mirrorless camera, introduced in late 2019, has risen to the top spot in the mirrorless camera wars, and is definitely worth consideration as the go-to for enthusiasts willing to spend a little more. - **For professional photographers**, the [Sony A9 II](https://www.sony.com/electronics/interchangeable-lens-cameras/ilce-9m2) is now regarded as one of the best mirrorless cameras for sports and action photography. Then, there is the [61MP Sony A7R IV](https://www.sony.com/electronics/interchangeable-lens-cameras/ilce-7rm4), which is raising the bar for resolution. These cameras, supporting the latest video features, make some of the professional mirrorless cameras perfect for full-scale video production, too. ## Size and weight in comparison With the mirror mechanism in DSLR cameras, they tend to be slightly larger and bulkier than mirrorless cameras. In comparison, the mirrorless camera body is often smaller, and with simpler construction. This makes it much easier to carry mirrorless cameras, and allows for more space to fit gear into your camera bag. ## Autofocus speed in comparison When it comes to autofocus speed and low-light photography, DSLRs were once the best choice. Today, however, the lines are getting blurred between who holds the top spot. Take low-light mirrorless cameras like the [Sony Alpha a7S II](https://www.sony.com/electronics/interchangeable-lens-cameras/ilce-7sm2) for example, or the highly sophisticated mirrorless autofocus system of the [Fujifilm XT-30](https://fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-t30/), with extremely fast autofocus speeds. With these rivals on the market and how rapidly the technology is advancing, DSLRs might soon be dethroned even for photographing sports and wildlife. ## Previewing images With DSLR cameras, the optical viewfinder shows you almost exactly what the camera experiences and what you will ultimately see in the final image. Mirrorless cameras on the other hand, provide photographers with an image preview on the screen, and, unfortunately, this preview can sometimes be unreliable, dull, or grainy. Some offer an electronic viewfinder that simulates an optical viewfinder, but in some situations this may not always yield positive results. **DSLRs, by contrast, currently are more reliable than mirrorless cameras in low-light situations.** If you are shooting in mostly good light, both types of cameras will perform well, but in low-light and other situations with challenging light, DSLRs are easier to use and shoot with. ## Video quality **In regards to video quality, the best options on the market are higher-end mirrorless cameras.** Especially popular with vloggers, these cameras are just generally better suited for capturing great video. Unlike mirrorless cameras, DSLRs simply cannot use phase detection while recording with the mirror up. This means they need to use the slower and less-accurate contrast-detection focus method, creating the blurry cameras sometimes get when trying to achieve focus. There are some newer DSLRs adding phase detection features, like the Nikon 850, but then there are also superb mirrorless cameras like the Panasonic Lumix GH5S, capable of capturing 4K and ultra HD video with four times the resolution of HD footage. Also, the superior autofocus in most models of mirrorless cameras makes them overall far more reliable for filmmaking. ## Shooting speed As for shooting speed, both DSLR and mirrorless cameras perform great in 2020. **The exception, however, is with the high-end mirrorless cameras of today.** The fact that they don’t have a mirror means they are much more apt at snapping photo after photo. They also have simpler mechanics, and ultimately allow photographers to capture more images per second, and with higher shutter speeds. ## Battery life **Overall, DSLRs possess greater battery life than the mirrorless cameras of 2020.** Photographers can utilize DSLRs without the LCD screen or EVF, both of which require lots of energy to operate. Both however will have similar battery life if you heavily use the LCD screen or EVF. Obviously, the batteries are removable in both types of cameras, and any serious photographer can always carry a spare. ## Lenses and accessories **For now, there are more lenses and accessories available for DSLR cameras in 2020 than there are for mirrorless.** This makes the selection for mirrorless lenses in 2020 somewhat restricted, but the selection is rapidly growing and could very well soon catch up to DSLRs. In the coming years, we can definitely expect the gap to either shrink or close entirely. ## The verdict: What’s the better buy, DSLR or Mirrorless cameras? The answer to this question will ultimately depend on what you intend to be shooting. Whether it’s still shots, portrait or landscape photography, action and sports, or footage for your vlog, there is a camera on the market for every amateur, enthusiast, or professional photographer. With all the advances in camera and battery technology, as well as more lenses for mirrorless cameras steadily becoming available, the gap between DSLRs and mirrorless cameras is quickly narrowing. DSLRs, for now, are better in low-light situations, and for their longer battery life; but we might soon see mirrorless cameras just as capable. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo # SECTION: blog > 7-components-to-capture-the-perfect-product-photo # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-06 --- # 7 Components to Capture the Perfect Product Photo For product photography studios and e-commerce stores alike, it’s crucial to capture the perfect product photo for every item in stock. Online shoppers today demand high resolution, high-quality media content that provides them with views of products from various angles and in vivid detail. In this guide, we’ll explain the 7 components that go into capturing the perfect product photo. - Categories: Product Photography ## Photography Equipment and Tips for the Perfect Product Photo Blurry or low-quality product photos will not only cost a business sales but can also harm the brand’s reputation, so it’s crucial to capture and use only the best product photos. A great product photo increases buyer’s trust at the instance of purchase, and ultimately leads to [higher sales and fewer returns](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/consistency-in-visual-content) in long-term operations. The product photo should replicate the in-store experience, placing products in the hands of the consumer to handle and examine just as they would in real life. Those leading in e-commerce know this. The professionals are setting high standards in eCommerce, especially so with [360 degree product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography). To stay ahead of the competition, it’s all about utilizing the right hardware, software, and accessories that can produce consistent, high-quality product imagery which is easily managed and distributed, and likewise that stimulates sales. Read on for the 7 components that go into capturing the perfect product photo for e-commerce stores, retailers and distributors. ## 1. Prepping for the product photo To capture the perfect product photo, first and foremost it’s vital that the product is in mint condition, and, secondly, that the product is positioned perfectly for the photo shoot. Whether the photo shoot is on-location or in a professional product photography studio, it’s important that the product does not get damaged, dinged, or scratched before the shoot. This can be of particular concern for high-volume product photo shoots, where there are many different items that need sorting, transporting, and prepping in a short amount of time. It is also of concern when shooting larger objects or machinery. It’s always important to be careful when transporting any product from storage to the photography station. Beyond transport, the product needs to be positioned and perfectly centered for the photo shoot. It’s always important to get the product in the center of the rotation to produce powerful spin (or even still) photos. At PhotoRobot, we use lasers that are automatically switched on for positioning and then automatically switched off when snapping photos. This prevents operator errors, and, if for some reason the product is not centered perfectly, we have software capable of recentering an entire batch of images in a few clicks. The software can also recenter products vertically, even if the product was improperly positioned throughout the shoot. Sometimes, you will need additional equipment or accessories, as not all items stand on their own. You want the product upright in the photo so it can be viewed from various angles. To do this, photographers often utilize something for prop assistance. An example might be a wire hung from the ceiling that is attached to the product to hold it upright, or invisible plastic props to make an item stand on its own. ## 2. Capturing a clean white background When capturing a product photo, it’s important that the product is set against a clean, white background. This not only makes the product stand out but it is also a requirement if utilizing online shopping places like Google Shopping or Amazon, who both require pure white backgrounds for product imagery. Capturing a white-background photo does however require certain tricks and a photographer’s touch to reduce the need for editing later on. At PhotoRobot, one way we accomplish this is by using a glass table for the product and having a white fabric several feet away, also with lighting to illuminate the product from behind. This creates an image with a smooth white background and outlining similar to what you would expect from Photoshop, and prepares the images for automated post-processing. What you don’t want from a product photo is distorted edges around the product. When this effect, so-called light wrap, is strong, it is clearly visible even without zooming in for detail, and requires heavy editing later on - if at all possible. This occurs when the product is superimposed improperly against digital white backgrounds, and calls for editing and post-processing that can be not only time-consuming but also costly, especially for high-volume product shoots. When you have a natural white background with the fabric, there is less likelihood you’ll need to go back and edit images later. There are also additional lighting tricks that can be used to minimize this problem while getting the perfect white background, but the most important element to consider is background distance. This can be a common problem with traditional *all-in-one* “box” solutions, where the background is a component of the lightbox and light-wrap occurs naturally due to items being too close to the background. At PhotoRobot, we understand this and have built solutions around this. ## 3. Achieving the perfect lighting for a product photo The perfect product photo makes your product stand out in vivid detail, with just the right lighting to convey shape and a deep depth of field. There should be no unwanted reflections, inconsistencies, or overwhelming shadows that distract consumers from the true nature of the product. And when every item surface is different, it requires a photographer’s knowledge of how different items respond to different lighting setups. There are three pieces of equipment needed to capture the right lighting for product photos. - **Lighting equipment**, e.g. strobe lighting, LED panel technology, or DMX-controlled LED panels - **Light Shapers**, e.g. diffusers, honeycombs, reflectors black flags, etc - **Various accessories**, all depending on the studio, the type of product photography, etc. At PhotoRobot, we suggest numerous solutions in terms of lighting, diffusers and accessories for small to medium and large objects or heavy machinery. With the right equipment, setup, and knowledge, it’s possible to capture consistent product photos, even when shooting reflective or translucent items that might require prop assistance or lighter toned backgrounds. ## 4. Getting consistent product image composition With product photography for ecommerce, consistency can be critical, especially for product galleries. All the products need to look like they would in a shop display, replicating the real shopping experience in an online environment. The experience can then be enhanced with spins, detailing, [3D modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model) and more, but the main goal is in first capturing consistent product images that can be used to later address these verticals. To do this, it all begins with preparation, and this can be one of the most time-consuming elements of product photo shoots. It takes time to unpackage, transport, and prep products and set the photography scene, as well as to complete the shooting and post processing. And while not much can be done to reduce the prep time, [PhotoRobot solutions](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/flexible-tools-for-e-commerce-product-photography) are designed to drastically cut shooting time, making it possible to capture entire sets of images for still shots, spin photography and 3D models -- requiring only a few clicks of the mouse to create consistent and remarkable online product presentations. At this point,it all comes down to the camera. Cameras with wide lenses are best when capturing larger products, while macro lenses can be utilized for smaller items. The goal is to capture the same composition from every angle, whether for 360 degree or still photos. ## 5. Optimizing product imagery for excellent zoom capabilities The next component to capturing the perfect product photo is in optimizing imagery for excellent zoom capabilities. It’s all about creating an interactive experience for the consumer, allowing them to rotate the product and zoom into the finest details, all the while ensuring that the product image is sharp and in focus throughout the experience. This is where utilizing high-end cameras with the appropriate lens comes into play to maximize image quality. One issue here, however, is that you often produce large image files when trying to capture the perfect images for zoom capability. This is why PhotoRobot has chosen to integrate with a global Content Delivery Network (CDN), which can be utilized to distribute image files globally and at maximum speed and resolution, dynamically prepared on-demand and delivered based on viewer resolution. Thus, the [360 product viewer](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer) allows us to drastically reduce data traffic and page load times to ensure online shoppers have a positive experience and increase SEO value on websites. PhotoRobot solutions also support 3rd party hosting services if preferred, with zero-friction automation background to integrate with clients’ existing solutions when required. ## 6. Snapping angles that best capture the product Establishing customer trust in today’s online shopping world revolves around showcasing products from various angles to replicate the in-store shopping experience. Just as zoom capabilities are important, the same is true for how consumers interact with, spin, and view a product photo. High-quality still images work well for zoom, but they only provide consumers with one angle of viewing. When making an object spin, however, static images alone are not enough. 360 degree or spin photos typically require 24, 48, or 72 still images which are all combined to create the product image. This is where you need extra equipment, like [PhotoRobot’s ROBOTIC TURNTABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/turntable) for automating product and 360 degree photography. ## 7. Automating post-production for consistent product photos A well-executed product photo shoot shouldn’t require much image post-processing after the fact, but sometimes it might be necessary to edit some common issues that might arise. One of the most common edits necessary is white balancing, and this is when you need to eliminate color casts and render products that are white into a product photo. Gray cards can be utilized as a standard component of PhotoRobot’s workflow and automated post processing for this. For highly translucent products, gray-scale edits are necessary. Oftentimes products might also require “global edits,” which are edits applied across a batch of images. It might be that the product needs different saturation or contrast to make the colors more vivid, or you might need localized edits to fix a blemished product. ## Consistency is key in e-commerce product photos When it comes to capturing the perfect product photos for e-commerce stores, distributor and retailer websites, the main component to success is in consistency across all of your product imagery. Online shoppers enjoy the experience of digital shopping the same as they enjoy shopping in real life, by browsing shops and comparing items before making a purchase. This is why the goal for e-commerce stores should be to provide the same quality of product photos across all their various platforms. Ultimately, by doing this, you not only establish brand trust but also stand a chance against the competition in an online world where perfect product photography is trending and prevalent thanks to automation becoming significantly cheaper than traditional techniques. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography # SECTION: blog > guide-to-attaining-the-perfect-lighting-for-360-product-photography # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-08-04 --- # Guide to Attaining the Perfect Lighting for 360 Product Photography Lighting is an essential element to photography in general and especially important in any high volume 360 product photography workstation or studio. While much of the 360-degree process is automated with spin photography, the human eye and some interaction is still required to capture the perfect product images. Read on to learn about all the moving parts of 360 degree lighting kits, the different approaches we take to capture photos, and the importance of improving your product photography. - Categories: Product Photography ## The standards in lighting for 360 product photography studios To obtain the best results in eCommerce [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), the lighting is essential. Unlike traditional or portrait photography, in which light is used to highlight specific details to create the illusion of shape, 360 product photography requires the perfect combination of soft light to remove backgrounds and unwanted shadows along with sharp lighting to accent fine product details. With this lighting setup, you can not only capture all the intricate details of a product but also create a more natural product experience by eliminating distracting, hard shadows when viewing the product from all sides. The soft lighting also allows for automated post-processing, while the hard lighting provides brilliant textures for presentation. At PhotoRobot, we adhere to tried-and-trusted photography principles that have been practised for over 100 years. The only difference is that we have highly automated the process, from the product photo shoot to the post-processing. ## Inside the studio: lights, diffusers and accessories for 360 product photography ## Lighting arrangements At PhotoRobot, we use strobe lighting and LED panel lights to attain the perfect lighting from all angles for 360 product photography. Strobe lighting is extremely bright and its high output provides a deep depth of field that maintains a sharp focus on products and also appears to freeze them in motion. The high intensity of the strobe lights makes it possible to use higher aperture and reach this depth of field, while also playing a crucial role in shooting larger products. With smaller objects, like a mobile phone, the LED lighting is often sufficient. Another benefit of the strobe lighting is that when you freeze the movement by the strobes, you do not need to stop the motion of the object. This means the shooting process can be extremely sped up, saving up to 70% of the shooting time compared to other methods. This can also be achieved with the LED lights, but only for very small items where the depth of field can be reached with low aperture values and the freezing of movement is obtained through short shutter time. ## Diffusers The right diffuser will make the lighting virtually wrap around a product, painting it in a soft light perfect for interactive 360 product photographs. The most common solution for this is the softbox, which combines a black structure with a white fabric front that can either soften the harder strobe lighting or compliment simple softboxes and diffusers. ## Studio lighting accessories This is where the human eye and an artistic touch comes into play. Photographers can utilize and adapt standard lighting approaches to improve their 360 product photos. There are various props and tools for this, from light-cutting black flags to white foam for bouncing light and larger diffuser panels to paint products in light from every angle of the spin. ## Approaches to attain picture-perfect lighting Before any product shoot, there are two crucial requirements for any photography studio: you must ensure that all photos will have a clean white background, and you also need to determine if you will be shooting reflective or non-reflective objects. ## Creating a clean, white background With a robotic table and rotating glass plate, a white fabric background and two rear lights, it’s possible to shield products from spill light and create perfect product imagery. The challenge is in ensuring that images are perfectly outlined and ready to distribute. To do this and achieve that clean white background isn’t always easy however, and this is especially true with more reflective or difficult products. With items like this, more focus needs to be on the product, which leads to greyer background and the need for post-production efforts to attain the white background. ## Working with reflective and non-reflective items When you have highly reflective products to shoot, there’s always a lot of extra attention to the product and detail required. Non-reflective items aren’t often difficult to capture in a spin sequence. It’s the reflective products that tend to be more of a challenge, often possessing intense highlights that can harm overall image quality as well as the product experience for the customer. This is why it is important to learn how to work with reflective products, ultimately aiming to utilize white panels and the strobe lighting to compliment and illuminate the item. In this regard, PhotoRobot has different, built-in strategies to handle reflective products. These solutions allow photographers to easily capture images with non-stop shooting and to quickly manage background removal. Additionally, all of this can be done at the press of button, as can control of the workstation to stop at precise given angles, take a variety of shots under various lighting conditions, and then combine everything into the final high quality result -- all in record time. ## Enhance product transparency, improve sales and reduce returns In the online shopping reality of E-commerce, your product images are very much your product. Higher quality images and the perfect product photography helps brands and retailers establish trust, provide product transparency, and, perhaps most importantly, to develop customer and community satisfaction. This is why product photos should always be presented in the right light, providing customers with every intricate detail of the product at a glance. When your customers have confidence in the purchases, not only do sales increase but there are also less returns overall, as shoppers receive exactly what they expect from their online purchase. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing # SECTION: blog > mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-07-30 --- # Mastering Product Photography: Apparel and Clothing In clothing and apparel e-commerce, mastering product photography is crucial to establishing an online presence and standing out from the competition. Having a great product description just isn’t enough. You need high-quality product images that replicate the in-store experience online shoppers demand, allowing them to view products from various angles and zoom all while staying in sharp focus to showcase every intricate detail of the product. In this guide, we’ll look at how to improve your apparel and clothing product photos with PhotoRobot hardware and software. - Categories: About PhotoRobot, Product Photography ## PhotoRobot-Powered Fashion and Clothing Photography With a wealth of online marketplaces for clothing and apparel, high-quality [product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/outputs) is the norm for today’s digital consumers. The more your photos can replicate the hands-on, in-store shopping experience, the more likely you are to generate higher sales, build brand trust, and increase revenue. To do this with clothing and apparel, you need perfectly lit product imagery, centered and viewable from numerous angles. It’s also important to have background removal tools and software for post-processing and editing to streamline uploading imagery to online marketplaces and advertising platforms, as well as distributors and retailers. The PhotoRobot apparel and clothing [360 & 3D photography kit](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) is designed to do precisely this, helping photographers to capture consistent, high-quality product imagery with our [CUBE ROBOT](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube), Mannequin Torso and PhotoRobot [editing software](https://www.photorobot.com/software). These tools allow photographers to snap clothing and apparel photography and get the photos online and ready for publishing, all in under a minute. Read on to walk through a typical PhotoRobot photo shoot with the CUBE and Mannequin. ## Setting the Scene for Apparel and Clothing Before any photo shoot, you need to first set the scene. For clothing and apparel, the scene will require the CUBE Robot set up for [mannequin photography](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin). Let’s walk through the process now. ## 1 - Set up a Mannequin and the Cube Robot This robot is a small box that rotates the mannequin and can be configured to capture your given angles. It is fairly light weight and can be easily transported to anywhere you need to set up a shoot. ## 2 - Choose your Studio Lighting Large softboxes or LED panels can cause loss of contrast and volume for the object. What is more, incorrectly set backlighting can cause a photograph to lose edge-clarity (so-called “light wrap”). PhotoRobot’s answer to this is using hard directional light and placing the mannequin further away from the background, which is impossible using “box solutions” with their limited space. PhotoRobot also uses velvet shields that allow us to apply more lighting to the background without affecting the clarity of the object. ## 3 - Set the Camera It’s as simple as plugging your camera in! Just place your camera on the tripod, plug it in, and together with your Cube robot you will now be able to capture all of your desired angles. ## Capturing the Scene After the product photo station is prepared, it’s time to capture images of the clothing and apparel. This consists of clothing the mannequin, choosing the desired angles and capturing all of your images in a single click thanks to the PhotoRobot software. ## 1 - Clothe the Mannequin And remember, you don’t have to worry about the pole being seen with PhotoRobot’s post-production and background removal features. All you need to do is fit the apparel you would like to shoot onto the mannequin. In larger studios, this is usually done by a stylist who assists the photographers, or, in this case the robot operators. PhotoRobot’s mannequin is equipped with a “quick coupler,” allowing the stylist to work outside of the scene on the next mannequin in line, while the robot operator can continue shooting without interruption. ## 2 - Choose the Desired Angles You can use full-spin, some predefined positions, or both. This depends on the type of clothing you are shooting, and how you want to present it to your customers. Choose just a few shots, 360° spin - or both - as overall capturing time is very fast and post-processing fully automated! ## 3 - Capture All Images in a Single Click. Now that your mannequin, camera, and desired angles are all set, you can now start your photo shoot with just one click of the mouse. Press the play button, and PhotoRobot will do the rest. ## Post-Production: Background Removal PhotoRobot makes it simple to not only automate the process of capturing your images but also to manage more crucial elements of your photo shoot, including background removal, cropping, color enhancements, white balance, and more. With apparel and clothing, background removal can be complicated by the fact that you have a mannequin pole that is visible or overlapping with the clothing. Our Chromakey feature will allow you to make the pole completely invisible in just a few clicks of your mouse. It really is that easy. ## The Value of Engaging Clothing and Apparel Product Photography In today’s visual world, the ecommerce landscape and success in the industry revolves around high-quality product content and customer confidence. This is especially true for selling clothing and apparel through online marketplaces, where shoppers have come to expect visually rich product imagery that comes as close as possible to replicating the in-store shopping experience. The better your product images, the more sales you will ultimately generate. At PhotoRobot, we understand this, and we strive to make product photoshoots as easy, quick, and affordable as can possibly be. Our solutions are aimed at increasing throughput by making photographers’ and teams’ jobs less time-consuming, while also providing valuable tools for consistent and powerful product photography. If you would like to learn more about how PhotoRobot can assist in the planning and realization of the optimal apparel and clothing photography studio for you, don’t hesitate to contact us today for a free consultation! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/introducing-photorobots-multicam # SECTION: blog > introducing-photorobots-multicam # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-07-28 --- # Introducing: PhotoRobot's MultiCam for Multi-Row Product Photography PhotoRobot’s MultiCam is a multi-camera system designed to simultaneously capture 3D and multi-row images, capable of snapping hundreds of photos in an instant. It has been developed for the effective, multi-room shooting of large volumes of products, and is made to fit into most studios and workspaces. - Categories: Robots ## PhotoRobot MultiCam: Rapidly Accelerate 3D Product Photoshoots [PhotoRobot’s MultiCam](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) multi-camera rig is designed to accelerate high-volume 3D product photography in the studio. Whether for still shots, 3D or multi-row images, this multi-camera system is built for speed. Watch the [PhotoRobot MultiCam Demo](https://www.photorobot.com/videos/multi-camera-rig-design-dynamics) to discover the design & dynamics of this multi-camera rig. Mechanically speaking, the MultiCam can mount up to 13 cameras on its heavy-duty arched bow, and each camera can then be controlled to snap images at the same time. Some users equip the bow with 2 cameras, others use 7. The more cameras you use, ultimately the faster your photoshoots become. Each camera mounted will trigger simultaneously and take sets of photos at every one stop, saving you time and energy! There are 13 positions on the Multi bow, at 7.5 degree increments where the cameras can be randomly mounted, all depending on the size of the product and the angles your team needs to capture. The elevation is all automated and controlled by the control software, so teams can adjust the system based on the size of the object. ## The PhotoRobot-Powered Multi-Camera System Combining the high rotational dynamics of PhotoRobot turntables and the synchronous shooting of the MultiCam multi-camera system, photography teams can capture full 3D photographic presentations in a fraction of the time compared to other devices. With 13 positions available for camera attachment at a spacing of 7.5 degrees, photographers can capture more images and more angles, all in short time. All thanks to synchronous shooting from multiple cameras during a single rotation! ## Easy, Secure & Reliable Camera Positioning If any automatic measuring system is integrated, the controls will read this and set up the elevation accordingly. Otherwise, the motor-assisted height adjustment makes it possible to easily and quickly point cameras to the center of rotation, with the vertical-center always in the middle of the object’s height. This setup can be used again and again for high volume photoshoots. There’s no need to waste time on changes or height repositioning from one product to the next, and all cameras will remain trained with precision to the virtual center of the object. Then, for even more camera support, there’s PhotoRobot’s Synchro Box that can be used in combination with the MultiCam system. The Synchro Box supports up to 8 cameras, while also being stackable (meaning the synchronization capabilities are virtually endless). ## Simultaneous Camera Capture Within a few seconds, the PhotoRobot MultiCam allows photographers to shoot several top view angles in a rotational range of 360°. Capture hundreds of images in an instant to create 3D photographic presentations or individual images from predefined angles for online or print advertising. ## Available in two sizes & PhotoRobot Cube compatible The MultiCam arch is available in two sizes, depending on the needs of your studio, and can also be used in combination with [PhotoRobot’s CUBE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube)for [shooting products like apparel and clothing](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/mastering-product-photography-apparel-and-clothing) and more. For more information, refer to the PhotoRobot [MultiCam specifications, properties and dimensions](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam). That, or, better yet, contact us today for a free consultation to find out how PhotoRobot’s MultiCam can simplify and accelerate your studio production. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/guide-to-360-product-photography-for-e-commerce # SECTION: blog > guide-to-360-product-photography-for-e-commerce # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-07-23 --- # Guide to 360 Product Photography for E-Commerce One of the most crucial challenges for e-commerce stores is in creating a visually rich, authentic and immersive online experience for shoppers through 360 product photography. The right product photography improves not only SEO on your website but also conversion rates and revenue benefits. In this guide, we’ll highlight the benefits of improving your e-commerce product photography and provide you with some tips on how to get started. - Categories: Product Photography ## 360 Product Photography for E-Commerce Businesses When executed perfectly, [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography) provides customers with that in-store experience they are looking for as well as the convenience of shopping online. The images are the products, so the better the image, the more likely it is that customer interactions will generate sales. This is why product photography is so vital, especially in today’s online world. E-commerce stores need to find the best ways to showcase their products or risk business going to the competition. Read on for 5 ways to improve your 360 product photography and meet the demands of today’s shoppers. ## 5 ways to improve your 360 product photography ## 1 - Use flexible, multi-purpose equipment to capture your product photographs It’s important to have a photo station with multiple configurations so that you can capture images of all angles from a wide range of products. PhotoRobot’s 360-degree [product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography) is designed to snap photos of products as small as a coin, as complex as a piece of jewellery, or as large as furniture, automobiles, and other large and heavy objects. The versatility of PhotoRobot’s equipment allows us to do precisely this, making any product viable for e-commerce photo shoots. ## 2 - Improve your product photography with the best lighting The correct lighting brings products to life, and this is especially true for 360 product photography. With spin photography, you need a depth of field to keep everything in focus, and this requires a lot of light and proper illumination. At PhotoRobot, we utilize [Broncolor](https://broncolor.swiss/products/lights), Profoto and [Fomei](https://www.fomei.com/en/products-led-lights-38888) strobes, all 3 well-known for color accuracy and consistent output. Our solutions also support a wide range of DMX-controlled still lights, like RotoLight among others. These tools help us improve our 360 product photography for a wide range of products of all sizes, shapes, and transparency. ## 3 - Utilize the best camera for the job One of our go-to cameras in our [eCommerce photography studio](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/ecommerce-photography) is the Canon 5D IV. It has become the standard in many commercial studios, well-renowned for its durability and its 30-megapixel CMOS sensor. This camera provides high quality photos with deep zoom capacity, and its zoom lens at 24-105 is perfect for making quick adjustments in the studio based on the photographed object’s size. ## 4 - Provide shoppers with multiple angles and 3D animations In order to capture a 360° product photo, you usually need between 24 and 72 images. With spin photography, you can showcase both moving and hidden product features, as well as provide customers with additional information about the product during their interaction. This is where animated 3D photography can take your showcases to the next level. Use animation to let customers interact directly with a product with numerous pieces and features, bringing the product to life and coming one step closer to replicating that in-store shopping experience they demand. ## 5 - Produce consistent product photos for distribution With automated 360-degree photography equipment, you can capture consistent, precise and steady images that can be easily deployed to other retailer and distributor websites. Computer-automated features also eliminate time-consuming manual errors from the equation, while likewise providing you with consistency across the various channels where you sell your products. ## Benefits of improving your e-commerce product photography ## 1 - Increase throughput With the right 360 product photography workstation, e-commerce stores can increase throughput and overall efficiency. They can create more photos in less time per day with every workstation they add to the studio, saving time and also reducing costs for e-commerce photography. ## 2 - Increase sales, reduce returns The perfect image can provide shoppers with more confidence in their purchase, ultimately leading to higher sales and less returns overall. When it comes to online shopping, most customers know they are taking a risk that they might not be satisfied with the product when it arrives, and that they could eventually return it. When you offer customers a rich 360 product experience, whether for B2B or B2C e-commerce sites, customers will be more likely to purchase with more confidence, and, ideally, to return fewer items. ## 3 - Improved SEO and Google Search Results Poor, missing or corrupt image files not only harm an e-commerce site’s SEO but also prevent companies from utilizing critical marketing campaigns like Google Shopping. Google refuses to host campaigns when product images are too small, too low in quality, or even when images do not have white backgrounds. This is where high-quality, 360-degree product photography makes you stand out in the crowd and improve your SEO. More relevance will be attached to your image, as well as your site, and you’ll also receive better SEO through the increased dwell time on your pages. ## PhotoRobot-Powered 360 Photo Studios Ultimately, when you improve your efficiency with 360 product photography, you’re not only setting yourself up for current success in the industry but also for the rapidly approaching future of e-commerce. Companies require a repository of assets for marketing and sales needs, and you don’t want to reshoot individual products every time a new channel becomes available to you. By capturing more photos from all angles, companies will have all the assets they need in stock for their websites, in-store displays, mobile applications, promotional campaigns on social media and more. They will also be ready for new visual and image search platforms, and thus the future of e-commerce stores and marketing. The future of e-commerce will demand 360-degree photos, spin photography, and interactive product experiences. You want your online experience to be no different to the customer than picking up an item off the store shelf. To learn more about how you can improve the efficiency of your 360 product photography, reach out to us. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/about-photorobot-packaging-and-distribution # SECTION: blog > about-photorobot-packaging-and-distribution # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-07-11 --- # About PhotoRobot: Packaging and Distribution At PhotoRobot, we take extreme care with the packaging and distribution of our hardware and accessories to ensure that all orders are delivered to clients in perfect condition. Read on to learn about the careful measures we take to eliminate the risk of damage to products in transportation to destinations all over the world. - Categories: About PhotoRobot ## PhotoRobot: Packaging and Distribution as a Top Priority When shipping heavy machinery around the globe, the packaging is extremely crucial to protect products in transit. This is especially true when dealing with heavy machines of different size, shape and weight, as is the case with the shipping needs at PhotoRobot. Our robots are not the traditional *all-in-one, one-size-fits-all* box solutions for product photography, so before we began operations, the first aspects we had to consider were packaging and distribution. It’s not like shipping many products of similar size and shape. We had to carefully plan the best means to transport a wide range of customisable photography solutions that include different machinery, hardware and accessories specified to the needs of each individual client. For us, this meant the challenge was in finding a way to ship robots of many different sizes, shapes and weights to clients, while also mitigating any risk of the products experiencing damage along the way. In the end, we designed our robots to fit inside shipping containers with suitable strength to withstand the shipment, storage and handling needs of the equipment. ### Packaging, distribution, and unloading PhotoRobot shipping containers In the video below, you can see just how easy it is to unload one of our shipping containers full of robots. **Snap36**, a former distributor in the US (now [1WorldSync](https://1worldsync.com/platform/product-photography/360-degree/)), demonstrates. Notice how much equipment can be easily and safely stored and shipped in each container. You can also note that each table includes reusable, protective framing, and all containers have integrated accessory holders to fasten objects in place for transport. ### Product conceptualization to photoshoots, packaging and dispatch At PhotoRobot, we firmly believe that creativity is not only demanded in product photography but rather in everything from the very beginning of the product concept to the end-result of packaging and dispatch. If you want to learn more, please reach out to us for a consultation on PhotoRobot photography solutions and how you can improve your studio workflow, throughput, and, ultimately, revenue and conversions in e-commerce. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/light-and-fast-online-360deg-image-viewer-for-free # SECTION: blog > light-and-fast-online-360deg-image-viewer-for-free # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-07-11 --- # PhotoRobot’s Light, Fast and Free Online Image Viewer PhotoRobot’s online image viewer is part of our hosting services and comes at no extra cost. Its design provides a light, fast and user-friendly experience, perfect for integrating directly into your e-store or website. - Categories: Software ## An Effective Online Product Image Viewer With our [3D / 360 product viewer software](https://www.photorobot.com/software/360-product-viewer), there are several ways to get your imagery published, captured and processed automatically through PhotoRobot systems. One way to do this is by downloading the content from the cloud via a **free download utility**, which manages the connection and gets your images to your local drive quickly regardless of the line quality. Alternatively, you can use **XML or JSON feeds** *(password protected if required)* from a global CDN where the images are stored. A great advantage to this is that these feeds are dynamic, meaning when the first object is captured and ready to go, it is immediately included into this feed, without the need for any user input or additional steps on your part. Then, with every single feed, you can add the latest imagery to your web in an instant - allowing your webpage to **make money for you** long before the complete batch for the photoshoot is finished! ### How to integrate the online image viewer with your webpage Integrating our free online image viewer directly to your webpage can be done in just a few lines of code. Simply input the code into your iFrame, and you’ll be ready to get all the benefits of this single-source solution. And now to the point - why is this viewer lightning fast? This is because we use a [**WebP**](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebP) file format - **introduced by Google** in 2010 - which drastically reduces the size of data downloaded to the viewer (compared to very well-compressed JPG files). In principle, we store in our cloud all original files as PNG with **zero quality loss**. Where it is possible (and Google technologies are part of the whole chain), we convert images on the fly to WebP and enjoy the advantages of smaller file sizes and their related speed of delivery. Wherever it is not possible (for example with iOS-based devices), we still rely on JPG or PNG (for images with transparent background). Fortunately, however, you do not need to worry about all of these technical details, as everything is taken care of in milliseconds - natively by the system. ### For more information about PhotoRobot Solutions Contact PhotoRobot experts to help you find the best setup for your zero-friction integration! You will be surprised how easy it is to **integrate the system and simply forget about it.** We have detailed documentation for your IT team and our support specialists ready to guide you to meet your targets in minutes! --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-introducing-the-cube # SECTION: blog > photorobot-introducing-the-cube # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-07-11 --- # Introducing the CUBE for Automated Photoshoots Dive in with PhotoRobot and learn all about our CUBE V5, V6, and V6 RotoPower, and what this versatile robot can do for your studio. Learn about the many different ways you can use the CUBE, the three different versions now available, and even see the CUBE in action in one of our latest introductory videos published for your viewing pleasure. - Categories: Robots ## The PhotoRobot Cube V5, V6, and Modified V6 [The CUBE V5](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/cube) is PhotoRobot’s most flexible, universal and portable robotic machine for automated product photo shooting. Able to be used as a standalone device or in combination with other robots, the CUBE is designed to shoot products in rotation for still shots, [360 degree product photos](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), and [3D modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/object-capture-how-to-make-a-3d-model). Above all, the CUBE is a versatile, multi-function robot that operators can use alone or with PhotoRobot [360 / 3D product photography equipment](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography). It is capable of shooting products that need to sit on a turntable, or products that need to be suspended in air like bags, chandeliers, and light fittings. It can even be quickly transformed into a rotating, [ghost mannequin](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin) for shooting apparel and clothing. ## Use the CUBE standalone as an effective turntable Allowing up to 8 total support bars, the standalone CUBE with its 100 cm diameter plate will serve as an effective mobile turntable. Its precision drive with zero-clearance transmission makes the robot surgically precise, even at a maximum load of 130 kg. In this way, the CUBE’s turntable can be used for shooting objects from the size of a ring to a handbag, backpack, or anything up to the size of a 15-inch laptop. And you’ll never have to worry about load capacity. ## Use the CUBE for suspending products in air The CUBE can also be easily transformed for shooting in suspension mode. Simply turn the CUBE upside-down, mount it to the support beam, and it’s ready to hold and spin your objects in air. This is useful for objects like bikes, handbags, backpacks and anything up to 130 kg in weight. ## Use the CUBE combined with a rotating mannequin for fashion Great for shooting apparel and clothing, from T-shirts to wedding gowns and more, the CUBE can also be transformed into a rotating mannequin. Its ingenious design allows you to prepare clothing on a separate torso that can be easily mounted to the CUBE, saving time and increasing throughput. As an optional accessory, this system can be complemented with a cart for storage of up to six mannequins, all of different size and type for a wide range of clothing and apparel photoshoots. ## Three different versions, each tailored to different studio needs There are three different variants of the CUBE, each designed for different needs. 1. **The V5** is the basic CUBE, with 19.6 newton-metres of torque. 2. **The V6**, with additional torque-power of 98 newton-metres, has zero gear play. 3. **The modified V6, the V6 / RotoPower**, has the additional feature of an electric plug-in, which allows you to plug the photographed object directly into the rotating plate to eliminate the problem of tangled wires. With the CUBE’s versatility, capturing the perfect still shots or 360 degree product photography has never been easier. To learn more about how PhotoRobot can help equip your photography studio with better tools for the job, contact us for your free consultation. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/blog/photorobot-photography-creativity-and-robotic-process-automation # SECTION: blog > photorobot-photography-creativity-and-robotic-process-automation # TYPE: Blog article # UPDATED: 2020-07-11 --- # Product Photography and Robotic Process Automation Combining traditional product photography and robotic process automation, PhotoRobot streamlines photoshoots, post processing, asset management and more. - Categories: About PhotoRobot ## The PhotoRobot Approach: Creativity and Automation Online shoppers of today have everything at their fingertips. The leading retailer and distributor platforms not only transport the store to the consumer but they also replicate the in-store shopping experience with visually rich 360 / [3D product imagery](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/equipment-for-360-and-3d-product-photography). Almost every seller’s website comes standard with appealing media content, spin photography, and imagery with flawless zoom capabilities. This is where PhotoRobot comes into play. We know that the real challenge for today’s competitive online stores is in executing photoshoots in the most timely fashion possible. This means providing photographers with the perfect tools for the job, from the hardware to the prop assistance, to the software, controls, and tools for data management. [PhotoRobot robots and accessories](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/flexible-tools-for-e-commerce-product-photography) have been designed to work with photographers to shoot products of any size, shape, or transparency; while our software helps automate repeatable tasks and save photographers time before, during, and after the photoshoot. Whether the product is as small and intricate as a microchip, as large as a car, or as reflective as a diamond engagement ring, PhotoRobot solutions are built to streamline the shooting process, as well as to record data, distribute it, and upload all imagery to the web with a few clicks of the mouse. ## Robots for any product: No matter the size, shape, or transparency Our photography robots are designed to help photographers capture consistent and effective product imagery, whether it's still shots, [360 product photography](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/360-product-photography), or [3D modeling](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/3d-ecommerce). To meet the demands of our clients, our catalogue of hardware solutions has something for every project, no matter the scale or what the product might be. These robots can be used standalone or in combination with other robots, all depending on the needs of the client and the capacity of the photography studio. We have designed tools like the [MULTICAM](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/multicam) for capturing 3D and multi-row images in a single spin, the [CENTERLESS TABLE](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/centerless-table) for shadow-free product photography, and, among others, the [CAROUSEL](https://www.photorobot.com/robots/carousel-5000) for photographing exceptionally large objects like cars, machinery and furniture. Ultimately, the primary goal at PhotoRobot is to provide photographers with flexible and high-functionality tools they need to complement their own strategies and creativity. Also connected to this, we have placed a lot of consideration into not only the hardware and software solutions photographers need but also [how to improve studio workflow](https://www.photorobot.com/blog/how-to-improve-workflow-in-a-product-photography-studio) and run an ecommerce business with lower costs, higher sales, and consistent product photography. ## Automate repeatable actions, store and report data, and quickly manage image post processing Beyond hardware, another consideration we had at PhotoRobot was how to make photographers’ lives easier through software and automation. Thanks to today’s technology, automation is becoming more and more affordable, and this is of considerable advantage to product photography studios. It’s now possible to automate many repeatable actions, such as hardware configurations, camera shutter and triggering, light controls and more. This can be of particular benefit to photography studios where they often shoot similar types of products, in which a universal approach can be applied to each photoshoot. Another way PhotoRobot software is designed to save time and money is through data reporting and management, making it easy to store, sort and manage image files, as well as to upload and distribute files quickly and easily to your e-commerce website, the cloud, or distributor and retailer channels. Then, to make life even easier on the photographer, PhotoRobot software is also designed to automate image post processing. This can be, for example, to eliminate unwanted shadows from photos, to create a clean white background, or to remove a pole from a [mannequin torso](https://www.photorobot.com/tutorials/how-to-use-a-ghost-mannequin) when shooting clothing. Photo alterations like this can be one of the most time-consuming parts of photo shoots, but, thanks to automation, it no longer has to be this way. ### Learn more about PhotoRobot product photography solutions At PhotoRobot, we know there are a wide range of components that need to work seamlessly together to successfully manage a product photography studio. Whether it’s utilizing the best data processes, top-of-the-line technology or cross-functional team integration, every part of the process is just as crucial as the next when it comes to improving studio workflow. If you would like to learn more, feel free to contact us and request a consultation on how PhotoRobot can answer your photography needs and improve your photography studio. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/ai-governance # SECTION: compliance > ai-governance # TYPE: Trust Center: compliance # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary This document provides a comprehensive and enterprise‑grade overview of PhotoRobot’s governance approach to artificial intelligence. ## PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary This document represents the PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition;** *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## Introduction - PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary This document provides a comprehensive and enterprise‑grade overview of PhotoRobot’s governance approach to artificial intelligence. It is written for procurement, legal, compliance, and information‑security teams evaluating the safety, transparency, and accountability of AI‑enabled product features. This summary includes the principles, processes, and controls that govern all AI development and deployment across the PhotoRobot ecosystem. ## Governance Framework Overview ### Purpose of the Governance Framework The framework ensures that AI‑powered capabilities: - operate safely and predictably, - comply with legal and regulatory requirements, - respect privacy and data‑protection principles, - provide transparent functionality and explainability, - include human oversight where necessary, - undergo continuous monitoring and evaluation. This framework aligns with our AI Governance Policy, which establishes mandatory controls across the full model lifecycle. ### Roles and Responsibilities PhotoRobot maintains clearly defined roles to ensure accountability: - **AI Governance Lead** oversees compliance, documentation, and risk reviews. - **Data Stewards** ensure the integrity and quality of training datasets. - **Machine‑Learning Engineers** are responsible for model design, testing, and operational readiness. - **Security Officers** conduct risk assessments and ensure resilience against misuse. - **Product Owners** validate intended use, fairness, and transparency requirements. - **Human Reviewers** verify sensitive outputs and override automated decisions where required. ## Dataset Governance ### Data Sourcing Principles Datasets used for model training undergo rigorous evaluation: - verification of data provenance, - documentation of allowed usage rights, - review for sensitive content, - removal of personally identifiable information where possible, - balancing to reduce bias where feasible. ### Dataset Quality Controls Data quality must meet strict standards: - consistency checks, - deduplication, - annotation validation, - metadata tagging, - storage within approved secure environments. ### Dataset Lineage and Versioning Every dataset version is recorded with: - source information, - schema history, - change logs, - validation reports. Dataset lineage supports reproducibility, auditability, and traceability for compliance purposes. ## Model Development and Validation ### Model Design Requirements New AI features must follow requirements defined in the AI Development Policy: - clear purpose and intended use, - documented potential risks, - description of model boundaries, - fallback behavior for errors or uncertainty, - safeguards against misuse. ### Validation and Testing Models are validated using: - benchmark tests, - fairness and bias assessments, - robustness checks for adversarial inputs, - performance evaluations under varied conditions, - reproducibility validation. All results are documented and reviewed prior to deployment. ### Explainability and Transparency Where feasible, PhotoRobot provides: - explanations of model behavior, - simplified descriptions of inputs and outputs, - disclosure of automated decision components, - developer notes on model limitations. ## Deployment and Monitoring ### Deployment Safeguards Before production release, AI components undergo: - peer review, - approval by governance lead, - security evaluation, - integration testing, - staged rollout procedures. Deployment follows the Secure Development Lifecycle (SDLC) and Change Management Policy. ### Continuous Monitoring AI systems are continuously observed for: - performance degradation, - anomalous behavior, - unexpected drift in predictions, - latency or reliability issues, - security threats and adversarial patterns. Automated monitors escalate alerts to human operators when thresholds are exceeded. ### Drift Management Model drift is detected through: - statistical change tracking, - periodic validation tests, - performance regression analysis. When drift is confirmed, the model is re‑evaluated, retrained, or rolled back. ## Risk Classification and Mitigation ### AI Risk Tiers Models are classified based on: - potential impact, - likelihood of harm, - regulatory exposure, - reliance on sensitive data, - user visibility. ### Mitigation Measures Each tier has required controls: - Tier 1 (Low Risk): Standard monitoring and documentation. - Tier 2 (Medium Risk): Additional fairness testing and human review gates. - Tier 3 (High Risk): Mandatory human‑in‑the‑loop workflows, advanced validation, and periodic auditing. ## Compliance Alignment ### U.S. Regulatory Alignment PhotoRobot aligns with: - NIST AI Risk Management Framework, - FTC fairness and transparency guidance, - emerging U.S. state‑level AI governance principles. ### International Regulatory Alignment Our governance approach is compatible with: - OECD AI Principles, - ISO/IEC AI standards under development, - EU AI Act classifications and risk‑tier requirements. This ensures readiness for compliance regardless of deployment market. ## Security Considerations for AI AI systems follow all baseline security controls defined in: - Access Control Policy, - Encryption Policy, - Incident Response Policy, - Logging & Monitoring Policy. Additional AI‑specific protections include: - secure sandboxing of model execution environments, - input validation against adversarial patterns, - hardened interfaces for model‑to‑model communication, - rate‑limiting for inference services, - audit logging of sensitive model decisions. ## Human Oversight and Intervention Even with automation, humans remain part of the decision-making loop for: - ambiguous cases, - high‑impact actions, - exceptions or overrides, - quality assurance processes. Oversight workflows include the ability to pause models, roll back versions, or reroute tasks to human operators. ## Conclusion This AI Governance Summary demonstrates PhotoRobot’s commitment to safe, ethical, transparent, and well‑controlled use of artificial intelligence. Through a structured governance approach, rigorous testing, continuous monitoring, and alignment with international frameworks, PhotoRobot ensures that AI features remain trustworthy, secure, and enterprise‑ready for customers across all regions. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/compliance-suite-overview # SECTION: compliance > compliance-suite-overview # TYPE: Trust Center: compliance # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Suite - Overview This PhotoRobot Compliance Document Suite Overview serves as the recommended starting point for all enterprise evaluations. ## PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Suite Overview This document represents the PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Suite Overview: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition;** *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## Introduction - Enterprise Compliance Suite Overview The Enterprise Compliance Suite serves as the central, high-level framework that unifies PhotoRobot’s global compliance, legal, and security posture into a single coherent structure. This overview document explains how enterprise customers—particularly U.S.-based procurement, security, and legal teams—should read, interpret, and rely upon the underlying documents in the suite. It also provides clarity on document relationships, scope, governance responsibilities, and integration with PhotoRobot’s broader Trust Center resources. This Suite is the recommended starting point for all enterprise evaluations. It outlines not only what documentation exists, but why it exists, how it fits together, and how it addresses the expectations of modern compliance programs. ## Suite Composition The Enterprise Compliance Suite consists of six tightly integrated documents, each with a distinct purpose: ### 1. PhotoRobot U.S. Security Overview A comprehensive yet readable enterprise-grade summary of PhotoRobot’s security posture, intended for American procurement and information security teams. It covers infrastructure protections, access control mechanisms, monitoring, encryption, SOC 2 alignment, CCPA/CPRA compatibility, and operational safeguards. This document functions as the primary reference for security reviewers. - **URL:** [https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/us-security](https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/us-security) ### 2. PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Sheet A structured YES / NO evaluation matrix that allows procurement teams to quickly assess compliance readiness. It includes a deeper narrative explaining each requirement, how PhotoRobot satisfies it, and which internal controls apply. This format is particularly well aligned with U.S. vendor intake workflows. - **URL:** [https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/enterprise-compliance](https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/enterprise-compliance) ### 3. PhotoRobot International Legal Pack (Intro) A high-level summary of PhotoRobot’s legal documents used outside the United States. It explains the role of Terms & Conditions, Data Processing Agreements, Privacy Policies, and license agreements. The intro clarifies how these materials complement (but do not replace) the U.S.-oriented compliance components. - **URL:** [https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/international-legal](https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/international-legal) ### 4. PhotoRobot International Security Pack (Intro) A structural overview of the technical security policies that apply globally, including Access Control, Encryption, Incident Response, Asset Management, and Change Management. Rather than duplicating full-length technical policies, this intro document explains how they relate to the U.S. Security Overview and when customers should reference each. - **URL:** [https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/international-security](https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/international-security) ### 5. PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary A detailed description of governance principles for AI-driven features. It covers dataset management, model validation, monitoring, interpretability, transparency, human oversight, and alignment with NIST, OECD, and EU AI Act requirements. This document is essential for customers operating in regulated industries or reviewing PhotoRobot’s AI-risk alignment. - **URL:** [https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/ai-governance](https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/ai-governance) ## Purpose and Value The Enterprise Compliance Suite exists to solve a practical problem: enterprise buyers—especially in the U.S.—expect a unified, well-organized body of documentation that describes a vendor’s compliance maturity. Instead of forcing customers to navigate individual policies or EU-specific legal texts, this Suite provides: - **A simplified entry point** for understanding compliance posture. - **A coherent narrative** connecting security, legal, privacy, and AI governance. - **A clear mapping** to industry frameworks like SOC 2, NIST, CCPA, GDPR, and OECD principles. - **An enterprise-oriented tone and structure**, matching expectations of Fortune 500 procurement teams. - **Consistency and alignment** with the broader PhotoRobot Trust Center. The Suite does not replace binding legal documents, but it does provide essential context for how they work together in a modern enterprise environment. ## Document Relationships ### Compliance Suite vs. Legal Pack The Legal Pack contains binding contractual material. The Enterprise Compliance Suite provides explanatory and supplementary documents designed to help legal teams understand PhotoRobot’s operating assumptions, responsibilities, and governance without parsing full contractual text upfront. ### Compliance Suite vs. Security Pack The Security Pack includes policy-level content such as Access Control, Encryption, and Incident Response. The U.S. Security Overview summarizes these in a business-friendly format. ### Compliance Suite vs. Privacy Privacy documents (such as the Privacy Policy and GDPR disclosures) remain separate under the Privacy category in the Trust Center. The Suite references privacy obligations but does not replicate them. ## Placement Within the Trust Center The Enterprise Compliance Suite appears in the **Compliance category**, listed above: - Legal - Security - Privacy This ensures that enterprise customers encounter a cohesive compliance narrative before diving into technical or legal details. ## Usage Recommendations for Customers ### For Procurement Teams Begin with the U.S. Security Overview and the Enterprise Compliance Sheet to obtain a clear view of PhotoRobot’s alignment with procurement requirements. ### For Security Teams Use the U.S. Security Overview as the foundation, followed by the International Security Pack intro to understand how policies reinforce operational controls. ### For Legal Teams Review the International Legal Pack intro for clarity on global documents, then proceed to the Legal category for binding terms. ### For AI Governance Assessors Use the AI Governance Summary to understand AI lifecycle management, risk mitigation, and regulatory positioning. ## Governance and Updates PhotoRobot maintains version control and review cadence to ensure all documents in this Suite remain accurate and aligned with evolving: - regulatory standards, - internal policies, - architectural changes, - global compliance expectations. Updates are communicated through the Trust Center, accompanied by version notes. ## Conclusion The Enterprise Compliance Suite provides a structured, enterprise-level overview of PhotoRobot’s compliance, governance, and security landscape. By placing this document at position zero, the Suite offers customers a clear and intuitive starting point that ties together the deeper, more specialized documents within the Compliance, Legal, and Security packs. It is the anchor of PhotoRobot’s enterprise transparency commitments and a foundational resource for any organization evaluating PhotoRobot as a technology partner. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/enterprise-compliance # SECTION: compliance > enterprise-compliance # TYPE: Trust Center: compliance # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Sheet This document represents the PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Sheet in a structured, detailed, and procurement-friendly overview. ## PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Sheet This document represents the PhotoRobot Enterprise Compliance Sheet: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition;** *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. The Enterprise Compliance Sheet provides procurement-ready summary and context. Use the matrix for rapid evaluation and the explanatory sections for deeper understanding. ## Introduction - Enterprise Compliance Sheet This Enterprise Compliance Sheet provides a structured, detailed, and procurement-friendly overview of PhotoRobot’s compliance posture across key regulatory, security, privacy, and operational domains. Unlike a simple yes/no table, this document includes contextual explanations, alignment notes, control references, and links to underlying governance frameworks. It is intended as a rapid vendor‑readiness resource for enterprise buyers and evaluators, especially within the United States. ## How to Use This Document Procurement teams should begin with the summary matrix and then review the explanatory sections for each requirement. Each subsection includes: - a description of the control area, - PhotoRobot’s compliance position, - references to the relevant internal policies, - operational notes and implementation details, - regional considerations (U.S. vs international). This Sheet complements, rather than replaces, the U.S. Security Overview and the International Legal & Security Pack introductions. ## Summary Compliance Matrix | Requirement | Supported | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | | SOC 2 Principles Alignment | YES | Controls aligned with Security, Availability, Confidentiality TSCs | | GDPR Compliance | YES | GDPR followed globally for uniformity | | CCPA / CPRA Alignment | YES | Consumer privacy controls implemented | | HIPAA Compatibility | OPTIONAL | Available via contractual addendum | | On-Prem Deployment | YES | Enterprise-only offering | | Hybrid Deployment | YES | Distributed-processing workflows supported | | U.S.-Only Hosting | PLANNED | Architecture prepared; region deployable | | Encryption at Rest | YES | AES-256 across databases and storage | | Encryption in Transit | YES | TLS 1.2+ system-wide | | MFA for Admin Access | YES | Required for all privileged roles | | Incident Response Framework | YES | Defined lifecycle with review gates | | Backup & Disaster Recovery | YES | Encrypted backups + tested recovery | ## SOC 2 Principles Alignment Although PhotoRobot is not yet formally SOC 2 certified, its internal control environment is deliberately designed to align with the **Security**, **Availability**, and **Confidentiality** Trust Service Criteria: - Access is restricted and logged per the **Access Control Policy**. - Infrastructure is monitored continuously according to the **Logging & Monitoring Policy**. - Change implementation follows a structured approval workflow as defined by the **Change Management Policy**. - Availability is supported via redundancy, fail-safes, and disaster recovery practices. This alignment significantly reduces the evaluation burden for enterprise customers with SOC 2 expectations. ## GDPR Compliance PhotoRobot operates under GDPR standards globally, regardless of customer location. This means: - lawful processing bases are documented, - data minimization principles are applied, - retention schedules are enforced, - deletion and access rights are supported, - privacy engineering practices influence system design. This approach simplifies compliance for multinational customers. ## CCPA / CPRA Alignment PhotoRobot supports consumer transparency and control rights consistent with California requirements: - data access, deletion, and opt-out capabilities, - clear disclosures on data use, - avoidance of selling personal information, - privacy-by-design integration. Although CCPA / CPRA do not apply to all global operations, their principles provide a strong baseline for U.S. customers. ## HIPAA Compatibility PhotoRobot is not a covered entity but can operate in a HIPAA-compatible configuration through: - business associate agreements (BAAs), - restricted logging modes, - enhanced privacy controls, - approved hosting architectures. This option is available for enterprise customers in healthcare or adjacent industries. ## Deployment Models ### On-Prem Deployment PhotoRobot offers on-prem solutions for customers requiring: - complete data residency control, - isolated network environments, - custom integration with internal systems. ### Hybrid Deployment Hybrid architectures support: - local processing for latency-sensitive workflows, - cloud-based orchestration or storage, - secure synchronization governed by the **Security Architecture Policy**. ## U.S.-Only Hosting Plan A dedicated U.S. infrastructure region is planned. The architecture is built for regional isolation and supports: - contractual commitments for data residency, - improved performance for U.S. customers, - future regulatory compliance. ## Encryption Controls All customer data benefits from: - **AES‑256 encryption at rest**, - **TLS 1.2+ encryption in transit**, - managed secret rotation policies, - restricted access to encryption keys. ## Access Control Administrative access is tightly limited: - MFA required for all privileged accounts, - role-based access enforced by policy, - automatic session expiration and anomaly detection, - regular access reviews per the **Access Control Policy**. ## Incident Response Readiness PhotoRobot maintains a structured, documented, and repeatable IR process featuring: - detection through automated monitoring, - classification logic, - containment workflows, - eradication and recovery procedures, - post-incident reviews, - corrective action tracking. ## Backup & Disaster Recovery Per the **Backup & Business Continuity Policy**, PhotoRobot maintains: - encrypted scheduled backups, - redundant storage across zones, - tested restoration procedures, - defined RTO and RPO objectives. ## Conclusion This Enterprise Compliance Sheet provides a comprehensive, procurement-ready summary of PhotoRobot’s compliance maturity. Its combination of high-level alignment, documented controls, and operational safeguards allows enterprise customers to evaluate PhotoRobot with confidence and efficiency. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/international-legal # SECTION: compliance > international-legal # TYPE: Trust Center: compliance # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot International Legal Pack Overview The International Legal Pack describes for enterprise customers all global legal documents governing PhotoRobot services outside the United States. ## PhotoRobot International Legal Pack Overview This document represents the PhotoRobot International Legal Pack Overview: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition;** *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. The International Legal Pack consolidates PhotoRobot’s contractual documents applicable outside the United States. These documents define rights, obligations, and data protection frameworks, especially under GDPR. ## Introduction - International Legal Pack Overview The International Legal Pack provides enterprise customers with a clear, structured explanation of all global legal documents governing PhotoRobot services outside the United States. Unlike the U.S.-optimized components of the Enterprise Compliance Suite, this pack centers on contractual documents that define rights, obligations, data protection requirements, and regulatory compliance frameworks applicable in international markets—especially the European Union. This overview is designed for legal teams, compliance officers, procurement specialists, and risk evaluators who need a coherent understanding of the international legal foundations supporting PhotoRobot’s platform. ## Purpose of the International Legal Pack The International Legal Pack exists to: - consolidate global contractual documents into a single reference point, - provide a clear interpretation of how each document functions, - demonstrate regulatory compliance, particularly under GDPR, - complement (but not duplicate) the Enterprise Compliance Suite, - support enterprise procurement processes requiring a deeper legal evaluation. The documents referenced in this pack are binding components of PhotoRobot’s contractual relationship with customers in applicable jurisdictions. ## Components of the International Legal Pack ### 1. Terms & Conditions The Terms & Conditions serve as the primary contractual agreement governing: - service usage rights and limitations, - payment terms, - warranties and disclaimers, - intellectual property responsibilities, - liability frameworks, - termination procedures. They establish the foundational legal relationship between PhotoRobot and its customers. ### 2. Data Processing Agreement (DPA) The DPA outlines the rules and responsibilities related to the processing of personal data under GDPR and comparable global privacy laws. It defines: - lawful bases for processing, - controller and processor roles, - subprocessor management, - security measures (linked to the Security Pack), - data subject rights and request handling, - breach notification requirements. The DPA is essential for organizations operating in regulated industries or handling personal data on a large scale. ### 3. Privacy Policy The Privacy Policy provides transparency to users regarding: - the types of personal data collected, - methods and purposes of processing, - retention schedules, - rights of individuals, - contact pathways for privacy-related concerns. This document fulfills GDPR’s requirement for transparent communication and informs end-users of their rights. ### 4. License Agreement Where applicable, PhotoRobot provides license terms covering the use of: - proprietary software components, - APIs and SDKs, - on-prem deployments, - technical documentation. The License Agreement defines permissible usage and reinforces intellectual property protections. ### 5. AI Regulatory Disclosures For jurisdictions implementing AI-specific governance (e.g., EU AI Act), supporting disclosures may be provided. These explain: - AI system categorization under regulatory frameworks, - transparency obligations, - datasets used, - intended purpose and potential limitations, - user obligations for safe use. This ensures that PhotoRobot’s AI-enabled features remain compliant with evolving regulatory landscapes. ## Relationship to Other Compliance Components ### Legal Pack vs. Enterprise Compliance Suite The Enterprise Compliance Suite provides narrative, U.S.-oriented summaries of PhotoRobot’s security and governance environment. The International Legal Pack contains **binding legal documents**, not summaries, and therefore must be interpreted as authoritative in all relevant jurisdictions. ### Legal Pack vs. Security Pack While the Legal Pack defines contractual and regulatory obligations, the Security Pack describes the technical measures used to fulfill them. For example: - The DPA requires certain security controls. - The Security Pack details how those controls are implemented. ### Legal Pack vs. Privacy The Privacy category in the Trust Center contains standalone privacy-focused documents, while the Legal Pack integrates privacy responsibilities into broader contractual frameworks. ## When Customers Should Use This Pack This pack is especially relevant when: - entering into new contracts, - undergoing legal reviews, - preparing internal compliance documentation, - assessing data protection obligations, - conducting international regulatory evaluations. U.S.-based enterprise customers may reference this pack when they operate globally or when a single unified compliance posture is required. ## Governance and Update Strategy PhotoRobot maintains a structured revision process consistent with: - GDPR requirements, - evolving regulatory guidance, - internal legal reviews, - industry best practices. Each update is reflected in the versioning history and communicated through the Trust Center. ## Conclusion The International Legal Pack provides the legal foundation that supports PhotoRobot’s global operations. It explains the purpose, structure, and relevance of each core legal document and clarifies how these materials integrate with the broader Enterprise Compliance Suite. Customers should rely on this pack when evaluating contractual terms, privacy obligations, and regulatory compliance requirements outside the United States. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/international-security # SECTION: compliance > international-security # TYPE: Trust Center: compliance # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot International Security Pack Overview The International Security Pack provides a structured overview of PhotoRobot’s global technical and operational security policies. ## PhotoRobot International Security Pack Overview This document represents the PhotoRobot International Security Pack Overview: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition;** *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## Introduction - International Security Pack Overview The International Security Pack provides a structured overview of PhotoRobot’s global technical and operational security policies. While the U.S. Security Overview presents an executive‑friendly narrative optimized for American procurement teams, this document focuses on the underlying frameworks, controls, and governance mechanisms that guide PhotoRobot’s security practices across all international regions. This overview explains the purpose and scope of each policy, how they interconnect, and how customers should interpret them during audits, vendor assessments, or technical due‑diligence processes. ## Purpose of the International Security Pack The International Security Pack exists to: - consolidate all core technical security policies into a unified reference, - provide clarity on security governance and operational responsibilities, - support compliance with GDPR, ISO 27001 principles, SOC 2 alignment, and industry best practices, - ensure transparency for customers evaluating infrastructure and data protection controls, - complement the higher‑level summaries found in the Enterprise Compliance Suite. ## Components of the International Security Pack The following policies form the backbone of PhotoRobot’s technical and operational security posture. ### 1. Security Architecture Policy Defines the architectural safeguards used to isolate workloads, enforce boundaries, and minimize attack surface. Topics include: - layered service design, - privilege separation, - resource isolation principles, - service‑to‑service authentication, - architectural review requirements. ### 2. Access Control Policy Establishes rules for identity lifecycle management and access authorizations. It covers: - MFA enforcement, - RBAC structures and role definitions, - onboarding and offboarding controls, - privileged‑access monitoring, - periodic access reviews. This policy ensures that only authorized individuals access systems and data. ### 3. Encryption & Cryptography Policy Defines mandatory encryption practices: - AES‑256 encryption at rest, - TLS 1.2+ encryption in transit, - key‑management protocols, - automated rotation cycles, - approved cipher suites. The policy also outlines restrictions on exporting cryptographic materials. ### 4. Incident Response Policy Provides a full lifecycle process for responding to security incidents. Key elements include: - detection and alerting, - severity classification, - containment and eradication procedures, - communication workflows, - forensic collection guidelines, - post‑incident review and corrective actions. The IR policy ensures consistency and accountability during high‑severity events. ### 5. Asset Management Policy Specifies the rules for tracking and protecting assets, including: - hardware inventories, - software inventories, - configuration documentation, - approved deployment environments, - classification of sensitive components. This policy supports patching, risk identification, and operational hygiene. ### 6. Change Management Policy Describes the controls required for modifying production systems, including: - required approvals, - risk assessments, - rollback plans, - scheduled deployment windows, - release‑verification requirements. It ensures stable, predictable operation and aligns with SOC 2 change‑control expectations. ### 7. Backup & Business Continuity Policy Defines the safeguards for ensuring system resilience: - backup frequency and encryption rules, - geographic redundancy, - restoration testing schedules, - disaster recovery procedures, - continuity planning. This policy governs PhotoRobot’s ability to recover from disruptive events. ### 8. Logging & Monitoring Policy Outlines: - required log types, - retention commitments, - monitoring thresholds, - anomaly detection procedures, - alert routing protocols. The policy ensures visibility into operational and security events. ## Relationship to the U.S. Security Overview The U.S. Security Overview provides: - high‑level explanations, - executive summaries, - procurement‑ready narratives. The International Security Pack provides: - policy‑level depth, - operational requirements, - governance structures, - technical expectations. They are complementary: - **U.S. Overview = what we do**; - **Security Pack = how we do it**. ## When Customers Should Use This Pack This pack is especially useful when: - undergoing detailed security audits, - completing SOC 2 or ISO‑aligned vendor questionnaires, - performing internal security reviews, - validating compliance with GDPR or regulated data workflows, - reviewing technical expectations for on‑prem or hybrid deployments. International customers rely on this pack as the authoritative source of operational security truth. ## Governance and Versioning Policies are reviewed and updated according to: - internal governance cycles, - regulatory changes, - audit recommendations, - architectural evolution, - post‑incident learnings. Each policy includes version history, scope, and change descriptions. ## Conclusion The International Security Pack forms the technical foundation of PhotoRobot’s global security program. It establishes clear expectations, mandatory control requirements, and governance mechanisms that support resilient, compliant, and trustworthy operation across all regions. Together with the U.S. Security Overview and the Enterprise Compliance Suite, it provides a complete picture of PhotoRobot’s enterprise‑grade security maturity. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/compliance/us-security # SECTION: compliance > us-security # TYPE: Trust Center: compliance # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot U.S. Security Overview This document provides a comprehensive, enterprise-grade security overview tailored specifically for U.S. procurement, legal, and information security teams. ## PhotoRobot U.S. Security Overview This document represents the PhotoRobot U.S. Security Overview: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition;** *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. The PhotoRobot U.S. Security Overview section serves as the recommended entry point for enterprise reviews, unifying legal, security, privacy, and governance documentation. It provides high-level context before diving into specific contractual or technical documents. ## Introduction - PhotoRobot U.S. Security Overview This document provides a comprehensive, enterprise-grade security overview tailored specifically for U.S. procurement, legal, and information security teams. It explains PhotoRobot’s security principles, operational safeguards, architectural models, compliance alignment, and ongoing commitments to resilience and data protection. While it references underlying technical policies, it is intentionally written in a clear, modern, and accessible style suitable for executive and technical audiences alike. ## Security Architecture Overview ### Layered Architecture PhotoRobot operates on a multi-layer architecture designed to isolate workloads, contain risks, and ensure predictable performance. The architecture consists of: - **Presentation layer** that handles user interactions through secure endpoints. - **Application services layer** composed of containerized components with enforced API boundaries. - **Data access layer** with audited gateways to persistence services. - **Infrastructure layer** responsible for orchestration, networking, and encrypted storage. This separation ensures that vulnerabilities in one layer do not propagate to others, following established principles from our Security Architecture Policy. ### Environment Segmentation Production, staging, and development environments are strictly separated. Access to production is limited, logged, and continuously monitored. Sensitive operations—such as deployment, configuration changes, and database access—are governed by Change Management Policy protocols requiring approvals and automated enforcement. ### Zero-Trust Principles Although not a full implementation of zero-trust networking, PhotoRobot applies its key principles: - never trust implicit identities, - validate every request with context-aware authentication, - restrict lateral movement, - require explicit role-based permissions for all internal processes. ## Data Hosting, Residency, and Encryption ### Hosting in EU High-Security Data Centers Primary hosting occurs in GDPR-compliant EU facilities with ISO 27001 auditing, redundant power systems, multi-tier fire suppression, and controlled physical access. These data centers maintain continuous monitoring and independent security certifications. ### U.S. Hosting Readiness The platform architecture supports seamless deployment to a U.S.-based region. This includes: - compatible data abstraction layers, - regional isolation capability, - configurable residency policies, - scalable service clusters ready for geographic replication. For enterprise customers requiring U.S.-only hosting, contractual terms can include roadmap milestones and early-access deployment options. ### Encryption Standards - **In Transit**: TLS 1.2+ enforced across all endpoints, including internal service-to-service traffic. - **At Rest**: AES-256 encryption across storage volumes, backups, and replicated snapshots. - **Key Protection**: Secrets are stored in vault-managed enclaves with restricted administrative access and automated rotation cycles. ## Access Control and Identity Management ### Identity Governance Access to internal systems is controlled via centralized identity management. All administrative sessions require: - MFA, - hardware-token-based authentication (for high-privilege roles), - short-lived access tokens. ### Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) Permissions are granted strictly on the basis of explicit roles defined in the Access Control Policy. Access is reviewed: - on every onboarding/offboarding event, - after role changes, - periodically via automated reconciliation scripts. ### Session Security Sessions are protected through inactivity timeouts, strict IP validation rules, device fingerprinting, and anomaly detection heuristics that identify suspicious authentication behavior. ## Operational Safeguards ### Defensive Mechanisms PhotoRobot implements several layers of runtime protection: - **Multi-layer caching** to offload application pressure, - **Automated throttling** against abusive or malformed workloads, - **Query sanitization and normalization**, - **Input validation filters** consistent with OWASP guidelines. ### Integrity of Distributed Operations Because PhotoRobot relies on distributed components for performance and reliability, synchronization safeguards ensure: - atomic write operations, - prevention of race conditions, - rollback on conflicting state updates, - automatic divergence detection. These mechanisms are core to ensuring data consistency across clusters. ### Monitoring and Logging Logs are retained and monitored according to the Logging & Monitoring Policy. This includes: - application logs, - access logs, - event logs, - security anomaly records, - infrastructure telemetry (CPU, memory, I/O, network). Alerts feed into a centralized monitoring system with 24/7 availability for critical events. ## Secure Development and Change Management ### SDLC (Secure Development Lifecycle) All code changes pass through: - peer review, - static code analysis, - dependency scanning, - vulnerability triage, - automated test suites, - controlled deployment scheduling. Security considerations are included in every design specification. ### Change Management High-risk changes require: - documented assessment, - two-stage approval, - rollback procedures, - scheduled deployment windows, - verification and post-deployment review. These processes align with SOC 2 expectations for change governance. ## Incident Response and Business Continuity ### Incident Response Lifecycle Our Incident Response Policy defines the following workflow: 1. **Detection** – triggered by automated monitoring or manual reporting. 2. **Classification** – determining severity and scope. 3. **Containment** – isolating impacted components. 4. **Eradication** – removing root causes. 5. **Recovery** – restoring normal operations. 6. **Post-Incident Review** – documenting lessons learned and implementing improvements. ### Disaster Recovery Backups occur automatically at regular intervals, encrypted and stored redundantly across regions. Recovery procedures are tested on a scheduled cadence. Recovery time objectives (RTO) and recovery point objectives (RPO) satisfy enterprise expectations for continuity. ## Compliance Alignment ### SOC 2 Alignment PhotoRobot aligns with SOC 2 Trust Service Criteria: - Security, - Availability, - Confidentiality. While not yet certified, internal controls and documentation mirror SOC 2 frameworks for ease of customer evaluation. ### GDPR Compliance All data is processed under GDPR standards, even outside the EU, ensuring high privacy protections. ### CCPA/CPRA Alignment PhotoRobot implements: - opt-out mechanisms, - data access rights, - deletion rights, - transparency commitments. ### AI Governance AI-driven features follow strict governance principles including transparency, safety, dataset governance, and human oversight. See the AI Governance Summary for details. ## U.S. Regional Expansion Roadmap PhotoRobot maintains an architectural and operational roadmap to deploy dedicated U.S. infrastructure regions. Expected benefits include: - improved latency for U.S. customers, - adherence to contractual data residency, - meeting industry-specific regulatory requirements, - enabling U.S.-only operational isolation. ## Conclusion This U.S. Security Overview provides a detailed, practical, and enterprise-ready description of PhotoRobot’s security posture, operational safeguards, and compliance alignment. It reflects our commitment to transparency, resilience, and continuous improvement—ensuring trust for all customers, especially those operating within the U.S. market. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/governance/anti-corruption # SECTION: governance > anti-corruption # TYPE: Trust Center: governance # UPDATED: 2025-12-31 --- # PhotoRobot Anti-Corruption Policy This Anti-Corruption Policy defines PhotoRobot's commitment to conducting business ethically and without corruption in any form. ## PhotoRobot Anti-Corruption Policy This document represents the PhotoRobot Anti-Corruption Policy: **Version 1.0** — PhotoRobot Edition (uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic). **uni-Robot Ltd.** (operating under the brand PhotoRobot) Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic ## 1. Purpose of Policy PhotoRobot maintains a zero-tolerance policy toward bribery, corruption, facilitation payments, and unethical influence. This policy applies to all employees, management, contractors, and representatives acting on behalf of PhotoRobot. ## 2. Prohibition of Bribery PhotoRobot strictly prohibits: - Offering, promising, or giving any undue advantage to obtain business or influence decisions - Accepting bribes or improper advantages - Indirect bribery through intermediaries - Facilitation payments of any kind This prohibition applies in both public and private sector interactions. ## 3. Gifts, Hospitality & Business Courtesies Reasonable business hospitality may be permitted if it: - Is transparent and proportionate - Has legitimate business purpose - Does not influence or appear to influence decision-making - Complies with applicable laws Excessive, inappropriate, or secret gifts and benefits are prohibited. ## 4. Conflicts of Interest Employees and representatives must avoid situations where personal interests conflict with company interests. Potential conflicts must be disclosed to management immediately. ## 5. Third Parties & Intermediaries PhotoRobot may engage distributors, partners, or service providers. The company expects all third parties to: - Comply with anti-corruption laws - Act with integrity - Avoid unethical practices Engagements with third parties must be based on legitimate business justification. ## 6. Record Keeping & Transparency PhotoRobot maintains accurate and transparent financial records. No off-the-books accounts or hidden transactions are permitted. All payments must be properly documented and authorized. ## 7. Reporting & Protection Against Retaliation Suspected violations of this policy may be reported to: **legal@photorobot.com** Reports will be handled confidentially. Retaliation against individuals who report concerns in good faith is strictly prohibited. ## 8. Compliance & Enforcement Violations of this policy may result in: - Disciplinary action - Termination of contracts - Legal action where applicable Management is responsible for oversight and enforcement of this policy. ## 9. Review and Updates This Anti-Corruption Policy is reviewed periodically and updated as necessary to reflect legal or organizational changes. The current version is available via the [PhotoRobot Trust Center](https://www.photorobot.com/trust-center). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/governance/corporate-compliance # SECTION: governance > corporate-compliance # TYPE: Trust Center: governance # UPDATED: 2025-12-31 --- # PhotoRobot Corporate Compliance Statement This Corporate Compliance Statement outlines the principles and commitments of PhotoRobot regarding lawful, ethical, and responsible business conduct. ## PhotoRobot - Corporate Compliance Statement This document represents the PhotoRobot - Corporate Compliance Statement: **Version 1.0** — PhotoRobot Edition (uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic). **uni-Robot Ltd.** (operating under the brand PhotoRobot) Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic ## 1. Purpose of Statement This Corporate Compliance Statement outlines the principles and commitments of uni-Robot Ltd. ("PhotoRobot") regarding lawful, ethical, and responsible business conduct. PhotoRobot is committed to conducting its business in full compliance with applicable laws and regulations, and in accordance with recognized international standards of ethical business behavior. This statement applies to all employees, contractors, management, and business partners acting on behalf of PhotoRobot. ## 2. Legal Compliance PhotoRobot conducts its operations in accordance with: - Applicable laws of the Czech Republic - European Union regulations (including GDPR) - International trade and export control regulations - Applicable tax and accounting regulations - Contractual obligations with customers and partners Compliance is considered a fundamental operational requirement, not an optional objective. ## 3. Ethical Business Conduct PhotoRobot maintains a zero-tolerance approach toward: - Bribery and corruption - Fraud and financial misconduct - Anti-competitive practices - Conflicts of interest - Misrepresentation of products or services Business decisions are made transparently and based on legitimate commercial considerations. Further details are described in the [PhotoRobot Anti-Corruption Policy](https://www.photorobot.com/governance/anti-corruption). ## 4. Data Protection & Information Security PhotoRobot processes personal data in compliance with: - GDPR [Regulation (EU) 2016 / 679] - Czech data protection laws Security and data protection are implemented through: - Technical and Organizational Measures (TOMs) - Internal security governance - Structured access controls - Secure cloud infrastructure Details are available in: - [PhotoRobot Legal Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/legal) - [PhotoRobot Security Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/security) - [PhotoRobot Technical and Organizational Measures (TOMs)](https://www.photorobot.com/security/toms) ## 5. Human Rights & Labor Standards PhotoRobot respects internationally recognized human rights principles, including: - Fair working conditions - Non-discrimination - Equal opportunity - Respectful workplace conduct - Prohibition of forced or child labor The company operates under Czech and EU labor laws and promotes a safe and respectful working environment. ## 6. Conflict of Interest Employees and management must avoid situations where personal interests conflict with company interests. Any potential conflict must be disclosed and resolved transparently. ## 7. Responsible Supply Chain PhotoRobot expects suppliers and business partners to adhere to comparable standards of: - Legal compliance - Ethical conduct - Anti-corruption - Data protection - Environmental responsibility These expectations are further defined in the [PhotoRobot - Supplier Code of Conduct](https://www.photorobot.com/governance/supplier-code). ## 8. Reporting & Whistleblowing PhotoRobot encourages internal reporting of compliance concerns. Concerns may be raised through management channels or via: **legal@photorobot.com** Reports are handled confidentially and without retaliation. ## 9. Governance & Oversight Compliance oversight is maintained by company management. The Managing Director of uni-Robot Ltd. holds ultimate responsibility for corporate compliance and governance. Managing Director: Kamil Hrbáček ## 10. Review and Updates This Corporate Compliance Statement is reviewed periodically and may be updated to reflect: - Regulatory changes - Organizational developments - Evolving best practices The current version is publicly available via the [PhotoRobot Trust Center](https://www.photorobot.com/trust-center). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/governance/esg # SECTION: governance > esg # TYPE: Trust Center: governance # UPDATED: 2025-12-31 --- # PhotoRobot Environmental, Social & Governance (ESG) Statement This document represents the PhotoRobot Environmental, Social & Governance (ESG) Statement: PhotoRobot Edition (uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic). ## PhotoRobot Environmental, Social & Governance (ESG) Statement This document represents the PhotoRobot Environmental, Social & Governance (ESG) Statement: **Version 1.0** — PhotoRobot Edition (uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic). **uni-Robot Ltd.** (operating under the brand PhotoRobot) Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic ## 1. Statement Introduction PhotoRobot recognizes the growing importance of responsible and sustainable business practices. This ESG Statement outlines our approach to Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) principles in the context of our operations as a robotics manufacturer and cloud technology provider. While PhotoRobot is not legally required to publish a formal ESG report, we are committed to responsible growth and transparent governance. ## Environmental ### 2. Responsible Manufacturing As a producer of robotic systems, PhotoRobot is committed to: - Designing durable and long-lasting hardware solutions - Optimizing mechanical design to reduce unnecessary material usage - Promoting modularity to extend product lifecycle - Supporting repairability and component replacement We aim to reduce waste by favoring high-quality components and long-term usability over disposable design. ### 3. Energy & Infrastructure PhotoRobot cloud services are hosted on professional cloud infrastructure providers (e.g., Google Cloud Platform) that implement energy-efficient data center practices. Where feasible, we aim to: - Optimize software performance to reduce computational load - Use efficient hardware components - Minimize unnecessary energy consumption in development and operations ## Social ### 4. Workplace & Culture PhotoRobot promotes: - Equal opportunity and non-discrimination - Fair working conditions - Respectful and professional conduct - Safe and healthy work environment We operate in compliance with Czech and EU labor laws and encourage responsible internal communication and collaboration. ### 5. Customer Responsibility Our products support automation of content production processes, helping businesses: - Increase operational efficiency - Reduce manual repetitive tasks - Improve workplace ergonomics in photography workflows We strive to build technology that enhances productivity while maintaining safety and ethical standards. ## Governance ### 6. Corporate Governance PhotoRobot operates under structured governance led by company management. Governance principles include: - Legal compliance - Transparent financial practices - Ethical business conduct - Anti-corruption commitments - Data protection and information security Further details are available in: - [PhotoRobot - Corporate Compliance Statement](https://www.photorobot.com/governance/corporate-compliance) - [PhotoRobot Anti-Corruption Policy](https://www.photorobot.com/governance/anti-corruption) - [PhotoRobot - Supplier Code of Conduct](https://www.photorobot.com/governance/supplier-code) - [PhotoRobot Legal Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/legal) - [PhotoRobot Security Documentation](https://www.photorobot.com/security) ### 7. Data Protection & Security Governance As a provider of cloud-based services, we place strong emphasis on: - GDPR compliance - Technical and Organizational Measures (TOMs) - Role-based access controls - Secure cloud infrastructure Security and privacy governance are core components of our operational model. ### 8. Continuous Improvement PhotoRobot views ESG as an evolving framework. We are committed to: - Periodically reviewing our practices - Adapting to regulatory developments - Improving transparency as the company grows - Aligning with industry best practices ## 9. Contact For ESG-related inquiries, contact: legal@photorobot.com ## 10. Final Note This ESG Statement reflects PhotoRobot's current commitments and operational approach. As a growing technology company, we aim to continuously strengthen our environmental responsibility, social impact, and governance standards. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/governance/health-safety # SECTION: governance > health-safety # TYPE: Trust Center: governance # UPDATED: 2025-12-31 --- # PhotoRobot Health Safety Commitment Statement This document represents the PhotoRobot Health Safety Commitment Statement: PhotoRobot Edition (uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic). ## PhotoRobot Health Safety Commitment Statement This document represents the PhotoRobot Health Safety Commitment Statement: **Version 1.0** — PhotoRobot Edition (uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic). **uni-Robot Ltd.** (operating under the brand PhotoRobot) Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic ## 1. Purpose of Statement This Health & Safety Commitment Statement outlines PhotoRobot's dedication to maintaining a safe and healthy working environment for employees, contractors, partners, and visitors. As a manufacturer of robotic systems and a provider of cloud-based services, PhotoRobot recognizes the importance of safety in both physical operations and technical environments. ## 2. Compliance with Applicable Regulations PhotoRobot operates in accordance with: - Czech occupational health and safety legislation - European Union health and safety directives - Applicable industry standards - Internal safety procedures and risk management practices Compliance with health and safety regulations is mandatory across all operational activities. ## 3. Workplace Safety PhotoRobot is committed to: - Providing a safe and healthy working environment\ - Identifying and mitigating workplace hazards\ - Maintaining appropriate safety procedures and documentation\ - Ensuring that equipment and machinery are used in accordance with manufacturer guidelines Safety considerations are integrated into operational processes and facility management. ## 4. Training and Awareness Employees are expected to: - Follow established safety procedures - Use equipment responsibly - Report unsafe conditions or incidents PhotoRobot promotes safety awareness as part of onboarding and operational processes. ## 5. Product Safety PhotoRobot robotic systems are designed and manufactured with safety in mind. Where applicable: - Products are designed and manufactured in accordance with applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements in the jurisdictions where they are placed on the market. - Appropriate documentation and operating guidelines are provided. - Safety features are integrated into hardware and firmware design. Customers are responsible for operating equipment in accordance with provided documentation and local regulations. ## 6. Incident Reporting and Prevention PhotoRobot maintains internal procedures for: - Reporting workplace incidents - Investigating safety-related events - Implementing corrective and preventive measures The company encourages proactive identification of risks and continuous improvement of safety standards. ## 7. Continuous Improvement Health and safety practices are reviewed periodically to ensure alignment with: - Regulatory developments - Technological changes - Organizational growth PhotoRobot aims to continuously improve safety standards in all areas of its operations. ## 8. Responsibility Company management holds overall responsibility for health and safety compliance. Managing Director: Kamil Hrbáček ## 9. Review and Updates This Health & Safety Commitment Statement is reviewed periodically and updated where necessary. The current version is available via the [PhotoRobot Trust Center](https://www.photorobot.com/trust-center). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/governance/supplier-code # SECTION: governance > supplier-code # TYPE: Trust Center: governance # UPDATED: 2025-12-31 --- # PhotoRobot Supplier Code of Conduct The Supplier Code of Conduct defines the standards of ethical, legal, and responsible behavior expected from suppliers, contractors, and business partners. ## PhotoRobot - Supplier Code of Conduct This document represents the PhotoRobot - Supplier Code of Conduct: **Version 1.0** — PhotoRobot Edition (uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic). **uni-Robot Ltd.** (operating under the brand PhotoRobot) Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic ## 1. Purpose of Statement This Supplier Code of Conduct defines the standards of ethical, legal, and responsible behavior expected from suppliers, contractors, and business partners of PhotoRobot (uni-Robot Ltd.). Suppliers are expected to conduct business in compliance with applicable laws and internationally recognized standards. ## 2. Legal Compliance Suppliers must comply with: - All applicable local and international laws - EU regulations where relevant - Trade and export control laws - Data protection laws, including GDPR where applicable Compliance with contractual obligations is mandatory. ## 3. Anti-Corruption & Ethical Conduct Suppliers must: - Prohibit bribery and corruption in any form - Avoid conflicts of interest - Maintain transparent and accurate financial records - Avoid anti-competitive behavior Facilitation payments and improper advantages are strictly prohibited. ## 4. Human Rights & Labor Standards Suppliers must uphold internationally recognized human rights principles, including: - No forced labor or human trafficking - No child labor - Non-discrimination - Fair wages and working conditions - Freedom of association where legally permitted Suppliers must comply with applicable labor laws in their jurisdiction. ## 5. Health & Safety Suppliers must: - Provide a safe and healthy working environment - Comply with applicable occupational health and safety regulations - Take reasonable measures to prevent workplace accidents ## 6. Environmental Responsibility Suppliers are expected to: - Comply with environmental laws and regulations - Minimize environmental impact where reasonably possible - Promote responsible use of resources ## 7. Data Protection & Confidentiality Suppliers handling personal or confidential data must: - Implement appropriate security measures - Protect confidential business information - Process personal data only as contractually authorized ## 8. Subcontracting Suppliers must ensure that any subcontractors involved in delivering services related to PhotoRobot adhere to comparable standards of compliance and ethical conduct. ## 9. Reporting & Cooperation Suppliers are encouraged to report suspected violations of this Code to: **legal@photorobot.com** Suppliers must cooperate in good faith in the investigation of compliance concerns. ## 10. Compliance & Enforcement Failure to comply with this Supplier Code of Conduct may result in: - Corrective action requirements - Suspension of cooperation - Termination of contractual relationships ## 11. Review and Updates This Supplier Code of Conduct may be updated periodically. The current version is available via the [PhotoRobot Trust Center](https://www.photorobot.com/trust-center). --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal-version/warranty-v1-1 # SECTION: legal-version > warranty-v1-1 # TYPE: Legal document (version) # UPDATED: 2026-09-23 --- # PhotoRobot Warranty Terms v1.1 These Warranty Terms are intended for commercial customers. Where the Customer is a consumer, mandatory consumer protection rules apply in addition to, and prevail over, these Warranty Terms to the extent they cannot be limited by contract. ## PhotoRobot Warranty Terms **Version 1.1 — PhotoRobot Edition** Issued by uni-Robot s.r.o., Czech Republic Effective from 23 September 2026. Supersedes Version 1.0. The English version of this document controls. Any other language version is provided for convenience only. ## 1. Definitions **Equipment** means a PhotoRobot-branded machine including its functions, upgrades and accessories. It does not include any software programs, whether pre-installed with the Equipment or installed later. Software is covered separately under the PhotoRobot License Agreement and, for cloud components, the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software. **Customer** means the party acquiring the Equipment under the Hardware Contract. **Hardware Contract** means the contract under which the Equipment is supplied, including its schedules. **Acceptance Criteria** has the meaning given to it in the applicable Hardware Contract, including any provision under which those criteria are deemed satisfied. **Consumable and wear parts** means parts subject to depletion or wear in normal use, such as X-rings for the glass plate support, rubber guide rollers and glass plates. **RMA** means the Return Material Authorization process described in the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware. **PWS** means Premium Worldwide Support as described in section 8. uni-Robot s.r.o., as the manufacturer of PhotoRobot, warrants that the Equipment used in its specified operating environment will conform to its officially published specifications. During the warranty period, uni-Robot s.r.o. will repair the Equipment without charge. uni-Robot s.r.o. may require proof of purchase (a copy of the sales receipt or purchase invoice) to confirm the warranty claim. ## 2. Warranty period The warranty period covers 12 months and begins on the date on which the Acceptance Criteria set out in the Hardware Contract are satisfied or deemed satisfied. Where the Hardware Contract does not provide for Acceptance Criteria, the warranty period begins on the date the Equipment is delivered to the Customer. ## 3. Coverage If the Equipment does not function as warranted during the warranty period and the problem cannot be resolved by phone, electronically, or by application of software updates, uni-Robot s.r.o., its subcontractor, or a reseller approved by uni-Robot s.r.o. to provide warranty service will, at its discretion, repair the Equipment or replace defective components so that the Equipment functions as warranted. **Territory.** These warranties apply in the country to which the Equipment is delivered under the Hardware Contract. Where the Hardware Contract specifies more than one place of delivery, they apply in each such country. Where the Equipment is moved to another country after delivery, warranty service outside the country of delivery is subject to uni-Robot s.r.o.’s prior written confirmation and may be affected by logistics, customs, export control, safety or service availability limitations. **Installation, commissioning and training.** Installation, commissioning and training performed by uni-Robot s.r.o. personnel shall be carried out with due professional care and skill and in accordance with the Supplier’s documented procedures. This obligation is subject to any applicable limitation of liability agreed between the parties and does not expand the remedies available under the applicable contract. Ad-hoc “how-to” guidance and photographic technique consulting provided outside the scope of the agreed installation and training services are not covered by this obligation. **Replacement parts.** Any replacement part supplied by uni-Robot s.r.o. is covered by a separate warranty of twelve (12) months, commencing on the date the part is installed by uni-Robot s.r.o. or, where the Customer installs the part, on the date of its delivery. This warranty applies to the replacement part only and does not extend the warranty period applicable to the remainder of the Equipment. Consumable and wear parts supplied as replacements are covered against manufacturing defect only. **Advance replacement.** Where a defective part must be repaired and a replacement is available from stock, uni-Robot s.r.o. will ship an advance replacement so that the Customer can continue production. Under warranty this is at no charge, subject to return of the defective part within fifteen (15) business days of delivery of the replacement; otherwise the replacement is invoiced at list price. Advance replacement depends on parts availability and is not a guaranteed lead time. uni-Robot s.r.o. warranties apply only to Equipment acquired for the Customer’s own use, not for the purpose of resale. uni-Robot s.r.o. does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the Equipment, or that uni-Robot s.r.o. will repair all defects. These warranties are the exclusive warranties of uni-Robot s.r.o. and replace all other warranties, including implied warranties or conditions of satisfactory quality, merchantability, non-infringement, and fitness for a particular purpose. uni-Robot s.r.o. warranties do not apply in cases of misuse, modification, damage not caused by uni-Robot s.r.o., or failure to follow the Equipment manufacturer’s instructions. In such cases, warranties are limited to the duration of the warranty period and after this period no warranties shall apply. Nothing in these Warranty Terms limits any statutory rights of consumers that cannot be limited by contract. If the Equipment fails during the warranty period, the time spent on repair is added to the warranty period. This period begins on the day the defect is reported to technical support and to the product seller, reseller, agency, representative, importer, or manufacturer, if technical support does not exist. If during the warranty period the Equipment fails due to a manufacturing or assembly defect, the repair is carried out without any service fee or parts replacement fee. Consumable and wear parts are covered against manufacturing defects only, in accordance with section 5. ## 4. Customer-supplied equipment The use of Customer-supplied computers, cameras, lenses, monitors, cabling and related accessories which uni-Robot s.r.o. has reviewed and confirmed in writing as compatible shall not void, limit or otherwise affect the warranty on the Equipment. For the avoidance of doubt, this warranty does not extend to the Customer-supplied items themselves, which remain subject to their respective manufacturers’ warranties. Confirmation of compatibility is given in writing, identifies the specific items reviewed, and is issued before procurement wherever the Customer provides the specification in time. ## 5. Exclusions The Equipment is under warranty coverage by uni-Robot s.r.o. against any defect that may occur during manufacturing, assembly and/or defective parts. Excessive or improper use of the Equipment is not covered by the warranty (for example scratched glass parts). Accessories, consumables, supplies, and wear and fatigue-prone support components (for example X-rings for the glass plate support) are not covered by the warranty. Warranty on the Equipment is terminated by removing or modifying Equipment or part identification labels. The obligations of free repair and replacement of the product under warranty cannot be applied in the following cases: - the product defect occurs due to use contrary to the conditions specified in the user manual; - the product has been opened, used, or previously repaired by unauthorized persons; - use of the product by connecting to an unsuitable voltage or with a faulty electrical installation; - the serial number of the product has been modified or removed; - defect or damage to the product occurs during transport outside the responsibility of uni-Robot s.r.o.; - breakage or scratching of the exterior of the product while in the Customer’s possession; - the product is damaged as a result of use with accessories or equipment purchased from third parties, other than Customer-supplied equipment confirmed as compatible under section 4, or as a result of unauthorized service; - damage caused by natural disasters, such as fire, lightning, flood, earthquake, and similar events. For services provided by technical support during the warranty period as part of regular maintenance stipulated by the manufacturer or importer, no labour charges will be requested from the Customer. ## 6. Your responsibilities The Customer will: - inform uni-Robot s.r.o. or the dealer of any changes in the location of the Equipment; - maintain the recommended operating environment for the Equipment; - before replacing the Equipment or its part, remove all additional elements, parts, modifications, extensions, and expansions that are not covered by this warranty, and ensure that the Equipment is not subject to any legal restrictions that prevent its replacement; where the type of warranty service requires delivery of the defective Equipment or part to uni-Robot s.r.o., send it suitably packaged to the location designated by uni-Robot s.r.o.; - obtain authorization from the owner of the Equipment before requesting warranty service, if relevant; - provide sufficient and safe access to the facilities and the Equipment to enable the services to be performed (clean, well-lit, and suitable for the purpose), including a suitable workspace allowing disassembly and re-assembly of the Equipment; - provide a stable internet connection where remote diagnostics are required; - follow the service procedures established by uni-Robot s.r.o., and comply with all operator responsibilities instructions; - allow uni-Robot s.r.o., its subcontractor, or the dealer to install mandatory technical changes, such as those related to safety; and - remain responsible for reasonable protection of the Equipment and all data contained therein, including backups and configuration, whenever uni-Robot s.r.o. remotely accesses it to help isolate the cause of the problem. If the Customer refuses remote access, uni-Robot s.r.o. may be limited in its ability to resolve the problem. ## 7. Shipping, insurance and RMA The return of defective components is handled under clause 7 of the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware. Each party shall insure the shipment for the leg of transport for which it bears the shipping cost under that clause, for not less than the replacement value of the component. Risk of loss of or damage to a component in transit rests with the party responsible for insuring that leg. ## 8. Premium Worldwide Support (PWS) PWS is PhotoRobot’s operational-continuity program for the production imaging workflow. It is defined, together with its binding terms, in the PhotoRobot PWS Program document. **Factory PWS.** New Equipment is delivered with Factory PWS included in the Equipment price, valid for the first year from the Installation Date as defined in the PWS Program. A higher service level during the first year can be arranged for a surcharge. **Renewal.** From year two onwards PWS is renewable. Uninterrupted renewal preserves the original preferential terms; the PWS Program sets out the grace period and the consequences of a lapse. **Service levels.** The objective for the first Qualified Technical Response is set by the service level contracted in the individual PWS offer. Severity of an individual ticket governs the order and intensity of handling within that contracted level and is a separate matter. **Configurable elements.** Several parameters are set in the individual PWS offer rather than by these Warranty Terms, including the service level, whether equipment-related technician travel is included, whether parts shipping is included, and the availability of loaner units. **Relationship to these Warranty Terms.** These Warranty Terms govern defects in the Equipment. The PWS Program governs support, response objectives and operational continuity. Where the same subject is addressed by both, the order of precedence set out in the PWS Program applies to support and response matters. Program and terms: [https://www.photorobot.com/pws](https://www.photorobot.com/pws) Support portal: [https://support.photorobot.com](https://support.photorobot.com) uni-Robot s.r.o. · Vodičkova 710/31 · 110 00 Prague 1 · Czechia · ID 01478061 --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/aup # SECTION: legal > aup # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) The PhotoRobot Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) represents a legal document detailing PhotoRobot Controls Cloud, Cloud 2.0, API & Related Services. ## PhotoRobot Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) This document details the PhotoRobot Controls Cloud, Cloud 2.0, API & Related Services:**Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**, *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction This Acceptable Use Policy (“**AUP** ”) defines acceptable and unacceptable use of the PhotoRobot Services, including: - PhotoRobot Controls Cloud - PhotoRobot Cloud 2.0 - PhotoRobot API and integrations - CL to Cloud synchronization - hosting, storage and processing infrastructure - workflow automation tools - user accounts and communication systems This AUP is incorporated into the [**PhotoRobot Terms of Service**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/terms-of-service). All users must comply. ## 2. General Principles You may use the Service only: - for lawful purposes, - in accordance with the Terms of Service, - without interfering with others, - without compromising security, - without attempting to circumvent or abuse system functionality. Any violation may result in account suspension or termination. ## 3. Prohibited Activities The following activities are **strictly prohibited**. ### 3.1. Security Violations You must not: - attempt to gain unauthorized access to accounts, systems or networks - test or probe system vulnerabilities without written permission - bypass authentication or security controls - distribute malware, viruses, trojans, worms or harmful code - use robots, scripts or automated tools to overload or disrupt the Service - perform denial-of-service (DoS or DDoS) attacks - forge headers or manipulate identifiers to disguise origin ### 3.2. Misuse of Infrastructure You must not: - make excessive or abusive API calls that degrade performance - generate unreasonable load through automation, bots or external tools - run unauthorized scripts or processes via Cloud 2.0 - upload large volumes of non-production or irrelevant data - interfere with backup processes or system operations ### 3.3. Unauthorized Use of Robots or Firmware You must not: - modify, reverse engineer, or tamper with robot firmware - attempt to use firmware outside authorized hardware - attempt to deactivate or override embedded safety systems - use the robots in unsafe, non-compliant or illegal contexts ### 3.4. Illegal or Harmful Content You must not upload, store or distribute: - illegal content or materials prohibited by law - content that violates intellectual property rights - harmful, abusive, defamatory, or deceptive content - personal data collected unlawfully (GDPR non-compliant) - images or videos obtained without valid consent when required Controller is fully responsible for legal compliance of uploaded content. ### 3.5. Abuse of Communication Systems You must not: - send unsolicited or spam messages via any PhotoRobot-related system - misuse support channels (e.g., spamming tickets) - impersonate PhotoRobot or any third party - submit false, fraudulent or misleading information ### 3.6. Circumventing Licensing or Usage Limits You must not: - bypass license restrictions - share or reuse activation keys without authorization - duplicate CL installations without proper licenses - manipulate billing, trial limits or subscription terms - access Cloud 2.0 without an active subscription ### 3.7. High-Risk or Prohibited Use Cases PhotoRobot Services must not be used in: - life-critical systems - medical or emergency applications - military or weapons systems - environments where failure could result in injury, death or severe damage - processing of special categories of personal data (Art. 9 GDPR) unless explicitly permitted ## 4. Customer Responsibilities The Customer is responsible for: - ensuring all Authorized Users follow this AUP - securing login credentials and access controls - ensuring lawful processing of personal data - maintaining safe operating environments for Robots - preventing misuse of the Service Violation by any Authorized User is considered a violation by the Customer. ## 5. Monitoring & Enforcement PhotoRobot may: - monitor system logs for security and performance - suspend or limit access if misuse is detected - block IP addresses or API tokens associated with abuse - require corrective steps from Customer - terminate accounts in case of severe violations PhotoRobot does not monitor user content except as necessary for: - security, - troubleshooting, - legal compliance, - or as instructed by Customer (per DPA). ## 6. Reporting Violations Suspected violations should be reported to: **security@photorobot.com** Or to: **legal@photorobot.com** PhotoRobot will investigate all reports. ## 7. Changes to This AUP We may update this AUP from time to time. Changes become effective when published on the PhotoRobot website. ## 8. Contact Information **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic **Email:** legal@photorobot.com **Email:** info@photorobot.com --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/cookies # SECTION: legal > cookies # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Cookie Policy The PhotoRobot Cookie Policy explains how PhotoRobot uses cookies and similar technologies while adhering to GDPR and ePrivacy Directive requirements. ## PhotoRobot Cookie Policy This document represents the PhotoRobot Cookie Policy: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**,*uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction - PhotoRobot Cookie Policy This Cookie Policy explains how **uni-Robot Ltd.** (“**PhotoRobot** ”, “**we** ”, “**us** ”) uses cookies and similar technologies when you visit: - [https://www.photorobot.com](https://www.photorobot.com) - cloud.photorobot.com - any subdomains or related online services It also describes your choices regarding cookie preferences in accordance with **GDPR** and **ePrivacy Directive** requirements. ## 2. What Are Cookies? Cookies are small text files stored in your browser. They help websites function, improve user experience, and provide analytics about website usage. Cookies may be: - **session cookies** (deleted when you close your browser) - **persistent cookies** (stored for a defined period) - **first-party cookies** (set by PhotoRobot) - **third-party cookies** (set by external providers) ## 3. Types of Cookies We Use PhotoRobot uses the following categories of cookies: ### 3.1. Strictly Necessary Cookies (Required) These cookies are essential for the website and cloud platform to function, including: - authentication and session management - security protections - load balancing - maintaining user preferences Without these cookies, the Service cannot be provided. **Examples:** - session tokens - CSRF protection cookies - login state cookies - infrastructure routing cookies *Consent is not required* for necessary cookies. ### 3.2. Functional Cookies (Optional) Used to improve user experience, such as: - remembering settings or preferences - saving UI configurations - enabling optional UX features ### 3.3. Analytics Cookies (Optional) Used to collect aggregated statistical data about: - number of visitors - pages viewed - time spent on the site - user navigation paths Typical tools: - Google Analytics (privacy-enhanced mode) - Google Tag Manager These cookies help us improve website performance and usability. Analytics cookies require **your consent**. ### 3.4. Marketing Cookies (Optional) Used to personalize and measure advertising campaigns. Examples: - Google Ads conversion tracking - remarketing tags - social media pixels (if implemented) These cookies require **explicit opt-in**. ## 4. Third-Party Cookies Some cookies are placed by third parties that provide services to PhotoRobot, such as: - Google (Analytics, Ads, Tag Manager) - marketing platforms (only if enabled) - support or chat tools (if implemented in the future) Each third party is responsible for its own cookie policies. ## 5. Cookie Duration Typical cookie retention periods include: - session cookies: deleted when browser closes - persistent cookies: between 1 day and 24 months - analytics cookies: commonly 12–26 months - marketing cookies: typically 1–12 months Exact durations depend on the specific cookie. ## 6. Managing Your Cookie Preferences ### 6.1. Cookie Banner On your first visit, you will see a cookie banner allowing you to: - accept all cookies - reject non-essential cookies - customize preferences You can change your preferences at any time. ### 6.2. Browser Settings You can disable or delete cookies using your browser’s settings. ### 6.3. Opt-Out Links Where applicable: - Google Analytics Opt-Out Browser Add-on: [https://tools.google.com/dlpage/gaoptout/](https://tools.google.com/dlpage/gaoptout/) ## 7. Legal Grounds for Cookie Use Under GDPR and ePrivacy Directive: - **Necessary cookies** do *not* require consent - **Analytics, functional and marketing cookies** require *explicit opt-in* PhotoRobot processes personal data collected through cookies in accordance with: - **Privacy Policy**, and - **GDPR Privacy Notice** ## 8. Changes to This Cookie Policy We may update this Cookie Policy to reflect: - changes in legal requirements - new cookie technologies - updates to our platform Updates will be published on this page. ## 9. Contact Information For questions regarding our cookie usage: **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic Email: **legal@photorobot.com** Email: **info@photorobot.com** --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/definitions # SECTION: legal > definitions # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Legal Definitions & Glossary This PhotoRobot Legal Definitions & Glossary contains the definitions of terms used across PhotoRobot’s legal documents. ## PhotoRobot Legal Definitions & Glossary This document represents the PhotoRobot Legal Definitions & Glossary: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**,*uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction - Legal Definitions & Glossary This Legal Definitions & Glossary (“**Glossary** ”) provides definitions of terms used across PhotoRobot’s legal documents, including: - [**PhotoRobot Terms of Service**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/terms-of-service) - [**PhotoRobot License Agreement**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/license-agreement) - [**PhotoRobot Privacy Policy**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/privacy-policy) - [**PhotoRobot GDPR Privacy Notice**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/privacy-notice) - [**PhotoRobot Data Processing Agreement (DPA)**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/dpa) - [**PhotoRobot Acceptable Use Policy (AUP)**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/aup) - [**PhotoRobot Service Level Agreement (SLA)**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla) - [**PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/support) Where definitions differ slightly between documents, the definitions in this Glossary prevail. ## 2. Key Terms ### A #### Account A user account created on the PhotoRobot Cloud for accessing services. #### Account Owner The individual or entity responsible for the Account, billing, permissions and security. #### API (Application Programming Interface) Programmatic interface provided by PhotoRobot for integrating external systems. #### Authorized User An individual permitted by the Customer to access the Service. ### B #### Backup Data copies created for redundancy and disaster recovery purposes, stored within Google Cloud Platform (GCP). #### Billing Date The recurring monthly date when subscription fees are charged. ### C #### CL (Controls Local) Locally installed desktop software requiring a license key for activation. #### Cloud 2.0 Enhanced cloud extension enabling hybrid local/cloud workflows and CL synchronization. #### Confidential Information Non-public business or technical information disclosed between Customer and PhotoRobot. #### Controller The entity determining the purposes and means of processing personal data (as per GDPR). #### Customer Any individual or entity using the Service, including Account Owner and Authorized Users. #### Customer Data Any data, content, images, metadata, or files uploaded or processed through the Service. ### D #### Data Processing Agreement (DPA) A required GDPR contract governing processing of personal data by PhotoRobot on behalf of the Customer. #### Data Subject Any identified or identifiable natural person whose data is processed. #### Device Log / Diagnostic Log Technical data generated by Robots or software, used for troubleshooting and analytics. #### Downtime Periods during which the Service is unavailable, excluding maintenance or force majeure. ### E #### Enterprise Customer A Customer with a custom commercial contract, higher-tier SLA, or premium support. ### F #### Firmware Embedded software running on PhotoRobot Robots controlling motors, sensors and internal logic. #### Force Majeure Unforeseeable events outside reasonable control (natural disasters, large-scale outages). ### G #### GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation) EU Regulation 2016/679 governing data protection and privacy. #### Glossary This Legal Definitions & Glossary document. ### H #### Hosting Provider A third-party provider responsible for infrastructure hosting (e.g., Google Cloud Platform). ### I #### Incident Any event affecting availability or performance of the Service. #### Intellectual Property (IP) All copyrights, trademarks, patents, trade secrets, software, firmware and documentation owned by PhotoRobot. ### L #### License Agreement Contract granting permission to use PhotoRobot's software, firmware, CL, Cloud 2.0, and related components. #### Licensed Software Controls Local, Cloud 2.0 software components, activation utilities, installers and tools. ### M #### Maintenance Window Pre-scheduled period for updates, during which the Service may be temporarily unavailable. #### Metadata Data providing information about other data, including timestamps, parameters, project settings. #### Monthly Uptime Percentage (MUP) Percentage of minutes in a calendar month when the Service is available. ### P #### Personal Data Any information relating to an identified or identifiable natural person. #### PhotoRobot Robots (Robots) Physical devices produced by PhotoRobot, such as TurnTable, Cube, Robotic Arm, Frame, Carousel and related modules. #### Processor Entity processing personal data on behalf of the Controller (PhotoRobot acts as Processor for Customer Data). ### R #### Remote Access Session Temporary support session where PhotoRobot engineers access Customer systems with permission. #### Rendering / Processing Queue Cloud-based system where uploaded assets are processed into final formats (3D spins, images). ### S #### SCC (Standard Contractual Clauses) EU-approved transfer mechanism for personal data sent outside the EEA. #### Service Collectively: PhotoRobot Controls Cloud, Cloud 2.0, APIs, project management tools and all cloud functions. #### Service Credits Compensation applied under SLA if availability falls below guaranteed levels. #### Sub-Processor A third party engaged by PhotoRobot to process personal data on its behalf. #### Subscription Plan Pricing tier defining features, limits and billing terms. #### Support Terms Customer Support Terms governing support processes and standards. ### T #### Terms of Service (ToS) Primary contract governing use of the Service. #### Token / Access Token Authentication token required for secure API or Cloud access. ### U #### Unauthorized Use Any activity prohibited by the AUP or ToS. ### W #### Warranty Disclaimer Statement that the Service is provided “as is,” as included in ToS and License Agreement. ### Z *(placeholder for future expansions if CZ terminology is added)* --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/dpa # SECTION: legal > dpa # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Data Processing Agreement (DPA) This PhotoRobot Data Processing Agreement (DPA) represents a legally binding document between the Controller (Customer) and Processor (PhotoRobot). ## PhotoRobot Data Processing Agreement (DPA) This document represents the PhotoRobot Data Processing Agreement:**Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**,*uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Parties This Data Processing Agreement (“**DPA** ”) is entered into between: **Controller (Customer)** The individual or legal entity that has entered into the PhotoRobot Terms of Service and uses the Service. and **Processor: uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic Company ID: 01478061 VAT ID: CZ01478061 Email: legal@photorobot.com Hereinafter collectively referred to as the **“Parties”**. This DPA supplements the [**PhotoRobot Terms of Service**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/terms-of-service) and applies when PhotoRobot processes personal data on behalf of the Customer. ## 2. Subject Matter & Nature of Processing PhotoRobot (“**Processor** ”) provides cloud-based services, local software extensions, firmware management and hosting infrastructure required to process images, metadata, and related digital content uploaded by the Customer (“**Controller** ”). Processing includes: - collection - storage - transmission - metadata extraction - synchronization between CL ↔ Cloud - hosting of customer-uploaded content - creation of logs and diagnostics - backup operations Processing is performed strictly **on behalf of the Controller**, according to their documented instructions. ## 3. Duration This DPA remains in force for the duration of the contractual relationship between the Parties, and thereafter as long as the Processor stores or processes any personal data on behalf of the Controller. ## 4. Personal Data & Categories of Data Subjects ### 4.1. Types of Personal Data Depending on how the Service is used, processed data may include: - identification data (name, surname, company) - contact data (email, telephone) - visual content (images, videos) - metadata associated with uploaded content - log data, IP addresses, technical identifiers - project-level data - credentials (hashed), access tokens Processor does **not** require or intentionally process special categories of data (Art. 9 GDPR). ### 4.2. Categories of Data Subjects - Customer’s employees - Customer’s clients or partners - Authorized Users - Any individuals presented in visual content uploaded by Customer Customer is solely responsible for ensuring lawful collection of data from data subjects. ## 5. Instructions from Controller Processor processes personal data only: 1. according to Controller’s documented instructions, 2. as required to provide the Service, 3. to ensure security, integrity and availability of systems, 4. as required by EU or Czech law. If Processor considers an instruction unlawful, Processor must notify Controller. ## 6. Confidentiality Processor ensures that all persons authorized to process personal data: - are subject to confidentiality obligations, - have received appropriate training, - process data solely under instructions from the Controller. ## 7. Sub-Processors Processor uses certain third parties (“**Sub-Processors** ”) to support the Service. ### 7.1. Approved Sub-Processors Controller grants general authorization for Processor to engage the following categories of Sub-Processors: - cloud infrastructure providers (e.g., **Google Cloud Platform**) - email delivery providers - analytics providers - ticketing systems - security monitoring services - backup and disaster recovery systems A complete list is maintained in the [**PhotoRobot Sub-Processor List**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sub-processors) and may be updated. ### 7.2. Notification of Changes Processor shall notify Controller of any intended changes to Sub-Processors at least **15 days** in advance, allowing Controller to object on reasonable grounds. ## 8. International Data Transfers Where Sub-Processors or infrastructure are located outside the EEA, Processor ensures: - application of **Standard Contractual Clauses (SCC 2021)**, - supplementary technical and organizational safeguards, - minimized access and encryption, - compliance audits by the underlying provider. Google Cloud Platform provides: - ISO 27001, ISO 27017, ISO 27018 - SOC 1/2/3 reports - GDPR compliance documentation Details available at [https://cloud.google.com/security](https://cloud.google.com/security). ## 9. Security Measures Processor shall implement industry-standard technical and organizational measures (TOMs), including: ### 9.1. Technical Measures - TLS encryption of data in transit - secure storage with encrypted access tokens - isolated processing environments - password hashing - rate limits and intrusion detection systems - multi-layer firewalling - physical data center security (via Google Cloud) ### 9.2. Organizational Measures - role-based access control - access logging and monitoring - internal policies for data handling - employee confidentiality obligations - periodic security training - vendor risk management A full list of TOMs is available upon request. ## 10. Data Subject Rights Processor assists Controller in responding to: - requests for access - rectification - deletion - restriction - data portability - objections Processor shall forward any direct request from a data subject to the Controller without undue delay. ## 11. Data Breach Notification In case of a personal data breach, Processor shall notify Controller: - **without undue delay**, - including all information required by Article 33 GDPR, - and provide ongoing updates until remediation is complete. Controller remains responsible for notifying authorities and affected individuals. ## 12. Deletion or Return of Data Upon termination of the contract: - Processor deletes Customer Data **after 30 days**, - unless otherwise instructed by Controller, - except where retention is required by law. Backups are overwritten during their normal lifecycle. ## 13. Audits Controller has the right to: - receive documentation proving GDPR compliance - request a report on TOMs - perform reasonable audits, limited to once per year - rely on third-party certifications (ISO/SOC reports of Google Cloud) Audits must not jeopardize security or disrupt operations. ## 14. Liability Liability of the Parties follows the Terms of Service. Processor is liable only for breaches caused by its own violation of GDPR obligations. ## 15. Governing Law & Jurisdiction This DPA is governed by the laws of the **Czech Republic**. Disputes shall be resolved by the courts in **Prague, Czech Republic**. ## 16. Standard Contractual Clauses (SCC) Where required, the **SCC 2021 (Module 2: Controller → Processor)** apply as an annex to this DPA. PhotoRobot: - incorporates SCC by reference, - includes all mandatory clauses, - implements supplemental technical measures - ensures compliance for transfers to sub-processors outside the EEA. The SCC may be provided in full upon request. ## 17. Contact **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic Email: **legal@photorobot.com** --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/license-agreement # SECTION: legal > license-agreement # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot License Agreement The PhotoRobot License Agreement serves as a legal contract between PhotoRobot and the user of any licensed software or firmware provided by PhotoRobot. ## PhotoRobot License Agreement This document represents the PhotoRobot License Agreement: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**,*uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction - PhotoRobot License Agreement This PhotoRobot License Agreement (“**Agreement** ”) is a legal contract between **uni-Robot Ltd.**, Vodičkova 710/31, 110 00 Prague 1, Czech Republic (“**PhotoRobot** ”) and the entity or person (“**Licensee** ”, “**you** ”) using any licensed software or firmware provided by PhotoRobot. By installing, activating, or using any PhotoRobot software, firmware, module, or robotic device, you agree to be bound by this Agreement. If you do not agree, you must not install or use the Licensed Software or Firmware. This Agreement supplements the [**PhotoRobot Terms of Service**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/terms-of-service). ## 2. Definitions - **Licensed Software** – any PhotoRobot software provided to you under this Agreement, including Controls Local (CL), Cloud 2.0 extension, activation tools, installers, drivers, and related components. - **Controls Local (CL)** – the desktop/local application installed on the Licensee’s system, requiring a software key for activation. - **Cloud 2.0** – a cloud extension enabling enhanced cloud-based workflows for CL. - **Firmware** – embedded software running on PhotoRobot Robots (TurnTable, Cube, Robotic Arm, Frame, Carousel, etc.). - **Robots** – PhotoRobot physical devices containing motors, electronics, sensors, embedded controllers, and firmware. - **Software Key** – activation key or token issued by PhotoRobot to enable licensed functionality. - **Update** – a minor modification, patch, or improvement. - **Upgrade / Trade-Up** – a major version or replacement requiring a new license or fee. - **Documentation** – manuals, online help, technical notes and usage guides. ## 3. Grant of License ### 3.1. License Scope PhotoRobot grants Licensee a **non-exclusive, non-transferable, revocable license** to: - install and use Controls Local on the permitted device(s) - connect CL to Cloud 2.0, if enabled - operate Firmware on PhotoRobot Robots owned or legally used by Licensee - create a reasonable number of backup copies ### 3.2. Purpose Licensed Software may only be used for operating PhotoRobot hardware, processing visual content, or interacting with the PhotoRobot Cloud ecosystem. ### 3.3. Ownership of Hardware Required Firmware may be used **only** on Robots manufactured or authorized by PhotoRobot. ## 4. Installation, Activation & Software Keys ### 4.1. Activation Required Controls Local requires activation using a Software Key. Without activation, the software may not function. ### 4.2. Hardware Binding Each Software Key is bound to: - the specific hardware configuration, or - the specific installation instance (depending on product) ### 4.3. Re-Issuing Keys A new key may be issued in case of: - hardware replacement - system upgrade - license migration (if approved) When a new key is issued, **the original key immediately expires**. ### 4.4. License Seat Unless stated otherwise in the invoice or contract, each license applies to **one installation**. ## 5. Use of Firmware ### 5.1. Embedded Nature Firmware is provided pre-installed on Robots and updates may be delivered electronically. ### 5.2. No Independent Use Firmware may not be: - extracted - reverse engineered - used separately from the Robot ### 5.3. Firmware Updates Updates may require an active support plan or valid maintenance agreement. ## 6. Cloud 2.0 Extension ### 6.1. Eligibility Cloud 2.0 is available only to: - customers with an active Controls Local license - and an active PhotoRobot Cloud subscription ### 6.2. Functionality Provides features such as: - cloud-assisted processing - hybrid local/cloud workflows - synchronization and metadata exchange ### 6.3. Dependency Cloud 2.0 cannot function without access to the Controls Cloud. ## 7. Updates, Upgrades & Trade-Ups ### 7.1. Updates PhotoRobot may provide Updates for: - stability - security - compatibility Updates are included only within the support period specified in the purchase or service contract. ### 7.2. Upgrades / Trade-Ups Major version upgrades or migration to new platforms may require a **new license fee**. ### 7.3. Support Period for CL CL license includes **12 months** of software support. Support renewal for an additional 12 months is charged at the current list price. ## 8. License Restrictions You may **not**: - sublicense, rent, lend, or lease the Licensed Software - modify, reverse engineer, disassemble, or decompile any software or firmware - use the Licensed Software with non-PhotoRobot hardware - remove copyright notices - use the Licensed Software in a manner that may damage PhotoRobot systems - distribute or share Software Keys Unauthorized use immediately terminates this Agreement. ## 9. Ownership & Intellectual Property ### 9.1. PhotoRobot IP All rights to the Licensed Software, Firmware, algorithms, UI elements, Protocols, APIs and Documentation belong exclusively to **uni-Robot Ltd.** Licensee acquires no ownership rights. ### 9.2. Third-Party Components Licensed Software may contain third-party libraries governed by their own licenses. ### 9.3. Protection Mechanisms Licensed Software may use technological protection measures (TPMs), including encrypted keys, obfuscation, or device fingerprinting. Tampering is strictly prohibited. ## 10. Limited Warranty & Disclaimer ### 10.1. No Warranty To the maximum extent permitted by law, PhotoRobot provides the Licensed Software **“as is”**, without warranties of any kind. ### 10.2. Firmware Safety Firmware is designed for safe operation of Robots, but: - Licensee is responsible for safe deployment - PhotoRobot is not liable for misuse or modification of hardware - Robots must be operated by trained personnel ### 10.3. Compatibility Not Guaranteed PhotoRobot does not guarantee: - compatibility with all OS versions - continued support for legacy systems - uninterrupted operation ## 11. Limitation of Liability ### 11.1. Limit PhotoRobot’s total liability is limited to the amount paid by Licensee for the applicable license in the previous 12 months. ### 11.2. Exclusions PhotoRobot is not liable for: - loss of data - indirect or consequential damages - lost profits - operational downtime - incorrect installation or unapproved hardware modifications ## 12. Term & Termination ### 12.1. Term This Agreement remains in effect until terminated. ### 12.2. Termination by Licensee Licensee may discontinue use at any time by uninstalling all Licensed Software and ceasing use of Robots. ### 12.3. Termination by PhotoRobot PhotoRobot may terminate immediately if: - Licensee breaches this Agreement - Licensee tampers with Firmware or Software Keys - Licensee uses the Licensed Software with unauthorized hardware ### 12.4. Effect of Termination Upon termination: - all rights under this Agreement cease - Licensee must destroy all copies of Licensed Software - Software Keys are invalidated - Firmware remains covered by hardware ownership, but all update rights end ## 13. Governing Law & Jurisdiction This Agreement is governed by the laws of the **Czech Republic**. Disputes shall be resolved exclusively by the courts of **Prague, Czech Republic**. ## 14. Contact Information **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic **Email:** legal@photorobot.com **Email:** info@photorobot.com --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/marketing-consent # SECTION: legal > marketing-consent # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Marketing Consent Policy This legal document represents the PhotoRobot Marketing Consent Policy explaining collection and use of personal data for marketing communications. ## PhotoRobot Marketing Consent Policy This document represents the PhotoRobot Marketing Consent Policy: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**, *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction - Marketing Consent Policy This Marketing Consent Policy explains how **uni-Robot Ltd.** (“**PhotoRobot** ”, “**we** ”, “**us** ”) collects and uses personal data for marketing communications. Marketing communications are sent only when you have given **explicit and voluntary consent**, in accordance with: - GDPR (EU Regulation 2016/679) - Czech Act No. 480/2004 Coll. (on electronic communications) - ePrivacy Directive Marketing consent is **not required** for using PhotoRobot services. ## 2. What Marketing Communications We Send If you provide consent, you may receive: - newsletters - product announcements - feature updates - webinars or events - PhotoRobot offers or promotions - educational or technical content We never sell or share your email address with third parties for independent marketing. ## 3. Legal Basis Marketing communications are based solely on: ### 3.1. Consent (Art. 6(1)(a) GDPR) You must actively opt-in by ticking a checkbox or submitting your email through a form that explicitly states the marketing purpose. ### 3.2. Withdrawal of Consent You may withdraw consent at any time. Withdrawal does not affect the lawfulness of processing before withdrawal. ## 4. How to Give Marketing Consent You may provide consent in the following ways: - ticking the marketing consent checkbox during registration - subscribing via newsletter form - opting in through email confirmation (double opt-in) - enabling marketing preferences in your Account settings (if available) ## 5. Marketing Consent Checkbox (Standard Text) Below is the **recommended exact wording** for onboarding, forms, and product UI: > **“I agree to receive marketing emails and product updates from PhotoRobot. I understand that I can unsubscribe at any time.”** Or for forms where short text is required: > **“I agree to receive marketing communications from PhotoRobot.”** ## 6. How to Withdraw Consent You can withdraw consent easily via: - clicking the **unsubscribe** link in any marketing email - contacting **info@photorobot.com** - contacting **legal@photorobot.com** - changing your preferences in account settings (future option) Once you opt out: - marketing emails stop immediately, - operational emails (e.g., billing, system updates) continue as they are not marketing. ## 7. Data Retention for Marketing We store marketing consent records: - until you withdraw consent, - for audit purposes for up to **24 months** after withdrawal (legal obligation), - then they are deleted or anonymized. We retain only minimal metadata: - timestamp of consent - method of consent - changes in subscription status ## 8. Third-Party Services For email delivery we may use trusted processors such as: - MailerLite - Mailgun - SendGrid - or a similar provider All processors operate under GDPR-compliant agreements. A complete list is maintained in the [**PhotoRobot Sub-Processor List**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sub-processors). ## 9. Changes to This Policy We may update this Policy from time to time. Changes become effective when published. ## 10. Contact Information For questions about marketing communications or consent: **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic Email: **info@photorobot.com** Email: **legal@photorobot.com** --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/privacy # SECTION: legal > privacy # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Privacy Documents - Overview The PhotoRobot Privacy Documents Overview provides the links and descriptions of all PhotoRobot privacy-related documents. ## PhotoRobot Privacy Documents - Overview Your privacy is important to us. This page provides access to all privacy-related documents by **PhotoRobot; *uni-Robot Ltd, Czech Republic*.** Privacy documentation is structured to provide both public transparency and required regulatory disclosures. The Privacy Policy is public-facing, while the GDPR Privacy Notice and DPA contain mandatory disclosures and contractual obligations. Please choose the version relevant to your needs: ## Privacy Policy (Public Version) **URL:** [https://www.photorobot.com/legal/privacy-policy](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/privacy-policy) - A clear and easy-to-read explanation of how PhotoRobot collects, uses, stores and protects personal data. - Intended for general users, website visitors and anyone seeking a non-legal overview. ## GDPR Privacy Notice (Article 13 Disclosure) **URL:** [https://www.photorobot.com/legal/privacy-notice](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/privacy-notice) - The official legal document required by GDPR. - This version contains mandatory information about data processing, legal bases, rights of data subjects and controller details. - Users must accept this document when creating an account. ## Contact for Privacy Related Questions For any privacy-related questions, please contact us at: **legal@photorobot.com** --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/privacy-notice # SECTION: legal > privacy-notice # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot GDPR Privacy Notice (Article 13) This legal document represents the PhotoRobot GDPR Privacy Notice (Article 13) and legal data processing information for the company uni-Robot Ltd. ## PhotoRobot GDPR Privacy Notice (Article 13) This document details the PhotoRobot GDPR Privacy Notice (Article 13): **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**,*uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. **Note:** The Privacy Policy applies to general users. The GDPR Privacy Notice is required for new accounts and per GDPR Article 13. ## 1. Controller Identification The controller of personal data is: **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic Company ID: 01478061 VAT ID: CZ01478061 Email: **legal@photorobot.com** Email: **info@photorobot.com** (Hereinafter: **“Controller”** or **“PhotoRobot”**) ## 2. Categories of Personal Data We Process We process the following categories of personal data: ### 2.1. Identification and contact details - Name, surname - Company name - Email address - Telephone number - Billing details and VAT information (if applicable) ### 2.2. Login and account information - Account credentials - Password (hashed only) - Account settings ### 2.3. Technical data - IP address - Device identifiers - Browser and OS information - Access time and usage logs ### 2.4. Operational data within the Service - Project metadata - Uploaded images and content - Processing logs and history - CL ↔ Cloud synchronization metadata - Robot/firmware diagnostic logs when enabled ## 3. Purposes of Processing Personal data is processed for the following purposes: 1. **Account creation and management** 2. **Provision of PhotoRobot Cloud and Cloud 2.0 services** 3. **Provision of CL license activation and update distribution** 4. **Operation of PhotoRobot Robots and firmware updates** 5. **Billing, invoicing and payment processing** 6. **Service improvement, diagnostics and security monitoring** 7. **Customer support and ticket resolution** 8. **Fulfilling legal obligations (accounting, taxation, archiving)** 9. **Protecting legitimate interests (fraud prevention, service security)** 10. **Sending marketing communications (only with consent)** ## 4. Legal Basis for Processing We process personal data based on: ### 4.1. Performance of a contract (Art. 6(1)(b) GDPR) For: - account creation - operation of the Service - CL license and firmware management - customer support ### 4.2. Legal obligations (Art. 6(1)(c) GDPR) For: - accounting - invoicing and taxation - compliance with legal requirements ### 4.3. Legitimate interests (Art. 6(1)(f) GDPR) For: - security and monitoring - troubleshooting and diagnostics - improvement of Service - prevention of misuse ### 4.4. Consent (Art. 6(1)(a) GDPR) Only when explicitly required, e.g.: - marketing communications - non-essential cookies Consent may be withdrawn at any time. ## 5. Recipients of Personal Data Personal data may be shared with: ### 5.1. Sub-processors To provide hosting, communication and analytics services: - Google Cloud Platform - email delivery providers - analytics tools - customer support systems - other IT vendors strictly required to operate the Service A complete list is maintained in the **Sub-Processor List**. ### 5.2. Professional services - accounting firms - legal advisors - auditors ### 5.3. Public authorities Only when required by law. ## 6. International Transfers If personal data is transferred outside the European Economic Area (EEA): - transfers are protected by **Standard Contractual Clauses (SCC 2021)** - additional technical and organizational measures are applied - access is strictly limited and controlled Servers are primarily hosted on **Google Cloud Platform**, which complies with: - ISO 27001 - ISO 27017 - ISO 27018 - SOC 1/2/3 - EU GDPR data protection requirements ## 7. Data Retention Periods ### 7.1. Account data Stored for the duration of the contract, and **5 years** afterwards (legal requirements). ### 7.2. Customer Data in Cloud Stored for the duration of the contract and **deleted 30 days after cancellation**, unless legal retention applies. ### 7.3. Technical logs Stored for **30–180 days**, depending on purpose. ### 7.4. Invoicing and accounting Retained for **10 years** (EU/CZ law). ## 8. Your Rights as Data Subject You have the following rights: - **Right of access** (Art. 15 GDPR) - **Right to rectification** (Art. 16 GDPR) - **Right to erasure** (Art. 17 GDPR) - **Right to restriction** (Art. 18 GDPR) - **Right to data portability** (Art. 20 GDPR) - **Right to object** (Art. 21 GDPR) - **Right to withdraw consent** - **Right to lodge a complaint** with the supervisory authority Supervisory authority in the Czech Republic: **ÚOOÚ – Úřad pro ochranu osobních údajů** https://www.uoou.cz ## 9. Mandatory or Voluntary Nature of Data Providing personal data may be: - **Mandatory** for contractual purposes (e.g., account creation) - **Mandatory** for legal obligations (billing) - **Voluntary** for marketing or non-essential cookies If the required data is not provided, we may not be able to offer the Service. ## 10. Automated Decision-Making We do **not** use personal data for automated decision-making or profiling that produces legal effects. ## 11. Contact Information For questions or to exercise your rights: **Email:** legal@photorobot.com **Email:** info@photorobot.com Or by mail to the Controller’s address. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/privacy-policy # SECTION: legal > privacy-policy # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Privacy Policy The PhotoRobot Privacy Policy represents a legal document describing the privacy practices and privacy policy of PhotoRobot. ## PhotoRobot Privacy Policy This document details the PhotoRobot Privacy Policy: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition (Public Version)**,*uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. The Privacy Policy applies to general users. The GDPR Privacy Notice is required for new accounts and per GDPR Article 13. ## 1. Introduction - PhotoRobot Privacy Policy This Privacy Policy explains how **uni-Robot Ltd.** (“**PhotoRobot** ”, “**we** ”, “**us** ”, “**our** ”) collects, uses, stores and protects personal data when you use: - PhotoRobot Controls Cloud - PhotoRobot Cloud 2.0 - PhotoRobot website - PhotoRobot Controls Local (CL) when connected to cloud services - any related online interfaces, APIs or content Your privacy is important to us. We process personal data in accordance with: - **GDPR (EU Regulation 2016/679)** - **Czech data protection laws** - **industry-standard security practices** If you do not agree with the practices described in this policy, please discontinue the use of our services. ## 2. Data We Collect We collect only the data necessary to provide and improve our services. ### 2.1. Data you provide directly - Name, surname - Company details - Email address - Telephone number - Billing and payment information (processed via secure providers) - Account login credentials - Content you upload to the Service (images, metadata, project files) ### 2.2. Data collected automatically - IP address - Device identifiers - Browser type and version - Operating system - Access timestamps - Usage logs (e.g., errors, API calls, operations inside Cloud/CL) ### 2.3. Data from PhotoRobot Robots Some PhotoRobot Robots may send technical telemetry, including: - firmware version - device health metrics - motor/load diagnostics - system logs for troubleshooting No personal data is collected by Robots unless you intentionally upload such content. ## 3. How We Use Your Data We use your data for the following purposes: ### 3.1. To provide the Service - account creation and authentication - processing and storing visual content - enabling cloud workflows - enabling CL ↔ Cloud 2.0 synchronization - customer support and maintenance ### 3.2. To improve and secure the Service - troubleshooting and diagnostics - load balancing - product development - security monitoring ### 3.3. To communicate with you - service updates - billing notifications - technical or security alerts Marketing communication is optional and requires separate consent. ## 4. Legal Bases for Processing We process personal data based on the following legal grounds: - **Performance of a contract** (art. 6(1)(b) GDPR) - **Legal obligation** (accounting, taxation) - **Legitimate interest** (security, service improvement, fraud prevention) - **Consent**, only where required (e.g., newsletters, cookies) ## 5. Sharing and Disclosure of Data We do not sell personal data. We only share data with: ### 5.1. Service Providers (Sub-Processors) These providers help us operate our services: - **Google Cloud Platform** (hosting) - email delivery providers - analytics tools - customer support systems (ticketing tools) A constantly updated list will be available in the [**PhotoRobot** **Sub-Processor List**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sub-processors). ### 5.2. Legal Requirements We may disclose data if required by: - law - court order - administrative authority Always within the limits of applicable legislation. ## 6. International Data Transfers We operate primarily from the **European Union**. Some sub-processors (e.g., Google Cloud) may store or process data outside the EU. In such cases, PhotoRobot ensures protection through: - **Standard Contractual Clauses (SCC 2021)** - supplementary technical & organizational measures - strict access controls Full details are provided in the [**PhotoRobot** **Data Processing Agreement (DPA)**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/dpa). ## 7. Data Retention We retain data only as long as necessary for: - service provision - fulfillment of legal obligations - resolving disputes - enforcing agreements ### Account & cloud data Deleted **30 days after account cancellation**, unless required otherwise. ### Logs & diagnostics Retained for a limited technical period, usually **30–180 days**. ## 8. Your Rights You have the right to: - access your personal data - request correction of inaccurate data - request deletion (“right to be forgotten”) - restrict processing - object to processing - data portability - withdraw consent (where applicable) To exercise your rights: **legal@photorobot.com** ## 9. Security Measures We use industry-standard security practices, including: - encrypted TLS communication - secure access tokens - isolated storage environments - role-based access control - regular security audits - Google Cloud Platform certifications (ISO 27001, 27017, 27018, etc.) No system is 100% secure, but we continuously improve and monitor our environment. ## 10. Children’s Privacy Our services are not intended for individuals under **18 years of age**. We do not knowingly collect data from minors. ## 11. Changes to This Policy We may update this Privacy Policy from time to time. Changes become effective once published on this page. Material changes will be announced via email or in-product notice. ## 12. Contact Information For privacy-related inquiries: **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic **Email:** legal@photorobot.com **Email:** info@photorobot.com --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla # SECTION: legal > sla # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements (SLA) The PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements (SLA) legal document provides access to all PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements. ## PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements (SLA) This page provides access to all PhotoRobot Service Level Agreements, *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. Each SLA describes different response commitments and operational conditions depending on whether the customer uses cloud/software services or hardware devices. Please select the SLA relevant to your use case: ## Software & Cloud SLA (SLA-SW) **URL:** [https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-sw](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-sw) This SLA defines: - cloud service availability - Monthly Uptime Percentage (MUP) - software incident severity levels - initial response times - maintenance windows - optional enterprise SLA credits Applies to Cloud, Cloud 2.0, API, rendering and CL to Cloud synchronization. ## Hardware SLA (SLA-HW) **URL:** [https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-hw](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-hw) This SLA defines: - hardware incident classification - response-time guarantees - diagnostic procedures - RMA workflow - rules for replacement parts - exclusions relevant to physical devices Applies to all PhotoRobot hardware products and firmware-based components. ## SLA Queries & Support Contact If you are unsure which SLA applies to your contract or system configuration, please contact us at: **legal@photorobot.com** --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-hw # SECTION: legal > sla-hw # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware The Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware defines the service levels, response, commitments, and diagnostic procedures provided by PhotoRobot. ## Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware This document represents the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**,*uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction This Hardware Service Level Agreement (“**Hardware SLA** ”) defines the service levels, response commitments, and diagnostic procedures provided by **uni-Robot Ltd.** (“**PhotoRobot** ”) for hardware devices (“**Robots** ”), including but not limited to: - PhotoRobot TurnTable - PhotoRobot Cube - PhotoRobot Robotic Arm - PhotoRobot Frame - PhotoRobot Carousel - PhotoRobot motorized modules - embedded electronics and firmware-based subsystems This SLA applies to: - warranty support, - post-warranty technical support, - remote diagnostics, - RMA processes, - assistance with identifying replacement parts. This Hardware SLA complements: - [**PhotoRobot Software SLA (SLA-SW)**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-sw) - [**PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/support) - [**PhotoRobot Terms of Service (ToS)**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/terms-of-service) - [**PhotoRobot License Agreement**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/license-agreement) This SLA governs **response times and diagnostic procedures**, not physical repair times or hardware replacement guarantees. ## 2. Definitions - **Robot** — any PhotoRobot hardware device or module. - **Hardware Incident** — malfunction, degraded performance, or failure of a Robot. - **Critical Failure** — Robot cannot operate in any capacity; production is halted. - **Major Failure** — Robot operates partially but with degraded functionality. - **Minor Failure** — small defects or operational anomalies that do not prevent operation. - **RMA** — process in which a defective component is returned for inspection or repair. - **Diagnostic Session** — remote session or guided troubleshooting. - **Replacement Part** — component required to restore functionality. ## 3. Scope of Hardware SLA This SLA covers: - remote troubleshooting - firmware-level diagnostics - mechanical/electrical guidance - identification of required parts - support during installation of replacement parts - coordination of RMA cases - coordination with engineering for advanced diagnostics This SLA does **not** cover: - guaranteed repair times - guaranteed replacement times - on-site repairs or physical servicing - installation at customer premises - logistics, customs, shipping delays - physical wear components (belts, bearings, friction surfaces, rubber parts) ## 4. Incident Classification & Response Times Hardware issues are classified into four severity levels. ### 4.1. Level 1 — Critical Failure Robot is fully non-functional. Production is stopped. **Initial response:** - **up to 24 hours** **Diagnostic start:** - **within 48 hours** ### 4.2. Level 2 — Major Failure Robot operates with major limitations. Production is partially affected. - **up to 48 hours** ### 4.3. Level 3 — Minor Failure Robot is operational with reduced comfort, precision, or minor functional issues. - **up to 3 business days** ### 4.4. Level 4 — Low Cosmetic defects or optional non-critical components. - **up to 5 business days** ## 5. Diagnostic Procedure PhotoRobot will initiate remote diagnostics to identify the cause and recommend corrective actions. ### 5.1. Customer must provide: - photos or video of affected area - device serial number - firmware version - short error description - environmental information (power, cabling, load, setup) ### 5.2. PhotoRobot may perform: - remote visual inspection - firmware verification - motor and sensor check - calibration review - electronics integrity check (if possible) - test instructions for Customer ## 6. Replacement Parts If a replacement part is required: 1. PhotoRobot identifies the part 2. Customer receives an offer 3. After approval, the part is shipped 4. Customer performs installation (unless contract states otherwise) **( ! ) - This SLA does not guarantee:** - availability of parts - delivery within specific timeframes - free replacement outside warranty ## 7. RMA (Return Material Authorization) For components that require inspection: 1. PhotoRobot issues an RMA number 2. Customer ships defective component 3. PhotoRobot inspects, repairs, or replaces 4. Part is shipped back to Customer Under warranty: - Customer covers shipping to PR - PR covers return shipping Out of warranty: - Customer covers both directions - repair/replace costs billed separately ## 8. Warranty Repair Warranty handling follows: - official Product Warranty Terms (separate document) - exclusions: - misuse - non-authorized repairs - third-party modifications - mechanical wear - electrical damage from customer wiring Warranty validity requires: - correct installation - correct firmware - proper maintenance ## 9. Preventive Maintenance Hardware SLA does not include maintenance, but PhotoRobot provides: - recommended maintenance intervals - calibration recommendations - cleaning instructions - lubrication guidance (if applicable) Customer is responsible for following maintenance guidance. ## 10. Exclusions This SLA does **not** apply to: - on-site service (optional paid service) - physical installation - training and operation consulting - lens, lighting, or camera issues (third-party equipment) - failures caused by external force, shock, liquids, or overloading - electrical wiring outside PhotoRobot devices - production environment issues - accessories not manufactured by PhotoRobot ## 11. Communication & Escalation If an issue is unresolved: 1. Support Engineer 2. Senior Hardware Engineer 3. Engineering Team 4. Technical Management (enterprise customers) Urgency and escalation are based on business impact. ## 12. Limitations of Liability PhotoRobot is not responsible for: - loss of production - commercial damage - indirect or consequential loss - delays due to customs, courier or logistics - damage caused by incorrect installation or modification ## 13. Changes to Hardware SLA PhotoRobot may update this SLA from time to time. Changes take effect when published. Material changes will be communicated in advance. ## 14. Contact Information **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic **Support Portal:** [https://support.photorobot.com](https://support.photorobot.com/)**Contact Email:** legal@photorobot.com (only for legal matters) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-sw # SECTION: legal > sla-sw # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software This legal document represents the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software which describes service levels and availability commitments. ## Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software This document represents the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**, *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction This Service Level Agreement (“**SLA** ”) describes the service levels and availability commitments provided by: **uni-Robot Ltd.** (“**PhotoRobot** ”) to customers using: - PhotoRobot Controls Cloud - PhotoRobot Cloud 2.0 - associated hosting, processing and synchronization services This SLA is incorporated by reference into the PhotoRobot Terms of Service and applies only to cloud-based components of the PhotoRobot ecosystem. Local software (Controls Local / CL) and firmware-based components are **not** governed by this SLA. ## 2. Definitions - **Service** – PhotoRobot Controls Cloud and Cloud 2.0. - **Availability** – ability of authorized users to access the core functions of the Service. - **Downtime** – unavailability of core functionality NOT caused by excluded events. - **Monthly Uptime Percentage (MUP)** – percentage of minutes during a calendar month in which the Service was available. - **Incident** – disruption or degradation of the Service. - **Maintenance Window** – scheduled maintenance announced in advance. Formula for uptime: - **MUP = (Total minutes – Downtime minutes) / Total minutes × 100%** ## 3. Service Availability Commitment PhotoRobot commits to: ### 3.1. Availability Target **99.5% Monthly Uptime Percentage** This corresponds to: | Availability | SLA | Max Downtime per Month | | --- | --- | --- | | Standard | 99.5% | ~3.6 hours | | Enterprise | 99.9%* | ~43 minutes | * Optional higher-tier SLA for enterprise accounts. ## 4. Included Components This SLA applies to: - login and authentication - project browsing - upload and processing - spin/3D workflows - rendering queues - API availability - Cloud 2.0 functions - storage, download and data retrieval ## 5. Excluded Components The following **do not count as Downtime**: ### 5.1. Scheduled Maintenance - announced at least **24 hours in advance**, - typically performed during off-peak hours, - may temporarily reduce performance or availability. ### 5.2. Emergency Maintenance Required to address security vulnerabilities or system instability. ### 5.3. Factors outside PhotoRobot’s reasonable control - failures of Customer’s internet connection - local device problems - DDoS attacks or network-level threats - issues on third-party networks beyond our control - force majeure events ### 5.4. Problems caused by Customer - misconfiguration - improper use of API - excessive load generated by Customer scripts - unsupported workflows ### 5.5. Controls Local (CL) CL is a local component and **not covered** by this SLA. ## 6. Incident Reporting Customers may report incidents to: **Support Portal:** [**https://support.photorobot.com**](https://support.photorobot.com/) A valid incident report must include: - description of the issue - time of occurrence - steps to reproduce (if known) - impact on operations Incident investigation begins once the ticket is received. ## 7. Response Times Standard response targets: | Severity | Definition | Response Time | | --- | --- | --- | | Level 1 – Critical | Complete unavailability of the Service for all users | 4 hours | | Level 2 – Major | Significant degradation, major workflows affected | 8 hours | | Level 3 – Minor | Partial degradation, small subset of features | 24 hours | | Level 4 – Low | Cosmetic or non-urgent issues | 3 business days | **Response time = time to acknowledge, not time to resolve.* ## 8. Resolution Commitment PhotoRobot will work continuously to resolve critical and major incidents. Resolution times may vary based on: - complexity of the issue - involvement of third-party sub-processors (e.g., Google Cloud) - need for emergency patches or infrastructure scaling ## 9. Backup & Data Protection PhotoRobot performs: - continuous data replication - redundant cloud storage - automated rolling backups - multiple-layer failover systems Data recovery times vary based on size and scope but follow industry practices. ## 10. Service Credits (Optional / Enterprise Tier) Service credits apply only if explicitly included in a Customer’s enterprise contract. ### Example credit schedule | Monthly Uptime | Service Credit | | --- | --- | | < 99.5% | 5% of monthly fee | | < 99.0% | 10% of monthly fee | | < 98.0% | 25% of monthly fee | Credits: - must be requested within 30 days - are applied to future invoices - do not provide refunds or damages - are the exclusive remedy for SLA failures ## 11. Status Communication PhotoRobot maintains: - system monitoring - internal health dashboards - optional public status pages (future enhancement) - email updates for major outages ## 12. Customer Responsibilities Customer must: - maintain stable internet connectivity - follow best practices and technical documentation - avoid abusive or excessive API usage - secure and update their local environment - configure CL ↔ Cloud bridges properly Failure to meet responsibilities may invalidate SLA commitments. ## 13. Changes to SLA PhotoRobot may update this SLA periodically. Changes become effective once published. Material changes will be announced in advance. ## 14. Contact Information **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic **Support Portal:** [https://support.photorobot.com](https://support.photorobot.com/)**Contact Email:** legal@photorobot.com (only for legal matters) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sub-processors # SECTION: legal > sub-processors # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Sub-Processor List The PhotoRobot Sub-Processor List identifies the third-party service providers engaged by PhotoRobot to process personal data on behalf of customers. ## PhotoRobot Sub-Processor List This document represents the PhotoRobot Sub-Processor List: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**, *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction - PhotoRobot Sub-Processor List This Sub-Processor List identifies the third-party service providers (“**Sub-Processors** ”) engaged by **uni-Robot Ltd.** (“**PhotoRobot** ”) to process personal data on behalf of customers using: - PhotoRobot Controls Cloud - PhotoRobot Cloud 2.0 - API services - related hosting and synchronization infrastructure Each Sub-Processor is bound by contractual commitments ensuring compliance with: - GDPR (EU Regulation 2016/679) - applicable EU and Czech law - PhotoRobot’s internal security and data protection requirements This document may be updated as new Sub-Processors are added or removed, in accordance with the [**PhotoRobot** **Data Processing Agreement (DPA)**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/dpa). ## 2. Cloud Infrastructure & Hosting Providers ### 2.1. Google Cloud Platform (GCP) - **Role:** Infrastructure, hosting, compute, storage, backup, networking - **Location:** EU (primary), global (failover) - **Data Processed:** Customer Data, project files, metadata, logs - **Legal Basis:** GDPR-compliant SCC 2021, ISO 27001/17/18 - **More info:** [https://cloud.google.com/security](https://cloud.google.com/security) *Google Cloud is the primary platform hosting all PhotoRobot cloud services.* ## 3. Email & Communication Services ### 3.1. Transactional Email Provider (Current provider: *to be assigned – e.g., Mailgun / SendGrid / MailerLite*) - **Role:** Sending transactional system emails (password resets, confirmations, notifications) - **Location:** EU or US (depending on chosen vendor) - **Data Processed:** Name, email address, message metadata - **Legal Basis: SCC 2021 where applicable** **( ! ) - *Because PhotoRobot can choose the most optimal provider, the exact vendor name may be added once confirmed.*** ## 4. Analytics & Monitoring Providers ### 4.1. Google Analytics (Optional, if enabled) - **Role:** Website analytics - **Location:** EU + USA - **Data Processed:** IP (anonymized), device data, usage statistics - **Legal Basis:** User consent + SCC 2021 - **Note:** Non-essential — used only if user opts in. ## 5. Customer Support & Ticketing ### 5.1. Email Support System (Current provider: native email + optional ticketing integration) - **Role:** Handling support requests - **Location:** EU or US (typically mailbox hosted under Google Workspace or alternative) - **Data Processed:** Contact details, ticket content - **Legal Basis:** contractual necessity ## 6. Backup & Disaster Recovery ### 6.1. Google Cloud Platform (as part of hosting) *No additional backup provider is used beyond GCP infrastructure.* - **Role:** Redundant storage, snapshot backups - **Location:** EU primary regions - **Data Processed:** Customer Data, metadata ## 7. Security & Anti-Abuse Tools (If implemented now or in future — structure prepared) ### 7.1. Security Monitoring Services (Optional) - **Role:** Threat detection, anomaly detection - **Location:** EU/US depending on provider - **Data Processed:** Logs, IPs, authentication events - **Legal Basis:** legitimate interest + SCC where needed ## 8. Optional / Future Sub-Processors These may include (only if enabled): - live chat / helpdesk providers - logging and telemetry systems (Sentry, Datadog, etc.) - CDN providers (Cloudflare, Fastly) - marketing automation tools Each will be added to this list before activation, following the DPA notification period. ## 9. How We Update This List Changes to Sub-Processors follow this procedure: 1. PhotoRobot updates this public Sub-Processor List. 2. Customers are notified of material changes (if required). 3. Customers may object within the timeframe specified in the DPA (typically **15 days**). 4. In case of objection, PhotoRobot will work with the Customer to find an acceptable solution. ## 10. Contact Information For questions about Sub-Processors: **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic Email: **legal@photorobot.com** --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/support # SECTION: legal > support # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms This PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms Legal Document describes the support services provided by uni-Robot Ltd (PhotoRobot). ## PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms This document represents the PhotoRobot Customer Support Terms: **Version 2.0 – PhotoRobot Edition**,*uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction - Customer Support Terms These Customer Support Terms (“**Support Terms** ”) describe the support services provided by **uni-Robot Ltd.** (“**PhotoRobot** ”) in connection with: - PhotoRobot Controls Cloud - PhotoRobot Cloud 2.0 - PhotoRobot API - CL ↔ Cloud synchronization - PhotoRobot hardware devices (“Robots”) including TurnTable, Cube, Robotic Arm, Frame, Carousel, and related modules - firmware-based control systems - enterprise support plans These Support Terms complement the [**PhotoRobot Software SLA**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-sw)**(/legal/sla-sw)**, the [**PhotoRobot Hardware SLA**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-hw)**(/legal/sla-hw)**, and the [**PhotoRobot Terms of Service**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/terms-of-service) **(/legal/terms-of-service)**. ## 2. Scope of Support ### 2.1. Cloud & Software Support PhotoRobot provides support for: - account access and authentication - project operations - uploads, processing, and rendering - API usage - synchronization issues (CL ↔ Cloud) - Cloud 2.0 functionality - software performance issues - firmware upgrade procedure ### 2.2. Controls Local (CL) Support includes: - installation - activation - configuration and networking - CL ↔ Cloud bridge - software key issues ### 2.3. Hardware Support (Robots & Firmware) PhotoRobot provides support related to: - firmware updates - robot connectivity - motor diagnostics and sensor diagnostics - device logs (if available) - troubleshooting of mechanical and electronic issues - calibration guidance - recommended maintenance routines - identification of required replacement parts - RMA process coordination **( ! ) - Hardware repairs, physical servicing, on-site work, or mechanical interventions are not included**, unless covered by: - warranty, or - commercial service agreement, or - paid on-site maintenance. ## 3. Support Channels ### 3.1. Support Portal Support Portal: [https://support.photorobot.com](https://support.photorobot.com) Used for ticket creation, troubleshooting, documentation requests. ### 3.2. In-Product Support Form Inside Cloud interface. ### 3.3. Remote Diagnostic Session For SW or HW troubleshooting when explicitly approved by Customer. ### 3.4. Phone / Video Call (Enterprise Only) Available for enterprise customers with premium support plans. ## 4. Support Availability Standard support hours: **Monday–Friday 08:00–16:00 CET (excluding Czech national holidays)** Enterprise support plans may extend these hours by contract. ## 5. Ticketing & Issue Handling ### 5.1. Ticket Creation Each request sent to [https://support.photorobot.com](https://support.photorobot.com) automatically creates a ticket. Ticket should include: - description of the issue - steps to reproduce - business impact - screenshots or logs - serial number of affected Robot (if applicable) - photos or short video for hardware issues (strongly recommended) - system logs ### 5.2. Ticket Lifecycle - **New** – ticket created - **In Progress** – engineer assigned - **Awaiting Customer** – waiting for information - **Resolved** – solution provided - **Closed** – auto-closed after 5 days without reply ## 6. Severity Levels & Response Times Severity definitions follow the **applicable SLA**: **Software Incidents to Software SLA (** [**https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-sw**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-sw)**)** | Severity | Definition | Initial Response | | --- | --- | --- | | L1 Critical | Complete outage, production halted | 4 hours | | L2 Major | Severe degradation | 8 hours | | L3 Minor | Partial disruption | 24 hours | | L4 Low | Cosmetic, non-urgent | 3 business days | **Hardware Incidents to Hardware SLA (** [**https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-hw**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla-hw)**)** | L1 Critical | Robot non-functional, production stopped | 24 hours | | L2 Major | Degraded functionality, workflow slowed | 48 hours | | L3 Minor | Non-critical malfunction | 3 business days | | L4 Low | Cosmetic or optional component | 5 business days | ## 7. Resolution Expectations PhotoRobot commits to: - prompt investigation - clear communication - identifying workarounds (where possible) - coordinating spare parts or RMA when needed - collaborating with sub-processors or suppliers ### ( ! ) - Important Resolution times are **not guaranteed** and depend on: - nature of hardware failure - availability of replacement parts - required diagnostics - cooperation from Customer - shipping and logistics constraints ## 8. Hardware Support Procedures ### 8.1. Diagnostic Requirements For hardware incidents, Customer should provide: - high-resolution photos of affected area - short video showing the malfunction - serial number & device model - firmware version - logs (if applicable) ### 8.2. Remote Diagnostics Where possible, PhotoRobot will perform: - remote inspection - firmware verification - motor/sensor tests (if supported) - calibration checks - environmental condition checks (power, cables, mounts, load) ### 8.3. Replacement Parts If a replacement part is required: - PhotoRobot identifies the part - Customer receives quotation - Shipment is made after order confirmation - Customer performs installation, unless service contract states otherwise **( ! ) - There is no guaranteed delivery time of parts unless contractually agreed.** ### 8.4. RMA (Return Material Authorization) If a defective part must be returned: 1. PhotoRobot issues RMA number 2. Customer ships part to PhotoRobot 3. PhotoRobot inspects and verifies failure 4. Repair or replacement is issued 5. Part is shipped back to Customer ### 8.5. Warranty Considerations If under warranty: - faulty part is repaired or replaced free of charge - customer pays shipping to PR - PR pays shipping back to customer If outside warranty: - repairs and parts are billed - shipping both ways is billed ### 8.6. Excluded Hardware Support Not included: - on-site repairs - damaged components caused by incorrect use - mechanical wear & tear (belts, bearings, rubber components) - user-made mechanical modifications - electrical damage from non-compliant installations ## 9. Customer Responsibilities Customer must: - provide accurate issue descriptions - maintain stable and compliant operating environment - follow safety instructions and manuals - perform recommended maintenance - avoid unauthorized modifications - provide logs / photos / videos when requested - ensure robots are operated legally and safely ## 10. Remote Access Policy Remote access may be used for SW or HW support if: - approved by Customer - supervised by Customer - session is temporary - strictly used for diagnostics - no permanent access remains Remote access is **optional**, never mandatory. ## 11. Exclusions from Support Support does **not** cover: - third-party hardware or software - unsupported operating systems - modified firmware - customer’s own scripts or integrations - photography technique consulting (unless paid) - on-site repairs - mechanical modifications - logistics, customs delays, or shipping risks - physical wear & tear of components Paid consultancy or service agreements may be offered. ## 12. Escalation Path If an issue is unresolved, escalation follows: 1. Support Engineer 2. Senior Engineer 3. Support Lead 4. Engineering Team 5. Management (enterprise only) ## 13. Customer Conduct Customers must: - maintain respectful communication - avoid ticket flooding - provide timely responses - designate a single point of contact (enterprise) PhotoRobot may limit support in cases of abusive behavior. ## 14. Changes to Support Terms PhotoRobot may update these Support Terms at any time. Changes take effect when published. Material changes will be announced in advance. ## 15. Contact Information **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic **Support Portal:** [https://support.photorobot.com](https://support.photorobot.com/)**Contact email:** legal@photorobot.com (only for legal matters) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/terms-of-service # SECTION: legal > terms-of-service # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Terms of Service This PhotoRobot Terms of Service Legal Document represents the legally binding agreement between the customer and PhotoRobot. ## PhotoRobot Terms of Service This document represents the PhotoRobot Terms of Service: **Version 1.0 — PhotoRobot Edition**, *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. ## 1. Introduction - PhotoRobot Terms of Service These Terms of Service (“**Terms** ”) govern your access to and use of the PhotoRobot Controls Cloud and related online services provided by **uni-Robot Ltd.**, Vodičkova 710/31, 110 00 Prague 1, Czech Republic, Company ID: 01478061, VAT ID: CZ01478061 (“**PhotoRobot**, **we**, **us**, **our** ”). By creating a PhotoRobot Account, accessing the PhotoRobot Controls Cloud, or using any part of the service, you agree to be bound by these Terms. If you do not agree to these Terms, you must not use the Service. These Terms form a legally binding agreement between you (“**Customer**, **User**, **you** ”) and PhotoRobot. ## 2. Definitions For the purpose of these Terms: - **Account** – a user account created on the PhotoRobot Cloud. - **Billing Date** – the recurring monthly date on which fees are charged. - **Customer Data** – all digital content uploaded or generated by you through the Service. - **PhotoRobot Robots** – physical robotic devices manufactured by uni-Robot Ltd., including TurnTable, Cube, Robotic Arm, Frame, Carousel and other mechanical modules. - **Controls Cloud** – PhotoRobot’s cloud-based software platform accessible at [https://cloud.photorobot.com](https://cloud.photorobot.com/) / [https://cloud2.photorobot.com](https://cloud.photorobot.com/). - **Controls Local (CL)** – the locally installed desktop application requiring a software key. - **Cloud 2.0** – an optional cloud extension for CL. - **Service** – collectively Controls Cloud, Cloud 2.0, APIs, cloud storage, and any associated web interfaces. - **Subscription Plan** – the specific plan and pricing under which the Service is provided. - **Authorized User** – any person permitted by the Customer to access the Service. - **Documentation** – all user guides, manuals, and online help resources. Full definitions are maintained in the [PhotoRobot Legal Definitions & Glossary](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/definitions). ## 3. Eligibility & Account Registration ### 3.1. Eligibility You must be at least 18 years old, or the legal age of majority in your jurisdiction, to use the Service. ### 3.2. Account Creation To access the Service, you must create an Account by providing accurate and complete registration information. ### 3.3. Account Owner The person or entity that creates the Account is the **Account Owner**, responsible for: - billing - security of login credentials - permissions granted to Authorized Users - compliance with these Terms ### 3.4. Account Security You must not share login credentials with unauthorized persons. You are responsible for all activities under your Account. ### 3.5. Account Communication You agree to receive essential communications electronically, including: - billing confirmations - security notices - policy updates (Non-essential marketing requires separate consent.) ## 4. Subscription, Pricing & Billing ### 4.1. Subscription Model The Service is provided on a recurring, month-to-month subscription basis unless agreed otherwise. ### 4.2. Free Trial New users may be granted a free trial period, limited by watermark. Abuse of free trials may lead to termination. ### 4.3. Billing & Payments Fees are charged monthly on the Billing Date to the selected payment method. ### 4.4. Taxes & VAT Prices exclude VAT unless explicitly stated. Customer is responsible for all applicable taxes. ### 4.5. Failed Payments If payment cannot be processed: 1. Your access may be suspended. 2. Data may be deleted after 30 days of non-payment. ### 4.6. Price Changes PhotoRobot may update pricing with at least **30 days’ notice**. ## 5. Use of the Service ### 5.1. Authorized Use You may use the Service solely for lawful business purposes and in accordance with these Terms. ### 5.2. Restrictions You may not: - copy, modify, or reverse engineer the Service - circumvent security mechanisms - upload malware or harmful content - use the Service for unlawful purposes - overload the Service via abusive automation or excessive API usage ### 5.3. Customer Responsibilities You are responsible for: - the accuracy of Customer Data - maintaining backup copies of Customer Data (although PhotoRobot maintains redundant backups, this is not a guaranteed archival service) - ensuring all Authorized Users comply with these Terms ### 5.4. Service Modifications We may update or modify the Service at any time to improve performance, security, or functionality. ## 6. Customer Data ### 6.1. Ownership Customer retains all rights to Customer Data. ### 6.2. License to operate the Service You grant PhotoRobot a limited, worldwide, non-exclusive license to process, store, transmit, and display Customer Data for the sole purpose of providing the Service. ### 6.3. Data Deletion Upon termination or cancellation: - data remains accessible for 30 days - after 30 days, data is permanently deleted and cannot be restored ### 6.4. Data Protection Processing of personal data is governed by: - our **Privacy Policy**, - our **GDPR Privacy Notice**, - and (where applicable) the **Data Processing Agreement (DPA)**. ## 7. Intellectual Property ### 7.1. PhotoRobot IP All intellectual property in the Service, software, firmware, designs, robots, algorithms, and documentation remains the property of **uni-Robot Ltd.** ### 7.2. No Transfer of Rights Nothing in these Terms transfers any ownership rights to the Customer. ### 7.3. Feedback If you provide suggestions or ideas, PhotoRobot may use them freely without obligation. ## 8. Service Availability ### 8.1. Reasonable Availability PhotoRobot aims to maintain high availability but does not guarantee uninterrupted access unless specified in a separate **SLA**. ### 8.2. Maintenance Windows Scheduled maintenance may cause temporary unavailability. Where feasible, customers will be notified in advance. ### 8.3. Third-Party Platforms The Service relies on third-party infrastructure (e.g., Google Cloud). Service disruptions outside our control are not considered breaches. ## 9. Term, Suspension & Termination ### 9.1. Term These Terms remain in effect until the Account is terminated. ### 9.2. Suspension We may suspend access if: - payment fails - illegal or abusive activity is detected - security concerns arise ### 9.3. Termination by Customer You may cancel your subscription at any time through your Account settings. ### 9.4. Termination by PhotoRobot We may terminate immediately if you violate these Terms. ### 9.5. Effect of Termination Upon termination: - access is revoked at the end of billing period - Customer Data is deleted after 30 days - no refunds are provided for partial months ## 10. Disclaimers & Limitations of Liability ### 10.1. No Warranties To the maximum extent permitted by law, the Service is provided “as is” without warranties of any kind. ### 10.2. Limitation of Liability PhotoRobot’s total liability is limited to the amount paid by Customer in the preceding 12 months. ### 10.3. Excluded Damages PhotoRobot is not liable for: - lost profits - lost data - indirect, incidental, or consequential damages ## 11. Governing Law & Jurisdiction These Terms are governed by the laws of the **Czech Republic**. All disputes shall be resolved exclusively by the competent courts in **Prague, Czech Republic**. ## 12. Changes to Terms PhotoRobot may revise these Terms at any time. You will be notified at least **30 days before** changes take effect. Continued use of the Service after changes constitutes acceptance. ## 13. Contact Information For questions regarding these Terms, contact: **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic **Email:** legal@photorobot.com **Email:** info@photorobot.com --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/legal/warranty # SECTION: legal > warranty # TYPE: Legal document # UPDATED: 2026-10-04 --- # PhotoRobot Warranty Terms These Warranty Terms are intended for commercial customers. Where the Customer is a consumer, mandatory consumer protection rules apply in addition to, and prevail over, these Warranty Terms to the extent they cannot be limited by contract. ## PhotoRobot Warranty Terms **Version 1.2 — PhotoRobot Edition** Issued by uni-Robot s.r.o., Czech Republic Effective from 4 October 2026. [Supersedes Version 1.1](https://www.photorobot.com/legal-version/warranty-v1-1). The English version of this document controls. Any other language version is provided for convenience only. ## 1. Definitions **Equipment** means a PhotoRobot-branded machine including its functions, upgrades and accessories. It does not include any software programs, whether pre-installed with the Equipment or installed later. Software is covered separately under the PhotoRobot License Agreement and, for cloud components, the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Software. **Customer** means the party acquiring the Equipment under the Hardware Contract. **Hardware Contract** means the contract under which the Equipment is supplied, including its schedules. **Acceptance Criteria** has the meaning given to it in the applicable Hardware Contract, including any provision under which those criteria are deemed satisfied. **Consumable and wear parts** means parts subject to depletion or wear in normal use, such as X-rings for the glass plate support, rubber guide rollers and glass plates. **RMA** means the Return Material Authorization process described in the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware. **PWS** means Premium Worldwide Support as described in section 8. uni-Robot s.r.o., as the manufacturer of PhotoRobot, warrants that the Equipment used in its specified operating environment will conform to its officially published specifications. During the warranty period, uni-Robot s.r.o. will repair the Equipment without charge. uni-Robot s.r.o. may require proof of purchase (a copy of the sales receipt or purchase invoice) to confirm the warranty claim. ## 2. Warranty period The warranty period covers 12 months and begins on the date on which the Acceptance Criteria set out in the Hardware Contract are satisfied or deemed satisfied. Where the Hardware Contract does not provide for Acceptance Criteria, the warranty period begins on the date the Equipment is delivered to the Customer. ## 3. Coverage If the Equipment does not function as warranted during the warranty period and the problem cannot be resolved by phone, electronically, or by application of software updates, uni-Robot s.r.o., its subcontractor, or a reseller approved by uni-Robot s.r.o. to provide warranty service will, at its discretion, repair the Equipment or replace defective components so that the Equipment functions as warranted. **Territory.** These warranties apply in the country to which the Equipment is delivered under the Hardware Contract. Where the Hardware Contract specifies more than one place of delivery, they apply in each such country. Where the Equipment is moved to another country after delivery, warranty service outside the country of delivery is subject to uni-Robot s.r.o.’s prior written confirmation and may be affected by logistics, customs, export control, safety or service availability limitations. **Installation, commissioning and training.** Installation, commissioning and training performed by uni-Robot s.r.o. personnel shall be carried out with due professional care and skill and in accordance with the Supplier’s documented procedures. This obligation is subject to any applicable limitation of liability agreed between the parties and does not expand the remedies available under the applicable contract. Ad-hoc “how-to” guidance and photographic technique consulting provided outside the scope of the agreed installation and training services are not covered by this obligation. **Replacement parts.** Any replacement part supplied by uni-Robot s.r.o. is covered by a separate warranty of twelve (12) months, commencing on the date the part is installed by uni-Robot s.r.o. or, where the Customer installs the part, on the date of its delivery. This warranty applies to the replacement part only and does not extend the warranty period applicable to the remainder of the Equipment. Consumable and wear parts supplied as replacements are covered against manufacturing defect only. **Advance replacement.** Where a defective part must be repaired and a replacement is available from stock, uni-Robot s.r.o. will ship an advance replacement so that the Customer can continue production. Under warranty this is at no charge, subject to return of the defective part within fifteen (15) business days of delivery of the replacement; otherwise the replacement is invoiced at list price. Advance replacement depends on parts availability and is not a guaranteed lead time. uni-Robot s.r.o. warranties apply only to Equipment acquired for the Customer’s own use, not for the purpose of resale. uni-Robot s.r.o. does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the Equipment, or that uni-Robot s.r.o. will repair all defects. These warranties are the exclusive warranties of uni-Robot s.r.o. and replace all other warranties, including implied warranties or conditions of satisfactory quality, merchantability, non-infringement, and fitness for a particular purpose. uni-Robot s.r.o. warranties do not apply in cases of misuse, modification, damage not caused by uni-Robot s.r.o., or failure to follow the Equipment manufacturer’s instructions. In such cases, warranties are limited to the duration of the warranty period and after this period no warranties shall apply. Nothing in these Warranty Terms limits any statutory rights of consumers that cannot be limited by contract. If the Equipment fails during the warranty period, the time spent on repair is added to the warranty period. This period begins on the day the defect is reported to technical support and to the product seller, reseller, agency, representative, importer, or manufacturer, if technical support does not exist. If during the warranty period the Equipment fails due to a manufacturing or assembly defect, the repair is carried out without any service fee or parts replacement fee. Consumable and wear parts are covered against manufacturing defects only, in accordance with section 5. ## 4. Customer-supplied equipment The use of Customer-supplied computers, cameras, lenses, monitors, cabling and related accessories which uni-Robot s.r.o. has reviewed and confirmed in writing as compatible shall not void, limit or otherwise affect the warranty on the Equipment. For the avoidance of doubt, this warranty does not extend to the Customer-supplied items themselves, which remain subject to their respective manufacturers’ warranties. Confirmation of compatibility is given in writing, identifies the specific items reviewed, and is issued before procurement wherever the Customer provides the specification in time. ## 5. Exclusions The Equipment is under warranty coverage by uni-Robot s.r.o. against any defect that may occur during manufacturing, assembly and/or defective parts. Excessive or improper use of the Equipment is not covered by the warranty (for example scratched glass parts). Accessories, consumables, supplies, and wear and fatigue-prone support components (for example X-rings for the glass plate support) are not covered by the warranty. Warranty on the Equipment is terminated by removing or modifying Equipment or part identification labels. The obligations of free repair and replacement of the product under warranty cannot be applied in the following cases: - the product defect occurs due to use contrary to the conditions specified in the user manual; - the product has been opened, used, or previously repaired by unauthorized persons; - use of the product by connecting to an unsuitable voltage or with a faulty electrical installation; - the serial number of the product has been modified or removed; - defect or damage to the product occurs during transport outside the responsibility of uni-Robot s.r.o.; - breakage or scratching of the exterior of the product while in the Customer’s possession; - the product is damaged as a result of use with accessories or equipment purchased from third parties, other than Customer-supplied equipment confirmed as compatible under section 4, or as a result of unauthorized service; - damage caused by natural disasters, such as fire, lightning, flood, earthquake, and similar events. For services provided by technical support during the warranty period as part of regular maintenance stipulated by the manufacturer or importer, no labour charges will be imposed on the Customer. ## 6. Your responsibilities The Customer will: - inform uni-Robot s.r.o. or the dealer of any changes in the location of the Equipment; - maintain the recommended operating environment for the Equipment; - before replacing the Equipment or its part, remove all additional elements, parts, modifications, extensions, and expansions that are not covered by this warranty, and ensure that the Equipment is not subject to any legal restrictions that prevent its replacement; where the type of warranty service requires delivery of the defective Equipment or part to uni-Robot s.r.o., send it suitably packaged to the location designated by uni-Robot s.r.o.; - obtain authorization from the owner of the Equipment before requesting warranty service, if relevant; - provide sufficient and safe access to the facilities and the Equipment to enable the services to be performed (clean, well-lit, and suitable for the purpose), including a suitable workspace allowing disassembly and re-assembly of the Equipment; - provide a stable internet connection where remote diagnostics are required; - follow the service procedures established by uni-Robot s.r.o., and comply with all operator responsibilities instructions; - allow uni-Robot s.r.o., its subcontractor, or the dealer to install mandatory technical changes, such as those related to safety; and - remain responsible for reasonable protection of the Equipment and all data contained therein, including backups and configuration, whenever uni-Robot s.r.o. remotely accesses it to help isolate the cause of the problem. If the Customer refuses remote access, uni-Robot s.r.o. may be limited in its ability to resolve the problem. ## 7. Shipping, insurance and RMA The return of defective components is handled under clause 7 of the Service Level Agreement (SLA) for PhotoRobot Hardware. Each party shall insure the shipment for the leg of transport for which it bears the shipping cost under that clause, for not less than the replacement value of the component. Risk of loss of or damage to a component in transit rests with the party responsible for insuring that leg. ## 8. Premium Worldwide Support (PWS) PWS is PhotoRobot’s operational-continuity program for the production imaging workflow. It is defined, together with its binding terms, in the PhotoRobot PWS Program document. **Factory PWS.** New Equipment is delivered with Factory PWS included in the Equipment price, valid for the first year from the Installation Date as defined in the PWS Program. A higher service level during the first year can be arranged for a surcharge. **Renewal.** From year two onwards PWS is renewable. Uninterrupted renewal preserves the original preferential terms; the PWS Program sets out the grace period and the consequences of a lapse. **Service levels.** The objective for the first Qualified Technical Response is set by the service level contracted in the individual PWS offer. Severity of an individual ticket governs the order and intensity of handling within that contracted level and is a separate matter. **Configurable elements.** Several parameters are set in the individual PWS offer rather than by these Warranty Terms, including the service level, whether equipment-related technician travel is included, whether parts shipping is included, and the availability of loaner units. **Relationship to these Warranty Terms.** These Warranty Terms govern defects in the Equipment. The PWS Program governs support, response objectives and operational continuity. Where the same subject is addressed by both, the order of precedence set out in the PWS Program applies to support and response matters. Program and terms: [https://www.photorobot.com/pws](https://www.photorobot.com/pws) Support portal: [https://support.photorobot.com](https://www.photorobot.com/support) uni-Robot s.r.o. · Vodičkova 710/31 · 110 00 Prague 1 · Czechia · ID 01478061 --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/privacy # SECTION: privacy # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot Privacy Policy > The PhotoRobot Privacy documentation is structured to provide both public transparency and required regulatory disclosures. Last edited: Dec 29, 2025 ## PhotoRobot Privacy Policy ## General Information This document defines the PhotoRobot Privacy Policy of Company improtech s.r.o. It ensures both public transparency and compliance with required regulatory disclosures through structured documentation. The PhotoRobot Privacy Policy is public-facing, while the GDPR Privacy Notice and DPA contain mandatory disclosures and contractual obligations. Company improtech s.r.o. is a controller of personal data of customers using our PhotoRobot services or products and potential customers who are interested in our offer (filled in contact forms or signed for newsletter). This means that we collect and use such data (process personal data) to perform customer orders, provide services, support (especially warranty support) and inform about our products and services. Since our products and services are focused to business customers - not to consumers, most of the data we process are not personal data. This Privacy Policy is designed to protect personal data, although it also governs how we use all information we obtain about our customers (including “non-personal data”). In cases where this Policy applies to any data we process about our customers or potential customers, we will use the term “data”, while “personal data” will mean only data about the identity of individuals. The Privacy Policy is in line with the provisions on the protection of personal data, in particular with Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 April 2016 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data (General Data Protection Regulation, hereinafter referred to as the GDPR). The rules of the GDPR govern the processing of any personal data of individuals from any Member State of the European Union. We treat the received data as confidential, which is why we do our best to protect them as far as possible against unauthorized persons. For this purpose, we use technical means, such as e.g. secure communications protocols. All our employees who come into contact with your data have been properly trained to process them. We respect your right to privacy. We only use the information you provide to us for the purpose for which it was collected with your consent or pursuant to legal provisions allowing us to do so. You will learn from this Privacy Policy, how we use the information, how you can protect your privacy and what rights you have in relation to your personal data. Please read it carefully and contact us if you have any questions. ## Data We Collect Due to the fact that our offer is addressed mainly to business customers (B2B) and not to consumers (B2C), we primarily collect data concerning companies (enterprises) interested in or already using our products and services. They may also include personal data of their representatives and employees. The information is provided to us either by the interested parties themselves via our website (contact forms, newsletter subscriptions), by e-mail or telephone and by personal contact (e.g. at trade fairs), or is collected by us automatically via cookies or similar technology. In the contact forms on our websites (on the website you can choose different language versions, the English version is available at: https://photorobot.com), we ask you to provide the company name, company e-mail address, phone, country and possibly the name and surname of the contact person. You can also subscribe to our newsletter via our website by entering your e-mail address and clicking the “Subscribe” button. Our newsletter may contain information about our products, news, etc. You can opt out from receiving it at any time. In order to process your purchase order, issue an invoice and deliver the products, we will need additional information as required by law (e.g. a invoice address and tax identification number of your company). Remember, that by providing us with your data you do it voluntarily. You have no legal or contractual obligation to do so. However, some details may be necessary, for example, to process your order (company name, invoice address, tax identification number). Without such information we may not be able to sell you our products nor provide services. Data collected automatically are data about the activity of visitors to our website, collected using the so-called cookies or similar technologies (see section “Use of cookies”). They allow us to constantly improve and adjust our websites and offers to the customer’s preferences. ## Use of the PhotoRobot Cloud Service We own and manage the PhotoRobot Cloud website available at cloud.photorobot.com and account.photorobot.com. It provides a 360/3D/2D multimedia presentation management service. The Service also serves the users solutions to manage purchased licenses for PhotoRobot software and to buy additional services such as technical support and extended warranty. A user of the Service is a company (entrepreneur) registered in the Service. In order to register, you need to provide a company name and a user e-mail. The data of the company registered in the Service are not visible to other users using the Service, except for PhotoRobot and it’s sale partner (e.g. a subsidiary company, or distributor), who has made a sale of any PhotoRobot product to the company. The data is used by PhotoRobot and it’s sales partners to provide warranty and technical support service. The company that owns the account can manage access to the account by individuals (e.g. its employees or co-workers). If you become our customer, i.e. you have purchased one of our products, you will receive an invitation e-mail from us, which will allow you to register with the Service. If you are not our customer yet (you have not used our products yet), you can register in the Service (create a company account) by providing the above data and choosing a password to the account. Free registration will enable you to test our PhotoRobot Cloud Service. If you register with the Service on its website, you may also give your consent to receive, at the e-mail address provided, commercial communications containing news about our product and service offerings. The information is sent in the form of a marketing newsletter. You can unsubscribe from receiving the marketing newsletter at any time in your account settings or by clicking the unsubscribe button in the newsletter. Other parts of the Privacy Policy also apply to the data of PhotoRobot Cloud users. Please read them carefully. ## Use of Cookies Through our websites, including PhotoRobot Cloud Service, we use cookies and similar local storage technology. Cookies are information technology data containing a small amount of text which are sent by a web server to a user’s browser when he or she accesses web pages. We use cookies and local storage files for the purpose of: - adapting the content of the pages to the user’s preferences and optimising the use of those pages; produce statistics that help us understand how visitors to our websites use them; for this purpose, we also use Google Analytics, an external web analysis service provided by Google Inc., with its own cookies - ensuring efficient operation of our websites, including all functionalities of the PhotoRobot website - providing users with adverts that are relevant to them by collecting information about their browsing habits and site usage as provided by Google with their own cookies By default, web browsers allow cookies to be placed on the user’s computer. You can change the conditions for storing and accessing cookies by yourself in the settings of your browser (see your browser’s help system for information). If you do not agree to the use of cookies, please change your browser settings accordingly. If you do not do this when you view our website, you will be consenting to the use of cookies for the above purposes. More information on how Google use your data can be found here: https://policies.google.com/technologies/cookies?hl=en-US To change your cookie settings, you can use Cookies policy link at the bottom of this page. Please note that blocking cookies may cause difficulties in using certain functionalities of the PhotoRobot Service. ## Use of Data and Legal Basis for It We use your data only for the purposes for which you have given us your consent or for which we are entitled by law, in particular under the GDPR provisions. The data provided to us for the purpose of purchasing our products are used for the execution of customer orders and after-sales service (warranty and post-warranty support). Similarly, data concerning the users of PhotoRobot Site are used to provide the PhotoRobot Service, including communicating to them (technical) information concerning operation of the Service. In this respect, the legal basis for our processing of personal data is Article 6(1)(b) of the GDPR provisions (processing of personal data is necessary for the performance of the concluded contract without the requirement of obtaining a separate consent for such processing). If you are already our customer and use our products, you can receive from us at the indicated e-mail address marketing information about our current offer, novelties and products improvements. It will be mailed to you in the form of a newsletter after your company has been registered with the PhotoRobot Service. The legal basis that allows us to do so is the so-called legitimate interest of the controller (in accordance with Article 6(1)(f) of the GDPR provisions). However, you may object at any time to receiving such commercial information by not giving your consent to register with the PhotoRobot Service (rejecting the activation e-mail received from us), by changing settings in your account preferences or by deleting your account. If you are not using our products yet (you are not our customer) but you have subscribed to the marketing newsletter (upon registration in the PhotoRobot Cloud Service or through our website), we will use the data provided by you, including your e-mail address, to send the newsletter. If you send us a product related inquiry through e-mail or using any of contact form, we will only give you information (send email or phone you) related to this inquiry. In the above cases, the legal basis for processing your personal data is your consent to receive specific commercial information (in accordance with Article 6(1)(a) of the GDPR). You can unsubscribe from receiving our newsletter at any time simply by clicking “unsubscribe” button in the newsletter. Data collected automatically (by means of cookies or similar technologies, such as local storage) are used by us to analyse the behaviour of visitors to our websites, to collect statistical information related to it and to personalize our websites. All this to improve the quality of our services and the attractiveness of our offer (for more information on how to block cookies, see the section “Use of cookies”). Any data we hold will not be passed on to any other person or entity for advertising or commercial purposes. ## Retention Period for Data The data we hold are processed (i.e. used) by us in principle for the period necessary to achieve the purpose for which they were collected, i.e. to perform the contract for the customer, provide after-sales service (warranty and post-warranty support), provide PhotoRobot Cloud Service, send newsletter or communicate other information requested by the user (customer). This does not mean, however, that once we have achieved the above purposes, we will immediately delete all the related data. The obligation to store the data for a longer period of time may result from the provisions of law (in accordance with Article 6 (1) (c) of the GDPR). This applies in particular to tax, accounting and statistical regulations, which require e.g. storing data on commercial transactions with customers for a specified period of time. Moreover, in order to secure the data collected in our IT system, protect it against loss due to system failure, capture and eliminate potential violations of personal data, we create back-up copies (backups) containing comprehensive data of the IT system for the time necessary for the above purposes (X months). The objective of achieving appropriate level of data security excludes the possibility to delete individual information (including specific personal information) from the backup copy. The legal basis for such data storage is the legitimate interest of the controller (in accordance with Article 6(1)(f) of the provisions of the GDPR). ## Data Protection and Data Security In order to ensure the best protection of the data transferred to us against their disclosure to unauthorized persons, we have applied a number of technical, IT, organizational and legal safeguards: - we collect data on our own server, located in a separate, guarded place; data from the PhotoRobot site or PhotoRobot Cloud service are stored on secure Google cloud servers located in the European Union - the premises in which we process data are protected by numerous physical security measures against unauthorised access - we use an internal firewall-protected network that is not accessible from the outside - we use communication encryption to our servers using SSH protocol and our servers can only be accessed by authorized person - we back up personal data (backups) in order to protect them against accidental loss or intentional destruction - we have implemented appropriate procedures to collect and process personal data in accordance with the provisions of the GDPR, we monitor and enforce their observance; in the case of a personal data breach we are obliged to notify to the national data protection supervisory authority - if the processing of personal data takes place with the participation of an external service provider, we use the services of only reputable companies, that ensure appropriate level of security and protection of the personal data entrusted to them ## Entities with Access to Data With a view to provide efficient and professional service to our customers, we also use IT solutions and tools developed by other companies. Therefore, personal data processed by us may be entrusted to external service providers to a certain extent. However, we select only those service providers that provide adequate guarantees for the protection of the data entrusted to them. In relation to the data entrusted to them, we still remain the controller of the data and exercise control over them. As far as processing of personal data for the purpose of sending newsletters to our customers is concerned, we use the external MailChimp mailing platform. For efficient handling of customer enquiries and requests, we use Copper CRM platform. The data of the users of our services are stored on a secure Google cloud server located within the European Union or United States. The companies listed above, based in the USA, should ensure a level of protection of personal data in accordance with the provisions of the GDPR, as they are certified participants of the Privacy Shield Framework, regulating the secure transfer of personal data from the European Union countries to the USA. (For more information and contact details of these companies, please refer to their privacy policies on their websites) We are also obliged to provide personal data held by us if such a request is made to us by authorized public authorities, e.g. the police, the public prosecutor’s office, a court as well as the data protection supervising authority. The data will not be passed on to other persons or entities for advertising or commercial purposes. ## Your Rights Under the GDPR Regulations In accordance with the provisions of the GDPR stipulating personal data protection for EU companies to which this Privacy Policy complies, you have especially following rights with respect to your personal data, of which we are the controller: - the right to obtain confirmation from us as to whether or not we are processing your personal data and, where this is the case, the right to access your personal data and receive information about your specific data we process, the purpose of processing it, its retention period and entities that have access to your data; - If you are a user of the PhotoRobot Cloud Service, you have access to your data registered in the Service through your profile created in it. - the right to rectify personal data which are inaccurate or to have incomplete data completed; - the right to withdraw at any time the consent to the processing of your data, where the basis for such processing is your consent (Article 6, point 1a of the GDPR provisions); this applies, for example, to withdrawing the consent to receive the newsletter, if you are not using our products and services yet (you are not our client); - the right to erasure your data (“the right to be forgotten”) if we no longer need it for the purpose for which we received it (once this purpose have been achieved) or if you have withdrawn the consent to the processing of your data (where the basis for such processing was your consent); In some cases, the obligation to store your data due to law or on the basis of the legitimate interest of the controller may prevent your request from being met. - the right to demand that data processing be restricted to the storage of data without any further processing in the following situations: – in case of your contesting the correctness of personal data (the limitation of the processing will then last for a period enabling us to verify the correctness of your data) – in case of the processing of your data proved to be unlawful and its erasure was impossible due to your objection, – in case of your personal data became unnecessary for us and were needed by you in order to establish, assert or defend any of your rights; - the right to data portability; you have the right to receive from us your personal data in a machine-readable format; or you may request that we transmit your personal data directly to another controller; - the right to object to the processing of your personal data by us on the basis of the legitimate interest of the controller, such as the right to object to the marketing newsletter being sent to you as our customer. You can unsubscribe from receiving the marketing newsletter at any time by clicking on the unsubscribe button in the email with the newsletter you received. - the right to lodge a complaint with the data protection supervisory authority in a given country, if in your opinion we do not comply with the GDPR regulations. If you wish to exercise these rights, or for an explanation of the content and scope of all rights under GDPR, please write to us (to an e-mail or postal address) or call us. Our contact details can be found at the bottom of this Privacy Policy. ## How the Company Communicates with Customers Our company only communicates with you in the manner in which you have given your consent and only to the address (especially e-mail address) or telephone number provided by you for this purpose. ## Changes to the Privacy Policy We reserve the right to modify this Privacy Policy in order to adapt it to possible changes in data protection legislation or changes in the scope of data processed by us. ## Information About Our Company **Company Name:** improtech s.r.o. **Address of Head Office:** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic **Identification Numbers:** CIN: 27367762 TIN: CZ27367762 The company is registered in the Municipal Court in Prague, Czech Republic, under the number C 108825/MSPH. **Contact Details:** e-mail: info@photorobot.com www.photorobot.com ## Cookies Policy --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/access-control # SECTION: security > access-control # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Access Control Policy This PhotoRobot Access Control Policy describes how PhotoRobot manages authentication, authorization, and user accounts. ## PhotoRobot Access Control Policy This document defines PhotoRobot’s Access Control Policy. It describes how PhotoRobot manages authentication, authorization, and user accounts. The Access Control Policy supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## Authentication - **SSO via Google Identity (OIDC)** - No local passwords within PhotoRobot Cloud - Password complexity and MFA policies enforced by Google ## Authorization (RBAC) Roles include: - **Production** - **Backstage** - **Retoucher** Access is granted based on: - job responsibilities - principle of least privilege - approval workflow ## Provisioning - Accounts created through SSO only - Access granted manually by an authorized admin - All assignments documented ## Deprovisioning - Access removed immediately upon termination or role change - Offboarding checklist enforced - Logs kept for auditing ## Session Controls - Automatic session expiration - Idle timeout enforced - Re-authentication required after expiry ## System Access Reviews - Periodic access audits - Review of inactive accounts - Verification of least-privilege compliance ## API Access - API keys tied to service accounts - Keys rotated regularly - Permissions scoped to required resources --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/ai-governance # SECTION: security > ai-governance # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary This document details the PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary for PhotoRobot Cloud use of AI in the form of OCR to extract text from images. ## PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary This document serves as the PhotoRobot AI Governance Summary. It ensures that PhotoRobot Cloud uses AI only in the form of OCR (Google Vision) to extract text from images. This supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. There is no decision-making, predictive, or user-impacted automated AI in use. ## AI Usage - **Type:** OCR text extraction - **Provider:** Google Vision API - **Scope:** Reading text from images for metadata automation ## Risk Classification The OCR functionality: - Is **not** a high-risk AI system - Is **not** a transparency-risk system - Is **not** a prohibited AI system - Does **not** perform autonomous decisions ## Human Oversight & Accountability - A designated **technical owner** supervises all AI-related functionality - Any extracted text is **visible** and can be **validated by users** - Users can easily identify incorrect OCR interpretations ## Transparency & Documentation - All OCR calls and transformations logged - Versioning and release notes maintained - OCR usage documented as part of system architecture ## Data Protection - No AI model training on customer data - Data never leaves the EU - Only trusted Google Cloud services are used --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/architecture # SECTION: security > architecture # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Architecture & Data Flow This page contains the security document regarding the PhotoRobot Architecture & Data Flow utilizing Google Cloud Platform services. ## PhotoRobot Architecture & Data Flow This policy defines the PhotoRobot Architecture & Data Flow. It provides a description of the high-level architecture, data flow, and design principles of PhotoRobot, and supports compliance with our contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. PhotoRobot Cloud is a cloud-native architecture utilizing Google Cloud Platform services for scalable processing, secure storage, and reliable delivery. ## High-Level Architecture ### Compute - GCP-managed compute resources (autoscaled) - Secure containerized workloads - Shielded VMs and workload identity ### Storage - Google Cloud Storage buckets (EU region) - Versioning and access controls - Encryption at rest with GCP-managed keys ### Networking - HTTPS/TLS 1.2+ for all inbound/outbound traffic - No public access to internal services - Identity-aware access at perimeter ### External Integrations - **OCR:** Google Vision API - **APIs:** REST API for customer systems - **Webhooks:** Optional for event notifications ## Data Flow (Conceptual) 1. **Upload** - User uploads images or files through the authenticated interface (HTTPS). 2. **Processing** - OCR called if enabled - Transformations and metadata generation - Actions logged for auditability 3. **Storage** - Objects stored in Google Cloud Storage - Metadata stored in cloud-managed database 4. **Delivery** - Processed results accessible via UI or API - Optional exports via standard export functions ## Design Principles - No raw data leaves the EU region - All processing isolated inside GCP - No direct access to underlying infrastructure by third parties - Minimal external dependencies (only trusted Google Cloud services) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/backup # SECTION: security > backup # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Backup Policy This document represents the PhotoRobot Backup Policy which defines how PhotoRobot ensures availability and recoverability of data. ## PhotoRobot Backup Policy This document defines the PhotoRobot Backup Policy. It describes how PhotoRobot ensures the availability and recoverability of data, and supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## Objectives - Protect customer data against loss or corruption - Ensure ability to restore core functionality - Support compliance with contractual and legal requirements ## Backup Scope Covers: - Core system databases - Metadata storage - Customer assets stored in GCP storage ## Backup Frequency - **Daily automated backups** - Additional snapshots for critical system updates - Redundant storage inside region europe-west4 ## Backup Integrity - Checksums to ensure data validity - Periodic restore tests to confirm recoverability ## Retention - Defined retention period per data type - Old backups purged automatically by policy ## Storage Location - All backups stored in **EU region** (GCP) - Encrypted at rest using AES-256 ## Restore Procedures - Manual trigger by engineering team - Prioritized based on business impact - Controlled and audited recovery process ## Access Control - Backups accessible only to authorized DevOps personnel - Access logged and monitored --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/business-continuity-dr # SECTION: security > business-continuity-dr # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Business Continuity & DR Overview This PhotoRobot page represents the security document for the PhotoRobot Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery (DR) Approach. ## PhotoRobot Business Continuity & DR Overview This document serves as the PhotoRobot Business Continuity & Disaster Recovery (DR) Overview. The policy ensures the continuity of PhotoRobot Cloud operations through resilient cloud architecture, automated backups, and clear recovery procedures. It supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. The platform is designed to withstand operational disruptions and restore services efficiently. ## Backup Strategy - **Daily automated backups** of core data and metadata - Backups stored in **Google Cloud Storage** (EU region) - Data integrity regularly validated ## Disaster Recovery Approach - **Single-region deployment** (europe-west4) - Recovery relies on backup restoration procedures - Documented workflow for recovering core services - No customer action required during recovery ## High Availability - GCP-managed uptime and resilience - Redundant infrastructure at the cloud level - Automatic failover of compute workloads within the region ## Incident Handling - Security incidents handled through documented IR procedures - Central logging provides traceability during recovery events ## Scope Limitations - Multi-region failover is not part of the current architecture - All data stays within the EU --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/change-management # SECTION: security > change-management # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Change Management Policy This policy defines how PhotoRobot manages changes to infrastructure, application code, and configurations in a controlled, auditable, and secure manner. ## PhotoRobot Change Management Policy This document defines the PhotoRobot Change Management Policy. It describes how PhotoRobot manages changes to infrastructure, application code, and configurations in a controlled, auditable, and secure manner. The PhotoRobot Change Management Policy supports compliance with our contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## Purpose - Reduce risk from uncontrolled changes - Ensure traceability and accountability - Maintain service stability and security ## Scope Covers: - Infrastructure running on Google Cloud - Application codebase and configuration - CI/CD pipelines and deployments - API specifications and system integrations ## Roles & Responsibilities - **Change Owner:** Person requesting or implementing the change - **Reviewer:** Provides approval after assessing impact - **Engineering Lead:** Oversees high-impact or sensitive changes ## Change Categories - **Standard changes:** regular deployments, routine updates - **Normal changes:** infrastructure updates, config changes - **Emergency changes:** immediate fixes during incidents ## Approval Process 1. Create change request 2. Describe impact, risk, and rollback strategy 3. Peer review required 4. Approval by Engineering Lead for high-impact changes 5. Deployment through controlled CI/CD pipeline ## Implementation Requirements - All changes must be version-controlled - No direct modification of production systems - Infrastructure changes performed via IaC where applicable - Secrets stored in Google Secret Manager ## Testing Requirements - Functional testing required - Security review applied when relevant - Rollback path must be documented ## Documentation - All deployments logged - Release notes maintained - Audit trail preserved in source control and CI/CD logs --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/disaster-recovery # SECTION: security > disaster-recovery # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Disaster Recovery Policy The PhotoRobot Disaster Recovery Policy describes how PhotoRobot recovers platform functionality during large-scale disruptions. ## PhotoRobot Disaster Recovery Policy This document defines the PhotoRobot Disaster Recovery Policy. It describes how PhotoRobot recovers platform functionality during large-scale disruptions, and supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## Purpose - Ensure controlled, timely recovery of services - Minimize downtime - Prevent data loss ## Scope Applies to: - Complete service outage - Regional service interruption - Critical infrastructure failures ## DR Strategy - **Single-region** GCP deployment (europe-west4) - Recovery based on restoring backups - Engineering-driven recovery workflow - No multi-region failover at this stage ## Recovery Priorities 1. Core infrastructure 2. Database and metadata 3. Processing pipelines 4. Public APIs 5. UI / account access ## DR Procedures - Incident commander activates DR plan - Systems restored in priority order - Verification of integrity and functionality - Communication to stakeholders when required ## Recovery Testing - DR procedures reviewed periodically - Tabletop exercises conducted when appropriate --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/incident-response # SECTION: security > incident-response # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Incident Response Policy This document establishes PhotoRobot’s structured approach to identifying, managing, and resolving security incidents affecting systems or data. ## PhotoRobot Incident Response Policy This document defines the PhotoRobot Incident Response Policy. It establishes PhotoRobot’s structured approach to identifying, managing, and resolving security incidents affecting systems or data. The Incident Response Policy supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## Objectives - Minimize impact of incidents - Ensure rapid and coordinated response - Maintain transparency and auditability - Comply with legal and contractual requirements ## Scope Covers events affecting: - PhotoRobot Cloud - Customer data - Infrastructure hosted on Google Cloud - Internal systems and devices ## Incident Classification Incidents are categorized based on: - Severity (low / medium / high) - Data impact - Operational impact - Regulatory exposure ## Roles & Responsibilities - **Incident Commander (CTO or delegate):** Leads response - **Engineering:** Executes technical mitigation steps - **Support:** Customer communication when required - **Management:** Escalation and decision-making ## 4-Phase Incident Response Cycle ### 1. Identification - Alert detection via GCP Monitoring - Log review - Suspicious access or anomalies - Report from user or employee ### 2. Containment - Limit scope of incident - Disable access if needed - Isolate affected systems - Block malicious activity ### 3. Eradication & Recovery - Remove root cause - Restore system from backup as needed - Patch vulnerabilities - Validate integrity ### 4. Lessons Learned - Document full report - Update controls based on findings - Brief internal stakeholders ## Notification & Reporting - GDPR-relevant incidents escalated immediately - Subprocessor incidents follow contract obligations - Customer notification performed through official support channels ## Evidence Handling - Logs preserved - Forensic data kept for audit - Centralized incident documentation maintained --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/information-security # SECTION: security > information-security # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Information Security Policy The Information Security Policy defines the principles, responsibilities, and controls in use by PhotoRobot to protect systems, data, and customer information. ## PhotoRobot Information Security Policy This document defines the PhotoRobot Information Security Policy. It describes the principles, responsibilities, and controls implemented by PhotoRobot to protect systems, data, and customer information. The Information Security Policy supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## Objectives - Ensure confidentiality, integrity, and availability of all systems and data - Define clear roles and responsibilities for information security - Maintain compliance with GDPR and industry best practices - Provide governance for risk management and continuous improvement ## Scope Covers: - PhotoRobot Cloud platform - Infrastructure hosted on Google Cloud Platform - Supporting systems and internal processes - Employees, contractors, and third parties ## Roles & Responsibilities - **CTO / Engineering Lead:** Overall accountability for platform security - **DevOps:** Implements and maintains cloud security controls - **Developers:** Follow secure coding and SDLC standards - **Support team:** Handles incidents and customer notifications ## Security Principles - Least privilege - Need-to-know access - Segregation of duties - Zero-trust approach - Security-by-design ## Technical Safeguards - Encryption (TLS, AES-256) - SSO authentication via Google Identity - Fine-grained RBAC roles - GCP Cloud Logging & Monitoring - Automated infrastructure patching - Daily backups with restore capability ## Organizational Safeguards - onboarding & offboarding procedures - device security expectations - confidentiality obligations - mandatory security awareness ## Risk Management - Risks assessed periodically - Controls updated based on findings - Security events documented and reviewed ## Compliance - GDPR compliant processing - DPA available for customers - Subprocessors listed publicly ## Continuous Improvement - Regular reviews of controls - Upgrades to cloud security configurations - Monitoring emerging threats --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/logging-monitoring # SECTION: security > logging-monitoring # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Logging & Monitoring Standard This standard defines how PhotoRobot collects, stores, and analyzes logs and metrics to ensure security, performance, and operational visibility. ## PhotoRobot Logging & Monitoring Standard This document defines the PhotoRobot Logging & Monitoring Standard. It details how PhotoRobot collects, stores, and analyzes logs and metrics to ensure security, performance, and operational visibility. The standard supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## Objectives - Detect anomalies and security events - Provide detailed forensic capability - Support business continuity and incident response - Ensure full traceability across systems ## Logging Sources - Application logs - Access logs - Authentication/authorization logs - API logs - Infrastructure logs (GCP) ## Logging Platform - **GCP Cloud Logging** (centralized) - Logs stored in the EU region - Protected from unauthorized access - Retention aligned with business and regulatory needs ## Monitoring Platform - **Google Cloud Monitoring** - Dashboards for key metrics - Alerts for security and uptime signals - Threshold-based triggers ## Log Retention - Retention period defined per log type - Sensitive logs restricted to minimum required duration - Automatic lifecycle policies applied ## Alerting - Security alerts issued for: - anomalous login attempts - unusual processing patterns - infrastructure issues - Notifications sent to engineering team ## Access Control to Logs - Logs accessible only to authorized personnel - All access to logs is itself logged - Least-privilege enforced ## Forensic Use - Logs support incident investigations - Combined with other telemetry for context - Strict tamper protection via GCP-managed controls --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/sdlc-security # SECTION: security > sdlc-security # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot SDLC Security Policy This PhotoRobot SDLC Security Policy document defines the security requirements applied throughout the software development lifecycle at PhotoRobot. ## PhotoRobot SDLC Security Policy This document defines the PhotoRobot SDLC Security Policy. It details the security requirements applied throughout the software development lifecycle at PhotoRobot, and supports compliance with our contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## Principles - Secure-by-design - Least privilege access to code and infrastructure - Mandatory code review - Dependency and vulnerability management ## Development Workflow - All code stored in version control - Changes reviewed via pull requests - CI pipelines enforce automated tests ## Dependency Management - Regular vulnerability scanning - Outdated libraries upgraded proactively - Only trusted package sources allowed ## Build & Deployment - Deployments via controlled CI/CD pipelines - Rollback mechanisms available - Audit logs maintained for deployments ## Secrets Management - Secrets stored securely (Google Secret Manager) - No hardcoded secrets in repositories - Rotation enforced for sensitive keys ## Testing - Unit, integration, and regression testing - Security tests included when applicable ## Release Management - Changelog maintained - Versioned releases - Controlled rollouts for major updates --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/security-measures # SECTION: security > security-measures # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Security Measures Summary This PhotoRobot Security Measures Summary document summarizes the technical and organizational safeguards applied with PhotoRobot Cloud. ## PhotoRobot Security Measures Summary This document serves as the PhotoRobot Security Measures Summary. It summarizes the technical and organizational safeguards applied within PhotoRobot Cloud, and supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## Encryption - **In transit:** TLS 1.2+ enforced on all endpoints - **At rest:** AES-256, GCP-managed encryption keys - **Key handling:** fully managed by Google Cloud KMS ## Identity & Access Management - **SSO:** Google Identity Provider (OIDC) - **Password policy:** Enforced by Google Account - **Roles:** Production, Backstage, Retoucher - **Session handling:** Automatic expiration and re-authentication ## Network Security - No publicly exposed databases or storage - API endpoints require authenticated access - Hardened perimeter via GCP infrastructure ## Application Security - Secure SDLC practices (review, versioning, dependency updates) - No customer passwords stored - Regular vulnerability checks and patching ## Logging & Monitoring - GCP Cloud Logging (audit logs, access logs) - Exception tracking and operational metrics - Alerting on critical anomalies ## Backups & Recovery - Automated daily backups of core data - Restore testing performed periodically - Single-region DR with defined recovery steps ## Vendor & Third Party - Only Google Cloud services and Google Vision OCR - Subprocessors listed at: [https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sub-processors](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sub-processors) ## AI Usage - OCR-only (Google Vision) - No automation of decisions - Full human oversight and accountability --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/security-overview # SECTION: security > security-overview # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-29 --- # PhotoRobot Security - Overview This page contains the PhotoRobot Security Overview describing the security, reliability, and privacy-by-design principles of PhotoRobot Cloud. ## PhotoRobot Security - Overview This document serves as the PhotoRobot Security Overview. It presents PhotoRobot’s security design principles, core technical controls, and operational safeguards to support enterprise risk assessments. PhotoRobot Cloud is a cloud-native SaaS platform running fully on Google Cloud Platform (GCP), designed with security, reliability, and privacy-by-design principles. The platform provides automated product photography workflows with robust access control, secure data processing, and operational continuity. ## Key Principles - Cloud-native design in a modern, resilient infrastructure. - Zero-trust aligned: all access authenticated; no anonymous access. - Security-by-default: encryption, SSO, role-based authorization. - Operational transparency: monitoring, logging, accountability. ## Infrastructure & Location - Cloud Provider: Google Cloud Platform (GCP) - Region: europe-west4 (Netherlands) - Architecture: Single-region with automated backups ## Authentication & Access Control - SSO via Google Identity - No local passwords inside PhotoRobot Cloud - Password complexity enforced by Google, not by the application - RBAC roles: Production, Backstage, Retoucher ## Data Protection - Encryption in transit: TLS 1.2+ - Encryption at rest: AES-256 (GCP-managed keys) - GCP Shielded VMs and industry-standard protections ## Monitoring & Security Controls - SIEM-equivalent: GCP Cloud Logging & Monitoring - Audit logs for user actions and system events - Alerting on anomalies and operational issues ## Operational Continuity - Daily backups of core datasets - Disaster Recovery: single-region with restore procedures - High availability through GCP-managed infrastructure ## AI Usage - Only OCR (Google Vision) for text extraction - No decision-making AI - Full human oversight and accountability PhotoRobot Cloud maintains a secure operational environment using Google Cloud’s industry-leading infrastructure and rigorous internal governance. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/security/toms # SECTION: security > toms # TYPE: Trust Center: security # UPDATED: 2025-12-30 --- # PhotoRobot Technical and Organizational Measures (TOMs) This security-related document represents the PhotoRobot Technical and Organizational Measures (TOMs) pursuant to Article 32 GDPR. ## PhotoRobot Technical and Organizational Measures (TOMs) This document defines PhotoRobot’s Technical and Organizational Measures (TOMs) pursuant to Article 32 GDPR: **Version 1.0 – PhotoRobot Edition**, *uni-Robot Ltd., Czech Republic*. The document has been last updated as of 31 December 2025, and supports compliance with PhotoRobot’s contractual obligations under the DPA and SLA. ## 1. Introduction - PhotoRobot TOMs This document describes the **Technical and Organizational Measures (TOMs)** implemented by **uni-Robot Ltd. (PhotoRobot)** to ensure an appropriate level of security for the processing of personal data in accordance with **Article 32 of the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)**. These measures apply to the operation of PhotoRobot services, including but not limited to: - PhotoRobot Controls Cloud - PhotoRobot Cloud 2.0 - PhotoRobot Controls Local (when connected to cloud services) - APIs and related online services - Supporting infrastructure and internal systems This document serves as the **authoritative description of PhotoRobot’s TOMs** and may be referenced in Data Processing Agreements (DPAs), audits, and enterprise security reviews. ## 2. Scope and Applicability The TOMs described herein apply to: - Personal data processed on behalf of customers as part of PhotoRobot services - Internal operational data necessary to provide, maintain, and secure the services The measures are designed taking into account: - the state of the art - implementation costs - the nature, scope, context, and purposes of processing - the risks to the rights and freedoms of natural persons ## 3. Organizational Security Measures ### 3.1. Information Security Governance PhotoRobot maintains internal policies and procedures governing information security, data protection, and acceptable use of systems. Responsibilities for security and data protection are clearly defined within the organization, including designated contacts for privacy and legal matters. ### 3.2. Employee Confidentiality and Awareness - Employees and contractors are bound by confidentiality obligations - Access to systems is granted on a **need-to-know basis** - Security and data protection awareness is promoted as part of onboarding and ongoing operations ## 4. Access Control and Authorization ### 4.1. Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) Access to systems and customer data is controlled using **role-based access control (RBAC)** principles. - Users are granted the minimum privileges necessary to perform their tasks - Administrative access is restricted to authorized personnel ### 4.2. Authentication - Strong authentication mechanisms are used for internal and external systems - Password policies and access credentials are managed securely - Access credentials must not be shared ## 5. Infrastructure and Network Security ### 5.1. Hosting and Cloud Infrastructure PhotoRobot services are hosted on **professional cloud infrastructure providers** (e.g., Google Cloud Platform), which implement industry-standard physical and environmental security controls. ### 5.2. Network Protection - Network traffic is protected using firewalls and access controls - Public-facing services are isolated from internal systems - Infrastructure components are monitored for availability and security events ## 6. Encryption and Data Protection ### 6.1. Data in Transit - Data transmitted between clients and PhotoRobot services is encrypted using **TLS/HTTPS** - Secure communication channels are enforced for APIs and cloud interfaces ### 6.2. Data at Rest - Data stored within cloud infrastructure is protected using encryption mechanisms provided by the hosting provider - Access to stored data is restricted to authorized systems and personnel ## 7. Logging, Monitoring, and Incident Detection ### 7.1. Logging - System logs are generated for operational and security-relevant events - Logs are used for troubleshooting, monitoring, and incident analysis ### 7.2. Monitoring - Services are monitored for availability, performance, and anomalies - Alerts are triggered in case of abnormal behavior or service disruption ## 8. Incident Response and Breach Management PhotoRobot maintains procedures for handling security incidents, including personal data breaches. These procedures include: - identification and assessment of incidents - mitigation and containment measures - internal escalation - communication with customers where required - compliance with GDPR breach notification obligations (Articles 33 and 34 GDPR) ## 9. Backup, Availability, and Business Continuity ### 9.1. Backups - Data backups are performed as part of standard cloud operations - Backups are used for disaster recovery and service continuity purposes ### 9.2. Availability - Reasonable efforts are made to maintain high availability of services - Planned maintenance activities may cause temporary service interruptions Details regarding availability targets and response times are described separately in the applicable [**Service Level Agreements (SLAs)**](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sla). ## 10. Secure Development and Change Management ### 10.1. Secure Development Practices PhotoRobot follows structured development and deployment processes, including: - separation of development, testing, and production environments where appropriate - controlled deployment procedures - version control and change tracking ### 10.2. Updates and Patching - Software components are updated to address security vulnerabilities - Critical updates are prioritized based on risk assessment ## 11. Sub-Processors and Third Parties PhotoRobot may engage **sub-processors** to support service delivery (e.g., hosting, email services). - Sub-processors are selected based on their security and data protection practices - A current [list of sub-processors](https://www.photorobot.com/legal/sub-processors) is maintained separately and made publicly available ## 12. Physical Security Physical access to servers and data centers is managed by the cloud infrastructure provider and includes: - access controls - surveillance and monitoring - environmental protections PhotoRobot does not operate its own data centers. ## 13. Data Minimization and Retention - Only data necessary for service provision is processed - Personal data is retained only as long as required for contractual, legal, or operational purposes - Data deletion and retention periods are defined in relevant policies and agreements ## 14. Review and Updates These Technical and Organizational Measures are reviewed periodically and updated as necessary to reflect: - changes in technology - changes in services - evolving security and regulatory requirements Material changes may be communicated to customers as appropriate. ## 15. Contact Information For questions regarding these Technical and Organizational Measures: **uni-Robot Ltd.** Vodičkova 710/31 110 00 Prague 1 Czech Republic Email: **legal@photorobot.com** ### Final Note These TOMs describe PhotoRobot’s current technical and organizational measures and are intended to provide transparency and assurance to customers. They do not constitute a guarantee of uninterrupted service or absolute security, but reflect a risk-based and proportionate approach to data protection and information security. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/contact # SECTION: contact # TYPE: Page --- # Contact PhotoRobot: Sales, Studio, Training and Support > Contact PhotoRobot about robots, software and pricing, a studio shoot, Academy training or a custom solution. Existing customers get help in our support portal. Pick a topic. Your message goes to the people who handle it, whichever topic you choose. Every enquiry from the contact form reaches the PhotoRobot sales team; the topic is part of the message. ## Topics ### Get in touch (Products, pricing or anything else) Tell us what you photograph and what you want to achieve. If it leads to an offer, we'll put together a configuration and budget. Form: https://www.photorobot.com/contact ### Studio shoot (We photograph your products) One-time shoot or ongoing production at our headquarters studio. Elsewhere, we connect you with a local studio running PhotoRobot. Form: https://www.photorobot.com/contact?topic=studio ### Training (PhotoRobot Academy) Standard courses or a programme built for your team, at our facilities or at your workplace. Form: https://www.photorobot.com/contact?topic=academy ### Custom solution (Dedicated machines & setups) When a standard module isn't enough, we design a dedicated machine or complete setup around your objects. Form: https://www.photorobot.com/contact?topic=custom ### Support (for existing customers) Support runs through the support portal, https://support.photorobot.com/: the support assistant answers first, day and night, from manuals and known cases. If it needs a person, the ticket goes to the specialist for that area: robots, software or studio workflow. Manuals: https://www.photorobot.com/manuals. Service plans: https://www.photorobot.com/support. ## E-mail Prefer e-mail? sales@photorobot.com --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/about # SECTION: about # TYPE: Page --- # About PhotoRobot: the team behind the robots > PhotoRobot designs and builds product photography robots, writes the software, uses it daily in its own studio and trains clients worldwide. Meet the team. PhotoRobot (since 2004): great people, capable robots and AI agents. One hybrid team. Robots, the software that drives them, the studio that uses them every day, and the training that gets your team there. Here are some of the faces behind each part. ## 01 We design and build the robots Every module, from the Centerless Table to the Carousel 5000, is engineered and assembled in-house. [See how we build them](https://www.photorobot.com/production) - Michal Benda, Design Engineer - Martin Olík, Production Lead ## 02 We write the software that runs them Capture, post-processing, publishing and integrations into your workflow: local, cloud or hybrid. [Ask about software and integrations](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) - Miro Osladil, Head of Software Development - Valda Závadský, Software Solution Architect ## 03 We use them every day, and teach you how PhotoRobot Studio shoots for clients with the same technology we sell. The same people install systems on site and train your operators anywhere in the world, with a dedicated team in the USA. [PhotoRobot Studio](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-studio) · [Academy](https://www.photorobot.com/photorobot-academy) [Book a studio shoot](https://www.photorobot.com/contact?topic=studio) · [Plan a training](https://www.photorobot.com/contact?topic=academy) - Erik Strakota, Photographer, Installations & Training · Worldwide - Ben Model, Photographer, Installations & Training · USA & worldwide ## 04 When standard isn't enough, we build to order The same engineers and developers adapt PhotoRobot components into dedicated machines. [Ask about a custom machine](https://www.photorobot.com/contact?topic=custom) - Patients before and after surgery - Museum collections & antiques - Luggage at airports - Minerals - Test tubes ## 05 We work with clients worldwide Headquarters in the Czech Republic, a team for North America, partners and logistics everywhere else. [Talk to sales](https://www.photorobot.com/contact) - Steve Embree, Managing Director · North America - Zbyněk Všolák, International Sales & Logistics - Kamil Hrbáček, Founder & CEO ## 06 And a thank-you to our AI agents We won't pretend otherwise: we're fans of artificial intelligence. We build it deep into our systems, and we use it in our own development, so you get the best possible results at an efficient price and on schedule. - First-line support: Answers first, around the clock, then hands over to a specialist. - Sales preparation: Prepares replies and configurations. A person always approves them. - Development: Helps our developers write, test and document software. ## Contact People, robots and agents. One address: https://www.photorobot.com/contact _Portraits created with AI from photos of our team._ --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/accommodation-tips # SECTION: accommodation-tips # TYPE: Page --- # Accommodation Tips for Attending Your PhotoRobot Demo Business Travel Tips ## Accommodation Tips for Attending Your PhotoRobot Demo Start planning the trip to your PhotoRobot demonstration in the Czech Republic with these hotel recommendations for PhotoRobot demo attendees. ## Recommended Hotels for PhotoRobot Demo Attendees The following customer hotel recommendations can help in planning your trip to the in-person PhotoRobot demonstration in the heart of the Czech Republic. With our showroom located just a 30-minute drive outside of historic Prague, transportation is easily arranged from the city by taxi service, or directly with PhotoRobot to your demonstration. This means that you can choose from the many hotels Prague has on offer to experience the magic of the capital city during your stay. Read ahead for our list of popular hotels for customers planning their trip to PhotoRobot. Suggestions include different categories of accommodation to meet various preferences and needs for your travels. There are suggestions ranging from luxury and 5-star hotels in the city center to more personalized boutique hotels, and hotels easily accessible to PhotoRobot for your technical teams. The last category provides especially easy access by public transport from the city center, with transport by car or taxi to the showroom. ## PhotoRobot Company adress and Showroom Adress PhotoRobot has both a company headquarters address in Prague, and the PhotoRobot showroom address. The PhotoRobot showroom is where all demonstrations take place, and it is located approximately a 30-minute drive from Prague. ### PhotoRobot Company Headquarters Located in Prague Vodičkova 710/31, 110 00 Praha 1, Nové Město ### PhotoRobot Showroom and Studio Location for the customer demonstration Approximately 30-minute drive from Prague Topolová 483, 250 67 Klecany ## Recommended Hotels for PhotoRobot Customers A common concern a visitor experiences is how well will the product or service be supported. Introducing the team eases fears while showing confidence. ### Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center #### Fairmont Golden Prague - Superb location in the Old Jewish Quarter - Walking distance to Old Town Square - Parizska street, famous for its luxury shopping boulevard - Rooftop restaurant, full services - Riverside view - Google Maps: Pařížská 30, 110 00 Josefov #### Four Seasons Hotel Prague - Luxury hotel, full services - Superb location - Riverside view - Views looking to Prague Castle - Google Maps: Veleslavínova 1098/2a, 110 00 Josefov #### Hotel Kings Court - Location at the Powder Gate Tower - Walking distance to the Old Town - Fine dining, lounge, spa services - Easily accessible for car transfers to PhotoRobot - Google Maps: U Obecního domu 660/3, 110 00 Staré Město #### Prague Marriott Hotel - Location the same as Hotel Hilton - Family hotel - Full services - Award-winning restaurant - Google Maps: V Celnici 8, 110 00 Nové Město #### Hilton Prague Old Town - Historic location near the Powder Tower and Old Town gates - City center with public transport connections to everywhere - Walking distance to Vltava river, Charles Bridge and Prague Castle - Indoor pool, sauna, spa, restaurant, full services - Google Maps: V Celnici 2079/7, 110 00 Nové Město #### Hotel NH Collection Prague Carlo IV - Central location, walking distance to city center - Nearby to both of Prague’s railway stations - Spacious, historic building - Google Maps: Senovážné nám. 13/991, 110 00 Nové Město #### Art Nouveau Palace Hotel - Nearby Wenceslas Square and Old Town Square - Prime location, restaurant cafe - Meeting rooms for teams - Secure parking - Easy access to public transport for exploring the whole city - Google Maps: Panská 897/12, 110 00 Nové Město #### Grand Majestic Hotel Prague - Calm location - Spacious rooms - Luxury suites available - Atrium restaurant with winter garden - Great access to public transport (metro, trams) - Google Maps: Truhlářská 16, 110 00 Petrská čtvrť #### Grandior Hotel Prague - City center location, although can be noisy area - Access by car or public transport - Close to the central railway station - Walking distance to historic Old Town - Google Maps: Na Poříčí 1052/42, 110 00 Florenc #### Art Deco Imperial Hotel - Nearby the central railway station - Traditional restaurant on-site - Comfortable walking distance to city center - One of the more noisy / lively locations - Google Maps: Na Poříčí 15, 110 00 Petrská čtvrť #### Almanac X Alcron Prague - Central location - Nearby Wenceslas Square and Old Town - Michelin-star restaurant, Alcron - Google Maps: Štěpánská 623 /40, 110 00 Nové Město #### Ambassador Zlata Husa Hotel - Historic Art Nouveau style hotel - Location in the heart of Prague - Directly on Wenceslas Square - Pedestrian walking area - Google Maps: Václavské nám. 840/5, 110 00 Můstek ### All Boutique Hotels for Customer Stays in Prague #### Complete List of Boutique Hotels in Prague - More personalized experience - Less services but charming - Unique ways to experience the city ### Boutique Hotels Near Prague Castle #### Hotel Residence Bijou de Prague - Nerudova Street just under Prague Castle - Original hand-painted ceilings - Google Maps: Nerudova 43, 110 00 Malá Strana #### Three Storks - Historic building from the 14th century - Very close to Charles Bridge - Google Maps: Valdštejnské nám. 20/8, 118 00 Malá Strana #### The Golden Wheel Hotel (Hotel U Zlatého Kola) - Location just under Prague Castle - 5-minute walk from Charles Bridge - Google Maps: Nerudova 217/28, 118 00 Malá Strana #### Miss Sophie's Charles Bridge - Nearby the Vltava River - Steps away from Prague Castle and Charles Bridge - Convenient access to public transport possibilities - Google Maps: Malostranské nám. 28, 110 00 Malá Strana ### Boutique Hotels in the City Center #### Tyn Yard Residence (Merchant’s Yard Residence) - Historic building from the 15th century - Hand-painted ceilings - Close to Old Town Square - Nearby the remarkable Church of Our Lady Before Týn - Google Maps: 7, Týn 637, 110 00 Praha #### Hotel BOOKQUET - Near to Vltava River and Charles Bridge - Google Maps: Karoliny Světlé 323/27, 110 00 Staré Město #### MOODs Boutique Hotel - Convenient public transport access - Calm and quiet location - Google Maps: Klimentská 28, 110 00 Petrská čtvrť #### Miss Sophie's New Town & Wellness - Location in Prague’s New Town - Close to Wenceslas Square, Charles Bridge - Google Maps: Melounova 3, 120 00 Nové Město ### Recommended Hotel for Technical Teams #### Hotel DUO - Great location for car transfer to PhotoRobot - Metro station nearby - Google Maps: Teplická 492, 190 00 Praha 9 ## For More Help Planning Your Trip to PhotoRobot For more tips to plan your business trip to the PhotoRobot demonstration, just ask your PhotoRobot Sales representative for assistance. PhotoRobot will do everything we can to ensure your comfort over the course of your travels and during your stay for the demo. Your trip to experience the PhotoRobot-powered studio demonstration in the Czech Republic awaits. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/keyboard-shortcuts # SECTION: keyboard-shortcuts # TYPE: Page --- # Keyboard shortcuts > Keyboard shortcuts on photorobot.com: open search from any page, move through results, browse images and control video players without a mouse. Every page of photorobot.com can be used from the keyboard. Press ? on any page to see this list in a dialog. Shortcuts are ignored while you are typing in a form field, except Ctrl+K (⌘K on a Mac), which always opens or closes search. ## Anywhere | Keys | Action | | --- | --- | | Ctrl+K (⌘K on a Mac) | Open or close search | | / | Open search | | ? | Show keyboard shortcuts | | Esc | Close menu, search, dialog or image viewer | | Tab / Shift+Tab | Move between links and buttons | | Enter / Space | Open menus and toggles | ## In search | Keys | Action | | --- | --- | | ↑ / ↓ | Move between results | | Enter | Open the selected (or first) result | | Esc | Close search | ## Image viewer | Keys | Action | | --- | --- | | ← / → | Previous / next image | | Esc | Close | ## Video player (when focused) | Keys | Action | | --- | --- | | Space / K | Play / pause | | ← / → | Seek | | F | Fullscreen | | M | Mute | --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com/production # SECTION: production # TYPE: Page --- # PhotoRobot production: we make our robots in Prague > PhotoRobot makes its robots on its own floor in Prague: TRUMPF sheet metal, 9-axis Mazak machining, robotic laser welding, SLS printing and our own electronics. We don't resell robots. We make them. From flat sheet to a finished robot on our own floor in Prague, with one machine from the leader in each process. The electronics are ours too: we design the control boards and program the chips on them. ## And the machines we build them with Sheet metal is punched and bent, parts are machined, welded by a laser on a robot arm and printed in production-grade nylon. One machine from the leader in each process, run by the people who design the robots. - 2.5 days to assemble a FRAME V6, with one worker - 4 hours to assemble a CUBE COMPACT, with one worker 1. Punching & forming: TRUMPF TruMatic 1000 (Germany). Punches, forms and taps threads straight into raw sheet. 2. Press brake: TRUMPF TruBend 5170 (Germany). 170 tonnes with laser angle measurement: the first part is already in tolerance. 3. Automatic tool setup: TRUMPF ToolMaster (Germany). Sets up the full bending tool set automatically in minutes. 4. 9-axis turn-mill: Mazak INTEGREX i-100H ST (Japan). Turning, milling, drilling and tapping in a single clamping. 5. Assembly & machine tending: FANUC CRX cobots (Japan). Assemble sub-assemblies and load the CNC machines around the clock. 6. Robotic laser welding: IPG Photonics LightWELD XR (USA). A fibre laser on a FANUC arm: clean welds, minimal distortion. 7. SLS printing in PA12: EOS FORMIGA P110 Velocis (Germany). Production parts that would otherwise need injection moulds. 8. SLS surface finishing: DyeMansion Powershot Performance (Germany). Turns a printed part into a part you can ship. 9. Electronics: Our own control boards and firmware (Czech Republic). We design the control boards and program the chips on them. A FRAME V6 takes 2.5 days and one worker to assemble. A CUBE COMPACT takes four hours. [We build for others too, at prototype.builders](https://prototype.builders/) · [The full stack at prototype.builders](https://prototype.builders/technology/) [Meet the people who design and build them](https://www.photorobot.com/about) ## Contact People, robots and agents. One address: https://www.photorobot.com/contact --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com (shown on several pages) # SECTION: collection > canon-compatible-cameras # TYPE: Compatible camera list --- # Compatible camera list ### iPhone - Category: Close-up Cameras / Handheld - Sensor size: Varies - Max resolution (MP): Up to 48 - Max video: Up to 4K at 60 fps - Connection: Lightning (USB 2.0) - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS-1D C - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 18.1 - Max video: 4K at 24 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS-1D Mark III - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: APS-H - Max resolution (MP): 10.1 - Max video: 1080p at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS-1D Mark IV - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: APS-H - Max resolution (MP): 16.1 - Max video: 1080p at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS-1D X - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 18.1 - Max video: 1080p at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS-1D X Mark II - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 20.2 - Max video: 4K at 60 fps - Connection: USB 3.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS-1D X Mark III - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 20.1 - Max video: 4K at 60 fps - Connection: USB 3.1 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS-1Ds Mark III - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 21.1 - Max video: Not available - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS 5D Mark II - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 21.1 - Max video: 1080p at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS 5D Mark III - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 22.3 - Max video: 1080p at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS 5D Mark IV - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 30.4 - Max video: 4K at 30 fps - Connection: USB 3.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS 6D - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 20.2 - Max video: 1080p at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS 6D Mark II - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 26.2 - Max video: 1080p at 60 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS 7D - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 18.0 - Max video: 1080p at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS 7D Mark II - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 20.2 - Max video: 1080p at 60 fps - Connection: USB 3.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS 850D - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 24.1 - Max video: 4K at 25 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS 90D - Category: EOS DSLR Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 32.5 - Max video: 4K at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS 90D - Category: Close-up Cameras / Handheld - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 32.5 - Max video: 4K at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS M200 - Category: EOS M Mirrorless Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 24.1 - Max video: 4K at 24 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS M50 Mark II - Category: EOS M Mirrorless Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 24.1 - Max video: 4K at 24 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS M6 Mark II - Category: EOS M Mirrorless Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 32.5 - Max video: 4K at 30 fps - Connection: USB 3.1 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R Mirrorless Series - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame / APS-C - Max resolution (MP): Varies - Max video: Up to 8K - Connection: USB 3.1 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R1 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 24 - Max video: 6K - Connection: USB 3.2 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R10 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 24.2 - Max video: 4K at 60 fps - Connection: USB 3.2 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R100 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 24.1 - Max video: 4K at 24 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R3 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 24.1 - Max video: 6K - Connection: USB 3.2 - LAN: Yes - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R5 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 45 - Max video: 8K - Connection: USB 3.1 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R5 Mark II - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 45 - Max video: 8K - Connection: USB 3.2 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R50 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 24.2 - Max video: 4K at 30 fps - Connection: USB 3.2 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R6 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 20.1 - Max video: 4K at 60 fps - Connection: USB 3.1 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R6 Mark II - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 24.2 - Max video: 4K at 60 fps - Connection: USB 3.2 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R7 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 32.5 - Max video: 4K at 60 fps - Connection: USB 3.2 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS R8 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 24.2 - Max video: 4K at 60 fps - Connection: USB 3.2 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS Ra - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 30.3 - Max video: 4K at 30 fps - Connection: USB 3.1 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS Rebel SL3 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 24.1 - Max video: 4K at 24 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS Rebel T7 - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 24.1 - Max video: 1080p at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: No ### EOS Rebel T8i - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: APS-C - Max resolution (MP): 24.1 - Max video: 4K at 24 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS RP - Category: EOS Rebel Series - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 26.2 - Max video: 4K at 24 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### EOS RP - Category: Close-up Cameras / Handheld - Sensor size: Full Frame - Max resolution (MP): 26.2 - Max video: 4K at 24 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### PowerShot G5 X Mark II - Category: PowerShot Series - Sensor size: 1.0-type - Max resolution (MP): 20.1 - Max video: 4K at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### PowerShot G7 X Mark III - Category: PowerShot Series - Sensor size: 1.0-type - Max resolution (MP): 20.1 - Max video: 4K at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes ### PowerShot SX70 HS - Category: PowerShot Series - Sensor size: 1/2.3-inch - Max resolution (MP): 20.3 - Max video: 4K at 30 fps - Connection: USB 2.0 - LAN: No - Wi-Fi: Yes --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com (shown on several pages) # SECTION: collection > ghost-mannequin-faq # TYPE: FAQ list --- # FAQ list ### When to take advantage of multiple mannequins If photographing wider clothing product lines of different gender, size, and styles, it makes sense to have multiple mannequins. The same is true for higher volume workflows, such as photographing 100s or 1000s of products over a single project. In these cases, teams can prep and style multiple mannequins in advance, and then photograph products one after another in rapid succession. The workflow is even faster with the Cube’s quick mannequin-exchange system, and PhotoRobot automation software. PhotoRobot software integrates control over one or multiple robots, lights, cameras, and post-production from one computer. It’s even possible to synchronize control over 10, 20, or 60+ Cube workstations at once. Each can operate standalone, or in combination with 360 turntables and robot arm systems to fully equip any production space. ### How long does a ghost mannequin last? The ghost mannequins on offer are either construction of a high-quality FRP or PP material. Both materials are eco-friendly, durable, drop resistant, and scratch proof. Additionally, some feature removable pieces with magnetized dicing for even safer combination and disassembly. This not only speeds up workflows in the studio, it can increase the average lifespan of the mannequin. Meanwhile, there are different mannequin bases, stands, and rotating plates that easily integrate into production. Some serve as strong steel bases on wheels with locking mechanisms, others as standalone rotating platforms for the mannequin. Also, some models securely mount to and detach from the Cube robot when operating it as a rotating mannequin stand. For safe storage and movement on-location, there are also optional storage carts that can hold multiple mannequins. ### How to select the best ghost mannequin Choosing the best ghost mannequin for your business will depend on the type of clothing you intend to photograph. There are many types of ghost mannequins: full-body mannequins, 3/4 mannequin torsos, half-body mannequin torsos, and half-body mannequin legs. These include female, male, uni-sex, child, and plus-size ghost mannequin models. Each has their own unique measurements, with varying height, chest, waist, and hip sizes. Some feature more athletic builds for sportswear and tight clothing, while others facilitate photography of looser clothing like blouses and dresses. They may have more or less cut-out pieces for different cuts of clothes, or different poses to more realistically style products. Thus, select a ghost mannequin around your specific clothing photography: the types of clothes, their measurements, cuts, and styling requirements. ### How does a ghost mannequin work? Ghost mannequins have removable cut-out pieces or missing parts to facilitate high-speed mannequin photography, and make mannequins disappear in photos. The missing space makes clothing appear to float in thin air on an invisible model. This gives clothing a more realistic, full-bodied, and 3D appearance. Meanwhile, a glare reducing matte finish makes it easy to remove visible mannequin parts in photos via software post-processing. Sometimes, more advanced image compositing techniques may also be necessary. However, the right ghost mannequin with PhotoRobot can dramatically reduce photo editing requirements, even down to zero human input. ### What mannequins combine with PhotoRobot? All ghost mannequin products frictionlessly integrate into the PhotoRobot workflow with PhotoRobot’s Cube robot and automation software. The Cube can work with one or multiple robots simultaneously via software integration of robots, studio lights, cameras, and post-production. This includes control over all studio equipment, and over mannequin rotation when using the Cube as a rotating mannequin stand. Additionally, the Cube features a mannequin quick-exchange system for easy mounting of some mannequin models to the robot. It can function as a standalone turntable, or suspend items like necklaces and jewelry in air for photos. For higher volume workflows, combine multiple Cube robots with multiple mannequins, and an optional storage cart for easy on-location transport. ### Is it difficult to remove a mannequin from photos? Achieving a ghost mannequin effect does not always require time-consuming photo editing and image compositing techniques. In fact, when the cut of clothing fits a mannequin well, it becomes possible to automate much of the post-processing. With PhotoRobot, this includes basic to advanced editing operations, and pre-programmable presets to consistently create high-quality ghost mannequin effects. The matte finish of ghost mannequins is also easy to edit out of pictures when visible. There are then Chroma-key operations to remove mannequin stands from photos, and software automation of background removal and image optimization. This way, even with minimal training, teams can accurately and quickly produce the effect on any type of clothing. ### Does it take much training to reproduce the effect? With PhotoRobot, anybody on the team with little to no training can easily produce the ghost mannequin effect. This is thanks to software Presets and Wizard modes, which are configurable on installation and customizable by advanced operators. In fact, the right software configuration can make it as simple as knowing how to style the clothing on the mannequin. Scanning a start barcode is then all it takes to fully automate photography sequences, mannequin rotation, lights, and post-processing. That, or a single click of the mouse runs all stages of production, with pre-programmable operations running the background. This way, complex processes become easily repeatable by any human resources, from new team members to student interns. ### Which types of products can you photograph? It’s possible to use a ghost mannequin with nearly any type of clothing thanks to the wide range of different models available. Some mannequins even feature additional accessories, like a hat stand above the headless neck. These make it easier to visualize and photograph entire outfits and accessories together. Other models like mannequin torsos are obviously more appropriate for products like jackets, coats, blazers, and shirts. Three-quarter mannequin torsos then work well for photographing long blouses and dresses, while leg form mannequins display trousers, jeans, and shorts. Truly, there is a ghost mannequin for any type of fashion or clothing store. --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com (shown on several pages) # SECTION: collection > production-workflow # TYPE: Production workflow step list --- # Production workflow step list ### 6. Content delivery Say goodbye to manual file copying or creating different filename structures at the output. Once set, runs in the background in defined intervals. - Feed-based (XML/JSON) - Fully automated = no touch - Secured - Multi structure (different export formats available for the same content) - SET&FORGET ### 4. Post-production Set and forget. Deploy project-driven settings that process images without asking, backup original files automatically, and instantly serve finished files. - Fully automated - based on presets - Possible manual input / retouch - Background removal (free-masking, chromakey, masking, etc.) - Image enhancements - Inputs for Photogrammetry 3D models - Built-in OCR - Set once, use forever ### 2. Preparation Benefit from greatly reduced preparation times thanks to features for styling, preset configurations, product staging and image overlay. - Style-guides - Presets - Staging - Image overlays ### 1. Product ingestion Save time and energy with PhotoRobot features for receiving & tracking items, sorting products, and managing projects. - Shooting-list import / modification anytime - Scan-IN - Weighing and measuring - Sorting on shelves - Barcode generation and print where missing ### 7. Product return Smooth in & smooth out. 100% of items leaving the studio, & 100% images delivered. Confirmed. - Scan-OUT - Delivery note assembly ### 5. Quality control Ensure excellence in the quality of your product photography with remote studio access, photoshoot & re-shoot control, and tools for client communication & review. Hardware and operator statistics also provide actionable insights into the production process. - Remote access (no need to be in studio) - Undo/Redo on overall batch - Return to re-shoot - Comments - Clients review ### 3. Shooting Manage the entire product photography session: camera settings, strobe & light control, the capturing process, image backup, and more. No matter if it’s creating still images, 360s, or product videos, you have complete control. - Canon camera control - Strobes / DMX lights control - Auto download and renaming of images - Non-stop capturing (fast product photography in which the spin of the table remains uninterrupted) - Focus stacking - Instant photo-backup - Video --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com (shown on several pages) # SECTION: collection > recommended-hotels # TYPE: Recommended hotel list --- # Recommended hotel list ### Almanac X Alcron Prague - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.almanachotels.com/praguex/ - Central location - Nearby Wenceslas Square and Old Town - Michelin-star restaurant, Alcron - Google Maps: [Štěpánská 623 /40, 110 00 Nové Město](https://maps.app.goo.gl/SKK3qzxQJ5focmMP6) ### Ambassador Zlata Husa Hotel - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.ambassador.cz/en - Historic Art Nouveau style hotel - Location in the heart of Prague - Directly on Wenceslas Square - Pedestrian walking area - Google Maps: [Václavské nám. 840/5, 110 00 Můstek](https://maps.app.goo.gl/XyzqFRFKeC985YiP7) ### Art Deco Imperial Hotel - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.hotel-imperial.cz/en/ - Nearby the central railway station - Traditional restaurant on-site - Comfortable walking distance to city center - One of the more noisy / lively locations - Google Maps: [Na Poříčí 15, 110 00 Petrská čtvrť](https://maps.app.goo.gl/qZfyENz7xEV4PcGi6) ### Art Nouveau Palace Hotel - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.palacehotel.cz/en/ - Nearby Wenceslas Square and Old Town Square - Prime location, restaurant cafe - Meeting rooms for teams - Secure parking - Easy access to public transport for exploring the whole city - Google Maps: [Panská 897/12, 110 00 Nové Město](https://maps.app.goo.gl/Z6faQigLYQS6tdVt7) ### Complete List of Boutique Hotels in Prague - Category: All Boutique Hotels for Customer Stays in Prague - Website: https://boutiquehotels-prague.com/ - More personalized experience - Less services but charming - Unique ways to experience the city ### Fairmont Golden Prague - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.fairmontgoldenprague.com - Superb location in the Old Jewish Quarter - Walking distance to Old Town Square - Parizska street, famous for its luxury shopping boulevard - Rooftop restaurant, full services - Riverside view - Google Maps: [Pařížská 30, 110 00 Josefov](https://maps.app.goo.gl/YfX5D4JivCN6sCXA9) ### Four Seasons Hotel Prague - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.fourseasons.com/prague/ - Luxury hotel, full services - Superb location - Riverside view - Views looking to Prague Castle - Google Maps: [Veleslavínova 1098/2a, 110 00 Josefov](https://maps.app.goo.gl/gjLGbMuQNaWDw2o69) ### Grand Majestic Hotel Prague - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.hotel-grandmajestic.cz/en/ - Calm location - Spacious rooms - Luxury suites available - Atrium restaurant with winter garden - Great access to public transport (metro, trams) - Google Maps: [Truhlářská 16, 110 00 Petrská čtvrť](https://maps.app.goo.gl/h4Bfn9zVEQLFjsPg6) ### Grandior Hotel Prague - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.hotel-grandior.cz/en/ - City center location, although can be noisy area - Access by car or public transport - Close to the central railway station - Walking distance to historic Old Town - Google Maps: [Na Poříčí 1052/42, 110 00 Florenc](https://maps.app.goo.gl/7JYvgHJfJKkZPGP8A) ### Hilton Prague Old Town - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.hilton.com/en/hotels/prgothi-hilton-prague-old-town/ - Historic location near the Powder Tower and Old Town gates - City center with public transport connections to everywhere - Walking distance to Vltava river, Charles Bridge and Prague Castle - Indoor pool, sauna, spa, restaurant, full services - Google Maps: [V Celnici 2079/7, 110 00 Nové Město](https://maps.app.goo.gl/fo22RwPTPJ8s9JPc7) ### Hotel BOOKQUET - Category: Boutique Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://boutiquehotels-prague.com/hotel/77150 - Near to Vltava River and Charles Bridge - Google Maps: [Karoliny Světlé 323/27, 110 00 Staré Město](https://maps.app.goo.gl/N1fLZy5v9P9Yw5wS9) ### Hotel DUO - Category: Recommended Hotel for Technical Teams - Website: https://www.hotelduo.cz/en - Great location for car transfer to PhotoRobot - Metro station nearby - Google Maps: [Teplická 492, 190 00 Praha 9](https://maps.app.goo.gl/iJW9vNZ64V2ef3yQA) ### Hotel Kings Court - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.hotelkingscourt.cz - Location at the Powder Gate Tower - Walking distance to the Old Town - Fine dining, lounge, spa services - Easily accessible for car transfers to PhotoRobot - Google Maps: [U Obecního domu 660/3, 110 00 Staré Město](https://maps.app.goo.gl/7eax3Jq4Xip5xLFx7) ### Hotel NH Collection Prague Carlo IV - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.nh-hotels.com/en/hotel/nh-collection-prague-carlo-iv - Central location, walking distance to city center - Nearby to both of Prague’s railway stations - Spacious, historic building - Google Maps: [Senovážné nám. 13/991, 110 00 Nové Město](https://maps.app.goo.gl/nDvLaEMzSZKNjH7t9) ### Hotel Residence Bijou de Prague - Category: Boutique Hotels Near Prague Castle - Website: https://boutiquehotels-prague.com/hotel/337500 - Nerudova Street just under Prague Castle - Original hand-painted ceilings - Google Maps: [Nerudova 43, 110 00 Malá Strana](https://maps.app.goo.gl/2fxuGxsLzMKYfwP46) ### The Golden Wheel Hotel (Hotel U Zlatého Kola) - Category: Boutique Hotels Near Prague Castle - Website: https://boutiquehotels-prague.com/hotel/77180 - Location just under Prague Castle - 5-minute walk from Charles Bridge - Google Maps: [Nerudova 217/28, 118 00 Malá Strana](https://maps.app.goo.gl/u1gAqBfjrtoKYDdz8) ### Miss Sophie's Charles Bridge - Category: Boutique Hotels Near Prague Castle - Website: https://boutiquehotels-prague.com/hotel/245885 - Nearby the Vltava River - Steps away from Prague Castle and Charles Bridge - Convenient access to public transport possibilities - Google Maps: [Malostranské nám. 28, 110 00 Malá Strana](https://maps.app.goo.gl/b5bkNNLKC6B9cKF28) ### Miss Sophie's New Town & Wellness - Category: Boutique Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://boutiquehotels-prague.com/hotel/1390784 - Location in Prague’s New Town - Close to Wenceslas Square, Charles Bridge - Google Maps: [Melounova 3, 120 00 Nové Město](https://maps.app.goo.gl/jdxdENf5jdjS8K3PA) ### MOODs Boutique Hotel - Category: Boutique Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://boutiquehotels-prague.com/hotel/238717 - Convenient public transport access - Calm and quiet location - Google Maps: [Klimentská 28, 110 00 Petrská čtvrť](https://maps.app.goo.gl/AfxaPrTfMWUrY7Rj9) ### Prague Marriott Hotel - Category: Luxury & 5-Star Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://www.marriott.com/en-us/hotels/prgdt-prague-marriott-hotel/overview/ - Location the same as Hotel Hilton - Family hotel - Full services - Award-winning restaurant - Google Maps: [V Celnici 8, 110 00 Nové Město](https://maps.app.goo.gl/WWsP6meLhfVVqZ1z5) ### Three Storks - Category: Boutique Hotels Near Prague Castle - Website: https://boutiquehotels-prague.com/hotel/77518 - Historic building from the 14th century - Very close to Charles Bridge - Google Maps: [Valdštejnské nám. 20/8, 118 00 Malá Strana](https://maps.app.goo.gl/2fxuGxsLzMKYfwP46) ### Tyn Yard Residence (Merchant’s Yard Residence) - Category: Boutique Hotels in the City Center - Website: https://boutiquehotels-prague.com/hotel/349249 - Historic building from the 15th century - Hand-painted ceilings - Close to Old Town Square - Nearby the remarkable Church of Our Lady Before Týn - Google Maps: [7, Týn 637, 110 00 Praha](https://maps.app.goo.gl/SLMeLLUwuaLYHheT7) --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com (shown on several pages) # SECTION: collection > testimonials # TYPE: Testimonial list --- # Testimonial list ### Chris Barbera With PhotoRobot, we can now capture 360-degree images in multiple axes faster than ever before. We are now able to capture over 12,000 images per day. The system is easy to use and was easy to integrate into our workflows. - Author: Chris Barbera - Position: Scanmore GmbH - Project management Photography / 3D Scan / Visualisation ### Fer Real & Javier Macias PhotoRobot technology has revolutionized our processes by improving their quality and speed, capturing every detail with precision and professionalism, and creating new services for our associates, which in turn provides them greater product projection across different digital platforms. - Author: Fer Real & Javier Macias - Position: GS1 Mexico ### Josef Indra In the past, we needed a lot of time to produce just one photo. Now, it takes 2 minutes or less to create 24, 36, or more web-ready images and a 360 spin of our products with the Case 850, Turning Platform and Cube PhotoRobots. - Author: Josef Indra - Position: BIKE FUN International - Marketing department - Superior ### Troy Benscoter PhotoRobot’s exceptional customer service and ongoing support makes them more than our supplier; they are a true partner in our success story. Their dedication to understanding our unique needs and providing tailored solutions has been instrumental in achieving our business goals. - Author: Troy Benscoter - Position: CEO of PVS Studios --- # SOURCE: https://www.photorobot.com (repeated on many pages) # SECTION: shared content # TYPE: Shared blocks --- # Shared content The following passages appear on 6 or more pages of the website. They are listed once here instead of being repeated in every page section. - (6 pages) Forget looking for a compromise between quality and efficiency. Achieve perfect results with small, large, transparent or glossy items. This allows you to capture images of anything, from a ring to a suitcase.